Table of Contents

As filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on May 14, 2013

 

 

UNITED STATES

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

Washington, D.C. 20549

 

 

Form 20-F

 

 

(Mark One)

 

¨ REGISTRATION STATEMENT PURSUANT TO SECTION 12(b) OR 12(g) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

or

 

x ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

For the fiscal year ended December 31, 2012

or

 

¨ TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

For the transition period from              to             

or

 

¨ SHELL COMPANY REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

Date of event requiring this shell company report

For the transition period from              to             

Commission file number: 1-31318

 

 

Gold Fields Limited

(Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)

 

 

Republic of South Africa

(Jurisdiction of incorporation or organization)

150 Helen Road

Sandown, Sandton, 2196

South Africa

011-27-11-562-9700

(Address of principal executive offices)

with a copy to:

Michael Fleischer

Executive Vice President—General Counsel

Tel: 011-27-11-562-9724

Fax: 011-27-11-562-9828

michael.fleischer@goldfields.co.za

150 Helen Road

Sandown, Sandton, 2196

South Africa

(Name, Telephone, E-mail and/or Facsimile number and Address of Company Contact Person)

Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act

 

Title of Each Class

 

Name of Each Exchange on Which Registered

Ordinary shares of par value Rand 0.50 each
American Depositary Shares, each representing one ordinary share
 

New York Stock Exchange *

New York Stock Exchange

 

* Not for trading, but only in connection with the registration of the American Depositary Shares pursuant to the requirements of the Securities and Exchange Commission.

Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act

None

(Title of Class)

Securities for which there is a reporting obligation pursuant to Section 15(d) of the Act

None

(Title of Class)

Indicate the number of outstanding shares of each of the issuer’s classes of capital or

common stock as of the close of the period covered by the Annual Report

731,588,614 ordinary shares of par value Rand 0.50 each

 

 

Indicate by check mark if the registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act:    Yes   x     No   ¨

If this report is an annual or transition report, indicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934.    Yes   ¨     No   x

Note—Checking the box above will not relieve any registrant required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 from their obligations under those Sections.

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days.    Yes   x     No   ¨

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has submitted electronically and posted on its corporate Web site, if any, every Interactive Data File required to be submitted and posted pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T (§232.405 of this chapter) during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to submit and post such files).    Yes   x     No   ¨

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, or a non-accelerated filer. See definition of “accelerated filer and large accelerated filer” in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act. (Check one):

Large accelerated filer   x                         Accelerated filer   ¨                         Non-accelerated filer   ¨

Indicate by check mark which basis of accounting the registrant has used to prepare the financial statements included in this filing:

U.S. GAAP   x         International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board   ¨         Other   ¨

If “Other” has been checked in response to the previous question, indicate by check mark which financial statement item the registrant has elected to follow:    Item 17   ¨     Item 18   ¨

If this is an annual report, indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act).    Yes   ¨     No   x

(APPLICABLE ONLY TO ISSUERS INVOLVED IN BANKRUPTCY PROCEEDINGS DURING THE PAST FIVE YEARS)

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has filed all documents and reports required to be filed by Sections 12, 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 subsequent to the distribution of securities under a plan confirmed by a court.    Yes   ¨     No   ¨

 

 

 


Table of Contents

Gold Fields — Worldwide Locations

LOGO

 

* The KDC and Beatrix operations were separated from Gold Fields in the spin-off of Sibanye Gold Limited on February 18, 2013.


Table of Contents

EXPLANATORY NOTE

On February 18, 2013, or the Spin-off date, Gold Fields Limited, or Gold Fields or the Company, completed the separation of its wholly-owned subsidiary, Sibanye Gold Limited, or Sibanye Gold (formerly known as GFI Mining South Africa Proprietary Limited, or GFIMSA), which includes the KDC and Beatrix mining operations, or the Spin-off. The Spin-off was achieved by way of Gold Fields making a distribution on a pro rata basis of one Sibanye Gold ordinary share for every one Gold Fields share (whether held in the form of shares, American depositary receipts, or ADRs, or international depositary receipts) to Gold Fields shareholders, registered as such in Gold Fields’ register at close of business on February 15, 2013, in terms of section 46 of the South African Companies Act and section 46 of the South African Income Tax Act. The board of directors of Gold Fields, or the Board, passed the resolution necessary to implement the Spin-off on December 12, 2012. Sibanye Gold shares listed on the JSE Limited, or the JSE, and on the New York Stock Exchange, or NYSE, on February 11, 2013. As of February 18, 2013, Gold Fields and Sibanye Gold were independent, publicly traded companies with separate public ownership, boards of directors and management.

Over the last few years, Gold Fields considered the Spin-off as part of its ongoing review of its strategy and operational portfolio against its strategic objectives. It is expected that the separation of Gold Fields and Sibanye Gold will enable the component parts of the businesses to operate in a more efficient and commercially effective manner, thereby enabling each of the businesses to achieve their respective strategic goals. As at December 31, 2012, Gold Fields reported reserves of 68.4 million ounces of gold and 1,024 million pounds of copper, of which the KDC and Beatrix operations distributed in the Spin-off, or the Sibanye Gold assets, accounted for 13.5 million ounces of gold. Total production during fiscal 2012, fiscal 2011 and fiscal 2010 was 3.35 million, 3.70 million and 3.84 million, respectively. Total production from the Sibanye Gold assets during fiscal 2012, fiscal 2011 and fiscal 2010, was 1.22 million, 1.45 million and 1.67 million ounces, respectively.

The separation of Sibanye Gold will enable the remaining Gold Fields management team to focus its attention on maximizing cash flows and returns from its existing mines in South Africa, Ghana, Peru and Australia and to realize value from its world-class portfolio of development and exploration projects. Gold Fields also intends to pursue a number of near-mine organic growth opportunities and life extensions at its existing mines and to maintain an exploration expenditure that is consistent with its strategy of growing the Company largely through exploration. A main priority will be the continued development of the South Deep gold mine in South Africa. Gold Fields will offer its shareholders strong leverage to the gold price through a highly cash generative, globally diversified portfolio, as well as a disciplined approach to growth and project development.

For more information on the rationale for the Spin-off, see “Information on the Company—Background to the Spin-off”.

 

i


Table of Contents

PRESENTATION OF FINANCIAL INFORMATION

In 2010, Gold Fields changed its fiscal year end from June 30 to December 31 to align with the Company’s peers in the gold mining industry. This annual report contains the audited consolidated financial statements of Gold Fields as at and for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2012. This annual report also contains the audited consolidated financial statements of Gold Fields as at and for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2011, for the six-month period ended December 31, 2010 and for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2010. It may not be possible to directly compare the audited consolidated financial statements as at and for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2011 with the audited consolidated financial statements as at and for the six-month period ended December 31, 2010, as these relate to different financial periods, and it may not be possible to compare audited consolidated financial statements as at and for the six-month period ended December 31, 2010 directly with the audited financial statements as at and for the fiscal years ended June 30, 2010, insofar as such financial statements refer to a completed financial year. Investors are advised to use caution in drawing comparisons between these periods.

Gold Fields is a South African company and, prior to the Spin-off, about one-half of its operations, based on gold production, were located there. After the Spin-off, approximately 16% of Gold Fields’ operations, based on gold production, were located in South Africa. Accordingly, its books of account are maintained in South African Rand and its annual and interim financial statements are prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards, or IFRS, as prescribed by law. Gold Fields also prepares annual financial statements in accordance with United States Generally Accepted Accounting Principles, or U.S. GAAP, which are translated into U.S. dollars. Except as otherwise noted, the financial information included in this annual report has been prepared in accordance with U.S. GAAP and is presented in U.S. dollars, and descriptions of critical accounting policies refer to accounting policies under U.S. GAAP.

For Gold Fields’ financial statements, unless otherwise stated, balance sheet item amounts are translated from Rand to U.S. dollars at the exchange rate prevailing on the date that it closed its accounts for fiscal 2012 (Rand 8.57 per $1.00 as of December 31, 2012), except for specific items included within shareholders’ equity and the statements of cash flows that are translated at the rate prevailing on the date the relevant transaction was entered into, and statements of operations item amounts are translated from Rand to U.S. dollars at the weighted average exchange rate for each period (Rand 8.19 per $1.00 for fiscal 2012).

In this annual report, Gold Fields presents the financial items “total cash costs,” “total cash costs per ounce”, “total production costs” and “total production costs per ounce,” which have been determined using industry standards promulgated by the Gold Institute and are general non-U.S. GAAP measures. The Gold Institute was a non-profit international industry association of miners, refiners, bullion suppliers and manufacturers of gold products that ceased operation in 2002, which developed a uniform format for reporting production costs on a per ounce basis. The Gold Institute has now been incorporated into the National Mining Association. The guidance was first adopted in 1996 and revised in November 1999. An investor should not consider these items in isolation or as alternatives to production costs, income before tax, net income, operating cash flows or any other measure of financial performance presented in accordance with U.S. GAAP. While the Gold Institute provided definitions for the calculation of total cash costs and total production costs, the calculation of total cash costs, total cash costs per ounce, total production costs and total production costs per ounce may vary significantly among gold mining companies, and by themselves do not necessarily provide a basis for comparison with other gold mining companies. See “Key Information—Selected Historical Consolidated Financial Data,” “Information on the Company—Glossary of Mining Terms—Total cash costs per ounce” and “Information on the Company—Glossary of Mining Terms—Total production costs per ounce”.

In this annual report, Gold Fields also presents the financial items “operating costs” and “notional cash expenditure”, or NCE. Operating costs and NCE, including operating costs per ounce and NCE per ounce, have been determined by Gold Fields on the basis of internally developed definitions and are general non-U.S. GAAP measures. Gold Fields defines operating costs as production costs (exclusive of depreciation, amortization and

 

ii


Table of Contents

movements in gold-in-process) plus corporate expenditure, employment termination costs and accretion expense on provision for environmental rehabilitation but excluding share based compensation costs. Gold Fields defines NCE margin as revenue minus NCE, divided by revenue, expressed as a percentage. See “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Notional Cash Expenditure”. An investor should not consider these items in isolation or as alternatives to production costs, cash flows from operating activities or any other measure of financial performance presented in accordance with U.S. GAAP. Operating costs, NCE and NCE margin as presented in this annual report may not be comparable to other similarly titled measures of performance of other companies.

Market Information

This annual report includes industry data about Gold Fields’ markets obtained from industry surveys, industry publications, market research and other publicly available third-party information. Industry surveys and industry publications generally state that the information they contain has been obtained from sources believed to be reliable but that the accuracy and completeness of such information is not guaranteed. Gold Fields and its advisors have not independently verified this data.

In addition, in many cases statements in this annual report regarding the gold mining industry and Gold Fields’ position in that industry have been made based on internal surveys, industry forecasts, market research, as well as Gold Fields’ own experiences. While these statements are believed by Gold Fields to be reliable, they have not been independently verified.

 

iii


Table of Contents

DEFINED TERMS AND CONVENTIONS

In this annual report, all references to the “Group” are to Gold Fields and its subsidiaries including Sibanye Gold unless otherwise noted.

In this annual report, all references to the “six-month period ended December 31, 2009” are to the six-month period ended December 31, 2009, “fiscal 2010” are to the 12-month period ended June 30, 2010, all references to the “six-month period ended December 31, 2010” are to the six-month transition period ended December 31, 2010, all references to “fiscal 2011” are to the 12-month period ended December 31, 2011, all references to “fiscal 2012” are to the 12-month period ended December 31, 2012 and all references to “fiscal 2013” are to the 12-month period ending December 31, 2013. In this annual report, all references to “South Africa” are to the Republic of South Africa, all references to “Ghana” are to the Republic of Ghana, all references to “Australia” are to the Commonwealth of Australia, all references to “Venezuela” are to the Bolivarian Republic of Venezuela, all references to “Finland” are to the Republic of Finland, all references to “Peru” are to the Republic of Peru, all references to “China” are to the People’s Republic of China, all references to “Mali” are to the Republic of Mali, all references to the “Philippines” are to the Republic of the Philippines and all references to the “United States” and “U.S.” mean the United States of America, its territories and possessions and any state of the United States and the District of Columbia.

In this annual report, all references to the “DMR” are references to the South African Department of Mineral Resources, the government body responsible for regulating the mining industry in South Africa, or to its predecessor entity, the Department of Minerals and Energy which was split into the Department of Mineral Resources and the Department of Energy in July 2009, as applicable.

This annual report contains descriptions of gold mining and the gold mining industry, including descriptions of geological formations and mining processes. In order to facilitate a better understanding of these descriptions, this annual report contains a glossary defining a number of technical and geological terms. See “Information on the Company—Glossary of Mining Terms”.

In this annual report, gold production figures are provided in troy ounces, which are referred to as “ounces” or “oz,” or in kilograms, which are referred as “kg”. Ore grades are provided in grams per metric tonne, which are referred to as “grams per tonne” or “g/t.” All references to “tonnes” or “t” in this annual report are to metric tonnes. All references to “gold” include gold and gold equivalent ounces, unless otherwise specified or where the context suggests otherwise. See “Information on the Company—Glossary of Mining Terms” for further information regarding units of measurement used in this annual report and a table providing rates of conversion between different units of measurement.

This annual report contains references to the “lost time injury frequency rate” at each Gold Fields operation. The lost time injury frequency rate at each operation includes any injury occurring in the workplace where, at any subsequent time, the injured employee is unable to attend a full shift due to the injury, or Lost Time Injuries.

In this annual report, “R” and “Rand” refer to the South African Rand and “Rand cents” refers to subunits of the South African Rand, “$,” “U.S.$” and “U.S. dollars” refer to United States dollars, “U.S. cents” refers to subunits of the U.S. dollar, “A$” and “Australian dollars” refer to Australian dollars, GH refers to Ghana Cedi and “CAD” refers to Canadian dollars.

Certain information in this annual report presented in Rand and Australian dollars has been translated into U.S. dollars. Unless otherwise stated, the conversion rates for these translations are Rand 8.57 per $1.00 and A$1.00 per $0.9608, which were the closing rates on December 31, 2012. By including the U.S. dollar equivalents, Gold Fields is not representing that the Rand or Australian dollar amounts actually represent the U.S. dollar amounts shown or that these amounts could be converted into U.S. dollars at the rates indicated.

In this annual report, except where otherwise noted, all production and operating statistics are based on Gold Fields’ total operations, which include production from the Tarkwa and Damang mines in Ghana and from the

 

iv


Table of Contents

Cerro Corona mine in Peru which is attributable to the noncontrolling shareholders in those mines. This annual report contains references to “gold equivalent ounces” which are quantities of metals (such as copper) expressed as amounts of gold using the prevailing prices of gold and the other metals. To calculate this, the accepted total value of the metal based on its weight and value is divided by the accepted value of one troy ounce of gold.

 

v


Table of Contents

FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS

This annual report contains forward-looking statements within the meaning of Section 27A of the U.S. Securities Act of 1933, as amended, or the Securities Act, and Section 21E of the U.S. Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, or the Exchange Act, with respect to Gold Fields’ financial condition, results of operations, business strategies, operating efficiencies, competitive position, growth opportunities for existing services, plans and objectives of management, markets for stock and other matters.

These forward-looking statements, including, among others, those relating to the future business prospects, revenues and income of Gold Fields, wherever they may occur in this annual report and the exhibits to the annual report, are necessarily estimates reflecting the best judgment of the senior management of Gold Fields and involve a number of risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from those suggested by the forward-looking statements. As a consequence, these forward-looking statements should be considered in light of various important factors, including those set forth in this annual report. Important factors that could cause actual results to differ materially from estimates or projections contained in the forward-looking statements include, without limitation:

 

   

overall economic and business conditions in South Africa, Ghana, Australia, Peru and elsewhere;

 

   

the ability to achieve anticipated efficiencies and other cost savings in connection with past and future acquisitions;

 

   

the ability to achieve anticipated cost savings at existing operations;

 

   

the success of exploration and development activities;

 

   

decreases in the market price of gold or copper;

 

   

the occurrence of hazards associated with underground and surface gold mining;

 

   

the occurrence of work stoppages related to health and safety incidents;

 

   

fluctuations in exchange rates, currency devaluations and other macroeconomic monetary policies;

 

   

the occurrence of labor disruptions and industrial actions;

 

   

the ability to realize the benefits of the Spin-off;

 

   

the ability to manage and maintain access to current and future sources of liquidity, capital and credit, including the terms and conditions of Gold Fields’ facilities and Gold Fields’ overall cost of funding;

 

   

the manner, amount and timing of capital expenditures made by Gold Fields on both existing and new mines, mining projects, exploration projects or other initiatives;

 

   

changes in relevant government regulations, particularly environmental, tax, health and safety, regulations and potential new legislation affecting mining and mineral rights; and

 

   

political instability in South Africa, Ghana, Peru or regionally in Africa or South America.

Gold Fields undertakes no obligation to update publicly or release any revisions to these forward-looking statements to reflect events or circumstances after the date of this annual report or to reflect the occurrence of unanticipated events.

 

vi


Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

     Page  

PART I ITEM 1: IDENTITY OF DIRECTORS, SENIOR MANAGEMENT AND ADVISERS

     1   

ITEM 2: OFFER STATISTICS AND EXPECTED TIMETABLE

     1   

ITEM 3: KEY INFORMATION

     1   

RISK FACTORS

     7   

ITEM 4: INFORMATION ON THE COMPANY

     30   

ITEM 4A: UNRESOLVED STAFF COMMENTS

     140   

ITEM 5: OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

     141   

ITEM 6: DIRECTORS, SENIOR MANAGEMENT AND EMPLOYEES

     231   

ITEM 7: MAJOR SHAREHOLDERS AND RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

     266   

ITEM 8: FINANCIAL INFORMATION

     269   

ITEM 9: THE OFFER AND LISTING

     270   

ITEM 10: ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

     274   

ITEM 11: QUANTITATIVE AND QUALITATIVE DISCLOSURES ABOUT MARKET RISK

     294   

ITEM 12: DESCRIPTION OF SECURITIES OTHER THAN EQUITY SECURITIES

     298   

PART II ITEM 13: DEFAULTS, DIVIDEND ARREARAGES AND DELINQUENCIES

     299   

ITEM 14: MATERIAL MODIFICATIONS TO THE RIGHTS OF SECURITY HOLDERS AND USE OF PROCEEDS

     300   

ITEM 15: CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES

     301   

ITEM 16A: AUDIT COMMITTEE FINANCIAL EXPERT

     302   

ITEM 16B: CODE OF ETHICS

     303   

ITEM 16C: PRINCIPAL ACCOUNTANT FEES AND SERVICES

     304   

ITEM 16D: EXEMPTIONS FROM THE LISTING STANDARDS FOR AUDIT COMMITTEES

     305   

ITEM 16E: PURCHASES OF EQUITY SECURITIES BY THE ISSUER AND AFFILIATED PURCHASERS

     306   

ITEM 16F: CHANGE IN REGISTRANT’S CERTIFYING ACCOUNTANT

     307   

ITEM 16G: CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

     308   

ITEM 16H: MINE SAFETY DISCLOSURE

     309   

PART III ITEM 17: FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

     310   

ITEM 18: FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

     311   

ITEM 19: EXHIBITS

     313   

 

vii


Table of Contents

PART I

ITEM 1: IDENTITY OF DIRECTORS, SENIOR MANAGEMENT AND ADVISERS

Not applicable.

ITEM 2: OFFER STATISTICS AND EXPECTED TIMETABLE

Not applicable.

ITEM 3: KEY INFORMATION

Selected Historical Consolidated Financial Data

The selected historical consolidated financial data set out below for fiscal 2012, fiscal 2011, the six-month period ended December 31, 2010 and fiscal 2010, and as of December 31, 2012 and 2011 have been derived from Gold Fields’ audited consolidated financial statements for those years and as of those dates and the related notes. The selected historical consolidated financial data for each of the two years ended June 30, 2009 and 2008, and as of December 31, 2010 and June 30, 2010, 2009 and 2008 have been derived from Gold Fields’ audited consolidated financial statements as of that date, which are not included in this annual report, and adjusted where applicable as described below. The selected historical consolidated financial data presented below have been derived from financial statements which have been prepared in accordance with U.S. GAAP. The other Operating Data presented has been calculated as described in the footnotes to the table below:

 

     Fiscal Period Ended (1)     Six-Month
Period
Ended (1)
    Fiscal
Period
Ended (1)
    Fiscal
Period
Ended (1)
 
     June 30,     December 31  
     2008     2009     2010     2010     2011     2012  
     ($ million, unless otherwise stated)  

Statement of Operations Data

            

Revenues

     3,206.2        3,228.3        4,164.3        2,564.2        5,800.1        5,551.8   

Production costs (exclusive of depreciation and amortization)

     1,996.1        1,998.6        2,573.6        1,450.3        2,989.0        3,190.4   

Depreciation and amortization

     400.5        433.5        631.1        389.4        745.3        729.9   

Corporate expenditure

     41.0        35.5        54.5        24.5        37.6        46.6   

Employee termination costs

     16.2        21.0        10.3        35.3        32.8        13.8   

Exploration expenditure

     39.8        58.0        86.6        53.2        125.4        135.3   

Feasibility and evaluation costs

     —          —          —          9.3        95.2        103.5   

Impairment of assets

     11.4        —          —          —          9.5        41.6   

Shaft closure costs

     3.3        (0.2     —          —          —          —     

Increase/(decrease) in provision for post-retirement health care costs

     (0.7     3.4        (9.4     (0.1     0.1        0.3   

Accretion expense on provision for environmental rehabilitation

     12.0        13.9        19.3        10.9        24.9        28.2   

Share-based compensation (2)

     20.7        33.7        —          —          —          —     

Interest and dividends

     31.2        24.9        40.2        12.9        25.4        29.2   

Finance expense

     (100.4     (73.9     (65.2     (31.7     (54.3     (70.1

Gain/(loss) on financial instruments

     19.8        (1.3     27.7        1.0        4.4        (0.4

Gain/(loss) on foreign exchange

     1.7        10.2        (8.5     (1.4     9.1        (13.8

Profit/(loss) on sale of property, plant and equipment

     4.6        0.5        0.3        0.7        (0.4     0.5   

 

1


Table of Contents
     Fiscal Period Ended (1)     Six-Month
Period
Ended (1)
    Fiscal
Period
Ended (1)
    Fiscal
Period
Ended (1)
 
     June 30,     December 31  
     2008     2009     2010     2010     2011     2012  
     ($ million, unless otherwise stated)  

Profit/(loss) on disposal of subsidiaries

     208.4        (0.3     —          —          —          —     

Profit/(loss) on disposal of listed investments

     3.7        (16.1     111.7        (0.4     12.8        27.6   

Impairment of listed investments

     —          (16.0     (8.1     —          (0.5     (10.5

South African Equity Empowerment Transactions

     —          —          —          (297.6     —          —     

Other income/(expenses)

     5.9        (7.7     (45.0     (36.8     (79.3     (77.4

Royalties (3)

     —          —          —          (43.3     (149.7     (151.2
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Income before tax, impairment of investment in equity investee and share of equity investees’ (losses)/income

     840.8        551.2        851.4        194.8        1,507.8        996.1   

Income and mining tax expense

     (271.2     (264.6     (358.4     (133.8     (552.0     (291.9
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Income before impairment of investment in equity investee and share of equity investees’ (losses)/income

     569.6        286.6        493.0        61.0        955.8        704.2   

Impairment of investment in equity investee

     (61.3     (87.4     —          —          (6.8     —     

Share of equity investees’ (losses)/income

     (16.0     (3.5     (22.7     4.9        4.0        (51.7
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net income

     492.3        195.7        470.3        65.9        953.0        652.5   

Less: Net income attributable to non controlling interests

     (39.8     (34.8     (79.3     (53.3     (71.5     1.8   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net income attributable to Gold Fields shareholders

     452.5        160.9        391.0        12.6        881.5        654.3   

Basic earnings per share attributable to Gold Fields shareholders($)

     0.69        0.24        0.55        0.02        1.22        0.90   

Diluted earnings per share attributable to Gold Fields shareholders($)

     0.69        0.24        0.55        0.02        1.21        0.90   

Dividend per share (Rand)

     1.60        1.50        1.30        0.70        1.70        3.90   

Dividend per share ($)

     0.22        0.17        0.17        0.10        0.24        0.29   

Other Operating Data

            

Total cash costs per equivalent ounce of gold produced ($) (4)

     505        538        670        753        835        960   

Total production costs per equivalent ounce of gold produced ($) (5)

     610        659        844        962        1,050        1,200   

Notional cash expenditure per equivalent ounce of gold produced ($) (6)

     822        763        928        1,060        1,153        1,364   

 

Notes:

(1) On July 1, 2009, Gold Fields adopted updated guidance pertaining to ownership interests in subsidiaries held by parties other than the parent (“noncontrolling interests”), which requires noncontrolling interests to be classified as a separate component of equity for presentation and disclosure purposes. The data for the years ended June 30, 2008 and 2009 have been adjusted to conform to the updated guidance.
(2) Share-based compensation for fiscal 2012 and fiscal 2011, the six-month period ended December 31, 2010 and fiscal 2010 has been reclassified into the respective captions where compensation costs of underlying employees are ordinarily classified. The reclassification has been made to conform with guidance SAB Topic 14.F.
(3)

The classification of royalty expense at Gold Fields’ operations requires judgment, particularly at the Groups’ South African and Ghanaian operations, where the percentages to be applied in calculating royalties are influenced by the expenses incurred in generating those product sales (and therefore the profitability of the operations). In light of the fact that the calculation of royalties in Ghana, representing the largest component of consolidated royalty expense, was changed as of April 1, 2011 to 5% of revenues earned from

 

2


Table of Contents
  minerals obtained (regardless of the operating margin), Gold Fields changed the classification of royalty expense in its consolidated financial statements from a component of “income and mining taxes” to “royalties” in its consolidated statements of operations for the six-month period ended December 31, 2010. Given the change in circumstances, Gold Fields considers it appropriate to change the presentation for all periods beginning with the six-month period ended December 31, 2010.
(4) Gold Fields has calculated total cash costs per ounce by dividing total cash costs, as determined using guidance provided by the Gold Institute, by gold ounces sold for all periods presented. The guidance was first adopted in 1996 and revised in November 1999. Total cash costs, as defined in the Gold Institute industry guidance, are production costs as recorded in the statement of operations, less offsite (i.e. central) general and administrative expenses (including head office costs performance, as well as changes in the currency exchange rate between the Rand, Australian dollar and the Bolivar, compared with the U.S. dollar). Total cash costs and total cash costs per ounce are not U.S. GAAP measures. Management, however, believes that total cash costs per ounce provides a measure for comparing Gold Fields’ operational performance against that of its peer group, both for Gold Fields as a whole, and for its individual operations. An investor should not consider total cash costs and total cash costs per ounce in isolation or as an alternative to total production costs or net income/(loss), income before tax, operating cash flows or any other measure of financial performance presented in accordance with U.S. GAAP. In particular, depreciation and amortization is included in a measure of production costs under U.S. GAAP, but is not included in total cash costs under the guidance provided by the Gold Institute. See “Presentation of Financial Information” and “Information on the Company—Glossary of Mining Terms—Total cash costs per ounce”. For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ production costs to its total cash costs for fiscal 2012 and fiscal 2011, fiscal 2011 and 2010 and the six-month periods ended December 31 2010 and December 31, 2009 , see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended December 31, 2012 and December 31, 2011—Costs and Expenses”, “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended December 31, 2011 and June 30, 2010—Costs and Expenses” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Six-Month Period Ended December 31, 2010 and 2009—Costs and Expenses”.
(5) Gold Fields has calculated total production costs per ounce by dividing total production costs, as determined using the guidance provided by the Gold Institute, by gold ounces sold for all periods presented. Total production costs, as defined by the Gold Institute industry guidance, are total cash costs, as calculated using the Gold Institute guidance, plus amortization, depreciation and rehabilitation costs. Changes in total production costs per ounce are affected by operational performance, as well as changes in the currency exchange rate between the Rand, and the Australian dollar compared with the U.S. dollar. Changes in the currency exchange rate between the Bolivar and the U.S. dollar affected changes in total production costs per ounce until the sale of the Choco 10 mine on November 30, 2007. Total production costs per ounce is not a U.S. GAAP measure. Management, however, believes that total production costs per ounce provides a measure for comparing Gold Fields’ operational performance against that of its peer group, both for Gold Fields as a whole, and for its individual operations. An investor should not consider total production costs per ounce in isolation or as an alternative to total production costs or net income/(loss), income before tax, operating cash flows or any other measure of financial performance presented in accordance with U.S. GAAP. See “Presentation of Financial Information” and “Information on the Company—Glossary of Mining Terms—Total production costs per ounce”. For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ production costs to its total production costs for fiscal 2012 and fiscal 2011, fiscal 2011 and 2010 and the six-month periods ended December 31 2010 and December 31, 2009 , see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended December 31, 2012 and December 31, 2011—Costs and Expenses”, “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended December 31, 2011 and June 30, 2010—Costs and Expenses” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Six-Month Periods Ended December 31, 2010 and 2009—Costs and Expenses”.

 

3


Table of Contents
(6) Gold Fields defines NCE as operating costs plus additions to property, plant and equipment, and defines operating costs as production costs (exclusive of depreciation and amortization) plus corporate expenditure, employment termination costs and accretion expense on provision for environmental rehabilitation. Gold Fields reports NCE on a per equivalent ounce basis. For a description of NCE and a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ NCE to its production costs for fiscal 2012, fiscal 2011 and fiscal 2010 and the six-month periods ended December 31, 2010 and 2009, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Notional Cash Expenditure”.

 

    As at (1)  
    June 30,     December 31,  
    2008     2009     2010     2010     2011     2012  
    ($ million, unless otherwise stated)  

Balance Sheet Data

           

Cash and cash equivalents

    253.7        357.5        500.7        809.5        744.0        655.6   

Current portion of financial instruments

    6.9        —          —          —          —          —     

Receivables

    280.1        383.5        305.4        411.4        483.4        522.7   

Inventories

    152.8        196.0        234.9        256.3        297.7        402.1   

Material contained on heap leach pads

    74.5        81.3        91.5        111.3        187.9        65.0   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total current assets

    768.0        1,018.3        1,132.5        1,588.5        1,713.0        1,645.4   

Property, plant and equipment, net

    5,423.7        5,756.9        6,639.7        7,482.0        7,016.8        7,388.9   

Goodwill

    1,092.8        1,084.7        1,154.9        1,295.2        1,075.4        1,020.1   

Deferred income and mining taxes

    —          —          —          —          —          24.1   

Material contained on heap leach pads

    —          —          —          —          —          111.8   

Non-current investments

    737.4        475.2        254.3        344.3        272.2        458.0   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total assets

    8,021.9        8,335.1        9,181.4        10,710.0        10,077.4        10,648.3   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Accounts payable and provisions

    610.3        533.5        551.9        670.6        669.9        751.9   

Current portion of financial instruments

    —          1.7        —          —          —          —     

Interest payable

    29.2        14.4        4.5        4.1        11.2        11.0   

Income and mining taxes payable

    123.1        98.2        104.3        156.1        264.4        192.1   

Current portion of long-term loans

    772.9        317.8        691.1        261.7        547.0        40.0   

Bank overdraft

    2.7        9.7        —          —          —          —     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total current liabilities

    1,538.2        975.3        1,351.8        1,092.5        1,492.5        995.0   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Long-term loans

    564.2        785.9        430.0        1,136.6        1,360.7        2,321.2   

Deferred income and mining taxes

    719.9        817.7        982.5        1,051.8        1,019.4        901.8   

Provision for environmental rehabilitation

    216.2        236.9        275.7        324.4        336.9        373.6   

Provision for post-retirement health care costs

    7.9        11.4        2.8        2.7        2.1        2.1   

Other non-current liabilities

    —          3.9        —          19.7        13.5        13.9   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total liabilities

    3,046.4        2,831.1        3,042.8        3,627.7        4,225.1        4,607.6   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Share capital

    54.9        57.7        57.8        58.8        59.0        61.0   

Additional paid-in capital

    4,490.4        4,944.2        5,005.4        5,313.2        5,374.6        5,452.3   

Retained earnings

    521.8        561.5        834.4        779.6        772.5        1,054.3   

 

4


Table of Contents
    As at (1)  
    June 30,     December 31,  
    2008     2009     2010     2010     2011     2012  
    ($ million, unless otherwise stated)  

Accumulated other comprehensive (loss)/income

    (243.0     (338.9     (96.5     562.4        (423.3     (653.0
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total equity attributable to Gold Fields shareholders

    4,824.1        5,224.5        5,801.1        6,714.0        5,782.8        5,914.6   

Noncontrolling interests

    151.4        279.5        337.5        368.3        69.5        126.1   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total equity

    4,975.5        5,504.0        6,138.6        7,082.3        5,852.3        6,040.7   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total liabilities and equity

    8,021.9        8,335.1        9,181.4        10,710.0        10,077.4        10,648.3   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Other Financial Data

           

Number of ordinary shares as adjusted to reflect changes in capital structure

    653,200,682        704,749,849        705,903,511        720,796,887        724,591,516        730,393,143   

Net Assets

    4,824.1        5,224.5        5,801.1        6,714.0        5,782.8        5,914.6   

 

Notes:

(1) On July 1, 2009, Gold Fields adopted updated guidance pertaining to ownership interests in subsidiaries held by parties other than the parent (“noncontrolling interests”), which requires noncontrolling interests to be classified as a separate component of equity for presentation and disclosure purposes. The data as at June 30, 2008 and 2009 have been adjusted to conform to the updated guidance.

Exchange Rates

The following tables set forth, for the periods indicated, the average, high and low exchange rates of Rand for U.S. Dollars, expressed in Rand per $1.00. For periods prior to December 31, 2008, the following tables express the exchange rates in terms of the noon buying rate in New York City for cable transfers in Rand as certified for customs purposes by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York. As of December 31, 2008, the Federal Reserve Bank ceased publication of the noon buying rate and, as such, the exchange rates for fiscal 2009 are sourced from I-Net Bridge (Proprietary) Limited, or I-Net Bridge, being the average rate.

 

Year ended

   Average  

June 30, 2008

     7.30 (1)  

June 30, 2009

     9.01 (2)  

June 30, 2010

     7.58 (2)  

December 31, 2011

     7.22 (2)  

December 31, 2012

     8.19 (2)  

through May 9, 2013

     8.98 (2)  

 

Notes:

(1) The average of the noon buying rates on the last day of each full month during the relevant period as certified for customs purposes by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York.
(2) The daily average of the closing rate during the relevant period as reported by I-Net Bridge.

 

Six-month period ended

   Average  

December 31, 2009

     7.65 (1)   

December 31, 2010

     7.14 (1)   

 

Note:

(1) The daily average of the closing rate during the relevant period as reported by I-Net Bridge.

 

5


Table of Contents

Month ended

   High      Low  

November 30, 2012

     8.97         8.63   

December 31, 2012

     8.87         8.40   

January 31, 2013

     9.09         8.45   

February 28, 2013

     9.03         8.78   

March 31, 2013

     9.37         8.99   

April 30, 2013

     9.33         8.45   

The closing rate for the Rand on May 9, 2013 as reported by I-Net Bridge was Rand 9.02 per $1.00. Fluctuations in the exchange rate between the Rand and the U.S. dollar will affect the dollar equivalent of the price of the ordinary shares on the JSE, which may affect the market price of the American Depositary Shares, or ADSs, on the NYSE. These fluctuations will also affect the U.S. dollar amounts received by owners of ADSs on the conversion of any dividends paid in Rand on the ordinary shares.

 

6


Table of Contents

RISK FACTORS

In addition to the other information included in this annual report, the considerations listed below could have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ business, financial condition or results of operations, resulting in a decline in the trading price of Gold Fields’ ordinary shares or ADSs. The risks set forth below comprise all material risks currently known to Gold Fields. These factors should be considered carefully, together with the information and financial data set forth in this document.

Changes in the market price for gold, and to a lesser extent copper, which in the past have fluctuated widely, affect the profitability of Gold Fields’ operations and the cash flows generated by those operations.

Most of Gold Fields’ revenues are derived from the sale of gold. Gold Fields generally does not enter into forward sales, derivatives or other hedging arrangements to establish a price in advance for the sale of its future gold production. Since Gold Fields does not generally use commodity or derivative instruments, it will generally be unprotected against declines in the gold price, which could lead to reduced revenue in respect of gold production that is not hedged. For example, during April 2013, the gold price had fallen approximately 30% from its high in September 2011. See “Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk”. Historically, the market price for gold has fluctuated widely and has been affected by numerous factors over which Gold Fields has no control, including:

 

   

the demand for gold for industrial uses and for use in jewelry;

 

   

demand for gold from relatively new emerging markets, particularly Brazil, Russia, India and China, and the emerging middle class in these markets;

 

   

actual, expected or rumored purchases and sales of gold bullion holdings by central banks or other large gold bullion holders or dealers;

 

   

demand for exchange traded funds, or ETFs, which replicate the exact performance of gold;

 

   

demand for gold for investment purposes;

 

   

investor confidence in gold and the gold business;

 

   

speculative trading activities in gold;

 

   

the overall level of forward sales by other gold producers;

 

   

the overall level and cost of production by other gold producers;

 

   

international or regional political and economic events or trends;

 

   

the strength or weakness of the U.S. dollar (the currency in which gold prices generally are quoted) and of other currencies;

 

   

financial market expectations regarding the rate of inflation; and

 

   

interest rates.

While the aggregate effect of these factors is impossible for Gold Fields to predict, if gold prices fall below the amount it costs Gold Fields to produce gold and remain at such levels for any sustained period, Gold Fields may experience losses and may be forced to curtail or suspend some or all of its exploration projects, growth projects, operations and/or reduce operational capital expenditures. In addition, Gold Fields might not be able to recover any losses it may incur during, or after, such periods.

In addition, the current demand for, and supply of, gold does not necessarily affect the price of gold in the same manner as current demand and supply affect the prices of other commodities. Since the potential supply of gold is large relative to mine production in any given year, normal variations in current production will not necessarily have a significant effect on the supply of gold or the gold price. Central banks, financial institutions and individuals historically have held large amounts of gold as a store of value, and production in any given year

 

7


Table of Contents

historically has constituted a small portion of the total potential supply of gold. Pursuant to a gold sales agreement entered into by 15 European central banks, individual banks may sell up to 400 tonnes of gold per year, effective through September 2014. However, the effect on the market of these or any other gold sales is unclear.

Due to the credit crisis in the Eurozone countries and other factors, the market price of gold has been at historically high levels recently, and has experienced significant volatility. See “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Overview—Revenues”. A sustained period of significant gold price volatility may adversely affect Gold Fields’ ability to evaluate the feasibility of undertaking new capital projects or continuing existing operations or to make other long-term strategic decisions.

Copper accounts for a significant proportion of the revenues at Gold Fields’ Cerro Corona mine, although copper is not a major element of Gold Fields’ overall revenues. A variety of factors may depress global copper prices, including slowing growth rates in Brazil, Russia, China and India. A decline in copper prices, which have also fluctuated widely, could adversely affect the revenues and cash flows from the Cerro Corona mine.

Gold Fields’ mineral reserves are estimates based on a number of assumptions, any changes to which may require Gold Fields to lower its estimated mineral reserves.

The mineral reserves stated in this annual report represent the amount of gold and copper that Gold Fields estimated, as of December 31, 2012, could be mined, processed and sold at prices at least sufficient to recover Gold Fields’ estimated future total costs of production, remaining investment and anticipated additional capital expenditures, along with comparative figures for the mineral reserves as of December 31, 2011. Ore reserves are estimates based on assumptions regarding, among other things, Gold Fields’ costs, expenditures, prices and exchange rates and metallurgical and mining recovery assumptions, which may prove inaccurate due to a number of factors, many of which are beyond Gold Fields’ control.

In the event that Gold Fields revises any of the assumptions that underlie its mineral reserves reporting in an adverse manner, Gold Fields may need to revise its mineral reserves downwards. In particular, if Gold Fields’ production costs or capital expenditures increase, if gold or copper prices decrease or if the Rand or Australian dollar strengthens against the U.S. dollar, a portion of Gold Fields’ mineral reserves may become uneconomical to recover, forcing Gold Fields to lower its estimated reserves. See “Information on the Company—Reserves of Gold Fields as of December 31, 2012”.

To the extent that Gold Fields makes acquisitions, it may experience problems in executing acquisitions or managing and integrating the acquisitions with its existing operations.

In order to maintain or expand its operations and reserve base, Gold Fields may seek to make acquisitions of selected precious metal producing and/or exploration companies or assets. Any such acquisition may change the scale of the Company’s business and operations and may expose it to new geographic, geological, political, social, operating, financial, legal, regulatory and contractual risks. For example, there may be a significant change in commodity prices after Gold Fields has committed to complete the transaction and established the purchase price or share exchange ratio; a material ore body may not meet expectations; Gold Fields may have difficulty integrating and assimilating the operations and personnel of any acquired companies, realizing anticipated synergies and maximizing the financial and strategic position of the combined enterprise, and maintaining uniform standards, policies and controls; the integration may disrupt Gold Fields’ on-going business and its relationships with employees, suppliers and contractors; the acquisition may divert management’s attention from Gold Fields’ day-to-day business; and the acquired business may have undetected liabilities which may be significant. Furthermore, Gold Fields operates and acquires businesses in different countries, with different regulatory and operating cultures, which may exacerbate the risks described above.

There can be no assurance that any acquisition will achieve the results intended. Any problems experienced by Gold Fields in connection with an acquisition as a result of one or more of these or other factors could have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ business, operating results and financial condition.

 

8


Table of Contents

Gold Fields’ operations and profits have been and may be adversely affected by union activity and new and existing labor laws.

There has been an increase in union activity in some of the countries in which Gold Fields operates, including South Africa and, in recent years, there have been new labor laws introduced or amendments to existing labor laws that impose additional obligations on Gold Fields or grant additional rights to workers, thereby increasing compliance and other costs. In fiscal 2012, union activity had a material adverse impact on Gold Fields’ operations, production and financial performance as described below. While the divestiture of the Sibanye Gold assets has lessened Gold Fields’ exposure to these risks in South Africa, the occurrence of any such events in the future could have further negative impacts upon Gold Fields and its financial performance and condition.

Greater union activity, including the entry of rival unions, has resulted in more frequent industrial disputes, including violent protests and clashes with police authorities, and has impacted labor negotiations in the industry. In the second half of fiscal 2012, there was heightened labor unrest in the South African mining industry. A number of unions in various industries have threatened to or have recently gone on strike, causing work stoppages and production losses. As a result, on September 27, 2012, South Africa’s sovereign debt credit rating, along with the credit ratings of a number of the country’s leading mining companies, including Gold Fields, was downgraded. Those strikes have impacted Gold Fields’ operations and caused work stoppages and significant production losses.

For example, during August, September and October 2012, approximately 29,000 employees at Gold Fields’ formerly owned KDC and Beatrix mines (out of nearly 36,000 employees at those mines) engaged in work stoppages. Work stoppages occurred at the KDC West mine from September 9, 2012 to October 18, 2012. At the KDC East mine, work stoppages occurred from August 29, 2012 to September 5, 2012 and again from October 14, 2012 to October 23, 2012, when 8,100 workers were dismissed for failing to return to work, with 7,600 appealing that dismissal. After an appeal process, a majority of the employees returned to work on November 6, 2012. At the Beatrix mine, work stoppages occurred from September 21, 2012 to October 18, 2012. Workers at Beatrix West went on strike on September 21, 2012 and workers at Beatrix North and South went on strike on September 24, 2012. On October 17, 2012, the strike at Beatrix North and South ended. On October 18, 2012, the strike at Beatrix West ended. In each case, these work stoppages continued despite the Chamber of Mines negotiating a settlement with three labor unions, the National Union of Mineworkers, or NUM, the Solidarity Trade Union, or Solidarity, and UASA, formerly known as the United Association of South Africa, which the striking employees rejected. Gold Fields continued to engage with the relevant unions and communicated with its employees in an attempt to resolve the work stoppages throughout the strikes.

Gold Fields estimated that, as a result of these work stoppages, the losses for fiscal 2012 were approximately 145,000 ounces of gold production and R2.1 billion of revenue. These estimated losses, however, were partially offset by approximately R0.4 billion saved in wages, electricity, consumables and other costs not paid.

Negotiations with the South African mining unions in 2011 resulted in above-inflation wage increases between 8.0% to 10.0%, depending upon the category of employee. Such negotiations, historically, have occurred every two years. However, the recent labor unrest has resulted in South African mining industry participants undergoing negotiations with workers and labor unions outside this period. These ad-hoc negotiations resulted in a settlement proposal made by a number of the gold mining companies in South Africa, including Gold Fields. Through the Chamber of Mines, Gold Fields agreed with the trade unions to an earlier implementation of a number of provisions of the wage agreement reached in 2011 that were agreed to by all parties, culminating in an adjustment to wages in the relevant bargaining units of around 2.5%, or R150 million, per annum relating to changes to job grades and entry-level wages. In addition, the gold mining companies, trade unions and government have set up a working group for a wide-ranging review of working practices, productivity improvements and socio-economic conditions in the gold mining industry, which will feed into the next round of

 

9


Table of Contents

wage negotiations scheduled for 2013. Despite the fact that returning employees will receive the benefit of the settlement proposal referred to above, Gold Fields’ employees may continue to take industrial action to protest and seek redress in connection with a variety of issues, including pay and working conditions. Negotiations with the South African mining unions generally take place every two years, and, in light of the recent labor unrest, Gold Fields expects that the negotiations in 2013 may be difficult and may be accompanied by further strikes, work stoppages or other labor actions that could disrupt its remaining South African operation, South Deep.

On August 2, 2012, Gold Fields announced that its South Deep mine had entered into a formal 60 day consultation process with the NUM and other affected employees in terms of Section 189(3) of the Labour Relations Act No. 66 of 1995, or the LRA. These negotiations centered around reaching agreement on a proposed new operating model. In terms of Section 189 of the LRA, Dismissals Based on Operational Requirements, when an employer contemplates dismissing employees for reasons based on the employer’s operational requirements, the employer must engage in a consensus-seeking process with its trade unions. On October 2, 2012, a formal agreement was reached between Gold Fields, the NUM and the UASA, which was implemented during the fourth quarter of fiscal 2012. The new South Deep operating model is expected to not only secure current jobs but allow management to create an additional 400 full-time positions at the mine. It should improve productivity and performance in order for the mine to approach international best practice. Further, during the second half of fiscal 2012, labor actions in several other South African industries also occurred, including in the transportation industry, the coal industry (which supplies the South African electricity utility) and the platinum industry. Such labor actions have the potential to impact on Gold Fields’ business by influencing its own labor negotiations and by curtailing the supply of necessary inputs.

Gold Fields’ operations in Peru have recently been and may in the future be impacted by increased union activities. For example, the operational employees at Cerro Corona formed a labor union and negotiated a five-year collective bargaining agreement with Gold Fields. In Ghana, Gold Fields entered into a three-year wage agreement with the labor unions in October 2010 for the years 2010 to December 2012, but there can be no guarantee that the labor unions will not undertake strikes and “go-slow” actions against the Group’s operations or other mining companies. In December 2012, the unions declined to start negotiations because of the general elections in Ghana on December 6, 2012. The renegotiation process is scheduled to start in the second quarter of 2013 with the aim of securing a multi-year wage agreement. Further, on April 3, 2013, employees at Gold Fields’ Ghanaian operations engaged in a work stoppage that led to a halt in production. On April 8, 2013, in order to end the strike, management and the Ghana Mineworkers Union, or GMWU, agreed to a settlement regarding the process for resolving certain issues raised by union petitions. However, the employees at these operations engaged in a further “go slow” action related to these issues between April 26, 2013 and May 2, 2013, which ended after further discussions between management and the GMWU.

In the event that Gold Fields experiences strikes or work stoppages, delays, sabotage, go-slow actions, lower productivity levels than envisaged or any other industrial relations related interruptions at any of its operations or increased employment-related costs due to union or employee activity, these may have a material adverse effect on its business, production levels, production targets, results of operations, financial condition and reputation and future prospects. In addition, lower levels of mining activity can have a longer term impact on production levels and operating costs, particularly since mining conditions can deteriorate during extended periods without production and Gold Fields will not re-commence mining until health and safety conditions are considered appropriate to do so.

Gold Fields may also be affected by certain labor laws that impose obligations regarding worker rights. For example, the Australian federal government introduced a new industrial relations system between 2009 and 2010 that includes “good faith bargaining” obligations for employers, fewer restrictions on the content of collective agreements and an enhanced role for union officials as bargaining representatives, parties to agreements and participants in dispute resolution. In addition, laws in South Africa impose monetary penalties for non-compliance with the administrative and the reporting requirements in respect of affirmative action policies. In Ghana, the Minerals and Mining (General) Regulations, 2012 (L.I. 2173) contain specific provisions requiring mining companies to recruit and train Ghanaian personnel and to procure goods and services with Ghanaian content. Failure to do so may result in the payment of a penalty. Gold Fields’ localization plan for recruiting and training Ghanaian personnel was approved by the Minerals Commission of Ghana in early January 2013 and is

 

10


Table of Contents

likely to be used as a template for the rest of the industry. Existing labor laws and any new or amended labor laws may increase Gold Fields’ labor costs and have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ business, operating results and financial condition.

An actual or alleged breach or breaches in governance processes, or fraud, bribery and corruption may lead to public and private censure, regulatory penalties, loss of licenses or permits and impact negatively upon our empowerment status and may damage Gold Fields’ reputation.

Gold Fields operates globally in multiple jurisdictions and with numerous and complex frameworks, and its governance and compliance processes may not prevent potential breaches of law or accounting or other governance practices. Gold Fields’ operating and ethical codes, among other standards and guidance may not prevent instances of fraudulent behavior and dishonesty, nor guarantee compliance with legal and regulatory requirements.

In December 2012, Gold Fields, through the Social and Ethics Committee of the Board, commenced an examination of a Black Economic Empowerment transaction related to its South Deep license. The Company took this action following press reports raising questions about the transaction. In that context, the Board engaged an independent law firm to assist in its examination and that firm has undertaken an investigation. The Board may also authorize a review of the Company’s relevant internal controls in order to determine whether any improvements are necessary. The Board’s examination of the matter is on-going.

To the extent that Gold Fields suffers from any actual or alleged breach or breaches of relevant laws (including South African anti-bribery and corruption legislation or the U.S. Foreign Corrupt Practices Act of 1977) under any circumstances, they may lead to regulatory and civil fines, litigation, public and private censure, loss of operating licenses or permits and impact negatively upon our empowerment status and may damage Gold Fields’ reputation. The occurrence of any of these events could have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ business, financial condition and results of operations.

To the extent that Gold Fields seeks to add to its reserve base through its exploration program, it may experience problems associated with mineral exploration or developing mining projects.

In order to expand its operations and reserve base, Gold Fields may rely on its exploration program for gold, and other metals associated with gold, as well as its ability to develop mining projects. Exploration for gold and other metals associated with gold is speculative in nature, involves many risks and is frequently unsuccessful. Any exploration program entails risks relating to the location of economic ore bodies, the development of appropriate extractive processes, the receipt of necessary governmental permits and regulatory approvals and the construction of mining and processing facilities at the mining site. Gold Fields’ exploration efforts may not result in the discovery of gold or other metals associated with gold and any mineralization discovered may not result in an increase of Gold Fields’ reserves. If ore bodies are developed, it can take a number of years and substantial expenditures from the initial phases of drilling until production commences, during which time the economic feasibility of production may change. In addition, to the extent Gold Fields participates in the development of a project through a joint venture or any other multi-party commercial structure, there could be disagreements, legal or otherwise, or divergent interests or goals amongst the parties, which could jeopardize the success of the project.

Furthermore, significant capital investment is required to achieve commercial production from exploration efforts. There is no assurance that Gold Fields will have, or be able to raise, the required funds to engage in these activities or to meet its obligations with respect to the exploration properties in which it has or may acquire an interest.

 

11


Table of Contents

Due to the nature of mining and the type of gold mines it operates, Gold Fields faces a material risk of liability, delays, mine stoppages and increased production costs from environmental and industrial accidents and pollution.

The business of gold mining by its nature involves significant risks and hazards, including environmental hazards and industrial and mining accidents. In particular, hazards associated with Gold Fields’ mining operations include:

 

   

rock bursts;

 

   

seismic events, particularly at the South Deep operation;

 

   

extreme ambient operating temperature;

 

   

surface or underground fires and explosions, including those caused by flammable gas or in connection with blasting;

 

   

cave-ins, wall collapse or gravity falls of ground, including collapses of rock dumps or tailings dams;

 

   

discharges of gases and toxic substances;

 

   

releases of radioactivity;

 

   

flooding;

 

   

electrocution;

 

   

falling from height;

 

   

accidents related to the presence of mobile machinery, including locomotives, shaft conveyances, elevators, open pit mining and rock transportation equipment;

 

   

ground and surface water pollution, including as a result of potential spillage or seepage from tailings dams;

 

   

production disruption due to weather;

 

   

sinkhole formation and ground subsidence; and

 

   

other accidents and conditions resulting from drilling, blasting and removing and processing material.

Gold Fields is at risk of experiencing any and all of these environmental or other industrial hazards. The Sibanye Gold assets were historically more susceptible, to certain of these risks due to mining at deep levels. The occurrence of any of these hazards could delay or halt production, increase production costs and result in liability for Gold Fields (including as a result of the occurrence of hazards that took place at the Sibanye Gold assets when they were owned by Gold Fields).

Ageing infrastructure may cause breakdowns and unplanned stoppages, which may result in production delays, increased costs and industrial accidents.

Deep level gold mining shafts and processing plants are usually designed with a lifespan of 25 to 30 years. Vertical shafts consist of large quantities of infrastructure steelwork for guiding conveyances and services such as high voltage electric cables, air, backfill and water pipe columns and communication cables. Maintaining this infrastructure requires skilled human resources, capital allocation, management and planned maintenance.

Once a shaft or a processing plant has reached the end of its intended lifespan, more than normal maintenance and care is required. Some of Gold Fields’ processing plants and South Deep’s South Shaft complex fall into this category. Although Gold Fields has comprehensive maintenance strategies in place, incidents resulting in production delays, increased costs or industrial accidents may occur. Such incidents may have a material adverse effect on the company’s results of operations and financial position.

 

12


Table of Contents

If Gold Fields loses senior management or is unable to hire and retain sufficient technically skilled employees, its business may be materially adversely affected.

Gold Fields’ ability to operate or expand effectively depends largely on the experience, skills and performance of its senior management team and technically skilled employees. However, the mining industry, including Gold Fields, continues to experience a global shortage of qualified senior management and technically skilled employees. Gold Fields cannot be certain that the services of its senior management and a sufficient number of its technically skilled employees will continue to be available to it. Any senior management departures, unavailability (due to death, injury, illness or other reasons) or technically skilled worker shortages could adversely affect Gold Fields’ operational efficiency and production levels.

Gold Fields may be unable to hire or retain appropriate technically skilled employees or other management personnel, or may have to pay higher levels of remuneration than it currently intends in order to do so. For instance, the production of gold at South Deep and at Gold Fields’ Australian underground mines relies heavily on mechanical equipment operators and maintenance staff. Competition for skills is particularly intense in Western Australia, where mining companies compete not only with one another, but also with the hydrocarbon sector. Further, in the surface open pit operations in Ghana, Australia and Peru, there is strong reliance on heavy mining equipment operators for machines such as drill rigs, excavators and dump trucks, as well as required technical staff to ensure maintenance programs are maintained. Turnover in these areas also remains a challenge across Gold Fields. For example, Gold Fields’ Ghana operations face skilled worker shortages due to the increasing number of skilled workers accepting work assignments outside of Ghana. Additionally, as experienced managers and technical specialists become eligible for retirement, Gold Fields and the mining industry as a whole face demographic challenges as there are not enough younger workers to replace them. If Gold Fields is not able to hire and retain appropriate management and technically skilled personnel or if there are not sufficient succession plans in place, this could have a material adverse effect on its business (including production levels), results of operations and financial position.

Because gold is generally sold in U.S. dollars, while some of Gold Fields’ production costs are in Australian dollars, Rand and other non-U.S. dollar currencies, Gold Fields’ operating results and financial condition could be materially harmed by a material appreciation in the value of these non-U.S. dollar currencies.

Gold is sold throughout the world principally in U.S. dollars. Gold Fields’ costs of production are incurred principally in U.S. dollars, Australian dollars, Rand and other currencies. As a result, any significant and sustained appreciation of any of these non-U.S. dollar currencies against the U.S. dollar may materially increase Gold Fields’ costs in U.S. dollar terms, which could materially adversely affect Gold Fields’ operating results and financial condition.

Conversely, inflation in any of the countries in which it operates could increase the prices Gold Fields pays for products and services, including wages for its employees and power costs, which if not offset by increased gold prices or currency devaluations, could have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ financial condition and results of operations.

Gold Fields is subject to various cost imposts, such as mining taxes or royalties, which may have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ operations and profits.

In recent years, governments (local and national), communities, non-governmental organizations and trade unions in several jurisdictions have sought and, in some cases, have implemented greater cost imposts on the mining industry, including through the imposition of additional taxes and royalties. Such resource nationalism, whether in the form of cost imposts, interference in project management, mandatory social investment requirements, local content requirements or creeping expropriation could impact the global mining industry and Gold Fields’ financial condition and results of operations.

In South Africa, the African National Congress, or the ANC, has adopted a recommendation which, among other things, proposed greater state intervention in the mining industry, including the revision of existing royalties, the imposition of new taxes and increasing the South African government’s holdings in mining

 

13


Table of Contents

companies. In June 2012, the recommendation was discussed at the national policy conference of the ANC. The conference recommended that the South African government take a more active role in the mining sector, including through the strengthening of a state mining company to be involved in new projects either through partnerships or individually. The policy conference’s recommendations were adopted as ANC policy during the national conference of the ANC held in December 2012.

The adopted policy may impose additional restrictions, obligations, operational costs, taxes or royalty payments on gold mining companies, including Gold Fields, any of which could have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ business, operating results and financial condition.

In Ghana, the parliament passed an Act that, effective March 9, 2012, increases taxes on mining companies. These changes included introducing a separate tax category for companies engaged in mining which raised the applicable corporate tax rate from 25% to 35%. At the same time, the 5% National Fiscal Stabilization levy was abolished, resulting in a net increase in the tax rate of 5%. The favorable capital allowance was changed from 80% for the first year, with the 20% remaining component, after being indexed at a rate of 10%, to be claimed on a reducing balance method, to a uniform regime of 20% over five years, which may affect Gold Fields’ future capital expenditure decisions. In addition, expenses exclusively incurred in a mining area may not be deducted against revenue derived from another mining area owned by the company in determining its chargeable income. On November 18, 2012, Ghana’s parliament passed Legislative Instrument 2191, which increased annual grounds rent on mining concessions from GH 0.5 per square kilometer to GH 36.5 per acre (GH 9,019 per square kilometer), which will be effective from the 2013 year of assessment. The new law threatens current and future exploration projects. Further, a draft bill has been presented to the Ghanaian parliament which, if passed in 2013, will impose a windfall profit tax of 10% of the cash balance of a company engaged in mining activities. The bill would also allow the Commissioner-General, in determining the cash balance of a company, to disregard or re-characterize a transaction or any other transaction if the Commissioner-General believes that the transaction was carried out for the purpose of reducing the cash balance with respect to calculation of the windfall profit tax. In his budget speech on March 5, 2013, the Minister of Finance announced that a mining review committee would consider the windfall profit tax as part of its full review of the mining industry and report to Parliament by the second half of 2013.

Further, in Ghana, the ownership of land on which there are mineral deposits is separate from the ownership of the minerals. All minerals in their natural state in or upon any land or water are, under Ghanaian law, the property of Ghana and vested in the President on behalf of the people of Ghana. Mining companies must pay royalties of 5% of the total revenue earned from minerals. Companies must also pay corporate taxes and the government has a right to obtain a 10% free-carried interest in mining leases. See “Information on the Company—Environmental and Regulatory Matters—Ghana—Mineral Rights”.

In Peru, a new special tax regime for mining companies was established in 2011 (relating to mining royalties), increasing the tax burden on mining companies. In addition, a new consultation law has been enacted, requiring the government to consult with indigenous or native populations on legislative or administrative proposals that may have an impact on their collective rights. It is not yet certain what, if any, other political or economic impact the policies of the new administration will have on Peru generally, or on Gold Fields specifically.

The impositions of additional restrictions, obligations, operational costs, taxes or royalty payments could have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ business, operating results and financial condition.

Economic, political or social instability in the countries or regions where Gold Fields operates may have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ operations and profits.

In fiscal 2012, approximately half of Gold Fields’ production was in South Africa. Gold Fields also has significant operations in Ghana, Australia and Peru. After the Spin-off, Gold Fields expects that its South African, Ghanaian, Australian and Peruvian operations will produce 16%, 42%, 28% and 14% of its total gold production in 2013, respectively. Changes or instability to the economic, political or social environment in South Africa or in any of these other countries or in neighboring countries could affect an investment in Gold Fields.

 

14


Table of Contents

As noted above, the South African mining industry in general, including Gold Fields, was the target of large scale labor strikes in fiscal 2012. Labor unrest has increased in the South African mining industry and the entry of rival unions has contributed to increased violence and greater frequency of unrest.

In South Africa, Gold Fields’ South Deep operation may be subject to actions by labor groups or other interested parties who object to perceived or actual conditions and policies at its mines or to perceived or actual environmental impact of such mines. Such action may also be influenced by political forces within South Africa. Additionally, the proliferation of social media and other internet technologies may contribute to negative publicity relating to any actual or perceived environmental, labor or other issues at Gold Fields’ operations. These actions may delay or halt production, increase production costs, result in liability, lead to greater costs or may create negative publicity related to Gold Fields. Additionally, these actions and especially those related to labor groups and work stoppages can lead to a loss of investor confidence in the gold industry in general which may restrict Gold Fields’ access to international financing and could have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ business, operating results and financial condition.

For example, in the second half of 2012, South Africa’s sovereign credit rating was lowered by certain rating agencies, resulting in higher interest rates for South Africa’s sovereign debt, which may in turn adversely affect South Africa’s economy. The credit ratings of a number of the country’s leading mining companies, including Gold Fields, were also downgraded. This could lead to increased borrowing costs for Gold Fields and a diminished ability to raise capital from the international debt markets in the future.

In recent years, South Africa has continued to experience high levels of crime and unemployment. These problems may have impacted fixed inward investment into South Africa and have prompted emigration of skilled workers. As a result, Gold Fields may have difficulty attracting and retaining qualified local employees. There has also been regional, political and economic instability in certain countries surrounding South Africa. Any similar political or economic instability in South Africa could have a negative impact on Gold Fields’ ability to manage and operate its South African operations.

In South Africa, numerous public statements have also been made about the nationalization of South African mines by labor unions and political groups in South Africa. While the official policy of the South African government and the ANC, which was confirmed at the ANC conference that took place during December 2012, is not to nationalize mines, these comments and any other potential threats of nationalization may negatively affect the perceived value of Gold Fields’ property and investors’ perceptions of South Africa. It remains unclear what effect the policies adopted at this conference will have on the South African gold mining industry or on Gold Fields specifically. Any threat of, or actual proceeding to, nationalize any of Gold Fields’ assets could halt or curtail operations at South Deep, resulting in a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ business, operating results and financial condition and could cause the value of Gold Fields’ securities to decline rapidly and dramatically, possibly causing investors to lose the entirety of their investment.

There has been regional social instability in the area around Gold Fields’ La Cima operation. While the unrest has not caused any stoppages to Gold Fields’ La Cima operations, it could have a negative impact on Gold Fields’ ability to manage and operate its Peruvian operations. There has been local opposition to mine development projects in Peru. Gold Fields’ operations and other mining operations in Peru have been the subject of local protests in the past, including the illegal blockades of access roads. Such blockades are normally accompanied by demands for increased employment from local communities and increased use of local contractors. In addition, Gold Fields’ Cerro Corona mine shares the same public road as Newmont-Buenaventura’s Yanacocha mine and is near the planned Conga Project, which was the subject of local protests, some of them violent. There have also been protests against the Gold Fields Chucapaca project in southern Peru. While production at Cerro Corona has not been affected by this opposition, Cerro Corona, along with other mining operations, may be affected by protests or heightened restrictions on mining activities in the future. If Gold Fields experiences further opposition in connection with its operations in Peru, or if protests aimed at other mining operations affect operations at Cerro Corona, it could have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ financial condition and results of operations.

 

15


Table of Contents

In Ghana, national elections took place on December 6, 2012. On March 5, 2013, the Minister of Finance announced in his 2013 budget speech that a major review of Ghana’s tax and investment laws would be conducted and programs to maintain single digit inflation, ensure exchange rate stability, reduce the budget deficit and achieve high annual economic growth rates would be introduced. However, it is not yet certain what, if any, political or economic impact the policies of the new administration will have on Ghana generally, or on Gold Fields specifically, as the speech did not provide further details about these initiatives.

Power cost increases may adversely affect Gold Fields’ results of operations.

Gold Fields’ South Deep mining operation depends upon electrical power generated by the state utility provider, Eskom Limited, or Eskom. See “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Overview—Costs”. Eskom holds a monopoly on power supply in the South African market. In calendar 2009, Eskom applied to the National Energy Regulator of South Africa, or NERSA, for a 35% average tariff increase on each of April 1, 2010, 2011 and 2012, and NERSA granted average increases of 24.8%, 25.8% and 25.9%, respectively. However, in April 2012, Eskom implemented an average tariff increase of 16%. On February 28, 2013, NERSA announced that it had approved an 8% per annum average increase in the electricity tariff over the next 5 year period but within such average increases for the mining and industrial sectors may be greater. Eskom has announced its intention to institute an average annual tariff increase of 8.0% and 9.6% for industrial users, the latter of which will apply to Gold Fields, for the five-year period starting April 1, 2013. Therefore, Gold Fields expects further significant additional increases during the next several years as Eskom embarks on an electricity generation capacity expansion program. Should Gold Fields experience further power tariff increases, its results of operations may be adversely impacted.

In Australia, Gold Fields’ contract for the supply of electricity to both of its Australian operations is due to expire in 2014. Gold Fields is in the process of negotiating a replacement for this contract with parties including the major mining company which presently supplies power under a power purchasing agreement, and also with domestic gas suppliers in Western Australia. Replacement of this supply may entail a significant increase in costs due to the volatile Western Australian gas market. Any such increase in costs could have a material adverse impact on Gold Fields’ business and operating results.

Both Gold Fields Ghana Limited, or Gold Fields Ghana, and Abosso Gold Fields Limited, or Abosso, have concluded tariff negotiations for 2012 and 2013 with their respective power suppliers (the state electricity supplier, the Volta River Authority, or VRA, supplies power to Gold Fields Ghana and the Electricity Company of Ghana, or ECG, provides power to Abosso and the South Heap Leach facility at Gold Fields Ghana), representing a 19% increase on VRA and 15% increase on ECG, respectively from fiscal 2011 to fiscal 2013. The 2013 tariffs will remain unchanged from the 2012 tariffs. The VRA has provided a revised “Power Sales and Purchase Agreement between VRA and Gold Fields Ghana” which is expected to be concluded by June 2013. Gold Fields Ghana has concluded a Transmission Service Agreement with Ghana Grid Company Limited, or GridCo. Until gas supply to the generating units in Ghana is assured, energy prices will correlate with the crude oil price. The Deregulated Mining Companies, or the DMC, are currently in discussions with the VRA regarding a new tariff model from 2014. Discussions with the ECG on behalf of Damang generally depend on the outcome of discussions with the VRA and have not been pursued in light of the status of discussions with the VRA. Tariffs with the ECG are not expected to be more than U.S. cents 2 per kilowatt hour above the VRA tariff. Management expects further tariff increases in the future. Any further increase in the electricity price could have a material adverse effect on the Group’s business and operating results. See “Information on the Company—Description of Mining Business”.

Power stoppages, fluctuations and usage constraints may force Gold Fields to halt or curtail operations.

In 2008, South Africa experienced disruptions in electrical power supply and these disruptions impacted Gold Fields’ operations. The Department of Energy is in the process of developing a power conservation program, including rules regarding baseline adjustments and load growth. However, there can be no assurance that this conservation program will ensure that there is sufficient electricity available for Gold Fields to run its South Deep operation at full capacity or at all. In October 2012, the South African state utility Eskom announced

 

16


Table of Contents

that its forecasted electricity sales for the financial year ending March 31, 2013 would be 2.5% lower than those in the previous financial year, but still warned that it may face constraints on the supply of power until the first units of its new power station come on line by mid-2014. Any disruption or decrease in the electrical power supply available to Gold Fields’ South Deep operation could have a material adverse effect on its business, operating results and financial condition.

Although the VRA has not imposed any power cuts in Ghana since August 2006, frequent power interruptions have occurred in the power supplied by ECG. In August 2012, damage to the West African Gas Pipeline resulted in disruptions to the power supply in Ghana. Since September 2012, Damang has been affected by an evening peak period load shedding by ECG, which is expected to be concluded by the end of April 2013. Further, intermittent low voltage has affected Damang’s operations. Part of the heap leach facilities in Tarkwa, which is also supplied by ECG, have been similarly affected, although stacking at the South Heap Leach facility has now been stopped due to profitability reasons. Gold Fields is in discussions with the VRA and the ECG on how to minimize the impact of power interruptions on its operations.

Should Gold Fields continue to experience power outages, fluctuations or usage constraints at any of its operations, then its business and results of operations may be materially adversely impacted.

Gold Fields may not realize the potential benefits from the Spin-off.

Gold Fields may not realize the potential benefits that it expects from the Spin-off. Gold Fields has described these anticipated benefits elsewhere in this annual report. See “Information on the Company—Strategy.” Moreover, the Spin-off could cause operational, human resources or information technology disturbances. Following the Spin-off, Gold Fields and Sibanye Gold are continuing to provide services to each other as described in a transitional services agreement signed on December 21, 2012, or the Transitional Services Agreement. These services include corporate functions and infrastructure support, purchasing, corporate communications, human resources and benefit management, treasury and finance, investor relations, corporate controller, internal audit, legal and tax advice, compliance regarding internal controls and information technology functions, which will be provided on a transitional basis for a period of up to 12 months. See “Additional Information—Material Contracts—Transitional Services Agreement”. The transition is continuing and may give rise to certain operating issues as the corporate and operational functions of the two companies are separated. In addition, Gold Fields will incur significant costs which may exceed its estimates. Any such issues could have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ business, results of operations and financial condition.

Actual and potential supply chain shortages and increases in the prices of production inputs may have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ operations and profits.

Gold Fields’ results of operations may be affected by the availability and pricing of raw materials and other essential production inputs, including fuel, steel and cyanide and other reagents. The price and quality of raw materials may be substantially affected by changes in global supply and demand, along with weather conditions, governmental controls and other factors. A sustained interruption in the supply of any of these materials would require Gold Fields to find acceptable substitute suppliers and could require it to pay higher prices for such materials. Any significant increase in the prices of these materials will increase the Company’s operating costs and affect production considerations.

Gold Fields’ insurance coverage may prove inadequate to satisfy potential claims.

Gold Fields has an insurance program, however, it may become subject to liability for pollution, occupational illnesses or other hazards against which it has not insured, cannot insure or has insufficiently insured, including those in respect of past mining activities. Gold Fields’ existing property and liability insurance contains exclusions and limitations on coverage. Should Gold Fields suffer a major loss, future earnings could be affected. In addition, insurance may not continue to be available at economically acceptable premiums. As a result, in the future, Gold Fields’ insurance coverage may not cover the extent of claims against Gold Fields, including, but not limited to, claims for environmental or industrial accidents, occupational illnesses or pollution or any cross-claims made.

 

17


Table of Contents

Gold Fields’ financial flexibility could be materially constrained by South African exchange control regulations.

South Africa’s exchange control regulations, or the Exchange Control Regulations, restrict the export of capital from South Africa, the Republic of Namibia, and the Kingdoms of Lesotho and Swaziland, known collectively as the Common Monetary Area, or the CMA. Transactions between South African residents (including companies) and non-residents of the CMA are subject to exchange controls enforced by the South African Reserve Bank, or SARB. As a result, Gold Fields’ ability to raise and deploy capital outside the CMA is restricted. These restrictions could hinder Gold Fields’ financial and strategic flexibility, particularly its ability to fund acquisitions, capital expenditures and exploration projects outside South Africa. See “Information on the Company—Environmental and Regulatory Matters—South Africa—Exchange Controls”.

Gold Fields may suffer material adverse consequences as a result of its reliance on outside contractors to conduct some of its operations.

A portion of Gold Fields’ operations in South Africa, Ghana, Australia and Peru are currently conducted by outside contractors. As a result, Gold Fields’ operations at those sites are subject to a number of risks, some of which are outside Gold Fields’ control, including contract risk, execution risk, litigation risk, regulatory risk and labor risk.

In addition, Gold Fields may incur liability to third parties as a result of the actions of its contractors. The occurrence of one or more of these risks could have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ business, results of operations and financial condition. See “Directors, Senior Management and Employees—Employees—Labor Relations—Australia” and “Directors, Senior Management and Employees—Employees—Labor Relations—Peru”.

Regulation of greenhouse gas emissions and climate change issues may materially adversely affect Gold Fields’ operations.

Energy is a significant input to Gold Fields’ mining and processing operations, with its principal energy sources being electricity, purchased petroleum products, natural gas and coal. There is a substantial weight of scientific evidence concluding that carbon emissions from fossil fuel-based energy consumption contribute to global warming, greenhouse effects and climate change.

A number of governments or governmental bodies, including the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change and the Kyoto Protocol, have introduced or are contemplating regulatory changes in response to the potential impact of climate change. Many of these contemplate restricting emissions of greenhouse gases in jurisdictions in which Gold Fields operates.

In Australia, the Australian Clean Energy Act 2011 (Cth) and associated legislation establishing a national carbon pricing scheme, or Scheme, passed into law in November 2011. While emissions from Gold Fields’ Australian operations are not currently being directly regulated, the price of diesel fuel paid by Gold Fields’ operations did rise due to changes in fuel subsidy levels. Other costs, predominantly electricity, have risen to reflect the flow-through impact of the Scheme on Gold Fields’ suppliers. The overall impact of the Scheme is estimated at A$8 million (U.S.$8 million) per annum on Gold Fields’ Australian operations. See “Information on the Company—Environmental and Regulatory Matters—Australia—Environmental”.

The South African government is considering the introduction of a carbon tax with effect from January 1, 2015 to reduce greenhouse gas emissions. The updated carbon tax policy paper released on May 2, 2013 confirmed that the proposed carbon tax will be R120 per tonne of carbon dioxide equivalent, or CO 2 -e, emitted above certain thresholds. The tax rate will increase by 10% a year, reaching R176 per tonne of CO 2 -e by 2019. However, 60% of emissions would initially be tax exempt. The 60% discount will continue to apply until December 31, 2019, along with certain “offsets” of 5% or 10%, a carbon intensity correction based on industry benchmarks and a correction for international trade exposure of 5% to 10% of tax liability, which together may allow for a cumulative reprieve from tax liability of up to 90%. The 60% discount and the associated tax

 

18


Table of Contents

reprieves will be scaled back gradually from 2020 until 2050 and may be replaced by absolute emissions thresholds thereafter. If the proposed carbon tax had been in effect in fiscal 2012 (as proposed), management estimates this would have introduced an additional cost of R38.0 million (after taking the 60% discount into consideration), R0.5 million at South Deep and R37.5 million at the Sibanye Gold assets. See “Information on the Company—Environmental and Regulatory Matters—South Africa—Environmental.

In addition, a number of other regulatory initiatives are underway in countries in which Gold Fields operates that seek to reduce or limit industrial greenhouse gas emissions. These regulatory initiatives will be either voluntary or mandatory and are likely to impact Gold Fields’ operations directly or by affecting the cost of doing business, for example by increasing the costs of its suppliers or customers. These costs may include, among others, emission measurement and reduction, audit processes and human resource costs. Non-compliance with statutory initiatives may result in monetary liabilities. Insurance premiums may increase and the Company’s position relative to industry competitors may change. Inconsistency of regulations particularly between developed and developing countries may affect Gold Fields’ decision to pursue opportunities in certain countries and also may affect its costs of operations. Assessments of the potential impact of future climate change regulation are uncertain, given the wide scope of potential regulatory change in countries in which Gold Fields operates.

Furthermore, the potential physical impacts of climate change on Gold Fields’ operations are highly uncertain and may differ across geographies. They may include changes in rainfall patterns and intensities, water shortages, extreme weather conditions and changing temperatures. Flooding could disrupt mining, processing and transportation, and result in increased health and safety risks. Reduced rainfall could result in electricity supply shortages in certain countries where Gold Fields operates and extreme weather conditions may negatively impact Gold Fields’ workforce. These effects may adversely impact the cost, production and financial performance of Gold Fields’ operations.

Theft of gold and copper bearing materials and production inputs, as well as illegal and artisanal mining, occur on some of Gold Fields’ properties, are difficult to control, can disrupt Gold Fields’ business and can expose Gold Fields to liability.

A number of Gold Fields’ properties have experienced illegal and artisanal mining activities and theft of gold and copper bearing materials and copper cables (which may be by employees or third parties). The activities of the illegal miners could cause pollution or other damage to Gold Fields’ properties, including underground fires, or personal injury or death, for which Gold Fields could potentially be held responsible. An increase in illegal or artisanal mining activities could result in depletion of mineral deposits, potentially making the future mining of such deposits uneconomic. The presence of illegal miners could lead to project delays and disputes regarding the development or operation of commercial gold deposits, particularly in Ghana where illegal mining activities could lead to the discharge of contaminants into water sources in a manner inconsistent with Gold Fields’ environmental obligations. Gold Fields has developed a high-level strategy to deal with the illegal miners problem and is engaging with businesses and the government regarding this problem. The Government of Ghana has encouraged a clamping down on illegal mining. However, an increase in the theft of gold and copper bearing materials or any inputs required for the production of gold and copper may reduce the amount of these metals that Gold Fields is able to recover from its operations. Rising gold and copper prices may increase the likelihood of such thefts occurring. Illegal mining and theft could also result in lost gold reserves and mine stoppages, cause Gold Fields to incur fines or other costs and have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ financial condition or results of operations.

HIV/AIDS, tuberculosis and other contagious diseases pose risks to Gold Fields in terms of lost productivity and increased costs.

The prevalence of HIV/AIDS in South Africa poses risks to Gold Fields in terms of potentially reduced productivity and increased medical and other costs. Management has recently estimated that approximately

 

19


Table of Contents

17.1% of Gold Fields’ workforce at its remaining South African operation at South Deep is infected with HIV. Increasingly, Gold Fields is seeing an adverse impact of HIV/AIDS on its affected employees similar to that experienced by other companies in the South African mining sector, evidenced by increased absenteeism and reduced productivity. Compounding this are the concomitant infections, such as tuberculosis, that can accompany HIV illness, particularly at the end stages, and cause additional healthcare-related costs. In South Africa, the incidence of tuberculosis in mine workers is aggravated by exposure to crystalline silica dust and by compromised immunity due to HIV infection. HIV/AIDS remains an important focus for Gold Fields and the Group will continue its extensive intervention campaigns. However, the potential impact of HIV/AIDS on Gold Fields’ South Deep operation and financial condition is significant. Factors influencing the impact of HIV/AIDS include the incidence of HIV infection among Gold Fields’ employees and the surrounding community, the impact on employees’ productivity, treatment costs and other costs. Most of these factors are beyond Gold Fields’ control. See “Directors, Senior Management and Employees—Employees—Health and Safety—Health—HIV/AIDS Program”.

Additionally, the spread of contagious diseases such as respiratory diseases, including seasonal flu and latent epidemics like avian, swine flu and severe acute respiratory syndrome, are exacerbated by communal housing and close quarters. Although Gold Fields is in the process of creating improved housing facilities at its mines, the spread of such diseases could impact employees’ productivity, treatment costs and, therefore, operational costs.

Gold Fields’ operations are subject to environmental and health and safety regulations, which could impose significant costs and burdens and Gold Fields may face claims and liability for breaches, or alleged breaches, of such regulations and other applicable laws.

Gold Fields’ operations are subject to various environmental laws and regulations in the jurisdictions in which they operate including, for example, those relating to waste treatment and disposal, emissions and water management. Further, Gold Fields must comply with permits or standards governing, among other things, land rehabilitation, tailings dams and waste disposal areas, water consumption, air emissions, water discharges, naturally occurring radioactive material, transportation of ore or hazardous substances, power use and generation, use and storage of explosives, housing and other facilities for workers, reclamation, labor standards and mine safety and occupational health.

In several of the countries in which Gold Fields operates, the environmental protection laws require, among other things, that Gold Fields register with the environmental authorities and obtain environmental permits and certificates for its operations, as well as rehabilitate land disturbed by mining operations. In several jurisdictions, such as Ghana and Australia, Gold Fields is required to secure estimated environmental rehabilitation costs in part by posting a reclamation bond. In South Africa, similar security is required in the form of financial provision for rehabilitation of a mine during and particularly after the mine has been closed in terms of the Mineral and Petroleum Resources Development Act No. 28 of 2002, or the MPRDA.

Moreover, in Peru, recent legislation now requires the government to consult with indigenous or tribal communities on any legislative or administrative measures that may directly affect their collective rights.

In Western Australia, proposed new mining rehabilitation fund legislation, the Mining Rehabilitation Fund Act 2012 (WA), was assented to on November 5, 2012. The legislation will be implemented from July 1, 2013. Upon implementation, most holders of mining tenements granted pursuant to the Mining Act 1978 (Western Australia), or the Mining Act, will be required to pay a levy into the fund. The levy will consist of an annual fund contribution, calculated as a percentage (likely initially to be 1% of each tenement’s closure liability estimate). The closure liability estimate for a tenement will be assessed in accordance with a per-hectare levy calculator which is currently being developed. The proposed legislation does not make any changes to the Mining Act of 1978, and environmental security bonds can still be applied to any Mining Act of 1978 tenements in accordance with that act. If the proposed legislation passes, the associated levy will create additional costs for Gold Fields.

 

20


Table of Contents

Gold Fields may in the future incur significant costs to comply with such environmental requirements imposed under existing or new legislation, regulations or permit requirements or to comply with changes in existing laws and regulations or the manner in which they are applied. Gold Fields may also be subject to litigation and other costs as a result of environmental rights granted to individuals under national constitutions or other sources of environmental rights. These costs could have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ business, results of operations and financial condition. See “Information on the Company—Environmental and Regulatory Matters”.

In each of the jurisdictions in which it operates, Gold Fields is also subject to various health and safety laws and regulations that impose various duties on Gold Fields’ mines while granting the authorities broad powers to, among other things, close or suspend operations at unsafe mines and order corrective action relating to health and safety matters. Under these health and safety laws and regulations, the Group may also be subject to prosecution for industrial accidents as well as significant penalties and fines for non-compliance. Any changes to the health and safety laws which increase the burden of compliance or the penalties for non-compliance may cause Gold Fields to incur further significant costs. See “Information on the Company—Environmental and Regulatory Matters.”

In South Africa, certain targets were set by the Mine Health and Safety Council, or the MHSC, a body consisting of representatives from the government, mining companies and unions, for the reduction of accidents, noise and silicosis to be achieved by 2013. If a mine fails to achieve these targets, or it is found to be in excess of noise or silicosis limits generally, the Mine Health and Safety Inspectorate, or the MHSI, could potentially order that operations be halted at any time due to overexposure of employees to unsafe or unhealthy working conditions. Gold Fields expects that the MHSC targets related to the reduction of accidents, noise and silicosis will be revised to tighten these standards over the next several years.

The principal health risks associated with Gold Fields’ mining operations in South Africa arise from occupational exposure and community environmental exposure to silica dust, noise and certain hazardous substances, including toxic gases and radioactive particulates. The most significant occupational diseases affecting Gold Fields’ workforce include lung diseases (such as silicosis, tuberculosis, a combination of the two and chronic obstructive airways disease, or COAD) as well as noise-induced hearing loss, or NIHL. The Occupational Diseases in Mines and Works Act 78 of 1973, or ODMWA, governs the payment of compensation and medical costs for certain illnesses, such as silicosis, contracted by those employed in mines or at sites where activities ancillary to mining are conducted. Recently, the South African Constitutional Court ruled that a claim for compensation under ODMWA does not prevent the employee from seeking to recover compensation from the employer concerned in a civil action under common law (either as individuals or as a class). While issues, such as negligence and causation, need to be proved on a case by case basis, it is nevertheless possible that such ruling could expose Gold Fields to claims related to occupational hazards and diseases (including silicosis or other ailments alleged to arise due to exposure to hazardous materials and substances), which may be in the form of a class action or similar group action. Although risks associated with alleged occupational exposure are likely to be greater, such actions may also arise in connection with the alleged incidence of such diseases in communities proximate to Gold Fields’ mines.

In the second half of 2012, two suits were filed against several South African mining companies, including Gold Fields, on behalf of current and former gold mine workers and the dependants of gold mine workers who have contracted or died from silicosis or other occupational lung diseases.

If a significant number of such claims were suitably established against it, the payment of compensation for the claims could have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ business, reputation, results of operations and financial condition. In addition, Gold Fields may incur significant additional costs arising out of these issues, including costs relating to the payment of fees, increased levies or other contributions in respect of compensatory or other funds established (if any) and expenditures arising out of its efforts to remediate these matters or to resolve any outstanding claims or other potential action. Further, we expect that the levels of statutory compensation payable to individuals may be increased over the next several years.

 

21


Table of Contents

Gold Fields monitors health and safety issues in the jurisdictions in which it operates. One issue that has arisen in the context of the United States is diesel particulate matter, or DPM. While regulations and litigation regarding DPM have not occurred in the jurisdictions where Gold Fields operates, there is a risk that these issues may arise in the future. Therefore, Gold Fields is unable to estimate any costs relating to new regulations or potential litigation around this issue, however, any such regulations or litigation could have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ business, operating results and financial condition.

A number of accidents, many of which resulted in fatalities, have recently occurred at various mining operations in South Africa, including at some of Gold Fields’ operations. For example, on June 30, 2012, Gold Fields’ former KDC mine was closed when there were five fatalities following a fire at its No. 4 (West), or Ya Rona, mine shaft. KDC East reopened on July 3, 2012 and KDC West reopened on July 9, 2012. The fire in the affected shaft was extinguished on August 14, 2012; however, this shaft remained closed subject to a Section 54 order issued by the Department of Mineral Resources, or the DMR, and reopened on October 17, 2012, although production did not recommence at that time due to the labor actions described above. See “—Gold Fields’ operations and profits have been and may be adversely affected by union activity and new and existing labor laws”. A Section 54 order suspends mining operations at an operating section following a safety incident or accident. Prior to the Spin-off, Gold Fields launched an internal investigation into the fire at KDC in order to better understand the cause of this accident. South Africa’s deputy Mineral Resources Minister has stated that the ministry may increase sanctions, including closures, for mines in which fatalities occur because of violations of health and safety rules. As occurred in June, the DMR can and does issue, in the ordinary course of its operations, instructions, including Section 54 orders, following safety incidents or accidents to partially or completely halt operations at affected mines. It is Gold Fields’ policy to halt production at its operations when serious accidents occur in order to rectify dangerous situations and, if necessary, retrain workers. In addition, there can be no assurance that the unions will not take industrial action in response to such accidents which could lead to losses in Gold Fields’ production. Any additional stoppages in production, or increased costs associated with such incidents, could have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ business, operating results and financial condition. Such incidents may also negatively affect Gold Fields’ reputation with, among others, employees and unions, South African regulators and regulators in other jurisdictions in which Gold Fields operates.

In April 2009, the Mine Health and Safety Amendment Act no.74 of 2008, or the Mine Health and Safety Amendment Act, became law, resulting in more stringent regulations regarding mine health and safety, to which Gold Fields is subject. Additionally, Gold Fields may be subject to an increased risk of prosecution for industrial accidents as well as greater penalties, including mine closure, and fines for non-compliance.

In Ghana, statutory workers’ compensation is not the exclusive means for workers to claim compensation, as claims may be made under common law torts. Gold Fields’ insurance for health and safety claims or the relevant workers’ compensation arrangements may not be adequate to meet the costs that may arise upon any future health and safety claims.

Further, any changes to the health and safety laws which increase the burden of compliance or the penalties for non-compliance may cause Gold Fields to incur further significant costs. See “Information on the Company—Environmental and Regulatory Matters—Health and Safety”.

Gold Fields’ operations are subject to water use licenses, which could impose significant costs and burdens.

Under South African law, Gold Fields’ South African operations are subject to water use licenses that govern each operation’s water usage and that require, among other things, mining operations to achieve and maintain certain water quality limits regarding all water discharges. The Kloof operation (part of the KDC operation) was issued a water use license in December 2008 that expired in December 2011. The Group has applied for renewal of, and amendments to, this license. Pending approval of the Kloof water use license, Gold Fields obtained a regulatory directive, or the Kloof Directive, from the Department of Water Affairs, or the DWA, that permits the continuation of water uses at its Kloof operations while its application for renewal of, and

 

22


Table of Contents

amendments to, its water use license was being processed. Prior to February 2011, the Kloof operation had been in compliance with the license granted to it in 2008. However, from February 2011 to September 2011, the water discharged from one of the shafts of the KDC operation covered by the Kloof license exceeded the discharge parameters specified by the license. Gold Fields informed the DWA and other relevant regulators and has investigated the cause of the increased discharge. One of the key findings of the investigation was that the increased discharge was most likely due to external variables beyond the control of the KDC operation. Based on this information, the Kloof Directive included an increase to the discharge limits of that specific discharge point. As of December 9, 2011, the date of issue of the Kloof Directive, the water discharged from the shaft covered by the Kloof water use license has been in compliance with the discharge parameters specified in the directive. Monitoring of the discharge quality is ongoing. However, there can be no assurance that the water discharge from the KDC operation will remain within these discharge parameters, that the renewed Kloof license will be granted or that it will be granted with the increased discharge limit provided by the Directive. The Driefontein operation (now part of the KDC operation) was also issued a water use license in October 2010. However, due to certain inaccuracies and discrepancies in the information provided for the water use license, Gold Fields has remained in discussions with the DWA to revise the license. While there was a delay in processing the water use license application at South Deep, which was submitted within the applicable time limits, Gold Fields was issued a new water use license for South Deep in December 2011. Gold Fields has made an application for rectification and amendment of this water use license to the DWA as well.

The DWA has advised Beatrix, which had pre-existing water permits of indefinite length, that its current water usage remains authorized and it need not apply for a new license. However, Beatrix has nevertheless proactively submitted a water use license application which is currently being processed. Therefore, management believes that the South African operations now have all required authorizations to undertake regulated water uses for purposes of carrying out its mining operations.

Gold Fields is investigating a water treatment strategy in an effort to satisfy the conditions of new water use licenses and prevent potential acid mine drainage, or AMD, issues across its South African operations. However, there can be no assurance that Gold Fields will be in compliance with its licensing agreements within the required timeframe due primarily to the associated regulatory approval processes and commercial agreements that are required for the water treatment strategy. Gold Fields expects to incur significant expenditure to achieve and maintain compliance with the license requirements at each of its South African operations.

In Ghana, environmental regulations also impose water treatment and discharge conditions on a mine owner. Gold Fields is required to comply with these regulations under its permits and licenses and any failure to do so could result in the curtailment or halting of production at the affected locations. On July 16, 2012, the operation of all heap leach facilities at Tarkwa was suspended after Gold Fields Ghana received a directive from the Environmental Protection Agency of Ghana, or the Ghanaian EPA, and the Ministry of Environment, Science and Technology to stop discharging water from these facilities and treat all water discharges through a water treatment plant to reduce conductivity levels to prescribed levels. In accordance with environmental best practice and in compliance with the Ghanaian EPA directive Gold Fields has commissioned the construction of two water treatment plants at its North and South Heap Leach facilities. On August 9, 2012, Gold Fields received permission from the Ghanaian EPA to reopen the heap leach facilities while the water treatment plants were being built. The North Heap Leach water treatment plant was operational on January 1, 2013 with increased capacity expected by the third quarter of 2013. The South Heap Leach water treatment plant is expected to come into operation during the second quarter of 2013. Certain weather patterns, including those associated with the rainy season in Ghana, when combined with the operation of the mine will increase the risk that the heap leach facilities discharge water in excess of the prescribed conductivity levels. Gold Fields has engaged in discussions with the Ghanaian EPA regarding these issues. However, if Gold Fields does not comply with applicable water treatment and discharge conditions, it could be subject to fines, mine closures, production curtailment or it could incur additional operating costs, and any such events could have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ business, production and results of operations.

 

23


Table of Contents

Any failure on Gold Fields’ part to achieve or maintain compliance with the requirements of its licenses with respect to any of its operations could result in Gold Fields being subject to substantial claims, penalties, fees and expenses; significant delays in operations; or the loss of the relevant water use license, which could curtail or halt production at the affected operation. Any of the above could have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ business, operating results and financial condition.

Gold Fields has experienced and may experience further acid mine drainage related pollution, which may compromise its ability to comply with its water use licenses.

Gold Fields has identified incidences of AMD, and the risk of potential short-term and long-term AMD issues, specifically at its Cerro Corona mine, its South Deep mine and, at currently immaterial levels, its Damang mine. AMD relates to the acidification and contamination of naturally occurring water resources by pyrite-bearing ore contained in underground mines and in rock dumps, tailings dams and pits on the surface. Gold Fields has commissioned several technical studies to identify the steps required to prevent or mitigate AMD at its facilities but none of these studies have allowed Gold Fields to generate a reliable estimate of the potential impact of AMD on the Company.

As part of Cerro Corona’s mine closure plan review, Gold Fields recently concluded a set of studies that were required by the Ministry of Energy and Mines, or MEM, to analyze post-closure water treatment requirements. The conclusion of these studies was that Cerro Corona will require post-closure water treatment, which represents a change with respect to Cerro Corona’s previous closure plan. Gold Fields is in the process of conferring with the MEM regarding its post-closure plans and cannot provide a precise estimate of the cost impact of these water treatment requirements at this stage. While the cost of these water treatment requirements is not expected to be material, future costs of compliance could have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ business, operating results and financial condition.

At South Deep, the old tailings are currently acid generating and acid base accounting, or ABA, and leachate testing have indicated that other material at the mine has the potential to be acid generating. While the majority of contaminated water emanating from the tailings is captured by collection trenches and return water dams, shallow seepage (off the underlying shale) of low pH water generated by the tailings and periodic overflows of the return dams occur into the surrounding watercourse and shallow groundwater. Gold Fields has informed the relevant regulators of these incidents and has put in place a number of measures agreed with the regulator. Gold Fields is also developing water and waste management strategies in an effort to, among other things, prevent or mitigate AMD issues at South Deep in the short, medium and long term. However there can be no assurance that Gold Fields will be successful in preventing or mitigating any current or potential AMD issues.

The existence of AMD issues at any of Gold Fields operations could cause it to fail to comply with its water use license requirements and could expose Gold Fields to fines, mine closures, production curtailment, additional operating costs and other liabilities, any of which could have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ business, production and results of operations.

Gold Fields’ mineral rights are subject to legislation, which could impose significant costs and burdens.

Gold Fields’ right to own and exploit mineral reserves and deposits is governed by the laws and regulations of the jurisdictions in which the mineral properties are located. Currently, a significant portion of Gold Fields’ reserves and deposits are located in countries where mining rights could be suspended or canceled should it breach its obligations in respect of the acquisition and exploitation of these rights.

In all of the countries where Gold Fields operates, the formulation or implementation of governmental policies on certain issues may be unpredictable. This may include changes in laws relating to mineral rights and ownership of mining assets and the right to prospect and mine, and, in extreme cases, nationalization, expropriation or nullification of existing concessions, licenses, permits agreements and contracts.

 

24


Table of Contents

For example, in South Africa, the MPRDA, together with the implementation of a broad-based socio-economic empowerment charter (amended with effect from September 13, 2010), or the Amended Mining Charter, effects entry of historically disadvantaged South Africans, or HDSAs, into the mining industry. Among other things, the Amended Mining Charter required each mining company to achieve a minimum of 26% HDSA ownership of mining assets by 2014, as well as requiring numerous other social and economic commitments from each mining company. There is uncertainty relating to the enforceability of the Amended Mining Charter’s requirement for mining entities to achieve a 26% HDSA ownership of mining assets by 2014. See “Information on the Company—Environmental and Regulatory Matters—South Africa—Mineral Rights—The MPRDA”.

Failure by the Group’s South Deep operation to comply with the 26% HDSA ownership requirements as set out in the MPRDA and the Amended Mining Charter, or other provisions of the Amended Mining Charter, may amount to breach of the MPRDA and may result in the cancellation or suspension of the company’s existing mining rights and may prevent the Group from obtaining any new mining rights in South Africa.

In December 2012, a draft Mineral and Petroleum Resources and Development Bill, 2012, or MPRDB, was published for comment, with the stated purpose of, among other things, removing ambiguities and enhancing sanctions. However, the MPRDB has been criticized for introducing new and burdensome regulations relating to, among other things, the upstream beneficiation of minerals, the status of tailings created prior to the commencement of the MPRDA, closure certificates, restricting the transfer of shares in listed and unlisted mining companies and retaining undue regulatory discretion over the conditions for, and issuance of, prospecting, mining and other rights. The MPRDB also seeks to significantly increase the penalties that may be imposed for, among other things, non-compliance with the MPRDA, other relevant law, the terms and conditions of a right or a social and labor plan. While it is anticipated that the MPRDB may undergo various amendments before it becomes law, the passage of the MPRDB may subject companies in the mining industry, like Gold Fields, to more stringent regulation in the future.

In accordance with the MPRDA, the DMR on April 29, 2009 published a Code of Good Practice for the Minerals Industry and the Housing and Living Condition Standard for the Mining Industry, or the Code, relating to the socio-economic transformation of the mining industry. However, certain provisions of the Code appeared to be inconsistent with the Mining Charter, or to go beyond the scope envisaged in the MPRDA. Various industry participants have been in discussions with the DMR regarding the scope and applicability of the Code. It is anticipated that the contents of the Code will ultimately be amended to be made consistent with the Amended Mining Charter. Details of when this will happen and the contents of the final Code are currently uncertain. See “Information on the Company—Environmental and Regulatory Matters—South Africa—Mineral Rights—The MPRDA”.

The Broad-Based Black Economic Empowerment Act, No. 53, 2003, or the BBBEE Act, established a national policy on broad-based black economic empowerment, or BBBEE, with the objective of increasing the participation of HDSAs in the economy. The BBBEE Act provides for various measures to promote black economic empowerment, including empowering the Minister of Trade and Industry to issue the BBBEE Codes with which organs of state and public entities and parties interacting with them or obtaining rights and licenses from them would be required to comply. There has been some debate as to whether or to what extent the mining industry was subject to the BBBEE Act and the policies and codes provided for thereunder. On November 23, 2012, the Broad-Based Black Economic Empowerment Amendment Bill, or the BBBEE Amendment Bill was published in the Government Gazette. The BBBEE Amendment Bill has the effect of expanding and strengthening the black economic empowerment provisions of the BBBEE Act. It was expected that the draft bill would have clarified the extent, if any, of the application of the BBBEE Act to the mining industry, but such clarification has not been provided for in the draft bill. While it is anticipated that the draft bill will undergo various amendments before it becomes law, it should be appreciated that a risk exists that the companies in the mining industry may become subject to more stringent black economic empowerment regulation.

There is no guarantee that any steps Gold Fields has already taken or might take in the future will ensure the successful renewal of its existing mining rights, the retaining of new mining rights, the granting of further new mining rights or that the terms of renewals of its rights would not be significantly less favorable to Gold Fields

 

25


Table of Contents

than the terms of its current rights. Any further adjustment to the ownership structure of Gold Fields’ South African mining assets in order to meet the MPRDA’s BEE requirements or the Amended Mining Charter’s requirements could have a material adverse effect on the value of Gold Fields’ ordinary shares or debt and failing to comply with the MPRDA’s BEE requirements or the Amended Mining Charter’s requirements could subject Gold Fields to negative consequences, the scope of which have not yet been fully determined but which may include, among other things, the loss of one or more mining rights. As noted, the ANC adopted a policy conference recommendation which, among other things, proposes greater state intervention in the mining industry.

Gold Fields may, in the future, incur significant costs as a result of changes in the interpretation of existing laws, or the imposition of new laws, which may have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ business, operating results and financial condition.

Some of Gold Fields’ tenements in Australia are subject to native title claims and include Aboriginal heritage sites, which could impose significant costs and burdens.

Certain of Gold Fields’ tenements are subject to native current title claims, and other tenements may become the subject of native title claims if Gold Fields seeks to expand or otherwise change its interest in rights to those tenements. There are also a number of recognized Aboriginal cultural heritage sites located on certain of Gold Fields’ tenements.

Native title and Aboriginal cultural heritage legislation protects the claims and determined rights of Aboriginal people in relation to the land and waters throughout Australia in certain circumstances. Native title claims could require costly negotiations with the registered claimants and could have implications for Gold Fields’ access to or use of its tenements; and, as a result, have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ business, operating results and financial condition. Similarly, there are risks that if Aboriginal cultural heritage sites are damaged or materially altered as a result of current or future operations, that Gold Fields could be subject to criminal and/or civil penalties under relevant legislation. See “Information on the Company—Environmental and Regulatory Matters—Australia—Land Claims”.

See “Information on the Company— Environmental and Regulatory Matters—Peru—Mining Royalty and Other Special Mining Taxes and Charges” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Costs—Income and Mining Taxes—Peru”.

The acquisition of Western Areas, BGSA and South Deep may expose Gold Fields to unknown liabilities and risks.

Prior to acquiring a 100% interest in South Deep in 2007 from GFI Joint Venture Holdings Proprietary Limited (previously known as Barrick Gold South Africa (Pty) Limited, or BGSA), a subsidiary of Barrick Gold Corporation, or Barrick, and GFO (previously known as Western Areas Limited, or Western Areas), Gold Fields was able to conduct only limited due diligence on South Deep, Western Areas and BGSA. There can be no assurance that Gold Fields identified all the liabilities of, and risks associated with, South Deep, BGSA or Western Areas prior to acquiring them or that it will not be subject to unknown liabilities of, and risks associated with, South Deep, Western Areas or BGSA, including liabilities and risks that may become evident only after Gold Fields has been involved in the operational management of South Deep for a longer period of time. On August 21, 2008, Western Areas received a summons from Randgold and Exploration Company Limited, or R&E, and African Strategic Investment (Holdings) Limited. The summons claims that, under prior ownership, Western Areas was part of a fraud whereby JCI Limited unlawfully disposed of shares owned by R&E in Randgold Resources Limited and Afrikander Lease Limited, now known as Uranium One. The action is still current. See “Information on the Company—Legal Proceedings and Investigations”.

 

26


Table of Contents

Gold Fields relies on information technology and communications systems, the failure of which could significantly impact its operations and business

Gold Fields relies on its information technology and communications systems, in particular its SAP, payroll and time and attendance applications. Gold Fields’ information technology and communications systems could be exposed to, among other things, damage or interruption from telecommunications failure, unauthorized entry and malicious computer code, fire, natural disaster, power loss, industrial action and human error. While Gold Fields has offsite backup systems in place, the occurrence of any of the above may also disrupt Gold Fields’ information technology and communications systems and may lead to important data (including the geophysical and geological data) being irretrievably lost or damaged. Such damage or interruption may adversely affect Gold Fields’ business, prospects and results of operations.

Gold Fields’ results of operations may be adversely impacted if it becomes obligated to make payments under certain guarantees it has provided on notes issued by Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited.

On September 30, 2010, Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited, or Orogen, announced the issue of $1,000,000,000 4.875% guaranteed notes due October 7, 2020, or the Notes, issued on October 7, 2010. The payment of all amounts due in respect of the Notes was unconditionally and irrevocably guaranteed by Gold Fields, Sibanye Gold, Gold Fields Operations Limited, or GFO, and Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited, or GFH, or, together, the Guarantors, on a joint and several basis. The Notes and guarantees constitute direct, unsubordinated and (subject to the negative pledge provisions related to further capital market indebtedness) unsecured obligations of Orogen and the Guarantors, respectively, and rank equally with all other existing and future unsubordinated and unsecured obligations from time to time outstanding of Orogen and the Guarantors, respectively.

Each of Gold Fields and the other Guarantors have entered into an indemnity agreement, or the Indemnity Agreement, in favor of Sibanye Gold in order to indemnify Sibanye Gold against any loss caused to Sibanye Gold in circumstances where Sibanye Gold is required to make a payment to noteholders or the trustee of the Notes by virtue of its guarantee of the Notes. If Gold Fields or the other Guarantors were to become obligated to indemnify Sibanye Gold, it could have a material adverse effect on Gold Field’s business, financial condition and results of operations.

Further, market conditions may negatively impact Gold Fields’ ability to obtain financing for amounts it becomes required to pay under its obligations as guarantor, as well as the rate of interest required to finance these amounts.

Shareholders outside South Africa may not be able to participate in future issues of securities (including ordinary shares) carried out by or on behalf of Gold Fields.

Securities laws of certain jurisdictions may restrict Gold Fields’ ability to allow participation by certain shareholders in future issues of securities (including ordinary shares) carried out by or on behalf of Gold Fields. In particular, holders of Gold Fields securities who are located in the United States (including those who hold ordinary shares or ADSs) may not be able to participate in securities offerings by or on behalf of Gold Fields unless a registration statement under the Securities Act is effective with respect to such securities or an exemption from the registration requirements of the Securities Act is available thereunder.

Securities laws of certain other jurisdictions may also restrict Gold Fields’ ability to allow the participation of all holders in such jurisdictions in future issues of securities carried out by Gold Fields. Holders who have a registered address or are resident in, or who are citizens of, countries other than South Africa should consult their professional advisors as to whether they require any governmental or other consents or approvals or need to observe any other formalities to enable them to participate in any offering of Gold Fields securities.

 

27


Table of Contents

Investors in the United States and other jurisdictions outside South Africa may have difficulty bringing actions, and enforcing judgments, against Gold Fields, its directors and its executive officers based on the civil liabilities provisions of the federal securities laws or other laws of the United States or any state thereof or under the laws of other jurisdictions outside South Africa.

Gold Fields is incorporated in South Africa. All of Gold Fields’ directors and executive officers (as well as Gold Fields’ independent registered public accounting firm) reside outside of the United States. Substantially all of the assets of these persons and substantially all of the assets of Gold Fields are located outside the United States. As a result, it may not be possible for investors to enforce against these persons or Gold Fields a judgment obtained in a United States court predicated upon the civil liability provisions of the federal securities or other laws of the United States or any state thereof. In addition, investors in other jurisdictions outside South Africa may face similar difficulties.

Investors should be aware that it is the policy of South African courts to award compensation for the loss or damage actually sustained by the person to whom the compensation is awarded. Although the award of punitive damages is generally unknown to the South African legal system, it does not mean that such awards are necessarily contrary to public policy. Whether a judgment is contrary to public policy depends on the facts of each case. Exorbitant, unconscionable or excessive awards will generally be contrary to public policy. South African courts cannot enter into the merits of a foreign judgment and cannot act as a court of appeal or review over the foreign court. South African courts will usually implement their own procedural laws and, where an action based on an international contract is brought before a South African court, the capacity of the parties to the contract will usually be determined in accordance with South African law. It is doubtful whether an original action based on United States federal securities laws or the laws of other jurisdictions outside South Africa may be brought before South African courts. Further, a plaintiff who is not resident in South Africa may be required to provide security for costs in the event of proceedings being initiated in South Africa. In addition, the Rules of the High Court of South Africa require that documents executed outside South Africa must be authenticated for the purpose of use in South Africa.

Investors should also be aware that a foreign judgment is not directly enforceable in South Africa, but constitutes a cause of action which will be enforced by South African courts provided that:

 

   

the court which pronounced the judgment had jurisdiction to entertain the case according to the principles recognized by South African law with reference to the jurisdiction of foreign courts;

 

   

the judgment is final and conclusive (that is, it cannot be altered by the court which pronounced it);

 

   

the judgment has not lapsed;

 

   

the recognition and enforcement of the judgment by South African courts would not be contrary to public policy, including observance of the rules of natural justice which require that the documents initiating the proceedings outside South Africa were properly served on the defendant and that the defendant was given the right to be heard and represented by counsel in a free and fair trial before an impartial tribunal;

 

   

the judgment was not obtained by fraudulent means;

 

   

the judgment does not involve the enforcement of a penal or revenue law; and

 

   

the enforcement of the judgment is not otherwise precluded by the provisions of the Protection of Businesses Act, No. 99 of 1978, as amended, of the Republic of South Africa.

Investors may face liquidity risk in trading Gold Fields’ ordinary shares on the JSE Limited.

Historically, trading volumes and liquidity of shares listed on the JSE have been low in comparison with other major markets. The ability of a holder to sell a substantial number of Gold Fields’ ordinary shares on the JSE in a timely manner, especially in a large block trade, may be restricted by this limited liquidity. See “The Offer and Listing—JSE Limited”.

 

28


Table of Contents

Gold Fields may not pay dividends or make similar payments to its shareholders in the future and any dividend payment may be subject to withholding tax.

Gold Fields pays cash dividends only if funds are available for that purpose. Whether funds are available depends on a variety of factors, including the amount of cash available and Gold Fields’ capital expenditures (on both existing infrastructure as well as on exploration and other projects) and other cash requirements existing at the time. Under South African law, Gold Fields will be entitled to pay a dividend or similar payment to its shareholders only if it meets the solvency and liquidity tests set out in the Companies Act No. 71 of 2008, or the Companies Act, and Gold Fields’ Memorandum of Incorporation. Given these factors (including the capital and investment needs of the business) and the Board of Directors’ discretion to declare a dividend (including the amount and timing thereof), cash dividends or other similar payments may not be paid in the future. It should be noted that a 15% withholding tax on dividends declared by South African resident companies to non-resident shareholders or non-resident ADS holders was introduced with effect from April 1, 2012. See “Additional Information—Taxation—Certain South African Tax Considerations—Withholding Tax on Dividends”.

Gold Fields’ non-South African shareholders face additional investment risk from currency exchange rate fluctuations since any dividends will be paid in Rand.

Dividends or distributions with respect to Gold Fields’ ordinary shares have historically been paid in Rand. The U.S. dollar or other currency equivalent of future dividends or distributions with respect to Gold Fields’ ordinary shares, if any, will be adversely affected by potential future reductions in the value of the Rand against the U.S. dollar or other currencies. In the future, it is possible that there will be changes in South African Exchange Control Regulations, such that dividends paid out of trading profits will not be freely transferable outside South Africa to shareholders who are not residents of the Common Monetary Area. See “Additional Information—South African Exchange Control Limitations Affecting Security Holders”.

Gold Fields’ ordinary shares are subject to dilution upon the exercise of Gold Fields’ outstanding share options.

As of December 31, 2012, Gold Fields had an aggregate of 1,000,000,000 ordinary shares authorized to be issued and as of that date an aggregate of 731,588,614 ordinary shares were issued, listed and outstanding. Gold Fields currently has two securities option plans which are authorized to grant options in an amount of up to an aggregate of 35,309,563 ordinary shares. As of December 31, 2012, 14,447,471 shares we are allocated and outstanding under these plans. After the Spin-off, as of May 9, 2013, 14,575,791 shares are allocated and outstanding under these plans. See “Directors, Senior Management and Employees—The GF Management Incentive Scheme,” “Directors, Senior Management and Employees—The Gold Fields Limited 2005 Share Plan,” and “Directors, Senior Management and Employees—The Gold Fields Limited 2005 Non-Executive Share Plan”. Shareholders’ equity interests in Gold Fields will be diluted to the extent of future exercises or settlements of these rights and any additional rights. Gold Fields shares are also subject to dilution in the event that the Board is required to issue new shares in compliance with BBBEE legislation.

 

29


Table of Contents

ITEM 4: INFORMATION ON THE COMPANY

Introduction

Gold Fields is a significant producer of gold and a major holder of gold reserves in South Africa, Ghana, Australia and Peru. In Peru, Gold Fields also produces copper. Gold Fields is primarily involved in underground and surface gold and copper mining and related activities, including exploration, extraction, processing and smelting. Gold Fields also has an interest in a platinum group metal (and associated by-product metals) exploration project in Finland.

On the Spin-off date, Gold Fields completed the Spin-off. The Spin-off was achieved by way of Gold Fields making a distribution on a pro rata basis of one Sibanye Gold ordinary share for every one Gold Fields share (whether held in the form of shares, ADRs or international depositary receipts) to Gold Fields shareholders, registered as such in Gold Fields’ register at close of business on February 15, 2013 in terms of section 46 of the South African Companies Act and section 46 of the South African Income Tax Act. The board of directors of Gold Fields passed the resolution necessary to implement the Spin-off on December 12, 2012. Sibanye Gold shares listed on the JSE, and on the NYSE on February 11, 2013. As of the Spin-off date, Gold Fields and Sibanye Gold were independent, publicly traded companies with separate public ownership, boards of directors and management.

Prior to the Spin-off, approximately half of Gold Fields’ operations, based on gold production, were located in South Africa. After the Spin-off, Gold Fields expects that its South African, Ghanaian, Australian and Peruvian operations will produce 16%, 42%, 28% and 14% of its total gold production in 2013, respectively. Gold Fields’ remaining South African operation is South Deep. Gold Fields also owns the St. Ives and Agnew gold mining operations in Australia and has a 90.0% interest in each of the Tarkwa gold mine and the Damang gold mine in Ghana. Gold Fields also owns a 98.5% economic interest in the Cerro Corona mine. In addition, Gold Fields has gold and other precious metal exploration activities and interests in Africa, Eurasia, Australasia and the Americas.

As of December 31, 2012, Gold Fields reported attributable proven and probable gold and copper reserves of approximately 68.4 million ounces of gold and 1,024 million pounds of copper, as compared to the 77.6 million ounces of gold and 1,109 million pounds of copper, reported as of December 31, 2011. Of the 68.4 million ounces as of December 31, 2012, the Sibanye Gold assets accounted for 13.5 million ounces of gold. See “—Reserves of Gold Fields as of December 31, 2012—Methodology”.

In fiscal 2012, Gold Fields processed 56.1 million tonnes of ore and produced 3.348 million ounces of gold (including gold equivalent ounces). On an attributable basis, Gold Fields produced 3.254 million ounces of gold (including gold equivalent ounces), of which 1.224 million ounces of gold was produced by the Sibanye Gold assets. In the second half of 2012, Gold Fields, like several other South African mining companies, was significantly affected by work stoppages that impacted much of the South African mining industry.

Competitive Position

Gold Fields is a producer of gold and major holder of gold reserves in South Africa, Ghana, Australia and Peru. Gold is a commodity product generally sold in U.S. dollars, with London being the world’s primary gold trading market. Gold is also actively traded using futures and forward contracts. The price of gold has historically been significantly affected by macroeconomic factors, such as inflation, exchange rates, reserves policy and by global political and economic events, rather than simple supply and demand dynamics. As a general rule, Gold Fields sells the gold it produces at market prices to obtain the maximum benefit from prevailing gold prices.

The key gold producers globally have historically been Barrick Gold, Newmont Mining, AngloGold and Gold Fields, which produced 6.996, 4.726, 3.948 and 3.697 million ounces, respectively, in 2011 and together accounted for approximately 21% of the total global gold production for the year, according to the information provided by the companies and the World Gold Council, or WGC.

 

30


Table of Contents

Based on fiscal 2011 production (the latest available data), the first, second and third largest gold producers in the world were Barrick Gold, Newmont Mining and AngloGold, respectively. According to the AME Group, a mining and metals economics consultancy, at March 13, 2013 Barrick Gold had 40 operations in 12 countries, Newmont Mining had 15 operations in eight countries and AngloGold had 26 operations in 11 countries. Including the Sibanye Gold assets, Gold Fields was the fourth largest gold producer in the world. Excluding production at the Sibanye Gold assets, Gold Fields was the tenth largest gold producer in the world in fiscal 2011.

Gold Fields attempts to attract and retain motivated high caliber employees through a mix of guaranteed and performance-based remuneration, as well as short-term and long-term incentives, and non-financial rewards relating to work experience. However, the worldwide mining industry, including Gold Fields, continues to experience a shortage of qualified senior management and technically skilled employees. For instance, the production of gold in deep level mines relies heavily upon rock drill operators and other operators of heavy machinery in underground conditions, and it is difficult to attract new entrants into these occupations. In order to maintain competitiveness in the global labor market, regular industry market surveys are conducted to benchmark remuneration practices and to keep abreast of industry movements regarding employee benefits and non-financial employee reward and recognition programs.

Developments since December 31, 2011

Since the end of fiscal 2011, the following significant events have occurred:

On January 24, 2012, Gold Fields entered into a Memorandum of Understanding in relation to assets of Sibanye Gold with Gold One International Limited, or Gold One, to investigate the viability of concurrently retreating their combined surface tailings deposits. The deposits are located in the West Rand region of the Witwatersrand Basin in South Africa. Gold Fields, Sibanye Gold and Gold One currently operate mines in the West Rand region and will consider creating a joint venture consisting of surface assets for retreatment. The included assets are expected to exceed 700 million tonnes, representing over 60% of the region’s total tailings material. The parties completed a detailed scoping study in July 2012 and, in early 2013, a decision was taken to proceed with a pre-feasibility study for the project. The results of the study will be used to determine whether to progress to a full feasibility study. If the joint venture proceeds, the parties plan to concurrently reprocess their combined tailings to recover residual gold, uranium and sulphur, while addressing mine closure in an environmentally sustainable manner and depositing the residues according to acceptable modern deposition practices.

On September 20, 2010 Gold Fields entered into two option agreements with Lepanto Consolidated Mining Company, or Lepanto, the 60% owner of the Far Southeast Project, or FSE, and Liberty Express Assets, or Liberty, the 40% owner of FSE, granting Gold Fields an option to acquire a 60% interest in FSE for a total consideration of $340 million.

After paying option fees of $10.0 million and making two down-payments of $44 million and $66 million in September 2010 and September 2011 respectively, Gold Fields brought forward half of the remaining $220 million payment to acquire Liberty’s 40% interest in FSE. On March 22, 2012, Gold Fields exercised its 40% option in the FSE in the Philippines after making a $110 million payment. Gold Fields continues to hold its option to acquire an additional 20% stake in FSE from Lepanto for a further U.S.$110 million, which, if exercised, would increase its total interest in FSE to 60%.

The Liberty and Lepanto options were initially granted to Gold Fields for the later of 18 months from signature in September 2010 or the date of receiving a Financial or Technical Assistance Agreement, or FTAA, for the project. A FTAA license allows a foreign corporation to control a majority interest in a Philippine mining project. Notwithstanding this provision, Gold Fields has the discretion to exercise either option prior to the FTAA being granted, and did so with its 40% option as noted above. The FTAA application for FSE was filed in

 

31


Table of Contents

November 2011. The application requires the free prior and informed consent, or FPIC, of the Kankana-ey indigenous people. The FPIC process was suspended at a national level pending the finalization of new national mining legislation. The process recommenced in August 2012, following the release of new national guidelines, but this period of suspension delayed Gold Fields’ FTAA application. Nonetheless, management anticipates completion of the FTAA process during fiscal 2013. See “—Growth & International Projects—International Projects—Far Southeast Scoping Study”.

On the Spin-off date, Gold Fields completed the Spin-off. See “Explanatory Note”.

Gold Fields is a limited public company incorporated in South Africa, with a registered office located at 150 Helen Road, Sandown, Sandton, 2196, South Africa, telephone number +27-11-562-9700.

 

32


Table of Contents

Organizational Structure

Gold Fields is a holding company with its significant ownership interests organized as set forth below.

Group Structure Pre-Spin-off (1)

 

LOGO

 

Notes:

(1) Until the Spin-off date, unless otherwise stated, all subsidiaries were, directly or indirectly, wholly-owned by Gold Fields Limited.
(2) See “Additional Information—Material Contracts—Additional Black Economic Empowerment Transactions”.
(3) Not all other subsidiaries and investments are wholly-owned.
(4) These entities were distributed in the Spin-off on the Spin-off date. See “Explanatory Note”.

 

33


Table of Contents

Group Structure Post-Spin-off (1)

 

LOGO

 

Notes:

(1) As of May 9, 2013, unless otherwise stated, all subsidiaries are, directly or indirectly, wholly-owned by Gold Fields Limited.
(2) See “Additional Information—Material Contracts—Additional Black Economic Empowerment Transactions”.
(3) Not all other subsidiaries and investments are wholly-owned.

 

34


Table of Contents

Background to the Spin-off

Gold Fields considered the Spin-off as part of its ongoing review of its strategy and operational portfolio against its strategic objectives over the last few years. It is expected that the separation of Gold Fields and Sibanye Gold will enable the component parts of the businesses to operate in a more efficient and commercially effective manner, thereby enabling each of the businesses to achieve their respective strategic goals. As at December 31, 2012, Gold Fields reported reserves of 68.4 million ounces of gold and 1,024 million pounds of copper, of which the Sibanye Gold assets accounted for 13.5 million ounces of gold. Total production during fiscal 2012, fiscal 2011 and fiscal 2010 was 3.35 million, 3.70 million and 3.84 million ounces, respectively. Total production from the Sibanye Gold assets during the fiscal years ended December 31, 2012 and 2011 and June 30, 2010, was 1.22 million, 1.45 million and 1.67 million ounces, respectively.

Gold Fields believes that its existing mining operations (pre-spin off) can be divided into two categories: (i) deep level, narrow vein, underground operations housed in Sibanye Gold; and (ii) open-pit and shallow underground operations in Ghana, Australia and Peru and, in the case of South Deep, deep-level, bulk underground mechanized operations which, together with the international exploration and development projects, are housed elsewhere in the Gold Fields structure.

These two categories of assets, which have divergent strategic focuses and require different management skills, were contained within one umbrella entity.

Gold Fields has indicated that it is committed to enhancing returns to shareholders through, inter alia , ongoing repositioning to improve leverage to the rising price of gold, and ensuring that dividends have a first call on cash flows. To this end, over the last few years Gold Fields has been engaged in an ongoing review of its strategy and operational portfolio against strategic objectives such as:

 

   

generating cash;

 

   

maximizing returns on funds invested;

 

   

containing the cost of gold production as measured on an all-in-cost basis (operating cost plus capital expenditure) or, as Gold Fields reports it, on a NCE basis;

 

   

deploying scarce capital only on projects that provide the best risk-weighted returns;

 

   

prioritizing lower risk, higher return brownfields projects, and judiciously advancing only the strongest brownfields and greenfields projects;

 

   

leveraging the balance sheet to grow Gold Fields’ value on a per share basis;

 

   

pursuing only opportunistic M&A of producing assets where the path to value is clear;

 

   

maintaining a focus on gold and global competitiveness; and

 

   

supporting the overall long-term sustainability of the business.

The review process assessed the sustainability of Sibanye Gold and its ability to deliver value against these key strategic objectives. While some parts of these assets have been in production for around 70 years, Gold Fields believes that the Sibanye Gold assets overall still have significant inherent quality and extensive resource and reserve potential.

The review process also concluded that the two categories of assets in the portfolio, namely the KDC and Beatrix mines on the one hand, and the other assets in the portfolio on the other, are at different stages of their life cycles; have different styles of mineralization that require different mining methods, mining skills and mining technology; and have competing capital requirements to sustain and improve production. The decision to review the portfolio of its existing operations and assets predates the recent unrest experienced in the South African mining industry.

 

35


Table of Contents

It was also determined that, with the competing management and funding demands of a geographically, geologically and technically diversified organization, Sibanye Gold would benefit from a more focused and fully dedicated executive management that was directly accountable to a similarly focused and dedicated board of directors.

Consequently, it was decided to separate Sibanye Gold from Gold Fields into a fit-for-purpose company not burdened by the usual costs associated with a global company, which in the case of Gold Fields included a world-wide exploration program and the associated project development costs, and managed by a focused team that can better sustain these operations.

The separation of Sibanye Gold out of the Gold Fields portfolio will enable the remaining Gold Fields management team to focus its attention on maximizing cash flows and returns from its existing mines in South Africa, Ghana, Peru and Australia and to realize value from its world-class portfolio of development and exploration projects. It will also enable Gold Fields to create a portfolio that is more resilient to fluctuations in the gold price and exchange rates.

Gold Fields may consider and evaluate a number of near-mine organic growth opportunities and life extensions at its existing mines and to maintain an exploration program that is consistent with its strategy of growing the company largely through exploration.

A main priority will be the continued development of the South Deep gold mine in South Africa, on which Gold Fields has spent a total of approximately R30 billion (including the acquisition cost) since acquiring it in December 2006. Gold Fields is committed to investing approximately a further R5 billion into this project over the next three years.

This mine will form the core of Gold Fields’ production growth over the next three to four years with production expected to ramp up to a run rate of approximately 700,000 ounces per year by December 2016 at globally competitive cash costs and NCE. The recently concluded agreement with the NUM to introduce a new operating model for South Deep is expected to lay the foundation for the future success of this asset, which has an estimated life of mine of at least 50 years at expected levels of production.

Gold Fields has a vision of totally eliminating the historic single sex hostel system at its new South Deep mine over the next five years by facilitating alternative forms of housing, including family accommodation, for all of its employees. Gold Fields intends to spend between R300 million and R500 million on this project over the five-year period.

Gold Fields expects to offer its shareholders strong leverage to the gold price through a cash generative, globally diversified portfolio, as well as a disciplined approach to growth and project development.

Gold Fields shareholders should expect to continue to enjoy amongst the highest dividend payouts in the sector with the company maintaining its “dividends first policy” of giving dividends the first call on cash flows and distributing 25% to 35% of normalized earnings to shareholders.

Gold Fields has met its BEE equity requirements and compliance for Gold Fields remained unaffected by the Spin-off.

Sibanye Gold retained Gold Fields’ South African net debt of R4 billion, while the U.S.$1.4 billion of off-shore net debt was retained by Gold Fields.

Strategy

Over the past decade, the gold mining industry has had a poor record of accomplishment in providing investors with a leveraged return over what they could attain from investing in gold directly. The industry is not growing ounces of production materially despite spending billions of dollars on exploration and the building or

 

36


Table of Contents

acquisition of new mines; the industry is adding costs at a rate that detracts from gold price gains and is not returning cash to shareholders at a rate that matches their expectations. As a result, gold industry share prices, including Gold Fields’ share price, have underperformed the gold price and have failed to reflect the decade-long gold bull market in company valuations.

This sobering analysis formed the foundation of Chief Executive Nicholas Holland’s keynote speech to the Melbourne Mining Club in July 2012, where he committed Gold Fields to a course of action to generate greater cash returns for investors in the Company.

Following the Melbourne Mining Club speech, Gold Fields, during the second half of 2012, engaged in a comprehensive review and analysis of its operating model as well as all of the assets in the portfolio—both producing mines and growth projects, or the Portfolio Review—to ‘give teeth’ to the principles articulated in the speech. The outcomes of the Portfolio Review, and its strategy implications are discussed below.

The key outcome of this review was a departure from the overarching strategic growth target, articulated in 2009, “to increase production to approximately five million attributable gold equivalent ounces, either in production or in development by 2015”, in favor of a new determination to pursue only production growth supported by attractive cash returns. In support of this new approach, Gold Fields will not provide long-term production estimates for the Group or estimates of timelines and likely production levels on any projects until advanced pre-feasibility or feasibility information is available and development decisions have been made and approved.

This shift in focus has had a major impact on the Group’s operating strategy, including the phasing-out of marginal production at the Company’s mines in Australia and Ghana and a new focus on low-risk, high-return near-mine growth opportunities at the Cerro Corona, Damang and Tarkwa mines. Beyond this, all greenfields growth opportunities are now subject to more strict commercial stage-gates to ensure the cash generating potential of these projects before they are progressed.

Strategically it has also led to the Spin-off of the Company’s mature underground mines in South Africa into the newly formed and independent Sibanye Gold, which was created to ensure a positive and sustainable future for the Beatrix and KDC mines and the people who work at them. See “—Background to Spin-off”.

The Gold Fields Franchise

Despite these changes, which are described in more detail below, the Gold Fields Franchise, which was developed following the appointment of Nicholas Holland as Chief Executive Officer as of May 1, 2008, remains robust and appropriate, with the exception of the overarching strategic goal “to increase production to approximately five million attributable gold equivalent ounces, either in production or in development by 2015”, in favor of a new determination to pursue only production growth supported by attractive cash returns.

The Gold Fields franchise, which describes “who we are”, “what we do”, and “how we do it”, is comprised of:

 

   

a vision statement;

 

   

a set of core values;

 

   

the three long-standing core pillars of the strategy, namely a) “Optimize Our Operations”, b) “Grow Gold Fields”, and c) “Secure Our Future”; and

 

   

a new regional operational delivery model.

In addition a number of short- and medium-term strategic priorities were identified and implemented, most notably the elevation of safety as the Group’s number one value and strategic priority, which is discussed in the Secure Our Future section below.

 

37


Table of Contents

Vision Statement

During fiscal 2009, Gold Fields developed a simple yet powerful new vision for the Group:

To be the Global Leader in Sustainable Gold Mining.

The purpose was to establish a simple yet compelling new vision that all stakeholders, in particular Gold Fields’ employees around the globe, could understand and buy into, and which could serve as a common and powerful motivational force across the organization.

The vision statement, which was successfully introduced across the Group during fiscal 2010, and remains relevant today, reflects Gold Fields’ desire to be the best at what it does rather than to be the biggest; the imperative to maintain a sustainable business model with particular regard to the social, economic and environmental impacts of the Group and its operations on current and future generations of stakeholders; and the fact that Gold Fields is a focused gold mining company as opposed to a diversified precious or poly metals company.

Core Values

Supporting the vision statement and directing the strategy are six core values that every employee is expected to embrace and which define the way in which Gold Fields conducts its business. These values are:

 

   

Safety

If we cannot mine safely, we will not mine;

 

   

Responsibility

We act responsibly and care for the environment, each other, and all of our stakeholders—our employees, our communities and our shareholders;

 

   

Honesty

We act with fairness, integrity, honesty and transparency;

 

   

Respect

We treat each other with trust, respect and dignity;

 

   

Innovation

We encourage innovation and entrepreneurship; and

 

   

Delivery

We do what we say we will do.

The Spin-off

The first and most significant outcome of the Portfolio Review was the decision to separate the Gold Fields portfolio of assets into two separate and independent companies, reflecting the diverse nature of the ore bodies, the relative maturity and profile of the assets as well as the different mining methods, management and operational skills, and technologies required to optimally and sustainably extract these ore bodies.

This decision led to the November 2012 announcement of the creation and unbundling to shareholders of the new Sibanye Gold as a totally independent company with its own dedicated executive management and board of directors, led by well-known and respected South African mining and business entrepreneurs, Neal Froneman (Chief Executive Officer, or CEO) and Sello Moloko (Chairman). The new Sibanye Gold, which comprises the KDC and Beatrix mines as well as the various South African service entities, was successfully listed on the JSE Limited and, the New York Stock Exchange on February 11, 2013.

 

38


Table of Contents

Sibanye Gold is expected to be a strong, fit-for-purpose vehicle for the optimal and sustainable extraction of its substantial mineral resources and mineral reserves, as well as potentially a catalyst for the long overdue restructuring of the South African gold mining industry.

The Spin-off was not a quick or easy decision to make. Nonetheless, Gold Fields believes that the decision to split the assets in this way will play an instrumental role in ensuring that Beatrix and KDC, as well as their respective workforces, continue to prosper well into the future. It was the right thing to do—for investors and employees.

A New Strategic Paradigm for Gold Fields

The second significant outcome of the 2012 portfolio review was a recognition and adoption of five key guiding principles which will underpin the Gold Fields strategy going forward.

Principle 1: Focus on cash returns, not ounces

The first principle is that the focus is no longer on ounce targets at any cost, but on the generation of cash returns. Central to this is a razor-sharp focus on understanding and managing the all-in costs of producing an ounce of gold, expressed as NCE, which Gold Fields pioneered in the gold mining industry and implemented in Gold Fields over the past five years. To turn this principle into action, Gold Fields embarked on a review and repositioning of all of the producing mines in the Gold Fields portfolio to focus on the production of profitable ounces only and to curtail marginal production which does not contribute to meaningful cash generation, even if this results in a decline in ounces of production. Some of the key actions that followed were:

 

   

The rationalization of the corporate office and regional structures (including Growth and International Projects) to reflect the reality that the new Gold Fields is now a much smaller company with base production of approximately 1.8 million ounces to 1.9 million ounces per year.

 

   

A significant reduction in Gold Fields’ greenfields exploration expenditure from U.S.$129 million in 2012 to approximately U.S.$80 million in 2013 and a refocusing of exploration efforts onto smaller, higher grade and less capital intensive targets, mainly in the regions where the Company already has a presence.

 

   

At St. Ives, the transition to owner mining of the surface operations was completed and the marginal heap leach operation mothballed. While this will result in a decline in annual production of between 30,000 and 40,000 ounces, it should lead to a lowering of costs and more profitable production overall.

 

   

At Agnew’s Waroonga underground mine, Gold Fields withdrew from the low-grade and marginal Main and Rajah lodes, re-focused only on the high grade Kim Lode, and right-sized the mine accordingly. A more appropriate level of production for this mine is expected to be around 160,000 ounces per year compared with 176,600 ounces produced in 2012 and the 200,000 ounces initially targeted.

 

   

At Tarkwa, improved performance was targeted by stopping production at the marginal and high cost South Heap leach operation, which will result in a production decline of approximately 40,000 ounces per year to between 640,000 and 650,000 ounces per year.

 

   

At Damang, the “Super Pit” concept was deferred in favor of a smaller and more capital efficient strategy to sustain long-term production levels of between 200,000 to 250,000 ounces per annum at a minimum NCE margin of 20%. This will entail the recapitalization of the mine over the next two years, including remediation of the plant and increased stripping of the Huni and Juno deposits at the North and South extremities of the main Damang Pit, as well as a potential cut-back to the pit. Until this is achieved, production over the next two years is not expected to be more than 170,000 ounces per annum at an NCE of between U.S.$1,650/oz and U.S.$1,750/oz.

 

   

At Cerro Corona, the emphasis will be to maintain the mine’s consistently high performance and cash generation.

 

39


Table of Contents

While these measures are expected to have a tangible impact in terms of reducing overall production, they should help improve the overall profitability and cash-generation ability of the portfolio. As stated, the focus of the Company will now be cash generation not just ounces.

As the effects of these interventions feed through—and as South Deep becomes cash-generative—Gold Fields should become a more attractive investment vehicle.

Industry leadership on reporting transparency

For several years, Gold Fields has led the industry in reporting transparency through a focus on NCE and NCE margin. This ensures the reporting all costs associated with mining operations, including all operating costs as well as all capital. As a result, investors can readily assess the contribution of each mine and the impact of the actions taken to improve their cash generating capacity. The industry is now starting to embrace such reporting and through the World Gold Council are currently developing industry standards in this regard. For far too long the industry reported a singular perspective of its profitability, which has contributed to governments and other stakeholders seeking a greater share of profits, which don’t necessarily exist.

Principle 2: Prioritizing near-mine growth opportunities

As Gold Fields seeks to further grow and diversify, it is this same principle of cash generation that will underpin corporate decision-making. Accordingly it was decided to accentuate the growth focus on lower risk, high-return near-mine opportunities near existing mines. With the focus moving from production levels to cash generation, there are a number of opportunities at existing mines to raise production while simultaneously enhancing the Group’s ability to generate cash. These opportunities are attractive not only because of their potential for competitive returns, but also because they are lower risk given that they are extensions of existing assets that are well known and understood. These opportunities include:

 

   

The proposed Tarkwa Expansion Phase 6, or TEP6, project which explores the possibility of replacing all or a proportion of the remaining North heap leach operations at Tarkwa with an expanded Carbon in Leach, or CIL, capacity. This has become necessary as the pits become deeper, the ore harder, and the heap leach recoveries lower. Recoveries at the heap leach facilities are currently in the low 50% range while recoveries through the existing CIL plant are in the upper 90% range.

 

   

The review of options to expand the existing sulphide plant at Cerro Corona to bring production forward given the long life of the mine. There is also a potential opportunity to process—through a new heap leach facility—more than 300,000 ounces of gold captured in oxide surface stockpiles.

Principle 3: Pursue greenfields projects only for superior returns

The third key guiding principle that emerged from the review process is to pursue greenfields opportunities only if they offer truly attractive returns and will contribute to the cash generation objectives of the Company. The approach of not adding ounces for ounces sake will be rigorously applied to the greenfields portfolio and projects will have to be assessed on their ability to generate a return on capital invested. This means enforcing stringent stage-gating of each project to ensure that decisions to advance projects to the next level are based on a thorough understanding of all technical assumptions, economic parameters and financial viabilities.

In support of this new approach no long-term estimates of timelines and likely production levels on these projects will be provided until feasibility information is available and approved and a development decision made. It is also recognized that, from a technical and financial perspective, it is unlikely that all of the projects can be advanced to the same extent simultaneously; prioritization of projects will therefore become the norm. The status of the most significant growth projects is as follows:

 

   

In late 2012, the decision was made to return the Chucapaca project in Peru to the drawing board after the feasibility study demonstrated inadequate returns. This does not mean abandoning the mineral resource offered by the project. Far from it, as this is potentially one of the most significant discoveries

 

40


Table of Contents
 

in South America over the past five years. Gold Fields is now investigating various ways of optimizing the project, including different production levels, underground opportunities as well as additional exploration in the area of interest, which could result in a more robust project. See “—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—International Projects—Chucapaca Feasibility Study”.

 

   

The burn-rate at the FSE in the Philippines has been slowed pending the outcome of efforts to secure the FPIC of local indigenous people—a pre-requisite for a FTAA, which would allow foreign companies to take a majority share in the project. Most of the underground drilling programs required for a pre-feasibility study have been completed. The focus now is on a surface geo-technical drilling program to provide additional data for the pre-feasibility study, which is scheduled to commence in late 2013 or early 2014. See “Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—International Projects—Far Southeast Scoping Study”.

 

   

At the Arctic Platinum Project, or APP, in Finland a pre-feasibility study, with initial findings demonstrating a viable project, is close to completion. Next steps are to initiate a full feasibility study once the results from the pre-feasibility study are evaluated and determine the optimal means through which to capture the inherent value in this project. See “Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—International Projects—Arctic Platinum Project Pre-Feasibility Study”.

 

   

At the Yanfolila Project in Mali, the objectives for 2013 are to conduct additional exploration drilling to further de-risk the project and, if successful, fast-track the project from scoping through feasibility to a position where a development decision could be reached.

Principle 4: ‘Dividend first’ policy

Gold Fields aims to make sure investors benefit from its enhanced ability to generate cash. This means continuing its ‘divided first’ policy, which was first articulated in 2012 and which prioritizes dividends over other demands on cash flows. The Company expects to pay out 25% to 35% of normalized earnings as dividends. Normalized earnings are defined as net earnings excluding gains and losses on foreign exchange, financial instruments, non-recurring items and share of results of associates after royalties and taxation.

Principle 5: Enduring commitment to business sustainability

The long term sustainability of the business, however, remains at the heart of what the Company does—cash generation is, after all, an important step towards securing the future of the business. Beyond this, the approach to the sustainability of the business can be broken down into the following key components.

The first is the Company’s approach towards its employees. The sustainability of the business demands that the Company provides the kind of remuneration, benefits, working conditions and development opportunities that means it can attract, motivate and retain the very best in mining talent amid intense competition in the labor market. Without the right people, the Company’s future is limited. Likewise, it is essential that the Company keep its employees safe and healthy. This is not only a moral imperative but—as demonstrated by Gold Fields’ past experience of safety closures at the South African operations-a business imperative.

The second is our application of responsible operational practices. We will only ever be a partner of choice for host governments and local communities if we can demonstrate a clear record of safe working practices and responsible environmental stewardship that goes beyond minimum standards. This is particularly the case with respect to water management—an issue of particular sensitivity for many host communities.

The third is the basis of our relationships with our host communities. Unless our relationships with our stakeholders (including our employees, suppliers and host communities, as well as our host governments) are based on the long-term, mutually-beneficial generation of shared value—our social licence to operate will never be fully assured. This is why we will continue to prioritize (where possible and sustainable) the employment of local people, the use of local supply chains and the delivery of development benefits to host communities.

 

41


Table of Contents

We are also proud of our significant public revenue contributions in all our countries of operation, which, combined with the right government policies, can help to turn finite natural resources into lasting national development. However, in some of the jurisdictions in which we operate the demands by stakeholders, in particular governments, on the mining sector, have reached uncompetitive levels and threaten to undermine the long-term profitability of the Group and the industry and thus its ability to deliver equitable economic value to investors, communities and governments.

The fourth is our ability to maintain strong business ethics—so that we can enhance rather than erode the business environments in which we operate. This means combating corrupt behaviour, maintaining transparent government relations, promoting the effective application of mineral resource revenues to broad-based national development, and supporting positive social transformation and human rights. Without trust, we would not have much of a future.

We are already making strong progress on our journey towards improved sustainability as reflected in the fact that in 2012 we were ranked third in the mining category of the world-wide Dow Jones Sustainability Index, or the DJSI, (moving from fourth place in 2011). This makes us the top-ranked gold mining company in the world and the top-ranked South African mining company.

Optimize Our Operations

Optimize Our Operations means bringing the Group’s attributable mineral reserves of 54.9 million ounces of gold (excluding the Sibanye Gold assets) and 1,024 million pounds of copper to account in a way that is safe, cost effective and environmentally responsible.

After the Spin-off, Gold Fields has six world-class producing mines. Fundamental to the attainment of the Group’s vision is for each one of these mines to produce to its real potential, especially as it relates to cash generation, and to maintain stability, predictability and consistency at its steady state level.

The first element of Optimize Our Operations is pursuing “Zero Harm” through the Group’s Safe Production philosophy which includes particular focus on the provision of a safe working environment and a transformation in the attitudes, behavior and accountability of its employees, which is discussed in the Secure Our Future section below.

The second element of Optimize Our Operations involves minimizing the Group’s environmental impact, including projects to minimize pollution risks, maximize energy efficiencies, manage its carbon impacts and plan for the eventual closure of mines. This is also discussed further in the Secure Our Future section below.

The third element of Optimize Our Operations relates to maximizing the operational potential of the Group’s mines, through investment in mechanization, infrastructure development, mining flexibility and ore reserve development. With attributable mineral reserves of 54.9 million ounces of gold (excluding the Sibanye Gold assets) and 1,024 million pounds of copper as at December 31, 2012, it is essential to bring the Group’s reserves to account in the most cost effective way and, in doing so, to ensure longevity for each of the mines. Equally important is the need to achieve the required levels of mineral reserve development to create and maintain mining flexibility, which is a prerequisite for maintaining stability, predictability and consistency. After safety, mineral reserve development is the most important strategic priority for all of the mines in the Group.

In support of the Group’s overarching strategic objective of cash generation, the Group also seeks to proactively manage costs with a view to maintaining a NCE margin of at least 20% in the short-term and 25% in the medium- to long-term at each mine excluding South Deep. To this end, the Group’s Business Process Re-engineering program, or BPR, has been implemented at Tarkwa and Damang in Ghana and at St. Ives and Agnew in Australia. This has entailed a significant focus on operating costs, the rationalization of on-mine and regional overhead cost structures and a review of the mine-to-mill processes to reduce inefficiencies and improve productivity. The Group achieved NCE margin of 18% in fiscal 2012 and 25% in fiscal 2011. This decrease is due to higher capital expenditure and lower gold production in fiscal 2012.

 

42


Table of Contents

Grow Gold Fields

Grow Gold Fields is about growing the value of the business on a per share basis. It is not purely about size, or the number of ounces produced, but about the quality of the portfolio and the generation of real value for shareholders, as measured by NCE and on a free cash flow basis.

The growth and diversification is based, in the first instance, on near-mine exploration, and then on the progression of the Group’s four advanced stage projects in Mali, Finland, Peru and the Philippines as well as greenfield exploration, both within the Group’s established Australasia, South America and West Africa regions, and in highly prospective locations such as those in Canada, Chile, Argentina, the Philippines and Kyrgyzstan.

As articulated in the section A New Strategic Paradigm for Gold Fields below, Gold Fields does not pursue growth simply to add incremental ounces to its portfolio. Hence the philosophy that every incremental ounce should be better than the previous ounce in terms of NCE and cash generation potential and, equally important, should offer shareholders growth in ounces in production per share and enhanced returns on a per share basis.

Despite the slogan No Mergers & Acquisitions Heroics, the Company will consider attractive investment opportunities by pursuing an opportunistic strategy on acquisitions of, in particular, producing or late-stage development assets. However, the Company does believe that a continuing lack of quality gold discoveries in the industry has led to escalating competition for advanced exploration and production assets. This makes value accretive growth through mergers and acquisitions increasingly onerous and prone to dilution of existing shareholders. For this reason, management believes that, in the current price environment, exploration success generally offers the most cost effective path to accretive and value adding growth.

The Company’s growth strategy is thus premised on creating high quality growth opportunities mainly through an aggressive focus on near-mine exploration at existing assets and robust stage gating of greenfields exploration projects to ensure that projects meet the quality criteria of the Group, in particular cash generation.

During 2013, there will be a significant reduction in Gold Fields’ greenfields exploration budget from U.S.$129 million in 2012 to approximately U.S.$80 million (excluding U.S.$81 million on projects exploration) in 2013 and a refocusing of exploration efforts onto smaller, higher grade and less capital intensive targets, mainly in the regions where the Company already has a presence in order to focus on jurisdictions carrying less exploration risk for Gold Fields. In fiscal 2013, Gold Fields plans to spend about U.S.$47 million on near-mine exploration.

Understanding non-geological aspects of prospective projects, such as social, political, environmental and commercial risks, ensuring that an appropriate risk versus reward trade-off analysis is factored into the decision is critical to the overall assessment and goes beyond a decision on the risk premium to be factored into the required return, and often goes to the root of that project decision. Gold Fields is prepared to consider projects with a higher risk profile if it believes they will offer superior returns. The focus will remain on gold and its by-product metals.

Outside South Africa, the three key regions of West Africa, Australasia and South America have been identified as containing prospective emerging gold and mineral belts with medium to long-term potential where Gold Fields has existing operational capabilities. In appropriate circumstances, Gold Fields will also consider opportunities outside its key regions of focus.

For acquisitions of assets or companies outside South Africa, South African exchange control regulations limit Gold Fields’ ability to provide guarantees or borrow outside South Africa without express approval from the SARB. However, the government has indicated that its intention is to gradually phase out the remaining exchange controls over time and Gold Fields has a good track record in gaining approval for its offshore acquisitions and in growing its international operations.

 

43


Table of Contents

Secure Our Future

Secure Our Future is about ensuring the long-term sustainability of the business as explained above in Principle 5: Enduring commitment to business sustainability.

A New Strategic Paradigm for Gold Fields

It encompasses safety and human resources, as well as a wide range of environmental social and economic parameters that impact on the business today and into the future. It is about acquiring and maintaining a “social license to operate” in each of the jurisdictions in which the Company operates.

The fact that sustainability was introduced as a specific element in Gold Fields new vision statement, To be the Global Leader in Sustainable Gold Mining, reflects the importance with which this subject is viewed by the Group. Gold Fields views sustainable development as a balance between the optimal financial and operational performance of the Group; maintaining of world-class environmental and health and safety management standards; and contributing meaningfully to socio-economic benefits for the communities in which it operates.

Gold Fields continues to be an active member of the International Council on Mining and Metals, or ICMM, and is a signatory to the United Nations Global Compact. All mines in the Group, as well as the exploration division, have ISO 14001 certified environmental management systems in place and have retained their certifications during fiscal 2012.

During fiscal 2010, Gold Fields also became the first mining house to achieve full accreditation for its eligible operations under the International Cyanide Management Code, or the Cyanide Code. The OHSAS 18001 Safety Management System is a company standard and all mines in the company are now OHSAS 18001 certified. Gold Fields’ Carbon Management Policy was approved by the Board of Directors in November 2010. All operations are also ISO 14001 compliant.

The Company has developed a Sustainable Development Framework that is closely aligned with the sustainable development principles of the ICMM and the United Nations Global Compact, and Gold Fields is a member of both groups. Gold Fields sustainability policy has been informed by the Global Reporting Initiative Sustainable Reporting Framework, which guides reporting on environmental, social and governance issues by companies that subscribe to it. The Sustainable Development Framework consists of a Sustainability Policy, with subsidiary policies, strategies and practice guides in each of the following eight pillars of sustainable development, namely: occupational health and safety; human rights; ethics and corporate governance; risk management, environment; material stewardship and supply chain management, community and indigenous people and stakeholder management.

Moreover, Gold Fields’ performance on the DJSI indicates that the Company is acknowledged as one of the mining leaders worldwide in sustainability. The DJSI is a widely recognized measure of the sustainability performance of listed companies worldwide. Launched in 1999, the DJSI ranks the performance of global sustainability leaders through an annual assessment of the world’s largest public companies. Among other factors, it measures management practices surrounding economic, environmental and social engagement approaches. As noted above, Gold Fields is currently ranked third on the DJSI within the mining category.

Safety

Gold Fields’ health and safety philosophy is premised on our most important value and the overarching moral imperative that “if we cannot mine safely, we will not mine”. This gives rise to the objective of striving towards a “zero harm” working environment for all its people. During fiscal 2012, 16 employees in South Africa lost their lives compared to 19 during fiscal 2011. The KDC and Beatrix mines where all of these deaths occurred are no longer part of Gold Fields since the creation of Sibanye Gold. At South Deep, there were no fatalities during fiscal 2012.

 

44


Table of Contents

Outside South Africa, there were no fatalities during fiscal 2012, one fatality during fiscal 2011 and no fatalities during fiscal 2010. The fatal injury frequency rate for the Group, before the Spin-off, showed an 8% decrease, from 0.12 per million man hours worked in fiscal 2011 to 0.11 per million man hours worked in fiscal 2012. For the new Gold Fields (excluding Sibanye Gold), the fatal injury frequency rate for fiscal 2012 was 0.00 per million man hours worked. The lost time injury frequency rate showed approximately a 9% increase, from 4.69 per million man hours worked in fiscal 2011 to 5.16 per million man hours worked (including restricted work cases for Australia; 4.66 per million man hours worked if restricted cases are excluded) in fiscal 2012. For Gold Fields (excluding Sibanye Gold), the lost time injury frequency rate for fiscal 2012 was 0.40 per million man hours worked. Since December 31, 2012, Gold Fields has reported one fatality at its operations in South Africa (including the Sibanye Gold assets until the Spin-off date). The South African region in Gold Fields post-Spin-off will reconstitute the CEO’s sub-committee for health and safety for South Deep.

In that regard, the Group’s Chief Executive Officer continues to participate in a South African Chamber of Mines Committee whose objective is to eliminate fatalities in the industry. Gold Fields remains committed to safety, and the safe operation of its mines continues to be its top strategic priority. The strategy to eliminate fatalities in the Group will focus on engineering out the risk, ensuring compliance to internal standards and bringing about behavioral changes in support of safe working practices by all employees. The experience of employee dynamics over the years has led Gold Fields to adopt a more comprehensive approach to the general well-being, and therefore the productivity, of its staff. To this end Gold Fields pursues a broad range of interventions encapsulated in the 24 Hours in the Life of a Gold Fields Employee program. This program was first launched in the South Africa region in fiscal 2009 and subsequently implemented in three international regions during fiscal 2010. Based on a total well-being philosophy, the program is aimed at improving every facet of the life of each employee and includes interventions in the fields of occupational health and safety, healthcare, living conditions, nutrition, sport and recreation and education.

Carbon and Energy

Addressing energy management is a key deliverable throughout the Company. Rising energy costs and growing concerns about the effect of climate change have elevated the importance of energy efficiency and carbon management on the global agenda. Against this backdrop, Gold Fields has been actively aligning the Company to a carbon-constrained economy. The Company’s intention is to reduce carbon emission and improve energy efficiency within the Company. Therefore, existing policies and strategies governing carbon management are being reviewed and updated to move the Group closer to the attainment of these goals.

In 2010, Gold Fields adopted a new Carbon Management Policy, which commits the Group to:

 

   

implement strategies to reduce its carbon footprint, improve its energy efficiency, pursue opportunities and use carbon friendly technology where possible;

 

   

identify and mitigate the risks posed by climate change;

 

   

provide comprehensive disclosure around carbon related issues;

 

   

comply with relevant legal requirements and other carbon management requirements; and

 

   

encourage business partners and suppliers to make similar commitments.

In 2011, Gold Fields updated its Carbon Management Policy. The integrated Energy and Carbon Management Strategy is being implemented throughout the Group through the development of customized Regional Carbon Management Plans. The implementation of this strategy has assisted the Company in achieving an industry recognized leadership position in climate change management. Gold Fields has acknowledged a significant overlap in energy and carbon management challenges at both strategic and tactical implementation levels. These challenges include, but are not limited to:

 

   

Energy Costs: Energy costs are increasing due to power prices, energy supply constraints and carbon pricing. This will likely impact dramatically on mine profitability. The impact of rising energy costs must be managed through energy efficiency and alternative energy programs;

 

45


Table of Contents
   

Security of Supply: Energy supply risks to Group operations are increasing due to multiple factors, including supply constraints and climate change;

 

   

Life-of-Mine Planning: Energy and carbon related issues can impact on the determination of mineral reserves and resources through the impact on pay limits and mining cut-offs and must be adequately considered in the life of mine planning process;

 

   

Regulatory Risks: Regulatory developments, with regard to energy and carbon management, represent potential risks to the Group and appropriate responses must be made;

 

   

Training and Awareness of the Workforce, including change management; and

 

   

Performance management.

To assist in meeting these challenges and addressing the overlap between energy and carbon management, a project was launched with the objective to develop an integrated Energy and Carbon Management Strategy for the Company that will secure future operations in an energy and carbon-constrained global economy characterized by increasing energy costs. The Group believes this strategy should aid energy and carbon management related activities and achieve the following objectives:

 

   

Support Gold Fields’ overall business objectives and strategy to be the global leader in sustainable gold mining;

 

   

Be nationally appropriate and regionally relevant;

 

   

Clearly understand the carbon and energy risks and ensure appropriate mitigation plans are in place;

 

   

Support the development of an effective energy and carbon governance system within Gold Fields;

 

   

Sustain Gold Fields’ leadership position in this area by ensuring that it further develops leading and innovative best practices with regard to energy and carbon management; and

 

   

Sustain current DJSI performance and support eco-efficiencies improvements.

Integral to this project is the effective management of energy and carbon emission through a range of initiatives aimed at improving the Group’s energy intensity, improved energy efficiency amid ever-rising energy costs. Initiatives are also being implemented to partially offset the 9.6% per year electricity tariff increase on the South Deep operation from April 2013. During fiscal 2012, savings of approximately 5.77% (2.46% excluding the impact of the strike) in electricity consumption were achieved compared to fiscal 2011. In line with this new approach to energy and carbon management, the Group has launched a number of initiatives to reduce its energy use and the associated greenhouse gases emitted by its operations.

Stakeholder Relationship Management

A central pillar of the Gold Fields Sustainable Development Framework is pro-active engagement with and management of the relationships with all stakeholders who have an influence over the affairs of the company or are impacted by its activities. These include in particular the relationships with the Group’s employees and their representative organizations and unions; local, regional and national governments; and the local communities in which Gold Fields operates or that are affected by its operations.

A high level of engagement has become essential to underpin the sustainability of Gold Fields’ operations. This has become evident over the past few years with governments, communities, non-governmental organizations and trade unions in several jurisdictions seeking and, in some cases, implementing greater cost imposts on the mining industry.

Similar trends are evident in the cost of electricity and other levies imposed by governments in many of the countries in which Gold Fields operates. There is a risk that such additional imposts on mining projects will raise input costs to unsustainable levels, which would have negative consequences for the projects and, by implication,

 

46


Table of Contents

for the affected countries. In the near future, Gold Fields will—directly and through various industry forums—continue and escalate its engagement with stakeholders to achieve greater appreciation for the impact these often ill-considered demands are having on the sector.

Gold Fields recognizes that, by understanding the needs and concerns of various stakeholder groups, it can build constructive and positive relationships that will support the long-term objectives of the business. The Group spends considerable time and resources in building sound stakeholder relations.

Gold Fields begins the engagement process at the exploration stage by talking to community stakeholder groups to understand their needs and to obtain their input on future plans for the prospective development of a new mining operation.

Black Economic Empowerment

In the South African environment, BEE and transformation in terms of the requirements of the MPRDA, and the associated Amended Mining Charter, remains a key business imperative and sustainability issue.

During May 2010, the DMR approved the conversion of the South Deep old order mining right into a new order mining right. Included in this approval was an additional portion of ground known as Uncle Harry’s, which is contiguous to South Deep. The cumulative effect of this approval, together with the previous conversions for the Driefontein, Kloof (both now part of KDC) and Beatrix gold mines granted in January 2007, was that all of Gold Fields’ South African mines had received their new order mining right.

Following a review, the DMR amended the Mining Charter and released the Amended Mining Charter on September 13, 2010. There is uncertainty relating to the enforceability of the Amended Mining Charter’s requirement for mining entities to achieve a 26% HDSA ownership of mining assets by 2014. Amendments to the Mining Charter in the Amended Mining Charter include, among other things, the requirement by mining companies to (i) facilitate local beneficiation of mineral commodities; (ii) procure a minimum of 40% of capital goods, 70% of services and 50% of consumable goods from HDSA suppliers (i.e. suppliers in which a minimum of 25% + 1 vote of their share capital must be owned by HDSAs) by 2014 (exclusive of non-discretionary procurement expenditure); (iii) ensure that multinational suppliers of capital goods contribute a minimum of 0.5% of their annual income generated from South African mining companies into a social development fund from 2010 towards the socio-economic development of South African communities; (iv) achieve a minimum of 40% HDSA demographic representation by 2014 at top management (board) level, senior management (executive committee) level middle management level, junior management level and core and critical skills; (v) invest up to 5% of annual payroll in essential skills development activities; and (vi) implement measures to improve the standards of housing and living conditions for mineworkers by converting or upgrading mineworkers’ hostels into family units, attaining an occupancy rate of one person per room and facilitating home ownership options for all mineworkers in consultation with organized labor, all of which must be achieved by 2014. In addition, mining companies are required to monitor and evaluate their compliance to the Amended Mining Charter, and must submit annual compliance reports to the DMR. The Scorecard for the Broad-Based Socio-Economic Empowerment Charter for the South African Mining Industry attached to the Amended Mining Charter, or the Scorecard, makes provision for a phased-in approach for compliance with the above targets over the five-year period ending in 2014. For measurement purposes, the Scorecard allocates various weightings to the different elements of the Amended Mining Charter. Failure to comply with the provisions of the Amended Mining Charter will amount to a breach of the MPRDA and may result in the cancelation or suspension of a mining company’s existing mining rights.

In 2010, Gold Fields completed three empowerment transactions which, together with previous transactions, enabled Gold Fields to meet its 2014 BEE equity ownership targets. These transactions included an Employee Share Option Plan for 10.75% of Sibanye Gold; a broad-based BEE transaction for 10% of South Deep; and a broad- based BEE transaction for a further 1% of Sibanye Gold, excluding South Deep (which was subsequently

 

47


Table of Contents

moved out from under Sibanye Gold). The three transactions had a combined value of approximately R2.4 billion U.S.$298 million. See “Additional Information—Material Contracts—Black Economic Empowerment Transactions”.

Regional Delivery Model

Gold Fields views itself as a global mining company, but believes that in some circles it is perceived as predominantly a South African company with some international operations. In order to change this perception and to help achieve its operational and growth aspirations, Gold Fields began restructuring its operations into four regions during fiscal 2009. These regions are: South Africa; West Africa; South America; and Australasia.

This restructuring was largely completed in fiscal 2010. All of the key regional executives have been appointed and good progress has been made in creating strong, entrepreneurial and appropriately resourced and incentivized management teams in each region. These teams are tasked with running the mines safely and efficiently, as well as driving and being significantly involved in the growth of the business within each region. This work of setting up the largely independent and self-contained regional structures proved to be prescient in the facilitation of the Spin-off of Sibanye Gold, with South Deep largely self-sustaining.

During fiscal 2009, the corporate office was relocated to new premises separate from the South African regional office. During fiscal 2010, the corporate office was further streamlined, in line with the strategy of relocating personnel to the regions that they service. Following the Spin-off of Sibanye Gold approximately 20% of the corporate office employees, who were principally involved in supporting the South Africa Region, moved to Sibanye as part of the Spin-off.

The corporate office is now a focused business unit engaged in establishing and monitoring operational standards that apply across the regions in areas such as safety, health and environmental issues, finance and human resources, developing Group-wide strategy, and allocating capital.

In fiscal 2012, Gold Fields further streamlined its operations in each of the regions through a series of initiatives resulting from the Portfolio Review, focusing on reducing operating costs, improving margin per ounce, rationalization of on-mine and regional overhead and a review of the mine-to-mill process.

Hedging

As a general rule and a matter of policy, Gold Fields sells the gold it produces at prevailing market prices and does not enter into hedging arrangements such as forward sales or derivatives which establish a price in advance for the sale of its future gold production. At December 31, 2012, Gold Fields had no such outstanding hedges, which is consistent with our policy and has been the case since 2007.

Significant changes in the prices of gold and/or copper over a sustained period of time may lead Gold Fields to increase or decrease its production in the near-term, which could have a material impact on Gold Fields’ revenues. See “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Overview—Revenues”.

Gold Fields may, from time to time, establish currency and/or interest rate financial instruments to protect underlying cash flows or to take advantage of potential favorable currency movements.

Strategic Goals and Objectives

Progress against Strategic Goals and Objectives for Fiscal 2012

 

   

To achieve tangible improvements with respect to all safety and health metrics

In addition to the strikes, the Ya Rona fire highlighted the ongoing nature of Gold Fields’ struggle to achieve Zero Harm at our operations. On June 30, 2012, there were five fatalities following a fire in a

 

48


Table of Contents

worked-out area of the Ya Rona shaft and for which the circumstances and causes are still being investigated. The fatalities accounted for almost a third of our fatalities for the year taking our total fatalities for 2012 to 16. While this is still unacceptable, it is lower than the 20 fatalities we experienced in 2011.

We are making significant progress around our five key safety interventions which were launched in 2011, namely Engineering out risk; Compliance with standards and procedures; Cultural transformation; Alignment with stakeholders, particularly government and trade unions; and, Embedding our Health & Wellness program. As a result there have been some notable achievements at the South African operations during 2012 including 3.5 million fatality free shifts at the KDC East underground section, two million fatality free shifts for the whole of KDC and 3.5 million fatality free shifts at South Deep. In addition, South Deep also achieved six million fall-of-ground fatality free shifts.

 

   

To reduce the rate of production decline at KDC between 3% and 5% against fiscal 2011

During the first half of fiscal 2012 KDC had a very steady performance, but in the second half it faced two significant challenges which, in a large part, caused production at KDC to decline by 15% to 0.935 million ounces—below where we wanted to be.

The first significant challenge was a tragic fire that took place at the Ya Rona shaft at KDC during the third quarter, which accounted for 30,000 ounces in lost production. The second was the industry wide illegal strikes in the South African mining industry which affected both KDC and Beatrix gold mines during the third and fourth quarters—accounting for 145,000 ounces in lost production. Had these two events not taken place, Group production would have been broadly in line with 2011 performance (3.49 million ounces).

It is frustrating to note that the events in South Africa in the second half of the year have obscured what was looking to be one of our key achievements for 2012—the hard-won stabilization of production at Beatrix and KDC during the first half of the year, when the production decline at these operations was arrested for the first time in eight years.

 

   

To regain momentum in the ramping up of production at South Deep

At South Deep, several significant milestones were reached in support of the build-up to full production of 700,000 ounces in 2016.

The first of these milestones was the completion, within budget and on time, of the fixed infrastructure installations required to support full production. These installations include the new ventilation shaft which was completed in the fourth quarter. The additional rock hoisting capacity provided by this shaft is planned to ramp up to a nameplate capacity of 195,000 tonnes per month by December 2013. Combined with the 175,000 tonnes per month capacity of the existing Main shaft, this is sufficient to sustain the full-production mill-feed of 330,000 tonnes per month. The simultaneous completion of the gold plant expansion increased South Deep’s processing capacity from 220,000 tonnes per month to 330,000 tonnes per month. Together with the new tailings facility, additional refrigeration capacity and backfill plant completed during 2012, South Deep now has the fixed infrastructure in place required to support full production.

The second major milestone at South Deep was the conclusion, in October 2012, of a landmark agreement with the NUM, introducing a new operating model for the mine. At the core of the agreement is the introduction of a new 24/7/365 operational schedule which is in line with the best practice of mechanized underground operations around the world. This is expected to provide an additional 23% face time which will drive the productivity improvements required for full production. The new operating model includes, among other things, more competitive grading, remuneration and targeted incentives and seeks closer employee alignment with the mine’s business objectives. The implementation process has commenced but it will take some months for the impact of the new operating model to be noticeable. From this point, the main focus is on de-stressing and developing the ore body, and ramping up production at this world-class gold mine.

Once it reaches its production target of 700,000 cash-generative ounces in 2016, South Deep is expected to be the bedrock of the Gold Fields Group—and a shining example of how, with the right mining methodologies, technology and labour models, deep underground gold mining can thrive and prosper in

 

49


Table of Contents

South Africa. Indeed, once it becomes cash-generative (which could be in the latter part of 2013, depending on the gold price), this mine should play a key role in supporting our strong dividend policy of paying out between 25% and 35% of earnings, as well as future efforts to grow and diversify our profitable production base around the world.

 

   

To ensure that every mine achieves an NCE margin of at least 20% in the short-term

The BPR program continued in fiscal 2012. The second phase of the BPR program in South Africa identified further cost reductions of R500 million (U.S.$58 million) over the next year through the optimization of staff structures, reduction in non-specialized contractors, lower electricity consumption and enhanced supply chain management. At its Australian and Ghanaian mines, Gold Fields also maximized the benefits realized by the implementation of owner mining, improved utilization and availability of mining equipment as well as the reduction in energy intensity.

 

   

To increase momentum on growth projects to achieve the goal of 5 million ounces, in production or in development, by 2015

This target was abandoned as a result of the Portfolio Review undertaken during 2012, in favor of a focus on cash generation.

 

   

To ensure Gold Fields has the financial capacity to fund growth projects in 2013 and beyond

Gold Fields maintained continued focus on strong operational cash flow generation in fiscal 2012. At the same time, Gold Fields explored the potential for securing additional long-term funding for the business and the possibility of extending the maturity profile of its long-term debt.

 

   

To ensure that sustainability is fully integrated into the business and is appropriately communicated to all levels of the business

In fiscal 2012, Gold Fields worked towards achieving this goal, through initiatives such as ongoing development, implementation and monitoring of sustainability development strategies at the group-, region- and project-levels, additional integration of internal and external reporting and a dedicated sustainable development communications program, voluntary adoption of the World Gold Council Conflict—Free Gold Standard. Further, sustainable development measures have been incorporated into the balanced scorecards of key decision-makers across the Company.

 

   

To ensure that climate change initiatives, carbon mitigation and adaptation strategies and energy efficiency initiatives are fully incorporated into the business

In fiscal 2012, Gold Fields proceeded with a number of climate change and carbon mitigation initiatives, including the implementation of a fully integrated Energy and Carbon Strategy, the creation of a carbon and energy division, and the development, implementation and monitoring of Carbon Management Plans by all regions. Gold Fields also rolled out a number of energy efficiency and carbon emission reduction projects and continued with the ongoing integration of carbon pricing into its financial planning to induce short-, medium- and long-term adaptation of the business. Gold Fields is also in the process of incorporating energy and carbon measures into the balanced scorecards of key decision-makers across the Company.

 

   

To increase focus on the attraction, retention and development of people and skills

Gold Fields fully implemented its new People Strategy. This strategy focused on a number of initiatives to attract and retain skilled employees, including enhanced branding, increased talent development, the establishment of an integrated human resources data management system, an ongoing review of base salaries and quality of working life and improvements to internal and external skills pipelines.

 

50


Table of Contents

Specific Strategic Goals and Objectives for fiscal 2013

The specific strategic goals and objectives for fiscal 2013 flow from the strategy and were designed to consolidate the operational gains made during fiscal 2012. As part of its strategy in 2013, Gold Fields intends to:

 

   

Produce a winning, safe and productive team

As noted above, Gold Fields is striving towards a “zero harm” working environment for all of its employees. In fiscal 2013, Gold Fields will continue its safety initiatives with the intent of engineering-out safety and health risks at all of its operations by enhancing safety enforcement measures, including increased resourcing, and maintaining its OHSAS 18001 certifications. Gold Fields will also promote cultural and behavioral changes in its workforce to foster a culture of safety.

In fiscal 2013, Gold Fields will also prepare for potential silicosis litigation in South Africa. See “—Legal Proceedings and Investigations”.

Further, Gold Fields will proactively engage with unions and employees in fiscal 2013. Gold Fields expects to develop a new employee charter and to pursue its competitive remuneration and benefits strategy to attract quality employees. The Company will provide proactive leadership development and a talent management program and deliver world-class training to its employees in order to develop employees internally.

 

   

Build a reputation as the most trusted and valued mining partner

Gold Fields plans an ongoing and constructive engagement with the communities and governments of the jurisdictions in which it operates to build a reputation as the most trusted and valued mining partner. Gold Fields is committed to measuring both the contributions that it makes and key stakeholders’ satisfaction with it, and to creating and sharing value with these stakeholders to ensure it leaves an enduring, positive legacy. Gold Fields will engage the communities in which it mines by developing a new Society Charter and Community Handbook and deliver shared value through its new Community Promises. Gold Fields will also continue its ongoing minimization of negative environmental impacts at its operations through initiatives such as its new water strategy and its Energy and Carbon Management Strategy. Gold Fields will maintain its ISO 14001 certification. As part of its overall engagement with government, Gold Fields will review the UN ‘Protect, Respect and Remedy’ Framework for Business and Human Rights, or the Ruggie Framework, in order to analyze human rights performance and ensure best practice.

 

   

Maintain and develop a quality portfolio of productive mines and assets under exploration and development

The quality of Gold Fields’ asset portfolio is key to its success but what is most important is that Gold Fields’ maximizes the value that this portfolio can generate and pursues asset returns rather than ounces in production. Gold Fields expects to geographically diversify in order to broaden its operational base and reduce overall risk in its portfolio. The Company will strictly apply the stage gate process to its growth projects and continue its BPR program to maximize efficiency at its operations, focusing on technology and innovation where appropriate. Towards this end, at South Deep, Gold Fields will accelerate de-stress mining and introduce a new, high impact operating model.

 

   

Provide the best achievable return on gold

In order to be an appealing long-term investment, Gold Fields must deliver leverage to the gold price and attractive returns relative to peers. Gold Fields plans to prioritize cash generation with respect to current and future production. In order to achieve this, Gold Fields will continue its operational and strategic Portfolio Review to enable it to focus on cash flow growth (not just production growth) and rigorous prioritization of capital expenditure and exploration spend based on the expected risk-adjusted return on investment. Further, Gold Fields will develop a new Investor Charter with a focus on providing shareholders with increased returns against the price of gold.

 

51


Table of Contents

Reserves of Gold Fields as of December 31, 2012

Methodology

While there are some differences between the definition of the South African Code for Reporting of Exploration Results, Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves, or SAMREC Code, and that of the Securities and Exchange Commission’s, or SEC’s, industry guide number 7, only the reserves at each of Gold Fields’ operations and exploration projects as of December 31, 2012 which qualify as reserves for purposes of the SEC’s industry guide number 7 are presented in the table below. See “—Glossary of Mining Terms”. In accordance with the requirements imposed by the JSE, Gold Fields reports its reserves using the terms and definitions of the SAMREC Code (2007 edition). Mineral or ore reserves, as defined under the SAMREC Code, are divided into categories of proved and probable reserves and are expressed in terms of tonnes to be processed at mill feed head grades, allowing for estimated mining dilution, recovery and other factors.

Prior to the Spin-off, Gold Fields reported reserves using cut-off grades (international operations and South Deep) and pay limits (South Africa, excluding South Deep), due to the nature of the deep level underground operations, to ensure the reserves realistically reflect both the cost structures and required margins relevant to each mining operation. After the Spin-off, all of Gold Fields operations report reserves using cut-off grades. Cut-off grade is the grade that distinguishes the material within an ore body that is to be extracted and treated from the remaining material. The pay limit is the grade at which an ore body can be mined without profit or loss, calculated using an appropriate metal price and working costs, plus modifying factors. Modifying factors used to calculate the pay limit grades include adjustments to mill delivered amounts, due to dilution incurred in the course of mining. Modifying factors applied in estimating reserves are primarily historical, but commonly incorporate adjustments for planned operational improvements such as those described below under “—Description of Mining Business—Productivity Initiatives”. Tonnage and grade may include some mineralization below the selected pay limit and cut-off grade to ensure that the reserve comprises blocks of adequate size and continuity. Reserves also take into account cost levels at each operation and are supported by mine plans.

This submission will indicate the Gold Fields and the Sibanye Gold reserves separately as well as the combined total, to facilitate forward and backward comparison.

The estimation of reserves at the South African underground operations during fiscal 2012 was based on surface drilling, underground drilling, surface three-dimensional reflection seismics, ore body facies modeling, structural modeling, underground mapping, channel sampling and geostatistical estimation. The reefs are initially explored by drilling from the surface on an approximately 500 meter to 2,000 meter grid. Once underground access is available, drilling is undertaken on an approximately 30 meter to 90 meter grid. Underground channel sampling perpendicular to the reef is undertaken at three-meter intervals in development areas and five-meter intervals at stope faces.

The following sets out the reserve estimation methodologies for the different categories of reserves at the underground operations of each of the South African mines.

KDC (1)

 

Reserve Classification

   Sample
Spacing
Range
Min/Max
     Maximum
Distance
Data is
Projected
 
     (meters)  

Proved

     3 to 250         125   

Probable (AI) (2)

     3 to 1,140         570   

Probable (BI) (2)

     3 to 2,840         1,420   

 

Note:

(1) Gold Fields’ KDC operation was divested in the Spin-off.
(2) AI is above infrastructure; BI is below infrastructure.

 

52


Table of Contents

For proved reserves, the ore body was opened up and sampled on a three-meter spacing for development (such as raises), and a five-meter grid for stoping, together with underground borehole spacings ranging from tens to hundreds of meters. Blocks classified as proved were therefore generally adjacent to closely spaced sampling and generally pierced by a relatively dense irregular pattern of boreholes. Estimation was constrained within both geologically homogenous structural and facies zones, and was generally derived from either ordinary or simple kriged small-scale grids, ranging from 10 meter to 50 meter block sizes.

For above infrastructure probable reserves, the estimates are founded on significant numbers of samples on a three-meter spacing for development, and a five-meter grid for stoping bordering these areas. In addition underground borehole spacings ranging from tens to hundreds of meters were used together with surface boreholes and seismic surveys. Blocks classified as probable (AI) were generally adjacent to blocks classified as proved. Estimation was constrained within homogenous structural and facies zones, and was generally derived from either ordinary or simple kriged medium- to macro-scale-sized grids ranging from 50 meters to 420 meters, or through declustered averaging or Sichel “t” techniques. For planning purposes, these blocks were further evaluated to facilitate the selection of blocks above the pay limit.

For below infrastructure probable reserves, the estimates access the significant numbers of samples on a three-meter spacing for development, and a five-meter grid for stoping above these areas. In addition underground borehole spacings ranging from tens to hundreds of meters were used together with surface boreholes and seismic surveys. Blocks classified as probable (BI) were generally downdip of blocks classified as proved or probable (AI). Estimation was constrained within homogenous structural and facies zones, and was generally derived from either ordinary or simple kriged medium- to macro-scale-sized grids ranging from 50 meters to 420 meters, or through declustered averaging or Sichel “t” techniques. For planning purposes, these blocks are further evaluated to facilitate the selection of blocks above the pay limit.

Beatrix (1)

 

Reserve Classification

   Sample
Spacing
Range
Min/Max
     Maximum
Distance
Data is
Projected
 
     (meters)  

Proved

     3 to 120         120   

Probable (AI) (2)

     3 to 820         700   

Probable (BI) (2)

     3 to 1,500         750   

 

Note:

(1) Gold Fields’ Beatrix operation was divested in the Spin-off.
(2) AI is above infrastructure; BI is below infrastructure.

Estimations for proved reserves were made on the same basis as at KDC but with kriging blocks ranging from 10 meters to 40 meters.

Estimations for above infrastructure probable reserves were made on the same basis as at KDC but with medium-sized kriged blocks of 40 meters, and macro geological zone estimates being made through declustered averaging or Sichel “t” techniques or macro-scale-sized kriged grids of up to 300 meters. For planning purposes these blocks were further evaluated to facilitate the selection of blocks above the pay limit.

Estimations for below infrastructure probable reserves were made on the same basis as at KDC but with medium-sized kriged blocks being 40 meters, to macro geological zone estimates through declustered averaging or Sichel “t” techniques or macro scale sized kriged grids of up to 300 meters. The distinction between estimation techniques for above infrastructure and below infrastructure probable reserves was the same as at KDC. For planning purposes, these blocks were further evaluated to facilitate the selection of blocks above the pay limit.

 

53


Table of Contents

South Deep

 

Reserve Classification

   Sample
Spacing
Range
Min/Max
     Maximum
Distance
Data is
Projected
 
     (meters)  

Proved

     0 to 100         220   

Probable (AI) (1)

     100 to 180         450   

Probable (BI) (1)

     >180         1,200   

 

Note:

(1) AI is above infrastructure; BI is below infrastructure.

For proved reserves, the ore body must be fully destressed, with drilling planned at an approximate 30 meter by 30 meter grid-spacing. Estimation is constrained within both geologically homogenous structural and facies zones, and is generally derived from either ordinary or simple kriged small-scale grids.

For above infrastructure probable reserves, the estimates access a significant number of samples on spacing greater than the spacing for development and stoping bordering these areas. In addition, borehole spacings ranging from tens to hundreds of meters are used in conjunction with 3D seismic survey results that confirm certain structural elevations and surfaces. Reserves classified as probable above infrastructure are generally adjacent to those classified as proved. Estimation is constrained within homogenous structural and facies zones, and is generally derived from simple and ordinary kriging and through declustered averaging techniques.

For below infrastructure probable reserves, the estimates access a significant number of samples on spacing greater than the spacing for development and stoping bordering these areas. In addition, borehole spacings ranging from tens to hundreds of meters are used in conjunction with 3D seismic survey results that confirm certain structural elevations and surfaces. Reserves classified as probable below infrastructure are generally adjacent to those classified as proved or probable above infrastructure. Estimation is constrained within homogeneous structural and facies zones, and is generally derived from simple and ordinary kriging and through declustered averaging techniques.

The primary assumptions of continuity of the geologically homogenous zones are driven by the geological model, which is updated when new information arises. Any changes to the model are subject to peer, internal technical corporate and external independent consultant review. Historically, mining at South African deep-level gold mines has shown significant geological continuity, so that new mines were started based on limited surface borehole information. Customarily, geological models are primarily based on the definition of different facies within each conglomerate horizon. These facies are extrapolated along palaeocurrent and grade trends into new, undeveloped areas taking into account any surface borehole data in those areas. Normally these facies are continuous, supported by extensive historical sample databases, and can be incorporated in the macro kriging of large blocks.

Ghana

For the Tarkwa open pit operation, estimation of reserves is based on a combination of an initial 100- or 200-meter grid of diamond drilling and in certain areas a 12.5 meter to 25.0 meter grid of reverse circulation drilling. For the Damang open pit operation, estimation of reserves is based on a 20 meter to 80 meter grid of combined reverse circulation and diamond drilling and, in certain areas, reverse circulation drilling on an eight- meter by five-meter drill grid.

Diamond drilling provides continuous (solid) core from diamond drill bits, using water and chemicals for lubrication. Consequently, diamond drilling provides greater resolution of geological parameters such as lithologies, alterations, mineralization and structures.

 

54


Table of Contents

In surface drilling programs, reverse circulation drilling provides chip samples from percussion hammers powered by compressed air. The chips are transferred to surface up a central tube with the rods to eliminate contamination from the outer hole. Sampling is generally conducted at intervals relevant to the block model and mining dimensions. Reverse circulation drilling is generally quicker and less expensive than diamond drilling. However, there is a depth limitation to reverse circulation drilling and consequently all deep holes are conducted by diamond drilling.

Generally exploration programs will consist of a mix of reverse circulation and diamond drilling in order to provide the necessary geological resolution, as well as bulk analytical data for evaluation purposes. Infill drilling programs are usually conducted by reverse circulation, as are grade control drilling programs.

Australia

At the Australian operations, the estimation of reserves for both underground and open pit operations is based on exploration, sampling and testing information gathered through appropriate techniques, primarily from boreholes and mine development. The locations of sample points are spaced close enough to deduce or confirm geological and grade continuity. Generally, drilling is undertaken on grids, which range between 20 meters by 20 meters to 40 meters by 40 meters, although this may vary depending on the continuity of the ore body. Due to the variety and diversity of mineralization at St. Ives and Agnew, sample spacing may also vary depending on each particular ore type.

Peru

For the Cerro Corona operation, estimation is based on diamond drill and reverse circulation holes. The spacing of holes at Cerro Corona is generally around 50 meters, with some areas approximating a 25 meter grid.

 

55


Table of Contents

Reserve Statement

The gold and copper reserves of the Gold Fields and the Sibanye Gold operating mines are reported separately, with a combined total to facilitate comparisons. As of December 31, 2012, Gold Fields (excluding the Sibanye Gold assets) had aggregate attributable proved and probable reserves of approximately 54.9 million ounces gold and 1,024 million pounds copper as set forth in the following tables:

 

    Gold ore reserve statement as of December 31, 2012 (1)  
    Proved reserves     Probable reserves     Total reserves     Attributable
gold
production
in fiscal
2012 (2)
 
    Tonnes     Head Grade     Gold     Tonnes     Head Grade     Gold     Tonnes     Head Grade     Gold    
    (million)     (g/t)     (M oz)     (million)     (g/t)     (M oz)     (million)     (g/t)     (M oz)     (M oz)  

Underground (“UG”) South Africa

                   

South Deep (total) (3)

    14.39        5.8        2.660        191.27        5.4        33.362        205.66        5.4        36.022        0.270   

Australia

                   

St. Ives

    0.80        5.9        0.151        7.16        4.4        1.023        7.96        4.6        1.174        0.258   

Agnew

    0.89        6.2        0.177        4.91        6.1        0.966        5.81        6.1        1.143        0.160   

Total Underground

    16.08        5.8        2.988        203.35        5.4        35.351        219.42        5.4        38.339        0.688   

Total Surface (Rock Dumps & Tailings Storage Facilities, or TSFs)

    —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —     

South Deep

    —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —     

Surface (Production Stockpiles)

                   

Ghana

                   

Tarkwa

    3.69        0.7        0.087        50.4        0.4        0.616        54.09        0.4        0.703        —     

Damang

    —          —          —          2.32        0.9        0.066        2.32        0.9        0.066        —     

Australia

                   

St. Ives

    4.13        1.0        0.129        —          —          —          4.13        1.0        0.129        —     

Agnew

    0.22        1.5        0.011        —          —          —          0.22        1.5        0.011        —     

Peru

                   

Cerro Corona

    —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —     

Surface (Open Pit)

                   

Ghana (4)

                   

Tarkwa

    93.49        1.3        3.874        116.37        1.2        4.496        209.86        1.2        8.370        0.647   

Damang

    7.86        1.8        0.458        58.33        1.7        3.156        66.19        1.7        3.614        0.149   

Australia (4)

                   

St. Ives

    0.29        1.4        0.013        13.43        2.0        0.873        13.72        2.0        0.886        0.192   

Agnew

    —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —          0.000   

Peru

                   

Cerro Corona

    76.24        0.9        2.180        25.89        0.7        0.555        102.13        0.8        2.735        0.168   

Total Surface

    185.91        1.1        6.753        266.74        1.1        9.762        452.65        1.1        16.515        1.157   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Grand Total

    201.99        1.5        9.741        470.09        3.0        45.114        672.07        2.5        54.855        1.845   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

Notes:

(1) (a)

Quoted as mill delivered metric tonnes and Run of Mine, or RoM, grades, inclusive of all mining dilutions and gold losses except mill recovery. Metallurgical recovery factors have not been applied to the reserve figures. The approximate metallurgical factors are as follows: (1) South Deep 96.5%; (2) Tarkwa 97% for milling, 61% for heap leach; (3) Damang 89% to 92%; (4) St. Ives 83% to 94% for milling; (5) Agnew 94.5%; and (6) Cerro Corona 51% to 70% for gold and 65% to 88% for copper. The metallurgical recovery is the ratio, expressed as a percentage, of the mass of the specific mineral product actually recovered from ore treated at the plant to its total specific mineral content before treatment. The South African operations have a fairly consistent metallurgical recovery, while the recoveries on the International operations vary according to the mix of the source material and method of treatment.

  (b)

For South Deep, a gold price of Rand 380,000 per kilogram ($1,500 per ounce at an exchange rate of Rand 7.88 per $1.00) was applied in valuing ore reserve. For the Tarkwa and Damang operations, ore reserve figures are based on an optimized pit at a gold price of $1,500 per ounce. For the Australian operations, ore reserve figures are based on a gold price of A$1,500 per ounce (at an exchange rate of A$1 per $1.00). Open pit ore reserves at the Australian operations are similarly based on optimized pits. The gold

 

56


Table of Contents
  price used for reserves is the approximate three-year trailing average, calculated on a monthly basis, of the London afternoon fixing price of gold. These prices are approximately 23% higher in South African Rand terms, 15% higher in U.S. dollar terms and 7% higher in Australian dollar terms, than the prices used for the December 31, 2011 declaration and reflect the effect of a consistently increasing gold price on historical average. For the Cerro Corona gold reserves, the optimized pit is based on a gold price of $1,500 per ounce and a copper price of $3.50 per pound, which, due to the nature of the deposit and the importance of net smelter returns, need to be considered together.
  (c) For the South African operations, mine dilution relates to the difference between the mill tonnage and the stope face tonnage and includes other sources stoping (which is waste that is broken on the mining horizon, other than on the stope face), development to mill and tonnage discrepancy (which is the difference between the tonnage expected on the basis of the mine’s measuring methods and the tonnage accounted for by the plant). For the International operations, dilution relates to planned and unplanned waste and/or low-grade material being mined and delivered to the mill. Ranges are given for those operations that have multiple ore body styles and mining methodologies. The mine dilution factors are as follows: (i) South Deep 8%; (ii) Tarkwa 11%; (iii) Damang 6% to 27%; (Includes both planned and unplanned); (iv) St. Ives 6% to 20% (open pits) and 5% to 40% (underground); (v) Agnew 15% to 26%; and (vi) Cerro Corona 0%.
  (d) The mining recovery factor relates to the proportion or percentage of ore mined from the defined ore body at the gold price used for the declaration of reserves. This percentage will vary from mining area to mining area and reflects planned and scheduled reserves against total potentially available reserves (at the gold price used for the declaration of reserves), with all modifying factors, mining constraints and pillar discounts applied. The mining recovery factors are as follows: (i) Tarkwa 100%; (ii) Damang 95%; (iii) St. Ives 95% to 99% (open pits) and 75% to 95% (underground); (iv) Agnew 107%; and (v) South Deep 97 %.
  (e) The cut-off grade may vary per shaft, open pit or underground mine, depending on the respective costs, depletion schedule, ore type and dilution. The following are the average or range of values applied in the planning process (i) South Deep 3.5 g/t; (ii) Tarkwa 0.37 to 0.77 g/t for heap leach and 0.42 g/t for mill feed; (iii) Damang 0.68-0.79 g/t for fresh ore and 0.52-0.65 g/t for oxide ore; (iv) St. Ives 0.8 g/t for mill feed—open pit, and 2.3 g/t to 3.0 g/t for mill feed—underground; (v) Agnew 0.38 g/t for mill feed—open pit, and to 3.1 to 4.4 g/t for mill feed—underground; and (vi) Cerro Corona $18.46/t net smelter return (combined copper and gold).
  (f) Totals may not sum due to rounding. Where this occurs it is not deemed significant.
  (g) A Mine Call Factor based on historic performance and planned improvements is applied to the mineral reserves. The following Mine Call Factors have been applied: Damang 89% to 92%, St.Ives 98%, with South Deep, Agnew, Tarkwa and Cerro Corona at 100%.
(2) Actual gold produced after metallurgical recovery.
(3) In line with other international operations, all South Deep reserves are classed as above infrastructure, as the reserves will be accessed by means of on-going declines from current infrastructure.
(4) Includes some gold produced from stockpile material, which cannot be separately measured.

The following table sets forth the proved and probable copper reserves of the Cerro Corona mine as of December 31, 2012 that are attributable to Gold Fields.

 

    Copper ore reserve statement as of December 31, 2012 (1)(2)  
    Proved reserves     Probable reserves     Total reserves     Attributable
copper
production
in Fiscal
2012
 
    Tonnes     Grade Cu     Cu     Tonnes     Grade Cu     Cu     Tonnes     Grade Cu     Cu    
    (million)     (%)     (million lbs)     (million)     (%)     (million lbs)     (million)     (%)     (million lbs)     (million lbs)  

Surface (Open Pit & Stockpiles)

                   

Peru

                   

Cerro Corona

    76.3        0.5        787        25.9        0.4        237        102.1        0.5        1,024        79   

 

Notes:

(1) Metallurgical recovery factors have not been applied to the reserve figures. The approximate metallurgical factor for copper at Cerro Corona is in the range of 65% to 88%, depending on the material type.
(2) For the copper reserves, the optimized pit is based on a gold price of $1,500 per ounce and a copper price of $3.50 per pound, which, due to the nature of the deposit, need to be considered together.

 

57


Table of Contents

As of December 31, 2012, Sibanye Gold had aggregate attributable proved and probable reserves of approximately 13.5 million ounces as set forth in the following table:

Gold ore reserve statement as of December 31, 2012 (1)

 

    Proved reserves     Probable reserves     Total reserves     Attributable
Gold
production in
the
12 months
ended
December 31,
2012 (2)
 
    Tonnes     Head Grade     Gold     Tonnes     Head Grade     Gold     Tonnes     Head Grade     Gold    
    (million)     (g/t)     (M oz)     (million)     (g/t)     (M oz)     (million)     (g/t)     (M oz)     (M oz)  

Underground (“UG”)

                   

KDC East (UG) (total)

    10.8        9.8        3.421        9.6        6.6        2.041        20.5        8.3        5.462        0.446   

Above infrastructure (3)

    10.8        9.8        3.421        9.6        6.6        2.041        20.5        8.3        5.462        0.446   

Below infrastructure (3)

    —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —     

KDC West (UG) (total)

    7.1        7.9        1.802        10.5        7.2        2.424        17.5        7.5        4.226        0.359   

Above infrastructure (3)

    7.1        7.9        1.802        10.5        7.2        2.424        17.5        7.5        4.226        0.359   

Below infrastructure (3)

    —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —     

Beatrix (UG) (total)

    9.6        4.7        1.462        14.4        4.0        1.859        24.0        4.3        3.321        0.278   

Above infrastructure (3)

    9.6        4.7        1.462        14.4        4.0        1.859        24.0        4.3        3.321        0.278   

Below infrastructure (3)

    —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —     

Total Underground

    27.5        7.5        6.685        34.5        5.7        6.324        62.0        6.5        13.009        1.084   

Surface (SRD)

                   

KDC East

    —          —          —          17.3        0.6        0.342        17.3        0.6        0.342        0.048   

KDC West

    —          —          —          5.9        0.7        0.142        5.9        0.7        0.142        0.082   

Beatrix

    —          —          —          4.0        0.3        0.037        4.0        0.3        0.037        0.010   

Total Surface (SRD)

    —          —          —          27.2        0.6        0.521        27.2        0.6        0.521        0.140   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Grand Total

    27.5        7.5        6.685        61.7        3.5        6.845        89.3        4.7        13.530        1.224   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

Notes:

(1) (a)

Quoted as mill delivered metric tonnes and RoM, grades, inclusive of all mining dilutions and gold losses except mill recovery. Metallurgical recovery factors have not been applied to the reserve figures. The approximate metallurgical factors are as follows: (i) KDC East KP 1 overall 80%, KDC East KP 2 overall 97% and KDC East Python 1 overall 68%. KDC West DP 1 overall 97%, KDC West DP 2 and DP 3 overall 90%, and (ii) Beatrix overall 95.5%. The metallurgical recovery is the ratio, expressed as a percentage, of the mass of the specific mineral product actually recovered from ore treated at the plant to its total specific mineral content before treatment. The South African operations have a fairly consistent metallurgical recovery.

  (b) For KDC and Beatrix, a gold price of R380,000 per kilogram ($1,500 per ounce at an exchange rate of R7.88 per $1.00) was applied in valuing the ore reserve. The gold price used for reserves is the approximate three-year trailing average, calculated on a monthly basis, of the London afternoon fixing price of gold. These prices are approximately 22% higher in South African Rand terms than the prices used for the December 31, 2011 declaration.
  (c) For the South African operations, mine dilution relates to the difference between the mill tonnage and the stope face tonnage and includes other sources stoping (which is waste that is broken on the mining horizon, other than on the stope face), development to mill and tonnage discrepancy (which is the difference between the tonnage expected on the basis of the mine’s measuring methods and the tonnage accounted for by the plant). The mine dilution factors are as follows: (i) KDC East 28%; (ii) KDC West 30% and (iii) Beatrix 19%.
  (d) The mining recovery factor relates to the proportion or percentage of ore mined from the defined ore body at the gold price used for the declaration of reserves. This percentage will vary from mining area to mining area and reflects planned and scheduled reserves against total potentially available reserves (at the gold price used for the declaration of reserves), with all modifying factors, mining constraints and pillar discounts applied. The mining recovery factors are as follows: (i) KDC East 77%; (ii) KDC West 93% and (iii) Beatrix 58%.
  (e) The pay limit varies per shaft or underground mine, depending on the respective costs, depletion schedule, ore type and dilution. The following are the average or range of values applied in the planning process: (i) KDC East 1,500 cm.g/t, (ii) KDC West 1,360 cm.g/t and (iii) Beatrix 950 cm.g/t.
  (f) Totals may not sum due to rounding. Where this occurs, it is not deemed significant.
  (g) A mine call factor based on historic performance and planned improvements is applied to the mineral reserves. The following mine call factors have been applied: KDC East 81%, KDC West 80% and Beatrix 77%.
(2) Actual gold produced after metallurgical recovery.

 

58


Table of Contents
(3) Above infrastructure reserves relate to mineralization which is located at a level at which an operation currently has infrastructure sufficient to allow mining operations to occur. Below infrastructure reserves relate to mineralization which is located at a level at which an operation currently does not have infrastructure sufficient to allow mining operations to occur, but where the operation has made plans to install additional infrastructure in the future which will allow mining to occur at that level.

As of December 31, 2012, the combined Gold Fields and Sibanye Gold had aggregate attributable proved and probable gold reserves of approximately 68.4 million ounces as set forth in the following table:

 

    Combined gold ore reserve statement as of December 31, 2012  
    Proved reserves     Probable reserves     Total reserves     Attributable
gold
production
in fiscal
2012 (2)
 
    Tonnes     Head Grade     Gold     Tonnes     Head Grade     Gold     Tonnes     Head Grade     Gold    
    (million)     (g/t)     (M oz)     (million)     (g/t)     (M oz)     (million)     (g/t)     (M oz)     (M oz)  

Totals by Mine

                   

KDC

    17.92        9.1        5.223        43.33        3.6        4.949        61.25        5.2        10.173        0.935   

South Deep

    14.39        5.8        2.660        191.27        5.4        33.362        205.66        5.4        36.022        0.270   

Beatrix

    9.61        4.7        1.462        18.40        3.2        1.896        28.01        3.7        3.358        0.289   

Tarkwa

    97.18        1.3        3.961        166.77        1.0        5.112        263.94        1.1        9.073        0.647   

Damang

    7.86        1.8        0.458        60.65        1.7        3.223        68.51        1.7        3.681        0.149   

St. Ives

    5.21        1.8        0.294        20.59        2.9        1.896        25.80        2.6        2.190        0.450   

Agnew

    1.12        5.2        0.188        4.91        6.1        0.966        6.03        6.0        1.154        0.177   

Cerro Corona

    76.24        0.9        2.180        25.89        0.7        0.555        102.13        0.8        2.735        0.168   

Grand Total

    229.53        2.2        16.426        531.81        3.0        51.959        761.20        2.8        68.385        3.085   

Gold and copper price sensitivity

The amount of gold mineralization that Gold Fields and Sibanye Gold can economically extract, and therefore can classify as reserves, is sensitive to fluctuations in the price of gold. The following table indicates Gold Fields’ and Sibanye Gold’s attributable reserves at different gold prices that are 10% above and below the $1,500 per ounce gold price used to estimate Gold Fields’ and Sibanye Gold attributable reserves, however the reserve sensitivities are not based on detailed depletion schedules and should be considered on a relative and indicative basis only.

 

     $1,350/oz      $1,500/oz      $1,650/oz  
     (Moz)  

KDC (1)(2)

     8.8         10.1         11.2   

Beatrix (1)(2)

     3.2         3.4         3.7   

South Deep

     33.8         36.0         41.5   

Tarkwa

     8.4         9.1         9.6   

Damang

     3.3         3.7         4.0   

St. Ives

     1.9         2.1         2.5   

Agnew

     1.0         1.2         1.2   

Cerro Corona (3)

     2.7         2.7         2.7   

 

Notes:

(1) South African operations’ reserves include run-of-mine ore stockpiles and low-grade strategic stockpiles.
(2) Gold Fields’ KDC and Beatrix operations were divested in the Spin-off.
(3) Under the current tailings dam design at Cerro Corona, reserves would not respond to an upward movement of the gold price because of current capacity constraints at the tailings storage facility for the Cerro Corona mine. A decrease of 10% in gold prices is insufficient to affect the level of gold reserves.

The London afternoon fixing price for gold on May 9, 2013 was U.S.$1,466 per ounce. Gold Fields’ and Sibanye Gold’s combined attributable gold reserves decreased from 77.6 million ounces at December 31, 2011 to

 

59


Table of Contents

68.4 million ounces at December 31, 2012, primarily due to exclusion of the TSF reserves at the KDC complex, exclusion of pillars and projects due to changing economics and changes in geology and modeling at the Sibanye Gold assets.

The amount of copper mineralization that Gold Fields can economically extract, and therefore can classify as reserves, could be sensitive to fluctuations in the price of copper. However, under the current tailings dam design at Cerro Corona, reserves would not respond to an upward movement of the copper price because of current capacity constraints at the tailings storage facility for Cerro Corona and a decrease of 10% in copper prices is insufficient to affect the level of copper reserves.

The London Metal Exchange, or LME, cash settlement price for copper on May 9, 2013 was U.S.$7,311 per tonne.

Gold Fields’ methodology for determining its reserves is subject to change and is based upon estimates and assumptions made by management regarding a number of factors as noted above under “—Methodology”. Accordingly, the sensitivity analysis of Gold Fields’ reserves provided above should not be relied upon as indicative of what the estimate of Gold Fields’ reserves would actually be or have been at the gold or copper prices indicated, or at any other gold or copper price, nor should it be relied upon as a basis for estimating Gold Fields’ ore reserves based on the current gold or copper price or what Gold Fields’ reserves will be at any time in the future. See “Risk Factors—Gold Fields’ reserves are estimates based on a number of assumptions, any changes to which may require Gold Fields to lower its estimated reserves.”

Geology

Prior to the Spin-off, approximately 48% of Gold Fields’ gold production (excluding gold equivalent ounces) was derived from deep-level underground gold mines located along the northern and western margins of the Witwatersrand Basin in South Africa. Including gold equivalent ounces, Gold Fields’ South African operations represented approximately 46% of total production. These properties included the KDC operation, the Beatrix operation and the South Deep operation. After the Spin-off, only 15% of Gold Fields’ gold production (excluding gold equivalent ounces) was derived from deep-level underground gold mines located along the northern and western margins of the Witwatersrand Basin in South Africa. The KDC, Beatrix and South Deep mines are typical of the many Witwatersrand Basin operations, which have been the primary contributors to South Africa’s production of a significant portion of the world’s recorded gold output since 1886.

The Witwatersrand Basin comprises a 6,000 meter vertical thickness of sedimentary rocks, extending laterally for some 350 kilometers northeast to southwest by some 1,200 kilometers northwest to southeast, generally dipping at shallow angles toward the center of the basin. The basin outcrops at its northern extent near Johannesburg but to the west, south and east it is overlaid by up to 4,000 meters of volcanic and sedimentary rocks. The Witwatersrand Basin is Archaean in age, meaning the sedimentary rocks are of the order of 2.8 billion years old.

Gold mineralization occurs within laterally extensive quartz pebble conglomerate horizons called reefs, which are developed above unconformable surfaces near the basin margin. As a result of faulting and primary controls on mineralization processes, the goldfields are not continuous and are characterized by the presence or dominance of different reef units. The reefs are generally less than two meters in thickness and are widely considered to represent laterally extensive braided fluvial deposits or unconfined flow deposits, which formed along the flanks of alluvial fan systems around the edge of an inland sea. Dykes and sills of diabase or dolerite composition are developed within the Witwatersrand Basin and are associated with several intrusive and extrusive events.

Gold generally occurs in native form, often associated with pyrite, carbon and uranium. Pyrite and gold within the reefs display a variety of forms, some obviously indicative of detrital transport within the depositional system and others suggesting crystallization within the reef itself.

 

60


Table of Contents

The most fundamental controls of gold distribution are the primary sedimentary features such as facies variation and channel directions. Consequently, the modeling of sedimentary features within the reefs and the correlation of payable grades within certain facies is key to in situ reserve estimation as well as effective operational mine planning and grade control.

For a discussion of the geological features present at the Tarkwa, Damang, St. Ives, Agnew and the Cerro Corona mines, see the geology discussion contained in the description of each of those mines found below under “—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—Ghana Operations—Tarkwa Mine,” “—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations— Ghana Operations—Damang Mine,” “—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—Australia Operations—St. Ives,” “—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—Australia Operations—Agnew”, “—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—Peru Operations—Cerro Corona”.

Description of Mining Business

The discussion below provides a general overview of the mining business as it applies to Gold Fields.

Exploration

Exploration activities are focused on the extension of existing ore bodies and identification of new ore bodies both at existing sites and at undeveloped sites. Once a potential ore body has been discovered, exploration is extended and intensified in order to enable clearer definition of the ore body and the potential portions to be mined. Geological and geophysical techniques are constantly refined to improve the economic viability of prospecting and mining activities.

Mining

Gold Fields currently mines only gold, with copper and silver as by-products. The mining process can be divided into two principal activities: (i) developing access to the ore body; and (ii) extracting the ore body once accessed. These two processes apply to both surface and underground mines.

Underground Mining

Developing Access to the Ore body

In fiscal 2012 and before, for Gold Fields’ South African underground mines, primary access to ore bodies was provided through vertical and inclined shaft systems. If access beyond the reach of a shaft or shaft system was required to fully exploit the ore body, sub-vertical or sub-inclined shafts (secondary or tertiary) were sunk where it was economically feasible. Horizontal and decline development at various intervals off a shaft, known as levels, extended laterally and provided access to the reef horizon. On-reef development opened up the ore body for mining.

Extracting the Ore body

Once an ore body has been accessed and opened up for mining, production activities consisting of drilling, blasting, supporting and cleaning activities are carried out on a daily basis. Prior to the Spin-off, at KDC and Beatrix, the broken ore was scraped into and along gullies to in-stope ore passes, which channeled the broken ore to the crosscut below. The ore was then trammed by rail to the shaft system where it was tipped into transfer systems and then hoisted to the surface in skips. At South Deep, a fully mechanized mine and Gold Fields’ remaining South African operation, the broken ore is loaded from the stope face into trucks using mechanical loaders and hauled along decline corridors to ore pass systems which connect the corridors to the crosscuts below. The ore is then transported by rail and tipped into the shaft transfer system and hoisted to the surface. At

 

61


Table of Contents

the Australian underground operations, the broken ore is loaded straight from the stope face into trucks, using mechanical loaders, and hauled to the surface by underground dump trucks via the decline. Mining methods employed at Gold Fields’ South African operations included de-stress mining, long hole open stoping and drift-and-fill mining, as well as drifting and benching at South Deep, and longwall mining, closely spaced dip pillar mining and scattered mining at KDC and Beatrix. Following the Spin-off, the KDC and Beatrix operations have been separated from Gold Fields. At the Australian underground operations, all mining activities are mechanized and trackless.

Open Pit-Mining

Opening up the Ore body

In open-pit mining, access to the ore is achieved by stripping the overburden in benches of fixed height to expose the ore below. This is most typically achieved by drilling and blasting an area, loading the broken rock with excavators into dump trucks and hauling the rock and/or soil to dumps.

Extracting the Ore body

Extraction of the ore body in open pit mining involves the same activity as in stripping the overburden. Lines are established demarcating ore from waste material and the rock is then drilled and blasted. The ore is loaded into dump trucks and hauled to the crusher or stockpile, while the waste is hauled to waste rock dumps.

Rock Dump and Production Stockpile Mining

Gold Fields mines surface rock dumps and production stockpiles using mechanized earth-moving equipment.

Mine Planning and Management

Operational and planning management on the mines receives support from Group Technical Services and corporate management as well as other regional support functions. The current philosophy is one of top-down/bottom-up management, with the non-financial operational objectives at each mine defined by the personnel at the mine based on parameters, objectives and guidelines provided by Gold Fields’ corporate office. This is based on the premise that the people on the ground have the best understanding of what is realistically achievable.

Each operation compiles a detailed two-year operational plan that rolls into a life of mine, or LoM, plan prior to the commencement of each fiscal year. The plans are based on financial parameters determined by the Gold Fields Executive Committee, or the Executive Committee. See “Directors, Senior Management and Employees—Executive Committee”. The operational plan is presented to the Executive Committee, which takes it to the Board for approval before the commencement of each fiscal year. The planning process is sequential and is based upon geological models, evaluation models, resource models, mine design, depletion schedules and, ultimately, financial analysis. Capital planning is formalized pursuant to Gold Fields’ capital spending planning process. Projects are categorized in terms of total expenditure, and all projects involving amounts exceeding R250 million (South Africa), A$35 million (Australia) and U.S.$35 million (Ghana/Peru) are submitted to the Board for approval. Material changes to the plans have to be referred back to the Executive Committee and the Board.

The Sibanye Gold assets implemented an integrated electronic reserve and resource information system, or IRRIS, to enhance LoM planning capabilities. This system provides a common planning platform to facilitate quicker, more flexible and more accurate short- and long-term planning and more timely identification of production shortfalls. Short-term planning on the operations is conducted monthly and aligned with the operational plan. Financial and economic parameters for the LoM and the operational plan are issued to the

 

62


Table of Contents

operations from the Executive Committee and relevant survey and evaluation factors are determined in accordance with Gold Fields’ guidelines. Significant changes in the LoM plans may occur from year-to-year as a result of mining experience, new ore discoveries, changes in the ore reserve estimates, changes in mining methods and rates, process changes, investment in new equipment and technology, input costs and metal prices.

Capital Expenditure

Gold Fields spent approximately U.S.$1,322.8 million, U.S.$1,153.0 million and U.S.$913.1 million in capital expenditure during fiscal 2012, fiscal 2011 and fiscal 2010, respectively. The major expenditure items in fiscal 2012 were ore reserve development at the South African operations of U.S.$259.8 million, U.S.$314.5 million on the development and equipping of the South Deep mine, U.S.$112.4 million on development at underground mines at St. Ives, U.S.$12.7 million on the water treatment plant and U.S.$62.5 million on new mining equipment at Tarkwa, U.S.$2.6 million on new mining fleet at Damang and U.S.$31.7 million on the development of the Waroonga underground complex at Agnew. In fiscal 2011, the major expenditure items included ore reserve development at the South African operations of U.S.$294.5 million, U.S.$274.6 million on the development and equipping of the South Deep mine, U.S.$81.5 million on development at underground mines at St. Ives, U.S.$29.7 million on the new mining equipment and U.S.$18.8 million on the carbon-in-leach expansion project at Tarkwa, U.S.$17.3 million on new mining fleet at Damang and U.S.$36.4 million on the development of the Waroonga underground complex at Agnew. In fiscal 2010, the major expenditure items included ore reserve development at the South African operations of U.S.$235.1 million, U.S.$212.8 million on the development and equipping of the South Deep mine, U.S.$65.8 million on development at underground mines at St. Ives, U.S.$24 million on the new mining equipment at Tarkwa, U.S.$12 million on additional mining fleet and U.S.$21.1 million on the development of the Waroonga underground complex at Agnew.

For more information regarding Gold Fields’ capital expenditure, see “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—KDC Operation—Capital Expenditure”, “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—Beatrix Operation—Capital Expenditure”, “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—South Deep Operation—Capital Expenditure”, “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—Tarkwa Mine—Capital Expenditure”, “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—Damang Mine—Capital Expenditure”, “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—Australia Operations—St. Ives—Capital Expenditure”, “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—Australia Operations—Agnew—Capital Expenditure”, “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—Cerro Corona—Capital Expenditure”, “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Capital Expenditures” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Liquidity and Capital Resources”.

Processing

Prior to the Spin-off, Gold Fields had 16 gold processing facilities (nine in South Africa, three in Ghana, three in Australia and one in Peru), which treated ore to extract gold and, in the case of Cerro Corona, copper and gold. After the Spin-off, Gold Fields has seven gold processing facilities (one in South Africa, three in Ghana, two in Australia and one in Peru). A typical processing plant circuit includes two phases: comminution and treatment.

Comminution

Comminution is the process of breaking up the ore to expose and liberate the gold and make it available for treatment. Conventionally, this process occurs in multi-stage crushing and milling circuits, which include the use of jaw and gyratory crushers and rod, tube, ball and semi-autogenous grinding, or SAG, mills. Most of Gold Fields’ milling circuits utilize SAG milling where the ore itself and steel balls are used as the primary grinding media. Through the comminution process, ore is ground to a pre-determined size before proceeding to the treatment phase.

 

63


Table of Contents

Treatment

In most of Gold Fields’ metallurgical plants, gold is extracted into a leach solution by leaching with cyanide in agitated tanks. Gold is then extracted onto activated carbon from the solution using either the carbon in leach, or CIL, or carbon in pulp, or CIP, process. The activated carbon is then eluted with the gold recovered by electrowinning.

Gold Fields has one active heap leach operation. In the heap leach process, crushed ore is stacked on impervious leach pads and a cyanide leaching solution is irrigated onto the pile. The solution percolates through the heap and dissolves liberated gold. A system of underdrains removes the gold-containing solution, which is then passed through columns containing activated carbon. The loaded carbon is then eluted and the gold recovered by electrowinning.

As a final recovery step, gold recovered from the carbon using the above processes is smelted to produce gold dore bars. These bars are then transported to the refinery which is responsible for further refining.

At Cerro Corona, gold/copper concentrate is produced using a standard flotation process. The copper concentrate is then shipped to a third-party smelter for further processing.

Productivity and Cost Initiatives

Gold Fields’ undertook a number of productivity and cost projects in order to ensure that focus was only on those projects with substantial value beyond the next five years. The result of the review was the identification of a suite of projects, as noted below:

The BPR program , which commenced in the second half of 2010, focuses on operating costs, the rationalization of on-mine and regional overhead and review of the mine-to-mill process. The BPR program has been implemented across the Group. The BPR program has focused on reviewing the business processes at Gold Fields’ mines, including operational production processes, costs and capital structures. The goals of the plan are to achieve a sustainable gold output at an NCE margin of 20% in the short-term and 25% in the long-term. The project consists of 326 initiatives across Gold Fields’ operations. The second phase of the project, which was incorporated into the 2012 operational plans, sought to achieve cost reductions through revising organizational structures and optimizing business processes, including enhanced supply chain management, reducing employee and non-specialized contractor headcount, and power consumption reduction. During fiscal 2012, the BPR program continued to implement new business blueprints and appropriate organizational structures to support sustainable gold output at the target NCE margins.

The Portfolio Review is a review of the portfolio of operations and projects, which is intended to enable Gold Fields to increase its focus on providing shareholders with increased returns against the price of gold. The goal of the Portfolio Review is to focus on cash flow growth (not just production growth) and rigorous prioritization of capital expenditure and exploration spend based on the expected risk-adjusted return on investment.

Noise and Dust Management System (Formerly Project 4M)— Achievement of the MHSC Milestones, as agreed to on June 15, 2003. This initiative focuses on the MHSC milestones agreed to on June 15, 2003 at a tripartite health and safety summit comprising representatives from the government, organized labor unions and associations, and mining companies. The focus is on achieving occupational health and safety targets and milestones over a 10 year period. In order to meet the MHSC’s milestone noise-induced hearing loss, or NIHL, target of reducing the total noise level to not more than 110 dBA, including individual pieces of equipment, a number of action plans, based on the highest potential exposure sources, were implemented and are ongoing. These include, inter alia: the silencing of all auxiliary fans, pneumatic loaders and diamond drills. South Africa also has a legislated personal Occupational Exposure Level, or OEL, of 85 dBA. Both the DMR and the Chamber of Mines accept the use of hearing protection devices while methods of reducing noise are explored. As of December 31, 2012, NIHL exposure above 85 dBA across all operations was 47%. This measurement excludes protection from hearing protection devices. Studies indicate that with the proper use of currently available ear

 

64


Table of Contents

protection devices no employee will be subject to a sound pressure level in excess of 85 dBA. A project to measure exposure while using hearing protective devices to provide further verification was started in September 2012 and is ongoing. 1.2% of all noise measurements taken were above 110 dBA, with one reading measured at a rock drill machine in a small confined space and five readings being measurements of fans where silencers must be replaced due to corrosion. Silencing of equipment is ongoing, with continued focus on replacing blocked and/or damaged silencers on machines.

Silicosis remains one of the biggest health risks associated with the gold mining industry. In order to meet the silicosis target of reducing all silica dust measurement to below 0.1 mg/m 3 a number of action plans, based on the highest potential exposure sources, were implemented. These include, inter alia : building health rooms at the training centers to coach employees on potential exposures and wearing of respiratory personal protection equipment, the installation of tip foggers, tip doors and foot wall treatment, all designed to reduce the liberation of dust into the ventilating air, installing dual stage tip filter units to improve dust filtration, managing the opening and closing of ore transfer chutes to reduce airborne dust, treating footwalls with binding chemicals to prevent dust in intake airways and analyzing individual filters to assist in determining exposure levels. As of December 31, 2012, only 3.5% of silica dust measurements taken were above the target of 0.1 mg/m3. Progress against all interventions is monitored monthly and reviewed quarterly. See “Directors, Senior Management and Employees—Health and Safety—Safety”. The sampling strategies have been updated to ensure compliance to the new Mandatory Airborne Pollutant Code of Practise requirements. Under this new strategy, the number of samples taken at the respective operations are expected to increase significantly to ensure that workplaces are represented separately.

The Heavy Mining Equipment, or HME , Strategy —This is the initiation of a new, medium-term HME Strategy to support Gold Fields’ shift towards owner-mining. The strategy is based on analysis and communication of sector best practice across the Group, as well as through the development of Group-wide guidance and protocols, including around fleet management systems, enhancement of tire life, road maintenance, condition monitoring and planned maintenance. This is with the ultimate aim of optimizing HME utilization and availability and of establishing internal benchmarking of performance, as well as the transferability of skills and equipment across the Group.

The Planning Handbook —Gold Fields developed a Group-wide Planning Handbook to ensure consistency of approach and to mitigate the potential impacts of personnel turnover.

Mine Reconciliation and Ore Flow Accounting is a project initiated in late 2011 to analyze and assess mining process performance across the Group and provide operations with action plans to enhance their performance from the stope to the pouring of gold, including the minimization of dilution. The findings from this project are currently being implemented by a dedicated, multidisciplinary team made up of internal and external experts, who have conducted extensive fieldwork at each of Gold Fields’ operations. Full implementation of this medium-term project has the potential to positively impact the Group NCE margin.

Sponsorship of the Coalition for Eco-Efficient Comminution , or CEEC —The CEEC, of which the Company’s CEO, is a patron, is a cross-sector initiative to improve blasting, crushing and grinding techniques to lower operating costs and carbon emissions. This includes a focus on more efficient separation of waste rock, improved combinations of grinding technologies and the targeting of larger grind sizes where practicable. By establishing comminution baselines at our processing plants and applying CEEC methodologies, Gold Fields is targeting a 5% reduction in power consumption per tonne treated.

Refining and Marketing

South Africa

Gold Fields has appointed Rand Refinery Proprietary Limited, or Rand Refinery, to refine all of Gold Fields’ South African-produced gold. Rand Refinery is a non-listed private company in which Gold Fields and

 

65


Table of Contents

Sibanye Gold, formerly a wholly owned subsidiary of Gold Fields, jointly held a 34.9% interest prior to the Spin-off. After the Spin-off, Gold Fields holds a 1.8% interest, with the remaining interests held by other South African gold producers, including Sibanye Gold, which holds a 33.1% interest. After the Spin-off, Rand Refinery has continued to refine the gold produced by the South Deep operation.

Prior to the Spin-off, Gold Fields’ treasury department arranged the sale of all the gold production from the South African operations. After the Spin-off, Gold Fields’ treasury department has continued to arrange the sale of all gold production from the South Deep operation. Rand Refinery advises Gold Fields on a daily basis of the amount of gold available for sale. Gold Fields sells the gold at a price benchmarked against the London afternoon fixing price. Two business days after the sale of gold, Gold Fields deposits an amount in U.S. dollars equal to the value of the gold at the London afternoon fixing price into Rand Refinery’s nominated U.S. dollar account. Rand Refinery deducts refining charges payable by Gold Fields relating to such amount of gold and deposits the balance of the proceeds into the nominated U.S. dollar account of Gold Fields.

Ghana

All gold produced by Gold Fields at the Tarkwa and Damang mines in Ghana is refined by Rand Refinery pursuant to a revised two-year fixed contract entered into in February 2012 between Rand Refinery and Gold Fields Ghana and between Rand Refinery and Abosso. Under these agreements, Rand Refinery collects, refines and sells gold as instructed by Gold Fields Ghana and Abosso. Rand Refinery assumes responsibility for the gold upon collection at either the Tarkwa or Damang mine. The gold is then transported to the Rand Refinery premises in Johannesburg, South Africa, where it is refined. Gold Fields Ghana and Abosso reimburse Rand Refinery for transportation costs. Under these agreements, Rand Refinery sells the refined gold on behalf of Gold Fields Ghana and Abosso at the London afternoon fixing price for gold on the date of delivery. Rand Refinery receives refining fees for gold received, and a realization fee for gold refined. Each of these agreements continues until either party terminates it upon 90 days’ written notice.

Australia

In Australia, all gold produced by St. Ives and Agnew is refined by the Western Australian Mint. An evergreen agreement between St. Ives Gold Mining Company Pty Ltd, Agnew Gold Mining Company Pty Ltd and AGR Matthey, which became effective on September 1, 2002, has been transferred by Deed of Novation to the Western Australian Mint. The Western Australian Mint applies competitive charges for the collection, transport and refining services. The collection and transportation fees are calculated by the weight of the unrefined gold and a nominal fixed fee component. The refining fees are calculated per ounce of refined gold produced which includes small refining losses of both gold and silver, with additional assay and environmental disposal charges. The Western Australian Mint takes responsibility for the unrefined gold at collection from St. Ives and Agnew where they engage a sub-contractor, Brinks Australia. Brinks delivers the unrefined gold to the Western Australian Mint in Perth, Australia, where it is refined and the refined ounces of gold and silver are credited to the relevant metal accounts held by St. Ives and Agnew with the Western Australian Mint. St. Ives and Agnew then inform Gold Fields treasury in the corporate office in Johannesburg of the amount of fine gold available for sale in Perth, Australia. After such confirmation, Gold Fields treasury either sells the gold directly to the Western Australian Mint, at the London afternoon fixing price, or swaps it into London for a competitive fee per ounce, meaning the Western Australian Mint provides that volume of fine gold in London for sale by Gold Fields. In the case of a location swap, the Western Australian Mint is instructed to credit St. Ives’ or Agnew’s metal account held with Deutsche Bank, London. Once the gold is sold to a third-party, Deutsche Bank in London is instructed by Gold Fields to deliver the gold to the relevant counterparty bank. All silver is sold to the Western Australian Mint at market rates. The agreement with the Western Australian Mint continues indefinitely until terminated by either party upon 90 days’ written notice.

Peru

Gold Fields S.A.A., or La Cima, has three contracts for the sale of approximately 75% of concentrate from the Cerro Corona mine, one with a Japanese refiner, one with a South Korean refiner and one with a German

 

66


Table of Contents

refiner. Two of the contracts expire on December 31, 2015, while the third contract expires on December 31, 2014. Under these contracts, La Cima is to sell approximately 25% of the concentrate to each company and to use reasonable efforts to spread the deliveries evenly throughout the year. Risk passes when the concentrate is loaded in the port of Salaverry, Peru or an alternative port chosen by La Cima. Pricing for copper and gold under each of the contracts is based on average LME copper prices and London Bullion Market Association gold prices, respectively. All production in excess of the amounts sold under long term contracts is sold on the spot market.

World Gold Council

Gold Fields supports and participates in the gold marketing activities of the World Gold Council, or WGC, and, during fiscal 2012, Gold Fields contributed to the WGC in support of its activities at a rate of U.S.$2.00 per ounce of gold it produced in South Africa (excluding gold produced from the South Deep Project), Australia and its attributable production from Tarkwa and Damang. This amount is expected to decrease to U.S.$1.00 per ounce in fiscal 2013.

Services

Mining activities require extensive services, located both on the surface and underground at the mines. Services include:

 

   

mining-related services such as engineering, rock mechanics, ventilation and refrigeration, materials handling, operational performance evaluation and capital planning;

 

   

safety and training;

 

   

housing and health-related services, including hostel and hospital operations;

 

   

reserves management, including sampling and estimation, geological services, including mine planning and design, and mine survey;

 

   

metallurgy;

 

   

equipment maintenance; and

 

   

assay services.

Most of these services are provided directly by Gold Fields, either at the operational level or through the regional or corporate structures, although some are provided by third-party contractors or through the Transitional Services Agreement between Sibanye Gold and Gold Fields.

Gold Fields’ Mining Operations

Before the Spin-off, Gold Fields had eight producing mines in South Africa, Ghana, Australia and Peru. After the Spin-off, Gold Fields has six producing mines in these jurisdictions. Gold Fields conducts underground mining operations at each site except Tarkwa, Damang and Cerro Corona and, prior to the Spin-off, conducted some processing of surface rock dump material at KDC, Beatrix and South Deep. After the Spin-off, Gold Fields has continued to process surface rock dump material at South Deep, while continuing underground mining operations at the mine. The processing of surface rock dump material at Agnew was completed in October 2008. Gold Fields conducts open pit mining at Tarkwa, Damang, St. Ives (which also conducts underground mining) and Cerro Corona and also processes material from production stockpiles at Tarkwa, Damang and St. Ives.

Total Operations

The following table details the operating and production results (including gold equivalents) for each of fiscal 2012, 2011, the six-month period ended December 31, 2010 and fiscal 2010 for all operations owned by

 

67


Table of Contents

Gold Fields during each respective period. The table also provides the operating and production results (including gold equivalents) for fiscal 2012 for all Gold Fields’ operations excluding the Sibanye Gold assets.

 

     Fiscal 2010      Six-Month
Period Ended
December 31,
2010
     Fiscal 2011      Fiscal 2012      Fiscal 2012
excluding the
Sibanye Gold
assets
 

Production

              

Tonnes (‘000)

     56,702         29,008         59,441         56,111         43,926   

Recovered grade (g/t)

     2.1         2.1         1.9         1.9         1.5   

Gold produced (‘000 oz) (1)

     3,841         1,983         3,697         3,348         2,124   

Results of operations ($ million)

              

Revenues

     4,164.3         2,564.2         5,800.1         5,551.8         3,530.6   

Total production costs (2)

     3,242.0         1,907.0         3,880.3         4,026.2         2,369.0   

Total cash costs (3)

     2,572.8         1,494.6         3,084.9         3,221.5         1,890.0   

Cash profit (4)

     1,591.5         1,069.6         2,715.2         2,330.3         1,640.6   

Cost per ounce of gold ($)

              

Total production costs

     844         962         1,050         1,200         1,115   

Total cash costs

     670         753         835         960         886   

Notional cash expenditure per ounce of gold produced ($) (5)

     928         1,060         1,153         1,364         1,343   

 

Notes:

(1) In fiscal 2010, 3.497 million ounces were attributable to Gold Fields, in the six-month period ended December 31, 2010, 1.806 million ounces were attributable to Gold Fields, in fiscal 2011, 3.485 million ounces were attributable to Gold Fields in fiscal 2012, 3.254 million ounces were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to noncontrolling shareholders in the Ghana and Peru operations during each of those periods.
(2) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ total production costs to production costs, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended December 31, 2012 and 2011 Costs and Expenses”, “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended December 31, 2011 and June 30, 2010—Costs and Expenses” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Six Month Periods Ended December 31, 2010 and 2009—Costs and Expenses”.
(3) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ total cash costs to production costs, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended December 31, 2012 and 2011—Costs and Expenses”, “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended December 31, 2011 and June 30, 2010—Costs and Expenses” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Six Month Periods Ended December 31, 2010 and 2009—Costs and Expenses”.
(4) Cash profit represents revenues less total cash costs.
(5) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ NCE to its production costs for fiscal 2012 and fiscal 2011, the six month period ended December 31, 2010 and fiscal 2010, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Costs—Notional Cash Expenditure”.

 

68


Table of Contents

Underground Operations

The following table details the operating and production results for Gold Fields’ underground operations for fiscal 2012, 2011, the six month period ended December 31, 2010 and fiscal 2010. The underground operations include all of the mines that were part of the South African operations prior to the Spin-off and the underground portions of the mines in the Australian operations. The table also provides the operating and production results (including gold equivalents) for fiscal 2012 for Gold Fields’ underground operations excluding the Sibanye Gold assets.

 

     Fiscal 2010      Six-Month
Period Ended
December 31,
2010
     Fiscal 2011      Fiscal 2012      Fiscal 2012
excluding the
Sibanye Gold

assets
 

Production

              

Tonnes (‘000)

     11,714         6,219         11,516         10,091         4,335   

Recovered grade (g/t)

     5.7         5.6         5.4         5.5         4.9   

Gold produced (‘000 oz) (1)

     2,155         1,114         1,984         1,772         689   

Results of operations ($ million)

              

Revenues

     2,338.3         1,432.1         3,150.2         2,939.5         1,149.4   

Total production costs

     2,074.7         1,270.7         2,779.8         2,742.6         1,123.9   

Total cash costs

     1,640.0         996.8         2,268.7         2,233.6         902.0   

Cash profit (2)

     698.3         435.3         881.5         705.9         247.4   

Cost per ounce of gold ($)

              

Total production costs

     963         1,132         1,411         1,548         1,631   

Total cash costs

     761         894         1,144         1,260         1,310   

 

Notes:

(1) In fiscal 2010, all 2.155 million ounces were attributable to Gold Fields, in the six-month period ended December 31, 2010, 1.078 million ounces were attributable to Gold Fields, in fiscal 2011, 1.984 million ounces were attributable to Gold Fields and in fiscal 2012, 1.772 million ounces were attributable to Gold Fields.
(2) Cash profit represents revenues less total cash costs.

Tonnes milled from the underground operations decreased from 11.5 million tonnes in fiscal 2011 to 10.1 million tonnes in fiscal 2012. The decrease was mainly due to labor unrest at the Sibanye Gold assets and an underground fire at the Ya Rona mine shaft. The amount of gold produced from underground operations decreased from 1.984 million ounces in fiscal 2011 to 1.772 million ounces in fiscal 2012. This decrease was also primarily a result of the work stoppages at the Sibanye Gold assets caused by the labor unrest at these operations.

 

69


Table of Contents

Surface Operations

The following table details the operating and production results (including gold equivalents) for Gold Fields’ surface operations for fiscal 2012 and 2011, the six month period ended December 31, 2010 and fiscal 2010. In fiscal 2012, surface operations include all of the mines in the Ghana, Australia and Peru operations, the open pit portions of the mines in the Australian operations and the surface rock dump material at the mines in the South African operation.

 

     Fiscal 2010      Six-Month
Period Ended
December 31,
2010
     Fiscal 2011      Fiscal 2012      Fiscal 2012
excluding the
Sibanye Gold

assets
 

Production

              

Tonnes (‘000)

     44,988         22,789         47,925         46,020         39,591   

Recovered grade (g/t)

     1.2         1.2         1.1         1.1         1.1   

Gold produced (‘000 oz) (1)

     1,686         869         1,713         1,576         1,435   

Results of operations ($ million)

              

Revenues

     1,826.0         1,132.1         2,649.9         2,612.3         2,381.3   

Total production costs

     1,167.3         635.9         1,080.5         1,283.6         1,245.0   

Total cash costs

     932.8         497.8         816.2         987.9         988.0   

Cash profit (2)

     893.2         634.3         1,833.7         1,624.4         1,393.3   

Cost per ounce of gold ($)

              

Total production costs

     692         732         631         810         862   

Total cash costs

     553         574         476         624         684   

 

Notes:

(1) In fiscal 2010, 1.342 million ounces were attributable to Gold Fields, in the six month period ended December 31, 2010, 0.692 million ounces were attributable to Gold Fields, in fiscal 2011, 1.502 million ounces were attributable to Gold Fields and in fiscal 2012, 1.465 million ounces were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to noncontrolling shareholders in the Ghana and Peru operations during each period.
(2) Cash profit represents revenues less total cash costs.

Tonnes milled and treated from the surface operations decreased from 47.9 million tonnes in fiscal 2011 to 46.0 million tonnes in fiscal 2012, mainly due to depletion of surface material at South Deep, reduced throughput at Damang due to increased ore hardness and lower throughput of surface rock dump material at the Sibanye Gold assets.

KDC Operation

Introduction

The KDC mine is located in the Gauteng Province of South Africa in the Far West Rand mining district, some 60 kilometers southwest of Johannesburg. It is South Africa’s largest mine by gold production, with KDC West having produced more than 100 million ounces of gold during its 75 year history. KDC is comprised of the Driefontein and Kloof mines, which were consolidated during fiscal 2010 under a single management team as part of the BPR program.

In fiscal 2012, KDC produced 0.935 million ounces of gold. As of December 31, 2012, KDC had approximately 26,200 employees and approximately 4,100 outside contractors. On the Spin-off date, KDC was separated from Gold Fields.

 

70


Table of Contents

History

The Driefontein operation was formed from the consolidation in 1981 of the East Driefontein and West Driefontein mines. Gold mining began at Driefontein in 1952. The Kloof operation was the result of the consolidation of the Kloof, Libanon, Leeudoorn and Venterspost mines. Gold mining began in the area now covered by these operations in 1934.

Geology

Geologically, the KDC mine is located on the northwestern and western rims of the Witwatersrand Basin. Three primary reefs are exploited: the Ventersdorp Contact Reef, or VCR, located at the top of the Central Rand Group; the Carbon Leader Reef, or Carbon Leader, near the base; and the Middelvlei Reef, or MVR, which stratigraphically occurs some 50 to 75 meters above the Carbon Leader.

The Driefontein operation is located in the West Wits Line that forms part of the Far West Rand of the Witwatersrand Basin. The operation is geologically divided into an eastern section and a western section, separated by a bank anticline and associated faulting. Gold mineralization at the Driefontein operation is contained within three reef horizons. The Carbon Leader, the VCR, and the MVR, occur at depths of between 500 meters and 4,000 meters. Stratigraphically, the Carbon Leader is situated 40 to 70 meters below the VCR and the MVR and is a generally high-grade reef comprising different facies and dips to the south at approximately 25 degrees. The Carbon Leader subcrops against the VCR in the eastern part of the mine. The west-dipping Bank Fault defines the eastern limit of both reefs. The VCR is most extensively developed in the east, and subcrops to the west. The MVR is a secondary reef, situated approximately 50 meters above the Carbon Leader, and, at present, it is a minor contributor to reserves and production. The average gold grades vary with lithofacies changes in all of the reefs.

The Kloof operation lies between the Bank Fault to the west, and the north trending West Rand Fault to the east. The latter truncates the VCR along the eastern boundary of the mine, with a 1- to 1.5-kilometer up throw to the east. Normal faults are developed sub-parallel to the westerly dipping West Rand Fault, with sympathetic north- northeast trending dykes that show little to no apparent offset of the stratigraphy. A conjugate set of faults and dykes occurs on a west-southwest trend, with throws of 1 to 15 meters. Structures that offset the VCR increase in frequency toward the southern portion of the mine as the Bank Fault is approached.

Mining

KDC was comprised of 13 producing shaft systems that mined different contributions from pillars and open ground and six gold plants of which two process mainly underground ore and four process mainly surface material. The preferred mining method at KDC was breast stoping with closely spaced dip pillar mining, with limited application of scattered and remnant pillar mining in the mature areas. Shafts No. 1 (East), 3 (East), 4 (East) and 7 (East) provided the main centers of current production at the KDC East operation. At older portions of KDC West, including Shafts No. 2 (West), 6 (West) and 8 (West), production focused on remnant pillar extraction and accessing and mining of secondary reef horizons. In the southern, newer portions of the mine, which include Shafts No. 1 (West), 4 (West) (Ya Rona) and 5 (West), the focus was on scattered or closely spaced dip pillar mining. In the far western portion of the mine, at Shafts No. 10 (West) and 6 Tertiary (West), reclamation and cleaning operations were conducted. The shafts at the deepest levels of the mine, consisting of Shaft No. 1 Tertiary (West) and Shaft No. 5 Sub-Vertical (West), employed the closely spaced dip pillar mining method.

Over the last several years, the planned extraction schedule for the Shaft No. 1 (East) pillar, or the Main Shaft Pillar, in the VCR, was reduced in order to decrease seismicity. Alternative scenarios that were being reviewed included not mining the inner section of the pillar in order to protect the Main Shaft infrastructure. Moreover, the profile for Shaft No.7 (East) was significantly reduced and simulations of building up Shaft No. 4 (East) production to replace the declining Shaft No. 7 (East) profile were underway. Shaft No. 8 (East) was predominantly mining the lower-grade MVR with reduced remnant mining on the VCR horizon.

 

71


Table of Contents

As a result of the electricity stoppages experienced in 2008, and capital allocation decisions, sinking operations at Shaft No. 9 (West) were suspended indefinitely. In the interim, KDC continued with the drilling program in the area below the lowest area currently being mined, targeting the area expected to be accessed by Shaft No. 9 (West). Gold Fields also conducted an optimization study on mining below current infrastructure. This study investigated a viable alternative to the Shaft No. 9 (West) project, such as a phased mini-decline system.

KDC continued to process low-grade surface material in fiscal 2012, for which the biggest risk was a decrease in grade of the remaining dumps. Grade management was undertaken through the screening of material to separate out the smaller fraction sizes of ore, which tend to be of higher grade. This process reduced the tonnage that was available for processing.

Detailed below are the operating and production results at KDC for fiscal 2012, 2011, the six month period ended December 31, 2010 and the operating and production results for Driefontein and Kloof for fiscal 2010.

 

     Fiscal 2010      Six-Month
Period ended
December 31,
2010
     Fiscal 2011      Fiscal 2012  
     Driefontein      Kloof           

Production

              

Tonnes (‘000)

     6,084         4,299         5,152         10,831         8,817   

Recovered grade (g/t)

     3.6         4.1         3.8         3.2         3.3   

Gold produced (‘000 oz)

     710         567         634         1,100         935   

Results of operations ($ million)

              

Revenues

     770.9         613.2         814.4         1,745.5         1,543.4   

Total production costs (1)

     586.2         554.8         681.6         1,326.3         1,248.8   

Total cash costs (2)

     490.4         435.5         545.4         1,059.7         1,007.8   

Cash profit (3)

     280.5         177.7         269.0         685.8         535.6   

Cost per ounce of gold ($)

              

Total production costs

     826         979         1,075         1,206         1,336   

Total cash costs

     691         769         860         963         1,078   

Notional cash expenditure per ounce of gold produced ($) (4)

     923         1,053         1,149         1,248         1,402   

 

Notes:

(1) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ total production costs to production costs, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended December 31, 2012 and 2011—Costs and Expenses” “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects-Results of Operations-Years Ended December 31, 2011 and June 30, 2010—Costs and Expenses” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Six Month Periods Ended December 31, 2010 and 2009—Costs and Expenses”.
(2) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ total cash costs to production costs, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended December 31, 2012 and 2011—Costs and Expenses” “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended December 31, 2011 and June 30, 2010—Costs and Expenses” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Six Month Periods Ended December 31, 2010 and 2009—Costs and Expenses”.
(3) Cash profit represents revenues less total cash costs.
(4) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ NCE to its production costs for fiscal 2012 and 2011, the six month period ended December 31, 2010 and fiscal 2010, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects— Costs—Notional Cash Expenditure”.

 

72


Table of Contents

Total tonnes milled decreased from 10.8 million tonnes in fiscal 2011 to 8.8 million tonnes in fiscal 2012 primarily due to a decrease in underground mining volumes caused by unplanned stoppages, which included industrial action and an underground fire at the Ya Rona Shaft. Gold production was 1.1 million ounces in fiscal 2011 compared to 0.9 million ounces in fiscal 2012. The overall recovered grade in fiscal 2012 increased to 3.3 compared to 3.2 in fiscal 2011 due to an 8% higher underground yield partly offset by a lower proportion of underground ore mined and processed.

The KDC operation engaged in both underground and rock dump mining, and was thus subject to all of the mining risks discussed in “Risk Factors”. The primary safety challenges facing the KDC underground operation included falls of ground, seismicity, flammable gas, water intrusion and temperatures. Water intrusion was dealt with through drilling, cementation sealing techniques and an extensive water-pumping network. Also, because rock temperatures tend to increase with depth, KDC required an extensive cooling infrastructure. Gold Fields sought to reduce the impact of seismicity at KDC by using the closely spaced dip pillar mining method. Early detection and increased ventilation of the shafts were used to minimize the risk of incidents caused by flammable gas. Additionally, KDC instituted a number of initiatives to reduce the risks posed by seismicity, including a detailed analysis of previous seismic events, precondition blasting and backfilling, the use of a support system to reduce the impact of seismic ground motion and to monitor seismic risk parameters to allow quicker reactions to changes. Centralized blasting systems were also installed to allow better control of blasting so that most of the mine seismicity was triggered during off-shift periods. Continued reviews of remnant and pillar mining areas were also conducted during fiscal 2012 leading to the stoppage of extraction at numerous higher risk areas across the mine. These stoppages reduced the falls of ground incidents, improving mine safety. As part of the Fall of Ground, or FOG, Strategy, in-stope bolting and netting were introduced and the roll-out started in November 2011. By April 2012, all panels on KDC were on in-stope bolts and netting. The surface operation safety risks include problems with ground stability, moving machinery and dust generation. KDC also had a risk management system in place that guided the mining of the rock dumps to minimize these risks.

In total, during fiscal 2012, there were 10 fatalities at KDC. Of these, one was due to an electrocution, one was due to a fall of ground, two were due to tramming related accidents and one was due to an accident while cleaning a tank. A further accident, in which five employees were fatally injured, resulted from a fire at one of the KDC shafts on June 30, 2012. KDC East reopened on July 3, 2012 and KDC West reopened on July 9, 2012. The fire in the affected shaft was extinguished on August 14, 2012; however, this shaft remained closed subject to a Section 54 order issued by the DMR, and reopened on October 17, 2012, although production did not recommence at that time due to the labor actions described below. Please see “Risk Factors—The Group’s operations in South Africa are subject to environmental and health and safety regulations, which could impose significant costs and burdens and the Group may face claims and liability for breaches, or alleged breaches, of such regulations and other applicable laws” for more information. On a calendar year basis, the lost time injury frequency rate (see “Defined Terms and Conventions”) for fiscal 2012 was 8.10 lost time injuries for every million hours worked, as compared to a lost time injury frequency rate of 7.95 for fiscal 2011 and 6.31 for calendar 2010. The fatal injury frequency rates for fiscal 2012, fiscal 2011 and fiscal 2010 were 0.15, 0.17 and 0.13 fatalities for every million hours worked, respectively. From December 31, 2012 to the Spin-off date, no fatalities were recorded. A major source of accidents in the mine remains falls of ground, which make up approximately 34% of all accidents. A 33% improvement has been made in terms of the number of falls of ground related accidents since 2011.

During fiscal 2012, after each major mine incident or accident, KDC received, and complied with, various instructions to halt operations from the Principal Inspector of the Gauteng area of the DMR. See “Directors, Senior Management and Employees—Labor Relations—Health and Safety”. There were 27 formal work stoppages issued at the mine by the DMR during fiscal 2012. These were issued as a result of either fatal or serious accidents, or as a result of deemed inadequate controls implemented for site specific hazards identified during inspections.

Further, KDC, like several other South African gold mining operations, was affected by work stoppages that impacted much of the South African mining industry. Workers at KDC West went on strike from September 9,

 

73


Table of Contents

2012 until October 18, 2012 and workers at KDC East went on strike from August 29, 2012 to September 5, 2012 and again from October 14, 2012 until October 23, 2012, when 8,100 workers were dismissed for failing to return to work, with 7,600 appealing that dismissal. After an appeal process, the majority of these employees returned to work on November 6, 2012. See “Risk Factors—Risks related to Gold Fields’ operations and profits have been and may be adversely affected by union activity and new and existing labor laws.” The total shaft hoisting capacity of KDC at December 31, 2012 is detailed below.

 

Shaft System

   Hoisting capacity  
     (tonnes/month)  

No. 1 (West)

     105,000   

No. 2 (West)

     165,000   

No. 4 (West) (1)

     57,000   

No. 5 (West)

     70,000   

No. 6 (West) (2)

     66,000   

No. 7 (West) (3)

     —     

No. 8 (West)

     66,000   

No. 10 (West) (2)

     —     

No. 1 (East)

     150,000   

No. 3 (East) (1)

     76,500   

No. 4 (East)

     75,000   

No. 7 (East)

     136,000   

No. 8 (East)

     73,000   

 

Notes:

(1) These shafts did not hoist material to the surface. The hoisting capacity refers to sub-surface hoisting.
(2) Shafts No. 6 Tertiary (West) and 10 (West) were only operated on a limited scale, with the focus on reclamation and cleaning.
(3) Shaft No. 7 (West) was only operated on a limited scale, and was used for transporting employees and materials.

Assuming no increase or decrease in the reserve estimates at KDC and no changes to the mine plan, the KDC December 31, 2012 proven and probable reserves of 10.2 million ounces (9.7 million ounces if excluding surface sources) of gold should be sufficient to maintain production through approximately fiscal 2027. However, as discussed earlier in “Risk Factors” and “—Mine Planning and Management,” there are numerous factors which can affect reserve estimates and the mine plan, which thus could materially change the life of mine. KDC achieved full compliance certification under the International Cyanide Management Code in October 2009.

 

74


Table of Contents

Processing

The following table sets forth year commissioned, processing techniques and processing capacity per month, as well as average tonnes milled per month and metallurgical recovery factors during fiscal 2012, for each of the plants at KDC as of December 31, 2012:

Processing Techniques

 

Plant

  Year
commissioned (1)
    Comminution
phase
  Treatment
phase
  Capacity (2)     Average
milled for
fiscal 2012
    Approximate
recovery factor
for fiscal 2012 (5)
 
                  (tonnes/month)        

KDC West DP 1

    1972      SAG milling   CIP treatment and
electrowinning
    255,000        157,000        97

KDC West DP 2

    1964      SAG/ball milling   CIP treatment (3)     200,000        148,000        91

KDC West DP 3

    1998      SAG milling   CIP treatment (3)     115,000        90,000        91

KDC East KP 1

    1968      Pebble milling   CIP treatment (4)     170,000        138,000        84

KDC East KP 2

    1989      SAG milling   CIP treatment and
electrowinning
    162,000        150,000        98

KDC East Python 1 (4)

 

 

2011

  

 

Crushing

 

Flotation

 

 

71,000

  

 

 

53,000

  

 

 

82

 

Notes:

(1) KDC West DP 1 was substantially upgraded in fiscal 2004, and KDC West DP 2 was substantially upgraded in fiscal 2003. KDC West DP 3 was originally commissioned as a uranium plant and was upgraded to a gold plant in 1998. Therefore, KDC West DP 3 lists the year commissioned as a gold plant.
(2) Nameplate capacity. Plant/Mill nameplate capacities are based on a number of operating assumptions, including assumptions regarding the blend of soft and hard ores processed, that can change and which may result in an increased level of throughput over and above the designed nameplate capacity.
(3) After CIP treatment, electrowinning occurs at KDC West DP 1 or KDC East KP 2.
(4) KDC East Python 1 commissioned during 2011.
(5) Percentages are rounded to the nearest whole percent.

In fiscal 2012, the KDC plants collectively extracted approximately 96% of the gold contained in ore delivered for processing.

Capital Expenditure

Gold Fields spent approximately U.S.$296 million on capital expenditures at the KDC operation in fiscal 2012, primarily on metallurgical growth plant, residential upgrades, technical projects, self rescue packs and ore reserve development. Gold Fields spent approximately U.S.$38 million of capital expenditures at KDC prior to the Spin-off date, principally on ore reserve development.

Beatrix Operation

Introduction

The Beatrix operation is located in the Free State Province of South Africa, some 240 kilometers southwest of Johannesburg, near Welkom and Virginia, and comprises the Beatrix mine. Beatrix operates under mining rights covering a total area of approximately 16,800 hectares. Beatrix has four shaft systems, with five ventilation shafts to provide additional up-cast and down-cast ventilation capacity and is serviced by two metallurgical plants. It is a shallow to intermediate-depth mining operation, at depths between 700 meters and 2,200 meters below surface. Beatrix requires cooling infrastructure to maintain an underground working environment

 

75


Table of Contents

conducive to health and safety for workers at depth. The mine therefore has a refrigeration and cooling infrastructure in both its North and West Sections. The Beatrix mine has access to the national electricity grid and water, road and rail infrastructure and is located near regional urban centers where it can routinely obtain needed supplies. In fiscal 2012, Beatrix produced 0.289 million ounces of gold. As of December 31, 2012, Beatrix had approximately 9,200 employees and approximately 1,100 outside contractors. On the Spin-off date, Beatrix was separated from Gold Fields.

History

Beatrix’s present scope of operations is the result of the consolidation with effect from July 1, 1999 of two adjacent mines: Beatrix and Oryx. Gold mining commenced at Beatrix in 1985 and at Oryx in 1991.

Geology

The Beatrix gold mine exploits the Beatrix Reef, or BXR, at Shafts No. 1, 2 and 3, and the Kalkoenkrans Reef, or KKR, at Shaft No. 4 (the former Oryx mine). The reefs are developed on the Aandenk erosional surface and dip to the north and northeast at between four degrees and nine degrees.

In general, the BXR occurs at depths of between 570 meters and 1,380 meters and the KKR occurs at depths of between 1,800 meters and 2,200 meters. Both the BXR and KKR reefs are markedly channelized and consist of multi-cycle, upward fining conglomerate beds with sharp erosive basal contacts. A general east-west trending pay-zone, some 500 to 800 meters wide, has been identified east of Shaft No. 4 and is known as the main channel Zone 2. In addition, surface exploratory drilling, and underground development has confirmed the reserves to the south of Beatrix’s Shaft No. 4 main channel in Zone 5, which now represents the majority of the reserves at the operation. Ongoing development and underground exploration drilling has continued over the past fiscal year so that all facies and structures have been updated and layouts and planning adapted. All new information is used as part of customary mine planning practices.

Mining

Prior to the Spin-off, Gold Fields managed Beatrix as three operational sections: the North Section (comprising Shaft No. 3), the South Section (comprising Shaft No. 2 and Shaft No. 1) and the West Section (comprising Shaft No. 4). No shafts were closed or opened in fiscal 2012. At the North Section, a variety of activities including drilling were primarily powered by hydropower, as opposed to compressed air, with a majority of the mining equipment being run off a high-pressure water system. The benefits of the system included improved cooling underground and machine efficiency, lower noise levels and reduced electrical power usage.

Mining at Beatrix was based upon a scattered mining method with the North Section being the primary source of production. During fiscal 2012, management focused on increasing development volumes at Shafts No. 3 and No. 4 to provide future mining flexibility and ore body definition. However, cessation of activities on some levels, as well as delays associated with water intersections and secondary support upgrading, resulted in a 14% decrease in main development volumes at Beatrix in fiscal 2012, as compared to fiscal 2011. The emphasis on development volumes is planned to continue in fiscal 2013. Overall stoping volumes per month at Beatrix decreased by 15% between fiscal 2011 and fiscal 2012. During fiscal 2012, both the development and stoping volumes decreased year-on-year due to the illegal strike, safety related stoppages, crew moves to manage the mining mix and a lack of mining flexibility. Beatrix investigated options to improve the MCF until the Spin-off date.

The overall mining grade at the North Section rose between fiscal 2011 and fiscal 2012 although gold output was affected by lower volumes.

 

76


Table of Contents

Based on the higher gold price received and in anticipation of improving gold prices in the longer term, a number of incremental expansion opportunities were being examined at Beatrix. For example, in fiscal 2012, ongoing improvements were made to rail tracks and ventilation, to increase the logistics capacity and support future mining volumes. Beatrix participated in the BPR program to, among other things, reduce energy and utility consumption. Beatrix also participated in a carbon credit program, whereby it would earn carbon emission reduction credits by extracting underground methane. Such methane can also be used to generate electricity.

Detailed below are the operating and production results at Beatrix for fiscal 2012 and 2011, the six month period ended December 31, 2010 and fiscal 2010.

 

     Fiscal 2010      Six-Month
Period ended
December 31,
2010
     Fiscal 2011      Fiscal 2012  

Production

           

Tonnes (‘000)

     3,051         1,965         3,817         3,368   

Recovered grade (g/t)

     4.0         3.2         2.8         2.7   

Gold produced (‘000 oz)

     392         202         347         289   

Results of operations ($ million)

           

Revenues

     424.6         259.1         555.4         477.8   

Total production costs (1)

     368.1         215.3         415.7         408.4   

Total cash costs (2)

     290.3         175.3         335.9         323.7   

Cash profit (3)

     134.3         83.8         219.5         154.1   

Cost per ounce of gold ($)

           

Total production costs

     939         1,066         1,199         1,414   

Total cash costs

     741         868         969         1,121   

Notional cash expenditure per ounce of gold produced ($) (4)

     985         1,098         1,221         1,400   

 

Notes:

(1) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ total production costs to production costs, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended December 31, 2012 and 2011—Costs and Expenses” “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended December 31, 2011 and June 30, 2009—Costs and Expenses” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Six Month Periods Ended December 31, 2010 and 2009—Costs and Expenses”.
(2) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ total cash costs to production costs, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended December 31, 2012 and 2011—Costs and Expenses” “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended December 31, 2011 and June 30, 2009—Costs and Expenses” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Six Month Periods Ended December 31, 2010 and 2009—Costs and Expenses”.
(3) Cash profit represents revenues less total cash costs.
(4) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ NCE to its production costs for fiscal 2012 and 2011, the six month period ended December 31, 2010 and fiscal 2010, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects— Costs—Notional Cash Expenditure”.

Total tonnes milled decreased from 3.82 million tonnes to 3.37 million tonnes as the decrease in underground tonnage milled from fiscal 2011 to fiscal 2012. The decrease was primarily due to flexibility constraints at the underground operations and limited availability to mill surface material due to a faulty gear box at one plant. Gold production was lower in fiscal 2012 and the overall recovered grade in fiscal 2012 decreased marginally compared to fiscal 2011 due to a lower proportion of higher underground ore.

 

77


Table of Contents

Beatrix processed 1.30 million tonnes of low grade material during the year. The increase in total cash costs per ounce of gold and total production costs per ounce of gold between fiscal 2011 and fiscal 2012 resulted primarily from the increase in operating costs and amortization costs and the lower production.

The Beatrix mine engaged in underground and surface mining, and thus was subject to all of the underground and surface mining risks discussed in “Risk Factors”. The primary safety risks at Beatrix were falls of ground, tramming accidents, winches, ventilation control and flammable gas explosions. Beatrix does experience seismic events and, while the seismic risk was much lower at Beatrix than it was at KDC, the operation managed these events with a seismic network consisting of several geophones.

During fiscal 2012, the focus of training at Beatrix remained on addressing the predominant causes of incidents, namely falls of ground, tramming and winches/rigging, which were part of a formal remedial action tracking system. Methane hazard awareness training also remained an area of focus.

The mine had an ongoing methane management system which included the declaration by competent ventilation staff of certain locations as hazardous, methane emission rate monitoring and ongoing awareness campaigns as well as the deployment of gas, velocity and fan sensors connected to an electronic telemetry system to act as early warning. These safety systems were monitored on a 24-hour basis from a central control room from which action could be taken in the event of alarm.

Beatrix achieved one million fatality free shifts during fiscal 2012. Although there were 6 fatalities at Beatrix in fiscal 2012, Beatrix experienced no shaft closures for any material length of time due to accidents. Three of these fatalities were tramming related, one fatality was due to a gravity related fall of ground, one fatality was the result of a shaft conveyance incident and one fatality was the result of a drilling accident. On a calendar year basis, the lost time injury frequency rate (See “Defined Terms and Conventions”) for fiscal 2012 was 3.54 lost time injuries for every million hours worked, as compared to 2.95 in fiscal 2011 and 3.31 in calendar 2010. In fiscal 2012, the fatal injury frequency rate was 0.25 fatalities for every million hours worked, while the rate was 0.19 in fiscal 2011 and 0.18 in calendar 2010. From December 31, 2012 until the Spin-off date, there were no fatalities at Beatrix .

In fiscal 2012, Beatrix, like several other South African gold mining operations, was affected by work stoppages that had an impact on much of the South African mining industry. Workers at Beatrix West went on strike on September 21, 2012 and workers at Beatrix North and South went on strike on September 24, 2012. On October 16, 2012, the strike at Beatrix North and South ended. On October 17, 2012, the strike at Beatrix West ended. See “Risk Factors—Gold Fields’ operations and profits have been and may be adversely affected by union activity and new and existing labor laws.” and “Directors, Senior Management and Employees— Employees—Labor Relations—South Africa.”

The total shaft hoisting capacities of Beatrix as of December 31, 2012 are detailed below.

 

Shift System

   Hoisting
capacity
 
     (tonnes/month)  

No. 1

     138,000   

No. 2

     138,000   

No. 3

     170,000   

No. 4

     120,000   

Assuming no increase or decrease in the reserves estimates at Beatrix and no changes to the life of mine plan, Beatrix’s December 31, 2012 proven and probable reserves of 3.4 million ounces of gold will be sufficient to maintain production through to approximately fiscal 2025. However, as discussed earlier in “Risk Factors” and “—Mine Planning and Management,” there are numerous factors which can affect reserve estimates and the mine plan, which could thus materially change the life of mine.

 

78


Table of Contents

Beatrix achieved full compliance certification under the International Cyanide Management Code in July 2009 and retained its OHSAS 18001 certification during fiscal 2012.

Processing

The following table sets forth the year of commissioning, processing techniques and processing capacity per month, as well as average tonnes milled per month and metallurgical recovery factor during fiscal 2012, for each of the plants at Beatrix.

Processing Techniques

 

Plant

   Year
commissioned
     Comminution
phase
   Treatment
phase
   Capacity (1)      Average
milled for
fiscal 2012
     Approximate
recovery factor
for fiscal 2012 (2)
 
                      (tonnes/month)         

No. 1 Plant

     1983       SAG milling    CIL treatment      246,000         174,000         95

No. 2 Plant

     1992       SAG milling    CIP treatment      130,000         106,000         86

 

Notes:

(1) Nameplate capacity. Plant/Mill nameplate capacities are based on a number of operating assumptions, including assumptions regarding the blend of soft and hard ores processed, that can change and which may result in an increased level of throughput over and above the designed nameplate capacity.
(2) Percentages are rounded to the nearest whole percent.

In fiscal 2012, the Beatrix plants collectively extracted approximately 94.59% of gold contained in ore delivered for processing.

Capital Expenditure

Gold Fields spent approximately U.S.$80 million on capital expenditures at the Beatrix operation in fiscal 2012, primarily on infrastructure upgrade and infrastructure redevelopment. In fiscal 2013, Gold Fields spent approximately U.S.$10 million on capital expenditures at Beatrix prior to the Spin-off date, primarily on ore reserve development.

South Deep Operation

Introduction

South Deep is situated 45 kilometers south-west of Johannesburg, in the Gauteng Province of South Africa. South Deep is a capital project and remains a developing mine where the permanent infrastructure to support expanded production is currently under construction. During calendar 2010, the DMR approved the conversion of the South Deep old order mining rights into a new order mining right. Included in this approval was an additional portion of ground known as Uncle Harry’s, which is contiguous to South Deep.

South Deep is engaged in underground mining and is comprised of one metallurgical plant and two operating shaft systems, the older South Shaft complex and the newer Twin Shaft complex. The South Shaft complex includes a main shaft and three sub-vertical (SV) shafts, two of which are operational. SV2 is used to hoist rock with SV3 being used to transport personnel and materials. SV1 is on care and maintenance and only the upper half of the shaft is accessible as shaft sidewall failure damaged the lower portion of the shaft prior to acquisition by Gold Fields. The Twin Shaft complex consists of a single-barrel main shaft for hoisting personnel and rock and an adjacent bratticed ventilation shaft, used for both drawing used air and hoisting rock. While this Twin Shaft complex forms the center of production and capital development activities, opening up, equipping and diamond drilling operations are being conducted in the South Shaft area in order to access new mining areas.

 

79


Table of Contents

The South Shaft complex operates to a depth of 2,650 meters below surface and the Twin Shaft complex operates to a depth of 2,995 meters below surface. South Deep’s workings are at depth and therefore require a significant cooling infrastructure. The South Deep operation has access to the national electricity grid, water, and road infrastructure and is located near regional urban centers where it can obtain needed supplies and services. In fiscal 2012, South Deep produced 0.270 million ounces of gold. As of December 31, 2012, South Deep employed approximately 3,500 employees and approximately 4,750 contractors.

History

The current South Deep operations derive from the Barrick Gold—Western Areas Joint Venture, which Gold Fields acquired in a series of transactions in the second and third quarters of fiscal 2007. The Barrick Gold—Western Areas Joint Venture is named the South Deep Joint Venture.

Geology

Gold mineralization at South Deep is hosted by conglomerates of the Upper Elsburg reefs and the VCR. The Upper Elsburg reefs sub-crop against the VCR in a Northeasterly trend, which defines their western limits. To the east of the sub-crop, the Upper Elsburg reefs are preserved in an easterly diverging sedimentary wedge attaining a total thickness of approximately 120 meters, which is subdivided into the lower “Individuals” and the overlying “Massives.” To the west of the sub-crop, only the VCR is preserved.

The stratigraphic units at South Deep generally dip southward at approximately 12 to 15 degrees and the gold-bearing reefs occur at depths of 1,500 meters to 3,500 meters below surface.

Production at South Deep is currently derived from the Upper Elsburg Reefs. In general terms, the Upper Elsburg succession represents an easterly prograding sedimentary sequence, with the Massives containing higher gold grades and showing more proximal sedimentological attributes in the eastern sector of the mining authorization than the underlying Individuals. The sedimentary parameters of the Upper Elsburg reef units influence the overall tenor of the reefs with gold grade displaying a gradual, general decrease toward the East, away from the sub crop.

The North-South trending “normal” West Rand and Panvlakte faults, which converge on the Western side of the lease area, are the most significant large-scale faults in the area and form the western limit to gold mineralization for the mine.

Mining

At South Deep the main target reef horizon is the Upper Elsburg Massives zone. South Deep uses trackless mechanized mining methods comprising an array of techniques and mobile machines to achieve the most efficient extraction system for any given area in the ore body. In order to effectively mine the target reefs through massive mining methods it is necessary to de-stress the main target reef horizons by mining a horizontal slice through the ore body at intervals. Significant progress was made in fiscal 2012 with a 75% improvement in square meters and 18 destress attack points established compared to nine in fiscal 2011. Once an area has been de-stressed, the Elsburg Massives can then be mined through a combination of long hole stoping, drift-and-fill and drift-and-benching mining methods. Long hole stoping techniques at South Deep are being refined to ensure optimal extraction of the ore body. This method contributed 14% of total tonnage in 2012 (24% in 2011). With these optimized methods, long hole stoping is planned to contribute 29% of total reef tons broken for 2013. Further optimization projects on long hole stoping will continue through 2013. As a result, long hole stoping will be a major component of production going forward.

As a developing mine, South Deep is being prepared to ramp up production to 330,000 tonnes per month by 2016. During fiscal 2012, reef production at South Deep stabilized at approximately 120,000 tonnes per month. Simultaneously, the development of the infrastructure necessary for the New Mine area continues at a steady pace and is expected to be in a position to support the production build-up.

 

80


Table of Contents

During fiscal 2012, South Deep’s capital project infrastructure build-up remained on track with the requisite new infrastructure in place to meet the plan. By October 2012, the headgear changeover in the ventilation shaft, the surface conveyors and the underground rock handling facilities were completed and operational. A new full plant tailings, or FPT, backfill plant was commissioned and the permanent shaft ore storage silos are on track to be commissioned at the end of 2013.

The construction phase of the metallurgical plant expansion, intended to increase capacity from 220,000 tonnes per month to 330,000 tonnes per month, was completed in October 2012. The commissioning of the second ball mill, additional free gold recovery circuit, the recycle crusher circuit, and the thickener, elution and smelthouse sections were completed in December 2012. A new control system is in progress for the kiln and a new fifth sludge reactor is being installed to allow for additional electrowinning capacity. Additional production capacity is expected to be added by the end of 2015.

 

     Fiscal 2010      Six-Month
Period ended
December 31,
2010
     Fiscal 2011      Fiscal 2012  

Production

           

Tonnes (‘000)

     1,681         1,101         2,440         2,106   

Recovered grade (g/t)

     4.9         4.1         3.5         4.0   

Gold produced (‘000 oz)

     265         146         273         270   

Results of operations ($ million)

           

Revenues

     288.7         188.2         427.5         450.8   

Total production costs (1)

     279.5         177.3         375.7         410.3   

Total cash costs (2)

     216.1         137.5         293.0         322.9   

Cash profit (3)

     72.6         50.7         134.5         127.9   

Cost per ounce of gold ($)

           

Total production costs

     1,056         1,213         1,376         1,517   

Total cash costs

     816         940         1,073         1,194   

Notional cash expenditure per ounce of gold produced ($) (4)

     1,640         1,914         2,092         2,371   

 

Notes:

(1) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ total production costs to production costs, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended December 31 2012 and 2011—Costs and Expenses”, “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended December 31, 2011 and June 30, 2010—Costs and Expenses” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Six Month Periods Ended December 31, 2010 and 2009—Costs and Expenses”.
(2) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ total cash costs to production costs, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended December 31 2012 and 2011—Costs and Expenses”, “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended December 31, 2011 and June 30, 2010—Costs and Expenses” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Six Month Periods Ended December 31, 2010 and 2009—Costs and Expenses”.
(3) Cash profit represents revenues less total cash costs.
(4) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ NCE to its production costs for fiscal 2012 and 2011, the six month period ended December 31, 2010 and fiscal 2010, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects— Costs—Notional Cash Expenditure”.

Total tonnes milled and gold production decreased from 2.4 million and 0.273 million ounces in fiscal 2011 to 2.1 million and 0.270 million ounces in fiscal 2012, respectively. The decrease in tonnage and gold production was due primarily to a reduction in surface material treated, partially offset by an increase in underground production.

 

81


Table of Contents

South Deep’s power usage is increasing as it builds up production and prepares for the development of long-term infrastructure. Eskom has supplied the additional power requirements for the build up and has installed additional transformers and new transmission lines. The national energy regulator has concluded a five-year pricing agreement and electricity costs are set to rise at an average of 8% per annum, 9.6% for industrial users, the latter of which will apply to Gold Fields. In order to mitigate the cost impact, numerous power saving projects have been initiated to reduce power consumption by 5% in fiscal 2013. See “Risk Factors—Power cost increases may adversely affect Gold Fields’ results of operations”.

South Deep is engaged in underground mining and is thus subject to all of the underground mining risks discussed in “Risk Factors”. The primary safety issues facing South Deep underground operations include seismicity (including seismically induced falls of ground), falls of ground due to gravity and the risk of pedestrians being struck by mobile equipment. To prevent falls of ground accidents, South Deep has implemented a mesh and bolt ground reinforcement support system which is intended to reduce the incidence of falls of ground.

Strict adherence to safe operating practices and procedures are enforced to prevent pedestrians being struck by mobile equipment. In addition, all vehicles and employees’ lamps are being fitted with sensors to prevent employees from being struck by trackless mobile machines. South Deep is mitigating the seismic risks through de-stress mining, the application of backfill and leaving of regional support pillars. In addition, mechanized mining requires fewer workers and reduces the exposure of employees to higher risk areas.

There were no fatalities at the South Deep operation in fiscal 2012. On a calendar year basis, the lost time injury frequency rate (see “Defined Terms and Conventions”) for fiscal 2012 was 1.95 injuries for every million man hours worked, as compared to 1.67 in fiscal 2011 and 2.87 in calendar 2010. The fatal injury frequency rate in fiscal 2012 was 0.00 for every million man hours worked compared to 0.04 in fiscal 2011 and 0.07 in calendar year 2010. Since December 31, 2012, there has been one fatality. South Deep conducts regular audits on its safety systems and performance in order to highlight areas of risk. The mine has formulated and implemented a comprehensive health and safety strategy.

There was one work-related work stoppage at South Deep in fiscal 2012. Since December 31, 2012, there have been no work stoppages.

Both the ISO 14001:2004 Environmental Management System and the OHSAS 18001 certifications were successfully maintained in fiscal 2012. South Deep’s certification under the International Cyanide Management Code which it received in December 2008 was reviewed in October 2011. In December 2011, South Deep received its water use license.

The total shaft hoisting capacities of South Deep are detailed below.

 

Shaft System

   Hoisting
capacity
 
     (tonnes/month)  

Twins Main Shaft

     175,000   

Twins Ventilation Shaft (1)

     195,000   
  

 

 

 

South Sub-Vertical 2 Shaft (2)

     60,000   

South Main Shaft (3)

     60,000   
  

 

 

 

 

Notes:

(1) The Ventilation Shaft at the Twin Shaft Complex was commissioned for hoisting in October 2012. An electrical upgrade to the thyristors will be completed by April 2013, and once this upgrade is completed, the rock winder will be able to hoist the full planned production build-up. The total hoisting capacity of the Twins Shaft Complex, once the Ventilation Shaft upgrade will be complete, is 370,000 tonnes per month.

 

82


Table of Contents
(2) This sub-vertical shaft is currently being refurbished. It has a capacity of 60,000 tonnes per month for sub-surface hoisting during the repair process. Rock from SV2 is hoisted to the surface via the South Main Shaft. Therefore, the South Shaft complex has a current combined hoisting capacity of 60,000 tonnes per month.
(3) This shaft is currently being refurbished and has a capacity of 60,000 tonnes per month during the repair process.

Assuming that Gold Fields does not materially increase or decrease reserves estimates at South Deep and that there are no significant changes to the life of mine plan, South Deep’s December 31, 2012 proven and probable managed reserves of 39.1 million ounces (approximately 36.0 million ounces of which are attributable to Gold Fields, with the rest attributable to non-controlling shareholders) will be sufficient to maintain production through to approximately fiscal 2093. However, as discussed earlier in “Risk Factors” and “—Mine Planning and Management,” there are numerous factors which can affect reserve estimates and the mine plan, which could thus materially change the life of mine.

Processing

All processing at South Deep is carried out at a single gold extraction plant. The following table sets forth year commissioned, processing techniques and processing capacity per month, as well as average tonnes milled per month and metallurgical recovery factors during fiscal 2012 for the plant.

Processing Techniques

 

Plant

   Year
commissioned
     Comminution
phase
   Treatment
phase
   Capacity (1)      Average
milled for
fiscal 2012
     Approximate
recovery factor
for fiscal
2012 (2)(3)
 
     (tonnes/month)  

Twin Shaft Plant

     2002       Primary SAG and
Secondary Ball
milling
   Leach, CIP with
elution and
electrowinning
     220,000         175,473         96.5

 

Notes:

(1) Plant/Mill nameplate capacities are based on a number of operating assumptions, including assumptions regarding the blend of soft and hard ores processed, that can change and which may result in a level of throughput over and above the designed nameplate capacity. In fiscal 2012 the plant capacity was upgraded from 220,000 tonnes per month to 330,000 tonnes per month.
(2) Excludes Kloof low grade surface material.

During fiscal 2012, the South Deep plant treated an average of 0.175 million tonnes per month (excluding Kloof mine toll treatment) consisting only of reef and waste from underground. No surface material from South Deep was treated in 2012. In fiscal 2012, the plant capacity was upgraded from 220,000 tonnes per month to 330,000 tonnes per month.

The full plant backfill tailings plant was commissioned in 2012 and will be able to recover up to 78% by mass of the annual tonnes milled to be returned underground as backfill.

The New Tailings Storage Facility at Doornpoort has been operational for a year and is in the process of being handed over to the operational staff.

Capital Expenditure

Gold Fields spent approximately U.S.$315 million on capital expenditures at the South Deep operation in fiscal 2012, primarily on development, the ventilation shaft deepening and infrastructure, the metallurgical plant

 

83


Table of Contents

expansion, trackless equipment and the full plant tailings backfill facility. Gold Fields expects to spend approximately U.S.$227 million on capital expenditures at South Deep in fiscal 2013, primarily on development, infrastructure and trackless equipment.

Ghana Operations

The Ghana operations are comprised of the Tarkwa and Damang gold mines. Gold Fields Ghana, which holds the interest in the Tarkwa mine, was owned 71.1% by Gold Fields, 18.9% by IAMGold and 10.0% by the government of Ghana. Abosso, which owns the interest in the Damang mine, was owned 71.1% by Gold Fields, 18.9% by IAMGold and 10% by the Ghanaian government, mirroring the shareholding structure of Gold Fields Ghana. On June 22, 2011, Gold Fields acquired the indirect 18.9% minority stake from IAMGold in the Tarkwa and Damang gold mines in Ghana, for a cash consideration of U.S.$667 million, increasing Gold Fields’ interest in each of the Tarkwa and Damang gold mines from 71.1% to 90.0%, the remaining 10.0% interest being held by the Government of Ghana.

Tarkwa Mine

Introduction

The Tarkwa mine is located in southwestern Ghana, about 300 kilometers by road west of Accra. The Tarkwa mine consists of several open pit operations on the original Tarkwa property and the adjacent southern portion of the property, which was formerly referred to as the Teberebie property and was acquired by Gold Fields in August 2000, together with a heap leach facility, referred to as the North Plant Heap Leach Facility (treatment at the South Heap Leach facility having been stopped in December 2012). Gold Fields added a SAG mill and CIL plant and a High Pressure Grinding Roll Facility.

The Tarkwa mine operates under mining leases with a total area of approximately 20,800 hectares, the entirety of which are surface operations. The Tarkwa mine has access to the national electricity grid, water, road and railway infrastructure, although rail service has been non-operational for many years. Most supplies are trucked in from either the nearest seaport, which is approximately 90 kilometers away by road in Takoradi, or from Tema, near Accra, which is approximately 300 kilometers away by road. In fiscal 2012, Tarkwa produced 0.719 million ounces of gold, of which 0.647 million ounces were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to minority shareholders in Gold Fields Ghana. As of December 31, 2012, Tarkwa had approximately 2,800 employees and approximately 1,700 outside contractors.

History

Investment in large-scale mining in the Tarkwa area commenced in the last quarter of the nineteenth century. In 1993, Gold Fields of South Africa, or GFSA, took over an area previously operated by the State Gold Mining Corporation, or SGMC. SGMC had, in turn, acquired the property from private companies owned by European investors. Mining operations commenced in 1997 following initial drilling, feasibility studies and project development (which included the removal of overburden and the resettlement of approximately 22,000 people).

Geology

Gold mineralization at Tarkwa is hosted by Proterozoic Tarkwaian metasediments, which overlie but do not conform to a Birimian greenstone belt sequence. Gold mineralization is concentrated in conglomerate reefs and has some similarities to deposits in the Witwatersrand Basin in South Africa. The deposit comprises a succession of stacked, tabular palaeoplacer units consisting of quartz pebble conglomerates. Approximately 10 such separate economic units occur in the concession area within a sedimentary package ranging from 40 meters to 110 meters in thickness. Low-grade to barren quartzite units are interlayered between the separate reef units.

 

84


Table of Contents

Mining

The existing surface operation currently exploits narrow auriferous conglomerates from six pits, namely Pepe, Akontansi, Teberebie, Atuabo, Maintrain and Kottraverchy. Tarkwa uses the typical open pit mining methods of drilling, blasting, loading and hauling.

Tarkwa faces the same challenges as other open pit and heap leaching mining operations. The operational challenges during the year consisted of increased haul distances and pit depths, greater than expected climatic delays due to heavy rainfall and upgrading infrastructure. Harder ores are expected at Tarkwa, which could reduce throughput and recovery at the north heap leach plant. As yet, throughput has not been affected, but heap leach recoveries declined from 67% in fiscal 2011 to 60.8% in fiscal 2012 as a result of the increase in competent ore, which is less amenable to heap leaching. A secondary crushing circuit in the CIL plant was put into production in March 2012, to counteract the impact of the harder ore on the current CIL throughput rate. On July 16, 2012, the operation of all heap leach facilities at Tarkwa was suspended after Gold Fields Ghana received a directive from the Ghanaian EPA and the Ministry of Environment, Science and Technology to stop discharging water from these facilities and treat all discharges through a water treatment plant to reduce conductivity levels to the prescribed levels. In accordance with environmental best practice and in compliance with the Ghanaian EPA directive Gold Fields has commissioned the construction of two water treatment plants at its North and South Heap Leach facilities. On August 9, 2012, Gold Fields received permission from the Ghanaian EPA to reopen the Heap Leach facilities while the water treatment plants were being built. The North Heap Leach water treatment plant was operational on January 1, 2013, with increased capacity expected by the third quarter of 2013. The South Heap Leach water treatment plant was expected to come into operation in January 2013 but, due to planning delays, is now expected to come into operation during the second quarter of 2013. Tarkwa lost about 0.015 million ounces of gold production during the closure. See “Risk Factors—Gold Fields’ operations are subject to water use licenses, which could impose significant costs and burdens.”

Detailed below are the operating and production results at Tarkwa for fiscal 2012 and 2011, the six month period ended December 31, 2010 and fiscal 2010 .

 

     Fiscal 2010      Six-Month
Period ended
December 31,
2010
     Fiscal 2011      Fiscal 2012  

Production

           

Tonnes (‘000)

     22,716         11,496         23,138         22,910   

Recovered grade (g/t)

     1.0         1.0         1.0         1.0   

Gold produced (‘000 oz) (1)

     721         362         717         719   

Results of operations ($ million)

           

Revenues

     790.1         468.1         1,122.9         1,198.9   

Total production costs (2)

     536.8         280.0         539.2         706.8   

Total cash costs (3)

     470.0         251.9         479.2         602.6   

Cash profit (4)

     320.1         215.2         643.7         596.3   

Cost per ounce of gold ($)

           

Total production costs

     745         773         752         983   

Total cash costs

     652         696         668         838   

Notional cash expenditure per ounce of gold produced ($) (5)

     743         892         913         1,050   

 

Notes:

(1) In fiscal 2010, the six month period ended December 31, 2010, fiscal 2011 and fiscal 2012, 0.513 million ounces, 0.257 million ounces, 0.576 million ounces and 0.647 million ounces of production, respectively, were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to minority shareholders in the Ghana operations.

 

85


Table of Contents
(2) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ total production costs to production costs, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years ended 31 December 2012 and 2011—Costs and Expenses”, “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended December 31, 2011 and June 30, 2010—Costs and Expenses” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Six Month Periods Ended December 31, 2010 and 2009—Costs and Expenses”.
(3) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ total cash costs to production costs, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years ended 31 December 2012 and 2011—Costs and Expenses”, “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended December 31, 2011 and June 30, 2010—Costs and Expenses” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Six Month Periods Ended December 31, 2010 and 2009—Costs and Expenses”.
(4) Cash profit represents revenues less total cash costs.
(5) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ NCE to its production costs for fiscal 2012 and 2011, the six month period ended December 31, 2010 and fiscal 2010, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects— Costs—Notional Cash Expenditure”.

In fiscal 2012, overall ore tonnage mined was 21.9 million tonnes compared with 29.1 million tonnes for fiscal 2011. Total waste mined increased by 22.7 million tonnes, from 95.3 million tonnes to 116.3 million tonnes, compared with fiscal 2011. Compared to fiscal 2011 levels, gold production at Tarkwa decreased slightly in fiscal 2012 because of declining heap leach recoveries and primarily slightly lower grades. Total cash costs per ounce of gold increased by approximately 21% during fiscal 2012, primarily due to increased annual wages, power and fuel, increased tonnes mined, reduced inventory credit and reduced gold production.

Both Gold Fields Ghana and Abosso have concluded tariff negotiations for 2012 and 2013 with their respective power suppliers (the VRA supplies power to Gold Fields Ghana and the ECG provides power to Abosso and the South Heap Leach facility at Gold Fields Ghana), representing a 19% increase on VRA and 15% increase on ECG respectively from fiscal 2011 to fiscal 2013. The 2013 tariffs will remain unchanged from the 2012 tariffs. The VRA has provided a revised “Power Sales and Purchase Agreement between VRA and Gold Fields Ghana” which is expected to be concluded by June 2013. Gold Fields Ghana has concluded a Transmission Service Agreement with GridCo. Until gas supply to the generating units in Ghana is assured, energy prices will correlate with the crude oil price. The DMC are currently in discussions with the VRA regarding a new tariff model from 2014. See “Risk Factors—Power cost increases may adversely affect Gold Fields results of operations”.

Assuming that Gold Fields does not increase or decrease ore reserves estimates at Tarkwa and that there are no changes to the current mine plan at Tarkwa, Tarkwa’s December 31, 2012 proven and probable reserves of 10.1 million ounces (9.1 million of which are attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to the Ghanaian government) will be sufficient to maintain production through approximately fiscal 2036 which includes re-treatment of the South Heap Leach at the end of the life of mine. However, as discussed earlier in “Risk Factors” and “—Mine Planning and Management,” there are numerous factors which can affect reserve estimates and the mine plan, which could thus materially change the life of mine.

The Tarkwa mine is engaged in open pit mining and is thus subject to all the risks associated with open pit mining discussed in “Risk Factors”. Although surface mining generally is less dangerous than underground mining, serious and even fatal accidents do still occur. Tarkwa had no fatalities in fiscal 2012. On a calendar year basis, the lost time injury frequency rate (see “Defined Terms and Conventions”) for fiscal 2012, fiscal 2011 and calendar 2010 was 0.15, 0.21, and 0.43 lost time injuries for every million hours worked, respectively. The fatal injury frequency rate (see “Defined Terms and Conventions”) for fiscal 2012 was 0.00 fatal injuries for every million hours worked, while for fiscal 2011 and calendar 2010 it was 0.05 and 0.06 fatal injuries for every million hours worked, respectively. Since December 31, 2012, there have been no fatalities at Tarkwa. Tarkwa mine received OHSAS 18001 recertification during the year and maintained its ISO 14001 certification. Tarkwa achieved full compliance certification under the International Cyanide Management Code in June 2008 and was successfully recertified in fiscal 2012.

 

86


Table of Contents

There were no labor stoppages in fiscal 2012. However, on April 3, 2013, workers at Tarkwa went on strike leading to a halt in production. On April 8, 2013, in order to end the strike, management and the GMWU agreed to a settlement regarding the process for resolving certain issues raised by union petitions. However, the employees at these operations engaged in a further “go slow” action related to these issues between April 26, 2013 and May 2, 2013, which ended after further discussions between management and the GMWU.

Gold Fields is committed to sustainable development and acquiring and maintaining a “social license to operate” in each of the regions in which it operates. As part of this commitment, the Gold Fields Ghana Foundation supports a wide range of projects in the fields of social and economic development, infrastructure, agriculture, education and health.

Processing

Tarkwa’s ore can be processed using either conventional heap leach techniques with acceptable recoveries or SAG milling with a CIL plant. The operation incorporates two separate heap leach circuits, the North Plant and the South Plant. The construction of a secondary crushing step on the CIL plant was commissioned in March 2012 to ensure current throughput rates are maintained. The following table sets forth year commissioned, processing techniques and processing capacity per month, as well as average tonnes milled per month and metallurgical recovery factors during the fiscal year ended December 31, 2012, for each of the plants at Tarkwa.

Processing Techniques

 

Plant

  Year
commissioned
    Comminution
phase
  Treatment
phase
  Capacity (1)     Average
milled for
fiscal 2012 (4)
    Approximate
recovery factor
for fiscal 2012 (2)
 
                  (tonnes/month)        

CIL Plant

    2004      SAG milling (with
ball mill)
(3)
  CIL treatment     1,025,000        967,000        97.3

North Plant Heap Leach Facility

 

 

1997

  

 

Multiple-stage
crushing and
screening process and
agglomeration

 

Heap leach with ADR
treatment

 

 

770,000

  

 

 

662,000

  

 

 

60.8

High Pressure Grinding Ratio Facility

 

 

2010

  

 

High Pressure
Grinding Roll Milling

 

Heap leach with ADR
treatment

 

 

275,000

  

 

 

281,000

  

 

 

61.8

 

Notes:

(1) Nameplate capacity as designed. Plant/Mill nameplate capacities are based on a number of operating assumptions, including assumptions regarding the blend of soft and hard ores processed, that can change and which may result in an increased level of throughput over and above the designed nameplate capacity.
(2) Percentages are rounded to the nearest whole percent.
(3) The ball mill was added in December 2008.
(4) Heap leach recoveries are the result of an extended solution application process with full recovery requiring several leach cycles. Full recovery of all recoverable gold for current ores is only achieved over several years. Thus, recoveries must be considered in terms of recovery as time progresses, or a “progressive” recovery. Over time, Gold Fields expects both plants to achieve progressive recovery factors of about 64% of contained gold, equivalent to full recovery of all recoverable gold during the life of mine.

The SAG Mill and CIL plant operated 3.7% below nameplate capacity during fiscal 2012. The amount of tonnage treated at the heap leach facilities decreased from 11.7 million tonnes in fiscal 2011 to 11.3 million tonnes in fiscal 2012. The CIL plant processed 12.05 million tonnes in fiscal 2012, as compared to 11.43 million tonnes in fiscal 2011. The High Pressure Grinding Rolls Facility processed 3.37 million tonnes in fiscal 2012.

 

87


Table of Contents

The South Heap Leach facility treated low and marginal grade ore stockpiles. The South Heap Leach operated until December 2012 when a decision was taken to stop stacking ore on the heap leach as a result of the stockpiles in the close proximity being depleted.

Capital Expenditure

Gold Fields spent approximately U.S.$142 million on capital expenditures at the Tarkwa operation in fiscal 2012 (excluding U.S$118 million spent on capital waste mining, which is expensed), principally for the pre-stripping, water treatment plant facilities and additional mining fleet. Gold Fields has budgeted approximately U.S$134 million for capital expenditures at Tarkwa for fiscal 2013 (excluding U.S$130 million to be spent on capital waste mining), principally for primary and ancillary mining fleet, water treatment facilities and tailing storage facility projects.

Damang Mine

Introduction

The Damang deposits are located in the Wassa West District in southwestern Ghana approximately 330 kilometers by road west of Accra and approximately 30 kilometers by road northeast of the Tarkwa mine. The mine exploits hydrothermal in addition to Witwatersrand-style palaeoplacer gold. The Damang mine consists of an open pit operation with a SAG mill and CIL processing plant. Damang operates under a mining lease with a total area of approximately 8,100 hectares. The Damang mine has access to the national electricity grid and water and road infrastructure. Most supplies are brought in by road from the nearest seaport, Takoradi, which is approximately 135 kilometers away, or from Accra, which is approximately 360 kilometers away by road. In fiscal 2012, the Damang mine produced 0.166 million ounces of gold, of which 0.149 million ounces was attributable to Gold Fields. As of December 31, 2012, Damang had approximately 1,100 employees and approximately 800 outside contractors.

History

Mining on the Abosso concession began with underground mining in the early twentieth century. Surface mining at Damang commenced in August 1997 and Gold Fields assumed control of operations on January 23, 2002. Historically, the underground mine was in operation from 1878 until 1956.

Geology

Damang is located on the Damang Anticline, which is marked by Tarkwaian metasediments on the east and west limbs, around a core of Birimian metasediments and volcanics. Gold in the Tarkwaian metasediments and volcanics is predominantly found in the conglomerates of the Banket Formation and is similar to the Witwatersrand in South Africa; however, at Damang, hydrothermal processes have enriched much of this palaeoplacer mineralization. Within the region, the contact between the Birimian and Tarkwaian metasediments and volcanics is commonly marked by zones of intense shearing and is host to a number of significant shear hosted gold deposits including Prestea, Bogoso, and Obuasi.

Palaeoplacer mineralization occurs on the west limb of the anticline at Abosso, Chida, and Tomento, and on the east limb of the anticline at the Kwesie, Lima South, and Bonsa North locations. Hydrothermal enrichment of the Tarkwaian palaeoplacer occurs at the Rex, Amoanda, and Nyame areas on the west limb and the Damang and Bonsa areas on the east limb.

Mining

Damang uses the typical open pit mining methods of drilling, blasting, loading and hauling. The primary operational challenges include improved grade control drilling and dilution controls given that the mine has a number of different ore sources (being DPCB, Huni, Juno and the remnants of the original Damang Pit Cutback, or DPCB), and maintaining adequate and timely supply of appropriate plant feed blend (i.e., where possible a blend of fresh and oxide materials). There were no material operational stoppages to the mining operations during fiscal 2012. During fiscal 2012, the DPCB pit remained the high-grade fresh ore feed source to the plant.

 

88


Table of Contents

Currently, the main oxide feed sources to the plant is the Huni pit. During 2012, it was observed that the ore mineralization continue to dip east perpendicular to the pit, which trends from north to south, going through the east wall and the Eastern Tailings Storage Facility, or ETSF, and a possible cutback to the DPCB is being investigated. A project team is working on the economic viability of the Damang Pit Cutback 2 Project.

Accelerated waste stripping of the Huni pit during fiscal 2012 took place to create mining flexibility. After a study which indicated a substantial cost saving, Damang moved from the outsourced contract with African Mining Services, or AMS, to owner mining from March 2011. The introduction of owner mining, combined with the addition of a fourth shift at the mine, has resulted in a substantial decrease in mining costs per tonne. Since the conversion of owner mining in the first quarter of fiscal 2011, Damang has recouped U.S.$53 million of the one-off cost of U.S.$55 million through the reduction in the running cost rate. The contractor cost of U.S.$4.35 per tonne in fiscal 2011 was reduced to U.S.$3.45 per tonne in fiscal 2012 before accounting for the cost of inflation. In fiscal 2012, a contractor, Engineers & Planners Company Limited, performed the ore haulage contract work at Damang, using 30-tonne trucks to haul the material from the various satellite pits to the RoM pad, which is the ore stockpile dump close to the crushing plant.

Detailed below are the operating and production results at Damang for fiscal 2012 and 2011, the six month period ended December 31, 2010 and fiscal 2010.

 

     Fiscal 2010      Six-Month
Period ended
December 31,
2010
     Fiscal 2011      Fiscal 2012  

Production

           

Tonnes (‘000)

     5,028         2,491         4,942         4,416   

Recovered grade (g/t)

     1.3         1.5         1.4         1.2   

Gold produced (‘000 oz) (1)

     207         117         218         166   

Results of operations ($ million)

           

Revenues

     226.9         152.1         340.8         277.8   

Total production costs (2)

     137.0         88.3         203.0         238.0   

Total cash costs (3)

     128.7         74.6         186.1         216.2   

Cash profit (4)

     98.2         77.5         154.7         61.6   

Cost per ounce of gold ($)

           

Total production costs

     661         755         932         1,430   

Total cash costs

     621         638         855         1,299   

Notional cash expenditure per ounce of gold produced ($) (5)

     738         1,111         1,056         1,628   

 

Notes:

(1) In fiscal 2010, the six month period ended December 31, 2010, fiscal 2011 and 2012, 0.147 million ounces, 0.083 million ounces, 0.175 million ounces and 0.149 million ounces of production, respectively, were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to noncontrolling shareholders in Abosso.
(2) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ total production costs to production costs, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended 31 December 2012 and 2011—Costs and Expenses”, “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended December 31, 2011 and June 30, 2010—Costs and Expenses” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Six Month Periods Ended December 31, 2010 and 2009—Costs and Expenses”.
(3) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ total cash costs to production costs, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended 31 December 2012 and 2011—Costs and Expenses”, “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended December 31, 2011 and June 30, 2010—Costs and Expenses” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Six Month Periods Ended December 31, 2010 and 2009—Costs and Expenses”.

 

89


Table of Contents
(4) Cash profit represents revenues less total cash costs.
(5) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ NCE to its production costs for fiscal 2012 and 2011, the six month period ended December 31, 2010 and fiscal 2010, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects— Costs—Notional Cash Expenditure”.

Total tonnes milled decreased from 4.9 million in fiscal 2011 to 4.4 million in fiscal 2012 primarily due to the reconfiguration of the processing plant. Gold production decreased from 0.218 million ounces in fiscal 2011 to 0.166 million ounces in fiscal 2012 primarily as a result of lower head grades resulting from continuing safety concerns while mining the southern inter-face between Juno and Damang pit cutback. In addition, blending constraints between hard and soft ore resulted in deteriorating grind and lower recovery efficiencies. To re-establish control of the grind size and recovery efficiencies, the milling rates in the process plant have been re-set to lower volumes. As the plant is ageing, preventative maintenance has been increased to provide sustainable processing capacity, particularly given the increase in ore reserves and resources and extended mine life. Total production and cash cost increased from U.S.$932 and U.S.$855 per ounce in fiscal 2011 to U.S.$1,430 and U.S.$1,299 per ounce respectively in fiscal 2012 as a result of lower gold production.

Damang obtains its electricity indirectly from the VRA, which generates the electricity. The electricity is distributed by the ECG, which is a distributor for GridCo, the electricity transmission utility. Damang has concluded tariff negotiations for 2012 and 2013, representing a 15% increase on ECG from fiscal 2011 to fiscal 2013. The 2013 tariffs will remain the same as the 2012 tariffs. See “—Ghana Operations—Tarkwa Mine—Mining” and “Risk Factors—Power cost increases may adversely affect Gold Fields’ results of operations”. Damang has a back-up power generation facility that is owned and controlled by the mine. This is only used during power outages or reduced grid supply capacity from the ECG.

Assuming that Gold Fields does not increase or decrease reserves estimates at Damang and that there are no changes to the current mine plan, Damang’s December 31, 2012 proven and probable reserves of 4.1 million ounces (approximately 3.7 million of which are attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to the Ghanaian government) will be sufficient to maintain production through approximately fiscal 2024 (as per new Life of Mine). However, as discussed earlier in “Risk Factors” and “—Mine Planning and Management,” there are many factors that can affect reserve estimates and the mine plan, which could thus materially change the life of mine.

The Damang mine comprises open pit mining, and is thus subject to all of the risks associated with open pit mining discussed in “Risk Factors”. Although surface mining generally is less dangerous than underground mining, serious and even fatal accidents do still occasionally occur. The safety management system of the mine is OHSAS 18001 certified. The Damang mine has not had a fatal injury since its acquisition by Gold Fields in 2002, including to date. On a calendar year basis, the lost time injury frequency rate (see “Defined Terms and Conventions”) at Damang for fiscal 2012, fiscal 2011 and calendar 2010 was 0.36, 0.19 and 0.64 lost time injuries for every million hours worked, respectively.

The environmental management system at the mine is certified to the ISO 14001 standard. Damang achieved full compliance certification under the International Cyanide Management Code in May 2008 and was successfully recertified in fiscal 2012.

There were no strikes or material work stoppages at Damang in fiscal 2012. However, on April 3, 2013, workers at Damang went on strike leading to a halt in production. On April 8, 2013, in order to end the strike, management and the GMWU agreed to a settlement regarding the process for resolving certain issues raised by union petitions. However, the employees at these operations engaged in a further “go slow” action related to these issues between April 26, 2013 and May 2, 2013, which ended after further discussions between management and the GMWU.

Processing

All ore at Damang is processed through a single facility. The following table sets forth the year commissioned, processing techniques and processing capacity per month, as well as average tonnes milled per month and metallurgical recovery factor during fiscal 2012 for the plant.

 

90


Table of Contents

Processing Techniques

 

Plant

   Year
commissioned
   

Comminution

phase

   Treatment
phase
   Capacity (1)      Average
milled for
fiscal 2012
     Approximate
recovery factor
for fiscal 2012 (2)
 
                     (tonnes/month)         

Processing Plant

  

 

1997

(3)  

 

Primary and two-stage secondary crushing with SAG and ball milling

  

CIL treatment

  

 

400,000

  

  

 

368,000

  

  

 

90

 

Notes:

(1) Nameplate capacity as designed. Plant/Mill nameplate capacities are based on a number of operating assumptions, including assumptions regarding the blend of soft and hard ores processed, that can change and which may result in an increased level of throughput over and above the designed nameplate capacity.
(2) Percentages are rounded to the nearest whole percent.
(3) The secondary crusher was commissioned in 2010.

The ball mill is currently the constraint of the plant and therefore affects throughput. Optimization of the Damang mill involves changing the design of the SAG mill liners and pebble ports, upgrading the mill discharge pumps, installing a pre-leach thickener and internal leach reactor, maintaining two gravity concentrators and constructing an eighth CIL tank. Mining operations continue to focus on maintaining an appropriate plant feed blend.

A second raise of the East Tailings storage capacity was completed in June 2012. This increased capacity to 8 million tonnes, which will sustain production until mid-2014. Early works related to the construction of a new Far East Tailings Storage Facility, or FETSF, is currently underway.

Capital Expenditure

Gold Fields spent approximately U.S.$51 million on capital expenditures at the Damang operation in fiscal 2012 (excluding U.S.$63 million spent on capital waste mining), principally for mining fleet and process plant optimization projects. Gold Fields has budgeted approximately U.S.$56 million for capital expenditures at Damang for fiscal 2013 (excluding U.S.$21 million to be spent on capital waste mining), principally for process plant circuit optimization projects and tailings storage facility projects.

Australia Operations

When Gold Fields acquired the St. Ives and Agnew gold mining operations from WMC Resources Limited, or WMC, on November 30, 2001, part of the purchase consideration included Gold Fields agreeing to pay a royalty to WMC (a right sold to Morgan Stanley in 2002). Separate, but similar, royalties were payable to the state for gold produced from the St. Ives and Agnew operations.

On June 26, 2002, WMC agreed to give up its right to receive royalties from the Agnew operation in exchange for a payment of A$3.6 million. On August 26, 2009 (during fiscal 2010), Gold Fields executed an agreement with Morgan Stanley pursuant to which the royalty payment by St. Ives to certain subsidiaries of Morgan Stanley was terminated for a consideration of A$308 million ($267.1 million).

St. Ives

Introduction

St. Ives is located 80 kilometers south of Kalgoorlie and 20 kilometers south of Kambalda, straddling Lake Lefroy in Western Australia. It holds exploration licenses, prospecting licenses and mining leases covering a total

 

91


Table of Contents

area of approximately 97,700 hectares. St. Ives is both a surface and underground operation, with a number of open pits, four operating underground mines, a metallurgical CIP plant and a heap leach facility. The St. Ives operation obtains electricity pursuant to a contract with a major mining company that expires in January 2014 and has access to water, rail, air and road infrastructure. Needed supplies are trucked in locally from both Perth and Kalgoorlie. In fiscal 2012, St. Ives produced 0.45 million ounces of gold. St. Ives had a workforce of approximately 650 employees and approximately 350 outside contractors as of December 31, 2012.

History

Gold mining began in the St. Ives area in 1897, with WMC commencing gold mining operations at St. Ives in 1980. Gold Fields acquired the St. Ives gold mining operation from WMC in November 2001.

Geology

The gold deposits of St. Ives are located at the southern end of the Norseman-Wiluna greenstone belt of the West Australian Goldfields Province. In the St. Ives area the belt consists of Kalgoorlie Group volcanic rocks, Black Flag group felsic volcanic rocks and sediments and a variety of intrusive and overlying post-tectonic sediments. The area is structurally complex, with host rocks metamorphosed to upper greenschist and lower amphibolite facies. Gold mineralization discovered to date is best developed in the mafic-dominated parts of the sequence, hosted in minor structures including vein arrays, breccia zones and central, quartz-rich and mylonitic parts of shear zones. Deposit styles and ore controls are varied, but deposits are commonly associated with subsidiary structures which splay off the regionally extensive Boulder-Lefroy Fault.

Mining

Gold production takes place over an extensive area at St. Ives, although it is mainly concentrated in a 55 kilometer corridor extending south-southeast from Kambalda across Lake Lefroy. St. Ives sources production from a variety of underground and surface operations. The site has a mill that treats primary ore and a heap leach facility which treated low- and marginal-grade ore. The major production sources for fiscal 2012 were:

Argo Complex . Stoping activities at the Argo mine commenced in November 2003. Production at the Argo underground mine declined in fiscal 2012. The Argo mine is expected to close in the final quarter of fiscal 2013 based on the December 31, 2012 reserves.

Cave Rocks Underground Mines. Cave Rocks is located approximately six kilometers to the west of the Kambalda West township. The underground mine utilizes primarily open stoping methods without backfill to extract ore. Cave Rocks was scheduled to close in December 2012; however, an intensive delineation and exploration program has extended the life of mine through to the end of 2015. Production was limited during the first three quarters of fiscal 2012 with extensive mine development required to access the new ore zones.

Leviathan Open Pit. The Leviathan open pit is based on the expansion of a pre-existing open pit located approximately two kilometers southeast of the Lefroy processing plant. The mine utilizes conventional truck and shovel mining practices. Mining occurs through areas previously exploited by underground mining methods, requiring special care when passing through these mined areas. Procedures based on industry best practice in the mining district have been implemented to manage the risks associated with these zones. Production continued at Leviathan throughout fiscal 2011 and was completed in November 2012.

Athena and Hamlet Underground Mines. The Athena mine reached commercial levels of production in July 2011. The construction of the decline from Athena to the new Hamlet mine commenced in December 2010. The first ore extraction from Hamlet occurred in November 2011 and Hamlet reached commercial levels of production in the first quarter of fiscal 2013. Based on reserves at December 31, 2012, Athena has a life of mine of four years and Hamlet has a life of six years with prospects of extensions to those lives.

 

92


Table of Contents

Other Open Pits . At any one time St. Ives will also operate a series of smaller open pits. During fiscal 2012, open pit production from Leviathan was supplemented by ore from the Agamemnon, Bellerophon, Britannia, Diana and Formidable open pits as well as stockpiled ore from pits operated in previous years.

St. Ives’s ongoing exploration program in fiscal 2012 has led to an improved understanding of the underlying geological mineralization of all mines, enabling consolidation of mine geology and a number of key project areas going forward. At all mines and in particular Cave Rocks, extensional drilling continued in order to replace and extend the existing ore bodies. Continued early-stage exploration and follow-up of prospective targets with first-pass exploratory drilling was also completed in a number of areas. The new mine developments of the Hamlet underground and the Formidable and Britannia open pits have allowed production to continue at similar levels in fiscal 2012.

In July 2011, St. Ives transitioned to owner mining at Cave Rocks and Argo with the assistance of Carlowen Proprietary Ltd, which trades as GBF Underground Mining, or GBF, who continue to undertake underground development work on access tunnels under a fixed and variable contract expiring in July 2013.

Gold Fields had a separate two-year contract for the capital development of the new Athena underground mine (and subsequently Hamlet) with Byrnecut Mining Propriety Limited, or Byrnecut, which extended to January 2013. This contract was retendered and is in the process of being renewed on revised terms and conditions.

Leighton Contractors Proprietary Limited, or Leighton, performed all of the surface mining at St. Ives under an alliance agreement until June 30, 2012. From July 1, 2012, Gold Fields commenced owner mining on a transitional basis as mining fleet became available with Leighton continuing to provide open pit mining services on a limited basis until November 2012 when the site moved fully to owner mining in the open pits.

Detailed below are the operating and production results at St. Ives for fiscal 2012 and 2011, the six month period ended December 31, 2010 and fiscal 2010.

 

     Fiscal 2010      Six-Month
Period Ended
December 31,
2010
     Fiscal 2011      Fiscal 2012  

Production

           

Tonnes (‘000)

     6,819         3,284         6,745         7,038   

Recovered grade (g/t)

     1.9         2.3         2.1         2.0   

Gold produced (‘000 oz) (1)

     421         243         465         450   

Results of operations ($ million)

           

Revenues

     460.6         313.4         734.2         752.2   

Total production costs (2)

     451.9         274.1         577.7         575.5   

Total cash costs (3)

     318.0         173.9         409.9         424.1   

Cash profit (4)

     142.6         139.5         324.3         328.1   

Cost per ounce of gold ($)

           

Total production costs

     1,073         1,128         1,244         1,280   

Total cash costs

     755         716         882         943   

Notional cash expenditure per ounce of gold produced ($) (5)

     1,023         918         1,192         1,554   

 

Notes:

(1) For purposes of allocating production costs between St. Ives and Agnew, the consideration paid for the Australian operations in excess of the book value of the underlying net assets was allocated pro rata to the value of the underlying assets.

 

93


Table of Contents
(2) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ total production costs to production costs, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended December 31, 2012 and 2012—Costs and Expenses, “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended December 31, 2011 and June 30, 2010—Costs and Expenses” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Six Month Periods Ended December 31, 2010 and 2009—Costs and Expenses”.
(3) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ total cash costs to production costs, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended December 31, 2012 and 2012—Costs and Expenses, “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended December 31, 2011 and June 30, 2010—Costs and Expenses” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Six Month Periods Ended December 31, 2010 and 2009—Costs and Expenses”.
(4) Cash profit represents revenues less total cash costs.
(5) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ NCE to its production costs for fiscal 2012 and 2011, the six month period ended December 31, 2010 and fiscal 2010, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects— Costs—Notional Cash Expenditure”.

From fiscal 2011 to fiscal 2012, ore processed at St. Ives increased from 6.745 million tonnes to 7.038 million tonnes, respectively due to improved throughput at the heap leach operations. Gold production decreased marginally to 0.450 million ounces in fiscal 2012 compared to 0.465 million ounces achieved during fiscal 2011 due to lower grade open-pit ore mined. Cash costs increased 3% from U.S.$410 million in fiscal 2011 to U.S.$424 million in fiscal 2012 due to normal inflationary increases and an increase in the A$/U.S.$ exchange rate.

Assuming that Gold Fields does not increase or decrease reserves estimates at St. Ives and that there are no changes to the current mine plan, St. Ives’ December 31, 2012 proven and probable reserves of 2.2 million ounces will be sufficient to maintain production through approximately fiscal 2018. However, as discussed earlier in “Risk Factors” and “—Mine Planning and Management,” there are numerous factors which can affect reserve estimates and the mine plan, which could thus materially change the life of mine.

St. Ives is engaged in underground mining and in both open pit and production stockpile surface mining, and is thus subject to all of the underground and surface mining risks discussed in “Risk Factors”. Seismicity is the primary underground safety risk with mining increasingly occurring at depths below 500 meters. The risk is addressed through the use of backfilling and by mining different parts of the ore body in controlled steps to improve stability, which is called stope sequencing. No fatalities were recorded in fiscal 2010, 2011, 2012 or to date. On a calendar year basis, the lost time injury frequency rate (see “Defined Terms and Conventions”) for fiscal 2012, fiscal 2011 and calendar 2010 was 3.49 (excluding restricted work cases, 23.17 if such cases are included), 2.86 and 5.03 lost time injuries per million hours worked, respectively. St. Ives has a health and safety system that conforms to the requirements of OHSAS 18001 and is integrated with its ISO 14001 environmental management system. Certifications in this respect were maintained during fiscal 2012. St. Ives achieved full compliance certification under the International Cyanide Management Code in August 2009. There were no strikes or material work stoppages at St. Ives in fiscal 2012 or to date in fiscal 2013.

Processing

The table below sets forth year commissioned, processing techniques and processing capacity per month, as well as average tonnes milled per month and metallurgical recovery factors during fiscal 2012, for each of the plants at St. Ives.

 

94


Table of Contents

Processing Techniques

 

Plant

   Year
commissioned (1)
    

Comminution

phase

   Treatment
phase
   Capacity (2)      Average
milled for
fiscal 2012
     Approximate
recovery factor
for fiscal 2012 (5)
 
                      (tonnes/month)         

Lefroy Plant

  

 

2005

  

  

Single-stage crushing and SAG milling

  

CIP

  

 

375,000

  

  

 

396,000

  

  

 

94

Heap Leach Facility

  

 

2000

  

  

Multiple-stage crashing and screening process

  

Carbon absorption

  

 

200,000

  

  

 

191,000

  

  

 

51

% (3)  

 

Notes:

(1) Nameplate capacity as designed. Plant/Mill nameplate capacities are based on a number of operating assumptions, including assumptions regarding the blend of soft and hard ores processed, that can change and which may result in an increased level of throughput over and above the designed nameplate capacity.
(2) Percentages are rounded to the nearest whole percent.
(3) Heap leach recoveries are the result of an extended solution application process with full recovery requiring several leach cycles. Thus, recoveries must be considered in terms of a “progressive” recovery.

The Lefroy Plant consistently achieved in excess of nameplate capacity throughout fiscal 2012. Optimization continued throughout the year to realize incremental improvements in recovery while maintaining throughput and minimizing costs.

The Heap Leach Facility treated low and marginal-grade ore from St. Ives. The heap leach operated until December 2012 when a decision was taken to stop stacking ore on the heap leach due to the high cost of heap leach processing and declining stockpiles of low grade ore. St. Ives will continue irrigating the heap leach during fiscal 2013 while the value of gold produced exceeds the costs incurred.

Capital Expenditure

Gold Fields spent approximately A$268 million on capital expenditures at St. Ives in fiscal 2012 primarily on mine development, development of a new tailings facility and fleet acquisition for the transition to owner mining (excluding A$34 million spent on exploration, which is expensed). Gold Fields has budgeted approximately A$137 million for capital expenditures at St. Ives in fiscal 2013 (excluding A$21 million spent on exploration, which is expensed). These funds are principally earmarked for pre-stripping at the open pits, the continuing development at Cave Rocks and Hamlet Mines, development of Bellerophon mine and the purchase of mining fleet.

Agnew

Introduction

Agnew is located 23 kilometers west of Leinster, approximately 375 kilometers north of Kalgoorlie and 630 kilometers northwest of Perth, Western Australia. It holds exploration licenses, prospecting licenses and mining leases covering a total area of approximately 54,000 hectares. Agnew operated both the Waroonga underground mining complex (comprising the Kim, Main and Rajah ore bodies) and the Songvang open pit in fiscal 2012. Underground mining is conducted from the Waroonga Underground Complex which comprises multiple ore zones. Agnew has one metallurgical plant. Agnew is serviced by sealed road infrastructure to the mine gate. Agnew is largely a fly-in fly-out site. Local services including air transport with a sealed runway and accommodation is provided pursuant to an arrangement with a neighboring mine operated by a major mining company. Agnew has access to electricity pursuant to a contract with the same neighboring mine which expires in January 2014. The bulk of the water is supplied from the mining operations and recovered from the in-pit tailings facility and previously mined pits. Supplies are generally trucked in from Perth or Kalgoorlie. In fiscal 2012, the operation produced 0.176 million ounces of gold. As of December 31, 2012, Agnew had approximately 260 employees and approximately 200 outside contractors.

 

95


Table of Contents

History

Gold was discovered at Agnew in 1895 and production was intermittent until WMC acquired the operation in the early 1980s and constructed the current mill in 1986. Since that time, numerous open pits and underground operations have been mined.

Geology

The Agnew deposits are located within the northwest portion of the Norseman-Wiluna greenstone belt of the Western Australian Goldfields. In the Agnew area the greenstone belt consists of an older sequence of ultramafic flows, gabbros, basalts, felsic volcanics and related sedimentary rocks. The rocks are folded about the large, moderately north plunging Lawlers Anticline. The Agnew deposits are located on the western limb of this anticline, and major deposits discovered to date lie on sheared contacts between stratigraphic units. The anticline is cut by north-northeast trending faults such as the Waroonga and East Murchison Unit shear zones.

Mining

The principal production source in fiscal 2012 at Agnew was the Waroonga underground mining complex. The northern cutback of the Songvang open pit commenced in 2011 and this ore has supplemented underground feed to the mill. Mining of this cutback was completed in early 2012 and the stockpiled ore supplemented underground production throughout 2012. Gold Fields expects that the Waroonga complex will remain the principal production source in fiscal 2013. The Waroonga Underground Complex included underground mining of the Kim South, Rajah and Main Lode ore bodies. Following a strategic review of Agnew in the third quarter of fiscal 2012, the evaluation indicated that there were improved economics by only mining the higher grade Kim ore body. This revised strategy was implemented in the fourth quarter of fiscal 2012. The mining method involves longhole open stoping with paste filling. Access to the ore body is through a decline tunnel which accommodates workers, materials and equipment. Waroonga underground performance averaged 52,000 tonnes per month in fiscal 2012.

During fiscal 2012, exploration to extend reserves at Waroonga continued to focus on down-dip extensions to the Kim South resources and, prior to the strategic review, the Main Lode resources.

During fiscal 2012, mining development of a new primary return air shaft was completed and new surface fans were installed. This system was designed to ensure sufficient ventilation underground for the life of the mine and doubled the previous ventilation capacity. Agnew commenced owner mining of its stoping activities in 2010. Underground development is performed by Barminco Limited, or Barminco. Barminco provides employees, consumables and equipment including drilling, blasting and haulage of development ore and waste. Barminco was awarded a three-year contract for mine development in June 2010. The contract for underground development at Agnew is in the process of being competitively tendered with a new three year contract to be awarded.

 

96


Table of Contents

Detailed below are the operating and production results at Agnew for fiscal 2012 and 2011, the six month period ended December 31, 2010 and fiscal 2010.

 

     Fiscal 2010      Six-Month
Period Ended
December 31,
2010
     Fiscal 2011      Fiscal 2012  

Production

           

Tonnes (‘000)

     883         417         935         943   

Recovered grade (g/t)

     5.8         5.9         6.5         5.8   

Gold produced (‘000 oz)

     165         80         194         176   

Results of operations ($ million)

           

Revenues

     177.8         102.4         313.1         294.4   

Total production costs (1)(2)

     109.1         60.5         179.6         190.4   

Total cash costs (3)

     87.7         50.2         149.3         152.7   

Cash profit (4)

     90.1         52.2         163.8         141.7   

Cost per ounce of gold ($)

           

Total production costs

     660         760         926         1,078   

Total cash costs

     531         631         769         864   

Notional cash expenditure per ounce of gold produced ($) (5)

     874         961         1,105         1,205   

 

Notes:

(1) For purposes of allocating production costs between St. Ives and Agnew, the consideration paid for the Australian operations in excess of the book value of the underlying net assets was allocated pro rata to the value of the underlying assets.
(2) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ total production costs to production costs, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended December 31, 2012 and 2011—Costs and Expenses”, “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended December 31, 2011 and June 30, 2010—Costs and Expenses” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Six Month Periods Ended December 31, 2010 and 2009—Costs and Expenses”.
(3) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ total cash costs to production costs, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended December 31, 2012 and 2011—Costs and Expenses”, “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended December 31, 2011 and June 30, 2010—Costs and Expenses” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Six Month Periods Ended December 31, 2010 and 2009—Costs and Expenses”.
(4) Cash profit represents revenues less total cash costs.
(5) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ NCE to its production costs for fiscal 2012 and 2011, the six-month period ended December 31, 2010 and fiscal 2010, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects— Costs—Notional Cash Expenditure”.

From fiscal 2011 to fiscal 2012, tonnes of ore processed at Agnew increased from 0.935 million tonnes to 0.943 million tonnes and included the processing of stockpiled ore from a cutback of the Songvang pit. Gold production decreased to 0.176 million ounces in fiscal 2012 compared to 0.194 million ounces in fiscal 2011 due to mining constraints at the Kim underground mine. 90% of ounces produced came from underground. Total cash cost per ounce increased to $864 per ounce in fiscal 2012 from $769 per ounce in fiscal 2011 in U.S. dollar terms due to lower production, normal inflationary increases and processing the higher cost low grade ore from Songvang.

Assuming that Gold Fields does not increase or decrease reserves estimates at Agnew and that there are no changes to the current mine plan at Agnew, Agnew’s December 31, 2012 proven and probable reserves at 1.2 million ounces will be sufficient to maintain production through approximately fiscal 2019. However, as discussed earlier in “Risk Factors” and “—Mine Planning and Management,” there are numerous factors which can affect reserve estimates and the mine plan, which could thus materially change the life of mine.

 

97


Table of Contents

Agnew engaged in underground mining and reclaiming stockpiles arising from the mined out Songvang operation during fiscal 2012. Agnew may pursue further open pit opportunities in the future and is thus subject to all of the underground and surface mining risks discussed in “Risk Factors”. The primary safety risk at Agnew is falls of ground at the underground operations, which is addressed through the use of ground support, backfilling of open voids and sequencing of mine operations to improve overall stability of the ground. There were no fatalities at Agnew in fiscal 2012, fiscal 2011 and fiscal 2010 or to date. On a calendar year basis, the lost time injury frequency rate for fiscal 2012, fiscal 2011 and calendar 2010 was 3.93 (excluding restricted work cases, 16.69 if such cases are included), 2.72 and 1.11 lost time injuries per million hours worked, respectively.

Agnew deploys a health and safety management system that conforms to the requirements of OHSAS 18001. The mine also has an environmental management system that is certified to the ISO 14001 standard. Agnew has retained ISO 14001 certification following a successful audit undertaken in March 2012. Agnew achieved full compliance certification under the International Cyanide Management Code in March 2010. There were no strikes or material work stoppages at Agnew in fiscal 2012 or to date.

Processing

All processing at Agnew is provided by a single plant. The following table sets forth year commissioned, processing techniques and processing capacity per month, as well as average tonnes milled per month and the metallurgical recovery factor during the fiscal year ended December 31, 2012 for the plant:

Processing Techniques

 

Plant

   Year
commissioned
    

Comminution
phase

   Treatment
phase
   Capacity (1)      Average milled
for fiscal 2012
     Approximate
recovery factor
for fiscal
2012 (2)
 
     (tonnes/month)  

Main Plant

     1986       2-stage ball milling    CIP treatment      110,000         78,600         93.2

 

Notes:

(1) Nameplate capacity as stated by the manufacturer. Plant/Mill nameplate capacities are based on a number of operating assumptions, including assumptions regarding the blend of soft and hard ores processed, that can change and which may result in an increased level of throughput over and above the designed nameplate capacity.
(2) Percentages are rounded to the nearest whole percent.

Capital Expenditure

Gold Fields spent approximately A$55 million on capital expenditures at Agnew in fiscal 2012 primarily on mining equipment and decline development (excluding A$5 million spent on exploration, which is expensed). Gold Fields has budgeted approximately A$39 million for capital expenditures at Agnew for fiscal 2013, primarily for mine development and capital works.

Peru Operation

Gold Fields owned a 92% voting interest (80.7% economic interest) in the Cerro Corona mine through its shareholding in La Cima. On April 15, 2011, Gold Fields increased its economic interest in La Cima from 80.7% to its present 98.5% following a voluntary offer to minority shareholders in La Cima to acquire their shares at a cost of $382 million.

 

98


Table of Contents

Cerro Corona

Introduction

The Cerro Corona mine became operational by the end of the first quarter of fiscal 2009. It forms part of a porphyry copper-gold deposit situated within the Hualgayoc Mining District in northern Peru. It is located in the highest part of the Western Cordillera of the Andes, in northern Peru, close to the headwaters of the Atlantic continental basin. Cerro Corona is located approximately 80 kilometers by road north of the City of Cajamarca. Cerro Corona holds mining leases covering a total area of approximately 1,600 hectares and the project was developed over an area of 940 hectares. Cerro Corona’s electricity is supplied through a long-term contract with a Peruvian power supplier and transported through the national power transmission system and a 34 kilometer transmission line constructed by the project. Cerro Corona’s water requirements are provided primarily by retention of rainfall and pit dewatering; water is continuously recycled. In fiscal 2012, the operation produced 0.170 million ounces of gold and 36,171 tonnes of copper, of which 0.168 million ounces of gold and 35,649 tonnes of copper were attributable to Gold Fields. As of December 31, 2012, Cerro Corona had approximately 370 employees involved in operating the mine and approximately 1,200 outside contractors involved in both mine operations and tailings dams construction programs.

History

In December 2003, Gold Fields, through a subsidiary, signed a definitive agreement to purchase an 80.7% economic and 92% voting interest in the Cerro Corona mine from a Peruvian family-owned company, Sociedad Minera Corona S.A., or SMC. The agreement called for a reorganization whereby the assets of Cerro Corona were transferred to La Cima, in July 2004. Following approval of an environmental impact assessment on December 2, 2005, Gold Fields completed the purchase of the 92% voting interest (80.7% economic interest) in La Cima in January 2006, for a total consideration of $40.5 million. La Cima subsequently acquired all requisite additional permits to construct the mine and construction commenced in May 2006.

Geology

The Cerro Corona gold-copper deposit is hosted by a 600- to 700-meter diameter sub-vertical cylindrical- shaped quartz diorite porphyry stock emplaced into mid-Cretaceous limestone and marls and siliclastic rocks. Within the porphyry, gold-copper mineralization is primarily hosted by extensive zones of stockwork veining. There are at least two phases of diorite placement, only one of which is mineralized. The non-mineralized diorite is generally regarded as the last phase, and is referred to as “barren core.” The latest re-modeling suggests that the Cerro Corona porphyry is probably comprised of four or five satellite stocks with the last two being barren. The intrusive has been emplaced at the intersection of Andean-parallel and Andeannormal (transandean) structures. Supergene oxidation and leaching processes at Cerro Corona have led to the development of a weak to moderate copper enrichment blanket, allowing for the subdivision of the deposit, from the surface downward, into an oxide zone, a mixed oxide-sulphide zone, a secondary enriched (supergene) sulphide zone and a primary (hypogene) sulphide zone.

Mining

The Cerro Corona deposit is mined by conventional, bulk surface mining methods. The Cerro Corona operation involves a single surface mine. This ore is treated in a conventional milling and sulphide flotation concentrator capable of treating 6.2 million tonnes per annum of ore and producing between 100,000 and 190,000 tonnes per annum of copper and gold containing concentrate, which is treated mainly at smelters in Japan, Korea and Europe.

The single largest contractor employer is Minera San Martin. Minera San Martin carries out all mining activities. All mine planning, excavation and head grade and engineering specifications to meet the required design performance through the life of mine are directly managed by La Cima personnel. Other contractors

 

99


Table of Contents

provide camp administration and catering, security, safety and laboratory operations. In addition, an average of approximately 500 temporary contractors per month are involved in the construction program at the tailings facility

Detailed below are the operating and production results at Cerro Corona in fiscal 2010, the six-month period ended December 31, 2010, fiscal 2011 and fiscal 2012.

 

     Fiscal 2010      Six-Month
Period ended
December 31,
2010
     Fiscal 2011     Fiscal 2012  

Production

          

Tonnes (‘000)

     6,141         3,102         6,593        6,513   

Recovered grade (g/t)

     0.7         0.8         0.8        1.24   

Recovered copper grade (%)

     0.70         0.66         0.61        0.68   

Combined yield (g/t)

     2.0         2.0         1.8        1.6   

Gold produced (‘000 oz)

     139         80         161        170   

Copper produced (‘000 tonnes)

     41         20         39        36 (1)  

Gold equivalent ounces (‘000 eq oz)

     394         200         383        342   

Results of operations ($ million)

          

Revenues (1)

     411.4         266.6         560.5        556.6   

Total production costs (2)

     198.8         113.8         242.1        230.5   

Total cash costs (3)

     135.5         80.6         171.1        171.6   

Cash profit (4)

     275.9         186.0         389.4        385.0   

Cost per ounce of gold($) (5)

          

Total production costs

     505         570         632        658   

Total cash costs

     348         401         447        490   

Notional cash expenditure per ounce of gold produced ($) (6)

     560         548         604        774   

 

Notes:

(1) Equates to 172 thousand ounces on a gold equivalent basis at a price of $1,663 per ounce of gold and $7,945 per tonne of copper.
(2) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ total production costs to production costs, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended December 31, 2012 and 2011—Costs and Expenses”, “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended December 31, 2011 and June 30, 2010—Costs and Expenses” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Six Month Periods Ended December 31, 2010 and 2009—Costs and Expenses”.
(3) For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ total cash costs to production costs, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended December 31, 2012 and 2011—Costs and Expenses”, “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended December 31, 2011 and June 30, 2010—Costs and Expenses” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Six Months Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Years Ended December 31, 2011 and June 30, 2010—Costs and Expenses”, “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Six Month Periods Ended December 31, 2010 and 2009—Costs and Expenses”.
(4) Cash profit represents revenues less total cash costs.
(5) Calculated on the basis of a total of 350,379 ounces of gold and gold equivalent sold.
(6) Calculated on the basis of a total of 342,098 ounces of gold and gold equivalent produced. For a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ NCE to its production costs for fiscal 2012, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Costs—Notional Cash Expenditure”.

 

 

100


Table of Contents

Assuming that Gold Fields does not increase or decrease reserve estimates at Cerro Corona and that there are no changes to the current mine plan, Cerro Corona’s December 31, 2012 proven and probable reserves of 2.8 million ounces of gold and 1,039 million pounds of copper (of which, 2.7 million ounces of gold and 1,024 million pounds of copper are attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to non-controlling shareholders at La Cima) will be sufficient to maintain production through approximately fiscal 2028. However, as discussed earlier in “Risk Factors” and “—Mine Planning and Management,” there are numerous factors that can affect reserve estimates and the mine plan, which could thus materially change the life of mine.

The Cerro Corona mine involves open pit mining, and is thus subject to all of the risks associated with open pit mining discussed in “Risk Factors”. Although surface mining generally is less dangerous than underground mining, serious and even fatal accidents do still occasionally occur. There were no fatalities at Cerro Corona in fiscal 2012 and none to date in fiscal 2013. On a calendar year basis, the lost time injury frequency rate (See “Defined Terms and Conventions”) at Cerro Corona for fiscal 2012, fiscal 2011 and calendar 2010 was 0.00, 0.18 and 0.00 lost time injuries for every million hours worked, respectively. Cerro Corona has implemented a health and safety management system in accordance with the Gold Fields Full Compliance Health and Safety Management System and in accordance with the OHSAS 18001. OHSAS 18001 certification was obtained in June 2010. The recertification audit of the integrated ISO 14001 and OHSAS 18001 requirements was successfully completed in August 2012. In fiscal 2012, Cerro Corona was ranked second for its safety practices in open pit mining by the Peruvian National Institute of Mining. La Cima was also awarded the John T. Ryan safety award in recognition of its outstanding safety performance for the third consecutive year. The fourth amendment to the Cerro Corona environmental impact assessment, or EIA, was approved by MEM in September 2011. Further, in fiscal 2012, Cerro Corona’s non-profit organization, “Asociación Puentes para el Desarrollo”, which was incorporated in fiscal 2011 to administrate and co-finance specific social programs, initiated a project with local and regional government for the improvement of child nutrition.

La Cima entered into a five year labor agreement with the Cerro Corona workers union in November 2011. Over the last few years Peru has seen many cases of conflicts and dissention between local communities and mining operations and mining projects, stemming largely from the communities’ desire for greater participation in the economic benefits of these mining projects. Cerro Corona has undertaken extensive community consultation and negotiation since 2003 through the land purchase and permitting process to achieve agreement with local communities on various aspects of community involvement. A comprehensive strategy to work with the communities has been implemented through the operations stages. The main focus of this strategy relies on three pillars which are (i) promoting the development of basic local infrastructure such as roads, telecommunications, electricity, potable water, education and health, (ii) training and employing the local communities, including having employed more than 1,000 locals during construction, maintaining approximately 500 currently, and developing more than 50 local contractors and (iii) developing economically self-sustaining projects such as a natural pastures and forestation. Gold Fields believes its social strategy has created goodwill with the local communities, with the implementation of key projects such as the paving of the road to Hualgayoc, rural electrification, a potable water plant, and the Kunturwasi highway, among others. The sustainable development projects have been very successful, with more than 700 hectares of natural pastures improved and 300 cows genetically enhanced to improve production of milk. Through the construction and operations phase, La Cima has carefully prioritized the agreements with local communities.

La Cima did not experience any work stoppages in fiscal 2012.

 

101


Table of Contents

Processing

The following table sets forth year commissioned, processing techniques and processing capacity per month, for the processing plant at Cerro Corona:

Processing Techniques

 

Plant

   Year
commissioned
     Comminution
phase
     Treatment
phase
   Capacity (1)      Average milled
for fiscal 2012
     Approximate
recovery factor
for fiscal 2012 (2)
 
     (tonnes/month)  

Main Plant

     2008         SAG/ball milling       Conventional
sulphide
floatation circuit
     560,000         543,000        
 
Gold 68%
Copper 86%
  
  

 

Notes:

(1) Nameplate capacity as designed. Plant/Mill nameplate capacities are based on a number of operating assumptions, including assumptions regarding the blend of soft and hard ores processed, that can change and which may result in an increased level of throughput over and above the designed nameplate capacity.
(2) Percentages are rounded to the nearest whole percent.

Studies are currently being conducted to evaluate the feasibility of a heap leach facility for the treatment of oxide ores which have previously been mined and stockpiled on surface. An expansion of the processing plant capacity for the treatment of sulphide ores is also underway.

Gold Fields operates a concentrate storage warehouse at the port of Salaverry in Trujillo city, approximately 450 kilometers away from Cerro Corona. Concentrate is shipped from the Salaverry port in bulk carrier vessels. Gold Fields entered into a five-year contract with Transportes Rodrigo Carranza, or TRC, in the third quarter of fiscal 2008 pursuant to which TRC handles the logistics of trucking concentrate from the mine to the warehouse and then transferring it to the ships. Operations at Salaverry are managed under the same safety and environmental standards as those at Cerro Corona. La Cima has contributed to improvement of the environmental practices at the port by implementing the first fully hermetic shiploading equipment in Peru.

Capital Expenditure

Gold Fields spent approximately U.S.$94 million on capital expenditures at Cerro Corona in fiscal 2012, consisting primarily of the construction activities at the tailings facility. Gold Fields has budgeted approximately U.S.$84 million for capital expenditures at Cerro Corona for fiscal 2013, primarily on construction of the tailings dam and completion of improvements of the process plant facilities.

Growth and International Projects

Gold Fields’ Growth & International Projects Group, or GIP, manages a diverse portfolio of exploration and development projects in Africa, Europe, Central Asia, the Americas and Australasia. In addition, Gold Fields has a number of exploration projects associated with mineral rights it holds which are adjacent to its active mining operations in South Africa, Ghana, Peru and Australia. The GIP programs are managed from two exploration hubs in Perth, Australia and Denver, United States. The company also has offices in Santiago, Chile; Vancouver, Canada; and Bamako, Mali. As of December 31, 2012, Gold Fields’ GIP included 481 full-time, part-time and contract employees, of which 165 are geoscientists and engineers, who provide the key technical capability in the regions of focus around the world. In addition to these employees, Gold Fields’ GIP also employs approximately 230 employees of outside contractors. Gold Fields’ growth strategy is based on a balanced approach to projects, which provides the ability to consider a project at any stage of development, from the greenfields stage through the feasibility study and including construction.

 

102


Table of Contents

The goal of this strategy is to maintain a consistent pipeline covering all stages of project development in order to deliver a new feasibility level project every one to two years, with at least one project in construction at any one time.

Gold Fields budgets to spend about $40 per ounce of gold produced on greenfields exploration in fiscal 2013, as distinct from the resource development and feasibility staged projects and near-mine exploration which refers to exploration around Gold Fields’ mine sites.

Gold Fields previously operated in four regional operating areas: South Africa, Australasia, West Africa and South America, with additional exploration activities in North America and an opportunistic approach to the “Rest of the World”. Following a review of the group project management philosophies during 2012, the regional operating areas were expanded to cover the entire global footprint. The regions are organized as clusters of countries based on time zones. Four Regions cover the globe: the Americas region; the Europe and MENA (Middle East and North Africa) region; the Australasia region (including Central and Eastern Asia); and the Southern Africa Development Countries region. The location of any project or activity defines which region it is designated to. The designated region will be committed to delivering the associated project business case for advanced project development, while Gold Fields’ GIP is responsible for delivering global exploration and project development focused on the growth of the company.

Gold Fields’ vision is to deliver sustainable growth in high quality gold production with a focus on quality of production measured by maximizing total margin and free cash flow. Gold Fields will leverage off its established infrastructure wherever possible to reduce development hurdles and delivery timelines for new opportunities. Near-mine exploration projects, which are adjacent to Gold Fields’ existing mining operations, endeavor to capture any possible operating synergies which can be realized, for example, by sharing processing plants and other infrastructure, which has a knock-on effect with regard to minimum project size criteria.

In the longer term, Gold Fields is also considering a limited number of opportunities in a number of new jurisdictions areas where it has historically had lower levels of activity. The focus is on areas of the world which are historically under-explored or where new technologies and concepts can be applied to improve the likelihood of discovery. Gold Fields has successfully expanded its exploration activities in countries and regions where it has limited experience by means of equity investments in, and strategic alliances with, junior mining partners who are already well established in those areas. Gold Fields has historically applied this strategy to exploration projects in Mali, China, Philippines, Argentina and Kyrgyzstan, amongst others.

Gold Fields divides the different phases of an exploration target’s development into what it refers to as the resource pipeline. An exploration project normally comprises several distinct exploration targets and the resource pipeline provides for the progression of the exploration targets in five stages: (1) target definition, (2) initial drilling, (3) advanced drilling or scoping study, (4) resource development or pre-feasibility study, and (5) feasibility study. To be successful, exploration targets need to be drill tested and moved up to the next exploration phase, or be divested. This leads to a focus on turning over targets as quickly and as effectively as possible by drill testing. Greenfields exploration projects are generated by reviewing and ranking the most prospective terrains across the world and exploration areas are selected after considering country risk and strategic fit. Each exploration region continuously monitors and reviews third party projects at all stages of development.

Greenfields Exploration

Gold Fields focuses its greenfields exploration activities on finding opportunities with the correct balance of quality, size and risk. When determining whether it will proceed with a project, Gold Fields weighs a variety of factors, including acquisition costs, expected operating and capital costs of production, as well as the possible technical, commercial, social, environmental and geo-political risks against the expected returns for the project. Other important considerations include the optionality embedded in the project and its strategic importance in

 

103


Table of Contents

terms of geographic diversification and production profiles. This could result in consideration of additional multi-commodity targets such as copper-gold deposits, gold-silver type deposits, or even platinum group metals, or PGM, deposits such as at the APP project in Finland. For greenfields projects, Gold Fields makes use of its existing operating centers in Ghana (through Gold Fields Exploration (Ghana) Ltd.), Australia (through Gold Fields Australasia Pty. Ltd.) and Peru (through Minera Gold Fields Peru S.A.) to pursue, incubate and facilitate new opportunities within other prospective countries in the respective regions.

The table below provides a breakdown of the number of targets in Gold Fields’ three main exploration regions, for each of the five stages of the resource triangle as of December 31, 2012. Multiple early stage targets in a single project has been reported as a single project, as opposed to multiple targets as previously reported by Gold Fields. This provides a more coherent representation of the overall project pipeline. The table does not include near-mine exploration projects on sites adjacent to Gold Fields’ existing operations.

 

Phase

   Europe and
MENA
     Australasia      The
Americas
     Total
Worldwide
 

Feasibility Study

     0         0         1         1   

Resource Development

     3         1         0         4   

Advanced Drilling

     0         1         2         3   

Initial Drilling

     3         3         4         10   

Target Definition

     0         3         5         8   

During fiscal 2012, Gold Fields spent approximately U.S.$135.3 million on greenfields exploration projects not adjacent to its mining operations and completed approximately 236,800 meters of drilling. In the same period, Gold Fields spent U.S.$103.5 million on feasibility and evaluation costs. Gold Fields’ total budget for greenfields exploration for fiscal 2013 is approximately U.S.$80 million.

Initial Drilling Projects

Gold Fields currently has 10 initial drilling projects (i.e., projects where a target has been successfully defined and drilling has commenced) in eight countries, ranging from Argentina to the Philippines.

Advanced Drilling Projects

In central British Columbia, Canada, Gold Fields is exploring the Woodjam project for copper-gold porphyry deposits. The project comprises two separate joint venture agreements signed in July 2009 and May 2010 with Fjordland Exploration Inc. and Cariboo Rose Resources, respectively, to earn up to a 70% interest. In November 2011, Fjordland Exploration and Cariboo Rose completed a “plan of arrangement” which spun out their stake of the Woodjam project into Consolidated Woodjam Copper Corp., a separate company now listed on the TSX Venture Exchange. The properties comprise 56,800 hectares covering several known porphyry copper and gold targets including the South East Zone, Takom, Megabuck, Deerhorn, and the recently discovered Three Firs zones. Additional prospective third party concessions totaling 2,150 hectares within the project area were optioned during 2011 and have been incorporated into the joint venture. In July 2011, Gold Fields also signed a joint venture agreement to earn up to a 70% interest of the nearby 8,902 hectare Redgold copper-gold property which is owned by two private individuals.

In January 2011, the Woodjam project was promoted to the advanced drilling stage based on positive results of the initial drilling programs. As of December 2012, Gold Fields has completed a total of 89,100 meters of diamond drilling and 170 meters of reverse circulation drilling on multiple targets within the Woodjam project. Gold Fields vested its 51% interest in the Woodjam North and South properties in 2011 and notified the partners of its intention to take up an additional 19% option allowing for a total project interest of 70%. The additional option required a minimum commitment of $2 million dollars on Woodjam South and $1 million on Woodjam North in the first year. This commitment was achieved during 2012 to allow Gold Fields to maintain its rights to

 

104


Table of Contents

the additional option. It has also completed approximately 2,400 meters of diamond drilling on the adjacent Rand option and approximately 3,900 meters of diamond drilling on the Redgold property. Gold Fields completed a conceptual mining study for the project and the maiden copper-gold resource for the South East zone as first reported in February 2012, which will be further updated in 2013 following completion of additional infill and extensional drilling programs during 2012.

In northwestern Kyrgyzstan, Gold Fields now owns a 100% interest in the Talas Copper-Gold Project which was previously with Orsu Metals Corporation, or Orsu. A transaction was completed on July 20, 2012 transferring the outstanding 40% of the project to Gold Fields for consideration of $10 million and a private placement for 25 million units of Orsu at a price of CAD$0.40 per unit, or the Subscription. Each unit consisted of one common share of Orsu and one-half of one common share purchase warrant. Each whole common share purchase warrant will be exercisable for a period of three years from the date of issue to acquire one common share of Orsu at a price of CAD$0.50. Completion of the subscription is conditional on Orsu obtaining formal waiver of the Kazakh Government’s pre-emptive right and requirement for consent for the issuance or placement of new shares in Orsu pursuant to the subscription. The process for obtaining these interests is ongoing.

The Talas Copper-Gold Project covers four exploration licenses which are prospective for copper-gold porphyry deposits. Exploration work completed to date has focused on the Taldybulak copper-gold deposit, with approximately 36,000 meters of drilling completed by the Group since 2008. Due to a prolonged period of social and political unrest in Kyrgyzstan from 2010-2011, all field work was suspended. In October 2011, a new President was elected and he consolidated a new government late in 2011. This allowed activities to recommence with a new diamond drilling program in April 2012, which completed approximately 6,400 meters in 2012 and is expected to continue in fiscal 2013. A new scoping study on this project is expected to be completed in first half of 2013.

In Chile, Gold Fields exercised an option, as part of an agreement, in February 2012 to acquire 100% of two properties, Salares Norte and Piedra, from SBX Asesorias e Inversiones, a private Chilean company, and the concessions were registered under the name Minera Gold Fields Salares Norte Limitada, a wholly owned subsidiary of Gold Fields. At Salares Norte, Gold Fields completed an initial reverse circulation drilling program in April 2011 consisting of three widely-spaced holes (comprising 933 meters of drilling) which tested combined geophysical and soil geochemical anomalies considered prospective for epithermal gold-silver mineralization. Results were encouraging and a follow-up diamond drilling program (consisting of 3,800 meters drilled) was completed in April 2012. The second phase of drilling was successful in identifying gold and silver mineralization in a high sulphidation system. The project was promoted to “Advanced Drilling” status in July 2012. A 30,000 meter drilling program commenced October 2012 to define limits and potential extensions to the mineralization with the aim of reporting a maiden resource on the project by the end of 2013.

In May 2011, an option agreement was signed with S.L.M. Rio Baker, a private Chilean company, which grants Gold Fields the option to acquire 100% of the Rio Baker property, which is adjacent to Salares Norte. Target definition work consisting of geological mapping, soil sampling and geophysical surveys was completed in early 2012 and initial drilling of targets identified commenced in late 2012 as part of the 30,000 meter drilling program described for Salares Norte.

Gold Fields also has an option to acquire 100% of the nearby Pircas gold property held by S.C.M. Aguas Heladas, a private Chilean company. In May 2011, a follow-up reverse circulation drilling program on the main breccia target was suspended by early winter snowstorms. Gold Fields aims to recommence and complete this drilling program in the second half of fiscal 2013.

International Projects

Chucapaca Feasibility Study

In early 2007, Gold Fields formed an agreement with Compania de Minas Buenaventura S.A., or Buenaventura, in southern Peru for the Chucapaca project. In early 2010, Minera Gold Fields Peru completed its

 

105


Table of Contents

back-in commitment to earn a 51% interest in the Chucapaca joint venture agreement and Gold Fields (51%) and Buenaventura (49%) registered Canteras del Hallazgo S.A.C., or CDH, as the joint venture company to hold, explore, and potentially develop the Chucapaca gold-copper property.

Gold Fields, through CDH, has completed more than 118,000 meters of drilling over the current life of the Chucapaca project, including resource drilling, as well as geotechnical and sterilization drilling required for feasibility studies. Detailed metallurgical, mining, and engineering studies have all been completed as part of the project over the last three years. Following completion of a scoping study in 2010, Gold Fields, through CDH, commenced a feasibility study in 2011 for the Canahuire deposit on the Chucapaca Project. The feasibility study was completed in late fiscal 2012 and concluded that the project financials were not sufficiently robust to warrant an execution decision at that time. Instead, the project is expected to conduct a value engineering exercise in fiscal 2013, to look at options to improve the financial position relative to the feasibility result. This phase will re-examine options including open pit and underground mining methodologies, as well as reviewing aspects of the feasibility scope to improve the initial capital position of the project.

Arctic Platinum Project Pre-Feasibility Study and Exploration

The APP is located approximately 60 kilometers south of the city of Rovaniemi in northern Finland. APP is assessing a number of potential surface mineable platinum group elements plus copper and nickel deposits located within the Portimo and Narkaus mafic layered intrusions. The principal prospects under consideration occur within the Suhanko Project area, comprising of the Konttijarvi, Ahmavaara, and Suhanko North deposits.

From 2009, Gold Fields has investigated the potential of applying the hydrometallurgical process, Platsol ® , instead of off-site smelting options to recover copper, nickel, gold and the platinum group elements (platinum, palladium and rhodium) from flotation concentrates, which would be produced in an on-site concentrator facility. Metallurgical testwork returned positive results and engineering work was conducted to provide initial operating and capital cost estimates to use hydrometallurgical recovery on a commercial scale at APP.

Following completion of a full scale Platsol ® pilot plant testwork program in 2011, which demonstrated that the process could provide a viable option for the Suhanko Project ores, Gold Fields completed a scoping study which showed a project was viable if additional resources could be identified to prolong life of mine of the project. A full pre-feasibility study commenced in late 2011 and was completed in December 2012 focusing on optimization of the Platsol-process and trade-off studies concerning processing options and product marketing have continued into 2012. With the study now fully completed, Gold Fields will evaluate the results to determine the optimal means through which to capture the inherent value of the project. A major drilling program of 30,000 meters diamond drilling was completed on the Suhanko North prospect in March 2012 has been successful in delineating a maiden resource on this deposit to complement the existing resource base of Konttijarvi and Ahmavaara, and to contribute to the overall Suhanko Project.

Additional work completed in fiscal 2012 included submission of an amendment to the valid Suhanko Environmental Permit for the inclusion of the Platsol ® hydrometallurgical process and associated plant infrastructure to the Finnish environmental authorities. In addition, Gold Fields submitted an application for a new water permit which was subsequently approved by the authorities in Finland. The permit requires construction activities to commence in early 2015 and to be completed by 2018. The final proposal for the Greater Suhanko project EIA was submitted to the Finnish coordinating authority in December 2012. Baseline environmental data collection on Suhanko North for inclusion in the amended EIA is on-going.

Further, during fiscal 2012 Gold Fields continued hydrometallurgical test work to assess the suitability of Platsol ® processing technology for delivering enhanced onsite metal recovery. Planning, sampling and sample dispatch were completed for a second pilot plant trial. During the third quarter of fiscal 2012, an independent panel of experts completed a technical risk review on the amenability of Platsol ® for treating the Suhanko project ore. This indicated the technology could be successfully implemented and that there were no serious flaws. Marketing studies are underway to determine downstream product marketing strategies. During 2012, this included discussions with six major European base metal/platinum group metals refiners to explore potential synergies and terms of business.

 

106


Table of Contents

Far Southeast Scoping Study

In September 2010, Gold Fields entered into two option agreements with Lepanto, the 60% owner, and Liberty, the 40% owner of the gold-copper FSE in the Philippines granting Gold Fields an option to acquire a 60% interest in FSE for a total consideration of $340 million. After paying option fees of $10.0 million and making two down-payments of $44 million and $66 million in September 2010 and September 2011 respectively, Gold Fields decided to bring forward half of the remaining $220 million payment to acquire Liberty’s 40% interest in FSE. Gold Fields continues to hold its option to acquire an additional 20% stake in FSE from Lepanto for a further $110 million, which, if exercised, would increase its total interest in FSE to 60%.

The Liberty and Lepanto options were initially granted to Gold Fields for the later of 18 months from signature in September 2010 or the date of receiving a FTAA for the project. A FTAA licence allows a foreign corporation to control a majority interest in a Philippine mining project. Notwithstanding this provision, Gold Fields had the discretion to exercise either option prior to the FTAA being granted and decided to exercise the Liberty option earlier than originally planned due to the fact that: due diligence results to date demonstrate significant upside to the resource potential; by acquiring ownership of 40% Gold Fields was able to demonstrate its commitment to the project and formalize its partnership with Lepanto; and the early exercise of the Liberty option does not affect the remaining 20% Lepanto option, which continues to be exercisable in accordance with the terms of the agreement.

The FTAA application for the FSE project was filed in November 2011. The application requires FPIC of the Kankana-ey indigenous people for Gold Fields’ exploration activities. The FPIC process was suspended at a national level pending the finalization of new national mining legislation. The process recommenced in August 2012, following the release of new national guidelines, but this period of suspension delayed Gold Fields’ FTAA application. Nonetheless, management anticipates completion of the FTAA process during fiscal 2013.

Gold Fields’ FPIC process is on-going and in support of the National Commission on Indigenous People, or NCIP, FSE, during fiscal 2012, established a technical working group with the local community and other stakeholders. This group has been successful in driving the FPIC process forward and ensuring alignment between all relevant stakeholders. The initiative is being adopted as best practice by the NCIP and FSE is being used as a model to support the incorporation of the working group as a National Standard Practice.

The Group commenced a pre-feasibility study focusing on extraction through bulk underground mining methods in fiscal 2012. Work on some elements of the pre-feasibility study was stopped while access to surface drilling, the FPIC and social acceptance to bulk mining were pursued.

A total of approximately 163,000 meters has been drilled on the project. A maiden mineral resource was declared in 2012 based on 38,000 meters of FSE drilling and 64,000 meters of Lepanto drilling. Additional drilling in fiscal 2013 is expected to focus on definition of the high grade, high value areas of the resource and the final pre-feasibility study resource model.

Approval for surface drilling at several drill sites has been obtained in fiscal 2012 and drilling has been conducted at these locations. Approvals are still pending on access to other required drill site locations, and negotiations are ongoing to secure this access through fiscal 2013. The community relations team significantly ramped up its activities in the district during 2012 and initiated sustainable development programs in partnership with the local communities.

Yanfolila Project

In southwestern Mali, Gold Fields is progressing the Yanfolila gold projects and a scoping study was completed in the fourth quarter of fiscal 2012. It has been agreed that a de-risking program will be completed in the first half of 2013 to fast-track the project from scoping through feasibility to a position where a development

 

107


Table of Contents

decision could be made by the end of fiscal 2013. The project has simple metallurgy and low infrastructure requirements, as well as a relatively low initial capital requirement. In the first quarter of 2013, Gold Fields submitted a project description for the Yanfolila Environmental and Social Impact Assessment, or ESIA, to the Malian authorities. Further, in fiscal 2013 the Yanfolila Exploration Permit will lapse and will need to be converted to an Exploitation Permit under Malian law. Gold Fields owns an effective 85% interest in the Yanfolila properties (assuming a 10% interest will go to the Mali government upon granting of the mining license). Gold Fields has completed approximately 98,700 meters of exploration drilling on the project between 2009 and 2012, including approximately 47,200 meters of targeted infill drilling in fiscal 2012.

Near-Mine Exploration

At the St Ives mine in Australia, most activity over the previous three years focused on resource development drilling for the Athena-Hamlet underground mines and open pit prospects in the Neptune-Revenge area. Following a sustained period of resource conversion, the resource base was stabilized in these production areas allowing a robust life-of-mine to be developed and supporting a recent change in operating philosophy to owner operated mining. In 2012, the focus shifted to re-balancing the exploration portfolio at St Ives with a substantial component of a A$35 million exploration budget allocated to early stage greenfields activities targeting new exploration areas and potential new discoveries while maintaining significant resource development programs at the Cave Rocks, Neptune-Revenge and Greater Victory mining areas. A total of 255,000 meters of drilling completed in 2012 effectively tested more than 80 targets with a number of new mineralization discoveries, the most notable of these being the Invincible prospect on the Lake Lefroy salt lake, only eight kilometers from the main Lefroy CIL processing plant. More than 9,000 meters of diamond drilling has been completed on this prospect and adjourning extensions after initial aircore drilling made a discovery intersection in late 2011. Gold Fields announced a maiden resource on this prospect in the December 2012 annual statement with a current exploration potential defined by mineralization drilled over one kilometer strike to a depth of 300 meters. An access causeway to allow infill RC drilling of the pit resource was completed and drilling commenced at the end of January 2013. Significant extensions were also defined at the Cave Rocks underground mine and Neptune.

At the Agnew gold mine in Australia, drilling in fiscal 2012 continued to target the three high grade ore-shoots developing at depth on the Waroonga Main Lode North, which were identified in fiscal 2011, the Fitzroy, the Bengal and the Hastings shoots, with a view to delineate additional ounces. The Fitzroy and Bengal shoots plunge steeply to the northwest with new drilling indicating that they may intersect with the Kim/Edmunds Lodes approximately 1,200 meters below the surface. In fiscal 2012, 27,724 meters of surface diamond drilling was completed on the High Grade Shoots project at the Waroonga Mine, while a further 24,000 meters of aircore and RC drilling was completed on early stage or conceptual targets three to 15 kilometers north of the Agnew Mill.

At the Damang gold mine in Ghana, the Damang Superpit described under International Projects formed the main site project for 2012. Accompanying this initiative, additional near-mine exploration activities focused on resource definition drilling to prove potential extensions to the north of the historic Amoanda open pit, which is situated south of the Damang Pit area. The program was designed to extend the Amoanda resource up to 1,000 meters north of the existing Amoanda pit. A total of 20,400 meters of diamond core and RC drilling was completed on this resource definition program in fiscal 2012.

Target definition and initial drilling activities completed in 2012 tested the highest ranking target, the Bonsa Hydrothermal Prospect, which displays geological features analogous to the main Damang ore body. An initial diamond drilling program of 15 holes or 2,550 meters, was conducted from September to November 2012 to test the major structures that identify this target area. Processing of the cores is in progress and follow-up drilling may be required after the receipt of assay results in 2013.

At the Cerro Corona copper-gold mine in Peru, an infill and extensional drilling program completed in the second half of 2012 under the Corona Deep Project confirmed the existing resource model. The data was used to

 

108


Table of Contents

develop a revised litho-structural-alteration model and resource update, which better defined the Life of Mine reserves and highlighted the potential for significant depth extensions below the existing open pit. The Corona Deep drill program, which commenced in April 2012, completed 6 diamond holes (6,800 meters) to scope the potential for deep extensions to higher grade gold-copper mineralization below current mine designs capable of supporting future mining options. While this drilling identified typical Cerro Corona porphyry-style copper-gold mineralization to depths of 600 meters below the current pit design, assay results received show lower grades at depth. A full evaluation of mining potential for the Corona Deep Project is expected to be completed in the first half of fiscal 2013. Depending on the results, this would potentially support plans for a first-pass deep drilling program to support large-scale underground mining operations over the longer term.

Insurance

Gold Fields’ insurance policies provide coverage for general liability, accidental loss or damage to its property, business interruption in the form of fixed operating costs or standing charges, material damage and other losses. While the bulk of these are insured through a captive insurance company domiciled in Gibraltar, not all potential losses are covered. Gold Fields does not insure all potential losses associated with its operations as some insurance premiums are considered to be too high, some risks are considered too remote to insure and some types of insurance cover are not available. Should an event occur for which there is no or limited insurance cover, this could affect Gold Fields’ cash flows and profitability.

Management believes that the scope and amount of insurance coverage is adequate, taking into account the probability and potential severity of each identified risk. Gold Fields’ insurance coverage is consistent with customary practice for a gold mining company of its size with multinational operations. See “Risk Factors—Gold Fields’ insurance coverage may prove inadequate to satisfy potential claims”.

The Gold Mining Industry

Background

Gold is a dense, relatively soft and rare precious metal which occurs in natural form as nuggets or grains in ore, underground veins and alluvial deposits. Gold mining operations include both underground and open pit operations with gold currently able to be commercially extracted from ore grades in amounts as low as 0.5 grams/metric tonne (open pit). The majority of gold production is used for jewelry production and for investment purposes, in the latter case because some investors view it as a store of value against inflation. In addition, certain physical properties of gold including its malleability, ductility, electric conductivity, resistance to corrosion and reflectivity make it the metal of choice in a number of industrial applications.

Global Markets

Demand

The two main categories of demand for gold are fabrication (primarily jewelry) and investment (private and governmental). The demand for gold in 2012 was 4,406 tonnes or U.S.$236 billion in value terms (not reflecting over-the-counter, or OTC, investments and stock flows), comprised of jeweler fabrication (43%); investments (35%); and technological applications (10%), according to the WGC. Gold demand over the last few years has been mainly driven by China and India, which accounted for 28% and 24% of the total global demand for 2012 and 2011, respectively. Significant private investment demand for gold is generated by gold ETFs and similar products, which accounted for 6% of the total global demand for 2012. This was almost one and a half times the amount experienced in 2011, where ETFs and similar products accounted for 4%. Demand for official gold purchases is driven by central banks, government bodies, supranational organizations and other investors. In 2012, purchases by central banks were at their highest level in 48 years. Gold is typically used as a ‘natural hedge’ against inflation, a fact that could impact the demand for gold given the recently announced commitment for asset purchases by the U.S. Federal Reserve, currently the largest holder of gold reserves. Technological applications demand is mainly generated by automotive electronics, industrial electronics and wireless equipment.

 

109


Table of Contents

Supply

Supply of gold consists of new production from mining, the recycling of gold scrap and releases from existing stocks of bullion. Mine production represents the most important source of supply but has been steadily falling since 2001 as lower grades and lack of investment during periods of low gold prices more than offset production from new mines. Gold supply in 2012 totaled 4,453 tonnes (out of which mine production was 64%), according to the WGC. However, with the strength in gold prices, a number of new operations are expected to commence production in the coming years which could increase the outlook for mine production.

Price

The market for gold is relatively liquid compared to other commodity markets, with London being the world’s largest gold trading market. Gold is also actively traded via futures and forward contracts. The price of gold has historically been significantly affected by macroeconomic factors, such as inflation, exchange rates, reserves policy and by global political and economic events, rather than simple supply/demand dynamics. Gold is often purchased as a store of value in periods of price inflation and weakening currency. The price of gold has historically been less volatile than that of most other commodities, however there has been a steady increase in the gold price due to rising investment demand against a backdrop of relatively flat supply as declining mine production and official sector sales offset rising scrap volumes. The closing gold price on May 9, 2013 was U.S.$1,466 per ounce. In 2012, the spot gold price was as high as U.S.$1,792 and as low as U.S.$1,540.

Top Producers

Based on fiscal 2011 production (the latest available data), the first, second and third largest gold producers in the world were Barrick Gold, Newmont Mining and AngloGold, respectively. According to the AME Group, at March 13, 2013 Barrick Gold had 40 operations in 12 countries, Newmont Mining had 15 operations in eight countries and AngloGold had 26 operations in 11 countries. Including the Sibanye Gold assets, Gold Fields was the fourth largest gold producer in the world. Excluding production at the Sibanye Gold assets, Gold Fields was the tenth largest gold producer in the world in fiscal 2011.

Environmental and Regulatory Matters

South Africa

Environmental

Gold Fields’ South African operations are subject to various laws relating to the protection of the environment. South Africa’s Constitution Act No. 106 of 1996 grants the people of South Africa the right to an environment that is not harmful to human health or well-being and to protection of that environment for the benefit of present and future generations through reasonable legislative and other measures. The Constitution and the National Environmental Management Act, No. 107 of 1998, or NEMA, as well as various other related pieces of legislation grant legal standing to a wide range of people and interest groups to bring legal proceedings to enforce their environmental rights, which are enforceable against private entities as well as the South African government.

South African environmental legislation commonly requires businesses whose operations may have an impact on the environment to obtain permits and authorizations for those operations. The applicable environmental legislation also imposes general compliance requirements and incorporates the “polluter pays” principle. Under the terms of the MPRDA, all prospecting and mining operations are to be conducted according to an environmental management plan/program which must be approved by the DMR. Directors will be held liable under provisions of the MPRDA and NEMA for any environmental degradation. See “—Mineral Rights”.

South African mining companies are required by law to undertake rehabilitation works as part of their ongoing operations in accordance with an approved environmental management plan/program, which supports a mine closure plan. Gold Fields funds these environmental rehabilitation costs by making contributions into an environmental trust fund and with insurance guarantees.

 

110


Table of Contents

Under the National Water Act 36 of 1998, or the National Water Act, all water in the hydrological cycle is under the custodianship of the South African government held in trust for the people of South Africa and water users have been required to re-register their water uses under this Act. In addition, the National Water Act governs waste water and waste water discharge into water resources. Gold Fields continues to use all reasonable and practical measures to remove underground water to permit the routine safe functioning of its South African mines. The Kloof operation (now part of the KDC jointly managed operation) was issued a water use license in December 2008 that expired in December 2011. The Group has applied for renewal of, and amendments to, this license. Pending approval of the Kloof water use license, Gold Fields obtained the Kloof Directive, from the DWA, that permits the continuation of water uses at its Kloof operations while its application for renewal of, and amendments to, its water use license was being processed. Prior to February 2011, the Kloof operation had been in compliance with the license granted to it in 2008. However, from February 2011 to September 2011, the water discharged from one of the shafts of the KDC operation covered by the Kloof license exceeded the discharge parameters specified by the license. Gold Fields informed the DWA and other relevant regulators and has investigated the cause of the increased discharge. One of the key findings of the investigation was that the increased discharge was most likely due to external variables beyond the control of the KDC operation. Based on this information, the Kloof Directive included an increase to the discharge limits of that specific discharge point. As of December 9, 2011, the date of issue of the Kloof Directive, the water discharged from the shaft covered by the Kloof water use license has been in compliance with the discharge parameters specified in the Kloof Directive. The Driefontein operation was also issued a water use license in October 2010. However, due to certain inaccuracies and discrepancies in the information provided for the water use license, Gold Fields has remained in discussions with the DWA to revise the license.

While there was a delay in processing the water use license application at South Deep, which was submitted within the applicable time limits, Gold Fields was issued a new water use license for South Deep in December 2011. Gold Fields has made an application for rectification and amendment of this water use license to the DWA as well.

The DWA has advised Beatrix, which had pre-existing water permits of indefinite length, that its current water usage remains authorized and it need not apply for a new license. However, Beatrix has nevertheless proactively submitted a water use license application, which is currently being processed. Therefore, management believes that the South African operations now have all required authorizations to undertake regulated water uses for purposes of carrying out its mining operations.

Under the National Environmental Management Air Quality Act, 2004, or Air Quality Act, the South African government has established minimum emission standards for certain activities. Gold Fields has submitted an application for a new license under the Air Quality Act in respect of some of the activities at South Deep and is currently determining whether other activities at South Deep require a license. Gold Fields is also drafting a plan to ensure it is in compliance with the Air Quality Act.

The National Environmental Management Amendment Act, No. 62 of 2008, or NEMAA, was promulgated on January 9, 2009 and came into effect on May 1, 2009. The Minerals and Petroleum Resources Development Amendment Act, No. 49 of 2008, or MPRDAA, was promulgated on April 21, 2009, although a commencement date has not been proclaimed by the President. The 2010 Environmental Impact Assessment Regulations, or EIA Regulations, as contained in Government Notices 543-546 of June 18, 2010, commenced on August 2, 2010. These replace the 2006 EIA Regulations. The effect of the amendments as contained in the NEMAA and the MPRDAA will ultimately mean that NEMA will be responsible for all environmental authorizations for and relating to mining and the Minister of Water and Environmental Affairs will be the relevant authority. Until the MPRDAA comes into effect, as well as during the first 18 month period after such effect, the MPRDA is the applicable legislation and the Minister of Mineral Resources is the responsible authority for all environmentally related mining activities. The Minerals and Petroleum Resources Development Amendment Bill was published on December 27, 2012 for public comment. This bill contains further environmental provisions relating to the requirement to obtain environmental authorizations in relation to prospecting, mining, production and exploration operations, where necessary.

 

111


Table of Contents

The South African government is considering the introduction of a carbon tax with effect from January 1, 2015 to reduce greenhouse gas emissions. The updated carbon tax policy paper released on May 2, 2013 confirmed that the proposed carbon tax will be Rand 120 per tonne of CO 2 -e emitted above certain thresholds. The tax rate will increase by 10% a year, reaching R176 per tonne of CO 2 -e by 2019. However, 60% of emissions would initially be tax exempt. The 60% discount will continue to apply until December 31, 2019, along with certain “offsets” set at 5% or 10%, a carbon intensity correction based on industry benchmarks and a correction for international trade exposure of 5% to 10% of tax liability, which together may allow for a cumulative reprieve from tax liability of up to 90%. The 60% discount and the associated tax reprieves will be scaled back gradually from 2020 until 2050 and may be replaced by absolute emissions thresholds thereafter.

The National Environmental Management Waste Act, 2008, or the Waste Act, commenced on July 1, 2009 with the exception of certain sections relating to contaminated land. Responsible waste management has become a priority for the Department of Environmental Affairs, or the DEA. Gold Fields is currently working with the DEA in order to ensure it is in compliance with the Waste Act.

Gold Fields undertakes activities which are regulated by the National Nuclear Regulator Act 47 of 1999, or the NNR Act. The NNR Act requires Gold Fields to obtain authorization from the National Nuclear Regulator, or NNR, and undertake activities in accordance with the conditions of such authorizations. Prior to the Spin-off, Gold Fields’ South African mining operations possessed and maintained Certificates of Registration issued by the NNR. After the Spin-off, South Deep continues to possess and maintain its Certificate of Registration, or CoR.

Although South Africa has a comprehensive environmental regulatory framework, enforcement of environmental law has traditionally been poor. The DEA has indicated that enforcement will improve and Environmental Management Inspectors have been appointed under NEMA. The Environmental Management Inspectors have commenced and are finishing environmental inspections and investigations at some of the major industrial facilities. The focus to date has been on those industries that impact heavily on air quality, such as platinum mines and the steel industry.

Health and Safety

The principal objective of the South African Mine Health and Safety Act No. 29 of 1996, or the Mine Health and Safety Act, is to protect the health and safety of persons at mines. The Mine Health and Safety Act requires that employers and others ensure their operating and non-operating mines provide a safe and healthy working environment, determines penalties and a system of administrative fines for non-compliance and gives the Minister of Mineral Resources the right to restrict or stop work at any mine and require an employer to take steps to minimize health and safety risks at any mine. The Mine Health and Safety Act further provides for employee participation through the establishment of health and safety committees and by requiring the appointment of health and safety representatives. It also gives employees the right to refuse dangerous work. Finally, it describes the powers and functions of the MHSI (which inspectorate is part of the DMR and the process of enforcement). Under the Mine Health and Safety Act, an employer is obligated, among other things, to ensure, as far as reasonably practicable, that its mines are designed, constructed and equipped to provide conditions for safe operation and a healthy working environment and the mines are commissioned, operated, maintained and decommissioned in such a way that employees can perform their work without endangering their health and safety or that of any other person. Every employer must ensure, as far as reasonably practicable, that persons who are not employees, but who may be directly affected by the activities at a mine, are not exposed to any hazards to their health and safety.

The Mine Health and Safety Amendment Act, came into operation on May 30, 2009. It criminalizes violations of the Mine Health and Safety Act and increases the maximum fines. Any owner convicted in terms of the above offenses may have its mining licenses withdrawn or suspended, be fined up to R3 million and/or be

 

112


Table of Contents

imprisoned for a period not exceeding five years, while the maximum fine for other offenses and administrative fines are increased, with the highest fine being Rl million per occurrence. Two sections of the Mine Health and Safety Amendment Act, which create new offenses of contravening or failing to implement provisions of the Mine Health and Safety Act resulting in a person’s death and vicarious liability for an employer where certain persons commit an offense and the employer permitted or did not take all reasonable steps to prevent the person’s actions, have not yet come into effect. Several mining companies objected to them on constitutional grounds and the government agreed that they would not come into effect pending further discussion with the industry. In fiscal 2011, the DMR increased enforcement of certain provisions of the Mine Health and Safety Act with respect to compliance with, and adoption of, leading practice at all mines. In response, Gold Fields’ senior leadership engaged with the DMR to ensure that Gold Fields is taking appropriate proactive steps to enhance safety and minimize risk.

The principal health risks associated with Gold Fields’ mining operations in South Africa arise from occupational exposure and community environmental exposure to silica dust, noise, heat and certain hazardous substances, including toxic gases and radioactive particulates. The most significant occupational diseases affecting Gold Fields’ workforce include lung diseases (such as silicosis, tuberculosis, a combination of the two and COAD) as well as NIHL. The ODMWA governs the payment of compensation and medical costs related to certain illnesses, such as silicosis, contracted by persons employed in mines or at sites where activities ancillary to mining are conducted. Occupational healthcare services are made available by Gold Fields to employees from its existing facilities. Pursuant to proposed changes in the ODMWA, Gold Fields may experience an increase in the cost of these services. See “Risk Factors—Gold Fields’ operations are subject to environmental and health and safety regulations, which could impose significant costs and burdens and Gold Fields may face claims and liability for breaches, or alleged breaches, of such regulations and other applicable laws”. This increased cost, should it transpire, is currently indeterminate.

Until recently, the mining industry believed, as previous cases had indicated, that a provision in the Compensation for Occupational Injuries and Diseases Act, No. 130 of 1993, or the COIDA, precluded an employee from recovering any damages from the employer for an occupational injury or disease resulting in his disablement or death, if compensation had been paid to the employee either under COIDA or under the ODMWA. The ODMWA governs the payment of compensation and medical costs for certain illnesses, such as silicosis, contracted by those employed in mines or at sites where activities ancillary to mining are conducted. Recently, the South African Constitutional Court ruled that a claim for compensation under ODMWA does not prevent the employee from seeking to recover compensation from the employer concerned in a civil action under common law (either as individuals or as a class). While issues, such as negligence and causation, need to be proved on a case by case basis, it is nevertheless possible that such a ruling could expose Gold Fields to claims related to occupational hazards and diseases (including silicosis or other ailments alleged to arise due to exposure to hazardous materials and substances), which may be in the form of a class action or similar group claim. Although risks associated with alleged occupational exposure are likely to be greater, such actions may also arise in connection with the alleged incidence of such diseases in communities proximate to Gold Fields’ mines. In the second half of 2012, two suits were filed against several South African mining companies, including Gold Fields, on behalf of current and former gold mine workers and the dependants of gold mine workers who have contracted or died from silicosis or other occupational lung diseases. See “—Legal Proceedings and Investigations”.

If a significant number of such claims were suitably established against it, the payment of compensation for the claims could have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’ business, reputation, results of operations and financial condition. In addition, Gold Fields may incur significant additional costs arising out of these issues, including costs relating to the payment of fees, increased levies or other contributions in respect of compensatory or other funds established (if any) and expenditures arising out of its efforts to remediate these matters or to resolve any outstanding claims or other potential action.

 

113


Table of Contents

Mineral Rights

The MPRDA

The MPRDA came into effect on May 1, 2004. The MPRDA transferred ownership of mineral resources (which includes the rights to grant prospecting and mining rights on behalf of the nation) to the South African people with the South African government acting as custodian in order to, among other things, promote equitable access to the nation’s mineral resources by South Africans, expand opportunities for historically disadvantaged persons who wish to participate in the South African mining industry, advance social and economic development, and create an internationally competitive and efficient administrative and regulatory regime, based on the universally accepted principle, and consistent with common international practice, that mineral resources are part of a nation’s patrimony. Mining companies are required to apply for the right to mine and/or prospect. In accordance with the MPRDA, the DMR on April 29, 2009 published the Code relating to the socio-economic transformation of the mining industry. However, certain provisions of the Code appeared to be inconsistent with the Mining Charter, or to go beyond the scope envisaged by the MPRDA. Various industry participants have been in discussions with the DMR regarding the scope and applicability of the Code, the operation of which appears to be in abeyance.

Under the MPRDA, prospecting rights are initially granted for a maximum period of five years and can be renewed once upon application for a further period not exceeding three years. Mining rights are valid for a maximum period of 30 years, and can be renewed upon application for further periods, each of which may not exceed 30 years. A wide range of factors and principles, including proposals relating to black economic empowerment and social responsibility, will be considered by the Minister of Minerals Resources when exercising her discretion whether to grant these applications. A mining right can be canceled if the mineral to which such mining right relates is not mined at an “optimal” rate. In November 2006, the DMR approved the conversion of Gold Fields’ mining licenses under the old regulatory regime at Kloof, Driefontein and Beatrix into rights under the new regime. During May 2010, the DMR approved the conversion of the South Deep old order mining rights into a new-order mining right. Included in this approval was an additional portion of ground known as Uncle Harry’s, which is contiguous to South Deep. The durations of the South Deep mining right and the Uncle Harry’s mining right are both 30 years. The cumulative effect of this approval, together with the previous conversions for the Driefontein, Kloof and Beatrix gold mines granted in January 2007, was that all of Gold Fields’ South African mines had received their new-order mining rights at the date of the Spin-off. See “Additional Information—Material Contracts—Additional Black Economic Empowerment Transactions”. Pursuant to the terms of the MPRDA, a Mining Charter for effecting entry of HDSAs into the mining industry was developed to guide the DMR in the conversion of old order mineral rights, the granting of new order mineral rights and the granting of consent relating to the transferability and encumbrance of mineral rights. The Mining Charter became effective on May 1, 2004. The Mining Charter’s stated objectives are to:

 

   

promote equitable access to South Africa’s mineral resources for all the people of South Africa;

 

   

substantially and meaningfully expand opportunities for HDSAs, including women, to enter the mining and minerals industry and to benefit from the exploitation of South Africa’s mineral resources;

 

   

utilize the existing skills base for the empowerment of HDSAs;

 

   

expand the skills base of HDSAs in order to serve the community;

 

   

promote employment and advance the social and economic welfare of mining communities and areas supplying mining labor; and

 

   

promote beneficiation of South Africa’s mineral commodities beyond mining and processing, including the production of consumer products.

To achieve these objectives, the Mining Charter requires that, within five years of its May 1, 2004 effective date, each mining company achieves a 15% HDSA ownership of mining assets and, within 10 years of that date, a 26% HDSA ownership of mining assets. Ownership can comprise active involvement, through HDSA-controlled companies (where HDSAs own at least 50% plus one share of the company and have management

 

114


Table of Contents

control), strategic joint ventures or partnerships (where HDSAs own at least 25% plus one vote of the joint venture or partnership interest and there is joint management and control) or collective investment vehicles, the majority ownership of which is HDSA based, or passive involvement, particularly through broad-based vehicles such as employee stock option plans. The Mining Charter also requires mining companies to submit annual, audited reports on progress toward their commitments, as part of an ongoing review process. There is uncertainty relating to the enforceability of the Mining Charter.

Following a review, the DMR released the Amended Mining Charter on September 13, 2010. There is uncertainty relating to the enforceability of the Amended Mining Charter’s requirement for mining entities to achieve a 26% HDSA ownership of mining assets by 2014. Amendments to the Mining Charter in the Amended Mining Charter include, among other things, the requirement by mining companies to: (i) facilitate local beneficiation of mineral commodities; (ii) procure a minimum of 40% of capital goods, 70% of services and 50% of consumable goods from HDSA suppliers (i.e. suppliers in which a minimum of 25% + 1 vote of their share capital must be owned by HDSAs) by 2014 (exclusive of non-discretionary procurement expenditure); (iii) ensure that multinational suppliers of capital goods contribute a minimum of 0.5% of their annual income generated from South African mining companies into a social development fund from 2010 towards the socio-economic development of South African communities; (iv) achieve a minimum of 40% HDSA demographic representation by 2014 at top management (board) level, senior management (executive committee) level, middle management level, junior management level, and core and critical skills; (v) invest up to 5% of annual payroll in essential skills development activities; and (vi) implement measures to improve the standards of housing and living conditions for mineworkers by converting or upgrading mineworkers’ hostels into family units, attaining an occupancy rate of one person per room and facilitating home ownership options for all mineworkers in consultation with organized labor, all of which must be achieved by 2014. In addition, mining companies are required to monitor and evaluate their compliance to the Amended Mining Charter, and must submit annual compliance reports to the DMR. The Scorecard for the Broad-Based Socio-Economic Empowerment Charter for the South African Mining Industry attached to the Amended Mining Charter, or the Scorecard, makes provision for a phased-in approach for compliance with the above targets over the five year period ending in 2014. For measurement purposes, the Scorecard allocates various weightings to the different elements of the Amended Mining Charter. Failure to comply with the provisions of the Amended Mining Charter will amount to a breach of the MPRDA and may result in the cancellation or suspension of a mining company’s existing mining rights.

The Amended Mining Charter clarifies that it is not the government’s intention to nationalize the mining industry. However, the ANC adopted a report which, among other things, proposes greater state intervention in the mining industry, including the imposition of new taxes and increasing the State’s holdings in mining companies.

In December 2012, the MPRDB, was published for comment, with the stated purpose of, among other things, removing ambiguities and enhancing sanctions. However, the MPRDB has been criticized for introducing new and burdensome regulations relating to, among other things the upstream beneficiation of minerals, the status of tailings created prior to the commencement of the MPRDA, closure certificates, restricting the transfer of shares in listed and unlisted mining companies and retaining undue regulatory discretion over the conditions for, and issuance of, prospecting, mining and other rights. The MPRDB also seeks to significantly increase the penalties that may be imposed for, among other things, non-compliance with the MPRDA, other relevant law, the terms and conditions of a right or a social and labor plan. While it is anticipated that the MPRDB may undergo various amendments before it becomes law, the passage of the MPRDB may subject companies in the mining industry, like Gold Fields, to more stringent regulation in the future.

The BBBEE Act and the BBBEE Amendment Bill

The BBBEE Act established a national policy on broad-based black economic empowerment with the objective of increasing the participation of HDSAs in the economy. The BBBEE Act provides for various measures to promote black economic empowerment, including empowering the Minister of Trade and Industry to

 

115


Table of Contents

issue the BBBEE Codes with which organs of state and public entities and parties interacting with them or obtaining rights and licenses from them would be required to comply. There has been some debate as to whether or to what extent the mining industry was subject to the BBBEE Act and the policies and codes provided for thereunder. In December 2011, the Minister of Trade and Industry, published for public comment by the February 9, 2012 a draft BBBEE Amendment Bill, which has the effect of expanding and strengthening the black economic empowerment provisions of the BBBEE Act. On August 8, 2012, the South African cabinet approved the introduction of the draft BBBEE Amendment Bill to the South African parliament. It was expected that the draft bill would have clarified the extent, if any, of the application of the BBBEE Act to the mining industry, but such clarification has not been provided for in the draft bill. While it is anticipated that the draft bill will undergo various amendments before it becomes law, it should be appreciated that a risk exists that the companies in the mining industry may become subject to more stringent black economic empowerment regulation.

The Royalty Act

The Mineral and Petroleum Resources Royalty Act, No. 28 of 2008, or the Royalty Act, was promulgated on November 24, 2008 and came into operation on March 1, 2010. The Royalty Act imposes a royalty on refined and unrefined minerals payable to the South African government.

The royalty in respect of refined minerals (which include gold and platinum) is calculated by dividing earnings before interest and taxes, or EBIT, by the product of 12.5 times gross revenue calculated as a percentage, plus an additional 0.5%. EBIT refers to taxable mining income (with certain exceptions such as no deduction for interest payable and foreign exchange losses) before assessed losses but after capital expenditure. A maximum royalty of 5% of revenue has been introduced for refined minerals.

Gold Fields currently pays a royalty based on the refined minerals royalty calculation as applied to its gross revenue. The rate of royalty tax payable for fiscal 2012 was 1.5% of revenue.

Exchange Controls

South African law provides for Exchange Control Regulations which, among other things, restrict the outward flow of capital from the CMA. The Exchange Control Regulations, which are administered by the SARB, are applied throughout the CMA and regulate international transactions involving South African residents, including companies. The South African government has, committed itself to gradually relaxing exchange controls and various relaxations have occurred in recent years.

SARB approval is required for Gold Fields and its South African subsidiaries to receive and/or repay loans to non-residents of the CMA. Such loans will usually be approved where the interest rate in respect of third party foreign denominated loans does not exceed the base lending rate plus 2% or, in the case of shareholder loans, the base lending rate as determined by commercial banks in the country of denomination. The interest rate in respect of Rand denominated loans may not exceed the base rate (i.e. prime rate plus 3% on third party loans, or the base rate in the case of shareholder loans). Gold Fields has historically approached the SARB for permission on all foreign loans, irrespective of the interest rate.

Funds raised outside of the CMA by Gold Fields’ non-South African resident subsidiaries (whether through debt or equity) can be used for overseas expansion, subject to any conditions imposed by the SARB. Gold Fields and its South African subsidiaries would, however, require SARB approval in order to provide guarantees for the obligations of any of Gold Fields’ subsidiaries with regard to funds obtained from non-residents of the CMA. Debt raised outside the CMA by Gold Fields’ non-South African subsidiaries must be repaid or serviced by those foreign subsidiaries. Absent SARB approval, income earned in South Africa by Gold Fields and its South African subsidiaries cannot be used to repay or service such foreign debts. Unless specific SARB approval has been obtained, income earned by one of Gold Fields’ foreign subsidiaries cannot be used to finance the operations of another foreign subsidiary.

 

116


Table of Contents

Transfers of funds from South Africa for the purchase of shares in offshore entities or for the creation or expansion of business ventures offshore require exchange control approval. However, if the investment is a new outward foreign direct investment where the total cost does not exceed R500 million per company per calendar year, the investment application may, without specific SARB approval, be processed by an authorized dealer, subject to all existing criteria and reporting obligations. Gold Fields applies annually to the SARB for blanket approval for a specified amount for offshore exploration expenditure and to make exploration related foreign investments. The current approval allows for annual expenditure of up to U.S.$159 million for fiscal 2012. Gold Fields is required to provide the SARB with an annual update on the Group’s activities, including any such exploration investments and obtain a new approval each year.

Gold Fields must obtain approval from the SARB regarding any capital raising involving a currency other than the Rand. In connection with its approval, it is possible that the SARB may impose conditions on Gold Fields’ use of the proceeds of any such capital raising, such as limits on Gold Fields’ ability to retain the proceeds of the capital raising outside South Africa or requirements that Gold Fields seeks further SARB approval prior to applying any such funds to a specific use.

Ghana

Environmental

The laws and regulations relating to the environment in Ghana have their roots in the 1992 Constitution which charges both the state and individuals with a duty to take appropriate measures to protect and safeguard the natural environment. Mining companies are required, under the Minerals and Mining Act, Environmental Assessment Regulations 1999 (LI 1652) and Water Use Regulations 2001 (LI 1692), to obtain all necessary approvals from the Ghanaian EPA, and, where applicable, the Water Resources Commission before undertaking mining operations. The Minerals and Mining Act also requires the Ghana mines to comply with all laws for the protection of the environment.

Under the relevant environmental laws and regulations, mining operations are required to undergo an environmental impact assessment process and obtain approval for an environmental permit prior to commencing operations. Environmental management plans, or EMPs, are submitted every three years and include details regarding the likely impact of the operation on the environment, including local communities, as well as a comprehensive plan and timetable for actions to lessen and remediate adverse impacts.

The laws also require mining operations to rehabilitate land disturbed as a result of mining operations pursuant to an environmental reclamation plan agreed with the Ghanaian environmental authorities. The reclamation plan provides an estimate of the costs to rehabilitate the mining area for the life of the mine and an estimate of the costs to rehabilitate the mine as at the date of the reclamation plan. These estimates are adjusted every two years. Each mining company is required to secure a percentage (typically between 50% and 100%) of the current estimated rehabilitation costs by posting an underwritten reclamation bond and a cash deposit. Gold Fields Ghana’s current reclamation bond secures an amount of $41.5 million, which is 52% of the rehabilitation costs estimated as at December 2012.

In March 2012, and in compliance with applicable laws, Gold Fields Ghana was issued an environmental certificate to operate the Tailings Storage Facility. Under the applicable laws, an environmental certificate must be obtained within 24 months of the commencement of operations of the Tailings Storage Facility and CIL plant at Tarkwa. Gold Fields Ghana applied for a three year environmental permit for the CIL plant in 2010. It is currently in discussions with the EPA regarding resubmitting its application. Under Ghanaian law, a mining company may continue operations while its application is being considered as long as all necessary filings have been made.

On July 16, 2012, the operation of all heap leach facilities at Tarkwa was suspended after Gold Fields Ghana received a directive from the Ghanaian EPA and the Ministry of Environment, Science and Technology to stop discharging water from these facilities and treat all water discharges through a water treatment plant to reduce conductivity levels to the prescribed levels. In accordance with environmental best practice and in

 

117


Table of Contents

compliance with the Ghanaian EPA directive Gold Fields has commissioned the construction of two water treatment plants at its North and South Heap Leach facilities. On August 9, 2012, Gold Fields received permission from the Ghanaian EPA to reopen the Heap Leach facilities while the water treatment plants were being built. The North Heap Leach water treatment plant was operational on January 1, 2013, with increased capacity expected by the third quarter of 2013. The South Heap Leach water treatment plant is expected to come into operation during the second quarter of 2013. See “Risk Factors—Gold Fields’ operations are subject to water use licenses, which could impose significant costs and burdens.”

Abosso has submitted the required EMP and reclamation plans and is in compliance with all permit, certificate and reclamation requirements. In October 2010, Abosso submitted a revised EMP covering the period from 2010 to 2013 to the Ghanaian EPA. The EMP certificate was issued in 2011 for a period of three years. Tarkwa is in the process of updating its EMP in order to obtain a certificate for the period 2013 to 2016. This certificate is expected to be in place by the end of June 2013.

Health and Safety

A mine owner is statutorily obligated to, among other things, take steps to ensure that the mine is managed and worked in accordance with the regulations that provide for the safety and proper discipline of the mine workers. The Minerals and Mining (Health, Safety and Technical) Regulations, 2012 (L.I 2173), prescribe the measures to be taken at every mining operation to ensure the safety and health of mine workers. Additionally, Gold Fields is required, under the terms of its mining leases, to comply with the reasonable instructions of the Chief Inspector of Mines regarding health and safety in the mine. A violation of the provisions of the health and safety regulations or failure to comply with the reasonable instructions of the Chief Inspector of Mines could lead to, among other things, a shutdown of all or a portion of the mine or the imposition of costly compliance procedures, and, in the case of a violation of the regulations relating to health and safety, constitutes an offense. Gold Fields, as the holder of the mining lease, has potential liability arising from injuries to, or deaths of, workers, including, in some cases, workers employed by its contractors. Although Ghanaian law provides statutory workers’ compensation for injuries or fatalities to workers, it is not the exclusive means for workers to claim compensation. Gold Fields’ insurance for health and safety claims or the relevant workers’ compensation may not be adequate to meet the costs which may arise upon any future health and safety claims. As a result, Gold Fields may suffer material adverse consequences.

Mineral Rights

Gold Fields Ghana holds five mining leases in respect of its mining operations. Three mining leases in respect of the Tarkwa property are dated April 18, 1997, and two mining leases are dated February 2, 1988 and June 18, 1992, respectively, for its operations at the former Teberebie property. The Tarkwa property mining leases all expire in 2027 and the Teberebie property mining leases both expire in 2018. Under the provisions of the Minerals and Mining Law, 1986 (PNDCL 153), or the Minerals and Mining Law, and the terms of the mining leases, all of the Tarkwa property and Teberebie property mining leases are renewable by agreement between Gold Fields Ghana and the Government of Ghana.

Abosso holds a mining lease in respect of the Damang mine dated April 19, 1995, as amended by an agreement dated April 4, 1996. This lease expires in 2025. Abosso also holds a mining lease in respect of Lima South, dated March 22, 2006, which expires in 2017. As with the Tarkwa and Teberebie mining leases, these leases are renewable under their terms and the provisions of the Minerals and Mining Law by agreement between Abosso and the government of Ghana.

The Minerals and Mining Act came into force on March 31, 2006. Although the Minerals and Mining Act repealed the Minerals and Mining Law, and the amendments to it, the Minerals and Mining Act provides that leases, permits and licenses granted or issued under the repealed laws will continue under those laws unless the Minister responsible for minerals provides otherwise by regulation. Therefore, unless and until such regulations are passed in respect of Gold Fields’ mineral rights, the Minerals and Mining Law will continue to apply to Gold Fields’ current operations in Ghana.

 

118


Table of Contents

The major provisions of the Minerals and Mining Act include:

 

   

the government of Ghana’s right to a free carried interest in mineral operations of 10% and the right to a special share (discussed below); and

 

   

mining companies which have invested or intend to invest at least U.S.$500 million (as Gold Fields has) may benefit from stability and development agreements, relating to both existing and new operations, which will serve to protect holders of current and future mining leases for a period not exceeding 15 years against changes in laws and regulations generally and in particular relating to customs and other duties, levels of payment of taxes, royalties and exchange control provisions, transfer of capital and dividend remittances. A development agreement may contain further provisions relating to the mineral operations and environmental issues. Each stability and development agreement is subject to the ratification of parliament.

In 2010, the Minerals and Mining Act was amended to provide for a fixed royalty rate of 5% of the total revenue earned from minerals obtained, with effect from March 17, 2010. Although payment of the royalty rate became effective in March 2010, Gold Fields did not begin submitting the required payment until April 1, 2011 due to a moratorium on the tax burden for mining leases in place prior to commencement of the Act, which ended on March 31, 2011.

The Ghanaian parliament has passed an Act that, effective March 9, 2012, increases taxes on mining companies. These changes included introducing a separate tax category for companies engaged in mining, which raised the applicable corporate tax rate from 25% to 35% and reduced the capital allowance regime from 80% for the first year with reductions to a uniform regime of 20% over five years. Further, a draft bill has been presented to the Ghanaian parliament which, if passed in 2013, will impose a windfall profit tax of 10% of the cash balance of a company engaged in mining activities. The bill would also allow the Commissioner-General, in determining the cash balance of a company, to disregard or re-characterize a transaction or any other transaction if the Commissioner-General believes that the transaction was carried out for the purpose of reducing the cash balance with respect to calculation of the windfall profit tax. In his budget speech on March 5, 2013, the Minister of Finance announced that a mining review committee would consider the windfall profit tax as part of its full review of the mining industry and report to Parliament by the second half of 2013.

Government Option to Acquire Shares of Mining Companies

Under Ghanaian law, the government is entitled to a 10% interest in any Ghanaian company which holds a mining lease in Ghana, without the payment of compensation. The government of Ghana has already received this 10% interest in each of Gold Fields Ghana and Abosso. The government also has the option, under the Minerals and Mining Law, of acquiring an additional 20% interest in the share capital of mining companies whose rights were granted under the Minerals and Mining Law at a price agreed upon by the parties, at the fair market value at the time the option is exercised, or as may be determined by international arbitration. The government of Ghana exercised this option in respect of Gold Fields Ghana and subsequently transferred the interest. The government of Ghana retains this option to purchase an additional 20% of the share capital of Abosso. As far as management is aware, the government of Ghana has not exercised this option for any other gold mining company in the past, other than Gold Fields Ghana.

Under the Minerals and Mining Law, which continues to apply to Gold Fields Ghana’s operations, and under the Minerals and Mining Act, the government has a further option to acquire a “special share” in a mining company for no consideration or in exchange for such consideration as the government and that company shall agree. This interest, when acquired, constitutes a special share which gives the government the right to attend and speak at any general meeting of shareholders, but does not entitle the government to any voting rights. The special share does not entitle the government to distributions of profits of the company which issues it to the government. The written consent of the government is required to make any amendment to a company’s articles of incorporation relating to the government’s option to acquire a special share. Although the government of Ghana has agreed not to exercise this option in respect of Gold Fields Ghana, it has retained this option for Abosso.

 

119


Table of Contents

Exchange Controls

Under Ghana’s mining laws, the Bank of Ghana or the Minister for Finance may permit the holder of a mining lease to retain a percentage of its foreign exchange earnings for certain expenses in bank accounts in Ghana. Under a foreign exchange retention account agreement with the government of Ghana, Gold Fields Ghana is required to repatriate 20% of its revenues derived from the Tarkwa mine to Ghana and use the repatriated revenues in Ghana or maintain them in a Ghanaian bank account. Management believes that Gold Fields Ghana is entitled to rely on the provisions of the foreign exchange retention account agreement for the duration of the Tarkwa mining leases. Abosso is currently obligated to repatriate 25% of its revenue to Ghana, although the level of repatriation under the deed of warranty between Abosso and the government of Ghana is subject to renegotiation every two years. The most recent negotiations were concluded in February 2003. Since then there have been no requests for negotiations by either side, until Abosso’s repatriation level is renegotiated, it will remain the same. While management has no reason to believe that the repatriation level will increase as a result of the next set of negotiations, there is no agreed ceiling on the repatriation level, and it could be increased. Gold Fields currently repatriates on average approximately 40% of revenues from the Ghana operations to Ghana, annually.

Australia

Environmental

While Australia’s federal government retains the power to regulate activities which impact matters of national environmental significance, the Constitution vests the power to legislate environmental matters principally in the states. Gold Fields’ gold operations in Australia are primarily subject to the environmental laws and regulations of the State of Western Australia which require, among other things, that Gold Fields obtains necessary environmental approvals, environmental licenses, work approvals and mining licenses to implement and carry on its mining operations. However, under the Environmental Protection and Biodiversity Act 1999 (Cth), it may be necessary to obtain separate approval from the federal government if any new project (including some expansions of existing facilities) is deemed to be a “controlled action” having, or likely to have, any significant impact on “matters of national environmental significance” under the Act.

Gold Fields is subject to the Environmental Protection Act 1986 (Western Australia), or EP Act, under which, it is obliged to prevent and abate pollution and environmental harm. The EP Act also prescribes sanctions and penalties for a range of environmental offences, including orders which may effectively suspend certain operations or activities. Gold Fields is also required to prepare and submit Annual Environmental Reports to the Department of Environment and Conservation, or DEC, in accordance with the published guidance materials.

At the state level, the Western Australian Environmental Protection Authority, or the Western Australian EPA, undertakes the environmental impact assessment, or EIA, of some proposals referred to it under Part IV of the EP Act. An EIA is a systematic and orderly evaluation of a new proposal (including an expansion of an existing facility) and its impact on the environment. The assessment includes considering ways in which the proposal, if implemented, could avoid or reduce any impact on the environment. As a result of recent amendments to the Western Australian EPA’s administrative processes, there are now only two formal levels of assessment—Public Environmental Review, or PER, and Assessment on Proponent Information, or API.

During the operational life of its mines, Gold Fields is required by law to make provisions for the ongoing rehabilitation of its mines and to provide for the cost of post-closure rehabilitation and monitoring once mining operations cease. Gold Fields guarantees its environmental obligations by providing the Western Australian government with unconditional bank-guaranteed performance bonds.

The Australian Clean Energy Act 2011 (Cth) and associated legislation establishing a national carbon pricing scheme, or Scheme, passed into law in November 2011 and has now fully commenced. Under the Scheme, entities that have operational control over facilities (i.e. activities) and that emit more than 25,000 tonnes CO 2 -e per annum in greenhouse gas emissions covered by the Scheme, are directly regulated and are required to acquire and surrender carbon units to cover those emissions.

 

120


Table of Contents

The Scheme will operate in two phases: a fixed price phase which commenced on July 1, 2012, followed by a floating price phase commencing on July 1, 2015. In the fixed price phase liable entities are able to acquire an uncapped number of carbon units at the applicable fixed price, which will be automatically surrendered by those entities to meet their liability and cannot be traded or banked for future use. The fixed carbon price has commenced at $23 per tonne CO 2 -e (for 2012-13), increasing to $24.15 per tonne CO 2 -e (for 2013-14) and $25.40 per tonne CO 2 -e (for 2014-15). In the floating price phase, the carbon price per tonne of CO 2 -e will cease to be prescribed and the Australian government will instead set annual caps on the number of carbon units to be issued in each year and carbon units will be made available for purchase through an auction process thereby allowing the price of those carbon units to be determined by the market.

The Scheme provides that by May 31, 2014, the Australian government will announce a price ceiling for carbon units during the first three years of the floating price phase. The price ceiling will be $20 above the expected European allowance price for 2015-16 and will rise by 5% in real terms in 2016-17 and 2017-18. There is uncertainty as to the price of carbon units under the Scheme once the floating price phase commences in 2015. Emissions from the combustion of certain liquid fossil fuels (including petroleum, diesel, liquefied natural gas and liquefied petroleum gas) are excluded from the Scheme and entities are not required to acquire and surrender carbon units to cover emissions resulting from the combustion of those types of fuels.

However, while entities which consume these types of liquid fossil fuels in their operations will not be directly regulated by the Scheme, they will nonetheless be indirectly regulated through the imposition, by the Australian government, of an effective carbon price on those fuels. The effective carbon price will be applied by the Australian government making periodic changes to the system of fuel tax credits and fuel excise/customs duties in respect of:

 

   

liquid fuels used for business transport (other than in the agriculture, forestry and fisheries industries), including liquid fuels used in the domestic aviation, shipping and rail sectors;

 

   

liquid fuels used for non-transport purposes (e.g. diesel used for power generation); and

 

   

compressed natural gas, liquefied natural gas and liquefied petroleum gas used for off-road transport and non-transport uses.

The first of these changes became effective on July 1, 2012 and will be made annually during the fixed price phase of the Scheme and bi-annually during the floating price phase.

Emissions from Gold Fields’ Australian operations predominantly arise from the combustion of liquid fossil fuels and as such Gold Fields’ Australian operations are not likely to be directly regulated by the Scheme and Gold Fields’ Australian operations will not be required to acquire and surrender carbon units to cover those emissions. However, the effective price of diesel fuel paid by Gold Fields’ Australian operations is likely to rise due to the Government’s periodic reduction in diesel fuel rebates and subsidy levels thereby imposing an effective carbon price on diesel fuel consumption. This will result in members of Gold Fields’ Australian group being indirectly regulated by the Scheme. In addition, operational expenditures will also be affected by the pass-through of compliance costs under contracts with regulated suppliers.

Health and Safety

The Mines Safety and Inspection Act 1994 (Western Australia), or the Safety and Inspection Act and the Mines Safety and Inspection Regulations 1995 (Western Australia) together regulate the duties of employers and employees in the mining industry with regard to occupational health and safety and outline offenses and penalties for breach. Resources Safety, a division of the Department of Mines and Petroleum, administers this legislation. Under the approach utilized by Resources Safety, it is the responsibility of each employer to manage safety (i.e. a general duty of care exists in mines located in Western Australia). A violation of the safety laws or failure to comply with the instructions of the relevant health and safety authorities could lead to, among other things, a temporary shutdown of all or a portion of the mine, a loss of the right to mine or the imposition of costly compliance procedures.

 

121


Table of Contents

The Work Health and Safety Bill 2011 (Western Australia), or the WHS bill, (which is a significantly amended version of the federal Model Work Health and Safety Act) has been drafted in respect of general industry; however, model work, health and safety regulations have still not been finalized in respect of the mining industry in the WHS bill. The Western Australian State Government is of the view that implementation of the model work, health and safety laws under the WHS bill requires a complete package of regulations covering both the general and mining industries.

The Western Australian State Government has not given a date for implementation of the model work, health and safety laws. A review is currently under way and a Western Australia-specific public consultation period commenced on August 17, 2012 in relation to the model work, health and safety regulations. The position regarding implementation of the model work, health and safety laws therefore remains unclear, but it seems unlikely that any form of the law will be introduced to the Western Australian Parliament before July 2013.

Mineral Rights

In Australia, the ownership of land is separate from the ownership of most minerals, which are the property of the states and are thus regulated by the state governments. The Mining Act is the principal piece of legislation governing exploration and mining on land in Western Australia. Licenses and leases for, among other things, prospecting, exploration and mining must be obtained pursuant to the requirements of the Mining Act before the relevant activity can begin.

Prospecting licenses, exploration licenses and mining leases are subject to prescribed minimum annual expenditure commitments. Royalties are payable to the state based on the amount of ore produced or obtained from a mining tenement. A quarterly production report must be filed and royalties are calculated accordingly at a fixed rate of 2.5% of royalty value in respect of gold, and at other rates in respect of ore produced or obtained from a mining tenement. The royalty value of gold is the amount of gold produced during each month in a relevant quarter multiplied by the average gold spot price for that month. Despite the discussion above, no royalty is payable in respect of the first 2,500 ounces of gold metal produced during a financial year from gold bearing material produced or obtained from the same gold royalty project.

Land Claims

In 1992, the High Court of Australia recognized a form of native title which protects the rights of indigenous people in relation to land and waters in certain circumstances. As a result of this decision, the Native Title Act 1993 (Cth), or Native Title Act, was enacted to recognize and protect existing native title by providing a mechanism for the determination of native title claims and a statutory right for Aboriginal groups or persons to negotiate, object, and/or be consulted when, among other things, there is an expansion of, or change to, the rights and interests in the land which affect native title and which constitute a “future act” under the Native Title Act. The existence of these claims does not necessarily prevent continued mining under existing tenements. Tenements granted prior to January 1, 1994 are not “future acts” and do not need to comply with the aforementioned consultation or negotiation procedures. As a general rule, tenements granted after January 1, 1994 need to comply with this process. However, in Western Australia, some tenements were granted without complying with this consultation or negotiation process on the basis of then prevailing Western Australian legislation. This legislation was subsequently found to be invalid as it conflicted with the Native Title Act which is Commonwealth legislation. Subsequent legislation was passed validating the grant of tenements between January 1, 1994 and December 23, 1996, provided certain conditions were met.

Certain of Gold Fields’ tenements are currently subject to native title claims. However, most of Gold Fields’ tenements were granted prior to January 1, 1994. Where tenements were granted between January 1, 1994 and December 23, 1996, Gold Fields believes it has complied with the conditions set out by the Native Title Act for those tenements to be validly granted. On those tenements granted after December 1996, Gold Fields has entered into agreements with the claimant parties which provide the Company with security of tenure. Therefore, the granting of native title over any of these tenements (if ever it occurs) will not have a material effect on Gold Fields’ tenure during the operation of these agreements.

 

122


Table of Contents

Peru

Regulatory

The regulatory framework governing the development of mining activities in Peru mainly consists of the General Mining Act ( Ley General de Minería ), or the LGM, and regulations relating to mining procedures, health and safety, environmental protection, and mining investment and guarantees. Mining activities as defined by the LGM include surveying, prospecting, exploration, exploitation, general workings, beneficiation, trading and transportation of ore. In addition to general taxation, mining companies are also subject to a special tax regime established in 2011 through the amendment of the Mining Royalty Law and enactment of the Special Mining Tax Law and the Special Mining Charge Law.

Regulatory and Supervisory Entities

In general terms, the principal regulator of mining activities in Peru is the Ministry of Energy and Mines, or MEM, through its General Bureau of Mining ( Dirección General de Minería ), or DGM, and its General Bureau of Mining and Environmental Affairs ( Dirección General de Asuntos Ambientales Mineros ), or DGAAM. Other regulatory institutions are the INGEMMET; the Labor Ministry; the Supervisory Body of Investment in Energy and Mining ( Organismo Supervisor de la Inversión en Energía y Minería ), or the OSINERGMIN, and the Assessment and Environment Supervising Agency ( Organismo de Evaluación y Fiscalización Ambiental ), or the OEFA.

Concessions

In accordance with the LGM, mining activities (except surveying, prospecting and trading) must be performed exclusively under the concession system. A concession confers upon its holder the exclusive right to develop a specific mining activity within a defined area. The LGM establishes four types of concessions:

Mining Concessions

A mining concession is a real property interest independent and separate from surface land located within the coordinates of the concession. Holders of mining concessions or of any pending claims for mining concessions must comply with payment of the ACF (U.S.$3.00 per hectare per year). Holders of mining concessions are also required to meet minimum annual production targets prescribed by law. Titleholders are entitled to group multiple concessions into Administrative Economic Units to comply with the minimum production requirement, provided certain conditions are met. In the case of mining concessions obtained prior to October 2008, the minimum annual production target for concessions to mine metals is equivalent to U.S.$100.00 per hectare per year.

In the case of mining concessions obtained starting in October 2008, the minimum annual production target for metallic concessions is equivalent to one Fiscal Payment Unit, or UIT, per hectare per year. The UIT is fixed on a yearly basis and is set to equal approximately U.S.$1,480.00 in 2013.

Beneficiation Concessions

Beneficiation or process concessions confer the right to extract or concentrate the valuable substances of an aggregate of minerals and/or to smelt, purify or refine metals through a set of physical, chemical and/or physicochemical processes. As with mining concessions, holders of beneficiation concessions are required to pay the ACF, which is calculated on the basis of the production capacity of the processing plant.

General Working Concessions

General workings concessions confer the right to render ancillary services to two or more mining concession holders. The following are considered ancillary services: ventilation, drainage, hoisting or extraction in favor of two or more concessions of different concessionaires.

 

123


Table of Contents

Ore Transportation Concessions

Ore transportation concessions confer the right to install and operate a system for the continuous massive transportation of mineral products between one or more mining centers and a port or beneficiation plant, or a refinery, or along one or more stretches of these routes. The ore transportation system must be non-conventional, such as conveyor belts, pipelines or cable cars, among others. Conventional transportation systems are authorized by the Ministry of Transport and Communications.

Mining Royalty and Other Special Mining Taxes and Charges

In addition to general taxation, mining companies are subject to a special tax regime established, in its current form, in September 2011. This special tax regime is structured around the Mining Royalty Law, the Special Mining Tax Law and the Special Mining Charge Law. The Mining Royalty Law, enacted in 2004, established payment of a mining royalty by owners of mining concessions for the exploitation of metallic and non-metallic resources. This mining royalty was originally calculated on the basis of revenues obtained from the sales of minerals. However, in September 2011, an amendment to the Mining Royalty Law was approved establishing that, as of October 2011, the mining royalty will be determined by applying a sliding scale rate (ranging from 1% to 12%, previously 1% to 3% of sales) based on the quarterly operating profits of mining companies. Mining royalties are deductible for income tax purposes.

In September 2011, the Special Mining Tax Law and the Special Mining Charge Law were enacted. The Special Mining Tax Law established that owners of mining concessions must pay, as of October 2011, a special mining tax for the exploitation of metallic resources. The special mining tax is calculated by applying a sliding scale of rates (ranging from 2% to 8.4%) based on the quarterly operating profits of mining companies. The special mining tax is deductible for income tax purposes and only applies to owners of mining concessions that have not executed a Mining Tax Stability Agreement with the Ministry of Energy and Mines.

In lieu of the special mining tax, holders of metallic mining concessions that have executed a Mining Tax Stability Agreement with the Ministry of Energy and Mines will be subject, as of October 2011, to payment of the special mining charge established by the Special Mining Charge Law. The special mining charge is calculated by applying a sliding scale of rates (ranging from 4% to 13.12%) based on the quarterly operating profits of mining companies. The special mining charge is deductible for income tax purposes.

In addition to the above, beginning with their annual income in calendar 2012, mining companies will have to contribute an amount equivalent to 0.5% of their annual income before taxes to fund the Complementary Retirement Fund for Mining, Metal and Iron and Steel activities that was created by Law 29741 in the 2011 calendar year.

Also, since July 2012 mining companies have to pay an annual supervisory contribution to the OSINERGMIN which will be established by Supreme Decree but that in no case will exceed an amount equivalent to 1% of annual invoicing, after deducting VAT.

Environmental

In 1990, the Environmental Code was enacted, which established for the first time a legal and institutional system to preserve the environment. In 1993, the Environmental Protection Regulations for Mining and Metallurgical Activities were enacted. On October 15, 2005, the Environmental Act completely repealed and replaced the Environmental Code.

The following items are required to be produced under the environmental laws in order to perform mining activities:

 

   

Environmental Impact Assessment, or EIA : EIAs are required for new projects, expansions of the operations by more than 50% and in conjunction with a project moving from the exploration stage to the development stage. EIAs must evaluate the physical, biological, socio-economic and cultural impacts on the environment resulting from the execution of the mining projects.

 

124


Table of Contents
   

Semi-Detailed Environmental Impact Assessment, or SD-EIA, and Environmental Impact Statement, or DIA : SD-EIAs and DIAs are required for mining exploration projects. SD-EIAs apply to larger projects while DIAs apply to smaller projects. Recent legislation has been enacted establishing that the initiation of exploration activities needs to be previously authorized by the DGM. A SD-EIA or DIA is a requirement to obtain such authorization.

 

   

Annual Consolidated Statement : Holders of mining concessions must submit statements by June 30 of each year describing emissions to the environment and follow-up actions taken pursuant to the previously approved EIA and/or the Program for Environmental Adequacy, or PAMA.

In 2003, a law regulating mine closure was approved. The closure of a mine usually entails the sealing of exits, in the case of underground mines, the removal of surface infrastructure and the environmental rehabilitation of the surface where the mining activity has been developed. The law requires mining companies to ensure the availability of the resources necessary for the execution of an adequate mine closure plan, including an Environmental Liabilities Closure Plan, in order to prevent, minimize and control the risks to and negative effects on health, personal safety and environment that may be generated or may continue after the cessation of mining operations. Furthermore, the law obligates holders of mining concessions to furnish guarantees in favor of the MEM to ensure that they will carry out the Environmental Liabilities Closure Plan in accordance with the environmental protection regulations and to ensure that the MEM has the necessary funds to execute the mine closure plan in the event of non-compliance by the holder of the mining concession. Mine concession holders may satisfy these requirements by providing to the MEM stand-by letters of credit to cover the amount of any mine closure plan.

Other matters subject to regulation include, but are not limited to, transportation of ore or hazardous substances, water use and discharges, power use and generation, use and storage of explosives, housing and other facilities for workers, reclamation, labor standards and mine safety and occupational health.

Right to Prior Consultation

On August 31, 2011, the Peruvian government approved the Law of Prior Consultation to Indigenous or Tribal Populations recognized in Convention 169 of the International Labor Organization. This law establishes that the Peruvian government must consult in advance with indigenous or tribal populations on legislative or administrative measures (including pending claims for mining concessions) that may directly affect the collective rights related to their physical existence, cultural identity, quality of life or development. The duty of consultation is undertaken by the Peruvian government, not Gold Fields or investors.

While the final decision to move forward with the consulted legislative or administrative measures rests with the Peruvian government, even in the absence of agreement, the Peruvian government has an obligation to take all necessary measures to ensure that the collective rights of indigenous or tribal populations are protected.

 

125


Table of Contents

Property

Gold Fields’ operations as of December 31, 2012 comprised the following:

Gold Fields’ operative mining areas as of December 31, 2012

 

Operation

   Size
(hectares)
 

South Africa

  

Driefontein

     8,561 (1)  

Kloof

     20,087 (1)  

Beatrix

     16,874 (1) )  

South Deep

     4,268 (2)  

Ghana

  

Tarkwa

     20,825   

Damang

     25,454   

Australia

  

St. Ives

     104,509   

Agnew

     68,138   

Peru

  

Cerro Corona

     2,971   

 

Note:

(1) Gold Fields disposed of its KDC (Kloof and Driefontein) and Beatrix operations as part of the Spin-off.
(2) As of July 13, 2010, the South Deep mining rights were extended to include Uncle Harry’s Area, increasing South Deep’s mining area to 4,268 hectares.

Gold Fields leases its corporate headquarters in Sandton and its exploration offices not located at the mines.

The MPRDA came into operation on May 1, 2004 and vests the right to prospect and mine in the South African State with administration by the government of South Africa. In November 2006, the South African Department of Minerals and Energy approved the conversion of Gold Fields’ mining rights under the former regulatory regime at Driefontein and Kloof (both now part of KDC) and Beatrix into rights under the new regime. Both of these operations were distributed on the Spin-off date. During May 2010, the DMR approved the conversion of the South Deep old order mining rights into a new order mining right. Included in this approval was an additional portion of ground known as Uncle Harry’s, which is contiguous to South Deep. The cumulative effect of this approval, together with the previous conversions for the Driefontein, Kloof and Beatrix Gold Mines granted in January 2007, was that, as of the Spin-off date, all of Gold Fields’ South African mines had received their new order mining rights.

Gold Fields also owns most of the surface rights with respect to its South African mining properties. Where Gold Fields conducts surface operations on land the surface rights of which it does not own, it does so in accordance with applicable mining and property laws. In addition, Gold Fields owns prospecting and surface rights contiguous to its operations in South Africa. As required under the MPRDA, Gold Fields has registered its surface rights utilized for mining purposes. Gold Fields has received prospecting rights on properties which it has identified as being able to contribute, now or in the future, to its business and is in the process of converting those prospecting rights to mining rights under the MPRDA. See “—Environmental and Regulatory Matters—South Africa—Mineral Rights”.

Gold Fields Ghana obtained the mining rights for the Tarkwa property from the government of Ghana in 1993. In August 2000, with the consent of the government of Ghana, Gold Fields Ghana was assigned the mining rights for the northern portion of the Teberebie property. The Tarkwa rights expire in 2027, while the Teberebie rights expire in 2018. Abosso holds the right to mine at the Damang property under a mining lease from the government of Ghana which expires in 2025. Gold Fields may exploit all surface and underground gold at all

 

126


Table of Contents

three sites until the rights expire, provided that Gold Fields pays the government of Ghana a quarterly royalty which is calculated on the basis of a formula which ranges from 3% to 12% of revenues derived from mining at the sites. For fiscal 2011, this formula resulted in Gold Fields Ghana paying royalties equivalent to approximately 3.0% of the revenues from gold produced at the Tarkwa and Teberebie properties, and Abosso paying approximately 3.0% of the revenues from gold produced at the Damang property. In 2010, the Minerals and Mining Act was amended to provide for a fixed royalty rate of 5% of the total revenue earned from minerals obtained, with effect from April 1, 2011.

In Australia, mining rights and property are leased from the state. Australian mining leases have an initial term of 21 years with one automatic 21-year renewal period and thereafter an indefinite number of 21-year renewals with government approval. At the St. Ives operations, the initial 21-year term has expired for 30 mining leases, with those mining leases having now entered their second 21-year term. At the Agnew operations, the initial 21-year term has expired for 40 mining leases, with those mining leases having now entered their second 21-year term. In relation to gold produced from the mining leases at St. Ives and Agnew, Gold Fields pays an annual royalty to the state of 2.5% of production.

In Peru, exploration and extraction activities can only be performed in duly authorized areas. Authorization is granted by the Peruvian government when a mining concession is issued. Mining concessions expire if the titleholder does not exploit the concessions for a period of twenty years. The titleholder must comply with specific obligations, such as paying annual fees of U.S.$3.00 per hectare, meeting minimum investment requirements, paying a monthly royalty according to the value of the produced concentrates and other requirements. La Cima has 33 mining concessions which cover 2,939.68 hectares, including 185.2 hectares outside of Cerro Corona. The total surface rights related to Cerro Corona cover 1,216.89 hectares. Five additional mining concessions located in the surrounding areas of Cerro Corona which cover 31.64 hectares were assigned to La Cima for a 30 year period.

As of December 31, 2012, Gold Fields also held exploration tenements covering a total of approximately 2 million hectares in various countries outside South Africa, including Chile, Peru, Finland, Kyrgyzstan, South Africa, Ghana, Mali, Guinea, the Philippines, Australia and Canada. Gold Fields’ ownership interests in these sites vary with its participation interests in the relevant exploration projects. Gold Fields’ international exploration offices are leased under various contract terms and durations. See “—Growth and International Projects”.

Gold Fields is the registered owner of approximately 55,341 hectares of land in the Gauteng and Free State Provinces of South Africa, which includes numerous non-mining properties e.g., buildings, shops, farmland and hospitals.

 

127


Table of Contents

The maps presented below show the location of Gold Fields’ operations.

South Africa Operations

 

LOGO

 

LOGO

 

128


Table of Contents

LOGO

 

LOGO

 

129


Table of Contents

Ghana Operations

 

LOGO   LOGO

 

130


Table of Contents

Australia Operations

 

LOGO   

LOGO

 

131


Table of Contents

Peru Operations

 

LOGO   

Research and Development

Gold Fields undertakes various research and development projects relating to gold production technology and potential uses of gold. In particular, Gold Fields developed a patented technology called BIOX ® through its formerly wholly-owned Swiss subsidiary Biomin Technologies S.A., or Biomin BIOX ® , which involves a process whereby bacteria release gold from sulfide-bearing gold ore to permit more economical recovery of the gold. Gold Fields completed the sale of Biomin to Biomin’s management in May 2013.

The Company was involved in the testing of biotechnology for the destruction of cyanide compounds in residue streams, for the purpose of complying with the Cyanide Code. The ASTER ® process is patented in South Africa. This project was separated from Gold Fields in the sale of Biomin.

In Australia, Gold Fields continues to work with the Commonwealth Scientific & Industrial Research Organization, or CSIRO, on mining projects that are mutually beneficial, building on a relationship agreement signed in 2008, although currently there are no active programs.

Legal Proceedings and Investigations

On August 21, 2008, Gold Fields Operations Limited, formerly known as Western Areas Limited, or WAL, a subsidiary of Gold Fields, received a summons from Randgold and Exploration Company Limited, or R&E, and African Strategic Investment (Holdings) Limited. The summons claims that during the period that WAL was

 

132


Table of Contents

under the control of Brett Kebble, Roger Kebble and others, WAL assisted in the unlawful disposal of shares owned by R&E in Randgold Resources Limited, or Resources, and Afrikander Lease Limited, now known as Uranium One. WAL’s assessment remains that it has sustainable defenses to these claims and, accordingly, WAL’s attorneys have been instructed to vigorously defend the claims. The claims have been computed in various ways. The highest claims have been computed on the basis of the highest prices of Resources and Uranium One between the dates of the alleged unlawful acts and March 2008 (between R11 billion and R12 billion). The alternative claims have been computed on the basis of the actual amounts allegedly received by WAL to fund its operations (approximately R519 million). The claims lie only against WAL, which holds a 50% stake in the South Deep Mine. This alleged liability is historic and relates to a period of time prior to Gold Fields purchasing the company.

On August 21, 2012, a court application was served on a group of respondents that included Gold Fields, or together the August Respondents. On December 21, 2012, a further court application was issued and was formally served on a number of respondents, including Gold Fields, or the December Respondents and, together with the August Respondents, the Respondents, on January 10, 2013, on behalf of classes of mine workers, former mine workers and their dependents who were previously employed by, or who are currently employed by, among others, Gold Fields, and who allegedly contracted silicosis and/or other occupational lung diseases, or together the Classes. The court application of August 21, 2012 and the court application of December 21, 2012 are together referred to below as the Applications.

These Applications request that the court certify a class action to be instituted by the applicants on behalf of the Classes. These Applications are the first and preliminary steps in a process where, if the court were to certify the class action, the applicants may, in a second stage, bring an action wherein they will attempt to hold the Respondents liable for silicosis and other occupational lung diseases and resultant consequences. In the second stage, the Applications contemplate addressing what the applicants describe as common legal and factual issues regarding the claim arising from the allegations of the entire Classes. If the applicants are successful in the second stage, they envisage that individual members of the Classes could later submit individual claims for damages against the respective Respondents. The Applications do not identify the number of claims that may be instituted against the Respondents or the quantum of damages the applicants may seek.

With respect to the Applications, Gold Fields has filed a notice of its intention to oppose the Applications and has instructed its attorneys to defend the claims. Gold Fields and its attorneys are engaging with the applicants’ attorneys in both Applications to try to establish a court-sanctioned process to agree the timelines (including the date by which Gold Fields must file its papers opposing the Applications) and the possible consolidation of the separate applications. At this stage, Gold Fields cannot quantify its potential liability from this action.

In December 2012, Gold Fields, through the Social and Ethics Committee of the Board, commenced an examination of a Black Economic Empowerment transaction related to its South Deep license. The Company took this action following press reports raising questions about the transaction. In that context, the Board engaged an independent law firm to assist in its examination and that firm has undertaken an investigation. The Board may also authorize a review of the Company’s relevant internal controls in order to determine whether any improvements are necessary. The Board’s examination of the matter is ongoing.

For further information regarding the risks associated with these matters, please read “Risk Factors—The acquisition of Western Areas, BGSA and South Deep may expose Gold Fields to unknown liabilities and risks” and “Risk Factors—An actual or alleged breach or breaches in governance processes, or fraud, bribery and corruption may lead to public and private censure, regulatory penalties, loss of licenses or permits and impact negatively upon our empowerment status and may damage Gold Fields’ reputation”.

Other than the proceedings and investigations described above, Gold Fields is not a party to any material legal or arbitration proceedings, nor is any of its property the subject of pending material legal proceedings.

 

133


Table of Contents

Glossary of Mining Terms

The following explanations are not intended as technical definitions, but rather are intended to assist the reader in understanding some of the terms used in this annual report.

Acid-base accounting ”, or “ ABA ” means the analysis applied to mine waste and geological materials to predict the potential of that material to be acid producing or acid neutralizing.

Agglomeration ” means a method of concentrating gold based on its adhesive characteristics.

Backfill ” means material, generally sourced from tailings or waste rock, used to refill mined-out areas to increase the long-term stability of mines and mitigate the effects of seismicity.

Breast Stoping ” means a mining method whereby the direction of mining is in the direction of strike of the reef.

Carbon absorption ” means a treatment process which uses activated carbon to remove gold in solution.

Carbon in leach ”, or “ CIL ” means a process similar to CIP (described below) except that the ore slurries are not leached with cyanide prior to carbon loading. Instead, the leaching and carbon loading occur simultaneously.

Carbon in pulp ”, or “ CIP ” means a common process used to extract gold from cyanide leach slurries. The process consists of carbon granules suspended in the slurry and flowing counter-current to the process slurry in multiple- staged agitated tanks. The process slurry, which has been leached with cyanide prior to the CIP process, contains soluble gold. The soluble gold is absorbed onto the carbon granules which are subsequently separated from the slurry by screening. The gold is then recovered from the carbon by electrowinning onto steel wool cathodes or by a similar process.

Cleaning ” means the process of removing broken rock from a mine.

Closely spaced dip pillar mining method ” means a mining method where support pillars are left in place at relatively close intervals to increase the stability of the mine. Mining is conducted using conventional drilling and blasting techniques.

Comminution ” means the breaking, crushing or grinding of ore by mechanical means.

Crosscut ” means a mine working driven horizontally and at right angles to a level.

Cut-off grade ” means the grade which distinguishes the material within the ore body that is to be extracted and treated from the remainder.

De-bottlenecking ” means decreasing production constraints (e.g., removing mechanical deficiencies so that processed tonnage may be increased).

Decline or incline ” means a sloping underground opening for machine access from the surface to an underground mine or from level to level in a mine. Declines and inclines are often driven in a spiral to access different elevations in the mine.

Declustered averaging ” means an estimation technique used in the evaluation of ore reserves.

Depletion ” means the decrease in quantity of ore in a deposit or property resulting from extraction or production.

Development ” means activities (including shaft sinking and on-reef and off-reef tunneling) required to prepare for mining activities and maintain a planned production level and those costs incurred to enable the conversion of mineralization to reserves.

 

134


Table of Contents

Dilution ” means the mixing of waste rock with ore, resulting in a decrease in the overall grade.

Dissolution ” means the process whereby a metal is dissolved and becomes amenable to separation from the gangue material.

Electrowinning ” means the process of removing gold from solution by the action of electric currents.

Elution ” means removal of the gold from the activated carbon.

Exploration ” means activities associated with ascertaining the existence, location, extent or quality of mineralization, including economic and technical evaluations of mineralization.

Flotation ” means the process whereby certain chemicals are added to the material fed to the leach circuit in order to float the desired minerals to produce a concentrate of the mineral to be processed. This process can be carried out in column flotation cells.

Gangue ” means commercially valueless material remaining after ore extraction from rock.

Gold in process ” means gold in the processing circuit that is expected to be recovered during or after operations.

Gold reserves ” means the gold contained within proven and probable reserves on the basis of recoverable material (reported as mill delivered tonnes and head grade).

Grade ” means the quantity of metal per unit mass of ore expressed as a percentage or, for gold, as grams of gold per tonne of ore.

Greenfield ” means a potential mining site of unknown quality.

Grinding ” means reducing rock to the consistency of fine sand by crushing and abrading in a rotating steel grinding mill.

Head grade ” means the grade of the ore as delivered to the metallurgical plant.

Heap leaching ” means a relatively low-cost technique for extracting metals from ore by percolating leaching solutions through heaps of ore placed on impervious pads. Generally used on low-grade ores.

Hypogene ” means ore or mineral deposits formed by ascending fluids within the earth.

In situ ” means within unbroken rock or still in the ground.

Kriging ” means an estimation technique used in the evaluation of ore reserves.

Leaching ” means dissolution of gold from the crushed and milled material, including reclaimed slime, for absorption and concentration onto the activated carbon.

Level ” means the workings or tunnels of an underground mine which are on the same horizontal plane.

Life of mine ”, or “ LoM ” means the expected remaining years of production, based on production rates and ore reserves.

London afternoon fixing price ” means the afternoon session open fixing of the gold price which takes place daily in London and is set by a board comprising five financial institutions.

Longwall mining method ” means a mining method involving mining over large continuous spans without the use of pillars.

 

135


Table of Contents

Mark-to-market ” means the current fair value of a derivative based on current market prices, or to calculate the current fair value of a derivative based on current market prices, as the case may be.

Measures ” means conversion factors from metric units to U.S. units are provided below.

 

Metric unit

       

U.S. equivalent

1 tonne

   = 1 t    = 1.10231 short tons

1 gram

   = 1 g    = 0.03215 ounces

1 gram per tonne

   = 1 g/t    = 0.02917 ounces per short ton

1 kilogram per tonne

   = 1 kg/t    = 29.16642 ounces per short ton

1 kilometer

   = 1 km    = 0.62137 miles

1 meter

   = 1 m    = 3.28084 feet

1 centimeter

   = 1 cm    = 0.39370 inches

1 millimeter

   = 1 mm    = 0.03937 inches

1 hectare

   = 1 ha    = 2.47104 acres

Metallurgical plant ” means a processing plant used to treat ore and extract the contained gold.

Metallurgical recovery factor ” means the proportion of metal in the ore delivered to the mill, that is recovered by the metallurgical process or processes.

Metallurgy ” means in the context of this document, the science of extracting metals from ores and preparing them for sale.

Mill delivered tonnes ” means a quantity, expressed in tonnes, of ore delivered to the metallurgical plant.

Milling/mill ” means the comminution of the ore, although the term has come to cover the broad range of machinery inside the treatment plant where the gold is separated from the ore.

Mine call factor ” means the ratio, expressed as a percentage, of the specific product recovered at the mill (plus residue) to the specific product contained in an ore body calculated based on an operation’s measuring and valuation methods.

Mineralization ” means the presence of a target mineral in a mass of host rock.

Mini-longwall ” means mining that is utilized in geologically/geotechnically constrained areas where strike stabilization pillars are applied. The back lengths of the individual mini-longwalls are dictated by the vertical spacing of the main mining levels.

Net smelter return ” means the volume of refined gold sold during the relevant period multiplied by the average spot gold price and the average exchange rate for the period, less refining, transport and insurance costs.

Notional Cash Expenditure”, or “NCE ” means operating costs plus additions to property, plant and equipment.

Open pit ” means mining in which the ore is extracted from a pit. The geometry of the pit may vary with the characteristics of the ore body.

Ore ” means a mixture of material containing minerals from which at least one of the minerals can be mined and processed at an economic profit.

Ore body ” means a well defined mass of material of sufficient mineral content to make extraction economically viable.

 

136


Table of Contents

Ore grade ” means the average amount of gold contained in a tonne of gold-bearing ore expressed in grams per tonne.

Ore reserves or reserves ” means that part of a mineral deposit which could be economically and legally extracted or produced at the time of the reserve determination.

Ounce ” means one troy ounce, which equals 31.1035 grams.

Overburden ” means the soil and rock that must be removed in order to expose an ore deposit.

Paste filling ” means a technique whereby cemented paste fill is placed in mined out voids to improve and maintain ground stability, minimize waste dilution and maximize extraction of the ore.

Pay limit ” means the value at which the ore body can be mined without profit or loss, calculated using an appropriate gold price, production costs and recovery factors.

Porphyry ” means an igneous rock of any composition that contains larger, well-formed mineral grains in a finer- grained groundmass.

Probable reserves ” means reserves for which quantity and grade and/or quality are computed from information similar to that used for proven reserves, but the sites for inspection, sampling, and measurement are farther apart or are otherwise less adequately spaced. The degree of assurance, although lower than that for proven reserves, is high enough to assume continuity between points of observation.

Production stockpile ” means the selective accumulation of low grade material which is actively managed as part of the current mining operations.

Prospect ” means to investigate a site with insufficient data available on mineralization to determine if minerals are economically recoverable.

Prospecting right ” means permission to explore an area for minerals.

Proven reserves ” means reserves for which” means (1) quantity is computed from dimensions revealed in outcrops, trenches, workings or boreholes; (2) grade and/or quality are computed from the results of detailed sampling; and (3) the sites for inspection, sampling and measurement are spaced so closely and the geologic character is so well defined that size, shape, depth and mineral content of reserves are well-established.

Reef ” means a gold-bearing sedimentary horizon, normally a conglomerate band, that may contain economic levels of gold.

Refining ” means the final stage of metal production in which final impurities are removed from the molten metal by introducing air and fluxes. The impurities are removed as gases or slag.

Rehabilitation ” means the process of restoring mined land to a condition approximating its original state.

Remnant pillar mining ” means the removal of blocks of ground previously left behind for various reasons during the normal course of mining.

Rock burst ” means an event caused by seismicity which results in damage to underground workings and/or loss of life and equipment.

 

137


Table of Contents

Rock dump ” means the historical accumulation of low grade material derived in the course of mining which is processed in order to take advantage of spare processing capacity.

Run of Mine ”, or “ RoM ” means a loose term to describe ore of average grade.

Sampling ” means taking small pieces of rock at intervals along exposed mineralization for assay (to determine the mineral content).

Scattered mining method ” means conventional mining which is applied in a non-systematic configuration.

Seismicity ” means a sudden movement within a given volume of rock that radiates detectable seismic waves. The amplitude and frequency of seismic waves radiated from such a source depend, in general, on the strength and state of stress of the rock, the size of the source of seismic radiation, and the magnitude and the rate at which the rock moves during the fracturing process. Rock bursts, as defined above, involve seismicity.

Semi-autogenous grinding ”, or “ SAG, mill ” means a piece of machinery used to crush and grind ore which uses a mixture of steel balls and the ore itself to achieve comminution. The mill is shaped like a cylinder causing the grinding media and the ore itself to impact upon the ore.

Shaft ” means a shaft providing principal access to the underground workings for transporting personnel, equipment, supplies, ore and waste. A shaft is also used for ventilation and as an auxiliary exit. It may be equipped with a surface hoist system that lowers and raises conveyances for men, materials and ore in the shaft. A shaft generally has more than one conveyancing compartment.

Shortfall ” means the ratio of actual reef tonnage hoisted compared to monthly reef tonnage broken.

Sichel “t” ” means an estimation technique used in the evaluation of ore reserves.

Slimes ” means the finer fraction of tailings discharged from a processing plant after the valuable minerals have been recovered.

Slurry ” means a fluid comprising fine solids suspended in a solution (generally water containing additives).

Smelting ” means thermal processing whereby molten metal is liberated from beneficiated ore or concentrate with impurities separating as lighter slag.

Spot price ” means the current price of a metal for immediate delivery.

Stockpile ” means a store of unprocessed ore.

Stope ” means the underground excavation within the ore body where the main gold production takes place.

Stripping ” means the process of removing overburden to mine ore.

Sulfide ” means a mineral characterized by the linkages of sulfur with a metal or semi-metal, such as pyrite (iron sulfide). Also a zone in which sulfide minerals occur.

Supergene ” means ores or ore minerals formed where descending surface water oxidizes mineralized rock and redistributes the ore minerals, often concentrating them in zones.

Tailings ” means finely ground rock from which valuable minerals have been extracted by milling.

Tailings dam/slimes dam ” means dams or dumps created from tailings or slimes.

 

138


Table of Contents

Tonne ” means one tonne is equal to 1,000 kilograms (also known as a “metric” tonne).

Tonnage ” means quantities where the tonne is an appropriate unit of measure. Typically used to measure reserves of gold-bearing material in situ or quantities of ore and waste material mined, transported or milled.

Total cash costs per ounce ” means a measure of the average cost of producing an ounce of gold, calculated by dividing the total cash costs in a period by the total gold sold over the same period. Total cash costs represent production costs as recorded in the statement of operations less offsite (i.e., central) general and administrative expenses (including head office costs charged to the mines, central training expenses, industry association fees and social development costs) and rehabilitation costs, plus royalties and employee termination costs. In determining the total cash cost of different elements of the operations, production overheads are allocated pro rata.

Total production costs per ounce ” means a measure of the average cost of producing an ounce of gold, calculated by dividing the total production costs in a period by the total gold production over the same period. Total production costs represent total cash costs, plus amortization, depreciation and rehabilitation costs.

Waste ” means rock mined with an insufficient gold content to justify processing.

Yield ” means the actual grade of ore realized after the mining and treatment process.

 

139


Table of Contents

ITEM 4A: UNRESOLVED STAFF COMMENTS

Not applicable.

 

140


Table of Contents

ITEM 5: OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

You should read the following discussion and analysis together with Gold Fields’ consolidated financial statements including the notes, appearing elsewhere in this annual report. Certain information contained in the discussion and analysis set forth below and elsewhere in this annual report includes forward-looking statements that involve risks and uncertainties. See “Forward-looking Statements” and “Risk Factors” for a discussion of important factors that could cause actual results to differ materially from the results described in or implied by the forward-looking statements contained in this annual report.

Overview

General

Gold Fields is a significant producer of gold and a major holder of gold reserves in South Africa, Ghana, Australia and Peru. In Peru, Gold Fields also produces copper. Gold Fields is primarily involved in underground and surface gold and copper mining and related activities, including exploration, extraction, processing and smelting. Gold Fields also has an interest in a platinum group metal (and associated by-product metals) exploration project in Finland.

On the Spin-off date, Gold Fields completed the Spin-off. See “—The Spin-off” below.

Prior to the Spin-off, approximately half of Gold Fields’ operations, based on gold production, were located in South Africa. After the Spin-off, Gold Fields expects that its South African, Ghanaian, Australian and Peruvian operations will produce 16%, 42%, 28% and 14% of its total gold production in 2013, respectively. Gold Fields’ remaining South African operation is South Deep. Gold Fields also owns the St. Ives and Agnew gold mining operations in Australia and has a 90.0% interest in each of the Tarkwa gold mine and the Damang gold mine in Ghana. Gold Fields also owns a 98.5% economic interest in the Cerro Corona mine. In addition, Gold Fields has gold and other precious metal exploration activities and interests in Africa, Eurasia, Australasia and the Americas.

As of December 31, 2012, Gold Fields reported attributable proven and probable gold and copper reserves of approximately 68.4 million ounces of gold and 1,024 million pounds of copper, as compared to the 77.6 million ounces of gold and 1,109 million pounds of copper, reported as of December 31, 2011. Of the 68.4 million ounces as of December 31, 2012, the Sibanye Gold assets accounted for 13.5 million ounces of gold. For a description of how gold equivalent ounces are determined, see “Defined Terms and Conventions”.

Total gold production was 3.348 million ounces of gold (including gold equivalents) in fiscal 2012, 3.254 million ounces of which were attributable to Gold Fields with the remainder attributable to noncontrolling shareholders in Gold Fields Ghana, Abosso and La Cima. Total gold production was 3.697 million ounces in fiscal 2011, 3.485 million ounces of which were attributable to Gold Fields with the remainder attributable to noncontrolling shareholders in Gold Fields Ghana, Abosso and La Cima.

In fiscal 2012, production from the South African operations decreased 13% mainly due to illegal strike action, which affected KDC and Beatrix, the fire at the Ya Rona mine shaft which broke out on June 30, 2012 and was extinguished on August 14, 2012, and lower grades compared with fiscal 2011. At KDC, production was 15% lower due to the reasons noted above resulting in lower underground mining volumes at slightly higher grades. The illegal strike action resulted in 30 days lost production at KDC East (formerly Kloof) and 39 days lost production at KDC West (formerly Driefontein). Gold Fields estimated that approximately 116,000 ounces of production at KDC was lost due to the illegal strike and 30,000 ounces due to the fire. Beatrix’s production was 17% lower due to lower underground grades, lower volumes mined and also because of the illegal strike action which resulted in the loss of 23 production days at the North and South sections and the loss of 29 days at the West section (formerly Oryx or No. 4 Shaft). Approximately 29,000 ounces of production at Beatrix was lost due to the illegal strike. South Deep’s production decreased by 1%. Increased underground mining volumes and grades, as South Deep builds to full production, were offset by a decrease in surface production which was discontinued in 2012 due to a lack of payable ore.

 

141


Table of Contents

Production at the international operations decreased by 6%. In Ghana, Tarkwa’s production increased marginally due to increased throughput at the CIL plant, partially offset by lower volumes processed at the North Heap Leach facility. Damang’s production was 24% lower due to lower volumes and grades mined from Damang pit as a result of safety concerns in the southern interface between the Juno and Damang pit cutback and deteriorating conditions on the East wall which restricted mining. In Australia, St. Ives’ production decreased by 3% mainly due to lower grade open pit ore mined. At Agnew, production was 9% lower due to complex ground conditions which required the mining schedule to be re-planned mid-year, resulting in a focus on lower-volume higher-grade ore from Kim underground. In Peru, Cerro Corona’s production decreased 11% mainly due to the lower copper price relative to the gold price in fiscal 2012 and due to anticipated lower gold and copper grades.

The Spin-off

On the Spin-off date, Gold Fields completed the Spin-off. The Spin-off was achieved by way of Gold Fields making a distribution on a pro rata basis of one Sibanye Gold ordinary share for every one Gold Fields share (whether held in the form of shares, ADRs or international depositary receipts) to Gold Fields shareholders, registered as such in Gold Fields’ register at close of business on February 15, 2013 in terms of section 46 of the South African Companies Act and section 46 of the South African Income Tax Act. The Board of Gold Fields passed the resolution necessary to implement the Spin-off on December 12, 2012. Sibanye Gold shares listed on the JSE and on the NYSE, on a “when issued” basis, on February 11, 2013.

Gold Fields’ consolidated results of operations discussed herein are not necessarily indicative of its future performance and do not reflect what its financial performance would have been had Sibanye Gold not been party of the Group during the periods presented.

Prior to the Spin-off, Gold Fields provided purchasing, corporate communications, human resources and benefits management, treasury and finance, investor relations, internal audit, legal and tax advice, compliance regarding internal controls and information technology functions to Sibanye Gold. The total cost of these services from Gold Fields was U.S.$8.4 million in fiscal 2012. While management expects that there will be some savings from the abovementioned functions, additional costs are also expected, including the renegotiation of contracts, in fiscal 2013, which should offset these savings.

Following the Spin-off, Gold Fields continues to provide some of these services to Sibanye Gold and Sibanye Gold continues to provide some services to Gold Fields on a transitional basis for a period of up to one year, pursuant to the Transitional Services Agreement. For more information on the Transitional Services Agreement, see “Additional Information—Material Contracts”.

Sibanye Gold’s total liabilities exceeded its assets by $965.2 million and $1,325.2 million as of December 31, 2012 and December 31, 2011, respectively. In addition, Sibanye Gold’s current liabilities exceeded its current assets by $2,001.3 million and $2,727.2 million, respectively, at those dates. Included in Sibanye Gold’s current liabilities were $1,996.3 million and $2,614.8 million owed by Sibanye Gold to GFL Mining Services Limited, or GFLMSL (a subsidiary of Gold Fields), as of December 31, 2012 and December 31, 2011, respectively. On February 1, 2013, Gold Fields subscribed for further shares in Sibanye Gold at a total subscription price of R17,245,786,016. Sibanye Gold used the majority of the proceeds of such subscription amount to repay the intercompany loan to GFLMSL, a wholly-owned subsidiary of Gold Fields. Gold Fields subscribed for such number of shares in Sibanye Gold so that, following such subscription, the number of issued shares held by Gold Fields in Sibanye Gold equaled the number of issued shares in Gold Fields. Sibanye Gold used the remaining portion of the proceeds of such subscription to establish a cell captive to continue to cover insurance exposures for risk categories including asset and liability claims that are typically denominated in U.S. dollars, which were covered under Gold Fields’ cell captive.

Comparability of Historical Financial Information

In 2010, Gold Fields changed its fiscal year end from June 30 to December 31 to align with the Company’s peers in the gold mining industry. It may not be possible to directly compare the audited consolidated financial

 

142


Table of Contents

statements as at and for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2011 with the audited consolidated financial statements as at and for the six month period ended December 31, 2010, as these relate to different financial periods, and it may not be possible to compare audited consolidated financial statements as at and for the six month period ended December 31, 2010 directly with the audited financial statements as at and for the fiscal years ended June 30, 2010, insofar as such financial statements refer to a completed financial year. Accordingly, the discussion below provides a comparison of fiscal 2012 and fiscal 2011, fiscal 2011 and fiscal 2010 (which do not reflect the same 12-month periods) and the six-month periods ended December 31, 2010 and 2009. Management believes that there are no factors that would materially affect the comparability of fiscal 2011 and 2010, except for the effect of inflation affecting fiscal 2011.

Disposal of Sino Gold shares

During fiscal 2010, Gold Fields entered into a sale agreement with Eldorado Gold Corporation, or Eldorado, to exchange its entire holding in Sino Gold (50 million shares) for equivalent shares in Eldorado (28 million). This resulted in a profit of U.S.$57.4 million. Subsequent to the share exchange, a further four million top-up shares were issued to Gold Fields by Eldorado. The entire holding in Eldorado was sold during fiscal 2010 resulting in a profit of U.S.$99.9 million of which U.S.$53.6 million relating to the top-up shares was accounted for as a gain on financial instruments. The total proceeds on disposal of the Eldorado shares were U.S.$361.9 million.

Purchase of Glencar

In fiscal 2010, Gold Fields acquired, for cash, 100% of Glencar Mining Plc., a company whose principal asset, and only defined resource, is the Komana project in Southern Mali, West Africa. The cash consideration paid was $43.0 million.

Payment for exploration rights in the Far South East Project

On September 20, 2010, Gold Fields entered into option agreements with Lepanto, a company listed in the Philippines, and Liberty, a private holding company, to acquire a 60% interest in the FSE, deposit in the Philippines.

The agreements provide Gold Fields with an 18 month option on FSE, during which time Gold Fields will conduct a major drilling program as part of a feasibility study on FSE. The option was initially granted to Gold Fields for the later of 18 months from signature in September 2010 or the date of receiving a FTAA for the project. A FTAA license allows a foreign corporation to control a majority interest in a Philippine mining project. The FTAA application for the FSE project was filed in November 2011. The application requires the FPIC of the Kankana-ey indigenous people. The FPIC process was suspended at a national level pending the finalization of new national mining legislation. The process recommenced in August 2012, following the release of new national guidelines, but this period of suspension delayed Gold Fields’ FTAA application. Nonetheless, management anticipates completion of the FTAA process during fiscal 2013. See “Description of the Company—Description of the Business—International Projects—Far Southeast Scoping Study”.

As part of the agreement, Gold Fields was required to pay U.S.$10.0 million in option fees to Lepanto and U.S.$44.0 million as a non-refundable down payment to Liberty upon signing of the option agreement, which payments were made during October 2010. During fiscal 2011, Gold Fields paid a further non-refundable down-payment of U.S.$66.0 million to Liberty, in accordance with the agreement. On March 22, 2012, Gold Fields exercised its option to acquire 40% of FSE after making a payment of U.S.$110.0 million. The final payment of U.S.$110.0 million is payable at the expiration of the option period. The total pre-agreed acquisition price for a 60% interest in FSE, inclusive of all of the above payments, is U.S.$340.0 million. See “Information on the Company—Developments since December 31, 2011”.

Purchase of noncontrolling interests

On March 22, 2011, Gold Fields announced a voluntary purchase offer in Lima, Peru, to acquire the outstanding common voting shares and investment shares of La Cima that it did not already own. Gold Fields

 

143


Table of Contents

offered 4.20 Peruvian Nuevos Soles in cash for each La Cima common or investment share. The offer closed on April 15, 2011. The transaction resulted in Gold Fields increasing its stake in La Cima from 80.7% to 98.5%, after purchasing 254.8 million shares, at a cost of $382.3 million. In fiscal 2012, Gold Fields purchased a further 0.1% in La Cima for U.S.$0.8 million.

On April 15, 2011, Gold Fields announced that a binding agreement had been entered into with IAMGold Corporation to acquire IAMGold’s 18.9% indirect minority stake (noncontrolling interest) in Tarkwa and Damang, for a cash consideration of U.S.$667.0 million. Upon completion of the acquisition, which was subject to obtaining shareholder approval, Gold Fields increased its interest in each of the Tarkwa and Damang gold mines from 71.1% to 90%, with the remaining 10% interest being held by the government of Ghana.

On October 14, 2011, Gold Fields purchased a 26% interest in Western Areas Prospecting from Peotona Gold (Proprietary) Limited, or Peotona Gold, for $6.3 million. The transaction was concluded in terms of an agreement signed between the parties during fiscal 2009. Gold Fields now owns 100% of Western Areas Prospecting which owns the Cardoville, the Kalbasfontein, the WA4 and the Wildebeestkuil prospecting rights.

Revenues

Substantially all of Gold Fields’ revenues are derived from the sale of gold and copper. As a result, Gold Fields’ revenues are directly related to the prices of gold and copper. Historically, the prices of gold and copper have fluctuated widely. For example, during April 2013, the gold price had fallen approximately 30% from its high in September 2011. The gold and copper prices are affected by numerous factors over which Gold Fields does not have control. See “Risk Factors—Changes in the market price for gold, and to a lesser extent copper, which in the past have fluctuated widely, affect the profitability of Gold Fields’ operations and the cash flows generated by those operations.” The volatility of gold and copper prices is illustrated in the following tables, which show the annual high, low and average of the London afternoon fixing price of gold and the London Metal Exchange cash settlement price for copper in U.S. dollars for the past 12 calendar years and to date in calendar year 2013:

 

       Price per ounce (1)  
Gold    High      Low      Average  
     ($/oz)  

2000

     313         264         282   

2001

     293         256         270   

2002

     349         278         310   

2003

     416         320         363   

2004

     454         375         409   

2005

     537         411         445   

2006

     725         525         604   

2007

     834         607         687   

2008

     1,011         713         872   

2009

     1,213         810         972   

2010

     1,421         1,058         1,224   

2011

     1,895         1,319         1,571   

2012

     1,792         1,540         1,669   

2013 (through May 9, 2013)

     1,694         1,380         1,585   

 

Source: I-Net

Note:

(1) Rounded to the nearest U.S. dollar.

 

144


Table of Contents

On May 9, 2013, the London afternoon fixing price of gold was U.S.$1,466 per ounce.

 

       Price per tonne (1)  
Copper    High      Low      Average  
     ($/t)  

2000

     2,009         1,607         1,814   

2001

     1,837         1,319         1,577   

2002

     1,690         1,421         1,558   

2003

     2,321         1,545         1,780   

2004

     3,287         2,337         2,867   

2005

     4,650         3,072         3,687   

2006

     8,788         4,537         6,728   

2007

     8,301         5,226         7,128   

2008

     8,985         2,770         6,952   

2009

     7,346         3,051         5,164   

2010

     9,740         6,091         7,539   

2011

     9,986         7,062         8,836   

2012

     8,658         7,252         7,951   

2013 (through May 9, 2013)

     8,243         6,811         7,714   

 

Source: I-Net

Note:

(1) Rounded to the nearest U.S. dollar.

On May 9, 2013, the LME cash settlement price for copper was U.S.$7,311 per tonne.

As a general rule, Gold Fields sells the gold it produces at market prices to obtain the maximum benefit from prevailing gold prices and does not enter into hedging arrangements such as forward sales or derivatives which establish a price in advance for the sale of its future gold production. Hedges can be undertaken in one or more of the following circumstances: to protect cash flows at times of significant capital expenditures; for specific debt servicing requirements; and to safeguard the viability of higher cost operations. At December 31, 2012, Gold Fields had no outstanding hedges. See “Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosure About Market Risk—Commodity Price Sensitivity”. Significant changes in the prices of gold and copper over a sustained period of time may lead Gold Fields to increase or decrease its production in the near-term, which could have a material impact on Gold Fields’ revenues.

Sales of copper concentrate are “provisionally priced”—that is the selling price is subject to final adjustment at the end of a period normally ranging from 30 to 90 days after delivery to the customer, based on market prices at the relevant quotation points stipulated in the contract.

Revenue on provisionally priced copper concentrate sales is recorded on the date of shipment, net of refining and treatment charges, using the forward London Metal Exchange price to the estimated final pricing date, adjusted for the specific terms of the agreements. Variations between the price used to recognize revenue and the actual final price received can be caused by changes in prevailing copper and gold prices and result in an embedded derivative. The host contract is the receivable from the sale of copper concentrate at the forward London Metal Exchange price at the time of sale. The embedded derivative, which does not qualify for hedge accounting, is marked-to-market each period until final settlement occurs, with changes in fair value classified as provisional price adjustments and included as a component of revenue while the contract itself is recorded in accounts receivable.

Gold Fields’ Realized Gold and Copper Prices

The following table sets out the average, the high and the low London afternoon fixing price per ounce of gold and Gold Fields’ average U.S. dollar realized gold price during the past three fiscal years and the six month periods ended December 31, 2010 and 2009. Gold Fields’ average realized gold price per equivalent ounce is

 

145


Table of Contents

calculated using the actual price per ounce of gold received on gold sold and the actual amount of revenue received on sales of copper, expressed in terms of the price per gold equivalent ounce. For a description of how gold equivalent ounces are determined, see “Defined Terms and Conventions.”

 

       Fiscal      Six months ended
December 31
     Fiscal  
Realized Gold Price (1)    2010      2011        2009          2010        2012  

Average

     1,089         1,567         1,028         1,295         1,669   

High

     1,261         1,875         1,213         1,421         1,792   

Low

     909         1,319         909         1,157         1,540   

Gold Fields’ average realized gold price (2)

     1,085         1,569         1,026         1,292         1,654   

 

Notes:

(1) Prices stated per ounce.
(2) Gold Fields’ average realized gold price may differ from the average gold price due to the timing of its sales of gold within each year.

The following table sets out the average, the high and the low London Metal Exchange cash settlement price per tonne for copper and Gold Fields’ average U.S. dollar realized copper price for fiscal 2010, 2011 and 2012 and the six month periods ended December 31, 2010 and 2009.

 

       Fiscal      Six months ended
December 31
     Fiscal  
Realized Copper Price (1)    2010      2011        2009          2010        2012  

Average

     6,675         8,836         6,238         7,933         7,951   

High

     7,951         9,986         7,346         9,740         8,658   

Low

     4,821         7,062         4,821         6,354         7,252   

Gold Fields’ average realized copper price (2)

     6,273         8,160         5,634         7,182         7,322   

 

Notes:

(1) Prices stated per tonne.
(2) Gold Fields’ average realized copper price may differ from the average copper price due to the timing of its sales of copper within each year and is net of treatment and refining charges.

Production

Gold Fields’ revenues are primarily driven by its production levels and the price it realizes on the sale of gold. Production levels are affected by a number of factors. Total production at the Gold Fields’ operations decreased from 3.7 million ounces in fiscal 2011 to 3.3 million ounces in fiscal 2012, having decreased from 3.8 million ounces in fiscal 2010 to 3.7 million ounces in fiscal 2011. The decrease in production between fiscal 2011 and fiscal 2012 was the result of a number of factors, primarily including the illegal strike action at KDC and Beatrix and the fire at the Ya Rona shaft at KDC.

Labor Impact

In recent years, Gold Fields has experienced greater union activity in some of the countries in which it operates, including the entry of rival unions, which has resulted in more frequent industrial disputes, including violent protests, intra-union violence and clashes with police authorities, and has impacted labor relations. In particular, in South Africa during the second half of fiscal 2012, a number of unions in the mining industry threatened to or went on strike for various reasons, including the renegotiation of wage agreements. These strikes impacted each of Gold Fields’ South African operations and caused work stoppages and significant production losses. The illegal strike action resulted in 30 days lost production at KDC East and 39 days lost production at KDC West. Gold Fields estimated that approximately 116,000 ounces of production at KDC was lost due to the illegal strike. The illegal strike action at Beatrix resulted in the loss of 23 production days at the North and South

 

146


Table of Contents

sections and the loss of 29 production days at the West section. Approximately 29,000 ounces of production at Beatrix was lost. Further, on April 3, 2013, employees at Gold Fields’ Ghanaian operations engaged in a work stoppage that led to a halt in production. On April 8, 2013, the strike ended and production resumed after management and the GMWU reached a settlement regarding the process for resolving certain issues raised by union petitions. See “Risk Factors—Gold Fields’ operations and profits have been and may be adversely affected by union activity and new and existing labor laws”.

Health and Safety Impact

Gold Fields’ operations are also subject to various health and safety laws and regulations that impose various duties on Gold Fields’ mines while granting the authorities broad powers to, among other things, close or suspend operations at unsafe mines and order corrective action relating to health and safety matters. Additionally, it is Gold Fields’ policy to halt production at its operations when serious accidents occur in order to rectify dangerous situations and, if necessary, retrain workers. During fiscal 2012, Gold Fields operations suffered 49 safety stoppages, some of which were self-imposed mine closures as a result of safety-related incidents. During fiscal 2011, Gold Fields operations suffered 75 safety stoppages, some of which were self-imposed mine closures as a result of safety-related incidents. In South Africa, Gold Fields has actively engaged with the DMR on the protocols applied to safety-related mine closures. Gold Fields conducted a tri-partite Health and Safety Summit in February 2012 along with government and labor organizations to promote health and safety in South Africa as part of a comprehensive effort to improve mine safety. See “Risk Factors—Gold Fields’ operations are subject to environmental and health and safety regulations, which could impose significant costs and burdens and Gold Fields may face claims and liability for breaches, or alleged breaches, of such regulations and other applicable laws”.

Gold Fields expects that each of these factors will continue to impact production levels in the future. These factors are likely to have a further impact on Gold Fields’ South Deep operation in fiscal 2013, as Gold Fields expects the next round of labor negotiations may be difficult and may be accompanied by further strikes, work stoppages or other labor actions; however, Gold Fields expects that the impact of these factors will be reduced after the divestiture of the Sibanye Gold assets.

Costs

Over the last three fiscal years (including the transition period), Gold Fields’ total cash costs consisted primarily of labor and contractor costs, power, water, consumable stores, which include explosives, timber, diesel fuel, other petroleum products and other consumables. Gold Fields expects that its total cash costs, particularly the input costs noted above, are likely to continue to increase in the near future driven by general economic trends, market dynamics and other regulatory changes.

In order to counter the effect of increasing costs in the mining industry, Gold Fields introduced broad-based cost saving initiatives which are collectively referred to as the BPR program. This program has been implemented across the Group and focuses on identifying and realizing major cost savings on an ongoing basis to ensure the long term sustainability of the operations. See “Information on the Company—Description of the Mining Business—Productivity and Cost Initiatives—The BPR Program”. One of Gold Fields’ strategic priorities relates to the proactive management of costs with a view to maintaining an NCE margin of between 20% and 25% at each mine.

In addition, in order to enable Gold Fields to increase its focus on providing shareholders with increased returns against the gold price, the Portfolio Review commenced in fiscal 2012. Its focus is on cash flow growth (not just ounce growth), and rigorous prioritization of capital expenditure and exploration spend based on expected risk-adjusted return on investment.

Gold Fields’ South African operations are labor intensive due to the use of deep level underground mining methods. As a result, over the last three fiscal years labor has represented on average approximately 44% of total cash costs at the South African operations.

 

147


Table of Contents

Negotiations with the South African mining unions in fiscal 2011 resulted in above-inflation wage increases of between 8.0% to 10.0%, depending upon the category of employee. Such negotiations historically have occurred every two years. However, the recent labor unrest has resulted in South African mining industry participants undergoing negotiations with workers and labor unions outside this period. These ad-hoc negotiations resulted in a settlement proposal made by a number of gold mining companies in South Africa, including Gold Fields. Through the Chamber of Mines, Gold Fields agreed with the trade unions to an earlier implementation of a number of provisions of the wage agreement reached in 2011 that were agreed to by all parties, culminating in an adjustment to wages in the relevant bargaining units of around 2.5%, or R150 million, per annum, relating to changes to job grades and entry-level wages. In addition, gold mining companies, trade unions and government have set up a working group for a wide-ranging review of working practices, productivity improvements and socio-economic conditions in the gold mining industry, which will feed into the next round of wage negotiations scheduled for 2013. Despite the fact that returning employees will receive the benefit of this settlement, Gold Fields’ employees may continue to take industrial action to protest and seek redress in connection with a variety of issues, including pay and working conditions.

At the South African operations, power and water made up on average approximately 14% of total cash costs over the last three fiscal years. In fiscal 2012, power costs made up 16% of the costs of production at the South African operations. Eskom applied to NERSA for a 35% average tariff increase on each of April 1, 2010, 2011 and 2012, and NERSA granted average increases of 24.8%, 25.8% and 25.9%, respectively. However, on March 9, 2012, NERSA announced a reduction in the electricity tariff increase from 25.9% to 16%, from April 1, 2012, through to March 2013. Eskom has announced its intention to institute an average annual tariff increase of 8.0% and 9.6% for industrial users, the latter of which will apply to Gold Fields, for the five-year period starting April 1, 2013. Gold Fields expects the above decreases to partially offset increases in labor and other costs.

Both Gold Fields Ghana and Abosso have concluded tariff negotiations for 2012 and 2013 with their respective power suppliers (the state electricity supplier, the VRA, supplies power to Gold Fields Ghana and the ECG, provides power to Abosso and the South Heap Leach facility at Gold Fields Ghana), representing a 19% increase from VRA and 15% increase from ECG, respectively, from fiscal 2011 to fiscal 2013. The 2013 tariffs will remain unchanged from the 2012 tariffs. The VRA has provided a revised “Power Sales and Purchase Agreement between VRA and Gold Fields Ghana” which is expected to be concluded by June 2013. Gold Fields Ghana has concluded a Transmission Service Agreement with GridCo.

At the Ghana operations, Damang completed the transition to owner mining in March 2011. In fiscal 2005, Tarkwa began engaging in owner mining and therefore significantly reduced its use of outside contractors. Both Tarkwa and Damang completed the transition to owner maintenance of the trucking fleet during fiscal 2011. Contractor costs represented on average 12% of total cash costs at Tarkwa over the last three fiscal years, and 11% of total cash costs during fiscal 2012. Over the last three fiscal years contractor costs represented on average 21% of total cash costs at Damang with 11% in fiscal 2012. Direct labor costs represent on average a further 10% of total cash costs at Tarkwa over the last three fiscal years and 11% in fiscal 2012. Over the last three fiscal years direct labor costs represented on average 9% at Damang and 9% in fiscal 2012.

At Cerro Corona, contractor cost represented on average 37% of total cash costs over the last three fiscal years and 40% of total cash costs during fiscal 2012. Direct labor costs represent on average a further 25% of total cash costs over the last three fiscal years and 27% in fiscal 2012.

At the Australian operations, mining operations were conducted by outside contractors. However at Agnew, owner mining at the underground operations commenced in May 2010, while development is still conducted by outside contractors. At St. Ives, owner mining commenced in July 2011 at the underground operations and in July 2012 at the surface operations, but development is still conducted by contractors. Over the last three fiscal years, total contractor costs represented on average 36% at St. Ives and 39% at Agnew of total cash costs and direct labor costs represented on average a further 17% at St. Ives and 20% at Agnew of total cash costs. In fiscal 2012, contractors and direct labor cost represented 37% and 16% at St. Ives and 30% and 22% at Agnew, respectively.

 

148


Table of Contents

Gold Fields’ operations in Ghana consume large quantities of diesel fuel for the running of their mining fleet. The cost of diesel fuel is directly related to the oil price and any movement in the oil price will have an impact on the cost of diesel fuel and therefore the cost of running the mining fleet. Over the last three fiscal years, fuel costs have represented approximately 13% of total cash costs at the Ghana operations. Fuel use is proportionately higher at the Ghana operations than at other operations because open pit mining in general requires more fuel usage than underground mining and because of the configuration of the Ghana operations, including the scale of certain of the pits and the distances between the pits and the plants. In order to provide some protection against future increases in oil prices, and therefore in diesel fuel prices, Gold Fields has in recent years entered into various call options for diesel fuel for the benefit of its Ghana operations. There were no call options entered into during fiscal 2012 or fiscal 2011 and call options entered into during fiscal 2009 expired on February 28, 2010. See “Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk—Commodity Price Sensitivity,” “Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk—Commodity Price Hedging Policy—Oil,” “Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk—Commodity Price Hedging Experience—Oil” and “Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk—Commodity Price Contract Position.”

During fiscal 2010, price participation royalties of A$3.4 million (U.S.$3.0 million) were paid to certain subsidiaries of Morgan Stanley Bank in respect of St. Ives. No such royalties were paid in fiscal 2011 due to the buy-out of the royalty in fiscal 2010.

Total gold produced from St. Ives since November 30, 2001 exceeded 3.3 million ounces prior to July 1, 2009, creating the liability to pay the 4% net smelter volume royalty which amounted to A$2.8 million (U.S.$2.5 million) for fiscal 2010. See “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—Australia Operations.” On August 26, 2009, Gold Fields terminated the royalty for a consideration of A$308 million (U.S.$257.1 million). The remainder of Gold Fields’ total costs consist primarily of amortization and depreciation, exploration costs and selling, administration and general and corporate charges.

Notional Cash Expenditure

Gold Fields defines NCE as operating costs plus additions to property, plant and equipment, and defines operating costs as production costs (exclusive of depreciation and amortization) plus corporate expenditure, employment termination costs and accretion expense on provision for environmental rehabilitation but excluding share-based compensation costs and GIP movement. Gold Fields reports NCE on a per equivalent ounce basis. Management considers NCE per equivalent ounce to be an important measure as it believes NCE per ounce provides more information than other commonly used measures, such as total cash costs per equivalent ounce, regarding the real cost to Gold Fields of producing an equivalent ounce of gold, reflecting not only the ongoing costs of production but also the investment cost of bringing mines into production. Management also believes that revenue less NCE is a useful indication of the cash Gold Fields has available for paying taxes, repaying debt, funding exploration and paying dividends and the like.

NCE is a non-U.S. GAAP measure. An investor should not consider NCE or operating costs in isolation or as alternatives to production costs, cash flows from operating activities or any other measure of financial performance presented in accordance with U.S. GAAP. NCE and operating costs as presented in this annual report may not be comparable to other similarly titled measures of performance of other companies.

 

149


Table of Contents

The following tables set out a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ production costs, as calculated in accordance with U.S. GAAP, to its NCE and NCE per equivalent ounce of gold produced for fiscal 2012, 2011, 2010 and the six-month periods ended December 31, 2010 and 2009.

 

                      For the year ended December 31, 2012                    
    KDC     Beatrix     South
Deep
    Tarkwa     Damang     St.
Ives
    Agnew     Cerro
Corona
    Corporate     Group (3)  
    (in $ million except as otherwise stated) (1)  

Production Costs

    1,005.3        322.5        328.1        587.5        215.5        426.3        152.2        158.0        (4.9     3,190.4   

Less Share-based payments

    (14.1     (5.2     (4.4     (5.5     (1.9     (3.5     (1.6     (5.2     —          (41.4

Add:

                   

Corporate expenditure (4)

    6.3        2.1        2.0        4.7        2.1        3.0        1.8        4.9        4.9        31.8   

Employment termination costs

    6.0        1.7        0.2        1.6        —          1.7        1.8        0.6        —          13.8   

GIP movement

    —          —          —          21.2        3.7        (13.8     (0.2     11.0        —          21.8   

Accretion expense on provision for environmental rehabilitation

    11.4        2.8        0.8        2.8        0.6        6.7        1.3        1.9        —          28.2   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating costs (3)

    1,014.9        324.0        326.7        612.1        220.0        420.5        155.3        171.1        —          3,244.6   

Additions to property, plant and equipment

    296.2        80.4        314.5        142.3        51.0        278.4        57.5        93.8        8.6        1,322.8   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Notional cash expenditure (3)

    1,311.1        404.4        641.2        754.4        271.0        698.9        212.8        264.9        8.6        4,567.4   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gold produced (‘000oz)

    934.9        288.7        270.4        718.8        166.4        449.8        176.6        342.1 (2 )       —          3,347.8   

Notional cash expenditure per ounce of gold produced ($)

    1,402        1,400        2,371        1,050        1,628        1,554        1,205        774        —          1,364   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

Notes:

(1) Calculated using an average exchange rate of R8.19 per $1.00.
(2) Including gold equivalent ounces.
(3) This total may not reflect the sum of the line items due to rounding.
(4) Corporate expenditure expense excludes share-based compensation as it is non-cash.

 

150


Table of Contents
                      For the year ended December 31, 2011                    
    KDC     Beatrix     South
Deep
    Tarkwa     Damang     St. Ives     Agnew     Cerro
Corona
    Corporate     Group (3)  
    (in $ million except as otherwise stated) (1)  

Production Costs

    1,028.7        335.1        299.0        450.3        173.9        401.2        145.7        158.8        (3.7     2,989.0   

Less Share-based payments

    (16.9     (5.8     (5.1     (4.3     (1.8     (2.5     (0.8     (3.2     —          (40.4

Add:

                   

Corporate expenditure (4)

    5.3        1.6        1.4        4.0        1.2        2.9        1.2        5.0        3.2        25.9   

Employment termination costs

    27.0        4.9        0.1        —          —          —          —          —          0.8        32.8   

GIP movement

    —          —          —          78.6        (1.1     (2.9     2.7        (0.1     —          77.2   

Accretion expense on provision for environmental rehabilitation

    10.8        2.9        1.0        1.8        0.3        4.2        2.3        1.7        —          24.9   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating costs (3)

    1,054.8        338.7        296.4        530.4        172.6        403.0        151.1        162.1        0.3        3,109.4   

Additions to property, plant and equipment

    318.6        84.6        274.6        124.8        57.4        150.8        63.3        69.4        9.5        1,153.0   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Notional cash expenditure (3)

    1,373.4        423.4        571.0        655.2        230.0        553.7        214.3        231.5        9.8        4,262.4   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gold produced (‘000oz)

    1.100.1        346.8        273.0        717.3        217.7        464.5        194.0        383.1 (2)       —          3,696.7   

Notional cash expenditure per ounce of gold produced ($)

    1,248        1,221        2,092        913        1,056        1,192        1,105        604        —          1,153   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

Notes:

(1) Calculated using an average exchange rate of R7.22 per $1.00.
(2) Including gold equivalent ounces.
(3) This total may not reflect the sum of the line items due to rounding.
(4) Corporate expenditure expense excludes share-based compensation as it is non-cash.

 

151


Table of Contents
    For the year ended June 30, 2010  
    Driefontein     Kloof     Beatrix     South
Deep
    Tarkwa     Damang     St. Ives     Agnew     Cerro
Corona
    Corporate     Group (3)  
    (in $ million except as otherwise stated) (1)  

Production Costs

    494.6        442.0        293.9        219.7        456.1        124.4        321.7        93.1        128.1        —          2,573.6   

Less Share-based payments

    (7.1     (6.4     (4.1     (3.2     (3.2     (1.5     (1.3     (0.7     (2.1     —          (29.6

Add:

                     

Corporate expenditure (4)

    10.3        9.4        5.5        3.8        5.7        1.5        3.6        1.6        6.1        —          47.5   

Employment termination costs

    2.6        3.4        2.7        0.7        —          —          —          0.3        —          0.6        10.3   

GIP movement

    —          —          —          —          10.9        (1.3     18.8        (0.3     1.3        —          29.4   

Accretion expense on provision for environmental rehabilitation

    4.8        3.2        2.5        0.7        1.5        0.3        3.3        1.6        1.5        —          19.3   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating costs (3)

    505.1        451.4        300.4        221.5        470.8        123.3        346.1        95.6        134.9        0.6        2,649.9   

Additions to property, plant and equipment

    150.3        145.7        85.8        212.8        64.6        29.8        84.9        48.8        85.6        4.6        913.1   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Notional cash expenditure (3)

    655.4        597.1        386.2        434.3        535.4        153.1        431.0        144.5        220.5        5.2        3,562.8   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gold produced (‘000oz)

    709.8        566.5        391.9        264.8        720.7        207.4        421.1        165.2        393.6 (2)       —          3,841.0   

Notional cash expenditure per ounce of gold produced ($)

    923        1,053        985        1,640        743        738        1,023        874        560        —          928   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

Notes:

(1) Calculated using an average exchange rate of R7.58 per $1.00.
(2) Including gold equivalent ounces.
(3) This total may not reflect the sum of the line items due to rounding.
(4) Corporate expenditure expense excludes share-based compensation as it is non-cash.

 

152


Table of Contents
    For the six-month period ended December 31, 2010  
    KDC     Beatrix     South
Deep
    Tarkwa     Damang     St. Ives     Agnew     Cerro
Corona
    Corporate     Group (3)  
    (in $ million except as otherwise stated) (1)  

Production Costs

    523.3        170.5        138.8        258.6        73.1        162.1        49.9        74.1        —          1,450.3   

Less Share-based payments

    (6.5     (2.1     (1.8     (1.0     (0.8     (0.5     (0.4     (1.5     —          (14.6

Add:

                   

Corporate expenditure (4)

    8.1        2.3        1.7        1.9        0.8        1.7        1.4        3.0        —          20.7   

Employment termination and restructuring costs

    22.0        7.1        0.4        0.2        —          0.2        0.3        —          5.2        35.3   

GIP movement

    —          —          —          (1.8     0.5        5.0        0.4        1.6        —          5.6   

Accretion expense on provision for environmental rehabilitation

    4.3        1.4        0.4        0.9        0.2        2.0        1.0        0.8        —          10.9   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating costs (3)

    551.2        179.2        139.4        258.8        73.7        170.4        52.5        78.0        5.2        1,508.2   

Additions to property, plant and equipment

    177.3        42.7        140.5        64.0        56.3        52.8        24.0        31.4        4.7        593.6   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Notional cash expenditure (3)

    728.5        221.9        279.9        322.8        129.9        223.2        76.5        109.4        9.8        2,101.8   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gold produced (‘000oz)

    634.0        202.0        146.2        362.0        116.9        243.0        79.6        199.5 (2)       —          1,983.3   

Notional cash expenditure per ounce of gold produced ($)

    1,149        1,098        1,914        892        1,111        918        961        548        —          1,060   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

Notes:

(1) Calculated using an average exchange rate of R7.14 per $1.00.
(2) Including gold equivalent ounces.
(3) This total may not reflect the sum of the line items due to rounding.
(4) Corporate expenditure expense excludes share-based compensation as it is non-cash.

 

153


Table of Contents
    For the six-month period ended December 31, 2009  
    KDC     Beatrix     South
Deep
    Tarkwa     Damang     St. Ives     Agnew     Cerro
Corona
    Corporate     Group (3)  
    (in $ million except as otherwise stated) (1)  

Production Costs

    461.6        150.3        103.8        201.5        55.5        151.0        47.1        65.0        —          1,235.5   

Less Share-based payments

    (7.7     (2.3     (1.7     (2.1     (0.9     (1.0     (0.4     (1.1     —          (17.1

Add:

                   

Corporate expenditure (4)

    9.5        2.7        1.9        3.1        0.8        1.9        0.7        3.1        —          23.5   

Employment termination and restructuring costs

    2.6        1.3        —          —          —          —          —          —          0.3        4.3   

GIP movement

    —          —          —          10.2        (0.7     3.9        0.9        (1.0     —          13.3   

Accretion expense on provision for environmental rehabilitation

    3.9        1.2        0.3        0.7        0.1        1.7        1.2        0.7        —          9.9   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating costs (3)

    469.8        153.2        104.3        213.3        54.8        157.5        49.4        66.7        0.3        1,269.4   

Additions to property, plant and equipment

    139.9        40.0        105.9        33.4        9.9        41.5        19.1        46.9        2.5        439.0   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Notional cash expenditure (3)

    609.7        193.2        210.2        246.7        64.6        199.0        68.5        113.6        2.8        1,708.4   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gold produced (‘000oz)

    695.4        217.2        136.9        347.9        96.7        196.3        92.8        186.9 (2)       —          1,970.1   

Notional cash expenditure per ounce of gold produced ($)

    877        890        1,535        709        668        1,014        738        608        —          867   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

Notes:

(1) Calculated using an average exchange rate of R7.65 per $1.00.
(2) Including gold equivalent ounces.
(3) This total may not reflect the sum of the line items due to rounding.
(4) Corporate expenditure expense excludes share-based compensation as it is non-cash.

NCE increased from U.S.$1,153 per ounce in fiscal 2011 to U.S.$1,364 per ounce in fiscal 2012, primarily because of inflation, significant increases in additions to property, plant and equipment mainly due to the project build-up at South Deep and expenditure on underground development and owner mining conversion at St. Ives and lower production. In addition, costs increased due to the 13% weakening of the South African Rand against the U.S. dollar, annual wage increases, increases in electricity tariffs in South Africa and Ghana, fuel price increases in Ghana and Australia.

Royalties

South Africa

The Royalty Act was promulgated on November 24, 2008 and came into operation on March 1, 2010. The Royalty Act imposes a royalty on refined and unrefined minerals payable to the South African government.

The royalty in respect of refined minerals (which include gold and platinum) is calculated by dividing EBIT by the product of 12.5 times gross revenue calculated as a percentage, plus an additional 0.5%. EBIT refers to taxable mining income (with certain exceptions such as no deduction for interest payable and foreign exchange losses) before assessed losses but after capital expenditure. A maximum royalty of 5% is levied on refined minerals.

The royalty in respect of unrefined minerals (which include uranium) is calculated by dividing EBIT by the product of nine times gross revenue calculated as a percentage, plus an additional 0.5%. A maximum royalty of 7% is levied on unrefined minerals.

 

154


Table of Contents

Where unrefined mineral resources (such as uranium) constitute less than 10% in value of the total composite mineral resources, the royalty rate in respect of refined mineral resources may be used for all gross sales and a separate calculation of EBIT for each class of mineral resources is not required. For Gold Fields, this means that currently it will pay a royalty based on the refined minerals royalty calculation as applied to its gross revenue. The rate of royalty tax payable for fiscal 2012 and fiscal 2011 was approximately 1.5% of revenue.

Ghana

Because minerals are owned by the Republic of Ghana and held in trust by the President, the Tarkwa and Damang operations are subject to a gold royalty which was set at 5% of total revenue earned from minerals obtained, effective from March 19, 2010. Although the royalty rate of 5% became effective on March 19, 2010, Gold Fields only became subject to the higher rate after April 1, 2011. Prior to April 1, 2011, although the royalty rate was calculated on a sliding scale with rates ranging from 3% to a maximum of 6% based on profitability of the mining operations, the gold mining sector paid at a rate of 3%.

Australia

Royalties are payable to the state based on the amount of gold produced from a mining tenement. Royalties are payable quarterly at a fixed rate of 2.5% of the royalty value of gold sold. The royalty value of gold is the amount of gold produced during the month multiplied by the average gold spot price for the month.

Peru

On October 1, 2011, the Peruvian Congress approved a new mining royalty law which established a mining royalty that owners of mining concessions must pay to the Peruvian government for the exploitation of metallic and non-metallic resources. The royalties are calculated with reference to the operating margin and ranging from 1% (for operating margins less than 10%) to 12% (for operating margins of more than 80%). Under the new regime, La Cima’s effective royalty rate for fiscal 2012 was 2.6% of revenue.

Under the previous mining royalty law, the previous royalty rates were calculated on gross revenues with a sliding scale from 1% to 3%.

Income and Mining Taxes

South Africa

Gold Fields pays taxes on its taxable income generated by its mining and non-mining tax entities. Under South African law, gold mining companies and non-gold mining companies are taxed at different rates. Companies in the Group not carrying on the direct gold mining operations are taxed at a statutory rate of 28%.

During the periods discussed below, Sibanye Gold (then known as GFIMSA) owned both the KDC and Beatrix mines. Gold Fields Operations Limited or GFO, and GFI Joint Venture Holdings (Proprietary) Limited (the legal partners of the South Deep Joint Venture), jointly own the South Deep Mine. Accordingly, these companies (Sibanye Gold, Gold Fields Operations Limited and GFI Joint Venture Holdings (Proprietary) Limited) constituted gold mining companies for South African taxation purposes. These companies were subject to the gold formula on their mining income.

 

The applicable formula takes the form Y

  =   a –  ab
          x

 

155


Table of Contents

Where:

 

y   =    the tax rate to be determined
a   =    the marginal tax rate of 34%
b   =    the portion of tax-free revenue (currently the first 5%)
x   =    the ratio of taxable income to the total income (expressed as a percentage).

In addition, until December 31, 2011, these gold mining companies paid tax on their non-mining income at a rate of either 28% or 35% (depending on the STC election—see below).

Up until December 31, 2011 a gold mining company could elect to pay a higher formula rate of tax (in the form of a 43% marginal tax rate, in the formula above) in exchange for being exempt from Secondary Tax on Companies, or STC (the workings of STC is described in more detail below). All of Gold Fields’ gold mining companies made this election, and as a result these companies paid tax on their gold mining income according to the 43% variation of the gold formula above in respect of mining income, and 35% in respect of non-mining income.

During the budget speech in February 2012, the Minister of Finance announced that STC will be abolished resulting in the abolishment of the STC inclusive gold mining formula. The result is that there is now only one gold mining formula effective January 1, 2012.

Gold Fields’ gold mining companies are taxed at a rate of 28% on any non-mining income with effect from January 1, 2012, in line with the reduction in the marginal rate applicable to mining income. The repeal of STC with effect from April 1, 2012 onwards and the introduction of the dividend withholding tax therefore results in a net lower effective tax rate paid by Gold Fields’ gold mining operations.

While Sibanye Gold owns both the KDC and Beatrix gold mines, unredeemed capital expenditure is still ring fenced between the historical gold mines (being KDC West (Driefontein), KDC East (Kloof) and Beatrix), so that capital expenditure at one of these mines cannot be used to reduce taxable income from another mine.

Up until December 31, 2011, South Africa imposed a STC, which was charged at a rate of 10%. STC was a tax on dividends declared by companies or closed corporations tax resident in South Africa.

STC differed from a dividend withholding tax in that it was a tax imposed on companies or closed corporations, and not on its shareholders. STC was payable on the amount of dividends declared by the company, less the sum of qualifying dividends received or accrued to the company during a particular time period (referred to as a dividend cycle).

In terms of the STC provisions, certain dividends received by South African resident companies carried STC “credits”, and to the extent that South African resident companies in turn declared these same dividends no additional STC was due.

While STC has now been abolished and replaced with a withholding tax on dividends at 15% with effect from April 1, 2012, there will be a three year transition period ending on March 31, 2015 during which dividends carrying STC “credits” may still be distributed by South African resident companies free of tax. No withholding tax on dividends will be levied on the distribution of such dividends carrying STC “credits” during this three year window period.

Gold Fields Limited and its subsidiaries have utilized all such STC credits at December 31, 2012.

 

156


Table of Contents

Ghana

Ghanaian resident entities are subject to tax on the basis of income derived from, accruing in, received in, or brought into Ghana. The standard corporate income tax rate is currently 35%.

On July 21, 2009, the Ghanaian government promulgated the National Fiscal Stabilization Levy Act, which introduces a levy of 5% on profits before tax of companies in selected industries, including mining. The Ghanaian government has in its 2012 annual budget statement announced that the National Fiscal Stabilization Levy does not apply for the 2012 calendar year onwards. The National Fiscal Stabilization Levy therefore was only applicable to the 2009, 2010 and 2011 calendar years, commencing for Gold Fields during the quarter ended September 30, 2009. The levy was introduced as a temporary measure to raise additional revenue and meet critical government expenditure, and was not intended to be a permanent feature of the Ghanaian fiscal regime.

Tax depreciation of capital equipment operates under a capital allowance regime. From March 9, 2012, the capital allowance regime was amended to allow qualifying mining equipment to be eligible for capital allowances at a rate of 20% per annum (straight line). Previously, the capital allowances for mine development consisted of an initial allowance of 80% of the cost of assets added in that calendar year, the balance of the brought forward balance was depreciated at the rate of 50% per year on a declining balance basis as well as a 5% investment allowance based on prior year additions. Under the project development agreement, (entered into between the Ghanaian government and Gold Fields Ghana) and the deed of warranty, (entered into between the Ghanaian government and Abosso), the government has agreed that no withholding tax shall be payable on any dividend or capital repayment declared by Gold Fields Ghana or Abosso which is due and payable to any shareholder not normally resident in Ghana.

The following changes are now in force, effective March 9, 2012:

 

   

Increased tax rate for mining companies from 25% to 35%.

 

   

Capital allowances on mining assets would now be granted at the rate of 20% per annum on the cost base of the assets, versus the previous 80% of the cost base of assets in the first year, 50% of the balance (the remaining 20%) of the tax written down value annually thereafter. Previously an “upliftment allowance” calculated as being 5% of the cost price of the asset was also granted claimable in the year following the acquisition. This “upliftment allowance” has expired and has been abolished.

 

   

Expenses exclusively incurred on one contracting area or site would no longer be offset against profits from another contracting area or site belonging to the same company in determining the chargeable income for income tax purposes (The mechanics of this change still need to be defined by the Ghanaian tax authorities).

 

   

Enactment of Transfer Pricing Regulations, effective September 14, 2012.

In addition, the following further amendment has been proposed:

 

   

A windfall profit tax of 10% on mining companies. The 10% is expected to be calculated based on an adjusted cash balance method. In the 2013 budget speech made by the Minister of Finance in Ghana, the windfall profit tax issue was referred to the mining review committee. The mining review committee needs to make a recommendation to Parliament on whether the windfall profit tax discussion should continue or be revoked from the roll.

Australia

Generally, Australia imposes tax on the worldwide income (including capital gains) of all of Gold Fields’ Australian incorporated and tax resident entities. The current income tax rate for companies is 30%. Exploration costs are deductible in full as incurred and other capital expenditure is deductible over the lives of the assets acquired. The Australian Uniform Capital Allowance allows tax deductions for depreciation attributable to assets and certain other capital expenditures.

 

157


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Australia and its wholly-owned Australian controlled entities have elected to be treated as a tax consolidated group for taxation purposes. As a tax consolidated group, a single tax return is lodged for the group based on the consolidated results of all companies within the group.

Withholding tax is payable on dividends, interest and royalties paid by Australian residents to non-residents. In the case of dividend payments to non-residents, withholding tax at a rate of 30% will apply. However, where the recipient of the dividend is a resident of a country with which Australia has concluded a double taxation agreement, the rate of withholding tax is generally limited to 15% (or 10% where the dividend is paid to a company’s parent company). Where dividends are paid out of profits that have been subject to Australian corporate tax there is no withholding tax, regardless of whether a double taxation agreement is in place.

Peru

Peru taxes resident individuals and domiciled corporations on their worldwide income. The corporate income tax rate applicable to domiciled corporations is 30% on taxable income. Capital gains are also taxed as ordinary income for domiciled corporations.

Tax losses may be carried forward by a domiciled corporation using one of the following methods:

 

   

losses may be carried forward and used in full in the subsequent four tax years. The balance of tax losses carried forward and not used during these four tax years is forfeited; or

 

   

losses can be carried forward, and up to 50% of the tax loss may be set off against taxable income in a subsequent tax year. The balance of the assessed losses may be carried forward and applied on this basis until the balance is fully used up, with no time limit on the carry forward.

On October 4, 2007, La Cima and its parent company, Gold Fields Corona (BVI) Limited, or Gold Fields Corona, signed Investment Stability Agreements on withholding taxes and income tax rates, or Investor Stability Agreement, with the relevant governmental authorities in Peru. These agreements, among other things, guarantee the current tax regime, including a 4.1% withholding tax rate on dividends and 30% income tax rate, for a period of 10 years.

Following the review of the previous royalty regime, the mining sector signed a letter of understanding with the government of Peru on August 24, 2011 stating that:

 

   

in calculating future royalty payments, the rate would be calculated based on profitability; and

 

   

increased collections will come from existing and new operations resulting from the implementation of the new royalty regime.

The new fiscal regime distinguishes between a company with formal stability agreements and those without such agreements. The Investor Stability Agreements signed by Gold Fields Corona and La Cima do not constitute a stability agreement for purposes of the new fiscal scheme.

Companies without signed stability agreements or with Investor Stability Agreements, such as La Cima, will pay a new royalty (which effectively replaces the existing royalty regime) calculated with reference to the operating margin and ranging from 1% (for operating margins of less than 10%) to 12% (for operating margins of more than 80%). Such companies would also be subject to a ‘Special tax on mining”, or IEM, ranging from 2% (for operating margins of less than 10%) to 8.4% (for operating margins of more than 85%).

Companies with signed stability agreements, or Comprehensive Stability Agreements, would be subject to a Special Levy on Mining, or GEM, ranging from 4% (for operating margins of less than 10%) to 13.12% (for operating margins of more than 85%). These companies would also be expected to sign voluntary agreements with the Government. A further distinction is made between stabilized companies who are exempt from mining royalties and those who are not. Stabilized companies would only be subject to GEM and not IEM. Stabilized

 

158


Table of Contents

companies who currently are exempt from royalty payments would only pay the new GEM tax and not the new royalty, where stabilized companies who are not exempt from paying royalties will pay the new royalty and the GEM tax but be entitled to deduct the royalty payments against the GEM payment so due.

The new royalty, IEM and GEM would be treated as tax deductible and the new royalty would no longer be treated as sales cost as was the case with the previous royalty.

Exchange Rates

Gold Fields’ South African revenues and costs are very sensitive to the Rand/U.S. dollar exchange rate because revenues are generated using a gold price denominated in U.S. dollars, while the costs of the South African operations are incurred principally in Rand. Depreciation of the Rand against the U.S. dollar reduces Gold Fields’ average costs when they are translated into U.S. dollars, thereby increasing the operating margin of the South African operations. Conversely, appreciation of the Rand results in South African operating costs being translated into U.S. dollars at a lower Rand/U.S. dollar exchange rate, resulting in lower operating margins. The impact on profitability of any change in the value of the Rand against the U.S. dollar can be substantial. Furthermore, the exchange rates obtained when converting U.S. dollars to Rand are set by foreign exchange markets, over which Gold Fields has no control. For more information regarding fluctuations in the value of the Rand against the U.S. dollar, see “Key Information—Exchange Rates.” In fiscal 2012, movements in the U.S. dollar/Rand exchange rate had a significant impact on Gold Fields’ results of operations as the Rand weakened 13.4% against the U.S. dollar, from an average of R7.22 per $1.00 in fiscal 2011 to R8.19 per $1.00 in fiscal 2012.

With respect to the Australian operations, the effect of fluctuations in the value of the Australian dollar against the U.S. dollar will be similar to that for the Rand, with weakness in the Australian dollar resulting in improved earnings for Gold Fields and strength in the Australian dollar producing the opposite result.

With respect to its operations in Ghana and Peru, a substantial portion of Gold Fields’ operating costs (including wages) are either directly incurred in U.S. dollars or are translated to U.S. dollars. Accordingly, fluctuations in the Ghanaian Cedi and Peruvian Nuevos Soles do not materially impact operating results for the Ghana and Peru operations.

During fiscal 2012, Gold Fields had the following currency forward contract:

 

   

South African rand/Australian dollar forward cover contract with an initial value of A$3 million of which A$3.0 million was delivered into during fiscal 2012.

See “Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk—Foreign Currency Sensitivity—Foreign Currency Hedging Experience”.

Inflation

A period of significant inflation could adversely affect Gold Fields’ results and financial condition. For example, in fiscal 2012, inflation in South Africa decreased to 5.7% from 6.1% in fiscal 2011. Further, over the past several years, production costs, especially wages and electricity costs, have increased considerably. The effect of these increases has adversely affected, and may continue to adversely affect, the profitability of Gold Field’s South Deep operations.

In order to combat increasing production costs, in fiscal 2011, Gold Fields restructured several of its business processes as part of the BPR program to optimize productivity and eliminate inefficiencies. One component of this project was a reduction in headcount at Gold Fields’ South African operations. In addition, Gold Fields carried out a reduction of non-specialized contractors at these operations. Significant electricity consumption savings were also realized during the period. BPR mitigated mining inflation increases, limiting operating cost increases to an effective 3% for fiscal 2011.

 

159


Table of Contents

Further the majority of Gold Fields’ costs at the South African operations are in Rand and revenues from gold sales are in U.S. dollars. Generally, when inflation is high, the Rand potentially devalues thereby increasing Rand revenues and potentially offsetting the increase in costs. However, there can be no guarantee that any cost-saving measures or the effects of any potential devaluation will offset the effects of increased inflation and production costs.

The same applies to the Australian operations with regard to the link between Australian dollars and U.S. dollars. The Peruvian and Ghanaian operations, on the other hand, are affected by inflation without a potential similar effect on revenue proceeds thereby increasing the impact of inflation on the operating margins.

Capital Expenditures

Gold Fields will continue to be required to make capital investments in both new and existing infrastructure and opportunities and, therefore, management will be required to continue to balance the demands for capital expenditure in the business and allocate Gold Fields’ resources in a focused manner to achieve its sustainable growth objectives. Gold Fields expects that its use of available capital resources and allocation of its capital expenditures may shift in future periods as it increases investment in certain of its exploration projects.

Set out below are the capital expenditures made by Gold Fields during fiscal 2012.

South African Operations

 

   

Gold Fields spent approximately U.S.$296 million on capital expenditures at the KDC operation in fiscal 2012. This operation was disposed of in the Spin-off.

 

   

Gold Fields spent approximately U.S.$80 million on capital expenditures at the Beatrix operation in fiscal 2012. This operation was disposed of in the Spin-off.

 

   

Gold Fields spent approximately U.S.$315 million on capital expenditures at the South Deep operation in fiscal 2012 and expects to spend approximately U.S.$227 million on capital expenditures at South Deep in fiscal 2013.

Ghanaian Operations

 

   

Gold Fields spent approximately U.S.$142 million on capital expenditures at the Tarkwa operation in fiscal 2012 (excluding U.S.$118 million spent on capital waste mining, which is expensed) and has budgeted U.S.$134 million for capital expenditures at Tarkwa for fiscal 2013 (excluding U.S.$130 million budgeted on capital waste mining, which is expensed).

 

   

Gold Fields spent approximately U.S.$51 million on capital expenditures at the Damang mine in fiscal 2012 (excluding U.S.$63 million spent on capital waste mining, which is expensed) and has budgeted U.S.$56 million of capital expenditures at Damang for fiscal 2013 (excluding U.S.$21 million budgeted on capital waste mining, which is expensed).

Australian Operations

 

   

Gold Fields spent approximately U.S.$278 million on capital expenditures at St. Ives in fiscal 2012 (excluding U.S.$34 million spent on exploration, which is expensed) and has budgeted U.S.$137 million for capital expenditures at St. Ives in fiscal 2013 (excluding U.S.$20 million budgeted on exploration which is expensed).

 

   

Gold Fields spent approximately U.S.$58 million on capital expenditures at Agnew in fiscal 2012 (excluding U.S.$5 million spent on exploration, which is expensed) and has budgeted U.S.$39 million for capital expenditures at Agnew for fiscal 2013 (with nil budgeted for exploration).

 

160


Table of Contents

Peruvian Operations

 

   

Gold Fields spent approximately U.S.$94 million on capital expenditures at Cerro Corona in fiscal 2012 and has budgeted U.S.$84 million for capital expenditures at Cerro Corona for fiscal 2013.

The actual expenditures for the future periods noted above may be different from the amounts set out above and the amount of actual capital expenditure will depend on a number of factors, such as production volumes, the price of gold, copper and other minerals mined by Gold Fields and general economic conditions. Some of the factors are outside of the control of Gold Fields. Please see “Risk Factors” and “Information on the Company” for further information.

Critical Accounting Policies and Estimates

Gold Fields’ significant accounting policies are more fully described in note 2 to its audited consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this annual report. Some of Gold Fields’ accounting policies require the application of significant judgments and estimates by management that can affect the amounts reported in the financial statements. By their nature, these judgments are subject to a degree of uncertainty and are based on Gold Fields’ historical experience, terms of existing contracts, management’s view on trends in the gold mining industry, information from outside sources and other assumptions that Gold Fields considers to be reasonable under the circumstances. Actual results could differ from these estimates under different assumptions or conditions.

Gold Fields’ significant accounting policies that are subject to significant judgments, estimates and assumptions are summarized below.

Business combinations

Management accounts for its business acquisitions under the purchase method of accounting. The total value of the consideration paid for acquisitions is allocated to the underlying net assets acquired, based on their respective estimated fair values determined by using internal or external valuations. Management uses a number of valuation methods to determine the fair value of assets and liabilities acquired including discounted cash flows, external market values, valuations on recent transactions or a combination thereof and believes that it uses the most appropriate measure or a combination of measures to value each asset or liability.

In addition, management believes that it uses the most appropriate valuation assumptions underlying each of those valuation methods based on current information available including discount rates, market risk rates, entity risk rates and cash flow assumptions. The accounting policy for valuation of business acquisitions is considered critical because judgments made in determining the estimated fair value and expected useful lives assigned to each class of assets and liabilities acquired can significantly impact the value of the asset or liability, including the impact on deferred taxes, the respective amortization periods and ultimately net profit. Therefore the use of other valuation methods, as well as other assumptions underlying these valuation methods, could significantly impact the determination of financial position and the results of operations.

Depreciation, depletion and amortization of mining assets

Depreciation, depletion and amortization charges are calculated using the units-of-production method and are based on Gold Fields’ current gold production as a percentage of total expected gold production over the lives of Gold Fields’ mines. An item is considered to be produced at the time it is removed from the mine. The lives of the mines are estimated by Gold Fields’ mineral resources department using interpretations of mineral reserves, as determined in accordance with the SEC’s industry guide number 7.

Depreciation, depletion and amortization at Gold Fields’ South African operations are calculated using above-infrastructure proven and probable reserves only, which because of their reserve base and respective long

 

161


Table of Contents

lives (which range from 5 to 80 years), are less sensitive to changes in reserve assumptions. Accordingly, at these locations, it is Gold Fields’ policy to update its depreciation, depletion and amortization calculations only once the new ore reserve declarations have been approved by Gold Field’s Board. However, if Gold Fields’ management becomes aware of significant changes in its above-infrastructure reserves ahead of the scheduled updates, management would not hesitate to immediately update its depreciation, depletion and amortization calculations and then subsequently notify the Board.

A similar approach is followed at Gold Fields’ operations in Ghana and Peru, due to the longer life of the primary ore body. At Gold Fields’ Australian operations, where mine-life ranges from 4 to 5 years, proven and probable reserves used for the calculation of depreciation, depletion and amortization are more susceptible to changes in reserve estimates. At these locations, Gold Fields’ depreciation, depletion and amortization calculations are updated on a more regular basis (at least quarterly) for all known changes in proven and probable reserves. The nature of the ore body, and the on-going information being gathered in connection with the ore body, facilitates these updates.

The estimates of the total expected future lives of Gold Fields’ mines could be different from the actual amount of gold mined in the future and the actual lives of the mines due to changes in the factors used in determining Gold Fields’ mineral reserves. Changes in management’s estimates of the total expected future lives of Gold Fields’ mines would therefore impact the depreciation, depletion and amortization charge recorded in Gold Fields’ consolidated financial statements. Changes due to acquisitions, sales or closures of shafts expected to have a material impact on Gold Fields’ depreciation, depletion and amortization calculations, are incorporated in those calculations as soon as they become known.

Impairment of long-lived assets

Gold Fields reviews and tests the carrying amounts of assets when events or changes in circumstances suggest that the carrying amount may not be recoverable. Assets are grouped at the lowest level for which identifiable cash flows are largely independent of the cash flows of other assets and liabilities.

Under U.S. GAAP, the impairment model for long-lived assets consists of two steps. The impairment analysis first compares the total estimated cash flows on an undiscounted basis to the carrying amount of the asset including goodwill, if any. If the undiscounted cash flows are less than the carrying amount of the asset, a second step is performed. The Group records an impairment as a charge to earnings if discounted expected future cash flows are less than the carrying amount.

The lowest level at which such cash flows are generated are generally at an individual operating mine, even if the individual operating mine is included in a larger mine complex.

If there are indications that an impairment may have occurred, Gold Fields prepares estimates of expected future cash flows for each group of assets. Expected future cash flows reflect:

 

   

estimated sales proceeds from the production and sale of recoverable gold and copper contained in proven and probable reserves;

 

   

expected future commodity prices and currency exchange rates (considering historical averages, current prices, forward pricing curves and related factors). In impairment assessments conducted in fiscal 2012, the Group used an expected future market gold price of $1,500 per ounce, and expected future market exchange rates of R8.29 to $1.00 and A$1.00 for the life of mine. The Group used an expected future market copper price of $7,720 per tonne for the life of mine;

 

   

expected future operating costs and capital expenditures to produce proven and probable gold reserves based on mine plans that assume current plant capacity, but exclude the impact of inflation; and

 

   

expected cash flows associated with value beyond proven and probable reserves.

 

162


Table of Contents

Gold Fields records a reduction of a group of assets to fair value as a charge to earnings if expected future cash flows are less than the carrying amount. The process of determining fair value is subjective as gold mining companies typically trade at a market capitalization that is based on a multiple of net asset value and requires management to make numerous assumptions. Gold Fields estimates fair value by discounting the expected future cash flows using a discount factor that reflects a market-related rate of interest for a term consistent with the period of expected cash flows.

Expected future cash flows are inherently uncertain, and could materially change over time. They are significantly affected by reserve estimates, together with economic factors such as gold prices and currency exchange rates, estimates of costs to produce reserves and future sustaining capital.

Because of the significant capital investment that is required at many mines, if an impairment occurs, it could materially impact earnings. Due to the long-life nature of many mines, the difference between total estimated discounted net cash flows and carrying value can be substantial. An impairment is only recorded when the carrying amount of a long-lived asset exceeds the total estimated discounted net cash flows. Therefore, although the value of a mine may decline gradually over multiple reporting periods, the application of impairment accounting rules could lead to recognition of the full amount of the decline in value in one period. Due to the highly uncertain nature of future cash flows, the determination of when to record an impairment charge can be very subjective. Management makes this determination using available evidence taking into account current expectations for each mining property.

For acquired exploration-stage properties, the purchase price is capitalized, but post-acquisition exploration expenditures are expensed. The future economic viability of exploration-stage properties largely depends upon the outcome of exploration activity, which can take a number of years to complete for large properties. Management monitors the results of exploration activity over time to assess whether an impairment may have occurred. The measurement of any impairment is made more difficult because there is not an active market for exploration properties, and because it is not possible to use discounted cash flow techniques due to the very limited information that is available to accurately model future cash flows.

In general, if an impairment occurs at an exploration stage property, it would probably have minimal value and most of the acquisition cost may have to be written down.

Gold Fields recorded no impairment charges on its long-lived assets during the six month ended December 31, 2010 or fiscal 2010 but recorded impairment charges amounting to $9.5 million in fiscal 2011 and $22.4 million in fiscal 2012.

Impairment of goodwill

Gold Fields acquired the South Deep mine on December 1, 2006. Goodwill related to this acquisition is reflected in the balance sheet in the U.S. dollar reporting currency at $1,020.1 million. Gold Fields performs its annual impairment test of goodwill related to the South Deep mine at the end of each fiscal period.

Under U.S. GAAP, the goodwill impairment test consists of two steps. The first step, which compares the reporting unit’s fair value to its carrying amount, is used as a screening process to identify potential goodwill impairment. If the carrying amount of a reporting unit exceeds the reporting unit’s fair value, the second step of the impairment test must be completed to measure the amount of the reporting unit’s goodwill impairment loss, if any. During this step, the reporting unit’s fair value is assigned to the reporting unit’s assets and liabilities, using the initial acquisition accounting guidance in ACS 805, in order to determine the implied fair value of the reporting unit’s goodwill. The implied fair value of the reporting unit’s goodwill is then compared with the carrying amount of the reporting unit’s goodwill to determine the goodwill impairment loss to be recognized, if any.

 

163


Table of Contents

The fair value represents a discounted cash flow valuation based on expected future cash flows. The expected future cash flows used to determine the fair value of the reporting unit are inherently uncertain and could materially change over time. They are significantly affected by a number of factors including, but not limited to, reserves and production estimates, together with economic factors such as the spot gold price and foreign currency exchange rates, estimates of production costs, future capital expenditure and discount rates. Therefore it is possible that outcomes within the next financial year that are materially different from the assumptions used in the impairment testing process could require an adjustment to the carrying values.

Management’s estimates and assumptions to estimate the fair value of the South Deep reporting unit include:

 

   

estimated sales proceeds from the production and sale of recoverable ounces of gold contained in proven and probable reserves;

 

   

expected future commodity prices and currency exchange rates (considering historical averages, current prices, forward pricing curves and related factors). In impairment assessments conducted in fiscal 2012, the Group used an expected future market gold price of $1,500 per ounce, and expected future market exchange rates of R8.29 to $1.00 for life of mine;

 

   

expected future operating costs and capital expenditures to produce proven and probable gold reserves based on mine plans that assume current plant capacity, but exclude the impact of inflation; and

 

   

expected cash flows associated with value beyond proven and probable reserves.

Gold Fields has determined that the fair value of the South Deep mine is in excess of its carrying value of $3,466.6 million and the goodwill related to the South Deep mine was therefore not considered impaired under U.S. GAAP.

Income Taxes

Management establishes a valuation allowance for deferred tax assets where it is more likely than not that some or all deferred tax assets will not be realized based on projections. These determinations are based on the projected taxable income and realization of tax allowances, tax losses and unredeemed capital expenditure. In the event that these tax assets are not realized, an adjustment to the valuation allowance would be required, which would be charged to income in the period that the determination was made. Likewise, should management determine that Gold Fields would be able to realize tax assets in the future in excess of the recorded amount, an adjustment to reduce the valuation allowance would be recorded generally as a credit to income in the period that the determination is made.

Gold Fields is periodically required to estimate the tax basis of assets and liabilities. Where tax laws and regulations are either unclear or subject to varying interpretations, it is possible that changes in these estimates could occur that materially affect the amounts of deferred income tax assets and liabilities recorded in the consolidated financial statements. Changes in deferred tax assets and liabilities generally have a direct impact on earnings in the period of changes. See note 6 to the audited consolidated financial statements which appear elsewhere in this annual report.

Gold Fields recognizes the tax benefit from an uncertain tax position only if it is more likely than not that the tax position will be sustained on examination by the taxing authorities, based on the technical merits of the position. The tax benefits recognized in the financial statements from such positions are then measured based on the largest benefit that has a greater than 50% likelihood of being realized upon settlement. Changes in recognition or measurement are reflected in the period in which the change in judgment occurs.

 

164


Table of Contents

Derivative financial instruments

The determination of the fair value of derivative financial instruments, when marked-to-market, takes into account estimates such as interest rates, commodity prices and foreign currency exchange rates under prevailing market conditions, depending on the nature of the financial derivatives.

These estimates may differ materially from actual interest rates and foreign currency exchange rates prevailing at the maturity dates of the financial derivatives and, therefore, may materially influence the values assigned to the financial derivatives, which may result in a charge to or an increase in Gold Fields’ earnings through maturity of the financial derivatives.

Environmental rehabilitation costs

Gold Fields makes provision for environmental rehabilitation costs and related liabilities when environmental disturbances occur based on management’s interpretations of current environmental and regulatory requirements. The provisions are recorded by discounting the expected cash flows associated with the environmental rehabilitation using a discount factor that reflects a credit-adjusted risk-free rate of interest. The principal factors that can cause expected cash flows to change are: the construction of new processing facilities; changes in the quantities of material in reserves and a corresponding change in the life of mine plan; changing ore characteristics that ultimately impact the environment; changes in water quality that impact the extent of water treatment required; and changes in laws and regulations governing the protection of the environment. In general, as the end of the mine life becomes nearer, the reliability of expected cash flows increases, but earlier in the mine life, the estimation of rehabilitation liabilities is inherently more subjective. Significant judgments and estimates are made when estimating the fair value of rehabilitation liabilities. In addition, expected cash flows relating to rehabilitation liabilities could occur over periods up to the planned life of mine at the time the estimate is made and the assessment of the extent of environmental remediation work is highly subjective.

While management believes that the environmental rehabilitation provisions made are adequate and that the interpretations applied are appropriate, the amounts estimated for the future liabilities may, when considering the factors discussed above, differ materially from the costs that will actually be incurred to rehabilitate Gold Fields’ mine sites in the future.

Employee benefits

Management’s determination of Gold Fields’ obligation and expense for post-retirement healthcare liabilities, depends on the selection of certain assumptions used by actuaries to calculate the amounts. These assumptions are described in note 15 to Gold Fields’ consolidated financial statements and include, among others, the discount rate, healthcare inflation costs and rates of increase in compensation costs. Actual results that differ from management’s assumptions are accumulated and charged over future periods, which will generally affect Gold Fields’ recognized expense and recorded obligation in future periods. While management believes that these assumptions are appropriate, significant changes in the assumptions may materially affect Gold Fields’ post-retirement obligations as well as future expenses, which will result in an impact on earnings in the periods that the changes in the assumptions occur.

Stockpiles, gold-in-process and product inventories

Costs that are incurred in or benefit the production process are accumulated as stockpiles, gold-in-process, ore on leach pads and product inventories. Lower of cost or market value tests are performed at least annually and represent the estimated future sales price of the product based on prevailing and long-term metals prices, less estimated costs to complete production and bring the product to sale.

Stockpiles are measured by estimating the number of tonnes added and removed from the stockpile, the number of contained gold ounces based on assay data, and the estimated recovery percentage based on the expected processing method. Stockpile tonnages are verified by periodic surveys.

 

165


Table of Contents

Although the quantities of recoverable metal are reconciled by comparing the grades of ore to the quantities of gold actually recovered (metallurgical balancing), the nature of the process inherently limits the ability to precisely monitor recoverability levels. As a result, the metallurgical balancing process is constantly monitored and the engineering estimates are refined based on actual results over time.

Concentrate inventories represent concentrate available for shipment. The concentrate inventory is valued at the average cost, including an allocated portion of amortization. Costs are added to and removed from the concentrate inventory based on tonnes of concentrate and are valued at the lower of cost and market value. Management’s determination of the percentage gold and copper content and the total quantity by weight of gold and copper in the concentrate depends on assay and laboratory results for the content and survey for the quantity.

Gold Fields recorded a write-down to market value of U.S.$19.2 million in fiscal 2012. There were no write-downs in fiscal 2010, the six month period ended December 31, 2010 or fiscal 2011.

Share-based compensation

U.S. GAAP requires Gold Fields to determine the fair value of shares and share options as of the date of the grant, which is then amortized as share-based compensation expense in the statement of operations over the vesting period of the option grant. Gold Fields determines the grant-date fair value of shares and options using a Black-Scholes or Monte Carlo simulation valuation model, which require Gold Fields to make assumptions regarding the estimated term of the option, share price volatility, expected forfeiture rates and Gold Fields’ expected dividend yield.

While Gold Fields’ management believes that these assumptions are appropriate, the use of different assumptions could have a material impact on the fair value of the option grant and the related recognition of share-based compensation expense in the consolidated income statement. Gold Fields’ options have characteristics significantly different from those of traded options and therefore fair values may also differ.

Share-based compensation charges are included in production costs, corporate expenditure, exploration expenditure and other costs where compensation costs of the underlying employees are classified.

Share-based compensation in prior periods has been reclassified into respective expense captions where compensation costs of underlying employees are ordinarily classified. The reclassification has been made to conform with guidance SAB Topic 14.F.

Recently adopted accounting pronouncements

Revenue recognition

In October 2009, the Accounting Standards Codification, or ASC guidance, related to revenue recognition: multiple-deliverable revenue arrangements was updated. The update specifies multiple–deliverable revenue arrangements will be separated in more circumstances than under existing U.S. GAAP requirements. It establishes a selling price hierarchy and requires significant expansion of disclosures relating to multiple-deliverable revenue arrangements. The amendments in this update are effective prospectively for revenue arrangements entered into or modified in fiscal years beginning on or after June 15, 2010. The updated guidance did not impact the Group’s financial statements.

In April 2010, the ASC guidance related to revenue recognition: milestone method of revenue recognition was updated. The amendments provide guidance on the criteria that should be met for determining whether the milestone method of revenue recognition is appropriate. The amendments are effective on a prospective basis for milestones achieved in fiscal years, and interim periods within those years beginning on or after June 15, 2010. The updated guidance did not impact the Group’s financial statements.

Fair value measurements

In January 2010, the ASC guidance related to fair value measurement: improving disclosures about fair value measurements was updated, providing amendments to the guidance which requires entities to disclose

 

166


Table of Contents

separately the amounts of significant transfers in and out of Level 1 (unadjusted quoted prices in active markets that are accessible at the measurement date for identical unrestricted assets or liabilities) and Level 2 (Quoted prices in markets that are not active, or inputs that are observable, either directly or indirectly for substantially the full term of the asset or liability) fair value measurements and describe the reasons for the transfers. In addition, entities are required to present separately information about purchases, sales, issuances, and settlements in the reconciliation for fair value measurements using significant unobservable inputs (Level 3). The disclosures related to Level 1 and Level 2 fair value measurements are effective for interim and annual reporting periods beginning after December 15, 2009. The disclosures related to Level 3 fair value measurements are effective for interim and annual reporting periods beginning after December 15, 2010. Except for presentation changes, the updated guidance did not have an impact on the Group’s financial statements.

During May 2011, the ASC guidance related to fair value measurement: amendments to achieve common fair value measurement and disclosure requirements in U.S. GAAP and IFRS was issued. The new standards do not extend the use of fair value but, rather, provide guidance about how fair value should be applied where it already is required or permitted under IFRS or U.S. GAAP. For U.S. GAAP, most of the changes are clarifications of existing guidance, additional disclosure requirements to the financial statements or wording changes to align with IFRS. The updated guidance did not materially impact Gold Fields’ financial statements.

Derivatives and hedging

During March 2010, the ASC guidance related to derivatives and hedging: scope exception related to embedded credit derivatives was updated. The amendments clarify the scope exceptions related to embedded credit derivatives. The amendments are effective from the first fiscal quarter beginning after June 15, 2010. The updated guidance did not impact the Group’s financial statements.

Compensation—stock compensation

During April 2010, the ASC guidance related to compensation – stock compensation: effect of denominating the exercise price of a share - based payment awarded in the currency of the market in which the underlying equity security trades was updated. The update clarifies that an employee share-based payment award with an exercise price denominated in the currency of a market in which a substantial portion of the entity’s equity securities trades should not be considered to contain a condition that is not a market, performance, or service condition. Therefore, an entity would not classify such an award as a liability if it otherwise qualifies as equity. The amendments are effective for those fiscal years, and interim periods within those fiscal years beginning on or after December 15, 2010. The updated guidance did not impact the Group’s financial statements.

Intangibles—goodwill and other

In December 2010, the ASC guidance related to intangibles—goodwill and other: when to perform step 2 of the goodwill impairment test for reporting units with zero or negative carrying amounts relating to goodwill testing was updated. The update modifies Step 1 of the goodwill impairment test for reporting units with zero or negative carrying amounts. For those reporting units, an entity is required to perform Step 2 of the goodwill impairment test if it is more likely than not that a goodwill impairment exists. In determining whether it is more likely than not that goodwill impairment exists, an entity should consider whether there are any adverse qualitative factors indicating that an impairment may exist. For public entities, the update is effective for fiscal years, and interim periods within those years, beginning after December 15, 2010. The updated guidance did not impact the Group’s financial statements.

Comprehensive income

During June 2011, the ASC guidance related to comprehensive income: presentation of comprehensive income was updated. The amendments provide an entity with the option to present the components of net income

 

167


Table of Contents

and comprehensive income in either one or two consecutive financial statements. The amendments eliminate the option in U.S. GAAP to present other comprehensive income in the statement of changes in equity. An entity should apply the ASU retrospectively. In December 2011, the FASB decided to defer the effective date of those changes in ASU 2011-05 that relate only to the presentation of reclassification adjustments in the statement of income by issuing ASU 2011-12, Comprehensive Income (Topic 220): Deferral of the Effective Date for Amendments to the Presentation of Reclassifications of Items Out of Accumulated Other Comprehensive income in Accounting Standards Update 2011-05. The updated guidance impacted Gold Fields’ order of its primary financial statements.

Intangibles: Goodwill

During September 2011, the ASC guidance related to intangibles: goodwill and other: testing goodwill for impairment was updated. The amendments permit an entity to make a qualitative assessment of whether it is more likely than not that a reporting unit’s fair value is less than its carrying amount before applying the two-step goodwill impairment test. If an entity concludes it is not more likely than not that the fair value of a reporting unit is less than its carrying amount, it need not perform the two-step impairment test. The amendments are effective for annual and interim goodwill impairment tests performed for fiscal years beginning after December 15, 2011. The updated guidance did not impact Gold Fields’ financial statements.

Recently issued accounting pronouncements not yet adopted

Balance sheet

During December 2011, the ASC guidance related to disclosures about offsetting assets and liabilities was updated. The amendments require an entity to disclose information about offsetting and related arrangements to enable users of financial statements to understand the effect of those arrangements on its financial position, and to allow investors to better compare financial statements prepared under U.S. GAAP with financial statements prepared under IFRS. The amendments are effective for annual periods beginning January 1, 2013, and interim periods within those annual periods. Retrospective application is required. The Group will implement the provisions of ASU 2011-11 as of January 1, 2013. Gold Fields does not expect that the updated guidance will impact its financial statements.

Comprehensive Income

In February 2013, the ASC guidance related to reporting of Amounts Reclassified Out of Accumulated Other Comprehensive Income was updated. The amendments require an entity to report the effect of significant reclassifications out of accumulated other comprehensive income on the respective line items in net income, either on the face of the statement of operations or in the notes, if the amount being reclassified is required under U.S. GAAP to be reclassified in its entirety to net income in the same reporting period. For other amounts not required by U.S. GAAP to be reclassified in their entirety to net income in the same reporting period, an entity is required to cross-reference other disclosures which provide additional information about the amounts. The guidance is effective prospectively for reporting periods beginning after December 15, 2012. As this guidance provides only presentation requirements, the adoption of this standard will not impact Gold Fields’ results of operations, cash flows or financial position.

Results of Operations

Years Ended December 31, 2012 and December 31, 2011

Revenues

Product sales decreased by U.S.$248.3 million, or 4.3%, from U.S.$5,800.1 million in fiscal 2011 to U.S.$5,551.8 million in fiscal 2012. The decrease in product sales was primarily due to a decrease of 0.341 million equivalent ounces, or 9.2%, in total equivalent gold sold, from 3.697 million ounces in fiscal 2011 to

 

168


Table of Contents

3.356 million ounces in fiscal 2012, partially offset by an increase in the average realized gold price of 5.4% from U.S.$1,569 per ounce in fiscal 2011 to U.S.$1,654 per ounce in fiscal 2012 and a decrease in the average realized copper price of 10.3% from U.S.$8,160 per tonne to U.S.$7,322 per tonne.

At the Cerro Corona operation in Peru copper production was converted to equivalent gold ounces on a monthly basis using average copper and gold prices for the month in which the copper was produced.

At the South African operations, gold sales decreased by 13.1% from 1.72 million ounces in fiscal 2011 to 1.49 million ounces in fiscal 2012, primarily as a result of illegal strike action which affected KDC and Beatrix, the fire at the Ya Rona mine shaft which broke out on June 30, 2012 and was extinguished on August 14, 2012, and lower grades compared to 2011. At KDC, gold sales decreased by 15.0% from 1.1 million ounces in fiscal 2011 to 0.93 million ounces in fiscal 2012 due to reasons noted above, resulting in lower underground mining volumes at slightly higher grades. At Beatrix, gold sales decreased by 16.7% from 0.35 million ounces to 0.29 million ounces mainly due to illegal industrial action, lower mining grades and lower volumes mined. At South Deep, gold sales were similar at 0.27 million ounces. Increased underground mining volumes and grades, as South Deep builds to full production, were offset by a decrease in surface production which was discontinued in 2012 due to a lack of payable ore.

At the West African operations, total gold sales decreased by 5.3% from 0.94 million ounces in fiscal 2011 to 0.89 million ounces in fiscal 2012. This was mainly due to Damang’s gold sales decreasing by 23.6% from 0.22 million ounces to 0.17 million ounces due to lower grade mainly as a result of less ore mined from the high grade Damang Pit Cutback (as a result of safety concerns) and ageing plant infrastructure which is in the process of being refurbished. Tarkwa remained flat at 0.72 million ounces in fiscal 2012.

At the South American operation of Cerro Corona in Peru, total gold equivalent sales decreased by 8.6% from 0.38 million gold equivalent ounces in fiscal 2011 to 0.35 million gold equivalent ounces in fiscal 2012, mainly due to lower copper prices relative to gold prices used to calculate equivalent production and scheduled lower gold and copper grades.

At the Australasian operations, total gold sales decreased by 5.0% from 0.66 million ounces in fiscal 2011 to 0.63 million ounces in fiscal 2012. At St. Ives, gold sales decreased by 3.2% from 0.47 million ounces to 0.45 million ounces due to mining lower grade open pits in 2012. At Agnew, gold sales decreased by 9.0% from 0.19 million ounces in fiscal 2011 to 0.18 million ounces fiscal 2012 due to complex ground conditions which required the mining schedule to be re-planned mid-year, resulting in a focus on lower volume higher grade ore from Kim underground.

 

169


Table of Contents

Costs and Expenses

The following table sets out Gold Fields’ total ounces sold and weighted average total cash costs and total production costs per ounce for fiscal 2011 and fiscal 2012.

 

     Fiscal 2011      Fiscal 2012      Percentage
increase in
unit total
cash costs
    Percent
increase in
unit total
production
costs
 
     Gold sold      Total  cash
costs (1)
     Total
production
costs (2)
     Gold sold      Total
cash
costs (1)
     Total
production
costs (2)
      
     (‘000 oz)      ($/oz)      (‘000 oz)      ($/oz)      (%)  

South Africa

     1,720         982         1,231         1,494         1,107         1,384         (13     (12

KDC

     1,100         963         1,206         935         1,078         1,336         (12     (11

Beatrix

     347         969         1,199         289         1,121         1,414         (16     (18

South Deep

     273         1,073         1,376         270         1,194         1,517         (11     (10

Ghana

     935         712         794         885         925         1,067         (30     (34

Tarkwa (3)

     717         668         752         719         838         983         (25     (31

Damang (4)

     218         855         932         166         1,299         1,430         (52     (53

Peru

     383         447         632         350         490         658         (10     (4

Cerro Corona (5)

     383         447         632         350         490         658         (10     (4

Australia (6)

     659         849         1,150         626         921         1,223         (8     (6

St. Ives

     465         882         1,244         450         943         1,280         (7     (3

Agnew

     194         769         926         176         864         1,078         (12     (16
  

 

 

          

 

 

            

Total (7)(8)

     3,697         —           —           3,356         —              —          —     

Weighted average

     —           835         1,050         —           960         1,200         (15     (14

 

Notes:

(1) For information on how Gold Fields has calculated total cash costs per ounce, see “Key Information—Selected Historical Consolidated Financial Data—Statement of Operations Data—Footnote 4”.
(2) For information on how Gold Fields has calculated total production costs per ounce, see “Key Information—Selected Historical Consolidated Financial Data—Statement of Operations Data—Footnote 5”.
(3) In fiscal 2011 and 2012, 0.576 million ounces and 0.647 million ounces of sales, respectively, were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to noncontrolling shareholders in the Tarkwa operation.
(4) In fiscal 2011 and 2012, 0.175 million ounces and 0.149 million ounces of sales, respectively, were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to noncontrolling shareholders in the Damang operation.
(5) In fiscal 2011 and 2012, 0.356 million ounces and 0.345 million ounces of sales were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to noncontrolling shareholders in the Cerro Corona operation
(6) The consideration paid for the Australian operations in excess of the book value of the underlying net assets was allocated pro rata to the value of the underlying assets, which affected the allocation of amortization between St. Ives and Agnew.
(7) In fiscal 2011 and 2012, 3.485 million ounces and 3.262 million ounces of sales, respectively, were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to noncontrolling shareholders in the Ghana and Peru operations.
(8) The total may not reflect the sum of the line items due to rounding.

 

170


Table of Contents

The following tables set out a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ production costs to its total cash costs and total production costs for fiscal 2012 and fiscal 2011.

 

    For the year ended December 31, 2012  
    KDC     Beatrix     South
Deep
    Tarkwa     Damang     St. Ives     Agnew     Cerro
Corona
    Corporate     Group (6 )  
    (in $ million except as otherwise stated) (1)  

Production Costs

    1,005.3        322.5        328.1        587.5        215.5        426.3        152.2        158.0        (4.9     3,190.4   

Less:

                   

G&A other than corporate costs

    (15.3     (4.0     (3.3     (39.4     (9.6     (16.1     (7.8     3.4        5.4        (87.3

GIP adjustment (2)

    —          —          —          (1.5     (1.7     (3.0     0.9        0.2        —          (5.1

Share-based payments

    (14.1     (5.2     (4.4     (5.5     (1.9     (3.5     (1.6     (5.2     —          (41.4

Plus: Employee termination costs

    6.0        1.7        0.2        1.6        —          1.7        1.8        0.6        —          13.8   

Royalties

    25.8        8.6        2.3        59.9        13.9        18.7        7.3        14.7        —          151.2   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total cash costs (6)

    1,007.8        323.7        322.9        602.6        216.2        424.1        152.7        171.6        0.5        3,221.5   

Plus: Amortization (2)

    215.5        76.7        82.3        95.9        19.2        141.3        34.8        51.8        17.5        735.0   

Share-based payments

    14.1        5.2        4.4        5.5        1.9        3.5        1.6        5.2        —          41.4   

Rehabilitation

    11.4        2.8        0.8        2.8        0.6        6.7        1.3        1.9        —          28.2   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total production costs (6)

    1,248.8        408.4        410.3        706.8        238.0        575.5        190.4        230.5        18.0        4,026.2   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gold produced (‘000 oz) (3)

    934.9        288.7        270.4        718.8        166.4        449.8        176.6        342.1        —          3,347.8   

Gold sold (‘000 oz)

    934.9        288.7        270.4        718.8        166.4        449.8        176.6        350.4        —          3,356.1   

Total cash costs ($/oz) (4)

    1,078        1,121        1,194        838        1,299        943        864        490        —          960   

Total production
costs ($/oz)
(5)

    1,336        1,414        1,517        983        1,430        1,280        1,078        658        —          1,200   

 

Notes

(1) Calculated using an average exchange rate of R8.19 per $1.00.
(2) The GIP adjustment excludes the non-cash portion of GIP which is included in amortization. GIP represents gold in the processing circuit, which is expected to be recovered.
(3) For the year ended December 2012, 3.254 million ounces of production were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to non-controlling shareholders in the Ghana and Cerro Corona operations.
(4) For information on how Gold Fields has calculated total cash costs per ounce, see “Key Information—Selected Historical Consolidated Financial Data—Statement of Operations Data—Footnote 4”.
(5) For information on how Gold Fields has calculated total production costs per ounce, see “Key Information—Selected Historical Consolidated Financial Data—Statement of Operations Data—Footnote 5”.
(6) The total may not reflect the sum of the line items due to rounding.

 

    For the year ended December 31, 2011  
    KDC     Beatrix     South
Deep
    Tarkwa     Damang     St. Ives     Agnew     Cerro
Corona
    Corporate     Group (6)  
    (in $ million except as otherwise stated) (1)  

Production Costs

    1,028.7        335.1        299.0        450.3        173.9        401.2        145.7        158.8        (3.7     2,989.0   

Less:

                   

G&A other than corporate costs

    (14.6     (2.9     (3.1     (29.8     (2.9     (8.0     (5.0     2.5        3.7        (60.1

GIP adjustment (2)

    —          —          —          12.0        1.4        0.8        1.4        (1.7     —          13.9   

Share-based payments

    (16.9     (5.8     (5.1     (4.3     (1.8     (2.5     (0.8     (3.2     —          (40.4

Plus: Employee termination costs

    27.0        4.9        0.1        —          —          —          —          —          0.8        32.8   

 

171


Table of Contents
    For the year ended December 31, 2011  
    KDC     Beatrix     South
Deep
    Tarkwa     Damang     St. Ives     Agnew     Cerro
Corona
    Corporate     Group (6)  
    (in $ million except as otherwise stated) (1)  

Royalties

    35.5        4.6        2.1        51.0        15.5        18.4        7.9        14.7        —          149.7   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total cash costs (6)

    1,059.7        335.9        293.0        479.2        186.1        409.9        149.3        171.1        0.8        3,084.9   

Plus: Amortization (2)

    238.9        71.1        76.6        53.9        14.8        161.1        27.2        66.1        20.5        730.1   

Share-based payments

    16.9        5.8        5.1        4.3        1.8        2.5        0.8        3.2        —          40.4   

Rehabilitation

    10.8        2.9        1.0        1.8        0.3        4.2        2.3        1.7        —          24.9   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total production costs (6)

    1,326.3        415.7        375.7        539.2        203.0        577.7        179.6        242.1        21.3        3,880.3   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gold produced (‘000 oz) (3)

    1,100.1        346.8        273.0        717.3        217.7        464.5        194.0        383.1        —          3,696.7   

Gold sold (‘000 oz)

    1,100.1        346.8        273.0        717.3        217.7        464.5        194.0        383.0        —          3,696.6   

Total cash costs ($/oz) (4)

    963        969        1,073        668        855        882        769        447        —          835   

Total production
costs ($/oz)
(5)

    1,206        1,199        1,376        752        932        1,244        926        632        —          1,050   

 

Notes:

(1) Calculated using an exchange rate of R7.22 per $1.00.
(2) The GIP adjustment excludes the non-cash portion of GIP which is included in amortization. GIP represents gold in the processing circuit, which is expected to be recovered.
(3) For the year ended December 2011, 3.485 million ounces of production were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to noncontrolling shareholders in the Ghana and Cerro Corona operations.
(4) For information on how Gold Fields has calculated total cash costs per ounce, see “Key Information—Selected Historical Consolidated Financial Data—Statement of Operations Data—Footnote 4.”
(5) For information on how Gold Fields has calculated total production costs per ounce, see “Key Information—Selected Historical Consolidated Financial Data—Statement of Operations Data—Footnote 5”.
(6) The total may not reflect the sum of the line items due to rounding.

Gold Fields’ weighted average total cash costs per ounce increased by U.S.$125 per ounce, or 15.0%, from U.S.$835 per ounce in fiscal 2011 to U.S.$960 per ounce in fiscal 2012.

The weighted average total cash costs at the South African operations increased by U.S.$125 per ounce, or 12.7%, from U.S.$982 per ounce in fiscal 2011 to U.S.$1,107 per ounce in fiscal 2012. This increase was as a result of the increase in electricity tariffs of 16%, inflationary increases, wage increases of around 9.4%, additional support costs, an increase in de-stress development at South Deep and lower production.

The weighted average total cash costs at the West African operations increased by U.S.$213 per ounce, or 29.9%, from U.S.$712 per ounce in fiscal 2011 to U.S.$925 per ounce in fiscal 2012. This increase was as a result of the increase in electricity tariffs and fuel prices, together with normal inflationary increases and lower production at Damang.

The weighted average total cash costs per ounce at the South American operation increased by U.S.$43 per ounce, or 9.6%, from U.S.$447 per ounce in fiscal 2011 to U.S.$490 per ounce in fiscal 2012. This increase was due to the decrease in gold equivalent ounces sold.

The weighted average total cash costs per ounce at the Australasian operations increased by U.S.$72 per ounce, or 8.5%, from U.S.$849 per ounce in fiscal 2011 to U.S.$921 per ounce in fiscal 2012. This increase was due to inflationary increases, wage increases, increases in fuel prices as well as the lower production at both St. Ives and Agnew.

 

172


Table of Contents

Production costs

Production costs increased by U.S.$201.4 million, or 6.7%, from U.S.$2,989.0 million in fiscal 2011 to U.S.$3,190.4 million in fiscal 2012.

This increase was due to inflationary increases, annual wage increases, increases in electricity tariffs in South Africa and Ghana and increases in fuel prices in Ghana and Australia.

Depreciation and amortization

Depreciation and amortization charges decreased by U.S.$15.4 million, or 2.1%, from U.S.$745.3 million in fiscal 2011 to U.S.$729.9 million in fiscal 2012. Depreciation and amortization is calculated on the units-of-production method and is based on current gold production as a percentage of total expected gold production over the lives of the different mines. In South Africa the decrease was due to the lower production. The increase at Tarkwa was due to the increase in production, increased amortization rates reflecting the current open pits being mined and the additional mining fleet. The increase in Damang was due to the additional mining fleet. In Australia, the decrease was mainly due to the decrease in production at St. Ives and Agnew, partially offset by the increase in amortization rates at Kim and Main Lode at Agnew. The decrease in Cerro Corona was due to an increase in reserve tonnes on which amortization is based.

The table below depicts the changes from December 31, 2010 to December 31, 2011, and December 31, 2011 to December 31, 2012 for proven and probable managed gold reserves above current infrastructure and for the life of mine for each operation and the resulting impact on the amortization charge in fiscal 2011 and 2012, respectively. The life of mine information is based on the operations’ strategic plans, adjusted for proven and probable reserve balances. In basic terms, amortization is calculated using the life of mine for each operation, which is based on: (1) the proven and probable reserves above infrastructure for the operation at the start of the relevant year (which are taken to be the same as at the end of the prior fiscal year and using only above infrastructure reserves); and (2) the amount of gold produced by the operation during the year. The ore reserve statement as at December 31, 2012 became effective on January 1, 2013.

 

    Proven and provable reserves as of     Life of mine (1)     Amortization for the year
ended
 
    December 31,
2010
    December 31,
2011
    December 31,
2012
    December 31,
2011
    December 31,
2012
    December 31,
2011
    December 31,
2012
 
    (‘000 oz)     (years)     ($ million)  

South African Region

             

KDC

    16,500        16,600        10,200        17        15        238.9        215.5   

Beatrix

    5,500        5,000        3,300        15        13        71.1        76.7   

South Deep (8)

    28,800        30,000        39,100        69        80        76.6        82.3   

West African Region

             

Tarkwa (2)(8)

    9,300        10,300        10,100        13        24        79.4        94.4   

Damang (3)

    2,000        3,400        4,100        14        16        13.2        17.5   

South American Region

             

Cerro Corona (4)

    2,700        6,100        2,800        17        16        64.4        52.0   

Australasian Region (5)

             

St. Ives

    2,800        2,800        2,200        7        6        155.9        138.3   

Agnew

    1,300        1,300        1,200        8        7        25.3        35.7   

Corporate and other

    —          —          —              20.5        17.5   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

       

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total

    68,900        75,500        72,900            745.3        729.9   
           

 

 

   

 

 

 

Reserves below infrastructure (6)

    9,500        9,600        —             
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

         

Total reserves (7)

    78,400        85,100        72,900           
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

         

 

173


Table of Contents

 

Notes:

(1) The LoM for each operation shown in the above table differs from that shown in “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations.” The LoM in the above table is based on the above infrastructure proven and probable reserves, whereas the LoM information in “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations” is based on both above and below infrastructure proven and probable reserves. In line with other International Operations, all South Deep reserves are classed as above infrastructure, as the reserves will be accessed via ongoing decline.
(2) As of December 31, 2010, December 31, 2011 and December 31, 2012 reserves of 6.576 million ounces, 9.310 million ounces and 9.073 million ounces of gold, respectively, were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to noncontrolling shareholders in the Tarkwa operation.
(3) As of December 31, 2010, December 31, 2011 and December 31, 2012 reserves of 1.479 million ounces, 3.051 million ounces and 3.681 million ounces of gold, respectively, were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to noncontrolling shareholders in the Damang operation.
(4) As of December 31, 2010, December 31, 2011 and December 31, 2012 reserves of 2.156 million ounces, 6.011 million ounces and 2.734 million ounces of equivalent gold were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to noncontrolling shareholders in the Cerro Corona operation.
(5) The consideration paid for the Australian operations in excess of the book value of the underlying net assets was allocated pro rata to the value of the underlying assets, which affected the allocation of amortization between St. Ives and Agnew.
(6) Below infrastructure reserves relate to mineralization which is located at a level at which an operation currently does not have infrastructure sufficient to allow mining operations to occur, but where the operation has made plans to install additional infrastructure in the future which will allow mining to occur at that level.
(7) As of December 31, 2010, December 31, 2011 and December 31, 2012 reserves of 75.940 million ounces, 74.571 million ounces and 71.388 million ounces of gold, respectively, were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to noncontrolling shareholders in the West African and South American operations.
(8) The change in tail-end management and milling strategy at South Deep and Tarkwa respectively, accounts for the change (increase) in LoM.

Corporate expenditure

Corporate expenditure increased from U.S.$37.6 million in fiscal 2011 to U.S.$46.6 million in fiscal 2012, an increase of 23.9%. The increase is due to reorganization of corporate services and inflation. Corporate expenditure consists primarily of general corporate overhead and corporate service department costs, primarily in the areas of technical services, human resources and finance, which are used by the operations. Corporate expenditure also includes business development costs. In Rand terms, corporate expenditure increased from R271.5 million in fiscal 2011 to R381.7 million in fiscal 2012 mainly due to the reorganization of corporate services and inflation.

Employee termination costs

Employee termination costs decreased from U.S.$32.8 million in fiscal 2011 to U.S.$13.8 million in fiscal 2012. The termination costs in fiscal 2012 and 2011 related primarily to restructuring at all the operations as part of the BPR program and the Portfolio Review in 2012.

Exploration expenditure

Exploration expenditure increased from U.S.$125.4 million in fiscal 2011 to U.S.$135.3 million in fiscal 2012, an increase of 7.9%. The bulk of the expenditure was incurred on a diversified pipeline of projects in Africa, Australia, Asia and North, South and Central America, with the increase in fiscal 2012 due primarily to a higher spend on advanced stage exploration projects; U.S.$18 million on Arctic platinum project in Finland and U.S.$14 million on Yanfolila in Mali, U.S.$13 million on Salares Norte in Chile, U.S.$10 million on Woodjam in Canada, U.S.$8 million on Taguas in Argentina and U.S.$6 million on Talas in Kyrgyzstan. Subject to continued

 

174


Table of Contents

exploration success, exploration expenditure is expected to be U.S.$208 million in fiscal 2013 comprising of greenfields exploration of U.S.$80 million, near-mine exploration of U.S.$47 million and projects exploration of U.S.$81 million. See “Information on the Company—Growth and International Projects” .

Feasibility and evaluation costs

Feasibility and evaluation expenditure increased from U.S.$95.2 million in fiscal 2011 to U.S.$103.5 million in fiscal 2012, an increase of 8.7%, comprising U.S.$51.8 million on Chucapaca in Peru on a 100% basis, U.S.$34.3 million on corporate development and strategic project costs and general office costs in the various countries the Group operates in, U.S.$9.8 million on the FSE project in the Philippines and U.S.$7.6 million on the Greater Damang project in Ghana.

(Profit)/loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment

Loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment was U.S.$0.4 million in fiscal 2011 compared to a profit of U.S.$0.5 million in fiscal 2012.

The major disposals in fiscal 2012 related to the sale of various redundant assets primarily at St. Ives, La Cima, South Deep, KDC and Beatrix, whereas in fiscal 2011, they related to Tarkwa, La Cima and KDC.

Impairment of assets

There was U.S.$9.5 million in impairment of assets in fiscal 2011 compared with U.S.$41.6 million in fiscal 2012. The impairment charge in fiscal 2012 consisted of a U.S.$10.1 million impairment of heap leach assets and U.S.$19.2 million write-down to market value of heap leach inventory at St. Ives in Australia due to the cessation of the heap leach at St. Ives and U.S.$4.4 million impairment of heavy mining equipment in Ghana. In addition, the Group impaired its patented technology, known as the Biox process, which is used for the pretreatment of refractory ores and concentrates prior to gold recovery through conventional cyanide leaching techniques. The Group entered into an agreement to sell its Biox technology in 2013. This impairment amounted to U.S.$7.9 million. The impairment charge in fiscal 2011 resulted from the decision to reassess the optimal processing methodology for the oxides at Cerro Corona, where the current focus is on the evaluation of a heap leach operation to capture the value inherent in the oxide instead of a stand-alone oxide plant; the evaluation costs of which were written off in 2011.

Increase/(decrease) in provision for post-retirement healthcare costs

In South Africa, Gold Fields provides medical benefits to employees in its operations through the Gold Fields Medical Scheme.

Under the medical plan which covers certain of its former employees, Gold Fields remains liable for 50% of these retired employees’ medical contributions after their retirement. At December 31, 2012, 126 (fiscal 2011: 128) former employees were covered under this plan. This benefit is not available to members of the scheme who were employees of the former Free State operation (which is now the Beatrix operation) who retired after August 31, 1997, and other employees who retired after January 31, 1999.

As part of the acquisition of South Deep, Gold Fields assumed an additional post-retirement healthcare cost liability. Former employees of South Deep belonged to a commercial medical scheme with employer liability for contribution per pensioner limited to R400 per month. The R400 monthly contribution was fixed until the termination of Gold Fields’ obligations on December 31, 2011.

The U.S.$0.3 million charge in fiscal 2012 and the U.S.$0.1 million charge in 2011 comprise the annual interest and service charge. The post-retirement healthcare provision is updated annually based on actuarial calculations, with any increase in the provision reflected in the statement of operations.

 

175


Table of Contents

Accretion expense on provision for environmental rehabilitation

At all of its operations, Gold Fields makes full provision for environmental rehabilitation based on the net present value of the estimated cost of restoring the environmental disturbance that has occurred up to the balance sheet date. The rehabilitation charge increased from U.S.$24.9 million in fiscal 2011 to U.S.$28.2 million in fiscal 2012. The increase was due primarily to the effect of higher estimated inflation and base case liability for fiscal 2012 compared to fiscal 2011.

For its South African operations, Gold Fields contributes to environmental trust funds it has established to provide for any environmental rehabilitation obligations and expected closure costs relating to its mining operations. The amounts invested in the trust funds are classified as non-current assets and any income earned on these assets is accounted for as interest income. For the Ghanaian, Australian and Peruvian operations Gold Fields does not contribute to a trust fund.

Interest and dividends

Interest and dividend income increased from U.S.$25.4 million in fiscal 2011 to U.S.$29.2 million in fiscal 2012. The increase was mainly due to higher average cash balances at the international operations in fiscal 2012 compared to fiscal 2011.

The interest and dividends received in fiscal 2012 of U.S.$29.2 million comprised U.S.$nil million in dividend income, U.S.$9.1 million on monies invested in the South African environmental rehabilitation trust funds and U.S.$20.1 million on other cash and cash equivalent balances.

The interest and dividends received in fiscal 2011 of U.S.$25.4 million comprised U.S.$0.5 million in dividend income, U.S.$9.7 million on monies invested in the South African environmental rehabilitation trust funds and U.S.$15.2 million on other cash and cash equivalent balances.

Interest received on the funds invested in rehabilitation trust funds decreased from U.S.$9.7 million in fiscal 2011 to U.S.$9.1 million in fiscal 2012 in dollar terms due to the weakening of the Rand against the U.S. dollar but in Rand terms increased due to higher average balances invested in the funds.

Interest on cash balances increased from U.S.$15.2 million in fiscal 2011 to U.S.$20.1 million in fiscal 2012 mainly due to the higher average cash balances at the international operations in fiscal 2012 compared to fiscal 2011.

Finance expense

Finance expense increased from U.S.$54.3 million in fiscal 2011 to U.S.$70.1 million in fiscal 2012.

Net finance expense in fiscal 2012 consisted of gross interest payments of U.S.$83.1 million (2011: U.S.$63.6 million) partially offset by interest capitalized of U.S.$13.0 million (2011: U.S.$9.3 million).

 

176


Table of Contents

The interest payments in fiscal 2012 and 2011 comprised:

 

     Fiscal 2012      Fiscal 2011  
     ($ million)  

Interest on the U.S.$1 billion 4.875% guaranteed notes due October 7, 2020

     49.6         50.0   

Interest on borrowings to fund capital expenditure and operating costs at the South African operations

     16.4         1.4   

Interest on the U.S.$200 million Non-Revolving Senior Secured Term Loan

     3.4         3.5   

Interest on the $1 billion Syndicated Revolving credit facility

     7.8         2.5   

Interest on the Split-tenor Revolving credit facility

     1.1         2.1   

Interest on $500 million syndicated revolving credit facility

     1.8         —     

Interest on the non-convertible redeemable preference shares

     —           1.3   

Interest on DMTN Program (Commercial Paper)

     —           1.1   

Interest on the $60 million Senior Secured Revolving credit facility

     1.6         1.0   

Other interest charges

     1.4         0.7   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Gross interest paid

     83.1         63.6   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Interest on the U.S.$1 billion guaranteed notes remained primarily unchanged at U.S.$49.6 million in fiscal 2012.

Interest on borrowings to fund capital expenditure and operating costs at the South African operations increased from U.S.$1.4 million in fiscal 2011 to U.S.$16.4 million in fiscal 2012 due to additional borrowings to fund working capital requirements of the South African operations due to the fire at the Ya Rona mine shaft and the illegal strike action.

Interest on the U.S.$200 million Non-Revolving Senior Secured Term Loan remained similar at U.S.$3.4 million in fiscal 2012.

Interest on the U.S.$1 billion Syndicated Revolving credit facility, Split-tenor Revolving credit facility and U.S.$500 million syndicated revolving credit facility increased from U.S.$4.6 million in fiscal 2011 to U.S.$10.7 million in fiscal 2012 due to additional borrowings.

Interest on the non-convertible Gold Fields’ preference shares decreased from U.S.$1.3 million in fiscal 2011 to U.S.$nil million in fiscal 2012 due to the redemption of the preference shares in fiscal 2011. See “—Liquidity and Capital Resources—Credit Facilities and Other Capital Resources.”

Interest on DMTN Program decreased from U.S.$1.1 million in fiscal 2011 to U.S.$nil million in fiscal 2012 due to the repayment of the commercial paper in fiscal 2011.

Interest on borrowings incurred in respect of assets requiring a substantial period of time to prepare for their intended use is capitalized to the date on which the assets are substantially completed and ready for their intended use, at which time they will be amortized over the lives of the corresponding assets. During fiscal 2012, U.S.$13.0 million was capitalized in respect of the South Deep’s mine development and ventilation shaft deepening projects compared to U.S.$9.3 million in fiscal 2011 in respect of the same.

(Loss)/gain on financial instruments

Gain on financial instruments was U.S.$4.4 million in fiscal 2011 compared to a loss of U.S.$0.4 million in fiscal 2012.

 

177


Table of Contents

The realized loss of U.S.$0.4 million in fiscal 2012 comprised:

 

     $ million  

Mark-to-market valuation of exploration junior warrants

     (1.1

Gain on Australian diesel hedge

     0.5   

Other

     0.2   
  

 

 

 
     (0.4
  

 

 

 

The realized gain of U.S.$4.4 million in fiscal 2011 comprised:

 

     $ million  

Gain on receipt of 15 million shares in Timpetra Resources Limited (1)

     3.2   

Mark-to-market gain on Atacama Pacific Corporation warrants

     1.0   

Other

     0.2   
  

 

 

 
     4.4   
  

 

 

 

 

Note:

(1) During fiscal 2011, 15 million Timpetra Resources Limited shares valued at U.S.$3.2 million were received in exchange for the Central Victoria tenements, or CVT, an Australian exploration project previously owned by Gold Fields. Because Gold Fields expensed CVT costs as incurred, on exchange of CVT for Timpetra shares, a financial gain of U.S.$3.2 million arose.

(Loss)/gain on foreign exchange

Gold Fields recognized an exchange loss of U.S.$13.8 million in fiscal 2012 compared to an exchange gain of U.S.$9.1 million in fiscal 2011.

The loss of U.S.$13.8 million in fiscal 2012 comprises:

 

     $ million  

Exchange loss on cash and cash equivalent balances held in currencies other than the functional currencies of the Gold Fields various subsidiary companies

     (10.1

Gain on repayment of U.S. dollar denominated intercompany loans

     (3.7
  

 

 

 
     (13.8
  

 

 

 

The gain of U.S.$9.1 million in fiscal 2011 comprises:

 

     $ million  

Gain on repayment of U.S. dollar denominated intercompany loans

     4.1   

Exchange gain on cash and cash equivalent balances held in currencies other than the functional currencies of the Gold Fields various subsidiary companies

     5.0   
  

 

 

 
     9.1   
  

 

 

 

Profit/(loss) on disposal of listed investments

During fiscal 2012 and 2011, Gold Fields liquidated certain non-current investments. The gain on disposal of listed investments increased from U.S.$12.8 million in fiscal 2011 to U.S.$27.6 million in fiscal 2012.

 

178


Table of Contents

The gain of U.S.$27.6 million in fiscal 2012 resulted from the following sales:

 

     $ million  

Gain on the sale of 5.6 million shares in Atacama Pacific Corporation

     7.7   

Gain on the sale of 14.0 million shares in GoldQuest Mining Corporation

     21.5   

Loss on the sale of 15.4 million shares in Evolution Mining Limited

     (1.6
  

 

 

 
     27.6   
  

 

 

 

The gain on of U.S.$12.8 million in fiscal 2011 resulted from the following sales:

 

     $ million  

Gain on the sale of 12.5 million shares in Gold One International Limited

     7.2   

Gain on exchange of 51.8 million Conquest Mining Limited shares for 15.5 million shares in Evolution Mining Limited

     5.6   
  

 

 

 
     12.8   
  

 

 

 

Impairment of listed investments

The charge in fiscal 2011 was U.S.$0.5 million compared with U.S.$10.5 million in fiscal 2012. The charge of U.S.$10.5 million in fiscal 2012 relates to the impairment of Northam Platinum Limited of U.S.$8.9 million and impairment of U.S.$1.6 million on various offshore listed exploration investments to their market values. The charge of U.S.$0.5 million in fiscal 2011 relates to impairment of various offshore listed exploration investments to their market values. The decline in market value below the carrying value of these investments was determined to be other than temporary.

Royalties

Royalties of U.S.$149.7 in fiscal 2011 compared with U.S.$151.2 million in fiscal 2012. Royalties in fiscal 2012 increased in line with higher revenues and profits at the international operations as well as an increase in the royalty rate in Ghana from 3% to 5% from April 1, 2011, partially offset by lower royalties at the South African operations due to the decrease in production and a weakening of the Rand against the U.S. dollar.

Other expenses

Other expenses represents miscellaneous corporate expenditure not allocated to the operations, net of miscellaneous revenue items such as scrap sales and rental income. In fiscal 2011, there were other expenses of U.S.$79.3 million compared with U.S.$77.4 million in fiscal 2012.

Other expenses in fiscal 2012 and fiscal 2011 consisted of miscellaneous items which included:

 

   

Corporate social investment and sponsorship costs;

 

   

Research and development into mechanized mining;

 

   

Loan facility charges;

 

   

Share-based compensation for service entities;

 

   

Restructuring costs as part of the business process re-engineering; and

 

   

Legal fees paid as a result of a dispute with a former mining contractor at the Ghanaian operation

 

179


Table of Contents

Income and mining tax expense

Income and mining tax expense decreased from U.S.$552.0 million in fiscal 2011 to U.S.$291.9 million in fiscal 2012. The table below sets forth Gold Fields’ effective tax rate for fiscal 2012 and fiscal 2011, including normal and deferred tax.

 

     Fiscal  
     2012     2011  

Effective tax expense rate

     29.3     36.6

As noted in “—Overview—Income and Mining Taxes”, during the budget speech in February 2012 the South African Minister of Finance announced that STC would be abolished. This resulted in there being only one gold mining formula to calculate mining income taxes. The revised formula was enacted on April 1, 2012, with effect from January 1, 2012, and resulted in a reduction in the maximum South African tax rate for mining companies from 43% to 34%.

In fiscal 2012, the effective tax expense rate of 29.3% was lower than the maximum South African mining statutory tax rate of 34% mainly due to the tax-effect of the following:

 

   

U.S.$34.5 million adjustment relating to the difference between the maximum rate and the actual rate arising from the application of the South African gold mining formula rate calculation;

 

   

U.S.$17.8 million adjustment to reflect the actual realized company tax rates in South Africa and offshore;

 

   

U.S.$137.3 million deferred tax release on reduction of the estimated future tax rate for brought forward deferred tax liabilities due to the reduction in the maximum mining rate and consequent impact in the gold mining tax rate formula in South Africa; and.

 

   

U.S.$58.2 million reversal of a portion of a valuation allowance previously raised against deferred tax assets. During fiscal 2012, the Group reversed a portion of the valuation allowance against unredeemed capital expenditure and net operating losses to the extent that there is sufficient future taxable income. In making this determination, the Group analyzed, amongst other things, the recent history of earnings and cashflows, forecasts of future earnings, the nature and timing of future deductions and benefits represented by deferred tax assets and the cumulative earnings for the last three years.

The above were offset by the following tax-effected charges:

 

   

U.S.$116.1 million of non-deductible expenditure comprising mainly share-based compensation of U.S.$23.8 million and U.S.$74.4 million exploration and feasibility and evaluation costs, and

 

   

U.S.$63.6 million deferred tax charge on increase in the tax rate in Ghana.

In fiscal 2011, the effective tax expense rate of 36.6% was lower than the maximum South African mining statutory tax rate of 43.0% mainly due to the tax-effect of the following:

 

   

U.S.$239.2 million adjustment to reflect the actual realized company tax rates in South Africa and offshore;

 

   

U.S.$11.9 million reduction relating to the South African mining tax formula rate adjustment;

 

   

U.S.$22.0 million reversal of valuation allowance previously raised against deferred tax assets; and

 

   

U.S.$9.1 million deferred tax release on reduction of the estimated rate at the Peruvian operation.

The above were offset by the following tax-effected charges:

 

   

U.S.$199.0 million non-deductible expenditure comprising mainly U.S.$24.5 million share-based compensation, U.S.$92.8 million exploration and feasibility and evaluation costs and U.S.$35.9 million National Stabilization Levy in Ghana.

Impairment of investment in equity investee

The impairment of investment in equity investee was U.S.$6.8 million in fiscal 2011 compared with U.S.$nil million in fiscal 2012 and related to Rusoro. The market value and carrying value of Rusoro at December 31, 2012 and December 31, 2011 was U.S.$6.3 million and U.S.$13.2 million, respectively. Gold Fields owned 26.4% of Rusoro at the end of fiscal 2012 and fiscal 2011.

 

180


Table of Contents

Share of equity investees’(losses)/profits

Share of equity investees’ profits was a profit of U.S.$4.0 million in fiscal 2011 and a loss of U.S.$51.7 million in fiscal 2012.

Gold Fields equity accounts for four associates; Rand Refinery Limited, Rusoro Mining Limited, Timpetra Resources Limited and from fiscal 2012, Far South East Gold Resources.

The Group’s 35% share of after-tax profits in Rand Refinery Limited was U.S.$12.0 million in fiscal 2012 compared with U.S.$5.0 million in fiscal 2011.

The Group’s 26.4% share of after-tax losses accounted for in Rusoro Mining Limited was U.S.$13.4 million in fiscal 2012 compared with U.S.$nil million in fiscal 2011. The share of Rusoro’s fiscal 2012 loss took into account U.S.$924.3 million impairment as a result of the expropriation of all of the company’s mining concessions, property, plant and equipment and mineral properties in Venezuela. The value of the investment is now below nil.

In August 2011, the late President of Venezuela Hugo Chavez Frias approved a decree with force of organic law which reserves to the State of Venezuela exclusive rights for the extraction of gold in Venezuela. The decree was subsequently approved by the Supreme Court of Venezuela and it was published in the Official Gazette of Venezuela in September 2011. The Venezuelan State announced that it is seeking a controlling stake of 55% in Rusoro and as such, Rusoro would be compensated for its decrease in ownership. The deadline to negotiate the compensation with the Venezuelan government lapsed and all assets and operations reverted to the Venezuelan government who took possession and control of the company. Rusoro filed a Request for Arbitration against the government due to non-payment of a fair, prompt and timely compensation as a result of the nationalization.

During fiscal 2011, the Group acquired a 21.8% interest in Timpetra Resources Limited as a result of receiving 15 million Timpetra Resources Limited shares valued at U.S.$3.2 million. Timpetra Resources is an Australian listed junior exploration company and the shares were received in exchange for the Central Victoria tenements, an Australian exploration project previously owned by St. Ives. The Group’s 21.8% share of after-tax losses in Timpetra was U.S.$0.2 million during fiscal 2012 and U.S.$1.0 million in fiscal 2011.

Gold Fields paid U.S.$10.0 million in option fees to Lepanto Consolidated Mining Company during the six month period ended December 31, 2010. In addition, Gold Fields paid non-refundable down payments of U.S.$66.0 million during the year ended December 31, 2011 and U.S.$44.0 million during the six month period ended December 31, 2010 to Liberty Express Assets in accordance with the agreement concluded whereby the Group has the option to acquire 60% of FSE. On March 31, 2012, Gold Fields acquired 40% of the issued share capital of FSE by contributing an additional U.S.$110.0 million in accordance with the agreement’s terms. The Group’s share of losses in FSE was U.S.$50.1 million in fiscal 2012.

Net income

As a result of the factors discussed above, Gold Fields’ net income was U.S.$652.5 million in fiscal 2012, compared with net income of U.S.$953.0 million in fiscal 2011.

Net income attributable to noncontrolling interests

Net income attributable to noncontrolling interests was U.S.$71.5 million in fiscal 2011 compared to a loss of U.S.$1.8 million in fiscal 2012. Due to the purchase of noncontrolling interests in Tarkwa, Damang, Cerro Corona in the first half of fiscal 2011 and Living Gold in the first half of fiscal 2012, net income attributable to noncontrolling interests decreased.

 

181


Table of Contents

The noncontrolling interests in Gold Fields Ghana (Tarkwa) and Abosso Goldfields (Damang) remained at 10.0% during fiscal 2012; at La Cima (Cerro Corona) noncontrolling interest decreased from 1.5% in fiscal 2011 to 1.4 % in fiscal 2012 (effective interest for the year of 1.5%) and at Living Gold (Pty) Limited, noncontrolling interest increased from 0.0% in fiscal 2011 to 10.0% in fiscal 2012 (effective interest for the year of 10.0%).

The noncontrolling interest in Canteras del Hallazgo remained at 49.0% (fiscal 2011: 49.0%). Canteras del Hallazgo is a subsidiary company that owns the Chucapaca project.

The amounts making up the noncontrolling interests in fiscal 2012 and 2011 were:

 

     Effective
interest
    Fiscal 2012     Effective
interest
    Fiscal 2011  

Gold Fields Ghana Limited—Tarkwa

     10.0     20.6        19.1     72.0   

Abosso Goldfields—Damang

     10.0     (0.3     19.9     13.6   

La Cima—Cerro Corona

     1.5     3.1        7.4     14.9   

Canteras del Hallazgo

     49.0     (25.3     49.0     (28.9

Living Gold (Pty) Limited

     10.0     0.1        3.4     (0.1
    

 

 

     

 

 

 
       (1.8       71.5   
    

 

 

     

 

 

 

Net income attributable to Gold Fields shareholders

As a result of the factors discussed above, net income attributable to Gold Fields shareholders was U.S.$654.3 million in fiscal 2012 compared to U.S.$881.5 million in fiscal 2011.

Years Ended December 31, 2011 and June 30, 2010

Revenues

Product sales increased by U.S.$1,635.8 million, or 39.3%, from U.S.$4,164.3 million in fiscal 2010 to U.S.$5,800.1 million in fiscal 2011. The increase in product sales was primarily due to an increase in the average realized gold price of 44.6% from U.S.$1,085 per ounce in fiscal 2010 to U.S.$1,569 per ounce in fiscal 2011 and an increase in the average realized copper price of 30.1% from U.S.$6,273 per tonne to U.S.$8,160 per tonne, coupled with a decrease of approximately 0.14 million equivalent ounces, or 3.6%, in total equivalent gold sold, from 3.837 million ounces in fiscal 2010 to 3.697 million ounces in fiscal 2011.

At the Cerro Corona operation in Peru copper production was converted to equivalent gold ounces on a monthly basis using average copper and gold prices for the month in which the copper was produced.

At the South African operations, gold sales decreased from 1.93 million ounces in fiscal 2010 to 1.72 million ounces in fiscal 2011, primarily as a result of safety related stoppages and wage related industrial action. At KDC, gold sales decreased by 13.9% to 1.10 million ounces due to wage related industrial action and safety related stoppages, resulting in lower underground mining volumes at lower grades. At Beatrix, gold sales decreased from 0.39 million ounces to 0.35 million ounces mainly due to lower mining grade in the North section, lower volumes mined and lower mine call factor. At South Deep, gold sales increased from 0.26 million ounces in fiscal 2010 to 0.27 million ounces for fiscal 2011, through an increase in long hole stoping and benching, despite wage-related industrial action. The 38.5% increase in volumes mined was partly offset by a 19.0% decrease in underground yield from 6.3 grams per tonne to 5.1 grams per tonne, mainly due to lower production from the higher grade 95 3 West area and increased infrastructure development, which cuts through the lower grade reefs in the current mine area, required for access to additional de-stress mining projects.

At the West African operations, total gold sales remained relatively flat at 0.94 million ounces in fiscal 2011 compared to 0.93 million ounces in fiscal 2010. This was mainly due to Tarkwa remaining flat at 0.72 million ounces in fiscal 2011. Damang’s gold sales increased by 5.0% from 0.21 million ounces to 0.22 million ounces due to the commissioning of the secondary crusher in the last quarter of fiscal 2010 which allowed more higher grade fresh ore to be treated.

 

182


Table of Contents

At the South American operation of Cerro Corona in Peru, total gold equivalent sales decreased from 0.39 million gold equivalent ounces in fiscal 2010 to 0.38 million gold equivalent ounces in fiscal 2011, mainly due to lower copper prices relative to gold prices used to calculate equivalent production.

At the Australasian operations, total gold sales increased from 0.59 million ounces in fiscal 2010 to 0.66 million ounces in fiscal 2011. At St. Ives, gold sales increased by 10.5% from 0.42 million ounces to 0.47 million ounces due to increased ore mined at Athena underground and the Diana, Formidable and Mars/Minotaur link, partially offset by the closure of Belleisle in May 2011. At Agnew, gold sales increased by 17.6% from 0.17 million ounces in fiscal 2010 to 0.19 million ounces fiscal 2011 due to improved performance at the Waroonga underground mine and additional ore mined at Songvang.

Costs and Expenses

The following table sets out Gold Fields’ total ounces sold and weighted average total cash costs and total production costs per ounce for fiscal 2010 and fiscal 2011.

 

     Fiscal 2010      Fiscal 2011      Percentage
increase/
(decrease)
in unit
total cash
costs
     Percentage
increase/
(decrease)
in unit
total
production
costs
 
     Gold sold      Total  cash
costs (1)
     Total
production
costs (2)
     Gold sold      Total  cash
costs (1)
     Total
production
costs (2)
       
     (‘000 oz)      ($/oz)      ($/oz)      (‘000 oz)      ($/oz)      ($/oz)      (%)      (%)  

South Africa

     1,933         741         925         1,720         982         1,231         33         33   

KDC

     —           —           —           1,100         963         1,206         N/A         N/A   

Driefontein

     710         691         826         —           —           —           N/A         N/A   

Kloof

     567         769         979         —           —           —           N/A         N/A   

Beatrix

     392         741         939         347         969         1,199         31         28   

South Deep

     264         816         1,056         273         1,073         1,376         31         30   

Ghana

     928         645         726         935         712         794         10         9   

Tarkwa (3)

     721         652         745         717         668         752         2         1   

Damang (4)

     207         621         661         218         855         932         38         41   

Peru

     390         348         505         383         447         632         28         25   

Cerro Corona (5)

     390         348         505         383         447         632         28         25   

Australia (6)

     586         692         957         659         849         1,150         23         20   

St. Ives

     421         755         1,073         465         882         1,244         17         16   

Agnew

     165         531         660         194         769         926         45         40   
  

 

 

          

 

 

             

Total (7)(8)

     3,837         —           —           3,697         —           —           —           —     

Weighted average

     —           670         844         —           835         1,050         25         24   

 

Notes:

(1) For information on how Gold Fields has calculated total cash costs per ounce, see “Key Information—Selected Historical Consolidated Financial Data—Statement of Operations Data—Footnote 4”.
(2) For information on how Gold Fields has calculated total production costs per ounce, see “Key Information—Selected Historical Consolidated Financial Data—Statement of Operations Data—Footnote 5”.
(3) In fiscal 2010 and 2011, 0.513 million ounces and 0.576 million ounces of sales, respectively, were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to noncontrolling shareholders in the Tarkwa operation.
(4) In fiscal 2010 and 2011, 0.147 million ounces and 0.175 million ounces of sales, respectively, were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to noncontrolling shareholders in the Damang operation.
(5) In fiscal 2010 and 2011, 0.315 million ounces and 0.356 million ounces of sales were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to noncontrolling shareholders in the Cerro Corona operation.

 

183


Table of Contents
(6) The consideration paid for the Australian operations in excess of the book value of the underlying net assets was allocated pro rata to the value of the underlying assets, which affected the allocation of amortization between St. Ives and Agnew.
(7) In fiscal 2010 and 2011, 3.494 million ounces and 3.485 million ounces of sales, respectively, were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to noncontrolling shareholders in the Ghana and Peru operations.
(8) The total may not reflect the sum of the line items due to rounding.

The following tables set out a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ production costs to its total cash costs and total production costs for fiscal 2011 and fiscal 2010.

 

    For the year ended December 31, 2011  
    KDC     Beatrix     South
Deep
    Tarkwa     Damang     St. Ives     Agnew     Cerro
Corona
    Corporate     Group (6)  
    (in $ million except as otherwise stated) (1)  

Production Costs

    1,028.7        335.1        299.0        450.3        173.9        401.2        145.7        158.8        (3.7     2,989.0   

Less:

                   

G&A other than corporate costs

    (14.6     (2.9     (3.1     (29.8     (2.9     (8.0     (5.0     2.5        3.7        (60.1

GIP adjustment (2)

    —          —          —          12.0        1.4        0.8        1.4        (1.7     —          13.9   

Share-based payments

    (16.9     (5.8     (5.1     (4.3     (1.8     (2.5     (0.8     (3.2     —          (40.4

Plus: Employee termination costs

    27.0        4.9        0.1        —          —          —          —          —          0.8        32.8   

Royalties

    35.5        4.6        2.1        51.0        15.5        18.4        7.9        14.7        —          149.7   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total cash costs (6)

    1,059.7        335.9        293.0        479.2        186.1        409.9        149.3        171.1        0.8        3,084.9   

Plus: Amortization (2)

    238.9        71.1        76.6        53.9        14.8        161.1        27.2        66.1        20.5        730.1   

Share-based payments

    16.9        5.8        5.1        4.3        1.8        2.5        0.8        3.2        —          40.4   

Rehabilitation

    10.8        2.9        1.0        1.8        0.3        4.2        2.3        1.7        —          24.9   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total production costs (6)

    1,326.3        415.7        375.7        539.2        203.0        577.7        179.6        242.1        21.3        3,880.3   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gold produced (‘000 oz) (3)

    1,100.1        346.8        273.0        717.3        217.7        464.5        194.0        383.1        —          3,696.7   

Gold sold (‘000 oz)

    1,100.1        346.8        273.0        717.3        217.7        464.5        194.0        383.0        —          3,696.6   

Total cash costs ($/oz) (4)

    963        969        1,073        668        855        882        769        447        —          835   

Total production
costs ($/oz)
(5)

    1,206        1,199        1,376        752        932        1,244        926        632        —          1,050   

 

Notes:

(1) Calculated using an exchange rate of R7.22 per U.S.$1.00.
(2) The GIP adjustment excludes the non-cash portion of GIP which is included in amortization. GIP represents gold in the processing circuit, which is expected to be recovered.
(3) For the year ended December 2011, 3.485 million ounces of production were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to noncontrolling shareholders in the Ghana and Cerro Corona operations.
(4) For information on how Gold Fields has calculated total cash costs per ounce, see “Key Information—Selected Historical Consolidated Financial Data—Statement of Operations Data—Footnote 4”.
(5) For information on how Gold Fields has calculated total production costs per ounce, see “Key Information—Selected Historical Consolidated Financial Data—Statement of Operations Data—Footnote 5”.
(6) The total may not reflect the sum of the line items due to rounding.

 

184


Table of Contents
    For the year ended June 30, 2010  
    Driefontein     Kloof     Beatrix     South
Deep
    Tarkwa     Damang     St. Ives     Agnew     Cerro
Corona
    Corporate     Group (6)  
    (in $ millions except as otherwise stated) (1)  

Production Costs

    494.6        442.0        293.9        219.7        456.1        124.4        321.7        93.1        128.1               2,573.6   

Less:

                     

G&A other than corporate costs

    5.5        4.6        2.9        1.6        18.3        2.4        6.1        2.9        1.4        —          45.7   

GIP adjustment (2)

    —          —          —          —          (6.4     —          (4.1     0.2        (0.6     —          (10.9

Exploration

    —          —          —          —          —          —          12.0        6.3        —          —          18.3   

Share-based payments

    (7.1     (6.4     (4.1     (3.2     (3.2     (1.5     (1.3     (0.7     (2.1     —          (29.6

Plus: Employee termination costs

    2.6        3.4        2.7        0.7        —          —          —          0.3        —          0.6        10.3   

Royalties

    5.8        1.1        0.7        0.5        29.0        8.2        11.6        4.4        10.3        —          71.6   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total cash costs (6)

    490.4        435.5        290.3        216.1        470.0        128.7        318.0        87.7        135.5        0.6        2,572.8   

Plus: Amortization (2)

    84.0        109.7        71.2        59.5        62.1        6.5        129.3        19.1        59.7        19.2        620.3   

Share-based payments

    7.1        6.4        4.1        3.2        3.2        1.5        1.3        0.7        2.1        —          29.6   

Rehabilitation

    4.7        3.2        2.5        0.7        1.5        0.3        3.3        1.6        1.5        —          19.3   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total production costs (6)

    586.2        554.8        368.1        279.5        536.8        137.0        451.9        109.1        198.8        19.8        3,242.0   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gold produced (‘000 oz) (3)

    709.8        566.5        391.9        264.8        720.7        207.4        421.1        165.2        393.6        —          3,841.0   

Gold sold (‘000 oz)

    709.8        566.5        391.9        264.8        720.7        207.4        421.1        165.2        389.9        —          3,837.3   

Total cash costs ($/oz) (4)

    691        769        741        816        652        621        755        531        348        —          670   

Total production costs ($/oz) (5)

    826        979        939        1,056        745        661        1,073        660        505        —          844   

 

Notes:

(1) Calculated using an exchange rate of R7.58 per U.S.$1.00.
(2) The GIP adjustment excludes the non-cash portion of GIP which is included in amortization. GIP represents gold in the processing circuit, which is expected to be recovered.
(3) In fiscal 2010, 3.497 million ounces of production were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to noncontrolling shareholders in the Ghana and Cerro Corona operations.
(4) For information on how Gold Fields has calculated total cash costs per ounce, see “Key Information—Selected Historical Consolidated Financial Data—Statement of Operations Data—Footnote 4”.
(5) For information on how Gold Fields has calculated total production costs per ounce, see “Key Information—Selected Historical Consolidated Financial Data—Statement of Operations Data—Footnote 5”.
(6) The total may not reflect the sum of the line items due to rounding.

Gold Fields’ weighted average total cash costs per ounce increased by U.S.$165 per ounce, or 24.6%, from U.S.$670 per ounce in fiscal 2010 to U.S.$835 per ounce in fiscal 2011.

The weighted average total cash costs at the South African operations increased by U.S.$241 per ounce, or 32.5%, from U.S.$741 per ounce in fiscal 2010 to U.S.$982 per ounce in fiscal 2011. This increase was as a result of the increase in electricity tariffs, inflationary increases, wage increases, the 4.7% strengthening of the Rand against the U.S. dollar and lower production.

The weighted average total cash costs at the West African operations increased by U.S.$67 per ounce, or 10.4%, from U.S.$645 per ounce in fiscal 2010 to U.S.$712 per ounce in fiscal 2011. This increase was as a result of the increase in electricity tariffs and fuel prices.

 

185


Table of Contents

The weighted average total cash costs per ounce at the South American operation increased by U.S.$99 per ounce, or 28.4%, from U.S.$348 per ounce in fiscal 2010 to U.S.$447 per ounce in fiscal 2011. This increase was due to the decrease in gold equivalent ounces sold and the increase in statutory workers participation as a result of increased profits.

The weighted average total cash costs per ounce at the Australasian operations increased by U.S.$157 per ounce, or 22.7%, from U.S.$692 per ounce in fiscal 2010 to U.S.$849 per ounce in fiscal 2011. This increase was due to inflationary increases, wage increases, increases in fuel prices and contractor costs at St. Ives and the increase in more expensive ounces mined from Songvang at Agnew. This was partially offset by increased production at both St. Ives and Agnew.

Production costs

Production costs increased by U.S.$415.4 million, or 16.1%, from U.S.$2,573.6 million in fiscal 2010 to U.S.$2,989.0 million in fiscal 2011.

This increase was due to the 4.7% strengthening of the South African Rand against the U.S. dollar, inflationary increases, annual wage increases, increases in electricity tariffs in South Africa and Ghana, increases in fuel prices in Ghana and Australia, an increase in production in Australia and the increase in statutory workers participation in Cerro Corona as a result of increase in profits.

Depreciation and amortization

Depreciation and amortization charges increased by U.S.$114.2 million, or 18.1%, from U.S.$631.1 million in fiscal 2010 to U.S.$745.3 million in fiscal 2011. Depreciation and amortization is calculated on the units-of-production method and is based on current gold production as a percentage of total expected gold production over the lives of the different mines. In South Africa the increase was due to the stronger Rand, the increase in short life ore reserve development which is amortized over a shorter period at KDC and the capital build-up at South Deep. The increase in Ghana was mainly at Tarkwa due to the increase in production and additional amortization on the CIL expansion and the high pressure grinding rolls (HPGR). In Australia the increase was mainly due to the increase in production at St. Ives where amortization rates on the Formidable pit, Mars Minotaur Link and Diana pit is much higher than that of the previously mined Leviathan pit.

 

186


Table of Contents

The table below depicts the changes from June 30, 2010 to December 31, 2011 for proven and probable reserves above current infrastructure and for the LoM for each operation and the resulting impact on the amortization charge in fiscal 2010 and 2011, respectively. The LoM information is based on the operations’ strategic plans, adjusted for proven and probable reserve balances. In basic terms, amortization is calculated using the LoM for each operation, which is based on: (1) the proven and probable reserves above infrastructure for the operation at the start of the relevant year (which are taken to be the same as at the end of the prior fiscal year and using only above infrastructure reserves); and (2) the amount of gold produced by the operation during the year. The ore reserve statement as at December 31, 2011 became effective on January 1, 2012.

 

     Proven and probable
reserves as of
     Life of mine (1)      Amortization for
the year ended
 
     June 30,
2010
     Dec 31,
2010
     Dec 31,
2011
     Dec 31,
2010
     Dec 31,
2011
     June 30,
2010
     Dec 31,
2011
 
     (’000 oz)      (years)      (U.S.$ million)  

South African Region

                    

KDC

     17,600         16,500         16,600         19         17         193.8         238.9   

Beatrix

     5,400         5,500         5,000         13         15         71.2         71.1   

South Deep

     16,900         28,800         30,000         54         69         59.5         76.6   

West African Region

                    

Tarkwa (2)

     9,900         9,300         10,300         14.5         13         54.9         79.4   

Damang (3)

     2,100         2,000         3,400         9.5         14         6.6         13.2   

South American Region

                    

Cerro Corona (4)

     2,700         2,700         6,100         16         17         60.3         64.4   

Australasian Region (5)

                    

St. Ives

     2,300         2,800         2,800         5         7         136.8         155.9   

Agnew

     1,200         1,300         1,300         6         8         15.5         25.3   

Corporate and other

     —           —           —                 19.0         20.5   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

          

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     58,100         68,900         75,500               631.1         745.3   
                 

 

 

    

 

 

 

Reserves below infrastructure (6)

     21,300         9,500         9,600               
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

             

Total reserves (7)

     79,400         78,400         85,100               
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

             

 

Notes:

(1) The LoM for each operation shown in the above table differs from that shown in “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations.” The LoM in the above table is based on the above infrastructure proven and probable reserves, whereas the LoM information in “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations” is based on both above and below infrastructure proven and probable reserves.
(2) As of June 30, 2010, December 31, 2010 and December 31, 2011 reserves of 7.038 million ounces, 6.576 million ounces and 9.310 million ounces of gold, respectively, were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to noncontrolling shareholders in the Tarkwa operation.
(3) As of June 30, 2010, December 31, 2010 and December 31, 2011 reserves of 1.493 million ounces, 1.479 million ounces and 3.051 million ounces of gold, respectively, were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to noncontrolling shareholders in the Damang operation.
(4) As of June 30, 2010, December 31, 2010 and December 31, 2011 reserves of 2.179 million ounces, 2.156 million ounces and 6.011 million ounces of equivalent gold were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to noncontrolling shareholders in the Cerro Corona operation.
(5) The consideration paid for the Australian operations in excess of the book value of the underlying net assets was allocated pro rata to the value of the underlying assets, which affected the allocation of amortization between St. Ives and Agnew.
(6) Below infrastructure reserves relate to mineralization which is located at a level at which an operation currently does not have infrastructure sufficient to allow mining operations to occur, but where the operation has made plans to install additional infrastructure in the future which will allow mining to occur at that level.

 

187


Table of Contents
(7) As of June 30, 2010, December 31, 2010 and December 31, 2011 reserves of 75.940 million ounces, 74.571 million ounces and 77.612 million ounces of gold, respectively, were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to noncontrolling shareholders in the West African and South American operations.

Corporate expenditure

Corporate expenditure decreased from U.S.$54.5 million in fiscal 2010 to U.S.$37.6 million in fiscal 2011, a decrease of 31.0%. The decrease is mainly due to the strengthening of the Rand against the U.S. dollar and the effect of corporate restructuring which commenced during calendar 2010. Corporate expenditure consists primarily of general corporate overhead and corporate service department costs, primarily in the areas of technical services, human resources and finance, which are used by the operations. Corporate expenditure also includes business development costs. In Rand terms, corporate expenditure decreased to R271.5 million in fiscal 2011 from R413.1 million in fiscal 2010 mainly due to the reallocation of costs to the operations as well as restructuring savings.

Employee termination costs

Employee termination costs increased from U.S.$10.3 million in fiscal 2010 to U.S.$32.8 million in fiscal 2011. The termination costs in fiscal 2011 and 2010 related primarily to restructuring at the South African operations as part of the BPR program.

Exploration expenditure

Exploration expenditure increased from U.S.$86.6 million in fiscal 2010 to U.S.$125.4 million in fiscal 2011, an increase of 44.8%. The bulk of the expenditure was incurred on a diversified pipeline of projects in Africa, Australia, Asia and North, South and Central America, with the increase in fiscal 2011 due primarily to a higher spend on advanced stage exploration projects; U.S.$14.7 million on Arctic platinum project in Finland and U.S.$23.0 million on Yanfolila in Mali, U.S.$15.0 million on FSE in the Philippines, U.S.$8.0 million on Woodjam in Canada and U.S.$4 million on Tacna, Moquequa and Amantina in Peru. Subject to continued exploration success, exploration expenditure is expected to be U.S.$110 million in fiscal 2012. See “Information on the Company—Growth & International Projects” .

Feasibility and evaluation costs

Feasibility and evaluation expenditure increased from nil in fiscal 2010 to U.S.$95.2 million in fiscal 2011, comprising U.S.$59.0 million on Chucapaca in Peru on a 100% basis, U.S.$17.4 million on the FSE project in the Philippines and U.S.$18.8 million on the Greater Damang project in Ghana.

(Loss)/profit on disposal of property, plant and equipment

Profit on disposal of property, plant and equipment was U.S.$0.3 million in fiscal 2010 compared to a loss of U.S.$0.4 million in fiscal 2011.

The major disposals in fiscal 2011 related to the sale of various redundant assets primarily at Tarkwa, La Cima and KDC whereas in fiscal 2010, they related to the sale of surplus housing at Beatrix.

Impairment of assets

There was no impairment of assets in fiscal 2010 compared with U.S.$9.5 million in fiscal 2011. The impairment charge in fiscal 2011 resulted from the decision to reassess the optimal processing methodology for the oxides at Cerro Corona, where the current focus is on the evaluation of a heap leach operation to capture the value inherent in the oxide instead of a stand-alone oxide plant; the evaluation costs of which were written off this year.

 

188


Table of Contents

Increase/(decrease) in provision for post-retirement healthcare costs

In South Africa, Gold Fields provides medical benefits to employees in its operations through the Gold Fields Medical Scheme.

Under the medical plan which covers certain of its former employees, Gold Fields remains liable for 50% of these retired employees’ medical contributions after their retirement. At December 31, 2011, 128 (fiscal 2010: 166) former employees were covered under this plan. This benefit is not available to members of the scheme who were employees of the former Free State operation (which is now the Beatrix operation) who retired after August 31, 1997, and other employees who retired after January 31, 1999.

As part of the acquisition of South Deep, Gold Fields assumed an additional post-retirement healthcare cost liability. Former employees of South Deep belonged to a commercial medical scheme with employer liability for contribution per pensioner limited to R400 per month. The R400 monthly contribution was fixed until the termination of Gold Fields’ obligations on December 31, 2011. At June 30, 2010, there were 182 former South Deep employees that were subject to this employer contribution.

In fiscal 2011, U.S.$0.1 million was charged to earnings compared with a U.S.$9.4 million credit to earnings in respect of Gold Fields’ obligations under these medical plans in fiscal 2010. The U.S.$0.1 million charge in fiscal 2011 comprises the annual interest and service charge. The U.S.$9.4 million credit comprises the annual interest and service charge and a decrease in the cross subsidization liability, partly due to the buy-out of 22 members. The post-retirement healthcare provision is updated annually based on actuarial calculations, with any increase in the provision reflected in the statement of operations.

Accretion expense on provision for environmental rehabilitation

At all of its operations, Gold Fields makes full provision for environmental rehabilitation based on the net present value of the estimated cost of restoring the environmental disturbance that has occurred up to the balance sheet date. The rehabilitation charge increased from U.S.$19.3 million in fiscal 2010 to U.S.$24.9 million in fiscal 2011. The increase is due primarily to the effect of higher estimated inflation for fiscal 2011 compared to fiscal 2010.

For its South African operations, Gold Fields contributes to environmental trust funds it has established to provide for any environmental rehabilitation obligations and expected closure costs relating to its mining operations. The amounts invested in the trust funds are classified as non-current assets and any income earned on these assets is accounted for as interest income. For the Ghanaian, Australian and Peruvian operations Gold Fields does not contribute to a trust fund.

Interest and dividends

Interest and dividend income decreased from U.S.$40.2 million in fiscal 2010 to U.S.$25.4 million in fiscal 2011. The decrease was mainly due to lower interest rates in fiscal 2011 compared to fiscal 2010.

The interest and dividends received in fiscal 2011 of U.S.$25.4 million comprised U.S.$0.5 million in dividend income, U.S.$9.7 million on monies invested in the South African environmental rehabilitation trust funds and U.S.$15.2 million on other cash and cash equivalent balances.

The interest and dividends received in fiscal 2010 of U.S.$40.2 million comprised U.S.$0.1 million in dividend income, U.S.$8.7 million on monies invested in the South African environmental rehabilitation trust funds and U.S.$31.4 million on other cash and cash equivalent balances.

Interest received on the funds invested in rehabilitation trust funds increased from U.S.$8.7 million in fiscal 2010 to U.S.$9.7 million in fiscal 2011 mainly due to a an interest adjustment on maturity, in November 2011, of a consumer-price-index-linked security comprising the trust fund investment portfolio.

 

189


Table of Contents

Interest on cash balances decreased from U.S.$31.4 million in fiscal 2010 to U.S.$15.2 million in fiscal 2011 mainly due to the lower interest rates in fiscal 2011 compared with fiscal 2010.

Finance expense

Finance expense decreased from U.S.$65.2 million in fiscal 2010 to U.S.$54.3 million in fiscal 2011.

Net finance expense in fiscal 2011 consisted of gross interest payments of U.S.$63.6 million (2010: U.S.$71.7 million) partially offset by interest capitalized of U.S.$9.3 million (2010: U.S.$6.5 million).

The interest payments in fiscal 2011 and 2010 comprised:

 

     Fiscal 2011      Fiscal 2010  
     (U.S.$ million)  

Interest on the U.S.$1 billion 4.875% guaranteed notes due October 7, 2020

     50.0         —     

Interest on the U.S.$200 million Non-Revolving Senior Secured Term Loan

     3.5         —     

Interest on the U.S.$1 billion Syndicated Revolving credit facility

     2.5         —     

Interest on the Split-tenor Revolving credit facility

     2.1         3.6   

Interest on borrowings to fund capital expenditure and operating costs at the South African operations

     1.4         24.0   

Interest on the non-convertible redeemable preference shares

     1.3         5.9   

Interest on DMTN Program (Commercial Paper)

     1.1         27.4   

Interest on the U.S.$60 million Senior Secured Revolving credit facility

     1.0         —     

Forward cover costs on the foreign exchange contract taken out on the revolving credit facility

     —           5.0   

Interest on Project Finance loan—La Cima (Cerro Corona)

     —           5.1   

Other interest charges

     0.7         0.7   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Gross interest paid

     63.6         71.7   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Interest on the U.S.$1 billion guaranteed notes increased from nil in fiscal 2010 to U.S.$50.0 million in fiscal 2011 due to the issue of the notes on September 30, 2010.

Interest on borrowings to fund capital expenditure and operating costs at the South African operations decreased from U.S.$24.0 million in fiscal 2010 to U.S.$1.4 million in fiscal 2011 due to the repayment of the borrowings.

Interest on the non-convertible Gold Fields’ preference shares decreased from U.S.$5.9 million in fiscal 2010 to U.S.$1.3 million in fiscal 2011 because in March 2011, the entire outstanding balance of U.S.$90 million (including U.S.$1.5 million of associated interest) of preference shares to Rand Merchant Bank, was redeemed. See “—Liquidity and Capital Resources—Credit Facilities and Other Capital Resources.”

Interest on DMTN Program decreased from U.S.$27.4 million in fiscal 2010 to U.S.$1.1 million in fiscal 2011 due to the repayment of the commercial paper in fiscal 2011.

Forward cover costs on the foreign exchange contract decreased from U.S.$5.0 million in fiscal 2010 to nil in fiscal 2011 due to the settlement of the forward cover on September 17, 2009.

Interest on the Project Finance loan decreased from U.S.$5.1 million in fiscal 2010 to nil in fiscal 2011 due to the facility being repaid on September 16, 2010.

 

190


Table of Contents

Interest on borrowings incurred in respect of assets requiring a substantial period of time to prepare for their intended use is capitalized to the date on which the assets are substantially completed and ready for their intended use, at which time they will be amortized over the lives of the corresponding assets. During fiscal 2011, U.S.$9.3 million was capitalized in respect of the South Deep’s mine development and ventilation shaft deepening projects compared to U.S.$6.5 million in fiscal 2010 in respect of the same.

Gain/(loss) on financial instruments

Gain on financial instruments decreased from U.S.$27.7 million in fiscal 2010 to U.S.$4.4 million in fiscal 2011.

The realized gain in fiscal 2011 comprised:

 

     U.S.$ million  

Gain on receipt of 15 million shares in Timpetra Resources Limited (1)

     3.2   

Mark-to-market gain on Atacama Pacific Corporation warrants

     1.0   

Other

     0.2   
  

 

 

 
     4.4   
  

 

 

 

 

Note:

(1) During fiscal 2011, 15 million Timpetra Resources Limited shares valued at U.S.$3.2 million were received in exchange for the CVT an Australian exploration project previously owned by Gold Fields. Because Gold Fields expensed CVT costs as incurred, on exchange of CVT for Timpetra shares, a financial gain of U.S.$3.2 million arose.

The realized gain in fiscal 2010 comprised:

 

     U.S.$ million  

Gain on receipt of 4 million top-up shares in Eldorado Gold Corporation (1)

     53.6   

Loss on the copper financial instruments

     (25.9

Loss on the International Petroleum Exchange Gasoil call option

     (0.3

Other

     0.3   
  

 

 

 
     27.7   
  

 

 

 

 

Note:

(1) During fiscal 2010, 58 million Sino Gold shares were exchanged for 28 million shares in Eldorado. Subsequently, a further four million top-up shares were received from Eldorado. All of the Eldorado shares, including the top-up shares were liquidated during fiscal 2010, resulting in a total profit of U.S.$99.9 million, of which U.S.$53.6 million relating to the top-up shares was recognized as a gain on financial instruments.

The loss on copper financial instruments in fiscal 2010 was due to the forward sale, during June 2009, of 8,705 tonnes of Cerro Corona’s expected copper production for monthly deliveries from June 24, 2009 to June 23, 2010. The average forward price for the monthly deliveries was U.S.$5,001 per tonne. An additional 8,705 tonnes of Cerro Corona’s expected copper production for fiscal 2010 was hedged by means of a zero cost collar, guaranteeing a minimum price of U.S.$4,600 per tonne with full participation up to a maximum price of U.S.$5,400 per tonne.

 

191


Table of Contents

Gain/(loss) on foreign exchange

Gold Fields recognized an exchange gain of U.S.$9.1 million in fiscal 2011 compared to an exchange loss of U.S.$8.5 million in fiscal 2010.

The gain of U.S.$9.1 million in fiscal 2011 comprises:

 

     U.S.$ million  

Gain on repayment of U.S. dollar denominated intercompany loans

     4.1   

Exchange gain on cash and cash equivalent balances held in currencies other than the functional currencies of the Gold Fields various subsidiary companies

     5.0   
  

 

 

 
     9.1   
  

 

 

 

The loss of U.S.$8.5 million in fiscal 2010 comprises:

 

     U.S.$ million  

Loss on Australian dollar denominated intercompany loans

     (6.4

Exchange losses on cash and cash equivalent balances held in currencies other than the functional currencies of the Gold Fields various subsidiary companies

     (2.1
  

 

 

 
     (8.5
  

 

 

 

Profit/(loss) on disposal of listed investments

During fiscal 2011 and 2010, Gold Fields liquidated certain non-current investments. The gain on disposal of listed investments decreased from U.S.$111.7 million in fiscal 2010 to U.S.$12.8 million in fiscal 2011.

The gain on of U.S.$12.8 million in fiscal 2011 resulted from the following sales:

 

     U.S.$ million  

Gain on the sale of 12.5 million shares in Gold One International Limited

     7.2   

Gain on exchange of 51.8 million Conquest Mining Limited shares for 15.5 million shares in Evolution Mining Limited

     5.6   
  

 

 

 
     12.8   
  

 

 

 

The gain of U.S.$111.7 million in fiscal 2010 resulted from the following sales:

 

     U.S.$ million  

Gain on exchange of 58 million Sino Gold shares for 28 million shares in Eldorado Gold Corporation (1)

     59.0   

Gain on sale of 32 million Eldorado Gold Corporation shares acquired through the Sino Gold Inc. share exchange (28 million) plus a further 4 million top-up shares

     46.2   

Gain from sale of Troy Resources shares

     3.9   

Gain from sale of Orezone Resources shares

     1.3   

Gain from sale of equity shares held through the New Africa Mining Fund

     1.1   

Gain from sale of Aquarius Platinum Ltd

     0.2   
  

 

 

 
     111.7   
  

 

 

 

 

192


Table of Contents

 

Note:

(1) During fiscal 2010, 58 million Sino Gold shares were exchanged for 28 million shares in Eldorado. Subsequently, a further four million top-up shares were received from Eldorado. All of the Eldorado shares, including the top-up shares were liquidated during fiscal 2010, resulting in a total profit of U.S.$99.9 million, of which U.S.$53.6 million relating to the top-up shares was recognized as a gain on financial instruments.

Impairment of listed investments

The charge in fiscal 2010 was U.S.$8.1 million compared with U.S.$0.5 million in fiscal 2011 and relates to the impairment of various offshore listed exploration investments to their market values. The decline in market value below the carrying value of these investments was determined to be other than temporary.

Royalties

Royalties of nil in fiscal 2010 compared with U.S.$149.7 million in fiscal 2011. In fiscal 2010, royalties were classified as income and mining tax expense. The reason for the classification is explained below.

The classification of royalty expense at the Group’s operations requires judgment, particularly at the Group’s South African and Ghanaian operations, where the percentages to be applied in calculating royalties are influenced by the expenses incurred in generating those product sales (and therefore the profitability of the operations). In light of the continued increase in royalties at the Group’s international operations, and the fact that the calculation of royalties in Ghana, representing the largest component of consolidated royalty expense (44%), changed to a predetermined 5% of product sales (regardless of the operating margin), Gold Fields has changed the classification of royalty expense in its consolidated financial statements from a component of “income and mining taxes” to “other expenses” in its consolidated statements of operations for fiscal 2011. Given the change in circumstances, Gold Fields considered it appropriate to change the presentation on a prospective basis.

Other expenses

Other expenses represents miscellaneous corporate expenditure not allocated to the operations, net of miscellaneous revenue items such as scrap sales and rental income. In fiscal 2010, there were other expenses of U.S.$45.0 million compared with U.S.$79.3 million in fiscal 2011. The increase in fiscal 2011 is in part attributable to the stronger Rand against the U.S. dollar.

Other expenses in fiscal 2011 and fiscal 2010 consisted of miscellaneous items which included:

 

   

Corporate social investment and sponsorship costs;

 

   

Research and development into mechanized mining;

 

   

Share-based compensation for service entities;

 

   

Loan facility charges;

 

   

Restructuring costs as part of the business process re-engineering; and

 

   

Legal fees paid as a result of a dispute with a former mining contractor at the Ghanaian operation

 

193


Table of Contents

Income and mining tax expense

Income and mining tax expense increased from U.S.$358.4 million in fiscal 2010 to U.S.$552.0 million in fiscal 2011. The table below sets forth Gold Fields’ effective tax rate for fiscal 2011 and fiscal 2010, including normal and deferred tax.

 

     Fiscal  
     2011     2010  

Effective tax expense rate

     36.6     42.1

In fiscal 2011, the effective tax expense rate of 36.6% was lower than the maximum South African mining statutory tax rate of 43.0% mainly due to the tax-effect of the following:

 

   

U.S.$239.2 million adjustment to reflect the actual realized company tax rates in South Africa and offshore;

 

   

U.S.$11.9 million reduction relating to the South African mining tax formula rate adjustment;

 

   

U.S.$22.0 million reversal of valuation allowance previously raised against deferred tax assets; and

 

   

U.S.$9.1 million deferred tax release on reduction of the estimated rate at the Peruvian operation.

The above were offset by the following tax-effected charges:

 

   

U.S.$199.0 million non-deductible expenditure comprising mainly U.S.$24.5 million share-based compensation, U.S.$92.8 million exploration and feasibility and evaluation costs and U.S.$35.9 million National Stabilisation Levy in Ghana.

In fiscal 2010, the effective tax expense rate of 42.1% was lower than the maximum South African mining statutory tax rate of 43.0% mainly due to the tax-effect of the following:

 

   

U.S.$62.7 million adjustment to reflect the actual realized company tax rates in South Africa and internationally;

 

   

U.S.$16.6 million reduction relating to the South African mining tax formula rate adjustment; and

 

   

U.S.$27.4 million net adjustment comprising U.S.$80.7 million of profit on disposal of investments and the gain on financial investments relating to the Eldorado top-up shares, which are subject to capital gains tax rather than income tax and deductible royalties, offset by U.S.$53.3 million comprising non-deductible charges, mainly share-based compensation and exploration expense.

The above were offset by the following tax-effected charges:

 

   

U.S.$71.6 million of royalties and levies at the South African, West African, Australasian and South American operations;

 

   

U.S.$8.3 million in additional valuation allowance raised against deferred tax assets; and

 

   

U.S.$23.9 million of capital gains tax on taxable gains on disposal of investments.

Impairment of investment in equity investee

The impairment of investment in equity investee was nil in fiscal 2010 compared with U.S.$6.8 million in fiscal 2011 and related to Rusoro. The market value and carrying value of Rusoro at December 31, 2011 was U.S.$13.2 million. Gold Fields owned 26.4% of Rusoro at the end of fiscal 2011 and fiscal 2010.

Share of equity investees’ profits/(losses)

Share of equity investees’ profits increased from a loss of U.S.$22.7 million in fiscal 2010 to a profit of U.S.$4.0 million in fiscal 2011.

 

194


Table of Contents

Gold Fields equity accounts for three associates; Rand Refinery Limited, Rusoro Mining Limited and as from fiscal 2011, Timpetra Resources Limited.

The Group’s 35% share of after-tax profits in Rand Refinery Limited was U.S.$5.0 million in fiscal 2011 compared with U.S.$8.4 million in fiscal 2010.

The Group’s 26.4% share of after-tax profits in Rusoro Mining Limited was nil in fiscal 2011 compared with a loss of U.S.$31.1 million in fiscal 2010. The share of Rusoro’s fiscal 2010 loss took into account U.S.$27.9 million translation loss as a result of applying hyper-inflation accounting to its investments in Venezuela.

In August 2011, President of Venezuela Hugo Chavez Frias approved a decree with force of organic law which reserves to the State of Venezuela exclusive rights for the extraction of gold in Venezuela. The decree was subsequently approved by the Supreme Court of Venezuela and it was published in the Official Gazette of Venezuela in September 2011. The Venezuelan State has announced that it is seeking a controlling stake of 55% in Rusoro and as such, Rusoro will be compensated for its decrease in ownership. The deadline to negotiate with the Venezuelan government has now lapsed and Rusoro is preparing to seek international arbitration to obtain compensation for the assets it expects to be nationalized.

During fiscal 2011, the Group acquired a 21.8% interest in Timpetra Resources Limited as a result of receiving 15 million Timpetra Resources Limited shares valued at U.S.$3.2 million. Timpetra Resources is an Australian listed junior exploration company and the shares were received in exchange for the Central Victoria tenements, an Australian exploration project previously owned by St. Ives. The Group’s 21.8% share of after-tax losses in Timpetra was U.S.$1.0 million during fiscal 2011.

Net income

As a result of the factors discussed above, Gold Fields’ net income was U.S.$953.0 million in fiscal 2011, compared with net income of U.S.$470.3 million in fiscal 2010.

Net income attributable to noncontrolling interests

Net income attributable to noncontrolling interests was U.S.$79.3 million in fiscal 2010 compared to U.S.$71.5 million in fiscal 2011. Due to the purchase of noncontrolling interests in Tarkwa, Damang, Cerro Corona and Living Gold during the first half of fiscal 2011, net income attributable to noncontrolling interests decreased.

As a result of the purchase of the noncontrolling interests in Gold Fields Ghana (Tarkwa) and Abosso Goldfields (Damang) during fiscal 2011, noncontrolling interests reduced to 10.0% (effective interest for the year of 19.2%) from 28.9% in fiscal 2010; in La Cima (Cerro Corona), from 19.3% to 1.5% (effective interest for the year of 7.4%) and in Living Gold (Pty) Limited, from 35.0% to 0.0% (effective interest for the year of 3.4%).

The noncontrolling interest in Canteras del Hallazgo is 49.0% (fiscal 2010: nil). Canteras del Hallazgo is a subsidiary company that owns the Chucapaca project.

The amounts making up the noncontrolling interests in fiscal 2011 and 2010 were:

 

     Effective
interest
    Fiscal 2011     Effective
interest
    Fiscal 2010  

Gold Fields Ghana Limited—Tarkwa

     19.1     72.0        28.9     45.2   

Abosso Goldfields—Damang

     19.9     13.6        28.9     17.3   

La Cima—Cerro Corona

     7.4     14.9        19.3     17.0   

Canteras del Hallazgo

     49.0     (28.9     N/A        —     

Living Gold (Pty) Limited

     3.4     (0.1     35.0     (0.2
    

 

 

     

 

 

 
       71.5          79.3   
    

 

 

     

 

 

 

 

195


Table of Contents

Net income attributable to Gold Fields shareholders

As a result of the factors discussed above, net income attributable to Gold Fields shareholders was U.S.$881.5 million in fiscal 2011, compared to U.S.$391.0 million in fiscal 2010.

Six-Month Periods Ended December 31, 2010 and 2009

Revenues

Product sales increased by U.S.$540.3 million, or 26.7%, from U.S.$2,023.9 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2009 to U.S.$2,564.2 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2010. The increase in product sales was primarily due to an increase in the average realized gold price of 25.9% from U.S.$1,026 per ounce in the six month period ended December 31, 2009 to U.S.$1,292 per ounce in the six month period ended December 31, 2010 and an increase in the average realized copper price of 27.5% from U.S.$5,634 per tonne to U.S.$7,182 per tonne.

At the Cerro Corona operation in Peru copper production was converted to equivalent gold ounces on a monthly basis using average copper and gold prices for the month in which the copper was produced.

At the South African operations, gold sales decreased from 1.05 million ounces in the six month period ended December 31, 2009 to 0.98 million ounces in the six month period ended December 31, 2010 primarily as a result of lower underground grades. At KDC, gold sales decreased by 8.8% from 0.70 million ounces to 0.63 million ounces as a result of lower grades mined and processed.

At Beatrix, gold sales decreased by 7.0% from 0.22 million ounces in the six month period ended December 31, 2009 to 0.20 million ounces in the six month period ended December 31, 2010 due to lower mining volumes. At South Deep, gold sales increased 6.8%, from 0.14 million ounces in six month period ended December 31, 2009 to 0.15 million ounces for the six month period ended December 31, 2010, in line with anticipated production build-up.

At the West African operations, total gold sales increased from 0.44 million ounces in the six month period ended December 31, 2009 to 0.48 million ounces in the six month period ended December 31, 2010.

This was mainly due to a 20.9% increase in gold sales at Damang from 0.10 million ounces in six month period ended December 31, 2009 to 0.12 million ounces in the six month period ended December 31, 2010. Gold sales increased at Damang mainly as a result of the commissioning of the secondary crusher in May 2010, which improved throughput and grades, as well as a 13 day shutdown in December 2009. Tarkwa’s gold sales increased by 4.1% from 0.35 million ounces to 0.36 million ounces due to an increase in mill throughput.

At the South American operation of Cerro Corona in Peru, total gold equivalent sales increased by 6.5% from 0.19 million gold equivalent ounces in the six month period ended December 31, 2009 to 0.20 million gold equivalent ounces in the six month period ended December 31, 2010, because of higher gold grades mined and processed.

At the Australasian operations, total gold sales increased from 0.29 million ounces in the six month period ended December 31, 2009 to 0.32 million ounces in the six month period ended December 31, 2010. At St. Ives, gold sales increased by 23.8% from 0.20 million ounces to 0.24 million ounces due to an increase in underground tonnes processed and higher head grades from surface and underground. At Agnew, gold sales decreased by 14.2% from 0.09 million ounces in the six month period ended December 31, 2009 to 0.08 million ounces in the six month period ended December 31, 2010 due to restricted underground stope access at Kim South.

All percentage increase or decrease calculations above were made using full production figures.

 

196


Table of Contents

Costs and Expenses

The following table sets out Gold Fields’ total ounces sold and weighted average total cash costs and total production costs per ounce for six month period ended December 31, 2009 and the six month period ended December 31, 2010.

 

     Six month period ended
December 31, 2009
     Six month period ended
December 31, 2010
     Percentage
increase/
(decrease)
in unit
total cash
costs
    Percentage
increase/
(decrease)
in unit
total
production
costs
 
     Gold sold      Total  cash
costs(s) (1)
     Total
production
costs (2)
     Gold sold      Total  cash
cost (1)
     Total
production
costs (2)
      
     (‘000 oz)      (U.S.$ oz)      (‘000 oz)      (U.S.$ oz)      (%)  

South Africa

     1049         668         838         982         874         1094         30.8        30.5   

KDC

     695         649         804         634         860         1,075         32.5        33.7   

Beatrix

     217         680         867         202         868         1,066         27.6        23.0   

South Deep

     137         740         961         146         940         1,213         27.0        26.2   

Ghana

     445         604         672         479         682         769         12.9        14.4   

Tarkwa (3)

     348         612         675         362         696         773         13.7        14.5   

Damang (4)

     97         575         661         117         638         755         11.0        14.2   

Peru

     189         360         530         201         401         570         11.4        7.5   

Cerro Corona (5)

     189         360         530         201         401         570         11.4        7.5   

Australia (6)

     289         667         879         323         695         1037         4.2        18.0   

St. Ives

     196         759         1,028         243         716         1,128         (5.7     9.7   

Agnew

     93         474         565         80         631         760         33.1        34.5   
  

 

 

          

 

 

            

Total (7)(8)

     1,972         —           —           1,985         —           —           —          —     

Weighted average

     —           624         782         —           753         962         20.7        23.0   

 

Notes:

(1) Gold Fields has calculated total cash costs per ounce by dividing total cash costs, as determined using guidance provided by the Gold Institute, by gold ounces sold for all periods presented. The guidance was first adopted in 1996 and revised in November 1999. Total cash costs, as defined in the Gold Institute industry guidance, are production costs as recorded in the statement of operations, less offsite (i.e. central) general and administrative expenses (including head office costs performance, as well as changes in the currency exchange rate between the Rand and the Australian dollar, compared with the U.S. dollar). Total cash costs and total cash costs per ounce are not U.S. GAAP measures. Management, however, believes that total cash costs per ounce provides a measure for comparing Gold Fields’ operational performance against that of its peer group, both for Gold Fields as a whole, and for its individual operations. An investor should not consider total cash costs and total cash costs per ounce in isolation or as an alternative to total production costs or net income/(loss), income before tax, operating cash flows or any other measure of financial performance presented in accordance with U.S. GAAP. In particular, depreciation and amortization is included in a measure of production costs under U.S. GAAP, but is not included in total cash costs under the guidance provided by the Gold Institute. See “Presentation of Financial Information”.
(2) Gold Fields has calculated total production costs per ounce by dividing total production costs, as determined using the guidance provided by the Gold Institute, by gold ounces sold for all periods presented. Total production costs, as defined by the Gold Institute industry guidance, are total cash costs, as calculated using the Gold Institute guidance, plus amortization, depreciation and rehabilitation costs. Changes in total production costs per ounce are affected by operational performance, as well as changes in the currency exchange rate between the Rand, and the Australian dollar compared with the U.S. dollar. Total production costs per ounce is a non-U.S. GAAP measure. Management, however, believes that total production costs per ounce provides a measure for comparing Gold Fields’ operational performance against that of its peer group, both for Gold Fields as a whole, and for its individual operations. An investor should not consider total production costs per ounce in isolation or as an alternative to total production costs or net income/ (loss), income before tax, operating cash flows or any other measure of financial performance presented in accordance with U.S. GAAP. See “Presentation of Financial Information”.

 

197


Table of Contents
(3) In the six month periods ended December 31, 2009 and 2010, 0.247 million ounces and 0.257 million ounces of sales, respectively, were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to noncontrolling shareholders in the Tarkwa operation.
(4) In the six month periods ended December 31, 2009 and 2010, 0.069 million ounces and 0.083 million ounces of sales, respectively, were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to noncontrolling shareholders in the Damang operation.
(5) In the six month periods ended December 31, 2009 and 2010, 0.153 million ounces and 0.162 million ounces of sales were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to noncontrolling shareholders in the Cerro Corona operation.
(6) The consideration paid for the Australian operations in excess of the book value of the underlying net assets was allocated pro rata to the value of the underlying assets, which affected the allocation of amortization between St. Ives and Agnew.
(7) In the six month periods ended December 31, 2009 and 2010, 1.806 million ounces and 1.806 million ounces of sales, respectively, were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to noncontrolling shareholders in the Ghana and Peru operations.
(8) The total may not reflect the sum of the line items due to rounding.

The following tables set out a reconciliation of Gold Fields’ production costs to its total cash costs and total production costs for the six month period ended December 31, 2010 and the six month period ended December 31, 2009.

 

    Six month period ended December 31, 2010  
    KDC     Beatrix     South
Deep
    Tarkwa     Damang     St. Ives     Agnew     Cerro
Corona
    Corporate     Group (6)  
    (in U.S.$ million except as otherwise stated) (1)  

Production Costs

    523.3        170.5        138.8        258.6        73.1        162.1        49.9        74.1        —          1,450.3   

Less:

                   

G&A other than corporate costs

    (5.3     (1.5     (0.8     (11.8     (1.3     (3.2     (1.8     (0.9     —          (26.5

GIP adjustment (2)

    —          —          —          (2.8     0.5        10.3        0.7        1.6        —          10.3   

Share-based payments

    (6.5     (2.1     (1.8     (1.0     (0.8     (0.5     (0.4     (1.5     —          (14.6

Exploration

    —          —          —          —          —          (2.6     (1.0     —          —          (3.6

Plus:

                   

Employee termination costs

    22.0        7.1        0.4        0.2        —          0.2        0.3        —          5.2        35.3   

Royalties

    11.8        1.3        0.9        8.7        3.1        7.6        2.5        7.3        —          43.3   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total cash costs (6)

    545.5        175.3        137.5        251.9        74.6        173.9        50.2        80.6        5.2        1,494.7   

Plus

                   

Amortization (2)

    126.0        36.7        37.7        26.9        12.8        98.7        9.2        31.3        10.9        389.4   

Share-based payments

    6.5        2.1        1.8        1.0        0.8        0.5        0.4        1.5        —          14.6   

Rehabilitation

    3.6        1.2        0.3        0.2        0.1        1.0        0.7        0.4        —          7.6   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total production costs (6)

    681.6        215.3        177.3        280.0        88.3        274.1        60.5        113.8        16.0        1,907.0   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gold produced (‘000 oz) (3)

    634.0        202.0        146.2        362.0        116.9        243.0        79.6        199.5        —          1,983.3   

Gold sold (‘000 oz)

    634.0        202.0        146.2        362.0        116.9        243.0        79.6        201.2        —          1,984.9   

Total cash costs (U.S.$/oz) (4) (6)

    860        868        940        696        638        716        631        401        —          753   

Total production
costs (U.S.$/oz)
(5)(6)

    1,075        1,066        1,213        773        755        1,128        760        570        —          962   

 

Notes:

(1) Calculated using an exchange rate of R7.14 per U.S.$1.00.
(2) The GIP adjustment excludes the non-cash portion of GIP which is included in amortization. GIP represents gold in the processing circuit, which is expected to be recovered.
(3) In the six month period ended December 31, 2010, 1.806 million ounces of production were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to noncontrolling shareholders in the Ghana and Cerro Corona operations.

 

198


Table of Contents
(4) Gold Fields has calculated total cash costs per ounce by dividing total cash costs, as determined using guidance provided by the Gold Institute, by gold ounces sold for all periods presented. The guidance was first adopted in 1996 and revised in November 1999. Total cash costs, as defined in the Gold Institute industry guidance, are production costs as recorded in the statement of operations, less offsite (i.e. central) general and administrative expenses (including head office costs performance, as well as changes in the currency exchange rate between the Rand and the Australian dollar, compared with the U.S. dollar). Total cash costs and total cash costs per ounce are not U.S. GAAP measures. Management, however, believes that total cash costs per ounce provides a measure for comparing Gold Fields’ operational performance against that of its peer group, both for Gold Fields as a whole, and for its individual operations. An investor should not consider total cash costs and total cash costs per ounce in isolation or as an alternative to total production costs or net income/(loss), income before tax, operating cash flows or any other measure of financial performance presented in accordance with U.S. GAAP. In particular, depreciation and amortization is included in a measure of production costs under U.S. GAAP, but is not included in total cash costs under the guidance provided by the Gold Institute. See “Presentation of Financial Information”.
(5) Gold Fields has calculated total production costs per ounce by dividing total production costs, as determined using the guidance provided by the Gold Institute, by gold ounces sold for all periods presented. Total production costs, as defined by the Gold Institute industry guidance, are total cash costs, as calculated using the Gold Institute guidance, plus amortization, depreciation and rehabilitation costs. Changes in total production costs per ounce are affected by operational performance, as well as changes in the currency exchange rate between the Rand, and the Australian dollar compared with the U.S. dollar. Total production costs per ounce is a non-U.S. GAAP measure. Management, however, believes that total production costs per ounce provides a measure for comparing Gold Fields’ operational performance against that of its peer group, both for Gold Fields as a whole, and for its individual operations. An investor should not consider total production costs per ounce in isolation or as an alternative to total production costs or net income/ (loss), income before tax, operating cash flows or any other measure of financial performance presented in accordance with U.S. GAAP. See “Presentation of Financial Information”.
(6) The total may not reflect the sum of the line items due to rounding.

 

    Six month period ended December 31, 2009  
    KDC     Beatrix     South
Deep
    Tarkwa     Damang     St. Ives     Agnew     Cerro
Corona
    Corporate     Group (6)  
    (in U.S.$ million except as otherwise stated) (1)  

Production Costs

    461.6        150.3        103.8        201.5        55.5        151.0        47.1        65.0        —          1,235.5   

Less:

                   

G&A other than corporate costs

    (5.0     (1.5     (0.8     (8.7     (0.7     (2.8     (1.3     (0.6     —          (21.5

GIP adjustment (2)

    —          —          —          11.5        (1.2     1.9        0.8        (1.0     —          12.0   

Share-based payments

    (7.7     (2.3     (1.7     (2.1     (0.9     (1.0     (0.4     (1.1       (17.1

Exploration

    —          —          —          —          —          (5.2     (4.6     —          —          (9.8

Plus:

                   

Employee termination costs

    2.6        1.3        —          —          —          —          —          —          0.3        4.2   

Royalties

    —          —          —          10.8        3.0        5.0        2.4        5.7        —          26.8   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total cash costs (6)

    451.5        147.8        101.3        213.0        55.6        148.9        44.0        67.9        0.3        1,230.2   

Plus

                   

Amortization (2)

    96.9        37.3        28.2        19.3        7.3        51.0        7.0        29.5        9.3        290.6   

Share-based payments

    7.7        2.3        1.7        2.1        0.9        1.0        0.4        1.1        —          17.1   

Rehabilitation

    3.2        1.0        0.3        0.4        0.1        0.8        1.0        0.5        —          7.3   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total production costs (6)

    559.3        188.4        131.5        234.8        63.9        201.7        52.4        99.1        9.6        1,540.4   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gold produced (‘000 oz) (3)

    695.4        217.2        136.9        347.9        96.7        196.3        92.8        186.9        —          1,970.1   

Gold sold (‘000 oz)

    695.4        217.2        136.9        347.9        96.7        196.3        92.8        189.0        —          1,972.2   

Total cash
costs (U.S.$/oz) (4)
(6)

    649        680        740        612        575        759        474        360        —          624   

Total production
costs (U.S.$/oz)
(5)(6)

    804        867        961        675        661        1,028        565        530        —          782   

 

199


Table of Contents

 

Notes:

(1) Calculated using an exchange rate of R7.65 per U.S.$1.00.
(2) The GIP adjustment excludes the non-cash portion of GIP which is included in amortization. GIP represents gold in the processing circuit, which is expected to be recovered.
(3) In the six month period ended December 31, 2009, 1.806 million ounces of production were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to noncontrolling shareholders in the Ghana and Cerro Corona operations.
(4) Gold Fields has calculated total cash costs per ounce by dividing total cash costs, as determined using guidance provided by the Gold Institute, by gold ounces sold for all periods presented. The guidance was first adopted in 1996 and revised in November 1999. Total cash costs, as defined in the Gold Institute industry guidance, are production costs as recorded in the statement of operations, less offsite (i.e. central) general and administrative expenses (including head office costs performance, as well as changes in the currency exchange rate between the Rand and the Australian dollar, compared with the U.S. dollar). Total cash costs and total cash costs per ounce are not U.S. GAAP measures. Management, however, believes that total cash costs per ounce provides a measure for comparing Gold Fields’ operational performance against that of its peer group, both for Gold Fields as a whole, and for its individual operations. An investor should not consider total cash costs and total cash costs per ounce in isolation or as an alternative to total production costs or net income/(loss), income before tax, operating cash flows or any other measure of financial performance presented in accordance with U.S. GAAP. In particular, depreciation and amortization is included in a measure of production costs under U.S. GAAP, but is not included in total cash costs under the guidance provided by the Gold Institute. See “Presentation of Financial Information”.
(5) Gold Fields has calculated total production costs per ounce by dividing total production costs, as determined using the guidance provided by the Gold Institute, by gold ounces sold for all periods presented. Total production costs, as defined by the Gold Institute industry guidance, are total cash costs, as calculated using the Gold Institute guidance, plus amortization, depreciation and rehabilitation costs. Changes in total production costs per ounce are affected by operational performance, as well as changes in the currency exchange rate between the Rand, and the Australian dollar compared with the U.S. dollar. Total production costs per ounce is a non-U.S. GAAP measure. Management, however, believes that total production costs per ounce provides a measure for comparing Gold Fields’ operational performance against that of its peer group, both for Gold Fields as a whole, and for its individual operations. An investor should not consider total production costs per ounce in isolation or as an alternative to total production costs or net income/ (loss), income before tax, operating cash flows or any other measure of financial performance presented in accordance with U.S. GAAP. See “Presentation of Financial Information”.
(6) The total may not reflect the sum of the line items due to rounding.

Gold Fields’ weighted average total cash costs per ounce increased by U.S.$129 per ounce, or 20.7%, from U.S.$624 per ounce in six month period ended December 31, 2009 to U.S.$753 per ounce in the six month period ended December 31, 2010.

The weighted average total cash costs at the South African operations increased by U.S.$207 per ounce, or 31.0%, from U.S.$667 per ounce in six month period ended December 31, 2009 to U.S.$874 per ounce in the six month period ended December 31, 2010.

This increase was as a result of the 6.7% strengthening of the Rand against the U.S. dollar, above inflation wage increases and an increase in electricity tariffs.

The weighted average total cash costs at the West African operations increased by U.S.$78 per ounce, or 12.9%, from U.S.$604 per ounce in six month period ended December 31, 2009 to U.S.$682 per ounce in the six month period ended December 31, 2010. This increase was as a result of the increase in electricity tariffs.

 

200


Table of Contents

The weighted average total cash costs per ounce at the South American operation increased by U.S.$41 per ounce, or 11.4%, from U.S.$360 per ounce in six month period ended December 31, 2009 to U.S.$401 per ounce in the six month period ended December 31, 2010. This increase was due to the increase in transport costs due to an increase in concentrate shipped as well as the increase in statutory workers participation.

The weighted average total cash costs per ounce at the Australasian operations increased by U.S.$28 per ounce, or 4.2%, from U.S.$667 per ounce in six month period ended December 31, 2009 to U.S.$695 per ounce in the six month period ended December 31, 2010. This increase was due to the 7.5% strengthening of the Australian dollar against the U.S. dollar partly offset by the increase in gold sales of 11.6%.

In the six month period ended December 31, 2010 exchange rate translations had a very significant effect on costs as the Rand strengthened 6.7% against the U.S. dollar from an average of 7.65 in six month period ended December 31, 2009 to 7.14 in the six month period ended December 31, 2010.

Production costs

Production costs, exclusive of depreciation and amortization, increased by U.S.$214.8 million, or 17.4%, from U.S.$1,235.5 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2009 to U.S.$1,450.3 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2010.

This increase was due to a 6.7% and an 7.5% strengthening of the South African Rand and Australian dollar against the U.S. dollar respectively, above inflation annual wage increases at the South African operations, increases in electricity tariffs in South Africa and Ghana and the increase in statutory workers participation in Cerro Corona due to the increase in profitability and increase in production at Tarkwa and St. Ives.

Depreciation and amortization

Depreciation and amortization charges increased by U.S.$98.8 million, or 34.0%, from U.S.$290.6 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2009 to U.S.$389.4 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2010. Depreciation and amortization is calculated on the units-of-production method and is based on current gold production as a percentage of total expected gold production over the lives of the different mines. In South Africa, the increase was due to the 6.7% stronger Rand, increased amortization on ore reserve development, additions to plant and machinery and the increase in short life ore reserve development (defined as development that creates assets with lives shorter than the LoM or shaft, including assets such as crosscuts, travelling ways, box holes) at KDC. The increase in amortization at Beatrix was due to an increase in short life ore reserve development and due to the project build-up at South Deep. The increase in Ghana was mainly due to the increase in production. Cerro Corona was similar as tonnes milled, on which amortization is based, remained constant. In Australia the increase was mainly due to the 7.5% stronger Australian dollar against the U.S. dollar, the increase in production and the amortization of the Morgan Stanley royalty for the six month period ended December 31, 2010 compared with only four months for the period ended December 31, 2009.

 

201


Table of Contents

The table below depicts the changes from June 30, 2009 to December 31, 2010 for proven and probable reserves above current infrastructure and for the life of mine for each operation, and the resulting impact on the amortization charge in the six month periods ended December 31, 2009 and 2010, respectively. The LoM information is based on the operations’ strategic plans, adjusted for proven and probable reserve balances. In basic terms, amortization is calculated using the LoM for each operation, which is based on: (1) the proven and probable reserves above infrastructure for the operation at the start of the relevant period (which are taken to be the same as at the end of the prior period and using only above infrastructure reserves); and (2) the amount of gold produced by the operation during the period. The ore reserve statement as at December 31, 2010 became effective after January 1, 2011.

 

    Proven and probable
reserves as of
    Life of mine as at     Amortization for the six
month period ended
 
    June 30,
2009
    June 30,
2010
    December 31,
2010
    December 31,
2009
    December 31,
2010
    December 31,
2009
    December 31,
2010
 
    (’000 oz)     (years)     (U.S.$ million)  

South African Region

             

KDC

    19,800        17,600        16,500        18        19        96.9        126.0   

Beatrix

    6,100        5,400        5,500        13        13        37.3        36.7   

South Deep

    17,200        16,900        28,800        42        54        28.2        37.7   

West African Region

             

Tarkwa (1)

    10,700        9,900        9,300        13        14.5        22.8        28.3   

Damang (2)

    1,800        2,100        2,000        10        9.5        7.8        12.7   

South American Region

             

Cerro Corona (3)

    2,800        2,700        2,700        15        16        29.3        31.8   

Australasian Region (4)

             

St. Ives

    2,300        2,300        2,800        5        5        52.1        96.1   

Agnew

    700        1,200        1,300        4        6        7.1        9.1   

Corporate and other

    —          —          —          —          —          9.1        11.0   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

       

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total

    61,400        58,100        68,900        —          —          290.6        389.4   

Reserves below infrastructure (5)

    21,700        21,300        9,500        —          —          —          —     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

         

Total reserves (6)

    83,100        79,400        78,400        —          —          —          —     

 

Notes:

(1) As of June 30, 2009, June 30, 2010 and December 31, 2010, reserves of 7.608 million ounces, 7.038 million ounces and 6.576 million ounces of gold, respectively, were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to noncontrolling shareholders in the Tarkwa operation.
(2) As of June 30, 2009, June 30, 2010 and December 31, 2010, reserves of 1.280 million ounces, 1.493 million ounces and 1.479 million ounces of gold, respectively, were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to noncontrolling shareholders in the Damang operation.
(3) As of June 30, 2009, June 30, 2010 and December 31, 2010, reserves of 2.260 million ounces, 2.179 million ounces and 2.156 million ounces of gold, respectively, were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to noncontrolling shareholders in the Cerro Corona operation. However, amortization at Cerro Corona is based on tonnes milled being the most consistent parameter over the life of the mine.
(4) The consideration paid for the Australian operations in excess of the book value of the underlying net assets was allocated pro rata to the value of the underlying assets, which affected the allocation of amortization between St. Ives and Agnew.
(5) Below infrastructure reserves relate to mineralization which is located at a level at which an operation currently does not have infrastructure sufficient to allow mining operations to occur, but where the operation has made plans to install additional infrastructure in the future which will allow mining to occur at that level.
(6) As of June 30, 2009, June 30, 2010 and December 31, 2010 reserves of 78.947 million ounces, 75.940 million ounces and 74.571 million ounces of gold, respectively, were attributable to Gold Fields, with the remainder attributable to noncontrolling shareholders in the West African and South American operations.

 

202


Table of Contents

Corporate expenditure

Corporate expenditure was U.S.$24.5 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2010 compared to U.S.$28.2 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2009, a decrease of 13.1%. The decrease is mainly due to the restructuring of the corporate office in Johannesburg, that took place in the six months period ended December 31, 2009. Corporate expenditure consists primarily of general corporate overhead and corporate service department costs, primarily in the areas of technical services, human resources and finance, which are used by the operations. Corporate expenditure also includes business development costs. In Rand terms, corporate expenditure decreased from R180.0 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2009 to R148.0 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2010.

Employee termination costs

In the six month period ended December 31, 2010, Gold Fields incurred employee termination costs of U.S.$35.3 million compared to U.S.$4.3 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2009. The terminations related primarily to restructuring at the South African operations. The significant increase in 2010 is mainly due to employees opting for voluntary separation packages following the business process re-engineering exercise.

Exploration expenditure

Exploration expenditure was U.S.$53.2 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2010, an increase of 26.4% from U.S.$42.1 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2009. The bulk of the expenditure was incurred on a diversified pipeline of projects in Africa, Europe, Asia, Australia and North, South and Central America, with the increase in the six months to December 31, 2010 due primarily to a higher spend on advanced stage exploration projects; U.S.$8.3 million on Chucapaca in Peru, U.S.$6.4 million on the Far South East and U.S.$6.1 million on Yanfolila in Mali. Subject to continued exploration success, exploration expenditure is expected to be U.S.$143.0 million in the fiscal year ending December 31, 2011 (excluding expenditure in relation to FSE, Chucapaca and Arctic Platinum Project).

Feasibility and evaluation costs

Feasibility and evaluation costs were U.S.$9.3 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2010 compared to nil million in the six month period ended December 31, 2009. The costs were comprised of spending on the Chucapaca project in Peru of U.S.$6.3 million and the FSE in the Philippines of U.S.$3.0 million.

No feasibility and evaluation costs were incurred on these two projects during the six month period ended December 31, 2009 due to work programs only beginning in the six month period ended December 31, 2010.

Profit on disposal of property, plant and equipment

Profit on disposal of property, plant and equipment increased from U.S.$0.1 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2009 to U.S.$0.7 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2010.

The major disposals in the six month period ended December 31, 2010 related to the sale of equipment at South Deep, KDC, Agnew and La Cima compared to the sale of assets at KDC, Beatrix and La Cima in the six month period ended December 31, 2009.

(Decrease)/increase in provision for post-retirement healthcare costs

In South Africa, Gold Fields provides medical benefits to employees in its operations through the Gold Fields Medical Scheme.

 

203


Table of Contents

Under the medical plan which covers certain of its former employees, Gold Fields remains liable for 50% of these retired employees’ medical contributions after their retirement. At December 31, 2010, 142 (June 30, 2010: 166) former employees were covered under this plan. In fiscal 2009, there was no actuarial valuation at December 31, 2009 because the valuation was conducted at June 30, 2010. This benefit is not available to members of the scheme who were employees of the former Free State operation (which is now the Beatrix operation) who retired after August 31, 1997, and other employees who retired after January 31, 1999.

As part of the acquisition of South Deep, Gold Fields assumed an additional post-retirement healthcare cost liability. Former employees of South Deep belong to a commercial medical scheme with employer liability for contribution per pensioner limited to R400 per month. The R400 monthly contribution is fixed until the termination of Gold Fields’ obligations on December 31, 2011. At December 31, 2010, there were 194 (June 30, 2010: 182) former South Deep employees that were subject to this employer contribution.

In the six month period ended December 31, 2010, an amount of U.S.$0.1 million was credited to earnings, compared to U.S.$9.3 million in six month period ended December 31, 2009, in respect of Gold Fields’ obligations under these medical plans. The U.S.$9.3 million credit in the six month period ended December 31, 2009 and U.S.$0.1 million in six month period ended December 31, 2010 relate to the annual interest and service charge. The post-retirement healthcare provision is updated annually based on actuarial calculations, with any increase in the provision reflected in the statement of operations.

Accretion expense on provision for environmental rehabilitation

At all of its operations, Gold Fields makes full provision for environmental rehabilitation based on the net present value of the estimated cost of restoring the environmental disturbance that has occurred up to the balance sheet date. The rehabilitation charge for the six month period ended December 31, 2010 was U.S.$10.9 million compared to U.S.$9.9 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2009. The increase is due primarily to the effect of translating accretion expenses at the South African operations at a stronger Rand against the U.S. dollar.

For its South African operations, Gold Fields contributes to environmental trust funds it has established to provide for any environmental rehabilitation obligations and expected closure costs relating to its mining operations. The amounts invested in the trust funds are classified as non-current assets and any income earned on these assets is accounted for as interest income. For the Ghanaian, Australian and Peruvian operations Gold Fields does not contribute to a trust fund.

Interest and dividends

Interest and dividends amounted to U.S.$12.9 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2010 compared to U.S.$19.2 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2009. The decrease was mainly due to lower interest rates in the six month period ended December 31, 2010 compared to the six month period ended December 31, 2009.

The interest and dividends received in the six month period ended December 31, 2010 of U.S.$12.9 million comprised U.S.$4.2 million on monies invested in the South African environmental rehabilitation trust funds and U.S.$8.7 million on other cash and cash equivalent balances.

The interest and dividends received in the six month period ended December 31, 2009 of U.S.$19.2 million comprised U.S.$4.6 million on monies invested in the South African environmental rehabilitation trust funds and U.S.$14.6 million on other cash and cash equivalent balances.

Interest on cash balances decreased from U.S.$14.6 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2009 to U.S.$8.7 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2010 mainly due to lower interest rates in the six month period ended December 31, 2010.

 

204


Table of Contents

Finance expense

Gold Fields recognized net finance expense of U.S.$31.7 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2010 compared to U.S.$31.3 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2009.

Net finance expense in the six month period ended December 31, 2010 consisted of gross interest payments of U.S.$36.4 million (2009: U.S.$33.7 million) partially offset by interest capitalized of U.S.$4.7 million (2009: U.S.$2.4 million).

The gross interest payments in the six month periods ended December 31, 2010 and 2009 comprised:

 

     Six month
period ended
December 31,
2010
     Six month
period ended
December 31,
2009
 
     (U.S.$ millions)  

Interest on the U.S.$1,000,000,000 4.875% guaranteed notes due October 7, 2020, or the Notes

     10.8         —     

Interest on the U.S.$200 million Non-revolving Senior Secured Term Loan

     3.5         —     

Interest on the non-convertible redeemable preference shares, or the Preference shares

     3.1         2.9   

Interest on R10 billion Domestic Medium Term Note program, or the DMTN Program

     13.7         10.1   

Interest on borrowings to fund capital expenditure and operating costs at the South African operations

     2.7         9.0   

Forward cover costs on the foreign exchange contract taken out on the revolving credit facility

     —           5.4   

Interest on Project Finance loan—La Cima (Cerro Corona)

     1.1         2.7   

Interest on the split-tenor revolving credit facility used to partially fund the Morgan Stanley Royalty, the acquisition of Glencar and capital expenditure in Cerro Corona in 2009

     0.7         3.4   

Other interest charges

     0.8         0.2   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Gross interest paid

     36.4         33.7   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Interest charges increased from U.S.$33.7 million to U.S.$36.4 million due to:

 

   

Higher average borrowings on the DMTN Program;

 

   

Interest charges arising from the new U.S.$1 billion notes issue and non-revolving senior secured term loan.

These increases were partly offset by:

 

   

Lower borrowings at the South African operations and the repayment of the Project Finance loan at Cerro Corona, and

 

   

The cancellation of the forward cover contract on the Western Areas loan in September 2009, resulting in no forward cover costs in the six month period ended December 31, 2010 compared to U.S.$5.4 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2009.

The overall strategy at South African operations was to move away from traditional bank debt and to access the commercial paper market in order to benefit from the lower interest rates offered by commercial paper. With the U.S.$1 billion Notes Issue in September 2010, loans under the DMTN program were repaid and replaced with the less expensive Notes.

 

205


Table of Contents

Interest on borrowings incurred in respect of assets requiring a substantial period of time to prepare for their intended use is capitalized to the date on which the assets are substantially completed and ready for their intended use, at which time they will be amortized over the lives of the corresponding assets. During the six month period ended December 31, 2010, U.S.$4.7 million was capitalized in respect of the South Deep operation compared to U.S.$2.4 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2009.

Gain/(loss) on financial instruments

Gold Fields recognized a net gain on financial instruments of U.S.$1.0 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2010 compared to U.S.$28.2 million in six month period ended December 31, 2009.

The gain on financial instruments in the six months to December 31, 2010 related to the U.S.$1.4 million gain on marking to market of warrants in Atacama Pacific Corporation, partly offset by a U.S.$0.4 million loss on the Rand/ U.S.$ forward contract.

The realized net gain in the six month period ended December 31, 2009 comprised:

 

     U.S.$ million  

Gain on receipt of 4 million top-up shares in Eldorado Gold Corporation (1)

     53.6   

Loss on the copper financial instruments (2)

     (25.0

Loss on the International Petroleum Exchange Gasoil call option

     (0.3

Other

     (0.1
  

 

 

 
     28.2   
  

 

 

 

 

Notes:

(1) During the six month period ended December 31, 2009, 58 million Sino Gold shares were exchanged for 28 million shares in Eldorado at a profit of U.S.$59.0 million. Subsequently, a further four million top-up shares, valued at U.S.$53.6 million were received from Eldorado and accounted for as gain on financial instruments. The 28 million Eldorado shares were liquidated during the six month period ended December 31, 2009, resulting in a profit of U.S.$36.3 million.
(2) The loss on copper financial instruments in the six month period ended December 31, 2009 was due to the forward sale, during June 2009, of 8,705 tonnes of Cerro Corona’s expected copper production for monthly deliveries from June 24, 2009 to June 23, 2010. The average forward price for the monthly deliveries was U.S.$5,001 per tonne.

An additional 8,705 tonnes of Cerro Corona’s expected copper production for the six month period ended December 31, 2009 was hedged by means of a zero cost collar, guaranteeing a minimum price of U.S.$4,600 per tonne with full participation up to a maximum price of U.S.$5,400 per tonne. The above loss relates to 4,415 forward tonnes and 4,415 zero-cost collar tonnes.

(Loss)/gain on foreign exchange

Gold Fields recognized an exchange loss of U.S.$1.4 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2010 compared to U.S.$7.2 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2009.

The loss of U.S.$1.4 million in the six months to December 31, 2010 related to net exchange losses on cash and cash equivalent balances held in currencies other than the functional currencies of the Gold Fields’ various subsidiary companies.

 

206


Table of Contents

The loss of U.S.$7.2 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2009 comprised:

 

     U.S.$ million  

Loss on Australian dollar denominated intercompany loans

     (6.4

Net exchange gains on cash and cash equivalent balances held in currencies other than the functional currencies of the Gold Fields’ various subsidiary companies

     (0.8
  

 

 

 
     (7.2
  

 

 

 

(Loss)/profit on disposal of listed investments

During the six month periods ended December 31, 2010 and 2009, Gold Fields liquidated certain non-current investments. In the six month period ended December 31, 2010, a loss of U.S.$0.4 million was realized on disposal of investments held by New Africa Mining Fund compared to a gain of U.S.$99.2 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2009.

The gain of U.S.$99.2 million resulted from the following sales:

 

     U.S.$ million  

Gain on exchange of 58 million Sino Gold shares for 28 million shares in Eldorado Gold Corporation (1)

     59.0   

Gain on sale of 28 million Eldorado Gold Corporation shares acquired through the Sino Gold Inc. share exchange

     36.3   

Gain from sale of Troy Resources shares

     3.9   
  

 

 

 
     99.2   
  

 

 

 

 

Note:

(1) During the six month period ended December 31, 2009, 58 million Sino Gold shares were exchanged for 28 million shares in Eldorado at a profit of U.S.$59.0 million. Subsequently, a further four million top-up shares, valued at U.S.$53.6 million were received from Eldorado and accounted for as gain on financial instruments. The 28 million Eldorado shares were liquidated during the six month period ended December 31, 2009, resulting in a profit of U.S.$36.3 million.

Impairment of listed investments

There was no impairment charge recognized in the six month period ended December 31, 2010 compared to a charge of U.S.$7.8 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2009. The impairment relates to various offshore listed exploration investments to their market value as at December 31, 2009. The decline in market value below the carrying value of these investments was determined to be other than temporary.

South African Equity Empowerment Transactions

The Mining Charter requires mining entities to achieve a 26% ownership of South African mining assets by HDSAs by the year 2014.

In fiscal year ended June 30, 2004, Gold Fields implemented its first 15% Black Economic Empowerment, or BEE, transaction with Mvelaphanda, a BEE partner. During the six month period ended December 31, 2010. Gold Fields implemented three empowerment transactions which enable the Group to achieve the 2014 BEE equity ownership targets.

 

207


Table of Contents

The value of these transactions was U.S.$297.6 million (2009: U.S.$0 million) and were comprised of an employee share option plan, or ESOP, for 10.75% of GFIMSA; a broad-based BEE transaction for 10.0% of South Deep, and a broad-based BEE transaction for 1% of GFIMSA, excluding South Deep. For accounting purposes, these transactions qualify as share-based compensation costs.

The U.S.$297.6 million was comprised of U.S.$171.9 million for the ESOP, U.S.$10.2 million for the GFIMSA transaction and U.S.$115.5 million for the South Deep transaction.

Under the ESOP transaction, 13.5 million shares were issued to approximately 47,000 Gold Fields employees. These shares were valued on the grant date using the Gold Fields closing share price of R122.79 on December 22, 2010, adjusted by a marketability discount of 25.8% to reflect the value of the restrictions placed on these shares; that the eligible employees may not dispose of the shares until after 15 years from grant gate. The cost of this once-off share-based compensation was U.S.$171.9 million.

Under the GFIMSA transaction, 0.6 million shares were issued to broad-based BEE partners on December 23, 2010. The share-based compensation cost, based on the closing price of R118.51, was U.S.$10.2 million. These shares were not adjusted by a marketability discount because they had no trading restrictions.

The South Deep transaction amounted to U.S.$115.5 million and was made up of a preferred BEE dividend of U.S.$21.2 million and an equity component equivalent to U.S.$94.3 million. Under the South Deep transaction, a wholly-owned subsidiary company of Gold Fields was created to acquire 100% of the South Deep asset from GFIMSA. The new company then issued 10 million Class B ordinary shares representing 10.0% of South Deep’s net worth to a consortium of BEE partners. Class B ordinary shareholders are entitled to a dividend of R2 per share and can convert to Class A ordinary shares over a twenty year period from the effective date of the transaction, December 6, 2010. The Class B ordinary shares will convert one-third after ten years and a third thereafter on each fifth year anniversary. For accounting purposes, the dividend represents a liability of Gold Fields to the Class B ordinary shareholders and qualifies as a share-based compensation. It has been valued at U.S.$21.2 million, of which U.S.$2.7 million has been classified as a short-term portion under accounts payable. The Rand based effective interest rate used to discount the future dividend payments was 9.55%.

The disposal of 10% of South Deep was subject to valuation adjustments relating to minority, liquidity and marketability discounts which resulted in an overall once-off share-based compensation expense of U.S.$94.3 million.

All but the dividend share-based compensation have been included within additional paid-in capital within shareholders’ equity. The long-term dividend liability component of the share-based compensation has been shown as other long-term liabilities.

Royalties

Royalties increased from U.S.$26.8 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2009 to U.S.$43.3 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2010 largely due to the increase in revenues and the fact that the South African operations only started paying royalties in the second half of fiscal year ended June 30, 2010, resulting in no royalty charges in the six month period ended December 31, 2009 for these operations. In the six month period ended December 31, 2009, royalties were classified as income and mining tax expense. The reason for the reclassification is explained below.

The classification of royalty expense at the Group’s operations requires judgment, particularly at the Group’s South African and Ghanaian operations, where the percentages to be applied in calculating royalties are influenced by the expenses incurred in generating those product sales (and therefore the profitability of the operations). In light of the continued increase in royalties at the Group’s international operations, and the fact that recent changes to the calculation of royalties in Ghana, representing the largest component of consolidated

 

208


Table of Contents

royalty expense, will going forward change the percentage to a predetermined 5% of product sales (regardless of the operating margin), Gold Fields has changed the classification of royalty expense in its consolidated financial statements from a component of “income and mining taxes” to “other expenses” in its consolidated statements of operations for the six month period ended December 31, 2010. Given the change in circumstances, Gold Fields considered it appropriate to change the presentation on a prospective basis.

Other expenses

Other expenses represent miscellaneous corporate expenditure not allocated to the operations, net of miscellaneous revenue items such as scrap sales and rental income. In the six month period ended December 31, 2010, there were other expenses of U.S.$36.8 million compared to U.S.$8.3 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2009. The increase is in part attributable to the stronger Rand against the U.S. dollar as well as restructuring costs incurred during the six month period ended December 31, 2010.

Other expenses in the six month period ended December 31, 2010 and six month period ended December 31, 2009 consisted of miscellaneous items which included:

 

   

social investment and sponsorship costs;

 

   

research and development costs into mechanized mining;

 

   

new loan facility charges;

 

   

share-based compensation for service entities;

 

   

restructuring costs incurred on business process re-engineering;

 

   

in the six month period ended December 31, 2010, legal fees paid as a result of a dispute with a mining contractor at the Ghanaian operation; and

 

   

in the six month period ended December 31, 2010, a write off of costs incurred on the Abosso Deeps feasibility study at Damang.

Income and mining tax expense

The income and mining tax expense decreased from U.S.$185.5 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2009 to U.S.$133.8 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2010. This decrease is explained below.

The table below sets forth Gold Fields’ effective tax rate for the six months ended December 31, 2010 and six months ended December 31, 2009, including normal and deferred tax.

 

     Six month
period ended
December 31,
 
     2010     2009  

Effective tax expense rate

     68.7     36.1

In the six month period ended December 31, 2010, the effective tax expense rate of 68.7% was higher than the maximum South African mining statutory tax rate of 43.0% mainly due to the tax-effect of the following:

 

   

U.S.$74.3 million adjustment to reflect the actual realized company tax rates in South Africa and internationally;

 

   

U.S.$61.3 million deferred tax release on reduction of the estimated rate at the South African mining operations;

 

209


Table of Contents
   

U.S.$10.4 million reduction relating to the South African mining tax formula rate adjustment; and

 

   

U.S.$10.3 million reversal of valuation allowance previously raised against deferred tax assets.

The above were offset by the following tax-effected charges:

U.S.$197.6 million non-deductible expenditure comprising mainly of U.S.$128.0 million BEE transaction costs, U.S.$11.6 share-based compensation, U.S.$25.9 million exploration, feasibility and evaluation costs and U.S.$12.6 million National Stabilization Levy in Ghana.

In the six month period ended December 31, 2009, the effective tax expense rate of 36.1% was lower than the maximum South African mining statutory tax rate of 43.0% mainly due to the tax-effect of the following:

 

   

U.S.$58.3 million adjustment to reflect the actual realized company tax rates in South Africa and internationally; and

 

   

U.S.$15.3 million reduction relating to the South African mining tax formula rate adjustment.

The above were offset by the following tax-effected charges:

 

   

U.S.$26.8 million of royalties at the South African, West African, Australian and South American operations; and

 

   

U.S.$7.1 million non-deductible expenditure.

Share of equity investees’ profits/(losses)

Gold Fields equity accounts for two associates, Rand Refinery Limited and Rusoro Mining Limited.

The share of equity investees’ results increased from a share of profits of U.S.$3.1 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2009 to a share of profits of U.S.$4.9 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2010.

The Group’s 35% share of after-tax profits in Rand Refinery Limited was U.S.$5.5 million in six month period ended December 31, 2009 compared with U.S.$3.1 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2010.

The Group’s 26.4% share of after-tax losses in Rusoro Mining Limited was U.S.$2.4 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2009 compared with a share of after-tax profit of U.S.$1.8 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2010.

Net income

As a result of the factors discussed above, Gold Fields’ net income was U.S.$65.9 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2010, compared with net income of U.S.$332.1 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2009.

Net income attributable to noncontrolling interests

Net income attributable to noncontrolling interests represented an expense of U.S.$53.3 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2010 compared to U.S.$37.0 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2009.

Net income attributable to noncontrolling interests increased as a result of the increase in profits at Tarkwa, Damang and Cerro Corona. The noncontrolling interests comprised Gold Fields Ghana (Tarkwa) and Abosso Goldfields (Damang) at 28.9%; in La Cima (Cerro Corona) at 19.3%, Canteras del Hallazgo at 49.0% and in Living Gold (Pty) Limited at 35.0%. Canteras del Hallazgo is the subsidiary company that owns the Chucapaca project.

 

210


Table of Contents

The amounts making up the noncontrolling interest for the six month periods ended December 31, 2010 and 2009 were:

 

     Noncontrolling
interest
    2010     2009  

Gold Fields Ghana—Tarkwa

     28.9     29.7        23.7   

Abosso Goldfields—Damang

     28.9     13.1        7.4   

La Cima—Cerro Corona

     19.3     17.7        6.0   

Canteras del Hallazgo—Chucapaca project

     49.0     (6.9     —     

Living Gold (Pty) Limited

     35.0     (0.3     (0.1
    

 

 

   

 

 

 
       53.3        37.0   
    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net income attributable to Gold Fields shareholders

As a result of the factors discussed above, net loss attributable Gold Fields shareholders was U.S.$12.6 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2010, compared to net income of U.S.$295.1 million in the six month period ended December 31, 2009.

Liquidity and Capital Resources

Cash resources

Cash flows from operations

Net cash provided by operations in fiscal 2011 was U.S.$1,907.5 million compared with U.S.$1,146.9 million in fiscal 2012.

Gold Fields’ realized gold price increased from an average of U.S.$1,569 per ounce in fiscal 2011 to an average of U.S.$1,654 per ounce in fiscal 2012. Gold Fields’ realized copper price decreased from an average of U.S.$8,160 per tonne in fiscal 2011 to an average of U.S.$7,322 per tonne in fiscal 2012. The increase in realized gold price and decrease in realized copper price resulted in revenue from product sales decreasing by U.S.$248.3 million from U.S.$5,800.1 million in fiscal 2011 to U.S.$5,551.8 million in fiscal 2012.

The decrease in net cash provided by operations was further reduced by:

 

   

a negative movement of U.S.$78.8 million in working capital resulting from an investment of working capital of U.S.$80.3 million in fiscal 2011 compared to an investment of U.S.$159.1 million in fiscal 2012;

 

   

an increase of U.S.$201.4 million in production costs, which increased from U.S.$2,989.0 in fiscal 2011 to U.S.$3,190.4 million in fiscal 2012;

 

   

a U.S.$37.9 million increase in royalties paid from U.S.$125.1 million in fiscal 2011 to U.S.$163.0 million in fiscal 2012 mainly as a result of increased profitability at the international subsidiaries; and

 

   

a U.S.$102.3 million increase in taxes paid from U.S.$352.8 million in fiscal 2011 to U.S.$455.1 million in fiscal 2012 mainly as a result of the increased profitability of the international subsidiaries.

The net effect of the above was a U.S.$760.6 million decrease in cash flow provided by operations.

Net cash provided by operations in fiscal 2010 was U.S.$1,162.9 million compared with U.S.$1,907.5 million in fiscal 2011.

Gold Fields’ realized gold price increased from an average of U.S.$1,085 per ounce in fiscal 2010 to an average of U.S.$1,569 per ounce in fiscal 2011. Gold Fields’ realized copper price increased from an average of

 

211


Table of Contents

U.S.$6,273 per tonne in fiscal 2010 to an average of U.S.$8,160 per tonne in fiscal 2011. The increase in realized price resulted in revenue from product sales increasing by U.S.$1,635.8 million from U.S.$4,164.3 million in fiscal 2010 to U.S.$5,800.1 million in fiscal 2011. The effect of the increased revenue on profit was further supported by a decrease of U.S.$8.1 million in actual interest paid (before interest capitalized).

The increase in product sales was partially offset by:

 

   

a negative movement of U.S.$89.6 million in working capital resulting from a release of working capital of U.S.$9.3 million in fiscal 2010 compared to a net investment of U.S.$80.3 million in fiscal 2011, which was mainly due to an increase in receivables in fiscal 2011;

 

   

an increase of U.S.$415.4 million in production costs, which increased from U.S.$2,573.6 in fiscal 2010 to U.S.$2,989.0 million in fiscal 2011; and

 

   

a U.S.$250.0 million increase in royalties and taxes paid as a result of the increased profitability at a number of subsidiaries.

The net effect of the above was a U.S.$744.6 million increase in cash flow provided by operations.

Although revenues from Gold Fields’ South African operations are denominated in U.S. dollars, Gold Fields receives them in Rand, which are then subject to South African exchange control limitations. See “Information on the Company—Environmental and Regulatory Matters—South Africa—Exchange Controls.” As a result, those revenues are generally not available to service Gold Fields’ non-Rand debt obligations or to make investments outside South Africa without the approval of the South African Reserve Bank.

Revenues from Gold Fields’ Ghanaian, Australian and Peruvian operations are also denominated in U.S. dollars, but, unlike in South Africa, Gold Fields receives them in U.S. dollars or is freely able to convert them into U.S. dollars. The Ghanaian and Australian U.S. dollar revenues can be used by Gold Fields to service its U.S. dollar-denominated debt and to make investments in its non-South African operations taking into account SARB-applicable requirements.

Cash flows from investing activities

Cash utilized in investing activities was U.S.$1,372.5 million in fiscal 2012, U.S.$1,223.3 million in fiscal 2011 and U.S.$852.0 million in fiscal 2010 respectively. The items comprising of these amounts are discussed below:

Capital expenditure increased by U.S.$169.8 million from U.S.$1,153.0 million in fiscal 2011 to U.S.$1,322.8 million in fiscal 2012. In Rand terms, capital expenditure increased by R2,508.7 million from R8,324.7 million in fiscal 2011 to R10,833.4 million in fiscal 2012.

The U.S.$169.8 million increase in capital expenditure to U.S.$1,322.8 million in fiscal 2012 from U.S.$1,153.0 million in fiscal 2011 was mainly due to:

 

   

increased expenditure at South Deep in line with the project plan build-up;

 

   

increased expenditure at St. Ives due to capital development at the Cave Rocks and Hamlet underground mines and the Bellerophon open pit;

 

   

increased expenditure at St. Ives due to the acquisition of open pit mobile equipment due to the transition to owner mining;

 

   

increased expenditure at Cerro Corona due to construction activities at the tailings facility and optimization projects at the process plant; and

 

   

increased expenditure at Tarkwa on additional mining fleet and the water treatment plants.

 

212


Table of Contents

Partially offset by:

 

   

decreased expenditure on ore reserve development at KDC; and

 

   

decreased expenditure at Damang due to the completion of the owner mining project in fiscal 2011.

Expenditure on Gold Fields’ major capital projects in fiscal 2012 included:

 

   

U.S.$259.8 million on ore reserve development at the South African operations, compared to U.S.$294.5 million in fiscal 2011 and U.S.$235.1 million in fiscal 2010;

 

   

U.S.$314.5 million on the development and equipping of the South Deep mine as the mine builds to full production as compared to U.S.$274.6 million in fiscal 2011 and U.S.$212.8 million in fiscal 2010;

 

   

U.S.$1.7 million on the CIL expansion project (secondary crusher) at Tarkwa, compared to U.S.$18.8 million expenditure in fiscal 2011 and no expenditure in fiscal 2010;

 

   

No expenditure on the heap leach pads at Tarkwa, as compared to U.S.$6.7 million expenditure in fiscal 2011 and no expenditure in fiscal 2010;

 

   

U.S.$12.7 million on the water treatment plant at Tarkwa, compared to no expenditure in fiscals 2011 and 2010;

 

   

U.S.$62.5 million on new mining equipment at Tarkwa, as compared to U.S.$29.7 million in fiscal 2011 and U.S.$24.0 million in fiscal 2010;

 

   

U.S.$2.6 million on new mining fleet at Damang as compared to U.S.$17.3 million in fiscal 2011 and no expenditure in fiscal 2010

 

   

U.S.$31.7 million expenditure on development of the Waroonga underground complex at Agnew, compared to U.S.$36.4 million in fiscal 2011 and U.S.$21.1 million in fiscal 2010;

 

   

U.S.$112.4 million on development of underground mines at St. Ives compared to U.S.$81.5 million in fiscal 2011 and U.S.$65.8 million in fiscal 2010. Athena accounted for U.S.$20.8 million of expenditure in fiscal 2012, as compared to U.S.$22.9 million in 2011 and U.S.$27.0 million in 2010;

 

   

U.S.$5.0 million expenditure on the acquisition of additional mining fleet at Agnew as compared to U.S.$5.9 million in fiscal 2011 and U.S.$12.0 million in 2010; and

 

   

U.S.$13.0 million of interest capitalized as compared to U.S.$9.3 million in fiscal 2011 and U.S.$6.5 million in fiscal 2010.

Proceeds on the disposal of property, plant and equipment decreased from U.S.$5.3 million in fiscal 2011 to U.S.$2.0 million in fiscal 2012. Proceeds on the disposal of property, plant and equipment were U.S.$1.2 million in fiscal 2010. In all three years this related to the disposal of various redundant mining assets by the South African and international mining operations.

On August 27, 2009, Gold Fields reached agreement with Morgan Stanley Bank to terminate, for A$308 million (U.S.$257.1 million), the royalty agreement between St. Ives Gold Mining Company Pty Limited and Morgan Stanley Bank’s subsidiaries. The terminated royalty agreement required St. Ives to pay a 4% net smelter volume royalty on all of its revenues once total gold produced from November 30, 2001 exceeded 3.3 million ounces which was triggered early in fiscal 2009, and provided that if the gold price exceeded A$600 per ounce, to pay an additional 10% of the revenue difference between the spot gold price, in Australian dollars per ounce, and the price of A$600 per ounce.

In fiscal 2010, Gold Fields acquired, for cash, 100% of Glencar Mining Plc., a company whose principal asset, and only defined resource, is the Komana project in Southern Mali, West Africa. The cash consideration paid was U.S.$43.0 million.

 

213


Table of Contents

On September 20, 2010, Gold Fields entered into option agreements with Lepanto, a company listed in the Philippines, and Liberty, a private holding company, to acquire a 60% interest in the FSE deposit in the Philippines. The agreements provide Gold Fields with an 18-month option on FSE, during which time Gold Fields will conduct a major drilling program as part of a feasibility study on FSE. As part of the agreement, Gold Fields was required to pay U.S.$10 million in option fees to Lepanto and U.S.$44 million as a non-refundable down-payment to Liberty upon signing of the option agreements, totaling U.S.$54 million, which payments were made during September 2010. During fiscal 2011, Gold Fields paid a further non-refundable down payment of U.S.$66 million to Liberty, in accordance with the agreement. On March 22, 2012, Gold Fields exercised its option to acquire 40% of the FSE after making a payment of U.S.$110 million. The final payment of U.S.$110 million is payable at the expiration of the option period. The total pre-agreed acquisition price for a 60% interest in FSE, inclusive of all of the above payments, is U.S.$340 million.

On October 4, 2011, Gold Fields entered into an option agreement with Bezant Resources PLC, or Bezant, to acquire the entire issued share capital of Asean Copper Investments Limited, or Asean, which is incorporated in the British Virgin Islands, a wholly owned subsidiary of Bezant. Asean holds Bezant’s entire interest in the Guinaoang porphyry copper-gold deposit (the Mankayan project) located on Luzon Island in the Philippines.

Gold Fields paid an upfront non-refundable option fee of U.S.$7.0 million and was granted the option to acquire the entire issued share capital of Asean for U.S.$63.0 million. The option can be exercised from the date upon which it is granted until expiry on January 31, 2013. Subsequent to year end, the option was extended to January 31, 2014 with a revised consideration of U.S.$60.5 million to be paid on future exercise of the option. The Mankayan project is located approximately four kilometers east of the FSE deposit.

Purchase of listed investments was U.S.$0.8 million in fiscal 2012, U.S.$0.1 million in fiscal 2011 and U.S.$13.5 million in fiscal 2010 respectively.

The investment purchases of U.S.$0.8 million in fiscal 2012 were:

 

     U.S.$ million  

Purchase of a shareholding in Cascadero Copper Corporation

     (0.1

Purchase of a shareholding in Atacama Pacific Gold Corporation—conversion of warrants

     (0.7
  

 

 

 
     (0.8
  

 

 

 

The investment purchase of U.S.$0.1 million in fiscal 2011 was:

 

     U.S.$ million  

Purchase of a shareholding in Atacama Pacific Gold Corporation

     0.1   
  

 

 

 
     0.1   
  

 

 

 

The investment purchases comprising the U.S.$13.5 million in fiscal 2010 were:

 

     U.S.$ million  

Loans advanced to GBF Underground Mining Company

     12.7   

Purchase of a shareholding in Atacama Pacific Gold Corporation

     0.7   

Other

     0.1   
  

 

 

 
     13.5   
  

 

 

 

Proceeds from the sale of listed investments were U.S.$65.4 million in fiscal 2012, U.S.$13.7 million in fiscal 2011 and U.S.$385.8 million in fiscal 2010 respectively.

 

214


Table of Contents

The investment disposals comprising the U.S.$65.4 million in fiscal 2012 were:

 

     U.S.$ million  

Sale of shares in Evolution Mining Limited

     25.5   

Sale of shares in GoldQuest Mining Corporation

     22.9   

Sale of shares in Atacama Pacific Gold Corporation

     15.0   

Sale of shares in Africo Resources Corporation Limited

     0.1   

Repayment of loans advanced to GBF Underground Mining Company

     1.9   
  

 

 

 
     65.4   
  

 

 

 

The investment disposals comprising the U.S.$13.7 million in fiscal 2011 were:

 

     U.S.$ million  

Sale of shares in Gold One International

     7.9   

Repayment of loans advanced to GBF Underground Mining Company

     5.8   
  

 

 

 
     13.7   
  

 

 

 

The investment disposals comprising the U.S.$385.8 million in fiscal 2010 were:

 

     U.S.$ million  

Sale of shares in:

  

Eldorado Gold Corporation

     372.8   

Troy Resources NL

     7.1   

Orezone Resources Inc

     3.9   

Great Basin Gold Ltd and Lupa Joint Venture held through New Africa Mining Fund

     1.5   

Aquarius Platinum Ltd

     0.4   

Cascadero Copper Corporation

     0.1   
  

 

 

 
     385.8   
  

 

 

 

For its South African operations, Gold Fields contributes to an environmental trust fund it has established to provide for any environmental rehabilitation obligations and expected closure costs relating to its mining operations. The amounts invested in the trust funds are classified as non-current assets and any income earned on these assets is accounted for as interest income. The amount required to be contributed each year is calculated pursuant to a statutory formula, and can vary depending on how the fund’s investments performed, the lives of mine of the different South African operations and various other factors. During fiscal 2012, Gold Fields’ South African operations contributed U.S.$6.3 million to the environmental trust fund compared to U.S.$16.2 million in fiscal 2011 and U.S.$12.3 million in fiscal 2010. For the Ghana, Australia and Peru operations, Gold Fields does not contribute to a trust fund.

Cash flows from financing activities

Net cash provided by financing activities was U.S.$115.8 million in fiscal 2012 as compared to cash utilized of U.S.$724.6 million in fiscal 2011 and U.S.$176.5 million in fiscal 2010. The items comprising these amounts are discussed below:

Long and short-term loans received were U.S.$1,451.0 million in fiscal 2012, U.S.$1,167.9 million in fiscal 2011 and U.S.$1,619.9 million in fiscal 2010.

 

215


Table of Contents

The U.S.$1,451.0 million in loans received in fiscal 2012 comprised:

 

     U.S.$ million  

Draw down under the U.S.$1 billion Syndicated Revolving credit facility

     666.0   

Draw down under the U.S.$500 million Syndicated Revolving credit facility

     244.0   

Draw down under the U.S.$60 million Senior Secured Revolving credit facility

     23.0   

Draw down under the various rand credit facilities

     518.0   
  

 

 

 
     1,451.0   
  

 

 

 

The U.S.$1,167.9 million in loans received in fiscal 2011 comprised:

 

     U.S.$ million  

Draw down under the Split-tenor revolving facility

     540.0   

Draw down under the U.S.$1 billion Syndicated Revolving credit facility

     483.0   

Draw down under the U.S.$60 million Senior Secured Revolving credit (1)

     70.0   

Proceeds on the scrip lending of 3 million Mvelaphanda shares

     18.2   

Borrowings by Sibanye Gold from various local banks to fund short term working capital and capital expenditure requirements

     56.7   
  

 

 

 
     1,167.9   
  

 

 

 

 

Note:

(1) Total drawdowns were made up of two separate drawdowns of U.S.$20 million (subsequently repaid) and U.S.$50 million.

The U.S.$1,619.9 million in loans received in fiscal 2010 comprised:

 

     U.S.$ million  

Drawn down under the Domestic Medium Term Notes, or DMTN, program to refinance existing facilities

     1,044.9   

Loans raised under the Split-tenor Revolving Credit facility to partially fund the St. Ives Royalty and the acquisition of Glencar Mining

     221.0   

Loans raised under U.S.$311 million Syndicated Revolving Credit Facility for purposes of refinancing existing facilities

     200.0   

Borrowings by Sibanye Gold from various local banks to fund short term working capital requirements and capital expenditure

     134.5   

Proceeds on the scrip lending of 3 million Mvelaphanda shares

     19.5   
  

 

 

 
     1,619.9   
  

 

 

 

Long and short-term loans repaid were U.S.$975.9 million in fiscal 2012, U.S.$654.6 million in fiscal 2011 and U.S.$1,637.5 million in fiscal 2010.

 

216


Table of Contents

The U.S.$975.9 million in loans repaid in fiscal 2012 comprised:

 

     U.S.$ million  

Split-tenor Revolving Facility

     500.0   

U.S.$500 million syndicated revolving credit facility

     140.0   

U.S.$1 billion syndicated revolving credit facility

     220.0   

U.S.$200 million Non-Revolving Senior Secured Term loan

     40.0   

U.S.$60 million Senior Secured Revolving credit facility

     73.0   

Borrowings under various rand facilities

     2.9   
  

 

 

 
     975.9   
  

 

 

 

The U.S.$654.6 million in loans repaid in fiscal 2011 comprised:

 

     U.S.$ million  

U.S.$1 billion Syndicated Revolving credit facility

     263.0   

DMTN Program

     105.3   

Preference Shares

     90.0   

Borrowings by Sibanye Gold from various local banks to fund short term working capital and capital expenditure requirements

     56.7   

Split-tenor Revolving Facility

     40.0   

U.S.$200 million Non-Revolving Senior Secured Term loan

     40.0   

Payments for the scrip lending of 3 million Mvelaphanda shares

     39.6   

U.S.$60 million Senior Secured Revolving credit facility

     20.0   
  

 

 

 
     654.6   
  

 

 

 

The U.S.$1,637.5 million in loans repaid in fiscal 2010 comprised:

 

     U.S.$ million  

DMTN Program

     721.9   

U.S.$311 million Syndicated Revolving Credit Facility

     272.0   

Group committed and uncommitted facilities

     284.1   

Split-tenor Revolving Credit Facility

     289.5   

Project Finance Facility

     50.0   

Short-term syndicated facility

     20.0   
  

 

 

 
     1,637.5   
  

 

 

 

For a description of the Gold Fields’ various credit facilities, see “—Credit Facilities and Other Capital Resources”.

U.S.$9.7 million overdraft was repaid in fiscal 2010. There were no changes in fiscal 2011 and 2012.

U.S.$15.4 million of noncontrolling shareholder loans at Tarkwa were repaid in fiscal 2010. No noncontrolling shareholder loans were repaid in fiscal 2011 and 2012.

U.S.$27.7 million and U.S.$31.0 million of noncontrolling shareholder loans were received in fiscal 2012 and fiscal 2011, respectively, from Buenventura which holds a 49% noncontrolling interest in Canteras del Hallazgo, the company that owns the Chucapaca project in Peru. No noncontrolling shareholder loans were received in fiscal 2010.

 

217


Table of Contents

During fiscal 2012, Gold Fields purchased an additional 0.1% in La Cima for U.S.$0.8 million and the noncontrolling interest of 40% in the Talas project from Orsu Metals Corporation for U.S.$10.0 million. During fiscal 2011, Gold Fields purchased noncontrolling interests in La Cima, Ghana and South Deep (relating to Western Areas Prospecting) for a total consideration of U.S.$1,055.6 million, comprising U.S.$382.3 million for La Cima, U.S.$667.0 million for Ghana and U.S.$6.3 million for South Deep. There were no such transactions in fiscal 2010.

On March 22, 2011, Gold Fields announced a voluntary purchase offer in Lima, Peru, to acquire the outstanding common voting shares and investment shares of La Cima that it did not already own. Gold Fields offered 4.20 Peruvian Nuevos Soles in cash for each La Cima common or investment share. The offer closed on April 15, 2011. The transaction resulted in Gold Fields increasing its stake in La Cima from 80.7% to 98.5%, after purchasing 254.8 million shares, at a cost of U.S.$382.3 million

On April 15, 2011, Gold Fields announced that a binding agreement had been entered into with IAMGold Corporation to acquire IAMGold’s 18.9% indirect minority stake (noncontrolling interest) in Tarkwa and Damang, for a cash consideration of U.S.$667.0 million. Upon completion of the acquisition, which was subject to obtaining shareholder approval, Gold Fields increased its interest in each of the Tarkwa and Damang gold mines from 71.1% to 90%, with the remaining 10% interest being held by the government of Ghana.

On October 14, 2011, Gold Fields purchased a 26% interest in Western Areas Prospecting from Peotona Gold for U.S.$6.3 million. The transaction was concluded in terms of an agreement signed between the parties during fiscal 2009. Gold Fields now owns 100% of Western Areas Prospecting which owns the Cardoville, the Kalbasfontein, the WA4 and the Wildebeestkuil prospecting rights.

Dividends paid amounted to U.S.$364.2 million in fiscal 2012 compared to U.S.$174.9 million in fiscal 2011 and U.S.$118.1 million in fiscal 2010. Dividend payments amounted to R2,846.3 million, or 390 SA cents per ordinary share in fiscal 2012, R1,229.4 million, or 170 SA cents per ordinary share in fiscal 2011 and R917.1 million, or 130 SA cents per ordinary share in fiscal 2010.

During fiscal 2012, Tarkwa and La Cima paid dividends to noncontrolling shareholders amounting to U.S.$11.5 million compared with U.S.$41.9 million paid by Tarkwa, Damang and La Cima in fiscal 2011 and U.S.$23.1 million paid by Tarkwa in fiscal 2010.

During the six month period ended December 31, 2010, Gold Fields implemented three empowerment transactions which included a broad-based BEE transaction for 10.0% of South Deep. The South Deep transaction amounted to U.S.$115.5 million and was made up of a preferred BEE dividend of U.S.$21.2 million and an equity component equivalent to U.S.$94.3 million. Under the South Deep transaction, a wholly owned subsidiary company of Gold Fields was created to acquire 100% of the South Deep asset from GFIMSA. The new company then issued 10 million Class B ordinary shares representing 10.0% of South Deep’s net worth to a consortium of BEE partners. Class B ordinary shareholders are entitled to a dividend of R2 per share. During fiscal 2012 and fiscal 2011, U.S.$2.5 million and U.S.$3.0 million of the Class B dividend was paid, respectively.

In fiscal 2012, U.S.$2.0 million was received as a result of share options exercised, as compared to U.S.$6.5 million in fiscal 2011 and U.S.$7.4 million in fiscal 2010.

Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

As a result of the above, net cash utilized after accounting for the effect of exchange rate on cash and cash equivalents was U.S.$88.4 million in fiscal 2012, U.S.$65.5 million in fiscal 2011 and U.S.$143.2 million generated in fiscal 2010, respectively.

The resultant cash and cash equivalents at December 31, 2012, December 31, 2011 and June 30, 2010 was U.S.$655.6 million, U.S.$744.0 million and U.S.$500.7 million, respectively.

 

218


Table of Contents

Credit Facilities and Other Capital Resources

As at December 31, 2012, Gold Fields had committed, unutilized banking facilities of U.S.$831.3 million available under the following facilities, details of which are discussed below:

 

   

U.S.$334.0 million available under U.S.$1 billion Syndicated Revolving Credit Facility;

 

   

U.S.$396.0 million available under U.S.$500 million Syndicated Revolving Credit Facility

 

   

U.S.$43.0 million available under U.S.$60 million Senior Secured Revolving Credit Facility; and

 

   

U.S.$58.3 million (R500.0 million) available under various committed revolving credit facilities discussed further below.

On February 15, 2013, the U.S.$1 billion Syndicated Revolving Credit Facility and the U.S.$500 million Syndicated Revolving Credit Facility were refinanced with the U.S.$1,440 million term loan and revolving credit facility (as defined below) and subsequently canceled. On February 18, 2013, the Sibanye Gold Rand long-term revolving credit facilities were refinanced by Sibanye Gold drawing down under the Rand bridge loan facility as detailed under “—Rand bridge loan facility” below. These facilities were also canceled on February 18, 2013.

As of May 9, 2013, Gold Fields had committed unutilized banking facilities of U.S.$671 million under the U.S.$60 million Senior Secured Revolving Credit Facility and the U.S.$1,440 million facility (as defined below) and R800 million under the R1,500 million Nedbank Revolving Credit Facility described below. Substantial contractual arrangements for uncommitted borrowing facilities are maintained with several banking counterparties to meet Gold Fields’ normal contingency funding requirements. As of the date of this report, Gold Fields was not in default under the terms of any of its outstanding credit facilities.

In the event that Gold Fields undertakes any acquisitions or incurs significant capital expenditure, it may need to incur further debt or arrange other financing to fund the costs, which could have an adverse effect on Gold Fields’ liquidity, including increasing its level of debt.

Project Finance Facility

On November 14, 2006, La Cima, entered into a U.S.$150 million project finance facility agreement, or the Project Finance Facility, with The Royal Bank of Scotland plc, Citigroup Global Markets Inc., The Bank of Nova Scotia, The Bank of Nova Scotia Trust Company of New York, Scotiabank Peru S.A.A. and other financial institutions, as set out in the agreement. The terms of the Project Finance Facility were an upfront arrangement fee of 1.2% and a margin over LIBOR of 0.45% during the pre-completion phase and between 1.25% and 1.75% thereafter.

Scheduled principal repayments were to be made in 16 semi-annual installments of various amounts ranging from 4.75% to 6.75% of the principal amount, beginning on June 30, 2009. The final installment was due on the tenth anniversary of the signing date. The Cerro Corona Facility was secured by, among other things, pledges of and mortgages over the assets and properties of La Cima. La Cima could elect to make optional prepayments and had to make prepayments in certain circumstances, including with the proceeds of any bond issuances up to a maximum of U.S.$100 million. At June 30, 2008, La Cima had drawn down a total of U.S.$150 million under this facility and repaid U.S.$50 million during fiscal 2010. Under the terms of the Project Finance Facility, all payments from the Peruvian operations to any Gold Fields group entities were restricted until the Project Finance Facility had been repaid in full.

In accordance with the facility agreement, the final completion date (i.e., the date on which the Guarantees fall away and the facility becomes non-recourse) was required to occur before November 14, 2010. However, La Cima repaid the full amount outstanding under this facility on September 16, 2010, from which date the security granted by La Cima in connection with this facility, was released. The repayment was made from cash generated by operations.

 

219


Table of Contents

U.S.$200 million Non-revolving Senior Secured Term Loan

On September 17, 2010, La Cima entered into a non-revolving senior secured term loan for up to U.S.$200 million with The Bank of Nova Scotia and Banco de Crédito del Perú. The purpose of this facility is to (i) repay La Cima’s outstanding subordinated loans with its affiliates; and (ii) to finance its working capital requirements.

On September 22, 2010, the lenders advanced U.S.$200 million to La Cima under this facility. The facility amount must be repaid in 20 equal quarterly installments of U.S.$10 million each. The final maturity date of this facility is 5 years from the disbursement date.

Borrowings under the non-revolving senior secured term loan are secured by first-ranking assignments of all rights, title and interest in all of La Cima’s concentrate sale agreements. In addition, the offshore and onshore collection accounts of La Cima will be subject to an Account Control Agreement and a first ranking charge in favor of the lenders. This facility will be non-recourse to the rest of the Gold Fields group. The loan bears an interest at LIBOR plus a margin of 2.0% per annum.

During fiscal 2011 and 2012, La Cima repaid U.S.$40.0 million and U.S.$40.0 million, respectively, and during the six month period ended December 31, 2010, La Cima repaid U.S.$10.0 million in accordance with the agreement terms.

The outstanding balance at December 31, 2012 was U.S.$110.0 million compared with U.S.$150.0 million at December 31, 2011.

Split-tenor Revolving Credit Facility

On May 16, 2007, Sibanye Gold, Orogen and GFO entered into a U.S.$750.0 million split-tenor revolving credit facility, or the Split-tenor Revolving Credit Facility, with lead lenders Barclays Bank Plc and ABN Amro N.V. As originally constituted, the Split-tenor Facility consisted of a U.S.$250.0 million 364-day revolving tranche, or Facility A, and a U.S.$500.0 million five-year revolving tranche, or Facility B. Facility A has since expired, as explained below.

Borrowings under the Split-tenor Facility were guaranteed by Gold Fields, Sibanye Gold, GF Holdings Company (BVI) Limited, or GF Holdings, Orogen and GFO. Under the Split-tenor Facility, Gold Fields was required to maintain a consolidated EBITDA to consolidated net finance charge ratio of at least 5 to 1 and a consolidated net borrowing to consolidated EBITDA ratio of no more than 2.5 to 1. There were also restrictions on the ability of Gold Fields and certain of its subsidiaries to encumber their assets, dispose of assets or enter into a merger or corporate reconstruction.

In connection with this facility Gold Fields paid an arrangement fee of 0.10% on Facility A and 0.30% on Facility B and paid a quarterly commitment fee of 0.09% of any undrawn amounts under Facility B and an agency fee of U.S.$35,000 per annum. Borrowings under Facility A bore interest at LIBOR plus a margin of 0.25% per annum while borrowings under Facility B bore interest at LIBOR plus a margin of 0.3% per annum. Where the total utilizations under Facility A were equal to or greater than 50% of the amount available, a utilization fee of 0.05% per annum was payable on the total amount of utilizations. The utilization fee was payable quarterly in arrears.

On April 28, 2008, Gold Fields exercised the term out option under Facility A which converted the full U.S.$250.0 million advance at that point into a term loan with a final maturity date of May 16, 2009. In terms of the facility agreement, Gold Fields had the option to repay the loan under Facility A early in whole or in part by giving five days’ prior notice. Facility B matured on May 16, 2012. The purpose of the facilities was to refinance existing facilities and for general corporate purposes.

During fiscal 2008 and 2009, Group companies borrowed a total of U.S.$225.1 million and U.S.$138.0 million, respectively. The loan repayments were U.S.$431.9 million and U.S.$150 million in fiscal 2008 and fiscal 2009, respectively.

 

220


Table of Contents

On September 17, 2009, Gold Fields utilized U.S.$259.0 million of the proceeds from the sale of the shares in Eldorado to fully settle GFO borrowings under Facility B. Subsequently, on various dates, Orogen drew down U.S.$221.0 million to refinance more expensive debt under the U.S.$311.0 million Syndicated Revolving Credit Facility. Orogen also repaid U.S.$32.0 million during fiscal 2010.

The outstanding borrowings of Orogen, all under Facility B, at June 30, 2010 were U.S.$430.0 million. During the six month period ended December 2010, Orogen drew down an additional U.S.$70 million and repaid the full outstanding balance of U.S.$500 million. During fiscal 2011, Orogen’s total drawdowns under Facility B were U.S.$540.0 million and Orogen’s total repayments under Facility B were U.S.$40.0 million.

On April 16, 2012, Orogen refinanced the outstanding balance of U.S.$500.0 million under the Split-tenor Revolving Credit Facility by drawing down under the U.S.$1.0 billion syndicated revolving credit facility. The Split-tenor Revolving Credit Facility was canceled on April 16, 2012.

The loan under Facility B bore interest at LIBOR plus a margin of 0.30% per annum. Borrowings under the Split-tenor Revolving Credit Facility were guaranteed by Gold Fields, Sibanye Gold, GF Holdings, Orogen, Newshelf and GF Operations.

U.S.$500 million Syndicated Revolving Credit Facility

On April 17, 2012, Sibanye Gold, Orogen and GFO entered into a U.S.$500 million syndicated revolving loan facility, or the Syndicated Revolving Loan Facility. The purpose of the facility was to refinance existing facilities and for general corporate and working capital purposes. The final maturity date of this facility was April 17, 2017.

The facility bore interest at LIBOR plus a margin of 1.60% per annum. Where the utilization under the facility was less than or equal to 33   1/3%, a utilization fee of 0.20% per annum would be payable on the amount of utilizations. Where the utilization under the facility was greater than 33   1/3% and less than or equal to 66   2/3%, a utilization fee of 0.40% per annum would be payable on the amount of utilizations. Where the utilization under the facility was greater than 66   2/3%, a utilization fee of 0.60% per annum would be payable on the amount of utilizations. Such utilization fee was payable quarterly in arrears. The borrowers were required to pay a quarterly commitment fee of 0.56% per annum.

On April 23, 2012, Orogen drew down U.S.$194.0 million under this facility to partially refinance borrowings under the U.S.$1 billion Syndicated Revolving Credit Facility. On June 1, 2012, Orogen drew down a further U.S.$20.0 million.

On July 25, 2012 and August 2, 2012, Orogen repaid U.S.$20.0 million and U.S.$20.0 million, respectively. On September 20, 2012, Orogen repaid a further U.S.$100.0 million. On November 23, 2012, Orogen drew down U.S.$10 million and on November 29, 2012, a further U.S.$20 million was drawn under the facility.

The outstanding borrowings of Orogen under this facility at December 31, 2012 were U.S.$104.0 million compared with U.S.$nil million at December 31, 2011.

Subsequent to year end, on February 15, 2013, this facility was refinanced by drawing down under the U.S.$1,440 million facility (defined below) as detailed below. The Syndicated Revolving Credit Facility was also canceled on February 15, 2013.

Borrowings under the syndicated revolving loan facility were guaranteed by Gold Fields, Sibanye Gold, GFH, Orogen, Newshelf and GFO.

 

221


Table of Contents

U.S.$311 million Syndicated Revolving Credit Facility

On May 7, 2009, Sibanye Gold, Orogen and GFO entered into a 364-day U.S.$311 million syndicated revolving loan facility with an option to extend the term on the same terms for an additional 364 days from the date of the original final maturity, or the Extension Option. At any time prior to the date of final maturity, Gold Fields had the option to convert all advances outstanding under this facility into a term loan with a final maturity date being no more than 24 months after the signing date of the facility, or the Term Out Option. The Extension Option was not exercisable if the Term Out Option had been exercised. The purpose of the facilities was to refinance existing facilities and for general corporate purposes.

On May 15, 2009, GFO and Orogen drew down U.S.$59 million and U.S.$57 million respectively under this facility to refinance their respective portion of the loans maturing under Facility A of the Split-tenor revolving credit facility. On June 15, 2009, GFO repaid U.S.$44 million of its loan.

On various dates during July 2009, Orogen drew down a total of U.S.$50 million for the funding of the Glencar Mining plc acquisition. During August 2009, Orogen drew down U.S.$150 million to partly fund the termination of the St. Ives royalty agreement.

On September 17, 2009, Gold Fields utilized U.S.$15 million, of the proceeds from the sale of the shares in Eldorado to fully settle GFO borrowings under this Facility. On September 22, 2009, Orogen repaid U.S.$36 million of its loan.

Subsequently, Orogen refinanced the outstanding balance under the facility of U.S.$221 million with the Split-tenor Revolving Credit Facility. The facility was then canceled.

The facility bore interest at LIBOR plus a margin of 2.75% per annum. The borrowers were required to pay a quarterly commitment fee of 1.10% per annum, payable on the undrawn portion of the facility. Neither the Extension Option nor the Term Out option had been exercised and the facility expired on May 7, 2010.

Borrowings under the syndicated revolving loan facility were guaranteed by Gold Fields, Sibanye Gold, GF Holdings, Orogen and GFO.

U.S.$450 million Syndicated Revolving Credit Facility

On May 12, 2010, Sibanye Gold, Orogen and GFO entered into a U.S.$450 million syndicated revolving loan facility with an option to increase the Facility to U.S.$550 million within six months from signing date. The option to increase the facility to U.S.$550 million was not exercised. The purpose of the facilities was to refinance existing facilities and for general corporate and working capital purposes. The final maturity date of this facility was September 30, 2013.

The facility bore interest at LIBOR plus a margin of 1.75% per annum. Where the utilization under the facility was equal to or greater than 50%, a utilization fee of 0.25% per annum would be payable on the amount of utilizations. Such utilization fee was payable quarterly in arrears. The borrowers were required to pay a quarterly commitment fee of 0.70% per annum. The facility was unutilized at December 31, 2010. The facility was canceled and replaced on June 22, 2011 with the new U.S.$1 billion Syndicated Revolving Credit Facility.

Borrowings under the syndicated revolving loan facility were guaranteed by Gold Fields, Sibanye Gold, GF Holdings, Orogen, Newshelf and GFO.

U.S.$60 million Senior Secured Revolving Credit Facility

On December 22, 2010, GF Ghana and Abosso entered into a U.S.$60 million reducing senior secured revolving credit facility, which facility became available on February 21, 2011. The available facility amount

 

222


Table of Contents

reduces annually on the anniversary date being February 21, from U.S.$60 million to U.S.$43 million to U.S.$35 million in the last and final year with the final maturity date being February 21, 2014. This facility is for (i) general corporate purposes; (ii) working capital purposes and/or (iii) capital expenditure purposes, including the purchase of a mining fleet.

On February 25, 2011, Abosso drew down U.S.$20.0 million under this facility and subsequently repaid the full loan of U.S.$20.0 million on various dates of which the last payment was on July 26, 2011. On November 28, 2011, GF Ghana drew down U.S.$50.0 million.

On January 30, 2012, GF Ghana repaid U.S.$7.0 million in advance of the first anniversary date of the facility becoming available. During February 2012 and March 2012, GF Ghana repaid U.S.$16.0 million and on May 1, 2012 repaid an additional U.S.$7.0 million. On various dates during April 2012, Abosso drew down U.S.$15.0 million under the facility. On May 1, 2012, Abosso drew down an additional U.S.$8.0 million under the facility.

On August 1, 2012, GF Ghana repaid U.S.$20 million and Abosso repaid U.S.$23 million bringing the balance outstanding under the facility to U.S.$nil million.

The outstanding borrowings for GF Ghana on December 31, 2012 and December 31, 2011 were U.S.$nil million and U.S.$50.0 million, respectively.

The loan bears interest at LIBOR plus a margin of 2.85% per annum. The borrowers are required to pay a quarterly commitment fee of 1.30% per annum.

Borrowings under this facility are guaranteed by GF Ghana and Abosso. Borrowings under this facility are also secured by the registration of security over certain fleet vehicles owned by GF Ghana and Abosso, or the Secured Assets. In addition, the lenders are noted as first loss payees under the insurance contracts in respect of the Secured Assets and are assigned the rights under the maintenance contracts between certain suppliers of the Secured Assets. This facility is non-recourse to the rest of the Gold Fields group.

Other Short-Term Credit Facilities

The group utilized uncommitted loan facilities from some of the major banks to fund the capital expenditure and working capital requirements of the South African operations.

These facilities had no fixed terms, were short-term in nature and interest rates were market related. Borrowings under these facilities were guaranteed by Gold Fields.

The total draw downs were R1,245.0 million (U.S.$152.0 million) in fiscal 2012, R400 million (U.S.$56.7 million) in fiscal 2011, R290 million (U.S.$39.4 million) in six month ended December 31, 2010 and R1,040 million (U.S.$135 million) in fiscal 2010. Total repayments were R25.0 million (U.S.$2.9 million) in fiscal 2012, R400 million (U.S.$56.7 million) in fiscal 2011, R290 million (U.S.$41.9 million) in six month ended December 31, 2010 and R2,140 million (U.S.$284 million) in fiscal 2010. The repayments were made from cash generated by operations.

The outstanding borrowings for the Group on December 31, 2012, were U.S.$142.4 million (December 31, 2011: U.S.$nil million).

Subsequent to year end, on February 18, 2013, these facilities were refinanced by drawing down under the Rand bridge loan facilities as detailed below.

Preference Shares

On December 24, 2007, Gold Fields issued R1,200 million (U.S.$165 million at the exchange rate in effect on the date of issuance) of non-convertible redeemable preference shares to Rand Merchant Bank. The dividend

 

223


Table of Contents

rate payable is a floating rate that increases from 22% up to 54% of the prime lending rate quoted by FirstRand Bank Limited, or the Prime Rate, over the life of the Preference Shares.

In certain circumstances, the dividend rate increases up to 61% of the Prime Rate in the event that the Preference Shares are redeemed before their scheduled maturity date and the dividend rate is also subject to adjustment in the case of a change in law or regulation. Dividends accrue quarterly and are rolled up until the redemption date. The Preference Shares can be redeemed by the Company in the event the dividend rate is adjusted according to the terms of the Preference Shares, or at any time on 14 days’ notice. The proceeds of the issuance of the Preference Shares were used to refinance a portion of the Split-tenor Facility. The Preference Shares matured on January 24, 2011 and payment in full of all dividends, redemption amounts, costs and expenses that may become payable in respect of the Preference Shares was been guaranteed by Sibanye Gold, Orogen, GFO, Newshelf and GF Holdings.

On October 10, 2008, R600 million (U.S.$61 million) of the R1,200 million (U.S.$165 million) preference shares was repaid, with an attributable dividend of R23 million (U.S.$3 million).

On December 15, 2010, Gold Fields declared and paid U.S.$19 million of the attributable dividend. On the same date, the redemption date of January 24, 2011 was extended to September 15, 2011. The preference shares may be redeemable earlier on a date as agreed between the holder and Gold Fields.

The remaining balance as at December 31, 2010 was U.S.$91 million (June 30, 2010: U.S.$96 million), consisting of capital of U.S.$88 million (June 30, 2010: U.S.$79 million) and an attributable dividend of U.S.$3 million (June 30, 2010: U.S.$17 million).

On March 31, 2011, the entire outstanding balance of preference shares of R600 million (U.S.$88.5 million) was redeemed in full with an attributable dividend of R9.9 million (U.S.$1.5 million).

R10 billion Domestic Medium Term Note Program

Gold Fields established a R10 billion Domestic Medium Term Note Program, or the Program, on April 6, 2009. Under the Program, Gold Fields could from time to time issue notes denominated in any currency. The notes were not subject to any minimum or maximum maturity and the maximum aggregate nominal amount of all notes from time to time outstanding could not exceed R10 billion.

The Program was registered with the bond market of the JSE and the notes issued could be listed on the JSE or not.

Under the Program, Gold Fields issued listed notes totaling nil during fiscal 2011, R1,825.0 million (U.S.$248 million) during the six month period ended December 31, 2010, R7,902 million (U.S.$1,045 million) during fiscal 2010 and R1,143 million (U.S.$134 million) in fiscal 2009, and settled listed maturing notes totaling R735 million (U.S.$105.3 million) in fiscal 2011, R4,692 million (U.S.$659.6 million) during six month ended December 31, 2010, R5,443 million (U.S.$722 million) during fiscal 2010 and nil in fiscal 2009. The different notes issued mature three, six or 12 months from date of issue and bear interest at JIBAR plus a margin ranging from 0.56% to 1.00% per annum, except for notes with a carrying value of R300 million (U.S.$39.6 million) which are at a fixed rate of 8.48%.

The outstanding issued notes under the Program at December 31, 2011 were U.S.$nil million and at December 31, 2010 were R735 million (U.S.$108.9 million). On December 14, 2012, the JSE approved the deregistration of the Gold Fields’ R10 billion Domestic Medium Term Note Program.

Notes under the Program were guaranteed by Sibanye Gold, GF Holdings, Orogen and GFO.

 

224


Table of Contents

R3,500 million Long-Term Revolving Credit Facilities

Sibanye Gold and GFO entered into separate revolving credit facilities with tenors between three and five years. The purpose of the facilities was to finance capital expenditure, general corporate and working capital requirements and to refinance existing debt. These facilities were unutilized at December 31, 2011 and December 31, 2010.

The borrowers were required to pay a commitment fee of between 0.65% and 0.90% per annum on the undrawn and uncanceled amounts of the facilities, calculated and payable either quarterly or semiannually in arrears.

In summary the facilities are:

 

   

a R1.0 billion (U.S.$116.7 million) revolving credit facility entered into on December 9, 2009 and maturing June 30, 2013 at JIBAR plus 3.00%;

 

   

a R500 million (U.S.$58.3 million) revolving credit facility entered into on March 8, 2010 and maturing March 10, 2013 at JIBAR plus 2.85%;

 

   

a R1.5 billion (U.S.$175.0 million) revolving credit facility entered into on May 6, 2009 and maturing June 10, 2014 at JIBAR plus 2.95%. This facility was canceled and replaced with a new R2.0 billion (U.S.$233.4 million) revolving credit facility on December 19, 2011; and

 

   

a R2.0 billion (U.S.$233.4 million) revolving credit facility entered into on December 19, 2011 and maturing on December 19, 2016 at JIBAR plus 1.95%.

On various dates during 2012, Sibanye Gold drew down R2.0 billion (U.S.$249.4 million) under the R2.0 billion revolving credit facility. On October 24, 2012, Sibanye Gold drew down R500.0 million (U.S.$58.3 million) under the R500.0 million revolving credit facility. On November 16, 2012, Sibanye Gold drew down a further R500.0 million (U.S.$58.3 million) under the R1.0 billion revolving credit facility.

The outstanding borrowings of Sibanye Gold under these facilities at December 31, 2012 were R3.0 billion (U.S.$350.0 million) and at December 31, 2011: Rnil (U.S.$nil).

Borrowings under these facilities were guaranteed by Gold Fields, GF Holdings, GFO, Orogen, Newshelf and Sibanye Gold.

Subsequent to year end, on February 18, 2013, these facilities were refinanced by Sibanye Gold drawing down under the Rand bridge loan facility as detailed below. These facilities were also canceled on February 18, 2013.

U.S.$1 billion Notes Issue

On September 30, 2010, Orogen announced the issue of U.S.$1,000,000,000 4.875% guaranteed Notes due October 7, 2020, issued October 7, 2010. The payment of all amounts due in respect of the Notes was unconditionally and irrevocably guaranteed by the Guarantors on a joint and several basis. The Notes and guarantees constitute direct, unsubordinated and unsecured obligations of Orogen and the Guarantors, respectively, and rank equally in right of payment among themselves and with all other existing and future unsubordinated and unsecured obligations of Orogen and the Guarantors, respectively.

Gold Fields used the net proceeds of the offering of the Notes to repay certain existing indebtedness of the Group and for general corporate purposes.

Each of Gold Fields and the other Guarantors have entered into the Indemnity Agreement in favor of Sibanye Gold in order to indemnify Sibanye Gold against any loss caused to Sibanye Gold in circumstances where Sibanye Gold is required to make a payment to noteholders or the trustee of the Notes by virtue of its guarantee of the Notes. See “Additional Information—Material Contracts—Indemnity Agreement”.

 

225


Table of Contents

U.S.$1 billion Syndicated Revolving Credit Facility

On June 20, 2011, Sibanye Gold, Orogen and GFO entered into a U.S.$1 billion syndicated revolving loan facility with an option to increase this facility to U.S.$1.1 billion within six months from signing date. The option to increase the facility to U.S.$1.1 billion was not exercised. The purpose of the facility was to refinance the existing U.S.$450 million Syndicated Revolving Credit Facility, for general corporate purposes and working capital. The final maturity date of this facility was June 20, 2016.

The facility bore interest at LIBOR plus a margin of 1.20% per annum. Where the utilization under the facility was greater than 33  1 / 3 % and less than or equal to 66  2 / 3 %, a utilization fee of 0.20% per annum would be payable on the amount of utilizations. Where the utilization under the facility was greater than 66  2 / 3 %, a utilization fee of 0.40% per annum would be payable on the amount of utilizations. Such utilization fee was payable quarterly in arrears. The borrowers were required to pay a quarterly commitment fee of 0.42% per annum.

Orogen’s total drawdowns were U.S.$666.0 million and U.S.$483.0 million in fiscal 2012 and fiscal 2011. Orogen’s total repayments were U.S.$220 million and U.S.$263.0 million in fiscal 2012 and fiscal 2011, respectively. The outstanding borrowings under this facility at December 31, 2012 were U.S.$666.0 million (December 31, 2011: U.S.$220.0 million).

Subsequent to year end, on February 15, 2013, this facility was refinanced by drawing down under the U.S.$1,440 million Facility (defined below) as detailed below. The facility was also canceled on February 15, 2013.

Borrowings under the syndicated revolving loan facility were guaranteed by Gold Fields, Sibanye Gold, GF Holdings, Orogen, Newshelf and GFO.

Rand bridge loan facility

On November 28, 2012, Sibanye Gold entered into a R6.0 billion term loan and revolving credit facilities reducing to R5.0 billion as detailed below. The facilities are comprised of a R2.0 billion revolving credit facility and a R4.0 billion term loan facility. The available revolving credit facility amount will reduce from R2.0 billion to R1.5 billion on the earliest of the date on which Sibanye Gold’s Board of Directors declares a final dividend in respect of the financial year ending December 2013 or the first anniversary of the Spin-off (February 18, 2014). Similarly, the term loan facility amount will reduce from R4.0 billion to R3.5 billion on the earliest of the date on which Sibanye Gold’s Board of Directors declares a final dividend in respect of the financial year ending December 2013 or the first anniversary of the Spin-off. The final maturity date of the facilities is 18 months after the Spin-off (August 18, 2014).

The purpose of the Rand bridge loan facilities is to refinance Sibanye Gold’s debt as detailed above under the other Rand long-term revolving credit facilities and the other Rand short-term credit facilities on Spin-off, with the balance of the Rand bridge loan facilities to be used to fund Sibanye Gold’s ongoing capital expenditure, working capital and general corporate expenditure requirements.

Sibanye Gold will cede all of its rights, title and interest in and to the Indemnity Agreement in favor of the lenders of the Rand bridge loan facility, jointly and severally, as security for its obligations under the facilities. Sibanye Gold must lodge and register a security package for its obligations under the facilities within six months from the Spin-off if it is not released as a guarantor under the Notes at such point in time.

The Rand bridge loan facilities bear interest at JIBAR plus a margin of 3.00% per annum for 12 months after the Spin-off and 3.50% per annum for the last six months of the facilities. If Sibanye Gold is not released as a guarantor under the Notes within six months from Spin-off, the margin will increase to 3.25% per annum for the six to 12 months period after Spin-off and 3.75% per annum for the last six months of the facilities. Sibanye Gold is required to pay a quarterly commitment fee of 35% of the applicable margin per annum calculated on the undrawn portion of the facilities.

 

226


Table of Contents

The facility was undrawn at December 31, 2012.

Subsequent to year end, on February 18, 2013, the Rand revolving credit facilities and the short-term Rand credit facilities were refinanced by drawing down under this facility.

U.S.$1,440 million term loan and revolving credit facility

On November 28, 2012, Orogen, GFO and GFI Joint Venture Holdings Proprietary Limited, or GFIJVH, or together the Borrowers, entered into a U.S.$900 million Term Loan and Revolving Credit Facility, or the U.S.$900 million facility. The U.S.$900 million facility comprises a U.S.$450 million three-year term loan tranche, or Facility A, and a U.S.$450 million five-year revolving tranche, or Facility B. In addition to the U.S.$900 million facility, the Borrowers entered into a U.S.$600 million bridge loan facility, or the U.S. Dollar Bridge Facility. The U.S. Dollar Bridge Facility had a 21-month maturity.

The purpose of the U.S.$900 million facility was to refinance the U.S.$1 billion syndicated revolving credit facility and the U.S.$500 million syndicated revolving credit facility on the Spin-off date and for general corporate and working capital purposes. The final maturity dates of Facility A and Facility B are November 28, 2015 and November 28, 2017, respectively, with the U.S. Dollar Bridge Facility maturing on August 28, 2014.

Subsequent to entering into the U.S.$900 million facility, the facility was syndicated to a wider bank group and received an oversubscription which allowed the Borrowers to increase the facility amount to U.S.$1,440 million on January 30, 2013, or the U.S.$1,440 million facility. Accordingly, the amounts of Facility A and Facility B both equaled U.S.$720 million. As a result of this oversubscription, the Borrowers canceled the U.S. Dollar Bridge Facility on January 30, 2013.

Borrowings under Facility A bear interest at LIBOR plus an initial margin of 2.45% per annum while borrowings under Facility B bear interest at LIBOR plus an initial margin of 2.25% per annum. The initial margins detailed above are based on the current long term credit rating assigned to Gold Fields and could either increase or decrease depending on the changes in the long term credit rating of Gold Fields.

Where the utilization under Facility B is less than or equal to 33  1 / 3 %, a utilization fee of 0.20% per annum will be payable on the amount of utilizations. Where the utilization under Facility B is greater than 33  1 / 3 % and less than or equal to 66  2 / 3 %, a utilization fee of 0.40% per annum will be payable on the amount of utilizations. Where the utilization under Facility B is greater than 66  2 / 3 %, a utilization fee of 0.60% per annum will be payable on the amount of utilizations. Such utilization fee is payable quarterly in arrears. The Borrowers are required to pay a quarterly commitment fee of 0.90% per annum under Facility B.

The facility was undrawn at December 31, 2012.

Subsequent to year end, on February 15, 2013, the U.S.$1 billion and the U.S.$500 million syndicated revolving credit facilities were refinanced by drawing down under this facility.

Borrowings under the U.S.$1,440 million facility are guaranteed by Gold Fields, GF Holdings, Orogen, GFO and GFIJVH.

R1,500 million Nedbank Revolving Credit Facility

On March 1, 2013, Nedbank, GFIJVH and GFO entered into a R1,500 million Revolving Credit Facility. The purpose of the facility is to fund Gold Fields’ capital expenditure and general corporate and working capital requirements. The tenor of the facility is five years. The final maturity date of this facility is March 7, 2018.

The facility bears interest at JIBAR plus a margin of 2.50% per annum. The borrowers are required to pay a commitment fee of 0.85% per annum every six months.

On March 8, 2013, each of GFO and GFIJVH drew down R350 million under this facility.

 

227


Table of Contents

Borrowings under the facility are guaranteed by Gold Fields, GFO, GFH, Orogen and GFIJVH.

Contractual obligations and commitments as at December 31, 2012

 

     Payments due by period  
     Total      Less
than 12
months
     12-36
months
     36-60
months
     After 60
months
 
     ($ millions)  

Long-term debt

              

Notes Issue

              

Capital

     1,000.0         —           —           —           1,000.0   

Interest

     379.2         48.8         97.5         97.5         135.4   

Non-Revolving Senior Secured Term Loan

              

Capital

     110.0         40.0         70.0         —           —     

Interest

     3.7         2.1         1.6         —           —     

U.S.$1,440 million term loan and revolving credit facility (3)

              

Capital

     770.0         —           720.0         50.0         —     

Interest

     61.6         20.3         39.0         2.3         —     

Rand bridge loan facility (3)

              

Capital

     492.4         —           492.4         —           —     

Interest

     66.3         39.5         26.8         —           —     

Operating lease obligations—building

     11.5         3.8         6.2         1.5         —     

Other long-term obligations

              

Post-retirement healthcare (1)

     2.1         0.1         0.2         0.2         1.6   

Environmental obligations (2)

     373.6         2.7         5.4         5.4         360.1   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total contractual obligations

     3,270.4         157.3         1,459.1         156.9         1,497.1   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

Notes:

(1) Gold Fields’ provision for post-retirement healthcare obligations increases annually based on the expected increases in the level of individual contributions in order to settle its obligations to its former employees, set off by payments made on behalf of certain pensioners and dependants of former employees on a pay-as-you-go basis.
(2) Gold Fields makes full provision for all environmental obligations based on the net present value of the estimated cost of restoring the environmental disturbance that has occurred up to the balance sheet date. This provision increases annually based on expected inflation. Management believes that the provisions made for environmental obligations are adequate to cover the expected volume of such obligations. See “—Critical Accounting Policies and Estimates—Environmental rehabilitation costs.”
(3) The U.S.$1 billion Syndicated Revolving Facility, the U.S.$500 million Syndicated Revolving Credit Facility, the R3,500 million Long-Term Revolving Credit Facilities and other short-term credit facilities were refinanced on February 18, 2013 by drawing under the U.S.$1,440 million term loan and revolving credit facility and the Rand bridge loan facilities. The maturities presented reflect the terms of the refinanced facilities.

 

228


Table of Contents
     Amounts of commitments expiring by period  
     Total      Less than
12 months
     12-36
months
     36-60
months
     After 60
months
 
     ($ millions)  

Other commercial commitments

              

Guarantees (1)

     0.5         0.5         —           —           —     

Capital expenditure (2)

     244.6         244.6         —           —           —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total commercial commitments

     245.1         245.1         —           —           —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

Notes:

(1) Guarantees consist of numerous obligations. Guarantees consisting of $100.7 million committed to guarantee Gold Fields’ environmental obligations with respect to its West African, South American and Australasian operations are fully provided for under the provision for environmental rehabilitation and are not included in the amount above.
(2) Capital expenditure consists only of amounts committed to external suppliers, although as of December 31, 2012 an amount of $1,257.3 million in respect of capital expenditure had been approved by Gold Fields’ Board.

Working capital

Management believes that Gold Fields’ working capital resources, by way of internal sources and banking facilities, are sufficient to fund Gold Fields’ currently foreseeable future business requirements.

Off balance sheet items

At December 31, 2012, Gold Fields had no material off balance sheet items.

Recent Developments

Spin-Off

See “—Overview—Spin-Off of Sibanye Gold”.

Ghana Labor Action

On April 3, 2013, employees at Gold Fields’ Ghanaian operations engaged in a work stoppage that led to a halt in production. On April 8, 2013 the strike ended and production resumed after management and the GMWU reached a settlement. See “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—Ghana Operations—Tarkwa Mine—Mining” and “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—Ghana Operations—Damang Mine—Mining”.

Trend and Outlook

In fiscal 2013, Gold Fields expects the trends discussed in “—Overview” to continue to have an impact on the business going forward.

The trend and outlook below are based on management accounts, which are prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards.

Gold production for the fiscal year ending December 31, 2013 (for the Group including two months of production and costs of the Sibanye Gold assets up to the Spin-off date) is expected to be between 2.010 million attributable equivalent ounces and 2.085 million attributable equivalent ounces. On an IFRS basis, the total cash cost is estimated at U.S.$850 per ounce and NCE is estimated at U.S.$1,357 per ounce (including U.S.$40 per ounce for exploration and growth projects). These estimates are based on an average exchange rate of R9.00 per U.S.$1.00 and U.S.$1.04 per A$1.00.

 

229


Table of Contents

Gold production for the fiscal year ending December 31, 2013 (for the Group excluding the Sibanye Gold assets) is expected to be between 1.825 million attributable equivalent ounces and 1.900 million attributable equivalent ounces. On an IFRS basis, the total cash cost is estimated at U.S.$860 per ounce and NCE is estimated at U.S.$1,360 per ounce (including U.S.$40 per ounce for exploration and growth projects). These estimates are based on an average exchange rate of R9.00 per U.S.$1.00 and U.S.$1.04 per A$1.00.

The above is an estimate subject to change based on a number of factors. For further information on these factors, see “Forward Looking Statements” and “Risk Factors”. The estimated financial information has not been reviewed and reported on by Gold Fields’ auditors.

 

230


Table of Contents

ITEM 6: DIRECTORS, SENIOR MANAGEMENT AND EMPLOYEES

Directors

Gold Fields’ directors and their ages and positions are:

 

Name

   Age     

Position

   Term
Expires (1)
 

Cheryl A. Carolus

     54       Non-executive Chair      May 2015   

Nicholas J. Holland

     54       Executive Director and Chief Executive Officer      —     

Paul A. Schmidt

     45       Executive Director and Chief Financial Officer      —     

Rupert L. Pennant-Rea

     65       Non-executive Director      May 2016   

Kofi Ansah

     68       Non-executive Director      May 2014   

Donald M. J. Ncube

     65       Non-executive Director      May 2016   

David N. Murray

     68       Non-executive Director      May 2016   

Gayle M. Wilson

     68       Non-executive Director      May 2016   

Richard P. Menell

     57       Non-executive Director      May 2015   

Roberto Dañino

     62       Non-executive Director      May 2015   

Alan R. Hill

     70       Non-executive Director      May 2015   

Delfin L. Lazaro

     62       Non-executive Director      May 2015   

 

Notes:

(1) Terms expire on the date of the annual general meeting in that year.

Matthews S. Moloko resigned as a non-executive director with effect from December 31, 2012. Mamphela Ramphele resigned as a director and the Non-executive Chair with effect from February 13, 2013.

Directors and Executive Officers

The Memorandum of Incorporation of Gold Fields provides that the Board must consist of no less than four and no more than 15 directors at any time. The Board currently consists of two executive directors and 10 non-executive directors, all of whom are independent.

The Memorandum of Incorporation of Gold Fields provides that the longest serving one-third of directors must retire from office at each annual general meeting of Gold Fields. Retiring directors normally make themselves available for re-election and are re-elected at the annual general meeting at which they retire. The number of directors serving under these contracts must at all times be less than one-half of the total number of directors in office. Gold Fields’ current executive directors are appointed to their positions as directors by contract.

According to the Memorandum of Incorporation, the Board may meet as it sees fit and set its own policies for adjourning and otherwise regulating meetings. Any director may call a meeting at any time by requesting the company secretary to convene a meeting. The Memorandum of Incorporation further provides for the following:

 

   

if a Director has a personal financial interest in a matter to be considered at a meeting of the Board, that Director is obliged to disclose that interest, must leave the meeting after making that disclosure and must not take part in the consideration of the matter. While absent from such meeting, the interested Director will nevertheless be regarded as being present for the purposes of determining a quorum, but will not be regarded as being present for the purpose of determining whether a resolution has sufficient support to be adopted. However, a Director who owns ordinary shares may vote his ordinary shares at a general meeting of shareholders in a transaction in which the Director is interested;

 

231


Table of Contents
   

a director may not vote as a director to determine his own compensation. The shareholders in a general meeting determine the fees for directors from time to time. Any additional compensation, including compensation for additional services performed by the director for Gold Fields’ business or for other positions in Gold Fields or its subsidiaries, must be determined by a quorum of directors whose compensation would not be affected by the decision; and

 

   

the directors are not required to hold shares in Gold Fields, although a shareholding qualification may be imposed at any meeting of the shareholders.

The Memorandum of Incorporation does not provide for a mandatory retirement age for directors. However, Gold Fields’ Board charter specifies the retirement age to be 72 years of age.

Some of Gold Fields’ executive officers and executive directors are members of the boards of directors of various of its subsidiaries.

Under Section 303A.11 of the New York Stock Exchange Company Manual, or the NYSE Listing Standards, foreign private issuers such as Gold Fields must disclose any significant ways in which their corporate governance practices differ from those followed by U.S. listed companies under the NYSE Listing Standards. Disclosure of the significant ways in which Gold Fields’ corporate governance practices differ from practices followed by U.S. companies listed on the NYSE can be found in Item 16G of this report.

The business address of all the directors and executive officers of Gold Fields is 150 Helen Road, Sandown, Sandton, 2196 South Africa, the address of Gold Fields’ head office.

Executive Directors

Nicholas J. Holland BCom, BAcc, Witwatersrand; CA (SA) .

Executive Director and Chief Executive Officer. Mr. Holland has been an Executive Director of Gold Fields since April 14, 1998 and became Chief Executive Officer on May 1, 2008. He served as Executive Director of Finance from April 1998. On April 15, 2002, his title changed to Chief Financial Officer until April 30, 2008. Mr. Holland has more than 30 years’ experience in financial management and over 22 years of experience in the mining industry. Prior to joining Gold Fields he was Financial Director and Senior Manager of Corporate Finance of Gencor Limited. He is also an alternate director of Rand Refinery.

Paul A. Schmidt BCom, Witwatersrand; BCompt (Hons), UNISA; CA (SA) .

Executive Director and Chief Financial Officer. Mr Schmidt was appointed Chief Financial Officer on January 1, 2009 and joined the Board on November 6, 2009. Prior to this, Mr. Schmidt was acting Chief Financial Officer from May 1, 2008. Prior to this appointment, Mr Schmidt was financial controller for Gold Fields from April 1, 2003. He has more than 16 years’ experience in the mining industry. Mr Schmidt holds no other directorships.

Non-executive Directors

Cheryl A. Carolus BA Law; Bachelor of Education, University of the Western Cape

Chair of the Board. Ms. Carolus has been a director of Gold Fields since March 10, 2009. She was appointed Non-executive Chair effective February 13, 2013. Ms. Carolus is an Executive Chairperson of Peotona Group Holdings. In 2009, she was appointed Chairperson of the Board of South African Airways and served on a number of listed and unlisted companies. Ms. Carolus has previously held senior leadership positions in the liberation movement in South Africa and in the ANC. She has served as Deputy Secretary General under Nelson Mandela, and helped to negotiate the new South African constitution and coordinate the drafting of post-apartheid ANC policy. She served as South Africa’s High Commissioner to the United Kingdom from 1998 to 2001 and was the CEO of SA Tourism from 2001 to 2004. She was Chairperson of South African National Parks

 

232


Table of Contents

Board for six years and currently serves on the boards of other public and private companies, including the World Wildlife Fund. She also works with NGOs focused on young people at risk and conflict prevention. Ms. Carolus was appointed as the Chair of the Board on February 14, 2013.

Rupert L. Pennant-Rea BA, Trinity College, Dublin, Ireland; MA, University of Manchester, United Kingdom

Mr. Pennant-Rea has been a Director of Gold Fields since July 1, 2002. He is Chairman of Henderson Group Plc and The Economist Newspaper Limited and is a Director of Hochschild Mining Plc, Go-Ahead Group, Times Newspaper Holdings Limited and a number of other companies. Previously, Mr. Pennant-Rea was editor of The Economist and Deputy Governor of the Bank of England.

Kofi Ansah BSc (Mechanical Engineering) UST Ghana; MSc (Metallurgy) Georgia Institute of Technology, United States of America

Mr. Ansah was appointed a Director of Gold Fields on March 4, 2004. He is a Director of Ecobank (Ghana) Limited.

Donald M. J. Ncube BA Economics and Political Science, Fort Hare University; Post Graduate Diploma in Labor Relations, Strathclyde University, Scotland; Graduate MSc Manpower Studies, University of Manchester, United Kingdom, Diploma in Financial Management; Honorary Doctorate in Commerce, University of Transkei

Mr. Ncube was appointed a Director of Gold Fields on February 15, 2006. Previously, he was an alternate Director of Anglo American Industrial Corporation Limited and Anglo American Corporation of South Africa Limited, a Director of AngloGold Ashanti Limited as well as Non-Executive Chairman of South African Airways. He is currently Chairman of Badimo Gas (Pty) Limited and the Managing Director of Vula Mining Supplies (Pty) Ltd.

David N. Murray BA Hons Econ; MBA (UCT)

Mr. Murray joined the Board on January 1, 2008. He has more than 38 years’ experience in the mining industry and has been Chief Executive Officer of Rio Tinto Portugal, Rio Tinto Brazil, TVX Gold Inc., Avgold Limited and Avmin Limited. He is a non-executive Director of Ivernia, Inc.

Gayle M. Wilson BCom, BCompt (Hons); CA (SA)

Mrs. Wilson was appointed a Director on August 1, 2008. She was previously an audit partner at Ernst & Young for 16 years where her main focus was on mining clients. In 1998, she was involved in AngloGold Ashanti Limited’s listing on the NYSE and in 2001 she took over as the lead partner on the global audit. Other mining clients during her career include Northam Platinum Limited, Aquarius Platinum Limited, Anglovaal Mining Limited (now African Rainbow Minerals Limited) and certain Anglo Platinum operations. She is a non-executive Director of Witwatersrand Consolidated Gold Resources Limited.

Richard P. Menell BA (Hons), MA (Natural Sciences, Geology), Trinity College, Cambridge, United Kingdom; M.Sc. (Mineral Exploration and Management), Stanford University, California, United States of America

Mr. Menell has been a Director of Gold Fields since October 8, 2008. He has over 34 years’ experience in the mining industry. Previously, he has been the President and Member of the Chamber of Mines of South Africa, President and Chief Executive Officer of TEAL Exploration & Mining Inc., Chairman of Anglovaal Mining Limited and Avgold Limited, Chairman of Bateman Engineering, Deputy Chairman of Harmony Gold Limited and African Rainbow Minerals and Executive Chairman of Anglovaal Mining Limited and Avgold Limited. He is currently a director of and senior advisor to Credit Suisse Securities Johannesburg, Weir Group Plc, the National Business Initiative and the Tourism Enterprise Partnership. Mr. Menell is a Trustee of Brand

 

233


Table of Contents

South Africa and a Council Member of Business Leadership South Africa. He is also Chairman of the City Year South Africa Citizen Service Organization, the Carrick Foundation and the Palaeontological Scientific Trust. Mr Menell became a director of Sibanye Gold with effect from January 1, 2013.

Roberto Dañino LLM, Harvard Law School; Bachelor of Law and Attorney, Pontificia Universidad Católica del Perú

Mr. Dañino has been a director of Gold Fields since March 10, 2009. He served as Prime Minister of Peru from 2001 to 2002 and Ambassador of Peru to the United States from 2002 to 2003. From 2003 to 2006, Mr Dañino was the Senior Vice President and General Counsel of the World Bank Group as well as Secretary General of the International Centre for Settlement of Investment Disputes. He was also the founding General Counsel of the Inter-American Investment Corporation, the private sector affiliate of the Inter-American Development Bank. Mr. Dañino sits on various corporate and non-profit boards, both in Peru and the United States, including La Cima in Peru. Mr Dañino is a Peruvian lawyer who has practiced for over 30 years as a partner of leading law firms in Lima and Washington, DC. Mr Dañino is currently the Deputy Chairman of the Board of Hochschild Mining Plc and Chairman of the Board of Fosfatos del Pacifico S.A.

Alan R. Hill B.Sc (Hons), M. Phil (Rock Mechanics), Leeds University, United Kingdom

Mr Hill joined the Board on August 21, 2009. From 2004 to 2007, Mr Hill was the non-executive chairman of Alamos Gold Limited and, from 2005 to 2009, he held the position of President and CEO of Gabriel Resources Limited. Both companies are involved in gold exploration and development. Mr Hill’s mining career started on the Zambian Copperbelt, following which he joined Noranda, Inc. where he managed gold and nickel mines. He worked as a consultant for a short period, before joining Camflo Mines in 1981, which merged with Barrick Gold in 1984. Mr Hill joined Barrick as part of the merger and spent 19 years with Barrick and was instrumental in its considerable growth, having played a pivotal role in its various merger and acquisition initiatives through the years. He retired from Barrick in 2003 as its Executive Vice President, Development. He was appointed the Executive Chairman of Teranga Gold Corporation in September 2012, having been the Chairman and CEO since it was founded in October 2010.

Delfin L. Lazaro BS Metallurgical Engineering, University of Philippines, MBA, Harvard Graduate School of Business

Mr Lazaro was appointed a director of Gold Fields on June 1, 2011. He also serves on the Board of Ayala Corporation, The Insular Life Assurance Company Ltd. and Manila Water Company, Inc., amongst other companies. He served as the President and CEO of Globe Telecom from 1996 to 1998. Prior to this, he was head of the Philippines Department of Energy and served as the Chairman of various entities from 1992 to 1994. He started his working career at Benguet Corporation in 1975 as a Treasurer and held various other positions in the organization until he was appointed Vice Chairman; he served in this role from 1989 to 1992.

Former Non-executive Directors

Matthews S. Moloko BSc (Hons) and Certificate in Education, University of Leicester, Advanced Management Programme, Wharton

Mr. Moloko was appointed a director of Gold Fields on February 25, 2011. He is the executive Chair, founder and shareholder of Thesele Group and non-executive Chair of Alexander Forbes Group. He worked at a number of financial services companies, including Brait and Old Mutual, where he was CEO of Old Mutual Asset Management until 2004. Other directorships include Sycom Property Fund and Aucap Limited. He is chairman of the Nelson Mandela Foundation Investment Committee. Mr Moloko resigned as a director and the non-executive Chair effective December 31, 2012, following his appointment as the Chairman of Sibanye Gold effective January 1, 2013.

 

234


Table of Contents

Mamphela A. Ramphele MBCHB, University of Natal; PhD in Social Anthropology, University of South Africa; BCom Admin University of South Africa. Diploma in Tropical Health and Hygiene and Diploma in Public Health, University of Witwatersrand

Dr. Ramphele was appointed non-executive Deputy Chair of the Board of Gold Fields on July 1, 2010 and was appointed Chair on November 2, 2010. She is the Founder of Letsema Circle, a Cape Town based specialist Transformation Advisory Company in both the public and private sector, as well as The Citizen Movement, an organization which encourages South African citizens to become active participants in entrenching the country’s constitutional democracy. Dr Ramphele is a director of Remgro, Technology Innovation Agency and Edu-Loan. She previously served as a director of Anglo American Plc and Medi-Clinic and was the Managing Director of the World Bank from May 2000 to July 2004, with responsibility for human development activities and the World Bank Institute, which provides training and learning for both staff and clients. Dr. Ramphele served as Co-Chair on the Global Commission for International Migration (GCIM) between 2004 and 2005. Prior to joining the World Bank, she was Vice-Chancellor of the University of Cape Town, a post she took up in 1996, having joined the university as a research fellow in 1986. Dr Ramphele resigned from the Board with effect from February 13, 2013.

Executive Officers

Michael D. Fleischer (52) BProc, University of Witwatersrand

Admitted as attorney of the High Court of South Africa in 1991, Advanced Taxation Certificate, University of South Africa. Executive Vice President, General Counsel. Mr. Fleischer was appointed to his current position of Executive Vice President, General Counsel on November 1, 2006. Prior to his appointment, Mr. Fleischer was a partner in the corporate services department at Webber Wentzel, one of the leading South African law firms. Mr. Fleischer has a wide range of experience in mergers and acquisitions, commercial transactions, mining law and stock exchange transactions. In 2005, he was ranked as one of South Africa’s leading commercial lawyers by Chambers Global.

Tommy D. McKeith (49) BSc. Hons (Geology), GDE (Mining) and MBA, University of the Witwatersrand (South Africa).

Executive Vice President, Head of Growth and International Projects. Mr. McKeith was appointed Executive Vice President, Head of Growth and International Projects on July 1, 2011. Prior to this, he served as Executive Vice President, Head of Exploration and Business Development since October 1, 2007. Prior to rejoining Gold Fields in October 2007, he served as Chief Executive Officer for Troy Resources NL. From August 2004 until January 2006, he was Vice President of Business Development at Gold Fields. Before joining Troy, he worked for over 17 years with Gold Fields and its predecessors in various mine geology, exploration and business development positions. Mr. McKeith has 20 years of experience in business development, mining and exploration geology in the international mining sector. He is a Fellow of the AusIMM and SEG.

Richard M. Weston (61) FAIMM, CPEng, IEA. MSc Mining Geomechanics, UNSW; GDM, UCQ; BE (Civil), Sydney University

Executive Vice President, Head of Australasia. Mr Weston was appointed to the position of Executive Vice President, Head of Australasia on May 1, 2010. He was formerly Senior Vice-President, Operations for Coeur d’Alene Mines Corporation, a gold and silver mining company based in Idaho in the United States. Before joining Coeur, he lead the site team responsible for the development of Barrick Australia’s Cowal gold project and prior to that he headed operations at Rio Tinto Australia’s ERA Ranger and Jabiluka uranium mines in the Northern Territory.

Naseem A. Chohan (52) BE (Electronic), University of Limerick.

Senior Vice President, Sustainable Development. Mr. Chohan was appointed to the position of Senior Vice President, Sustainable Development on September 13, 2010. Mr. Chohan was previously self-employed as a

 

235


Table of Contents

consultant to various companies and, prior to that, spent 25 years at De Beers. When he left DeBeers in 2009, he was acting as Group Consultant, Sustainability and ECOHS (Environment, Community, Occupational Health and Hygiene and Safety).

Jan W. Jacobsz (52). BA, University of Johannesburg (previously Rand Afrikaans University).

Senior Vice President, Head of Investor Relations and Corporate Affairs. Mr. Jacobsz was appointed Senior Vice President and Head of Investor Relations & Corporate Affairs, as well as a member of the Group executive committee, on April 15, 2002. In addition Mr. Jacobsz held the portfolio of Group Sustainable Development from 2002 to 2005. Prior to that Mr. Jacobsz was Senior Manager: Investor Relations & Corporate Affairs; Programme Manager of Gold Fields’ Group Transformation Program at Gold Fields of South Africa Limited, and Administrator of the Gold Fields Foundation.

Kgabo F. L. Moabelo (42) B.Admin (Honours) in Industrial Psychology, University of South Africa, MSc in Engineering Business Management, University of Warwick

Managing Executive, South Africa. Mr Kgabo Moabelo was appointed Managing Executive, South Africa effective March 1, 2013. Prior to that Mr. Moabelo had served as Executive Vice President, People and Organizational Effectiveness since August 1, 2011 after having joined Gold Fields on October 1, 2010 as Senior Vice President, Human Resources. Before joining Gold Fields, he was the HR Director for Africa and Levant at Cisco Systems, the IT Group from 2008 to 2010. Prior to Cisco Systems he was the Human Resources Director for Standard Bank overseeing the Global Personal and Business Banking, Credit and Support Services from 2005 to 2008. Mr Moabelo has extensive HR experience within the mining and energy industries, having also worked for Anglo Platinum between 1992 and 2005 and Eskom, respectively.

Timothy W. Rowland (52) BSc Hons Geology; MSc Mineral Exploration; GDE Mining Engineering; Pr.Sci.Nat.; FSAIMM; FGSSA; GASA

Executive Vice-President, Group Technical Services. Mr Rowland has 26 years mining industry experience and prior to his appointment as Executive Vice President, Group Technical Services he had been acting Executive Vice-President and Head of the South Africa region, since October 16, 2010. Tim received his BSc (Hons) Geology at the University of Nottingham, UK, in 1982. In 1984 he received his MSc in Mining Geology and Mineral Exploration—Postgraduate at the University of Leicester, UK. During the period of 1986—2002 he worked at various Anglo American and AngloGold Ashanti Gold Operations and at the AAC Head Office as Technical Assistant, working mainly in the areas of Mine and Exploration Geology, Business Development, Mineral Resource Management and global merger and acquisition due diligences, before joining Gold Fields Limited, Kloof Division as Manager: Mineral Resources and Mine Planning, in July 2002. He was then appointed to Head Office as Group Senior Consultant: Mineral Resources and Mine Planning in 2004 where he was responsible for Mineral Resource Management in Gold Fields and specifically held the position of Group Competent Person for the Mineral Resource and Reserve Reporting process compliance and governance. In October 2008, Tim was appointed as Vice President and Head of the Gold Fields Technical Division for the South African region.

Peet van Schalkwyk (49) BSc (GeoChem), University of Potchefstroom. Diploma in Industrial Relations.

Executive Vice President, Head of MENA & Eurasia. Mr. van Schalkwyk was appointed Executive Vice President, West Africa on September 19, 2011 a scope which was subsequently expanded to include operations in MENA & Eurasia. Prior to his appointment, Mr. van Schalkwyk was the General Manager of Alamos Gold Incorporated since March 2010. Prior to that, he was General Manager at both Tarkwa and Damang (from April 2007 to March 2010). Before joining Gold Fields, Mr. van Schalkwyk held various positions with AngloGold Ashanti Ltd, Harmony Gold Mining Co. Ltd. and Anglo American Corporation.

 

236


Table of Contents

Lee-Ann N. Samuel (35) BA Psychology and Honors Political Science, University of Johannesburg, Global Remuneration Practitioner (GRP), WorldatWork, USA.

Senior Vice President, Human Resources. Mrs. Samuel joined Gold Fields in 2009 as Vice President, Group Remuneration and Employee Benefits, and, effective March 1, 2013, she was promoted to Senior Vice President: Human Resources. Lee-Ann has 14 years of Human Resources experience in financial services, mining and telecommunications. Prior to joining Gold Fields, Mrs. Samuel worked as Head of People Development at Telkom Media, a subsidiary of Telkom for 3 years. Her overall responsibility is to provide strategic direction for the Human Resources discipline at Gold Fields, including the development of Human Resource policies to ensure alignment with the strategy for the Group as well as external trends and demands impacting on HR.

Ernesto Balarezo (45)MSc Industrial Management, BSc Industrial Engineering, Texas A&M University, Management Studies, Wharton School of Business, Management Studies, Harvard University.

Executive Vice President, South America. Mr. Balarez joined Gold Fields effective March 11, 2013 as Executive Vice President for South America. He has 21 years of professional experience at industrial and mining companies with a focus on finance and operations. Prior to joining Gold Fields, Mr. Balarezo was the Vice-President: Operations of Hochschild Mining plc, or Hochschild. In this capacity, he was responsible for overseeing the Hochschild group’s six silver and gold mining operations in Peru, Argentina and Mexico, as well as its growth projects. He had 9,000 employees under his management. He joined Hochschild in 2007 as General Manager of the Mexican operation before being promoted to General Manager for Peru in 2008 and Vice President of Operations in 2010. Prior to Hochschild, Ernesto worked at other subsidiaries of the Hochschild group since 1997, including at Hochschild’s cement subsidiary, Cementos Pacasmayo, as deputy CEO.

Brett J. Mattison (34). BComm (Hons) Law, Accounting, University of Stellenbosch, Masters in Law, Higher Tax Diploma, University of Johannesburg, Exec. MBA (PLD), Harvard Business School

Senior Vice-President: Strategy, Planning and Corporate Development. Mr. Mattison was appointed Senior Vice-President: Strategy, Planning and Corporate Development effective May 1, 2013. He began his career with Gold Fields in 2001 as part of the Global Legal team providing commercial, legal and tax structuring advice in relation to various global transactions. He subsequently joined the Corporate Development team in 2005 where he worked for 6 years until 2010. In late 2010, Mr. Mattison was appointed as the Country Manager of the Philippines tasked with the mandate of setting up Gold Fields’ activities in the Philippines. Most recently, he has been in the role of Vice President of Special Projects tasked with setting out the groundwork for the Gold Fields strategy sessions.

Former Executive Officers

James W. D. Dowsley (55) BSc (Mining Engineering), Witwatersrand.

Senior Vice President, Head of Corporate Development. Mr. Dowsley was General Manager of Corporate Development at Gold Fields since March 1998. On April 15, 2002, Mr. Dowsley’s title changed to Senior Vice President, Corporate Development. Prior to his appointment as General Manager of Corporate Development, Mr. Dowsley served as General Manager of New Business, and also as Manager of the Mineral Economics Division of Gold Fields of South Africa Limited. Mr. Dowsley retired from Gold Fields with effect from May 31, 2013.

Zakira Amra (31). BCom. University of Natal. Senior Vice President: Head of Corporate Affairs and Investor Relations.

Ms. Amra was appointed Senior Vice President: Head of Corporate Affairs and Investor Relations on May 3, 2011. She joined Gold Fields from Barclays Capital where she was a senior member of the Mining & Metals team since 2008. Prior to Barclays Capital she was employed at RMB Asset Management since 2007 and Barnard Jacobs Mellet Securities since 2005. Ms. Amra resigned from Gold Fields at the end of May 2012.

 

237


Table of Contents

Cain Farrel (63). FCIS, MBA, Southern Cross University, Australia.

Mr. Farrel was appointed Company Secretary on May 1, 2003 and retired on December 31, 2012. Mr. Farrel is past President and a former Director of the Southern African Institute of Chartered Secretaries and Administrators. Previously, Mr. Farrel served as Senior Divisional Secretary of Anglo American Corporation of South Africa. Mr Farrel was appointed Company Secretary of Sibanye Gold effective January 1, 2013.

Peter L. Turner (56) National Higher Diploma (NHD) Vaal Triangle Technikon SA, Mechanical Engineering; South African Mine Manager Certificate of Competency—Metalliferous; South Africa Mechanical Engineers Certificate of Competency

Mr Turner was appointed as Executive Vice President, Head of South Africa region on August 8, 2011 and previously served as Executive Vice President, Head of West Africa since August 1, 2009. He moved to Ghana in 2008 when he was appointed Vice President of Operations and before that he was the head of the Kloof mine in South Africa from 2005 and later the Driefontein mine. Prior to joining Gold Fields in 2005, he was Managing Director of Geita Gold Mining Limited in Tanzania from 2002 to 2005 and, before that, General Manager of East and West Africa region for AngloGold Ashanti where he spent the majority of his career. He progressed through the ranks, starting as an engineering trainee at Vaal Reefs in 1975, later spending time in various managerial positions at numerous gold mining operations. Mr Turner has more than 34 years of experience in the mining industry. Mr Turner resigned from Gold Fields effective December 31, 2012 to join Sibanye Gold.

Juan L. Kruger (42) Bachelor degree in Business and Finance, Universidad del Pacifico; MBA, Harvard Business School

Mr. Kruger was appointed as Executive Vice President, Head of Operations for South America on August 1, 2009, a scope which was subsequently expanded to include the Americas. He has over 15 years of broad experience in corporate finance, strategic planning and general management in the mining, consumer goods, airline, telecommunications, consumer goods and financial services industries in South America. Mr. Kruger joined Gold Fields in October 2007 as Senior Vice President and country manager for the Peruvian Operations, and led the start-up team at Cerro Corona. As of April 2008, he assumed responsibilities for the South American region. Prior to joining Gold Fields, Mr. Kruger was the Chief Executive Officer for LAN Peru, a subsidiary of LAN Airlines. From 2001 to 2004, Mr. Kruger was the Chief Financial and Strategy Officer for Telefonica Data in Peru and, from 2004 to 2006, he was employed by Glencore A.G. where he was the Chief Financial Officer for Glencore’s operating assets in the region. Mr. Kruger also held senior management and consulting positions at McKinsey & Co. and Procter & Gamble in South America. In fiscal 2012, Mr Kruger left Gold Fields to become CEO of a privately-held mining company in Peru.

Company Secretary

Karen Robinson (35). LLB, Certificate in Advanced Corporate & Securities Law.

Mrs Robinson was appointed as Assistant Company Secretary on November 1, 2011 and was promoted to Company Secretary on January 1, 2013. She was previously the Company Secretary of Aveng Limited and Kagiso Trust Investments (Pty) Limited and the Assistant Company Secretary of Murray & Roberts Limited.

Board of Directors’ Committees

In order to ensure good corporate governance, the Board has formed an Audit Committee, a Remuneration Committee, a Nominating and Governance Committee a Safety, a Health and Sustainable Development Committee, a Capital Projects Control and Review Committee and a Social & Ethics Committee. All the committees are comprised exclusively of Non-executive Directors. All committees are chaired by an independent Non-executive Director. The remuneration of Non-executive Directors for their service on the various committees has been approved by the shareholders.

The Audit Committee monitors and reviews Gold Fields’ accounting controls and procedures, including the effectiveness of the Group’s information systems and other systems of internal control; the effectiveness of the internal audit function; reports of both external and internal auditors; quarterly reports, the Form 20-F, annual report and the annual financial statements; the accounting policies of the Group and any proposed revisions

 

238


Table of Contents

thereto; external audit findings, reports and fees, and the approval thereof; and compliance with applicable legislation and requirements of regulatory authorities and Gold Fields’ Code of Ethics. The current membership of the Audit Committee is as follows:

Gayle M. Wilson (chair)

Rupert L. Pennant-Rea

Donald M. J. Ncube

Richard P. Menell

The Remuneration Committee establishes the compensation philosophy of Gold Fields and the terms and conditions of employment of Executive Directors and other executive officers. The current membership of the Remuneration Committee is as follows:

Rupert L. Pennant-Rea (chair)

Cheryl A. Carolus

Gayle M. Wilson

Donald M. J. Ncube

The Safety, Health and Sustainable Development Committee reviews adherence to occupational health, safety and environmental standards by Gold Fields. The Committee seeks to minimize mining-related accidents, to ensure that the Company’s operations are in compliance with all environmental regulations and to establish policy in respect of HIV/AIDS and health matters. The current membership of the Safety, Health and Sustainable Development Committee is as follows:

David N. Murray (chair)

Kofi Ansah

Cheryl A. Carolus

Roberto Dañino

Richard P. Menell

The Nominating and Governance Committee develops and implements policy on corporate governance issues, develops the policy and process for evaluating nominations to the Board of Directors, identifies successors to the Chairman and Chief Executive Officer and considers selection and rotation of the Board committee members. The current membership of the Nominating and Governance Committee is as follows:

Cheryl A. Carolus (chair)

Rupert L. Pennant-Rea

Kofi Ansah

Roberto Dañino

The Capital Projects Control and Review Committee was established on May 1, 2009 as a sub-committee to satisfy the Board that Gold Fields has used appropriate and efficient methodologies and has adequate controls in place in respect of new capital projects proposed by management in excess of R1.5 billion or U.S.$200 million. These projects are reviewed from inception to completion and the committee makes recommendations to management as it considers appropriate. The current membership of the Capital Projects Control and Review Committee is as follows:

Richard P. Menell (chair)

Gayle M. Wilson

 

239


Table of Contents

Alan R. Hill

David N. Murray

Delfin L. Lazaro

The Social & Ethics Committee was established on November 29, 2011 and is responsible for ensuring, among other things, that Gold Fields discharges its statutory duties in respect of section 72 of Companies Act 71 of 2008 (as amended) and its applicable regulations, which include monitoring Gold Fields’ activities in relation to relevant legislation, other legal requirements and prevailing codes of best practice regarding: (i) social and economic development; (ii) good corporate citizenship; (iii) the environment, health and public safety and their impact on Gold Fields’ activities, products and services; (iv) consumer relations; and (v) labor and employment legislation. The Social and Ethics Committee must bring any matters relating to this monitoring to the attention of the Board and report to shareholders at the annual general meeting. The Board seeks the assistance of the Social and Ethics Committee in ensuring that Gold Fields complies with best practice recommendations in respect of social and ethical management. The current members of the committee include the chairs of the Audit Committee, Remuneration Committee, the Safety, Health and Sustainable Development Committee and the Nominating and Governance Committee, as follows:

Roberto Dañino (chair)

Cheryl A. Carolus

David N. Murray

Rupert L. Pennant-Rea

Gayle M. Wilson

Executive Committee

Gold Fields’ Executive Committee meets on a regular basis to discuss and make decisions on strategic and operating issues facing Gold Fields. The current composition of the Executive Committee is as follows:

 

Nicholas J. Holland

  

Chief Executive Officer

Paul A. Schmidt

   Chief Financial Officer

Brett J. Mattison

   Senior Vice President, Strategy, Planning and Corporate Development

Tommy D. McKeith

   Executive Vice President, Growth and International Projects

Kgabo F. L. Moabelo

   Managing Executive, South Africa

Peet van Schalkwyk

   Executive Vice President, Head of MENA & Eurasia

Ernesto Balarezo

   Executive Vice President, South America

Jan W. Jacobsz

   Senior Vice President, Head of Investor Relations and Corporate Affairs

Richard M. Weston

   Executive Vice President, Head of Australasia

Michael D. Fleischer

   Executive Vice President, General Counsel

Naseem A. Chohan

   Senior Vice President, Sustainable Development

Timothy W. Rowland

   Executive Vice President, Group Technical Services

Lee-Ann N. Samuel

   Senior Vice President, Human Resources

Karen Robinson

   Company Secretary (In attendance)

 

240


Table of Contents

Regional Executive Management Committees

Each of Gold Fields’ four operating regions (South Africa, Australasia, West Africa and South America) has a Regional Executive Management Committee. Gold Fields also has a Growth and International Projects Committee and a Group Technical Services Committee.

South African Regional Executive Management Committee composition ( 1) :

 

Kgabo F. L. Moabelo

   Managing Executive, South Africa

Ken Matthysen

   Vice President and Head of South Deep

 

Note:

(1) Prior to the Spin-off, Peter L. Turner was Executive Vice President, Head of South African Region, Koos Barnard was Senior Vice President and Head of KDC, Reg Naidoo was Vice President and Head of Finance—South Africa Region, Ben Haumann was Vice President and Head of Beatrix, Morapedi Mutloane was Vice President and Head of Human Resources—South Africa Region. Paddy Govender was Vice President and Head of Commercial Services, Stuart Allan was Vice President and Head of the South Deep Capital Project, Philip Jacobs was Vice President and Head of Sustainable Development—South Africa Region and Karel Opperman was Vice President and Head of Engineering—South Africa Region.

Australasian Regional Executive Management Committee composition:

 

Richard Weston

   Executive Vice President, Head of Australasia

Ross Calnan

   General Manager—St. Ives

Garry Mills

   General Manager—Agnew

Wimpie Du Toit

   Vice President and Head of Human Resources—Australasia

Alex Munt

   Vice President and Head of Finance—Australasia

Philip Woodhouse

   Vice President and Head of Sustainable Development—Australasia

Middle East North Africa, or MENA, and Eurasia Regional Executive Management Committee composition:

 

Peet van Schalkwyk

   Executive Vice President, Head of MENA and Eurasia

Alfred Baku

   Vice President Operations—Ghana

Pierre Coussey

   Country Manager—Ghana

Marnu Lombaard

   Vice President and Regional Head of Technical Services—MENA and Eurasia

Gary Hamman

   Vice President and Regional Head of Finance—MENA and Eurasia

Dawie Strydom

   Vice President and Regional Head of Human Resources—MENA and Eurasia

Errol Drake

   Vice President and Regional Head of Projects—MENA and Eurasia

Johan Joubert

   Regional Manager: Protection Services Manager—MENA and Eurasia

 

241


Table of Contents

South American Regional Executive Management Committee composition:

 

Ernesto Balarezo

   Executive Vice President, South America

Manuel Diaz

   General Manager—Cerro Corona

Alberto Cardenas

   Vice President—Head of Strategic Planning and Business Development

Rodolfo Michels

   Vice President—Head of Finance

Miguel Inchaustegui

   Vice President—Head of Corporate Affairs and Sustainable Development

Ralph Alosilla-Velasco

   Vice President—Head of Logistics and Commercial

Veronica Valderrama

   Vice President—Head of Human Resources

Juan Jose Granda

   Legal and Institutional Relations Corporate Manager

Manuel Villanueva

   General Manager—Chucapaca

Francisco Azevedo

   Head of Exploration

Growth and International Projects Committee composition:

 

Tommy McKeith

   Executive Vice President, Growth and International Projects

Nate Brewer

   Senior Vice President Greenfields Exploration

Mike Nelson

   Senior Vice President: International Projects

Matt Dusci

   Vice President Concept and Studies

Diego Ortega

   Vice President Sustainability and Corporate Affairs

Vinit Desai

   Vice President Finance: Growth and International Projects

Conrad Mtshali

   Vice President Human Resources: Growth and International Projects

Alan Gibson

   Head of Legal and Commercial

Group Technical Services Committee composition:

 

Timothy Rowland

   Executive Vice President, Group Technical Services

Kevin Robertson

   Vice President and Group Head of Mineral Resource Management and Mine Planning

Jacques van Rensburg

   Vice President and Group Head of Engineering

Philip Engelbrecht

   Group Head of Metallurgy

Paul Lucey

   Group Head of Technology and Innovations

Jan Du Plessis

   Vice President and Group Head of Energy, Carbon and Water Management

Jan van Niekerk

   Manager: BIOX ®

 

242


Table of Contents

Compensation of Directors and Senior Management

During the fiscal year ended December 31, 2012, the aggregate compensation paid or payable to directors and senior management of Gold Fields as a group was approximately R212.0 million, including all salaries, fees, bonuses and contributions during such period to provide pension, retirement or similar benefits for directors and senior management of Gold Fields, of which R7.8 million was due to pension scheme contributions and life insurance, R125.8 million was due to bonus and performance-related share payments, R1.1 million was expenses and R77.3 million was due to salary payments.

The following table presents information regarding the compensation paid by Gold Fields for the year ended December 31, 2012 to its directors and executive officers:

 

    Directors
fees
    Committee
fee
    Salary     Annual
Bonus
    Share
Proceeds
    Pension
Scheme
Contributions
    Expenses     Total (2)  
    (Rand thousand)  

Executive Directors

               

Nicholas J. Holland (3)

    —          —          9,310        8,460        25,389        1,573        600        45,332   

Paul A. Schmidt (3)

    —          —          5,465        5,553        8,001        614        327        19,960   

Executive officers

               

Zakira Amra (4)

    —          —          2,250        —          —          128        —          2,378   

Naseem A. Chohan

    —          —          2,464        1,402        236        325        —          4,427   

James W. D. Dowsley

    —          —          3,115        3,298        4,110        765        —          11,288   

Michael D. Fleischer (3)

    —          —          4,603        4,307        8,462        741        —          18,113   

Juan L. Kruger

    —          —          4,753        5,726        5,455        916        —          16,850   

Tommy D. McKeith

    —          —          7,391        3,782        7,985        212        —          19,370   

Kgabo F. L. Moabelo

    —          —          3,499        3,102        321        467        —          7,389   

Timothy W. Rowland

    —          —          3,227        2,679        4,854        595        71        11,426   

Peet van Schalkwyk (3)

    —          —          4,827        2,771        113        —          —          7,711   

Peter L. Turner

    —          —          5,032        3,394        4,521        798        —          13,745   

Richard M. Weston

    —          —          5,483        2,909        20        632        —          9,044   

Jan W. Jacobsz (5)

    —          —          2,102        3,325        3,551        —          —          8,978   

Non-executive Directors

               

Kofi Ansah

    758        214        —          —          410        —          —          1,382   

Cheryl A. Carolus

    758        107        —          —          —          —          —          865   

Roberto Dañino

    758        364        —          —          412        —          —          1,534   

Alan R. Hill

    758        107        —          —          —          —          —          865   

Richard P. Menell

    758        418        —          —          —          —          —          1,176   

David N. Murray

    758        371        —          —          411        —          —          1,540   

Donald M. J. Ncube

    758        249        —          —          413        —          —          1,420   

Mamphela A. Ramphele (6)

    2,284        —          —          —          —          —          8        2,292   

Rupert L. Pennant-Rea

    758        513        —          —          —          —          —          1,271   

Gayle M. Wilson

    758        583        —          —          414        —          117        1,872   

Delfin L. Lazaro

    758        107        —          —          —          —          —          865   

Matthews S. Moloko (7)

    758        142        —          —          —          —          —          900   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total

    10,622        3,175        63,521        50,708        75,078        7,766        1,123        211,993   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

Notes:

(1) The annual bonus relates to bonus accruals for the year ended December 31, 2012 paid in February 2013.
(2) This relates to all share transactions for the year ended December 31, 2012 in terms of the Gold Fields Management Incentive Scheme and the Gold Fields 2005 and 2012 Share Plans. Mr. Holland’s 2009 share award resulted in a share pay-out of R24.3 million and Mr. Schmidt’s 2009 share award resulted in a share pay-out of R6.4 million in 2012.
(3) These amounts reflect the full directors’ emoluments in Rand for comparative purposes. The portion of executive directors’ emoluments payable in U.S. dollars is paid in terms of agreements with the offshore subsidiaries for work done by directors offshore for offshore companies. The total U.S. dollar amounts paid for 2012 were as follows: Nicholas J. Holland $336,300, Paul A. Schmidt $90,300, Michael D. Fleischer $77,303 and Peet van Schalkwyk $272,924.
(4) Resigned on May 31, 2012.
(5) Appointed as a prescribed officer on August 1, 2012.
(6) Resigned as Chair of Gold Fields on February 13, 2013.
(7) Resigned as non-Executive Director on December 31, 2012.

 

243


Table of Contents

Share options and restricted shares outstanding and held by directors, former directors, executive officers and former executive officers as of December 31, 2012 were, to the knowledge of Gold Fields’ management, as follows:

 

Name

  Options to
purchase
ordinary
shares
    Share
Appreciation
Rights
(SARS)
    Restricted
Shares
    Option/
SARS
exercise
price
    Spin-off
Adjustment (1)
    Adjusted
Exercise
Price (1)
    Expiration/
Settlement Date (2)
          (Rand)

Executive Directors

             

Nicholas J. Holland

    —          49,000        —          109.66        7,383        95.31      March 24, 2015
    —          59,000        —          89.76        6,045        75.89      March 1, 2016
    —          —          80,800        —          22,659        —        March 1, 2013
    —          38,250        —          119.15        5,762        103.55      March 1, 2017
    —          —          52,500        —          7,908        —        June 1, 2014
    —          —          116,415        —          17,536        —        March 1, 2015
    —          —          11,027        —          —          —        September 1, 2013

Paul A. Schmidt

    —          4,950        —          124.19        1,516        108.23      March 1, 2013
    —          6,300        —          107.59        949        93.51      March 3, 2014
    —          9,450        —          103.99        1,326        90.12      June 2, 2014
    —          14,390        —          109.66        2,168        95.31      March 2, 2015
    —          8,220        —          103.78        1,173        89.91      June 1, 2015
    —          22,350        —          89.76        2,290        75.89      March 1, 2016
    —          —          26,250        —          7,361        —        March 1, 2013
    —          25,800        —          119.15        3,886        103.55      March 1, 2017
    —          —          32,600        —          4,910        —        March 1, 2014
    —          —          5,481        —          —          —        September 1, 2013
    —          —          43,743        —          6,589        —        March 1, 2015

Non-executive Directors

             

Rupert L. Pennant-Rea

    —          —          4,100        —          —          —        November 4, 2012

Cheryl A. Carolus

    —          —          4,100        —          —          —        November 4, 2012

Richard P. Menell

    —          —          4,100        —          —          —        November 4, 2012

Executive Officers

             

James W. D. Dowsley

    —          5,500        —          124.19        1,684        108.23      March 1, 2013
    2,500        —          —          107.59        —          —        March 3, 2014
    2,500        —          —          107.59        —          —        March 3, 2014
    5,000        —          —          107.59        —          —        March 3, 2014
    5,000        —          —          107.59        —          —        March 3, 2014
    —          12,750        —          107.59        1,921        93.51      March 3, 2014
    —          12,750        —          103.99        1,789        90.12      June 2, 2014
    —          9,950        —          109.66        1,499        95.31      March 2, 2015
    —          18,000        —          89.76        1,844        75.89      March 1, 2016
    —          —          18,525        —          5,194        —        March 1, 2013
    —          12,975        —          119.15        1,954        103.55      March 1, 2017
    —          —          13,275        —          1,998        —        March 1, 2014
    —          —          24,283        —          3,657        —        March 1, 2015
    —          —          3,395        —          —          —        September 1, 2014

Michael D. Fleischer

    —          11,067        —          124.19        3,389        108.29      March 1, 2013
    —          15,900        —          107.59        2,396        93.51      March 3, 2014
    —          15,900        —          103.99        2,231        90.12      June 2, 2014
    —          20,400        —          109.66        3,073        95.31      March 2, 2015
    —          22,350        —          89.76        2,290        75.89      March 1, 2016

 

244


Table of Contents

Name

  Options to
purchase
ordinary
shares
    Share
Appreciation
Rights
(SARS)
    Restricted
Shares
    Option/
SARS
exercise
price
    Spin-off
Adjustment (1)
    Adjusted
Exercise
Price (1)
    Expiration/
Settlement Date (2)
          (Rand)
    —          —          25,575        —          7,172        —        March 1, 2013
    —          18,225        —          119.15        2,744        103.55      March 1, 2017
    —          —          20,850        —          3,140        —        March 1, 2014
    —          —          4,533        —          —          —        September 1, 2013
    —          —          36,390        —          5,481        —        March 1, 2015

Tommy D. McKeith

    —          50,000        —          121.82        7,547        105.88      October 1, 2013
    —          10,600        —          107.59        1,597        93.51      March 3, 2014
    —          10,600        —          103.99        1,487        90.12      June 2, 2014
    —          20,400        —          109.66        3,073        95.31      March 2, 2015
    —          22,350        —          89.76        2,290        75.89      March 1, 2016
    —          —          25,575        —          7,172        —        March 1, 2013
    —          18,225        —          119.15        2,744        103.55      March 1, 2017
    —          —          20,850        —          3,140        —        March 1, 2014
    —          —          12,661        —          —          —        September 1, 2013
    —          —          50,302        —          7,577        —        March 1, 2015

Peter L. Turner

    15,000        —          —          89.8        —          —        July 2, 2013
    —          4,800        —          124.19        1,470        —        March 11, 2013
    —          8,550        —          107.59        1,578        93.53      March 13, 2014
    —          8,550        —          103.99        2,439        90.12      June 12, 2014
    —          6,650        —          109.66        4,798        95.41      March 12, 2015
    —          5,500        —          99.87        3,396        86.00      September 1, 2015
    —          22,350        —          89.76        —          —        March 1, 2016
    —          —          25,575        —          7,172        —        March 1, 2013
    —          12,150        —          119.15        —          —        March 1, 2017
    —          —          13,900        —          2,092        —        March 1, 2014
    —          —          5,341        —          —          —        September 1, 2013
    —          —          37,146        —          5,595        —        March 1, 2015

Juan L. Kruger

    —          10,000        —          124.09        1,509        107.85      October 15, 2013
    —          8,500        —          107.59        1,281        93.51      March 3, 2014
    —          8,500        —          103.99        1,193        90.12      June 2, 2014
    —          9,950        —          109.66        1,499        95.31      March 2, 2015
    —          3,600        —          99.87        468        86.00      September 1, 2015
    —          22,350        —          89.76        2,290        75.89      March 1, 2016
    —          —          25,575        —          7,172        —        March 1, 2013
    —          18,225        —          119.15        2,744        103.55      March 1, 2017
    —          —          20,850        —          3,140        —        March 1, 2014
    —          —          8,108        —          —          —        September 1, 2013
    —          —          46,624        —          7,023        —        March 1, 2015

Richard M. Weston

    —          10,840        —          101.48        1,493        87.61      June 1, 2016
    —          —          12,460        —          1,876        —        June 1, 2013
    —          18,225        —          119.15        2,744        103.55      March 1, 2017
    —          —          20,850        —          3,140        —        March 1, 2014
    —          —          12,661        —          —          —        September 1, 2013
    —          —          36,195        —          5,452        —        March 1, 2015

Naseem A. Chohan

    —          4,130        —          118.35        622        102.86      December 1, 2016
    —          —          4,200        —          632        —        December 1, 2013
    —          12,975        —          119.15        1,954        103.55      March 1, 2017

 

245


Table of Contents

Name

  Options to
purchase
ordinary
shares
    Share
Appreciation
Rights
(SARS)
    Restricted
Shares
    Option/
SARS
exercise
price
    Spin-off
Adjustment (1)
    Adjusted
Exercise
Price (1)
    Expiration/
Settlement Date (2)
          (Rand)
    —          —          13,275        —          1,998        —        March 1, 2014
    —          —          2,287        —          —          —        September 1, 2013
    —          —          16,961        —          2,554        —        March 1, 2015

Kgabo F.L. Moabelo

    —          3,440        —          118.35        518        102.86      December 1, 2016
    —          —          3,500        —          527        —        December 1, 2013
    —          12,975        —          119.15        1,954        103.55      March 1, 2017
    —          —          13,275        —          1,998        —        March 1, 2014
    —          4,156        —          114.64        626        99.63      September 1, 2017
    —          —          5,643        —          850        —        September 1, 2014
    —          —          3,133        —          —          —        September 1, 2013
    —          —          27,188        —          4,095        —        March 1, 2015

Timothy W. Rowland

    —          4,950        —          124.19        1,516        108.23      March 1, 2013
    —          6,300        —          107.59        949        93.51      March 3, 2014
    —          9,450        —          103.99        1,326        90.12      June 2, 2014
    —          11,400        —          109.66        1,717        95.31      March 2, 2015
    —          14,400        —          89.76        1,475        75.89      March 1, 2016
    —          —          14,775        —          4,143        —        March 1, 2013
    —          11,925        —          119.15        1,796        103.55      March 1, 2017
    —          —          12,225        —          1,840        —        March 1, 2014
    —          5,450        —          114,64        821        99.63      September 1, 2017
    —          —          7,150        —          1,077        —        September 1, 2014
    —          —          2,651        —          —          —        September 1, 2013
    —          —          25,971        —          3,912        —        March 1, 2015

Peet van Schalkwyk

    —          4,400        —          136.29        662        118.45      December 1, 2017
    —          —          20,000        —          3,012        —        December 1, 2014
    —          —          1,089        —          —          —        September 1, 2013
    —          —          29,831        —          4,493        —        March 1, 2015

Jan W. Jacobsz

    —          18,000        —          89.76        1,844        75.89      June 1, 2013
    —          6,487        —          119.15        977        103.55      June 1, 2014
    —          6,488        —          119.15        977        103.55      June 1, 2014
    —          5,500        —          124.19        1,684        108.23      March 1, 2016
    —          9,950        —          109.66        1,499        95.31      March 1, 2017
    —          —          6,638        —          999        —        December 1, 2015
    —          —          18,525        —          5,194        —        March 1, 2014
    —          —          6,637        —          999        —        June 1, 2015
    —          —          2,851        —          —          —        March 1, 2017
    —          —          19,173        —          2,888        —        March 1, 2015
    —          —          5,448        —          820        —        March 15, 2015

 

Notes:

(1) The rules of the share plans make provision for an adjustment to the number of shares in the event there is a variation in the issued share capital as a result of corporate action. The share plans require that the fair market value of an employee’s share portfolio pre- and post-corporate action remain the same. In order to uphold this principle an independent auditing firm was contracted to provide a fair opinion on the additional number of shares required to maintain the pre-Spin-off value of the share portfolios of employees, which resulted in 1,639,517 shares being awarded.

 

(2) For the restricted shares, the settlement date is three years after the date of award and for the SARS six years after the date of award.

 

246


Table of Contents

Share Ownership of Directors and Executive Officers

The following sets forth, to the knowledge of Gold Fields’ management, the total amount of ordinary shares directly or indirectly owned by the directors and executive officers of Gold Fields as of December 31, 2012:

 

Holder

   Ordinary
shares
    

 

   Percentage  

Nicholas J. Holland (1)

     5,000            .001

Paul A. Schmidt (2)

     7,000            .001

Mamphela A. Ramphele

     1,450            .000

Rupert L. Pennant-Rea

     13,759            .002

Donald M. J. Ncube (4)

     7,874            .001

Peter L. Turner (3)

     13,689            .002

Gayle M. Wilson (5)

     2,378            .000

Michael D. Fleischer (6)

     4,533            .001

Naseem A. Chohan (7)

     2,286            .000

Peet van Schalkwyk (8)

     1,090            .000

Jan W. Jacobsz (9)

     12,939            .002

Total Directors (6 persons)

     37,461            .005

Total Non-Director Executive Officers (5 persons)

     34,537            .005

Total Directors and Executive Officers (11 persons)

     71,998            .010

Note:

 

(1) Nicholas J. Holland acquired 5,000 ordinary shares on March 23, 2012.
(2) Paul A. Schmidt acquired 5,000 ordinary shares on March 13, 2012 and 1,000 ordinary shares on June 1, 2012.
(3) Peter L. Turner acquired 13,689 ordinary shares on September 20, 2012
(4) Donald M. J. Ncube acquired 2,378 ordinary shares on December 14, 2012
(5) Gayle M. Wilson acquired 2,378 ordinary shares on December 6, 2012
(6) Michael D. Fleischer acquired 4,533 ordinary shares on December 14, 2012
(7) Naseem A. Chohan acquired 2,286 ordinary shares on December 13,2012
(8) Peet van Schalkwyk acquired 1,090 ordinary shares on December 20,2012
(9) Jan W. Jacobsz acquired 7,852 ordinary shares on December 12, 2012 and 887 ordinary shares on December 13, 2012

The Gold Fields Limited 2012 Share Plan

At Gold Fields’ annual general meeting held on May 14, 2012, the shareholders approved the Gold Fields Limited 2012 Share Plan, or The 2012 Plan, under which employees, including executive directors but excluding non-executive directors, are compensated. With the approval of The 2012 Plan, no further awards will be made to participants under The 2005 Plan (as defined below).

The 2012 Plan contains two equity instruments: conditional shares, or the Performance Shares, and forfeitable shares, the Bonus Shares.

The Performance Shares share similar features with the PVRSs (as defined below) under The 2005 Plan. The Performance Shares will settle subsequent to the vesting date. The employee’s annual salary, grade, performance, retention and attraction requirements and market benchmarks determine the number of Performance Shares to be awarded. The actual number of Performance Shares which would be settled to a participant after the original award date is determined by the company’s performance measured against the performance of a peer group (made up of AngloGold Ashanti, Barrick, Goldcorp, Harmony, Newmont, Newcrest and Kinross) based on the relative change in Gold Fields’ share price compared to the respective U.S. dollar

 

247


Table of Contents

share prices of its peer group. Furthermore, for PVRS awards to be settled to executives, an internal company performance target is required to be met before the external relative measure is applied. As in The 2005 Plan, the target performance criterion has been set at 85% of the company’s expected gold production over the three-year measurement period as set out in the Business Plans of the company approved by the Board. In the event that the target performance criterion is met, the full initial target award shall be settled on the settlement date. The Remuneration Committee has determined that the number of Performance Shares to be settled may only be increased by up to 200%, as opposed to 300% in terms of The 2005 Plan, of the number of the initial target number of Performance Shares conditionally awarded.

The 2012 Plan discontinues SARs (as defined below) and replaces them with Bonus Shares. The Bonus Shares vest over a nine-month and 18-month period from the award date in equal parts. The size of the award of Bonus Shares is dependent on the employee’s annual cash bonus calculated with reference to actual performance against predetermined targets for the financial year ending immediately preceding the award date. The aggregate number of shares which may at one time be allocated under the 2012 Plan, when added to the 2005 Plan and the GF Management Initiative Scheme may not exceed 35,309,593 shares (which represents approximately 5% of the number of ordinary shares of the company currently in issue). The maximum number of shares which may be allocated to an individual may not exceed 3,530,956. As of December 31, 2012, Gold Fields had 4,262,170 Performance Shares and 792,376 Bonus Shares outstanding under the 2012 Plan.

The Gold Fields Limited 2005 Share Plan

At Gold Fields’ annual general meeting held on November 17, 2005, the shareholders approved The Gold Fields Limited 2005 Share Plan, or The 2005 Plan, under which employees, including executive directors, were compensated. With the approval of the 2012 Plan, no further awards will be made to participants under the 2005 Plan.

The 2005 Plan provided for two types of awards: performance vesting restricted shares, or PVRS, and performance allocated share appreciation rights, or SARS. The PVRS are settled three years after being awarded and the SARS vest three years after being allocated, with a further three years before expiration. The size of the annual award or allocation was dependent on the performance of the participant at the time of the award or allocation, which was usually in March. As of December 31, 2012, Gold Fields had 4,318,909 SARS and 4,998,516 PVRS outstanding under The 2005 Plan.

All PVRS allocations made from March 1, 2006 to December 1, 2011 were conditionally awarded to participants. Based on the rules of The 2005 Plan, the actual number of PVRS which would be settled to a participant three years after the original award date is determined by the company’s performance measured against the individual performance of five other major gold mining companies (referred to as the peer group and made up of AngloGold Ashanti; Barrick, Goldcorp, Harmony and Newmont) based on the relative change in the Gold Fields share price compared to the respective U.S. dollar share prices of the individual companies within the peer group. For PVRS awards to be settled to executives, an internal company performance target is required to be met before the external relative measure is applied. Effective June 1, 2008, the rules were modified so that two performance measures apply, as permitted under the existing rules approved by the shareholders at the annual general meeting. The target performance criterion has been set at 85% of the company’s expected gold production over the three-year measurement period as set out in the Business Plans of the company approved by the Board. In the event that the target performance criterion was met, the full initial target award was settled on the settlement date. In addition, the Remuneration Committee determined that the number of PVRS to be settled may be increased by up to 300% of the number of the initial target number of PVRS conditionally awarded, depending on the performance of the company relative to the performance of five other major gold mining companies (the peer group) based on the relative change in the Gold Fields share price compared to the respective U.S. dollar share prices of the individual companies within the peer group.

 

248


Table of Contents

The GF Management Incentive Scheme

Prior to approval of The 2005 Plan, share options were available to executive officers and other employees, as determined by the Board of Directors under The GF Management Incentive Scheme. Before the Spin-off, the exercise prices of all outstanding options ranged between Rand 63.65 and Rand 140.66 per ordinary share and they expire between January 3, 2013 and July 2, 2013. After March 8, 2013, as a result of the Spin-off, the exercise prices of all outstanding options range between R49.78 and R118. The exercise price of each ordinary share which is the subject of an option is the weighted average price of the ordinary shares on the JSE on the day immediately preceding the date on which the Board of Directors resolved to grant the option.

Each option may normally only be exercised by a participant on the following bases: (1) after two years have elapsed from the date on which the option was accepted by the participant, in respect of not more than one-third of the ordinary shares which are the subject of that option; (2) after three years have elapsed from the date on which the option was accepted by the participant, in respect of not more than a further one-third (representing two-thirds cumulatively) of the ordinary shares which are the subject of that option; and (3) after four years have elapsed from the date on which the option was accepted by the participant, in respect of all the ordinary shares which are the subject of that option, subject to revision by the Board of Directors. For so long as a person continues to work for Gold Fields, options lapse seven years after the date of acceptance of the option by the participant. Options vest as soon as they are exercisable, and employees who leave Gold Fields have one year following their departure to exercise options which have vested.

The first allocations under The 2005 Plan were made in March 2006 and no further allocations have been made under The GF Management Incentive Scheme from that date as the scheme has been discontinued.

The Gold Fields Limited 2005 Non-Executive Share Plan

At Gold Fields’ annual general meeting held on November 17, 2005, the shareholders approved The Gold Fields Limited 2005 Non-Executive Share Plan, or The 2005 Non-Executive Plan. Participants in The 2005 Non-Executive Plan were non-executive directors of Gold Fields who are not members of the Non-Executive Directors Remuneration Committee, which comprises independent external professional advisers under The GF Non-Executive Director Share Plan. The Plan provided for the release of restricted shares awarded to the non-executive directors three years after the date of the award, provided that the non-executive director was not removed, disqualified or forced to resign from the Board of Directors during that period. No consideration is payable for the grant of an award of restricted shares.

Shareholders approved that the 2005 Non-Executive Plan, which governed the award of restricted shares to non-executive directors, be discontinued in the 2010 financial year. This was to achieve full compliance with the rules of the JSE Listings Requirements, which state that from April 1, 2010, any director who participates in a share incentive/option scheme will not be regarded as independent. The JSE has ruled that section 3.84(f)(iii) of the Listings Requirements, as amended, will not be applied retrospectively. Effectively, the restricted shares awarded to the non-executive directors before the amended JSE Listings Requirements became effective on April 1, 2010 will thus remain valid and the non-executive directors are considered independent until the restricted shares already awarded vest. The last vesting took place in November 2012 and the scheme was subsequently closed.

Additional Scheme Shares

The aggregate number of the Company’s issued ordinary share capital on December 31, 2012, reserved for issuance under all the prevailing share schemes described above was limited to 35,309,593 shares (which represents approximately 5% of the number of current issued shares). This percentage may only be amended with the approval of shareholders in general meeting and the JSE.

As at February 28, 2013, the number of shares in issue under the share schemes was 19,955,492 (which included a Spin-off adjustment of 1,639,517, a performance condition of 300% for the March 2010 award that vested on March 1, 2013 of 1,851,133 and a Spin-off forfeiture of 2,339,380). The March Annual Awards in terms of Gold Fields totalled 4,796,526 performance shares and 1,952,096 bonus shares which resulted in a total of 26,704,114 shares in issue as at March 1, 2013.

 

249


Table of Contents

As a result of the above, the shares that have been set aside for the share plans are being depleted and will not be sufficient for future awards and settlements. A special resolution will be tabled at the 2014 annual general meeting requesting an additional number of shares be allocated for the share plans.

The rules of the share plans make provision for an adjustment to the number of shares in the event there is a variation in the issued share capital as a result of corporate action. The share plans require that the fair market value of an employee’s share portfolio pre and post corporate action remain the same. In order to uphold this principle, an independent audit firm was contracted to provide a fairness opinion on the additional number of shares required to maintain the pre-Spin-off value of the share portfolios of employees, which resulted in 1,639,517 shares being awarded. Furthermore, employees who ceased to be employed by the Group as a result of the Spin-off are treated as “good leavers” in terms of the rules of the share plans. Good leavers are entitled to a portion of their shares on accelerated vesting base on the period that the shares were held up to vesting date. The unvested portion is forfeited in terms of the rules of the share plans, which amount to 2,339,380 shares.

Employee Share Option Scheme

An ESOP in respect of an effective 10.75% stake in GFIMSA was registered on December 1, 2010. The ESOP is housed and administered through the Thusano Share Trust. The effective holding in GFIMSA was equivalent to about 13.5 million unencumbered Gold Fields shares with full voting rights, which were issued to and held by the trust at par value of R0.50 which represented a 99.5%. discount to the 30 days volume-weighted average price at July 30, 2010. This represents approximately 1.87% of the current Gold Fields shares in issue. See “Additional Information—Material Contracts—Additional Black Economic Empowerment Transactions”.

Executive Directors’ Terms of Employment

Nicholas J. Holland (Executive Director and Chief Executive Officer) is party to three employment agreements: one with Gold Fields Ghana Holdings (BVI) Limited, or Gold Fields Ghana Holdings, one with Orogen and one with Gold Fields Group Services (Pty) Ltd, or GFGS. Paul A. Schmidt (Executive Director and Chief Financial Officer) is party to three employment contracts: one with Gold Fields Ghana Holdings, one with Orogen, and one with GFGS. The terms and conditions of employment for each executive director are substantially similar, except where otherwise indicated below.

The annual gross remuneration package, or GRP, payable to each of Mr. Holland and Mr. Schmidt for fiscal 2012 was determined by the Remuneration Committee and is as follows:

 

   

Nicholas J. Holland: R8,145,700 plus U.S.$336,300

 

   

Paul A. Schmidt: R5,125,000 plus U.S.$90,300

The split between the contracts for these amounts payable to the executive directors is determined on the basis of the amount of time spent by that executive director in respect of each contract.

The GFGS Contracts

Under the GFGS Contracts, the employment of an executive director will continue until terminated upon (i) 24 or 12 months’ notice by either party for the Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer, respectively or (ii) retirement of the relevant executive director (currently provided for at age 60 in the contract). Gold Fields can also terminate the executive director’s employment summarily for any reason recognized by law as justifying summary termination.

The value of the GRP payable in terms of the GFGS Contract is to be allocated among the following benefits: (i) salary; (ii) compulsory retirement fund contribution (with contributions set at 20% of “Pensionable Emoluments,” which are set at a rate between 50% and 100% of the GRP as elected by the executive director); (iii) voluntary participation in a vehicle scheme; (iv) compulsory medical coverage; and (v) compulsory Group Personal Accident Policy coverage. In addition, it is compulsory for the executive director to contribute 1% of his GRP to the Unemployment Insurance Fund, subject to any legislated contribution maximum at the time.

 

250


Table of Contents

The Offshore Contracts

Under the agreements with Gold Fields Ghana Holdings and Orogen, or the Offshore Contracts, the executive director is paid offshore, in an appropriate currency, that portion of the GRP relating to the amount of time spent performing duties offshore for the relevant offshore companies. In the interest of simplicity, no benefits other than annual leave accrue to each executive director under the Offshore Contracts.

Other Remuneration

In addition to the gross guaranteed remuneration payable, each executive director is entitled, among other things, to the following benefits under their employment contracts: (i) participation in the GF Management Incentive Scheme and The Gold Fields Limited 2005 and 2012 Share Plans; and (ii) consideration for an annual (financial year) incentive bonus based upon the fulfillment of certain targets set by the Board of Directors and an expense allowance.

In fiscal 2012, the amount and manner of any bonus payment for the CEO and CFO was determined by the Remuneration Committee of the Board. See “—Board of Directors’ Committees”. The annual bonus was set at a target of 65% of the value of the GRP for the CEO and 60% of the value of the GRP for the CFO, assuming fulfillment of all targets, with scope to award a lesser bonus if targets were not met, or a greater bonus, up to a further 65% of the GRP for the CEO and 60% of the value of the GRP for the CFO, if targets are exceeded.

As of January 1, 2013, the amount and manner of any bonus payment for the CEO and CFO remained unchanged for fiscal 2012.

The employment contracts also provide that, in the event of the relevant executive director’s employment being terminated solely as a result of a “change of control” as defined below, and within 12 months of the change of control, the director is entitled to: (i) payment of an amount equal to twice his GRP, or two and a half times in the case of the CEO and two times in the case of the CFO; (ii) payment of an amount equal to the average of the incentive bonuses paid to the executive director during the previous two completed financial years; (iii) any other payments and/or benefits due under the contracts; (iv) payment of any annual incentive bonus he has earned during the financial year notwithstanding that the financial year is incomplete; (v) an entitlement, for two years after the date of termination, subject to the relevant rules of the GF Management Incentive Scheme then in force, to retain and to exercise all share options allocated to him, including those which may not have vested at the date of such termination; and (vi) an entitlement to be settled with the SARS and Restricted Shares allocated and awarded to him, and in the case of the SARS will have a further period of one year in which to exercise such SARS. The employment contracts further provide that these payments cover any compensation or damages the executive director may have under any applicable employment legislation.

A “change of control” for the above is defined as the acquisition by a third-party or concert parties of 30% or more of Gold Fields’ ordinary shares.

In the event of the consummation of an acquisition, merger, consolidation, scheme of arrangement or other reorganization, whether or not there is a change of control, if the executive director’s services are terminated, the “change of control” provisions summarized above also apply.

The committee resolved to discontinue the compensation entitlement in the event of change of control for senior executives appointed from January 1, 2013. The senior executives who are currently entitled to the change of control compensation benefits will retain their rights under the previous policy.

Non-executive Director Fees

Gold Fields has no service contracts with its non-executive directors. The fees for non-executive directors are determined by a special non-executive directors’ Remuneration Committee comprised of independent

 

251


Table of Contents

external remuneration advisers. Fees for the non-executive directors are reviewed by the independent external professional advisers annually and proposed fees are presented to shareholders at the Annual General Meeting in May of each year. Annual fee reviews are effective June 1 of each year.

The Board decided to freeze the salaries of senior executives for fiscal 2013 due to challenging economic times and in light of the revenue lost in 2012 as a result of the illegal strike. There will be a freeze on salaries for top management, including non-executive directors during fiscal 2013.

Employees

The gold mining industry, particularly in South Africa, is labor-intensive. The total number of employees, excluding employees of outside contractors who are not on Gold Fields’ payroll, as of the end of the last three fiscal years at each of the operations owned by Gold Fields as of those dates was:

 

    As of (1) (2)  
    June 30, 2010     December 31,
2010
    December 31,
2011
    December 31,
2012
 

South Africa

       

KDC (3)

    35,300 (4)       32,100 (4)       26,300 (4)       26,200 (4)  

Beatrix (3)

    11,200 (4)       10,500 (4)       9,200 (4)       9,200 (4)  

South Deep

    6,500 (4)       6,800 (4)       3,500 (4)       3,500 (4)  

Ghana

       

Tarkwa

    2,100 (4)       2,200 (4)       2,600 (4)       2,800 (4)  

Damang

    430 (5)       420 (5)       1,000 (4)       1,100 (4)  

Australia

       

St. Ives

    760 (5)       790 (5)       470 (5)       650 (5)  

Agnew

    370 (5)       360 (5)       240 (5)       260 (5)  

Peru

       

Cerro Corona

    310 (5)       340 (5)       370 (5)       370 (5)  

Corporate

    90 (5)       100 (5)       130 (5)       150 (5)  
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total

    59,800 (4)       56,200 (4)       43,800 (4)       44,230 (4)  
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

Notes:

(1) The employee numbers presented in 2012 do not include contractors who are not on the payroll. As at December 31, 2012, Gold Fields employed approximately 14,200 outside contractors divided among its operations as follows: KDC 4,100; Beatrix: 1,100; South Deep: 4,750; Tarkwa: 1,700; Damang: 800; St. Ives: 350; Agnew: 200; and Cerro Corona: 1,200. The 2010 employee numbers include contractors not on payroll. This was rebased in 2011 and 2012 to only include employees on the payroll.
(2) In addition to the employee numbers for fiscal 2012, Gold Fields also employs approximately 770 employees in its Growth & International Project division and 3,100 employees in its Support Services division. As at December 31, 2012, the total number of employees and contractors on payroll was approximately 48,100.
(3) Gold Fields distributed KDC and Beatrix as part of the Spin-off.
(4) Rounded to the nearest hundred.
(5) Rounded to the nearest ten.

Labor Relations

South Africa

Since 1995, the South African legislature has enacted various labor laws that enhance the rights of employees. For example, these laws:

 

   

confirm the right of employees to belong to trade unions and the right of unions to have access to the workplace;

 

   

guarantee employees the right to strike, picket and participate in secondary strikes in certain prescribed circumstances;

 

   

provide for mandatory severance pay in the event of termination of employment for operational reasons;

 

   

reduce and limit the maximum ordinary hours of work;

 

252


Table of Contents
   

increase the rate of pay for overtime;

 

   

require large employers such as Gold Fields to implement affirmative action policies to benefit historically disadvantaged groups, and impose significant monetary penalties for non-compliance with the administrative and reporting requirements of the legislation;

 

   

provide for the financing of training programs by means of a levy grant system and a National Skills Fund; and

 

   

grant employees the right to strike if a company employing over 500 employees terminates the employment of over 50 employees at any one time for operational reasons.

Prior to the Spin-off approximately 97% of the labor force at Gold Fields’ South African operations was unionized, with the major portion of its South African workforce being members of the NUM the other two recognized unions being UASA and Solidarity. As a result of its highly unionized labor force in South Africa and the fact that labor costs constituted approximately 43% of production costs, Gold Fields attempted to balance union demands with the need to contain and reduce total cash costs in order to ensure the long-term viability of its operations. After the Spin-off, approximately 78% of the labor force at Gold Fields’ South African operation is unionized. Excluding the Sibanye Gold assets, labor costs constituted approximately 40.4% of production costs.

In fiscal 2012, Gold Fields, like several other South African mining companies, was affected by work stoppages at its South African operations. See “Risk Factors—Gold Fields’ operations and profits have been and may be adversely affected by union activity and new and existing labor laws”, “Information on the Company—Sibanye Gold’s Mining Operations—KDC Operation” and “Information on the Company—Sibanye Gold’s Mining Operations—Beatrix Operation”. For example, approximately 29,000 of 36,000 employees went on strike at the KDC and Beatrix mines in September and October 2012. These work stoppages continued despite the Chamber of Mines negotiating a settlement with NUM, Solidarity and UASA which the striking employees rejected. This breakdown of union cohesion has made, and may continue to make, it difficult to settle labor issues such as wage demands and working conditions. Additionally, at South Deep, on August 2, 2012, Gold Fields announced that its South Deep mine was entering into a formal 60 day consultation process with the NUM and other affected employees in terms of Section 189(3) of the Labour Relations Act No. 66 of 1995, or the LRA. However, on October 2, 2012, Gold Fields announced that it had reached a formal agreement with the NUM and the UASA to implement a new operating model at South Deep, which was implemented for the fourth quarter of fiscal 2012. Gold Fields expects that this new South Deep operating model will secure current jobs and allow the mine to create up to an additional 400 full-time positions at the mine. It is also expected to improve productivity and performance for the mine to approach international best practice. South Deep withdrew the Section 189 notice issued to the NUM after the key aspects of the operating model were agreed.

During fiscal 2012, Gold Fields’ South African operations suffered 49 safety stoppages, of which one occurred at South Deep. Certain stoppages were self-imposed mine closures as a result of safety-related incidents. Gold Fields has actively engaged with the DMR on the protocols applied to safety-related mine closures. Gold Fields conducted a tri-partite Health and Safety Summit in February 2012 along with government and labor organizations to promote health and safety in South Africa as part of a comprehensive effort to improve mine safety.

Gold Fields South African Operations has offered an Employee Share Option Plan to non-management employees as part of meeting the Mining Charter requirements. The plan, which places an effective 10.75% stake in GFIMSA in the hands of employees, was approved by shareholders and became effective on December 1, 2010. See “Additional Information—Material Contracts—Additional Black Economic Empowerment Transactions”.

Wage Agreements

2011 – 2013 Agreement

Wage increases and changes to terms and conditions of employment are negotiated with the unions every two years, and on August 2, 2011, Gold Fields reached a two-year wage agreement, or the 2011 wage agreement, with the UASA, Solidarity, and the NUM. This agreement provided for wage increases marginally above inflation, where the majority of employees received increases between 8% and 10%, depending upon the category of employee. The increases were implemented with effect from July 1, 2011. The same percentage increases applied in fiscal 2012. Annual increases for management were implemented in March 2012.

 

 

253


Table of Contents

The 2011 wage agreement further provided for a few adjustments to other conditions of employment, such as medical incapacitation benefits, as well as an increase in the “living out allowance” from R1,400 to R1,520, effective from September 1, 2011 and a further increase to R1,640, effective from September 1, 2012. Currently, approximately 36% of Gold Fields’ South African labor force (excluding employees of outside contractors) receive living out allowances.

In total, labor costs in South Africa decreased by 7.3% in fiscal 2012 compared to fiscal 2011. The decrease is due to the weakening of the Rand from 7.22 to 8.19 per U.S.$1.00.

As noted above, as part of the strike settlement negotiations, the Chamber of Mines offered a settlement proposal, within the ambit of the existing collective wage agreement, to the striking miners on October 12, 2012. Under this proposal, Gold fields agreed with the trade unions to an earlier implementation of a number of provisions of the 2011 wage agreement that were agreed to by all parties, culminating in an adjustment to wages in the relevant bargaining units of around 2.5%, or R150 million, per annum relating to changes to job grades and entry-level wages. In addition, the gold mining companies, trade unions and government have set up a working group for a wide-ranging review of working practices, productivity improvements and socio-economic conditions in the gold mining industry, which will feed into the next round of wage negotiations scheduled for 2013. Gold Fields offered the benefit of the settlement proposal agreed by the Chamber of Mines, NUM, Solidarity and UASA to striking miners that returned to work.

Ghana

In Ghana, there are various constitutional and legislative provisions relating to labor which, among other things:

 

   

entitle workers to join trade unions and give those unions the power to negotiate on their behalf with regard to their conditions of employment;

 

   

prohibit discrimination against union members;

 

   

entitle workers to strike in certain prescribed circumstances;

 

   

regulate the hours of work, termination notice, severance pay and minimum length of annual leave for workers;

 

   

provide for social security for workers and workers’ compensation; and

 

   

provide for arbitration in trade disputes.

On October 8, 2003, the Ghanaian parliament passed the Labor Act, 2003 (Act 651), or the Labor Act. The Labor Act gives employees greater freedom to form and to join trade unions, among other rights. The Labor Regulations 2007 (L.I 1833), or the Regulations, made under the Labor Act came into effect on June 8, 2007.

Of the Ghanaian employees at Tarkwa, Damang and the Accra office, the majority are members of the Ghana Mineworkers Union, or GMWU, whose employment is governed by a collective bargaining agreement originally concluded in 1996 and revised in 2000, 2003, 2004 and 2006. Wages are revised annually by negotiation with the GMWU.

Gold Fields negotiated a new employee gain-sharing model with the union for fiscal 2007, 2008 and 2009, pursuant to which 1.25% of profits after tax and royalties will be shared among local employees. This profit sharing agreement is still applicable, and in fiscal 2012 Gold Fields paid a lump sum of U.S.$1,047 to each employee.

In October 2010, Gold Fields concluded wage negotiations for 2010 and signed a three year wage deal with the GMWU to increase minimum wages by 10% per year for 2010, 2011 and 2012, as well as adjustments to other benefits such as housing, schooling and funeral allowances.

Australia

In Western Australia, where Gold Fields’ Australian operations are located, labor is now primarily regulated by the Fair Work Act (2009), or the Fair Work Act, and the federal industrial relations system created thereby. The Fair Work Act came into effect on July 1, 2009, replacing the previous federal industrial relations system created by the Workplace Relations Act 1996 (Cth.), or the Workplace Relations Act.

 

254


Table of Contents

With the exception of a range of state statutes limited to health and safety, long-service leave, discrimination and workers’ compensation, Gold Fields and its employees are not subject to state industrial or employment laws.

The Fair Work Act continues to prescribe, among other things:

 

   

minimum wages;

 

   

maximum weekly hours;

 

   

forms of leave (other than long-service leave);

 

   

conditions regarding termination of an employee for redundancy;

 

   

sanctions for unfair dismissal and unlawful termination;

 

   

rights of unions to enter a workplace;

 

   

collective bargaining rights for employees; and

 

   

sanctions against unlawful industrial action.

However, the Fair Work Act has made significant changes to the previous federal industrial relations system under the Workplace Relations Act by enhancing employee collective bargaining rights and increasing the role of unions in the collective bargaining process. Changes to the federal industrial relations system under the Fair Work Act include, among other things:

 

   

the removal of the ability for employers to make Australian Workplace Agreements which were individual statutory agreements used by employers to exclude collective bargaining and union access to the workplace;

 

   

the introduction of a new collective bargaining framework that introduces “good faith bargaining” obligations for employers, fewer restrictions on the content of agreements and an enhanced role for union officials as bargaining representatives, parties to agreements and participants in dispute resolution;

 

   

the introduction of the National Employment Standards on January 1, 2010, which prescribe core minimum conditions of employment applicable to all Australian employees under the federal industrial relations system;

 

   

the introduction of new industry-wide terms of employment known as Modern Awards on January 1, 2010, which simplify and update such agreements for different industry sectors, including the mining industry;

 

   

the opening of access to unfair dismissal laws to all Australian employees; and

 

   

the creation of a national body called Fair Work Australia which, among other matters, will have wider arbitration powers in relation to collective agreements and hear and determine unlawful dismissal claims and matters relating to minimum entitlements of employment and freedom of association.

All of Gold Fields’ Australian employees and the employees of the contractors at the St. Ives and Agnew mines are employed pursuant to individually negotiated federal workplace agreements under the Workplace Relations Act which will eventually terminate or expire and will no longer exist under the Fair Work Act.

The commencement of the Fair Work Act means that unions have an increased role in negotiating collective agreements for pay and working conditions and may lead to an increased union presence in Western Australia’s mining industry, potentially including at Gold Fields’ mining operations in Australia. In order to mitigate potential labor risks, Gold Fields has implemented an Employee Collective Agreement with its employees which provides some protection from potential third-party interventions. The Employee Collective Agreement excludes unions from negotiating terms and conditions of employment for a period of five years starting from August 27, 2009.

 

255


Table of Contents

Peru

Mine workers in Peru are subject to the general regulations of the private labor system. In addition to these general regulations, the specific legal framework regarding mining activities is provided by the General Mining Law and its regulations and the Mine Safety and Hygiene Regulations.

New regulations regarding the contracting of outsourcing services have been recently enacted in the private labor system. Under the new regulations, mining companies that decide to hire outsourcing companies for the execution of specialized services involving the assignment of personnel will have the assigned personnel added to their payrolls and be jointly liable with the outsourcing companies for the payment of labor benefits and social security obligations of the assigned personnel. The liability is enforceable against the mining company up to a term of one year after the personnel have concluded its assignment.

Prior to 2011, the employees at Cerro Corona were not unionized and had no collective bargaining agreement. However, Peruvian labor regulations provide that a collective negotiation process may be commenced by a union or by workers’ representatives elected by the majority thereof. Beyond these collective bargaining rights, there are various labor regulations which, among other things:

 

   

entitle workers to strike in certain prescribed circumstances and manners;

 

   

prescribe maximum ordinary hours of work and minimum vacation time;

 

   

prescribe overtime pay, which can include the provision of rest days;

 

   

prescribe minimum wages, bonuses, profit-sharing and compensation for the employee’s period of service to the company;

 

   

require mine owners to transport workers between remote mine sites and population centers; and

 

   

provide for mediation or arbitration in certain collective bargaining negotiations.

In June 2011, operational employees at Cerro Corona formed a labor union and negotiated a five year collective bargaining agreement with Gold Fields. This agreement provides for a 9.1% wage increase during the first year and 5.77% annual wage increases in subsequent years. In addition, eligible employees are entitled to a special bonus payment, education expenses and other benefits.

Though not required by law, Gold Fields provides to certain management staff a flat amount to cover housing and utility expenses in the city of Cajamarca in accordance with Gold Fields’ internal policy.

Also, Gold Fields provides to its workers, as a working condition, free transportation between the mine site and the city of Cajamarca.

In January 2010, the new Law of Labor Procedure, establishing the procedural rules for labor-related claims, was enacted to reduce the emphasis on documentary filings, as compared to hearings, and reduce the time involved in resolving labor claims. The law became effective on July 15, 2010. These laws have been implemented progressively in 2011 throughout Peru in accordance with an approved schedule.

In addition, in calendar 2010, the Peruvian Labor Authority set up new labor inspection programs aimed at identifying, sanctioning and correcting irregular labor practices. These programs are part of the administrative measures promoted by the Ministry of Labor to ensure compliance with labor laws. Gold Fields has put practices in place to ensure compliance with these laws.

Benefits

Gold Fields provides benefits to its employees, generally including pension, medical and accommodation benefits. Employees are also entitled to a severance package if they are laid off. Gold Fields’ own employees are generally provided with medical and retirement benefits. In Australia, benefits for contractors’ employees are the responsibility of each contractor and Gold Fields’ own employees are generally responsible for their own medical costs and other benefits, except that Gold Fields contributes to a third-party pension plan.

 

256


Table of Contents

In South Africa, Gold Fields attempts to attract and retain motivated high caliber employees through a mix of guaranteed and performance-based remuneration, as well as short-term and long-term incentives, and non-financial rewards relating to work experience. Gold Fields has also implemented company pay structuring for management employees and also for supervisory employees in South Africa, known as the Gross Remuneration Package.

Furthermore, in order to maintain competitiveness in the South African labor market, regular industry market surveys are conducted, to benchmark remuneration practices and to keep abreast of industry movements regarding employee benefits and non-financial employee reward and recognition programs. Gold Fields was actively involved in an industry task team working with the Institute of Directors in formulating industry standards for remuneration practices based on labor market dynamics.

Gold Fields provides 50% of the contributions (premiums) under a medical plan, or the Gold Fields Plan, for certain former employees in South Africa. As of December 31, 2012, approximately 126 former employees were still covered under this plan.

As part of the acquisition of South Deep, Gold Fields assumed an additional post-retirement healthcare cost liability, or the South Deep Plan. Former employees of South Deep belong to a commercial medical scheme with employer liability for contribution per pensioner limited to R400 per month. The R400 monthly contribution is fixed and is payable until the arrangement terminated on December 31, 2011.

In fiscal 2012, $0.3 million was debited to earnings under both the Gold Fields and South Deep Plans described above.

Bonus Schemes

Gold Fields offers appropriate bonus schemes for employees at all levels. The focus of Gold Fields’ bonus schemes is based on specific production and safety targets as the primary drivers, with quality factors, such as cost and development, being secondary drivers at management levels. Bonus scheme drivers and parameters are aligned with the Group Annual Incentive Scheme. The targets and on-target bonus percentages of the Group Annual Incentive Scheme were reviewed in fiscal 2012. The short-term drivers include safety, production, notional cash expenditure, development/waste mined and growth.

Employment Equity

Under the South African Employment Equity Act, or the Employment Equity Act, Gold Fields has a responsibility to: (1) promote equal opportunity and fair treatment in employment by eliminating unfair discrimination; and (2) implement affirmative action measures to redress the disadvantages in employment experienced by certain groups, in order to ensure their equitable representation in all occupational categories and levels in the workforce. As required by the Employment Equity Act, Gold Fields had a formal employment equity plan, which was been approved by its unions and submitted as part of its report to South African regulatory officials. The plan includes numerical targets to be achieved over a five year period, with regular meetings of employment equity forums involving management and employee representatives to monitor progress against the plan. Management believes that Gold Fields is currently making adequate progress toward the targets under its plan and is in compliance with legal and regulatory requirements regarding employment equity.

Training

Gold Fields spent approximately R366.0 million on employee training and development at its South African operations in fiscal 2012 and R42.0 million at its Ghanaian, Australian, Peruvian and Growth and International Projects divisions.

 

257


Table of Contents

During fiscal 2012, most Gold Fields employees in South Africa participated in one or more of the numerous training and development programs offered. Approximately 42,300 employees and 9,700 contractor employees went through the induction and skills review training program. In addition, during the second half of fiscal 2012, Gold Fields introduced a new program for on-the-job training and coaching, providing further skills development at the workplace for approximately 12,500 employees. In fiscal 2012, approximately 6,600 employees participated in team-based health and safety training, and approximately 1,050 employees and 800 local community members attended adult literacy programs. In addition, approximately 500 employees were given portable skills training, in order to support personal growth and empower employees with technical skills that can be used outside the mining industry.

In fiscal 2012, approximately 400 employees attended technical trade qualification programs in the engineering domain and approximately 300 received mining qualification training. Approximately 1,500 employees received part qualifications in the form of registered skills programs, while in-house new skills training and short skills-enhancement programs were also offered to approximately 10,900 mining employees, 1,900 technical service employees and 131 metallurgical employees.

For fiscal 2013, the direct employee training and development in human resources budget at South Deep is expected to be R40 million, which represents a decrease over the budget from 2012 primarily due to the Spin-off.

Gold Fields continues to provide comprehensive training to its employees, in full compliance with the regulatory requirements at the sites at which it operates. The training provided in South Africa is aligned with South Africa’s National Qualifications Framework, and is carried out within the ambit of Gold Fields’ education, training and development, or ETD, establishment, which is fully accredited with the relevant Sectoral Education and Training Authority, or SETA, which for Gold Fields is the Mining Qualifications Authority, or MQA. Gold Fields’ ETD establishment has secured accreditation and program approvals from a number of SETAs outside of the mining industry, and is fully certificated in terms of the ISO 9001/2008 and ISO 14000 quality management standards. In order to secure optimal workplace safety and productive work performance, Gold Fields exposes its employees to ETD interventions which significantly exceed compliance to minimum standards, in the form of additional mining and safety skills training, team-based behavioral training, and non-mining related life and social skills training.

In addition, Gold Fields continues to focus systematically on managerial, leadership, and professional development though its Leadership and Professional Talent Pipeline program, by means of a process known as the Talent Review, which is integrated with its performance management system.

In South Africa, Gold Fields has maintained its enrollment of University Bursars and entry-level scholarships across the technical disciplines.

Gold Fields continues to review the performance of its human resource development, which seeks to identify further opportunities to improve the training and development initiatives. This new focus has resulted in changes in the approach of human resource development, with a conscious departure from the traditional training-only approach, towards a holistic talent and change management approach. Gold Fields believes that this approach will facilitate the cultural and behavioral changes required for the organization to achieve its Safe Production performance objectives.

Through the Gold Fields foundation, Gold Fields previously announced that it would be investing R28 million in an effort to address skills shortages in the South African mining industry. The three-year sponsorship deal comprises investments in the mining engineering faculties at the University of Witwatersrand and the University of Johannesburg. Since this announcement, Gold Fields has invested approximately R18 million with the University of Witwatersrand and over R10 million with the University of Johannesburg, which has assisted the universities in accelerating their long-term strategies for upgrading facilities and implementing improved learning technology and equipment. As a result, an alliance between Gold Fields and the universities has been formed to promote the study of mining engineering, a core skill required to sustain not only the company itself but the local mining industry as a collective. In addition to these university sponsorships, Gold Fields continues to provide approximately R5 million annually to support private students in obtaining practical mining exposure as well as the Mining Education Trust Fund, which provides subsidization towards university staff wages.

 

258


Table of Contents

Gold Fields continues to subscribe to initiatives concerning national critical skills formation, operating through various private sector collaborative initiatives such as the Gold Producer’s Committee’s “Collaborative Skills Development” initiative and the Technical Skills Business Partnership, or TSBP, which involves Arcelor-Mittal, SASOL, Eskom, Transnet, Anglo Plats and Gold Fields. In addition, Gold Fields continues to work closely with local and national government forums towards the development of business initiatives aimed at addressing youth development.

All of Gold Fields’ employee training activities in South Africa take account of the human resources development requirements of the Mining Charter, and are fully described in the Social and Labor Plan submitted by Gold Fields to the Department of Minerals and Energy. See “Information on the Company—Environmental and Regulatory Matters—South Africa—Mineral Rights”.

Gold Fields has initiated training and development programs internationally that are appropriate to the specific regions, commensurate with regional and site-specific objectives and constraints. A comprehensive leadership development program at Gold Fields’ operations has been developed to further the growth of high-potential individuals, including management, specialists, and other high performers. In fiscal 2013, Gold Fields expects to develop supervisory and management skills components and other initiatives to further this program. In fiscal 2012, health, safety and environmental training remained a focal point in order to comply with site-specific safety and environmental systems and support the Group’s core value that if it cannot mine safely, it will not mine.

Leadership development

In addition, each of Gold Fields’ regions runs its own leadership development programs. Key leadership development courses offered by the Group include the following:

 

   

Global Leader Program: This 15-day course is run in partnership with Duke University in North Carolina and is aimed at the development of ‘global leaders’, with a focus on strategic thinking, risk management, stakeholder engagement and related issues.

 

   

Business Leader Program: This 15-day course is also run in partnership with Duke University and is aimed at high performing senior managers. It is focused on issues such as the cascading of strategy, community engagement, development of regional perspectives and related issues.

 

   

Operational Leader Program: This 10 to 15-day course is run in partnership with both Duke University and the Gordon Institute of Business Science in South Africa. The course is focused on developing potential successors for senior managers, with emphasis on the execution of strategy, process excellence, employee engagement and related issues.

 

   

Emergent Leader Program: This nine-day course is run in partnership with Duke University and is focused on high-performing/high-potential managers. Focus areas include safe production behaviors, teambuilding, community awareness and related issues.

 

   

Preparatory Program: This two to four-day program for high performers, including potential supervisors and junior managers, focuses on self-leadership, leading others and driving safe performance.

 

   

Foundational Program: This two to three-day program for all Gold Fields’ employees (with particular focus on high-potential talent and those in ‘mission critical’ roles) addresses issues such as linking individuals’ roles to Group strategy, development options, internal governance, sustainable development strategy and a range of other important issues.

 

 

259


Table of Contents

Health and Safety

Health

The principal health risks associated with Gold Fields’ mining operations in South Africa arise from occupational and environmental exposure to silica dust, noise, heat and certain hazardous chemicals. The most significant occupational diseases affecting Gold Fields’ workforce include lung diseases (such as silicosis, tuberculosis, a combination of the two and COAD) as well as NIHL. In South Africa, the incidence of tuberculosis in mine workers is aggravated by exposure to crystalline silica dust and by compromised immunity due to HIV infection. HIV infection is the most significant non-occupational disease impacting the South African workforce. Exposure of HIV-positive individuals to silica dust can significantly increase the risk of contracting tuberculosis and silicosis, compared with either situation alone. Gold Fields continues to introduce many initiatives to reduce exposure to silica dust at its underground operations. In addition, NIHL is the subject of numerous interventions, including hearing conservation programs, engineering controls to reduce exposure as close to the source as possible, training of exposed workers and the provision of hearing protection devices to exposed workers. Gold Fields continues to expand initiatives to address HIV infection and AIDS among its workforce.

In Ghana, Australia and Peru, the primary health risks include dust and NIHL. Malaria is also a significant health risk in Ghana. To combat these risks, Gold Fields provides workers with appropriate protective equipment, regular training and screening tests.

Gold Fields provides free healthcare to a substantial portion of its South African, Peruvian and Ghanaian employees while they are employed by Gold Fields. This includes the operation of hospitals and/or clinics to provide treatment as needed. In addition, statutory medical surveillance of all employees at the South African operations is conducted by Gold Fields’ in-house health services. Workers in Australia are responsible for their own healthcare.

HIV/AIDS Program

Management estimates that the prevalence of HIV was approximately 18% for Gold Fields’ employees in the South Africa region before the Spin-off. After the Spin-off, management estimates that the prevalence of HIV is approximately 17.1% for Gold Fields’ employees in the South Africa region. Gold Fields believes that its South African workforce has a similar level of HIV prevalence to that present in the same demographic groups in South Africa generally. Accordingly, Gold Fields has developed and implemented a significant HIV/AIDS program with the goals of reducing the rate of HIV infection among its workforce and minimizing the potential financial impact of AIDS on its operations. This program involves a multi-faceted approach known as the HAST program (HIV, AIDS, sexually transmitted infections and tuberculosis), which consists of a variety of initiatives aimed at preventing these diseases and includes collaboration with international organizations such as the Global Health Initiative, World Economic Forum, World Health Organization and USAID. In addition to these programs, care and support for workers with HIV/AIDS includes wellness management, ill health retirement for workers with AIDS and home-based care for such workers following retirement. See “Risk Factors—HIV/AIDS, tuberculosis and other contagious diseases pose risks to Gold Fields in terms of lost productivity and increased costs.”

HIV/AIDS prevalence is not significant in Gold Fields’ Ghanaian, Australian or Peruvian workforces. Gold Fields has also introduced its HIV/AIDS program in Ghana.

Safety

Operating mines, particularly underground mines, involves significant safety hazards. Gold Fields takes steps to address particular safety issues which are present at its operations. Specific safety issues are explained in further detail in connection with the description of each of Gold Fields’ operations. See “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—KDC Operation—Mining”, “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—Beatrix Operation—Mining”, “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—South Deep Operation—Mining”, “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—Ghana Operations—Tarkwa Mine—Mining”, “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining

 

260


Table of Contents

Operations—Ghana Operations—Damang Mine—Mining”, “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—Australia Operations—St. Ives—Mining”, “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—Australia Operations—Agnew—Mining” and “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—Peru Operations—Cerro Corona—Mining”.

During fiscal 2012, Gold Fields faced a number of significant safety issues, including the deaths of 16 workers at its South African mines. The Company continually renews its commitment to safety. OHSAS 18001 surveillance audits were conducted by Burea Veritas at Gold Fields’ three South African operations. Non conforming practices identified during the audits have been rectified and certification has been maintained at all operations. See “Information on the Company—Strategy”.

Gold Fields’ Full Compliance Health and Safety Management System started as a health and safety initiative at the end of 2000. A group consisting of representatives of management, the DMR’s Mine Health and Safety inspectorate and South African trade unions developed the management system for Gold Fields. The Full Compliance Health and Safety Management System consists of health and safety management standards aimed at improving the safety performance of each mine. Every year the system is revisited taking into consideration recent fatal accidents, lessons learned from the investigations and the outcomes of the various safety audits that have been conducted. Safety training initiatives at the South African operations are tailored for these particular circumstances. All employees undergo refresher training at least once a year.

In fiscal 2010, in order to further safety-improvement efforts, Gold Fields’ Safe Production Management strategy was re-focused on two key efforts: compliance and engineering out risk. These efforts were further implemented in fiscal 2011 and 2012, and Gold Fields intends to continue carrying out this safety-improvement strategy through its well-being program and leadership and skills development. In the remaining South African operation, the existing health and safety strategy focuses on five elements: culture, stakeholder engagement, well-being, engineering out risk and compliance. This approach was project managed through 2012 to bring about the required shift in health and safety attitudes, practices and procedures. Bain & Company was engaged for the first half of 2012 to assist with the implementation of the South African operations’ (which at the time included the Sibanye Gold assets) safety strategy as well as its culture transformation program. Thereafter, Gold Fields continued implementing the programs until the date of the Spin-off.

Gold Fields’ South African operations have subscribed to the milestones set for accidents, silicosis and NIHL issued by the Mine Health and Safety Council of South Africa, which is a legislative body set up under the Mine Health and Safety Act to advise the Minister of Mineral Resources on mine health and safety legislation. These milestones include (i) achieving safety performance levels equivalent to international standards for underground metalliferous mines by 2013, (ii) by December 2008, achieving respirable crystalline silica levels of below 0.1 mg per cubic meter in 95% of individual exposure measurement results, (iii) after December 2013, there being no new cases of silicosis among individuals previously unexposed prior to 2008, (iv) after December 2008, eliminating hearing deterioration of more than 10% among occupationally exposed individuals and (v) by December 2013, reducing the noise emitted by equipment to a level below 110dB(A) at any location in the workplace. As of December 31, 2012, Gold Fields measured respirable crystalline silica levels above 0.1 mg per cubic meter in 3.5% of exposure measurement results and 1.2% of all equipment measurements taken were above 110 dB(A), with one reading measured at a rock drill machine in a small confined space and five readings being measurements of fans where silencers must be replaced due to corrosion. Silencing of equipment is ongoing, with continued focus on replacing blocked and/or damaged silencers on machines. South Africa has a legislated personal OEL of 85 dBA. Both the DMR and the Chamber of Mines accept the use of hearing protection devices while methods for reducing noise are explored. As of December 31, 2012, the NIHL exposure above 85 dBA across all operations was 47%. This measurement excludes protection from hearing protection devices. Studies indicate that with the proper use of currently available ear protection devices no employee will be subject to a sound pressure level in excess of 85 dBA. A project to measure exposure while using hearing protective devices to provide further verification was started in September 2012 and is ongoing. Cases of NIHL and silicosis may still arise in the future, particularly due to the latency period after exposure. Gold Fields has also set internal targets, which are more stringent than these milestones. Action plans to achieve the milestones have been developed and the Vice President and Head of South African operations reports to the Board’s Safety, Health and Sustainable Development Committee on a quarterly basis.

 

261


Table of Contents

Lost Time Injury Frequency Rate and Fatal Injury Frequency Rate

The following tables set out the lost time injury frequency rate data for Gold Fields’ South African, West African, Australian and South American mining operations for the last five calendar years. The tables also set out the number of fatalities and fatal injury frequency rate data for Gold Fields’ South African and West African operations. The number of fatalities and fatal injury frequency rates at Damang, St. Ives, Agnew and Cerro Corona were 0.00 for each of the last five calendar years.

South Africa

 

LOGO

 

LOGO

 

262


Table of Contents

 

LOGO

West Africa

 

LOGO

 

263


Table of Contents

 

LOGO

 

LOGO

 

264


Table of Contents

Australia

 

LOGO

 

Notes:

(1) Excluding restricted work cases, 23.17 if such cases are included.
(2) Excluding restricted work cases, 16.69 if such cases are included.

South America

 

LOGO

 

265


Table of Contents

ITEM 7: MAJOR SHAREHOLDERS AND RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

Major Shareholders

To the knowledge of management: (1) Gold Fields is not directly or indirectly owned or controlled (a) by another corporation or (b) by any foreign government; and (2) there are no arrangements the operation of which may at a subsequent date result in a change in control of Gold Fields. To the knowledge of Gold Fields’ management, there is no controlling shareholder of Gold Fields.

As of December 31, 2012, the issued share capital of Gold Fields consisted of 731,588,614 ordinary shares.

A list of the individuals and organizations holding, to the knowledge of management, directly or indirectly, 5% or more of its issued share capital as of May 1, 2013 is set forth below.

 

Beneficial owner

   Ordinary
shares
     Percentage  

Investec Asset Management

     47,780,256         6.44

First Eagle Investment Management LLC

     47,068,164         6.36

Van Eck Associates Corporation

     41,849,469         5.66

To the knowledge of management, none of the above shareholders hold voting rights which are different from those held by Gold Fields’ other shareholders.

The table below shows the significant changes in the percentage of ownership by Gold Fields’ major shareholders, to the knowledge of Gold Fields’ management, during the past three fiscal years.

 

     Beneficial ownership as of  
     June 30, 2010      December 31, 2011      December 31, 2012  
     (%)  

Beneficial owner

        

Tradewinds Global Investors

     6.54         4.24         1.19   

Investec Asset Management

     5.91         6.27         6.74   

First Eagle Investment Management LLC

     5.82         5.44         6.92   

Related Party Transactions

None of the directors, officers or major shareholders of Gold Fields or, to the knowledge of Gold Fields’ management, their families, had any interest, direct or indirect, in any transaction during the last three fiscal years or in any proposed transaction which has affected or will materially affect Gold Fields or its investment interests or subsidiaries, other than as stated below.

Rand Refinery

GFLMSL, as agent for Gold Fields and its subsidiaries, has an agreement with Rand Refinery, in which Sibanye Gold and Gold Fields held a 33.1% and 1.8% interest, respectively prior to the Spin-off, providing for the refining of substantially all of Gold Fields’ South African gold production by Rand Refinery. After the Spin-off, Gold Fields holds a 1.8% interest with the remaining interest held by other South African gold producers including Sibanye Gold which holds a 33.1% interest. Prior to October 1, 2004, GFLMSL acted as agent for Rand Refinery to sell up to 50% of Gold Fields’ South African production. However, since October 1, 2004, Gold Fields has sold the gold produced from its South African operations itself. Gold Fields Ghana and Abosso are each party to agreements with Rand Refinery to transport, refine and sell substantially all of the gold production from the Tarkwa and Damang mines entered into in June 2003. Nicholas J. Holland, who is the Chief Executive Officer and a Director of Gold Fields, was a Director of Rand Refinery from July 12, 2000 until

 

266


Table of Contents

September 30, 2008. He remains an alternate Director. As a Director of GFLMSL, which is a wholly-owned subsidiary of Gold Fields, Mr. Holland declared his interest in the contract between Rand Refinery and GFLMSL, pursuant to South African requirements, and did not participate in the decision of Rand Refinery to enter into the agreement with GFLMSL, Gold Fields Ghana or Abosso. Mr. Holland signed the agreement with Rand Refinery on behalf of GFLMSL. See “Information on the Company—Description of Mining Business—Refining and Marketing” for further details regarding these arrangements.

Uncle Harry’s Area

Cheryl A. Carolus, the non-executive chair of Gold Fields, is a party in her capacity as a founding shareholder of Peotona Gold Holdings (Proprietary) Limited, or PGH, to the agreement described below. Ms. Carolus has a 25% interest in PGH, which in turn has a one-third economic interest and a 51% voting interest in the issued share capital of Peotona Gold. Western Areas Prospecting (Proprietary) Limited, or WAP, which is a company 74% owned by GFO and 26% owned by Peotona Gold, held four prospecting rights on grounds contiguous to South Deep. On April 21, 2009, Gold Field Operations Limited, or GFO, GFI Joint Venture Holdings (Proprietary) Limited, Peotona Gold, WAP and others entered into an agreement, or the April 2009 Agreement, under which WAP relinquished and abandoned a portion of the prospecting area covered by one of the above prospecting rights (commonly known as “Uncle Harry’s Area”) in favor of the South Deep Joint Venture. The April 2009 Agreement was subject to (among other conditions precedent) the conversion of the old order mining right of South Deep to a new order mining right and simultaneously amending the South Deep mining right by extending the area covered by the South Deep mining right to include Uncle Harry’s Ground pursuant to the Mineral and Petroleum Resources Development Act. 28 of 2002. Peotona Gold also granted GFO an option to acquire its 26% shareholding in WAP. With effect from October 14, 2011, the parties amended the April 2009 Agreement pursuant to which amendment GFO acquired Peotona Gold’s 26% shareholding in WAP for an amount of R50,700,000, or the Share Purchase Price. Against receipt by Peotona Gold of the Share Purchase Price, Peotona Gold distributed the Share Purchase Price (less applicable tax and certain historical costs), as a dividend to its shareholders, including PGH, in respect of its one-third economic interest in Peotona Gold.

Alexander Forbes Group

Gold Fields, of which Sibanye Gold was a wholly-owned subsidiary during fiscal 2012, has an agreement with the Alexander Forbes Group, or Alexander Forbes, pursuant to which Alexander Forbes manages Gold Fields’ employee defined contribution fund. Guardrisk, a wholly-owned subsidiary of Alexander Forbes, manages Gold Fields’ local short-term insurance policies. Gold Fields has also obtained financial guarantees in favor of the South African Department of Mineral Resources from Alexander Forbes to partially secure the estimated rehabilitation costs at its South African operations. Matthews S. Moloko, who was a non-executive director of Gold Fields until his resignation on December 31, 2012, has been a non-executive director of Alexander Forbes from December 2007. As a director of Gold Fields, Mr. Moloko declared his interest in the agreement between Alexander Forbes and Gold Fields pursuant to South African requirements, and did not participate in the decision of Alexander Forbes to enter into the agreement with Gold Fields.

Credit Suisse

On April 17, 2012, Sibanye Gold, Orogen and GFO, owned subsidiaries of Gold Fields (the former parent of Sibanye Gold), entered into a U.S.$500 million syndicated revolving loan facility. The purpose of the facility was to refinance existing facilities and for general corporate and working capital purposes. Credit Suisse AG, London Branch, or Credit Suisse, was a lender under the U.S.$500 million syndicated revolving loan facility. See “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Credit Facilities and Other Capital Resources—$500 million Syndicated Revolving Credit Facility” for further details regarding this facility.

Further, Credit Suisse was an original lender and arranger of the U.S.$1,440 million facility and the U.S. Dollar Bridge Facility. The purpose of these facilities was to refinance Gold Fields’ debt upon the

 

267


Table of Contents

occurrence of the Spin-off and for general corporate and working capital purposes. See “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Credit Facilities and Other Capital Resources—U.S.$1,440 million term loan and revolving credit facility” for further details regarding these facilities.

Credit Suisse Securities (Europe) Limited was also a co-financial advisor to the Spin-off.

Richard Menell, who is both a senior advisor to Credit Suisse Securities Jhb Ltd and a non-executive director of Gold Fields, has been a director of Credit Suisse Securities Jhb Ltd since September 2012. As a director of Gold Fields, Mr. Menell declared his interest in the above mentioned agreements between Credit Suisse and Gold Fields, pursuant to South African requirements, and did not participate in the decision of Credit Suisse to enter into the agreements with Gold Fields.

Sibanye Gold

GFLMSL accounted for a significant portion of related party loans with the Sibanye Gold Group. These loans were U.S.$1,996.3 million in fiscal 2012. These loans were unsecured, interest-free and had no fixed terms of repayment. The amount outstanding under these loans at June 30, 2012 was U.S.$2.4 billion, The amount outstanding on the Spin-off date, the date that the loan was repaid, was nil.

On February 1, 2013, Gold Fields subscribed for further shares in Sibanye Gold at a total subscription price of R17,245,786,016.46. Sibanye Gold used the majority of the proceeds of such subscription amount to repay the intercompany loan to GFLMSL mentioned above. Gold Fields subscribed for such number of shares in Sibanye Gold so that, following such subscription, the number of issued shares held by Gold Fields in Sibanye Gold equalled the number of issued shares in Gold Fields. Sibanye Gold will use the remaining portion of the proceeds of such subscription to establish a cell captive to continue to cover insurance exposures for risk categories including asset and liability claims that are typically denominated in U.S. dollars, which were covered under Gold Fields’ cell captive.

Guarantees

Gold Fields guaranteed certain debt of Sibanye Gold Group until the Spin-off date. For information on these guarantees, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Credit Facilities and Other Capital Resources”.

Indemnity Agreement

Each of Gold Fields and the other Guarantors have entered into the Indemnity Agreement in favor of Sibanye Gold, in order to indemnify Sibanye Gold, with effect from the date on which the Spin-off took place, against any loss caused to Sibanye Gold in circumstances where Sibanye Gold is required to make a payment to noteholders or the trustee of the Notes by virtue of its guarantee of the Notes (whether such loss is made prior to or after the date on which the Spin-off takes effect or whether the circumstances giving rise to such loss arose prior to or after such date). The Indemnity Agreement will remain in place for as long as Sibanye Gold’s guarantee obligations under the Notes remain in place.

For further information on the Indemnity Agreement see “Additional Information—Material Contracts—Indemnity Agreement”.

Gold Fields believes that the above transactions with related parties have been conducted on terms at least as favorable to it as arm’s length terms; however, in certain circumstances such as related party loans, the transactions were not at arm’s length as the loans were unsecured, interest-free and had no fixed terms of repayment.

None of the directors or officers of Gold Fields or any associate of such director or officer is currently or has been at any time during the past three fiscal years materially indebted to Gold Fields.

 

268


Table of Contents

ITEM 8: FINANCIAL INFORMATION

Reference is made to Item 18 for a list of all financial statements filed as part of this annual report. For information on legal proceedings, please refer to “Information on the Company” above.

Dividends and Dividend Policy

The following table sets forth the dividends announced and paid per share in respect of Gold Fields’ ordinary shares for the periods indicated:

 

    Year ended  
    June 30,
2007
    June 30,
2008
    June 30,
2009
    June 30,
2010
    December 31,
2010
    December  31,
2011
    December  31,
2012 (1)
 
    ($)     (Rand)     ($)     (Rand)     ($)     (Rand)     ($)     (Rand)     ($)     (Rand)     ($)     (Rand)     ($)     (Rand)  

Prior year’s final dividend

    0.15        1.10        0.13        0.95        0.16        1.20        0.10        0.80        0.10        0.70        0.10        0.70        0.30        2.30   

Interim dividend

    0.13        0.90        0.09        0.65        0.03        0.30        0.07        0.50        —          —          0.14        1.00        0.20        1.60   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total dividend

    0.28        2.00        0.22        1.60        0.19        1.50        0.17        1.30        0.10        0.70        0.24        1.70        0.50        3.90   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

Note:

(1) A final dividend of R0.75 was announced on February 13, 2013 and paid on March 11, 2013.

During fiscal 2012, Gold Fields restated its dividend policy. Previously, Gold Fields’ dividend policy was to declare an interim and final dividend in respect of each financial year based on 50% of the earnings for the year before taking account of investment opportunities and after excluding impairments. Earnings were adjusted to exclude unrealized gains and losses on financial instruments and foreign debt, but adjusted to include cash payments and receipts in relation to the underlying financial instruments. The new dividend policy is to pay a dividend of between 25% and 35% of normalized earnings.

Significant Changes

Please refer to “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Recent Developments”.

 

269


Table of Contents

ITEM 9: THE OFFER AND LISTING

Listing Details

The principal non-United States trading market for the ordinary shares of Gold Fields is the JSE on which they trade under the symbol “GFI.” The ordinary shares of Gold Fields are also listed on the SWX Swiss Exchange. Gold Fields’ International Depositary Shares are listed on Euronext Brussels. As of December 31, 2012, 15,849 record holders of Gold Fields’ ordinary shares, holding an aggregate of 209,746,446 ordinary shares (28.66%), were listed as having addresses in South Africa. As of December 31, 2012, 471 record holders of Gold Fields’ ordinary shares, holding an aggregate of 121,017,265 ordinary shares (16.54%), were listed as having addresses in the United States.

Gold Fields’ ADSs currently trade in the United States on the NYSE under the symbol “GFI.” ADRs representing the ADSs are issued by The Bank of New York Mellon, as Depositary. Each ADS represents one ordinary share. Gold Fields’ ADRs are also listed on the NASDAQ Dubai.

JSE Trading History

The tables below show the high and low closing prices in Rand and the average daily volume of trading activity on the JSE for Gold Fields’ ordinary shares for the last five fiscal years.

The following table sets out ordinary share trading information on a yearly basis for the last five fiscal years, as reported by I-Net Bridge, a South African financial information service:

 

Year ended

   Ordinary share
price
    Average
daily trading
volume
 
     High     Low    
     (Rand per
ordinary
share)
    (number of
ordinary
shares)
 

June 30, 2008

     135.00        87.01        2,900,832   

June 30, 2009

     123.50        54.00        3,011,023   

June 30, 2010

     114.74        83.30        2,678,274   

December 31, 2010

     125.90        94.90        2,095,245   

December 31, 2011

     143.00        95.60        2,172,942   

December 31, 2012

     131.31        96.00        2,304,320   

through May 9, 2013

     110.29        54.73        4,255,946   

The following table sets out ordinary share trading information on a quarterly basis for the periods indicated, as reported by I-Net Bridge:

 

Quarter ended

   Ordinary share price      Average
daily trading
volume
 
     High      Low     
    

(Rand per

ordinary

share)

     (number of
ordinary
shares)
 

March 31, 2011

     128.40         111.41         2,101,349   

June 30, 2011

     123.50         95.60         2,117,767   

September 30, 2011

     141.01         95.80         2,577,103   

December 31, 2011

     143.00         117.99         1,883,768   

March 31, 2012

     131.31         104.48         2,323,091   

June 30, 2012

     117.45         97.00         2,452,051   

September 30, 2012

     114.54         96.00         2,516,738   

December 31, 2012

     112.38         97.93         1,930,090   

 

270


Table of Contents

The following table sets out ordinary share trading information on a monthly basis for each of the last six months, as reported by I-Net Bridge:

 

Month ended

   Ordinary share price      Average
daily trading
volume
 
     High     Low     
    

(Rand per

ordinary
share)

     (number of
ordinary
shares)
 

November 30, 2012

     112.38        102.73         2,280,646   

December 31, 2012

     105.63        97.93         1,986,354   

January 31, 2013

     109.85        101.88         2,496,448   

February 28, 2013

     109.48        74.30         3,193,220   

March 31, 2013

     74.72        69.45         6,355,314   

April 30, 2013

     71.39        54.73         5,077,810   

On May 9, 2013, the closing price of the ordinary shares on the JSE was 62.64.

New York Stock Exchange Trading History

The tables below show the high and low closing prices in U.S. dollars and the average daily volume of trading activity on the NYSE for the last five fiscal years.

The following table sets out ordinary share trading information on a yearly basis for the last five fiscal years, as reported by Bloomberg:

 

Year ended

   ADS price      Average
daily trading
volume
 
       High      Low     
     ($ per ADS)      (number of
ADSs)
 

June 30, 2008

     19.13         10.88         6,368,692   

June 30, 2009

     13.72         4.90         7,635,974   

June 30, 2010

     15.82         10.99         5,907,096   

December 31, 2010

     18.49         11.08         4,889.081   

December 31, 2011

     18.55         13.80         4,007,009   

December 31, 2012

     16.92         11.32         3,994,433   

through May 9, 2013

     12.47         6.26         5,154,151   

The following table sets out ADS trading information on a quarterly basis for the periods indicated, as reported by Bloomberg:

 

Quarter ended

   ADS price      Average
daily trading
volume
 
       High      Low     
     ($ per ADS)      (number of
ADSs)
 

March 31, 2011

     18.14         15.84         3,616,958   

June 30, 2011

     18.55         13.80         4,043,453   

September 30, 2011

     17.89         14.25         4,950,355   

December 31, 2011

     18.30         14.69         3,396,105   

March 31, 2012

     16.92         13.50         3,345,949   

June 30, 2012

     14.04         11.75         4,005,821   

September 30, 2012

     13.94         11.85         4,582,211   

December 31, 2012

     13.02         11.32         4,034,089   

 

271


Table of Contents

The following table sets out ADS trading information on a monthly basis for each of the last six months, as reported by Bloomberg:

 

Month ended

   ADS price      Average
daily trading
volume
 
       High      Low     
     ($ per ADS)      (number of
ADSs)
 

November 30, 2012

     13.02         11.54         4,054,358   

December 31, 2012

     12.49         11.32         4,041,204   

January 31, 2013

     12.47         11.58         3,490,133   

February 28, 2013

     10.51         8.29         4,277,752   

March 31, 2013

     8.20         7.75         6,029,213   

April 30, 2013

     7.70         6.26         6,966,808   

On May 9, 2013, the closing price of Gold Fields’ ADSs quoted on the NYSE was $6.84.

JSE Limited

The JSE was formed in 1887. The JSE provides facilities for the buying and selling of a wide range of securities, including equity and corporate debt securities and warrants in respect of securities, as well as Krugerrands.

The JSE is a self-regulating organization operating under the ultimate supervision of the Ministry of Finance, through the Financial Services Board and its representative, the Registrar of Stock Exchanges. Following the introduction of the Stock Exchanges Control Amendment Act No. 54 of 1995, or the Stock Exchange Act, which provides the statutory framework for the deregulation of the JSE, the JSE’s rules were amended with effect from November 8, 1995. These amendments removed the restrictions on corporate membership and allowed stockbrokers to form limited liability corporate entities. Members were, for the first time, also required to keep client funds in trust accounts separate from members’ own funds. Further rules to complete the deregulation of the JSE, as envisaged by the Stock Exchange Act, were promulgated during 1996 to permit members of the JSE to trade either as agents or as principals in any transaction in equities and to allow members to negotiate freely the brokerage commissions payable on agency transactions in equities. With effect from 1996, screen trading commenced on the JSE. The Securities Services Act No. 36 of 2004 came into effect on January 18, 2005. This act consolidates and amends the laws relating to the regulation and control of exchanges and securities trading, the regulation and control of central securities depositories and the custody and administration of securities and the prohibition of insider trading.

The market capitalization of companies listed on the stock exchange operated by the JSE was approximately R8.4 trillion as of December 31, 2012. The actual float available for public trading is significantly smaller than the aggregate market capitalization because of the large number of long-term holdings by listed holding companies in listed subsidiaries and associates, the existence of listed pyramid companies and cross-holdings between listed companies. Liquidity on the JSE (measured by reference to the total market value of securities traded as a percentage of the total market capitalization) was 43.1% for fiscal 2012. Trading is concentrated in a small, but growing, number of companies. As of May 9, 2013, there were 395 listed companies on the JSE.

South Africa was included in the Morgan Stanley Capital International Emerging Markets Free Index and the International Finance Corporation Investable Index in March and April 1995, respectively. South Africa has a significant representation in these emerging market indices.

The JSE has established a project named Share Transactions Totally Electronic, or STRATE, which has involved the dematerialization of share certificates in a central securities depositary and the introduction of contractual, rolling, electronic settlement in order to increase the speed, certainty and efficiency of settlement and

 

272


Table of Contents

to fall into line with international practice. Gold Fields joined STRATE on October 1, 2001. Investors are given the choice of either holding their securities in dematerialized form in the central securities depositary or retaining their share certificates. Shareholders who elect to retain their share certificates are not able to trade their shares on the JSE, although they may trade their shares off-market. Settlement of dematerialized shares traded electronically on the JSE is made five days after each trade (T+5).

 

273


Table of Contents

ITEM 10: ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

General

Gold Fields is a public company registered in South Africa under the Companies Act which limits the liability of its shareholders, and is governed by its Memorandum of Incorporation in terms of the Companies Act. Gold Fields’ registration number is 1968/004880/06. On April 8, 2009, South Africa passed the Companies Act, which came into force on May 1, 2011. At the annual general meeting held on May 14, 2012, Gold Fields adopted a new Memorandum of Incorporation, or Memorandum of Incorporation, to replace its memorandum of association and the articles of association. Upon the passage of the Companies Act, the Memorandum of Incorporation became Gold Fields’ Memorandum of Incorporation upon the advent of the Act. The Memorandum of Incorporation conforms to the requirements of the Companies Act and the amended JSE Listings Requirements. Clause 4 of the Memorandum of Incorporation provides that Gold Fields has the powers and capacity of a natural person and is not subject to any special conditions. Gold Fields amended the Memorandum of Incorporation at its annual general meeting on May 9, 2013. These amendments relate to, among other things:

 

   

the ability of the Board to create and issue debt instruments (in the form of bonds, notes, commercial paper, debentures or other similar securities that are, or are capable of being, listed or ordinarily dealt with on an exchange) without reference to shareholders, on such terms and conditions as the Board may from time to time determine, provided that no special privileges may be granted to secured and unsecured debt instruments as contemplated in the JSE Listings Requirements. Such ability shall in all circumstances be subject to, and be in accordance with, the JSE Listings Requirements and the Companies Act;

 

   

the retirement of directors by rotation, which amendment will, in line with international best practice, provide that all directors, and not only non-executive directors, are subject to retirement by rotation; and

 

   

recent changes to the JSE Listings Requirements.

The memoranda of incorporation of all of its subsidiary companies are similarly aligned. This process was completed by the May 1, 2013 deadline.

Dividends and Payments to Shareholders

Gold Fields may make distributions (including the payment of dividends to its shareholders) from time to time in accordance with provisions of the Companies Act and the JSE Listing Requirements and Gold Fields’ Memorandum of Incorporation. In terms of the Companies Act, a company may only make a distribution (including the payment of any dividend) if:

 

   

it reasonably appears that the Company will satisfy the solvency and liquidity test immediately after completing the proposed distribution;

 

   

the Board, by resolution, has acknowledged that it has applied the solvency and liquidity test and reasonably concluded that the Company will satisfy the solvency and liquidity test immediately after completing the proposed distribution.

In terms of the Companies Act, the solvency and liquidity test will be satisfied at a particular time if, considering all reasonably foreseeable financial circumstances of the Company at that time:

 

   

the assets of the Company, fairly valued, equal or exceed the liabilities of the Company, as fairly valued; and

 

   

it appears that the Company will be able to pay its debts as they become due in the ordinary course of business for a period of:

 

   

12 months after the date on which the test is considered; or

 

   

in the case of a distribution (including the payment of dividends to its shareholders) 12 months following that distribution.

 

274


Table of Contents

Subject to the above requirements, the shareholders of Gold Fields in a general meeting or the directors may from time to time declare a dividend or any other payment to be paid to shareholders and to the holders of share warrants (if any) in proportion to the number of shares held by them.

The Company must hold all monies due to the shareholders in trust indefinitely but subject to the laws of prescription. The Company shall be entitled at any time to delegate its obligations in respect of unclaimed dividends or other unclaimed payment to shareholders to any one of the Company’s bankers.

Voting Rights

Every shareholder of Gold Fields, or representative of a shareholder, who is present at a shareholders’ meeting has one vote on a show of hands, regardless of the number of shares he holds or represents or the number of shareholders he represents, unless a poll is demanded. Every Gold Fields’ shareholder is, on a poll, entitled to one vote per ordinary share held. A poll may be demanded by not less than five persons having the right to vote on that matter, a person or persons entitled to exercise not less than one tenth of the total voting rights entitled to vote on that matter, or the chairperson. Neither the Companies Act nor Gold Fields’ Memorandum of Incorporation provide for cumulative voting.

A shareholder is entitled to appoint a proxy to attend, speak and vote at any meeting on his or her behalf. The proxy need not be a shareholder; however, the proxy may not delegate authority granted to him or her as a proxy.

Issue of Additional Shares and Pre-emptive Rights

Shareholder approval is required for any issuance of additional shares. Shareholders may either convey a general or specific authority to directors to issue shares. A general authority is valid until the earlier of the next annual general meeting and 15 months after the authority was granted.

The JSE and Gold Fields’ Memorandum of Incorporation require that any new issue of equity shares by Gold Fields must first be offered to existing shareholders in proportion to their shareholding in the company unless, among other things, the issuance to new shareholders is:

 

   

pursuant to a shareholder approved employee share incentive scheme;

 

   

for the acquisition of an asset, provided that, if the issue is more than 30% of the company’s issued share capital, a simple majority of shareholders must vote in favor of the acquisition;

 

   

to raise cash through a general issuance at the discretion of the directors to the general public (but not to related parties) of up to 10% of the issued share capital in any one fiscal year at an issue price with a discount not exceeding 10% of the 30-business-day weighted average trading price prior to the date the application is made to the JSE to list the shares provided that a 75% majority of votes cast by shareholders at a general meeting must approve the granting of such authority to the directors; or

 

   

to raise cash through a specific issuance of shares for cash, provided that a 75% majority of shareholders, other than controlling shareholders, votes in favor of the resolution to issue the shares at a general meeting.

Transfer of Shares

The transfer of any Gold Fields certificated shares will be implemented in accordance with the provisions of the Companies Act using the then common form of transfer. Dematerialized shares which have been traded on the JSE are transferred on the STRATE system and delivered five business days after each trade. The transferor of any share is deemed to remain the holder of that share until the name of the transferee is entered in Gold Fields’ register for that share. Since Gold Fields shares are traded through STRATE, only shares which have been dematerialized may be traded on the JSE. Accordingly, Gold Fields shareholders who hold shares in certificated form will need to dematerialize their shares in order to trade on the JSE.

 

275


Table of Contents

Disclosure of Interest in Shares

Under South African law, a registered holder of Gold Fields shares who is not the beneficial owner of such shares is required to disclose to Gold Fields, within five business days after the end of every month during which a change has occurred in the beneficial ownership, the identity of the beneficial owner and the number and class of securities held on behalf of the beneficial owner. Moreover, Gold Fields may, by notice in writing, require a person who is a registered shareholder, or whom Gold Fields knows or has reasonable cause to believe has a beneficial interest in Gold Fields ordinary shares, to confirm or deny whether or not such person holds the ordinary shares or beneficial interest and, if the ordinary shares are held for another person, to disclose to Gold Fields the identity of the person on whose behalf the ordinary shares are held. Gold Fields may also require the person to give particulars of the extent of the beneficial interest held during the three years preceding the date of the notice. Gold Fields is obligated to establish and maintain a register of the disclosures described above and to publish in its annual financial statements a list of the persons who hold a beneficial interest equal to or in excess of 5% of the total number of ordinary shares issued by Gold Fields together with the extent of those beneficial interests.

General Meetings of Shareholders

The shareholders and/or directors may convene Gold Fields shareholders’ meetings pursuant to the requirements of the Companies Act. Gold Fields is obligated to hold an annual general meeting for each fiscal year prior to 15 months after the date of the last annual general meeting.

Shareholders’ meetings, including annual general meetings, require at least 15 business days’ notice in writing of the place, day and time of the meeting to shareholders.

Business may be transacted at any shareholders’ meeting only while a quorum of shareholders is present. The quorum for the commencement of a shareholders’ meeting shall be:

 

   

sufficient persons present to exercise, in aggregate, at least 25% of all the voting rights that are entitled to be exercised; and

 

   

in addition, three shareholders entitled to vote and present at the meeting.

The annual general meeting deals with and disposes of all matters prescribed by Gold Fields’ Memorandum of Incorporation and the Companies Act, including:

 

   

the presentation of the Directors’ report, the audited financial statements for the immediately preceding financial year and the audit committee report; and

 

   

the election of directors.

Annual Report and Accounts

Gold Fields is required to keep the accounting records and books of accounts as are necessary to present the state of affairs of the company and to explain the financial position of the company as prescribed by the Companies Act. No shareholder (who is not a director of Gold Fields) has the right to inspect any account or book or document of Gold Fields, except as conferred by the Companies Act or authorized by the directors or by a resolution of Gold Fields at a shareholders’ meeting.

The directors of Gold Fields will cause to be prepared annual financial statements and an annual report as required by the Companies Act and the Listing Requirements of the JSE. Gold Fields will send by mail to the registered address of every shareholder a copy of the annual report and annual financial statements. Not later than three months after the first six months of its financial year, Gold Fields will mail to every shareholder an interim report for the previous six month period.

 

276


Table of Contents

Changes in Capital or Objects and Powers of Gold Fields

The Gold Fields shareholders may, by the passing of a special resolution in accordance with the provisions of the Companies Act:

 

   

increase Gold Fields’ authorized share capital;

 

   

divide all or any part of Gold Fields’ share capital into shares of larger amounts than Gold Fields’ existing shares or consolidate and reduce the number of the issued no par value shares, if any;

 

   

reduce Gold Fields’ authorized share capital and, if required by law, its issued share capital, stated capital and any capital redemption reserve fund or any share premium account;

 

   

alter the provisions of Gold Fields’ Memorandum of Incorporation; and

 

   

subject to the provisions of the Companies Act or any other South African law governing companies and the requirements of the JSE and any other stock exchange upon which the shares of Gold Fields may be quoted or listed from time to time, allow Gold Fields to acquire shares issued by itself or in any subsidiary of the company from time to time, and provided that:

 

   

the directors may resolve that any return of capital made to all or any shareholders whose registered addresses are outside South Africa will, subject to any exchange control regulations then in force, be paid in such other currencies as may be stipulated by the directors. The directors may also stipulate the date for converting Rand to those currencies and the provisional rate of exchange, provided that the date for conversion must be within a period of 30 days prior to the date of payment; and

 

   

all unclaimed amounts due as a result of a reduction of capital or any consolidation or subdivision of capital may be invested or otherwise made use of by the directors for the benefit of Gold Fields until claimed.

Variation of Rights

All or any of the rights, privileges or conditions attached to Gold Fields’ ordinary shares may be varied by a special resolution of Gold Fields passed in accordance with the provisions of the Companies Act.

Distribution of Assets on Liquidation

In the event of a voluntary or compulsory liquidation, dissolution or winding-up, the assets remaining after payment of all the debts and liabilities of Gold Fields, including the costs of liquidation, shall be dealt with by a liquidator who may, with the sanction of a special resolution, among other things, divide among the shareholders any part of the assets of Gold Fields, and may vest any part of the assets of Gold Fields as the liquidator deems fit in trustees for the benefit of shareholders. The division of assets is not required to be done in accordance with the legal rights of shareholders of Gold Fields. In particular, any class may be given preferential or special rights or may be partly or fully excluded.

Purchase of Shares

The Companies Act permits the establishment of share incentive trusts for the purpose of purchasing shares of a company for the benefit of its employees, including salaried directors. These share incentive trusts are permitted to extend loans to company employees, other than non-salaried directors, for the purpose of purchasing or subscribing for shares of the company.

The solvency and liquidity test will be satisfied at a particular time if, considering all reasonably foreseeable financial circumstances of the Company at that time:

 

   

the assets of the Company, fairly valued, equal or exceed the liabilities of the Company, as fairly valued; and

 

277


Table of Contents
   

it appears that the Company will be able to pay its debts as they become due in the ordinary course of business for a period of:

 

   

12 months after the date on which the test is considered; or

 

   

in the case of a distribution (including the payment of dividends to its shareholders) 12 months following that distribution.

The procedure for acquisition of shares by Gold Fields is regulated by its Memorandum of Incorporation, the Companies Act and the Listing Requirements of the JSE.

Gold Fields may, if authorized by special resolution, acquire its own shares; provided that it reasonably appears that the Company will satisfy the solvency and liquidity test immediately after completing the proposed distribution and that the Board, by resolution, has acknowledged that it has applied the solvency and liquidity test and reasonably concluded that the Company will satisfy the solvency and liquidity test immediately after completing the proposed distribution. See “—Dividends and Payments to Shareholders”.

Borrowing Powers

In terms of the provisions of Section 19(1) of the Companies Act, read together with Clause 4 of the Company’s Memorandum of Incorporation, the borrowing powers of the Company are unlimited.

Non-South African Shareholders

There are no limitations imposed by South African law or by the Memorandum of Incorporation of Gold Fields on the rights of non-South African shareholders to hold or vote Gold Fields’ ordinary shares.

Rights of Minority Shareholders and Directors’ Duties

The Companies Act provides instances in which minority shareholders may seek relief from the courts if he, she or it has been unfairly prejudiced by the company.

In South Africa, a director of a company, when acting in that capacity, must exercise the powers and perform the functions of a director:

 

   

in good faith and for a proper purpose;

 

   

in the best interests of the company; and

 

   

with the degree of care, skill and diligence that may reasonably be expected of a person;

 

   

carrying out the same functions in relation to the company as those carried out by that director; and

 

   

having the general knowledge, skill and experience of that director.

Material Contracts

Additional Black Economic Empowerment Transactions

On August 5, 2010, Gold Fields announced a series of empowerment transactions to meet its 2014 Black Economic Empowerment equity ownership requirements. On November 2, 2010, the shareholders of Gold Fields approved these transactions at the General Meeting which included the establishment of an ESOP, the issue of approximately 600,000 Gold Fields shares to a broad-based BEE consortium, or BEECO, and BEECO’s subscription for a 10% holding in South Deep with a phase in participation over 20 years. On November 19, 2010, Gold Fields issued 13,525,394 shares to the ESOP housed and administered by the Gold Fields Thusano Share Trust, thereby commencing the implementation of the ESOP transaction. The remaining empowerment transactions have been completed.

 

278


Table of Contents

U.S.$1 billion Note Issue

See “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Credit Facilities and Other Capital Resources—U.S.$1 billion Note Issue”.

Project Finance Facility

See “Information on the Company—Gold Fields’ Mining Operations—Peru Operation—Cerro Corona” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Credit Facilities and Other Capital Resources—Project Finance Facility”.

U.S.$200 million Non-revolving Senior Secured Term Loan

See “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Credit Facilities and Other Capital Resources—U.S.$200 million Non-revolving Senior Secured Term Loan”.

U.S.$60 million Senior Secured Revolving Credit Facility

See “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects —Credit Facilities and Other Capital Resources—U.S.$60 million Senior Secured Revolving Credit Facility”.

Split-tenor Revolving Credit Facility

See “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Credit Facilities and Other Capital Resources—Split- tenor Revolving Credit Facility”.

U.S.$500 million Syndicated Revolving Credit Facility

See “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Credit Facilities and Other Capital Resources— U.S.$500 million Syndicated Revolving Credit Facility”.

R1,000 million Standard Bank Revolving Credit Facility

See “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Credit Facilities and Other Capital Resources— R3,500 million Long Term Revolving Credit Facilities”.

R500 million RMB Revolving Credit Facility

See “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Credit Facilities and Other Capital Resources— R3,500 million Long Term Revolving Credit Facilities”.

R10 billion Domestic Medium Term Note Program

See “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Credit Facilities and Other Capital Resources—R10 billion Domestic Medium Term Note Program”.

U.S.$1 billion Syndicated Revolving Credit Facility

See “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Credit Facilities and Other Capital Resources—U.S.$1 Billion Syndicated Revolving Credit Facility”.

U.S.$1,440 million Term Loan and Revolving Credit Facility

See “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Credit Facilities and Other Capital Resources—U.S.$1,440 million Term Loan and Revolving Credit Facility”.

R1,500 million Nedbank Revolving Credit Facility

See “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Credit Facilities and Other Capital Resources—R1,500 million Nedbank Revolving Credit Facility”.

 

279


Table of Contents

Management and Other Compensatory Plans and Arrangements

See “Directors, Senior Management and Employees—The Gold Fields Limited 2005 Share Plan”, “Directors, Senior Management and Employees—The Gold Fields Limited 2005 Non-Executive Share Plan”, “Directors, Senior Management and Employees—The GF Management Incentive Scheme”, “Directors, Senior Management and Employees—The GF Non-Executive Director Share Plan” and “Directors, Senior Management and Employees—Executive Directors’ Terms of Employment”.

Transitional Services Agreement

Following the Spin-off, Gold Fields and Sibanye Gold are continuing to provide services to each other as described in the Transitional Services Agreement. These services include corporate functions and infrastructure support, purchasing, corporate communications, human resources and benefit management, treasury and finance, investor relations, corporate controller, internal audit, legal and tax advice, compliance regarding internal controls and information technology functions, which will be provided on a transitional basis for a period of up to 12 months.

Indemnity Agreement

Pursuant to the Indemnity Agreement entered into between the Guarantors and Sibanye Gold, the Guarantors agreed to hold Sibanye Gold harmless from and against any and all liabilities and expenses which may be incurred by Sibanye Gold under or in connection with the Notes, including any payment obligations by Sibanye Gold to the noteholders or the trustee of the Notes pursuant to the guarantee of the Notes, all on the terms and subject to the conditions contained therein. The Indemnity Agreement will remain in place for as long as Sibanye Gold’s guarantee obligations under the Notes remain in place. See “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Credit Facilities and Other Capital Resources—U.S.$1 billion Notes Issue”.

Deposit Agreement

Gold Fields has an American Depositary Receipt facility. In connection with this facility, Gold Fields is party to a Deposit Agreement, dated as of February 2, 1998, as amended and restated as of May 21, 2002 among Gold Fields, The Bank of New York (now known as The Bank of New York Mellon, or BNYM), as Depositary, and all owners and holders from time to time of American Depositary Receipts issued thereunder.

This summary is subject to and qualified in its entirety by reference to the Deposit Agreement, including the form of ADRs attached thereto. Terms used in this section and not otherwise defined will have the meanings set forth in the Deposit Agreement. Copies of the Deposit Agreement are available for inspection at the Corporate Trust Office of the Depositary, located at 101 Barclay Street, New York, New York 10286. The Depositary’s principal executive office is located at One Wall Street, New York, New York 10286.

American Depositary Receipts

Each Gold Fields ADS represents ownership interests in one Gold Fields ordinary share and the rights attributable to one Gold Fields ordinary share that Gold Fields will deposit with one of the custodians, which currently are Standard Bank of South Africa, First National Bank of South Africa and Société Générale. Each Gold Fields ADR also represents securities, cash or other property deposited with BNYM but not distributed to holders of Gold Fields ADRs.

As BNYM will actually be the holder of the underlying ordinary shares, Gold Fields will not treat you as one of its shareholders. As a holder of ADSs, you will have ADR holder rights. A Deposit Agreement among Gold Fields, BNYM and you, as a Gold Fields ADR holder, sets out the ADR holders’ rights and obligations of BNYM, as depositary. New York state law governs the Deposit Agreement and the ADRs evidencing the Gold Fields ADSs.

 

280


Table of Contents

You may hold ADRs either directly or indirectly through your broker or financial institution. If you hold ADRs directly, you are an ADR holder. This description assumes you hold your ADRs directly. If you hold the ADRs indirectly, you must rely on the procedures of your broker or financial institution to assert the rights of ADR holders described in this section. You should consult with your broker or financial institution to find out what those procedures are.

Share Dividends and Other Distributions

How will you receive dividends and other distributions on the ordinary shares?

BNYM will pay to you the cash dividends or other distributions it or the custodian receives on the ordinary shares or other deposited securities, after deducting its fees and expenses. You will receive these distributions in proportion to the number of ordinary shares your Gold Fields ADSs represent.

Cash:

BNYM will convert any cash dividend or distribution Gold Fields pays on the ordinary shares, other than any dividend or distribution paid in U.S. dollars, into U.S. dollars. If that is not possible on a reasonable basis, or if any approval from any government is needed and cannot be obtained, the Deposit Agreement allows BNYM to distribute the foreign currency only to those ADS holders to whom it is possible to do so or to hold the foreign currency it cannot convert for the account of the ADS holders who have not been paid. It will not invest the foreign currency and it will not be liable for any interest.

Before making a distribution, BNYM will deduct any withholding taxes that must be paid under applicable laws. It will distribute only whole U.S. dollars and U.S. cents and will round any fractional amounts to the nearest whole cent. If the exchange rates fluctuate during a time when BNYM cannot convert the foreign currency, you may lose some or all of the value of the distribution.

Ordinary shares:

BNYM will distribute new ADRs representing any ordinary shares Gold Fields distributes as a dividend or free distribution, if Gold Fields requests that BNYM make this distribution and if Gold Fields furnishes BNYM promptly with satisfactory evidence that it is legal to do so. BNYM will only distribute whole ADRs. It will sell ordinary shares which would require it to issue a fractional ADS and distribute the net proceeds to the holders entitled to those ordinary shares. If BNYM does not distribute additional cash or ADSs, each ADS will also represent the new ordinary shares.

Right to purchase additional ordinary shares:

If Gold Fields offers holders of securities any rights, including rights to subscribe for additional ordinary shares, BNYM may take actions necessary to make these rights available to you. Gold Fields must first instruct BNYM to do so and furnish it with satisfactory evidence that it is legal to do so. If Gold Fields does not furnish this evidence and/or give these instructions, and BNYM determines that it is practical to sell the rights, BNYM may sell the rights and allocate the net proceeds to holders’ accounts. BNYM may allow rights that are not distributed or sold to lapse. In that case, you will receive no value for them.

If BNYM makes rights available to you, upon instruction from you it will exercise the rights and purchase the ordinary shares on your behalf. BNYM will then deposit the ordinary shares and deliver ADSs to you. It will only exercise rights if you pay BNYM the exercise price and any charges the rights require you to pay. U.S. securities laws may restrict the sale, deposit, cancellation and transfer of the ADSs issued after exercise of rights. In this case, BNYM may deliver the ADSs under a separate restricted deposit agreement, which will contain the same provisions as the Deposit Agreement, except for changes needed to put the restrictions in place. BNYM will not offer you rights unless those rights and the securities to which the rights relate are either exempt from registration or have been registered under the Securities Act of 1933 with respect to a distribution to you.

 

281


Table of Contents

Other distributions:

BNYM will send to you anything else Gold Fields distributes on deposited securities by any means BNYM thinks is legal, fair and practical. If it cannot make the distribution in that way, BNYM may decide to sell what Gold Fields distributed—for example by public or private sale—and distribute the net proceeds, in the same way as it does with cash, or it may decide to hold what Gold Fields distributed, in which case the ADRs will also represent the newly distributed property.

BNYM is not responsible if it decides that it is unlawful or impractical to make a distribution available to any ADR holder. Gold Fields will have no obligation to take any other action to permit the distribution of ADSs, ordinary shares, rights or anything else to ADS holders. This means that you may not receive the distribution Gold Fields makes on its ordinary shares or any value for them if it is illegal or impractical for Gold Fields to make them available to you.

Deposit, Withdrawal and Cancellation

How does the Depositary issue ADSs?

BNYM will deliver the ADSs that you are entitled to receive in the offer against deposit of the underlying ordinary shares. BNYM will deliver additional ADSs if you or your broker deposit ordinary shares with the custodian. You must also deliver evidence satisfactory to BNYM of any necessary approvals of the governmental agency in South Africa, if any, which is responsible for regulating currency exchange at that time. If required by BNYM, you must in addition deliver an agreement transferring your rights as a shareholder to receive dividends or other property. Upon payment of its fees and of any taxes or charges, BNYM will register the appropriate number of ADSs in the names you request and will deliver the ADRs at its Corporate Trust Office to the persons you request.

How do ADS holders cancel an ADS and obtain ordinary shares?

You may submit a written request to withdraw ordinary shares and turn in your ADRs evidencing your ADSs at the Corporate Trust Office of BNYM. Upon payment of its fees and of any taxes or charges, such as stamp taxes or stock transfer taxes, BNYM will deliver the deposited securities underlying the ADSs to an account designated by you at the office of the custodian. At your request, risk and expense, BNYM may deliver at its Corporate Trust Office any dividends or distributions with respect to the deposited securities represented by the ADSs, or any proceeds from the sale of any dividends, distributions or rights, which may be held by BNYM.

Record Dates

Whenever any distribution of cash or rights, change in the number of ordinary shares represented by ADSs or notice of a meeting of holders of ordinary shares or ADSs is made, BNYM will fix a record date for the determination of the owners entitled to receive the benefits, rights or notice.

Voting of Deposited Securities

How do you vote?

If you are an ADS holder on a record date fixed by BNYM, you may exercise the voting rights of the same class of securities as the ordinary shares represented by your ADSs, but only if Gold Fields asks BNYM to ask for your instructions. Otherwise, you will not be able to exercise your right to vote unless you withdraw the ordinary shares.

However, you may not know about the meeting enough in advance to withdraw the ordinary shares. If Gold Fields asks for your instructions, BNYM will notify you of the upcoming meeting and arrange to deliver certain

 

282


Table of Contents

materials to you. The materials will: (1) include all information included with the meeting notice sent by Gold Fields to BNYM, (2) explain how you may instruct BNYM to vote the ordinary shares or other deposited securities underlying your ADSs as you direct if you vote by mail or by proxy and (3) include a voting instruction card and any other information required under South African law that Gold Fields and BNYM will prepare. For instructions to be valid, BNYM must receive them on or before the date specified in the instructions. BNYM will try, to the extent practical, subject to applicable law and the provisions of the by-laws of Gold Fields, to vote or have its agents vote the underlying shares as you instruct. BNYM will only vote, or attempt to vote, as you instruct. However, if BNYM does not receive your voting instructions, it will give a proxy to vote your ordinary shares to a designated representative of Gold Fields, unless Gold Fields informs BNYM that either: (1) it does not want the proxy issued, (2) substantial opposition exists or (3) the matter materially and adversely affects the rights of holders of ordinary shares.

Gold Fields cannot assure that you will receive the voting materials in time to ensure that you can instruct BNYM to vote your ordinary shares. In addition, BNYM and its agents are not responsible for failing to carry out voting instructions or for the manner of carrying out voting instructions. This means that you may not be able to exercise your right to vote and there may be nothing you can do if your ordinary shares are not voted as you requested.

Inspection of Transfer Books

BNYM will keep books for the registration and transfer of ADRs. These books will be open at all reasonable times for inspection by you, provided that you are inspecting the books for a purpose related to Gold Fields or the Deposit Agreement or the ADRs.

Reports and Other Communications

BNYM will make available for your inspection at its Corporate Trust Office any reports or communications, including any proxy material, received from Gold Fields, as long as these materials are received by BNYM as the holder of the deposited securities and generally available to Gold Fields shareholders. At Gold Fields’ written request, BNYM will also send copies of reports, notices and communications to you.

 

283


Table of Contents

Fees and Expenses

BNYM, as Depositary, will charge any party depositing or withdrawing ordinary shares or any party surrendering ADRs or to whom ADRs are issued:

 

For:

 

Gold Fields ADS holders must pay:

•   each issuance of a Gold Fields ADS, including as a result of a distribution of ordinary shares or rights or other property or upon exercise of a warrant to purchase an ADS

 

•   $5.00 or less per 100 Gold Fields ADSs or portion thereof

•   each distribution of securities distributed to holders of Gold Fields’ ordinary shares which are distributed by BNYM to Gold Fields’ ADR holders

 

•   any fees that would be payable if the securities had been ordinary shares and those ordinary shares had been deposited for the issuance of ADSs

•   each cancellation of a Gold Fields ADS, including if the Deposit Agreement terminates

 

•   $5.00 or less per 100 Gold Fields ADSs or portion thereof

•   each cash distribution pursuant to the Deposit Agreement

 

•   not more than $0.02 per ADS (or portion thereof)

•   annual depositary services

 

•   not more than $0.02 per ADS (or portion thereof) paid annually, provided that this fee will not be charged if the $0.02 fee for cash distributions described above was charged during the calendar year

•   transfer and registration of ordinary shares on the Gold Fields’ share register from your name to the name BNYM or its agent when you deposit or withdraw ordinary shares

 

•   registration or transfer fees

•   conversion of foreign currency to U.S. dollars

 

•   expenses of BNYM

•   cable, telex and facsimile transmission expenses, if expressly provided in the Deposit Agreement

 

•   expenses of BNYM

•   as necessary

 

•   certain taxes and governmental charges BNYM or the custodian has to pay on any Gold Fields ADS or ordinary share underlying a Gold Fields ADS

In fiscal 2012, BNYM paid U.S.$1.3 million to Gold Fields as reimbursement for costs incurred over the year in connection with the ADR program

Payment of Taxes

You will be responsible for any taxes or other governmental charges payable on your ADRs or on the deposited securities underlying your ADRs. BNYM may deduct the amount of any taxes owed from any payments to you. It may also restrict or refuse the transfer of your Gold Fields ADSs or restrict or refuse the withdrawal of your underlying deposited securities until you pay any taxes owed on your Gold Fields ADSs or underlying securities. It may also sell deposited securities to pay any taxes owed. You will remain liable if the proceeds of the sale are not enough to pay the taxes. If BNYM sells deposited securities, it will, if appropriate, reduce the number of Gold Fields ADSs held by you to reflect the sale and pay to you any proceeds, or send to you any property, remaining after it has paid the taxes.

 

284


Table of Contents

Reclassifications, Recapitalizations and Mergers

If Gold Fields:

 

   

changes the par value of any of the Gold Fields ordinary shares;

 

   

reclassifies, splits or consolidates any of the Gold Fields ordinary shares;

 

   

distributes securities on any of the Gold Fields ordinary shares that are not distributed to you; or

 

   

recapitalizes, reorganizes, merges, consolidates, sells its assets, or takes any similar action, then:

the cash, ordinary shares or other securities received by BNYM will become new deposited securities under the Deposit Agreement, and each Gold Fields ADS will automatically represent the right to receive a proportional interest in the new deposited securities; and BNYM may and will, if Gold Fields asks it to, distribute some or all of the cash, ordinary shares or other securities it received. It may also issue new Gold Fields ADSs or ask you to surrender your outstanding Gold Fields ADSs in exchange for new Gold Fields ADSs identifying the new deposited securities.

Amendment and Termination of the Deposit Agreement

How may the Deposit Agreement be amended?

Gold Fields may agree with BNYM to amend the Deposit Agreement and the Gold Fields ADRs without your consent for any reason. If the amendment adds or increases fees or charges, except for taxes and governmental charges, or prejudices an important right of Gold Fields ADS holders, it will only become effective 30 days after BNYM notifies you of the amendment. At the time an amendment becomes effective, you are considered, by continuing to hold your ADSs, to agree to the amendment and to be bound by the agreement as amended. However, no amendment will impair your right to receive the deposited securities in exchange for your Gold Fields ADSs.

How may the Deposit Agreement be terminated?

BNYM will terminate the Deposit Agreement if Gold Fields asks it to do so, in which case it must notify you at least 30 days before termination. BNYM may also terminate the agreement after notifying you if BNYM informs Gold Fields that it would like to resign and Gold Fields does not appoint a new depositary bank within 90 days.

If any Gold Fields ADSs remain outstanding after termination, BNYM will stop registering the transfer of Gold Fields ADSs, will stop distributing dividends to Gold Fields ADS holders, and will not give any further notices or do anything else under the Deposit Agreement other than:

 

   

collect dividends and distributions on the deposited securities;

 

   

sell rights and other property offered to holders of deposited securities; and

 

   

deliver ordinary shares and other deposited securities upon cancellation of Gold Fields ADSs.

At any time after one year after termination of the Deposit Agreement, BNYM may sell any remaining deposited securities by public or private sale. After that, BNYM will hold the money it received on the sale, as well as any cash it is holding under the Deposit Agreement, for the pro rata benefit of the Gold Fields ADS holders that have not surrendered their Gold Fields ADSs. It will not invest the money and has no liability for interest. BNYM’s only obligations will be to account for the money and cash. After termination, Gold Fields’ only obligations will be with respect to indemnification of, and to pay specified amounts to, BNYM.

 

285


Table of Contents

Your Right to Receive the Ordinary Shares Underlying Your Gold Fields ADSs

You have the right to cancel your Gold Fields ADSs and withdraw the underlying ordinary shares at any time except:

 

   

due to temporary delays caused by BNYM or Gold Fields closing its transfer books, the transfer of ordinary shares being blocked in connection with voting at a shareholders’ meeting, or Gold Fields paying dividends;

 

   

when you or other ADR holders seeking to withdraw ordinary shares owe money to pay fees, taxes and similar charges; or

 

   

when it is necessary to prohibit withdrawals in order to comply with any laws or governmental regulations that apply to Gold Fields ADSs or to the withdrawal of ordinary shares or other deposited securities.

This right of withdrawal may not be limited by any provision of the Deposit Agreement.

Limitations on Obligations and Liability to Gold Fields ADS Holders

The Deposit Agreement expressly limits the obligations of Gold Fields and BNYM. It also limits the liability of Gold Fields and BNYM. Gold Fields and BNYM:

 

   

are only obligated to take the actions specifically set forth in the Deposit Agreement without negligence or bad faith;

 

   

are not liable if either of them is prevented or delayed by law, any provision of the Gold Fields by-laws or circumstances beyond their control, from performing their obligations under the agreement;

 

   

are not liable if either of them exercises, or fails to exercise, discretion permitted under the agreement;

 

   

have no obligation to become involved in a lawsuit or proceeding related to the ADSs or the Deposit Agreement on your behalf or on behalf of any other party unless they are indemnified to their satisfaction; and

 

   

may rely upon any advice of or information from any legal counsel, accountants, any person depositing ordinary shares, any Gold Fields ADS holder or any other person whom they believe in good faith is competent to give them that advice or information.

In the Deposit Agreement, Gold Fields and BNYM agree to indemnify each other under specified circumstances.

Requirements for Depositary Actions

Before BNYM will deliver or register the transfer of a Gold Fields ADS, make a distribution on a Gold Fields ADS, or permit withdrawal of ordinary shares, BNYM may require:

 

   

payment of taxes, including stock transfer taxes or other governmental charges, and transfer or registration fees charged by third parties for the transfer of any ordinary shares or other deposited securities, as well as the fees and expenses of BNYM;

 

   

production of satisfactory proof of the identity of the person presenting ordinary shares for deposit or Gold Fields ADSs upon withdrawal, and of the genuineness of any signature; and

 

   

compliance with regulations BNYM may establish consistent with the Deposit Agreement, including presentation of transfer documents.

BNYM may refuse to deliver, transfer, or register transfer of Gold Fields ADSs generally when the transfer books of BNYM are closed or at any time if BNYM or Gold Fields thinks it advisable to do so.

 

286


Table of Contents

Pre-Release of Gold Fields ADSs

In certain circumstances, subject to the provisions of the Deposit Agreement, BNYM may deliver Gold Fields ADSs before deposit of the underlying ordinary shares. This is called a pre-release of Gold Fields ADSs. BNYM may also deliver ordinary shares prior to the receipt and cancellation of pre-released Gold Fields ADSs (even if those Gold Fields ADSs are canceled before the pre-release transaction has been closed out). A pre-release is closed out as soon as the underlying ordinary shares are delivered to BNYM. BNYM may receive Gold Fields ADSs instead of the ordinary shares to close out a pre-release. BNYM may pre-release Gold Fields ADSs only under the following conditions:

 

   

before or at the time of the pre-release, the person to whom the pre-release is being made must represent to BNYM in writing that it or its customer, as the case may be, owns the ordinary shares or Gold Fields ADSs to be deposited;

 

   

the pre-release must be fully collateralized with cash or collateral that BNYM considers appropriate; and

 

   

BNYM must be able to close out the pre-release on not more than five business days’ notice.

The pre-release will be subject to whatever indemnities and credit regulations BNYM considers appropriate. In addition, BNYM will limit the number of Gold Fields ADSs that may be outstanding at any time as a result of pre-release.

Governing Law

The Deposit Agreement is governed by the law of the State of New York.

South African Exchange Control Limitations Affecting Security Holders

The discussion below relates to exchange controls in force as of the date of this annual report. These controls are subject to change at any time without notice. It is not possible to predict whether existing exchange controls will be abolished, continued or amended by the South African government in the future. Investors are urged to consult a professional adviser as to the exchange control implications of their particular investments.

Acquisitions of shares or assets of South African companies by non-South African purchasers solely for a cash consideration equal to the fair value of the shares, will generally be permitted by the SARB pursuant to South African exchange control regulations. An acquisition of shares or assets of a South African company by a non-South African purchaser may be refused by the SARB in other circumstances, such as if the consideration for the acquisition is shares in a non-South African company or if the acquisition is financed by a loan from a South African lender. Denial of SARB approval for an acquisition of shares or assets of a South African company may result in the transaction not being able to be completed. Subject to this limitation, there are no restrictions on equity investments in South African companies and a foreign investor may invest freely in the ordinary shares and ADSs of Gold Fields.

There are no exchange control restrictions on the remittance in full of dividends declared out of trading profits to non-residents of the Common Monetary Area (comprising South Africa, the Kingdoms of Lesotho and Swaziland and the Republic of Namibia) by Gold Fields.

Under South African exchange control regulations, the ordinary shares and ADSs of Gold Fields are freely transferable outside South Africa between persons who are not residents of the Common Monetary Area. Additionally, where ordinary shares are sold on the JSE on behalf of shareholders of Gold Fields who are not residents of the Common Monetary Area, the proceeds of such sales will be freely exchangeable into foreign currency and remittable to them. Any share certificates held by non-resident Gold Fields shareholders will be endorsed with the words “non-resident.” The same endorsement, however, will not be applicable to ADSs of Gold Fields held by non-resident shareholders.

 

287


Table of Contents

Taxation

Certain South African Tax Considerations

The discussion in this section sets forth the material South African tax consequences of the purchase, ownership and disposition of Gold Fields’ ordinary shares or ADSs under current South African law. Changes in the law may alter the tax treatment of Gold Fields’ ordinary shares or ADSs, possibly on a retroactive basis.

The following summary is not a comprehensive description of all of the tax considerations that may be relevant to a decision to purchase, own or dispose of Gold Fields’ ordinary shares or ADSs and does not cover tax consequences that depend upon your particular tax circumstances. In particular, the following summary addresses tax consequences for holders of ordinary shares or ADSs who are not residents of, or who do not carry on business in, South Africa and who hold ordinary shares or ADSs as capital assets (that is, for investment purposes). For the purposes of the income tax treaty between South Africa and the United States, and South African tax law, a United States resident that owns Gold Fields ADSs will be treated as the owner of the Gold Fields ordinary shares represented by such ADSs. Gold Fields recommends that you consult your own tax adviser about the consequences of holding Gold Fields’ ordinary shares or ADSs, as applicable, in your particular situation.

Withholding Tax on Dividends

It should be noted that the 15% withholding tax on dividends declared by South African resident companies to non-resident shareholders or non-resident ADS holders was introduced with effect from April 1, 2012. Generally, under the terms of the reciprocal tax treaty entered into between South Africa and the United States, or the Treaty, the withholding tax is limited to 5% of the gross amount of the dividends if the beneficial owner of the shares is a company holding directly at least 10% of the voting stock of the company paying the dividends and to 15% of the gross amount of the dividends in all other cases. South Africa previously imposed a tax on companies distributing dividends, the STC, at a rate of 10%. Although it applied to the dividend paying company, and not the recipient, STC was a recognized form of tax in terms of the double taxation convention between South Africa and the United States, but it did not constitute a withholding tax on dividends. STC was abolished with effect from March 31, 2012.

Income Tax and Capital Gains Tax

Non-resident holders of ordinary shares or ADSs will not be subject to income or capital gains tax in South Africa, with respect to the disposal of those ordinary shares or ADSs, on the basis that the Shares do not relate to any immovable property held in South Africa, unless the non-resident carried on business through a permanent establishment in South Africa, and the profits are realized in the ordinary course of that business.

Securities Transfer Tax

No Securities Transfer Tax, or STT, is payable in South Africa with respect to the issue of a security.

STT is charged at a rate of 0.25% on the taxable amount of the transfer of every security issued by a company or a close corporation incorporated in South Africa, or a company incorporated outside South Africa but listed on an exchange in South Africa, subject to certain exemptions.

The word “transfer” is broadly defined and includes the transfer, sale, assignment or cession or disposal in any other manner of a security. The cancellation or redemption of a security is also regarded as a transfer unless the company is being liquidated. However, the issue of a security that does not result in a change in beneficial ownership is not regarded as a transfer.

 

288


Table of Contents

STT is levied on the taxable amount of a security. The taxable amount of a listed security is the greater of the consideration for the security declared by the transferee or the closing price of that security. The taxable amount of an unlisted security is the greater of the consideration given for the acquisition of the security or the market value of the unlisted security. In the case of a transfer of a listed security, either the member or the participant or the person to whom the security is transferred is liable for the tax. The tax must be paid within a period of 14 days from the transfer. The liability for tax with respect to the transfer of listed securities lies with the party facilitating the transfer or the recipient of the security.

The liability for STT with respect to the transfer of unlisted securities is that of the company that issued the unlisted security. The STT must be paid by the company issuing the unlisted security within two months from the date of the transfer of such security.

U.S. Federal Income Tax Considerations

TO ENSURE COMPLIANCE WITH TREASURY DEPARTMENT CIRCULAR 230, HOLDERS ARE HEREBY NOTIFIED THAT: (A) ANY DISCUSSION OF FEDERAL TAX ISSUES IN THIS DOCUMENT IS NOT INTENDED OR WRITTEN TO BE RELIED UPON, AND CANNOT BE RELIED UPON, BY HOLDERS FOR THE PURPOSE OF AVOIDING PENALTIES THAT MAY BE IMPOSED ON HOLDERS UNDER THE INTERNAL REVENUE CODE; (B) SUCH DISCUSSION IS INCLUDED HEREIN BY GOLD FIELDS IN CONNECTION WITH THE PROMOTION OR MARKETING (WITHIN THE MEANING OF CIRCULAR 230) BY GOLD FIELDS OF THE TRANSACTIONS OR MATTERS ADDRESSED HEREIN; AND (C) HOLDERS SHOULD SEEK ADVICE BASED ON THEIR PARTICULAR CIRCUMSTANCES FROM AN INDEPENDENT TAX ADVISER.

The following discussion summarizes the material U.S. federal income tax consequences of the acquisition, ownership and disposition of ordinary shares and ADSs by a U.S. Holder. As used herein, the term “U.S. Holder” means a beneficial owner of ordinary shares or ADSs that is for U.S. federal income tax purposes:

 

   

a citizen or resident of the United States;

 

   

a corporation created or organized under the laws of the United States or any State within the United States; or

 

   

otherwise subject to U.S. federal income tax on a net income basis in respect of the ordinary shares or ADSs.

The U.S. federal income tax treatment of a partner in an entity treated as a partnership for U.S. federal income tax purposes that holds ordinary shares or ADSs will depend upon the status of the partner and the activities of the partnership. If you are an entity treated as a partnership for U.S. federal income tax purposes, you should consult your tax adviser concerning the U.S. federal income tax consequences to your partners of the acquisition, ownership and disposition of ordinary shares or ADSs by you.

This summary only applies to U.S. Holders that hold ordinary shares or ADSs as capital assets. This summary is based upon:

 

   

the current tax laws of the United States, including the Internal Revenue Code of 1986;

 

   

current U.S. Internal Revenue Service practice and applicable U.S. court decisions; and

 

   

the income tax treaty between the United States and South Africa.

This summary assumes that the obligations of the Depositary under the Deposit Agreement and any related agreements will be performed in accordance with their terms.

 

289


Table of Contents

The following summary is of a general nature and does not address all U.S. federal income tax consequences that may be relevant to you in light of your particular situation. For example, this summary does not apply to:

 

   

investors that own (directly or indirectly) 10% or more of Gold Fields’ voting stock;

 

   

financial institutions;

 

   

insurance companies;

 

   

investors liable for the alternative minimum tax;

 

   

individual retirement accounts and other tax-deferred accounts;

 

   

tax-exempt organizations;

 

   

dealers in securities or currencies;

 

   

investors that hold ordinary shares or ADSs as part of straddles, hedging transactions or conversion transactions for U.S. federal income tax purposes; or

 

   

investors whose functional currency is not the U.S. dollar.

Gold Fields does not believe that it should be treated as, and does not expect to become, a PFIC for U.S. federal income tax purposes but Gold Fields’ possible status as a PFIC must be determined annually and therefore may be subject to change. If Gold Fields were to be treated as a PFIC, U.S. Holders of ordinary shares or ADSs would be required (i) to pay a special U.S. addition to tax on certain distributions and gains on sale and (ii) to pay tax on any gain from the sale of ordinary shares or ADSs at ordinary income (rather than capital gains) rates in addition to paying the special addition to tax on this gain. Additionally, dividends paid by Gold Fields would not be eligible for the special reduced rate of tax described below under “Taxation of Dividends”. You should consult your own tax advisers regarding the potential application of the PFIC regime.

The summary of U.S. federal income tax consequences set out below is for general information only. You are urged to consult your tax advisers as to the particular tax consequences to you of acquiring, owning and disposing of the ordinary shares or ADSs, including the applicability and effect of state, local, foreign and other tax laws and possible changes in tax law.

U.S. Holders of ADSs

For U.S. federal income tax purposes, an owner of ADSs will be treated as the owner of the corresponding number of underlying ordinary shares held by the depositary for the ADSs, and references to ordinary shares in the following discussion refer also to ADSs representing the ordinary shares.

Taxation of Dividends

Distributions paid out of Gold Fields’ current or accumulated earnings and profits (as determined for U.S. federal income tax purposes) will generally be taxable to you as foreign source dividend income, and will not be eligible for the dividends received deduction allowed to corporations. Distributions that exceed Gold Fields’ current and accumulated earnings and profits will be treated as a non-taxable return of capital to the extent of your basis in the ordinary shares and thereafter as capital gain. However, we do not maintain calculations of our earnings and profits in accordance with U.S. federal income tax accounting principles. You should therefore assume that any distribution by us with respect to the shares will constitute ordinary dividend income. You should consult your own tax advisers with respect to the appropriate U.S. federal income tax treatment of any distribution received from us. For purposes of determining limitations on any foreign tax credits, dividends paid by Gold Fields will generally constitute “passive income.”

 

290


Table of Contents

Dividends paid by Gold Fields will be taxable to non-corporate U.S. Holders at the special reduced rate normally applicable to long-term capital gains, provided that either Gold Fields qualifies for the benefits of the income tax treaty between the United States and South Africa, or the ADSs are considered to be “readily tradable” on the NYSE. You will be eligible for this reduced rate only if you are an individual, and have held the ordinary shares for more than 60 days during the 121-day period beginning 60 days before the ex-dividend date.

For U.S. federal income tax purposes, the amount of any dividend paid in Rand will be included in income in a U.S. dollar amount calculated by reference to the exchange rate in effect on the date the dividends are received by you or the depositary (in the case of ADSs). If you or the depositary, as the case may be, convert dividends received in Rand into U.S. dollars on the day they are received, you generally will not be required to recognize foreign currency gain or loss in respect of this dividend income.

Effect of South African Withholding Taxes

As discussed in “Certain South African Tax Considerations—Withholding Tax on Dividends”, under current law, South Africa imposes a withholding tax of 15% on dividends paid by Gold Fields. A U.S. Holder will generally be entitled, subject to certain limitations, to a foreign tax credit against its U.S. federal income tax liability, or a deduction in computing its U.S. federal taxable income, for South African income taxes withheld by Gold Fields.

U.S. Holders that receive payments subject to this withholding tax will be treated, for U.S. federal income tax purposes, as having received the amount of South African taxes withheld by Gold Fields, and as then having paid over the withheld taxes to the South African taxing authorities. As a result of this rule, the amount of dividend income included in gross income for U.S. federal income tax purposes by a U.S. Holder with respect to a payment of dividends may be greater than the amount of cash actually received (or receivable) by the U.S. Holder from Gold Fields with respect to the payment.

For purposes of the foreign tax credit limitation, foreign source income is classified in one of two “baskets”, and the credit for foreign taxes on income in any basket is limited to U.S. federal income tax allocable to that income. Dividends paid by Gold Fields generally will constitute foreign source income in the “passive income” basket. If a U.S. Holder receives a dividend from Gold Fields that qualifies for the reduced rate described above under “Taxation of Dividends”, the amount of the dividend taken into account in calculating the foreign tax credit limitation will in general be limited to the gross amount of the dividend, multiplied by the reduced rate divided by the highest rate of tax normally applicable to dividends. In certain circumstances, a U.S. Holder may be unable to claim foreign tax credits (and may instead be allowed deductions) for foreign taxes imposed on a dividend if the U.S. Holder has not held the Shares for at least 16 days in the 31-day period beginning 15 days before the ex dividend date.

U.S. Holders that are accrual basis taxpayers, and who do not otherwise elect, must translate South African taxes into U.S. dollars at a rate equal to the average exchange rate for the taxable year in which the taxes accrue, while all U.S. Holders must translate taxable dividend income into U.S. dollars at the spot rate on the date received. This difference in exchange rates may reduce the U.S. dollar value of the credits for South African taxes relative to the U.S. Holder’s U.S. federal income tax liability attributable to a dividend. However, cash basis and electing accrual basis U.S. Holders may translate South African taxes into U.S. dollars using the exchange rate in effect on the day the taxes were paid. Any such election by an accrual basis U.S. Holder will apply for the taxable year in which it is made and all subsequent taxable years, unless revoked with the consent of the IRS.

You should consult your tax advisor concerning the foreign tax credit implications of the payment of South African withholding taxes.

 

291


Table of Contents

Taxation of a Sale or Other Disposition

Your tax basis in an ordinary share will generally be its U.S. dollar cost. The U.S. dollar cost of an ordinary share purchased with foreign currency will generally be the U.S. dollar value of the purchase price on the date of purchase or, in the case of ordinary shares traded on an established securities market, as defined in the applicable Treasury Regulations, that are purchased by a cash basis taxpayer (or an accrual basis taxpayer that so elects), on the settlement date for the purchase. Such an election by an accrual basis taxpayer must be applied consistently from year to year and cannot be revoked without the consent of the IRS.

Upon a sale or other disposition of ordinary shares or ADSs, other than an exchange of ADSs for ordinary shares and vice versa, you will generally recognize capital gain or loss for U.S. federal income tax purposes equal to the difference between the amount realized and your adjusted tax basis in the ordinary shares or ADSs. This capital gain or loss will be long-term capital gain or loss if your holding period in the ordinary shares or ADSs exceeds one year. However, regardless of your actual holding period, any loss may be treated as long-term capital loss to the extent you receive a dividend that qualifies for the reduced rate described above under “Taxation of Dividends” and also exceeds 10% of your basis in the ordinary shares. Any gain or loss will generally be U.S. source.

The amount realized on a sale or other disposition of ordinary shares for an amount in foreign currency will be the U.S. dollar value of this amount on the date of sale or disposition. On the settlement date, you will recognize U.S. source foreign currency gain or loss (taxable as ordinary income or loss) equal to the difference (if any) between the U.S. dollar value of the amount received based on the exchange rates in effect on the date of sale or other disposition and the settlement date. However, in the case of ordinary shares traded on an established securities market that are sold by a cash basis taxpayer (or an accrual basis taxpayer that so elects), the amount realized will be based on the exchange rate in effect on the settlement date for the sale, and no exchange gain or loss will be recognized at that time.

Foreign currency received on the sale or other disposition of an ordinary share will have a tax basis equal to its U.S. dollar value on the settlement date. Foreign currency that is purchased will generally have a tax basis equal to the U.S. dollar value of the foreign currency on the date of purchase. Any gain or loss recognized on a sale or other disposition of a foreign currency (including its use to purchase ordinary shares or upon exchange for U.S. dollars) will be U.S. source ordinary income or loss.

Deposits and withdrawals of ordinary shares by U.S. Holders in exchange for ADSs will not result in the realization of gain or loss for U.S. federal income tax purposes. Your tax basis in withdrawn ordinary shares will be the same as your tax basis in the ADSs surrendered, and your holding period for the ordinary shares will include the holding period of the ADSs.

To the extent you incur Securities Transfer Tax in connection with a transfer or withdrawal of ordinary shares as described under “—Certain South African Tax Considerations—Securities Transfer Tax” above, such securities transfer tax will not be a creditable tax for U.S. foreign tax credit purposes.

Backup Withholding and Information Reporting

Payments of dividends and other proceeds with respect to ordinary shares or ADSs by U.S. persons will be reported to you and to the IRS as may be required under applicable regulations. Backup withholding may apply to these payments if you fail to provide an accurate taxpayer identification number or certification of exempt status or fail to report all interest and dividends required to be shown on your U.S. federal income tax returns. Some holders are not subject to backup withholding. You should consult your tax adviser as to your qualification for an exemption from backup withholding and the procedure for obtaining an exemption.

 

292


Table of Contents

Foreign Financial Asset Reporting

Legislation enacted in March 2010, the Hiring Incentives to Restore Employment (HIRE) Act of 2010, imposes new reporting requirements on the holding of certain foreign financial assets, including equity of foreign entities, if the aggregate value of all of these assets exceeds $50,000 at the end of the taxable year or $75,000 at any time during the taxable year. Gold Fields’ ordinary shares and ADSs are expected to constitute foreign financial assets subject to these requirements unless they are held in an account at a financial institution (in which case, the account may be reportable if maintained by a foreign financial institution). You should consult you tax advisor regarding the application of this legislation.

Documents on Display

Gold Fields files annual and special reports and other information with the SEC. You may read and copy any reports or other information on file at the SEC’s public reference room at the following location:

100 F Street, N.E.

Washington, D.C. 20549

Please call the SEC at 1-800-SEC-0330 for further information on the public reference room. The SEC filings are also available to the public from commercial document retrieval services. Gold Fields’ SEC filings may also be obtained electronically via the EDGAR system on the website maintained by the SEC at http://www.sec.gov.

 

293


Table of Contents

ITEM 11: QUANTITATIVE AND QUALITATIVE DISCLOSURES ABOUT MARKET RISK

Gold Fields is exposed to market risks, including foreign currency, commodity price and interest rate risk associated with underlying assets, liabilities and anticipated transactions. Following periodic evaluation of these exposures, Gold Fields may enter into derivative financial instruments to manage some of these exposures. As part of its strategy, however, Gold Fields does not generally hedge against the risk of changes in the price of gold. See “—Commodity Price Sensitivity—Commodity Price Hedging Policy.”

Gold Fields has policies in areas such as counterparty exposure, hedging practices and prudential limits which have been approved by Gold Fields’ Board of Directors. Management of financial risk is centralized at Gold Fields’ treasury department, which acts as the interface between Gold Fields’ operations and counterparty banks. The treasury department manages financial risk in accordance with the policies and procedures established by the Gold Fields Board of Directors and Executive Committee. Gold Fields’ Audit Committee has approved dealing limits for money market, foreign exchange and commodity transactions, which Gold Fields’ treasury department is required to adhere to. Among other restrictions, these limits describe which instruments may be traded and demarcate open position limits for each category as well as indicating counterparty credit- related limits. The dealing exposure and limits are checked and controlled each day and reported to the Chief Financial Officer.

Foreign Currency Sensitivity

General

In the ordinary course of business, Gold Fields enters into transactions, such as gold and concentrate sales, denominated in foreign currencies, primarily U.S. dollars. In addition, Gold Fields has investments and indebtedness in various foreign currencies, primarily U.S. and Australian dollars. Although this exposes Gold Fields to transaction and translation exposure from fluctuations in foreign currency exchange rates, Gold Fields does not generally hedge this exposure, although it may do so in specific circumstances, such as foreign currency commitments, financing projects or acquisitions. Also, Gold Fields on occasion undertakes currency hedging to take advantage of favorable short-term fluctuations in exchange rates when management believes exchange rates are at unsustainably high levels.

Foreign Currency Hedging Experience

Gold Fields uses various derivative instruments to protect its exposure to adverse movements in foreign currency exchange rates.

During fiscal 2012, forward cover was taken out to cover various commitments of the South African operations. All contracts were completed during the year.

Realized gains and losses on financial instruments are disclosed in detail under “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Results of Operations—Realized (loss)/gain on financial instruments.”

Foreign Currency Contract Position

As of December 31, 2012, there were no material foreign currency contract positions.

Foreign Currency Sensitivity Analysis

Gold Fields’ revenues and costs are very sensitive to the Rand/U.S. dollar and Australian dollar/U.S. dollar exchange rates because revenues are generated using a gold price denominated in U.S. dollars, while costs of the South African and Australian operations are incurred principally in Rand and Australian dollars, respectively. Depreciation of the Rand and Australian dollar against the U.S. dollar results in lower operating costs when they

 

294


Table of Contents

are translated into U.S. dollars, thereby increasing the operating margin of the South African and Australian operations. Conversely, appreciation of the Rand and Australian dollar results in higher operating costs when translated into U.S. dollars, thereby decreasing the operating margins at the South African and Australian operations. The impact on profitability of changes in the value of the Rand and Australian dollar against the U.S. dollar can be substantial.

A sensitivity analysis of the mark-to-market valuation has not been performed as there were no material foreign currency contracts as of December 31, 2012.

Commodity Price Sensitivity

General

Gold and copper

The market price of gold and to a lesser extent copper have a significant effect on the results of operations of Gold Fields, the ability of Gold Fields to pay dividends and undertake capital expenditures, and the market price of Gold Fields’ ordinary shares. Gold and copper prices have historically fluctuated widely and are affected by numerous industry factors over which Gold Fields does not have any control. See “Risk Factors—Changes in the market price for gold, and to a lesser extent copper, which in the past have fluctuated widely, affect the profitability of Gold Fields’ operations and the cash flows generated by those operations” and “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Revenues.” The aggregate effect of these factors on the gold and copper prices, all of which are beyond the control of Gold Fields, is impossible for Gold Fields to predict.

Oil

The market price of oil has a significant effect on the results of the offshore operations of Gold Fields. The offshore operations consume large quantities of diesel in the running of their mining fleets. Oil prices have historically fluctuated widely and are affected by numerous factors over which Gold Fields does not have any control.

Commodity Price Hedging Policy

Gold and copper

Generally, Gold Fields does not enter into forward sales, derivatives or other hedging arrangements to establish a price in advance for future gold and copper production. On an exceptional basis, Gold Fields may consider gold and copper hedging arrangements in one or more of the following circumstances:

 

   

to protect cash flows at times of significant capital expenditure;

 

   

for specific debt-servicing requirements; and

 

   

to safeguard the viability of higher cost operations.

See “Information on the Company—Strategy—Hedging.”

To the extent that it enters into commodity hedging arrangements, Gold Fields seeks to use different counterparty banks consisting of local and international banks to spread risk. None of the counterparties is affiliated with, or a related party of, Gold Fields.

Oil

Generally Gold Fields does not enter into derivatives or other hedging arrangements to establish a price in advance for future oil consumption. However, where oil prices are expected to increase in the short- to medium- term, Gold Fields may consider hedging the oil price in order to protect itself against the adverse cost effects of a material increase in the oil price.

 

295


Table of Contents

Commodity Price Hedging Experience

Gold

No gold derivative instruments were entered into during fiscal 2012 and no gold derivative instruments have been entered into since fiscal 2007.

Copper

During June 2009, Gold Fields La Cima sold forward 8,705 tonnes of Cerro Corona’s expected copper production for fiscal 2010 for monthly deliveries. The contract ran from June 24, 2009 to June 23, 2010. The average forward price for the monthly deliveries is U.S.$5,001 per tonne. An additional 8,705 tonnes of Cerro Corona’s expected copper production for fiscal 2010 was hedged by means of a zero cost collar, guaranteeing a minimum price of U.S.$4,600 per tonne with full participation up to a maximum price of U.S.$5,400 per tonne. The contract realized a total loss of $25.9 million.

No further contracts were entered into during fiscal 2012.

Oil

From time to time, various subsidiaries of Gold Fields enter into call options to fix the price of specified quantities of diesel fuel. During fiscal 2009, the following options were entered into and expired unexercised during fiscal 2009 and 2010:

 

   

On July 21, 2008, Gold Fields Australia (Pty) Ltd purchased a one-year Asian Style Singapore 0.5% Gasoil call option in respect of 30 million liters of diesel for the period August 1, 2008 to July 31, 2009 at a strike price of $1.095 per liter. The call option cost $2.85 million paid upfront.

 

   

On August 21, 2008, Gold Fields Ghana purchased a further two-month Asian style ICE Gasoil call option in respect of 10 million liters of diesel for the period July 1, 2009 to August 31, 2009 at a strike price of $0.98 per liter. The call option cost $1.0 million paid upfront.

 

   

On September 18, 2008, Gold Fields Ghana purchased a further six-month Asian style ICE Gasoil call option in respect of 36 million liters of diesel for the period September 1, 2009 to February 28, 2010 at a strike price of $0.90 per liter. The call option cost $3.6 million paid upfront.

 

   

On September 18, 2008, Gold Fields Australia (Pty) Ltd purchased a further six-month Asian Style Singapore 0.5% Gasoil call option in respect of 17.5 million liters of diesel for the period August 1, 2009 to February 28, 2010 at a strike price of $0.91 per liter. The call option cost $1.6 million paid upfront.

On July 5, 2012, St. Ives Gold Mining Company (Pty) Ltd entered into a Gasoil 10ppm free on board Singapore contract for 10,000 barrels per month effective from August 1, 2012 until January 31, 2013 at a fixed price of $118.90 per barrel.

No further contracts were entered into during fiscal 2012.

Commodity Price Contract Position

The following contract was outstanding as of December 31, 2012:

 

   

Australian diesel hedge—20,000 barrels with a mark-to-market value of $0.1 million.

Interest Rate Sensitivity

General

As of December 31, 2012, Gold Fields’ indebtedness amounted to $2,361.2 million. Gold Fields generally does not undertake any specific action to cover its exposure to interest rate risk, although it may do so in specific

 

296


Table of Contents

circumstances. For a discussion of Gold Fields’ credit facilities and other borrowings outstanding as of December 31, 2012, including the interest rates applicable to them, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—Credit Facilities and Other Capital Resources.”

Interest Rate Sensitivity Analysis

$1,372.4 of Gold Fields interest bearing debt outstanding as of December 31, 2012 was exposed to interest rate fluctuations. This debt is normally rolled for periods between one and three months and is therefore exposed to the rate changes in this period.

$880.0 million of the total debt was exposed to changes in LIBOR while $492.4 million was exposed to the Prime Rate and JIBAR. The following table indicates the change to finance expense had LIBOR and the Prime Rate differed as indicated.

 

     Change in finance expense for a nominal change in
interest rate, change as of
December 31, 2012
 
     ($ million, except for percentages)  

Sensitivity to interest rates

     (1.5 )%      (1.0 )%      (0.5 )%      0.5     1.0     1.5

Sensitivity to LIBOR interest rate

     (13.9     (9.3     (4.6     4.6        9.3        13.9   

Sensitivity to Prime and JIBAR

     (2.6     (1.7     (0.9     0.9        1.7        2.6   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Change in finance expense

     (16.5     (11.0     (5.5     5.5        11.0        16.5   

 

297


Table of Contents

ITEM 12: DESCRIPTION OF SECURITIES OTHER THAN EQUITY SECURITIES

Not applicable.

 

298


Table of Contents

PART II

ITEM 13: DEFAULTS, DIVIDEND ARREARAGES AND DELINQUENCIES

Not applicable.

 

299


Table of Contents

ITEM 14: MATERIAL MODIFICATIONS TO THE RIGHTS OF SECURITY HOLDERS

AND USE OF PROCEEDS

Not applicable.

 

300


Table of Contents

ITEM 15: CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES

 

(a) Disclosure Controls and Procedures:

Gold Fields has carried out an evaluation, under the supervision and with the participation of management, including the Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer of Gold Fields, of the effectiveness of the design and operation of Gold Fields’ disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rule 13a-15(e)) as of the end of the period covered by this annual report. Based upon that evaluation, Gold Fields’ Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer concluded that, as of December 31, 2012, Gold Fields’ disclosure controls and procedures were effective.

 

(b) Management’s Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting:

Gold Fields’ management is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over financial reporting. The Securities Exchange Act of 1934 defines internal control over financial reporting in Rule 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f) as a process designed by, or under the supervision of, the company’s principal executive and principal financial officers and effected by the company’s board of directors, management and other personnel, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles and includes those policies and procedures that:

 

   

pertain to the maintenance of records that in reasonable detail accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company;

 

   

provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and

 

   

provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use or disposition of the company’s assets that could have a material effect on the consolidated financial statements.

Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.

Gold Fields’ management assessed the effectiveness of its internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2012. In making this assessment, Gold Fields’ management used the criteria set forth by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission, or COSO, in Internal Control- Integrated Framework. Based upon its assessment, Gold Fields’ management concluded that, as of December 31, 2012, its internal control over financial reporting is effective based upon those criteria.

KPMG Inc., or KPMG, an independent registered public accounting firm that audited the consolidated financial statements included in this annual report on Form 20-F, has issued an attestation report on the effectiveness of Gold Fields’ internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2012.

 

(c) Attestation Report of the Registered Public Accounting Firm:

See report of KPMG Inc., an Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm, on page F-1.

 

(d) Changes in Internal Control Over Financial Reporting:

There has been no change in Gold Fields’ internal control over financial reporting that occurred during fiscal 2012 that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, Gold Fields’ internal control over financial reporting.

 

301


Table of Contents

ITEM 16A: AUDIT COMMITTEE FINANCIAL EXPERT

The Board of Directors has determined that Gold Fields’ Audit Committee does not have an “audit committee financial expert,” as defined in the rules promulgated by the Securities and Exchange Commission. Although a person with such qualifications does not serve on the Audit Committee, the Board of Directors believes that the members of the Audit Committee collectively possess the knowledge and experience to oversee and assess the performance of Gold Fields’ management and auditors, the quality of Gold Fields’ disclosure controls, the preparation and evaluation of Gold Fields’ financial statements and Gold Fields’ financial reporting. Gold Fields’ Board of Directors also believes that the members of the Audit Committee collectively possess the understanding of audit committee functions necessary to diligently execute their responsibilities. For biographical information on each member of the Audit Committee, see “Directors, Senior Management and Employees—Non-executive Directors”.

 

302


Table of Contents

ITEM 16B: CODE OF ETHICS

Gold Fields has adopted a Company Code of Ethics, or the Code, which applies to all directors and employees, the text of which can be accessed on Gold Fields’ website at www.goldfields.co.za.

 

303


Table of Contents

ITEM 16C: PRINCIPAL ACCOUNTANT FEES AND SERVICES

As of the six month period ended December 31, 2010 KPMG has served as Gold Fields’ principal accountant. Set forth below are the fees for audit and other services rendered by KPMG for the six month period ended December 31, 2010, fiscal 2011 and fiscal 2012.

 

     Six Month
Period ended
December 31,
2010
     Year ended
December 31,
2011
     Year ended
December 31,
2012
 
     (U.S.$ million)   

Audit fees

     2.9         3.8         3.8   

Audit related fees

     —           0.3         1.2   

Tax fees

     0.1         —           —     

All other fees

     0.2         —           0.1   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     3.2         4.1         5.1   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Audit fees include fees billed for audit services rendered for Gold Fields’ annual consolidated financial statements filed with regulatory organizations.

Audit related fees include fees billed for related services by the principal accountant that are reasonably related to the performance of the audit or review of the registrant’s financial statements.

Tax fees include fees billed for tax compliance, tax advice, tax planning and other tax-related services.

All other fees consist of fees for all other services not included in any of the other categories noted above.

All of the above fees were pre-approved by the Audit Committee.

Audit Committee’s Policies and Procedures

In accordance with the Securities and Exchange Commission rules regarding auditor independence, the Audit Committee has established Policies and Procedures for Audit and Non-Audit Services Provided by an Independent Auditor. The rules apply to Gold Fields and its consolidated subsidiaries engaging any accounting firms for audit services and the auditor who audits the accounts filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission, or the external auditor, for permissible non-audit services.

When engaging the external auditor for permissible non-audit services (audit-related services, tax services, and all other services), pre-approval is obtained prior to the commencement of the services.

 

304


Table of Contents

ITEM 16D: EXEMPTIONS FROM THE LISTING STANDARDS FOR AUDIT COMMITTEES

Not applicable.

 

305


Table of Contents

ITEM 16E: PURCHASES OF EQUITY SECURITIES BY THE ISSUER AND AFFILIATED

PURCHASERS

None.

 

306


Table of Contents

ITEM 16F: CHANGE IN REGISTRANT’S CERTIFYING ACCOUNTANT

Not applicable

 

307


Table of Contents

ITEM 16G: CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

Gold Fields’ home country corporate governance practices are regulated by the Listing Requirements of the JSE, or the JSE Listing Requirements. The following is a summary of the significant ways in which Gold Fields’ home country corporate governance standards and its corporate governance practices differ from those followed by domestic companies under the NYSE Listing Standards.

 

   

The NYSE Listing Standards require that the non-management directors of U.S. listed companies meet at regularly scheduled executive sessions without management. The JSE Listing Requirements do not require such meetings of listed company non-executive directors. Gold Fields’ non-management directors do meet regularly without management.

 

   

The NYSE Listing Standards require U.S. listed companies to have a nominating/corporate governance committee composed entirely of independent directors. The JSE Listing Requirements also require the appointment of such a committee, and stipulate that all members of this committee must be non-executive directors, the majority of whom must be independent. Gold Fields has a Nominating and Governance Committee which is currently comprised of four non-executive directors, all of whom are independent under the NYSE Listing Standards and which is chaired by the Chairman of Gold Fields, as required by the JSE Listing Requirements.

 

   

The NYSE Listing Standards require U.S. listed companies to have a compensation committee composed entirely of independent directors. The JSE Listing Requirements merely require the appointment of such a committee. Gold Fields has appointed a Remuneration Committee, currently comprised of four board members, all of whom are independent under both the JSE Listing Requirements and the NYSE Listing Standards.

 

   

The NYSE Listings Standards require U.S. listed companies to have an audit committee composed entirely of independent directors. The JSE Listings Requirements also require an audit committee composed entirely of independent directors. Gold Fields has appointed an Audit Committee, currently comprised of four board members, all of whom are non-executive and independent, as defined under both the JSE Listings Requirements and the NYSE Listing Requirements.

 

308


Table of Contents

ITEM 16H: MINE SAFETY DISCLOSURE

Not applicable.

 

309


Table of Contents

PART III ITEM 17: FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Gold Fields has responded to Item 18 in lieu of responding to this item.

 

310


Table of Contents

ITEM 18: FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

The following financial statements of Gold Fields Limited are filed as part of this annual report.

 

311


Table of Contents

INDEX TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

Gold Fields Limited

  

Report of the Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm (KPMG)

     F-1   

Report of the Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm (PwC)

     F-3   
Consolidated Statements of Operations for fiscal 2012, fiscal 2011, the six month period ended December 31, 2010 and fiscal 2010      F-4   
Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income for fiscal 2012 and 2011, the six month period ended December 31, 2010 and fiscal 2010      F-5   
Consolidated Balance Sheets as of December 31, 2012 and 2011      F-6   
Consolidated Statements of Changes in Shareholders’ Equity for fiscal 2012 and 2011, the six month period ended December 31, 2010 and fiscal 2010      F-7   
Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows for fiscal 2012 and 2011, the six month period ended December 31, 2010 and fiscal 2010      F-9   

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

     F-10   

Schedules to Gold Fields Limited’s Financial Statements

  

Schedule 1—Valuation and Qualifying Accounts

     S-1   

 

312


Table of Contents

ITEM 19: EXHIBITS

The following instruments and documents are included as Exhibits to this annual report.

 

No.

  

Exhibit

1.1    Memorandum of Association of Gold Fields (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 1.1 to the registration statement on Form 20-F (File No. 1-31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on May 6, 2002)
1.2    Articles of Association of Gold Fields (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 1.2 to the registration statement on Form 20-F (File No. 1-31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on May 6, 2002)
1.3    Amended Articles of Association of Gold Fields (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 1.3 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1 -31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on December 7, 2007)
2.1    Memorandum of Incorporation of Gold Fields (included in Exhibits 1.1 and 1.2)
2.2    Deposit Agreement among Gold Fields, Gold Fields Limited (f/k/a/Driefontein Consolidated Limited), The Bank of New York, as depositary, and the owners and beneficial owners from time to time of American Depositary Receipts, dated as of February 2, 1998, as amended and restated as of May 21, 2002 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 2.3 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1-31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on October 24, 2002)
2.3    Form of American Depositary Receipt (included in Exhibit 2.2)
2.4    Amended Memorandum of Incorporation of Gold Fields (included in Exhibit 1.3)
2.5    Trust Deed among Orogen, as issuer; Gold Fields Limited, GFIMSA, GFO, and GF Holdings, as guarantors; and Citicorp Trustee Company Limited, as trustee, dated October 7, 2010 in relation to the U.S.$1 billion Note Issue (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 2.8 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1 -31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on December 2, 2010)
2.6    Amended Memorandum of Incorporation of Gold Fields, adopted by Special Resolution on May 14, 2012
4.1    The GF Management Incentive Scheme, adopted November 10, 1999 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.2 to the registration statement on Form 20-F (File No. 1 -31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on May 6, 2002)
4.2    Deed of Amendment to the GF Management Incentive Scheme between Gold Fields Limited and Tokyo Mosima Gabriel Sexwale and Gordon Rae Parker, both in their capacity as trustees for The GF Management Incentive Trust, adopted May 4, 2001 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.4 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1 -31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on November 26, 2004)
4.3    Deed of Amendment to the GF Management Incentive Scheme between Gold Fields Limited and Tokyo Mosima Gabriel Sexwale and Gordon Rae Parker, both in their capacity as trustees for The GF Management Incentive Trust, adopted October 31, 2001 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.5 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1 -31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on November 26, 2004)
4.4    The Gold Fields Limited 2005 Non-Executive Share Plan, adopted November 17, 2005 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.24 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1-31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on December 22, 2005)

 

313


Table of Contents

No.

  

Exhibit

 4.5    The Gold Fields Limited 2005 Share Plan, adopted November 17, 2005 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.25 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1 -31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on December 22, 2005)
 4.6    The Gold Fields Limited 2012 Share Plan, dated May 14, 2012
 4.7    U.S.$750,000,000 Facility Agreement between GFIMSA, Orogen, Western Areas Limited, ABN AMRO Bank N.V., Barclays Capital and Barclays Bank plc, dated May 16, 2007 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.37 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1 -31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on December 7, 2007)
 4.8    Agency Agreement in respect of the Domestic Medium Term Note Program, between Gold Fields Limited and Absa Capital, dated April 6, 2009, including Annexures (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.19 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1 -31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on December 3, 2009)
 4.9    Gold Fields Limited Program Memorandum in respect of the Domestic Medium Term Note Program, dated April 6, 2009 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.20 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1 -31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on December 3, 2009)
 4.10    Gold Fields Limited Operating and Procedures Memorandum in respect of the Domestic Medium Term Note Program, dated April 6, 2009 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.21 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1 -31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on December 3, 2009)
 4.11    Program Agreement in respect of the Gold Fields Limited Domestic Medium Term Note Program, between Gold Fields Limited, Absa Capital and Nedbank Capital, dated April 6, 2009 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.22 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1 -31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on December 3, 2009)
 4.12    Agreement between Nicholas J. Holland and Gold Fields Group Services (Pty) Ltd, dated March 6, 2009 and effective March 1, 2009 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.29 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1 -31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on December 3, 2009)
 4.13    Agreement between Nicholas J. Holland and Gold Fields Ghana Holdings (BVI) Limited, dated March 9, 2009 and effective March 1, 2009 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.30 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1 -31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on December 3, 2009)
 4.14    Agreement between Nicholas J. Holland and Gold Fields Orogen Holding Company (BVI), dated March 6, 2009 and effective March 1, 2009 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.31 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1 -31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on December 3, 2009)
 4.15    Agreement between Nicholas J. Holland and Gold Fields Group Services (Pty) Ltd, dated April 9, 2010 and effective April 1, 2010 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.29 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1 -31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on December 2, 2010)
 4.16    Agreement between Nicholas J. Holland and Gold Fields Ghana Holdings (BVI) Limited, dated April 9, 2010 and effective April 1, 2010 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.30 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1 -31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on December 2, 2010)

 

314


Table of Contents

No.

  

Exhibit

 4.17    Agreement between Nicholas J. Holland and Gold Fields Orogen Holding Company (BVI), dated April 9, 2010 and effective April 1, 2010 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.31 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1 -31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on December 2, 2010)
 4.18    R1,000 million Standard Bank Revolving Credit Facility between Standard Bank of South Africa Limited, GFIMSA, GFO and the Original Guarantors (listed in Schedule 1), dated December 9, 2009 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.33 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1 -31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on December 2, 2010)
 4.19    R500 million RMB Revolving Credit Facility between FirstRand Bank Limited, GFIMSA, GFO and the Guarantors (listed in Schedule 1), dated March 8, 2010 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.34 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1 -31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on December 2, 2010)
 4.20    U.S.$200 million Non-revolving Senior Secured Term Loan between The Bank of Nova Scotia and Banco de Crédito del Perú, as mandated lead arrangers; Banco de Crédito del Perú, as administrative agent; Scotiabank Perú S.A.A., as onshore collateral agent; The Bank of Nova Scotia Trust Company of New York, as offshore collateral agent; and La Cima, dated September 17, 2010 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.33 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1 -31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on December 2, 2010).
 4.21    U.S.$1,000,000,000 Syndicated Revolving Facility Agreement between Barclays Bank Plc, GFIMSA, GFO and Gold Fields Limited, dated June 20, 2011 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.25 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1 -31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on April 23, 2012).
 4.22    Rand 2,000,000,000 Revolving Facility Agreement between Nedbank Limited, GFIMSA and the Original Guarantors (listed in Schedule 1), dated December 19, 2011 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.26 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1 -31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on April 23, 2012).
 4.23    U.S.$500 million Credit Facility Agreement between The Bank of Tokyo Mitsubishi UFJ, Limited, GFIMSA, GFO, Gold Fields Orogen Holdings (BVI) Limited and the Original Guarantors (listed in Schedule 1), dated April 17, 2012.
 4.24    Bridge Facility Agreement between Barclays Bank Plc, GFI Joint Venture Holdings (Pty) Limited, GFO, Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) and the Original Guarantors (listed in Schedule 1), dated November 28, 2012.
 4.25    Credit Facilities Agreement between Barclays Bank Plc, GFI Joint Venture Holdings (Proprietary) Limited, GFO, Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) and the Original Guarantors (listed in Schedule 1), dated November 28, 2012, as amended and restated as of January 30, 2013 pursuant to a Syndication and Amendment Agreement.
 4.26    Indemnity Agreement among Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited, Gold Fields, GFO, Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited and Sibanye Gold, in respect of Sibanye Gold’s obligations under the Notes, dated December 20, 2012
 4.27    Transitional Services Agreement among Sibanye Gold, Gold Fields, Gold Fields Shared Services (Pty) Limited and Gold Fields Group Services (Pty) Limited, dated December 21, 2012.
 4.28    Revolving Credit Facility Agreement among Nedbank Limited, GFI Joint Venture Holdings (Proprietary) Limited, GFO and the Original Guarantors (listed in Schedule 1), dated March 1, 2013.

 

315


Table of Contents

No.

  

Exhibit

 4.29    Agreement between Paul A. Schmidt and Gold Fields Group Services (Pty) Ltd, dated November 24, 2009 and effective November 6, 2009 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.33 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1 -31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on December 3, 2009)
 4.30    Agreement between Paul A. Schmidt and Gold Fields Ghana Holdings (BVI) Limited, dated November 24, 2009 and effective November 6, 2009 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.34 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1 -31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on December 3, 2009)
 4.31    Agreement between Paul A. Schmidt and Gold Fields Orogen Holding Company (BVI), dated November 24, 2009 and effective November 6, 2009 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.35 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1 -31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on December 3, 2009)
 4.32    First Addendum to the Employment Contract made and entered into between Gold Fields Group Services (Pty) Ltd and Paul A. Schmidt, dated April 1, 2010 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.40 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1 -31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on December 2, 2010)
 4.33    First Addendum to the Employment Contract made and entered into between Gold Fields Ghana Holdings (BVI) Limited and Paul A. Schmidt, dated April 1, 2010 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.41 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1 -31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on December 2, 2010)
 4.34    First Addendum to the Employment Contract made and entered into between Gold Fields Orogen Holding Company (BVI) and Paul A. Schmidt, dated April 1, 2010 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.42 to the annual report on Form 20-F (File No. 1 -31318), filed by Gold Fields with the Securities and Exchange Commission on December 2, 2010)
  8.1    Amended list of subsidiaries of the registrant
12.1    Certification of Chief Executive Officer
12.2    Certification of Chief Financial Officer
13.1    Certification of Chief Executive Officer
13.2    Certification of Chief Financial Officer
101.INS    XBRL Instance Document
101.SCH   

XBRL Taxonomy Extension Schema Document

101.CAL   

XBRL Taxonomy Extension Calculation Linkbase Document

101.LAB   

XBRL Taxonomy Extension Label Linkbase Document

101.PRE   

XBRL Taxonomy Extension Presentation Linkbase Document

101.DEF   

XBRL Taxonomy Extension Definition Linkbase Document

 

316


Table of Contents

SIGNATURES

The registrant hereby certifies that it meets all of the requirements for filing on Form 20-F and that it has duly caused and authorized the undersigned to sign this annual report on its behalf.

GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

 

/s/ Nicholas J. Holland

Name: Nicholas J. Holland

Title: Chief Executive Officer

Date: May 14, 2013

 

317


Table of Contents

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

Board of Directors and Stockholders

Gold Fields Limited

We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of Gold Fields Limited (“the Company”) and subsidiaries as of December 31, 2012 and 2011, and the related consolidated statements of operations, comprehensive income, changes in shareholders’ equity, and cash flows for the years then ended and the six-month period ended December 31, 2010. In connection with our audits of the consolidated financial statements, we also have audited the financial statement schedule, “Schedule I - Valuation and Qualifying Accounts”. We also have audited Gold Fields Limited’s internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2012, based on criteria established in Internal Control - Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO). The Company’s management is responsible for these consolidated financial statements and financial statement schedule, for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting, and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, included in “Management’s Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting” appearing in Item 15 on Form 20-F. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these consolidated financial statements and financial statement schedule, and an opinion on the Company’s internal control over financial reporting based on our audits.

We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audits to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement and whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audits of the consolidated financial statements included examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, and evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. Our audit of internal control over financial reporting included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, and testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control based on the assessed risk. Our audits also included performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinions.

A company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company’s internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (2) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the company’s assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.

Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.

In our opinion, the consolidated financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Gold Fields Limited and subsidiaries as of December 31, 2012 and 2011, and the results of their operations and their cash flows for the years then ended and the six-month period ended December 31, 2010, in conformity with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles. Also, in our opinion, the accompanying financial statement schedule for the years ended December 31, 2012 and 2011 and the six month period ended

 

F-1


Table of Contents

December 31, 2010, when considered in relation to the basic consolidated financial statements taken as a whole, presents fairly, in all material respects, the information set forth therein. Also in our opinion, Gold Fields Limited maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2012, based on criteria established in Internal Control—Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission.

KPMG Inc.

Johannesburg, South Africa

May 14, 2013

 

F-2


Table of Contents

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

To the Board of Directors and Shareholders of Gold Fields Limited

In our opinion, the statements of operations, changes in shareholders’ equity, comprehensive income and cash flows for the year ended June 30, 2010 present fairly, in all material respects, the results of operations and cash flows of Gold Fields Limited and its subsidiaries for the year ended June 30, 2010, in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America. In addition, in our opinion, the financial statement schedule for the year ended June 30, 2010 presents fairly, in all material respects, the information set forth therein when read in conjunction with the related consolidated financial statements. These financial statements and financial statement schedule are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements and financial statement schedule based on our audit. We conducted our audit of these statements in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, and evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis for our opinion.

PricewaterhouseCoopers Inc.

Johannesburg, Republic of South Africa

December 2, 2010

 

F-3


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Consolidated Statements of Operations

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

     Fiscal Year Ended December 31,     Six Months Ended
December 31,
    Fiscal Year
Ended June 30,
 
             2012                     2011                     2010                     2010          

REVENUES

        

Product sales

     5,551.8        5,800.1        2,564.2        4,164.3   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

COSTS AND EXPENSES

        

Production costs (exclusive of depreciation and amortization)

     3,190.4        2,989.0        1,450.3        2,573.6   

Depreciation and amortization

     729.9        745.3        389.4        631.1   

Corporate expenditure

     46.6        37.6        24.5        54.5   

Employee termination costs

     13.8        32.8        35.3        10.3   

Exploration expenditure

     135.3        125.4        53.2        86.6   

Feasibility and evaluation costs

     103.5        95.2        9.3        —     

(Profit)/loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment

     (0.5     0.4        (0.7     (0.3

Impairment of assets

     41.6        9.5        —          —     

Increase/(decrease) in provision for post-retirement health care costs

     0.3        0.1        (0.1     (9.4

Accretion expense on provision for environmental rehabilitation

     28.2        24.9        10.9        19.3   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
     4,289.1        4,060.2        1,972.1        3,365.7   

OTHER (EXPENSES)/INCOME

        

Interest and dividends

     29.2        25.4        12.9        40.2   

Finance expense

     (70.1     (54.3     (31.7     (65.2

(Loss)/gain on financial instruments

     (0.4     4.4        1.0        27.7   

(Loss)/gain on foreign exchange

     (13.8     9.1        (1.4     (8.5

Profit/(loss) on disposal of listed investments

     27.6        12.8        (0.4     111.7   

Impairment of listed investments

     (10.5     (0.5     —          (8.1

South African Equity Empowerment Transactions

     —          —          (297.6     —     

Royalties

     (151.2     (149.7     (43.3     —     

Other expenses

     (77.4     (79.3     (36.8     (45.0
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
     (266.6     (232.1     (397.3     52.8   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

INCOME BEFORE TAX, IMPAIRMENT OF INVESTMENT IN EQUITY INVESTEE AND SHARE OF EQUITY INVESTEES’ (LOSSES)/PROFITS

     996.1        1 507.8        194.8        851.4   

Income and mining tax expense

     (291.9     (552.0     (133.8     (358.4
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

INCOME BEFORE IMPAIRMENT OF INVESTMENT IN EQUITY INVESTEE AND SHARE OF EQUITY INVESTEES’ (LOSSES)/PROFITS

     704.2        955.8        61.0        493.0   

Impairment of investment in equity investee

     —          (6.8     —          —     

Share of equity investees’ (losses)/profits

     (51.7     4.0        4.9        (22.7
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net income

     652.5        953.0        65.9        470.3   

Net loss/(income) attributable to noncontrolling interests

     1.8        (71.5     (53.3     (79.3
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net income attributable to Gold Fields shareholders

     654.3        881.5        12.6        391.0   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

BASIC EARNINGS PER SHARE ($)

     0.90        1.22        0.02        0.55   

DILUTED EARNINGS PER SHARE ($)

     0.90        1.21        0.02        0.55   

WEIGHTED AVERAGE NUMBER OF SHARES USED IN THE

        

- COMPUTATION OF BASIC EARNINGS PER SHARE

     727,459,457        722,376,228        711,011,673        705,364,200   

- COMPUTATION OF DILUTED EARNINGS PER SHARE

     730,723,950        730,787,498        719,689,050        714,549,842   

DIVIDEND PER SHARE ($)

     0.50        0.24        0.10        0.17   

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements

 

F-4


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

    Fiscal Year Ended December 31,     Six Months Ended
December 31,
         Fiscal Year Ended
June, 30
 
          2012                 2011                 2010                      2010        

Net income

    652.5        953.0        65.9           470.3   

Other comprehensive (loss)/income

    (190.6     (1,008.9     658.9           259.6   

Share of equity investee’s other comprehensive income

    —          —          —            0.8   

Mark-to-market adjustment of listed investments

    18.7        (26.4     28.8           24.9   

Realized (gain)/loss on disposal of listed investments

    (14.7     (12.8     0.4           (111.7

Impairment of listed investments

    10.5        0.5        —             8.1   

Foreign currency translation adjustment

    (205.1     (970.2     629.7           337.5   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

      

 

 

 

Comprehensive income/(loss)

    461.9        (55.9     724.8           729.9   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

      

 

 

 

Comprehensive income/(loss) attributable to:

          

Gold Fields shareholders

    424.6        (104.2     671.5           633.4   

Noncontrolling interests

    37.3        48.3        53.3           96.5   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

      

 

 

 
    461.9        (55.9     724.8           729.9   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

      

 

 

 

 

 

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements

 

F-5


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Consolidated Balance Sheets

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

     December 31,
2012
    December 31,
2011
 

ASSETS

    

CURRENT ASSETS

    

Cash and cash equivalents

     655.6        744.0   

Receivables

     522.7        483.4   

Inventories

     402.1        297.7   

Materials contained on heap leach pads

     65.0        187.9   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total current assets

     1,645.4        1,713.0   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Property, plant and equipment, net

     7,388.9        7,016.8   

Goodwill

     1,020.1        1,075.4   

Deferred income and mining taxes

     24.1        —     

Materials contained on heap leach pads

     111.8        —     

Non-current investments

     458.0        272.2   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

TOTAL ASSETS

     10,648.3        10,077.4   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

LIABILITIES AND SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY

    

Accounts payable and provisions

     751.9        669.9   

Interest payable

     11.0        11.2   

Royalties, income and mining taxes payable

     192.1        264.4   

Short-term loans and current portion of long-term loans

     40.0        547.0   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total current liabilities

     995.0        1,492.5   

Long-term loans

     2,321.2        1,360.7   

Deferred income and mining taxes

     901.8        1,019.4   

Provision for environmental rehabilitation

     373.6        336.9   

Other non-current liabilities

     13.9        13.5   

Provision for post-retirement health care costs

     2.1        2.1   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total liabilities

     4,607.6        4,225.1   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES - see notes 19 and 20

    

SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY

    

Share capital December 31, 2012 - 1,000,000,000 (December 31, 2011 - 1,000,000,000) authorized ordinary shares of 50 South African cents each. Shares issued December 31, 2012: 729,536,813 (December 31, 2011: 723,735,186)

     61.0        59.0   

Additional paid-in capital

     5,452.3        5,374.6   

Retained earnings

     1,054.3        772.5   

Accumulated other comprehensive loss

     (653.0     (423.3
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gold Fields shareholders’ equity

     5,914.6        5,782.8   

Noncontrolling interests

     126.1        69.5   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total equity

     6,040.7        5,852.3   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

TOTAL LIABILITIES AND SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY

     10,648.3        10,077.4   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements

 

F-6


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Consolidated Statements of Changes in Shareholders’ Equity

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

    Number of
ordinary
shares issued
    Share
capital
    Additional
paid-in
capital
    Retained
earnings
    Accumulated
other
comprehensive
(loss)/income
    Noncontrolling
interests
    Total  

BALANCE - JUNE 30, 2009

    704,749,849        57.7        4,944.2        561.5        (338.9     279.5        5,504.0   

Net income

    —          —          —          391.0        —          79.3        470.3   

Dividends declared

    —          —          —          (118.1     —          (23.1     (141.2

Share-based compensation

    —          —          53.9        —          —          —          53.9   

Exercise of employee share options

    1,153,662        0.1        7.3        —          —          —          7.4   

Other comprehensive income*

    —          —          —          —          242.4        17.2        259.6   

Transactions with noncontrolling interests

    —          —          —          —          —          (15.4     (15.4
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

BALANCE - JUNE 30, 2010

    705,903,511        57.8        5,005.4        834.4        (96.5     337.5        6,138.6   

Net income

    —           —          —          12.6        —          53.3        65.9   

Dividends declared

    —           —          —          (67.4     —          (28.9     (96.3

Share-based compensation

    —          —          303.4        —          —          —          303.4   

Exercise of employee share options

    751,630        —          4.4        —          —          —          4.4   

Shares issued under the South African Equity Empowerment Transactions

    14,141,746        1.0        —          —          —          —          1.0   

Other comprehensive income*

    —          —          —          —          658.9        —          658.9   

Receipt of funds from noncontrolling interests

    —          —          —          —          —          6.4        6.4   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

BALANCE - DECEMBER 31, 2010

    720,796,887        58.8        5,313.2        779.6        562.4        368.3        7,082.3   

Net income

    —          —          —          881.5        —          71.5        953.0   

Dividends declared

    —          —          —          (174.9     —          (36.2     (211.1

Share-based compensation

    —          —          66.4        —          —          —          66.4   

Exercise of employee share options

    3,794,629        0.3        6.2        —          —          —          6.5   

Treasury shares

    (856,330     (0.1     ( 11.2     —          —          —          (11.3

Purchase of noncontrolling interests

    —          —          —          (713.7     —          (341.9     (1,055.6

Other comprehensive income*

    —          —          —          —          (985.7     (23.2     (1,008.9

Receipt of funds from noncontrolling interests

    —          —          —          —          —          31.0        31.0   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

BALANCE - DECEMBER 31, 2011

    723,735,186        59.0        5,374.6        772.5        (423.3     69.5        5,852.3   

Net income

    —          —          —          654.3        —          (1.8     652.5   

Dividends declared

    —          —          —          (364.2     —          (8.5     (372.7

Share-based compensation

    —          —          77.7        —          —          —          77.7   

Exercise of employee share options

    5,801,627        2.0        —          —          —          —          2.0   

Purchase of noncontrolling interests

    —          —          —          (8.3     —          0.1        (8.2

Other comprehensive income*

    —          —          —          —          (229.7     39.1        (190.6

Receipt of funds from noncontrolling interests

    —          —          —          —          —          27.7        27.7   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

BALANCE - DECEMBER 31, 2012

    729,536,813        61.0        5,452.3        1,054.3        (653.0     126.1        6,040.7   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

* Noncontrolling interests’ share of other comprehensive income/(loss) relates to foreign exchange translation

 

 

 

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements

 

F-7


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Consolidated Statements of Changes in Shareholders’ Equity (continued)

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

The following is a reconciliation of the components of accumulated other comprehensive (loss)/ income for the periods presented:

 

     Share of equity
investee’s other
comprehensive
income
    Mark-to-market of
listed investments
    Foreign exchange
translation
    Accumulated other
comprehensive
(loss)/income
 

BALANCE - JUNE 30, 2009

     (15.2     66.6        (390.3     (338.9

Share of equity investee’s other comprehensive income movements

     0.8        —          —          0.8   

Mark-to-market of listed investments

     —          24.9        —          24.9   

Realized gain on disposal of listed investments

     —          (111.7     —          (111.7

Impairment of listed investments

     —          8.1        —          8.1   

Foreign exchange translation

     —          —          320.3        320.3   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

BALANCE - JUNE 30, 2010

     (14.4     (12.1     (70.0     (96.5

Mark-to-market of listed investments

     —          28.8        —          28.8   

Realized loss on disposal of listed investments

     —          0.4        —          0.4   

Foreign exchange translation

     —          —          629.7        629.7   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

BALANCE - DECEMBER 31, 2010

     (14.4     17.1        559.7        562.4   

Mark-to-market of listed investments

     —          (26.4     —          (26.4

Realized gain on disposal of listed investments

     —          (12.8     —          (12.8

Impairment of listed investments

     —          0.5        —          0.5   

Foreign exchange translation

     —          —          (946.9     (946.9
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

BALANCE - DECEMBER 31, 2011

     (14.4     (21.6     (387.2     (423.2

Mark-to-market of listed investments

     —          18.7        —          18.7   

Realized gain on disposal of listed investments

     —          (14.7     —          (14.7

Impairment of listed investments

     —          10.5        —          10.5   

Foreign exchange translation

     —          —          (244.3     (244.3
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

BALANCE - DECEMBER 31, 2012

     (14.4     (7.1     (631.5     (653.0
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements

 

F-8


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

    Fiscal Year Ended
December 31,
    Six Months
Ended
December 31,
    Fiscal Year Ended
June, 30
 
    2012     2011     2010     2010  

CASH FLOWS FROM OPERATIONS

       

Net income

    652.5        953.0        65.9        470.3   

Reconciled to net cash provided by operations:

       

- Share of equity investees’ (profits)/losses

    51.7        (4.0     (4.9     22.7   

- Impairment of investment in equity investee

    —          6.8        —          —     

- Income and mining tax expense

    291.9        552.0        133.8        358.4   

- Royalties

    151.2        149.7        43.3        —     

- (Profit)/loss on disposal of listed investments

    (27.6     (12.8     0.4        (111.7

- Impairment of listed investments

    10.5        0.5        —          8.1   

- Impairment of assets

    41.6        9.5        —          —     

- Depreciation and amortization

    729.9        745.3        389.4        631.1   

- Loss/(profit) on disposal of property, plant and equipment

    (0.5     0.4        (0.7     (0.3

- Share-based compensation

    77.7        66.4        27.0        53.9   

- Accretion expense on provision for environmental rehabilitation

    28.2        24.9        10.9        19.3   

- Increase/(decrease) in provision for post-retirement health care costs

    0.3        0.1        (0.1     (9.4

- Finance expense capitalized

    (13.0     (9.3     (4.7     (6.5

- South African Equity Empowerment Transactions

    —          —          297.6        —     

- Other

    (20.1     (16.5     6.2        (54.1

- Cash portion of share of equity investee loss

    (50.1     —          —          —     

- Payment against post-retirement health care provision

    (0.1     (0.3     (0.6     (0.3

Changes in operating assets and liabilities:

       

- Receivables

    (151.8     22.1        (37.0     94.4   

- Inventories and heap leach pads

    (93.4     (165.2     (25.7     (43.4

- Accounts payable and provisions

    86.1        62.8        58.5        (41.7

- Royalties paid

    (163.0     (125.1     (44.5     —     

- Income and mining taxes paid

    (455.1     (352.8     (106.5     (227.9
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

NET CASH PROVIDED BY OPERATIONS

    1,146.9        1,907.5        808.3        1,162.9   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

CASH FLOWS FROM INVESTING ACTIVITIES

       

Additions to property, plant and equipment

    (1,322.8     (1,153.0     (593.6     (913.1

Proceeds on disposal of property, plant and equipment

    2.0        5.3        5.3        1.2   

Royalty termination

    —          —          —          (257.1

Purchase of Glencar asset

    —          —          —          (43.0

Investment in the Far South East Project

    (110.0     (66.0     (54.0     —     

Investment in the Mankayan Project - Bezant Resources

    —          (7.0     —          —     

Purchase of listed investments

    (0.8     (0.1     (9.4     (13.5

Proceeds on sale of listed investments

    65.4        13.7        0.4        385.8   

Investment in environmental trust funds

    (6.3     (16.2     (15.4     (12.3
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

NET CASH UTILIZED IN INVESTING ACTIVITIES

    (1,372.5     (1,223.3     (666.7     (852.0
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

CASH FLOWS FROM FINANCING ACTIVITIES

       

Long and short-term loans raised

    1,451.0        1,167.9        1,543.8        1,619.9   

Long and short-term loans repaid

    (975.9     (654.6     (1,330.8     (1,637.5

(Repayment)/utilization of bank overdraft

    —          —          —          (9.7

Decrease in noncontrolling interests funding

    —          —          (2.9     (15.4

Increase in noncontrolling interests funding

    27.7        31.0        9.3        —     

Purchase of noncontrolling interests

    (10.8     (1,055.6     —          —     

Dividends paid to Company shareholders

    (364.2     (174.9     (67.4     (118.1

Dividends paid to noncontrolling interests

    (11.5     (41.9     (20.2     (23.1

Payment to South African Equity interests in South Deep

    (2.5     (3.0     —          —     

Ordinary shares issued

    2.0        6.5        5.4        7.4   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

NET CASH PROVIDED BY/(UTILIZED IN) FINANCING ACTIVITIES

    115.8        (724.6     137.2        (176.5

EFFECT OF EXCHANGE RATE ON CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS

    21.4        (25.1     30.0        8.8   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

NET (DECREASE)/INCREASE IN CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS

    (88.4     (65.5     308.8        143.2   

CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS - beginning of the year

    744.0        809.5        500.7        357.5   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS - end of year

    655.6        744.0        809.5        500.7   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements

 

F-9


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

1 GENERAL

Gold Fields Limited (formerly Driefontein Consolidated Limited, or Driefontein, the Company or the Group) was originally incorporated in South Africa and listed on the JSE Securities Exchange S.A. (“JSE”) during 1968 as East Driefontein Gold Mining Company Limited. Following a merger with West Driefontein Gold Mining Company Limited, it was renamed Driefontein on June 15, 1981. On May 10, 1999, Driefontein completed a business combination, with another South African company listed on the JSE, Gold Fields Limited (“Old Gold Fields”). Old Gold Fields evolved through a series of transactions in 1998, whereby it acquired substantially all of the gold mining assets and interests previously held by Gold Fields of South Africa Limited, Gencor Limited, New Wits Limited and certain other shareholders in the companies owning the assets and interests. These assets and interests included publicly traded gold mining companies, mineral rights and service agreements. Driefontein, the surviving entity, was renamed Gold Fields Limited, and Old Gold Fields was renamed GFL Mining Services Limited, effective from that date. The Group is engaged in gold mining and related activities, including exploration, extraction, processing and smelting. Gold bullion, the Group’s principal product, is currently produced in South Africa, Ghana and Australia and sold in South Africa and internationally.

On November 29, 2012, Gold Fields announced the creation of a new South African gold mining company through the listing and subsequent unbundling of its 100% owned subsidiary, Sibanye Gold Limited (“Sibanye Gold”), formerly known as GFI Mining South Africa Proprietary Limited, which holds the KDC and Beatrix gold mines as well as various service companies. The separation of Sibanye Gold from Gold Fields is referred to as the Spin-off. The board of directors of Gold Fields, or the Board, passed the resolution necessary to implement the Spin-off on December 12, 2012 and the Spin-off was completed in February 2013. Refer to notes 3(a) and 24.

The Group also produces copper/gold concentrate in Peru, which is sold internationally.

 

2 SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES

 

  (a) USE OF ESTIMATES: The preparation of the consolidated financial statements in conformity with United States generally accepted accounting principles, or U.S. GAAP, requires the Group’s management to make estimates and assumptions about current and future events that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the financial statements, and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting period.

Future events and their effects cannot be determined with absolute certainty. Therefore, the determination of estimates requires the exercise of judgment based on various assumptions and other factors such as historical experience, current and expected economic conditions, and in some cases actuarial techniques. Actual results ultimately may differ from those estimates.

The more significant areas requiring the use of management estimates and assumptions relate to mineral reserves that are the basis of future cash flow estimates and unit-of-production depreciation, depletion and amortization calculations; environmental, reclamation and closure obligations; estimates of recoverable gold and other materials in heap leach pads; asset impairments (including impairments of goodwill, long-lived assets, and investments); write-downs of inventory to market; post employment, post retirement and other employee benefit liabilities (including valuation of share-based compensation); valuation allowances for deferred tax assets; reserves for contingencies and litigation; and the fair value and accounting treatment of financial instruments.

 

F-10


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

2 SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued)

 

The following are accounting policies used by the Group which have been consistently applied for all periods presented:

 

  (b) CONSOLIDATION: The Group’s financial statements include the financial statements of the Group, and its subsidiaries, and its share of results of investments in associates. A company in which the Group has, directly or indirectly, through subsidiary undertakings, a controlling interest is classified as a subsidiary undertaking. In addition, the Company reviews its relationships with other entities to assess if the Company is the primary beneficiary of a variable interest entity. If the determination is made that the Company is the primary beneficiary, then that entity is consolidated from the date that the Company was deemed to have become the primary beneficiary. The results of subsidiaries acquired or disposed of are included in the Group statements from the effective dates of acquisition or excluded from such statements as from the effective dates of disposal. Investments in companies which the Company does not control, but where it has the ability to exercise significant influence over their operating and financial policies, are accounted for by the equity method.

Inter-company transactions and balances are eliminated on consolidation. Gains or losses that arise from a change in the Group’s interest in subsidiaries or equity method investees’ are recognized in equity.

Any excess between the purchase price and the fair value of the attributable net assets of subsidiaries and associates at the date of acquisition is capitalized as goodwill.

Goodwill is not amortized; however it is subject to an annual assessment for impairment. The Company evaluates the carrying amount of goodwill to determine whether current events and circumstances indicate that such carrying amount may no longer be recoverable. To accomplish this, the Company compares the estimated fair values of its reporting units to their carrying amounts. If the carrying value of the reporting unit exceeds its estimated fair value, the Company compares the implied fair value of the reporting unit’s goodwill to its carrying amount, and any excess of the carrying value over the fair value is charged to earnings. The Company’s fair value estimates are based on numerous assumptions and it is possible that actual fair values will be significantly different from the estimates, as actual future quantities of recoverable minerals, gold and other commodity prices, production levels and operating costs of production and capital are each subject to significant risks and uncertainties.

 

  (c) (i)

FOREIGN CURRENCY TRANSACTIONS: Foreign currency transactions are recorded at the prevailing exchange rate at the date of the transaction. Monetary assets and liabilities designated in foreign currencies are translated at the exchange rate ruling at period end. Gains and losses arising from these translations are recognized in net income or loss.

 

  (ii) FOREIGN ENTITIES: The Group’s foreign entities are regarded as those entities that are considered to be self-sustaining. The balance sheets and statements of operations of foreign subsidiaries are translated on the following basis:

Assets and liabilities are translated at the prevailing exchange rate at period end. Statement of operations items are translated at the average exchange rate for the period. Exchange differences on translation are accounted for in shareholders’ equity. These differences are recognized in net income or loss upon realization of the underlying foreign entity.

 

  (iii)

FUNCTIONAL CURRENCY: The functional currency of the Group’s South African operations is the South African Rand, of its Australian operations is the Australian dollar, of its Ghanaian operations and of its Peruvian operation is the U.S. dollar. The translation differences arising as a result of converting the South African Rand and the Australian dollar to U.S. dollars (reporting

 

F-11


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

2 SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued)

 

  currency) using the current exchange rate method are included as a separate component of Accumulated Other Comprehensive Income.

 

  (d) PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

 

  (i) MINING ASSETS: Mining assets, including mine development costs and mine plant facilities, are recorded at cost.

At the Group’s surface mines, when it has been determined that a mineral property can be economically developed as a result of establishing proven and probable reserves, costs incurred to develop the property are capitalized as incurred until saleable minerals are extracted from the mine and are amortized using the units-of-production method over the estimated life of the ore body based on estimated recoverable ounces or pounds mined from proven and probable reserves. These costs include costs to further delineate the ore body and remove overburden to initially expose the ore body. Subsequent mine development costs are treated as variable production costs.

At the Group’s underground mines, the Group capitalizes all underground development costs to access specific ore blocks or other areas of the mine where such costs will provide future economic benefits as a result of establishing proven and probable reserves associated with a specific block or area of operations, even after the reef horizon may have been intersected with the development of the first specific ore block or area of the mine. All costs associated with the development of a specific underground block or area are capitalized until saleable minerals are extracted from that specific block or area. At the Group’s underground mines, these costs include the cost of shaft sinking and access, the costs of building access ways, lateral development, drift development, ramps, box cuts and other infrastructure development.

The costs incurred to access specific ore blocks or areas of the mine, which only provide an economic benefit over the period during which that ore block or area is being mined, are attributed to earnings using the units-of-production method where the denominator is estimated recoverable ounces of gold contained in proven and probable reserves within that ore block or area. Capitalized costs that provide an economic benefit over the entire mine life, such as the initial primary shaft in an underground complex, will continue to be attributed to earnings using the units-of-production method, where the denominator is the estimated recoverable ounces of gold contained in total accessible proven and probable reserves. Accessible proven and probable reserves, also referred to as “above infrastructure proven and probable reserves”, relate to mineralization which is located at a level at which an operation currently has infrastructure sufficient to allow mining operations to occur.

Interest on borrowings incurred in respect of assets requiring a substantial period of time to prepare for their intended use is capitalized to the date on which the assets are substantially completed and ready for their intended use.

 

  (ii) LAND: Land is shown at cost and is not depreciated.

 

  (iii) MINERAL INTERESTS: Mineral interests represent mineral and surface use rights for parcels of land owned by the Group. Mineral interests and other tangible assets include acquired mineral use rights in production, development and exploration stage properties. The amount capitalized related to mineral interests represents its fair value at the time it was acquired, either as an individual asset purchase or as part of a business combination.

 

F-12


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

2 SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued)

 

Production stage mineral interests represent mineral interests in operating properties that contain proven and probable reserves. Development stage mineral interests represent interests in properties under development that contain proven and probable reserves. Exploration stage mineral interests represent interests in properties that are believed to potentially contain (i)  other mineralized material such as inferred material within pits, measured, indicated and inferred material with insufficient drill spacing to qualify as proven and probable reserves; and inferred material in close proximity to proven and probable reserves; (ii)  around-mine exploration potential such as inferred material not immediately adjacent to existing reserves and mineralization but located within the immediate mine infrastructure; (iii)  other mine-related exploration potential that is not part of measured, indicated or inferred material and is comprised mainly of material outside of the immediate mine area; or (iv)  greenfield exploration potential that is not associated with any other production, development or exploration stage property as described above. The Group’s mineral use rights are enforceable regardless of whether proven or probable reserves have been established. In certain limited situations, the nature of a use right changes from an exploration right to mining right upon the establishment of proven and probable reserves. The Group has the ability and intent to renew mineral use rights where the existing term is not sufficient to recover all identified and valued proven and probable reserves and/or undeveloped mineral interests.

 

  (iv) AMORTIZATION AND DEPRECIATION OF MINING ASSETS: Mining assets, mine development and evaluation costs, and mine plant facilities are amortized over the life of mine using the units-of-production method, based on estimated above infrastructure proven and probable ore reserves. Proven and probable ore reserves reflect estimated quantities of economically recoverable reserves, which can be recovered in future from known mineral deposits. At the Group’s South African operations, its amortization and depreciation calculations are generally based on the Group’s most recent life-of-mine plan and annual above-infrastructure reserve declarations as approved by the Company’s Board. However, if management becomes aware of significant changes in its above-infrastructure reserves ahead of the scheduled updates, management would update its amortization and depreciation calculations and then subsequently notify the Company’s Board. A similar approach is followed at the Group’s operations in Ghana and Peru, due to the longer-life of the primary ore body. At the Group’s other international operations, such as Australia, the Group’s amortization and depreciation calculations are updated on a more regular basis during the year for all known changes in proven and probable reserves. The nature and life-span of the ore body, and the on-going information gathered in connection with the ore body, facilitates these more frequent updates.

 

  (v) AMORTIZATION OF MINERAL INTERESTS: Mineral interests associated with production stage mineral interests are amortized over the life-of-mine using the units-of-production method in order to match the amortization with the expected underlying future cash flows. Mineral interests associated with development and exploration stage mineral interests are not amortized until such time as the underlying property is converted to the production stage.

 

F-13


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

2 SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued)

 

  (vi) DEPRECIATION OF NON-MINING ASSETS: Other non-mining assets are recorded at cost and depreciated on a straight-line basis over their expected useful lives as follows:

 

Vehicles

          20.0

Computers

          33.3

Furniture and Equipment

          10.0

 

  (vii) MINING EXPLORATION: Expenditure on exploration activities is expensed as incurred. Such expenditure includes the costs incurred for purposes of upgrading resources from one category to another or for purposes of upgrading resources to proven and probable reserves, even when in close proximity to the Company’s development and production stage properties. When it has been determined that a property can be economically developed as a result of establishing proven and probable reserves, costs incurred prospectively to develop the property are capitalized as mine development costs.

 

  (viii) IMPAIRMENT: The Group reviews and tests the carrying amounts of long-lived assets, which include development costs, when events or changes in circumstances suggest that the carrying amount may not be recoverable. For impairment purposes, assets are grouped at the lowest level for which identifiable cash flows are largely independent of the cash flows of other assets and liabilities. The lowest level at which such cash flows are generated is generally at an individual operating mine, even if the individual operating mine is included in a larger mine complex.

If there are indications that an impairment may have occurred, the Group prepares estimates of expected future cash flows for each group of assets. Expected future cash flows are based on a probability-weighted approach applied to potential outcomes and reflect:

 

   

estimated sales proceeds from the production and sale of recoverable ounces of gold contained in proven and probable reserves;

 

   

expected gold prices and currency exchange rates (considering historical and current prices, price trends and related factors);

 

   

expected future operating costs and capital expenditures to produce proven and probable gold reserves based on approved life-of-mine plans that assume current plant capacity, but exclude the impact of inflation; and

 

   

expected cash flows associated with value beyond proven and probable reserves, which include the expected cash outflows required to develop and extract the value beyond proven and probable reserves.

The impairment analysis first compares the total estimated cash flows on an undiscounted basis to the carrying amount of the asset, including goodwill, if any. If the undiscounted cash flows are less than the carrying amount of the asset, a second step is performed. The Group records a reduction of a group of assets to fair value as a charge to earnings if discounted expected future cash flows are less than the carrying amount. The Group estimates fair value by discounting the expected future cash flows using a discount factor, adjusted for inflation, that reflects the risk- free rate of interest for a term consistent with the period of expected cash flows.

 

F-14


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

2 SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued)

 

Management’s estimate of future cash flows is subject to risk and uncertainties. It is therefore reasonably possible that changes could occur which may affect the recoverability of the Group’s mining assets.

 

  (e) INCOME TAXES: Deferred taxation is calculated on the comprehensive basis using the balance sheet (assets and liabilities) approach. Deferred tax liabilities and assets are recognized by applying expected tax rates to the temporary differences existing at each reporting date between the tax values and their carrying amounts. These temporary differences are expected to result in taxable or deductible amounts in determining taxable profits for future periods when the carrying amount of the asset is recovered or the liability is settled. The effect on deferred tax of any changes in tax rates is recognized in net income or loss during the period in which the change occurs.

The principal temporary differences arise from depreciation on property, plant and equipment, provisions, unutilized capital allowances and tax losses carried forward. A valuation allowance is recorded to reduce the carrying amounts of deferred tax assets if it is more likely than not that such assets will not be realized.

The Group recognizes interest and penalties, if any, in net income or loss as part of income tax expense.

Gold Fields recognizes the tax benefit from an uncertain tax position only if it is more likely than not the tax position will be sustained on examination by the taxing authorities, based on the technical merits of the position. The tax benefits recognized in the financial statements from such positions are then measured based on the largest benefit that has a greater than 50% likelihood of being realized upon settlement. Changes in recognition or measurement are reflected in the period in which the change in judgment occurs.

 

  (f) NON-CURRENT INVESTMENTS: Non-current investments comprise (i) investments in listed companies which are classified as available-for-sale and are accounted for at fair value, with unrealized holding gains and losses excluded from earnings and reported as a separate component of shareholders’ equity; and (ii) investments in unlisted companies which are carried at their original costs as the directors believe that the original cost is not materially different from the fair value; (iii) monies in environmental trust fund; and (iv) equity method investments. Realized gains and losses are included in the determination of net income or loss.

Unrealized losses are included in the determination of net income or loss where it is determined that a decline, other than a temporary decline, in the value of the investment has occurred.

 

  (g) MATERIALS CONTAINED IN HEAP LEACH PADS: The recovery of gold from certain oxide ores is best achieved through the heap leaching process. Under this method, ore is placed on leach pads where it is permeated with a chemical solution, which dissolves the gold contained in the ore. The resulting “pregnant” solution is further processed in a leach plant where the gold in solution is recovered. For accounting purposes, value is added to leach pads based on current mining costs, including applicable depreciation and amortization relating to mining operations. Value is removed from the leach pad as ounces are recovered in circuit at the leach plant based on the average cost per recoverable ounce of gold on the leach pad.

The engineering estimates of recoverable gold on the heap leach pads are calculated from quantities of ore placed on the pads (measured tonnes added to the leach pads), the grade of ore placed on the leach pads (based on assay data) and a recovery percentage (based on the leach process and the ore type). In

 

F-15


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

2 SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued)

 

general, the leach pad production cycles project recoveries of approximately 50% to 70% of the placed recoverable ounces in the first year of leaching, declining each year thereafter until the leaching process is completed.

Although the quantities of recoverable gold placed on the leach pads are reconciled by comparing the grades of ore placed on the pads to the quantities of gold actually recovered (metallurgical balancing), the nature of the leaching process inherently limits the ability to precisely monitor inventory levels. As a result, the metallurgical balancing process is constantly monitored and engineering estimates are refined based on actual results over time. Variations between actual and estimated quantities resulting from changes in assumptions and estimates that do not result in write-downs to market are accounted for on a prospective basis. The ultimate recovery of gold from the pad will not be known until the leaching process is terminated.

The current portion of leach pad inventories is determined based on engineering estimates of the quantities of gold at the reporting date that are expected to be recovered during the next twelve months.

 

  (h) INVENTORIES: Inventories are valued at the lower of cost and market. The Group’s inventories comprise consumable stores, gold-in-process, gold bullion, ore stockpiles and mineral rights and are accounted for as follows:

Consumable stores: Consumable stores are valued at average cost, after appropriate provision for surplus and slow moving items.

Gold-in-process: Gold in-process inventories at the international operations represent materials that are currently in the process of being converted to a saleable product. Conversion processes vary depending on the nature of the ore and the specific mining operation, but include mill in-circuit, leach in-circuit, flotation and column cells, and carbon in-pulp inventories. In-process material is measured based on assays of the material fed to process and the projected recoveries of the respective plants.

In-process inventories are valued at the average cost of the material fed to process attributable to the source material coming from the mine, stockpile or leach pad plus the in-process conversion costs, including applicable depreciation relating to the process facility, incurred to that point in the process.

Gold bullion: Gold bullion inventories represent saleable gold ore or gold bullion and are valued at the average cost of the respective in-process inventories incurred prior to the refining process, plus refining costs.

Concentrates: Concentrate inventories represent concentrate available for shipment. The concentrate inventory is valued at the average cost, including an allocated portion of amortization. Costs are added to and removed from the concentrate inventory based on tons of concentrate and are valued at the lower of average cost and market value. Management’s determination of the gold and copper concentrate content and quantity depends on assay and laboratory results for the metal content and survey for the quantities.

Stockpiles: Stockpiles represent coarse ore that has been extracted from the mine that is available for further processing. Stockpiles are measured by estimating the number of tons (via truck counts and/or in-pit surveys of the ore before stockpiling) added and removed from the stockpile, the number of contained ounces (based on assay data) and the recovery percentage (based on the process for which

the ore is destined). Stockpile tonnages are verified by periodic surveys. Stockpiles are valued based on mining costs incurred up to the point of stockpiling the ore, including applicable depreciation and amortization relating to mining operations. Value is added to a stockpile based on the current mining

 

F-16


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

2 SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued)

 

cost per ton plus applicable depreciation and amortization and removed at the average cost per recoverable ounce of gold in the stockpile.

Mineral rights: Mineral rights not linked to any specific operation are valued at the lower of cost and market value.

 

  (i) FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS: Financial instruments carried on the balance sheet include cash and cash equivalents, investments, receivables, derivative financial instruments, accounts payable and accrued liabilities. The particular recognition method for each financial instrument item is disclosed in its respective significant accounting policy description.

 

  (j) HEDGING : The Group accounts for its hedging activities in accordance with Accounting Standards

Codification, or ASC, guidance for derivative instruments and hedging activities.

Under ASC 815, all derivatives are recognized on the balance sheet at their fair value, unless they meet the criteria for the normal purchases normal sale exemption. On the date a derivative contract is entered into, the Group designates the derivative as (1) a hedge of the fair value of a recognized asset or liability (fair value hedge), (2) a hedge of a forecasted transaction (cash flow hedge), or (3) a hedge of a net investment in a foreign entity. Certain derivative transactions, while providing effective economic hedges under the Group’s risk management policies, do not qualify for hedge accounting.

Hedging activities are conducted in accordance with guidelines established by the Audit Committee which allow for the use of various hedging instruments.

Changes in the fair value of a derivative that is highly effective, and that is designated and qualifies as a fair value hedge, are recorded in net income or loss, along with the change in the fair value of the hedged asset or liability that is attributable to the hedged risk.

Changes in the fair value of a derivative that is highly effective, and that is designated and qualifies as a cash flow hedge, are recognized directly in shareholders’ equity. Amounts deferred in shareholders’ equity are included in net income or loss in the same period during which the hedged firm commitment or forecasted transaction affects net income or loss.

Recognition of derivatives which meet the criteria for the normal purchases normal sales exception under ASC 815 is deferred until settlement. Under these contracts, the Group must deliver a specified quantity of gold at a future date at a specified price to the contracted counter-party.

Hedges of net investment in foreign entities are accounted for similarly to cash flow hedges. Changes in the fair value of derivatives that do not qualify for hedge accounting are recognized in net income or loss, under the caption entitled gains and losses on financial instruments. The fair value recognized on the balance sheet is included under the caption financial instruments.

The Group formally documents all relationships between hedging instruments and hedged items, as well as its risk management objective and strategy for undertaking various hedge transactions. This process includes linking derivatives designed as hedges to specific assets and liabilities or to specific firm commitments or forecasted transactions. The Group also formally assesses, both at the hedge inception date and on an ongoing basis, whether the derivatives that are used in hedging transactions are highly effective in offsetting changes in fair values or cash flows of hedged items.

 

F-17


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

2 SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued)

 

  (k) CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS: Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash on hand, demand deposits and investments in money market instruments. These are all highly liquid investments with a maturity of three months or less at the date of purchase.

The carrying amount of cash and cash equivalents is stated at cost which approximates fair value.

 

  (l) TRADE RECEIVABLES: Trade receivables are carried at anticipated realizable value. Estimates are made for doubtful debts based on a review of all outstanding amounts at period end. Irrecoverable amounts are written off during the period in which they are identified.

 

  (m) PROVISIONS: Provisions are recognized when information is available prior to the issuance of the financial statements which indicates that it is probable that an asset has been impaired or a liability had been incurred at the date of the financial statements and the amount can be reasonably estimated.

 

  (n) REHABILITATION COSTS: ASC 410 applies to legal obligations associated with the retirement of a long-lived asset that result from the acquisition, construction, development and/or the normal operation of a long-lived asset.

Under ASC 410 the Group records the fair value of a liability for an asset retirement obligation in the period in which it is incurred. When the liability is initially recorded, the Group correspondingly capitalizes the cost by increasing the carrying value of the related long-lived asset. Over time, the liability is increased (accretion) to reflect an interest element considered in its initial measurement at fair value, and the capitalized cost is amortized over the useful life of the related asset. Upon settlement of the liability, the Group will record a gain or loss if the actual cost incurred differs from the liability recorded.

Environmental liabilities, other than rehabilitation costs which relate to liabilities from specific events, are expensed as incurred.

 

  (o) ENVIRONMENTAL TRUST FUNDS: Contributions are made to the Group’s trust funds, created in accordance with statutory requirements, to fund the estimated cost of pollution control, rehabilitation and mine closure at the end of the life of the Group’s South African mines. Contributions are determined on the basis of the estimated environmental obligation over the life of the mine. Income earned on monies paid to environmental trust funds is accounted for as investment income. The funds contributed to the trusts plus growth in the trust funds are included under investments on the balance sheet.

 

  (p) EMPLOYEE BENEFITS

 

  (i) PENSION AND PROVIDENT FUNDS: In South Africa, the Group operates a defined contribution retirement plan and contributes to a number of industry based defined contribution retirement plans. The retirement plans are funded by payments from employees and the Group.

Contributions to defined contribution funds are recognized in net income or loss as incurred.

 

  (ii) POST-RETIREMENT HEALTH CARE COSTS: Medical coverage is provided through a number of schemes. Post-retirement health care in respect of existing employees is recognized as an expense over the remaining service lives of the relevant employees.

The Group has an obligation to provide medical benefits to certain of its pensioners and dependents of ex-employees. These liabilities are unfunded and have been provided in full, calculated on an actuarial basis.

 

F-18


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

2 SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued)

 

Valuation of these obligations is carried out annually by independent actuaries using appropriate mortality tables, long-term estimates of increases in medical costs and appropriate discount rates.

 

  (iii) SHARE-BASED COMPENSATION PLANS: Compensation costs recognized in fiscal 2012, 2011, six months ended December 31, 2010 and fiscal 2010 include: a) compensation cost for all share-based payments granted prior to, but not yet vested as of July 1, 2005, based on the grant-date fair value estimated in accordance with the original provisions of ASC 718, Accounting for Stock- Based Compensation, and b) compensation cost for all share-based payments granted subsequent to June 30, 2005, based on the grant-date fair value estimated in accordance with the provisions of ASC 718, Stock-Based Compensation.

 

  (q) REVENUE RECOGNITION: Revenue arising from gold and by-product sales is recognized when the risks and rewards of ownership and title pass to the buyer under the terms of the applicable contract, the pricing is fixed and determinable and collectability is reasonably assured. Sales revenue excludes value-added tax but includes the net profit and losses arising from hedging transactions from matched gold sales contracts, which are designated as normal sales contracts.

Contracts for the sale of copper concentrate are provisionally priced - that is, the selling price is subject to final adjustment at the end of a period normally ranging from 30 to 90 days after delivery to the customer, based on market prices at the relevant quotation points stipulated in the contract.

Revenue on provisionally priced copper concentrate sales is recorded on the date of shipment, net of refining and treatment charges, using the forward London Metal Exchange price to the estimated final pricing date, adjusted for the specific terms of the relevant agreement. Variations between the price used to recognize revenue and the actual final price received can be caused by changes in prevailing copper and gold prices and result in an embedded derivative. The host contract is the receivable from the sale of copper concentrate at the forward London Metal Exchange price at the time of sale. The embedded derivative, which does not qualify for hedge accounting, is marked-to-market each period until final settlement occurs, with changes in fair value classified as provisional price adjustments and included as a component of revenue while the contract itself is recorded in accounts receivable.

 

  (r) DIVIDEND INCOME: Dividends are recognized when the right to receive payment is established.

 

  (s) INTEREST INCOME: Interest is recognized on a time proportion basis taking account of the

principal outstanding and the effective rate to maturity on the accrual basis.

 

  (t) DIVIDENDS DECLARED: Dividends proposed are recognized only when the dividends are declared. Dividends are payable in South African Rand.

 

  (u) SEGMENT REPORTING: The Group is a gold mining company operating geographically in South Africa, Ghana, Australia and Peru. The business segments comprise geographical operations based on locations and operating units.

 

  (v) EARNINGS/(LOSS) PER SHARE is calculated based on the net income/(loss) divided by the weighted average number of common shares in issue during the period. Diluted earnings/(loss) per share is presented when the inclusion of potential ordinary shares has a dilutive effect on earnings/ (loss) per share.

 

  (w) RECLASSIFICATIONS: Share-based compensation in prior periods has been reclassified into respective expense captions where compensation costs of underlying employees are ordinarily classified. The reclassification has been made to conform with guidance SAB Topic 14.F.

 

F-19


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

2 SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued)

 

  (x) RECENTLY ADOPTED ACCOUNTING PRONOUNCEMENTS

Revenue recognition

In October 2009, the Accounting Standards Codification, or ASC guidance, related to revenue recognition: multiple-deliverable revenue arrangements was updated. The update specifies multiple-deliverable revenue arrangements will be separated in more circumstances than under existing U.S. GAAP requirements. It establishes a selling price hierarchy and requires significant expansion of disclosures relating to multiple-deliverable revenue arrangements. The amendments in this update are effective prospectively for revenue arrangements entered into or modified in fiscal years beginning on or after June 15, 2010. The updated guidance did not impact the Group’s financial statements.

In April 2010, the ASC guidance related to revenue recognition: milestone method of revenue recognition was updated. The amendments provide guidance on the criteria that should be met for determining whether the milestone method of revenue recognition is appropriate. The amendments are effective on a prospective basis for milestones achieved in fiscal years, and interim periods within those years beginning on or after June 15, 2010. The updated guidance did not impact the Group’s financial statements.

Fair value measurements

In January 2010, the ASC guidance related to fair value measurement: improving disclosures about fair value measurements was updated, providing amendments to the guidance which requires entities to disclose separately the amounts of significant transfers in and out of Level 1 (unadjusted quoted prices in active markets that are accessible at the measurement date for identical unrestricted assets or liabilities) and Level 2 (Quoted prices in markets that are not active, or inputs that are observable, either directly or indirectly for substantially the full term of the asset or liability) fair value measurements and describe the reasons for the transfers. In addition, entities are required to present separately information about purchases, sales, issuances, and settlements in the reconciliation for fair value measurements using significant unobservable inputs (Level 3). The disclosures related to Level 1 and Level 2 fair value measurements are effective for interim and annual reporting periods beginning after December 15, 2009. The disclosures related to Level 3 fair value measurements are effective for interim and annual reporting periods beginning after December 15, 2010. Except for presentation changes, the updated guidance did not have an impact on the Group’s financial statements.

During May 2011, the ASC guidance related to fair value measurement: amendments to achieve common fair value measurement and disclosure requirements in U.S. GAAP and IFRS was issued. The new standards do not extend the use of fair value but, rather, provide guidance about how fair value should be applied where it already is required or permitted under IFRS or U.S. GAAP. For U.S. GAAP, most of the changes are clarifications of existing guidance, additional disclosure requirements to the financial statements or wording changes to align with IFRS. The updated guidance did not, materially impact Gold Fields’ financial statements.

Derivatives and hedging

During March 2010, the ASC guidance related to derivatives and hedging: scope exception related to embedded credit derivatives was updated. The amendments clarify the scope exceptions related to

 

F-20


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

2 SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued)

 

embedded credit derivatives. The amendments are effective from the first fiscal quarter beginning after June 15, 2010. The updated guidance did not impact the Group’s financial statements.

Compensation - stock compensation

During April 2010, the ASC guidance related to compensation - stock compensation: effect of denominating the exercise price of a share - based payment awarded in the currency of the market in which the underlying equity security trades was updated. The update clarifies that an employee share-based payment award with an exercise price denominated in the currency of a market in which a substantial portion of the entity’s equity securities trades should not be considered to contain a condition that is not a market, performance, or service condition. Therefore, an entity would not classify such an award as a liability if it otherwise qualifies as equity. The amendments are effective for those fiscal years, and interim periods within those fiscal years beginning on or after December 15, 2010. The updated guidance did not impact the Group’s financial statements.

Intangibles - goodwill and other

In December 2010, the ASC guidance related to intangibles - goodwill and other: when to perform step 2 of the goodwill impairment test for reporting units with zero or negative carrying amounts relating to goodwill testing was updated. The update modifies Step 1 of the goodwill impairment test for reporting units with zero or negative carrying amounts. For those reporting units, an entity is required to perform Step 2 of the goodwill impairment test if it is more likely than not that a goodwill impairment exists. In determining whether it is more likely than not that goodwill impairment exists, an entity should consider whether there are any adverse qualitative factors indicating that an impairment may exist. For public entities, the update is effective for fiscal years, and interim periods within those years, beginning after December 15, 2010. The updated guidance did not impact the Group’s financial statements.

Comprehensive income

During June 2011, the ASC guidance related to comprehensive income: presentation of comprehensive income was updated. The amendments provide an entity with the option to present the components of net income and comprehensive income in either one or two consecutive financial statements. The amendments eliminate the option in U.S. GAAP to present other comprehensive income in the statement of changes in equity. An entity should apply the ASU retrospectively. In December 2011, the FASB decided to defer the effective date of those changes in ASU 2011-05 that relate only to the presentation of reclassification adjustments in the statement of income by issuing ASU 2011-12, Comprehensive Income (Topic 220): Deferral of the Effective Date for Amendments to the Presentation of Reclassifications of Items Out of Accumulated Other Comprehensive income in Accounting Standards Update 2011-05. The updated guidance impacted Gold Fields’ order of its primary financial statements.

Intangibles: Goodwill

During September 2011, the ASC guidance related to intangibles: goodwill and other: testing goodwill for impairment was updated. The amendments permit an entity to make a qualitative

 

F-21


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

2 SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued)

 

assessment of whether it is more likely than not that a reporting unit’s fair value is less than its carrying amount before applying the two-step goodwill impairment test. If an entity concludes it is not more likely than not that the fair value of a reporting unit is less than its carrying amount, it need not perform the two-step impairment test. The amendments are effective for annual and interim goodwill impairment tests performed for fiscal years beginning after December 15, 2011. The updated guidance did not impact Gold Fields’ financial statements.

Recently issued accounting pronouncements not yet adopted

Balance sheet

During December 2011, the ASC guidance related to disclosures about offsetting assets and liabilities was updated. The amendments require an entity to disclose information about offsetting and related arrangements to enable users of financial statements to understand the effect of those arrangements on its financial position, and to allow investors to better compare financial statements prepared under U.S. GAAP with financial statements prepared under IFRS. The amendments are effective for annual periods beginning January 1, 2013, and interim periods within those annual periods. Retrospective application is required. The Group will implement the provisions of ASU 2011-11 as of January 1, 2013. Gold Fields does not expect that the updated guidance will impact its financial statements.

Comprehensive Income

In February 2013, the ASC guidance related to reporting of Amounts Reclassified Out of Accumulated Other Comprehensive Income was updated. The amendments require an entity to report the effect of significant reclassifications out of accumulated other comprehensive income on the respective line items in net income, either on the face of the statement of operations or in the notes, if the amount being reclassified is required under U.S. GAAP to be reclassified in its entirety to net income in the same reporting period. For other amounts not required by U.S. GAAP to be reclassified in their entirety to net income in the same reporting period, an entity is required to cross-reference other disclosures which provide additional information about the amounts. The guidance is effective prospectively for reporting periods beginning after December 15, 2012. As this guidance provides only presentation requirements, the adoption of this standard will not impact Gold Fields’ results of operations, cash flows or financial position.

 

3. ACQUISITION AND DISPOSAL OF BUSINESSES

 

(a) Sibanye Gold Spin-off

On February 18, 2013, Gold Fields completed the separation of its wholly-owned subsidiary, Sibanye Gold (formerly known as GFI Mining South Africa, or GFIMSA), which includes the KDC and Beatrix mining operations. The Spin-off was achieved by way of Gold Fields making a distribution on a pro rata basis of one Sibanye Gold ordinary share for every one Gold Fields share (whether held in the form of shares, American depositary receipts, or ADRs, or international depositary receipts) to Gold Fields shareholders, registered as such in Gold Fields’ register at close of business on February 15, 2013, in terms of section 46 of the South African Companies Act and section 46 of the South African Income Tax Act. The Board of Gold Fields passed the resolution necessary to implement the Spin-off on December 12, 2012. Sibanye

 

F-22


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

3. ACQUISITION AND DISPOSAL OF BUSINESSES (continued)

 

Gold shares listed on the JSE, and on the NYSE on a “when issued” basis, on February 11, 2013. As of February 18, 2013, or the Spin-off Date, Gold Fields and Sibanye Gold were independent, publicly traded companies with separate public ownership, boards of directors and management.

 

(b) Far South East Project

On September 20, 2010, Gold Fields entered into option agreements with Lepanto Consolidated Mining Company, or Lepanto, a company listed in the Philippines, and Liberty Express Assets, or Liberty, a private holding company, to acquire a 60% interest in the undeveloped gold-copper Far Southeast, or FSE, deposit in the Philippines. The agreements provide Gold Fields with an 18-month option on FSE, during which time Gold Fields will conduct a major drilling program as part of a feasibility study on FSE. As part of the agreement, Gold Fields was required to pay $10.0 million in option fees to Lepanto and $44.0 million as a non-refundable down-payment to Liberty upon signing of the option agreements, which payments were made during September 2010. During fiscal years ended December 31, 2011 and 2012, Gold Fields paid further non-refundable down-payments of $66.0 million and $110.0, respectively to Liberty. The final payment of $110.0 million is payable at the expiration of the option period. The total pre-agreed acquisition price for a 60% interest in FSE, inclusive of all of the above payments, is $340.0 million. Refer note 12(c) for disclosure on FSE.

 

(c) The Mankayan Project

On October 4, 2011, Gold Fields entered into an option agreement with Bezant Resources PLC (Bezant), or Bezant, to acquire the entire issued share capital of Asean Copper Investments Limited, or Asean, which is incorporated in the British Virgin Islands, a wholly owned subsidiary of Bezant. Asean holds Bezant’s entire interest in the Guinaoang porphyry copper-gold deposit (the Mankayan project) located on Luzon Island in the Philippines.

Gold Fields paid an upfront non-refundable option fee of $7.0 million and was granted the option to acquire the entire issued share capital of Asean for $63.0 million. The option could have been exercised from the date upon which it is granted until expiry on January 31, 2013. Subsequent to year end, the option was extended to January 31, 2014 with a revised consideration of $60.5 million to be paid on future exercise of the option.

The Mankayan project is located approximately four (4) kilometres east of the FSE deposit.

 

(d) Ghana Operations

On June 22, 2011, Gold Fields acquired the 18.9% minority stake of IAMGold Corporation, or IAMGold, in the Tarkwa and Damang gold mines in Ghana, for a cash consideration of U.S.$667.0 million, increasing Gold Fields’ interest in each of the Tarkwa and Damang gold mines from 71.1% to 90.0%, the remaining 10.0% interest being held by the government of Ghana.

 

(e) Peru Operations

On March 22, 2011, Gold Fields Corona (BVI) Limited, a wholly owned subsidiary of Gold Fields, made a voluntary purchase offer to acquire the outstanding common voting shares and investment shares of Gold Fields La Cima S.A.A., or La Cima, that were not already owned. The offer closed on April 15, 2011. With the closing of the offer and with further purchases of shares after that date, Gold Fields’ effective economic

 

F-23


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

3. ACQUISITION AND DISPOSAL OF BUSINESSES (continued)

 

shareholding in La Cima increased to 98.5% from 80.7% for a total cash consideration of U.S.$382.0 million. During fiscal 2012, Gold Fields purchased an additional 0.1% in La Cima for U.S.$0.8 million La Cima holds the Cerro Corona mine in Peru.

 

4. IMPAIRMENT OF ASSETS

 

     Fiscal Year Ended December 31,      Six Months Ended
December 31,
     Fiscal Year
Ended June 30,
 
             2012                      2011                      2010                      2010          

Materials contained on heap leach pad (1)

     19.2         —           —           —     

Property, plant and equipment (2)

     14.5         9.5         —           —     

Biox - property, plant and
equipment
(3)

     7.9         —           —           —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     41.6         9.5         —           —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

  (1) The charge of $19.2 million relates to a write-down to market value in Australia due to the cessation of the heap leach at St. Ives.
  (2) The impairment charge in fiscal 2012 consisted of a $10.1 million impairment of heap leach assets in Australia due to the cessation of the heap leach at St. Ives and $4.4 million impairment of heavy mining machinery in Ghana. The impairment charge in fiscal 2011 resulted from the decision to reassess the optimal processing methodology for the oxides at Cerro Corona, where the focus was on the evaluation of a heap leach operation to capture the value inherent in the oxide instead of a stand-alone oxide plant; the evaluation costs of which were written off in 2011.
  (3) The Group impaired its patented technology, known as the Biox process, which is used for the pretreatment of refractory ores and concentrates prior to gold recovery through conventional cyanide leaching techniques. The Group entered into an agreement to sell its Biox technology in 2013.

 

5. FINANCE EXPENSE

 

     Fiscal Year Ended December 31,     Six Months Ended
December 31,
    Fiscal Year
Ended June 30,
 
             2012                     2011                     2010                     2010          

Interest expense - preference share dividend

     —          (1.3     (3.1     (5.9

Interest expense - other

     (83.1     (62.3     (33.3     (65.8
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total finance expense

     (83.1     (63.6     (36.4     (71.7

Capitalized interest

     13.0        9.3        4.7        6.5   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
     (70.1     (54.3     (31.7     (65.2
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-24


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

6. INCOME AND MINING TAX EXPENSE

 

     Fiscal Year Ended December 31,     Six Months Ended
December 31,
    Fiscal Year
Ended June 30,
 
             2012                     2011                     2010                     2010          

Current income taxes

        

South Africa

     (72.4     (108.3     (39.0     (67.7

Ghana

     (170.6     (180.5     (73.4     (98.6

Australia

     (64.1     (35.9     —          (16.5

Peru

     (104.7     (111.7     (47.1     (51.2
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Current income and mining taxes

     (411.8     (436.4     (159.5     (234.0
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Deferred income taxes

        

South Africa

     149.6        (70.1     44.9        (58.6

Ghana

     (36.8     (12.0     4.5        (28.1

Australia

     (4.8     (51.3     (22.9     (12.3

Peru

     11.9        17.8        (0.8     (25.4
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Deferred income and mining taxes

     119.9        (115.6     25.7        (124.4
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total income and mining taxes

     (291.9     (552.0     (133.8     (358.4
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

The Company’s pre-tax income before impairment of equity investee and share of equity investees’ share of losses comprise:

 

     Fiscal Year Ended December 31,      Six Months Ended
December 31,
    Fiscal Year
Ended June 30,
 
             2012                      2011                      2010                     2010          

South Africa

     113.9         378.5         (221.0     192.0   

Ghana

     441.6         624.9         216.8        343.1   

Australia

     156.5         258.8         77.3        55.7   

Peru

     259.6         241.1         139.4        164.6   

British Virgin Islands

     24.5         4.5         (17.7     96.0   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 
     996.1         1,507.8         194.8        851.4   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-25


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

6. INCOME AND MINING TAX EXPENSE (continued)

 

    Fiscal Year Ended December 31,     Six Months Ended
December 31,
    Fiscal Year
Ended June 30,
 
        2012             2011         2010     2010  
South African mining tax on mining income, an income tax, is determined on a formula basis which takes into account the profit and revenue from mining operations during the period. Non-mining income is taxed at a standard rate. Deferred tax is provided at the estimated effective mining tax rate on temporary differences. The applicable tax rates are:        

South Africa:

       

Mining statutory rate

    34.0     43.0     43.0     43.0

Non-mining income standard tax rate

    28.0     35.0     35.0     35.0

Non-mining companies

    28.0     28.0     28.0     28.0

Ghana

    35.0     25.0     25.0     25.0

Australia

    30.0     30.0     30.0     30.0

Peru

    30.0     30.0     35.6     35.6

Major items causing the Group’s income tax provision to differ from the South African mining statutory rate were:

       

Tax on income before tax, impairment of investment in equity investee and share of equity investees’ profits/(losses) at South African mining statutory rate

    (338.7     (648.4     (83.7     (366.1

Rate adjustment to reflect company tax rates

    17.8        239.2        74.3        62.7   

South African mining tax formula rate adjustment

    34.5        11.9        10.4        16.6   

Valuation allowance raised against deferred tax assets

    —          —          —          (8.3

Reversal of valuation allowance previously raised against deferred tax assets 3

    58.2        22.0        10.3        0.1   

Non taxable income/non deductible expenditure 1

    (116.1     (199.0     (197.6     27.4   

South African capital gains tax

    —          —          —          (23.9

Royalties 2

    —          —          —          (71.6

Deferred tax adjustment on changes in tax rates at the South African and Ghanaian operations (2011: Peruvian operation and for six months ended December 31, 2010: South African operations)

    73.7        9.1        61.3        —     

Other

    (21.3     13.2        (8.8     4.7   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Income and mining tax expense

    (291.9     (552.0     (133.8     (358.4
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-26


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

6. INCOME AND MINING TAX EXPENSE (continued)

 

  1) The $116.1 million (fiscal year ended December 31, 2011: $199.0 million, six months ended December 31, 2010: $197.6 million) non-deductible expenditure comprises mainly $23.8 million (fiscal year ended December 31, 2011: $24.5 million, six months ended December 31, 2010: $11.6 million) share-based-compensation, $nil million (fiscal year ended December 31, 2011: $nil million, six months ended December 31, 2010: $128.0 million) empowerment transaction costs and $74.4 million (fiscal year ended December 31, 2011: $92.8 million, six months ended December 31, 2010: $25.9 million) exploration, feasibility and evaluation costs. There are no other individually significant amounts included in this line item.
  2) The classification of royalty expense at the Group’s operations requires judgement, particularly at the Groups’ South African and Ghanian operations, where the percentages to be applied in calculating royalties are influenced by the expenses incurred in generating those product sales (and therefore the profitability of the operations). In light of the continued increase in royalties at the Group’s international operations, and the fact that changes to the calculation of royalties in Ghana, representing the largest component of consolidated royalty expense, changed to a predetermined 5% of product sales (regardless of the operating margin), Gold Fields changed the classification of royalty expense in its consolidated financial statements from a component of “income and mining taxes” to “other expenses” in its consolidated statements of operations starting with the six months ended December 31, 2010. Given the change in circumstances, Gold Fields considered it appropriate to change the presentation on a prospective basis.
  3) During fiscal year ended December 31, 2012, the Group reversed a portion of the valuation allowance against unredeemed capital expenditure and net operating losses to the extent that there is sufficient future taxable income. In making this determination, the Group analyzed, amongst other things, the recent history of earnings and cashflows, forecasts of future earnings, the nature and timing of future deductions and benefits represented by deferred tax assets and the cumulative earnings for the last three years.
  4) No provision is made for the income tax effect that may arise on the remittance of unremitted earnings by certain foreign subsidiaries. It is management’s intention that these earnings will be permanently re-invested into future capital expansion projects, maintenance capital and ongoing working capital funding requirements. In the event that the Group repatriated these earnings, income taxes and withholding taxes may be incurred. The determination of such taxes is subject to various complex calculations and accordingly, the Group has determined that it is impractical to estimate the amount of deferred tax liability on such unremitted earnings.
  5) The Group does not have any uncertain tax benefits which will more likely than not result in changes to tax liabilities.

 

F-27


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

6. INCOME AND MINING TAX EXPENSE (continued)

 

    December 31,
2012
    December 31,
2011
 
Deferred income and mining tax liabilities and assets on the balance sheet as of December 31, 2012 and 2011 relate to the following:    

Deferred income and mining tax liabilities

   

Mining assets

    1,608.0        1,803.8   

Investments held by environmental trust funds

    45.3        77.3   

Inventory

    15.3        9.3   

Other

    13.1        45.8   
 

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross deferred income and mining tax liabilities

    1,681.7        1,936.2   
 

 

 

   

 

 

 

Provisions, including rehabilitation accruals

    (144.6     (149.0

Tax losses

    (183.0     (278.1

Unredeemed capital expenditure

    (782.9     (630.0

Other

    —          (3.7
 

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross deferred income and mining tax assets

    (1,110.5     (1,060.8

Valuation allowance for deferred tax assets

    324.4        152.4   
 

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total deferred income and mining tax assets

    (786.1     (908.4
 

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total deferred income and mining tax liabilities

    895.6        1,027.8   

Less: short term portion of deferred income and mining tax (included in accounts payable and provisions)

    (17.9     (8.4
 

 

 

   

 

 

 

Long-term portion of deferred income and mining tax liabilities

    877.7        1,019.4   
 

 

 

   

 

 

 

Classified as:

   

Long-term liabilities

    (901.8     (1,019.4

Long-term assets

    24.1          

The classification of deferred income and mining tax liabilities or assets as current or non-current is based on the related liability or asset creating the deferred tax. Deferred taxes not related to a specific liability or asset are classified based on the estimated period of reversal.

The Group has established a valuation allowance for certain deferred tax assets where cumulative losses require a valuation allowance, or where management believes that they will not be realized based on projections as of December 31, 2012 and December 31, 2011. The valuation allowance relates primarily to net operating loss carry-forwards for the entities below, except for Living Gold (Pty) Limited, and GFI Joint Venture Holdings, or GFIJVH, which also include unredeemed capital expenditure.

 

    December 31,
2012
     December 31,
2011
 

Orogen Investments SA (Luxembourg)

    37.9         39.2   

Gold Fields Arctic Platinum Oy

    28.8         30.3   

Living Gold (Pty) Limited

    4.8         3.9   

Gold Fields Operations

    —           33.2   

GFI Joint Venture Holdings

    252.3         44.6   

Other

    0.6         1.2   
 

 

 

    

 

 

 
    324.4         152.4   
 

 

 

    

 

 

 

The Group has tax losses available of $95.9 million (December 31, 2011: $101.0 million) at Gold Fields Arctic Platinum Oy. Tax losses may be carried forward for ten years. These losses expire on a first-in first-out basis.

 

F-28


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

6. INCOME AND MINING TAX EXPENSE (continued)

 

The Group has tax losses available of $126.3 million (December 31, 2011: $130.8 million) at Orogen Investments SA (Luxembourg), or Orogen, which can only be used to offset future interest income generated by Orogen. In terms of current Luxembourg taxation legislation, losses incurred in accounting periods subsequent to December 31, 1990, can be carried forward indefinitely. Losses incurred prior to this date could only be carried forward for five (5) years. All losses incurred by Orogen were incurred subsequent to December 31, 1990.

As at December 31, 2012 and December 31, 2011 the Group had unredeemed capital expenditure and tax loss carry forwards available for deduction against future mining income at its operations as follows:

 

     December 31,
2012
     December 31,
2011
 

Unredeemed capital expenditure:

     

Gold Fields Operations

     724.3         608.4   

GFI Joint Venture Holdings

     1,885.4         1,049.4   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 
     2,609.7         1,657.8   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

At December 31, 2012, the Group has, at Gold Fields La Cima, estimated capital allowances of $506.8 million to be offset against future taxable income (December 31, 2011: $507.9 million). The estimated capital allowances do not have an expiration date. Gold Fields La Cima, or La Cima, currently has no tax losses available for utilization against future profits.

 

     December 31,
2012
     December 31,
2011
 

Calculated tax losses:

     

Gold Fields Operations

     404.9         484.4   

GFI Joint Venture Holdings

     —           12.6   

Gold Fields Group Services (Pty) Limited

     15.2         10.0   

Golden Oils (Pty) Limited

     —           1.2   

Agrihold (Pty) Limited

     2.1         1.9   

Golden Hytec Farming (Pty) Limited

     —           1.1   

Living Gold (Pty) Limited

     17.1         14.1   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 
     439.3         525.3   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

These future deductions may be utilized against income generated by the individual tax entity concerned and do not expire unless the tax entity ceases to commercially operate for a period longer than one year. Under South African mining tax ring-fencing legislation, each tax entity is treated separately and as such these deductions can only be utilized by the tax entities in which the deductions have been generated.

 

Tax years open for assessments

  

South Africa (1)

   2001 - 2011

Ghana (2)

   All years open

Australia (3)

   2002 - 2011

Peru (4)

   2005 - 2011
  

Notes:

 

  (1) The South African Tax legislation allows the Revenue Authorities to reopen assessments issued for a period of up to 3 years after the assessments were issued.

 

F-29


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

6. INCOME AND MINING TAX EXPENSE (continued)

 

  (2) The Ghanaian Tax Authorities have the right to examine and, if necessary, amend the income tax determined by the relevant Group entity for any year without limitation to the years which may be reassessed.
  (3) The Australian Tax Authorities have the right to examine and, if necessary, amend the income tax determined by the relevant Group entity in the last four years, as from the date the tax returns have been filed.
  (4) The Peruvian Tax Authorities have the right to examine and, if necessary, amend the income tax determined by the relevant Group entity in the last four years, as from the date the tax returns have been filed.

It is possible that the Group will receive assessments during the next twelve months, which may have an effect on uncertain tax positions. The Group cannot estimate the amounts of possible changes as a result of an assessment.

The Group does not have any unrecognised tax benefits for which it is reasonably possible the amount will significantly change within twelve months of the recognition date.

 

7. EARNINGS PER SHARE

 

    Fiscal Year Ended December 31,     Six Months Ended
December 31,
    Fiscal Year
Ended June, 30
 
    2012     2011     2010     2010  

BASIC EARNINGS PER SHARE

       

Net income attributable to Gold Fields shareholders

    654.3        881.5        12.6        391.0   

Shares outstanding - beginning of year

    723,735,186        720,796,887        705,903,511        704,749,849   

Weighted average number of shares issued

    3,724,271        1,579,341        5,108,162        614,351   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Weighted average number of shares issued at the end of the year

    727,459,457        722,376,228        711,011,673        705,364,200   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Basic earnings per share

    0.90        1.22        0.02        0.55   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

DILUTED EARNINGS PER SHARE

       

Net income attributable to Gold Fields shareholders

    654.3        881.5        12.6        391.0   

Weighted average number of shares issued at the end of the year

    727,459,457        722,376,228        711,011,673        705,364,200   

Effect of dilutive securities

    3,264,493        8,411,270        8,677,377        9,185,642   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
    730,723,950        730,787,498        719,689,050        714,549,842   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Diluted earnings per share

    0.90        1.21        0.02        0.55   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-30


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

8. RECEIVABLES

 

     December 31,
2012
     December 31,
2011
 

Product sale trade receivables

     240.6         169.7   

Other trade receivables

     32.8         23.7   

Deposits

     0.5         0.1   

Value added tax

     69.3         65.3   

Interest receivable

     0.4         0.4   

Payroll debtors

     11.3         12.6   

Prepayments (1)

     138.9         198.0   

Other

     28.9         13.6   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 
     522.7         483.4   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

(1) Includes $7.0 million for the Bezant’s Mankayan Project (December 31, 2011: $120.0 million for the FSE project and $7.0 for Bezant).

 

9. INVENTORIES

 

     December 31,
2012
     December 31,
2011
 

Ore stockpiles

     76.5         63.7   

Gold in-process

     29.7         26.9   

Consumable stores

     295.2         205.5   

Other

     0.7         1.6   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 
     402.1         297.7   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

10. PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

 

     December 31,
2012
    December 31,
2011
 

Cost

     12,868.5        12,083.9   

Accumulated depreciation and amortization

     (5,479.6     (5,067.1
  

 

 

   

 

 

 
     7,388.9        7,016.8   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Mining properties, mine development costs, mine plant facilities and mineral interests

     6,344.5        6,021.3   

Asset retirement costs

     119.3        112.3   

Other non-mining assets

     925.1        883.2   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 
     7,388.9        7,016.8   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Included in property, plant and equipment is cumulative capitalized interest, net of amortization, relating to the following assets:

 

     December 31,
2012
     December 31,
2011
 

South African operations

     45.5         32.5   

Tarkwa Mine

     13.5         14.4   

Cerro Corona

     71.6         75.4   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 
     130.6         122.3   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

F-31


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

10. PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT (continued)

 

Depreciation charge on property, plant and equipment amounted to $729.9 million (fiscal year ended December 31, 2011: $745.3 million; six months ended December 31, 2010: $389.4 million; fiscal year ended June 30, 2010: $631.1 million).

Fleet assets in Ghana with a cost of $80.7 million have been pledged as security for the $60 million senior secured revolving credit facility. For further information, see Note 14(h).

 

11. GOODWILL

 

     December 31,
2012
    December 31,
2011
 

Balance at beginning of the year

     1,075.4        1,295.2   

Translation adjustment

     (55.3     (219.8
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balance at end of the year

     1,020.1        1,075.4   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

The goodwill arose on the acquisition of South Deep and was attributable to the upside potential of the asset, deferred tax and other factors. The total goodwill has been allocated to South Deep, being the reporting unit where it is tested for impairment as part of the reporting unit.

Goodwill is tested for impairment on an annual basis at the end of each fiscal year or transition period. In addition, the Group reviews and tests the carrying value of assets when events or changes in circumstances suggest that the carrying amount of a reporting unit may not be recoverable.

For goodwill impairment testing purposes, Gold Fields estimated the fair value of the South Deep reporting unit. The process for determining fair value is subjective as gold mining companies typically trade at a market capitalization that is based on net asset value and requires management to make numerous assumptions. The net asset value represents a discounted cash flow valuation based on expected future cash flows. The expected future cash flows used to determine the fair value of the reporting unit are inherently uncertain and could materially change over time. They are significantly affected by a number of factors, including, but not limited to, reserves and production estimates, together with economic factors such as the spot gold price and foreign currency exchange rates, estimates of production costs, future capital expenditure and discount rates. Therefore it is possible that outcomes within the next fiscal year that are materially different from the assumptions used in the impairment testing process could require an adjustment to the carrying values.

Based on management’s assessment, no impairment to the goodwill was required at December 31, 2012. Management’s estimates and assumptions for the goodwill impairment test include:

- Long-term gold price used is R400,000 per kilogram ($1,500 per ounce at an exchange rate of R8.29 to $1.00). The South Deep life of mine is estimated at 80 years.

- A range of discount rates of 3.2% - 5.8% based on a calculated weighted average cost of capital to Gold Fields;

- Expected future operating costs and capital expenditures to produce proven and probable gold reserves based on mine plans that assume current plant capacity, but exclude the impact of inflation; and

- Expected cash flows associated with value beyond proven and probable reserves.

 

F-32


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

12. NON-CURRENT INVESTMENTS

 

     December 31,
2012
     December 31,
2011
 

Listed investments (a)

     36.2         77.3   

Unlisted investments

     1.3         2.6   

Investments held by environmental trust funds (b)

     165.3         161.5   

Equity investees (c)

     254.4         28.2   

Other investments

     0.8         2.6   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 
     458.0         272.2   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

(a) Listed investments mainly consist of:

 

     December 31, 2012      December 31, 2011  
     Number of
shares
     Market value, $
per share
     Number of
shares
     Market value, $
per share
 

Northam Platinum

     7,820,169         4.55         7,820,169         3.75   

Radius Gold Incorporated

     3,625,124         0.22         3,625,124         0.23   

Gran Columbia Gold Corporation

     1,585,274         0.36         1,585,274         0.40   

Evolution Mining Limited

     —           —           15,535,016         1.62   

GoldQuest Mining Corporation

     —           —           13,962,500         0.08   

Atacama Pacific Gold Corporation

     —           —           4,945,598         3.79   

Details of the listed investments are as follows:

 

     December 31,
2012
    December 31,
2011
 

Fair value

     36.2        77.3   

Less: Cost

     24.8        68.4   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net unrealized gain

     11.4        8.9   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

The net gain comprises:

    

Gross unrealized gains

     11.7        15.2   

Gross unrealized losses

     (0.3     (6.3
  

 

 

   

 

 

 
     11.4        8.9   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

The gross unrealized loss comprises the following number of equity instruments none of which have been in a continuous unrealized loss position for more than 12 months:

     4        8   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Realized gain reclassified from equity on disposal of listed investments ($ million)

     14.7        12.8   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

(b) The environmental trust funds are irrevocable trusts under the Group’s control. The monies in the trusts are invested primarily in interest bearing short-term (money market), government and other corporate bond investments and the costs of these investments approximate their fair value. The investments provide for the estimated cost of rehabilitation during and at the end of the life of the Group’s South African mines. While the asset is under the Group’s control, it is not available for the general purposes of the Group. All income from this asset is reinvested or spent to meet these obligations. These obligations are described in note 15, “Provision for Environmental Rehabilitation”.

 

F-33


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

12. NON-CURRENT INVESTMENTS (continued)

 

(c) Equity investees comprise the following:

 

          Ownership %      Market value  

Investment

  

Description of business

   December 31,
2012
     December 31,
2011
     December 31,
2012
     December 31,
2011
 

Far South East

   Exploration      40.0         —           *         *   

Rusoro Mining Limited

   Gold mining      26.4         26.4         6.3         13.1   

Rand Refinery Limited

   Refining of gold bullion and by-products      34.9         34.9         *         *   

Timpetra Resources Limited

   Resource exploration      21.8         21.8         1.0         1.2   
* - Not readily determinable

Rusoro Mining Limited

The carrying value of the equity investment in Rusoro Mining Limited, or Rusoro:

 

 

     December 31,
2012
    December 31,
2011
 

Opening balance

     13.2        20.0   

Share of losses recognized (1)

     (13.4     —     

Impairment

     —          (6.8

Other comprehensive income

     0.2          
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Closing balance

            13.2   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

  (1) The results of Rusoro for the Gold Fields’ fiscal year ended December 31, 2012 are for the twelve months to September 2012 (December 31, 2011: nine months ended September 30, 2011).

Rusoro, a company listed on the TSX Venture Exchange, is a junior gold producer with a large land position in the Bolivar State gold region of southern Venezuela. Gold Fields’ interest in Rusoro remained unchanged at 26.4% at December 31, 2012 and 2011.

The Group acquired its interest in Rusoro on November 30, 2007.

Rand Refinery Limited

The carrying value of the equity investment in Rand Refinery Limited, or Rand Refinery:

 

     December 31,
2012
    December 31,
2011
 

Opening balance

     12.9        10.2   

Share of profits recognized

     12.0        5.0   

Translation

     (1.2     (2.3
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Closing balance

     23.7        12.9   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

During the fiscal years ended December 31, 2012 and 2011, the Company did not receive dividends from Rand Refinery. In the six months ended December 31, 2010, $5.4 million was received in dividends (fiscal year ended June 30, 2010: $ nil million).

Rand Refinery acts as a sale and refining agent on behalf of the Company’s African operations. The market value of the Company’s investment in Rand Refinery is not readily determinable.

 

F-34


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

12. NON-CURRENT INVESTMENTS (continued)

 

Far South East

Far South East Gold Resources Incorporated has a 31 December year end and has been equity accounted since April 1, 2012.

 

     December 31,
2012
    December 31,
2011
 

Gold Fields interest in FSE on December 31, 2012 was 40.0%.

    

Opening balance

     —          —     

Investment

     230.0        —     

Equity contribution

     50.1        —     

Share of losses recognized

     (50.1     —     
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Closing balance

     230.0        —     
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gold Fields paid US$10.0 million in option fees to Lepanto Consolidated Mining Company during the 6 months ended December 31, 2010. In addition, Gold Fields paid non-refundable down payments of US$66.0 million during the year ended December 31, 2011 and US$44.0 million during the 6 months ended December 31, 2010 to Liberty Express Assets in accordance with the agreement concluded whereby the Group has the option to acquire 60% of FSE. On March 31, 2012, Gold Fields acquired 40% of the issued share capital of FSE by contributing a further US$110.0 million in fiscal year ended December 31, 2012.

The remaining 20% option is not likely to be exercised until such time as FSE obtains a Foreign Technical Assistance Agreement which allows for direct majority foreign ownership and control.

 

13. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE AND PROVISIONS

 

     December 31,
2012
     December 31,
2011
 

Trade payables

     220.5         196.3   

Accruals

     352.0         301.1   

Payroll and other compensation

     57.8         67.5   

Leave pay accrual

     73.8         68.3   

Dividends payable

     —           3.0   

Short-term portion of the South Deep Dividend liability

     2.3         3.4   

Short term portion of deferred income and mining tax

     17.9         8.4   

Other

     27.6         21.9   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 
     751.9         669.9   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

F-35


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

14. SHORT-TERM AND LONG-TERM LOANS

 

       December 31,
2012
    December 31,
2011
 

Collateralized

    

- Split-tenor revolving credit facility (a)

     —          500.0   

- $500 million syndicated revolving credit facility (b)

     104.0        —     

- Preference shares (c)

     —          —     

- Scrip loan (d)

     —          —     

- Non-revolving Senior Secured Term Loan (e)

     110.0        150.0   

- $1 Billion Notes Issue (f)

     988.8        987.7   

- $1 Billion syndicated revolving credit facility (g)

     666.0        220.0   

- $60 million senior secured revolving credit facility (h)

     —          50.0   

Uncollateralized

    

- Domestic Medium Term Notes Program (i)

     —          —     

- Other loans (j)

     492.4        —     
  

 

 

   

 

 

 
     2,361.2        1,907.7   

Short-term loans and current portion of long-term loans *

     (40.0     (547.0
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total long-term loans

     2,321.2        1,360.7   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

  * - The maturity of the loans has been updated to reflect post year end refinancing terms.

(a) Split-tenor revolving credit facility

On May 16, 2007, Sibanye Gold, Orogen and GFO entered into a $750 million split-tenor revolving credit facility consisting of a $250 million 364-day revolving tranche with a twelve-month term out option, or Facility A, and a $500 million five-year revolving tranche, or Facility B.

On April 28, 2008, Gold Fields exercised the term out option under Facility A converting the full $250 million advance at that point into a term loan with a final maturity date of May 16, 2009. In terms of the facility agreement, Gold Fields had the option to repay the loan under Facility A early in whole or in part by giving five days’ prior notice. Facility B was due to mature on May 16, 2012. The purpose of the facilities was to refinance existing facilities and for general corporate purposes.

On June 30, 2008, Orogen had borrowed $73 million and $121 million under Facility A and Facility B, respectively. GFO had $177 million and $141 million outstanding under Facility A and Facility B, respectively, on the same date.

On various dates during fiscal 2009, Orogen drew down a further $120 million under Facility B. On May 15, 2009, GFO drew down $118 million under Facility B to partly refinance its maturing loan under Facility A. The balance of the GFO loan outstanding under Facility A of $59 million was refinanced with the $311 million syndicated revolving loan facility. Also on May 15, 2009, Orogen repaid $16 million of its portion of the maturing Facility A and refinanced the remaining $57 million with the $311 million syndicated revolving loan facility.

Facility A was repaid in full on May 15, 2009. On September 17, 2009, Gold Fields utilized $259 million of the proceeds from the sale of the shares in Eldorado Gold Corporation, or Eldorado, to fully settle GFO borrowings under facility B. Subsequently, on various dates, Orogen drew down $221 million to refinance

 

F-36


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

14. SHORT-TERM AND LONG-TERM LOANS (continued)

 

more expensive debt under the $311 million syndicated revolving loan facility. Orogen also repaid $32 million during the year.

On August 26, 2010, Orogen drew down a further $70 million and on October 8, 2010, repaid the full $500 million drawn under Facility B using proceeds of the $1 billion Notes issue. On March 22, 2011, Orogen drew down $420 million to fund the acquisition of the noncontrolling interests in La Cima. On May 26, 2011, Orogen repaid $40 million. On June 22, 2011, Orogen drew down $120 million under this facility to partially fund the acquisition of IAMGold’s 18.9% noncontrolling interests in the Ghanaian operations.

The loan under Facility B bore interest at LIBOR plus a margin of 0.30% per annum.

On April 16, 2012, Orogen refinanced the outstanding balance of $500.0 million under the facility by drawing down under the $1.0 billion syndicated revolving credit facility. The facility was cancelled on April 16, 2012.

The outstanding borrowings of Orogen, all under Facility B, at December 31, 2011 were $500 million.

Borrowings under the Revolving Credit Facility were guaranteed by Gold Fields, Sibanye Gold, Gold Fields Holding Company (BVI) Limited, or GF Holdings, Orogen, GFO and Newshelf 899 (Proprietary) Limited, or Newshelf.

 

     December 31,
2012
    December 31,
2011
 

Opening balance

     500.0        —     

Loans advanced, net of transaction costs

     —          540.0   

Loan repayments

     (500.0     (40.0
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Closing balance

     —          500.0   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

(b) $500 million syndicated revolving credit facility

On April 17, 2012, Sibanye Gold, Orogen and GFO entered into a $500 million syndicated revolving credit facility. The purpose of the facility was to refinance existing facilities, for general corporate purposes and working capital. The final maturity date of this facility was April 17, 2017.

The facility bore interest at LIBOR plus a margin of 1.60% per annum. Where the utilisation under the facility was less than or equal to 33  1 / 3 %, a utilisation fee of 0.20% per annum would be payable on the amount of utilisations. Where the utilisation under the facility was greater than 33  1 / 3 % and less than or equal to 66  2 / 3 %, a utilisation fee of 0.40% per annum would be payable on the amount of utilisations. Where the utilisation under the facility was greater than 66 2/3%, a utilisation fee of 0.60% per annum would be payable on the amount of utilisations. Such utilisation fee was payable quarterly in arrears. The borrowers were required to pay a quarterly commitment fee of 0.56% per annum.

On April 23, 2012, Orogen drew down $194.0 million under this facility to partially refinance borrowings under the $1 billion Syndicated Revolving Credit Facility. On June 1, 2012, Orogen drew down a further $20.0 million.

On July 25, 2012 and August 2, 2012, Orogen repaid $20.0 million and $20.0 million, respectively. On September 20, 2012, Orogen repaid a further $100.0 million. On November 23, 2012, Orogen drew down $10 million and on November 29, 2012, a further $20 million was drawn under the facility.

 

F-37


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

14. SHORT-TERM AND LONG-TERM LOANS (continued)

 

The outstanding borrowings under this facility at December 31, 2012 were $104.0 million.

Borrowings under the syndicated revolving loan facility were guaranteed by Gold Fields, Sibanye Gold, GF Holdings, Orogen, Newshelf and GFO.

Subsequent to year end, on February 15, 2013, this facility was refinanced by drawing down under the $1,440 million term loan and revolving credit facility as detailed in (j). The facility was also cancelled on February 15, 2013.

 

     December 31,
2012
    December 31,
2011
 

Opening balance

     —          —    

Loans advanced

     244.0        —    

Loan repayments

     (140.0     —    
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Closing balance

     104.0        —    
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

(c) Preference shares

On December 24, 2007 Gold Fields issued R1.2 billion of non-convertible redeemable preference shares, or the Preference Shares, to Rand Merchant Bank, or RMB, a division of First Rand Bank Limited. The dividend rate payable is a floating rate that increases from 22% to up to 61% of the prime lending rate quoted by First Rand Bank Limited, or the Prime Rate, over the life of the Preference Shares. In certain circumstances, the dividend rate increases to 61% of the Prime Rate in the event the Preference Shares are redeemed before their scheduled maturity date and the dividend rate is also subject to adjustment in the case of a change in law or regulation. Dividends accrue quarterly and are rolled up until the redemption date. The purpose of the Preference Shares was to refinance existing credit facilities.

On October 10, 2008, $61.0 million of the outstanding Preference Shares were repaid. In addition, a preference dividend of $2.5 million was also paid on the same date. On December 15, 2010, Gold Fields declared and paid $19.3 million of the preference dividend. On the same date, the redemption date of January 24, 2011 was extended to September 15, 2011. The Preference Shares were redeemable earlier on a date as agreed between the holder and Gold Fields. On March 31, 2011, Gold Fields redeemed the entire outstanding balance paying $90.0 million, which included a dividend of $1.5 million.

The Preference Shares were guaranteed by Sibanye Gold, Orogen, Newshelf, GF Holdings and GFO.

 

     December 31,
2012
     December 31,
2011
 

Opening balance

     —           91.4   

Preference share dividend

     —           1.3   

Redemptions

     —           (90.0

Other

     —           (2.3

Translation

     —           (0.4
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Closing balance

     —           —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

F-38


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

14. SHORT-TERM AND LONG-TERM LOANS (continued)

 

(d) Scrip loan

On March 26, 2010, GFL Mining Services, or GFLMS, entered into a Scrip Lending agreement with a South African Bank in terms of which GFLMS agreed to lend 3 million of its securities in Mvelaphanda for an initial cash collateral of $19.5 million (R144 million). The market value of the collateral delivered by the bank to GFLMS on each settlement date shall represent not less than the market value of the loaned securities on that date together with a margin of 5% per annum.

The agreement provides for the substantial risks and rewards on ownership inherent in the securities to be retained by GFLMS (i.e. equity price risk) and as a consequence, GFLMS has transferred the legal right to receive cash flows (dividends) on the securities loaned to the bank. The agreement was set to terminate on March 26, 2011. In the event of unbundling of the assets of Mvelaphanda before the termination date, the agreement would terminate within thirty days of unbundling and GFLMS would be entitled to receive the unbunbled assets.

Subsequent to December 31, 2010, Mvelaphanda unbundled certain of its assets and in accordance with the terms of the agreement the loaned unbundled securities were returned and the collateral was repaid on February 28, 2011. A new scrip lending agreement was entered into between the parties with the same terms and conditions as the original agreement whereby GFLMS agreed to lend another three million of its securities in Mvelaphanda for a cash collateral of R127 million ($18.8 million). The loaned securities were returned and the collateral was repaid on April 5, 2011 and the new agreement was cancelled on the same date.

Interest on the cash collateral held was calculated based on one month JIBAR rate and accrued daily and compounded monthly in arrears. The first interest settlement was on June 24, 2010. In terms of the agreement, the next interest payment date was on final settlement of the loan.

 

     December 31,
2012
     December 31,
2011
 

Opening balance

     —           21.4   

Interest

     —           0.3   

Loans advanced

     —           18.2   

Loans repaid

     —           (39.6

Translation

     —           (0.3
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Closing balance

     —           —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

(e) Non-revolving Senior Secured Term Loan

On September 17, 2010, La Cima entered into a non-revolving senior secured term loan for up to $200.0 million with The Bank of Nova Scotia and Banco de Credito del Peru. The purpose of this facility was to repay the Gold Fields outstanding subordinated loans with its affiliates and to finance its working capital requirements. The loan bears interest at LIBOR plus a margin of 2.00% per annum.

On September 22, 2010, the lenders advanced $200 million to La Cima under this facility. The facility amount is repayble in 20 equal quarterly instalments of $10 million each. During fiscal year ended December 31, 2012, $40 million was repaid (fiscal year ended December 31, 2011 $40 million; six months ended December 31, 2010: $10 million).

The final maturity of this facility is five years from the disbursement date.

The outstanding borrowings under this facility at December 31, 2012 were $110.0 million (December 31, 2011: $150.0 million).

 

F-39


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

14. SHORT-TERM AND LONG-TERM LOANS (continued)

 

Borrowings under the non-revolving senior secured term loan are secured by first-ranking assignments of all rights, title and interest in all of La Cima’s concentrate sale agreements. In addition, the offshore and onshore collection accounts of La Cima will be subject to an account control agreement and a first ranking charge in favor of the lenders. This facility will be non-recourse to the rest of the Group.

 

     December 31,
2012
    December 31,
2011
 

Opening balance

     150.0        190.0   

Loans repaid

     (40.0     (40.0
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Closing balance

     110.0        150.0   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

(f) $1 Billion Notes Issue

On September 30, 2010, Orogen issued $1,000,000,000 4.875% guaranteed notes due October 7, 2020, or the Notes. The payment of all Notes is unconditionally and irrevocably guaranteed by Gold Fields Limited, Sibanye Gold, GFO and GF Holdings, or together, the Guarantors, on joint and several basis. The Notes and guarantees constitute direct, unsubordinated and unsecured obligations of Orogen and the Guarantors, respectively, and rank equally in right of payment amoung themselves and with all other existing and future unsubordinated and unsecured obligations of Orogen and the Guarantors, respectively.

The transaction costs of $13.6 million were deducted from the liability on initial measurement. These costs will unwind over the period of the Notes as an interest expense.

Gold Fields used a portion of the net proceeds of the offering of the Notes to repay certain existing indebtedness of the Group and the balance of the net proceeds for general corporate purposes.

An indemnity agreement (“the Indemnity Agreement”) has been entered into between the Guarantors, pursuant to which the Guarantors (other than Sibanye Gold) hold Sibanye Gold harmless from and against any and all liabilities and expenses which may be incurred by Sibanye Gold under or in connection with the Notes, including any payment obligations by Sibanye Gold to the noteholders or the trustee of the Notes pursuant to the guarantee of the Notes, all on the terms and subject to the conditions contained therein. The Indemnity Agreement will remain in place for as long as Sibanye Gold’s guarantee obligations under the Notes remain in place.

 

     December 31,
2012
     December 31,
2011
 

Opening balance

     987.7         986.6   

Unwinding of transaction costs

     1.1         1.1   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Closing balance

     988.8         987.7   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

(g) $1 billion syndicated revolving credit facility

On June 20, 2011, Sibanye Gold, Orogen and GFO entered into a $1 billion syndicated revolving loan facility with an option to increase the Facility to $1.1 billion within six months from signing date, which option was not exercised. The purpose of the facility is to refinance an existing facility, for general corporate purposes and working capital. The final maturity date of this facility is June 20, 2016.

 

F-40


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

14. SHORT-TERM AND LONG-TERM LOANS (continued)

 

The facility bears interest at LIBOR plus a margin of 1.20% per annum. Where the utilization under the facility is greater than 33  1 / 3 % and less than or equal to 66  2 / 3 %, a utilization fee of 0.20% per annum will be payable on the amount of utilizations. Where the utilization under the facility is greater than 66  2 / 3 %, a utilization fee of 0.40% per annum will be payable on the amount of utilizations. Such utilization fee is payable quarterly in arrears. The borrowers are required to pay a quarterly commitment fee of 0.42% per annum.

On June 22, 2011, Orogen drew down $450.0 million under this facility to partially fund the acquisition of IAMGold’s 18.9% stake in the Ghanaian operations. On August 22, 2011 and September 22, 2011, Orogen repaid $75.0 million and $105.0 million, respectively under this facility. On November 16, 2011, Orogen drew down $33.0 million which was repaid on December 19, 2011. In addition, Orogen repaid $50.0 million on December 23, 2011 under this facility.

On March 15, 2012, Orogen drew down $110.0 million to fund the third payment to exercise the Group’s 40% option in the FSE project. On April 16, 2012, Orogen drew down $556.0 million of which $500.0 million was used to refinance the Split-tenor revolving credit facility. On April 23, 2012, Orogen repaid $220.0 million under this facility which was partially funded by drawing down $194.0 million under the $500 million syndicated revolving credit facility.

The outstanding borrowings under this facility at December 31, 2012 were $666.0 million (December 31, 2011: $220.0 million).

Borrowings under the syndicated revolving loan facility are guaranteed by Gold Fields, Sibanye Gold, GF Holdings, Orogen, Newshelf and GFO.

Subsequent to year end, on February 15, 2013, this facility was refinanced by drawing down under the $1,440 million term loan and revolving credit facility as detailed in (j). The facility was also cancelled on February 15, 2013.

 

     December 31,
2012
    December 31,
2011
 

Opening balance

     220.0        —     

Loans advanced

     666.0        483.0   

Repayments

     (220.0     (263.0

Translation

     —          —     
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Closing balance

     666.0        220.0   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

(h) $60 million senior secured revolving credit facility

On December 22, 2010, GF Ghana and Abosso entered into a $60 million reducing senior secured revolving credit facility, which became available on February 21, 2011. The available facility amount reduces annually on each anniversary date from $60 million to $43 million to $35 million in the last and final year with the final maturity date being February 21, 2014. The purpose of this facility is for general corporate purposes, working capital purposes and/or capital expenditure purposes, including the purchase of a yellow vehicle fleet.

The loan bears interest at LIBOR plus a margin of 2.85% per annum. The borrowers are required to pay a quarterly commitment fee of 1.30% per annum.

Borrowings under the facility are guaranteed by GF Ghana and Abosso and further secured by the registration of security over certain fleet vehicles owned by GF Ghana and Abosso, or the Secured Assets.

 

F-41


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

14. SHORT-TERM AND LONG-TERM LOANS (continued)

 

In addition, the lenders are noted as first loss payees under the insurance contracts in respect of the Secured Assets and are assigned the rights under the maintenance contracts between certain suppliers of the Secured Assets. This facility is non-recourse to the rest of the Group. On February 25, 2011, Abosso drew down $20.0 million under this facility and subsequently repaid the full loan on various dates of which the last payment was on July 26, 2011. On November 28, 2011, GF Ghana drew down $50.0 million.

On January 30, 2012, GF Ghana repaid $7.0 million in advance of the first anniversary date of the facility. During February 2012 and March 2012, GF Ghana repaid $16.0 million and on May 1, 2012 repaid an additional $7.0 million. On various dates during April 2012 Abosso drew down $15.0 million under the facility. On May 1, 2012 Abosso drew down an additional $8.0 million under the facility. On August 1, 2012, GF Ghana repaid $20 million and Abosso repaid $23 million bringing the balance outstanding under the facility to nil.

The outstanding borrowings for GF Ghana on December 31, 2012 were $nil million (December 31, 2011 were $50.0 million).

 

     December 31,
2012
    December 31,
2011
 

Opening balance

     50.0        —     

Loans advanced

     23.0        70.0   

Repayments

     (73.0     (20.0
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balance at close

     —          50.0   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

(i) Domestic Medium Term Notes Progam

On April 6, 2009, Gold Fields established a R10 billion domestic medium term notes program, or the Program, in terms of which Gold Fields may, from time to time, issue notes denominated in any currency. The notes will not be subject to any minimum and maximum maturity and the maximum aggregate nominal outstanding amount of all notes will not exceed R10 billion. The Program has been registered with the bond market of the JSE Limited, or the JSE, and the notes issued can be listed on the JSE or not.

On December 31, 2010, $108.9 million of listed notes were outstanding. Gold Fields settled the last listed maturing notes of $105.3 million in the year ended December 31, 2011. No notes were issued during the years ended December 31, 2012 and 2011.

Notes under the programme were guaranteed by Sibanye Gold, GF Holdings, Orogen and GFO.

The Programme was deregistered on December 14, 2012.

 

     December 31,
2012
     December 31,
2011
 

Opening balance

     —           108.9   

Settlements

     —           (105.3

Translation

     —           ( 3.6
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Balance at close

     —           —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

F-42


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

14. SHORT-TERM AND LONG-TERM LOANS (continued)

 

(j) Other loans

 

     December 31,
2012
    December 31,
2011
 
    

Opening balance

     —          —     

Loans advanced

     518.0        56.7   

Loans repaid

     ( 2.9     (56.7

Translation

     (22.7     —     
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Closing balance

     492.4        —     
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Short-term credit facilities: The Group utilized uncommitted loan facilities from some of the major banks to fund the capital expenditure and working capital requirements of the South African operations. The total draw downs were $152.0 million in fiscal year ended December 31, 2012 (fiscal year ended December 31, 2011: $56.7 million; six months ended December 31, 2010: $39.4 million). Total repayments were $2.9 million in fiscal year ended December 31, 2012 (fiscal year ended December 31, 2011: $56.7 million; six months ended December 31, 2010: $41.9 million).

These facilities have no fixed terms, are short-term in nature and interest rates are market related. Borrowings under these facilities are guaranteed by Gold Fields.

The outstanding borrowings of Sibanye Gold under these facilities at December 31, 2012 were $142.4 million (R1,220 million) and at December 31, 2011: $nil.

Subsequent to year end, on February 18, 2013, these facilities were refinanced by drawing down under the Rand bridge loan facilities as detailed below.

$450 million syndicated revolving credit facility : On May 12, 2010, Sibanye Gold, Orogen and GFO entered into a $450 million syndicated revolving loan facility with an option to increase the facility to $550 million within six months from signing date. The option to increase the facility to $550 million was not exercised. The purpose of the facilities was to refinance existing facilities, for general corporate purposes and working capital.

The facility bore interest at LIBOR plus a margin of 1.75% per annum. Where the utilization under the facility was equal to or greater than 50%, a utilization fee of 0.25% per annum would be payable on the amount of utilizations. Such utilization fee was payable quarterly in arrears. The borrowers were required to pay a quarterly commitment fee of 0.70% per annum.

Borrowings under these facilities were guaranteed by Gold Fields, GF Holdings, GFO, Orogen, Newshelf and Sibanye Gold.

This facility was unutilized at December 31, 2010. The final maturity of this facility was September 30, 2013. The facility was cancelled and replaced on June 22, 2011 with the new U.S.$1 billion revolving credit facility.

R3.5 billion long-term revolving credit facilities: Sibanye Gold and GFO (collectively “the borrowers”) entered into various revolving credit facilities with some of the major banks with tenors between three and five years. The purpose of the facilities was to finance capital expenditure, general corporate and working capital requirements and to refinance existing borrowings. The borrowers were required to pay a commitment fee of between 0.65% and 0.90% per annum on the undrawn and uncancelled amounts of the facilities, calculated and payable either quarterly or semi-annually in arrears.

 

F-43


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

14. SHORT-TERM AND LONG-TERM LOANS (continued)

 

In summary the facilities are:

- a R1.0 billion ($116.7 million) revolving credit facility entered into on December 9, 2009 and maturing June 30, 2013 at JIBAR plus 3.00%;

- a R500 million ($58.3 million ) revolving credit facility entered into on March 8, 2010 and maturing March 10, 2013 at JIBAR plus 2.85%;

- a R1.5 billion ($175.0 million) revolving credit facility entered into on May 6, 2009 and maturing June 10, 2014 at JIBAR plus 2.95%. This facility was cancelled and replaced with a new R2 .0 billion ($233.4 million) revolving credit facility on December 19, 2011; and

- a R2.0 billion ($233.4 million) revolving credit facility entered into on December 19, 2011 and maturing on December 17, 2016 at JIBAR plus 1.95%.

These facilities were unutilised during the year ended 31 December 2011.

On various dates during 2012, Sibanye Gold drew down R2.0 billion ($249.4 million) under the R2.0 billion revolving credit facility. On October 24, 2012, Sibanye Gold drew down R500.0 million ($58.3 million) under the R500.0 million revolving credit facility. On November 16, 2012, Sibanye Gold drew down a further R500.0 million ($58.3 million) under the R1.0 billion revolving credit facility.

The outstanding borrowings of Sibanye Gold under these facilities at December 31, 2012 were R3.0 billion (US$350.0 million) and at December 31, 2011: Rnil (US$nil).

Borrowings under these facilities were guaranteed by Gold Fields, GF Holdings, GFO, Orogen, Newshelf and Sibanye Gold.

Subsequent to year end, on February 18, 2013, these facilities were refinanced by drawing down under the Rand bridge loan facilities as detailed below. These facilities were also cancelled on February 18, 2013.

$1,440 million term loan and revolving credit facility : On November 28, 2012, Orogen, GFO and GFI Joint Venture Holdings (Pty) Limited (“GFIJVH”) (collectively “the Borrowers”) entered into a US$900 million term loan and revolving credit facility (“the US$900 million facility”). The $900 million facility comprises a $450 million three-year term loan tranche (“Facility A”) and a $450 million five-year revolving tranche (“Facility B”). In addition to the $900 million facility, Orogen, GFO and GFIJVH entered into a $600 million bridge loan to bond issue facility (“the US$ bridge facility”). The US$ bridge facility had a 21-month maturity.

The purpose of the $900 million facility is to refinance the existing $1 billion syndicated revolving credit facility and the $500 million syndicated revolving credit facility on the unbundling of Sibanye Gold in February 2013 and for general corporate and working capital purposes. The final maturity dates of Facility A and Facility B are November 28, 2015 and November 28, 2017, respectively, with the $ bridge facility maturing on August 28, 2014.

Subsequent to entering into the $900 million facility, the facility was syndicated to a wider bank group and received an oversubscription which allowed the Borrowers to increase the facility amount to $1,440 million on January 30, 2013 (“the $1,440 million facility). Accordingly, the amounts of Facility A and Facility B both increased to $720 million. As a result of this oversubscription, the Borrowers cancelled the $ bridge facility on January 30, 2013.

Borrowings under Facility A bear interest at LIBOR plus an initial margin of 2.45% per annum while borrowings under Facility B bear interest at LIBOR plus an initial margin of 2.25% per annum. The initial

 

F-44


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

14. SHORT-TERM AND LONG-TERM LOANS (continued)

 

margins detailed above are based on the current long term credit rating assigned to Gold Fields and could either increase or decrease depending on the changes in the long term credit rating of Gold Fields.

Where the utilization under Facility B is less than or equal to 33  1 / 3 %, a utilization fee of 0.20% per annum will be payable on the amount of utilizations. Where the utilization under Facility B is greater than 33  1 / 3 % and less than or equal to 66  2 / 3 %, a utilization fee of 0.40% per annum will be payable on the amount of utilizations. Where the utilization under Facility B is greater than 66  2 / 3 %, a utilization fee of 0.60% per annum will be payable on the amount of utilizations. Such utilization fee is payable quarterly in arrears. The borrowers are required to pay a quarterly commitment fee of 0.90% per annum under Facility B.

The facility was undrawn at December 31, 2012.

Subsequent to year end, on February 15, 2013, the $1 billion and the $500 million syndicated revolving credit facilities were refinanced by drawing down under this facility.

Borrowings under the $1,440 million facility are guaranteed by Gold Fields, GF Holdings, Orogen, GFO and GFIJVH.

Rand bridge loan facilities : On November 28, 2012, Sibanye Gold entered into a R6.0 billion ($700.1 million) term loan and revolving credit facilities reducing to R5.0 billion ($583.4 million) as detailed below. The facilities comprise of a R2.0 billion ($233.4 million) revolving credit facility and a R4.0 billion ($466.7 million) term loan facility. The available revolving credit facility amount will reduce from R2.0 billion ($233.4 million) to R1.5 billion ($175.0 million) on the earliest of the date on which Sibanye Gold’s Board of Directors declares a final dividend in respect of the financial year ending December 2013 or the first anniversary of the Spin-Off (February 18, 2014). Similarly, the term loan facility amount will reduce from R4.0 billion ($466.7 million) to R3.5 billion ($408.4 million) on the earliest of the date on which Sibanye Gold’s Board of Directors declares a final dividend in respect of the financial year ending December 2013 or the first anniversary of the Spin-Off. The final maturity date of the facilities is 18 months after the Spin-Off (August 18, 2014).

The purpose of the Rand bridge loan facilities is to refinance Sibanye Gold’s debt as detailed above under the other rand long-term revolving credit facilities and the other rand short-term credit facilities on Spin-Off, with the balance of the Rand bridge loan facilities to be used to fund Sibanye Gold’s ongoing capital expenditure, working capital and general corporate expenditure requirements.

Sibanye Gold will cede all of its rights, title and interest in and to the Indemnity Agreement in favour of the lenders of the Rand bridge loan facility, jointly and severally, as security for its obligations under the facilities. Sibanye Gold must lodge and register a security package for its obligations under the facilities within six months from the Spin-Off if it is not released as a guarantor under the Notes (refer note 14(f)) at such point in time. The Indemnity Agreement is discussed in note 14(f).

The Rand bridge loan facilities bear interest at JIBAR plus a margin of 3.00% per annum for 12 months after the Spin-Off and 3.50% per annum for the last six months of the facilities. If Sibanye Gold is not released as a guarantor under the Notes within six months from Spin-Off, the margin will increase to 3.25% per annum for the six to 12 months period after Spin-Off and 3.75% per annum for the last six months of the facilities. Sibanye Gold is required to pay a quarterly commitment fee of 35% of the applicable margin per annum calculated on the undrawn portion of the facilities.

The facilities were undrawn at December 31, 2012.

Subsequent to year end, on February 18, 2013, the rand revolving credit facilities and the short-term rand credit facilities were refinanced by drawing down under these facilities.

 

F-45


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

14. SHORT-TERM AND LONG-TERM LOANS (continued)

 

R1,500 million Nedbank Revolving Credit Facility : On March 1, 2013, Nedbank, GFIJVH and GFO entered into a R1,500 million Revolving Credit Facility. The purpose of the facility is to fund Gold Fields’ capital expenditure and general corporate and working capital requirements. The final maturity date of this facility is March 7, 2018.

The facility bears interest at JIBAR plus a margin of 2.50% per annum. The borrowers are required to pay a commitment fee of 0.85% per annum every six months.

On March 8, 2013, each of GFO and GFIJVH drew down R350.0 million under this facility.

Borrowings under the facility are guaranteed by Gold Fields, GFO, GFH, Orogen and GFIJVH.

Debt maturity ladder

The combined aggregate maturities of short and long-term loans for each of the next five years at December 31, 2012 is tabulated below:

 

Maturity

   December 31,
2012
     December 31,
2011
 

1 year

     40.0         547.0   

2 years

     532.4         48.0   

3 years

     750.0         75.0   

4 years

     50.0         30.0   

5 years and thereafter

     1,000.0         1,207.7   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 
     2,372.4         1,907.7   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

At December 31, 2012, the Group was in compliance with its debt covenants.

$142.4 has been reclassified to long-term, even though they are considered short-term under the Short-term Rand facilities (j) as the Group refinanced these facilities as detailed in the Rand bridge loan facilities on February 18, 2013.

 

15. PROVISION FOR ENVIRONMENTAL REHABILITATION

The Group has made, and expects to make in the future, expenditures to comply with environmental laws and regulations, but cannot predict the full amount of such future expenditures. Estimated future reclamation costs are based principally on legal and regulatory requirements. The following is a reconciliation of the total liability for environmental rehabilitation:

 

     December 31,
2012
    December 31,
2011
 

Provision for environmental rehabilitation

    

Opening balance

     336.9        324.4   

Addition to liabilities

     18.1        18.7   

Liabilities settled

     (2.7     (1.7

Accretion of liability

     28.2        24.9   

Foreign currency translation adjustment

     (6.9     (29.4
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balance at close

     373.6        336.9   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

The Group intends to finance the ultimate rehabilitation costs of the South African operations from the monies invested with the environmental trust fund (see Note 12(b)) and ongoing contributions, as well as the proceeds of the sale of assets and gold from plant clean-up at the time of mine closure.

 

F-46


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

16. PROVISION FOR POST-RETIREMENT HEALTH CARE COSTS

 

     December 31,
2012
     December 31,
2011
 

Gold Fields Group (excluding South Deep) accrued post-retirement health care costs (a)

     2.1         2.1   

South Deep accrued post-retirement health care costs (b)

     —           —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Gold Fields Group accrued post-retirement health care costs

     2.1         2.1   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

The Group is exposed to obligations for post-retirement health care costs under the Group health care scheme. In the case of the South Deep health care scheme, the exposure was up to December 31, 2011.

 

(a) Group (excluding South Deep) accrued post-retirement health care costs

The Group has certain liabilities to subsidize the contributions payable by certain pensioners and dependants of ex-employees on a pay-as-you-go basis. The Group’s contributions to these schemes on behalf of current and retired employees amounted to $0.1 million in fiscal 2012 (fiscal year ended December 31, 2011: $0.2 million; six months ended December 31, 2010: $0.5 million, fiscal year ended June 30, 2010: $0.2 million). The obligation has been actuarially valued at December 31, 2012 and the outstanding contributions will be funded over the lifetime of these pensioners and dependants.

The following table sets forth the funded status and amounts recognized by the Group (excluding South Deep) for post-retirement health care costs:

 

     December 31,
2012
    December 31,
2011
 

Actuarial present value

     2.1        2.1   

Plan assets at fair value

     —          —     
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Accumulated benefit obligation in excess of plan assets

     2.1        2.1   

Prior service costs

     —          —     

Unrecognized net (gain)/loss

     —          —     
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Post-retirement health care liability

     2.1        2.1   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

The following is a reconciliation of the benefit obligation:

    

Balance at beginning of year

     2.1        2.6   

Service costs

     0.2        0.1   

Contributions paid

     (0.1     (0.2

Foreign currency translation adjustment

     (0.1     (0.4
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balance at end of year

     2.1        2.1   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-47


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

16. PROVISION FOR POST-RETIREMENT HEALTH CARE COSTS (continued)

 

The obligation has been valued using the projected unit credit funding method on past service liabilities. The valuation assumes a health care cost inflation rate of 7.5% per annum (December 31, 2011: 8.0%) and a discount rate of 8.0% per annum (December 31, 2011: 8.75%).

 

     December 31,
2012
     December 31,
2011
     December 31,
2010
    June 30,
2010
 

The net periodic benefit cost is explained as follows:

          

Service costs

     0.2         0.1         (0.1     0.9   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net periodic benefit cost

     0.2         0.1         (0.1     0.9   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Assumed health care cost trend rates have a significant effect on the amounts reported for the health care plans. A one percentage point increase in assumed health care cost trend rates would have increased the aggregate of service and interest cost for the fiscal ended December 31, 2012 by $0.02 million (fiscal year ended December 31, 2011: $0.03 million; six months ended December 31, 2010: $0.01 million, fiscal year ended June 30, 2010: $0.1 million). The effect of this change on the accumulated post-retirement health care benefit obligation at December 31, 2012 would be an increase of $0.2 million (fiscal year ended December 31, 2011: $0.2 million). A one percentage point decrease in assumed health care cost trend rates would have decreased the aggregate of service and interest cost for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2012 by $0.01 million (fiscal year ended December 31, 2011: $0.01 million; six months ended December 31, 2010: $0.01 million, fiscal year ended June 30, 2010: $0.01 million). The effect of this change on the accumulated post-retirement health care benefit obligation at December 31, 2012 would be a decrease of $0.2 million (fiscal year ended December 31, 2011: $0.2 million).

 

(b) South Deep accrued post-retirement health care costs

As part of the acquisition of South Deep, the post-retirement health care cost liability was assumed. The Group has certain liabilities to provide fixed monthly post-retirement medical benefits to certain pensioners and dependents of ex-employees. The Group’s contributions to these schemes on behalf of current and retired employees amounted to $nil million (fiscal year ended December 31, 2011: $0.1 million; six months ended December 31, 2010: $0.1 million; fiscal year ended June 30, 2010: $0.1 million). The obligation was actuarially valued at December 31, 2011 and the outstanding contributions were funded until December 31, 2011, when the obligation was extinguished.

 

17. EMPLOYEE BENEFIT PLANS

Retirement benefits

Contributions to the various retirement schemes are fully expensed during the year in which they are incurred. The cost of providing retirement benefits for the Company’s defined contribution plans for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2012 is $92.8 million (fiscal year ended December 31, 2011: $87.8 million; six months ended December 31, 2010: $43.0 million; fiscal year ended June 30, 2010: $76.0 million).

Share option schemes

The Company currently maintains the Gold Fields Limited 2012 Share Plan. The Company also maintains prior stock plans (the Gold Fields Limited 2005 Share Plan, the Gold Fields Limited 2005 Non-Executive

 

F-48


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

17. EMPLOYEE BENEFIT PLANS (continued)

 

Share Plan, the GF Management Incentive Scheme and the GF Non-Executive Director Share Plan), but no longer grants awards under these plans. The details of these Plans are discussed below.

The charge for share-based compensation has been recognized in the statement of operations under the captions production costs, corporate expenditure, exploration expenditure and other expenses. The cost for fiscal year ended December 31, 2012 is $77.7 million (fiscal year ended December 31, 2011: $66.4 million; six months ended December 31, 2010: $27.0 million and fiscal year ended June 30, 2010: $53.9 million).

The Gold Fields Limited 2012 Share Plan: At the annual general meeting on 14 May 2012 shareholders approved the adoption of the Gold Fields Limited 2012 Share Plan to replace the Gold Fields Limited 2005 Share Plan. The plan provides for two methods of participation, namely the Performance Share Method (“PS”) and the Bonus Share Method (“BS”). This plan seeks to attract, retain, motivate and reward participating employees on a basis which seeks to align the interests of such employees with those of the Company’s shareholders.

The salient features of the plan are:

- PS are offered to participants annually in March. Quarterly allocations of PS are also made in June, September and December on a pro-rata basis to qualifying new employees. PS are performance-related shares, granted at zero cost (the shares are granted in exchange for the rendering of service by participants to the Company during the three-year restricted period prior to the share vesting period);

- based on the rules of the plan, the actual number of PS which would be settled to a participant three years after the original award date is determined by the company’s performance measured against the performance of seven other major gold mining companies (“the peer group”) based on the relative change in the Gold Fields share price compared to the basket of respective US Dollar share prices of the peer group. Furthermore, for PS awards to be settled to members of the Executive Committee, an internal company performance target is required to be met before the external relative measure is applied. The internal target performance criterion has been set at 85% of the company’s planned gold production over the three-year measurement period as set out in the business plans of the company approved by the Board. In the event that the internal target performance criterion is met the full initial target award shall be settled on the settlement date. In addition, the Remuneration Committee has determined that the number of PS to be settled may be increased by up to 200% of the number of the initial target PS conditionally awarded, depending on the performance of the company relative to the performance of the peer group, based on the relative change in the Gold Fields share price compared to the basket of respective US Dollar share prices of the peer group;

- the performance of the Company that will result in the settlement of shares is to be measured by the Company’s share price performance relative to the share price performance of a peer group of gold mining companies, over the three year period;

- BS are offered to participants annually in March; and

- based on the rules of the plan, the actual number of BS which would be settled to a participant in two equal tranches over a 9-month and an 18-month period after the original award date is determined by the employee’s annual cash bonus calculated with reference to actual performance against predetermined targets for the financial year ended immediately preceding the award date.

 

F-49


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

17. EMPLOYEE BENEFIT PLANS (continued)

 

Details of the Performance shares and Bonus shares granted under this Plan are as follows:

 

     Number of
Performance
shares
    Number of
Bonus
shares
 

Outstanding at December 31, 2011

     —          —     

Granted during the year

     4,511,700        1,368,423   

Exercised and released

     —          (528,392

Forfeited

     (249,530     (47,655
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Outstanding at December 31, 2012

     4,262,170        792,376   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

None of the options above have vested at year end.

The Group uses the Monte-Carlo Simulation to value the Performance Shares. The inputs to the model for awards granted during the period were as follows:

 

     2012  

Weighted average historical volatility (based on a statistical analysis of the share price on a weighted moving average basis for the expected term of the option)

     36.4

Expected term (years)

     3.00   

Historical dividend yield

     1.60

Weighted average three year risk free interest rate (based on US interest rates)

     0.70

Weighted average fair value - Rand

     R 162.14   

A future trading model is used to estimate the loss in value to the holders of Bonus Shares due to trading restrictions. The actual valuation is developed using a Monte-Carlo analysis of the future share price of Gold Fields:

 

Weighted average historical volatility (based on a statistical analysis of the share price on a weighted moving average basis for the expected term of the option)

     29.4

Expected term (months)

     9 - 18   

Historical dividend yield

     2.70

Weighted average three year risk free interest rate (based on SA interest rates)

     5.50

Marketability discount

     1.6

Weighted average fair value - Rand

     R 115.61   

A marketability discount is applied to the bonus shares valuation as the shares are granted upfront.

The Gold Fields Limited 2005 Share Plan: At Gold Fields’ annual general meeting held on November 17, 2005, the shareholders approved The Gold Fields Limited 2005 Share Plan, or the 2005 Plan, under which employees, including executive directors, would be compensated going forward.

The 2005 Plan provided for two types of awards: performance vesting restricted shares, or PVRS, and performance allocated share appreciation rights, or SARS. The PVRS will only be released to participants and the SARS will vest three years after the date of the award and/or allocation of such shares. However, in respect of the PVRS, Company performance criteria need to be met in respect of awards to executives. The size of the initial allocation of SARS and PVRS was dependent on the performance of the participant at the time of allocation. The allocations under The 2005 Plan were usually made annually in March.

 

F-50


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

17. EMPLOYEE BENEFIT PLANS (continued)

 

No further allocations of options under this plan are being made in view of the introduction of the Gold Fields Limited 2012 Share Plan (see above) and the plan will be closed once all options have been exercised or forfeited. Currently the last date of expiry of SARS is December 1, 2017.

Details of the PVRS and SARS granted under this Plan are as follows:

 

     Number of PVRS     Number of SARS     Average price  
         Rand      $  

Outstanding at June 30, 2009

     6,831,964        4,609,626        111.50         13.83   

Granted during the year

     3,177,552        1,564,217        90.84         11.98   

Exercised and released

     (341,309     —          —           —     

Forfeited

     (619,793     (513,571     109.40         14.43   

Conditions for vesting not met

     (609,751     —          —           —     
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Outstanding at June 30, 2010

     8,438,663        5,660,272        106.00         14.00   

Granted during the period

     381,115        307,070        103.66         14.52   

Exercised and released

     (355,779     (13,329     103.07         14.44   

Forfeited

     (753,918     (683,416     104.01         14.57   

Conditions for vesting not met

     (60,000     —          —           —     
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Outstanding at December 31, 2010

     7,650,081        5,270,597        105.53         15.63   

Granted during the period

     3,165,342        1,638,484        119.17         16.51   

Exercised and released

     (2,559,552     (1,247,317     111.06         15.38   

Forfeited

     (886,759     (631,621     110.69         15.33   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Outstanding at December 31, 2011

     7,369,112        5,030,143        107.91         13.27   

Exercised and released

     (1,798,082     (259,455     106.36         12.99   

Forfeited

     (584,814     (451,779     117.14         14.30   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Outstanding at December 31, 2012

     4,986,216        4,318,909        107.37         12.53   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

In terms of the 2005 Plan rules, PVRS are granted for no consideration, vest after three years from grant date and do not expire. None of the PVRS granted during fiscal year ended December 31, 2011 and the six months ended December 31, 2010 were exercisable on December 31, 2012.

At the time the 2005 Plan was first implemented, the release of PVRS was subject to, among other things, the Group’s relative performance on the Philadelphia XAU Index, or the XAU Index. In fiscal year ended June 30, 2008, it became evident that the XAU Index was not representative of Gold Fields’ peer competitors, as some of the companies in the XAU Index are not pure gold mining companies. Furthermore, since the selection of the XAU Index as a benchmark, a number of relatively small gold producers have been included in the XAU Index and again these cannot be regarded as representative of Gold Fields’ peer competitors. Accordingly instead of using the XAU Index, Gold Fields’ performance is therefore measured against only five gold mining companies whom it believes can be regarded as its peer competitors.

During the year ended December 31, 2012, some share appreciation rights’ expiry dates were extended to enable participants who were disadvantaged due to the closed period to be placed in an equitable position. The incremental fair value of the modifications were $nil. No share options were extended during the year ended December 31, 2011.

 

F-51


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

17. EMPLOYEE BENEFIT PLANS (continued)

 

The following executive directors were affected by the modification:

 

     Number of
options
     Average
instrument price
(cps) R
     Average
instrument
price (cps) $
     Contractual
life extended
by (years)
 

NJ Holland

     49,000         109.66         12.80         0.06   

PA Schmidt

     43,310         108.67         12.68         0.06   

In terms of the 2005 Plan rules, SARS currently expire no later than six years from the grant date and vest three years after grant date. No SARS granted during the fiscal year ended December 31, 2011 and the six months ended December 31, 2010 were exercisable on December 31, 2012. The average exercise price for SARS outstanding at December 31, 2012 was R107.37 ($12.53).

The following tables summarize information relating to the options outstanding at December 31, 2012.

 

     Outstanding options  
     Price range      Number of
options
     Contractual
life
     Weighted average
exercise price
 
     Rand      $         (in years)      Rand      $  

Range of prices

     60.00 - 84.99         7.00 - 9.92         3,400         1.95         69.48         8.11   
     85.00 - 109.99         9.93 - 12.83         2,625,234         2.52         99.45         11.60   
     110.00 - 134.99         12.84 - 15.75         1,652,471         3.72         119.65         13.96   
     135.00 - 159.99         15.76 - 18.67         37,804         5.01         136.29         15.90   
        

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

           4,318,909         3.00         107.48         12.53   
        

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

The PVRS have not been included in the table above as they do not have an expiry date and are granted for no consideration.

GF Management Incentive Scheme: Prior to approval of The 2005 Plan, share options were available to executive officers and other employees, as determined by the Board of Directors under The GF Management Incentive Scheme. Options to purchase a total of 75,500 ordinary shares were outstanding under The GF Management Incentive Scheme as of December 31, 2012, none of which were held by the executive directors of Gold Fields. The exercise prices of all outstanding options range between Rand 63.65 and Rand 140.66 per ordinary share and they expire between December 21, 2012 and July 2, 2013. The exercise price of each ordinary share which is the subject of an option is the weighted average price of the ordinary shares on the JSE on the day immediately preceding the date on which the Board of Directors resolved to grant the option.

Each option may normally only be exercised by a participant on the following bases: (1) after two years have elapsed from the date on which the option was accepted by the participant, in respect of not more than one-third of the ordinary shares which are the subject of that option; (2) after three years have elapsed from the date on which the option was accepted by the participant, in respect of not more than a further one-third (representing two-thirds cumulatively) of the ordinary shares which are the subject of that option; and (3) after four years have elapsed from the date on which the option was accepted by the participant, in respect of all the ordinary shares which are the subject of that option, subject to revision by the Board of Directors. For so long as a person continues to work for Gold Fields, options lapse seven years after the date of acceptance of the option by the participant. Options vest as soon as they are exercisable, and employees who leave Gold Fields have one year following their departure to exercise options which have vested.

 

F-52


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

17. EMPLOYEE BENEFIT PLANS (continued)

 

Options which are not yet exercisable are forfeited upon leaving employment, subject to exceptions relating to changes in control of Gold Fields and no fault termination of service as part of organizational restructuring.

The share option scheme may be amended from time to time by the Board of Directors and the trustees of the scheme in any respect (except in relation to amendments affecting: (1) the eligibility of participants under the scheme; (2) the formula for calculating the total number of ordinary shares which may be issued under the scheme; (3) the maximum number of options which may be acquired by any participant; (4) the option price formula; and (5) the voting, dividend and transfer rights attaching to options, which may only be amended through approval in a general meeting), provided that no such amendment shall operate to affect the vested rights of any participant.

The first allocations were made under The 2005 Plan in March 2006 and no further allocations will be made under The GF Management Incentive Scheme from that date. A total of 5% of the Company’s issued ordinary share capital, being 35,309,563 shares as of December 31, 2012, is reserved for issuance under all the prevailing share schemes described above. This percentage may only be amended with the approval of shareholders in general meeting and the JSE.

For the convenience of the reader, the Rand amounts have been converted to U.S. dollars at the balance sheet rates for the respective fiscal years.

Details of the options granted under the GF Management Incentive Scheme are as follows:

 

     Number of
Options
    Average option price  
       Rand      $  

Outstanding at June 30, 2009

     2,304,421        77.20         9.58   

Exercised and released

     (778,172     74.62         9.84   

Forfeited

     (173,616     97.01         12.80   
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Outstanding at June 30, 2010

     1,352,633        76.15         10.06   

Exercised and released

     (348,430     75.40         10.56   

Forfeited

     (27,670     96.06         13.45   
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Outstanding at December 31, 2010

     976,533        75.85         11.24   

Exercised and released

     (614,340     72.33         10.02   

Forfeited

     (50,968     118.63         16.43   
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Outstanding at December 31, 2011

     311,225        73.48         9.04   

Exercised and released

     (204,570     68.60         8.38   

Forfeited

     (31,155     73.91         9.02   
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Outstanding at December 31, 2012

     75,500        86.51         10.09   
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

In terms of the GF Management Incentive Scheme rules, options currently expire no later than seven years from the grant date and vest as follows: upon the second anniversary of the grant date, a third of the total option grant vests, and then annually upon future anniversaries of the grant date, a further third of the total option grant vests. Proceeds received by the Company from the exercise of options are credited to common stock and additional paid-in capital. All of the outstanding options under this Scheme have vested and are

 

F-53


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

17. EMPLOYEE BENEFIT PLANS (continued)

 

therefore exercisable. The range of exercise prices for options outstanding at December 31, 2012 was R63.65 to R140.66. The range of exercise prices for options is wide primarily due to the fluctuation of the price of the Company’s stock over the period of the grants.

No further allocations are being made under the GF Management Incentive Scheme in view of the Gold Fields Limited 2005 Share Plan. However, during the six months ended December 31, 2010 and fiscal years ended December 31, 2012 and June 30, 2010 some share option expiry dates were extended to enable participants who were disadvantaged due to closed periods to be placed in an equitable position. The incremental fair value of the modification was accounted for in each respective period.

The following tables summarize information relating to the options outstanding at December 31, 2012:

 

                   Outstanding and exercisable options  
                   Number of
options
     Contractual life
(in years)
     Weighted average
exercise price
 
     Rand      $            Rand      $  

Range of prices

     60.00 - 84.99         7.00 - 9.92         34,500         0.36         66.07         7.71   
     85.00 - 109.99         9.93 - 12.83         21,800         0.53         89.80         10.48   
     110.00 - 134.99         12.84 - 15.75         14,000         0.04         111.66         13.03   
     135.00 - 159.99         15.76 - 18.67         5,200         0.17         140.66         16.41   
        

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

           75,500         0.33         86.51         10.09   
        

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

These options will expire if not exercised at specific dates ranging from December 21, 2012 to July 2, 2013. Market prices of shares for which options were exercised during the fiscal year ended December 31, 2012 ranged from R97.00 to R127.80.

The Gold Fields Limited 2005 Non-Executive Director Share Plan: At Gold Fields’ annual general meeting held on November 17, 2005, the shareholders approved The Gold Fields Limited 2005 Non-Executive Share Plan, or The 2005 Non-Executive Plan. Participants in The 2005 Non-Executive Plan are non-executive directors of Gold Fields who are not members of the Non-Executive Directors Remuneration Committee, which is a committee comprising external independent remuneration advisors. The Plan provides for the release of restricted shares awarded to the non-executive directors three years after the date of the award, provided that the non-executive director is not removed, disqualified or forced to resign from the Board of Directors during that period. No consideration is payable for the grant of an award of restricted shares.

Consistent with the King III Report on Corporate Governance and the JSE Listings Requirements, the Board recommended to the shareholders that the practice of awarding of rights under the Gold Fields Limited 2005 Non-executive Share Plan Scheme be immediately discontinued. Allocations awarded before April 1, 2010 vested according to the rules of the plan. The last vesting took place in November 2012 and the scheme will be closed.

 

F-54


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

17. EMPLOYEE BENEFIT PLANS (continued)

 

Details of the restricted shares granted under this Plan are as follows:

 

     No. of restricted
shares
 

Outstanding at June 30, 2009

     100,200   

Granted during the year

     47,300   

Exercised and released

     (11,622
  

 

 

 

Outstanding at June 30, 2010

     135,878   

Exercised and released

     (37,000
  

 

 

 

Outstanding at December 31, 2010

     98,878   

Exercised and released

     (56,978
  

 

 

 

Outstanding at December 31, 2011

     41,900   

Exercised and released

     (29,600
  

 

 

 

Outstanding at December 31, 2012

     12,300   
  

 

 

 

The restricted shares have not been split per range as they do not have an expiry date and are granted for no consideration.

During fiscal 2008, the terms of the restricted shares granted to non-executive directors were modified in the same way as the PVRS granted under the Gold Fields Limited 2005 Share Plan. The incremental fair value resulting from the modification amounted to $0.5 million and was expensed over the remaining life of the restricted shares.

The GF Non-Executive Director Share Plan: Prior to the approval of The 2005 Non-Executive Plan, share options were available to non-executive directors selected by the Non-Executive Directors Remuneration Committee. No member of the Non-Executive Directors Remuneration Committee could be a participant in The GF Non-Executive Director Share Plan. The GF Non-Executive Director Share Plan was adopted at the annual general meeting of shareholders on October 31, 2001. The exercise price of each ordinary share which is the subject of an option is the weighted average price of the ordinary shares on the JSE on the day immediately preceding the date on which the Non-Executive Directors Remuneration Committee resolves to grant the option.

Under The GF Non-Executive Director Share Plan, all options granted may only be exercised no less than 12 months and no more than five years after the date on which the option was accepted by the participant.

If an option holder ceases to hold office for any reason, he will be entitled within 30 days to exercise share options which he was entitled to exercise immediately prior to his ceasing to hold office, failing which the options shall automatically lapse. The share option plan may be amended from time to time by the Non-Executive Directors Remuneration Committee in any respect, except in relation to: (1) the eligibility of participants under the plan; (2) the formula for calculating the total number of ordinary shares which may be acquired pursuant to the plan; (3) the maximum number of options which may be acquired by any participant; (4) the price payable by participants; and (5) the voting, dividend and transfer rights attaching to options, which may only be amended through approval by the shareholders in a general meeting and by the JSE.

There were no outstanding options granted under this plan at December 31, 2011 and 2012.

 

F-55


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

17. EMPLOYEE BENEFIT PLANS (continued)

 

Following the approval of The 2005 Non-Executive Plan at the Annual General Meeting held on November 17, 2005 and the approval of the first allocations under that Plan at that meeting, no further allocations will be made under The GF Non-Executive Director Share Plan.

The following tables summarize information relating to the options outstanding at December 31, 2011 and 2012. For the convenience of the reader, the Rand amounts have been converted to U.S. dollars at the balance sheet rates for the respective fiscal years.

Details of the Plan are as follows:

 

     Number of
Options
    Average option price  
       Rand      $  

Outstanding as of June 30, 2009

     81,700        88.54         10.99   
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Outstanding as of June 30, 2010

     81,700        88.54         11.70   

Exercised and released

     (20,000     78.49         10.99   

Forfeited

     (25,000     110.03         15.41   
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Outstanding as of December 31, 2010

     36,700        79.37         11.76   

Exercised and released

     (36,700     79.37         10.99   
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Outstanding as of December 31, 2011 and 2012

     —          —           —     
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

There were no options outstanding under the GF Non-Executive Director Share Plan as of December 31, 2011 and 2012.

The compensation cost related to awards not yet recognized in the statement of operations under all schemes amounts to $96.7 million and is to be spread over three years.

 

F-56


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

17. EMPLOYEE BENEFIT PLANS (continued)

 

The Group used the Black Scholes Model to value the SARS under the Gold Fields 2005 Share Plan. The inputs to the model for awards granted during the period were as follows:

 

    Fiscal Year Ended
December 31,
    Fiscal Year Ended
December 31,
    Six Months Ended
December 31,
    Fiscal Year Ended
June 30,
 
    2012     2011     2010     2010  

Weighted average exercise price - Rand

    —          119.17        93.89        90.84   

Weighted average expected volatility (based on a statistical analysis of the share price on a weighted moving average basis for the expected term of the option)

    —          46.4     50.2     52.0

Expected term (years)

    —          5.90        3.0 - 4.2        3.0 - 4.2   

Long-term expected dividend yield

    —          1.70     1.00     1.00

Weighted average risk free interest rate

    —          6.90     6.90     7.90

Weighted average fair value - Rand

    —          51.66        55.06        43.82   

The Group used the Monte-Carlo Simulation to value the PVRS under the Gold Fields 2005 Share Plan and the Gold Fields Limited 2005 Non-executive Director Share Plan. The inputs to the model for awards granted during the year were as follows:

 

    Fiscal Year Ended
December 31,
    Fiscal Year Ended
December 31,
    Six Months Ended
December 31,
    Fiscal Year Ended
June 30,
 
    2012     2011     2010     2010  

Weighted average expected volatility (based on a statistical analysis of the share price on a weighted moving average basis for the expected term of the option)

    —          64.1     50.1     50.4

Expected term (years)

    —          3.0        3.0        3.0   

Historical dividend yield

    —          1.70     1.90     1.40

Weighted average risk free interest rate (based on U.S. interest rate)

    —          0.20     0.20     0.20

Weighted average fair value - Rand

    —          206.27        191.38        155.78   

 

(c) South African Equity Empowerment Transactions

The South African Mining Charter requires mining entities to achieve a 26% ownership of South African mining assets by historically disadvantaged South Africans, or HDSA, by the year 2014.

In fiscal year ended June 30, 2004, Gold Fields implemented its first 15% Black Economic Empowerment, or BEE, transaction with Mvelaphanda, a BEE partner. During the six months ended December 31, 2010. Gold Fields implemented three empowerment transactions which are aimed at complying with the 2014 BEE equity ownership targets.

The value of these transactions was $297.6 million and were comprised of an employee share option plan, or ESOP, for 10.75% of Sibanye Gold; a broad-based BEE transaction for 10.0% of South Deep, and a broad-based BEE transaction for an effective 1% indirect beneficial interest in Sibanye Gold, excluding South Deep. For accounting purposes, these transactions qualify as share-based compensation costs.

The $297.6 million was comprised of $171.9 million for the ESOP, $10.2 million for the Sibanye Gold transaction and $115.5 million for the South Deep transaction.

 

F-57


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

17. EMPLOYEE BENEFIT PLANS (continued)

 

Under the ESOP transaction, 13.5 million shares were issued to approximately 47,000 Gold Fields employees. These shares were valued on the grant date using the Gold Fields closing share price of R122.79 on December 22, 2010, adjusted by a marketability discount of 25.8% to reflect the value of the restrictions placed on these shares; that the eligible employees may not dispose of the shares until after 15 years from grant gate. The cost of this once-off share-based compensation was $171.9 million.

Under the GFIMSA transaction, 0.6 million shares were issued to broad-based BEE partners on December 23, 2010. The share-based compensation cost, based on the closing price of R118.51, was $10.2 million. These shares were not adjusted by a marketability discount because they had no trading restrictions.

The South Deep transaction amounted to $115.5 million and was made up of a preferred BEE dividend of $21.2 million and an equity component equivalent to $94.3 million. Under the South Deep transaction, a wholly-owned subsidiary company of Gold Fields was created to acquire 100% of the South Deep asset from GFIMSA. The new company then issued 10 million Class B ordinary shares representing 10.0% of South Deep’s net worth to a consortium of BEE partners. Class B ordinary shareholders are entitled to a dividend of R2 per share until conversion to Class A ordinary shares. The Class B ordinary shares will convert one-third after ten years and a third thereafter on each fifth year anniversary. For accounting purposes, the dividend represents a liability of Gold Fields to the Class B ordinary shareholders and qualifies as a share-based compensation. It was valued at $21.2 million, of which $2.3 million (December 31, 2011: $3.4 million) was classified as a short-term portion under accounts payable at December 31, 2012. The Rand based effective interest rate used to discount the future dividend payments was 9.55%.

The disposal of 10% of South Deep was subject to valuation adjustments relating to minority, liquidity and marketability discounts which resulted in an overall once-off share-based compensation expense of $94.3 million.

All but the dividend share-based compensation have been included within additional paid-in capital within shareholders’ equity. The long-term dividend liability component of the share-based compensation has been shown as other long-term liabilities.

 

18. DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS AND FAIR VALUE AND CREDIT RISK OF FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS

Risk management activities

In the normal course of its operations, the Group is exposed to commodity price, currency, interest rate, liquidity and credit risk. In order to manage these risks, the Group has developed a comprehensive risk management process to facilitate control and monitoring of these risks.

Concentration of credit risk

The Group’s financial instruments do not represent a concentration of credit risk as the Group deals with a number of major banks. Accounts receivable are regularly monitored and assessed and where necessary an adequate level of provision is maintained.

A formal process of allocating counterparty exposure and prudential limits is approved by the audit committee and is applied under the supervision of the Group’s executive committee. Facilities requiring margin payments are not engaged.

 

F-58


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

18. DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS AND FAIR VALUE AND CREDIT RISK OF FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued)

 

Foreign currency and commodity price risk

In the normal course of business, the Group enters into transactions for the sale of its gold, denominated in U.S. Dollars. In addition, the Group has assets and liabilities in a number of different currencies (South African Rand, U.S. Dollars and Australian Dollars). As a result, the Group is subject to transaction and translation exposure from fluctuations in foreign currency exchange rates.

As at December 31, 2012 and 2011, Gold Fields did not hold any derivative instruments to protect its exposure to adverse movements in gold and copper commodity prices.

Under the long-established structure of sales agreements prevalent in the industry, substantially all of Gold Fields’ copper concentrate sales are provisionally priced at the time of shipment. The provisional prices are finalized in a contractually specified future period (generally one to three months) primarily based on quoted London Metal Exchange, or LME, prices. Sales subject to final pricing are generally settled in a subsequent month. Because a significant portion of Gold Fields’ copper concentrate sales in a period usually remain subject to final pricing, the forward price is a major determinant of recorded revenues and the average recorded copper price for the period.

LME copper prices averaged $7,951 per ton during the fiscal year ended December 31, 2012 (fiscal year ended December 31, 2011: $8,836; six months ended December 31, 2010: $7,828 per ton, fiscal year ended June 30, 2010: $6,651 per ton), compared with the Company’s recorded average provisional price, net of refining charges, of $7,322 per ton. The applicable 3 month copper price at December 31, 2012 was $7,930 per ton. During the fiscal year ended December 31, 2012, changes in copper prices resulted in a provisional pricing mark-to-market gain of $15.6 million (included in revenue) (fiscal year ended December 31, 2011 loss of $20.6 million).

Interest rate and liquidity risk

Fluctuations in interest rates impact on the value of investments and financing activities, giving rise to interest rate risk. The Group does not currently hedge its exposure to interest rate risk.

In the ordinary course of business, the Group receives cash proceeds from its operations and is required to fund working capital and capital expenditure requirements. The cash is managed to ensure surplus funds are invested to maximize returns while ensuring that capital is safeguarded to the maximum extent possible by investing only with top financial institutions.

Substantial contractual arrangements for uncommitted borrowing facilities are maintained with several banking counterparties to meet the Group’s normal contingency funding requirements.

Fair value

The fair value of a financial instrument is defined as the amount at which the instrument could be exchanged in a current transaction between willing parties, other than in a forced or liquidation sale. The carrying amounts of receivables, accounts payable and cash and cash equivalents are a reasonable estimate of their fair values due to the short-term maturity of such instruments. The investments in the environmental trust fund approximate fair value, as the monies are invested in short-term maturity investments. The listed investments are carried at market value. Long-term loans at floating rates, approximate fair value as they are subject to market based floating rates.

 

F-59


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

18. DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS AND FAIR VALUE AND CREDIT RISK OF FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued)

 

The estimated fair values of the Group’s financial instruments are:

 

     December 31, 2012      December 31, 2011  
     Carrying
value
     Fair
value
     Carrying
value
     Fair
value
 

Financial assets

           

Cash and cash equivalents

     655.6         655.6         744.0         744.0   

Receivables

     314.5         314.5         220.1         220.1   

Non-current investments *

     458.0         464.6         272.2         271.2   

Financial liabilities

           

Long-term loans

     2,321.2         2,322.4         1,360.7         1,263.0   

Accounts payable and provisions

     678.1         678.1         601.6         601.6   

Interest payable

     11.0         11.0         11.2         11.2   

Short-term loans and current portion of long-term loans

     40.0         40.0         547.0         547.0   

Other non-current liabilities

     13.9         13.9         13.5         13.5   

 

  * Fair value determined by using cost for Rand Refinery Limited and Far South East due to a market value not being readily available.

Fair value accounting establishes a fair value hierarchy that prioritizes the inputs to valuation techniques used to measure fair value. The hierarchy gives the highest priority to unadjusted quoted prices in active markets for identical assets or liabilities (Level 1 measurements) and the lowest priority to unobservable inputs (Level 3 measurements). The three levels of the fair value hierarchy are described below:

 

   

Level 1 Unadjusted quoted prices in active markets that are accessible at the measurement date for identical, unrestricted assets or liabilities;

 

   

Level 2 Quoted prices in markets that are not active, or inputs that are observable, either directly or indirectly, for substantially the full term of the asset or liability;

 

   

Level 3 Prices or valuation techniques that require inputs that are both significant to the fair value measurement and unobservable (supported by little or no market activity).

The following table sets forth the Group’s financial assets measured at fair value by level within the fair value hierarchy. As required by Accounting Standard Codification, or ASC, fair value guidance , assets and liabilities are classified in their entirety based on the lowest level of input that is significant to the fair value measurement.

 

     Fair value at December 31, 2012  
     Total      Level 1      Level 2      Level 3  

Assets:

           

Listed investments

     36.2         36.2         —           —     

Investments held by environmental trust funds

     165.3         135.3         30.0         —     

Unlisted investments

     1.3         —           —           1.3   

Trade receivable from provisional copper concentrate sales, net

     149.9         —            149.9         —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     352.7         171.5         179.9         1.3   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

F-60


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

18. DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS AND FAIR VALUE AND CREDIT RISK OF FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued)

 

     Fair value at December 31, 2011  
     Total      Level 1      Level 2      Level 3  

Assets:

           

Listed investments

     77.3         77.3         —           —     

Investments held by environmental trust funds

     161.5         122.5         39.0         —     

Unlisted investments

     2.6         —           —           2.6   

Trade receivable from provisional copper concentrate sales, net

     88.4         —           88.4         —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     329.8         199.8         127.4         2.6   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

The Group’s listed investments comprise equity investments in listed entities and are therefore valued using quoted market prices in active markets and classified within level 1 of the fair value hierarchy. The fair value of the listed investments is the product of the quoted market price and the number of shares held.

The Group investments held in environmental funds primarily comprise interest bearing short-term investments which are valued using quoted market prices.

The Group’s net trade receivable from provisional copper and gold concentrate sales in La Cima (Cerro Corona) is valued using quoted market prices based on the forward London Metal Exchange and classified within level 2 of the fair value hierarchy.

The Group’s financial instruments are valued using pricing models and classified within level 2 of the fair value hierarchy. Where possible, the values produced by the valuation models are verified to market prices. Valuation models require a variery of inputs, including contractual terms, market prices, yield curves, credit spreads, measures of volatility and correlations of such inputs.

The table below sets forth a summary of changes in the fair value of our Level 3 financial assets.

 

     December 31,
2012
    December 31,
2011
 

Balance at the beginning of the period

     2.6        1.7   

Additions

     —           0.4   

Unrealized (loss)/ gain

     (1.3     0.5   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balance at the end of the period

     1.3        2.6   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Unrealized loss of $1.3 million for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2012 was included in accumulated other comprehensive loss. As of December 31, 2012, the assets classified within Level 3 of the fair value hierarchy represent less than 1.00% of the total assets and liabilities measured at fair value, respectively.

Derivative contracts

There were no derivative contracts December 31, 2011.

St Ives Gold Mining Company (Pty) Ltd entered into a Gasoil 10PPM FOB Singapore contract for 10,000 barrels per month effective August 1, 2012 until January 31, 2013 at a fixed price of US$118.90 per barrel. 20,000 barrels with a mark-to-market value of US$0.1 million were outstanding at the end of December 2012.

 

F-61


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

19. ADDITIONAL CASH FLOW INFORMATION

 

         Fiscal year Ended
December 31,
    Six Months
Ended
December 31,
     Fiscal Year
Ended
June 30,
 
         2012      2011     2010      2010  

(a)    

 

Supplementalcash flow disclosures

          
 

The income and mining taxes paid in the statement of cash flow represents actual cash paid.

          
 

The following amounts of interest paid were included in cash flows from operations:

          
 

Interest paid before capitalization

     83.1         63.6        36.4         71.7   
    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

(b)    

 

Non cash-items

          
 

Marked to market gain/(loss) of listed investments

     18.7         (26.4     28.8         24.9   
    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

20. COMMITMENTS

 

     December 31,
2012
     December 31,
2011
 
Capital expenditure      

Authorized

South Africa - KDC

  

 

401.0

  

  

 

373.7

  

     

South Africa - Beatrix

     104.8         87.1   

South Africa - South Deep

     446.3         433.1   

Ghana - Tarkwa

     110.9         126.5   

Ghana - Damang

     9.8         16.9   

Peru - Cerro Corona

     6.4         44.7   

Australia - St Ives

     175.7         150.3   

Australia - Agnew

     1.6         10.4   

Other

     0.8         0.4   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 
     1,257.3         1,243.1   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Contracted for

     244.6         245.7   

Other guarantees

     0.5         1.7   

The Group also provides environmental obligation guarantees with respect to its South African, Ghanaian and Australian operations. These guarantees, amounting to $193.8 million at December 31, 2012 (December 31, 2011: 154.4 million) have not been included in the amount of guarantees of $0.5 million (December 31, 2011: $1.7 million) because they are fully provided for under the related asset retirement obligation.

Commitments will be funded from internal cash resources and borrowings as necessary. All the contracted capital expenditure as at December 31, 2012 and December 31, 2011 relates to obligations within the next 12 months. The expenditure relates to mining development, infrastructure and hostel upgrades.

 

F-62


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

21. CONTINGENT LIABILITIES

World Gold Council

Gold Fields is a member of the World Gold Council. In terms of the membership agreement, all members are responsible for certain costs, including ongoing costs on a three year rolling basis, winding up costs, if applicable, and various other contingent liabilities. Apportionment of liabilities, should they arise, is done proportionate to the member’s production relative to the total production of all members. To date, no claims have been made on Gold Fields.

Occupational health care services

The Group provides occupational health care services to its employees through its existing facilities at the various operations. There is a risk that the cost of providing such services could increase in the future depending upon changes in the nature of underlying legislation and the profile of employees. Any such increased cost has not yet been quantified. The Group is monitoring developments in this regard.

The principal health risks associated with Gold Fields’ mining operations in South Africa arise from occupational exposure to silica dust, noise, heat and certain hazardous chemicals. The most significant occupational diseases affecting Gold Fields’s workforce include lung diseases (such as silicosis, tuberculosis, a combination of the two and chronic obstructive airways disease (“COAD”) as well as noise induced hearing loss (“NIHL”). The Occupational Diseases in Mines and Works Act, 78 of 1973, or ODMWA, governs the compensation paid to mining employees who contract certain illnesses, such as silicosis. Recently, the South African Constitutional Court ruled that a claim for compensation under ODMWA does not prevent an employee from seeking compensation from its employer in a civil action under common law (either as individuals or as a class). While issues, such as negligence and causation, need to be proved on a case by case basis, it is possible that such ruling could expose Gold Fields to claims related to occupational hazards and diseases (including silicosis), which may be in the form of a class or similar group action. If Gold Fields were to face a significant number of such claims and the claims were suitably established against it, the payment of compensation for the claims could have a material adverse effect on Gold Fields’s results of operations and financial condition. In addition, Gold Fields may incur significant additional costs arising out of these issues, including costs relating to the payment of fees, levies or other contributions in respect of compensatory or other funds established (if any) and expenditures arising out of its efforts to resolve any outstanding claims or other potential action.

On August 21, 2012, a court application was served on a group of respondents that included Gold Fields (the “August Respondents”). On December 21, 2012, a further court application was issued and was formally served on a number of respondents, including Gold Fields, (the “December Respondents” and, together with the August Respondents, the “Respondents”) on January 10, 2013, on behalf of classes of mine workers, former mine workers and their dependents who were previously employed by, or who are currently employed by, amongst others, Gold Fields and who allegedly contracted silicosis and/or other occupational lung diseases (the “Classes”). The court application of August 21, 2012 and the court application of December 21, 2012 are together referred to below as the “Applications”.

These Applications request that the court certify a class action to be instituted by the applicants on behalf of the Classes. The Applications are the first and preliminary steps in a process where, if the court were to certify the class action, the applicants may, in a second stage, bring an action wherein they will attempt to hold the Respondents liable for silicosis and other occupational lung diseases and resultant consequences. In the second stage, the Applications contemplate addressing what the applicants describe as common legal and factual issues regarding the claim arising from the allegations of the entire Classes. If the applicants are

 

F-63


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

21. CONTINGENT LIABILITIES (continued)

 

successful in the second stage, they envisage that individual members of the Classes could later submit individual claims for damages against the respective Respondents. The Applications do not identify the number of claims that may be instituted against the Respondents or the quantum of damages the applicants may seek.

With respect to the Applications, Gold Fields has filed notices of its intention to oppose both the Applications and has instructed its attorneys to defend the claims. Gold Fields and its attorneys are engaging with the applicants’ attorneys in both Applications to try to establish a court-sanctioned process to agree the timelines, (including the date by which Gold Fields must file its papers opposing the Applications) and the possible consolidation of the separate applications. At this stage, Gold Fields cannot quantify its potential liability from these actions.

Randgold and Exploration summons

On August 21, 2008, Gold Fields Operations Limited, formerly known as Western Areas Limited, or WAL, a subsidiary of Gold Fields Limited, received a summons from Randgold and Exploration Company Limited, or R&E and African Strategic Investment Holdings Limited. The summons claims that, during the period that WAL was under the control of Brett Kebble, Roger Kebble and others, WAL assisted in the unlawful disposal of shares owned by R&E in Randgold Resources Limited, or Resources and Afrikander Lease Limited, now known as Uranium One. WAL’s assessment remains that it has sustainable defences to these claims and, accordingly, WAL’s attorneys have been instructed to vigorously defend the claims. The claims have been computed in various ways. The highest claims have been computed on the basis of the highest prices of Resources and Uranium One between the dates of the alleged unlawful acts and March 2008 (between R11 billion and R12 billion). The alternative claims have been computed on the basis of the actual amounts allegedly received by WAL to fund its operations (approximately R519 million). The claims lie only against WAL, which holds a 50% stake in the South Deep Mine. This alleged liability is historic and relates to a period of time prior to Gold Fields purchasing the company.

Acid mine drainage

Gold Fields has identified incidence of, and a risk of short-term and long term Acid Mine Drainage (“AMD”), on certain of its operations. AMD relates to the acidification and contamination of naturally occurring water resources by pyrite-bearing ore contained in underground mines and in rock dumps, tailings dams and pits on the surface. Gold Fields has not been able to reliably determine the financial impact that AMD might have on the Group, however, Gold Fields has adopted a proactive approach by initiating projects, such as Liquid Gold (long-term water management strategy), and the identification of mine rehabilitation options that focus on AMD risk management. Gold Fields also conducts acid base accounting to obtain a more detailed understanding of where the key potential AMD risks are located at identified operations, thereby better informing appropriate long term mitigation strategies.

 

22. LINES OF CREDIT

The Group had unused lines of committed and uncommitted credit facilities available amounting to $893.2 million at December 31, 2012 (December 31, 2011: $1,429.1 million).

 

F-64


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

23. RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

None of the directors or officers of Gold Fields or any associate of such director or officer is currently or has been at any time during the past three fiscal years materially indebted to Gold Fields.

Rand Refinery

Rand Refinery, in which the Company holds a 34.9% interest, has an agreement with the Group whereby it refines all the Company’s South African and Ghanaian operations gold production. The Group’s chief executive officer is currently an alternate director of Rand Refinery and has held his directorship since September 30, 2008. Prior to this date, he had been a director since July 10, 2000. The Company paid Rand Refinery $1.8 million, $1.7 million, $1.4 million and $1.2 million in refining fees for the fiscal years ended December 31, 2012 and 2011, six months ended December 31, 2010 and fiscal year ended June 30, 2010, respectively. Refer to note 12 - Non-current Investments for the dividends received from Rand Refinery for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2012, 2011, six months ended December 31, 2010 and fiscal year ended June 30, 2010.

On November 21, 2000, GFL Mining Services Limited, or GFLMS, entered into an agreement with Rand Refinery in terms of which GFLMS acts as an agent for Rand Refinery with regard to the sale of a maximum of 50% of Gold Fields’ South African gold production. On June 1, 2004, GFLMS exercised its right, by giving notice to Rand Refinery, to sell all of Gold Fields’ South African gold production with effect from October 1, 2004. Gold Fields Ghana Limited and Abosso Goldfields Limited also have had agreements with Rand Refinery since March 2002 to transport, refine and sell substantially all of the gold production from the Tarkwa and Damang mines.

Peotona Gold

Cheryl A. Carolus, a non-executive director of Gold Fields, is a party in her capacity as founding shareholder of Peotona Gold Holdings (Proprietary) Limited, or PGH, to the agreement described below. Ms Carolus has a 25% interest in PGH, which in turn has a one-third economic interest and a 51% voting interest in the issued share capital of Peotona Gold (Proprietary) Limited, or Peotona Gold.

Western Areas Prospecting (Proprietary) Limited, (a company 74% owned by GFO and 26% owned by Peotona Gold), or WAP, held four prospecting rights on ground contiguous to the South Deep Mine. On April 21, 2009, GFO, GFIJVH, Peotona Gold, WAP and others entered into an agreement in terms of which WAP relinquished and abandoned a portion of the prospecting area covered by one of the above prospecting rights on ground contiguous to the South Deep mine (commonly known as “Uncle Harry’s Area”) in favor of the South Deep Joint Venture. The agreement was subject to (among other conditions precedent) the conversion of the old order mining right of South Deep to a new order mining right and simultaneously amending the South Deep mining right by extending the area covered by the South Deep mining right to include Uncle Harry’s Ground pursuant to the Mineral and Petroleoum Resources Development Act. 28 of 2002. Peotona Gold also granted GFO an option to acquire its 26% shareholding in WAP.

On July 13, 2010, the South African Department of Mineral Resources executed the new-order mining right for the South Deep Gold Mine, including Uncle Harry’s Ground.

On October 14, 2011, Gold Fields purchased the 26% interest in WAP from Peotona Gold for $6.3 million. Gold Fields now owns 100% of WAP which owns the Cardoville, the Kalbasfontein, the WA4 and the Wildebeestkuil prospecting rights.

Gold Fields believes that the above transactions with related parties have been conducted on terms at least as favorable to it as arm’s length terms.

 

F-65


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

24. SUBSEQUENT EVENTS

Sibanye Gold Spin-Off

On February 18, 2013, Gold Fields completed the separation of its wholly-owned subsidiary, Sibanye Gold. The Spin-off was achieved by way of Gold Fields making a distribution on a pro rata basis of one Sibanye Gold ordinary share for every one Gold Fields share (whether held in the form of shares, American depositary receipts, or ADRs, or international depositary receipts) to Gold Fields shareholders, registered as such in Gold Fields’ register at close of business on February 15, 2013, in terms of section 46 of the South African Companies Act and section 46 of the South African Income Tax Act. The Board of Gold Fields passed the resolution necessary to implement the Spin-off on December 12, 2012. Sibanye Gold shares listed on the JSE, and on the NYSE on a “when issued” basis, on February 11, 2013. As of February 18, 2013, or the Spin-off Date, Gold Fields and Sibanye Gold were independent, publicly traded companies with separate public ownership, boards of directors and management.

Refinancing of borrowings

Refer to note 14 for further details.

Final dividend

On February 13, 2013, Gold Fields declared a final dividend of R0.75 ($0.08) per share.

 

F-66


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

25 GEOGRAPHICAL AND SEGMENT INFORMATION

Gold Fields is primarily involved in gold mining, exploration and related activities. Activities are conducted and investments held both inside and outside of South Africa.

The segment results have been prepared and presented based on management’s reporting format. The Group prepares its financial records in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards, or IFRS, and such IFRS information by segment is what the Group’s chief operating decision maker reviews in allocating resources and making investment decisions. The Company’s gold mining operations are managed and internally reported based upon the following geographic areas: in South Africa the Driefontein-Kloof complex, or KDC, (prior to July 1, 2010, Driefontein and Kloof divisions were reported as separate segments), the Beatrix division and the South Deep mine, in Ghana the Tarkwa and Damang mines, in Australia, the St. Ives and Agnew mines and in Peru, the Cerro Corona mine. The Group also has exploration interests which are included in the Corporate and other segment. Corporate costs are allocated between segments based upon the time spent on each segment by members of the executive team.

 

    Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2012  
    South Africa     Ghana     Australia     Peru     Corporate and
other #
    Reconciling
items
    Group
Consolidated
 
    KDC     Beatrix     South
Deep
    Tarkwa     Damang     St Ives     Agnew     Total     Cerro
Corona
       

Statement of operations

                       

Revenue

    1,543.4        477.8        450.8        1,198.9        277.8        752.2        294.4        1,046.6        556.6        —          —          5,551.8   

Operating costs  (1)

    (1,005.7     (321.9     (302.9     (494.4     (156.8     (411.5     (148.1     (559.6     (171.4     (93.1     (195.4     (3,301.2

Gold inventory change (2)

    —          —          —          24.8        3.6        (14.7     (2.6     (17.3     11.0        —          0.1        22.2   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating profit

    537.7        155.8        147.9        729.3        124.6        325.9        143.7        469.6        396.2        (93.1     (195.3     2,272.8   

Amortization and depreciation

    (209.1     (77.1     (82.4     (125.4     (27.0     (156.9     (53.7     (210.6     (48.8     11.8        38.6        (729.9
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net operating profit/(loss)

    328.5        78.7        65.6        603.8        97.6        169.0        90.0        259.0        347.4        (81.3     (156.7     1,542.9   

Exploration expenditure

    —          —          —          —          —          (9.8     (9.6     (19.4     (2.2     (168.0     54.3        (135.3

Feasibility and evaluation

    —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —          (44.1     (59.4     (103.5

Other items as detailed in statement of operations

    (49.8     (9.4     (44.0     (24.6     (12.0     (62.8     (21.7     (84.5     (20.7     98.2        (10.0     (156.8

Royalty

    (25.8     (8.6     (2.3     (59.9     (13.9     N3        N3        (26.0     (14.7     —          —          (151.2

Current taxation

    (40.2     (14.8     —          (163.1     (7.6     N3        N3        (53.6     (104.7     (10.6     (17.2     (411.8

Deferred taxation

    71.4        29.1        (4.5 )*      (92.5     (27.9     N3        N3        13.2        12.4        (13.2     131.9        119.9   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit/(loss) after taxation

    284.1        74.9        14.9        263.7        36.3        N3        N3        88.9        217.6        (219.0     (57.1     704.2   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

# Corporate and other represents items to reconcile segment data to consolidated financial statement totals. Included in Corporate and other is goodwill relating to the acquisition of South Deep.
* Indicative as tax is provided in the holding companies of South Deep.

Figures may not add as they are rounded independently.

 

F-67


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

25 GEOGRAPHICAL AND SEGMENT INFORMATION (continued)

 

    December 31, 2012  
    South Africa     Ghana     Australia     Peru     Corporate and
other #
    Reconciling
items
    Group
Consolidated
 
    KDC     Beatrix     South
Deep
    Tarkwa     Damang     St Ives     Agnew     Total     Cerro
Corona
       

Balance sheet

                       

Total assets (excluding deferred tax assets)

    2,126.3        313.1        208.3        1,775.6        404.3        1,066.7        372.4        1,439.1        1,165.8        3,610.0        (418.3     10,624.2   

Total liabilities excluding deferred tax

    740.8        (26.8     104.0        377.2        93.2        189.7        47.8        237.5        234.4        1,849.7        77.9        3,687.9   

Deferred tax liability/(asset)

    379.2        110.3        19.2        300.2        56.9        N3        N3        264.5        12.4        (65.3     (181.8     895.6   

Capital expenditure

    296.2        80.4        314.5        259.9        114.4        311.9        62.3        374.2        93.8        86.2        (296.8     1,322.8   

 

(1) Operating costs for management reporting purposes includes: Corporate expenditure - $46.6 million, Environmental rehabilitation - $28.2 million and Employee termination costs - $13.8 million, which are not included in production costs under U.S. GAAP. In addition, gold inventory change is included in production costs under U.S. GAAP.
(2) Reflects the change in quantity and value of broken ore and ore on the heap leach pad during the fiscal year.
(3) As a significant portion of the acquisition price was allocated to tenements of St Ives and Agnew based on endowment ounces and also as these two Australian operations are entitled to transfer and off-set losses from one company to another, it is not meaningful to split the royalties, current or deferred taxation.

Figures may not add as they are rounded independently.

 

F-68


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

25 GEOGRAPHICAL AND SEGMENT INFORMATION (continued)

 

    Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2011  
    South Africa     Ghana     Australia     Peru     Corporate  and
other #
    Reconciling
items
    Group
Consolidated
 
    KDC     Beatrix     South
Deep
    Tarkwa     Damang     St Ives     Agnew     Total     Cerro
Corona
       

Statement of operations

                       

Revenue

    1,745.5        555.4        427.5        1,122.9        340.8        734.2        313.1        1,047.3        560.5        —          —          5,800.1   

Operating costs  (1)

    (1,032.2     (333.6     (296.2     (436.4     (142.1     (415.4     (138.5     (553.9     (157.4     (83.1     (126.5     (3,161.4

Gold inventory change (2)

    —          —          —          65.0        1.9        3.0        6.0        9.0        (0.1     —          1.4        77.2   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating profit

    713.4        221.8        131.3        751.6        200.6        321.8        180.6        502.4        403.0        (83.1     (125.1     2,715.9   

Amortization and depreciation

    (230.4     (71.2     (76.7     (104.9     (26.7     (149.9     (44.6     (194.5     (58.6     (20.4     38.1        (745.3
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net operating profit/(loss)

    483.0        150.6        54.6        646.6        173.9        171.9        136.0        307.9        344.4        (103.5     (87.0     1,970.6   

Exploration expenditure

    —          —          —          —          —          (5.0     (4.4     (9.4     (4.2     (106.5     (5.3     (125.4

Feasibility and evaluation

    —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —          (17.4     (77.8     (95.2

Other items as detailed in statement of operations

    (56.3     (11.2     (15.1     (21.5     (15.0     0.2        (0.1     0.1        (15.7     41.6        0.6        (92.5

Royalty

    (35.5     (4.6     (2.1     (51.0     (15.5     N3        N3        (26.3     (14.7     —          —          (149.7

Current taxation

    (88.5     (0.3     —          (150.7     (29.8     N3        N3        —          (111.7     (55.5     —          (436.5

Deferred taxation

    (39.7     (43.4     (17.1 )*      (22.0     (13.2     N3        N3        (82.8     10.4        43.9        48.4        (115.5
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit/(loss) after taxation

    263.2        91.1        20.3        401.4        100.5        N3        N3        189.6        208.5        (197.4     (121.1     955.8   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

# Corporate and other represents items to reconcile segment data to consolidated financial statement totals. Included in Corporate and other is goodwill relating to the acquisition of South Deep.
* Indicative as tax is provided in the holding companies of South Deep.

Figures may not add as they are rounded independently.

 

F-69


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

25 GEOGRAPHICAL AND SEGMENT INFORMATION (continued)

 

    December 31, 2011  
    South Africa     Ghana     Australia     Peru                    
    KDC     Beatrix     South
Deep
    Tarkwa     Damang     St Ives     Agnew     Total     Cerro
Corona
    Corporate  and
other #
    Reconciling
items
    Group
Consolidated
 

Balance sheet

                       

Total assets (excluding deferred tax assets)

    1,714.5        225.0        153.0        1,435.9        344.2        1,058.2        609.0        1,667.2        1,069.5        3,643.0        (174.9     10,077.4   

Total liabilities excluding deferred tax

    414.2        (103.5     66.9        323.9        99.2        174.9        44.6        219.5        282.8        1,949.5        (55.2     3,197.3   

Deferred tax liability/(asset)

    471.6        145.6        15.8        207.7        29.1        N3        N3        270.8        24.9        (77.3     (60.3     1,027.8   

Capital expenditure

    318.6        84.6        274.6        218.9        87.8        182.7        74.1        256.8        69.4        102.5        (260.2     1,153.0   

 

(1) Operating costs for management reporting purposes includes: Corporate expenditure - $37.6 million, Environmental rehabilitation - $24.9 million and Employee termination costs - $32.8 million, which are not included in production costs under U.S. GAAP. In addition, gold inventory change is included in production costs under U.S. GAAP.
(2) Reflects the change in quantity and value of broken ore and ore on the heap leach pad during the fiscal year.
(3) As a significant portion of the acquisition price was allocated to tenements of St Ives and Agnew based on endowment ounces and also as these two Australian operations are entitled to transfer and off-set losses from one company to another, it is not meaningful to split the royalties, current or deferred taxation.

Figures may not add as they are rounded independently.

 

F-70


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

25 GEOGRAPHICAL AND SEGMENT INFORMATION (continued)

 

    Six Months Ended December 31, 2010  
    South Africa     Ghana     Australia     Peru                    
    KDC     Beatrix     South
Deep
    Tarkwa     Damang     St Ives     Agnew     Total     Cerro
Corona
    Corporate
and  other #
    Reconciling
items
    Group
Consolidated
 

Statement of operations

                       

Revenue

    814.3        259.1        188.2        468.1        152.1        313.4        102.4        415.8        266.6        —          —          2,564.2   

Operating costs (1)

    (533.6     (172.8     (139.5     (205.4     (73.9     (178.2     (50.7     (228.9     (77.4     (51.5     (43.6     (1,526.6

Gold inventory change (2)

    —          —          —          (2.8     0.5        10.3        0.7        11.0        1.6        —          (4.7     5.6   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating profit

    280.7        86.3        48.7        259.9        78.7        145.5        52.4        197.9        190.8        (51.5     (48.3     1,043.2   

Amortization and depreciation

    (122.5     (36.9     (37.8     (43.5     (12.7     (81.5     (14.1     (95.6     (29.1     (10.9     (0.4     (389.4
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net operating profit/(loss)

    158.2        49.4        10.9        216.4        66.0        64.0        38.3        102.3        161.7        (62.4     (48.7     653.8   

Exploration expenditure

    —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —          (51.4     (1.8     (53.2

Feasibility and evaluation

    —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —          (9.3     —          (9.3

Other items as detailed in statement of operations

    (148.9     (47.7     (22.9     (11.6     (6.0     (4.2     (1.4     (5.6     (12.1     (96.9     (1.4     (353.1

Royalty

    (11.8     (1.3     (0.9     (8.7     (3.1     N3        N3        (10.2     (7.3     —          —          (43.3

Current taxation

    (20.5     (0.4     —          (54.8     (18.6     N3        N3        —          (47.1     (18.1     —          (159.5

Deferred taxation

    33.7        (7.9     (0.6 )*      (5.7     1.2        N3        N3        (25.7     (1.9     (0.6     33.2        25.7   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit/(loss) after taxation

    10.7        (7.9     (13.5     135.6        39.5        N3        N3        60.8        93.3        (238.7     (18.7     61.1   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

# Corporate and other represents items to reconcile segment data to consolidated financial statement totals. Included in Corporate and other is goodwill relating to the acquisition of South Deep.
* Indicative as tax is provided in the holding companies of South Deep.

Figures may not add as they are rounded independently.

 

    December 31, 2010  
    South Africa     Ghana     Australia     Peru                    
    KDC     Beatrix     South
Deep
    Tarkwa     Damang     St Ives     Agnew     Total     Cerro
Corona
    Corporate and
other #
    Reconciling
items
    Group
Consolidated
 

Balance sheet

                       

Total assets (excluding deferred tax assets)

    1,937.9        237.5        126.6        1,193.3        250.0        862.7        485.6        1,348.3        1,063.2        4,370.8        182.4        10,710.0   

Total liabilities excluding deferred tax

    437.1        (93.0     67.5        189.4        70.5        140.9        45.9        186.8        288.5        1,427.7        (12.0     2,562.5   

Deferred tax liability/(asset)

    525.6        128.9        0.6        185.7        15.8        N3        N3        187.2        35.2        (33.1     19.4        1,065.3   

Capital expenditure

    177.3        42.7        140.5        116.6        56.3        55.5        25.0        80.5        31.4        4.7        (56.4     593.6   

 

(1) Operating costs for management reporting purposes includes: Corporate expenditure - $24.5 million, Environmental rehabilitation - $10.9 million and Employee termination costs - $35.3 million, which are not included in production costs under U.S. GAAP. In addition, gold inventory change is included in production costs under U.S. GAAP.

 

F-71


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

25 GEOGRAPHICAL AND SEGMENT INFORMATION (continued)

 

(2) Reflects the change in quantity and value of broken ore and ore on the heap leach pad during the financial year.
(3) As a significant portion of the acquisition price was allocated to tenements of St Ives and Agnew based on endowment ounces and also as these two Australian operations are entitled to transfer and off-set losses from one company to another, it is not meaningful to split the royalties, current or deferred taxation.

Figures may not add as they are rounded independently.

 

    Fiscal Year Ended June 30, 2010  
    South Africa     Ghana     Australia     Peru                    
    Driefontein     Kloof     Beatrix     South
Deep
    Tarkwa     Damang     St Ives     Agnew     Total     Cerro
Corona
    Corporate and
other #
    Reconciling
items
    Group
Consolidated
 

Statement of operations

                         

Revenue

    770.9        613.2        424.7        288.7        790.1        226.9        460.6        177.8        638.4        411.4        —          —          4,164.3   

Operating costs (1)

    (505.6     (451.8     (299.9     (220.9     (387.0     (130.7     (308.9     (89.3     (398.2     (135.0     (36.6     (118.5     (2,684.2

Gold inventory change (2)

    —          —          —          —          11.4        (2.1     13.4        (0.5     12.9        1.3        —          5.9        29.4   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating profit

    265.3        161.4        124.8        67.8        414.5        94.1        165.1        88.0        253.1        277.7        (36.6     (112.6     1,509.5   

Amortization and depreciation

    (82.0     (105.6     (71.5     (59.7     (111.0     (17.2     (98.6     (18.2     (116.8     (55.3     (19.1     6.9        (631.3
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net operating profit/(loss)

    183.3        55.8        53.3        8.1        303.5        76.9        66.5        69.8        136.3        222.4        (55.7     (105.7     878.2   

Exploration expenditure

    —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —          (85.0     (1.6     (86.6

Other items as detailed in statement of operations

    (12.0     (14.1     (6.4     (24.8     (10.9     (3.3     (4.5     (1.3     (5.8     (53.2     185.9        4.4        59.8   

Current taxation

    (32.6     (3.7     (1.0     (0.5     (70.3     (28.3     N3        N3        (16.5     (51.2     (29.9     —          (234.0

Deferred taxation

    (26.5     (15.4     (18.6     6.5     (34.4     0.5        N3        N3        (34.7     (27.0     3.5        21.7        (124.4
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit/(loss) after taxation

    112.2        22.6        27.3        (10.7     187.9        45.8        N3        N3        79.3        91.0        18.8        (81.2     493.0   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-72


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

25 GEOGRAPHICAL AND SEGMENT INFORMATION (continued)

 

    June 30, 2010  
    South Africa     Ghana     Australia     Peru                    
    Driefontein     Kloof     Beatrix     South
Deep
    Tarkwa     Damang     St Ives     Agnew     Total     Cerro
Corona
    Corporate and
other #
    Reconciling
items
    Group
Consolidated
 

Balance sheet

                         

Total assets

    1,076.5        661.2        140.5        132.0        1,059.0        177.4        701.8        380.8        1,082.6        886.0        3,812.6        153.6        9,181.4   

Total liabilities excluding deferred tax

    307.2        142.8        (114.9     78.9        144.6        36.7        125.4        32.5        157.9        218.0        1,109.2        (27.6     2,052.8   

Deferred tax liability/(asset)

    263.6        236.9        107.5        —          180.0        17.1        N3        N3        138.2        33.3        (33.0     46.6        990.2   

Capital expenditure

    150.3        145.7        85.8        212.8        148.6        29.8        103.0        55.2        158.2        85.6        4.5        (108.2     913.1   

 

# Corporate and other represents items to reconcile segment data to consolidated financial statement totals. Included in Corporate and other is goodwill relating to the acquisition of South Deep.

 

(1) Operating costs for management reporting purposes includes: Corporate expenditure - $54.5 million, Environmental rehabilitation - $19.3 million and Employee termination costs - $10.3 million, which are not included in production costs under U.S. GAAP. In addition, gold inventory change is included in production costs under U.S. GAAP.
(2) Reflects the change in quantity and value of broken ore and ore on the heap leach pad during the financial year.
(3) As a significant portion of the acquisition price was allocated to tenements of St Ives and Agnew based on endowment ounces and also as these two Australian operations are entitled to transfer and off-set losses from one company to another, it is not meaningful to split the current or deferred taxation.

Figures may not add as they are rounded independently.

 

F-73


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

25 GEOGRAPHICAL AND SEGMENT INFORMATION (continued)

 

          Fiscal Year
Ended
December 31,
    Fiscal Year
Ended
December 31,
    Six Months
Ended
December 31,
    Fiscal Year
Ended
June, 30
 
          2012     2011     2010     2010  

The following provides a breakdown of the reconciling items for each line item presented

           

Operating costs

           

On-mine exploration

   (i)      (35.2     (22.9     (3.6     (18.3

Provision for rehabilitation

   (j)      (7.7     (2.2     0.4        1.7   

Cut-backs

   (h)      (184.0     (144.4     (52.7     (90.0

Deferred stripping

   (l)      31.5        43.0        12.3        (11.9
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
        (195.4 )       (126.5     (43.6     (118.5
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gold inventory

           

Inventory

   (m)      0.1        1.3        (5.3     4.5   

Inventory stockpiles

   (q)      —          0.1        0.6        1.4   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
        0.1        1.4        (4.7     5.9   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Amortization and depreciation

           

Business combination - formation of Original Gold Fields

   (a)      (4.1     (5.6     (2.7     (5.3

Business combination - formation of Gold Fields

   (b)      (3.9     (3.4     (1.7     (3.3

Business combination - purchase of St. Ives and Agnew

   (c)      —          2.1        0.3        0.5   

Business combination - purchase of Abosso

   (d)      —          1.1        0.1        0.1   

Amortization of reserves

   (f)      (11.9     (23.3     (23.2     (37.6

Cut-backs

   (h)      41.1        39.6        16.3        54.6   

Amortization - inclusion of future costs

   (g)      47.0        34.7        13.5        1.4   

Amortization - capitalized interest

   (p)      (4.3     (6.9     (3.3     (6.6

Provision for rehabilitation

   (j)      4.1        (0.2     0.3        3.1   

Amortization - discontinued operations

   (o)      (29.4     —          —          —     
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
        38.6        38.1        (0.4     6.9   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Exploration expenditure

           

Exploration, evaluation and feasibility costs

   (i)      (5.1     (83.1     (1.8     (1.6
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Other items as detailed in the statement of operations

           

Impairment of assets

   (a)      (7.5     —          —          —     

Interest capitalization

   (p)      (3.1     —          —          (5.2

Other

        0.6        0.6        (1.4     9.6   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
        (10.0     0.6        (1.4     4.4   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-74


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

25 GEOGRAPHICAL AND SEGMENT INFORMATION (continued)

 

           December 31,
2012
    December 31,
2011
 

Total liabilities excluding deferred income and mining taxes

      

Provision for rehabilitation

     (j)        77.9        55.2   
    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total assets

      

Business combination - formation of Original Gold Fields

     (a)        66.3        79.9   

Business combination - formation of Gold Fields

     (b)        26.0        31.3   

Business combination - purchase of St Ives and Agnew

     (c)        —          —     

Business combination - purchase of Abosso

     (d)        —          —     

Business combination - purchase of South Deep

     (e)        481.8        507.9   

Cut-backs

     (h)        (498.8     (354.8

Amortization of reserves

     (f)        (197.5     (180.9

Amortization - inclusion of future costs

     (g)        175.9        123.9   

Amortization - Interest capitalised

     (p)        (18.5     (15.2

Exploration, feasibility and evaluation costs

     (i)        (379.3     (338.3

Provision for rehabilitation

     (j)        (75.4     (49.5

Investments in equity investees

     (k)        (3.4     9.6   

Deferred stripping

     (l)        (12.9     (43.6

Inventory

     (m     15.4        15.7   

Impairment of Agnew

     (n)        (52.8     (51.5

Interest capitalization

     (p     84.2        91.8   

Inventory stockpiles

     (q     (1.2     (1.2

Amortization - discontinued operations

     (o     (28.1     —     
    

 

 

   

 

 

 
       (418.3     (174.9
    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Notes to the reconciliation of segment information to the historical financial statements

 

(a) Business combination - formation of Original Gold Fields

For management reporting purposes, the formation of Original Gold Fields was accounted for as a uniting-of-interests. Under U.S. GAAP, the Company accounted for the assets and liabilities acquired from Gold Fields of South Africa Limited at historical cost, and the assets and liabilities acquired from Gencor and outside shareholders as a purchase.

 

(b) Business combination - formation of Gold Fields

For management reporting purposes, the difference between the purchase price and net asset value of acquired assets that arose on this transaction was set-off against shareholders’ equity. Under U.S. GAAP, the excess purchase price was capitalized to property, plant and equipment and is being amortized over its useful life.

 

(c) Business combination - purchase of St. Ives and Agnew

For management reporting purposes, traded equity securities issued as consideration in a business combination are valued on the date they are issued. Under U.S. GAAP, traded equity securities issued as consideration in a business combination are valued a few days before and after the terms of the transaction are announced.

 

F-75


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

25 GEOGRAPHICAL AND SEGMENT INFORMATION (continued)

 

(d) Business combination - purchase of Abosso

For management reporting purposes, traded equity securities issued as consideration in a business combination are valued on the date they are issued. Under U.S. GAAP, traded equity securities issued as consideration in a business combination are valued a few days before and after the terms of the transaction are announced.

 

(e) Business combinations - purchase of South Deep

For management reporting purposes, traded equity securities issued as consideration in a business combination are valued on the date they are issued. Under U.S. GAAP, traded equity securities issued as consideration in a business combination are valued a few days before and after the terms of the transaction are announced.

For management reporting purposes, the entire interest acquired in South Deep was fair value upon gaining a controlling interest. Under U.S. GAAP, only the additional interest acquired was accounted for at fair value; assets acquired before obtaining control are stated at historical carrying amounts. In addition, U.S. GAAP requires retrospective equity accounting from the date the interest is acquired until the Group obtains control and the investment becomes a subsidiary. For management reporting purposes no retrospective equity accounting is applied.

For management reporting purposes, any excess arising over the purchase price paid and the fair value of the net identifiable assets and liabilities acquired for additional interests in subsidiaries from minority shareholders are recorded directly in equity (‘economic entity model’). Under U.S. GAAP, any excess over the purchased price paid and the fair value of the net identifiable assets and liabilities are recorded as goodwill (‘parent company model’).

 

(f) Amortization of reserves

For management reporting purposes, a portion of ore resources at the Australian operations, based on the philosophy of “endowment”, is used for calculating depreciation and amortization. Under U.S. GAAP, depreciation and amortization is calculated based upon existing proven and probable reserves.

 

(g) Amortization - inclusion of future costs

For management reporting purposes, future mine development costs are included in mining assets in calculating depreciation and amortization. Under U.S. GAAP, future development costs are not included in the calculation of depreciation and amortization.

 

(h) Cut-backs

For management reporting purposes, waste laybacks at surface operations are capitalized as mine development costs. Under U.S. GAAP, once the production phase of a mine has commenced, waste laybacks are considered variable production costs that should be included as a component of inventory to be recognized in Production costs exclusive of depreciation and amortization in the same period as the revenue from the sale of inventory. As a result, capitalization of waste laybacks is appropriate only to the extent product inventory exists at the end of a reporting period.

 

F-76


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

25 GEOGRAPHICAL AND SEGMENT INFORMATION (continued)

 

(i) Exploration, feasibility and evaluation costs

For management reporting purposes, exploration costs are capitalized from the date the drilling program confirms sufficient evidence of mineralization to proceed with a feasibility study. Under U.S. GAAP, exploration costs are capitalized from the date a bankable feasibility study is completed.

 

(j) Provision for rehabilitation

Revisions to the environmental rehabilitation obligation

For management reporting purposes, all changes in the carrying amount of the obligation are recognized as an increase or decrease in the carrying amount of the associated capitalized retirement cost. Due to differences in the capitalized retirement cost between management reporting and U.S. GAAP, differences could arise. Changes resulting from revisions in the timing or amount of estimated cash flows are recognized as an increase or decrease in the carrying amount of the asset retirement obligation and the associated capitalized retirement cost for U.S. GAAP.

In addition, the current discount rate is applied to measure the retirement obligation for management reporting purposes. Under U.S. GAAP any decreases in the asset retirement obligation as a result of downward revisions in cash flow estimates should be treated as a modification of an existing asset retirement obligation, and should be measured at the historical discount rate used to measure the initial asset retirement obligation.

Amortization of rehabilitation asset

For reasons discussed above, the rehabilitation asset’s carrying value for management reporting purposes is different to that under U.S. GAAP, which results in a different amortization charge.

 

(k) Investments in equity investees

For management reporting purposes an equity investment exceeding a 20% shareholding was treated as an available-for-sale investment prior to fiscal 2003. Under U.S. GAAP this investment was accounted for under the equity method since acquisition.

 

(l) Deferred stripping

For management reporting purposes, the Company defers the waste stripping costs in excess of the expected average pitlife stripping ratio. Under U.S. GAAP, waste stripping costs are considered costs of the extracted minerals and recognized as a component of inventory to be recognized in production costs exclusive of depreciation and amortization in the same period as the revenue from the sale of inventory.

 

(m) Inventory

Under U.S. GAAP additional amortization, waste normalization and cut backs expensed are included in the cost of inventory produced. No such absorption of costs occurred for management reporting purposes. Additionally, for management reporting purposes, no adjustment is required to record inventory at net realizable value. Under U.S. GAAP, due to the impact of the amortization adjustments on the inventory valuation, an adjustment may be required to record inventory at the lower of cost and net realizable value.

 

F-77


Table of Contents

Gold Fields Limited

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

($ in millions unless otherwise noted)

 

25 GEOGRAPHICAL AND SEGMENT INFORMATION (continued)

 

(n) Impairment of Agnew

For management reporting purposes the Agnew mine was not determined to be impaired. Under U.S. GAAP the Agnew mine was determined to be impaired and an impairment charge was recognized.

 

(o) Amortization - discontinued operations

For management reporting purposes, the Spin-off of Sibanye Gold was accounted for as discontinued operations in fiscal 2012 and the related assets and liabilities were classified as held for distribution. As a result, depreciation ceased due to the classification of the assets as held for distribution. Under U.S. GAAP, the Spin-off was not accounted for as discontinued operations in 2012 as the Sibanye Gold assets and liabilities continue to be classified as held for use until the Spin-off date. As a result, depreciation did not cease during fiscal 2012 and is charged until the Spin-off date.

 

(p) Interest capitalization

For management reporting purposes, borrowing costs are capitalized to the extent that qualifying assets are financed through specific debt financing or general outstanding debt not for any specific purpose other than funding the operations of the Group. Under U.S. GAAP, total outstanding debt financing is taken into account in calculating the amount of borrowing cost to be capitalized.

 

(q) Inventory stockpiles

For management reporting purposes, previous impairment charges writing down stockpiles to net realizable values are reversed when the net realizable value rises above the original cost. Under U.S. GAAP, the net realizable value is deemed the new base cost and impairment charges are not reversed.

 

F-78


Table of Contents

Schedule 1 - Valuation and Qualifying Accounts

Valuation allowances on deferred tax assets

 

     Balance at
beginning of
year
     Charged to
costs and
expenses
    Deduction     Charged to
unredeemed
capital
expenditure
     Foreign
currency
translation
adjustment
    Balance at
end of year
 

Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2012

              

Valuation allowance

     152.4         (58.2     —          222.8         7.4        324.4   

Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2011

              

Valuation allowance

     192.4         (22.0     —          —           (18.0     152.4   

Six Months Ended December 31, 2010

              

Valuation allowance

     195.3         (10.3     —          —           7.4        192.4   

Fiscal Year Ended June 30, 2010

              

Valuation allowance

     195.5         8.3        (0.1     —           (8.4     195.3   

 

S-1

Exhibit 2.6

Republic of South Africa

Companies Act, No 71 of 2008, as amended

MEMORANDUM OF INCORPORATION FOR A PUBLIC COMPANY

Name of company: GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

Registration No.: 1968/004880/06

This Memorandum of Incorporation (“ MOI ”) was adopted by Special Resolution passed on 14 May 2012, a copy of which was Filed, together with the notice of amendment, in substitution for the Company’s existing MOI, consisting of the memorandum of association and the articles of association of the Company (which were the constitutional documents of the Company in terms of the Companies Act, No. 61 of 1973). This MOI takes effect (in terms of section 16(9)(b)(i) of the Companies Act) on the date of Filing hereof, together with the notice of amendment.

 

 

MA Ramphele
Chair
Approved


1. INTERPRETATION

In this MOI, –

 

  1.1. words that are defined in the Companies Act (which are contained in Schedule 1 for easy reference but which do not form part of this MOI for purposes of interpretation) but not defined in this MOI will bear the same meaning in this MOI as in the Companies Act. For ease of reading, such terms have been capitalised in this MOI;

 

  1.2. unless the context otherwise requires –

 

  1.2.1. Companies Act ” means the Companies Act, No 71 of 2008, as amended or any legislation which replaces it;

 

  1.2.2. Company ” means Gold Fields Limited or by whatever other name it may be known from time to time;

 

  1.2.3. Deliver ” means deliver in the manner in which the Company is entitled to give notice or deliver documents in accordance with clause 34 ( Notices ) and the Companies Act and Regulations and shall, where permitted by the Companies Act and the listings requirements of the JSE, include delivery of an abridged document together with instructions as to how the recipient may obtain an unabridged version of such document;

 

  1.2.4. Effective Date ” means the date on which the Companies Act came into operation, namely 1 May 2011;

 

  1.2.5. Electronic Address ” means in regard to Electronic Communication, any email address furnished to the Company by the Holder;

 

  1.2.6. Holders ” means registered holders of Securities;

 

  1.2.7. Ineligible or Disqualified ” means ineligible or disqualified as contemplated in the Companies Act (as set out in Schedule 2 for easy reference but which does not form part of this MOI for purposes of interpretation), which shall apply not only to Directors, but also to the Prescribed Officers and the secretary of the Company;

 

  1.2.8. JSE ” means the exchange operated by JSE Limited, registration number 2005/022939/06 (or any other name by which it may be known in the future), or its successor body;

 

2


  1.2.9. MOI ” means this Memorandum of Incorporation as now framed or as from time to time altered by Special Resolution;

 

  1.2.10. Participant “ means a depository institution accepted by a Central Securities Depository as a participant in terms of the Securities Services Act;

 

  1.2.11. Regulations ” means regulations published pursuant to the Companies Act from time to time;

 

  1.2.12. Round Robin Resolution ” means, subject to clause 29.13, a resolution adopted by Written consent of a majority of the Directors, given in person or by Electronic Communication, provided that each Director has received notice of the matter to be decided upon;

 

  1.2.13. Securities Services Act ” means the Securities Services Act, No 36 of 2004, as amended or any legislation which replaces it;

 

  1.2.14. Shares ” means the shares in the share capital of the Company;

 

  1.2.15. Uncertificated Securities ” means Securities as defined in the Securities Services Act which are by virtue of the Companies Act transferrable without a written instrument and are not evidenced by a certificate;

 

  1.2.16. Writing ” or “ Written ” includes Electronic Communication but as regards any Holder entitled to vote, only to the extent that such Holder has notified the Company of an Electronic Address;

 

  1.3. references to Holders represented by proxy shall include Holders entitled to vote represented by an agent appointed under a general or special power of attorney;

 

  1.4. references to Holders entitled to vote Present at a Meeting or acting in person shall include Juristic Persons represented by a duly authorised representative or acting in the manner prescribed in the Companies Act;

 

  1.5. the headings are for reference purposes only and shall not affect the interpretation of this MOI;

 

  1.6. words in the singular number shall include the plural, and words in the plural number shall include the singular, one gender will include the other genders, and words importing persons shall include created entities (corporate or not);

 

3


  1.7. if any term is defined within the context of any particular clause in the MOI, the term so defined, unless it is clear from the clause in question that the term so defined has limited application to the relevant clause, shall bear the meaning ascribed to it for all purposes in terms of this MOI, notwithstanding that that term has not been defined in this interpretation provision;

 

  1.8. save to the extent that item 4(4) of Schedule 5 of the Companies Act may permit this MOI to prevail, if the provisions of this MOI are in any way inconsistent with the provisions of the Companies Act, the provisions of the Companies Act shall prevail, and this MOI shall be read in all respects subject to the Companies Act;

 

  1.9. the rule of construction that a contract shall be interpreted against the party responsible for the drafting or preparation of the contract, shall not apply to this MOI.

 

2. CALCULATION OF BUSINESS DAYS

When a particular number of Business Days is provided for between the happening of one event and another, the number of days must be calculated by –

 

  2.1. excluding the day on which the first such event occurs;

 

  2.2. including the day on or by which the second event is to occur; and

 

  2.3. excluding any public holiday in the Republic of South Africa, Saturday or Sunday that falls on or between the days contemplated in clauses 2.1 and 2.2 respectively.

 

3. PUBLIC COMPANY

The Company is a Public Company as it is not a Private Company or a State-Owned Company or a Personal Liability Company.

 

4. POWERS AND CAPACITY OF THE COMPANY

 

  4.1. The Company has the powers and capacity of an Individual and is not subject to any special conditions.

 

  4.2. Notwithstanding the omission from this MOI of any provision to that effect, the Company may do anything which the Companies Act empowers a company to do if so authorised by its MOI.

 

4


5. AMENDMENTS TO THE MOI

Subject to the provisions of the Companies Act and the listings requirements of the JSE, save for –

 

  5.1. correcting errors substantiated as such from objective evidence or which are self-evident errors (including, but without limitation eiusdem generis , spelling, punctuation, reference, grammar or similar defects) in the MOI, which the Board is empowered to do; and

 

  5.2. amendments of the MOI effected in compliance with a court order in the manner contemplated in section 16(1)(a), read with section 16(4) of the Companies Act,

all other amendments of the MOI, including but not limited to –

 

  5.3. the creation of any class of Shares;

 

  5.4. the variation of any preferences, rights, limitations and other terms attaching to any class of Shares;

 

  5.5. the conversion of one class of Shares into one or more other classes;

 

  5.6. an increase in the number of the Company’s authorised Securities;

 

  5.7. a consolidation of the Company’s Securities;

 

  5.8. a sub-division of the Company’s Securities; and/or

 

  5.9. the change of the Company’s name;

shall be effected in accordance with section 16(1)(c) of the Companies Act and must be approved by a Special Resolution passed by the Holders of the ordinary Shares. The Board shall publish a copy of any correction effected by the Board in accordance with clause 5.1 on the Company’s web site.

 

6. THE MAKING OF RULES

The Board shall not have the capacity to make, amend or repeal any Rules relating to the governance of the Company in respect of matters that are not addressed in the Companies Act or in this MOI, as contemplated in sections 15(3) to (5) of the Companies Act and in the listings requirements of the JSE. [10.4]

 

7. AUTHORISED SECURITIES AND ALLOTMENT AND ISSUE

 

  7.1. The Company is authorised to issue the following number and class of Shares (which includes Shares already issued at the Effective Date)

1 000 000 000 (one billion) ordinary par value Shares of R0.50 (fifty cent) each, which shall have Voting Rights in respect of every matter that may be decided by the Company on the following basis –

 

5


  7.1.1. every Person entitled to vote who is Present at a Meeting, shall be entitled to –

 

  7.1.1.1. 1 (one) vote on a show of hands irrespective of the number of ordinary par value Shares she holds or represents; provided that a proxy shall irrespective of the number of Shareholders she represents have only 1 (one) vote; or

 

  7.1.1.2. that proportion of the total votes in the Company which the aggregate amount of the nominal value of the ordinary par value Shares held by her bears to the aggregate amount of the nominal value of all ordinary par value Shares issued by the Company in respect of every matter that may be decided by polling; and

 

  7.1.2. rank after all other classes of Shares in the Company which do not rank pari passu with the ordinary par value Shares as regards Distributions, but save as aforesaid shall be entitled to receive the net assets of the Company upon its liquidation.

 

  7.2. The Board shall not have the power to amend the authorisation (including increasing or decreasing the number) and classification of Shares (including determining rights and preferences) as contemplated in section 36(2)(b) or 36(3) of the Companies Act.

 

  7.3. To the extent that the Company immediately before the Effective Date had authorised but unissued par value Shares in its capital of a class of which there are issued Shares, the unissued Shares of that class may be issued at par or at a premium or at a discount.

 

  7.4. All Securities of a class shall rank pari passu in all respects.

 

  7.5. No rights, privileges or conditions for the time being attached to any class of Securities of the Company, nor any interests of that class of Securities, may (unless otherwise provided by the terms of issue of the Securities of that class) whether or not the Company is being wound up, be varied in any manner adverse to the Holders of that class of Securities, nor may any variations be made to the rights, privileges, conditions or interests, of any class of Securities, such that the interests of another class of Securities is adversely affected, unless a Special Resolution sanctioning the variation has been passed by the Holders of that adversely affected class of Securities with the support of at least 75% (seventy five per cent) of the Voting Rights Exercised on the Special Resolution at a separate meeting of the Holders of that class. The Holders of that class of Securities shall also be entitled to vote with the Holders of the ordinary Shares as regards the passing of any resolution required to be passed for such variation by the Holders of the ordinary Shares, subject to clause 18.28. The provisions of this MOI relating to Shareholders Meetings shall mutatis mutandis apply to any such separate meeting except that –

 

  7.5.1. the necessary quorum shall be a Shareholder or Shareholders of the class present in person, or represented by proxy and holding at least 25% (twenty five per cent) of the capital paid or credited as paid of the issued Shares of that class;

 

6


  7.5.2. if at any adjourned meeting of such Holders, the required quorum contemplated in clause 7.5.1 is not present, those Persons entitled to vote who are Present shall be a quorum.

 

  7.6. Notwithstanding any implication in this MOI to the contrary, the Board may not authorise any financial assistance by the Company in connection with the subscription for or purchase of its Securities or those of a Related or Inter-Related company without complying with section 44(3) of the Companies Act.

 

8. AUTHORITY TO ISSUE SECURITIES

 

  8.1. The Board shall not have the power to issue authorised Shares (other than as contemplated in clause 8.4) without the prior approval contemplated in clause 8.2 and the approval of the JSE (where necessary).

 

  8.2. As regards the issue of :-

 

  8.2.1. Shares that require the approval of a Special Resolution as contemplated in sections 41(1) and (3) of the Companies Act or as contemplated in the listings requirements of the JSE, the Directors shall not have the power to allot or issue same, without the prior approval of a Special Resolution;

 

  8.2.2. Shares, other than as contemplated in clause 8.2.1, or other Securities, including options in respect thereof, the Directors shall not have the power to allot or issue same, without the prior approval of an Ordinary Resolution adopted with the support of more than 50% (fifty per cent) of the Voting Rights Exercised on the resolution;

provided that such issue has been approved by the JSE and is made subject to the listings requirements of the JSE. No special privileges may be granted to secured and unsecured debt instruments as contemplated in section 43(3) of the Companies Act.

 

  8.3.

Any such approval may be in the form of a general authority to the Directors, whether conditional or unconditional, to allot or issue any such Securities contemplated in

 

7


  clauses 8.2.1 and 8.2.2 in their discretion, or in the form of a specific authority in respect of any particular allotment or issue of such Securities contemplated in clauses 8.2.1 and 8.2.2. Such authority shall endure for the period provided in the Ordinary or Special Resolution in question but may be revoked by Ordinary Resolution or Special Resolution, as the case may be, at any time.

 

  8.4. The Board may issue capitalisation Shares or offer a cash payment in lieu of awarding a capitalisation Share, in accordance with section 47 of the Companies Act.

 

  8.5. No Shares of a class which is listed may be issued other than as fully paid.

 

9. PRE-EMPTION ON ISSUE OF ORDINARY SHARES

 

  9.1. Equity Securities of a particular class in the Company which are authorised but unissued and which are intended to be issued for cash, shall be offered to the existing Holders of that class of equity Securities by way of a rights offer pro rata to the Voting Power of that Shareholder’s Voting Rights of that class of equity Securities immediately before the offer was made (with a reasonable time allowed to subscribe), unless –

 

  9.1.1. the approvals contemplated in clause 8.1 have been obtained;

 

  9.1.2. a capitalisation issue, an issue for an acquisition of assets (including another company) or an Amalgamation or Merger is to be undertaken;

 

  9.1.3. the equity Securities are to be issued in terms of option or conversion rights,

provided that no fraction of an equity Security may be issued and accordingly any fractional entitlement to an equity Security shall be rounded down to the nearest whole number if it is less than half and shall be rounded up to the nearest whole number if it is equal to or more than half.

 

  9.2. After the expiration of the time within which an offer may be accepted, or on the receipt of an intimation from the Person to whom the offer is made that she declines to accept the equity Securities offered, the Directors may, subject to the aforegoing provisions, issue such equity Securities in such manner as they think most beneficial to the Company.

 

10. CERTIFICATES EVIDENCING ISSUED SECURITIES, UNCERTIFICATED SECURITIES AND SECURITIES REGISTER

 

  10.1.

The Securities issued by the Company may either be certificated (that is evidenced by a certificate) or uncertificated in which case the Company must not issue certificates evidencing or purporting to evidence title to those Securities. When any new Securities are

 

8


  to be issued by the Company, the subscriber shall, subject to the Companies Act, be entitled to elect whether all or part of the Securities offered to her shall be in certificated or uncertificated form. Each original certificate issued to a Holder in certificated form shall be issued without charge, but for every subsequent certificate issued in respect of the same Securities to the same Holder, the Directors shall be entitled, as they may deem fit, to require a charge in settlement of the reasonable costs included in such issue.

 

  10.2. The Company shall convert its share register into a Securities Register with effect from the Effective Date and maintain such Securities Register in accordance with the prescribed standards, which Securities Register shall reflect –

 

  10.2.1. the number of Securities authorised and the number available to be issued and the date of authorisation;

 

  10.2.2. the total number of Securities of a class that have been issued, re-acquired or surrendered to the Company;

 

  10.2.3. the number of Securities of a class that are held in uncertificated form;

 

  10.2.4. the number of Securities of that class that are the subject of options or conversion rights which, if Exercised, would require Securities of that class to be issued;

 

  10.2.5. in the case of uncertificated Securities, a unique identifying number of the Person to, from or by whom the Securities were issued, re-acquired or surrendered, as the case may be;

 

  10.2.6. details of any unlisted Securities issued by the Company.

 

  10.3. As soon as practicable after –

 

  10.3.1. issuing any Securities, the Company must enter or cause to be entered in its Securities Register, in respect of every class of Securities that it has issued –

 

  10.3.1.1. with respect to certificated Securities –

 

  10.3.1.1.1. the names and addresses and identity numbers of the Persons to whom the Securities were issued;

 

  10.3.1.1.2. those Persons’ Electronic Addresses who have furnished them;

 

9


  10.3.1.1.3. the number and class of Securities issued to each of them, the date of issue, distinguishing numbers of such certificated Securities and the Consideration for which the Securities were issued;

 

  10.3.1.1.4. the number of, and prescribed circumstances relating to, any Securities –

 

  10.3.1.1.4.1. that have been placed in trust as contemplated in section (40)(6)(d) of the Companies Act; or

 

  10.3.1.1.4.2. whose transfer has been restricted;

 

  10.3.1.1.5. as regards Securities as contemplated in section 43 of the Companies Act –

 

  10.3.1.1.5.1. the number of those Securities issued and outstanding;

 

  10.3.1.1.5.2. the names and addresses of the registered owners of such Securities and any holders of a Beneficial Interest in such Securities;

 

  10.3.1.1.6. any other information prescribed in terms of the Companies Act from time to time;

 

  10.3.1.2. the total number of uncertificated Securities from time to time;

 

  10.3.2. the re-acquisition or surrender of any Securities, the Company must enter or cause to be entered in its Securities Register, in respect of every class of Securities –

 

  10.3.2.1. the date on which the Securities were re-acquired or surrendered to the Company;

 

  10.3.2.2. the distinguishing number or numbers of any certificated Securities re-acquired or surrendered to the Company;

 

10


  10.3.2.3. the Consideration for which the Securities were re-acquired by, or surrendered to the Company; and

 

  10.3.2.4. the name of the Person from or by whom the Securities were re-acquired or surrendered, as the case may be;

 

  10.3.3. the transfer of any Securities, the Company must enter or cause to be entered in its Securities Register, in respect of every class of Securities transferred –

 

  10.3.3.1. the names and addresses and identity numbers of the transferee to whom the Securities were transferred;

 

  10.3.3.2. those transferees’ Electronic Addresses who have furnished them;

 

  10.3.3.3. the number and class of Securities transferred, the date of the transfer, distinguishing numbers of such certificated Securities and the Consideration for which the Securities were transferred;

 

  10.3.3.4. the value of any Consideration still to be received by the Company on such Securities in the case of a transfer of Securities contemplated in sections 40(5) and (6) of the Companies Act.

 

  10.4. In respect of uncertificated Securities, the Company shall ensure that a record is administered and maintained by a Participant or Central Securities Depository as the Company’s uncertificated Securities Register, which shall from part of the Company’s Securities Register and which shall contain the details with respect to the uncertificated Securities referred to in clause 10.3.1, read with the changes required by the context.

 

  10.5. The Company shall establish and maintain a register to record all Beneficial Interests disclosures made in terms of section 56 of the Companies Act, including the following information for any Securities in respect of which a disclosure was made –

 

  10.5.1. the name and unique identifying number of the Holder of the Securities;

 

  10.5.2. the number, class and the distinguishing numbers of the Securities; and

 

  10.5.3. for each Person who holds a Beneficial Interest in the Securities, the extent of the Person’s Interest in the Securities, together with that Person’s –

 

  10.5.3.1. name and unique identity number;

 

  10.5.3.2. business, residential or postal address;

 

  10.5.3.3. Electronic Address if available.

 

11


  10.6. Securities certificates shall be issued in such manner and form as the Directors shall from time to time prescribe save that they must –

 

  10.6.1. state on the face –

 

  10.6.1.1. the name of the Company;

 

  10.6.1.2. the name of the Person to whom the Securities were issued;

 

  10.6.1.3. the number and class of Shares and the designation of the series, if any, evidenced by that certificate; and

 

  10.6.1.4. any restriction on the transfer of the Securities (which are not listed on the JSE) evidenced by that certificate;

 

  10.6.2. be signed by two Persons authorised by the Board by autographic, mechanical or electronic means.

 

  10.7. Each class of Shares, and any other Securities, must be distinguished by an appropriate numbering system.

 

  10.8. Each Holder shall be entitled to 1 (one) certificate for all the Securities of a particular class registered in his name, or to several certificates, each for a part of such Securities.

 

  10.9. A certificate for Securities registered in the names of 2 (two) or more Persons shall be Delivered to the Person first named in the Securities Register and Delivery of a certificate for Securities to that Person shall be a sufficient Delivery to all joint Holders.

 

  10.10. If a certificate for Securities is defaced, lost or destroyed, it may be renewed, on such terms, as to evidence and indemnity, and upon payment of such fee as the Directors think fit, and (in case of defacement) on delivery of the old certificate to bearer to the Company.

 

  10.11. A Person –

 

  10.11.1. acquires the rights associated with any particular Securities of the Company when that Person’s name is entered in the Company’s Securities Register as a Person to whom those Securities have been issued or transferred; and

 

  10.11.2. ceases to have the rights associated with any particular Securities of the Company when the transfer to another Person, re-acquisition by the Company, or surrender to the Company of those Securities has been entered in the Company’s Securities Register.

 

12


  10.12. After receiving a notice from a Central Securities Depository or Participant that a Holder who wishes to withdraw all or part of the uncertificated Securities held by that Person in an uncertificated Securities Register, and obtain a certificate in respect of those withdrawn Securities, the Company must –

 

  10.12.1. immediately enter the relevant Person’s name and details of that Person’s holding of Securities in the Securities Register and indicate on the Securities Register that the Securities so withdrawn are no longer held in uncertificated form;

 

  10.12.2. within 10 (ten) Business Days, or 20 (twenty) Business Days in the case of a Holder who is not resident within South Africa –

 

  10.12.2.1. prepare and Deliver to the relevant Person a certificate in respect of the Securities; and

 

  10.12.2.2. notify the Central Securities Depository that the Securities are no longer held in uncertificated form,

and may charge the Holder a reasonable fee to cover the actual costs of issuing a certificate.

 

  10.13. If the Company issues Securities which are not listed on the JSE, the share certificates for those Securities must be stamped “unlisted securities” and may only be released by the Company with the written permission of the JSE.

 

11. PROHIBITION AGAINST VOTING OF SECURITIES BEING HELD BY ONE PERSON FOR THE BENEFICIAL INTEREST OF ANOTHER OR THE COMPANY TAKING ANY LIEN

 

  11.1. The Company shall permit Securities to be held by one Person for the Beneficial Interest of another. The Company shall not permit Securities to be voted upon by the holder of a Beneficial Interest who does not hold a proxy form from the Holder notwithstanding any agreement permitting the holder of the Beneficial Interest to vote the Securities to the exclusion of the Holder between the Holder and the holder of the Beneficial interest.

 

  11.2. The Company shall not be entitled to claim any lien over any Securities issued by it.

 

13


12. LISTINGS ON OTHER STOCK EXCHANGES

The Company may seek listings on such stock exchanges as the Directors may consider appropriate from time to time.

 

13. COMMISSION

The Company may pay commission not exceeding 10% (ten per cent) of the subscription price at which Securities of the Company are issued to any Person, in consideration of her subscribing or agreeing to subscribe, whether absolutely or conditionally, for any Securities or of her procuring or agreeing to procure subscriptions, whether absolute or conditional, for any Securities.

 

14. TRANSFER OF SECURITIES

 

  14.1. There is no restriction on the transfer of Securities.

 

  14.2. The Securities Register (but not any Sub-Registers) may, subject to the listings requirements of the JSE, be closed during such time as the Directors think fit, for purposes of determining the identities of the Persons entitled to receive notice, participate in Distributions or other advantages and/or exercise other rights to which Holders may be entitled.

 

  14.3. The transfer of any Securities which are certificated shall be implemented in accordance with the then common form of transfer. Every instrument of transfer shall be left at the transfer office of the Company at which it is presented for registration, accompanied by the certificate of the Securities to be transferred, and/or such other evidence as the Company may require to prove the title of the transferor or his rights to transfer the Securities.

 

  14.4. All authorities to sign transfer deeds granted by Holders for the purpose of transferring Securities that may be lodged, produced or exhibited with or to the Company at any of its transfer offices shall as between the Company and the grantor of such authorities, be taken and deemed to continue and remain in full force and effect, and the Company may allow the same to be acted upon until such time as express notice in Writing of the revocation of the same shall have been given and lodged at the Company’s transfer offices at which the authority was lodged, produced or exhibited. Even after the giving and lodging of such notices the Company shall be entitled to give effect to any instruments signed under the authority to sign and certified by any officer of the Company, as being in order before the giving and lodging of such notice.

 

14


  14.5. The Company must enter in its Securities Register regarding every transfer of any Securities the information contemplated in clause 10.3.1, any reference to issue being read as a reference to transfer, which entry shall include –

 

  14.5.1. the date of the transfer; and

 

  14.5.2. the value of any Consideration still to be received by the Company on each Share or interest, in the case of a transfer of Securities the subscription price for which has not been fully paid,

provided that such entry may only be made if the transfer –

 

  14.5.3. is evidenced by a proper instrument of transfer that has been delivered to the Company; or

 

  14.5.4. was effected by operation of law.

 

15. TRANSMISSION OF SECURITIES BY OPERATION OF LAW

Subject to the laws relating to securities transfer tax upon or in respect of the estates of deceased Persons and the administration of estates of insolvent and deceased Persons and Persons under disability –

 

  15.1. the parent or guardian or curator of any Holder who is a minor;

 

  15.2. the trustee of an insolvent Holder;

 

  15.3. the liquidator of a body corporate Holder;

 

  15.4. the tutor or curator of a Holder under disability;

 

  15.5. the executor or administrator of the estate of a deceased Holder; or

 

  15.6. any other Person becoming entitled to any Securities held by a Holder by any lawful means other than transfer in terms of this MOI,

shall, upon production of such evidence as may be required by the Directors, have the right either –

 

  15.7. to Exercise the same rights and to receive the same Distributions and other advantages to which she would be entitled if she was the Holder of the Securities registered in the name of the Holder concerned; or

 

  15.8. herself to be registered as the Holder in respect of those Securities and to make such transfer of those Securities as the Holder concerned could have made, but the Directors shall have the same right to decline or suspend registration as they would have had in the case of a transfer of the Securities by the Holder.

 

15


16. ACCOUNTING RECORDS AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

  16.1. The Company shall maintain the necessary Accounting Records which shall be accessible from its Registered Office.

 

  16.2. The Company shall prepare its Financial Statements in accordance with the International Financial Reporting Standards and shall have its annual Financial Statements audited. In addition the annual Financial Statements shall reflect the –

 

  16.2.1. Beneficial Interests of the Directors and Persons who hold Beneficial Interests equal to or in excess of 5% (five per cent) of the total number of Securities of that class issued by the Company, together with the extent of those Beneficial Interests;

 

  16.2.2. status of any Securities issued by the Company which are not listed on the JSE;

 

  16.3. The Directors shall from time to time determine at what times and places (save in the case of Accounting Records which shall be accessible from the Registered Office) and under what conditions, subject to the requirements of the Regulations, the Holders and holders of Beneficial Interests are entitled to inspect and take copies of –

 

  16.3.1. the MOI;

 

  16.3.2. amendments to the MOI;

 

  16.3.3. records in respect of Directors;

 

  16.3.4. Accounting Records required to be maintained by the Company;

 

  16.3.5. reports to Annual General Meetings;

 

  16.3.6. annual Financial Statements;

 

  16.3.7. notices and minutes of Shareholders Meetings;

 

  16.3.8. communications generally to Holders;

 

  16.3.9. the Securities Register.

 

  16.4. Apart from the Holders and holders of Beneficial Interests, no other Person shall be entitled to inspect any of the documents of the Company (other than the Securities Register) unless expressly authorised by the Directors or in accordance with the Promotion of Access to Information Act, No 2 of 2000 as amended.

 

  16.5. The Company shall notify the Holders and the holders of Beneficial Interests of the publication of any annual Financial Statements of the Company, setting out the steps required to obtain a copy of those Financial Statements. If a Holder or the holder of a Beneficial Interest demands a copy of the annual Financial Statements, the Company shall make same available to such holder free of charge.

 

16


17. AUDIT COMMITTEE AND AUDITOR

 

  17.1. At each Annual General Meeting, the Company must elect an Audit committee comprising at least 3 (three) members, unless –

 

  17.1.1. the Company is a subsidiary of another company that has an Audit committee; and

 

  17.1.2. the audit committee of that other company will perform the functions required in terms of the Companies Act on behalf of the Company.

 

  17.2. Each member of the Audit committee must –

 

  17.2.1. be a Director, who satisfies any applicable requirements prescribed by the Minister;

 

  17.2.2. not be –

 

  17.2.2.1. involved in the day-to-day management of the Company’s business or have been so involved at any time during the previous financial year;

 

  17.2.2.2. a Prescribed Officer, or full-time employee, of the Company or another Related or Inter-Related company, or have been such an Officer or employee at any time during the previous 3 (three) financial years; or

 

  17.2.2.3. a Material supplier or customer of the Company, such that a reasonable and informed third party would conclude in the circumstances that the integrity, impartiality or objectivity of that Director is compromised by that relationship,

 

  17.2.3. not be Related to any Person who falls within the criteria set out in clause 17.2.2. In addition, at least one third of the members of the Audit committee at any particular time must have academic qualifications, or experience, in economics, law, corporate governance, finance, accounting, commerce, industry, public affairs and/or human resource management.

 

17


  17.3. The Board must appoint a person to fill any vacancy on the Audit committee within 40 (forty) Business Days after the vacancy arises.

 

  17.4. The Audit committee has the following duties –

 

  17.4.1. to nominate, for appointment as Auditor, a Registered Auditor who, in the opinion of the Audit committee, is independent of the Company;

 

  17.4.2. to determine the fees to be paid to the Auditor and the Auditor’s terms of engagement;

 

  17.4.3. to ensure that the appointment of the Auditor complies with the provisions of the Companies Act and any other legislation relating to the appointment of auditors;

 

  17.4.4. to determine the nature and extent of any non-audit services that the Auditor may provide to the Company, subject to compliance with the Companies Act, or that the Auditor must not provide to the Company, or a Related company;

 

  17.4.5. to pre-approve any proposed agreement with the Auditor for the provision of non-audit services to the Company;

 

  17.4.6. to prepare a report, to be included in the annual Financial Statements for that financial year –

 

  17.4.6.1. describing how the Audit committee carried out its functions;

 

  17.4.6.2. stating whether the Audit committee is satisfied that the Auditor was independent of the Company; and

 

  17.4.6.3. commenting in any way the Audit committee considers appropriate on the Financial Statements, the accounting practices and the internal financial control of the Company;

 

  17.4.7. to receive and deal appropriately with any concerns or complaints, whether from within or outside the Company, or on its own initiative, relating to –

 

  17.4.7.1. the accounting practices and internal audit of the Company;

 

  17.4.7.2. the content or auditing of the Company’s Financial Statements;

 

18


  17.4.7.3. the internal financial controls of the Company; or

 

  17.4.7.4. any related matter;

 

  17.4.8. to make submissions to the Board on any matter concerning the Company’s accounting policies, financial control, records and reporting; and

 

  17.4.9. to perform other oversight functions as may be determined by the Board.

In considering whether, for the purposes of this clause 17.4, a Registered Auditor is independent of the Company, the Audit committee must –

 

  17.4.10. ascertain that the Auditor does not receive any direct or indirect remuneration or other benefit from the Company, except –

 

  17.4.10.1. as Auditor; or

 

  17.4.10.2. for rendering other services to the Company, to the extent permitted in terms of the Companies Act;

 

  17.4.11. consider whether the Auditor’s independence may have been prejudiced –

 

  17.4.11.1. as a result of any previous appointment as Auditor; or

 

  17.4.11.2. having regard to the extent of any consultancy, advisory or other work undertaken by the Auditor for the Company; and

 

  17.4.12. consider compliance with other criteria relating to independence or conflict of interest as prescribed by the Independent Regulatory Board for Auditors established by the Auditing Profession Act,

in relation to the Company, and if the Company is a member of a Group of Companies, any other company within that Group.

 

  17.5. Nothing precludes the appointment by the Company at its Annual General Meeting of an Auditor other than one nominated by the Audit committee, but if such an Auditor is appointed, the appointment is valid only if the Audit committee is satisfied that the proposed Auditor is independent of the Company.

 

  17.6. The Company must pay all expenses reasonably incurred by the Audit committee, including, if the Audit committee considers it appropriate, the fees of any consultant or specialist engaged by the Audit committee to assist it in the performance of its functions.

 

19


  17.7. No Person shall be elected as a member of the Audit committee, if she is Ineligible or Disqualified and any such election shall be a nullity. A Person who is Ineligible or Disqualified must not consent to be elected as a member of the Audit committee nor act as a member of the Audit committee. A Person placed under probation by a court must not serve as a member of the Audit committee unless the order of court so permits.

 

  17.8. A member of the Audit committee shall cease to hold office as such immediately when she becomes Ineligible or Disqualified in terms of the Companies Act.

 

  17.9. There are no general qualifications prescribed by the Company for a Person to serve as a member of the Audit committee in addition to the requirements of the Companies Act and the Regulations.

 

  17.10. The Company shall appoint an Auditor at its Annual General Meeting provided that if an Annual General Meeting does not appoint or reappoint an Auditor, the Directors must fill the vacancy in the office in terms of the procedure contemplated in section 91 of the Companies Act within 40 (forty) Business Days after the date of the Annual General Meeting. A retiring Auditor may be automatically re-appointed at an Annual General Meeting without any resolution being passed, unless –

 

  17.10.1. the retiring Auditor is –

 

  17.10.1.1. no longer qualified for appointment;

 

  17.10.1.2. no longer willing to accept the appointment, and has so notified the Company; or

 

  17.10.1.3. required to cease serving as Auditor, in terms of section 92 of the Companies Act;

 

  17.10.2. the Audit committee objects to the re-appointment; or

 

  17.10.3. the Company has notice of an intended resolution to appoint some other person or persons in place of the retiring Auditor.

 

  17.11. Any firm of auditors appointed by the Company as the Auditor shall ensure that the Individual responsible for performing the Audit must comply with the requirements of section 90(2) of the Companies Act, provided that –

 

  17.11.1. the same Individual may not serve as the Auditor or designated Auditor for more than 5 (five) consecutive financial years;

 

  17.11.2. if an Individual has served as the Auditor or designated auditor for 2 (two) or more consecutive financial years and then ceases to be the Auditor or designated auditor, the Individual may not be appointed again as the Auditor or designated auditor until after the expiry of at least 2 (two) further financial years.

 

20


  17.12. The Auditor –

 

  17.12.1. has the right of access at all times to the Accounting Records and all books and documents of the Company, and is entitled to require from the Directors or Prescribed Officers any information and explanations necessary for the performance of the Auditor’s duties;

 

  17.12.2. if the Company is a Holding Company, has the right of access to all current and former Financial Statements of any Subsidiary and is entitled to require from the Directors or Prescribed Officers of the Company or Subsidiary any information and explanations in connection with any such statements and in connection with the Accounting Records, books and documents of the Subsidiary as necessary for the performance of the Auditor’s duties; and

 

  17.12.3. is entitled to –

 

  17.12.3.1. attend any Shareholders Meeting;

 

  17.12.3.2. receive all notices of and other communications relating to any Shareholders Meeting; and

 

  17.12.3.3. be heard at any Shareholders Meeting on any part of the business of the meeting that concerns the Auditor’s duties or functions.

 

  17.12.4. may not perform any services for the Company –

 

  17.12.4.1. that would place the Auditor in a conflict of interest as prescribed or determined by the Independent Regulatory Board for Auditors in terms of section 44(6) of the Auditing Profession Act; or

 

  17.12.4.2. as may be prescribed by the Audit committee.

 

  17.13. If a vacancy arises in the office of Auditor, the Board –

 

  17.13.1. must appoint a new Auditor within 40 (forty) Business Days, if there was only 1 (one) incumbent Auditor; and

 

21


  17.13.2. may appoint a new Auditor at any time, if there was more than 1 (one) incumbent, but while any such vacancy continues, the surviving or continuing Auditor may act as Auditor of the Company.

If, by comparison with the membership of a firm at the time of its latest appointment, less than 1/2 (one half) of the members remain after a change in the composition of the members, that change constitutes the resignation of the firm as Auditor of the Company, giving rise to a vacancy.

 

  17.14. Before making an appointment in terms of clause 17.13, the Board –

 

  17.14.1. must propose to the Audit committee, within 15 (fifteen) Business Days after the vacancy occurs, the name of at least one Registered Auditor to be considered for appointment as the new Auditor; and

 

  17.14.2. may proceed to make an appointment of a Person proposed in terms of clause 17.14.1 if, within 5 (five) Business Days after delivering the proposal, the Audit committee does not give notice in writing to the Board rejecting the proposed auditor.

 

  17.15. The provisions of clauses 31.4 and 31.5 apply mutatis mutandis to the Auditor.

 

18. SHAREHOLDERS MEETINGS

 

  18.1. The Company shall convene an Annual General Meeting once in every calendar year, but no more than 15 (fifteen) months after the date of the previous Annual General Meeting, or within an extended time allowed by the Companies Tribunal, on good cause shown, which must, at a minimum, provide for the following business to be transacted –

 

  18.1.1. presentation of –

 

  18.1.1.1. the Directors’ report;

 

  18.1.1.2. audited Financial Statements for the immediately preceding financial year;

 

  18.1.1.3. the Audit committee report as contemplated in clause 17.4.6;

 

  18.1.2. election of Directors, to the extent required by the Companies Act or the MOI;

 

22


  18.1.3. appointment of –

 

  18.1.3.1. an Auditor for the ensuing year;

 

  18.1.3.2. an Audit committee;

 

  18.1.4. any matters raised by Holders, with or without advance notice to the Company.

 

  18.2. The Company shall hold a Shareholders Meeting in order to consider one or more resolutions and shall not permit a resolution that could be voted on at a Shareholders Meeting to be dealt with by a round robin resolution of those Persons entitled to vote. In particular, all Shareholders Meetings convened in terms of the listings requirements of the JSE must be held in person and may not be held by means of a written resolution as contemplated in section 60 of the Companies Act.

 

  18.3. Unless otherwise agreed with the JSE, no resolution may be proposed to be considered by Shareholders in terms of section 20(2) and (6) of the Companies Act, if such a resolution would lead to the ratification of an act that is contrary to the listings requirements of the JSE.

 

  18.4. A Company must hold a Shareholders Meeting at any time that the Board is required by the Companies Act, the listings requirements of the JSE or this MOI to refer a matter to Holders entitled to vote for decision.

 

  18.5. Each resolution shall be expressed with sufficient clarity and specificity and accompanied by sufficient information / explanatory material to enable a Person who is entitled to vote on the resolution to determine whether to participate in the Shareholders Meeting, if applicable, and to seek to influence the outcome of the vote on the resolution. Once a resolution has been approved, it may not be challenged or impugned on the ground that it did not comply with the aforegoing.

 

  18.6. The Board or, if the Company has no Directors, any single Holder entitled to vote, may, whenever she thinks fit, convene a Shareholders Meeting. The Board must convene a Shareholders Meeting if one or more Written and signed demands for such a Shareholders Meeting is/are delivered to the Company, and –

 

  18.6.1. each such demand describes the specific purpose for which the Shareholders Meeting is proposed; and

 

  18.6.2. in aggregate, demands for substantially the same purpose are made and signed by the Holders, at the earliest time specified in any of those demands, of at least 10% (ten per cent) of the Voting Rights entitled to be Exercised in relation to the matter proposed to be considered at the Shareholders Meeting.

 

23


  18.7. Every Shareholders Meeting shall be held where the Board determines from time to time. The authority of the Company to conduct a Shareholders Meeting entirely by Electronic Communication, or to provide for participation in a Shareholders Meeting by Electronic Communication so long as the Electronic Communication employed ordinarily enables all Persons participating in that Shareholders Meeting to communicate concurrently with each other without an intermediary, and to participate reasonably effectively in the Shareholders Meeting, as set out in section 63(2) of the Companies Act, is not limited or restricted.

 

  18.8. The Holder of any Securities which are in certificated form (and thus not subject to the rules of Strate as the Central Securities Depository) in which any Person has a Beneficial Interest must deliver to each such Person –

 

  18.8.1. a notice of any Shareholders Meeting of the Company at which those Securities may be voted within 2 (two) Business Days after receiving such a notice from the Company; and

 

  18.8.2. a proxy appointment to the extent of that Person’s Beneficial Interest, if the Person so demands in compliance with section 56(11) of the Companies Act.

 

  18.9. The Company shall deliver a notice of each Shareholders Meeting in the prescribed manner and form to the JSE and all Holders as of the Record Date for receipt of the notice of the meeting, at least 15 (fifteen) Business Days before the meeting is to be held. An announcement shall also be made on SENS.

 

  18.10. A Holder entitled to vote, who is Present at a Meeting –

 

  18.10.1. is regarded as having received or waived notice of the Shareholders Meeting if at least the required minimum notice was given;

 

  18.10.2. has a right to –

 

  18.10.2.1. allege a Material defect in the form of notice for a particular item on the agenda for the Shareholders Meeting; and

 

  18.10.2.2. participate in the determination whether to waive the requirements for notice, if less than the required minimum notice was given, or to ratify a defective notice; and

 

  18.10.3. except to the extent set out in clause 18.10.2, is regarded to have waived any right based on an actual or alleged Material defect in the notice of the Shareholders Meeting.

 

24


  18.11. A notice of a Shareholders Meeting must be in writing, in plain language and must include –

 

  18.11.1. the date, time and place for the Shareholders Meeting, and the Record Date for determining the Holders entitled to participate in and vote at the Shareholders Meeting;

 

  18.11.2. the general purpose of the Shareholders Meeting, and any specific purpose contemplated in clause 18.1, if applicable;

 

  18.11.3. in the case of the Annual General Meeting, a copy of the annual Financial Statements for the preceding financial year unless it has been distributed them previously;

 

  18.11.4. a copy of any proposed resolution, of which the Company has received notice in terms of section 61(3) of the Companies Act, and which is to be considered at the meeting, and a notice of the percentage of Voting Rights that will be required for that resolution to be adopted;

 

  18.11.5. a reasonably prominent statement that –

 

  18.11.5.1. a Holder entitled to attend and vote at the Shareholders Meeting shall be entitled to appoint a proxy to attend, participate in, speak and vote at the Shareholders Meeting in the place of the Holder entitled to vote;

 

  18.11.5.2. a proxy need not be a Holder;

 

  18.11.5.3. a Holder entitled to vote in respect of any Shareholders Meeting may appoint 1 (one) proxy to Exercise Voting Rights attached to the Securities held by that Holder in respect of such Shareholders Meeting;

 

  18.11.5.4. the proxy may not delegate the authority granted to her as proxy;

 

  18.11.5.5.

participants in a Shareholders Meeting are required to present reasonably satisfactory identification in terms of section 63(1) of the Companies Act in order to reasonably satisfy the Person presiding

 

25


  at the Shareholders Meeting that the right of that person to participate and vote either as a Holder or as a proxy, has been reasonably verified;

 

  18.11.5.6. participation in the Shareholders Meeting by Electronic Communication is available, and provide any necessary information to enable Holders entitled to vote or their proxies, to access the available medium or means of Electronic Communication and advise that access to the medium or means of Electronic Communication is at the expense of the Holder entitled to vote or proxy, except to the extent that the Company determines otherwise.

 

  18.12. A Shareholders Meeting may proceed notwithstanding a Material defect in the giving of the notice, subject to clause 18.13, only if every Person who is entitled to Exercise Voting Rights in respect of each item on the agenda of the Shareholders Meeting is Present at a Meeting and votes to approve the ratification of the defective notice.

 

  18.13. If a Material defect in the form or manner of giving notice of a Shareholders Meeting relates only to one or more particular matters on the agenda for the Shareholders Meeting –

 

  18.13.1. any such matter may be severed from the agenda, and the notice remains valid with respect to any remaining matters on the agenda; and

 

  18.13.2. the Shareholders Meeting may proceed to consider a severed matter, if the defective notice in respect of that matter has been ratified.

 

  18.14. An immaterial defect in the form or manner of Delivering notice of a Shareholders Meeting, or an accidental or inadvertent failure in the Delivery of the notice to any particular Holder to whom it was addressed, does not invalidate any action taken at the Shareholders Meeting.

 

  18.15. Business may be transacted at any Shareholders Meeting only while a quorum is present.

 

  18.16. The quorum necessary for the commencement of a Shareholders Meeting shall be sufficient Persons Present at a Meeting to Exercise, in aggregate, at least 25% (twenty five per cent) of all of the Voting Rights that are entitled to be Exercised in respect of at least one matter to be decided at the Shareholders Meeting but –

 

  18.16.1. the Shareholders Meeting may not begin unless in addition at least 3 (three) Holders entitled to vote are Present at a Meeting;

 

  18.16.2. if the Company is a subsidiary of a company, those constituting the quorum must include its Holding Company present in person.

 

26


  18.17. A matter to be decided at the Shareholders Meeting may not begin to be considered unless those who fulfilled the quorum requirements of clause 18.16, continue to be present. If a resolution is proposed to meet the requirements of the JSE, notwithstanding that the Holders of Securities not listed on the JSE shall be entitled to be counted in the quorum as a matter of law, they shall not be taken into account for the purposes of determining whether or not the quorum requirements of the JSE have been attained.

 

  18.18. If within 30 (thirty) minutes from the time appointed for the Shareholders Meeting to commence, a quorum is not present, the Shareholders Meeting shall be postponed, without motion, vote or further notice, subject to clause 18.21, for 1 (one) week to the same time on the same day in the next week or, if that day be a public holiday in the Republic of South Africa, Saturday or Sunday, to the next succeeding day which is not a public holiday in the Republic of South Africa, Saturday or Sunday, and if at such adjourned Shareholders Meeting a quorum is not present within 30 (thirty) minutes from the time appointed for the Shareholders Meeting to commence, then the Person/s entitled to vote Present at a Meeting shall be deemed to be the requisite quorum.

 

  18.19. A Shareholders Meeting, or the consideration of any matter being debated at the Shareholders Meeting, may be adjourned from time to time without further notice on a motion supported by Persons entitled to Exercise, in aggregate, a majority of the Voting Rights –

 

  18.19.1. held by all of the Persons who are Present at a Meeting at the time; and

 

  18.19.2. that are entitled to be Exercised on at least one matter remaining on the agenda of the Shareholders Meeting, or on the matter under debate, as the case may be.

Such adjournment may be either to a fixed time and place or until further notice (in which latter case a further notice shall be Delivered to Holders), as agreed at the Shareholders Meeting.

 

  18.20. A Shareholders’ Meeting may not be adjourned beyond 120 (one hundred and twenty) Business Days after the date of that meeting.

 

27


  18.21. No further notice is required to be Delivered by the Company of a Shareholders Meeting that is postponed or adjourned as contemplated in clause 18.18, unless the location or time for the Shareholders Meeting is different from –

 

  18.21.1. the location or time of the postponed or adjourned Shareholders Meeting; or

 

  18.21.2. a location or time announced at the time of adjournment, in the case of an adjourned Shareholders Meeting.

 

  18.22. The chairperson, if any, of the Board shall preside as chairperson at every Shareholders Meeting. If there is no such chairperson, or if at any Shareholders Meeting she is not present within 15 (fifteen) minutes after the time appointed for holding the Shareholders Meeting or is unwilling to act as chairperson, the Holders Present at a Meeting shall elect at the meeting a Director present at the Shareholders Meeting, or if no Director be present at the Shareholders Meeting, or if all the Directors present decline to take the chair, the Holders Present at a Meeting shall select one of their number to be chairperson of the Shareholders Meeting.

 

  18.23. At a Shareholders Meeting a resolution put to the vote shall be decided on a show of hands, unless before the vote on a show of hands or before or on the declaration of the result of the show of hands a poll shall be demanded by –

 

  18.23.1. not less than 5 (five) Persons having the right to vote on that matter; or

 

  18.23.2.

a Person/s entitled to Exercise not less than 1/10 th  (one tenth) of the total Voting Rights entitled to vote on that matter; or

 

  18.23.3. the chairperson,

and, unless a poll is so demanded, a declaration by the chairperson that a resolution has, on a show of hands been carried, or carried unanimously, or by a particular majority, or lost, and an entry to that effect in the minute book of the Company, shall be conclusive evidence of such declaration, without proof of the number or proportion of the votes recorded in favour of, or against, such resolution. No objection shall be raised as to the admissibility of any vote except at the Shareholders Meeting or adjourned Shareholders Meeting at which the vote objected to is or may be given or tendered and every vote not disallowed at such Shareholders Meeting shall be valid for all purposes. Any such objection shall be referred to the chairperson of the Shareholders Meeting, whose decision shall be final and conclusive.

 

  18.24.

If a poll is duly demanded it shall be taken in such manner as the chairperson directs, save that it shall be taken forthwith, and the result of the poll shall be deemed to be the resolution

 

28


  of the Shareholders Meeting at which the poll was demanded. Scrutineers may be appointed by the chairperson to declare the result of the poll, and if appointed their decision, which shall be given by the chairperson of the Shareholders Meeting, shall be deemed to be the resolution of the Shareholders Meeting at which the poll is demanded. The demand for a poll shall not prevent the continuation of a Shareholders Meeting for the transaction of any business other than the question upon which the poll has been demanded. The demand for a poll may be withdrawn.

 

  18.25. In the case of an equality of votes, whether on a show of hands or on a poll, the chairperson of the Shareholders Meeting at which the show of hands takes place, or at which the poll is demanded, shall not be entitled to a second or casting vote.

 

  18.26. Any person entitled to a Share in terms of clause 15 ( Transmission of Securities by Operation of Law ) may vote at any Shareholders Meeting in respect thereof in the same manner as if she was the Holder of that Security, provided that (except where the Directors have previously accepted his right to vote in respect of that Security) at least 24 (twenty four) hours before the time of holding the Shareholders Meeting at which she proposes to vote, she shall have satisfied the Directors that she is entitled to Exercise the right referred to in clause 15 ( Transmission of Securities by Operation of Law ).

 

  18.27. Every resolution of Shareholders is either an Ordinary Resolution or a Special Resolution. An Ordinary Resolution, save to the extent expressly provided in respect of a particular matter contemplated in this MOI, shall require to be adopted with the support of more than 50% (fifty per cent) of the Voting Rights Exercised on the resolution. A Special Resolution shall require to be adopted with the support of at least 75% (seventy five per cent) of the Voting Rights Exercised on the resolution. For so long as the Company is listed on the JSE, if any of the listings requirements of the JSE require an Ordinary Resolution to be passed with a 75% (seventy five per cent) majority, it will be passed by that majority.

 

  18.28.

Subject to any restrictions attaching to any class or classes of Securities which are not ordinary Shares (as no voting restrictions shall be permitted as regards ordinary Shares and no special rights or privileges shall attach to other Securities), on a show of hands a Person entitled to vote Present at a Meeting shall have only 1 (one) vote, irrespective of the number of Voting Rights that Person would otherwise be entitled to Exercise. A proxy shall, irrespective of the number of holders of Securities entitled to vote she represents, have only 1 (one) vote on a show of hands. On a poll every Person entitled to vote who is Present at a Meeting shall have the number of votes determined in accordance with the Voting Rights associated with the Securities in question. The total Voting Rights of the Holders of all Securities, other than ordinary Shares and any special shares created for the purposes of

 

29


  Black Economic Empowerment, may not exceed 24,99% (twenty four comma nine nine per cent) of the total Voting Rights of all Persons entitled to vote at such a meeting. If a resolution is proposed to meet the requirements of the JSE, notwithstanding that the Holders of Securities not listed on the JSE shall be entitled to vote thereon as a matter of law, their votes shall not be taken into account for the purposes of determining whether or not the requirements of the JSE have been attained.

 

  18.29. In the case of joint Holders the vote of the senior who tenders a vote, whether in person or by proxy, shall be accepted to the exclusion of the votes of the other joint Holders; and for this purpose seniority shall be determined by the order in which the names stand in the Securities Register.

 

  18.30. No form appointing a proxy shall be valid after the expiration of 1 (one) year from the date when it was signed unless the proxy itself provides for a longer or shorter duration but it may be revoked at any time. The appointment is revocable unless the proxy appointment expressly states otherwise, and may be revoked by cancelling it in writing, or making a later inconsistent appointment of a proxy, and delivering a copy of the revocation instrument to the proxy, and to the Company. The appointment is suspended at any time and to the extent that the Holder entitled to vote chooses to act directly and in person in the Exercise of any rights as a Holder entitled to vote.

 

  18.31. The form appointing a proxy and the power of attorney or other authority, if any, under which it is signed or a notarially certified copy of such power or authority shall be delivered to the Company or any Person which it has identified in the notice of meeting as being a Person to whom proxies may be delivered on behalf of the Company, immediately prior to the Shareholders Meeting, before the proxy Exercises any rights of the Holder entitled to vote at a Shareholders Meeting.

 

  18.32. A vote given in accordance with the terms of an instrument of proxy shall be valid notwithstanding the death or mental disorder of the principal or revocation of the proxy or of the authority under which the proxy was executed, or the transfer of the Securities in respect of which the proxy is given, provided that no intimation in writing of such death, insanity, revocation or transfer as aforesaid shall have been received by the Company at its Registered Office before the commencement of the Shareholders Meeting or adjourned Shareholders Meeting at which the proxy is used.

 

  18.33. Subject to the provisions of the Companies Act, a form appointing a proxy may be in any usual or common form. The Company shall supply a generally standard form of proxy upon request by a Holder entitled to vote.

 

  18.34. If a proxy is received duly signed but with no indication as to how the Person named therein should vote on any issue, the proxy may vote or abstain from voting as she sees fit unless the proxy indicates otherwise.

 

30


19. RECORD DATE

 

  19.1. The Board shall determine the Record Date in accordance with the applicable rules of the Central Securities Depository and the listings requirements of the JSE.

 

  19.2. If, at any time, the Board fails to determine a Record Date, the Record Date for the relevant matter is –

 

  19.2.1. in the case of a Shareholders Meeting, the latest date by which the Company is required to Deliver to Holders entitled to vote, notice of that Shareholders Meeting; or

 

  19.2.2. in the case of dividends, a date subsequent to the declaration date or confirmation date of the dividend, whichever is the later; or

 

  19.2.3. the date of the action or event, in any other case.

 

  19.3. The Company must publish a notice of a Record Date for any matter by –

 

  19.3.1. Delivering a copy to each Holder; and

 

  19.3.2. posting a conspicuous copy of the notice –

 

  19.3.2.1. at its principal office;

 

  19.3.2.2. on its web-site, if it has one;

 

  19.3.2.3. on any automated system of disseminating information maintained by the JSE.

 

20. ELECTION OF DIRECTORS AND ALTERNATE DIRECTORS AND VACANCIES

 

  20.1. The minimum number of Directors shall be 4 (four) and the maximum number shall be 15 (fifteen). Any failure by the Company at any time to have the minimum number of Directors, does not limit or negate the authority of the Board, or invalidate anything done by the Board or the Company.

 

  20.2.

Each of the Directors and the Alternate Directors, other than a Director contemplated in clause 20.8, shall be elected (which in the case of a vacancy arising shall take place at the

 

31


  next Annual General Meeting), in accordance with clause 20.5 to serve as a Director or Alternate Director. An Alternate Director shall serve in the place of 1 (one) or more Director/s named in the resolution electing her during the Director’s absence or inability to act as Director. If a Person is an Alternate Director to more than 1 (one) Director or if an Alternate Director is also a Director, she shall have a separate vote, on behalf of each Director she is representing in addition to his own vote, if any.

 

  20.3. There are no general qualifications prescribed by the Company for a Person to serve as a Director or an Alternate Director in addition to the requirements of the Companies Act and the Regulations. The Board, with the assistance of the nominations committee, must make recommendations to the Holders regarding the eligibility of Persons nominated for election as Directors, taking into account their past performance and contribution, if applicable. A brief curriculum vita of each Person standing for election or re-election as a Director at a Shareholders Meeting or the Annual General Meeting, must accompany the notice of the Shareholders Meeting.

 

  20.4. No Director shall be entitled to appoint any Person as an Alternate Director to herself.

 

  20.5. In any election of Directors and Alternate Directors, the election is to be conducted as follows –

 

  20.5.1. a series of votes of those entitled to Exercise votes regarding such election, each of which is on the candidacy of a single individual to fill a single vacancy, with the series of votes continuing until all vacancies on the Board at that time have been filled; and

 

  20.5.2. in each vote to fill a vacancy –

 

  20.5.2.1. each Voting Right entitled to be Exercised may be Exercised once; and

 

  20.5.2.2. the vacancy is filled only if a majority of the Voting Rights Exercised support the candidate.

 

  20.6. No Person shall be elected as a Director or Alternate Director, if she is Ineligible or Disqualified and any such election shall be a nullity. A Person who is Ineligible or Disqualified must not consent to be elected as a Director or Alternate Director nor act as a Director or Alternate Director. A Person placed under probation by a court in terms of section 162 of the Companies Act or in terms of section 47 of the Close Corporations Act, No 69 of 1984 as amended, must not serve as a Director or an Alternate Director unless the order of court so permits.

 

32


  20.7. No election of a Person to serve as a Director shall take effect until she has delivered to the Company a Written consent to serve.

 

  20.8. Any vacancy occurring on the Board may be filled by the Board, but the Individual so appointed shall cease to hold office at the termination of the first Annual General Meeting to be held after the appointment of such Individual as a Director unless she is elected at such or any other Shareholders Meeting.

 

  20.9. The continuing Directors (or sole continuing Director) may act, notwithstanding any vacancy in their body, so long there remain in office not less than the prescribed minimum number of Directors duly qualified to act. If the number falls below the prescribed number, as their number is reduced below the number fixed by or pursuant to this MOI as a quorum, the remaining Directors or Director shall not act except for the purpose of filling such vacancy or for the purpose of calling a Shareholders Meeting.

 

  20.10. If there is no Director able and willing to act, then any Holder entitled to Exercise Voting Rights in the election of a Director may convene a Shareholders Meeting for the purpose of electing Directors.

 

21. CESSATION OF OFFICE AS DIRECTOR OR ALTERNATE DIRECTOR

A Director or Alternate Director shall cease to hold office as such –

 

  21.1. if she becomes Ineligible or Disqualified or the Board (other than the Director concerned) resolves to remove her on such basis, and in the latter case the Director / Alternate Director has not within the permitted period filed an application for review or has filed such an application but the court has not yet confirmed the removal (during which period she shall be suspended); or

 

  21.2. when her term of office, as contemplated in clause 20.2, expires; or

 

  21.3. when she dies; or

 

  21.4. when she resigns by Written notice to the Company; or

 

  21.5.

if there are more than 4 (four) Directors in office and if the Board (other than the Director concerned) determines that she has become incapacitated to the extent that such Director is unable to perform the functions of a director, and is unlikely to regain that capacity within a

 

33


  reasonable time, and the Director / Alternate Director has not within the permitted period filed an application for review or has filed such an application but the court has not yet confirmed the removal (during which period she shall be suspended); or

 

  21.6. when she is declared delinquent by a court, or placed on probation under conditions that are inconsistent with continuing to be a Director; or

 

  21.7. if she is removed by Ordinary Resolution; or

 

  21.8. if there are more than 4 (four) Directors in office and if she is removed by resolution of the Board (other than the Director concerned) for being negligent or derelict in performing the functions of a Director, and the Director / Alternate Director has not within the permitted period filed an application for review or has filed such an application but the court has not yet confirmed the removal (during which period she shall be suspended); or

 

  21.9. she files a petition for the surrender of his estate or an application for an administration order, or if she commits an act of insolvency as defined in the insolvency law for the time being in force, or if she makes any arrangement or composition with his creditors generally; or

 

  21.10. she is otherwise removed in accordance with any provisions of this MOI.

 

22. REMUNERATION OF DIRECTORS AND ALTERNATE DIRECTORS AND MEMBERS OF BOARD COMMITTEES

 

  22.1. The Directors may be paid all their travelling and other expenses, properly and necessarily incurred by them in and about the business of the Company, and in attending meetings of the Directors or of committees thereof, and if any Director shall be required to perform extra services, to go or to reside abroad or otherwise, or be specially occupied about the Company’s business, she shall be entitled to receive a remuneration to be fixed by a disinterested quorum of the Directors, which may be either in addition to or in substitution for the remuneration provided for in clauses 22.2 and 22.3. For purposes hereof a “disinterested quorum of Directors” shall comprise a quorum of Directors excluding any Director whose remuneration would or may be affected by the relevant resolution.

 

  22.2. The Board may pay or grant any type of remuneration contemplated in sections 30(6)(b) to (g) of the Companies Act to any executive Directors.

 

  22.3. The Directors or Alternate Directors or members of Board or statutory committees shall be entitled to such remuneration for their services as Directors or Alternate Directors or members of such committees as may have been determined from time to time by Special Resolution within the previous 2 (two) years.

 

34


23. FINANCIAL ASSISTANCE FOR DIRECTORS AND PRESCRIBED OFFICERS AND THEIR RELATED AND INTER-RELATED PARTIES

 

  23.1. The Board’s powers to provide direct or indirect financial assistance as contemplated in section 45(2) of the Companies Act are not limited in any manner.

 

  23.2. If the Board adopts a resolution to provide direct or indirect financial assistance as contemplated in section 45(2) of the Companies Act, the Company shall Deliver Written notice of that resolution to all Shareholders, unless every Shareholder is also a Director, and to any trade union representing its employees –

 

  23.2.1.

within 10 (ten) Business Days after the Board adopts the resolution, if the total value of all loans, debts, obligations or assistance contemplated in that resolution, together with any previous such resolution during the financial year, exceeds 1/10 th  (one tenth) of 1% (one per cent) of the Company’s net worth at the time of the resolution; or

 

  23.2.2. within 30 (thirty) Business Days after the end of the financial year, in any other case.

 

24. RETIREMENT OF DIRECTORS IN ROTATION

 

  24.1. At the Annual General Meeting held in each year 1/3 (one-third) of the non-executive Directors, or if their number is not a multiple of 3 (three), then the number nearest to, but not less than 1/3 (one-third) shall retire from office. The non-executive Directors so to retire at each Annual General Meeting shall be firstly those retiring in terms of clause 20.8, and then, those who have been longest in office since their last election. As between non-executive Directors of equal seniority, the non-executive Directors to retire shall, in the absence of agreement, be selected by the chairperson; provided that notwithstanding anything herein contained, if, at the date of any Annual General Meeting any non-executive Director will have held office for a period of 3 (three) years since his last election or appointment, she shall retire at such meeting, either as one of the non-executive Directors to retire in pursuance of the foregoing or additionally thereto. The length of time a non-executive Director has been in office shall be computed from the date of his last election or appointment.

 

  24.2. A retiring non-executive Director shall act as a Director throughout the Meeting at which she retires.

 

35


  24.3. For avoidance of doubt, in determining the number of non-executive Directors to retire, no account shall be taken of any executive Director who has been appointed as an executive Director or holder of any executive office in the Company or as a director or employee of a company controlled by, or itself a major subsidiary of, the Company, including (but not limited to) the chief executive officer and the executive financial Director.

 

  24.4. Retiring non-executive Directors shall be eligible for re-election. No person other than a non-executive Director retiring at the Meeting shall, unless recommended by the Directors for election, be eligible for election to the office of a Director at any Annual General Meeting unless, not less than 14 (fourteen) Business Days nor more than 21 (twenty one) Business Days before the issue date for the notice of the meeting, there shall have been given to the company secretary notice in Writing by a Holder or Holders duly qualified to be Present at a Meeting for which such notice is given of the intention of such Holder or Holders to propose such Director for election and also notice in Writing signed by the Person to be proposed of his willingness to be elected.

 

  24.5. If at any Annual General Meeting, the place of any retiring non-executive Director is not filled, she shall if willing continue in office until the dissolution of the Annual General Meeting in the next year, and so on from year to year until his place is filled, unless it shall be determined at such Meeting not to fill such vacancy.

 

25. GENERAL POWERS AND DUTIES OF DIRECTORS

 

  25.1. The powers of management granted to the Directors in terms of section 66(1) of the Companies Act are not limited in any manner.

 

  25.2. The Directors may –

 

  25.2.1. establish and maintain any non-contributory or contributory pension, superannuation, provident and benefit funds for the benefit of; and

 

  25.2.2. give pensions, gratuities and allowances to and make payments for or towards the insurance of,

any persons who are employees or former employees (including Directors or former Directors) of the Company, or of any company which is or was a subsidiary of the Company or is or was in any way allied to or associated with it or any such subsidiary, and the wives, widows, families and dependants of such persons.

 

36


26. EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS

 

  26.1. A Director may be employed in any other capacity in the Company or as a director or employee of a company controlled by, or itself a major subsidiary of, the Company and, in such event, her appointment and remuneration in respect of such other office must be determined by a disinterested quorum of Directors.

 

  26.2. The Board shall from time to time appoint from their number a chief executive officer and an executive financial Director as executive Directors and may, notwithstanding any contract between them and the Company, from time to time terminate their appointment as chief executive officer or executive financial Director and appoint others in their places.

 

  26.3. In addition, the Board may from time to time appoint one or more of the Directors to be executive Directors or to be holders of any other executive office in the Company for such period (not exceeding 5 (five) years) and at such remuneration (whether by way of salary or commission, or participation in profits or partly in one way and partly in another) and generally on such terms they may think fit, and it may be made a term of his appointment that she be paid a pension, gratuity or other benefit on his retirement from office.

 

  26.4. The Board may from time to time entrust to and confer upon an executive Director for the time being such of the powers vested in the Directors as they may think fit, and may confer such powers for such time and to be exercised for such objects and upon such terms and with such restrictions, as they think expedient, and they may confer such powers either collaterally with or to the exclusion of and in substitution for, all or any of the powers of the Directors, and may from time to time revoke or vary all or any of such powers.

 

27. BOARD COMMITTEES

 

  27.1. Only Directors will be entitled to be appointed as members of a Board committee.

 

  27.2. The Board may appoint any number of Board committees and delegate to such committees any authority of the Board.

 

  27.3. No Person shall be appointed as a member of a Board committee, if she is Ineligible or Disqualified and any such appointment shall be a nullity. A Person who is Ineligible or Disqualified must not consent to be appointed as a member of a Board committee nor act as such a member. A Person placed under probation by a court must not serve as a member of a Board committee unless the order of court so permits.

 

37


  27.4. Subject to clause 27.1, there are no general qualifications prescribed by the Company for a Person to serve as a member of a Board committee in addition to the requirements of the Companies Act.

 

  27.5. A member of a Board committee shall cease to hold office as such immediately when she becomes Ineligible or Disqualified in terms of the Companies Act.

 

  27.6. Committees of the Board may consult with or receive advice from any person.

 

  27.7. Meetings and other proceedings of a committee of the Board consisting of more than 1 (one) member shall be governed by the provisions of this MOI regulating the meetings and proceedings of Directors.

 

  27.8. The composition of such committees, a brief description of their mandates, the number of meetings held and other relevant information must be disclosed in the annual report of the Company.

 

28. PERSONAL FINANCIAL INTERESTS OF DIRECTORS AND PRESCRIBED OFFICERS AND MEMBERS OF BOARD COMMITTEES

 

  28.1. For the purposes of this clause 28 ( Personal Financial Interests of Directors and Prescribed Officers and Members of Board Committees ), “Director” includes an Alternate Director, a Prescribed Officer, and a person who is a member of a committee of the Board, irrespective of whether or not the Person is also a member of the Board.

 

  28.2. At any time, a Director may disclose any Personal Financial Interest in advance, by delivering to the Board, a notice in Writing setting out the nature and extent of that Personal Financial Interest, to be used generally by the Company until changed or withdrawn by further Written notice from that Director.

 

  28.3. This clause 28 ( Personal Financial Interests of Directors and Prescribed Officers and Members of Board Committees ) shall not apply to a Director in respect of a decision that may generally affect –

 

  28.3.1. all of the Directors in their capacity as Directors, but in that case all the Directors shall act in accordance with and as if section 75(3) of the Companies Act were applicable unless the Directors are acting pursuant to an authorisation given by the Holders for the Directors to make a decision within certain thresholds, relating to their capacity as Directors; or

 

  28.3.2. a class of Persons, despite the fact that the Director is one member of that class of Persons, unless the only members of the class are the Director or Persons Related or Inter-Related to the Director. In such event the Director shall be treated as not having a Personal Financial Interest, unless the class is predominantly made up of Directors and Persons Related or Inter-Related to such Directors and in the circumstances the conflict of the Director requires the provisions of this clause 28 ( Personal Financial Interests of Directors and Prescribed Officers and Members of Board Committees ) to apply.

 

38


  28.4. If, in the reasonable view of the other non-conflicted Directors, a Director or the Related Person in respect of such Director acts in competition with the Company relating to the matter to be considered at the meeting of the Board, the Director shall only be entitled to such information concerning the matter to be considered at the meeting of the Board as shall be necessary to enable the Director to identify that such Personal Financial Interest exists or continues to exist.

 

  28.5. If a Director has a Personal Financial Interest in respect of a matter to be considered at a meeting of the Board, or Knows that a Related Person has a Personal Financial Interest in the matter, the Director –

 

  28.5.1. must disclose the Personal Financial Interest and its general nature before the matter is considered at the meeting;

 

  28.5.2. must disclose to the meeting any Material information relating to the matter, and Known to the Director;

 

  28.5.3. may disclose any observations or pertinent insights relating to the matter if requested to do so by the other Directors;

 

  28.5.4. if present at the meeting, must leave the meeting immediately after making any disclosure contemplated in clauses 28.5.2 and 28.5.3;

 

  28.5.5. must not take part in the consideration of the matter, except to the extent contemplated in clauses 28.5.2 and 28.5.3;

 

  28.5.6. while absent from the meeting in terms of this clause 28.5:

 

  28.5.6.1. is to be regarded as being present at the meeting for the purpose of determining whether sufficient Directors are present to constitute a quorum; and

 

  28.5.6.2. is not to be regarded as being present at the meeting for the purpose of determining whether a resolution has sufficient support to be adopted; and

 

39


  28.5.7. must not execute any document on behalf of the Company in relation to the matter unless specifically requested or directed to do so by the Board.

 

  28.6. If a Director acquires a Personal Financial Interest in an agreement or other matter in which the Company has a Material interest, or Knows that a Related Person has acquired a Personal Financial Interest in the matter, after the agreement or other matter has been approved by the Company, the Director must promptly disclose to the Board, the nature and extent of that Personal Financial Interest, and the Material circumstances relating to the Director or Related Person’s acquisition of that Personal Financial Interest.

 

  28.7. A decision by the Board, or a transaction or agreement approved by the Board, is valid despite any Personal Financial Interest of a Director or Person Related to the Director, only if –

 

  28.7.1. it was approved following the disclosure of the Personal Financial Interest in the manner contemplated in this clause 28 ( Personal Financial Interests of Directors and Prescribed Officers and Members of Board Committees ); or

 

  28.7.2. despite having been approved without disclosure of that Personal Financial Interest, it has been ratified by an Ordinary Resolution following disclosure of that Personal Financial Interest or has been declared to be valid by a court in terms of section 75(8) of the Companies Act.

 

29. PROCEEDINGS OF DIRECTORS

 

  29.1. A Director authorised by the Board –

 

  29.1.1. may, at any time, call a meeting of the Board; and

 

  29.1.2. must call a meeting of the Board if required to do so by at least 2 (two) Directors.

 

  29.2. The Directors may determine what period of notice shall be given of meetings of Directors and may determine the means of giving such notice which may include telephone, telefax or Electronic Communication. It shall be necessary to give notice of a meeting of Directors to all Directors even those for the time being absent from South Africa.

 

40


  29.3. If all of the Directors –

 

  29.3.1. acknowledge actual receipt of the notice;

 

  29.3.2. are present at the Board meeting; or

 

  29.3.3. waive notice of the meeting,

the meeting may proceed even if the Company failed to give the required notice of that meeting, or there was a defect in the giving of the notice.

 

  29.4. The Directors may meet for the despatch of business, adjourn and otherwise regulate their meetings as they think fit.

 

  29.5. A meeting of Directors may be conducted by Electronic Communication and/or one or more Directors may participate in a meeting of Directors by Electronic Communication so long as the Electronic Communication facility employed ordinarily enables all persons participating in that meeting to communicate concurrently with each other without an intermediary, and to participate effectively in the meeting.

 

  29.6. The quorum for a Directors’ meeting shall be 4 (four) Directors.

 

  29.7. The Directors may elect a chairperson of their meetings and determine the period, not exceeding 1 (one) year, for which she is to hold office; but if no such chairperson is elected, or if at any meeting the chairperson is not present within 15 (fifteen) minutes after the time appointed for holding it, the Directors present may choose one of their number to be chairperson of the meeting.

 

  29.8. Each Director has 1 (one) vote on a matter before the Board and a majority of the votes cast on a resolution is sufficient to approve that resolution.

 

  29.9. In the case of a tied vote the chairperson may not cast a deciding vote even if the chairperson did not initially have or cast a vote and the matter being voted on fails.

 

  29.10. The Company must keep minutes of the meetings of the Board, and any of its committees, and include in the minutes –

 

  29.10.1. any declaration given by notice or made by a director as required by clause 28 ( Personal Financial Interests of Directors );

 

  29.10.2. every resolution adopted by the Board.

 

41


  29.11. Resolutions adopted by the Board –

 

  29.11.1. must be dated and sequentially numbered; and

 

  29.11.2. are effective as of the date of the resolution, unless the resolution states otherwise.

 

  29.12. Any minutes of a meeting, or a resolution, signed by the chair of the meeting, or by the chair of the next meeting of the Board, are/is evidence of the proceedings of that meeting, or adoption of that resolution, as the case may be.

 

  29.13. A Round Robin Resolution of Directors shall be as valid and effectual as if it had been passed at a meeting of the Directors duly called and constituted, provided that each Director has received notice of the matter to be decided upon and that the majority of the Directors have voted in favour of the matter. A Round Robin Resolution may be executed in any number of counterparts and will have the same effect as if the signatures on the counterparts were on a single copy of the Round Robin Resolution.

 

30. PRESCRIBED OFFICERS

 

  30.1. No Person shall hold office as a Prescribed Officer, if she is Ineligible or Disqualified. A Person who is Ineligible or Disqualified must not consent to be appointed as a Prescribed Officer or undertake any functions which would result in her being a Prescribed Officer nor act in such office nor undertake any such functions. A Person placed under probation by a court must not consent to be appointed as a Prescribed Officer or undertake any functions which would result in her being a Prescribed Officer nor act in such office nor undertake any such functions unless the order of court so permits.

 

  30.2. A Prescribed Officer shall cease to hold office as such immediately when she becomes Ineligible or Disqualified in terms of the Companies Act.

 

31. APPOINTMENT OF COMPANY SECRETARY

 

  31.1. The Directors must appoint a company secretary from time to time, who –

 

  31.1.1. shall be a permanent resident of the Republic of South Africa and remain so while serving as company secretary; and

 

  31.1.2. shall have the requisite knowledge of, or experience in, relevant laws; and

 

  31.1.3. may be a Juristic Person subject to the following –

 

42


  31.1.3.1. every employee of that Juristic Person who provides company secretary services, or partner and employee of that partnership, as the case may be, is not Ineligible or Disqualified;

 

  31.1.3.2. at least 1 (one) employee of that Juristic Person, or one partner or employee of that partnership, as the case may be, satisfies the requirements in clauses 31.1.1 and 31.1.2;

 

  31.2. Within 60 (sixty) Business Days after a vacancy arises in the office of a company secretary, the Board must fill the vacancy by appointing a Person whom the Directors consider to have the requisite knowledge and experience. A change in the membership of a Juristic Person or partnership that holds office as company secretary does not constitute a vacancy in the office of company secretary, if the Juristic Person or partnership continues to satisfy the requirements of clause 31.1.3.

 

  31.3. If at any time a Juristic Person or partnership holds office as company secretary of the Company –

 

  31.3.1. the Juristic Person or partnership must immediately notify the Directors if the Juristic Person or partnership no longer satisfies the requirements of clause 31.1.3, and is regarded to have resigned as company secretary upon giving that notice to the Company;

 

  31.3.2. the Company is entitled to assume that the Juristic Person or partnership satisfies the requirements of clause 31.1.3, until the Company has received a notice contemplated in clause 31.3.1; and

 

  31.3.3. any action taken by the Juristic Person or partnership in performance of its functions as company secretary is not invalidated merely because the Juristic Person or partnership had ceased to satisfy the requirements of clause 31.1.3 at the time of that action.

 

  31.4. The company secretary may resign from office by giving the Company 1 (one) month’s Written notice or less than that with the prior Written approval of the Board.

 

  31.5. If the company secretary is removed from office by the Board, the company secretary may, by giving Written notice to that effect to the Company by not later than the end of the financial year in which the removal took place, require the Company to include a statement in its annual Financial Statements relating to that financial year, not exceeding a reasonable length, setting out the company secretary’s contention as to the circumstances that resulted in the removal. The Company must include this statement in the Directors’ report in its annual Financial Statements.

 

43


32. DISTRIBUTIONS

 

  32.1. The Company –

 

  32.1.1. may make Distributions from time to time, provided that –

 

  32.1.1.1. any such Distribution:

 

  32.1.1.1.1. is pursuant to an existing legal obligation of the Company, or a court order; or

 

  32.1.1.1.2. has been authorised -

 

  32.1.1.1.2.1. by a resolution of the Board; and

 

  32.1.1.1.2.2. save in the case of a pro rata payment to all Shareholders (except one which results in Shareholders holding Shares in an unlisted entity which requires the sanction of an Ordinary Resolution), cash dividends paid out of retained income, capitalisation issues or scrip dividends incorporating an election to receive either capitalisation Shares or cash, it has been sanctioned by Ordinary Resolution;

 

  32.1.1.2. it reasonably appears that the Company will satisfy the Solvency and Liquidity Test immediately after completing the proposed Distribution;

 

  32.1.1.3. the Board, by resolution, has acknowledged that it has applied the Solvency and Liquidity Test and reasonably concluded that the Company will satisfy the Solvency and Liquidity Test immediately after completing the proposed Distribution; and

 

  32.1.1.4. no obligation is imposed, if it is a Distribution of capital, that the Company is entitled to require it to be subscribed again;

 

44


  32.1.2. must before incurring any debt or other obligation for the benefit of any Holders, comply with the requirements in clause 32.1.1,

and must complete any such Distribution fully within 120 (one hundred and twenty) Business Days after the acknowledgement referred to in clause 32.1.1.3, failing which it must again comply with the aforegoing.

 

  32.2. No notice of change of address or instructions as to payment given after the determination of a dividend or other Distribution by the Company in terms of clause 32.1.1.1, shall become effective until after the dividend or other Distribution has been made, unless the Board so determines at the time the dividend or other Distribution is approved.

 

  32.3. The Company must hold all monies due to the Shareholders in trust indefinitely, but subject to the laws of prescription.

 

  32.4. The Company shall be entitled at any time to delegate its obligations in respect of unclaimed dividends or other unclaimed Distributions, to any one of the Company’s bankers from time to time.

 

33. LOSS OF DOCUMENTS

The Company shall not be responsible for the loss in transmission of any cheque, warrant, certificate or (without any limitation eiusdem generis ) other document sent through the post either to the registered address of any Holder or to any other address requested by the Holder.

 

34. NOTICES

 

  34.1. The Company may give notices, documents, records or statements or notices of availability of the aforegoing by personal delivery to the Holder or if required, a holder of Beneficial Interests or by sending them prepaid through the post or by transmitting them by Electronic Communication. The Company must give notice of any meeting to each Person entitled to vote at such meeting who has elected to receive such notice other than proxies.

 

  34.2. Any Holder or holder of Beneficial Interests who/which has furnished an Electronic Address to the Company, by doing so –

 

45


  34.2.1. authorises the Company to use Electronic Communication to give notices, documents, records or statements or notices of availability of the aforegoing to her; and

 

  34.2.2. confirms that same can conveniently be printed by the Holder or a holder of the Beneficial Interest within a reasonable time and at a reasonable cost.

 

  34.3. Any notice, document, record or statement or notice of availability of the aforegoing sent by the Company shall be deemed to have been Delivered on the date and time determined in accordance with Table CR3 in the Regulations (which is included as Schedule 3 for easy reference but does not form part of this MOI for purposes of interpretation).

 

  34.4. A Holder or Person entitled to Securities (or his executor) shall be bound by every notice in respect of the Securities Delivered to the Person who was, at the date on which that notice was Delivered, shown in the Securities Register or established to the satisfaction of the Directors (as the case may be) as the Holder of or Person entitled to the Securities, notwithstanding that the Holder or Person entitled to Securities may then have been dead or may subsequently have died or have been or become otherwise incapable of acting in respect of the Securities, and notwithstanding any transfer of the Securities was not registered at that date. The Company shall not be bound to enter any Person in the Securities Register as entitled to any Securities until that Person gives the Company an address for entry on the Securities Register.

 

  34.5. If joint Holders are registered in respect of any Securities or if more than 1 (one) Person is entitled to Securities, all notices shall be given to the Person named first in the Securities Register in respect of the Securities, and notice so Delivered shall be sufficient notice to all the Holders of or Persons entitled to or otherwise interested in the Securities.

 

  34.6. The Company shall not be bound to use any method of giving notice, documents, records or statements or notices of availability of the aforegoing, contemplated in the Regulations in respect of which provision is made for deemed delivery, but if the Company does use such a method, the notice, document, record or statement or notice of availability of the aforegoing shall be deemed to be delivered on the day determined in accordance with the Regulations. In any other case, when a given number of days’ notice or notice extending over any period is required to be given (which are not Business Days which shall be calculated in accordance with clause 2 ( Calculation of Business Days )), the provisions of clause 2 ( Calculation of Business Days ) shall also be applied.

 

  34.7.

As regards the signature of an Electronic Communication by a Holder, it shall be in such form as the Directors may specify to demonstrate that the Electronic Communication is

 

46


  genuine, or failing any such specification by the Directors, it shall be constituted by the Holder indicating in the Electronic Communication that it is the Holder’s intention to use the Electronic Communication as the medium to indicate the Holder’s approval of the information in, or the Holder’s signature of the document in or attached to, the Electronic Communication which contains the name of the Holder sending it in the body of the Electronic Communication.

 

35. INDEMNITY

 

  35.1. For the purposes of this clause 35 ( Indemnity ), “Director” includes a former Director, an Alternate Director, a Prescribed Officer, a person who is a member of a committee of the Board, irrespective of whether or not the person is also a member of the Board and a member of the Audit committee.

 

  35.2. The Company may –

 

  35.2.1. not directly or indirectly pay any fine that may be imposed on a Director, or on a Director of a related company, as a consequence of that Director having been convicted of an offence in terms of any national legislation unless the conviction was based on strict liability;

 

  35.2.2. advance expenses to a Director to defend litigation in any proceedings arising out of the Director’s service to the Company; and

 

  35.2.3. directly or indirectly indemnify a Director for –

 

  35.2.3.1. any liability, other than in respect of –

 

  35.2.3.1.1. any liability arising in terms of section 77(3)(a), (b) or (c) of the Companies Act or from wilful misconduct or wilful breach of trust on the part of the Director; or

 

  35.2.3.1.2. any fine contemplated in clause 35.2.1;

 

  35.2.3.2. any expenses contemplated in clause 35.2.2, irrespective of whether it has advanced those expenses, if the proceedings –

 

  35.2.3.2.1. are abandoned or exculpate the Director; or

 

  35.2.3.2.2. arise in respect of any other liability for which the Company may indemnify the Director in terms of clause 35.2.3.1.

 

47


  35.3. The Company may purchase insurance to protect –

 

  35.3.1. a Director against any liability or expenses for which the Company is permitted to indemnify a Director, as contemplated in clause 35.2.2 or 35.2.3; or

 

  35.3.2. the Company against any contingency including but not limited to –

 

  35.3.2.1. any expenses:

 

  35.3.2.1.1. that the Company is permitted to advance in accordance with clause 35.2.2; or

 

  35.3.2.1.2. for which the Company is permitted to indemnify a Director in accordance with clause 35.2.3; or

 

  35.3.2.2. any liability for which the Company is permitted to indemnify a Director in accordance with clause 35.2.3.1.

 

  35.4. The Company is entitled to claim restitution from a Director or from a director of a Related company for any money paid directly or indirectly by the Company to or on behalf of that Director in any manner inconsistent with section 78 of the Companies Act.

 

36. REPURCHASE OF SECURITIES

The Company is authorised to repurchase Securities as provided for and in accordance with the listings requirements of the JSE.

 

37. REGISTER OF DISCLOSURES

The Company must –

 

  37.1. establish and maintain a register of the Beneficial Interests disclosures made in terms of section 56 of the Companies Act;

 

  37.2. file a copy of a notification in respect of the acquisition of any Beneficial Interest constituting 5% (five per cent) or a multiple thereof of the issued Securities of that class or disposal so that the Person no longer holds a multiple of 5% (five per cent) of the issued Securities of that class, with the Panel;

 

48


  37.3. report the information to the Holders of the relevant class of Securities in respect of which the Company has received a notification of the type referred to in clause 37.2 unless it relates to the disposal of any Beneficial Interest of less than 1% (one per cent) of the class;

 

  37.4. publish in its annual Financial Statements a list of the Persons who hold Beneficial Interests equal to or in excess of 5% (five per cent) of the total number of Securities of that class issued by the Company, together with the extent of those Beneficial Interests.

 

38. SOCIAL AND ETHICS COMMITTEE

 

  38.1. The Board shall appoint a social and ethics committee with the first such committee, if one is required, being appointed within 12 (twelve) months after the Effective Date, unless it is a Subsidiary of another company that has a social and ethics committee, and the social and ethics committee of that other company will perform the functions required on behalf of the Company, or the Company has been exempted in terms of the Companies Act from having to have a social and ethics committee.

 

  38.2. The social and ethics committee must comprise not less than 3 (three) Directors at least 1 (one) of whom must be a Director who is not involved in the day-to-day management of the Company’s business, and must not have been so involved within the previous 3 (three) financial years.

 

  38.3. The social and ethics committee has the following functions –

 

  38.3.1. to monitor the Company’s activities, having regard to any relevant legislation, other legal requirements or prevailing codes of best practice, with regard to matters relating to –

 

  38.3.1.1. social and economic development, including the Company’s standing in terms of the goals and purposes of –

 

  38.3.1.1.1. the 10 (ten) principles set out in the United Nations Global Compact Principles;

 

  38.3.1.1.2. the OECD recommendations regarding corruption;

 

  38.3.1.1.3. the Employment Equity Act; and

 

  38.3.1.1.4. the Broad-Based Black Economic Empowerment Act;

 

  38.3.1.2. good corporate citizenship, including the Company’s –

 

49


  38.3.1.2.1. promotion of equality, prevention of unfair discrimination, and reduction of corruption;

 

  38.3.1.2.2. contribution to development of the communities in which its activities are predominantly conducted or within which its products or services are predominantly marketed; and

 

  38.3.1.2.3. record of sponsorship, donations and charitable giving;

 

  38.3.1.3. the environment, health and public safety, including the impact of the Company’s activities and of its products or services;

 

  38.3.1.4. consumer relationships, including the Company’s advertising, public relations and compliance with consumer protection laws; and

 

  38.3.1.5. labour and employment, including –

 

  38.3.1.5.1. the Company’s standing in terms of the International Labour Organization Protocol on decent work and working conditions; and

 

  38.3.1.5.2. the Company’s employment relationships, and its contribution toward the educational development of its employees;

 

  38.3.2. to draw matters within its mandate to the attention of the Board as occasion requires;

 

  38.3.3. to report, through one of its members, to the Shareholders at the Annual General Meeting on the matters within its mandate.

 

  38.4. The social and ethics committee shall be entitled to –

 

  38.4.1. require from any Director or Prescribed Officer any information or explanation necessary for the performance of the committee’s functions;

 

  38.4.2. request from any employee of the Company any information or explanation necessary for the performance of the committee’s functions;

 

  38.4.3. attend any Shareholders Meeting;

 

50


  38.4.4. receive all notices of and other communications relating to any Shareholders Meeting; and

 

  38.4.5. be heard at any Shareholders Meeting on any part of the business of the meeting that concerns the committee’s functions.

 

  38.5. The Company must pay all the expenses reasonably incurred by its social and ethics committee, including, if the social and ethics committee considers it appropriate, the costs or the fees of any consultant or specialist engaged by the social and ethics committee in the performance of its functions.

 

51


Schedule 1 – Definitions in the Companies Act

accounting records ” means information in written or electronic form concerning the financial affairs of a company as required in terms of this Act including, but not limited to, purchase and sales records, general and subsidiary ledgers and other documents and books used in the preparation of financial statements; 1

alternate director ” means a person elected or appointed to serve, as the occasion requires, as a member of the board of a company in substitution for a particular elected or appointed director of that company;

amalgamation or merger ” means a transaction, or series of transactions, pursuant to an agreement between two or more companies, resulting in –

 

(a) the formation of one or more new companies, which together hold all of the assets and liabilities that were held by any of the amalgamating or merging companies immediately before the implementation of the agreement, and the dissolution of each of the amalgamation or merging companies; or

 

(b) the survival of at least one of the amalgamating or merging companies, with or without the formation of one or more new companies, and the vesting in the surviving company or companies, together with such new company or companies, of all of the assets and liabilities that were held by any of the amalgamating or merging companies immediately before the implementation of the agreement;

annual general meeting ” means the meeting of a public company required by section 61(7);

audit ” has the meaning set out in the Auditing Profession Act, but does not include an “independent review” of annual financial statements, as contemplated in section 30(2)(b)(ii)(bb);

Auditing Profession Act ” means the Auditing Profession Act, 2005 (Act No. 26 of 2005);

auditor ” has the meaning set out in the Auditing Profession Act;

Banks Act ” means the Banks Act, 1990 (Act No. 1194 of 1990);

beneficial interest ”, when used in relation to a company’s securities, means the right or entitlement of a person, through ownership, agreement, relationship or otherwise, alone or together with another person to –

 

(a) receive or participate in any distribution in respect of the company’s securities;

 

(b) exercise or cause to be exercised, in the ordinary course, any or all of the rights attaching to the company’s securities; or

 

(c) dispose or direct the disposition of the company’s securities, or any part of a distribution in respect of the securities,

but does not include any interest held by a person in a unit trust or collective investment scheme in terms of the Collective Investment Schemes Act, 2002 (Act No. 45 of 2002);

board ” means the board of directors of a company;

business days ” has the meaning determined in accordance with section 5(3);

central securities depository ” has the meaning set out in section 1 of the Securities Services Act, 2004 (Act No. 36 of 2004);

Commission ” means the Companies and Intellectual Property Commission established by section 185;

Commissioner ” means the person appointed to or acting in the office of that name, as contemplated in section 189;

 

1  

Regulation 25(3) contains requirements as to what the accounting records must include.


company ” means a juristic person incorporated in terms of this Act, a domesticated company, or a juristic person that, immediately before the effective date –

 

(a) was registered in terms of the –

 

  (i) Companies Act, 1973 (Act No. 61 of 1973), other than as an external company as defined in that Act; or

 

  (ii) Close Corporations Act, 1984 (Act No. 69 of 1984), if it has subsequently been converted in terms of Schedule 2 ;

 

(b) was in existence and recognised as an ‘existing company’ in terms of the Companies Act, 1973 (Act No. 61 of 1973); or

 

(c) was deregistered in terms of the Companies Act, 1973 (Act No. 61 of 1973), and has subsequently been re-registered in terms of this Act;

Competition Act ”, means the Competition Act, 1998 (Act No. 89 of 1998);

consideration ” means anything of value given and accepted in exchange for any property, service, act, omission or forbearance or any other thing of value, including –

 

(a) any money, property, negotiable instrument, securities, investment credit facility, token or ticket;

 

(b) any labour, barter or similar exchange of one thing for another; or

 

(c) any other thing, undertaking, promise, agreement or assurance, irrespective of its apparent or intrinsic value, or whether it is transferred directly or indirectly;

convertible ” when used in relation to any securities of a company, means securities that may, by their terms, be converted into other securities of the company, including –

 

(a) any non-voting securities issued by the company and which will become voting securities –

 

  (i) on the happening of a designated event; or

 

  (ii) if the holder of those securities so elects at some time after acquiring them; and

 

(b) Options to acquire securities to be issued by the company, irrespective of whether those securities may be voting securities, or non-voting securities contemplated in paragraph (a) ;

director ” means a member of the board of a company, as contemplated in section 66, or an alternate director of a company and includes any person occupying the position of a director or alternate director, by whatever name designated;

distribution ” means a direct or indirect –

 

(a) transfer by a company of money or other property of the company, other than its own shares, to or for the benefit of one or more holders of any of the shares or to the holder of a beneficial interest in any such shares, of that company or of another company within the same group of companies, whether –

 

  (i) in the form of a dividend;

 

  (ii) as a payment in lieu of a capitalisation share, as contemplated in section 47;

 

  (iii) as consideration for the acquisition –

 

2


  (aa) by the company of any of its shares, as contemplated in section 48; or

 

  (bb) by any company within the same group of companies, of any shares of a company within that group of companies; or

 

  (iv) otherwise in respect of any of the shares of that company or of another company within the same group of companies, subject to section 164(19);

 

(b) incurrence of a debt or other obligation by a company for the benefit of one or more holders of any of the shares of that company or of another company within the same group of companies; or

 

(c) forgiveness or waiver by a company of a debt or other obligation owed to the company by one or more holders of any of the shares of that company or of another company within the same group of companies,

but does not include any such action taken upon the final liquidation of the company;

effective date ”, with reference to any particular provision of this Act, means the date on which that provision came into operation in terms of section 225;

electronic communication ” has the meaning set out in section 1 of the Electronic Communications and Transactions Act;

Electronic Communications and Transactions Act ” means the Electronic Communications and Transactions Act, 2002 (Act No. 25 of 2002);

employee share scheme ” has the meaning set out in section 95(1) (c) ;

exchange ” when used as a noun, has the meaning set out in section 1 of the Securities Services Act, 2004 (Act No. 36 of 2004);

exercise ”, when used in relation to voting rights, includes voting by proxy, nominee, trustee or other person in a similar capacity;

ex officio director ” means a person who holds office as a director of a particular company solely as a consequence of that person holding some other office, title, designation or similar status specified in the company’s Memorandum of Incorporation;

external company ” means a foreign company that is carrying on business, or non-profit activities, as the case may be, within the Republic, subject to section 23(2);

file ” when used as a verb, means to deliver a document to the Commission in the manner and form, if any, prescribed for that document;

financial statemen t” includes –

 

(a) annual financial statements and provisional annual financial statements;

 

(b) interim or preliminary reports;

 

(c) group and consolidated financial statements in the case of a group of companies; and

 

(d) financial information in a circular, prospectus or provisional announcement of results, that an actual or prospective creditor or holder of the company’s securities, or the Commission, Panel or other regulatory authority, may reasonably be expected to rely on;

group of companies ” means a holding company and all of its subsidiaries;

 

3


holding company ”, in relation to a subsidiary, means a juristic person that controls that subsidiary as a result of any circumstances contemplated in section 2(2)(a) or 3(1)(a);

incorporator ”, when used –

 

(a) with respect to a company incorporated in terms of this Act, means a person who incorporated that company, as contemplated in section 13; or

 

(b) with respect to a pre-existing company, means a person who took the relevant actions comparable to those contemplated in section 13 to bring about the incorporation of that company;

individual ” means a natural person;

inter-related ”, when used in respect of three or more persons, means persons who are related to one another in a linked series of relationships, such that two of the persons are related in a manner contemplated in section 2(1) and one of them is related to the third in any such manner, and so forth in an unbroken series;

juristic person ” includes –

 

(a) a foreign company; and

 

(b) a trust, irrespective of whether or not it was established within or outside the Republic;

knowing ”, “ knowingly or “ knows ”, when used with respect to a person, and in relation to a particular matter, means that the person either –

 

(a) Had actual knowledge of the matter; or

 

(b) Was in a position in which the person reasonably ought to have –

 

  (i) had actual knowledge;

 

  (ii) investigated the matter to an extent that would have provided the person with actual knowledge; or

 

  (iii) taken other measures which, if taken, could reasonably be expected to have provided the person with actual knowledge of the matter;

material , when used as an adjective, means significant in the circumstances of a particular matter, to a degree that is –

 

(a) of consequence in determining the matter; or

 

(b) might reasonably affect a person’s judgement or decision-making in the matter;

nominee ” has the meaning set out in section 1 of the Securities Services Act, 2004 (Act No. 36 of 2004);

ordinary resolution ” means a resolution adopted with the support of more than 50% of the voting rights exercised on the resolution, or a higher percentage as contemplated in section 65(8) –

 

(a) at a shareholders meeting; or

 

(b) by holders of the company’s securities acting other than at a meeting, as contemplated in section 60;

person ” includes a juristic person;

personal financial interest ”, when used with respect to any person –

 

4


(a) means a direct material interest of that person, of a financial, monetary or economic nature, or to which a monetary value may be attributed; but

 

(b) does not include any interest held by a person in a unit trust or collective investment scheme in terms of the Collective Investment Schemes Act, 2002 (Act No. 45 of 2002), unless that person has direct control over the investment decisions of that fund or investment;

prescribed officer ” means a person who, within a company, performs any function that has been designated by the Minister in terms of section 66(10);

present at a meeting ” means to be present in person, or able to participate in the meeting by electronic communication, or to be represented by a proxy who is present in person or able to participate in the meeting by electronic communication;

private company ” means a profit company that –

 

(a) is not a public, personal liability or state-owned company; and

 

(b) satisfies the criteria set out in section 8(2)(b);

profit company ” means a company incorporated for the purpose of financial gain for its shareholders;

public company ” means a profit company that is not a state-owned company, a private company or a personal liability company;

record date ” means the date established under section 59 on which a company determines the identity of its shareholders and their shareholdings for the purposes of this Act;

registered auditor ” has the meaning set out in the Auditing Profession Act;

registered office ” means the office of a company, or of an external company, that is registered as required by section 23;

related ”, when used in respect of two persons, means persons who are connected to one another in any manner contemplated in section 2(1)(a) to section (c ) ;

rules ” and “ rules of a company ” means any rules made by a company as contemplated in section 15(3) to (5);

securities ” means any shares, debentures or other instruments, irrespective of their form or title, issued or authorised to be issued by a profit company;

securities register ” means the register required to be established by a profit company in terms of section 50(1);

share ” means one of the units into which the proprietary interest in a profit company is divided;

shareholder ”, subject to section 57(1), means the holder of a share issued by a company and who is entered as such in the certificated or uncertificated securities register, as the case may be;

shareholders meeting ”, with respect to any particular matter concerning a company, means a meeting of those holders of that company’s issued securities who are entitled to exercise voting rights in relation to that matter;

solvency and liquidity test ” means the test set out in section 4 (1);

special resolution ” means –

 

5


(a) in the case of a company, a resolution adopted with the support of at least 75% of the voting rights exercised on the resolution, or a different percentage as contemplated in section 65(10) –

 

  (i) at a shareholders meeting; or

 

  (ii) by holders of the company’s securities acting other than at a meeting, as contemplated in section 60; or

 

(b) in the case of any other juristic person, a decision by the owner or owners of that person, or by another authorised person, that requires the highest level of support in order to be adopted, in terms of the relevant law under which that juristic person was incorporated;

subsidiary ” has the meaning determined in accordance with section 3;

voting power ”, with respect to any matter to be decided by a company, means the voting rights that may be exercised in connection with that matter by a particular person, as a percentage of all such voting rights;

voting rights ”, with respect to any matter to be decided by a company, means –

 

(a) the rights of any holder of the company’s securities to vote in connection with that matter, in the case of a profit company; or

 

(b) the rights of a member to vote in connection with the matter, in the case of a non-profit company;

voting securities ”, with respect to any particular matter, means securities that –

 

(a) carry voting rights with respect to that matter; or

 

(b) are presently convertible to securities that carry voting rights with respect to that matter;

wholly-owned subsidiary ” has the meaning determined in accordance with section 3(1)(b).

 

6


Schedule 2 – Ineligible / disqualified in terms of section 69(7) and (8) of the Companies Act read with Regulation 39(3)

 

1. A person is ineligible to be a Director if the Person –

 

  1.1. is a juristic person;

 

  1.2. is an unemancipated minor, or is under a similar legal disability; or

 

  1.3. does not satisfy any qualification set out in the MOI.

 

2. A person is disqualified to be a Director if –

 

  2.1. a court has prohibited that Person to be a Director, or declared the Person to be delinquent in terms of section 162, or in terms of section 47 of the Close Corporations Act, 1984 (Act No. 69 of 1984); or

 

  2.2. the Person –

 

  2.2.1. is an unrehabilitated insolvent;

 

  2.2.2. is prohibited in terms of any public regulation to be a Director;

 

  2.2.3. has been removed from an office of trust, on the grounds of misconduct involving dishonesty; or

 

  2.2.4. has been convicted, in the Republic or elsewhere, and imprisoned without the option of a fine, or fined more than R1 000,00 (one thousand rand), for theft, fraud, forgery, perjury or an offence –

 

  2.2.4.1. involving fraud, misrepresentation or dishonesty;

 

  2.2.4.2. in connection with the promotion, formation or management of a company, or in connection with any act contemplated in subsection (2) or (5); or

 

  2.2.4.3 under the Companies Act, the Insolvency Act, 1936 (Act No. 24 of 1936), the Close Corporations Act, 1984, the Competition Act, the Financial Intelligence Centre Act, 2001 (Act No. 38 of 2001), the Securities Services Act, 2004 (Act No. 36 of 2004), or Chapter 2 of the Prevention and Combating of Corruption Activities Act, 2004 (Act No. 12 of 2004).


Schedule 3 – Prescribed methods of delivery in the Regulations

 

Person to whom the
document is to be delivered

  

Method of delivery

  

Date and Time of Deemed delivery

Any Person    By faxing the notice or a certified copy of the document to the Person, if the Person has a fax number;    On the date and at the time recorded by the fax receiver, unless there is conclusive evidence that it was delivered on a different date or at a different time.
  

 

By sending the notice or a copy of the document by electronic mail, if the Person has an Electronic Address;

  

 

On the date and at the time recorded by the computer used by the Company, unless there is conclusive evidence that it was delivered on a different date or at a different time.

  

 

By sending the notice or a certified copy of the document by registered post to the Person’s last known address;

  

 

On the 7th (seventh) day following the day on which the notice or document was posted as recorded by a post office, unless there is conclusive evidence that it was delivered on a different day.

  

 

By any other means authorised by the High Court; or

  

 

In accordance with the order of the High Court.

  

 

By any other method allowed for that Person in terms of the following rows of this Table.

  

 

As provided for that method of delivery.

 

Any natural Person

  

 

By handing the notice or a certified copy of the document to the Person, or to any representative authorised in writing to accept service on behalf of the Person;

  

 

On the date and at the time recorded on a receipt for the delivery.

  

 

By leaving the notice or a certified copy of the document at the Person’s place of residence or business with any other Person who is apparently at least 16 (sixteen) years old and in charge of the premises at the time;

  

 

On the date and at the time recorded on a receipt for the delivery.

  

 

By leaving the notice or a certified copy of the document at the Person’s place of employment with any Person who is apparently at least 16 (sixteen) years old and apparently in authority.

  

 

On the date and at the time recorded on a receipt for the delivery.

 

A company or similar body corporate

  

 

By handing the notice or a certified copy of the document to a responsible employee of the company or body corporate at its registered office or its principal place of business within South Africa;

  

 

On the date and at the time recorded on a receipt for the delivery.

  

 

If there is no employee willing to accept service, by affixing the notice or a certified copy of the document to the main door of the office or place of business.

  

 

On the date and at the time sworn to by affidavit of the Person who affixed the document, unless there is conclusive evidence that the document was affixed on a different date or at a different time.


Person to whom the
document is to be delivered

  

Method of delivery

  

Date and Time of Deemed delivery

The state or a province    By handing the notice or a certified copy of the document to a responsible employee in any office of the State Attorney.    On the date and at the time recorded on a receipt for the delivery.

 

A municipality

  

 

By handing the notice or a certified copy of the document to the town clerk, assistant town clerk or any Person acting on behalf of that Person.

  

 

On the date and at the time recorded on a receipt for the delivery.

 

A trade union

  

 

By handing the notice or a certified copy of the document to a responsible employee who is apparently in charge of the main office of the union or for the purposes of section 13(2), if there is a union office within the magisterial district of the firm required to notify its employees, in terms of the Regulations at that office.

  

 

On the date and at the time recorded on a receipt for the delivery.

  

 

If there is no person willing to accept service, by affixing a certified copy of the notice or document to the main door of that office.

  

 

On the date and at the time sworn to by affidavit of the Person who affixed the document, unless there is conclusive evidence that the document was affixed on a different date or at a different time.

 

Employees of the Company

  

 

By fixing the notice or certified copy of the document, in a prominent place in the workplace where it can be easily read by employees.

  

 

On the date and at the time sworn to by affidavit of the Person who affixed the document, unless there is conclusive evidence that the document was affixed on a different date or at a different time.

 

A partnership, firm or association

  

 

By handing the notice or a certified copy of the document to a Person who is apparently in charge of the premises and apparently at least 16 (sixteen) years of age, at the place of business of the partnership, firm or association;

  

 

On the date and at the time recorded on a receipt for the delivery.

  

 

If the partnership, firm or association has no place of business, by handing the notice or a certified copy of the document to a partner, the owner of the firm, or the chairman or secretary of the managing or other controlling body of the association, as the case may be.

  

 

On the date and at the time recorded on a receipt for the delivery.

 

2

Exhibit 4.6

ANNEXURE B

GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

(Registration No 1968/004880/06)

2012 SHARE PLAN


TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

1.

   INTRODUCTION      3   

2.

   INTERPRETATION      3   

3.

   THE PLAN      15   

4.

   OPERATION OF THE PLAN      15   

5.

   PLAN LIMITS      18   

6.

   MAKING AND SETTLEMENT OF AWARDS      19   

7.

   ASSESSMENT OF COMPLIANCE WITH PERFORMANCE CONDITION      24   

8.

   VESTING OF THE FORFEITABLE SHARES AND CONDITIONAL SHARES      25   

9.

   TERMINATION OF EMPLOYMENT AND DEATH 14.1(h)      26   

10.

   CHANGE OF CONTROL 14.3(a), (b), (c), 14.1(g)      28   

11

   VARIATION IN SHARE CAPITAL 14.1(g), 14.3(a), (b)      30   

12

   FORFEITURE AND LAPSE OF AWARDS      34   

13

   FURTHER CONDITIONS      35   

14

   DISCLOSURE IN ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 14.8      37   

15

   COMPLIANCE OFFICER      37   

16

   AMENDMENTS AND TERMINATION 14.2      37   

17

   DOMICILIUM AND NOTICES      39   

18

   DISPUTES      41   

19

   SEVERABILITY      43   

20

   GOVERNING LAW      43   


1. INTRODUCTION

The purpose of the Gold Fields Limited Long-Term Incentive Plan 2012 is to provide selected Employees of the Employer Companies with the opportunity of receiving Shares in the Company. The provision of Shares will be used as both an incentive to Participants to deliver the Group’s business strategy over the long-term and as a retention mechanism. This will provide selected Employees with the opportunity to share in the success of the Company and provide alignment between these Employees and shareholders. 14.1(a)

 

2. INTERPRETATION

 

2.1 In these Rules, unless inconsistent with the context, the following words and expressions shall have the following meanings:

 

2.1.1    “Act”    the Companies Act 71 of 2008 as amended and any re-enactment or replacement thereof;
2.1.2    “Allocated”    for purposes of setting the Plan limits referred to in Rule 5.1.1, shall mean one Share allocated per Award granted;
2.1.3    “Auditors”    the auditors of the Company from time to time;
2.1.4    “Award”    (a) an award of a specified number of Forfeitable Shares to an Employee in terms of the Plan; and/or

 

Page 1


      (b) an award of a specified number of Conditional Shares to an Employee in terms of the Plan,
      on the basis that a Participant may forfeit the Forfeitable Shares or Conditional Shares in the circumstances set out in the Award Letter, and “Awarded” shall bear a similar meaning;
2.1.5    “Award Date”    the date, specified in the Award Letter, on which an Award is made to an Employee (being a date not earlier than the date on which the Committee resolved to make such an Award to the Employee) and the Employee will be deemed to have automatically accepted the Award on this date, unless otherwise specified in the Rules;
2.1.6    “Award Letter”    a letter containing the information specified in Rule 6.3 sent by the Company, or its nominee, and on the recommendation of the Employer Company, to an Employee informing the Employee of the grant of an Award to him;

 

Page 2


2.1.7   “Business Day”    any day on which the JSE is open for the transaction of business;
2.1.8   “Capitalisation Issue”    a capitalisation issue as contemplated in section 47 of the Act;
2.1.9   “Change of Control”    all circumstances where a party (or parties acting in concert), directly or indirectly, obtains –
     (a)    beneficial ownership of 50% (fifty percent) or more of the Company’s issued Shares; or
     (b)    control of 50% (fifty percent) or more of the voting rights at meetings of the Company; or
     (c)    the right to control the management of the Company or the composition of the board of Directors of the Company; or
     (d)    the right to appoint or remove directors holding a majority of voting rights at board meetings; or
     (e)    the approval by the Company’s shareholders of, or the consummation of, a merger or consolidation of the

 

Page 3


     Company with any other business or entity, or upon a sale of the whole or a major part of the Company’s assets or undertaking.
2.1.10   “Change of Control Date”    the date on which the Change of Control of the Company becomes effective;
2.1.11   “Committee”    the Remuneration Committee of the board of Directors, the members of which do not hold any executive office within the Group, or any sub-committee of that committee charged with the administration of all or part of the Plan and, in the absence of such a committee, the board of Directors;
2.1.12   “Company”    Gold Fields Limited (Registration Number 1968/004880/06);
2.1.13   “Conditional Shares”    Shares, the Settlement of which is subject to the fulfilment of the Performance Condition and Vesting Condition specified in the Award Letter;
2.1.14   “Country Schedule”    a schedule to these Rules to be adopted as directed by the Committee, governing participation in the Plan by Participants employed by the Group in jurisdictions other

 

Page 4


     than South Africa. Such Country Schedule shall form part of the Rules and in the event of a conflict between the respective provisions of the Country Schedule and the Rules, the relevant provision/s of the Rules shall prevail;
2.1.15   “Date of Termination of Employment”    the date upon which a Participant is no longer employed by, or ceases to hold salaried office in, any Employer Company; provided that, where a Participant’s employment is terminated without notice or on terms in lieu of notice, the Date of Termination of Employment shall be deemed to occur on the date on which the termination takes effect, and where such employment is terminated with notice, the Date of Termination of Employment shall be deemed to occur upon the date on which that notice expires;
2.1.16   “Directors”    the directors of the Company from time to time;
2.1.17   “Employee”    any person holding salaried employment or office with any Employer Company, including any executive director, but excluding any non-executive director of the Group; 14.1 (a) 14.4, 14.5

 

Page 5


2.1.18   “Employer Company”    a company in the Group which employs a Participant;
2.1.19   “Escrow Agent”    the person or entity appointed by the Company from time to time to hold Forfeitable Shares for the absolute benefit of Participants, subject to the terms and conditions of these Rules;
2.1.20   “Existing Share Plans”    the Gold Fields Management Incentive Scheme, the terms and conditions of which are set out in the Gold Fields Management Incentive Deed of Trust, and the Gold Fields Limited 2005 Share Plan;
2.1.21   “Financial Year”    the financial year of the Company, running from 1 January to 31 December of each year as at the date of adoption of this Plan;
2.1.22   “Forfeitable Shares”    the Shares comprised in the Award registered in the name of the Participant and held for his benefit in dematerialised form in terms of 6.6 and 6.7;

 

Page 6


2.1.23   “Group”    the Company and its Subsidiary companies from time to time and the expression “member of the Group” shall be construed accordingly;
2.1.24   “JSE”    the exchange operated by the JSE Limited (registration number 2005/022939/06), a public company duly registered and incorporated in accordance with the company laws of South Africa, licensed as an exchange under the Securities Services Act, No. 36 of 2004, as amended;
2.1.25   “JSE Listings Requirements”    the Listings Requirements as amended from time to time by the JSE, whether by way of practice note or otherwise;
2.1.26   “Liquidation Date”    the date on which any successful application for the final or provisional liquidation of the Company is lodged at the relevant court;
2.1.27   “Market Value”    the three day volume weighted average price of a Share on the JSE, on the last trading day preceding the date on which a determination of the Market Value of the Shares is to be made for the purposes of these Rules;

 

Page 7


2.1.28   “Participant”    an Employee who has accepted or is deemed to have accepted an Award made to him in terms of the Plan and includes the executor of such Employee’s deceased estate where appropriate;
2.1.29   “Performance Condition”    a Performance Condition, if any, imposed as a condition of Vesting of an Award of Conditional Shares under Rule 6.2, as set out in the Award Letter;
2.1.30   “Performance Period”    the period in respect of which a Performance Condition is to be satisfied, as set out in the Award Letter;
2.1.31   “Plan”    the Gold Fields Limited Long-Term Incentive Plan 2012 constituted by these Rules, and amended from time to time;
2.1.32   “Prohibited Period”    (a) a closed period, as defined in the JSE Listings Requirements applicable to the Company from time to time; or
     (b) any other period when there exists any matter, which constitutes unpublished price sensitive information in relation to the Company’s securities;

 

Page 8


2.1.33   “Recharge Policy”    a written policy in force from time to time between the Company and Employer Company, regulating the funding of the Settlement;
2.1.34   “Retirement”    in relation to a Participant, retirement in terms of the rules of the Participant’s Employer Company’s pension or provident fund or, in relation to a Participant who is not a member of such fund, or where the Employer Company does not have such fund, as determined by a service contract between the Participant and his Employer Company, or early retirement with the consent of the Participant’s Employer Company;
2.1.35   “Rights Issue”    the offer of any securities of the Company, or those of another company, to all ordinary shareholders of the Company pro rata to their holdings;
2.1.36   “Rights Issue Share”    a Share or other security which a Participant can acquire in terms of a Rights Issue by virtue of Forfeitable Shares awarded to him;

 

Page 9


2.1.37   “Rules”    these Rules of the Plan, as amended from time to time;
2.1.38   “Settlement”    the issue by the Company to a Participant of the required number of Forfeitable Shares or Shares to which a Participant is entitled pursuant to the making of an Award to a Participant, in accordance with the Settlement method stipulated in Rule 6.6 and the words “Settle” and “Settled” shall bear a corresponding meaning;
2.1.39   “Settlement Date”    the date on which Settlement shall occur;
2.1.40   “Share”    an ordinary share in the capital of the Company and includes any security/ies which are attributable to such ordinary share following a Change of Control;
2.1.41   “Subsidiary”    a company which is a subsidiary of the Company, within the meaning of the Act and/or a “Subsidiary” as defined in Accounting Statement IAS 27 (Consolidated and separate financial statements);
2.1.42   “Vesting Condition”    the condition of continued employment with the Group for the duration of the Vesting Period up to and including the Vesting Date,

 

Page 10


     as specified in Rule 8, unless otherwise stated in Rule 9, and applicable to all Awards;
2.1.43   “Vest”    (a) in respect of an Award of Forfeitable Shares, a Participant becoming unconditionally entitled to the Forfeitable Shares, free of any restrictions and forfeiture, on the fulfilment of the Vesting Condition as set out in the Award Letter;
     (b) in respect of an Award of Conditional Shares, a Participant becoming entitled to a Share after confirmation by the Directors that the Performance Condition and Vesting Condition have been fulfilled, as set out in the Award Letter, and “Vesting” and “Vested” shall be construed accordingly;
2.1.44   “Vesting Date”    the date on which Vesting occurs; and
2.1.45   “Vesting Period”    the period specified in the Award Letter for which the Participant should fulfil the Vesting Condition.

 

2.2 The headings in these Rules are inserted for reference purposes only and shall in no way govern or affect the interpretation hereof.

 

Page 11


2.3 If any provision in a definition is a substantive provision conferring rights or imposing obligations on any party, effect shall be given to it as if it were a substantive provision in the body of these Rules.

 

2.4 Unless the context indicates otherwise, an expression that denotes any gender includes the others; a natural person includes a created entity (corporate or unincorporated) and the singular includes the plural, and vice versa in each case.

 

2.5 References in these Rules to any statutory provisions include a reference to those provisions as amended or replaced from time to time and include any subordinate legislation made under them from time to time. Any reference to a particular section in a statutory provision is to that section as at the date of adoption of this Plan, and as amended or re-enacted from time to time and/or an equivalent measure in a statutory provision, provided that if as a result of such amendment or re-enactment, the specific requirements of a section referred to in this Plan are changed, the relevant provision of this Plan shall be read also as if it had been amended as necessary, without the necessity for an actual amendment;

 

2.6 When any number of days is prescribed in this Plan, same shall be reckoned exclusively of the first and inclusively of the last day unless the last day falls on a day which is not a business day, in which case the last day shall be the next succeeding day which is a business day.

 

2.7 Unless a contrary intention clearly appears -

 

Page 12


2.7.1 if figures are referred to in numerals and in words and if there is any conflict between the two, the words shall prevail;

 

2.7.2 the words “include”, “including” and “in particular” shall be construed as being by way of example or emphasis only and shall not be construed as, nor shall they take effect as, limiting the generality of any preceding word/s;

 

2.8 Any reference in this Plan to another agreement or document shall be construed as a reference to such other agreement or document as same may have been, or may from time to time be, amended, varied, novated or supplemented;

 

2.9 The words “other” and “otherwise” shall not be construed eiusdem generis with any preceding words if a wider construction is possible.

 

3. THE PLAN

The Plan shall be applicable to Awards made on or after the approval of the Plan by shareholders of the Company. These Rules shall govern the Plan.

 

4. OPERATION OF THE PLAN

 

4.1 Basis upon which Awards are made 14.1.(f)

 

4.1.1 The basis upon which the Awards of Forfeitable Shares are made includes the following:

 

  (i) an Award of Forfeitable Shares will be made with reference to a Participant’s cash bonus calculated with reference to a Participant’s annual performance targets as applicable for the Financial Year ending immediately preceding the Award Date;

 

Page 13


  (ii) the Shares are registered in the name of the Participant immediately subsequent to the Award Date and the Participant has all shareholder rights from the Settlement Date, subject to the forfeiture and disposal restrictions and the remaining provisions of these Rules; and

 

  (iii) Vesting of the Awards in all instances will be subject to the Vesting Condition, unless otherwise stated in Rule 9.

 

4.1.2 The basis upon which the Awards of Conditional Shares are made includes the following:

 

  (i) the number of Conditional Shares subject to an Award made to an Employee will primarily be based on the Employee’s annual salary, grade, performance, retention and attraction requirements and market benchmarks; 14.1(f)

 

  (ii) a Participant will not be entitled to any voting rights or dividends prior to the Settlement of Conditional Shares subsequent to the Vesting thereof; 14.1(e)

 

  (iii) Vesting of the Awards in all instances is subject to the Vesting Condition, unless otherwise stated in Rule 9; and

 

  (iv) Vesting of the Awards will be subject to the satisfaction of the Performance Condition measured over the Performance Period.

 

4.2 The Committee may from time to time, in its discretion:

 

Page 14


4.2.1 call upon the Employer Companies to make recommendations to the Committee as to which of their respective Employees they recommend to incentivise or retain the services of by the Award of Forfeitable Shares or Conditional Shares; and

 

4.2.2 approve the grant of Awards to the Employees.

 

4.3 The Committee will have the final authority to decide:

 

4.3.1 which Employees will participate in the Plan in respect of each Award;

 

4.3.2 whether the Awards will be in the form of Forfeitable Shares or Conditional Shares, or a combination thereof;

 

4.3.3 the aggregate quantum of Awards to be made to all Employees;

 

4.3.4 the Vesting Period and Vesting Date in respect of each Award;

 

4.3.5 in respect of an Award of Conditional Shares, the terms of the Performance Condition and the Performance Period; and

 

4.3.6 all other issues relating to the governance of the Plan.

 

4.4 If, and when, the Committee approves the granting of an Award, the Committee shall notify the Company and the Employer Company of each Employee who has been approved for participation in the Plan.

 

4.5 The Company, or its nominee, shall issue an Award Letter to every Employee who has been approved for participation in the Plan as soon as is practically possible after receiving the Committee’s notification in terms of Rule 4.4.

 

Page 15


4.6 The Employer Companies will, however, remain responsible to procure the Settlement of the benefits under the Plan to the Participants employed by them on the Settlement Date, or as may otherwise be regulated under the Recharge Policy.

 

5. PLAN LIMITS

 

5.1 Overall company Limit 14.1(b)

 

5.1.1 The aggregate number of Shares at any one time which may be Allocated under the Plan, when added to the total number of Shares allocated under the Existing Share Plans shall not exceed 36,231,651 Shares (which represents approximately 5% of the number of issued Shares as at the date of approval of the Plan by shareholders). To the extent that there is a discrepancy between the number of Shares and the percentage of issued Shares it represents, the number of Shares will take precedence.

 

5.1.2 The limit referred to in Rule 5.1.1 shall include new Shares allotted and issued by the Company in Settlement of this Plan as contemplated in Rules 6.6.1 and 6.6.2 and new Shares allocated and issued and delivered by the Company in settlement of awards granted under the Existing Share Plans.

 

5.1.3 The limit referred to in Rule 5.1.1 shall exclude Shares Allocated by way of Awards under the Plan and Shares allocated in respect of awards under the Existing Share Plans which have been forfeited by Participants or which have lapsed without being exercised by Participants. 14.3(f)

 

Page 16


5.1.4 The Directors must, where required, adjust the number of Shares available for the Plan (without the prior approval of the Company in a general meeting) and the number of Shares subject to existing Awards to take account of a sub-division or consolidation of the Shares of the Company. 14.3(a)

 

5.1.5 The Auditors shall confirm to the JSE in writing that any such adjustment has been properly calculated on a reasonable and equitable basis, in accordance with the Rules. 14.3(d)

 

5.2 Individual limit 14.1(c)

 

5.2.1 Subject to the provisions of Rule 11, the maximum number of Shares Allocated in respect of all unvested Awards granted to any Participant in respect of this Plan and unvested awards under the Existing Share Plans, shall not exceed 3,623,165 Shares (which represents approximately 0,5% of the number of issued Shares as at the date of approval of the Plan by shareholders. To the extent that there is a discrepancy between the number of Shares and the percentage of issued Shares it represents, the number of Shares will take precedence.

 

6. MAKING AND SETTLEMENT OF AWARDS

 

6.1 Time when Awards may be made

 

6.1.1 The Committee may select any Employee for participation in the Plan, and make a grant to such Employee:

 

  (i) after the Plan has been approved by shareholders; and

 

Page 17


  (ii) after the publication of the Company’s annual results for the relevant financial year. However, the Committee may, on behalf of an Employer Company, allow an Employee to join the Plan part way through a Financial Year of the Company by making an Award as soon as is practically possible after the interim results are published; and

 

  (iii) on any day on which there are no restrictions on the making of Awards being restrictions imposed by or as a result of a Prohibited Period, statute, order, regulation or directive, or by any code adopted by the Company based on the provisions contained in the King Report on Corporate Governance relating to dealings in securities by directors or the Listings Requirements, as the case may be.

 

6.2 Performance Condition in respect of Conditional Shares

 

6.2.1 The Vesting of an Award of Conditional Shares will be subject to the satisfaction of the Performance Condition set by the Committee.

 

6.2.2 Any such Performance Condition imposed under Rule 6.2.1 shall be:

 

  (i) objective; and

 

  (ii) set out in, or attached in the form of a schedule to, the Award Letter.

 

6.3 Award Letter

 

6.3.1 The Award Letter shall be in writing and shall specify the terms of the Award including:

 

Page 18


  (i) the name of the Employee;

 

  (ii) the Award Date;

 

  (iii) the form of the Award, i.e. Forfeitable Shares or Conditional Shares and the combination thereof;

 

  (iv) the number of Shares subject to an Award;

 

  (v) the Vesting Date for Forfeitable Shares and Conditional Shares;

 

  (vi) the Vesting Condition;

 

  (vii) the Vesting Period;

 

  (viii) in respect of Conditional Shares, the Performance Condition and Performance Period; and

 

  (ix) any other relevant terms and conditions.

 

6.4 Award of Forfeitable Shares and Conditional Shares

 

6.4.1 An Award shall:

 

  (i) be personal to the Employee to whom it is addressed and may only be acted on by such Employee; and

 

  (ii) indicate that the Award will be deemed to have been accepted automatically by the Employee on the Award Date, unless the Employee specifically rejects the Award in writing to the Company within 5 (five) Business Days of the Award Date.

 

Page 19


6.5 Save for Securities Transfer Tax which the Employer Company will recover from the Participant, the Participant will not be required to give any consideration for the grant or Settlement of an Award. The method of recovering the Securities Transfer Tax amount will be agreed between the Employer Company and the Participant prior to the Settlement Date and, failing such agreement being reached, the Employer Company may withhold such amount required from the Participant’s salary or other payments due to him from the Employer Company. 14.1(d)(i)

 

6.6 Settlement of Awards

 

6.6.1 Following the making of an Award of Forfeitable Shares, the Company shall, within 30 (thirty) days of the Award Date, procure the Settlement of that number of Forfeitable Shares to the Participant (without deducting any costs or income tax) by issuing Shares to the Participant (the related costs of which shall be recharged to the relevant Employer Company in terms of the Recharge Policy).

 

6.6.2 Following the Vesting of the Conditional Award, the Company shall within 30 (thirty) days of the Vesting Date procure the Settlement of that number of Shares to the Participant (without deducting any costs or income tax) by issuing Shares to the Participant (the related costs of which shall be recharged to the relevant Employer Company in terms of the Recharge Policy).

 

6.6.3 Notwithstanding any other provision to the contrary, as a fall back provision only, the Committee may determine that any Participant shall be paid (and instruct an Employer Company to make such payment) an amount in cash in lieu of any Shares that would have become liable to be issued to the Participant, which is equivalent to the aggregate Market Value of such Shares as at the Settlement Date.

 

Page 20


6.7 Ownership in respect of Forfeitable Shares and Participant’s rights before the Vesting Date

 

6.7.1 Following the making of an Award of Forfeitable Shares, the Committee will procure that the Shares are held by the Escrow Agent for the absolute benefit of the Participants as owners of the Forfeitable Shares, but subject to the provisions of Rule 9. The Forfeitable Shares may not be disposed of or otherwise encumbered at any time from the date of their Settlement, up to and including the Vesting Date, except that on a Participant’s death (as envisaged in Rule 9.2) his Forfeitable Shares may be transferred to the executor of his estate. 14.9(b)(ii)

 

6.7.2 The Forfeitable Shares shall be subject to the control of the Escrow Agent acting on instructions from the Company from the Settlement Date up to and including the Vesting Date where after the Company shall, subject to Rule 9, procure unrestricted delivery of the Forfeitable Shares to the Participant and shall procure the release of the Forfeitable Shares from the Escrow Agent.

 

6.7.3 Except for the restrictions envisaged in Rule 6.7.1, the Participant has all other shareholder rights, namely the right to dividends and voting in respect of the Forfeitable Shares from the Settlement Date. To the extent that the Participant does not exercise his shareholder rights, they may not be exercised by the Escrow Agent. 14.1(e), 14.10

 

6.7.4

The Participant shall provide his Employer Company with, and the Participant shall consent to his Employer Company furnishing the Escrow Agent

 

Page 21


  with, any information relating to the Participant’s identification that the Escrow Agent may require in order to ensure compliance with the Financial Intelligence Centre Act, 2001 or any other applicable legislation.

 

6.7.5 The Participant shall, where required, enter into a written agreement with the Escrow Agent, in a form approved by the Employer Company, relating to the holding of the Forfeitable Shares by the Escrow Agent during the Vesting Period.

 

6.7.6 The Employer Company shall not be liable for any loss or damage arising from any act or omission of the Escrow Agent, any central securities depository participant (“CSDP”) engaged by the Escrow Agent, any employee, director, or representative of the Escrow Agent or such CSDP in connection with or arising out of the holding of, or transacting in, the Forfeitable Shares.

 

7. ASSESSMENT OF COMPLIANCE WITH PERFORMANCE CONDITION

 

7.1 As soon as reasonably practicable after the end of the Performance Period in relation to an Award of Conditional Shares, the Committee shall assess the relevant Participant’s compliance with the Performance Condition and determine the extent to which it has been satisfied.

 

7.2 The Committee shall calculate the number of Conditional Shares (if any) that Vest in each Participant, by reference to the extent to which it has been satisfied, and shall notify the Participant of this fact accordingly.

 

7.3 To the extent that the Committee determines that the Performance Condition has not been fulfilled, the Conditional Shares subject to the Performance Condition shall not Vest and will lapse immediately. The Participant shall be notified of such fact accordingly.

 

Page 22


7.4 In the event that the Performance Condition has to be assessed prior to the end of the Performance Period, as envisaged by Rule 9, the Committee will have regard to the following when determining whether, and the extent to which, the Performance Condition has been satisfied:

 

7.4.1 where the event which triggers the early assessment occurs within 6 months of the end of the Company’s Financial Year, the Performance Condition will be assessed by reference to the results reported by the Company in respect of the previous Financial Year; and

 

7.4.2 where the event which triggers the early assessment occurs more than 6 months after the end of the Company’s Financial Year, the Performance Condition will be assessed by reference to the results reported by the Company in respect of the forthcoming Financial Year.

 

8. VESTING OF THE FORFEITABLE SHARES AND CONDITIONAL SHARES

 

8.1 Subject to Rules 9 and 10, an Award of Forfeitable Shares will Vest on the date or dates specified in the Award Letter to be the Vesting Date, provided the Vesting Condition specified in the Award Letter has been fulfilled.

 

8.2 Subject to Rules 7, 9 and 10, an Award of Conditional Shares will Vest on the date or dates specified in the Award Letter to be the Vesting Date, provided the Vesting Condition and Performance Condition specified in the Award Letter have been fulfilled.

 

Page 23


8.3 The effect of an Award Vesting will be:

 

8.3.1 in respect of an Award of Forfeitable Shares, that the restrictions imposed on the Forfeitable Shares shall cease to apply and the risk of forfeiture will lift; and

 

8.3.2 in respect of an Award of Conditional Shares, that the Participant becomes entitled to be issued the Shares comprised in the Award, free of any further restrictions, in Settlement thereof.

 

8.4 No amount will be payable by the Participant in respect of Forfeitable Shares or Conditional Shares on the Vesting Date. 14.1(d)(i)

 

9. TERMINATION OF EMPLOYMENT AND DEATH 14.1(h)

 

9.1 Resignation, dismissal or abscondment

 

9.1.1 If a Participant’s employment with any Employer Company terminates by reason of:

 

  (i) his resignation;

 

  (ii) dismissal on grounds of misconduct, proven poor performance or proven dishonest or fraudulent conduct (whether such cessation occurs as a result of notice given by him or otherwise or where he resigns to avoid dismissal on ground of misconduct, poor performance or proven dishonest or fraudulent conduct); or

 

  (iii) his abscondment,

 

Page 24


the Awards of Forfeitable Shares and/or Conditional Shares made to him that have not Vested, shall be forfeited in its entirety and will lapse immediately on the Date of Termination of Employment. For the avoidance of doubt, any Awards of Forfeitable Shares and Conditional Shares which have already Vested will be unaffected by this provision.

 

9.2 Death, Retrenchment, Retirement, ill-health, injury, disability and sale of Employer Company

 

9.2.1 If a Participant’s employment with any Employer Company terminates prior to the Vesting Date by reason of:

 

  (i) death; or

 

  (ii) retrenchment, as determined in accordance with the Employer Company’s policy; or

 

  (iii) Retirement; or

 

  (iv) ill-health, injury or disability, as determined to the satisfaction of the Committee; or

 

  (v) the Participant’s Employer Company ceasing to be a member of the Group or the undertaking in which he is employed being transferred to a transferee which is not a member of the Group; or

 

  (vi) other terminations and exceptional circumstances as determined by the Committee,

the following will apply:

 

Page 25


9.2.2 in respect of Forfeitable Shares, a portion of the Award shall Vest on the Date of Termination of Employment and will reflect the number of months served since the Award Date over the total number of months in the Vesting Period. The portion of the Award that does not vest will lapse on the Date of Termination of Employment. For the avoidance of doubt, any Awards which have already Vested will be unaffected by this provision.

 

9.2.3 In respect of Conditional Shares, a portion of the Award shall Vest on the Date of Termination of Employment and will reflect the number of months served since the Award Date over the total number of months in the Vesting Period, and the extent to which the Performance Condition, has been met on the Date of Termination of Employment. In determining the extent to which the Performance Condition has been satisfied the Committee shall consider the provisions of Rule 7.4. The portion of the Award that does not Vest will lapse on the Date of Termination of Employment. For the avoidance of doubt, any Awards which have already Vested will be unaffected by this provision.

 

9.2.4 For the purposes of this Rule 9, a Participant will not be treated as ceasing to be an Employee of an Employer Company if, on the same date on which he ceases to be an Employee of an Employer Company, he is employed by another Employer Company.

 

10. CHANGE OF CONTROL 14.3(a), (b), (c), 14.1(g)

 

10.1

Subject to Rule 10.3, in the event of a change of Control of the Company occurring before the Vesting Date, a portion of the Award of Forfeitable Shares and Conditional Shares will Vest on the Change of Control Date. In respect of

 

Page 26


  Forfeitable Shares, the portion of the Award which shall Vest will reflect the number of months served since the Award Date until the Change of Control Date over the total number of months in the Vesting Period. In respect of Conditional Shares, the portion of the Award which shall Vest will also reflect the number of months served since the Award Date. The Performance Condition in respect of Conditional Shares will be deemed to have been satisfied to the extent required for 100% of the Award of Conditional Shares to Vest (on-target performance).

 

10.2 The Employer Company shall discharge its obligation to issue to a Participant any Shares in terms of this Rule 10 in Settlement, by paying to a Participant an amount equal to the Market Value of such Shares as at the Change of Control Date. However, a Participant shall be Settled by the issue of Shares where he has made such election in writing and giving effect to such election is not restricted in terms of any restriction or requirement for shareholder approval imposed by or as a result of a Prohibited Period, statute, order, regulation or directive, or by any code adopted by the Company based on the provisions contained in the King Report on Corporate Governance relating to dealings in securities by directors or the Listings Requirements, as the case may be.

 

10.3 If the Company undergoes a Change of Control pursuant to a transaction, the terms of which make provision for Participants’ rights under this Plan to be accommodated on a basis which is determined by an independent merchant bank to be fair and reasonable to Participants, the provisions 0 shall not apply, provided that, in such an event, if a Participant’s employment by any member of the Group is terminated for any reason whatsoever (including his resignation) within 12 months following the Change of Control Date he shall be entitled to be Settled on mutatis mutandis the basis of 0 and 10.2 been applicable.

 

Page 27


10.4 If there is an internal reconstruction or other event which does not involve any change in the ultimate Control of the Company or if any other event happens which may affect Awards, including the Shares ceasing to be listed on the JSE, the Awards held by a Participant shall not Vest as a consequence of that event and shall continue to be governed by the Rules of the Plan. However, if the terms of the Award Letter are no longer appropriate, the number of Forfeitable Shares or Conditional Shares subject to an Award and the Performance Condition in relation to Conditional Shares shall be adjusted, or the Awards shall be converted into awards in respect of shares in one or more other companies, provided the Participant is no worse off.

 

11. VARIATION IN SHARE CAPITAL 14.1(g), 14.3(a), (b)

 

11.1 Capitalisation Issue, subdivision or consolidation of shares, liquidation, etc

 

11.1.1 In the event of a:

 

  (i) Capitalisation Issue; or

 

  (ii) a subdivision of Shares; or

 

  (iii) a consolidation of Shares; or

 

  (iv) the Company entering into a scheme of arrangement as contemplated in section 114 of the Act; or 14.1(e)

 

Page 28


  (v) the Company making distributions to shareholders, as defined in the Act, including a distribution in specie, other than a dividend paid in the ordinary course of business out of the current year’s retained earnings,

Participants shall continue to participate in the Plan. The Committee may make such adjustment to the number of Forfeitable Shares or Conditional Shares comprised in the relevant Award or take such other action to place Participants in no worse a position than they were prior to the happening of the relevant event and to provide that the fair value of the Award immediately after the event is materially the same as the fair value of the Award immediately before the event. 14.3(a) (b)

 

11.2 The issue of Shares as consideration for an acquisition, and the issue of Shares or a vendor consideration placing will not be regarded as a circumstance that requires any adjustment to Awards.14.3(c)

 

11.3 The Company shall notify the Participants of any adjustments which are made under Rule 11.1. Where necessary, in respect of any such adjustments, the Company’s auditors, acting as experts and not as arbitrators and whose decision shall be final and binding on all persons affected thereby, shall confirm to the Company in writing that these are calculated on a non-prejudicial basis. 14.3(d)

 

11.4 The auditors of the Company shall confirm in writing to the JSE whether those adjustments were calculated in accordance with the Rules. Such confirmation is to be provided to the JSE at the time that the relevant adjustment is finalised. Any adjustments made will be reported in the Company’s annual financial statements in the year during which the adjustment is made, to the extent required by the Act or the JSE Listings Requirements. 14.3(d) (e)

 

Page 29


11.5 Rights Issue 14.3(b)

 

11.5.1 In the event of a Right Issue, Rule 11.1 to 0 shall apply mutatis mutandis to Conditional Shares that have not Vested.

 

11.5.2 In the event of a Rights Issue, a Participant shall, subject to approval by the JSE, be entitled to participate in any Rights Issue in respect of his Forfeitable Shares and any additional Shares subject to the Awards of Forfeitable Shares as a result of any event listed in Rule 11.1 above.

 

11.5.3 If a Rights Issue to the shareholders of the Company is proposed, the Committee shall notify the Participants holding Awards of Forfeitable Shares of that Rights Issue in writing. The written notice shall specify:

 

11.5.3.1 the terms and conditions of the Rights Issue as contained in the letter of allocation accompanying the Rights Issue;

 

11.5.3.2 the number of Rights Issue Shares offered;

 

11.5.3.3 the price payable in respect of the Rights Issue Shares and any costs incidental to the purchase of the Rights Issue Shares, including Securities Transfer Tax; and

 

11.5.3.4 the date by which the Participant should notify the Committee if he intends to purchase the Rights Issue Shares.

 

Page 30


11.5.4 If any Participant holding Awards of Forfeitable Shares intends to purchase the Rights Issue Shares he shall:

 

11.5.4.1 notify the Committee of his intention by the date specified in the notice sent to him or her in terms of Rule 11.5.3;

 

11.5.4.2 simultaneously pay the full price in respect of the Rights Issue Shares and costs incidental to the purchase of the Rights Issue Shares, including Securities Transfer Tax; and

 

11.5.4.3 be deemed to have authorised the Escrow Agent to take all necessary steps and sign all documents to purchase the Rights Issue Shares for his or her benefit.

 

11.5.5 If the Participant fails to notify the Committee of his or her intention to purchase the Rights Issue Shares by the date specified in the notice in terms of Rule 11.5.3 he shall be deemed to have waived his right to take up any Rights Issue Shares in terms of the Rights Issue. In this instance the Escrow Agent shall sell the rights pertaining to the Rights Issue on behalf of the Participant and remit such proceeds to such Participant.

 

11.5.6 The Rights Issue Shares will not be subject to any restrictions in terms of the Plan and shall Vest immediately upon acquisition in terms of the Rights Issue.

 

11.5.7 Where Participants are not permitted to participate in any Rights Issue, Rules 11.1 to 11.4 shall apply mutatis mutandis to Forfeitable Shares that have not Vested.

 

Page 31


11.6 If the Company is placed into liquidation for purposes other than reorganisation, an Award of Forfeitable Shares or Conditional Shares shall ipso facto lapse as from the Liquidation Date. 14.1(e)

 

12 FORFEITURE AND LAPSE OF AWARDS

 

12.1 Notwithstanding any other provision of the Rules, an Award shall lapse on the earliest of:

 

12.1.1 the Committee determining that the Performance Condition, or any further condition imposed under Rule 6.2, in relation to Conditional Shares, has not been satisfied either in whole or in part in respect of the Award and can no longer be satisfied;

 

12.1.2 subject to Rule 9 and 10, the Date of Termination of Employment where the Participant ceases to be employed by, or a salaried director of, the Company;

 

12.1.3 the Liquidation Date, in accordance with Rule11.6; and

 

12.1.4 any other date provided for under these Rules.

 

12.2 If Forfeitable Shares are forfeited under the Plan, the Employer Company and/or the Company retain the right to:

 

12.2.1 instruct the Agent to sell or to procure the sale of any forfeited Forfeitable Shares held for the absolute benefit of the Participant on such terms as the relevant company, in its sole and absolute discretion, may consider appropriate;

 

12.2.2 retain the proceeds of any sale referred to in Rule 12.2.1 net of any deductions that may be owing to the Escrow Agent; and

 

Page 32


12.2.3 take such further steps as the relevant company, in its sole and absolute discretion, may consider appropriate to deal with the Forfeitable Shares which have been forfeited.

 

13 FURTHER CONDITIONS

 

13.1 In circumstances where the tax and/or regulatory requirements of a particular jurisdiction where a Participant works makes the issue of Shares impossible or impractical, the Directors can direct that the Participants be paid a cash amount in lieu of Shares that would have become liable to be issued to the Participant, which is equivalent to the aggregate Market Value of such Shares as at the Settlement Date, on such date. A separate Country Schedule detailing the provisions in respect of such jurisdiction may be adopted in addition to, or instead of, paying a cash amount in lieu of Shares on the Vesting Date.

 

13.2 An Employer Company may withhold any amount required:

 

13.2.1 to meet any costs in respect of the Vesting of an Award of Forfeitable Shares and Conditional Shares for which the Participant is liable; or

 

13.2.2 for employees’ tax,

from the Participant’s remuneration or any other amount due by the Employer Company to the Participant.

 

13.3 The Employer Company will delay the Settlement or Vesting of the Award, whichever is appropriate, to the Participant if the acquisition or disposal of the Shares would otherwise:

 

Page 33


13.3.1 occur during a Prohibited Period; or

 

13.3.2 be in contravention of any code adopted by the Company relating to dealings in securities by directors; or

 

13.3.3 be prohibited by insider trading legislation or any other legislation or regulations, until such time as the Settlement or Vesting of the Award will no longer constitute such a contravention.

 

13.4 The rights of Participants under this Plan are determined exclusively by these Rules.

 

13.5 Except as otherwise provided in the Rules, the Participant has no right to any compensation, damages or any other sum or benefit by reason of the fact that:

 

13.5.1 he ceased to be a Participant in the Plan; or

 

13.5.2 any of his rights or expectations under this Plan were reduced or lost.

 

13.6 Shares will only be issued once a Participant has been formally identified. 14.9(a)

 

13.7 The Company will ensure compliance with paragraphs 3.63 – 3.74 (director dealings) of the JSE Listings Requirements in terms of share dealings by the Company relating to the Plan. 14.9(d)

 

13.8 The issue of shares to employees which do not fall under the Rules of this Plan will be treated as a specific issue for cash as contemplated in paragraph 5.51 of the JSE Listings Requirements. 14.11

 

13.9 Where a Participant becomes employed by another Employer Company:

 

Page 34


13.9.1 all Awards granted to such Participant by the first Employer Company shall remain in force on the same terms and conditions as set out in these Rules; and

 

13.9.2 the second Employer Company shall assume a pro-rata portion of the first Employer Company’s obligations in respect of the relevant Awards in consideration for obtaining the Participant’s services from the first Employer Company.

 

14 DISCLOSURE IN ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 14.8

The Company shall, to the extent required by the Act or the JSE Listings Requirements, disclose in its annual financial statements the number of Shares that may be utilised for purposes of the Plan at the beginning of the accounting period and changes in such number during the accounting period and the balance of Shares available for utilisation for purposes of the Plan at the end of the accounting period.

 

15 COMPLIANCE OFFICER

The Company shall appoint a compliance officer for the Plan to be accountable to the directors of the Company and shall ensure that the compliance officer complies with the duties and responsibilities required of a compliance officer in terms of the Act.

 

16 AMENDMENTS AND TERMINATION 14.2

 

16.1 Subject as provided in this Rule 16, the Committee may at any time alter, vary or add to these terms and conditions as it thinks fit. Amendments to these terms and conditions may only affect Awards to Participants that have already been made if they are to the advantage of Participants, and subject to the Listings Requirements.

 

Page 35


16.2 Except as provided in Rule 16.3 the provisions relating to: 14.2

 

16.2.1 the category of persons who are eligible for participation in the Plan; 14.1(a)

 

16.2.2 the number of Shares which may be utilised for the purpose of the Plan; 14.1(b)

 

16.2.3 the individual limit entitlements envisaged in Rule 5.2; 14.1(c)

 

16.2.4 the basis upon which Awards are made as stipulated in Rule 0; 14.1(f)

 

16.2.5 the amount (if any) payable upon the grant, Settlement or Vesting of an Award; 14.1(d)

 

16.2.6 the voting, dividend, transfer and other rights attached to the Awards, including those arising on a liquidation of the Company; 14.1(e)

 

16.2.7 the adjustment of Awards in the event of a Change of Control of the Company or other corporate actions; 14.1(g)

 

16.2.8 the procedure to be adopted in respect of the Vesting of Awards in the event of termination of employment as envisaged in Rule 9; 14.1(h)

 

16.2.9 the terms of this Rule 16.2,

may not be amended without the prior approval of the JSE and by ordinary resolution of 75% (seventy five percentage) of shareholders of the Company present or by proxy, in general meeting, excluding all the votes attached to unvested Forfeitable Shares held under this Plan and all Shares owned by persons as a result of the Vesting of Forfeitable Shares and Conditional Shares under this Plan and who are existing Participants in the Plan.

 

16.3

Subject to Rule 16.2 the Committee may make minor amendments for ease of the administration of the Plan, to comply with or take account of the provisions of any proposed or existing legislation or to obtain or maintain favourable, taxation

 

Page 36


  or regulatory treatment of any Employer Company or any present or future Participant, including the adoption of a Country Schedule for the benefit of Employees of the Group working outside South Africa.

 

16.4 The Committee may terminate the Plan at any time, but Awards granted before such termination will continue to be valid and as described in the provisions of the Plan.

 

17 DOMICILIUM AND NOTICES

 

17.1 The parties choose domicilium citandi et executandi for all purposes arising from this Plan, including, without limitation, the giving of any notice, the payment of any sum, the delivery of shares, the serving of any process, as follows:

 

17.1.1 the Company, the company secretary and the Committee: The address and telefax number of the Registered Office of the Company from time to time;

 

17.1.2 Employer Company: The address and telefax number of the Registered Office of the Employer Company from time to time;

 

17.1.3 each Participant: The physical address, telefax number and electronic address from time to time reflected as being his address, telefax number and/or electronic address in the Employer Company’s relevant system from time to time.

 

17.2 Any of the above persons shall be entitled from time to time, by written notice to the other, to vary its domicilium to any other physical address within the Republic of South Africa and/or its facsimile number and/or (in the case of a Participant) his electronic address; provided in the case of a Participant such variation is also made to his details on the Employer Company’s payroll system.

 

Page 37


17.3 Any notice given and any delivery or payment made by any of the above persons to any other which:

 

17.3.1 is delivered by hand during the normal business hours of the addressee at the addressee’s domicilium for the time being shall be rebuttably presumed to have been received by the addressee at the time of delivery;

 

17.3.2 is delivered by courier during the normal business hours of the addressee at the addressee’s domicilium for the time being shall be rebuttably presumed to have been received by the addressee on the third day after the date of the instruction to the courier to deliver to the addressee;

 

17.3.3 is posted by prepaid registered post from an address within the Republic of South Africa to the addressee at the addressee’s domicilium for the time being shall be rebuttably presumed to have been received by the addressee on the seventh day after the date of posting.

 

17.4 Any notice given that is transmitted by electronic mail and/or facsimile to the addressee at the addressee’s electronic address and/or facsimile address (as the case may be) for the time being shall be presumed, until the contrary is proved by the addressee, to have been received by the addressee on the date of successful transmission thereof.

 

17.5 Any notice or other document given to any Participant pursuant to the Plan may be delivered to him or sent by post to him at his home address according to the records of the Employer Company or such other address as may appear to the Directors to be appropriate. Notices or other documents sent by post will be deemed to have been given 7 days following the date of posting if sent by post.

 

Page 38


17.6 Any notice or document given to the Employer Company pursuant to the Plan may be delivered to it or sent by post to its registered office marked for the attention of the company secretary of the Employer Company, or such other address as may be specified by the Employer Company and the documents will not be deemed to have been received before actual receipt by the company secretary of the Employer Company.

 

18 DISPUTES

 

18.1 Any dispute arising under the Plan shall be decided by arbitration in the manner set out in Rule 18.

 

18.2 The arbitration shall be held subject to the provisions of this Plan:

 

18.2.1 at Johannesburg;

 

18.2.2 informally;

 

18.2.3 otherwise in accordance with the provisions of the Arbitration Act, No. 42 of 1965, as amended,

it being the intention that, if possible it shall be held and concluded within 21 (twenty-one) Business Days, after it has been demanded.

 

18.3 The arbitrator shall be if the question in issue is:

 

18.3.1

primarily an accounting matter, an independent accountant with not less than 15 (fifteen) years experience agreed upon between the parties. In the event that the

 

Page 39


  parties to the dispute cannot agree within 7 (seven) Business Days, a chartered accountant to be nominated by the Executive President for the time being of the South African Institute of Chartered Accountants;

 

18.3.2 primarily a legal matter, a practising senior counsel or attorney with no less than 15 (fifteen) years standing agreed upon between the parties. In the event that the parties to the dispute cannot agree within 7 (seven) Business Days, a practising attorney nominated by the President for time being of the Law Society of the Northern Provinces;

 

18.3.3 any other matter, an independent person agreed upon between the parties to the dispute.

 

18.4 An aggrieved party may appeal against the arbitration award within 10 (ten) Business Days after receipt of the arbitration award by lodging a notice of appeal with the other party/ies to the dispute.

 

18.5 Where an appeal is made, 2 (two) practising senior counsel of at least 15 (fifteen) years standing shall be appointed as chairpersons of the appeal. If the parties to the dispute are unable to agree on the chairpersons for the appeal the provisions of Rule 18.3 shall mutatis mutandis apply with the changes required by the context. The chairpersons shall meet the parties to the dispute within 7 (seven) Business Days after their appointment to determine the procedure for the appeal.

 

Page 40


19 SEVERABILITY

Each provision of these Rules is entirely separate and independent from each of the other provisions. If any provision is found to be invalid then it will be deemed never to have been part of these Rules and to the extent that it is possible to do so, this will not affect the validity or enforceability of any of the remaining provisions.

 

20 GOVERNING LAW

South African law governs the Plan and Awards made in terms of the Plan (including Awards made to Participants employed by the Group in jurisdictions other than South Africa). All Employer Companies and Participants submit to the jurisdiction of the South African courts as regards any matter arising under the Plan.

This Plan was duly adopted at a shareholders meeting of Gold Fields Limited held at [insert] on [insert date], the Rules of the Plan having been made available for inspection for at least 14 days prior to the general meeting at the Company’s registered office.14.7

 

 

Chairman of the General Meeting

 

Page 41

Exhibit 4.23

 

LOGO    CLIFFORD CHANCE LLP

EXECUTION VERSION

DATED 17 April 2012

GFI MINING SOUTH AFRICA (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED

GOLD FIELDS OPERATIONS LIMITED

GOLD FIELDS OROGEN HOLDING (BVI) LIMITED

ARRANGED BY

THE FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS

LISTED HEREIN AS ARRANGERS

WITH

THE BANK OF TOKYO-MITSUBISHI UFJ, LTD.

ACTING AS AGENT

 

 

CREDIT FACILITY AGREEMENT

 

 


CONTENTS

 

Clause    Page  

1. Definitions and Interpretation

     1   

2. The Facility

     20   

3. Purpose

     20   

4. Conditions of Utilisation

     20   

5. Utilisation

     22   

6. Repayment

     23   

7. Prepayment and Cancellation

     24   

8. Interest

     29   

9. Interest Periods

     30   

10. Changes to the Calculation of Interest

     30   

11. Fees

     31   

12. Tax Gross up and Indemnities

     33   

13. Increased Costs

     35   

14. Other Indemnities

     37   

15. Mitigation by the Lenders

     38   

16. Costs and Expenses

     38   

17. Guarantee and Indemnity

     40   

18. Representations

     44   

19. Information Undertakings

     48   

20. Financial Covenants

     54   

21. General Undertakings

     56   

22. Events of Default

     60   

23. Changes to the Lenders

     65   

24. Changes to the Obligors

     70   

25. Role of the Agent and the Arrangers

     72   

26. Conduct of Business by the Finance Parties

     79   

27. Sharing among the Finance Parties

     80   

28. Payment Mechanics

     82   

29. Set-off

     85   

30. Notices

     86   

31. Calculations and Certificates

     88   

32. Partial Invalidity

     89   

33. Remedies and Waivers

     89   

34. Amendments and Waivers

     89   


35. Confidentiality

     91   

36. Counterparts

     95   

37. Governing Law

     96   

38. Enforcement

     96   

Schedule 1 The Original Parties

     97   

Part I The Obligors

     97   

Part II The Arrangers

     98   

Part III The Original Lenders

     99   

Schedule 2 Conditions Precedent

     100   

Part I Conditions Precedent to Initial Utilisation

     100   

Part II Conditions Precedent required to be delivered by an Additional Borrower

     102   

Part III Conditions Precedent required to be delivered by an Additional Guarantor

     104   

Schedule 3 Utilisation Request

     106   

Schedule 4 Mandatory Cost Formula

     107   

Schedule 5 Form of Transfer Certificate

     109   

Schedule 6 Form of Assignment Agreement

     112   

Schedule 7 Form of Accession Letter

     116   

Schedule 8 Form of Resignation Letter

     118   

Schedule 9 Form of Compliance Certificate

     119   

Schedule 10 Timetable

     120   

Schedule 11 LMA Form of Confidentiality Undertaking

     121   


THIS AGREEMENT is dated 17 April 2012 and made

BETWEEN :

 

(1) GOLD FIELDS LIMITED (the “ Parent ”);

 

(2) GFI MINING SOUTH AFRICA (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED, GOLD FIELDS OPERATIONS LIMITED and GOLD FIELDS OROGEN HOLDING (BVI) LIMITED (the “ Original Borrowers ”);

 

(3) THE SUBSIDIARIES of the Parent listed in Part I of Schedule 1 ( The Original Parties ) as guarantors (together with the Parent, the “ Original Guarantors ”);

 

(4) THE FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS listed in Part II of Schedule 1 ( The Original Parties ) as mandated lead arrangers and bookrunners (together the “ Arrangers ” and individually an “ Arranger ”);

 

(5) THE FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS listed in Part III of Schedule 1 ( The Original Parties ) as lenders (the “ Original Lenders ”); and

 

(6) THE BANK OF TOKYO-MITSUBISHI UFJ, LTD. as agent of the other Finance Parties (the “ Agent ”).

IT IS AGREED as follows:

SECTION 1

INTERPRETATION

 

1. DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION

 

1.1 Definitions

In this Agreement:

Accession Letter ” means a document substantially in the form set out in Part I of Schedule 7 ( Form of Accession Letter ).

Additional Borrower ” means a company which becomes an Additional Borrower in accordance with Clause 24 ( Changes to the Obligors ).

Additional Cost Rate ” has the meaning given to it in Schedule 4 ( Mandatory Cost Formula ).

Additional Guarantor ” means a company which becomes an Additional Guarantor in accordance with Clause 24 ( Changes to the Obligors ).

Additional Obligor ” means an Additional Borrower or an Additional Guarantor.

Affiliate ” means, in relation to any person, a Subsidiary of that person or a Holding Company of that person or any other Subsidiary of that Holding Company.

Agreement ” means this credit facility agreement.

 

- 1 -


Assignment Agreement ” means an agreement substantially in the form set out in Schedule 6 ( Form of Assignment Agreement ) or any other form agreed between the relevant assignor and assignee.

Associate ” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 20.1 ( Financial definitions ) of this Agreement.

Auditors ” means, at any time, the auditors of the Parent at that time, being as at the date of this Agreement KPMG and any replacement for those auditors appointed by the Parent.

Availability Period ” means the period from and including the date of this Agreement to and including the date which is one month prior to the Termination Date.

Available Commitment ” means a Lender’s Commitment minus (subject as set out below):

 

  (a) the amount of its participation in any outstanding Loans; and

 

  (b) in relation to any proposed Utilisation, the amount of its participation in any Loans that are due to be made on or before the proposed Utilisation Date.

For the purposes of calculating a Lender’s Available Commitment in relation to any proposed Utilisation, that Lender’s participation in any Loans that are due to be repaid or prepaid on or before the proposed Utilisation Date shall not be deducted from a Lender’s Commitment.

Available Facility ” means the aggregate for the time being of each Lender’s Available Commitment in respect of the Facility.

Basel III ” has the meaning set out in Clause 13.1(b) ( Increased costs ).

Borrower ” means an Original Borrower or an Additional Borrower unless it has ceased to be a Borrower in accordance with Clause 24 ( Changes to the Obligors ).

Break Costs ” means the amount (if any) by which:

 

  (a) the interest which a Lender should have received for the period from the date of receipt of all or any part of its participation in a Loan or Unpaid Sum to the last day of the current Interest Period in respect of that Loan or Unpaid Sum, had the principal amount or Unpaid Sum received been paid on the last day of that Interest Period;

exceeds:

 

  (b) the amount which that Lender would be able to obtain by placing an amount equal to the principal amount or Unpaid Sum received by it on deposit with a leading bank in the Relevant Interbank Market for a period starting on the Business Day following receipt or recovery and ending on the last day of the current Interest Period.

 

- 2 -


Business Day ” means a day (other than a Saturday or Sunday) on which banks are open for general business in London, New York and Johannesburg.

Cerro Corona Project ” means the development of the gold and copper deposits in Peru by the Cerro Corona Subsidiary.

Cerro Corona Subsidiary ” means Gold Fields La Cima S.A.

Commitment ” means:

 

  (a) in relation to an Original Lender, the amount in dollars set out opposite its name under the heading “ Commitment ” in Part III of Schedule 1 ( The Original Parties) and the amount of any other Commitment transferred to it under this Agreement; and

 

  (b) in relation to any other Lender, the amount in dollars of any Commitment transferred to it under this Agreement,

to the extent not cancelled, reduced or transferred by it under this Agreement.

Compliance Certificate ” means a certificate substantially in the form set out in Schedule 9 ( Form of Compliance Certificate ).

Confidential Information ” means all information relating to the Parent, any Obligor, the Group, the Finance Documents or the Facility of which a Finance Party becomes aware in its capacity as, or for the purpose of becoming, a Finance Party or which is received by a Finance Party in relation to, or for the purpose of becoming a Finance Party under, the Finance Documents or the Facility from either:

 

  (a) any member of the Group or any of its advisers; or

 

  (b) another Finance Party, if the information was obtained by that Finance Party directly or indirectly from any member of the Group or any of its advisers,

in whatever form, and includes information given orally and any document, electronic file or any other way of representing or recording information which contains or is derived or copied from such information but excludes information that:

 

  (i) is or becomes public information other than as a direct or indirect result of any breach by that Finance Party of Clause 35 ( Confidentiality ); or

 

  (ii) is identified in writing at the time of delivery as non-confidential by the Parent; or

 

  (iii) is known by that Finance Party before the date the information is disclosed to it in accordance with paragraphs (a) or (b) above or is lawfully obtained by that Finance Party after that date, from a source which is, as far as that Finance Party is aware, unconnected with the Group and which, in either case, as far as that Finance Party is aware, has not been obtained in breach of, and is not otherwise subject to, any obligation of confidentiality.

 

- 3 -


Confidentiality Undertaking ” means a confidentiality undertaking substantially in a recommended form of the LMA as set out in Schedule 11 ( LMA Form of Confidentiality Undertaking ) or in any other form agreed between the Parent and the Agent.

Consolidated EBITDA ” has the meaning set out in Clause 20.1 ( Financial Definitions ).

Consolidated Tangible Net Worth ” means, at any time, the “Shareholders’ Equity”, as reported in the “Group Statement of Changes in Shareholders’ Equity” in the last set of annual consolidated financial statements of the Parent delivered to the Agent pursuant to this Agreement.

Constitutional Documents ” means, in respect of any person at any time, the then current and up-to-date constitutional documents of such person at such time (including, without limitation, such person’s memorandum and articles of association, certificate of incorporation, articles of incorporation or commercial registration certificate).

Default ” means an Event of Default or any event or circumstance specified in Clause 22 ( Events of Default ) which would (with the expiry of a grace period, the giving of notice, the making of any determination under the Finance Documents or any combination of any of the foregoing) be an Event of Default.

Defaulting Lender ” means any Lender:

 

  (a) which has failed to make its participation in a Loan available or has notified the Agent that it will not make its participation in a Loan available by the Utilisation Date of that Loan in accordance with Clause 5.4 ( Lenders’ participation );

 

  (b) which has otherwise rescinded or repudiated a Finance Document; or

 

  (c) with respect to which an Insolvency Event has occurred and is continuing,

unless, in the case of paragraph (a) above:

 

  (a) its failure to pay is caused by:

 

  (i) administrative or technical error; or

 

  (ii) a Disruption Event, and

payment is made within five (5) Business Days of its due date; or

 

  (b) the Lender is disputing in good faith whether it is contractually obliged to make the payment in question.

Designated Website ” has the meaning given to it in paragraph (a) of Clause 19 .7 ( Use of websites ).

 

- 4 -


Disruption Event ” means either or both of:

 

  (a) a material disruption to those payment or communications systems or to those financial markets which are, in each case, required to operate in order for payments to be made in connection with the Facility (or otherwise in order for the transactions contemplated by the Finance Documents to be carried out) which disruption is not caused by, and is beyond the control of, any of the Parties; or

 

  (b) the occurrence of any other event which results in a disruption (of a technical or system-related nature) to the treasury or payments operations of a Party preventing that, or any other Party:

 

  (i) from performing its payment obligations under the Finance Documents; or

 

  (ii) from communicating with other Parties in accordance with the terms of the Finance Documents,

and which (in either such case) is not caused by, and is beyond the control of, the Party whose operations are disrupted.

Encumbrance ” means:

 

  (a) any mortgage, pledge, lien, assignment or cession conferring security, hypothecation, a security interest, preferential right or trust arrangement or other encumbrance of the like securing any obligation of any person; or

 

  (b) any arrangement under which money or claims to, or for the benefit of, a bank or other account may be applied, set off or made subject to a combination of accounts so as to effect discharge of any sum owed or payable to any person; or

 

  (c) any other type of preferential agreement or arrangement (including any title transfer and retention arrangement), the effect of which is the creation of a security interest.

Environmental Claim ” means any claim, proceeding or investigation by any person in respect of any Environmental Law.

Environmental Law ” means any law applicable to the business conducted by a Material Group Company at the relevant time in any jurisdiction in which that Material Group Company conducts business which relates to the pollution, degradation or protection of the environment or harm to or the protection of human health or the health of animals or plants.

Environmental Permits ” means any permit, licence, consent, approval and other authorisation and the filing of any notification, report or assessment required under any Environmental Law for the operation of the business of any Material Group Company conducted on or from the properties owned or used by that Material Group Company.

 

- 5 -


Event of Default ” means any event or circumstance specified as such in Clause 22 ( Events of Default ).

Existing Facility ” means the revolving loan facility made available under the up to US$750,000,000 facility agreement dated 16 May 2007 for GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, Gold Fields Operations Limited (formerly known as Western Areas Limited) and Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited with Barclays Bank PLC acting as Agent.

Existing Lender ” has the meaning given to it in Clause 23.1 ( Assignments and transfers by the Lenders ).

Facility ” means the revolving loan facility made available under this Agreement as described in Clause 2 .1 ( The Facility ).

Facility Office ” means the office(s) notified by a Lender to the Agent in writing on or before the date it becomes a Lender (or, following that date, by not less than five (5) Business Days’ written notice) as the office(s) through which it will perform its obligations under this Agreement.

Fee Letter ” means any letter or letters dated on or about the date of this Agreement between the Arrangers and the Original Borrowers or the Parent (or the Agent and the Parent) setting out any of the fees referred to in Clause 11 ( Fees ).

Finance Document ” means this Agreement, any Fee Letter, any Accession Letter, any Resignation Letter and any other document designated as such by the Agent and the Parent.

Finance Party ” means the Agent, the Arrangers or a Lender.

Financial Indebtedness ” means (without double counting) any indebtedness for or in respect of:

 

  (a) moneys borrowed;

 

  (b) any amount raised by acceptance under any acceptance credit facility or dematerialised equivalent;

 

  (c) any amount raised pursuant to any note purchase facility or the issue of bonds, notes, debentures, loan stock or any similar instrument;

 

  (d) the amount of any liability in respect of any lease or hire purchase contract which would, in accordance with GAAP, be treated as a finance or capital lease;

 

  (e) receivables sold or discounted (other than any receivables to the extent they are sold on a non-recourse basis);

 

  (f) the amount of liability in respect of any purchase price for assets or services the payment of which is deferred where the deferral of such price is either:

 

  (i) used primarily as a method of raising credit; or

 

  (ii) not made in the ordinary course of business;

 

- 6 -


  (g) any agreement or option to re-acquire an asset if one of the primary reasons for entering into such agreement or option is to raise finance;

 

  (h) any amount raised under any other transaction (including any forward sale or purchase agreement) having the commercial effect of a borrowing;

 

  (i) any derivative transaction entered into in connection with protection against or benefit from fluctuation in any rate or price (and, when calculating the value of any derivative transaction, only the marked to market value shall be taken into account);

 

  (j) any counter-indemnity obligation in respect of a guarantee, indemnity, bond, standby or documentary letter of credit or any other instrument issued by a bank or financial institution;

 

  (k) any amount raised by the issue of redeemable shares to the extent such shares are redeemable prior to the Termination Date; and

 

  (l) the amount of any liability in respect of any guarantee or indemnity for any of its items referred to in paragraphs (a) to (k) above.

Financial Year ” means, at any time, the financial year of the Group ending on 31 December in each calendar year.

GAAP ” means the generally accepted accounting principles set out in IFRS.

Ghanaian Companies ” means Gold Fields Ghana Limited and Abosso Goldfields Limited.

Group ” means the Parent, the Guarantors and each of their Subsidiaries from time to time.

Group Company ” means a member of the Group.

Guarantor ” means an Original Guarantor or an Additional Guarantor unless, in the case of an Additional Guarantor, it has ceased to be a Guarantor in accordance with Clause 24 ( Changes to the Obligors ).

Holding Company ” means, in relation to a company or corporation, any other company or corporation in respect of which it is a Subsidiary.

IFRS ” means international accounting standards within the meaning of the IAS Regulation 1606/2002 to the extent applicable to the relevant financial statements.

Impaired Agent ” means the Agent at any time when:

 

  (a) it has failed to make (or has notified a Party that it will not make) a payment required to be made by it under the Finance Documents by the due date for payment;

 

- 7 -


  (b) the Agent otherwise rescinds or repudiates a Finance Document;

 

  (c) (if the Agent is also a Lender) it is a Defaulting Lender under paragraph (a) or (b) of the definition of “Defaulting Lender”; or

 

  (d) an Insolvency Event has occurred and is continuing with respect to the Agent;

unless, in the case of paragraph (a) above:

 

  (i) its failure to pay is caused by:

 

  (A) administrative or technical error; or

 

  (B) a Disruption Event; and

 

  payment is made within five (5) Business Days of its due date; or

 

  (ii) the Agent is disputing in good faith whether it is contractually obliged to make the payment in question.

Increased Costs ” has the meaning given to it in paragraph (b) of Clause 13.1 ( Increased costs ).

Indebtedness for Borrowed Money ” means Financial Indebtedness save for any indebtedness for or in respect of paragraphs (i) and (j) of the definition of “ Financial Indebtedness ”.

Information ” has the meaning given to such term in paragraph (a) of Clause 18.10 ( No misleading information ).

Information Package ” means the documents provided by the Group and posted on Debtdomain by The Bank of Tokyo-Mitsubishi UFJ, Ltd. and the Commonwealth Bank of Australia between 23 February 2012 and 5 April 2012 (inclusive) for the purposes of and in connection with syndication of the Facility.

Insolvency Event ” means, in relation to a Finance Party, that:

 

  (a) any receiver, administrative receiver, administrator, liquidator, compulsory manager or other similar officer is appointed in respect of that Finance Party or all or substantially all of its assets;

 

  (b) that Finance Party is subject to any event which has an analogous effect to any of the events specified in paragraph (a) above under the applicable laws of any jurisdiction; or

 

  (c) that Finance Party suspends making payments on all or substantially all of its debts or publicly announces an intention to do so.

Interest Period ” means, in relation to a Loan, each period determined in accordance with Clause 9 ( Interest Periods ) and, in relation to an Unpaid Sum, each period determined in accordance with Clause 8.3 ( Default interest ).

 

- 8 -


Lender ” means:

 

  (a) any Original Lender; and

 

  (b) any bank or financial institution which has become a Party in accordance with Clause 23 ( Changes to the Lenders ),

which in each case has not ceased to be a Party in accordance with the terms of this Agreement.

LIBOR ” means, in relation to any Loan:

 

  (a) the applicable Screen Rate; or

 

  (b) (if no Screen Rate is available for dollars for the Interest Period of that Loan) the arithmetic mean of the rates (rounded upwards to four decimal places) as supplied to the Agent at its request quoted by three (3) Reference Banks to leading banks in the London interbank market,

as of the Specified Time on the Quotation Day for the offering of deposits in dollars and for a period comparable to the Interest Period for that Loan.

LMA ” means the Loan Market Association.

Loan ” means a Revolving Loan.

Majority Lenders ” means a Lender or Lenders whose Commitments aggregate more than 66  2 / 3  per cent. of the Total Commitments (or, if the Total Commitments have been reduced to zero, aggregated more than 66  2 / 3  per cent. of the Total Commitments immediately prior to the reduction).

Mandatory Cost ” means the percentage rate per annum calculated by the Agent in accordance with Schedule 4 ( Mandatory Cost Formula ).

Margin ” means 1.60 per cent. per annum.

Market Disruption Event ” has the meaning given to it in paragraph (b) of Clause 10.2 ( Market disruption ).

Material Adverse Effect ” means a material adverse effect on:

 

  (a) the business, operations, property or financial condition of the Group taken as a whole;

 

  (b) the ability of an Obligor to perform its financial or other material obligations under the Finance Documents to which it is a party; or

 

  (c) the validity or enforceability of the Finance Documents or any of them.

Material Group Company ” means:

 

  (a) the Obligors; and

 

  (b) any member of the Group from time to time that is not a Non-Material Group Company;

 

- 9 -


and “ Material Group Companies ” means, as the context requires, all of them.

Mining Charter ” has the meaning given to it in Clause 22.9 ( Creditors’ Process ).

Month ” means a period starting on one day in a calendar month and ending on the numerically corresponding day in the next calendar month, except that:

 

  (a) (subject to paragraph (c) below) if the numerically corresponding day is not a Business Day, that period shall end on the next Business Day in that calendar month in which that period is to end if there is one, or if there is not, on the immediately preceding Business Day;

 

  (b) if there is no numerically corresponding day in the calendar month in which that period is to end, that period shall end on the last Business Day in that calendar month; and

 

  (c) if an Interest Period begins on the last Business Day of a calendar month, that Interest Period shall end on the last Business Day in the calendar month in which that Interest Period is to end.

Paragraphs (a), (b) and (c) above will only apply to the last Month of any period.

MPRDA ” has the meaning given to it in Clause 22.9 ( Creditors’ Process ).

New Lender ” has the meaning given to it in Clause 23.1 ( Assignments and transfers by the Lenders ).

Newshelf ” means Newshelf 899 (Proprietary) Limited, a company incorporated under the laws of South Africa.

Non-Material Group Company ” means, at any time, a member of the Group (other than an Obligor) which had EBITDA (determined on the same basis as Consolidated EBITDA) and gross assets in its most recently ended Financial Year (on a consolidated basis taking into account it and its subsidiaries only) less than ten per cent. (10%) of Consolidated EBITDA (but including, for these purposes only, the net income of any Project Finance Subsidiaries) and gross assets of the Group (calculated according to the most recent set of audited consolidated financial statements delivered pursuant to Clause 19.1 ( Financial Statements )). Compliance with the aforementioned condition shall be determined by reference to the latest audited financial statements of such member of the Group (consolidated in the case of a member of the Group which itself has Subsidiaries), provided that :

 

  (a) if, in the case of any member of the Group which itself has Subsidiaries, no consolidated financial statements are prepared and audited, its consolidated EBITDA and gross assets shall be determined on the basis of pro forma consolidated financial statements of the relevant member of the Group and its Subsidiaries, prepared for this purpose by the Parent;

 

- 10 -


  (b) if any intra-Group transfer or re-organisation takes place, the audited financial statements of the Group Company and all relevant members of the Group shall be adjusted by the Parent in order to take into account such intra-Group transfer or re-organisation; and

 

  (c) the audited financial statements of the Group and any relevant member of the Group shall be adjusted in such a manner as the Auditors think fair and appropriate to take account of the acquisition or disposal of any member of the Group or any business of any member of the Group, after the date or at which the audited financial statements of the Group are made up.

Should there be any dispute regarding whether any member of the Group is or is not a Non-Material Group Company such dispute shall be referred, at the request of the Agent, to the Auditors and a report by the Auditors that a member of the Group is or is not a Non-Material Group Company shall, in the absence of manifest error, be conclusive and binding on all Parties. The costs of obtaining the report by the Auditors will be borne by the unsuccessful party to the dispute.

Obligor ” means a Borrower or a Guarantor.

Original Financial Statements ” means the audited consolidated financial statements of the Parent for the Financial Year ended 31 December 2011.

Paper Form Lenders ” has the meaning given to it in paragraph (a) of Clause 19.7 ( Use of websites ).

Party ” means a party to this Agreement.

Permitted Disposal ” means any sale, lease, transfer or other disposal:

 

  (a) by an Obligor or any member of the Group of obsolete or redundant assets which are no longer required for the efficient operation of the business of such Obligor or such member of the Group; or

 

  (b) by an Obligor or any member of the Group in the ordinary course of its day-to-day business if that sale, lease, transfer or other disposal is not otherwise restricted by a term of any Finance Document; or

 

  (c) by an Obligor to another Obligor (other than to an Additional Obligor); or

 

  (d) by a member of the Group that is not an Obligor to an Obligor or by an Obligor to an Additional Obligor or to a member of the Group that is not an Obligor if such sale, lease, transfer or other disposal is concluded at arm’s length; or

 

  (e) by a member of the Group that is not an Obligor to another member of the Group that is not an Obligor; or

 

  (f) by any member of the Group to any other person where the higher of the market value or consideration receivable when aggregated with the higher of the market value or consideration receivable for any other sale, lease, transfer or other disposal by any member of the Group (other than a sale, lease,

 

- 11 -


  transfer or other disposal referred to in (a), (b), (c), (d), (e) and (g)) does not exceed twenty per cent. (20%) of the Consolidated Tangible Net Worth in any Financial Year subject to a maximum of thirty per cent. (30%) of Consolidated Tangible Net Worth at such time in aggregate during the period from the date of this Agreement to the Termination Date; or

 

  (g) for which the Agent has given its prior written consent (acting on the instructions of the Majority Lenders).

Permitted Encumbrance ” means:

 

  (a) any Encumbrance created prior to the date of this Agreement which (i) is disclosed in the Original Financial Statements and (ii) in all circumstances secures only indebtedness outstanding or a facility available at the date of this Agreement if the principal amount or original facility thereby secured is not increased after the date of this Agreement;

 

  (b) any title transfer or retention arrangement entered into by any member of the Group in the normal course of its trading activities and on terms no worse for that member of the Group than the standard terms of the relevant supplier;

 

  (c) any netting or set-off arrangement entered into by any member of the Group in the ordinary course of its banking arrangements (which shall include, for the avoidance of doubt, those pursuant to hedging arrangements in relation to gold, silver, copper and other commodity prices, foreign exchange rates and interest rates where such arrangements are entered into for the purposes of providing protection against fluctuation in such rates or prices in the ordinary course of business), for the purpose of netting debit and credit balances;

 

  (d) any lien arising by operation of law and in the ordinary course of trading and not by reason of any default (whether in payments or otherwise), of any member of the Group;

 

  (e) any Encumbrance over or affecting (or transaction described in paragraph (b) of Clause 21.3 ( Negative Pledge ) ( “Quasi-Encumbrance ”) affecting) any asset acquired by a member of the Group after the date of this Agreement if:

 

  (i) the Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance was not created in contemplation of the acquisition of that asset by a member of the Group;

 

  (ii) the principal amount secured has not been increased in contemplation of, or since the acquisition of that asset by a member of the Group; and

 

  (iii) the Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance is (other than an Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance otherwise permitted pursuant to paragraphs (b), (c), (d), (f), (g), (i) or (j)) removed or discharged within six (6) months of the date of acquisition of such asset;

 

  (f) any Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance over or affecting any asset of any company which becomes a member of the Group after the date of this

 

- 12 -


  Agreement, where the Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance is created prior to the date on which that company becomes a member of the Group, if:

 

  (i) the Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance was not created in contemplation of the acquisition of that company;

 

  (ii) the principal amount secured has not increased in contemplation of or since the acquisition of that company; and

 

  (iii) the Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance is (other than an Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance otherwise permitted pursuant to paragraphs (b), (c), (d), (e), (g), (i) or (j)) removed or discharged within six (6) months of that company becoming a member of the Group;

 

 
  (g) any Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance granted in respect of Project Finance Borrowings over assets of, or the shares in, a Project Finance Subsidiary;

 

  (h) any Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance resulting from the rules and regulations of any clearing system or stock exchange over shares and/or other securities held in that clearing system or stock exchange;

 

  (i) in respect of Encumbrances or Quasi-Encumbrances over or affecting any asset of any Material Group Company, any Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance securing indebtedness the principal amount of which (when aggregated with the principal amount of any other indebtedness which has the benefit of Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance other than any permitted under paragraphs (a) to (h) above and (j) and (k) below)) does not at any time exceed twelve per cent. (12%) of Consolidated Tangible Net Worth (or its equivalent in another currency) (but adjusted to include the net value of new assets acquired since the last date of the latest set of consolidated annual financial statements of the Group);

 

  (j) any other Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance as agreed by the Agent (acting on the instructions of the Majority Lenders) in writing; or

 

  (k) any Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance granted in respect of Financial Indebtedness incurred in connection with the Cerro Corona Project over the business or assets of the Cerro Corona Subsidiary or over the Ownership Interests in the Cerro Corona Subsidiary provided that the amount of Financial Indebtedness secured by all such Encumbrances or Quasi-Encumbrances permitted by this paragraph (k) does not at any time in aggregate exceed two hundred million dollars ($200,000,000) (or its equivalent). In this paragraph (k) “Ownership Interests” means (i) the shares issued by the Cerro Corona Subsidiary; (ii) any shareholder loans made to the Cerro Corona Subsidiary (iii) to the extent required by Peruvian law, the shares in the Holding Company which directly owns the shares issued by the Cerro Corona Subsidiary provided that such Holding Company’s sole assets are shares issued by, and any loans made by it to, the Cerro Corona Subsidiary and its sister company, Minera Gold Fields S.A.

 

- 13 -


Permitted Financial Indebtedness ” means any Financial Indebtedness:

 

  (a) arising under the Finance Documents;

 

  (b) arising under any environmental bond which any member of the Group is required to issue by any applicable law;

 

  (c) arising in connection with the Cerro Corona Project;

 

  (d) arising under any derivative transaction entered into in connection with protection against or benefit from fluctuation in any rate or price but not for speculative purposes;

 

  (e) of the Group existing and available on the date of this Agreement (or, of any person that becomes a member of the Group from time to time, provided that , such Financial Indebtedness existed at the time such person became a member of the Group and was not created in anticipation thereof);

 

  (f) between Group Companies to the extent incurred for the purposes of financing general corporate and working capital requirements; or

 

  (g) not falling within paragraphs (a), (b), (c), (d), (e) or (f) above provided that the aggregate amount of all Financial Indebtedness (excluding, for the avoidance of doubt, any Financial Indebtedness incurred by a Guarantor or a Project Finance Subsidiary) permitted under this paragraph (g) does not at any time exceed five hundred million dollars ($500,000,000) (or its equivalent).

Project Finance Borrowings ” means:

 

  (a) any indebtedness to finance (or re-finance) a project comprised of the ownership, development, construction, refurbishment, commissioning and/or operation of assets which is incurred by a Project Finance Subsidiary in connection with such project and in respect of which the recourse of the person(s) making any such finance (or re-finance) available to that Project Finance Subsidiary for the payment, repayment and prepayment of such indebtedness is limited to (i) the Project Finance Subsidiary and its assets and/or the shares in that Project Finance Subsidiary and/or (ii) during the period prior to successful completion of the relevant completion tests applicable to such project guarantees from any one or more members of the Group; or

 

  (b) any indebtedness the terms and conditions of which have been approved by the Agent and which the Agent has agreed in writing (acting on the instructions of the Majority Lenders) to treat as a “Project Finance Borrowing” for the purposes of the Finance Documents.

Project Finance Subsidiary ” means a single purpose company or other entity (excluding the Obligors) whose sole business is a project comprised of the ownership, development, construction, refurbishment, commissioning and/or operation of an asset which has incurred Project Finance Borrowings.

 

- 14 -


Quotation Day ” means, in the case of a determination of LIBOR, the date on which quotations would customarily be provided by leading banks in the London Interbank Market for deposits or amounts in dollars for delivery on the first day of such period or on any other relevant date.

Recipient ” has the meaning given to it in paragraph (b) of Clause 12.5 ( Value added tax ).

Recovered Amount ” has the meaning given to it in Clause 27.1 ( Payments to Finance Parties ).

Recovering Finance Party ” has the meaning given to it in Clause 27.1 ( Payments to Finance Parties ).

Redistributed Amount ” has the meaning given to it in Clause 27.4 ( Reversal of redistribution ).

Reference Banks ” means the principal London offices of The Bank of Tokyo-Mitsubishi UFJ, Ltd., and Barclays Bank PLC and/or such other banks as may be appointed by the Agent in consultation with the Parent.

Related Fund ” in relation to a fund (the “ first fund ”), means a fund which is managed or advised by the same investment manager or investment adviser as the first fund or, if it is managed by a different investment manager or investment adviser, a fund whose investment manager or investment adviser is an Affiliate of the investment manager or investment adviser of the first fund.

Relevant Interbank Market ” means the London interbank market.

Repeating Representations ” means each of the representations set out in Clause 18.1 ( Status ), to Clause 18.22 ( No Material Adverse Effect ) other than Clause 18.3 ( Binding Obligations ), Clause 18.6 ( Governing law and enforcement ), Clause 18.7 ( Deduction of Tax ), Clause 18.8 ( No filing or stamp taxes ), paragraphs (a) and (b) of Clause 18.10 ( No misleading information ) and Clause 18.13 ( No proceedings pending or threatened ).

Replacement Lender ” has the meaning given to it in paragraph (a) of Clause 34.4 ( Replacement of a Defaulting Lender ).

Representative ” means any delegate, agent, manager, administrator, nominee, attorney, trustee or custodian.

Resignation Letter ” means a letter substantially in the form set out in Schedule 8 ( Form of Resignation Letter ).

Retiring Guarantor ” has the meaning given to it in Clause 17.8 ( Release of Guarantors’ right of contribution ).

Revolving Loan ” means a loan made or to be made under the Facility or the principal amount outstanding for the time being of that loan.

 

- 15 -


Rollover Loans ” means one or more Revolving Loans:

 

  (a) made or to be made on the same day that a maturing Revolving Loan is due to be repaid;

 

  (b) the aggregate amount of which is equal to or less than the maturing Revolving Loan; and

 

  (c) made or to be made for the purpose of refinancing a maturing Revolving Loan.

Screen Rate ” means the British Bankers’ Association Interest Settlement Rate for dollars for the relevant period, displayed on the appropriate page (being LIBOR 01) of the Reuters screen. If the agreed page is replaced or service ceases to be available, the Agent may specify another page or service displaying the appropriate rate after consultation with the Parent and the Lenders.

Sharing Finance Parties ” has the meaning given to it in Clause 27.2 ( Redistribution of payments ).

Sharing Payment ” has the meaning given to it in Clause 27.1 ( Payments to Finance Parties ).

Specified Time ” means a time determined in accordance with Schedule 10 ( Timetable ).

Subject Party ” has the meaning given to it in paragraph (b) of Clause 12.5 ( Value added tax ).

Subsidiary ” means, in relation to any company or corporation, a company or corporation:

 

  (a) which is controlled, directly or indirectly, by the first mentioned company or corporation;

 

  (b) more than half the issued share capital of which is beneficially owned, directly or indirectly by the first mentioned company or corporation; or

 

  (c) which is a Subsidiary of another Subsidiary of the first mentioned company or corporation,

and for this purpose, a company or corporation shall be treated as being controlled by another if that other company or corporation is able to direct its affairs and/or to control the composition of its board of directors or equivalent body.

Supplier ” has the meaning given to it in paragraph (b) of Clause 12.5 ( Value added tax ).

Tax ” means any tax, levy, impost, duty or other charge or withholding of a similar nature (including, without limitation, any penalty or interest payable in connection with any failure to pay or any delay in paying any of the same).

 

- 16 -


Tax Credit ” means a credit against, relief or remission for, or repayment of any Tax.

Tax Deduction ” means a deduction or withholding for or on account of Tax from a payment under a Finance Document.

Tax Payment ” means either the increase in a payment made by an Obligor to a Finance Party under Clause 12.1 ( Tax gross-up ) or a payment under Clause 12.2 ( Tax indemnity ).

Termination Date ” means the date falling five (5) years from the date of this Agreement.

Total Commitments ” means the aggregate of the Commitments, being five hundred million dollars ($500,000,000) at the date of this Agreement.

Transfer Certificate ” means a certificate substantially in the form set out in Schedule 5 ( Form of Transfer Certificate ) or any other form agreed between the Agent and the Parent.

Transfer Date ” means, in relation to an assignment or a transfer:

 

  (a) the proposed Transfer Date specified in the relevant Assignment Agreement or Transfer Certificate; or

 

  (b) in the event that no Transfer Date is specified in the relevant Assignment Agreement or Transfer Certificate, the date on which the Agent executes the relevant Assignment Agreement or Transfer Certificate.

Unpaid Sum ” means any sum due and payable but unpaid by an Obligor under the Finance Documents.

Utilisation ” means a utilisation of the Facility.

Utilisation Date ” means the date of a Utilisation, being the date on which the relevant Loan is to be made.

Utilisation Request ” means a notice substantially in the form set out in Schedule 3 ( Utilisation Request ).

VAT ” means value added tax as provided for in the Value Added Tax Act 1994 and any other tax of a similar nature.

Website Lenders ” has the meaning given to it in paragraph (a) of Clause 19.7 ( Use of websites ).

 

1.2 Construction

 

  (a) Unless a contrary indication appears any reference in this Agreement to:

 

  (i) the “ Agent ”, the “ Arranger ”, any “ Finance Party ”, any “ Lender ”, any “ Obligor ” or any “ Party ” shall be construed so as to include its successors in title, permitted assigns and permitted transferees;

 

- 17 -


  (ii) arm’s length ” means terms that are fair and reasonable to the counterparty of a transaction and no more or less favourable to the other party to the relevant transaction as could reasonably be expected to be obtained in a comparable arm’s length transaction with a person that is not the ultimate Holding Company of such counterparty or an entity of which such counterparty or its ultimate Holding Company has direct or indirect control, or owns directly or indirectly more than twenty per cent. (20%) of the share capital or similar rights of ownership;

 

  (iii) assets ” includes present and future properties, revenues and rights of every description;

 

  (iv) audited ” means, in respect of any financial statement, those financial statements as audited by the Auditors;

 

  (v) authorisations ” mean any authorisation, consent, registration, filing agreement, notarisation, certificate, licence, approval, resolution, permit and/or authority or any exemption from any of the aforesaid, by, with or from any authority (including, without limitation, any approvals required from the South African Reserve Bank in relation to any Finance Document or any transaction contemplated under any Finance Document);

 

  (vi) a “ Finance Document ” or any other agreement or instrument is a reference to that Finance Document or other agreement or instrument as amended, novated, supplemented, extended, replaced or restated;

 

  (vii) indebtedness ” shall be construed so as to include any obligation (whether incurred as principal or as surety) for the payment or repayment of money, whether present or future, actual or contingent;

 

  (viii) law ” shall be construed as any law (including statutory, common or customary law), statute, constitution, decree, judgment, treaty, regulation, directive, by-law, order, other legislative measure, requirement, request or guideline (whether or not having the force of law but, if not having the force of law, is generally complied with by the persons to whom it is addressed or applied) of any government, supranational, local government, statutory or regulatory or self-regulatory or similar body or authority or court and the common law, as amended, replaced, re-enacted, restated or reinterpreted from time to time;

 

  (ix) a “ person ” includes any individual, firm, company, corporation, government, state or agency of a state or any association, trust, joint venture, consortium or partnership (whether or not having separate legal personality);

 

  (x) a “ regulation ” includes any regulation, rule, official directive, request or guideline (whether or not having the force of law but complied with generally) of any governmental, intergovernmental or supranational body, agency, department or regulatory, self-regulatory or other authority or organisation;

 

- 18 -


  (xi) a provision of law is a reference to that provision as amended or re-enacted; and

 

  (xii) a time of day is a reference to London time.

 

  (b) Section, Clause and Schedule headings are for ease of reference only.

 

  (c) Unless a contrary indication appears, a term used in any other Finance Document or in any notice given under or in connection with any Finance Document has the same meaning in that Finance Document or notice as in this Agreement.

 

  (d) A Default is “ continuing ” if it has not been remedied or waived.

 

1.3 Currency Symbols and Definitions

US$ ”, “ $ ” and “ dollars ” denote lawful currency of the United States of America.

 

1.4 Third party rights

 

  (a) Unless expressly provided to the contrary in a Finance Document, a person who is not a Party has no right under the Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999 (the “ Third Parties Act ”) to enforce or to enjoy the benefit of any term of this Agreement.

 

  (b) Notwithstanding any term of any Finance Document, the consent of any person who is not a Party is not required to rescind or vary this Agreement at any time.

 

- 19 -


SECTION 2

THE FACILITY

 

2. THE FACILITY

 

2.1 The Facility

Subject to the terms of this Agreement, the Lenders make available to the Borrowers a dollar revolving loan facility in an aggregate amount equal to the Total Commitments.

 

2.2 Finance Parties’ rights and obligations

 

  (a) The obligations of each Finance Party under the Finance Documents are several. Failure by a Finance Party to perform its obligations under the Finance Documents does not affect the obligations of any other Party under the Finance Documents. No Finance Party is responsible for the obligations of any other Finance Party under the Finance Documents.

 

  (b) The rights of each Finance Party under or in connection with the Finance Documents are separate and independent rights and any debt arising under the Finance Documents to a Finance Party from an Obligor shall be a separate and independent debt.

 

  (c) A Finance Party may, except as otherwise stated in the Finance Documents, separately enforce its rights under the Finance Documents.

 

3. PURPOSE

 

3.1 Purpose

 

  (a) The Original Borrowers shall apply all amounts borrowed by them under the Facility towards (i) repayment in an amount of up to US$500,000,000 of the Existing Facility and (ii) their general corporate and working capital purposes.

 

  (b) Each Additional Borrower shall apply all amounts borrowed by it under the Facility towards the purposes specified in the Accession Letter to which it is a party as Additional Borrower.

 

3.2 Monitoring

No Finance Party is bound to monitor or verify the application of any amount borrowed pursuant to this Agreement.

 

4. CONDITIONS OF UTILISATION

 

4.1 Initial conditions precedent

No Borrower may deliver a Utilisation Request unless the Agent has received all of the documents and other evidence listed in Part I of Schedule 2 ( Conditions Precedent to Initial Utilisation ) in form and substance satisfactory to the Agent. The Agent shall notify the Parent and the Lenders promptly upon being so satisfied.

 

- 20 -


4.2 Further conditions precedent

The Lenders will only be obliged to comply with Clause 5.4 ( Lenders’ participation ) if on the date of the Utilisation Request and on the proposed Utilisation Date:

 

  (a) in the case of a Rollover Loan, no Event of Default is continuing or would result from the proposed Rollover Loan, and in the case of any other Loan, no Default is continuing or would result from the proposed Loan; and

 

  (b) the Repeating Representations to be made by each Obligor are true in all material respects.

 

4.3 Maximum number of Loans

A Borrower may not deliver a Utilisation Request if as a result of the proposed Utilisation more than 10 (ten) Loans would be outstanding.

 

- 21 -


SECTION 3

UTILISATION

 

5. UTILISATION

 

5.1 Delivery of a Utilisation Request

A Borrower may utilise the Facility by delivery to the Agent of a duly completed Utilisation Request not later than the Specified Time.

 

5.2 Completion of a Utilisation Request

 

  (a) Each Utilisation Request is irrevocable and will not be regarded as having been duly completed unless:

 

  (i) the proposed Utilisation Date is a Business Day within the Availability Period;

 

  (ii) the currency and amount of the Utilisation comply with Clause 5.3 ( Currency and amount ); and

 

  (iii) the proposed Interest Period complies with Clause 9 ( Interest Periods ).

 

  (b) Only one Loan may be requested in each Utilisation Request.

 

5.3 Currency and amount

 

  (a) The currency specified in a Utilisation Request must be dollars.

 

  (b) The amount of the proposed Loan must be an amount which is not more than the Available Facility and which is a minimum of ten million dollars ($10,000,000) or, if less, the Available Facility.

 

5.4 Lenders’ participation

 

  (a) If the conditions set out in this Agreement have been met, each Lender shall make its participation in each Loan available by the Utilisation Date through its Facility Office.

 

  (b) The amount of each Lender’s participation in each Loan will be equal to the proportion borne by its Available Commitment to the Available Facility immediately prior to making the Loan.

 

  (c) The Agent shall notify each Lender of the amount of each Loan and the amount of its participation in that Loan by the Specified Time.

 

- 22 -


SECTION 4

REPAYMENT, PREPAYMENT AND CANCELLATION

 

6. REPAYMENT

 

  (a) Each Borrower shall repay each Loan made to it on the last day of its Interest Period.

 

  (b) Subject to Clause 4.2 ( Further conditions precedent ), without prejudice to each Borrower’s obligation under paragraph (a) above, if one or more Loans are to be made available to a Borrower:

 

  (i) on the same day that a maturing Loan is due to be repaid by that Borrower; and

 

  (ii) for the purpose of refinancing the maturing Loan,

the aggregate amount of the new Loans shall be treated as if applied in or towards repayment of the maturing Loan so that,

 

  (i) if the amount of the maturing Loan exceeds the aggregate amount of the new Loans:

 

  (A) the relevant Borrower will only be required to pay an amount in cash in the relevant currency equal to that excess; and

 

  (B) each Lender’s participation (if any) in the new Loans shall be treated as having been made available and applied by the Borrower in or towards repayment of that Lender’s participation (if any) in the maturing Loan and that Lender will not be required to make its participation in the new Loans available in cash; and

 

  (ii) if the amount of the maturing Loan is equal to or less than the aggregate amount of the new Loans:

 

  (A) the relevant Borrower will not be required to make any payment in cash; and

 

  (B) each Lender will be required to make its participation in the new Loans available in cash only to the extent that its participation (if any) in the new Loans exceeds that Lender’s participation (if any) in the maturing Loan and the remainder of that Lender’s participation in the new Loans shall be treated as having been made available and applied by the Borrower in or towards repayment of that Lender’s participation in the maturing Loan.

 

- 23 -


7. PREPAYMENT AND CANCELLATION

 

7.1 Illegality

If it becomes unlawful in any applicable jurisdiction for a Lender to perform any of its obligations as contemplated by this Agreement or to fund or maintain its participation in any Loan:

 

  (a) that Lender shall promptly notify the Agent upon becoming aware of that event;

 

  (b) upon the Agent notifying the Parent, the Commitment of that Lender will be immediately cancelled; and

 

  (c) each Borrower shall repay that Lender’s participation in the Loans made to that Borrower on the last day of the Interest Period for each Loan occurring after the Agent has notified the Parent or, if earlier, the date specified by the Lender in the notice delivered to the Agent (being no earlier than the last day of any applicable grace period permitted by law).

 

7.2 Change of control

 

  (a) If any person or group of persons acting in concert gains control of the Parent:

 

  (i) the Parent shall promptly notify the Agent upon becoming aware of that event;

 

  (ii) a Lender shall not be obliged to fund a Utilisation (except for a Rollover Loan) and the Agent and the Parent shall consult about the change of control;

 

  (iii) if the Majority Lenders so require after a period of forty-five (45) days from receipt of the notice referred to in (i) above (provided, for the avoidance of doubt, failure of the Parent to provide such notice shall not prevent the Lenders from taking the following actions), the Agent shall by notice to the Parent, (such notice to be delivered no later than sixty (60) days from receipt of the notice referred to in (i) above), cancel the Total Commitments and declare all outstanding Loans, together with accrued interest and all other amounts accrued under the Finance Documents immediately due and payable, whereupon the Total Commitments will be cancelled and all such outstanding amounts will become immediately due and payable;

 

  (iv) if the Agent does not serve the notice referred to in paragraph (iii) above, a Lender may by notice to the Agent which shall be delivered not earlier than forty-five (45) days nor later than sixty (60) days from receipt of the notice referred to in (i) above, whereupon the Agent shall by notice to the Parent (such notice to be delivered promptly after receipt of such Lender notification), cancel the Commitment of that Lender and declare the participation of that Lender in all outstanding Loans, together with accrued interest thereon and all other amounts due to such Lender under the Finance Documents immediately due and payable, whereupon the Commitment of that Lender will be cancelled and all such outstanding amounts will become immediately due and payable.

 

- 24 -


  (b) For the purpose of paragraph (a) above “ control ” means:

 

  (i) the power (whether by way of ownership of shares, proxy, contract, agency or otherwise) to:

 

  (A) cast, or control the casting of, more than one-half of the maximum number of votes that might be cast at a general meeting of the Parent; or

 

  (B) appoint or remove all, or the majority, of the directors or other equivalent officers of the Parent; or

 

  (C) give directions with respect to the operating and financial policies of the Parent which the directors or other equivalent officers of the Parent are obliged to comply with; or

 

  (ii) the holding of more than one-half of the issued share capital of the Parent (excluding any part of that issued share capital that carries no right to participate beyond a specified amount in a distribution of either profits or capital).

 

  (c) For the purpose of paragraph (a) above “ acting in concert ” means, a group of persons who, pursuant to an agreement or understanding (whether formal or informal), actively co-operate, through the acquisition by any of them, either directly or indirectly, of shares in the Parent, to obtain or consolidate control of the Parent.

 

7.3 Voluntary cancellation

During the Availability Period, the Parent may, if it gives the Agent not less than five (5) Business Days’ (or such shorter period as the Majority Lenders may agree) prior notice, cancel the whole or any part (being a minimum amount of ten million dollars ($10,000,000)) of the Available Facility. Any cancellation under this Clause 7.3 shall reduce the Commitments of the Lenders rateably.

 

7.4 Voluntary Prepayment of Loans

The Borrower to which a Loan has been made may, if it gives the Agent not less than five (5) Business Days’ (or such shorter period as the Majority Lenders may agree) prior notice, prepay the whole or any part of a Loan (but if in part, being an amount that reduces the Loan by a minimum amount of ten million dollars ($10,000,000)).

 

- 25 -


7.5 Right of replacement or repayment and cancellation in relation to a single Lender

 

  (a) If:

 

  (i) any sum payable to any Lender by an Obligor is required to be increased under paragraph (c) of Clause 12.1 ( Tax gross-up ); or

 

  (ii) any Lender claims indemnification from the Parent under Clause 12.2 ( Tax indemnity ) or Clause 13.1 ( Increased costs ); or

 

  (iii) any Lender notifies the Agent of its Additional Cost Rate under paragraph 3 of Schedule 4 ( Mandatory Cost Formula ),

the Parent may, whilst (in the case of paragraphs (i) and (ii) above) the circumstance giving rise to the requirement for that increase or indemnification continues or (in the case of paragraph (iii) above) that Additional Cost Rate is greater than zero, give the Agent notice of cancellation of the Commitment of that Lender and its intention to procure the repayment of that Lender’s participation in the Loans or give the Agent notice of its intention to replace that Lender in accordance with paragraph (d) below.

 

  (b) On receipt of a notice of cancellation referred to in paragraph (a) above, the Commitment of that Lender shall immediately be reduced to zero whereupon the Total Commitments shall be reduced by the same amount.

 

  (c) On the last day of each Interest Period which ends after the Parent has given notice of cancellation under paragraph (a) above (or, if earlier, the date specified by the Parent in that notice), each Borrower to which a Loan is outstanding shall repay that Lender’s participation in that Loan.

 

  (d) The Parent may, in the circumstances set out in paragraph (a) above, on five (5) Business Days’ prior notice to the Agent and that Lender, replace that Lender by requiring that Lender to (and, to the extent permitted by law, that Lender shall) transfer pursuant to Clause 23 ( Changes to the Lenders ) all (and not part only) of its rights and obligations under this Agreement to a Lender or other bank, financial institution, trust, fund or other entity selected by the Parent which confirms its willingness to assume and does assume all the obligations of the transferring Lender in accordance with Clause 23 ( Changes to the Lenders ) for a purchase price in cash or other cash payment payable at the time of the transfer equal to the outstanding principal amount of such Lender’s participation in the outstanding Loans and all accrued interest (to the extent that the Agent has not given a notification under Clause 23.9 ( Pro rata interest settlement )), Break Costs and other amounts payable in relation thereto under the Finance Documents.

 

  (e) The replacement of a Lender pursuant to paragraph (d) above shall be subject to the following conditions:

 

  (i) the Parent shall have no right to replace the Agent;

 

- 26 -


  (ii) neither the Agent nor any Lender shall have any obligation to find a replacement Lender; and

 

  (iii) in no event shall the Lender replaced under paragraph (d) above be required to pay or surrender any of the fees received by such Lender pursuant to the Finance Documents.

 

7.6 Restrictions

 

  (a) Any notice of cancellation or prepayment given by any Party under this Clause 7 shall be irrevocable and, unless a contrary indication appears in this Agreement, shall specify the date or dates upon which the relevant cancellation or prepayment is to be made and the amount of that cancellation or prepayment.

 

  (b) Any prepayment under this Agreement shall be made together with accrued interest on the amount prepaid and, subject to any Break Costs, without premium or penalty.

 

  (c) Unless a contrary indication appears in this Agreement any part of any Loan which is prepaid or repaid may be reborrowed in accordance with the terms of this Agreement.

 

  (d) The Borrowers shall not repay or prepay all or any part of the Loans or cancel all or any part of the Commitments except at the times and in the manner expressly provided for in this Agreement.

 

  (e) No amount of the Total Commitments cancelled under this Agreement may be subsequently reinstated.

 

  (f) At the end of the Availability Period, the Total Commitments shall be reduced to zero.

 

  (g) If the Agent receives a notice under this Clause 7 it shall promptly forward a copy of that notice to either the Parent or the affected Lender, as appropriate.

 

  (h) If all or part of a Loan is repaid or prepaid and is not available for redrawing (other than by operation of Clause 4.2 ( Further conditions precedent )), an amount of the Commitments (equal to the amount of the Loan which is repaid or prepaid) will be deemed to be cancelled on the date of repayment or prepayment. Any cancellation under this paragraph (h) shall reduce the Commitments of the Lenders rateably.

 

7.7 Right of cancellation in relation to a Defaulting Lender

 

  (a) If any Lender becomes a Defaulting Lender, the Parent may, at any time whilst the Lender continues to be a Defaulting Lender, give the Agent five (5) Business Days’ notice of cancellation of each Available Commitment of that Lender.

 

- 27 -


  (b) On the notice referred to in paragraph (a) above becoming effective, each Available Commitment of the Defaulting Lender shall immediately be reduced to zero.

 

  (c) The Agent shall as soon as practicable after receipt of a notice referred to in paragraph (a) above, notify all the Lenders.

 

- 28 -


SECTION 5

COSTS OF UTILISATION

 

8. INTEREST

 

8.1 Calculation of interest

The rate of interest on each Loan for each Interest Period is the percentage rate per annum which is the aggregate of the applicable:

 

  (a) Margin;

 

  (b) LIBOR; and

 

  (c) Mandatory Cost, if any.

 

8.2 Payment of interest

Each Borrower to which a Loan has been made shall pay accrued interest on that Loan on the last day of each Interest Period (and, if the Interest Period is longer than 6 (six) months, on the dates falling at 6 (six) Monthly intervals after the first day of the relevant Interest Period).

 

8.3 Default interest

 

  (a) If an Obligor fails to pay any amount payable by it under a Finance Document on its due date, interest shall accrue on the overdue amount from the due date up to the date of actual payment (both before and after judgment) at a rate which, subject to paragraph (b) below, is one per cent. (1%) higher than the rate which would have been payable if the overdue amount had, during the period of non-payment, constituted a Loan in the currency of the overdue amount for successive Interest Periods, each of a duration selected by the Agent (acting reasonably). Any interest accruing under this Clause 8.3 shall be immediately payable by that Obligor on demand by the Agent.

 

  (b) If any overdue amount consists of all or part of a Loan which became due on a day which was not the last day of an Interest Period relating to that Loan:

 

  (i) the first Interest Period for that overdue amount shall have a duration equal to the unexpired portion of the current Interest Period relating to that Loan; and

 

  (ii) the rate of interest applying to the overdue amount during that first Interest Period shall be one per cent. (1%) higher than the rate which would have applied if the overdue amount had not become due.

 

  (c) Default interest (if unpaid) arising on an overdue amount will be compounded with the overdue amount at the end of each Interest Period applicable to that overdue amount but will remain immediately due and payable.

 

- 29 -


8.4 Notification of rates of interest

The Agent shall promptly notify the Lenders and the relevant Borrower of the determination of a rate of interest under this Agreement.

 

9. INTEREST PERIODS

 

9.1 Selection of Interest Periods

 

  (a) A Borrower may select an Interest Period for a Loan in the Utilisation Request for that Loan.

 

  (b) Subject to this Clause 9, a Borrower may select an Interest Period of one (1), two (2), three (3) or six (6) months or any other period agreed between the Borrower and the Agent (acting on the instructions of all the Lenders).

 

  (c) An Interest Period for a Loan shall not extend beyond the Termination Date.

 

  (d) Each Interest Period for a Loan shall start on the Utilisation Date.

 

  (e) A Loan has one Interest Period only.

 

9.2 Non-Business Days

If an Interest Period would otherwise end on a day which is not a Business Day, that Interest Period will instead end on the next Business Day in that calendar month (if there is one) or the preceding Business Day (if there is not).

 

10. CHANGES TO THE CALCULATION OF INTEREST

 

10.1 Absence of quotations

Subject to Clause 10.2 ( Market disruption ), if LIBOR is to be determined by reference to the Reference Banks but a Reference Bank does not supply a quotation by the Specified Time on the Quotation Day, the applicable LIBOR shall be determined on the basis of the quotations of the remaining Reference Banks.

 

10.2 Market disruption

 

  (a) If a Market Disruption Event occurs in relation to a Loan for any Interest Period, then the rate of interest on each Lender’s share of that Loan for the Interest Period shall be the percentage rate per annum which is the sum of:

 

  (i) the Margin;

 

  (ii) the rate notified to the Agent by that Lender as soon as practicable and in any event not later than five (5) Business Days before interest is due to be paid in respect of that Interest Period ( provided that if such Lender is unable to notify the Agent of such rate not later than five (5) Business Days before interest is due to be paid in respect of that Interest Period, it shall do so before interest is due to be paid in respect of that Interest Period), to be that which expresses as a percentage rate

 

- 30 -


per annum the cost to that Lender of funding its participation in that Loan from whatever source it may reasonably select; and

 

  (iii) the Mandatory Cost, if any, applicable to that Lender’s participation in the Loan.

 

  (b) In this Agreement “ Market Disruption Event ” means:

 

  (i) at or about noon on the Quotation Day for the relevant Interest Period the Screen Rate is not available and none or only one of the Reference Banks supplies a rate to the Agent to determine LIBOR for dollars and for the relevant Interest Period; or

 

  (ii) before close of business in London on the Quotation Day for the relevant Interest Period, the Agent receives notifications from a Lender or Lenders (whose participations in a Loan exceed thirty five per cent. (35%) of that Loan) that the cost to it of obtaining matching deposits in the Relevant Interbank Market would be in excess of LIBOR.

 

10.3 Alternative basis of interest or funding

 

  (a) If a Market Disruption Event occurs and the Agent or the Parent so requires, the Agent and the Parent shall enter into negotiations (for a period of not more than thirty (30) days) with a view to agreeing a substitute basis for determining the rate of interest.

 

  (b) Any alternative basis agreed pursuant to paragraph (a) above shall, with the prior consent of all the Lenders and the Parent, be binding on all Parties.

 

10.4 Break Costs

 

  (a) Each Borrower shall, within three (3) Business Days of demand by a Finance Party, pay to that Finance Party its Break Costs attributable to all or any part of a Loan or Unpaid Sum being paid by that Borrower on a day other than the last day of an Interest Period for that Loan or Unpaid Sum.

 

  (b) Each Lender shall, as soon as reasonably practicable after a demand by the Agent, provide a certificate confirming the amount of its Break Costs for any Interest Period in which they accrue.

 

11. FEES

 

11.1 Commitment fee

 

  (a) The Parent (or a Borrower nominated by the Parent) shall pay to the Agent (for the account of each Lender) a fee in dollars which shall be computed at the rate of zero point five six per cent. (0.56%) per annum on that Lender’s Available Commitment during the Availability Period.

 

  (b) The accrued commitment fee is payable on the last day of each successive period of three (3) months which ends during the Availability Period, on the last day of the Availability Period and, if cancelled in full, on the cancelled amount of the relevant Lender’s Commitment at the time the cancellation is effective.

 

  (c) No commitment fee is payable to the Agent (for the account of a Lender) on any Available Commitment of that Lender for any day on which that Lender is a Defaulting Lender.

 

- 31 -


11.2 Participation fee

The Parent (or a Borrower nominated by the Parent) shall pay to the Agent (for the account of the Lenders based on their respective Commitments) a participation fee in the amount and at the times agreed in a Fee Letter.

 

11.3 Arrangement fee

The Parent (or a Borrower nominated by the Parent) shall pay to the Agent (for the account of the Arrangers) an arrangement fee in the amount and at the times agreed in a Fee Letter.

 

11.4 Agency fee

The Parent (or a Borrower nominated by the Parent) shall pay to the Agent (for its own account) an agency fee in the amount and at the times agreed in a Fee Letter.

 

11.5 Utilisation fee

Where the principal amount outstanding of the drawn Loans under the Facility, expressed as a percentage of the Total Commitments, fall within a percentage range set out in the left hand column below, the Parent (or a Borrower nominated by the Parent) shall pay to the Agent (for the account of each Lender in respect of its participation in the Loan(s)) a utilisation fee which shall be computed at a rate equal to the rate per annum set out opposite such percentage range in the right hand column below on the total outstanding Loans. Utilisation fees are calculated on a day to day basis and accrued utilisation fees are payable quarterly in arrear until the Termination Date and on the date a Lender’s Commitment is cancelled in full.

 

Less than or equal to 33 1/3%

   0.20%

Greater than 33 1/3% and less than or equal to 66 2/3%

   0.40%

Greater than 66 2/3%

   0.60%

 

- 32 -


SECTION 6

ADDITIONAL PAYMENT OBLIGATIONS

 

12. TAX GROSS UP AND INDEMNITIES

 

12.1 Tax gross-up

 

  (a) Each Obligor shall make all payments to be made by it without any Tax Deduction, unless a Tax Deduction is required by law.

 

  (b) An Obligor shall promptly upon becoming aware that it must make a Tax Deduction (or that there is any change in the rate or the basis of a Tax Deduction) notify the Agent accordingly. Similarly, a Lender shall notify the Agent on becoming so aware in respect of a payment payable to that Lender. If the Agent receives such notification from a Lender it shall notify the Parent and, if applicable, that Obligor.

 

  (c) If a Tax Deduction is required by law to be made by an Obligor, the amount of the payment due from that Obligor shall be increased to an amount which (after making any Tax Deduction) leaves an amount equal to the payment which would have been due if no Tax Deduction had been required.

 

  (d) If an Obligor is required to make a Tax Deduction, that Obligor shall make that Tax Deduction and any payment required in connection with that Tax Deduction within the time allowed and in the minimum amount required by law.

 

  (e) Within thirty (30) days of making either a Tax Deduction or any payment required in connection with that Tax Deduction, the Obligor making that Tax Deduction shall deliver to the Agent for the Finance Party entitled to the payment evidence reasonably satisfactory to that Finance Party that the Tax Deduction has been made or (as applicable) any appropriate payment paid to the relevant taxing authority.

 

12.2 Tax indemnity

 

  (a) An Obligor shall (within three (3) Business Days of demand by the Agent) pay to a Finance Party an amount equal to the loss, liability or cost which that Finance Party determines (in its absolute discretion) will be or has been (directly or indirectly) suffered for or on account of Tax by that Finance Party in respect of a Finance Document.

 

  (b) Paragraph (a) above shall not apply:

 

  (i) with respect to any Tax assessed on a Finance Party:

 

  (A) under the law of the jurisdiction in which that Finance Party is incorporated or, if different, the jurisdiction (or jurisdictions) in which that Finance Party is treated as resident for tax purposes; or

 

- 33 -


  (B) under the law of the jurisdiction in which that Finance Party’s Facility Office is located in respect of amounts received or receivable in that jurisdiction,

if that Tax is imposed on or calculated by reference to the net income received or receivable (but not any sum deemed to be received or receivable) by that Finance Party; or

 

  (ii) to the extent a loss, liability or cost is compensated for by an increased payment under Clause 12.1 ( Tax gross-up ).

 

  (c) A Finance Party making, or intending to make a claim under paragraph (a) above shall promptly notify the Agent of the event which will give, or has given, rise to the claim, following which the Agent shall notify the Obligor.

 

  (d) A Finance Party shall, on receiving a payment from an Obligor under this Clause 12.2, notify the Agent.

 

12.3 Tax Credit

If an Obligor makes a Tax Payment and the relevant Finance Party determines (in its absolute discretion) that:

 

  (a) a Tax Credit is attributable either to an increased payment of which that Tax Payment forms part, or to that Tax Payment; and

 

  (b) that Finance Party has obtained, utilised and retained that Tax Credit,

the Finance Party shall pay an amount to such Obligor which that Finance Party determines (in its absolute discretion) will leave it (after that payment) in the same after-Tax position as it would have been in had the Tax Payment not been required to be made by such Obligor.

 

12.4 Stamp taxes

The Parent shall pay and, within three (3) Business Days of demand, indemnify each Finance Party against any cost, loss or liability that Finance Party incurs in relation to all stamp duty, registration and other similar Taxes payable in respect of any Finance Document.

 

12.5 Value added tax

 

  (a) All amounts set out or expressed in a Finance Document to be payable by any Party to a Finance Party which (in whole or in part) constitute the consideration for a supply or supplies for VAT purposes shall be deemed to be exclusive of any VAT which is chargeable on such supply or supplies, and accordingly, subject to paragraph (b) below, if VAT is or becomes chargeable on any supply made by any Finance Party to any Party under a Finance Document, that Party shall pay to the Finance Party (in addition to and at the same time as paying any other consideration for such supply) an amount equal to the amount of such VAT (and such Finance Party shall promptly provide an appropriate VAT invoice to such Party).

 

- 34 -


  (b) If VAT is or becomes chargeable on any supply made by any Finance Party (the “ Supplier ”) to any other Finance Party (the “ Recipient ”) under a Finance Document, and any Party other than the Recipient (the “ Subject Party ”) is required by the terms of any Finance Document to pay an amount equal to the consideration for such supply to the Supplier (rather than being required to reimburse the Recipient in respect of that consideration), such Party shall also pay to the Supplier (in addition to and at the same time as paying such amount) an amount equal to the amount of such VAT. The Recipient will promptly pay to the Subject Party an amount equal to any credit or repayment obtained by the Recipient from the relevant tax authority which the Recipient reasonably determines is in respect of such VAT.

 

  (c) Where a Finance Document requires any Party to reimburse or indemnify a Finance Party for any cost or expense, that Party shall reimburse or indemnify (as the case may be) such Finance Party for the full amount of such cost or expense, including such part thereof as represents VAT, save to the extent that such Finance Party reasonably determines that it is entitled to credit or repayment in respect of such VAT from the relevant tax authority.

 

  (d) Any reference in this Clause 12.5 to any Party shall, at any time when such Party is treated as a member of a group for VAT purposes, include (where appropriate and unless the context otherwise requires) a reference to the representative member of such group at such time (the term “representative member” to have the same meaning as in the Value Added Tax Act 1994).

 

13. INCREASED COSTS

 

13.1 Increased costs

 

  (a) Subject to Clause 13.3 ( Exceptions ) the Parent (or a Borrower nominated by the Parent) shall, within twenty (20) Business Days of a demand by the Agent, pay for the account of a Finance Party the amount of any Increased Costs incurred by that Finance Party or any of its Affiliates as a result of:

 

  (i) the introduction of or any change in (or in the interpretation, administration or application of) any law or regulation after the date of this Agreement;

 

  (ii) compliance with any law or regulation made after the date of this Agreement; or

 

  (iii) the implementation or application of, or compliance with, Basel III or any law or regulation that implements or applies Basel III.

 

  (b) In this Agreement:

 

  (i) Basel III ” means the agreements on capital requirements, a leverage ratio and liquidity standards contained in “Basel III: A global regulatory framework for more resilient banks and banking systems”, “Basel III: International framework for liquidity risk measurement, standards and monitoring” and “Guidance for national authorities

 

- 35 -


       operating the countercyclical capital buffer” published by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision on 16 December 2010, each as amended, supplemented or restated; and

 

  (ii) “Increased Costs” means:

 

  (A) a reduction in the rate of return from the Facility or on a Finance Party’s (or its Affiliate’s) overall capital;

 

  (B) an additional or increased cost; or

 

  (C) a reduction of any amount due and payable under any Finance Document,

which is incurred or suffered by a Finance Party or any of its Affiliates to the extent that it is attributable to that Finance Party having entered into its Commitment or funding or performing its obligations under any Finance Document.

 

13.2 Increased cost claims

 

  (a) A Finance Party intending to make a claim pursuant to Clause 13.1 ( Increased costs ) shall notify the Agent of the event giving rise to the claim, following which the Agent shall promptly notify the Parent.

 

  (b) Each Finance Party shall, as soon as practicable after a demand by the Agent, provide a certificate confirming the amount of its Increased Costs.

 

13.3 Exceptions

Clause 13.1 ( Increased costs ) does not apply to the extent any Increased Cost is:

 

  (a) attributable to a Tax Deduction required by law to be made by an Obligor;

 

  (b) compensated for by Clause 12.2 ( Tax indemnity ) (or would have been compensated for under Clause 12.2 ( Tax indemnity ) but was not so compensated solely because any of the exclusions in paragraph (b) of Clause 12.2 ( Tax indemnity ) applied);

 

  (c) compensated for by the payment of the Mandatory Cost;

 

  (d) attributable to the wilful breach by the relevant Finance Party or its Affiliates of any law or regulation; or

 

  (e) attributable to the implementation or application of or compliance with the bank levy imposed by the United Kingdom government under the Finance Act 2011 in the form existing on the date of this Agreement (the “UK Bank Levy”) or any other law or regulation which implements the UK Bank Levy (whether such implementation, application or compliance is by a government, regulator, Finance Party or any of its Affiliates).

 

- 36 -


14. OTHER INDEMNITIES

 

14.1 Currency indemnity

 

  (a) If any sum due from an Obligor under the Finance Documents (a “ Sum ”), or any order, judgment or award given or made in relation to a Sum, has to be converted from the currency (the “ First Currency ”) in which that Sum is payable into another currency (the “ Second Currency ”) for the purpose of:

 

  (i) making or filing a claim or proof against that Obligor;

 

  (ii) obtaining or enforcing an order, judgment or award in relation to any litigation or arbitration proceedings,

that Obligor shall as an independent obligation, within five (5) Business Days of demand, indemnify each Finance Party to whom that Sum is due against any cost, loss or liability arising out of or as a result of the conversion including any discrepancy between (A) the rate of exchange used to convert that Sum from the First Currency into the Second Currency and (B) the rate or rates of exchange available to that person at the time of its receipt of that Sum.

 

  (b) Each Obligor waives any right it may have in any jurisdiction to pay any amount under the Finance Documents in a currency or currency unit other than that in which it is expressed to be payable.

 

14.2 Other indemnities

The Parent (or a Borrower nominated by the Parent) shall, within five (5) Business Days of demand, indemnify each Finance Party against any cost, loss or liability incurred by that Finance Party as a result of:

 

  (a) the occurrence of any Event of Default;

 

  (b) a failure by an Obligor to pay any amount due under a Finance Document on its due date, including without limitation, any cost, loss or liability arising as a result of Clause 27 ( Sharing Among the Finance Parties );

 

  (c) funding, or making arrangements to fund, its participation in a Loan requested by a Borrower in a Utilisation Request but not made by reason of the operation of any one or more of the provisions of this Agreement (other than by reason of default or negligence by that Finance Party alone); or

 

  (d) a Loan (or part of a Loan) not being prepaid in accordance with a notice of prepayment given by a Borrower or the Parent.

 

14.3 Indemnity to the Agent

The Parent shall promptly indemnify the Agent against any cost, loss or liability incurred by the Agent (acting reasonably) as a result of:

 

  (a) investigating any event which it reasonably believes is a Default; or

 

- 37 -


  (b) acting or relying on any notice, request or instruction which it reasonably believes to be genuine, correct and appropriately authorised.

 

15. MITIGATION BY THE LENDERS

 

15.1 Mitigation

 

  (a) Each Finance Party shall, in consultation with the Parent, take all reasonable steps to mitigate any circumstances which arise and which would result in any amount becoming payable under or pursuant to, or cancelled pursuant to, any of Clause 7.1 ( Illegality ), Clause 12 ( Tax Gross-up and Indemnities ), Clause 13 ( Increased Costs ) or paragraph 3 of Schedule 4 ( Mandatory Cost Formula ) including (but not limited to) transferring its rights and obligations under the Finance Documents to another Affiliate or Facility Office.

 

  (b) Paragraph (a) above does not in any way limit the obligations of any Obligor under the Finance Documents.

 

15.2 Limitation of liability

 

  (a) The Parent shall indemnify each Finance Party for all costs and expenses reasonably incurred by that Finance Party as a result of steps taken by it under Clause 15.1 ( Mitigation ).

 

  (b) A Finance Party is not obliged to take any steps under Clause 15.1 ( Mitigation ) if, in the opinion of that Finance Party (acting reasonably), to do so might be prejudicial to it.

 

16. COSTS AND EXPENSES

 

16.1 Transaction expenses

The Parent (or a Borrower nominated by the Parent) shall, promptly within five (5) Business Days of demand, pay the Agent and the Arrangers the amount of all costs and expenses (including legal fees but subject to any separately agreed cap) reasonably incurred by any of them in connection with the negotiation, preparation, printing and execution of:

 

  (a) this Agreement and any other documents referred to in this Agreement; and

 

  (b) any other Finance Documents executed after the date of this Agreement,

subject to a cap of ten thousand dollars ($10,000) ( provided , however , that such cap shall not include the legal fees, which shall be subject to a separately agreed cap).

 

16.2 Amendment costs

If (a) an Obligor requests an amendment, waiver or consent or (b) an amendment is required pursuant to Clause 28.11 ( Change of currency ), the Parent (or a Borrower nominated by the Parent) shall, within five (5) Business Days of demand, reimburse the Agent for the amount of all costs and expenses (including legal fees) reasonably incurred by the Agent in responding to, evaluating, negotiating or complying with that request or requirement.

 

- 38 -


16.3 Enforcement costs

The Parent (or a Borrower nominated by the Parent) shall, within five (5) Business Days of demand, pay to each Finance Party the amount of all costs and expenses (including legal fees) incurred by that Finance Party in connection with the enforcement of, or the preservation of any rights under, any Finance Document.

 

- 39 -


SECTION 7

GUARANTEE

 

17. GUARANTEE AND INDEMNITY

 

17.1 Guarantee and indemnity

Each Guarantor irrevocably and unconditionally jointly and severally:

 

  (a) guarantees to each Finance Party punctual performance by each Borrower and the Parent of all that Borrower’s and the Parent’s obligations under the Finance Documents;

 

  (b) undertakes with each Finance Party that whenever a Borrower or the Parent does not pay any amount when due under or in connection with any Finance Document, that Guarantor shall immediately on demand pay that amount as if it was the principal obligor; and

 

  (c) agrees with each Finance Party that if any obligation guaranteed by it is or becomes unenforceable, invalid or illegal, it will, as an independent and primary obligation, indemnify that Finance Party immediately on demand (and shall make the relevant payment within five (5) Business Days of demand) against any cost, loss or liability it incurs as a result of a Borrower or the Parent not paying any amount which would, but for such unenforceability, invalidity or illegality, have been payable by it under any Finance Document on the date when it would have been due. The amount payable by a Guarantor under this indemnity will not exceed the amount it would have had to pay under this Clause 17 if the amount claimed had been recoverable on the basis of a guarantee.

 

17.2 Continuing guarantee

This guarantee is a continuing guarantee and will extend to the ultimate balance of sums payable by any Obligor under the Finance Documents, regardless of any intermediate payment or discharge in whole or in part.

 

17.3 Reinstatement

If any discharge, release or arrangement (whether in respect of the obligations of any Obligor or any security for those obligations or otherwise) is made by a Finance Party in whole or in part on the basis of any payment, security or other disposition which is avoided or must be restored in insolvency, liquidation, administration or otherwise, without limitation, then the liability of each Guarantor under this Clause 17 will continue or be reinstated as if the discharge, release or arrangement had not occurred.

 

- 40 -


17.4 Waiver of defences

The obligations of each Guarantor under this Clause 17 will not be affected by an act, omission, matter or thing which, but for this Clause, would reduce, release or prejudice any of its obligations under this Clause 17 ( without limitation and whether or not known to it or any Finance Party ) including:

 

  (a) any time, waiver or consent granted to, or composition with, any Obligor or other person;

 

  (b) the release of any other Obligor or any other person under the terms of any composition or arrangement with any creditor of any member of the Group;

 

  (c) the taking, variation, compromise, exchange, renewal or release of, or refusal or neglect to perfect, take up or enforce, any rights against, or security over assets of, any Obligor or other person or any non-presentation or non-observance of any formality or other requirement in respect of any instrument or any failure to realise the full value of any security;

 

  (d) any incapacity or lack of power, authority or legal personality of or dissolution or change in the members or status of an Obligor or any other person;

 

  (e) any amendment, novation, supplement, extension, restatement (however fundamental and whether or not more onerous) or replacement of any Finance Document or any other document or security including without limitation any change in the purpose of, any extension of or any increase in any facility or the addition of any new facility under any Finance Document or other document or security;

 

  (f) any unenforceability, illegality or invalidity of any obligation of any person under any Finance Document or any other document or security; or

 

  (g) any insolvency or similar proceedings.

 

17.5 Immediate recourse

Each Guarantor waives any right it may have of first requiring any Finance Party (or any trustee or agent on its behalf) to proceed against or enforce any other rights or security or claim payment from any person before claiming from that Guarantor under this Clause 17. This waiver applies irrespective of any law or any provision of a Finance Document to the contrary.

 

17.6 Appropriations

Until all amounts which may be or become payable by the Obligors under or in connection with the Finance Documents have been irrevocably paid in full, each Finance Party (or any trustee or agent on its behalf) may:

 

  (a) refrain from applying or enforcing any other moneys, security or rights held or received by that Finance Party (or any trustee or agent on its behalf) in respect of those amounts, or apply and enforce the same in such manner and order as it sees fit (whether against those amounts or otherwise) and no Guarantor shall be entitled to the benefit of the same; and

 

- 41 -


  (b) hold in an interest-bearing suspense account any moneys received from any Guarantor or on account of any Guarantor’s liability under this Clause 17.

 

17.7 Deferral of Guarantors’ rights

Until all amounts which may be or become payable by the Obligors under or in connection with the Finance Documents have been irrevocably paid in full and unless the Agent otherwise directs, no Guarantor will exercise any rights which it may have by reason of performance by it of its obligations under the Finance Documents or by reason of any amount being payable, or liability arising, under this Clause 17:

 

  (a) to be indemnified by an Obligor;

 

  (b) to claim any contribution from any other guarantor of any Obligor’s obligations under the Finance Documents;

 

  (c) to take the benefit (in whole or in part and whether by way of subrogation or otherwise) of any rights of the Finance Parties under the Finance Documents or of any other guarantee or security taken pursuant to, or in connection with, the Finance Documents by any Finance Party;

 

  (d) to bring legal or other proceedings for an order requiring any Obligor to make any payment, or perform any obligation, in respect of which any Guarantor has given a guarantee, undertaking or indemnity under Clause 17.1 ( Guarantee and Indemnity );

 

  (e) to exercise any right of set-off against any Obligor; and/or

 

  (f) to claim or prove as a creditor of any Obligor in competition with any Finance Party.

If a Guarantor receives any benefit, payment or distribution in relation to such rights it shall hold that benefit, payment or distribution to the extent necessary to enable all amounts which may be or become payable to the Finance Parties by the Obligors under or in connection with the Finance Documents to be repaid in full on trust for the Finance Parties and shall promptly pay or transfer the same to the Agent or as the Agent may direct for application in accordance with Clause 28 ( Payment mechanics )

 

17.8 Release of Guarantors’ right of contribution

If any Guarantor (a “ Retiring Guarantor ”) ceases to be a Guarantor in accordance with the terms of the Finance Documents for the purpose of any sale or other disposal of that Retiring Guarantor then on the date such Retiring Guarantor ceases to be a Guarantor:

 

  (a) that Retiring Guarantor is released by each other Guarantor from any liability (whether past, present or future and whether actual or contingent) to make a contribution to any other Guarantor arising by reason of the performance by any other Guarantor of its obligations under the Finance Documents; and

 

- 42 -


  (b) each other Guarantor waives any rights it may have by reason of the performance of its obligations under the Finance Documents to take the benefit (in whole or in part and whether by way of subrogation or otherwise) of any rights of the Finance Parties under any Finance Document or of any other security taken pursuant to, or in connection with, any Finance Document where such rights or security are granted by or in relation to the assets of the Retiring Guarantor.

 

17.9 Additional security

This guarantee is in addition to and is not in any way prejudiced by any other guarantee or security now or subsequently held by any Finance Party.

 

- 43 -


SECTION 8

REPRESENTATIONS, UNDERTAKINGS AND EVENTS OF DEFAULT

 

18. REPRESENTATIONS

Each Obligor makes the representations and warranties set out in this Clause 18 to each Finance Party.

 

18.1 Status

 

  (a) It is a limited liability company, duly incorporated and validly existing under the law of its jurisdiction of incorporation.

 

  (b) It has the power to own its assets and carry on its business as it is being conducted or is contemplated to be conducted.

 

18.2 Power and authority

It has the power to enter into and perform, and has taken all necessary action to authorise its entry into, and performance of, the Finance Documents to which it is party and the transactions contemplated by those Finance Documents.

 

18.3 Binding obligations

The obligations expressed to be assumed by it in each Finance Document to which it is a party are, subject to any general principles of law as at the date of this Agreement limiting its obligations, which are specifically referred to in any legal opinion delivered pursuant to Clause 4 ( Conditions of Utilisation ) or Clause 24 ( Changes to the Obligors ), legal, valid, binding and enforceable obligations.

 

18.4 Non-conflict with other obligations

The entry into and performance by it of, and the transactions contemplated by, the Finance Documents to which it is a party do not and will not conflict with:

 

  (a) any applicable law of its jurisdiction of incorporation;

 

  (b) its Constitutional Documents; or

 

  (c) any material agreement or instrument binding upon it or any of its assets.

 

18.5 Validity and admissibility in evidence

All authorisations required:

 

  (a) to enable it lawfully to enter into, exercise its rights and comply with its obligations under the Finance Documents to which it is a party and to ensure that the obligations expressed to be assumed by it thereunder are legal, valid, binding and enforceable; and

 

  (b) to make the Finance Documents to which it is a party admissible in evidence in its jurisdiction of incorporation, have been obtained or effected and are in full force and effect.

 

- 44 -


18.6 Governing law and enforcement

Subject to any general principles of law as at the date of this Agreement set out in any legal opinion delivered pursuant to the Finance Documents:

 

  (a) the choice of English law as the governing law of the Finance Documents will be recognised and enforced in its jurisdiction of incorporation; and

 

  (b) any judgment obtained in England in relation to a Finance Document will be recognised and enforced in its jurisdiction of incorporation.

 

18.7 Deduction of Tax

It is not required under the law of its jurisdiction of incorporation to make any deduction for or on account of Tax from any payment it may make under any Finance Document.

 

18.8 No filing or stamp taxes

Except to the extent set out in any legal opinion provided pursuant to the Finance Documents in relation to it, under the law of its jurisdiction of incorporation it is not necessary that the Finance Documents be filed, recorded or enrolled with any court or other authority in that jurisdiction or that any stamp, registration or similar tax be paid on or in relation to the Finance Documents or the transactions contemplated by the Finance Documents.

 

18.9 No default

 

  (a) No Event of Default is continuing or might reasonably be expected to result from the making of any Utilisation.

 

  (b) It is not, nor is it likely to be as a result of entering into and performing its obligations under the Finance Documents, in violation of any law or in breach of or in default under any agreement to which it is a party or which is binding on it or any of its assets to an extent or in a manner which could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

18.10 No misleading information

 

  (a) All written factual information supplied by it to the Finance Parties and the Agent in connection with the Finance Documents (and the information contained in the Information Package, excluding the equity analysts reports and the reports from the credit rating agencies) (the “ Information ”) was true and accurate in all material respects as at the date it was given or as at the date (if any) at which it was stated and was not misleading in any material respect at such date.

 

  (b) The financial projections and forecasts contained in the Information have been prepared in good faith on the basis of recent historical information and on the basis of reasonable assumptions.

 

- 45 -


  (c) It has not knowingly withheld any information which, if disclosed, could reasonably be expected materially and adversely to affect the decision of the Finance Parties in considering whether or not to provide finance to each Borrower.

 

18.11 Financial statements

 

  (a) The Original Financial Statements were prepared in accordance with GAAP.

 

  (b) The Original Financial Statements fairly represent the Group’s financial condition and operations during the relevant financial year.

 

18.12 Pari passu ranking

Its payment obligations under the Finance Documents rank at least pari passu with the claims of all its other unsecured and unsubordinated creditors, except for obligations mandatorily preferred by law applying to companies generally in the jurisdiction of its incorporation.

 

18.13 No proceedings pending or threatened

Other than as disclosed in the financial statements most recently delivered to the Agent pursuant to Clause 19.1(a) ( Financial statements ), no litigation, arbitration or administrative proceedings of or before any court, arbitral body or government agency which, if adversely determined, might reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect have (to the best of its knowledge and belief) been started or threatened against it or any Material Group Company.

 

18.14 No winding-up

No Material Group Company has taken any corporate action, nor have any other steps been taken or legal proceedings started or (to the best of its knowledge and belief, after due enquiry) threatened against any Material Group Company, for its winding-up, dissolution, administration or re-organisation or for the enforcement of any Encumbrance over all or any of its revenues or assets or for the appointment of a receiver, administrator, administrative receiver, conservator, custodian, trustee or similar officer of it or of all or any of its assets which could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

18.15 No encumbrances

 

  (a) No Encumbrance exists over all or any of the assets of any Material Group Company except for Permitted Encumbrances.

 

  (b) No Encumbrance would arise as a result of the execution of and performance of its rights and obligations under the Finance Documents

 

18.16 Assets

It and each Material Group Company has good title to or validly leases or licenses all of the assets necessary and has all consents and/or authorisations necessary to carry on its business as conducted to the extent that failure to comply with this Clause 18.16 could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

- 46 -


18.17 Insurance

Each Material Group Company maintains insurances on and in relation to its business and assets against those risks and to the extent as is usual for companies in the jurisdiction in which it conducts its business carrying on substantially similar business in such jurisdiction.

 

18.18 Environmental Compliance

Each Material Group Company has adopted and complies with an environmental policy which requires monitoring of and compliance with all applicable Environmental Law and Environmental Permits applicable to it from time to time unless non-compliance with such policy could not reasonably be expected to cause a Material Adverse Effect.

 

18.19 Environmental Claims

No Environmental Claim (not of a frivolous or vexatious nature) has been commenced or (to the best of its knowledge and belief) is threatened against any Material Group Company where that claim would be reasonably likely, if determined against that Material Group Company, to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

18.20 Taxation

 

  (a) It and each Material Group Company has duly and punctually paid and discharged all Taxes imposed upon it or its assets within the time period allowed without incurring penalties except to the extent that:

 

  (i) payment is being contested in good faith;

 

  (ii) it has maintained adequate reserves for those Taxes; and

 

  (iii) payment can be lawfully withheld.

 

  (b) It is not and no Material Group Company is materially overdue in the filing of any Tax returns.

 

18.21 Ownership of Material Group Companies

 

  (a) Each existing Material Group Company on the date of this Agreement (other than the Cerro Corona Subsidiary, Newshelf and the Ghanaian Companies) is a wholly-owned Subsidiary of the Parent and any member of the Group which becomes a Material Group Company after the date of this Agreement will be a wholly or partially owned subsidiary of the Parent and the members of the Group holding the shares in such Material Group Company have not reduced their shareholding in such Subsidiary below the level of their shareholding at the time such Subsidiary became a Material Group Company.

 

- 47 -


  (b) The Parent holds at least seventy-four per cent. (74%) of the issued share capital of GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited.

 

  (c) The Parent holds at least seventy-four per cent. (74%) of the issued share capital of Newshelf.

 

  (d) Newshelf holds at least seventy-four per cent. (74%) of the issued share capital of each of Gold Fields Operations Limited and GFI Joint Venture Holdings (Proprietary) Limited.

 

  (e) The Parent indirectly holds at least ninety per cent. (90%) of the issued share capital of each Ghanaian Company.

 

  (f) The Parent indirectly holds at least ninety-nine per cent. (99%) of the common shares in the share capital of the Cerro Corona Subsidiary (which equates to ninety-eight point five per cent. (98.5%) of the issued and outstanding shares in the share capital of the Cerro Corona Subsidiary).

 

18.22 No Material Adverse Effect

There has been no change in the business, condition (financial or otherwise), operations, performance or properties of the Obligors or the Group (taken as a whole) since 31 December 2011 which could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

18.23 Times when representation made

 

  (a) All the representations and warranties in this Clause 18 are made by each Obligor on the date of this Agreement and, in the case of each Additional Obligor, on the date of accession of such Additional Obligor (by reference to the facts and circumstances then existing (other than the representation in paragraph (a) of Clause 18.10 ( No misleading information ) which is deemed to be made on the date the Information is provided by the relevant Obligor).

 

  (b) All the representations and warranties in this Clause 18 are deemed to be made by each Obligor (by reference to the facts and circumstances then existing) on the date of each Utilisation Request and Utilisation Date.

 

  (c) The Repeating Representations are deemed to be made by each Obligor (by reference to the facts and circumstances then existing) on the first day of each Interest Period, save that the references in Clause 18.11 ( Financial statements ) to “the Original Financial Statements” shall, for the purposes of the Repeating Representations, be construed as references to the most recent audited consolidated financial statements of the Parent delivered to the Agent under Clause 19.1 ( Financial statements ).

 

19. INFORMATION UNDERTAKINGS

The undertakings in this Clause 19 are given in favour of each Finance Party and remain in force from the date of this Agreement for so long as any amount is outstanding under the Finance Documents or any Commitment is in force.

 

- 48 -


19.1 Financial statements

The Parent shall supply to the Agent:

 

  (a) as soon as the same become available, but in any event within one hundred and twenty (120) days after the end of each of its Financial Years the audited consolidated financial statements of the Parent for that Financial Year;

 

  (b) as soon as the same become available, but in any event within one hundred and fifty (150) days after the end of each of its Financial Years:

 

  (i) the audited financial statements of each Obligor (other than Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited and Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited unless there is a legal requirement to audit its financial statements and any other Obligor which is not legally required to audit its financial statements) for that Financial Year; and

 

  (ii) if the audited financial statements of Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited and/or Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited and/or any other Obligor which is not legally required to audit its financial statements (as the case may be) are not delivered under (i) above, the unaudited financial statements of Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited and/or Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited and/or any other Obligor which is not legally required to audit its financial statements (as the case may be) for that Financial Year;

 

  (c) as soon as the same become available, but in any event within sixty (60) days after the first six (6) months of each of its Financial Years:

 

  (i) the unaudited financial statements of each Obligor for the first six (6) month period of that Financial Year; and

 

  (ii) the unaudited consolidated financial statements of the Parent for the first six (6) month period of that Financial Year; and

 

  (d) as soon as the same become available, but in any event within sixty (60) days after the end of each quarter of each Financial Year:

 

  (i) the unaudited consolidated financial statements of the Parent for that period; and

 

  (ii) the unaudited financial statements of each Obligor for that period.

 

19.2 Compliance Certificate

 

  (a) The Parent shall supply to the Agent, with each set of consolidated financial statements delivered pursuant to paragraphs (a) and (c) of Clause 19.1 ( Financial statements ), a Compliance Certificate setting out (in reasonable detail) computations as to compliance with Clause 20 ( Financial Covenants ) as at the date as at which those financial statements were drawn up.

 

- 49 -


  (b) Each Compliance Certificate shall be signed by 2 (two) directors or executive officers of the Parent and, if required to be delivered with the audited consolidated financial statements delivered pursuant to paragraph (a)(i) of Clause 19.1 ( Financial statements ), reported on by the Auditors.

 

19.3 Requirements as to financial statements

 

  (a) Each set of financial statements delivered by the Parent pursuant to Clause 19.1 ( Financial statements ) shall be certified by a director of the relevant company as fairly representing its financial condition as at the date as at which those financial statements were drawn up. This Clause 19.3 shall not apply to those financial statements delivered pursuant to Clause 19.1(d) ( Financial Statements ).

 

  (b) The Parent shall procure that each set of financial statements delivered pursuant to Clause 19.1 ( Financial statements ) is prepared in accordance with GAAP, the requirements of its jurisdiction of incorporation and accounting practices and financial reference periods consistent with those applied in the preparation of the Original Financial Statements.

 

  (c) Paragraph (b) above shall not apply to the extent that, in relation to any sets of financial statements, the Parent notifies the Agent that there has been a change in GAAP or the accounting practices or reference periods and its Auditors (in the case of its annual audited financial statements) or the Parent (in the case of any of its other financial statements) delivers to the Agent:

 

  (i) a description of any change necessary for those financial statements to reflect GAAP, accounting practices and reference periods upon which the Original Financial Statements were prepared; and

 

  (ii) sufficient information, in form and substance as may be reasonably required by the Agent, to enable the Agent to determine whether Clause 20 ( Financial Covenants ) has been complied with and make an accurate comparison between the financial position indicated in those financial statements and the Original Financial Statements.

 

  (d) If the Parent notifies the Agent of a change in accordance with paragraph (c) above, then the Parent and the Agent shall enter into negotiations in good faith with a view to agreeing:

 

  (i) whether or not the change might result in material alteration in the commercial effect of any of the terms of this Agreement or any other Finance Document; and

 

  (ii) if so, any amendments to this Agreement or any other Finance Document which may be necessary to ensure that the change does not result in any material alteration in the commercial effect of those terms, and if any amendments are agreed they shall take effect and be binding on each of the Parties in accordance with their terms.

 

- 50 -


  (e) Any reference in the Finance Documents to “ financial statements ” shall be construed as a reference to those financial statements as the same may be adjusted under this Clause 19.3 to reflect the basis upon which the Original Financial Statements were prepared.

 

19.4 Access to records

At any time after the occurrence of a Default and for so long as it is continuing, upon the request of the Agent or a Finance Party each Obligor shall (at that Obligor’s expense) provide to the Agent or any of its representatives and professional advisors such access to that Obligor’s records (including its general ledger), books and assets as that person may require at reasonable times and upon reasonable notice.

 

19.5 Information: miscellaneous

Each Obligor shall supply to the Agent, if the Agent so requests:

 

  (a) all documents dispatched by that Obligor to its shareholders (or any class of them) or its creditors generally at the same time as they are dispatched;

 

  (b) the details of any litigation, arbitration or administrative proceedings which are current, threatened or pending against any member of the Group which, if adversely determined against it, would be reasonably likely to have a Material Adverse Effect; and

 

  (c) promptly, such further information (including an extract of its general ledger) regarding the financial condition, business and operations of any Material Group Company as any Finance Party (through the Agent) may reasonably request.

 

19.6 Notification of default

 

  (a) Each Obligor shall notify the Agent, of any Default (and the steps, if any, being taken to remedy it) promptly upon becoming aware of its occurrence (unless that Obligor is aware that a notification has already been provided by another Obligor).

 

  (b) Promptly upon a request by the Agent, each Borrower shall supply to the Agent, a certificate signed by 2 (two) of its directors or senior officers on its behalf certifying that no Default is continuing (or if a Default is continuing specifying the Default and the steps, if any, being taken to remedy it).

 

- 51 -


19.7 Use of websites

 

  (a) The Parent may satisfy its obligation under the Finance Documents to deliver any information in relation to those Lenders (the “ Website Lenders ”) who accept this method of communication by posting this information onto an electronic website designated by the Parent and the Agent (the “ Designated Website ”) if:

 

  (i) the Agent expressly agrees (after consultation with each of the Lenders) that it will accept communication of the information by this method;

 

  (ii) both the Parent and the Agent are aware of the address of and any relevant password specifications for the Designated Website; and

 

  (iii) the information is in a format previously agreed between the Parent and the Agent.

If any Lender (a “ Paper Form Lender ”) does not agree to the delivery of information electronically then the Agent shall notify the Parent accordingly and the Parent shall supply the information to the Agent (in sufficient copies for each Paper Form Lender) in paper form. In any event the Parent shall supply the Agent with at least one copy in paper form of any information required to be provided by it.

 

  (b) The Agent shall supply each Website Lender with the address of and any relevant password specifications for the Designated Website following designation of that website by the Parent and the Agent.

 

  (c) The Parent shall promptly upon becoming aware of its occurrence notify the Agent if:

 

  (i) the Designated Website cannot be accessed due to technical failure;

 

  (ii) the password specifications for the Designated Website change;

 

  (iii) any new information which is required to be provided under the Finance Documents is posted onto the Designated Website;

 

  (iv) any existing information which has been provided under the Finance Documents and posted onto the Designated Website is amended; or

 

  (v) the Parent becomes aware that the Designated Website or any information posted onto the Designated Website is or has been infected by any electronic virus or similar software.

If the Parent notifies the Agent under paragraph (c)(i) or paragraph (c)(v) above, all information to be provided by the Parent under the Finance Documents after the date of that notice shall be supplied in paper form unless and until the Agent and each Website Lender is satisfied that the circumstances giving rise to the notification are no longer continuing.

 

- 52 -


Any Website Lender may request, through the Agent, one (1) paper copy of any information required to be provided under the Finance Documents which is posted onto the Designated Website. The Parent shall comply with any such request within ten (10) Business Days.

 

19.8 “Know your customer” checks

 

  (a) If:

 

  (i) the introduction of or any change in (or in the interpretation, administration or application of) any law or regulation made after the date of this Agreement;

 

  (ii) any change in the status of an Obligor or the composition of the shareholders of an Obligor after the date of this Agreement; or

 

  (iii) a proposed assignment or transfer by a Lender of any of its rights and obligations under the Finance Documents to a party that is not a Lender prior to such assignment or transfer,

obliges the Agent or any Lender (or, in the case of paragraph (iii) above, any prospective new Lender) to comply with “know your customer” or similar identification procedures in circumstances where the necessary information is not already available to it, each Obligor shall promptly upon the request of the Agent or any Lender supply, or procure the supply of, such documentation and other evidence as is reasonably requested by the Agent (for itself or on behalf of any Lender) or any Lender (for itself or, in the case of the event described in paragraph (iii) above, on behalf of any prospective new Lender) in order for the Agent, such Lender or, in the case of the event described in paragraph (iii) above, any prospective new Lender to carry out and be satisfied it has complied with all necessary “know your customer” or other similar checks under all applicable laws and regulations pursuant to the transactions contemplated in the Finance Documents.

 

  (b) Each Lender shall promptly upon the request of the Agent supply, or procure the supply of, such documentation and other evidence as is reasonably requested by the Agent (for itself) in order for the Agent to carry out and be satisfied it has complied with all necessary “know your customer” or other similar checks under all applicable laws and regulations pursuant to the transactions contemplated in the Finance Documents.

 

  (c) The Parent shall, by not less than ten (10) Business Days’ prior written notice to the Agent, notify the Agent (which shall promptly notify the Lenders) of its intention to request that one of its Subsidiaries becomes an Additional Obligor pursuant to the terms of the Finance Documents.

 

  (d) Following the giving of any notice pursuant to paragraph (c) above, if the accession of such Additional Obligor obliges the Agent or any Lender to comply with “know your customer” or similar identification procedures in circumstances where the necessary information is not readily available to it, the Parent shall promptly upon the request of the Agent or any Lender supply,

 

- 53 -


or procure the supply of, such documentation and other evidence as is reasonably requested by the Agent (for itself or on behalf of any Lender) or any Lender (for itself or on behalf of any prospective Lender) in order for the Agent or such Lender or any prospective new Lender to carry out and be satisfied it has complied with all necessary “know your customer” or other similar checks under all applicable laws and regulations pursuant to the accession of such Subsidiary to the Finance Documents as an Additional Obligor.

 

20. FINANCIAL COVENANTS

 

20.1 Financial definitions:

In this Clause 20:

Consolidated EBITDA ” means, in respect of any Measurement Period, the consolidated net income of the Group (less the net income of any Project Finance Subsidiaries but including any dividends received in cash by any member of the Group (other than a Project Finance Subsidiary) from a Project Finance Subsidiary), before, without duplication and all as calculated in accordance with GAAP:

 

  (a) any provision on account of normal, deferred and royalty taxation;

 

  (b) any interest, commission, discounts or other fees incurred or payable, received or receivable by any member of the Group in respect of Indebtedness for Borrowed Money;

 

  (c) any other interest received or receivable by any member of the Group on any deposit or bank account;

 

  (d) any non-cash adjustments to the environment rehabilitation and/or reclamation expenses;

 

  (e) any amount attributable to the amortisation of intangible assets and depreciation of tangible assets;

 

  (f) any non-cash gains or losses relating to and resulting from the marked to market valuation of derivative and/or financial instruments;

 

  (g) any losses from (or gains on the reversal of previously recognised) write-downs or impairments of assets and/or investments;

 

  (h) any gains or losses recognised on the attributable share of results of associates after tax, but including any dividends received in cash by any member of the Group from such an associate;

 

  (i) any share-based payments;

 

  (j) any other extraordinary or exceptional items; and

 

  (k) any other material non-cash gain or loss that needs to be accounted for under GAAP.

 

- 54 -


For any company that is not a Subsidiary of the Group but in which any member of the Group directly or indirectly owns an equity interest of more than twenty per cent. (20%) of the issued share capital (an “ Associate ”), the Parent may include in the Consolidated EBITDA the percentage of the equity interest of the amount that would be the EBITDA of the Associate.

Consolidated Net Borrowings ” means, at any time, the aggregate amount of all obligations of the members of the Group, other than Project Finance Subsidiaries (but including, for the avoidance of doubt, any guaranteed obligations of any other member of the Group in respect of the obligations of a Project Finance Subsidiary), for or in respect of Indebtedness for Borrowed Money but excluding any such obligation to any member of the Group, adjusted to take account of the aggregate amount of freely available cash and cash equivalents held by any member of the Group, other than Project Finance Subsidiaries, and so that no amount shall be included or excluded more than once, provided that, if a percentage of the EBITDA of any Associate is included in the Consolidated EBITDA then the same percentage of such Associate’s Consolidated Net Borrowings (but as if references in such definition to “Group” were references to the Associate and its Subsidiaries) will be included in the calculation of Consolidated Net Borrowings;

Consolidated Net Finance Charges ” means, in respect of any Measurement Period, the aggregate amount of the interest (including the interest element of leasing and hire purchase payments and capitalised interest), commission, fees, discounts and other finance payments payable by any member of the Group, other than Project Finance Subsidiaries, (including any commission, fees, discounts and other finance payment payable by any member of the Group under any interest rate hedging arrangement but deducting any commission, fees, discounts and other finance payments receivable by any member of the Group under any interest rate hedging instrument) but deducting any other interest receivable by any member of the Group, other than Project Finance Subsidiaries, on any deposit or bank account, provided that, if a percentage of the EBITDA of any Associate is included in the Consolidated EBITDA then the same percentage of such Associate’s Consolidated Net Finance Charges (but as if references in such definition to “Group” were references to the Associate and its Subsidiaries) will be included in the calculation of Consolidated Net Finance Charges; and

Measurement Period ” means each period of twelve (12) months ending on the last day of the Parent’s Financial Year and each period of twelve (12) months ending on the last day of the first half of the Parent’s Financial Year.

 

20.2 Financial condition

The Parent shall ensure that for so long as any amount is outstanding under a Finance Document or any Commitment is in force:

 

  (a) the ratio of Consolidated EBITDA to Consolidated Net Finance Charges in respect of any Measurement Period shall be or shall exceed 5:1; and

 

  (b) the ratio of Consolidated Net Borrowings to Consolidated EBITDA shall not in respect of any Measurement Period exceed 2.5:1.

 

- 55 -


20.3 Financial testing

The financial covenants set out in Clause 20.2 ( Financial condition ) shall be tested by reference to each of the financial statements and/or each Compliance Certificate delivered pursuant to Clause 19.1 ( Financial Statements ) and Clause 19.2 ( Compliance Certificate).

 

20.4 Breach of a Financial Condition Undertaking

Any Obligor shall, immediately upon becoming aware of a breach of either of the financial covenants in Clause 20.2 ( Financial condition ), notify the Agent and provide such details about the breach as the Agent may request (unless that Obligor is aware that a notification has already been provided by another Obligor).

 

21. GENERAL UNDERTAKINGS

The undertakings in this Clause 21 are given in favour of each Finance Party and remain in force from the date of this Agreement for so long as any amount is outstanding under the Finance Documents or any Commitment is in force.

 

21.1 Authorisations

Each Obligor shall promptly:

 

  (a) obtain, comply with and do all that is necessary to maintain in full force and effect; and

 

  (b) upon written request by the Agent or a Finance Party, supply certified copies to the Agent and/or a Finance Party, as the case may be, of,

any authorisation required or desirable under any applicable law to enable it to perform its obligations under the Finance Documents to which it is a party and to ensure the legality, validity, enforceability or admissibility in evidence of any Finance Document.

 

21.2 Compliance with laws

Each Obligor shall comply in all respects with all laws and regulations to which it may be subject (including, but not limited to, Environmental Law), if failure so to comply would materially impair its ability to perform its obligations under the Finance Documents to which it is a party.

 

21.3 Negative pledge

 

  (a) No Obligor shall (and the Parent shall procure that no other Material Group Company shall) create or permit to subsist any Encumbrance over any of its assets.

 

- 56 -


  (b) No Obligor shall (and the Parent shall ensure that no other Material Group Company will):

 

  (i) sell, transfer or otherwise dispose of any of its assets on terms whereby they are or may be leased to or re-acquired by it or by an Obligor or any other member of the Group;

 

  (ii) sell, transfer or otherwise dispose of any of its receivables on recourse terms;

 

  (iii) enter into any arrangement under which money or the benefit of a bank or other account may be applied, set-off or made subject to a combination of accounts; or

 

  (iv) enter into any other preferential arrangement having a similar effect,

in circumstances where the arrangement or transaction is entered into primarily as a method of raising Financial Indebtedness or of financing the acquisition of an asset.

 

  (c) Paragraphs (a) and (b) above do not apply to Permitted Encumbrances.

 

21.4 Disposals and Mergers

 

  (a) No Obligor shall (and the Parent shall ensure that no other Material Group Company will):

 

  (i) enter into a single transaction or a series of transactions (whether related or not) and whether voluntarily or involuntarily to sell, lease, transfer or otherwise dispose of any assets; or

 

  (ii) enter into any amalgamation, demerger, merger or corporate reconstruction.

 

  (b) Paragraph (a) above does not apply to:

 

  (i) Permitted Disposals; or

 

  (ii) any amalgamation, demerger, merger or corporate reconstruction of any member of the Group, without insolvency, if:

 

  (A) in respect of the Obligors or the successors-in-title or assignees of the Obligors, the Finance Documents are preserved as binding upon the amalgamated, demerged, merged and/or reconstructed members of the Group; and

 

  (B) the amalgamated, demerged, merged and/or reconstructed companies will be members of the Group; and

 

  (C) such amalgamation, demerger, merger and/or corporate reconstruction will not have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

- 57 -


21.5 Change of business

Each Obligor shall procure that no substantial change is made to the general nature of its business or the business of the Group taken as a whole from that carried on at the date of this Agreement.

 

21.6 Insurance

Each Obligor shall (and the Parent shall ensure that each Material Group Company will) maintain insurances on and in relation to its business, properties and assets with reputable underwriters or insurance companies against those risks and to the extent as is usual for companies carrying on the same or substantially similar business.

 

21.7 Environmental Compliance

Each Obligor shall (and the Parent shall ensure that each Material Group Company will) substantially comply in all material respects with all Environmental Law and obtain and maintain any Environmental Permits and take all reasonable steps in anticipation of known or expected future changes to or obligations under the same.

 

21.8 Environmental Claims

Each Obligor shall inform the Agent, in writing as soon as reasonably practical upon becoming aware of the same:

 

  (a) if any Environmental Claim (not of a frivolous or vexatious nature) has been commenced or (to the best of its knowledge and belief) threatened against any Material Group Company; or

 

  (b) of any facts or circumstances which will or are reasonably likely to result in any Environmental Claim (not of a frivolous or vexatious nature) being commenced or threatened against any Material Group Company,

where the claim would be reasonably likely, if determined against that Material Group Company, to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

21.9 Taxation

Each Material Group Company shall duly and punctually pay and discharge all Taxes imposed upon it or its assets within the time period allowed without incurring penalties save to the extent that:

 

  (a) payment is being contested in good faith;

 

  (b) adequate reserves are being maintained for those Taxes; and

 

  (c) where such payment can be lawfully withheld.

 

21.10 Maintenance of Legal Status

Each Material Group Company shall do all such things as are necessary to maintain its existence as a legal person and shall maintain its books and records in good order and make all necessary corporate filings with the relevant authorities in its jurisdiction of incorporation.

 

- 58 -


21.11 Claims Pari Passu

Each Obligor shall ensure that at all times the claims of the Finance Parties against it under the Finance Documents rank at least pari passu with the claims of all its other unsecured and unsubordinated creditors save those whose claims are preferred by any bankruptcy, insolvency, liquidation or other similar laws of general application in its jurisdiction of incorporation.

 

21.12 Maintenance of Assets

Each Material Group Company shall ensure that it has good title to or validly leases or licences all of the assets necessary and has all consents and/or authorisations necessary to carry on its business as conducted to the extent that failure to comply with this Clause 21.12 could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

21.13 Acquisitions

No Obligor shall (and the Parent shall ensure that no Material Group Company will), without the prior consent of the Majority Lenders, enter into any transaction, acquire any company, business, assets or undertaking where such a transaction or acquisition is classed as a “Category 1” transaction under the Listing Requirements of the JSE Limited. For the purpose of this Clause 21.13 only, references to a transaction shall be construed as not including any acquisition of the Parent by a third party.

 

21.14 Financial Indebtedness

No member of the Group (other than a Guarantor or a Project Finance Subsidiary) shall incur, create or permit to subsist or have outstanding any Financial Indebtedness or enter into any agreement or arrangement whereby it is entitled to incur, create or permit to subsist any Financial Indebtedness other than Permitted Financial Indebtedness.

 

21.15 Ownership of Material Group Companies

Subject to applicable law, the Parent shall ensure that:

 

  (a) each existing Material Group Company on the date of this Agreement (other than the Cerro Corona Subsidiary, Newshelf, the Ghanaian Companies, Gold Fields Operations Limited and GFI Joint Venture Holdings (Proprietary) Limited) is and continues to be a wholly-owned Subsidiary of the Parent and each member of the Group which becomes a Material Group Company after the date of this Agreement is a wholly or partially owned Subsidiary of the Parent and that members of the Group will hold and continue to hold at least the same percentage of the issued share capital of such Material Group Company as was held by members of the Group at the time such Subsidiary became a Material Group Company;

 

- 59 -


  (b) the Parent holds and continues to hold at least seventy four per cent. (74%) of the issued share capital of GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited;

 

  (c) the Parent holds and continues to hold at least seventy four per cent. (74%) of the issued share capital of Newshelf;

 

  (d) Newshelf holds and continues to hold at least seventy four per cent. (74%) of the issued share capital of each of Gold Fields Operations Limited and GFI Joint Venture Holdings (Proprietary) Limited;

 

  (e) the Parent indirectly holds and continues to indirectly hold at least ninety per cent. (90%) of the issued share capital of each Ghanaian Company; and

 

  (f) the Parent indirectly holds and continues to indirectly hold at least ninety nine per cent. (99%) of the common shares in the share capital of the Cerro Corona Subsidiary (which equates to ninety-eight point five per cent. (98.5%) of the issued and outstanding shares in the share capital of the Cerro Corona Subsidiary).

 

22. EVENTS OF DEFAULT

Each of the events or circumstances set out in Clause 22 is an Event of Default (whether or not caused by any reason whatsoever outside the control of a Borrower or the Parent or any other person) save for Clause 22.16 ( Acceleration ) and Clause 22.17 ( Remedy ).

 

22.1 Non-payment

An Obligor does not pay on the due date any amount payable pursuant to a Finance Document at the place and in the currency in which it is expressed to be payable unless payment is made within three (3) Business Days of its due date.

 

22.2 Financial covenants

Any requirement of Clause 20 ( Financial Covenants ) is not satisfied.

 

22.3 Other obligations

 

  (a) Subject to Clause 22.17 ( Remedy ), an Obligor does not comply with any provision of the Finance Documents (other than those referred to in Clause 22.1 ( Non-Payment ) and Clause 20 ( Financial Covenants )).

 

  (b) No Event of Default will occur under paragraph (a) above if the Taxes not duly and punctually paid and discharged and in respect of which the undertaking contained in Clause 21.9 ( Taxation ) is given do not exceed an amount of twenty million dollars ($20,000,000).

 

22.4 Misrepresentation

 

  (a) Subject to Clause 22.17 ( Remedy ), any representation or statement made or deemed to be made by any Obligor in the Finance Documents or any other document delivered by or on behalf of any Obligor under or in connection with any Finance Document is or proves to have been incorrect or misleading in any material and adverse respect when made or deemed to be made.

 

- 60 -


  (b) No Event of Default will occur under paragraph (a) above if the Taxes in respect of which the representation contained in Clause 18.20 ( Taxation ) was made do not exceed an amount of twenty million dollars ($20,000,000).

 

22.5 Cross-default

 

  (a) Any Financial Indebtedness of a Material Group Company is not paid when due, nor where there is an applicable grace period, within the originally applicable grace period.

 

  (b) Any Financial Indebtedness of a Material Group Company is declared to be or otherwise becomes due and payable prior to its specified maturity as a result of an event of default (however described).

 

  (c) Any commitment for any Financial Indebtedness of a Material Group Company is cancelled or suspended by a creditor of a Material Group Company as a result of an event of default (however described).

 

  (d) Any creditor of a Material Group Company becomes entitled to declare any Financial Indebtedness of a Material Group Company due and payable prior to its specified maturity as a result of an event of default (however described).

 

  (e) No Event of Default will occur under this Clause 22.5 if the aggregate amount of Financial Indebtedness or commitment for Financial Indebtedness, falling within paragraphs (a) to (d) of this Clause 22.5 is less than twenty million dollars ($20,000,000).

 

22.6 Insolvency

 

  (a) Any Material Group Company is unable or admits inability to pay its debts as they fall due, suspends making payments on any of its debts or, by reason of actual or anticipated financial difficulties, commences negotiations with one or more of its classes of creditors with a view to rescheduling any of its Financial Indebtedness which in the case of a Material Group Company (other than an Obligor) could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

  (b) The value of the assets of any Material Group Company, fairly valued, is less than its liabilities (taking into account contingent and prospective liabilities) which in the case of a Material Group Company (other than an Obligor) could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

  (c) A moratorium is declared in respect of any Financial Indebtedness of any Material Group Company.

 

- 61 -


22.7 Insolvency proceedings

Any corporate action, legal proceedings or other similar procedure or step is taken in relation to:

 

  (a) the suspension of payments, a moratorium of any Financial Indebtedness, winding-up, dissolution, administration or reorganisation (by way of voluntary arrangement, scheme of arrangement or otherwise) of any Material Group Company;

 

  (b) a composition, compromise, assignment or arrangement with any creditor or class of creditors of any Material Group Company;

 

  (c) the appointment of a liquidator, receiver, administrator, administrative receiver, judicial manager, compulsory manager or other similar officer in respect of any Material Group Company or any of its assets; or

 

  (d) enforcement of any Encumbrance over any assets of any Material Group Company,

or any analogous procedure or step is taken in any jurisdiction and any such procedure or proceedings are not contested in good faith nor discharged within thirty (30) days (or such shorter period provided for contesting such procedure or proceedings under the laws of the relevant jurisdiction).

 

22.8 Failure to comply with final judgment

Any Material Group Company fails within five (5) Business Days of the due date to comply with or pay any sum due from it under any material final judgment or any final order made or given by any court of competent jurisdiction. For the purposes of this Clause 22.8, a “material final judgment” shall be any judgment for the payment of a sum of money in excess of twenty million dollars ($20,000,000).

 

22.9 Creditors’ process

Any expropriation (other than an expropriation where fair compensation is received) or the operation of the attachment, sequestration, distress or execution affects any material asset of a Material Group Company and is not discharged within twenty-one (21) days. For the purposes of this Clause 22.9 a “material asset” is any single income producing asset of the relevant Material Group Company which contributes not less than five per cent. (5%) towards the Consolidated EBITDA or gross assets of the Group (calculated according to the most recent set of audited consolidated financial statements delivered pursuant to Clause 19.1 ( Financial Statements )) provided that any loss of mineral rights arising as a result of the operation of the Mineral and Petroleum Resources Development Act, No. 28 of 2002 (the “ MPRDA ”) (including the broad-based socio-economic empowerment charter (the “ Mining Charter ”), the revised Mining Charter, the Code of Good Practice for the Minerals Industry and the Housing and Living Condition Standard for the Mining Industry published in accordance with the MPRDA) substantially in its current form as at the date of this Agreement and/or the operation of the Mineral and Petroleum Resources Royalty Act, No. 28 of 2008, substantially in its current form as at the date of this Agreement shall not constitute an expropriation for the purposes of this Clause 22.9.

 

- 62 -


22.10 Unlawfulness

It is or becomes unlawful for an Obligor to perform any of its obligations under the Finance Documents or such obligations cease to be legal, valid, binding or enforceable obligations

 

22.11 Repudiation and Unenforceability

An Obligor repudiates a Finance Document or any Finance Document is declared to be or is otherwise unenforceable against an Obligor by a court of the jurisdiction of incorporation of the relevant Obligor.

 

22.12 Governmental Intervention

By or under the authority of any government:

 

  (a) the management of any Material Group Company is wholly or partially displaced or the authority of any Material Group Company in the conduct of its business is wholly or partially taken over; or

 

  (b) all or a majority of the issued shares of any Material Group Company or material part of its revenues or assets is seized, nationalised, expropriated or compulsorily acquired. For the purposes of this Clause 22.12 “material part of its revenues or assets” shall in relation to the relevant Material Group Company be construed as revenues comprising not less than five per cent. (5%) of the Consolidated EBITDA or gross assets of the Group calculated mutatis mutandis in accordance with the provisions of Clause 22.9 ( Creditors’ process ) or assets which contribute not less than five per cent. (5%) towards the Consolidated EBITDA or gross assets of the Group calculated mutatis mutandis accordance with the provisions of Clause 22.9 ( Creditors’ process ), provided that neither the implementation of the MPRDA (including the Mining Charter, the revised Mining Charter, the Code of Good Practice for the Minerals Industry and the Housing and Living Condition Standard for the Mining Industry published in accordance with the MPRDA) substantially in its current form as at the date of this Agreement nor the implementation of the Mineral and Petroleum Resources Royalty Act, No. 28 of 2008, in each case substantially in its current form as at the date of this Agreement, shall constitute a seizure, nationalisation, expropriation or compulsory acquisition as contemplated by this Clause 22.12.

 

22.13 Material Adverse Effect

Any change occurs in the business, condition (financial or otherwise), operations, performance or properties of the Obligors or the Group taken as a whole since the date of the Original Financial Statements which could be reasonably likely to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

- 63 -


22.14 Cessation of Business

Any Material Group Company ceases to carry on the business which it undertakes at the date of this Agreement.

 

22.15 Litigation

Any litigation, arbitration, administrative proceedings or governmental or regulatory investigations or proceedings against any Material Group Company or its respective assets or revenues is reasonably expected to be adversely determined, and if so determined, could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

22.16 Acceleration

On and at any time after the occurrence of an Event of Default which is continuing the Agent may, and shall if so directed by the Majority Lenders, by notice to the Borrowers and the Parent:

 

  (a) cancel the Total Commitments whereupon they shall immediately be cancelled;

 

  (b) declare that all or part of the Loans, together with accrued interest, and all other amounts accrued or outstanding under the Finance Documents be immediately due and payable, whereupon they shall become immediately due and payable; and/or

 

  (c) declare that all or part of the Loans be payable on demand, whereupon they shall immediately become payable on demand by the Agent on the instructions of the Majority Lenders.

 

22.17 Remedy

 

  (a) No Event of Default under this Clause 22 ( Events of Default ) (other than those referred to in Clause 22.1 ( Non-payment ) and 22.2 ( Financial covenants )) will occur if the failure to comply or circumstance giving rise to the same is capable of remedy and is remedied by an Obligor within ten (10) days of the earlier of the Agent giving notice to the Obligors or any Obligor becoming aware of the failure to comply.

 

  (b) For the purposes of paragraph (a) above, the events or circumstances referred to in Clause 22.5 ( Cross-default ), Clause 22.6 ( Insolvency ), Clause 22.7 ( Insolvency Proceedings ), Clause 22.8 ( Failure to comply with final judgment ), Clause 22.9 ( Creditors’ process ), Clause 22.10 ( Unlawfulness ), Clause 22.11 ( Repudiation and Unenforceability ), Clause 22.12 ( Governmental Intervention ), Clause 22.13 ( Material Adverse Effect ) and Clause 22.14 ( Cessation of Business ) shall be deemed to be incapable of remedy save to the extent set out therein unless the Agent determines otherwise.

 

- 64 -


SECTION 9

CHANGES TO PARTIES

 

23. CHANGES TO THE LENDERS

 

23.1 Assignments and transfers by the Lenders

Subject to this Clause 23, a Lender (the “ Existing Lender ”) may:

 

  (a) assign any of its rights; or

 

  (b) transfer by novation any of its rights and obligations,

to another bank or financial institution or to a trust, fund or other entity which is regularly engaged in or established for the purpose of making, purchasing or investing in loans, securities or other financial assets (the “ New Lender ”).

 

23.2 Conditions of assignment or transfer

 

  (a) The consent of the Parent is required for an assignment or transfer by an Existing Lender, unless the assignment or transfer:

 

  (i) is to another Lender or an Affiliate of a Lender; or

 

  (ii) takes effect at a time when an Event of Default has occurred and is continuing.

 

  (b) The consent of the Parent to an assignment or transfer must not be unreasonably withheld or delayed. The Parent will be deemed to have given its consent five (5) Business Days after the Existing Lender has requested it unless consent is expressly refused by the Parent within that time.

 

  (c) The consent of the Parent to an assignment or transfer must not be withheld solely because the assignment or transfer may result in an increase to the Mandatory Cost.

 

  (d) An assignment will only be effective on:

 

  (i) receipt by the Agent (whether in the Assignment Agreement or otherwise) of written confirmation from the New Lender (in form and substance satisfactory to the Agent) that the New Lender will assume the same obligations to the other Finance Parties as it would have been under if it was an Original Lender; and

 

  (ii) performance by the Agent of all necessary “know your customer” or other similar checks under all applicable laws and regulations in relation to such assignment to a New Lender, the completion of which the Agent shall promptly notify to the Existing Lender and the New Lender.

 

  (e) A transfer will only be effective if the procedure set out in Clause 23.5 ( Procedure for transfer ) is complied with.

 

- 65 -


  (f) If:

 

  (i) a Lender assigns or transfers any of its rights or obligations under the Finance Documents or changes its Facility Office; and

 

  (ii) as a result of circumstances existing at the date the assignment, transfer or change occurs, an Obligor would be obliged to make a payment to the New Lender or Lender acting through its new Facility Office under Clause 12 ( Tax gross-up and indemnities ) or Clause 13 ( Increased costs ),

then the New Lender or Lender acting through its new Facility Office is only entitled to receive payment under those Clauses to the same extent as the Existing Lender or Lender acting through its previous Facility Office would have been if the assignment, transfer or change had not occurred.

 

  (g) If a Lender assigns or transfers part, but not all, of its rights and obligations under the Finance Documents, such assignment or transfer shall be in respect of such Lender’s Commitment and its participation in outstanding Loans on a pro rata basis.

 

  (h) Each New Lender, by executing the relevant Transfer Certificate or Assignment Agreement, confirms, for the avoidance of doubt, that the Agent has authority to execute on its behalf any amendment or waiver that has been approved by or on behalf of the requisite Lender or Lenders in accordance with this Agreement on or prior to the date on which the transfer or assignment becomes effective in accordance with this Agreement and that it is bound by that decision to the same extent as the Existing Lender would have been had it remained a Lender.

 

23.3 Assignment or transfer fee

The New Lender shall, on the date upon which an assignment or transfer takes effect, pay to the Agent (for its own account) a fee of three thousand dollars ($3,000), unless the Agent, in its sole discretion, agrees to waive the payment of such fee.

 

23.4 Limitation of responsibility of Existing Lenders

 

  (a) Unless expressly agreed to the contrary, an Existing Lender makes no representation or warranty and assumes no responsibility to a New Lender for:

 

  (i) the legality, validity, effectiveness, adequacy or enforceability of the Finance Documents or any other documents;

 

  (ii) the financial condition of any Obligor;

 

  (iii) the performance and observance by any Obligor of its obligations under the Finance Documents or any other documents; or

 

  (iv) the accuracy of any statements (whether written or oral) made in or in connection with any Finance Document or any other document, and any representations or warranties implied by law are excluded.

 

- 66 -


  (b) Each New Lender confirms to the Existing Lender and the other Finance Parties that it:

 

  (i) has made (and shall continue to make) its own independent investigation and assessment of the financial condition and affairs of each Obligor and its related entities in connection with its participation in this Agreement and has not relied exclusively on any information provided to it by the Existing Lender in connection with any Finance Document; and

 

  (ii) will continue to make its own independent appraisal of the creditworthiness of each Obligor and its related entities whilst any amount is or may be outstanding under the Finance Documents or any Commitment is in force.

 

  (c) Nothing in any Finance Document obliges an Existing Lender to:

 

  (i) accept a re-transfer or re-assignment from a New Lender of any of the rights and obligations assigned or transferred under this Clause 23; or

 

  (ii) support any losses directly or indirectly incurred by the New Lender by reason of the non-performance by any Obligor of its obligations under the Finance Documents or otherwise.

 

23.5 Procedure for transfer

 

  (a) Subject to the conditions set out in Clause 23.2 ( Conditions of assignment or transfer ) a transfer is effected in accordance with paragraph (c) below when the Agent executes an otherwise duly completed Transfer Certificate delivered to it by the Existing Lender and the New Lender. The Agent shall, subject to paragraph (b) below, as soon as reasonably practicable after receipt by it of a duly completed Transfer Certificate appearing on its face to comply with the terms of this Agreement and delivered in accordance with the terms of this Agreement, execute that Transfer Certificate.

 

  (b) The Agent shall only be obliged to execute a Transfer Certificate delivered to it by the Existing Lender and the New Lender once it is satisfied it has complied with all necessary “know your customer” or other similar checks under all applicable laws and regulations in relation to the transfer to such New Lender.

 

  (c) Subject to Clause 23.9 ( Pro rata interest settlement ), on the Transfer Date:

 

  (i) to the extent that in the Transfer Certificate the Existing Lender seeks to transfer by novation its rights and obligations under the Finance Documents each of the Obligors and the Existing Lender shall be released from further obligations towards one another under the Finance Documents and their respective rights against one another under the Finance Documents shall be cancelled (being the “ Discharged Rights and Obligations ”);

 

- 67 -


  (ii) each of the Obligors and the New Lender shall assume obligations towards one another and/or acquire rights against one another which differ from the Discharged Rights and Obligations only insofar as that Obligor and the New Lender have assumed and/or acquired the same in place of that Obligor and the Existing Lender;

 

  (iii) the Agent, the Arrangers, the New Lender and other Lenders shall acquire the same rights and assume the same obligations between themselves as they would have acquired and assumed had the New Lender been an Original Lender with the rights and/or obligations acquired or assumed by it as a result of the transfer and to that extent the Agent, the Arrangers and the Existing Lender shall each be released from further obligations to each other under the Finance Documents; and

 

  (iv) the New Lender shall become a Party as a “Lender”.

 

23.6 Procedure for assignment

 

  (a) Subject to the conditions set out in Clause 23.2 ( Conditions of assignment or transfer ) an assignment may be effected in accordance with paragraph (c) below when the Agent executes an otherwise duly completed Assignment Agreement delivered to it by the Existing Lender and the New Lender. The Agent shall, subject to paragraph (b) below, as soon as reasonably practicable after receipt by it of a duly completed Assignment Agreement appearing on its face to comply with the terms of this Agreement and delivered in accordance with the terms of this Agreement, execute that Assignment Agreement.

 

  (b) The Agent shall only be obliged to execute an Assignment Agreement delivered to it by the Existing Lender and the New Lender once it is satisfied it has complied with all necessary “know your customer” or other similar checks under all applicable laws and regulations in relation to the assignment to such New Lender.

 

  (c) Subject to Clause 23.9 ( Pro rata interest settlement ), on the Transfer Date:

 

  (i) the Existing Lender will assign absolutely to the New Lender the rights under the Finance Documents expressed to be the subject of the assignment in the Assignment Agreement;

 

  (ii) the Existing Lender will be released by each Obligor and the other Finance Parties from the obligations owed by it (the “ Relevant Obligations ”) and expressed to be the subject of the release in the Assignment Agreement; and

 

  (iii) the New Lender shall become a Party as a “Lender” and will be bound by obligations equivalent to the Relevant Obligations.

 

  (d)

Lenders may utilise procedures other than those set out in this Clause 23.6 to assign their rights under the Finance Documents (but not, without the consent of the relevant Obligor or unless in accordance with Clause 23.5 ( Procedure

 

- 68 -


  for transfer ), to obtain a release by that Obligor from the obligations owed to that Obligor by the Lenders nor the assumption of equivalent obligations by a New Lender) provided that they comply with the conditions set out in Clause 23.2 ( Conditions of assignment or transfer ).

 

23.7 Copy of Transfer Certificate or Assignment Agreement to Parent

The Agent shall, as soon as reasonably practicable after it has executed a Transfer Certificate or Assignment Agreement, send to the Parent a copy of that Transfer Certificate or Assignment Agreement.

 

23.8 Security over Lenders’ rights

 

  (a) In addition to the other rights provided to Lenders under this Clause 23, each Lender may without consulting with or obtaining consent from any Obligor, at any time charge, assign or otherwise create an Encumbrance in or over (whether by way of collateral or otherwise) all or any of its rights under any Finance Document to secure obligations of that Lender including, without limitation:

 

  (i) any charge, assignment or other Encumbrance to secure obligations to a federal reserve or central bank; and

 

  (ii) in the case of any Lender which is a fund, any charge, assignment or other Encumbrance granted to any holders (or trustee or representatives of holders) of obligations owed, or securities issued, by that Lender as security for those obligations or securities,

except that no such charge, assignment or Encumbrance shall:

 

  (A) release a Lender from any of its obligations under the Finance Documents or substitute the beneficiary of the relevant charge, assignment or Encumbrance for the Lender as a party to any of the Finance Documents; or

 

  (B) require any payments to be made by an Obligor other than or in excess of, or grant to any person any more extensive rights than, those required to be made or granted to the relevant Lender under the Finance Documents.

 

23.9 Pro rata interest settlement

If the Agent has notified the Lenders that it is able to distribute interest payments on a “ pro rata basis” to Existing Lenders and New Lenders then (in respect of any transfer pursuant to Clause 23.5 ( Procedure for transfer ) or any assignment pursuant to Clause 23.6 ( Procedure for assignment ) the Transfer Date of which, in each case, is after the date of such notification and is not on the last day of an Interest Period):

 

  (a)

any interest or fees in respect of the relevant participation which are expressed to accrue by reference to the lapse of time shall continue to accrue in favour of the Existing Lender up to but excluding the Transfer Date (“ Accrued Amounts ”) and shall become due and payable to the Existing Lender (without

 

- 69 -


  further interest accruing on them) on the last day of the current Interest Period (or, if the Interest Period is longer than six Months, on the next of the dates which falls at six Monthly intervals after the first day of that Interest Period); and

 

  (b) the rights assigned or transferred by the Existing Lender will not include the right to the Accrued Amounts so that, for the avoidance of doubt:

 

  (i) when the Accrued Amounts become payable, those Accrued Amounts will be payable for the account of the Existing Lender; and

 

  (ii) the amount payable to the New Lender on that date will be the amount which would, but for the application of this Clause 23.9, have been payable to it on that date, but after deduction of the Accrued Amounts.

 

24. CHANGES TO THE OBLIGORS

 

24.1 Assignment and transfer by Obligors

No Obligor may assign any of its rights or transfer any of its rights or obligations under the Finance Documents.

 

24.2 Additional Borrowers

 

  (a) Subject to compliance with the provisions of paragraphs (c) and (d) of Clause 19.8 ( “Know your customer” checks ), the Parent may request that any of its Subsidiaries become an Additional Borrower. That Subsidiary shall become an Additional Borrower if:

 

  (i) all the Lenders, acting reasonably, approve the addition of that Subsidiary;

 

  (ii) the Parent delivers to the Agent a duly completed and executed Accession Letter;

 

  (iii) the Parent confirms that no Default is continuing or would occur as a result of that Subsidiary becoming an Additional Borrower; and

 

  (iv) the Agent has received all of the documents and other evidence listed in Part II of Schedule 2 ( Conditions precedent ) in relation to that Additional Borrower, each in form and substance satisfactory to the Agent.

 

  (b) The Agent shall notify the Parent and the Lenders promptly upon being satisfied that it has received (in form and substance satisfactory to it) all the documents and other evidence listed in Part II of Schedule 2 ( Conditions precedent ).

 

24.3 Resignation of an Additional Borrower

 

  (a) The Parent may request that a Borrower (other than the Original Borrowers) ceases to be a Borrower by delivering to the Agent a Resignation Letter.

 

- 70 -


  (b) The Agent shall accept a Resignation Letter and notify the Parent and the Lenders of its acceptance if:

 

  (i) no Default is continuing or would result from the acceptance of the Resignation Letter (and the Parent has confirmed to the Agent that this is the case); and

 

  (ii) the Borrower is under no actual or contingent obligations as a Borrower under any Finance Documents,

whereupon that company shall cease to be a Borrower and shall have no further rights or obligations under the Finance Documents.

 

24.4 Additional Guarantors

 

  (a) Subject to compliance with the provisions of paragraphs (c) and (d) of Clause 19.8 ( “Know your customer” checks ), the Parent may request that any of its Subsidiaries become an Additional Guarantor. That Subsidiary shall become an Additional Guarantor if;

 

  (i) the Parent delivers to the Agent a duly completed and executed Accession Letter; and

 

  (ii) the Agent has received all of the documents and other evidence listed in Part III of Schedule 2 ( Conditions precedent ) in relation to that Additional Guarantor, each in form and substance satisfactory to the Agent.

 

  (b) The Agent shall notify the Parent and the Lenders promptly upon being satisfied that it has received (in form and substance satisfactory to it) all the documents and other evidence listed in Part III of Schedule 2 ( Conditions precedent ).

 

24.5 Repetition of Representations

Delivery of an Accession Letter constitutes confirmation by the relevant Subsidiary that the representations in Clause 18 ( Representations ) are true and correct in relation to it as at the date of delivery as if made by reference to the facts and circumstances then existing.

 

24.6 Resignation of an Additional Guarantor

 

  (a) The Parent may request that a Guarantor (other than an Original Guarantor) ceases to be a Guarantor by delivering to the Agent a Resignation Letter.

 

  (b) The Agent shall accept a Resignation Letter and notify the Parent and the Lenders of its acceptance if no Default is continuing and the Parent has confirmed to the Agent that this is the case.

 

- 71 -


SECTION 10

THE FINANCE PARTIES

 

25. ROLE OF THE AGENT AND THE ARRANGERS

 

25.1 Appointment of the Agent

 

  (a) Each other Finance Party appoints the Agent to act as its agent under and in connection with the Finance Documents.

 

  (b) Each other Finance Party authorises the Agent to exercise the rights, powers, authorities and discretions specifically given to the Agent under or in connection with the Finance Documents together with any other incidental rights, powers, authorities and discretions.

 

25.2 Duties of the Agent

 

  (a) Subject to paragraph (b) below, the Agent shall promptly forward to a Party the original or a copy of any document which is delivered to the Agent for that Party by any other Party.

 

  (b) Without prejudice to Clause 23.7 ( Copy of Transfer Certificate or Assignment Agreement to Parent ), paragraph (a) above shall not apply to any Transfer Certificate or to any Assignment Agreement.

 

  (c) Except where a Finance Document specifically provides otherwise, the Agent is not obliged to review or check the adequacy, accuracy or completeness of any document it forwards to another Party.

 

  (d) If the Agent receives notice from a Party referring to this Agreement, describing a Default and stating that the circumstance described is a Default, it shall promptly notify the other Finance Parties.

 

  (e) If the Agent is aware of the non-payment of any principal, interest, commitment fee or other fee payable to a Finance Party (other than the Agent or the Arrangers) under this Agreement it shall promptly notify the other Finance Parties.

 

  (f) The Agent’s duties under the Finance Documents are solely mechanical and administrative in nature.

 

  (g) The Agent shall provide to the Parent within five (5) Business Days of a request by the Parent (but no more frequently than once per calendar month), a list (which may be in electronic form) setting out the names of the Lenders as at the date of that request, their respective Commitments, the address and fax number (and the department or officer, if any, for whose attention any communication is to be made) of each Lender for any communication to be made or document to be delivered under or in connection with the Finance Documents, the electronic mail address and/or any other information required to enable the sending and receipt of information by electronic mail or other electronic means to and by each Lender to whom any communication under or in connection with the Finance Documents may be made by that means and the account details of each Lender for any payment to be distributed by the Agent to that Lender under the Finance Documents.

 

- 72 -


25.3 Role of the Arrangers

Except as specifically provided in the Finance Documents, the Arrangers have no obligations of any kind to any other Party under or in connection with any Finance Document.

 

25.4 No fiduciary duties

 

  (a) Nothing in this Agreement constitutes the Agent or the Arrangers as a trustee or fiduciary of any other person.

 

  (b) Neither the Agent nor the Arrangers shall be bound to account to any Lender for any sum or the profit element of any sum received by it for its own account.

 

25.5 Business with the Group

The Agent and the Arrangers may accept deposits from, lend money to and generally engage in any kind of banking or other business with any member of the Group.

 

25.6 Rights and discretions of the Agent

 

  (a) The Agent may rely on:

 

  (i) any representation, notice or document believed by it to be genuine, correct and appropriately authorised; and

 

  (ii) any statement made by a director, authorised signatory or employee of any person regarding any matters which may reasonably be assumed to be within his knowledge or within his power to verify.

 

  (b) The Agent may assume (unless it has received notice to the contrary in its capacity as agent for the Lenders) that:

 

  (i) no Default has occurred (unless it has actual knowledge of a Default arising under Clause 22.1 ( Non-payment ));

 

  (ii) any right, power, authority or discretion vested in any Party or the Majority Lenders has not been exercised; and

 

  (iii) any notice or request made by the Parent (other than a Utilisation Request) is made on behalf of and with the consent and knowledge of all the Obligors.

 

  (c) The Agent may engage, pay for and rely on the advice or services of any lawyers, accountants, surveyors or other experts.

 

  (d) The Agent may act in relation to the Finance Documents through its personnel and agents.

 

- 73 -


  (e) The Agent may disclose to any other Party any information it reasonably believes it has received as agent under this Agreement.

 

  (f) Notwithstanding any other provision of any Finance Document to the contrary, neither the Agent nor the Arrangers are obliged to do or omit to do anything if it would or might in its reasonable opinion constitute a breach of any law or regulation or a breach of a fiduciary duty or duty of confidentiality.

 

  (g) Without prejudice to the generality of paragraph (f) above, the Agent may disclose the identity of a Defaulting Lender to the other Finance Parties and the Parent and shall disclose the same upon the written request of the Parent or the Majority Lenders.

 

  (h) The Agent may not disclose to any Finance Party any details of the rate notified to the Agent by any Lender or the identity of any such Lender for the purpose of paragraph (a)(ii) of Clause 10.2 ( Market Disruption ).

 

25.7 Majority Lenders’ instructions

 

  (a) Unless a contrary indication appears in a Finance Document, the Agent shall (i) exercise any right, power, authority or discretion vested in it as Agent in accordance with any instructions given to it by the Majority Lenders (or, if so instructed by the Majority Lenders, refrain from exercising any right, power, authority or discretion vested in it as Agent) and (ii) not be liable for any act (or omission) if it acts (or refrains from taking any action) in accordance with an instruction of the Majority Lenders.

 

  (b) Unless a contrary indication appears in a Finance Document, any instructions given by the Majority Lenders will be binding on all the Finance Parties.

 

  (c) The Agent may refrain from acting in accordance with the instructions of the Majority Lenders (or, if appropriate, the Lenders) until it has received such security as it may require for any cost, loss or liability (together with any associated VAT) which it may incur in complying with the instructions.

 

  (d) In the absence of instructions from the Majority Lenders, (or, if appropriate, the Lenders) the Agent may act (or refrain from taking action) as it considers to be in the best interest of the Lenders.

 

  (e) The Agent is not authorised to act on behalf of a Lender (without first obtaining that Lender’s consent) in any legal or arbitration proceedings relating to any Finance Document.

 

25.8 Responsibility for documentation

Neither the Agent nor the Arrangers:

 

  (a) is responsible for the adequacy, accuracy and/or completeness of any information (whether oral or written) supplied by the Agent, the Arrangers, an Obligor or any other person given in or in connection with any Finance Document; or

 

- 74 -


  (b) is responsible for the legality, validity, effectiveness, adequacy or enforceability of any Finance Document or any other agreement, arrangement or document entered into, made or executed in anticipation of or in connection with any Finance Document.

 

25.9 Exclusion of liability

 

  (a) Without limiting paragraph (b) below (and without prejudice to the provisions of paragraph (e) of Clause 28.10 ( Disruption to payment systems etc ), the Agent will not be liable (including without limitation, for negligence or any other category of liability whatsoever) for any action taken by it under or in connection with any Finance Document, unless directly caused by its gross negligence or wilful misconduct.

 

  (b) No Party (other than the Agent) may take any proceedings against any officer, employee or agent of the Agent in respect of any claim it might have against the Agent or in respect of any act or omission of any kind by that officer, employee or agent in relation to any Finance Document and any officer, employee or agent of the Agent may rely on this Clause 25.9 subject to Clause 1.4 ( Third Party Rights ) and the provisions of the Third Parties Act.

 

  (c) The Agent will not be liable for any delay (or any related consequences) in crediting an account with an amount required under the Finance Documents to be paid by the Agent if the Agent has taken all necessary steps as soon as reasonably practicable to comply with the regulations or operating procedures of any recognised clearing or settlement system used by the Agent for that purpose.

 

  (d) Nothing in this Agreement shall oblige the Agent or the Arrangers to carry out any “know your customer” or other checks in relation to any person on behalf of any Lender and each Lender confirms to the Agent and the Arrangers that it is solely responsible for any such checks it is required to carry out and that it may not rely on any statement in relation to such checks made by the Agent or the Arrangers.

 

25.10 Lenders’ indemnity to the Agent

Each Lender shall (in proportion to its share of the Total Commitments or, if the Total Commitments are then zero, to its share of the Total Commitments immediately prior to their reduction to zero) indemnify the Agent, within three (3) Business Days of demand, against:

 

  (a) save as set out in (b) below, any cost, loss or liability (including, without limitation, for negligence or any other category of liability whatsoever) incurred by the Agent (otherwise than by reason of the Agent’s gross negligence or wilful misconduct)) or,

 

  (b) in the case of any cost, loss or liability pursuant to Clause 28.10 ( Disruption to Payment systems etc. ) notwithstanding the Agent’s negligence, gross negligence or any other category of liability whatsoever but not including any claim based on the fraud of the Agent, in either case, in acting as Agent under the Finance Documents

 

- 75 -


(unless, in either case, the Agent has been reimbursed by an Obligor pursuant to a Finance Document or, as the case may be, by the relevant person pursuant to Clause 28.4 ( Clawback )).

 

25.11 Resignation of the Agent

 

  (a) The Agent may resign and appoint one of its Affiliates acting through an office as successor by giving notice to the other Finance Parties and the Parent.

 

  (b) Alternatively the Agent may resign by giving notice to the other Finance Parties and the Parent, in which case the Majority Lenders (after consultation with the Parent) may appoint a successor Agent.

 

  (c) If the Majority Lenders have not appointed a successor Agent in accordance with paragraph (b) above within thirty (30) days after notice of resignation was given, the Agent (after consultation with the Parent) may appoint a successor Agent.

 

  (d) If the Agent wishes to resign because (acting reasonably) it has concluded that it is no longer appropriate for it to remain as agent and the Agent is entitled to appoint a successor Agent under paragraph (c) above, the Agent may (if it concludes (acting reasonably) that it is necessary to do so in order to persuade the proposed successor Agent to become a party to this Agreement as Agent) agree with the proposed successor Agent amendments to this Clause 25 consistent with then current market practice for the appointment and protection of corporate trustees (which shall be determined by reference to the then standard documents published by the Loan Market Association and, to the extent practicable, following consultation by the Agent with the Lenders) and those amendments will bind the Parties.

 

  (e) The retiring Agent shall, at its own cost, make available to the successor Agent such documents and records and provide such assistance as the successor Agent may reasonably request for the purposes of performing its functions as Agent under the Finance Documents.

 

  (f) The Agent’s resignation notice shall only take effect upon the appointment of a successor.

 

  (g) Upon the appointment of a successor, the retiring Agent shall be discharged from any further obligation in respect of the Finance Documents but shall remain entitled to the benefit of this Clause 25. Its successor and each of the other Parties shall have the same rights and obligations amongst themselves as they would have had if such successor had been an original Party.

 

  (h) After consultation with the Parent, the Majority Lenders may, by notice to the Agent, require it to resign in accordance with paragraph (b) above. In this event, the Agent shall resign in accordance with paragraph (b) above.

 

- 76 -


25.12 Replacement of the Agent

 

  (a) At any time the Agent is an Impaired Agent, the Majority Lenders may, by giving notice to the Agent replace the Agent by appointing a successor Agent (acting through an office in the United Kingdom).

 

  (b) The retiring Agent shall (at its own cost) make available to the successor Agent such documents and records and provide such assistance as the successor Agent may reasonable request for the purposes of performing its functions as Agent under the Finance Documents.

 

  (c) The appointment of the successor Agent shall take effect on the date specified in the notice from the Majority Lenders to the retiring Agent. As from this date, the retiring Agent shall be discharged from any further obligation in respect of the Finance Documents but shall remain entitled to the benefit of this Clause 25 (and any agency fees for the account of the retiring Agent shall cease to accrue from (and shall be payable on) that date).

 

  (d) Any successor Agent and each of the other Parties shall have the same rights and obligations amongst themselves as they would have had if such successor had been an original Party.

 

25.13 Confidentiality

 

  (a) In acting as agent for the Finance Parties, the Agent shall be regarded as acting through its agency division which shall be treated as a separate entity from any other of its divisions or departments.

 

  (b) If information is received by another division or department of the Agent, it may be treated as confidential to that division or department and the Agent shall not be deemed to have notice of it.

 

25.14 Relationship with the Lenders

 

  (a) Subject to Clause 23.9 ( Pro rata interest settlement ), the Agent may treat the person shown in its records as Lender at the opening of business (in the place of the Agent’s principal office as notified to the Finance Parties from time to time) as the Lender acting through its Facility Office:

 

  (i) entitled to or liable for any payment due under any Finance Document on that day; and

 

  (ii) entitled to receive and act upon any notice, request, document or communication or make any decision or determination under any Finance Document made or delivered on that day,

unless it has received not less than five (5) Business Days’ prior notice from that Lender to the contrary in accordance with the terms of this Agreement.

 

  (b) Each Lender shall supply the Agent with any information required by the Agent in order to calculate the Mandatory Cost in accordance with Schedule 4 ( Mandatory Cost formula ).

 

- 77 -


  (c) Any Lender may by notice to the Agent appoint a person to receive on its behalf all notices, communications, information and documents to be made or despatched to that Lender under the Finance Documents. Such notice shall contain the address, fax number and (where communication by electronic mail or other electronic means is permitted under Clause 30.6 ( Electronic communication )) electronic mail address and/or any other information required to enable the sending and receipt of information by that means (and, in each case, the department or officer, if any, for whose attention communication is to be made) and be treated as a notification of a substitute address, fax number, electronic mail address, department and officer by that Lender for the purposes of Clause 30.2 ( Addresses ) and paragraph (a)(iii) of Clause 30.6 ( Electronic communication ) and the Agent shall be entitled to treat such person as the person entitled to receive all such notices, communications, information and documents as though that person were that Lender.

 

25.15 Credit appraisal by the Lenders

Without affecting the responsibility of any Obligor for information supplied by it or on its behalf in connection with any Finance Document, each Lender confirms to the Agent and the Arrangers that it has been, and will continue to be, solely responsible for making its own independent appraisal and investigation of all risks arising under or in connection with any Finance Document including but not limited to:

 

  (a) the financial condition, status and nature of each member of the Group;

 

  (b) the legality, validity, effectiveness, adequacy or enforceability of any Finance Document and any other agreement, arrangement or document entered into, made or executed in anticipation of, under or in connection with any Finance Document;

 

  (c) whether that Lender has recourse, and the nature and extent of that recourse, against any Party or any of its respective assets under or in connection with any Finance Document, the transactions contemplated by the Finance Documents or any other agreement, arrangement or document entered into, made or executed in anticipation of, under or in connection with any Finance Document; and

 

  (d) the adequacy, accuracy and/or completeness of any information provided by the Agent, any Party or by any other person under or in connection with any Finance Document, the transactions contemplated by the Finance Documents or any other agreement, arrangement or document entered into, made or executed in anticipation of, under or in connection with any Finance Document.

 

25.16 Reference Banks

If a Reference Bank (or, if a Reference Bank is not a Lender, the Lender of which it is an Affiliate) ceases to be a Lender, the Agent shall (in consultation with the Parent) appoint another Lender or an Affiliate of a Lender to replace that Reference Bank.

 

- 78 -


25.17 Agent’s Management Time

Any amount payable to the Agent under Clause 14.3 ( Indemnity to the Agent ), Clause 16 ( Costs and expenses ) and Clause 25.10 ( Lenders’ indemnity to the Agent ) shall include the cost of utilising the Agent’s management time or other resources and will be calculated on the basis of such reasonable daily or hourly rates as the Agent may notify to the Parent and the Lenders, and is in addition to any fee paid or payable to the Agent under Clause 11 ( Fees ).

 

25.18 Deduction from amounts payable by the Agent

If any Party owes an amount to the Agent under the Finance Documents the Agent may, after giving notice to that Party, deduct an amount not exceeding that amount from any payment to that Party which the Agent would otherwise be obliged to make under the Finance Documents and apply the amount deducted in or towards satisfaction of the amount owed. For the purposes of the Finance Documents that Party shall be regarded as having received any amount so deducted.

 

25.19 Reliance and engagement letters

Each Finance Party confirms that each of the Arrangers and the Agent has authority to accept on its behalf (and ratifies the acceptance on its behalf of any letters or reports already accepted by the Arrangers or Agent) the terms of any reliance letter or engagement letters relating to any reports or letters provided by accountants in connection with the Finance Documents or the transactions contemplated in the Finance Documents and to bind it in respect of those reports or letters and to sign such letters on its behalf and further confirms that it accepts the terms and qualifications set out in such letters.

 

26. CONDUCT OF BUSINESS BY THE FINANCE PARTIES

No provision of this Agreement will:

 

  (a) interfere with the right of any Finance Party to arrange its affairs (tax or otherwise) in whatever manner it thinks fit;

 

  (b) oblige any Finance Party to investigate or claim any credit, relief, remission or repayment available to it or the extent, order and manner of any claim; or

 

  (c) oblige any Finance Party to disclose any information relating to its affairs (tax or otherwise) or any computations in respect of Tax.

 

- 79 -


27. SHARING AMONG THE FINANCE PARTIES

 

27.1 Payments to Finance Parties

If a Finance Party (a “ Recovering Finance Party ”) receives or recovers any amount from an Obligor other than in accordance with Clause 28 ( Payment mechanics ) (a “ Recovered Amount ”) and applies that amount to a payment due under the Finance Documents then:

 

  (a) the Recovering Finance Party shall, within three (3) Business Days, notify details of the receipt or recovery to the Agent;

 

  (b) the Agent shall determine whether the receipt or recovery is in excess of the amount the Recovering Finance Party would have been paid had the receipt or recovery been received or made by the Agent and distributed in accordance with Clause 28 ( Payment mechanics ), without taking account of any Tax which would be imposed on the Agent in relation to the receipt, recovery or distribution; and

 

  (c) the Recovering Finance Party shall, within three (3) Business Days of demand by the Agent, pay to the Agent an amount (the “ Sharing Payment ”) equal to such receipt or recovery less any amount which the Agent determines may be retained by the Recovering Finance Party as its share of any payment to be made, in accordance with Clause 28.6 ( Partial payments ).

 

27.2 Redistribution of payments

The Agent shall treat the Sharing Payment as if it had been paid by the relevant Obligor and distribute it between the Finance Parties (other than the Recovering Finance Party) (the “ Sharing Finance Parties ”) in accordance with Clause 28.6 ( Partial payments ) towards the obligations of that Obligor to the Sharing Finance Parties.

 

27.3 Recovering Finance Party’s rights

On a distribution by the Agent under Clause 27.2 ( Redistribution of payments ) of a payment received by a Recovering Finance Party from an Obligor, as between the relevant Obligor and the Recovering Finance Party, an amount of the Recovered Amount equal to the Sharing Payment will be treated as not having been paid by that Obligor.

 

27.4 Reversal of redistribution

If any part of the Sharing Payment received or recovered by a Recovering Finance Party becomes repayable and is repaid by that Recovering Finance Party, then:

 

  (a) each Sharing Finance Party shall, upon request of the Agent, pay to the Agent for the account of that Recovering Finance Party an amount equal to the appropriate part of its share of the Sharing Payment (together with an amount as is necessary to reimburse that Recovering Finance Party for its proportion of any interest on the Sharing Payment which that Recovering Finance Party is required to pay) (the “ Redistributed Amount ”); and

 

- 80 -


  (b) as between the relevant Obligor and each relevant Sharing Finance Party, an amount equal to the relevant Redistributed Amount will be treated as not having been paid by that Obligor.

 

27.5 Exceptions

 

  (a) This Clause 27 shall not apply to the extent that the Recovering Finance Party would not, after making any payment pursuant to this Clause 27, have a valid and enforceable claim against the relevant Obligor.

 

  (b) A Recovering Finance Party is not obliged to share with any other Finance Party any amount which the Recovering Finance Party has received or recovered as a result of taking legal or arbitration proceedings, if:

 

  (i) it notified that other Finance Party of the legal or arbitration proceedings; and

 

  (ii) that other Finance Party had an opportunity to participate in those legal or arbitration proceedings but did not do so as soon as reasonably practicable having received notice and did not take separate legal or arbitration proceedings.

 

- 81 -


SECTION 11

ADMINISTRATION

 

28. PAYMENT MECHANICS

 

28.1 Payments to the Agent

 

  (a) On each date on which an Obligor or a Lender is required to make a payment under a Finance Document, that Obligor or Lender shall make the same available to the Agent (unless a contrary indication appears in a Finance Document) for value on the due date at the time and in such funds specified by the Agent as being customary at the time for settlement of transactions in the relevant currency in the place of payment.

 

  (b) Payment shall be made to such account in the principal financial centre of the country of that currency with such bank as the Agent specifies.

 

28.2 Distributions by the Agent

Each payment received by the Agent under the Finance Documents for another Party shall, subject to Clause 28.3 ( Distributions to an Obligor ), Clause 28.4 ( Clawback ) and Clause 25.18 ( Deduction from amounts payable by the Agent ) be made available by the Agent as soon as practicable after receipt to the Party entitled to receive payment in accordance with this Agreement (in the case of a Lender, for the account of its Facility Office), to such account as that Party may notify to the Agent by not less than five (5) Business Days’ notice with a bank in the principal financial centre of the country of that currency.

 

28.3 Distributions to an Obligor

The Agent may (with the consent of the Obligor or in accordance with Clause 29 ( Set-off )) apply any amount received by it for that Obligor in or towards payment (on the date and in the currency and funds of receipt) of any amount due from that Obligor under the Finance Documents or in or towards purchase of any amount of any currency to be so applied.

 

28.4 Clawback

 

  (a) Where a sum is to be paid to the Agent under the Finance Documents for another Party, the Agent is not obliged to pay that sum to that other Party (or to enter into or perform any related exchange contract) until it has been able to establish to its satisfaction that it has actually received that sum.

 

  (b) If the Agent pays an amount to another Party and it proves to be the case that the Agent had not actually received that amount, then (i) the Party to whom that amount (or the proceeds of any related exchange contract) was paid by the Agent shall on demand refund the same to the Agent and (ii) the person by whom that sum should have been made available or, if that person fails to do so the person to whom that sum was made available, shall on request pay to the Agent the amount (as certified by the Agent) which will indemnify the Agent against any funding cost incurred by it as a result of paying out that sum before receiving it.

 

- 82 -


28.5 Impaired Agent

 

  (a) If, at any time, the Agent becomes an Impaired Agent, an Obligor or a Lender which is required to make a payment under the Finance Documents to the Agent in accordance with Clause 28.1 ( Payments to the Agent ) may instead either pay that amount direct to the required recipient or pay that amount to an interest-bearing account held with a bank or financial institution which has a rating for its long-term unsecured and non credit-enhanced debt obligations of A- or higher by Standard & Poor’s Rating Services or Fitch Ratings Ltd or A3 or higher by Moody’s Investor Services Limited or a comparable rating from an internationally recognised credit rating agency and in relation to which no Insolvency Event has occurred and is continuing, in the name of the Obligor or the Lender making the payment and designated as a trust account for the benefit of the Party or Parties beneficially entitled to that payment under the Finance Documents. In each case such payments must be made on the due date for payment under the Finance Documents.

 

  (b) All interest accrued on the amount standing to the credit of the trust account shall be for the benefit of the beneficiaries of that trust account pro rata to their respective entitlements.

 

  (c) A Party which has made a payment in accordance with this Clause 28.5 shall be discharged of the relevant payment obligation under the Finance Documents and shall not take any credit risk with respect to the amounts standing to the credit of the trust account.

 

  (d) Promptly upon the appointment of a successor Agent in accordance with Clause 25.12 ( Replacement of the Agent ), each Party which has made a payment to a trust account in accordance with this Clause 28.5 shall give all requisite instructions to the bank with whom the trust account is held to transfer the amount (together with any accrued interest) to the successor Agent for distribution in accordance with Clause 28.2 ( Distributions by the Agent ).

 

28.6 Partial payments

 

  (a) If the Agent receives a payment that is insufficient to discharge all the amounts then due and payable by an Obligor under the Finance Documents, the Agent shall apply that payment towards the obligations of that Obligor under the Finance Documents in the following order:

 

  (i) first , in or towards payment pro rata of any unpaid fees, costs and expenses of the Agent and the Arrangers under the Finance Documents;

 

  (ii) secondly , in or towards payment pro rata of any accrued interest, fee or commission due but unpaid under this Agreement;

 

  (iii) thirdly , in or towards payment pro rata of any principal due but unpaid under this Agreement; and

 

- 83 -


  (iv) fourthly , in or towards payment pro rata of any other sum due but unpaid under the Finance Documents.

 

  (b) The Agent shall, if so directed by the Majority Lenders, vary the order set out in paragraphs (a)(ii) to (iv) above.

 

  (c) Paragraphs (a) and (b) above will override any appropriation made by an Obligor.

 

28.7 No set-off by Obligors

All payments to be made by an Obligor under the Finance Documents shall be calculated and be made without (and free and clear of any deduction for) set-off or counterclaim.

 

28.8 Business Days

 

  (a) Any payment which is due to be made on a day that is not a Business Day shall be made on the next Business Day in the same calendar month (if there is one) or the preceding Business Day (if there is not).

 

  (b) During any extension of the due date for payment of any principal or Unpaid Sum under this Agreement interest is payable on the principal or Unpaid Sum at the rate payable on the original due date.

 

28.9 Currency of account

 

  (a) Subject to paragraphs (b) and (c) below, dollars is the currency of account and payment for any sum due from an Obligor under any Finance Document.

 

  (b) Each payment in respect of costs, expenses or Taxes shall be made in the currency in which the costs, expenses or Taxes are incurred.

 

  (c) Any amount expressed to be payable in a currency other than dollars shall be paid in that other currency.

 

28.10 Disruption to payment systems etc.

If either the Agent determines (in its discretion) that a Disruption Event has occurred or the Agent is notified by the Parent that a Disruption Event has occurred:

 

  (a) the Agent may, and shall if requested to do so by the Parent, consult with the Parent with a view to agreeing with the Parent such changes to the operation or administration of the Facility as the Agent may deem necessary in the circumstances;

 

  (b) the Agent shall not be obliged to consult with the Parent in relation to any changes mentioned in paragraph (a) if, in its opinion, it is not practicable to do so in the circumstances and, in any event, shall have no obligation to agree to such changes;

 

- 84 -


  (c) the Agent may consult with the Finance Parties in relation to any changes mentioned in paragraph (a) but shall not be obliged to do so if, in its opinion, it is not practicable to do so in the circumstances;

 

  (d) any such changes agreed upon by the Agent and the Parent shall (whether or not it is finally determined that a Disruption Event has occurred) be binding upon the Parties as an amendment to (or, as the case may be, waiver of) the terms of the Finance Documents notwithstanding the provisions of Clause 34 ( Amendments and Waivers );

 

  (e) the Agent shall not be liable for any damages, costs or losses whatsoever (including, without limitation for negligence, gross negligence or any other category of liability whatsoever but not including any claim based on the fraud of the Agent) arising as a result of its taking, or failing to take, any actions pursuant to or in connection with this Clause 28.10; and

 

  (f) the Agent shall notify the Finance Parties of all changes agreed pursuant to paragraph (d) above.

 

28.11 Change of currency

 

  (a) Unless otherwise prohibited by law, if more than one currency or currency unit are at the same time recognised by the central bank of any country as the lawful currency of that country, then:

 

  (i) any reference in the Finance Documents to, and any obligations arising under the Finance Documents in, the currency of that country shall be translated into, or paid in, the currency or currency unit of that country designated by the Agent (after consultation with the Parent); and

 

  (ii) any translation from one currency or currency unit to another shall be at the official rate of exchange recognised by the central bank for the conversion of that currency or currency unit into the other, rounded up or down by the Agent (acting reasonably).

 

  (b) If a change in any currency of a country occurs, this Agreement will, to the extent the Agent (acting reasonably and after consultation with the Parent) specifies to be necessary, be amended to comply with any generally accepted conventions and market practice in the Relevant Interbank Market and otherwise to reflect the change in currency.

 

29. SET-OFF

A Finance Party may set off any matured obligation due from an Obligor under the Finance Documents (to the extent beneficially owned by that Finance Party) against any matured obligation owed by that Finance Party to that Obligor, regardless of the place of payment, booking branch or currency of either obligation. If the obligations are in different currencies, the Finance Party may convert either obligation at a market rate of exchange in its usual course of business for the purpose of the set-off.

 

- 85 -


30. NOTICES

 

30.1 Communications in writing

Any communication to be made under or in connection with the Finance Documents shall be made in writing and, unless otherwise stated, may be made by fax or letter.

 

30.2 Addresses

The address and fax number (and the department or officer, if any, for whose attention the communication is to be made) of each Party for any communication or document to be made or delivered under or in connection with the Finance Documents is:

 

  (a) in the case of the Parent, that identified with its name below;

 

  (b) in the case of each Lender or any other Obligor, that notified in writing to the Agent on or prior to the date on which it becomes a Party; and

 

  (c) in the case of the Agent, that identified with its name below,

or any substitute address or fax number or department or officer as the Party may notify to the Agent (or the Agent may notify to the other Parties, if a change is made by the Agent) by not less than five (5) Business Days’ notice.

 

30.3 Delivery

 

  (a) Any communication or document made or delivered by one person to another under or in connection with the Finance Documents will only be effective:

 

  (i) if by way of fax, when received in legible form; or

 

  (ii) if by way of letter, when it has been left at the relevant address or five (5) Business Days after being deposited in the post postage prepaid in an envelope addressed to it at that address,

and, if a particular department or officer is specified as part of its address details provided under Clause 30.2 ( Addresses ), if addressed to that department or officer.

 

  (b) Any communication or document to be made or delivered to the Agent will be effective only when actually received by the Agent and then only if it is expressly marked for the attention of the department or officer identified with the Agent’s signature below (or any substitute department or officer as the Agent shall specify for this purpose).

 

  (c) All notices from or to an Obligor shall be sent through the Agent.

 

  (d) Any communication or document made or delivered to the Parent in accordance with this Clause will be deemed to have been made or delivered to each of the Obligors.

 

- 86 -


30.4 Notification of address and fax number

Promptly upon receipt of notification of an address and fax number or change of address or fax number pursuant to Clause 30.2 ( Addresses ) or changing its own address or fax number, the Agent shall notify the other Parties.

 

30.5 Communication when Agent is Impaired Agent

If the Agent is an Impaired Agent the Parties may, instead of communicating with each other through the Agent, communicate with each other directly and (while the Agent is an Impaired Agent) all the provisions of the Finance Documents which require communications to be made or notices to be given to or by the Agent shall be varied so that communications may be made and notices given to or by the relevant Parties directly. This provision shall not operate after a replacement Agent has been appointed.

 

30.6 Electronic communication

 

  (a) Any communication to be made between the Agent and a Lender under or in connection with the Finance Documents may be made by electronic mail or other electronic means, if the Agent and the relevant Lender:

 

  (i) agree that, unless and until notified to the contrary, this is to be an accepted form of communication;

 

  (ii) notify each other in writing of their electronic mail address and/or any other information required to enable the sending and receipt of information by that means; and

 

  (iii) notify each other of any change to their address or any other such information supplied by them.

 

  (b) Any electronic communication made between the Agent and a Lender will be effective only when actually received in readable form and in the case of any electronic communication made by a Lender to the Agent only if it is addressed in such a manner as the Agent shall specify for this purpose.

 

30.7 English language

 

  (a) Any notice given under or in connection with any Finance Document must be in English.

 

  (b) All other documents provided under or in connection with any Finance Document must be:

 

  (i) in English; or

 

  (ii) if not in English, and if so required by the Agent, accompanied by a certified English translation and, in this case, the English translation will prevail unless the document is a constitutional, statutory or other official document.

 

- 87 -


30.8 Obligor agent

 

  (a) Each Obligor (other than the Parent) by its execution of this Agreement or an Accession Letter (as the case may be) irrevocably appoints the Parent to act on its behalf as its agent in relation to the Finance Documents and irrevocably authorises:

 

  (i) the Parent on its behalf to supply all information concerning itself contemplated by this Agreement to the Finance Parties and to give all notices and instructions (including, in the case of a Borrower, Utilisation Requests), to execute on its behalf any documents required hereunder and to make such agreements capable of being given, made or effected by any Obligor notwithstanding that they may affect the Obligor, without further reference to or the consent of that Obligor; and

 

  (ii) each Finance Party to give any notice, demand or other communication to that Obligor pursuant to the Finance Documents to the Parent on its behalf,

and in each case the Obligor shall be bound as though the Obligor itself had given the notices and instructions (including, without limitation, any Utilisation Requests) or executed or made such agreements or received the relevant notice, demand or other communication.

 

  (b) Every act, agreement, undertaking, settlement, waiver, notice or other communication given or made by the Parent or given to the Parent under any Finance Document on behalf of another Obligor or in connection with any Finance Document (whether or not known to any other Obligor and whether occurring before or after such other Obligor became an Obligor under any Finance Document) shall be binding for all purposes on that Obligor as if that Obligor had expressly made, given or concurred with it. In the event of any conflict between any notices or other communications of the Parent and any other Obligor, those of the Parent shall prevail.

 

31. CALCULATIONS AND CERTIFICATES

 

31.1 Accounts

In any litigation or arbitration proceedings arising out of or in connection with a Finance Document, the entries made in the accounts maintained by a Finance Party are prima facie evidence of the matters to which they relate.

 

31.2 Certificates and Determinations

Any certification or determination by a Finance Party of a rate or amount under any Finance Document is, in the absence of manifest error, conclusive evidence of the matters to which it relates.

 

- 88 -


31.3 Day count convention

Any interest, commission or fee accruing under a Finance Document will accrue from day to day and is calculated on the basis of the actual number of days elapsed and a year of three hundred and sixty (360) days or, in any case where the practice in the Relevant Interbank Market differs, in accordance with that market practice.

 

32. PARTIAL INVALIDITY

If, at any time, any provision of the Finance Documents is or becomes illegal, invalid or unenforceable in any respect under any law of any jurisdiction, neither the legality, validity or enforceability of the remaining provisions nor the legality, validity or enforceability of such provision under the law of any other jurisdiction will in any way be affected or impaired.

 

33. REMEDIES AND WAIVERS

No failure to exercise, nor any delay in exercising, on the part of any Finance Party, any right or remedy under the Finance Documents shall operate as a waiver, nor shall any single or partial exercise of any right or remedy prevent any further or other exercise or the exercise of any other right or remedy. The rights and remedies provided in this Agreement are cumulative and not exclusive of any rights or remedies provided by law.

 

34. AMENDMENTS AND WAIVERS

 

34.1 Required consents

 

  (a) Subject to Clause 34.2 ( Exceptions ) any term of the Finance Documents may be amended or waived only with the consent of the Majority Lenders and the Parent and any such amendment or waiver will be binding on all Parties.

 

  (b) The Agent may effect, on behalf of any Finance Party, any amendment or waiver permitted by this Clause 34.

 

34.2 Exceptions

 

  (a) An amendment or waiver that has the effect of changing or which relates to:

 

  (i) the definition of “Majority Lenders” in Clause 1.1 ( Definitions );

 

  (ii) an extension to the date of payment of any amount under the Finance Documents;

 

  (iii) a reduction in the Margin or a reduction in the amount of any payment of principal, interest, fees or commission payable;

 

  (iv) an increase in or an extension of any Commitment;

 

  (v) a change to the Borrowers or Guarantors (other than in accordance with Clause 24 ( Changes to the Obligors ));

 

- 89 -


  (vi) any provision which expressly requires the consent of all the Lenders; or

 

  (vii) Clause 2.2 ( Finance Parties’ rights and obligations ), Clause 17 ( Guarantee and Indemnity ), Clause 23 ( Changes to the Lenders ) or this Clause 34,

shall not be made without the prior consent of all the Lenders.

 

  (b) An amendment or waiver which relates to the rights or obligations of the Agent or the Arrangers may not be effected without the consent of the Agent or the Arrangers.

 

34.3 Disenfranchisement of Defaulting Lenders

 

  (a) For so long as a Defaulting Lender has any Available Commitment, in ascertaining the Majority Lenders or whether any given percentage (including, for the avoidance of doubt, unanimity) of the Total Commitments has been obtained to approve any request for a consent, waiver, amendment or other vote under the Finance Documents, that Defaulting Lender’s Commitments will be reduced by the amount of its Available Commitments.

 

  (b) For the purposes of this Clause 34.3, the Agent may assume that the following Lenders are Defaulting Lenders:

 

  (i) any Lender which has notified the Agent that it has become a Defaulting Lender;

 

  (ii) any Lender in relation to which it is aware that any of the events or circumstances referred to in paragraphs (a), (b) or (c) of the definition of “Defaulting Lender” has occurred,

unless it has received notice to the contrary from the Lender concerned (together with any supporting evidence reasonably requested by the Agent) or the Agent is otherwise aware that the Lender has ceased to be a Defaulting Lender.

 

34.4 Replacement of a Defaulting Lender

 

  (a) The Parent may, at any time a Lender has become and continues to be a Defaulting Lender, by giving five (5) Business Days’ prior written notice to the Agent and such Lender:

 

  (i) replace such Lender by requiring such Lender to (and such Lender shall) transfer pursuant to Clause 23 ( Changes to the Lenders ) all (and not part only) of its rights and obligations under this Agreement; or

 

  (ii) require such Lender to (and such Lender shall) transfer pursuant to Clause 23 ( Changes to the Lenders ) all (and not part only) of the undrawn Commitment of the Lender,

 

- 90 -


to a Lender or other bank, financial institution, trust, fund or other entity (a “ Replacement Lender ”) selected by the Parent, and which (unless the Agent is an Impaired Agent) is acceptable to the Agent (acting reasonably), which confirms its willingness to assume and does assume all the obligations or all the relevant obligations of the transferring Lender (including the assumption of the transferring Lender’s participations or unfunded participations (as the case may be) on the same basis as the transferring Lender), for a purchase price in cash payable at the time of the transfer equal to the outstanding principal amount of such Lender’s participation in the outstanding Utilisations and all accrued interest (subject to any notice having been given by the Agent under Clause 23.9 ( Pro rata interest settlement )), Break Costs and other amounts payable in relation thereto under the Finance Documents.

 

  (b) Any transfer of rights and obligations of a Defaulting Lender pursuant to this Clause shall be subject to the following conditions:

 

  (i) the Parent shall have no right to replace the Agent;

 

  (ii) neither the Agent nor the Defaulting Lender shall have any obligation to the Parent to find a Replacement Lender;

 

  (iii) the transfer must take place no later than five (5) days after the notice referred to in paragraph (a) above; and

 

  (iv) in no event shall the Defaulting Lender be required to pay or surrender to the Replacement Lender any of the fees received by the Defaulting Lender pursuant to the Finance Documents.

 

35. CONFIDENTIALITY

 

35.1 Confidential Information

Each Finance Party agrees to keep all Confidential Information confidential and not to disclose it to anyone, save to the extent permitted by Clause 35.2 ( Disclosure of Confidential Information ) and Clause 35.3 ( Disclosure to numbering service providers ), and to ensure that all Confidential Information is protected with security measures and a degree of care that would apply to its own confidential information.

 

35.2 Disclosure of Confidential Information

Any Finance Party may disclose:

 

  (a) to any of its Affiliates and Related Funds and any of its or their officers, directors, employees, professional advisers, auditors, partners and Representatives such Confidential Information as that Finance Party shall consider appropriate if any person to whom the Confidential Information is to be given pursuant to this paragraph (a) is informed in writing of its confidential nature and that some or all of such Confidential Information may be price-sensitive information except that there shall be no such requirement to so inform if the recipient is subject to professional obligations to maintain the confidentiality of the information or is otherwise bound by requirements of confidentiality in relation to the Confidential Information;

 

- 91 -


  (b) to any person:

 

  (i) to (or through) whom it assigns or transfers (or may potentially assign or transfer) all or any of its rights and/or obligations under one or more Finance Documents and to any of that person’s Affiliates, Related Funds, Representatives and professional advisers;

 

  (ii) with (or through) whom it enters into (or may potentially enter into), whether directly or indirectly, any sub-participation in relation to, or any other transaction under which payments are to be made or may be made by reference to, one or more Finance Documents and/or one or more Obligors and to any of that person’s Affiliates, Related Funds, Representatives and professional advisers;

 

  (iii) appointed by any Finance Party or by a person to whom paragraph (b)(i) or (ii) above applies to receive communications, notices, information or documents delivered pursuant to the Finance Documents on its behalf (including, without limitation, any person appointed under paragraph (c) of Clause 25.14 ( Relationship with the Lenders ));

 

  (iv) who invests in or otherwise finances (or may potentially invest in or otherwise finance), directly or indirectly, any transaction referred to in paragraph (b)(i) or (b)(ii) above;

 

  (v) to whom information is required or requested to be disclosed by any court of competent jurisdiction or any governmental, banking, taxation or other regulatory authority or similar body, the rules of any relevant stock exchange or pursuant to any applicable law or regulation;

 

  (vi) to whom or for whose benefit that Finance Party charges, assigns or otherwise creates any Encumbrance (or may do so) pursuant to Clause 23.8 ( Security over Lenders’ rights );

 

  (vii) to whom information is required to be disclosed in connection with, and for the purposes of, any litigation, arbitration, administrative or other investigations, proceedings or disputes;

 

  (viii) who is a Party; or

 

  (ix) with the consent of the Parent;

in each case, such Confidential Information as that Finance Party shall consider appropriate if:

 

  (A) in relation to paragraphs (b)(i), (b)(ii) and b(iii) above, the person to whom the Confidential Information is to be given has entered into a Confidentiality Undertaking except that there shall be no requirement for a Confidentiality Undertaking if the recipient is a professional adviser and is subject to professional obligations to maintain the confidentiality of the Confidential Information;

 

- 92 -


  (B) in relation to paragraph (b)(iv) above, the person to whom the Confidential Information is to be given has entered into a Confidentiality Undertaking or is otherwise bound by requirements of confidentiality in relation to the Confidential Information they receive and is informed that some or all of such Confidential Information may be price-sensitive information;

 

  (C) in relation to paragraphs (b)(v), (b)(vi) and (b)(vii) above, the person to whom the Confidential Information is to be given is informed of its confidential nature and that some or all of such Confidential Information may be price-sensitive information except that there shall be no requirement to so inform if, in the opinion of that Finance Party, it is not practicable so to do in the circumstances;

 

  (c) to any person appointed by that Finance Party or by a person to whom paragraph (b)(i) or (b)(ii) above applies to provide administration or settlement services in respect of one or more of the Finance Documents including without limitation, in relation to the trading of participations in respect of the Finance Documents, such Confidential Information as may be required to be disclosed to enable such service provider to provide any of the services referred to in this paragraph (c) if the service provider to whom the Confidential Information is to be given has entered into a confidentiality agreement substantially in the form of the LMA Master Confidentiality Undertaking for Use With Administration/Settlement Service Providers or such other form of confidentiality undertaking agreed between the Parent and the relevant Finance Party;

 

  (d) to any rating agency (including its professional advisers) such Confidential Information as may be required to be disclosed to enable such rating agency to carry out its normal rating activities in relation to the Finance Documents and/or the Obligors.

 

35.3 Disclosure to numbering service providers

 

  (a) Any Finance Party may disclose to any national or international numbering service provider appointed by that Finance Party to provide identification numbering services in respect of this Agreement, the Facility and/or one or more Obligors the following information:

 

  (i) names of Obligors;

 

  (ii) country of domicile of Obligors;

 

  (iii) place of incorporation of Obligors;

 

  (iv) date of this Agreement;

 

  (v) the names of the Agent and the Arrangers;

 

  (vi) date of each amendment and restatement of this Agreement;

 

- 93 -


  (vii) amount of Total Commitments;

 

  (viii) currency of the Facility;

 

  (ix) type of Facility;

 

  (x) ranking of Facility;

 

  (xi) Termination Date for Facility;

 

  (xii) changes to any of the information previously supplied pursuant to paragraphs (i) to (xi) above; and

 

  (xiii) such other information agreed between such Finance Party and the Parent,

to enable such numbering service provider to provide its usual syndicated loan numbering identification services.

 

  (b) The Parties acknowledge and agree that each identification number assigned to this Agreement, the Facility and/or one or more Obligors by a numbering service provider and the information associated with each such number may be disclosed to users of its services in accordance with the standard terms and conditions of that numbering service provider.

 

  (c) Each Obligor represents that none of the information set out in paragraphs (i) to (xiii) of paragraph (a) above is, nor will at any time be, unpublished price-sensitive information.

 

  (d) The Agent shall notify the Parent and the other Finance Parties of:

 

  (i) the name of any numbering service provider appointed by the Agent in respect of this Agreement, the Facility and/or one or more Obligors; and

 

  (ii) the number or, as the case may be, numbers assigned to this Agreement, the Facility and/or one or more Obligors by such numbering service provider.

 

35.4 Entire agreement

This Clause 35 constitutes the entire agreement between the Parties in relation to the obligations of the Finance Parties under the Finance Documents regarding Confidential Information and supersedes any previous agreement, whether express or implied, regarding Confidential Information.

 

35.5 Inside Information

Each of the Finance Parties acknowledges that some or all of the Confidential Information is or may be price-sensitive information and that the use of such information may be regulated or prohibited by applicable legislation including securities law relating to insider dealing and market abuse and each of the Finance Parties undertakes not to use any Confidential Information for any unlawful purpose.

 

- 94 -


35.6 Notification of disclosure

Each of the Finance Parties agrees (to the extent permitted by law and regulation) to inform the Parent:

 

  (a) of the circumstances of any disclosure of Confidential Information made pursuant to paragraph (b)(v) of Clause 35.2 ( Disclosure of Confidential Information ) except where such disclosure is made to any of the persons referred to in that paragraph during the ordinary course of its supervisory or regulatory function; and

 

  (b) upon becoming aware that Confidential Information has been disclosed in breach of this Clause 35.

 

35.7 Continuing obligations

The obligations in this Clause 35 are continuing and, in particular, shall survive and remain binding on each Finance Party for a period of twelve months from the earlier of:

 

  (a) the date on which all amounts payable by the Obligors under or in connection with this Agreement have been paid in full and all Commitments have been cancelled or otherwise cease to be available; and

 

  (b) the date on which such Finance Party otherwise ceases to be a Finance Party.

 

36. COUNTERPARTS

Each Finance Document may be executed in any number of counterparts, and this has the same effect as if the signatures on the counterparts were on a single copy of the Finance Document.

 

- 95 -


SECTION 12

GOVERNING LAW AND ENFORCEMENT

 

37. GOVERNING LAW

This Agreement and any non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with it are governed by English law.

 

38. ENFORCEMENT

 

38.1 Jurisdiction

 

  (a) The courts of England have exclusive jurisdiction to settle any dispute arising out of or in connection with this Agreement (including a dispute regarding the existence, validity or termination of this Agreement or any non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with it) (a “ Dispute ”).

 

  (b) The Parties agree that the courts of England are the most appropriate and convenient courts to settle Disputes and accordingly no Party will argue to the contrary.

 

  (c) This Clause 38.1 is for the benefit of the Finance Parties only. As a result, no Finance Party shall be prevented from taking proceedings relating to a Dispute in any other courts with jurisdiction. To the extent allowed by law, the Finance Parties may take concurrent proceedings in any number of jurisdictions.

 

38.2 Service of process

Without prejudice to any other mode of service allowed under any relevant law, each Obligor (other than an Obligor incorporated in England and Wales):

 

  (a) irrevocably appoints Law Debenture Corporate Services Limited as its agent for service of process (in the case of an Obligor incorporated in South Africa, domicilium citandi et executandi ) in relation to any proceedings before the English courts in connection with any Finance Document; and

 

  (b) agrees that failure by an agent for service of process to notify the relevant Obligor of the process will not invalidate the proceedings concerned.

This Agreement has been entered into on the date stated at the beginning of this Agreement.

 

- 96 -


SCHEDULE 1

THE ORIGINAL PARTIES

PART I

THE OBLIGORS

 

Name of Original Borrowers

   Registration number (or
equivalent, if any)

GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, incorporated in South Africa

   2002/031431/07

Gold Fields Operations Limited, incorporated in South Africa

   1959/003209/06

Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited, incorporated in the British Virgin Islands

   184982

Name of Original Guarantors

   Registration number (or
equivalent, if any)

GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, incorporated in South Africa

   2002/031431/07

Gold Fields Limited, incorporated in South Africa

   1968/004880/06

Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited, incorporated in the British Virgin Islands

   651406

Gold Fields Operations Limited, incorporated in South Africa

   1959/003209/06

Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited, incorporated in the British Virgin Islands

   184982

Newshelf 899 (Proprietary) Limited, incorporated in South Africa

   2007/019941/07

 

- 97 -


PART II

THE ARRANGERS

Name of Arranger

The Bank of Tokyo-Mitsubishi UFJ, Ltd.

Commonwealth Bank of Australia

Absa Capital, a division of Absa Bank Limited.

Australia and New Zealand Banking Group Limited

Bank of China Limited

Bank of Montreal Ireland plc.

Credit Suisse AG, London Branch

HSBC Bank plc

JPMorgan Chase Bank, N.A, London Branch

Scotiabank (Ireland) Limited

Westpac Banking Corporation (acting through its Offshore Banking Unit)

China Construction Bank Corporation, Johannesburg Branch

 

- 98 -


PART III

THE ORIGINAL LENDERS

 

Name of Original Lender

   Commitment (US$)  

The Bank of Tokyo-Mitsubishi UFJ, Ltd.

     42,500,000   

Commonwealth Bank of Australia

     42,500,000   

Absa Capital, a division of Absa Bank Limited.

     41,500,000   

Australia and New Zealand Banking Group Limited

     41,500,000   

Bank of China Limited

     41,500,000   

Bank of Montreal Ireland plc.

     41,500,000   

Credit Suisse AG, London Branch

     41,500,000   

HSBC Bank plc

     41,500,000   

JPMorgan Chase Bank, N.A, London Branch

     41,500,000   

Scotiabank (Ireland) Limited

     41,500,000   

Westpac Banking Corporation (acting through its Offshore Banking Unit)

     41,500,000   

China Construction Bank Corporation, Johannesburg Branch

     41,500,000   
  

 

 

 
   $ 500,000,000   
  

 

 

 

 

- 99 -


SCHEDULE 2

CONDITIONS PRECEDENT

PART I

CONDITIONS PRECEDENT TO INITIAL UTILISATION

 

1. Obligors

 

  (a) A copy of the Constitutional Documents of each Obligor.

 

  (b) A copy of a good standing certificate with respect to Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited and Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited, issued as of a recent date by the Registrar of Corporate Affairs in the British Virgin Islands.

 

  (c) A copy of a resolution of the board of directors (and, if necessary under the laws of its jurisdiction of incorporation, the shareholders) of each Obligor:

 

  (i) approving the terms of, and the transactions contemplated by, the Finance Documents to which it is a party and resolving that it execute the Finance Documents to which it is a party;

 

  (ii) authorising a specified person or persons to execute the Finance Documents to which it is a party on its behalf; and

 

  (iii) authorising a specified person or persons, on its behalf, to sign and/or dispatch all documents and notices (including, if relevant, any Utilisation Request) to be signed and/or dispatched by it under or in connection with the Finance Documents to which it is a party.

 

  (d) A specimen of the signature of each person authorised by the resolution referred to in paragraph (c) above.

 

  (e) A certificate of incumbency from the registered agent for Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited and Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited.

 

  (f) A copy of the resolution of the shareholders of Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited, Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited approving the relevant resolutions of the board of directors and the transactions contemplated thereby.

 

  (g) A certificate of the Obligors (signed by a director) confirming that borrowing or guaranteeing, as appropriate, the Total Commitments and any and all accrued interest would not cause any borrowing, guaranteeing or similar limit binding on any Obligor to be exceeded and that in respect of each Obligor to whom the Companies Act 2008 of South Africa applies the requirements of Section 45 of such Act has been complied with and each certificate shall have annexed to it the copies of the relevant resolutions, notices and statements.

 

  (h) A certificate of an authorised signatory of the relevant Obligor certifying that each copy document relating to it specified in this Part I of Schedule 2 is correct, complete and in full force and effect as at a date no earlier than the date of this Agreement.

 

- 100 -


2. Legal opinions

 

  (a) A legal opinion of Clifford Chance LLP legal advisers to the Arrangers and the Agent in England, substantially in the form distributed to the Original Lenders prior to signing this Agreement.

 

  (b) A legal opinion of Conyers Dill & Pearman, legal advisers to the Arrangers and Agent in the British Virgin Islands, substantially in the form distributed to the Original Lenders prior to signing this Agreement.

 

  (c) A legal opinion of Edward Nathan Sonnenbergs, legal advisers to the Arrangers and Agent in South Africa, substantially in the form distributed to the Original Lenders prior to signing this Agreement.

 

3. Other documents and evidence

 

  (a) Evidence that any agent for service of process referred to in Clause 38.2 ( Service of process ) has accepted its appointment.

 

  (b) The Original Financial Statements together with the latest audited financial statements of Gold Fields Limited.

 

  (c) Evidence that the fees, costs and expenses then due from the Parent pursuant to Clause 11 ( Fees ) and Clause 16 ( Costs and expenses ) have been paid or will be paid by the initial Utilisation Date.

 

  (d) A copy of the approval of the Financial Surveillance Department of the South African Reserve Bank confirming that Gold Fields Limited, GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited and Gold Fields Operations Limited may enter into and provide the guarantee as contemplated by this Agreement and that the Original Borrowers may enter into and implement the provisions of this Agreement. If such approval is granted conditionally, this condition precedent shall not be considered to have been fulfilled, unless both the Lenders and the Original Borrowers acknowledge in writing to each other that such conditions are acceptable.

 

  (e) A copy of any authorisation or consent (to include any relevant corporate, regulatory and shareholder consent) which the Agent considers to be necessary or desirable in connection with the entry into and performance of the transactions contemplated by this Agreement or for the validity and enforceability of any Finance Document.

 

  (f) Evidence that all amounts outstanding under the Existing Facility have been or will be repaid and cancelled in full on or before the first Utilisation Date.

 

- 101 -


PART II

CONDITIONS PRECEDENT REQUIRED TO BE DELIVERED BY AN

ADDITIONAL BORROWER

 

1. An Accession Letter, duly executed by the Additional Borrower and the Parent.

 

2. A copy of a good standing certificate with respect to any Additional Borrower incorporated in the British Virgin Islands, issued as of a recent date by the Registrar of Corporate Affairs in the British Virgin Islands.

 

3. A copy of the Constitutional Documents of the Additional Borrower.

 

4. A copy of a resolution of the board of directors (and, if necessary under the laws of its jurisdiction of incorporation, the shareholders) of the Additional Borrower:

 

  (a) approving the terms of, and the transactions contemplated by, the Accession Letter and the Finance Documents and resolving that it execute the Accession Letter;

 

  (b) authorising a specified person or persons to execute the Accession Letter on its behalf; and

 

  (c) authorising a specified person or persons, on its behalf, to sign and/or despatch all other documents and notices (including, in relation to an Additional Borrower, any Utilisation Request) to be signed and/or despatched by it under or in connection with the Finance Documents.

 

5. A specimen of the signature of each person authorised by the resolution referred to in paragraph 4 above.

 

6. A certificate of incumbency from the registered agent of each Additional Borrower incorporated in the British Virgin Islands.

 

7. If appropriate, a certificate of the Additional Borrower (signed by a director) confirming that borrowing or guaranteeing, as appropriate, the Total Commitments would not cause any borrowing, guaranteeing or similar limit binding on it to be exceeded and that in respect of each Additional Borrower to whom the Companies Act 2008 of South Africa applies the requirements of Section 45 of such Act has been complied with and each certificate shall have annexed to it the copies of the relevant resolutions, notices and statements.

 

8. A certificate of an authorised signatory of the Additional Borrower certifying that each copy document listed in this Part II of Schedule 2 is correct, complete and in full force and effect as at a date no earlier than the date of the Accession Letter.

 

9. A copy of any other authorisation or other document, opinion or assurance which the Agent considers to be necessary or desirable in connection with the entry into and performance of the transactions contemplated by the Accession Letter or for the validity and enforceability of any Finance Document.

 

10.

If appropriate, a copy of the approval of the Financial Surveillance Department of the South African Reserve Bank confirming that Additional Borrower may enter into and

 

- 102 -


  provide the guarantee as contemplated by this Agreement and that the Additional Borrower may enter into and implement the provisions of this Agreement. If such approval is granted conditionally, this condition precedent shall not be considered to have been fulfilled, unless both the Lenders and the Additional Borrower acknowledge in writing to each other that such conditions are acceptable.

 

11. If available, the latest audited financial statements of the Additional Borrower.

 

12. A legal opinion from legal advisers to the Agent in England.

 

13. If the Additional Borrower is incorporated in a jurisdiction other than England and Wales, a legal opinion of the legal advisers to the Arrangers and the Agent in the jurisdiction in which the Additional Borrower is incorporated.

 

14. If the proposed Additional Borrower is incorporated in a jurisdiction other than England and Wales, evidence that the agent for service of process specified in Clause 38.2 ( Service of process ) has accepted its appointment in relation to the proposed Additional Borrower.

 

- 103 -


PART III

CONDITIONS PRECEDENT REQUIRED TO BE DELIVERED BY AN

ADDITIONAL GUARANTOR

 

1. An Accession Letter, duly executed by the Additional Guarantor and the Parent.

 

2. A copy of the Constitutional Documents of the Additional Guarantor.

 

3. A copy of a good standing certificate with respect to any Additional Guarantor incorporated in the British Virgin Islands, issued as of a recent date by the appropriate official in the British Virgin Islands.

 

4. A copy of a resolution of the board of directors (and, if necessary under the laws of its jurisdiction of incorporation, the shareholders) of the Additional Guarantor:

 

  (a) approving the terms of, and the transactions contemplated by, the Accession Letter and the Finance Documents and resolving that it execute the Accession Letter;

 

  (b) authorising a specified person or persons to execute the Accession Letter on its behalf; and

 

  (c) authorising a specified person or persons, on its behalf, to sign and/or dispatch all other documents and notices to be signed and/or despatched by it under or in connection with the Finance Documents.

 

5. A specimen of the signature of each person authorised by the resolution referred to in paragraph 4 above.

 

6. A certificate of incumbency from the registered agent of each Additional guarantor incorporated in the British Virgin Islands.

 

7. A copy of a resolution signed by all the holders of the issued shares of the Additional Guarantor, approving the terms of, and the transactions contemplated by, the Finance Documents to which the Additional Guarantor is a party.

 

8. A certificate of the Additional Guarantor (signed by a director) confirming that guaranteeing the Total Commitments would not cause any borrowing, guaranteeing or similar limit binding on it to be exceeded and that in respect of each Additional Guarantor to whom the Companies Act 2008 of South Africa applies the requirements of Section 45 of such Act has been complied with and each certificate shall have annexed to it the copies of the relevant resolutions, notices and statements.

 

9. A certificate of an authorised signatory of the Additional Guarantor certifying that each copy document listed in this Part III of Schedule 2 is correct, complete and in full force and effect as at a date no earlier than the date of the Accession Letter.

 

10. A copy of any other authorisation or other document, opinion or assurance which the Agent considers to be necessary or desirable in connection with the entry into and performance of the transactions contemplated by the Accession Letter or for the validity and enforceability of any Finance Document.

 

- 104 -


11. If available, the latest audited financial statements of the Additional Guarantor.

 

12. A legal opinion from legal advisers to the Agent in England.

 

13. If the Additional Guarantor is incorporated in a jurisdiction other than England and Wales, a legal opinion of the legal advisers to the Agent in the jurisdiction in which the Additional Guarantor is incorporated.

 

14. If the Additional Guarantor is incorporated in a jurisdiction other than England and Wales, evidence that the agent for service of process specified in Clause 38.2 ( Service of process ) has accepted its appointment in relation to the proposed Additional Guarantor.

 

15. A copy of the approval of the Exchange Control Department of the South African Reserve Bank confirming that any Additional Guarantor incorporated in South Africa may enter into and provide the guarantees as contemplated by this Agreement and that the Additional Guarantor may enter into and implement the provisions of this Agreement. If such approval is granted conditionally, this condition precedent shall not be considered to have been fulfilled, unless both the Lenders and the Additional Guarantor acknowledge in writing to each other that such conditions are acceptable.

 

- 105 -


SCHEDULE 3

UTILISATION REQUEST

From: [ The Borrower ]

To: The Bank of Tokyo-Mitsubishi UFJ, Ltd. as Agent

Dated:

Dear Sirs

GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited and Gold Fields Operations Limited –$500,000,000 Credit Facility Agreement dated [ ] 2012 (the “Agreement”)

 

1. We refer to the Agreement. This is a Utilisation Request. Terms defined in the Agreement have the same meaning in this Utilisation Request unless given a different meaning in this Utilisation Request.

 

2. We wish to borrow a Loan on the following terms:

 

Proposed Utilisation Date:

  [ ] (or, if that is not a Business Day, the next Business Day)

Currency of Loan:

  Dollars

Amount:

  [ ]

Interest Period:

  [ ]

 

3. We confirm that each condition specified in Clause 4.2 ( Further conditions precedent ) is satisfied on the date of this Utilisation Request.

 

4. The proceeds of this Loan should be credited to [ account ].

 

5. This Utilisation Request is irrevocable.

Yours faithfully

 

 

authorised signatory for
[ name of relevant Borrower ]

 

- 106 -


SCHEDULE 4

MANDATORY COST FORMULA

 

1. The Mandatory Cost is an addition to the interest rate to compensate Lenders for the cost of compliance with (a) the requirements of the Bank of England and/or the Financial Services Authority (or, in either case, any other authority which replaces all or any of its functions) or (b) the requirements of the European Central Bank.

 

2. On the first day of each Interest Period (or as soon as possible thereafter) the Agent shall calculate, as a percentage rate, a rate (the “Additional Cost Rate ”) for each Lender, in accordance with the paragraphs set out below. The Mandatory Cost will be calculated by the Agent as a weighted average of the Lenders’ Additional Cost Rates (weighted in proportion to the percentage participation of each Lender in the relevant Loan) and will be expressed as a percentage rate per annum.

 

3. The Additional Cost Rate for any Lender lending from a Facility Office in a Participating Member State will be the percentage notified by that Lender to the Agent. This percentage will be certified by that Lender in its notice to the Agent to be its reasonable determination of the cost (expressed as a percentage of that Lender’s participation in all Loans made from that Facility Office) of complying with the minimum reserve requirements of the European Central Bank in respect of loans made from that Facility Office.

 

4. The Additional Cost Rate for any Lender lending from a Facility Office in the United Kingdom will be calculated by the Agent as follows:

 

 

E ×0.01

  per cent. per annum.
 

300

 

Where:

 

  E is designed to compensate Lenders for amounts payable under the Fees Rules and is calculated by the Agent as being the average of the most recent rates of charge supplied by the Reference Banks to the Agent pursuant to paragraph 7 below and expressed in pounds per Ł1,000,000.

 

5. For the purposes of this Schedule:

 

  (a) Fees Rules ” means the rules on periodic fees contained in the FSA Supervision Manual or such other law or regulation as may be in force from time to time in respect of the payment of fees for the acceptance of deposits;

 

  (b) Fee Tariffs ” means the fee tariffs specified in the Fees Rules under the activity group A.1 Deposit acceptors (ignoring any minimum fee or zero rated fee required pursuant to the Fees Rules but taking into account any applicable discount rate); and

 

  (c) Tariff Base ” has the meaning given to it in, and will be calculated in accordance with, the Fees Rules.

 

- 107 -


6. If requested by the Agent, each Reference Bank shall, as soon as practicable after publication by the Financial Services Authority, supply to the Agent, the rate of charge payable by that Reference Bank to the Financial Services Authority pursuant to the Fees Rules in respect of the relevant financial year of the Financial Services Authority (calculated for this purpose by that Reference Bank as being the average of the Fee Tariffs applicable to that Reference Bank for that financial year) and expressed in pounds per Ł1,000,000 of the Tariff Base of that Reference Bank.

 

7. Each Lender shall supply any information required by the Agent for the purpose of calculating its Additional Cost Rate. In particular, but without limitation, each Lender shall supply the following information on or prior to the date on which it becomes a Lender:

 

  (a) the jurisdiction of its Facility Office; and

 

  (b) any other information that the Agent may reasonably require for such purpose.

Each Lender shall promptly notify the Agent of any change to the information provided by it pursuant to this paragraph.

 

8. The percentages of each Lender for the purpose of E above shall be determined by the Agent based upon the information supplied to it pursuant to paragraphs 6 and 7 above and on the assumption that, unless a Lender notifies the Agent to the contrary, each Lender's obligations in relation to cash ratio deposits are the same as those of a typical bank from its jurisdiction of incorporation with a Facility Office in the same jurisdiction as its Facility Office.

 

9. The Agent shall have no liability to any person if such determination results in an Additional Cost Rate which over or under compensates any Lender and shall be entitled to assume that the information provided by any Lender or Reference Bank pursuant to paragraphs 3, 6 and 7 above is true and correct in all respects.

 

10. The Agent shall distribute the additional amounts received as a result of the Mandatory Cost to the Lenders on the basis of the Additional Cost Rate for each Lender based on the information provided by each Lender and each Reference Bank pursuant to paragraphs 3, 6 and 7 above.

 

11. Any determination by the Agent pursuant to this Schedule in relation to a formula, the Mandatory Cost, an Additional Cost Rate or any amount payable to a Lender shall, in the absence of manifest error, be conclusive and binding on all Parties.

 

12. The Agent may from time to time, after consultation with the Parent and the Lenders, determine and notify to all Parties any amendments which are required to be made to this Schedule in order to comply with any change in law, regulation or any requirements from time to time imposed by the Financial Services Authority or, the European Central Bank (or, in any case, any other authority which replaces all or any of its functions) and any such determination shall, in the absence of manifest error, be conclusive and binding on all Parties.

 

- 108 -


SCHEDULE 5

FORM OF TRANSFER CERTIFICATE

 

To:

   The Bank of Tokyo-Mitsubishi UFJ, Ltd. as Agent

From:

   [ The Existing Lender ] (the “ Existing Lender ”) and [ The New Lender ] (the “ New Lender ”)

Dated:

  

GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI)

Limited and Gold Fields Operations Limited –$500,000,000 Credit Facility Agreement

dated [ ] 2012 (the “Agreement”)

 

1. We refer to the Agreement. This is a Transfer Certificate. Terms defined in the Agreement have the same meaning in this Transfer Certificate unless given a different meaning in this Transfer Certificate.

 

2. We refer to Clause 23.5 ( Procedure for transfer ):

 

  (a) The Existing Lender and the New Lender agree to the Existing Lender transferring to the New Lender by novation all or part of the Existing Lender’s Commitment, rights and obligations referred to in the Schedule in accordance with Clause 23.5 ( Procedure for transfer ).

 

  (b) The proposed Transfer Date is [                    ].

 

  (c) The Facility Office and address, fax number, email address and attention details for notices of the New Lender for the purposes of Clause 30.2 ( Addresses ) are set out in the Schedule.

 

3. The New Lender expressly acknowledges the limitations on the Existing Lender’s obligations set out in paragraph (c) of Clause 23.4 ( Limitation of responsibility of Existing Lenders ).

 

4. This Transfer Certificate may be executed in any number of counterparts and this has the same effect as if the signatures on the counterparts were on a single copy of this Transfer Certificate.

 

5. This Transfer Certificate, and any non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with it, is governed by English law.

 

- 109 -


THE SCHEDULE

Commitment/rights and obligations to be transferred

[ insert relevant details ]

[ Facility Office address, fax number, email address and attention details for notices and

account details for payments, ]

 

[Existing Lender]       [New Lender]  
By:  

 

    By:  

 

Market Entity Identifier:  

 

    Market Entity Identifier:  

 

 

- 110 -


This Transfer Certificate is accepted by the Agent and the Transfer Date is confirmed as [                    ].

[ ]

 

By:  

 

 

- 111 -


SCHEDULE 6

FORM OF ASSIGNMENT AGREEMENT

 

To:

   [    ] as Agent and [        ] as Parent, for and on behalf of each Obligor

From:

   [the Existing Lender] (the “ Existing Lender ”) and [the New Lender] (the “ New Lender ”)

Dated:

  

GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI)

Limited and Gold Fields Operations Limited –$500,000,000 Credit Facility Agreement

dated [ ] 2012 (the “Agreement”)

 

1. We refer to the Agreement. This is an Assignment Agreement. Terms defined in the Agreement have the same meaning in this Assignment Agreement unless given a different meaning in this Assignment Agreement.

 

2. We refer to Clause 23.6 ( Procedure for assignment ):

 

  (a) The Existing Lender assigns absolutely to the New Lender all the rights of the Existing Lender under the Agreement and the other Finance Documents which relate to that portion of the Existing Lender’s Commitments and participations in Loans under the Agreement as specified in the Schedule.

 

  (b) The Existing Lender is released from all the obligations of the Existing Lender which correspond to that portion of the Existing Lender’s Commitments and participations in Loans under the Agreement specified in the Schedule.

 

  (c) The New Lender becomes a Party as a Lender and is bound by obligations equivalent to those from which the Existing Lender is released under paragraph (b) above.

 

3. The proposed Transfer Date is [                    ].

 

4. On the Transfer Date the New Lender becomes Party to the Finance Documents as a Lender.

 

5. The Facility Office and address, fax number and attention details for notices of the New Lender for the purposes of Clause 30.2 ( Addresses ) are set out in the Schedule.

 

6. The New Lender expressly acknowledges the limitations on the Existing Lender’s obligations set out in paragraph (c) of Clause 23.4 ( Limitation of responsibility of Existing Lenders ).

 

7. This Assignment Agreement acts as notice to the Agent (on behalf of each Finance Party) and, upon delivery in accordance with Clause 23.7 ( Copy of Transfer Certificate or Assignment Agreement to Parent ), to the Parent (on behalf of each Obligor) of the assignment referred to in this Assignment Agreement.

 

- 112 -


8. This Assignment Agreement may be executed in any number of counterparts and this has the same effect as if the signatures on the counterparts were on a single copy of this Assignment Agreement.

 

9. This Assignment Agreement, and any non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with it, is governed by English law.

 

10. This Assignment Agreement has been entered into on the date stated at the beginning of this Assignment Agreement.

 

- 113 -


THE SCHEDULE

Commitment/rights to be assigned

[ insert relevant details ]

[ Facility Office address, fax number, email address and attention details for notices and account details for payments, ]

 

[Existing Lender]       [New Lender]  
By:  

 

    By:  

 

Market Entity Identifier:  

 

    Market Entity Identifier:  

 

 

- 114 -


This Assignment Agreement is accepted by the Agent and the Transfer Date is confirmed as [                    ].

[ ]

 

By:  

 

 

- 115 -


SCHEDULE 7

FORM OF ACCESSION LETTER

 

To:    The Bank of Tokyo-Mitsubishi UFJ, Ltd. as Agent
From:    [Subsidiary] and Gold Fields Limited
Dated:   
Dear Sirs

GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI)

Limited and Gold Fields Operations Limited –$500,000,000 Credit Facility Agreement

dated [ ] 2012 (the “Agreement”)

 

1. We refer to the Agreement. This is an Accession Letter. Terms defined in the Agreement have the same meaning in this Accession Letter unless given a different meaning in this Accession Letter.

 

2. [Subsidiary] agrees to become an Additional [Borrower]/[Guarantor] and to be bound by the terms of the Agreement as an Additional [Borrower]/[Guarantor] pursuant to Clause [24.2 ( Additional Borrowers )]/[24.4 ( Additional Guarantors )] of the Agreement. [Subsidiary] is a wholly owned Subsidiary of the Parent duly incorporated under the laws of [name of relevant jurisdiction].

 

3. [ Specify purpose of the Loan ].

 

4. [Subsidiary’s] administrative details are as follows:

Address:

Fax No:

Attention:

 

5. This Accession Letter, and any non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with it, is governed by English law.

[This Accession Letter has been executed as a deed by [ Subsidiary ] and is delivered on the date stated above.] 1

 

1   For any additional Guarantor, the Accession Letter is to be executed as a deed and the signature block shall be amended accordingly.

 

- 116 -


Gold Fields Limited   [Subsidiary]  
By:     By:  

 

- 117 -


SCHEDULE 8

FORM OF RESIGNATION LETTER

 

To:    The Bank of Tokyo-Mitsubishi UFJ, Ltd. as Agent
From:    [resigning Obligor] and Gold Fields Limited
Dated:   
Dear Sirs

GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI)

Limited and Gold Fields Operations Limited –$500,000,000 Credit Facility Agreement

dated [ ] 2012 (the “Agreement”)

 

1. We refer to the Agreement. This is a Resignation Letter. Terms defined in the Agreement have the same meaning in this Resignation Letter unless given a different meaning in this Accession Letter.

 

2. Pursuant to [Clause 24.3 ( Resignation of an Additional Borrower )]/[Clause 24.6 ( Resignation of an Additional Guarantor )], we request that [resigning Obligor] be released from its obligations as a [Borrower]/[Guarantor] under the Agreement.

 

3. We confirm that no default is continuing or would result from the acceptance of this request.

 

4. This Resignation Letter, and any non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with it, is governed by English law.

 

Gold Fields Limited       [Subsidiary]
By:  

 

    By:  

 

 

- 118 -


SCHEDULE 9

FORM OF COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATE

 

To:    The Bank of Tokyo-Mitsubishi UFJ, Ltd. as Agent
From:    Gold Fields Limited
Dated:   
Dear Sirs

GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited, Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI)

Limited and Gold Fields Operations Limited –$500,000,000] Credit Facility Agreement

dated [ ] 2012 (the “Agreement”)

 

1. We refer to the Agreement. This is a Compliance Certificate. Terms defined in the Agreement have the same meaning when used in this Compliance Certificate unless given a different meaning in this Compliance Certificate.

 

2. We confirm that as at [    ]:

 

  (a) Consolidated EBITDA to Consolidated Net Finance Charges

the ratio of Consolidated EBITDA to Consolidated Net Finance Charges in respect of the Measurement Period ending on [    ] was: [        ]: 1; and

 

  (b) Consolidated Net Borrowings to Consolidated EBITDA

the ratio of Consolidated Net Borrowings to Consolidated EBITDA in respect of the Measurement Period ending on [    ] was: [        ]: 1,

and attach calculations showing how these figures were calculated.

 

3. We confirm that no Default is continuing.

 

Signed:  

 

   

 

[Director]/[Executive Officer]       [Director]/[Executive Officer]
of       of    
Gold Fields Limited       Gold Fields Limited
[ insert applicable certification language ]  

 

   
[or and on behalf of
[ name of auditors of the Parent ]

 

- 119 -


SCHEDULE 10

TIMETABLE

 

“U”

    =     date of utilisation

“U – X”

    =     X Business Days prior to date of Utilisation

 

Delivery of a duly completed Utilisation Request (Clause 5.1

         U-3   

( Delivery of a Utilisation Request )

         10.00 a.m.   

Agent notifies the Lenders of the Loan in accordance with

         U-3   

Clause 5.4 ( Lenders’ participation )

         3.00 p.m.   

LIBOR is fixed

         U-2   
         11:00 a.m.   

 

- 120 -


SCHEDULE 11

LMA FORM OF CONFIDENTIALITY UNDERTAKING

[Letterhead of Seller]

Date: [                    ]

To:

 

    
    

[insert name of Potential

Purchaser]

    
    

Re:         The Agreement

 

        

Company:

  (the “ Company ”)     

Date:

      

Amount:

      

Agent:

      
        

Dear Sirs

We understand that you are considering acquiring an interest in the Agreement which, subject to the Agreement, may be by way of novation, assignment, the entering into, whether directly or indirectly, of a sub-participation or any other transaction under which payments are to be made or may be made by reference to one or more Finance Documents and/or one or more Obligors or by way of investing in or otherwise financing, directly or indirectly, any such novation, assignment, sub-participation or other transaction (the “ Acquisition ”). In consideration of us agreeing to make available to you certain information, by your signature of a copy of this letter you agree as follows:

 

1. CONFIDENTIALITY UNDERTAKING

You undertake (a) to keep all Confidential Information confidential and not to disclose it to anyone, save to the extent permitted by paragraph 2 below and to ensure that all Confidential Information is protected with security measures and a degree of care that would apply to your own confidential information, and (b) until the Acquisition is completed to use the Confidential Information only for the Permitted Purpose.

 

2. PERMITTED DISCLOSURE

We agree that you may disclose:

 

2.1

to any of your Affiliates and any of your or their officers, directors, employees, professional advisers and auditors such Confidential Information as you shall consider appropriate if any person to whom the Confidential Information is to be given

 

- 121 -


  pursuant to this paragraph 2.1 is informed in writing of its confidential nature and that some or all of such Confidential Information may be price-sensitive information, except that there shall be no such requirement to so inform if the recipient is subject to professional obligations to maintain the confidentiality of the information or is otherwise bound by requirements of confidentiality in relation to the Confidential Information;

 

2.2 subject to the requirements of the Agreement, to any person:

 

  (a) to (or through) whom you assign or transfer (or may potentially assign or transfer) all or any of your rights and/or obligations which you may acquire under the Agreement such Confidential Information as you shall consider appropriate if the person to whom the Confidential Information is to be given pursuant to this sub-paragraph (a) of paragraph 2.2 has delivered a letter to you in equivalent form to this letter;

 

  (b) with (or through) whom you enter into (or may potentially enter into) any sub-participation in relation to, or any other transaction under which payments are to be made or may be made by reference to the Agreement or any Obligor such Confidential Information as you shall consider appropriate if the person to whom the Confidential Information is to be given pursuant to this sub-paragraph (b) of paragraph 2.2 has delivered a letter to you in equivalent form to this letter;

 

  (c) to whom information is required or requested to be disclosed by any governmental, banking, taxation or other regulatory authority or similar body, the rules of any relevant stock exchange or pursuant to any applicable law or regulation such Confidential Information as you shall consider appropriate; and

 

2.3 notwithstanding paragraphs 2.1 and 2.2. above, Confidential Information to such persons to whom, and on the same terms as, a Finance Party is permitted to disclose Confidential Information under the Agreement, as if such permissions were set out in full in this letter and as if references in those permissions to Finance Party were references to you.

 

3. NOTIFICATION OF DISCLOSURE

You agree (to the extent permitted by law and regulation) to inform us:

 

3.1 of the circumstances of any disclosure of Confidential Information made pursuant to sub-paragraph (c) of paragraph 2.2 above except where such disclosure is made to any of the persons referred to in that paragraph during the ordinary course of its supervisory or regulatory function; and

 

3.2 upon becoming aware that Confidential Information has been disclosed in breach of this letter.

 

4. RETURN OF COPIES

If you do not enter into the Acquisition and we so request in writing, you shall return or destroy all Confidential Information supplied to you by us and destroy or

 

- 122 -


permanently erase (to the extent technically practicable) all copies of Confidential Information made by you and use your reasonable endeavours to ensure that anyone to whom you have supplied any Confidential Information destroys or permanently erases (to the extent technically practicable) such Confidential Information and any copies made by them, in each case save to the extent that you or the recipients are required to retain any such Confidential Information by any applicable law, rule or regulation or by any competent judicial, governmental, supervisory or regulatory body or in accordance with internal policy, or where the Confidential Information has been disclosed under sub-paragraph (c) of paragraph 2.2 above.

 

5. CONTINUING OBLIGATIONS

The obligations in this letter are continuing and, in particular, shall survive and remain binding on you until (a) if you become a party to the Agreement as a lender of record, the date on which you become such a party to the Agreement; (b) if you enter into the Acquisition but it does not result in you becoming a party to the Agreement as a lender of record, the date falling [twelve] months after the date on which all of your rights and obligations contained in the documentation entered into to implement that Acquisition have terminated; or (c) in any other case the date falling [twelve] months after the date of your final receipt (in whatever manner) of any Confidential Information.

 

6. NO REPRESENTATION; CONSEQUENCES OF BREACH, ETC

You acknowledge and agree that:

 

6.1 neither we, nor any member of the Group nor any of our or their respective officers, employees or advisers (each a “ Relevant Person ”) (i) make any representation or warranty, express or implied, as to, or assume any responsibility for, the accuracy, reliability or completeness of any of the Confidential Information or any other information supplied by us or the assumptions on which it is based or (ii) shall be under any obligation to update or correct any inaccuracy in the Confidential Information or any other information supplied by us or be otherwise liable to you or any other person in respect of the Confidential Information or any such information; and

 

6.2 we or members of the Group may be irreparably harmed by the breach of the terms of this letter and damages may not be an adequate remedy; each Relevant Person may be granted an injunction or specific performance for any threatened or actual breach of the provisions of this letter by you.

 

7. ENTIRE AGREEMENT: NO WAIVER; AMENDMENTS, ETC

 

7.1 This letter constitutes the entire agreement between us in relation to your obligations regarding Confidential Information and supersedes any previous agreement, whether express or implied, regarding Confidential Information.

 

7.2 No failure to exercise, nor any delay in exercising, any right or remedy under this letter will operate as a waiver of any such right or remedy or constitute an election to affirm this letter. No election to affirm this letter will be effective unless it is in writing. No single or partial exercise of any right or remedy will prevent any further or other exercise or the exercise of any other right or remedy under this letter.

 

- 123 -


7.3 The terms of this letter and your obligations under this letter may only be amended or modified by written agreement between us.

 

8. INSIDE INFORMATION

You acknowledge that some or all of the Confidential Information is or may be price-sensitive information and that the use of such information may be regulated or prohibited by applicable legislation including securities law relating to insider dealing and market abuse and you undertake not to use any Confidential Information for any unlawful purpose.

 

9. NATURE OF UNDERTAKINGS

The undertakings given by you under this letter are given to us and are also given for the benefit of the Company and each other member of the Group.

 

10. THIRD PARTY RIGHTS

 

10.1 Subject to this paragraph 10 and to paragraphs 6 and 9, a person who is not a party to this letter has no right under the Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999 (the “ Third Parties Act ”) to enforce or to enjoy the benefit of any term of this letter.

 

10.2 The Relevant Persons may enjoy the benefit of the terms of paragraphs 6 and 9 subject to and in accordance with this paragraph 10 and the provisions of the Third Parties Act.

 

10.3 Notwithstanding any provisions of this letter, the parties to this letter do not require the consent of any Relevant Person to rescind or vary this letter at any time.

 

11. GOVERNING LAW AND JURISDICTION

 

11.1 This letter (including the agreement constituted by your acknowledgement of its terms) (the “ Letter ”) and any non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with it (including any non-contractual obligations arising out of the negotiation of the transaction contemplated by this Letter) are governed by English law.

 

11.2 The courts of England have non-exclusive jurisdiction to settle any dispute arising out of or in connection with this Letter (including a dispute relating to any non-contractual obligation arising out of or in connection with either this Letter or the negotiation of the transaction contemplated by this Letter).

 

12. DEFINITIONS

In this letter (including the acknowledgement set out below) terms defined in the Agreement shall, unless the context otherwise requires, have the same meaning and:

Confidential Information ” means all information relating to the Company, any Obligor, the Group, the Finance Documents, the Facility and/or the Acquisition which

 

- 124 -


is provided to you in relation to the Finance Documents or the Facility by us or any of our affiliates or advisers, in whatever form, and includes information given orally and any document, electronic file or any other way of representing or recording information which contains or is derived or copied from such information but excludes information that:

 

  (a) is or becomes public information other than as a direct or indirect result of any breach by you of this letter; or

 

  (b) is identified in writing at the time of delivery as non-confidential by us or our advisers; or

 

  (c) is known by you before the date the information is disclosed to you by us or any of our affiliates or advisers or is lawfully obtained by you after that date, from a source which is, as far as you are aware, unconnected with the Group and which, in either case, as far as you are aware, has not been obtained in breach of, and is not otherwise subject to, any obligation of confidentiality.

Group ” means the Company and its subsidiaries for the time being (as such term is defined in the Companies Act 2006).

Permitted Purpose ” means considering and evaluating whether to enter into the Acquisition.

Please acknowledge your agreement to the above by signing and returning the enclosed copy.

 

Yours faithfully
   
For and on behalf of

[Seller]

To:       [Seller]

The Company and each other member of the Group

 

We acknowledge and agree to the above:
   
For and on behalf of

[Potential Purchaser]

 

- 125 -


SIGNATURES

The Parent

GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

/s/ Paul A. Schmidt

 

By:

   PAUL ANDY SCHMIDT

Address:

   150 HELEN ROAD, SANDOWN, SANDTON, 2196

Tel:

   +27 11 562 9724

Fax:

   +27 86 720 2704

Attention:

   MICHAEL FLEISCHER

The Original Borrowers

GFI MINING SOUTH AFRICA (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED

/s/ Soobramoney M. Govender

 

By:

   SOOBRAMONEY MUNSAMY GOVENDER

Address:

   150 HELEN ROAD, SANDOWN, SANDTON, 2196

Tel:

   +27 11 562 9724

Fax:

   +27 86 720 2704

Attention:

   MICHAEL FLEISCHER

GOLD FIELDS OROGEN HOLDING (BVI) LIMITED

/s/ Richard Taylor

 

By:

   RICHARD TAYLOR

Address:

   FALCON CLIFF, PALACE ROAD, DOUGLAS, ISLE OF MAN

Fax:

  

Attention:

   COLIN BIRD

 

- 126 -


GOLD FIELDS OPERATIONS LIMITED

/s/ Paul A. Schmidt

 

By:

   PAUL ANDY SCHMIDT

Address:

   150 HELEN ROAD, SANDOWN, SANDTON, 2196

Tel:

   +27 11 562 9724

Fax:

   +27 86 720 2704

Attention:

   MICHAEL FLEISCHER

The Original Guarantors

GFI MINING SOUTH AFRICA (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED

/s/ Soobramoney M. Govender

 

By:

   SOOBRAMONEY MUNSAMY GOVENDER

Address:

   150 HELEN ROAD, SANDOWN, SANDTON, 2196

Tel:

   +27 11 562 9724

Fax:

   +27 86 720 2704

Attention:

   MICHAEL FLEISCHER

GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

/s/ Paul A. Schmidt

 

By:

   PAUL ANDY SCHMIDT

Address:

   150 HELEN ROAD, SANDOWN, SANDTON, 2196

Tel:

   +27 11 562 9724

Fax:

   +27 86 720 2704

Attention:

   MICHAEL FLEISCHER

 

- 127 -


GOLD FIELDS HOLDINGS COMPANY (BVI) LIMITED

/s/ Michael D. Fleischer

 

By:

   MICHAEL DAVID FLEISCHER

Address:

   150 HELEN ROAD, SANDOWN, SANDTON, 2196

Tel:

   +27 11 562 9724

Fax:

   +27 86 720 2704

Attention:

   MICHAEL FLEISCHER

GOLD FIELDS OPERATIONS LIMITED

/s/ Paul A. Schmidt

 

By:

   PAUL ANDY SCHMIDT

Address:

   150 HELEN ROAD, SANDOWN, SANDTON, 2196

Tel:

   +27 11 562 9724

Fax:

   +27 86 720 2704

Attention:

   MICHAEL FLEISCHER

GOLD FIELDS OROGEN HOLDING (BVI) LIMITED

/s/ Richard Taylor

 

By:

   RICHARD TAYLOR

Address:

   FALCON CLIFF, PALACE ROAD, DOUGLAS, ISLE OF MAN

Tel:

   +44 (0) 1624 630 000

Fax:

  

Attention:

   COLIN BIRD

NEWSHELF 899 (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED

/s/ Michael D. Fleischer

 

By:

   MICHAEL DAVID FLEISCHER

Address:

   150 HELEN ROAD, SANDOWN, SANDTON, 2196

Tel:

   +27 11 562 9724

Fax:

   +27 86 720 2704

Attention:

   MICHAEL FLEISCHER

 

- 128 -


The Arrangers   
THE BANK OF TOKYO-MITSUBISHI UFJ, LTD.   

By:

 

/s/ Raouf Jundi

     
  Raouf Jundi   
  Senior Vice President,
Head of Origination – Middle East and Africa
  
COMMONWEALTH BANK OF AUSTRALIA ABN (48 123 123 124)   
By:  

/s/ M.L. Woolhouse

     
ABSA CAPITAL, A DIVISION OF ABSA BANK LIMITED.   
By:  

/s/ JH De La Pasture

  

/s/ Amitha Chetty

  
  JH DE LA PASTURE    AMITHA CHETTY   
AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND BANKING GROUP LIMITED   
By:  

/s/ S. Ball

     
BANK OF CHINA LIMITED   
By:  

/s/ H. Wang; /s/ L. Liu

     
BANK OF MONTREAL IRELAND PLC.   
By:  

/s/ Neil Ward

  

/s/ Alan Lynch

  
  NEIL WARD    Alan Lynch   
  GENERAL MANAGER    Chief Financial Officer   
  BANK OF MONTREAL IRELAND    Bank of Montreal Ireland p.l.c.   
CREDIT SUISSE AG, LONDON BRANCH   
By:  

/s/ Markus Niemeier

  

/s/ Karim Blasetti

  
  Markus Niemeier    Karim Blasetti   
  Managing Director    Director   
  Fixed Income      
HSBC BANK PLC   
By:  

/s/ Guy R. Jolly

     
JPMORGAN CHASE BANK, N.A., LONDON BRANCH   
By:  

/s/ Regis Castro

     
  Regis Castro      
  Vice President      

 

- 129 -


SCOTIABANK (IRELAND) LIMITED   

By:

 

/s/ Clive Sinnamon

  

/s/ David Muldoon

  

WESTPAC BANKING CORPORATION (ACTING THROUGH ITS OFFSHORE

BANKING UNIT) (ABN 33 007 457 141)

  

By:

 

/s/ David J. Arthurson

     
  David James Arthurson      
CHINA CONSTRUCTION BANK CORPORATION, JOHANNESBURG BRANCH   

By:

 

/s/ R. Rhategan

  

/s/ W. Chan

  
The Original Lenders   
THE BANK OF TOKYO-MITSUBISHI UFJ, LTD.   

By:

 

/s/ Hidekazu Horikoshi

     
  Hidekazu Horikoshi      
  General Manager      
  European Business Division      
COMMONWEALTH BANK OF AUSTRALIA ABN (48 123 123 124)   

By:

 

/s/ M.L. Woolhouse

     
ABSA CAPITAL, A DIVISION OF ABSA BANK LIMITED.   

By:

 

/s/ JH De La Pasture

  

/s/ Amitha Chetty

  
  JH DE LA PASTURE    AMITHA CHETTY   
AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND BANKING GROUP LIMITED   

By:

 

/s/ S. Ball

     
BANK OF CHINA LIMITED   

By:

 

/s/ H. Wang

  

/s/ L. Liu

  

 

- 130 -


BANK OF MONTREAL IRELAND PLC.

 

By:

  

/s/ Neil Ward

  

/s/ Alan Lynch

  
   NEIL WARD    Alan Lynch   
   GENERAL MANAGER    Chief Financial Officer   
   BANK OF MONTREAL IRELAND    Bank of Montreal Ireland p.l.c.   
CREDIT SUISSE AG, LONDON BRANCH   

By:

  

/s/ Markus Neimeier

  

/s/ Karim Blasetti

  
   Markus Neimeier    Karim Blasetti   
   Managing Director    Director   
   Fixed Income      
HSBC BANK PLC      

By:

  

/s/ Guy R. Jolly

     
JPMORGAN CHASE BANK, N.A., LONDON BRANCH   

By:

  

/s/ Regis Castro

     
   Regis Castro      
   Vice President      
SCOTIABANK (IRELAND) LIMITED   

By:

  

/s/ Clive Sinnamon

  

/s/ David Muldoon

  

WESTPAC BANKING CORPORATION (ACTING THROUGH ITS OFFSHORE

BANKING UNIT (ABN 33 007 457 141)

  

By:

  

/s/ David J. Arthurson

     
   David James Arthurson      
CHINA CONSTRUCTION BANK CORPORATION, JOHANNESBURG BRANCH   

By:

  

/s/ R. Rhategan

  

/s/ W. Chan

  

 

- 131 -


The Agent

THE BANK OF TOKYO-MITSUBISHI UFJ, LTD.

/s/ Raouf Jundi

 

By:   Raouf Jundi
 

Senior Vice President

Head of Origination – Middle East and Africa

Address:  

THE BANK OF TOKYO – MITSUBISHI UFJ, LTD

ROPEMAKER PLACE

25 ROPEMAKER STREET

LONDON EC2Y9AN

Tel: +44 20 7577 1185  
Fax: +44 20 7577 1559  
Attention: THE MANAGER – LOANS ADMINISTRATION  

 

- 132 -

Table of Contents

Exhibit 4.24

 

LOGO

CONFORMED COPY

DATED 28 NOVEMBER 2012

GFI JOINT VENTURE HOLDINGS PROPRIETARY LIMITED

GOLD FIELDS OPERATIONS LIMITED

GOLD FIELDS OROGEN HOLDING (BVI) LIMITED

ARRANGED BY

THE FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS

LISTED HEREIN AS ARRANGERS

WITH

BARCLAYS BANK PLC

ACTING AS AGENT

 

 

BRIDGE FACILITY AGREEMENT

 

 

 


Table of Contents

CONTENTS

 

Clause        Page  
1.   Definitions and Interpretation      1   
2.   The Facility      22   
3.   Purpose      22   
4.   Conditions of Utilisation      22   
5.   Utilisation      24   
6.   Repayment      25   
7.   Prepayment and Cancellation      25   
8.   Interest      33   
9.   Interest Periods      34   
10.   Changes to the Calculation of Interest      35   
11.   Fees      36   
12.   Tax Gross up and Indemnities      38   
13.   Increased Costs      40   
14.   Other Indemnities      42   
15.   Mitigation by the Lenders      43   
16.   Costs and Expenses      43   
17.   Guarantee and Indemnity      45   
18.   Representations      49   
19.   Information Undertakings      54   
20.   Financial Covenants      59   
21.   General Undertakings      61   
22.   Events of Default      68   
23.   Changes to the Lenders      74   
24.   Changes to the Obligors      79   
25.   Role of the Agent and the Arrangers      82   
26.   Conduct of Business by the Finance Parties      89   
27.   Sharing among the Finance Parties      90   
28.   Payment Mechanics      92   
29.   Set-off      95   
30.   Notices      96   
31.   Calculations and Certificates      98   
32.   Partial Invalidity      99   
33.   Remedies and Waivers      99   
34.   Amendments and Waivers      99   

 

- i -


Table of Contents

35.

   Confidentiality      101   

36.

   Counterparts      106   

37.

   Governing Law      107   

38.

   Enforcement      107   

Schedule 1 The Original Parties

     108   

Part I The Obligors

     108   

Part II The Arrangers

     109   

Part III The Original Lenders

     110   

Schedule 2 Conditions Precedent

     111   

Part I Conditions Precedent to Initial Utilisation

     111   

Part II Conditions Precedent required to be delivered by an Additional Borrower

     114   

Part III Conditions Precedent required to be delivered by an Additional Guarantor

     116   

Schedule 3 Requests

     118   

Part I Utilisation Request

     118   

Part II Selection Notice

     119   

Schedule 4 Mandatory Cost Formula

     120   

Schedule 5 Form of Transfer Certificate

     122   

Schedule 6 Form of Assignment Agreement

     124   

Schedule 7 Form of Accession Letter

     127   

Schedule 8 Form of Resignation Letter

     128   

Schedule 9 Form of Compliance Certificate

     129   

Schedule 10 Timetable

     130   

Schedule 11 LMA Form of Confidentiality Undertaking

     131   

 

- ii -


Table of Contents

THIS AGREEMENT is dated 28 November 2012 and made

BETWEEN:

 

(1) GOLD FIELDS LIMITED (the “ Parent ”);

 

(2) GFI JOINT VENTURE HOLDINGS PROPRIETARY LIMITED, GOLD FIELDS OPERATIONS LIMITED and GOLD FIELDS OROGEN HOLDING (BVI) LIMITED (the “ Original Borrowers ”);

 

(3) THE SUBSIDIARIES of the Parent listed in Part I of Schedule 1 ( The Original Parties ) as guarantors (together with the Parent, the “ Original Guarantors ”);

 

(4) THE FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS listed in Part II of Schedule 1 ( The Original Parties ) as mandated lead arrangers and bookrunners (together the “ Arrangers ” and individually an “ Arranger ”);

 

(5) THE FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS listed in Part III of Schedule 1 ( The Original Parties ) as lenders (the “ Original Lenders ”); and

 

(6) BARCLAYS BANK PLC as agent of the other Finance Parties (the “ Agent ”).

IT IS AGREED as follows:

SECTION 1

INTERPRETATION

 

1. DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION

 

1.1 Definitions

In this Agreement:

Accession Letter ” means a document substantially in the form set out in Schedule 7 ( Form of Accession Letter ).

Additional Borrower ” means a company which becomes an Additional Borrower in accordance with Clause 24 ( Changes to the Obligors ).

Additional Cost Rate ” has the meaning given to it in Schedule 4 ( Mandatory Cost Formula ).

Additional Guarantor ” means a company which becomes an Additional Guarantor in accordance with Clause 24 ( Changes to the Obligors ).

Additional Obligor ” means an Additional Borrower or an Additional Guarantor.

Affiliate ” means, in relation to any person, a Subsidiary of that person or a Holding Company of that person or any other Subsidiary of that Holding Company.

Agreement ” means this credit facility agreement.

 

- 1 -


Table of Contents

Assignment Agreement ” means an agreement substantially in the form set out in Schedule 6 ( Form of Assignment Agreement ) or any other form agreed between the relevant assignor and assignee.

Associate ” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 20.1 ( Financial definitions ) of this Agreement.

Auditors ” means, at any time, the auditors of the Parent at that time, being as at the date of this Agreement KPMG and any replacement for those auditors appointed by the Parent.

Availability Period ” means the period from and including the date of this Agreement to and including the date which is 18 Months from the date of this Agreement.

Available Commitment ” means a Lender’s Commitment minus:

 

  (a) the amount of its participation in any outstanding Loans; and

 

  (b) in relation to any proposed Utilisation, the amount of its participation in any Loans that are due to be made on or before the proposed Utilisation Date.

Available Facility ” means the aggregate for the time being of each Lender’s Available Commitment in respect of the Facility.

Basel III ” has the meaning set out in paragraph (b) of Clause 13.1 ( Increased costs ).

Borrower ” means an Original Borrower or an Additional Borrower unless it has ceased to be a Borrower in accordance with Clause 24 ( Changes to the Obligors ).

Break Costs ” means the amount (if any) by which:

 

  (a) the interest which a Lender should have received for the period from the date of receipt of all or any part of its participation in a Loan or Unpaid Sum to the last day of the current Interest Period in respect of that Loan or Unpaid Sum, had the principal amount or Unpaid Sum received been paid on the last day of that Interest Period;

exceeds:

 

  (b) the amount which that Lender would be able to obtain by placing an amount equal to the principal amount or Unpaid Sum received by it on deposit with a leading bank in the Relevant Interbank Market for a period starting on the Business Day following receipt or recovery and ending on the last day of the current Interest Period.

Business Day ” means a day (other than a Saturday or Sunday) on which banks are open for general business in London, New York and Johannesburg.

Cerro Corona Project ” means the development of the gold and copper deposits in Peru by the Cerro Corona Subsidiary.

 

- 2 -


Table of Contents

Cerro Corona Subsidiary ” means Gold Fields La Cima S.A.

Commitment ” means:

 

  (a) in relation to an Original Lender, the amount set opposite its name under the heading “Commitment” in Part III of Schedule 1 ( The Original Parties ) and the amount of any other Commitment transferred to it under this Agreement; and

 

  (b) in relation to any other Lender, the amount of any Commitment transferred to it under this Agreement,

to the extent not cancelled, reduced or transferred by it under this Agreement.

Compliance Certificate ” means a certificate substantially in the form set out in Schedule 9 ( Form of Compliance Certificate ).

Confidential Information ” means all information relating to the Parent, any Obligor, the Group, the Finance Documents or the Facility of which a Finance Party becomes aware in its capacity as, or for the purpose of becoming, a Finance Party or which is received by a Finance Party in relation to, or for the purpose of becoming a Finance Party under, the Finance Documents or the Facility from either:

 

  (a) any member of the Group or any of its advisers; or

 

  (b) another Finance Party, if the information was obtained by that Finance Party directly or indirectly from any member of the Group or any of its advisers,

in whatever form, and includes information given orally and any document, electronic file or any other way of representing or recording information which contains or is derived or copied from such information but excludes information that:

 

  (i) is or becomes public information other than as a direct or indirect result of any breach by that Finance Party of Clause 35 ( Confidentiality ); or

 

  (ii) is identified in writing at the time of delivery as non-confidential by the Parent; or

 

  (iii) is known by that Finance Party before the date the information is disclosed to it in accordance with paragraphs (a) or (b) above or is lawfully obtained by that Finance Party after that date, from a source which is, as far as that Finance Party is aware, unconnected with the Group and which, in either case, as far as that Finance Party is aware, has not been obtained in breach of, and is not otherwise subject to, any obligation of confidentiality.

Confidentiality Undertaking ” means a confidentiality undertaking substantially in a recommended form of the LMA as set out in Schedule 11 ( LMA Form of Confidentiality Undertaking ) or in any other form agreed between the Parent and the Agent.

 

- 3 -


Table of Contents

Consolidated EBITDA ” has the meaning set out in Clause 20.1 ( Financial Definitions ).

Consolidated Tangible Net Worth ” means, at any time, the “Shareholders’ Equity”, as reported in the “Group Statement of Changes in Shareholders’ Equity” in the last set of annual consolidated financial statements of the Parent delivered to the Agent pursuant to this Agreement.

Constitutional Documents ” means, in respect of any person at any time, the then current and up-to-date constitutional documents of such person at such time (including, without limitation, such person’s memorandum and articles of association, certificate of incorporation, articles of incorporation or commercial registration certificate).

Credit Facilities Agreement ” means the US$ 900,000,000 credit facilities agreement to be entered into on or about the date of this Agreement between the Parent as Parent, certain Subsidiaries of the Parent as borrowers and/or guarantors, the Arrangers, the Agent and others.

Default ” means an Event of Default or any event or circumstance specified in Clause 22 ( Events of Default ) which would (with the expiry of a grace period, the giving of notice, the making of any determination under the Finance Documents or any combination of any of the foregoing) be an Event of Default.

Defaulting Lender ” means any Lender:

 

  (a) which has failed to make its participation in a Loan available or has notified the Agent that it will not make its participation in a Loan available by the Utilisation Date of that Loan in accordance with Clause 5.4 ( Lenders’ participation );

 

  (b) which has otherwise rescinded or repudiated a Finance Document; or

 

  (c) with respect to which an Insolvency Event has occurred and is continuing,

unless, in the case of paragraph (a) above:

 

  (i) its failure to pay is caused by:

 

  (A) administrative or technical error; or

 

  (B) a Disruption Event, and

payment is made within five (5) Business Days of its due date; or

 

  (ii) the Lender is disputing in good faith whether it is contractually obliged to make the payment in question.

Demerger ” means the demerger of the business of GFIMSA and its Subsidiaries from the business of the Parent and its other Subsidiaries by way of the Distribution.

 

- 4 -


Table of Contents

Demerger Date ” means the first day on which each of the following has occurred (i) the entire share capital of GFIMSA is listed and admitted to trading on the Johannesburg Stock Exchange as notified to the Parent by the Johannesburg Stock Exchange; and (ii) the Distribution is effected and GFIMSA accordingly ceases to be a Subsidiary of the Parent as notified to the Parent by its transfer secretaries or STRATE (the Central Depository for the electronic settlement of financial instruments in South Africa as conducted by Strate Limited).

Designated Website ” has the meaning given to it in paragraph (a) of Clause 19.7 ( Use of websites ).

Disruption Event ” means either or both of:

 

  (a) a material disruption to those payment or communications systems or to those financial markets which are, in each case, required to operate in order for payments to be made in connection with the Facility (or otherwise in order for the transactions contemplated by the Finance Documents to be carried out) which disruption is not caused by, and is beyond the control of, any of the Parties; or

 

  (b) the occurrence of any other event which results in a disruption (of a technical or system-related nature) to the treasury or payments operations of a Party preventing that, or any other Party:

 

  (i) from performing its payment obligations under the Finance Documents; or

 

  (ii) from communicating with other Parties in accordance with the terms of the Finance Documents,

and which (in either such case) is not caused by, and is beyond the control of, the Party whose operations are disrupted.

Distribution ” means the pro rata distribution in specie under South African law by the Parent of the entire issued share capital held by the Parent in GFIMSA to the Parent’s existing shareholders, American depository receipt holders and international depository receipt holders.

Encumbrance ” means:

 

  (a) any mortgage, pledge, lien, assignment or cession conferring security, hypothecation, a security interest, preferential right or trust arrangement or other encumbrance of the like securing any obligation of any person; or

 

  (b) any arrangement under which money or claims to, or for the benefit of, a bank or other account may be applied, set off or made subject to a combination of accounts so as to effect discharge of any sum owed or payable to any person; or

 

- 5 -


Table of Contents
  (c) any other type of preferential agreement or arrangement (including any title transfer and retention arrangement), the effect of which is the creation of a security interest.

Environmental Claim ” means any claim, proceeding or investigation by any person in respect of any Environmental Law.

Environmental Law ” means any law applicable to the business conducted by a Material Group Company at the relevant time in any jurisdiction in which that Material Group Company conducts business which relates to the pollution, degradation or protection of the environment or harm to or the protection of human health or the health of animals or plants.

Environmental Permits ” means any permit, licence, consent, approval and other authorisation and the filing of any notification, report or assessment required under any Environmental Law for the operation of the business of any Material Group Company conducted on or from the properties owned or used by that Material Group Company.

Event of Default ” means any event or circumstance specified as such in Clause 22 ( Events of Default ).

Existing Bond ” means the US$1,000,000,000 bond maturing in 2020 issued on 7 October 2010 by Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited.

Existing Facility Agreements ” means the Existing 2012 Facility Agreement and the Existing 2011 Facility Agreement.

Existing 2011 Facility Agreement ” means the US$1,000,000,000 credit facility agreement dated 16 June 2011 between GFIMSA, Gold Fields Operations Limited and Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited as borrowers, the Parent and certain Subsidiaries of the Parent as guarantors, the financing institutions listed therein as mandated lead arrangers, Barclays Bank PLC as agent and others.

Existing 2012 Facility Agreement ” means the US$500,000,000 credit facility agreement dated 17 April 2012 between GFIMSA, Gold Fields Operations Limited and Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited as borrowers, the Parent and certain Subsidiaries of the Parent as guarantors, the financing institutions listed therein as mandated lead arrangers, The Bank of Tokyo-Mitsubishi UFJ, Ltd as agent and others.

Existing Lender ” has the meaning given to it in Clause 23.1 ( Assignments and transfers by the Lenders ).

Facility ” means the term loan facility made available under this Agreement as described in Clause 2 ( The Facility ).

Facility Office ” means the office(s) notified by a Lender to the Agent in writing on or before the date it becomes a Lender (or, following that date, by not less than five (5) Business Days’ written notice) as the office(s) through which it will perform its obligations under this Agreement.

 

- 6 -


Table of Contents

Fee Letter ” means any letter or letters dated on or about the date of this Agreement between the Arrangers and the Original Borrowers or the Parent (or the Agent and the Parent) setting out any of the fees referred to in Clause 11 (Fees).

Finance Document ” means this Agreement, any Fee Letter, any Accession Letter, any Resignation Letter and any other document designated as such by the Agent and the Parent.

Finance Party ” means the Agent, the Arrangers or a Lender.

Financial Indebtedness ” means (without double counting) any indebtedness for or in respect of:

 

  (a) moneys borrowed;

 

  (b) any amount raised by acceptance under any acceptance credit facility or dematerialised equivalent;

 

  (c) any amount raised pursuant to any note purchase facility or the issue of bonds, notes, debentures, loan stock or any similar instrument;

 

  (d) the amount of any liability in respect of any lease or hire purchase contract which would, in accordance with GAAP, be treated as a finance or capital lease;

 

  (e) receivables sold or discounted (other than any receivables to the extent they are sold on a non-recourse basis);

 

  (f) the amount of liability in respect of any purchase price for assets or services the payment of which is deferred where the deferral of such price is either:

 

  (i) used primarily as a method of raising credit; or

 

  (ii) not made in the ordinary course of business;

 

  (g) any agreement or option to re-acquire an asset if one of the primary reasons for entering into such agreement or option is to raise finance;

 

  (h) any amount raised under any other transaction (including any forward sale or purchase agreement) having the commercial effect of a borrowing;

 

  (i) any derivative transaction entered into in connection with protection against or benefit from fluctuation in any rate or price (and, when calculating the value of any derivative transaction, only the marked to market value shall be taken into account);

 

  (j) any counter-indemnity obligation in respect of a guarantee, indemnity, bond, standby or documentary letter of credit or any other instrument issued by a bank or financial institution;

 

  (k) any amount raised by the issue of redeemable shares to the extent such shares are redeemable prior to the Termination Date; and

 

- 7 -


Table of Contents
  (l) the amount of any liability in respect of any guarantee or indemnity for any of its items referred to in paragraphs (a) to (k) above.

Financial Year ” means, at any time, the financial year of the Group ending on 31 December in each calendar year.

GAAP ” means the generally accepted accounting principles set out in IFRS.

GFIMSA ” means GFI Mining South Africa Proprietary Limited (subsequently renamed Sibanye Gold Ltd), a company incorporated in South Africa with registration number 2002/031431/06.

Ghanaian Companies ” means Gold Fields Ghana Limited and Abosso Goldfields Limited.

Group ” means the Parent, the Guarantors and each of their Subsidiaries from time to time, provided that prior to the Demerger Date, GFIMSA and its Subsidiaries shall be deemed to not be members of the Group.

Group Company ” means a member of the Group.

Guarantor ” means an Original Guarantor or an Additional Guarantor unless, in the case of an Additional Guarantor, it has ceased to be a Guarantor in accordance with Clause 24 ( Changes to the Obligors ).

Holding Company ” means, in relation to a company or corporation, any other company or corporation in respect of which it is a Subsidiary.

IFRS ” means international accounting standards within the meaning of the IAS Regulation 1606/2002 to the extent applicable to the relevant financial statements.

Impaired Agent ” means the Agent at any time when:

 

  (a) it has failed to make (or has notified a Party that it will not make) a payment required to be made by it under the Finance Documents by the due date for payment;

 

  (b) the Agent otherwise rescinds or repudiates a Finance Document;

 

  (c) (if the Agent is also a Lender) it is a Defaulting Lender under paragraph (a) or (b) of the definition of “Defaulting Lender”; or

 

  (d) an Insolvency Event has occurred and is continuing with respect to the Agent;

unless, in the case of paragraph (a) above:

 

  (i) its failure to pay is caused by:

 

  (A) administrative or technical error; or

 

  (B) a Disruption Event; and

 

- 8 -


Table of Contents

payment is made within five (5) Business Days of its due date; or

 

  (ii) the Agent is disputing in good faith whether it is contractually obliged to make the payment in question.

Increased Costs ” has the meaning given to it in paragraph (b) of Clause 13.1 ( Increased costs ).

Indebtedness for Borrowed Money ” means Financial Indebtedness save for any indebtedness for or in respect of paragraphs (i) and (j) of the definition of “ Financial Indebtedness ”.

Information ” has the meaning given to such term in paragraph (a) of Clause 18.10 ( No misleading information ).

Information Package ” means (i) the projections and (ii) the presentation dated 22 October 2012 prepared by the Parent in order to solicit the assignment of a long term credit rating to the Parent from Moody’s and Standard & Poor’s each in the form approved and identified as such by the Parent, and each of which, at the Parent’s request and on its behalf, are to be posted on Debtdomain by Barclays Bank PLC (in its capacity as Arranger) in connection with syndication of the Facility.

Insolvency Event ” means, in relation to a Finance Party, that:

 

  (a) any receiver, administrative receiver, administrator, liquidator, compulsory manager or other similar officer is appointed in respect of that Finance Party or all or substantially all of its assets;

 

  (b) that Finance Party is subject to any event which has an analogous effect to any of the events specified in paragraph (a) above under the applicable laws of any jurisdiction; or

 

  (c) that Finance Party suspends making payments on all or substantially all of its debts or publicly announces an intention to do so.

Interest Period ” means, in relation to a Loan, each period determined in accordance with Clause 9 ( Interest Periods ) and, in relation to an Unpaid Sum, each period determined in accordance with Clause 8.3 ( Default interest ).

Lender ” means:

 

  (a) any Original Lender; and

 

  (b) any bank or financial institution which has become a Party in accordance with Clause 23 ( Changes to the Lenders ),

which in each case has not ceased to be a Lender in accordance with the terms of this Agreement.

LIBOR ” means, in relation to any Loan:

 

  (a) the applicable Screen Rate; or

 

- 9 -


Table of Contents
  (b) (if no Screen Rate is available for dollars for the Interest Period of that Loan) the arithmetic mean of the rates (rounded upwards to four decimal places) as supplied to the Agent at its request quoted by two (2) Reference Banks to leading banks in the London interbank market,

as of the Specified Time on the Quotation Day for the offering of deposits in dollars and for a period comparable to the Interest Period for that Loan.

LMA ” means the Loan Market Association.

Loan ” means a loan made or to be made under the Facility or the principal amount outstanding for the time being of that loan.

Majority Lenders ” means:

 

  (a) at any time there are only three Lenders, a Lender or Lenders whose Commitments aggregate 66 per cent. or more of the Total Commitments (or, if the Total Commitments have been reduced to zero, aggregated 66 per cent. or more of the Total Commitments immediately prior to the reduction); and

 

  (b)

at any other time, a Lender or Lenders whose Commitments aggregate more than 66  2 / 3  per cent. of the Total Commitments (or, if the Total Commitments have been reduced to zero, aggregated more than 66  2 / 3  per cent. of the Total Commitments immediately prior to the reduction).

Mandatory Cost ” means the percentage rate per annum calculated by the Agent in accordance with Schedule 4 ( Mandatory Cost Formula ).

Margin ” means for each period set out in the column to the left hand side below, the percentage rate per annum as set out below in the column on the right hand side below opposite such period:

 

Period

  

Margin p.a.

Until 30 June 2013

   2.00%

From 01 July 2013 – 31 October 2013

   2.50%

From 01 November 2013 – 28 February 2014

   3.25%

From 1 March 2014 – 31 May 2014

   3.75%

From 1 June 2014 – 31 August 2014

   4.25%

Market Disruption Event ” has the meaning given to it in paragraph (b) of Clause 10.2 ( Market disruption ).

Material Adverse Effect ” means a material adverse effect on:

 

  (a) the business, operations, property or financial condition of the Group taken as a whole;

 

- 10 -


Table of Contents
  (b) the ability of an Obligor to perform its financial or other material obligations under the Finance Documents to which it is a party; or

 

  (c) the validity or enforceability of the Finance Documents or any of them.

Material Group Company ” means:

 

  (a) the Obligors; and

 

  (b) any member of the Group from time to time that is not a Non-Material Group Company;

and “ Material Group Companies ” means, as the context requires, all of them.

Mining Charter ” has the meaning given to it in Clause 22.9 ( Creditors’ Process ).

Month ” means a period starting on one day in a calendar month and ending on the numerically corresponding day in the next calendar month, except that:

 

  (a) (subject to paragraph (c) below) if the numerically corresponding day is not a Business Day, that period shall end on the next Business Day in that calendar month in which that period is to end if there is one, or if there is not, on the immediately preceding Business Day;

 

  (b) if there is no numerically corresponding day in the calendar month in which that period is to end, that period shall end on the last Business Day in that calendar month; and

 

  (c) if an Interest Period begins on the last Business Day of a calendar month, that Interest Period shall end on the last Business Day in the calendar month in which that Interest Period is to end.

Paragraphs (a), (b) and (c) above will only apply to the last Month of any period.

Moody’s ” means Moody’s Investor Services Inc., or any successor to its rating agency function.

MPRDA ” has the meaning given to it in Clause 22.9 ( Creditors’ Process ).

New Lender ” has the meaning given to it in Clause 23.1 ( Assignments and transfers by the Lenders ).

Newshelf ” means Newshelf 899 Proprietary Limited, a company incorporated under the laws of South Africa.

Non-Material Group Company ” means, at any time, a member of the Group (other than an Obligor) which had EBITDA (determined on the same basis as Consolidated EBITDA) and gross assets in its most recently ended Financial Year (on a consolidated basis taking into account it and its subsidiaries only) less than ten per cent. (10%) of Consolidated EBITDA (but including, for these purposes only, the net income of any Project Finance Subsidiaries) and gross assets of the Group (calculated according to the most recent set of audited consolidated financial statements delivered

 

- 11 -


Table of Contents

pursuant to Clause 19.1 ( Financial Statements )). Compliance with the aforementioned condition shall be determined by reference to the latest audited financial statements of such member of the Group (consolidated in the case of a member of the Group which itself has Subsidiaries), provided that :

 

  (a) if, in the case of any member of the Group which itself has Subsidiaries, no consolidated financial statements are prepared and audited, its consolidated EBITDA and gross assets shall be determined on the basis of pro forma consolidated financial statements of the relevant member of the Group and its Subsidiaries, prepared for this purpose by the Parent;

 

  (b) following the Demerger, or if any intra-Group transfer or re-organisation takes place, the audited financial statements of the Group Company and all relevant members of the Group shall be adjusted by the Parent in order to take into account the Demerger or such intra-Group transfer or re-organisation; and

 

  (c) the audited financial statements of the Group and any relevant member of the Group shall be adjusted in such a manner as the Auditors think fair and appropriate to take account of the Demerger or the acquisition or disposal of any member of the Group or any business of any member of the Group, after the date or at which the audited financial statements of the Group are made up.

Should there be any dispute regarding whether any member of the Group is or is not a Non-Material Group Company such dispute shall be referred, at the request of the Agent, to the Auditors and a report by the Auditors that a member of the Group is or is not a Non-Material Group Company shall, in the absence of manifest error, be conclusive and binding on all Parties. The costs of obtaining the report by the Auditors will be borne by the unsuccessful party to the dispute.

Obligor ” means a Borrower or a Guarantor.

Original Financial Statements ” means the audited consolidated financial statements of the Parent for the Financial Year ended 31 December 2011.

Paper Form Lenders ” has the meaning given to it in paragraph (a) of Clause 19.7 ( Use of websites ).

Party ” means a party to this Agreement.

Permitted Disposal ” means any sale, lease, transfer or other disposal:

 

  (a) by an Obligor or any member of the Group of obsolete or redundant assets which are no longer required for the efficient operation of the business of such Obligor or such member of the Group; or

 

  (b) by an Obligor or any member of the Group in the ordinary course of its day-to-day business if that sale, lease, transfer or other disposal is not otherwise restricted by a term of any Finance Document; or

 

  (c) by an Obligor to another Obligor (other than to an Additional Obligor); or

 

- 12 -


Table of Contents
  (d) by a member of the Group that is not an Obligor to an Obligor or by an Obligor to an Additional Obligor or to a member of the Group that is not an Obligor if such sale, lease, transfer or other disposal is concluded at arm’s length; or

 

  (e) by a member of the Group that is not an Obligor to another member of the Group that is not an Obligor; or

 

  (f) by any member of the Group to any other person where the higher of the market value or consideration receivable when aggregated with the higher of the market value or consideration receivable for any other sale, lease, transfer or other disposal by any member of the Group (other than a sale, lease, transfer or other disposal referred to in (a), (b), (c), (d), (e) and (g)) does not exceed ten per cent. (10%) of the Consolidated Tangible Net Worth in any Financial Year subject to a maximum of twenty per cent. (20%) of Consolidated Tangible Net Worth at such time in aggregate during the period from the date of this Agreement to the Termination Date; or

 

  (g) for which the Agent has given its prior written consent (acting on the instructions of the Majority Lenders).

Permitted Encumbrance ” means:

 

  (a) any Encumbrance created prior to the date of this Agreement which (i) is disclosed in the Original Financial Statements and (ii) in all circumstances secures only indebtedness outstanding or a facility available at the date of this Agreement if the principal amount or original facility thereby secured is not increased after the date of this Agreement;

 

  (b) any title transfer or retention arrangement entered into by any member of the Group in the normal course of its trading activities and on terms no worse for that member of the Group than the standard terms of the relevant supplier;

 

  (c) any netting or set-off arrangement entered into by any member of the Group in the ordinary course of its banking arrangements (which shall include, for the avoidance of doubt, those pursuant to hedging arrangements in relation to gold, silver, copper and other commodity prices, foreign exchange rates and interest rates where such arrangements are entered into for the purposes of providing protection against fluctuation in such rates or prices in the ordinary course of business), for the purpose of netting debit and credit balances;

 

  (d) any lien arising by operation of law and in the ordinary course of trading and not by reason of any default (whether in payments or otherwise), of any member of the Group;

 

- 13 -


Table of Contents
  (e) any Encumbrance over or affecting (or transaction described in paragraph (b) of Clause 21.3 ( Negative Pledge ) (“ Quasi-Encumbrance ”) affecting) any asset acquired by a member of the Group after the date of this Agreement if:

 

  (i) the Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance was not created in contemplation of the acquisition of that asset by a member of the Group;

 

  (ii) the principal amount secured has not been increased in contemplation of, or since the acquisition of that asset by a member of the Group; and

 

  (iii) the Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance is (other than an Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance otherwise permitted pursuant to paragraphs (b), (c), (d), (f), (g), (i) or (j)) removed or discharged within six (6) months of the date of acquisition of such asset;

 

  (f) any Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance over or affecting any asset of any company which becomes a member of the Group after the date of this Agreement, where the Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance is created prior to the date on which that company becomes a member of the Group, if:

 

  (i) the Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance was not created in contemplation of the acquisition of that company;

 

  (ii) the principal amount secured has not increased in contemplation of or since the acquisition of that company; and

 

  (iii) the Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance is (other than an Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance otherwise permitted pursuant to paragraphs (b), (c), (d), (e), (g), (i) or (j)) removed or discharged within six (6) months of that company becoming a member of the Group;

 

  (g) any Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance granted in respect of Project Finance Borrowings over assets of, or the shares in, a Project Finance Subsidiary (other than the Cerro Corona Subsidiary);

 

  (h) any Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance resulting from the rules and regulations of any clearing system or stock exchange over shares and/or other securities held in that clearing system or stock exchange;

 

  (i) in respect of Encumbrances or Quasi-Encumbrances over or affecting any asset of any Material Group Company (other than the Cerro Corona Subsidiary), any Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance securing indebtedness the principal amount of which (when aggregated with the principal amount of any other indebtedness which has the benefit of Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance other than any permitted under paragraphs (a) to (h) above and (j) and (k) below) does not at any time exceed ten per cent. (10%) of Consolidated Tangible Net Worth (or its equivalent in another currency) (but adjusted to include the net value of new assets acquired since the last date of the latest set of consolidated annual financial statements of the Group);

 

- 14 -


Table of Contents
  (j) any other Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance as agreed by the Agent (acting on the instructions of the Majority Lenders) in writing; or

 

  (k) any Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance granted in respect of Financial Indebtedness incurred in connection with the Cerro Corona Project over the business or assets of the Cerro Corona Subsidiary or over the Ownership Interests in the Cerro Corona Subsidiary provided that the amount of Financial Indebtedness secured by all such Encumbrances or Quasi-Encumbrances permitted by this paragraph (k) does not at any time in aggregate exceed two hundred million dollars ($200,000,000) (or its equivalent). In this paragraph (k) “Ownership Interests” means (i) the shares issued by the Cerro Corona Subsidiary, (ii) any shareholder loans made to the Cerro Corona Subsidiary (iii) to the extent required by Peruvian law, the shares in the Holding Company which directly owns the shares issued by the Cerro Corona Subsidiary provided that such Holding Company’s sole assets are shares issued by, and any loans made by it to, the Cerro Corona Subsidiary and its sister company, Minera Gold Fields S.A.

Permitted Financial Indebtedness ” means any Financial Indebtedness:

 

  (a) arising under the Finance Documents;

 

  (b) arising under any environmental bond which any member of the Group is required to issue by any applicable law;

 

  (c) arising in connection with the Cerro Corona Project, provided that , the aggregate amount of all such Financial Indebtedness does not at any time exceed two hundred million dollars ($200,000,000) (or its equivalent);

 

  (d) arising under any derivative transaction entered into in connection with protection against or benefit from fluctuation in any rate or price but not for speculative purposes;

 

  (e) of the Group existing and available on the date of this Agreement (or, of any person that becomes a member of the Group from time to time, provided that , such Financial Indebtedness existed at the time such person became a member of the Group and was not created in anticipation thereof);

 

  (f) between Group Companies to the extent incurred for the purposes of financing general corporate and working capital requirements; or

 

  (g) not falling within paragraphs (a), (b), (c), (d), (e) or (f) above provided that the aggregate amount of all Financial Indebtedness (excluding, for the avoidance of doubt, any Financial Indebtedness incurred by a Guarantor or a Project Finance Subsidiary) permitted under this paragraph (g) does not at any time exceed two hundred and fifty million dollars ($250,000,000) (or its equivalent).

Permitted Guarantee ” means:

 

  (a) any guarantees of any Financial Indebtedness of any member of the Group;

 

- 15 -


Table of Contents
  (b) any guarantee given in respect of the netting or set-off arrangements permitted pursuant to paragraph (c) of the definition of “Permitted Encumbrances”;

 

  (c) any guarantee or indemnities outstanding on the date of this Agreement (which for the avoidance of doubt shall include the indemnity granted in favour of GFIMSA in relation to its obligations under the Existing Bond); or

 

  (d) any guarantees not falling within paragraphs (a), (b) or (c) above so long as the aggregate amount of such guarantees outstanding at any time when aggregated with the amount of any loans permitted pursuant to paragraph (f) of “Permitted Loan” does not exceed $200,000,000 (or its equivalent) at any time.

Permitted Loan” means:

 

  (a) any trade credit extended by any member of the Group to its customers on normal commercial terms and in the ordinary course of its trading activities;

 

  (b) Financial Indebtedness which is referred to in the definition of, or otherwise constitutes, Permitted Financial Indebtedness (except under paragraph (d) of that definition);

 

  (c) a loan made by an Obligor to another Obligor or made by a Material Group Company which is not an Obligor to another Material Group Company;

 

  (d) any loan between Group Companies to the extent made for the purposes of financing general corporate and working capital requirements;

 

  (e) any loan made by an Obligor or Material Group Company which is outstanding on the date of this Agreement; or

 

  (f) any loan (other than a loan permitted under paragraphs (a), (b), (c), (d) or (e) above) so long as the aggregate amount of the Financial Indebtedness under any such loans when aggregated with the amount of any guarantees permitted pursuant to paragraph (d) of “Permitted Guarantee” does not exceed $200,000,000 (or its equivalent) at any time.

Project Finance Borrowings ” means:

 

  (a) any indebtedness to finance (or re-finance) a project comprised of the ownership, development, construction, refurbishment, commissioning and/or operation of assets which is incurred by a Project Finance Subsidiary in connection with such project and in respect of which the recourse of the person(s) making any such finance (or re-finance) available to that Project Finance Subsidiary for the payment, repayment and prepayment of such indebtedness is limited to (i) the Project Finance Subsidiary and its assets and/or the shares in that Project Finance Subsidiary and/or (ii) during the period prior to successful completion of the relevant completion tests applicable to such project guarantees from any one or more members of the Group; or

 

- 16 -


Table of Contents
  (b) any indebtedness the terms and conditions of which have been approved by the Agent and which the Agent has agreed in writing (acting on the instructions of the Majority Lenders) to treat as a “Project Finance Borrowing” for the purposes of the Finance Documents.

Project Finance Subsidiary ” means a single purpose company or other entity (excluding the Obligors) whose sole business is a project comprised of the ownership, development, construction, refurbishment, commissioning and/or operation of an asset which has incurred Project Finance Borrowings.

Quotation Day ” means, in the case of a determination of LIBOR, the date on which quotations would customarily be provided by leading banks in the London Interbank Market for deposits or amounts in dollars for delivery on the first day of such period or on any other relevant date.

Recipient ” has the meaning given to it in paragraph (b) of Clause 12.5 ( Value added tax ).

Recovered Amount ” has the meaning given to it in Clause 27.1 ( Payments to Finance Parties ).

Recovering Finance Party ” has the meaning given to it in Clause 27.1 ( Payments to Finance Parties ).

Redistributed Amount ” has the meaning given to it in Clause 27.4 ( Reversal of redistribution ).

Reference Banks ” means the principal London offices of The Bank of Tokyo-Mitsubishi UFJ, Ltd., and Barclays Bank PLC and/or such other banks as may be appointed by the Agent in consultation with the Parent.

Related Fund ” in relation to a fund (the “ first fund ”), means a fund which is managed or advised by the same investment manager or investment adviser as the first fund or, if it is managed by a different investment manager or investment adviser, a fund whose investment manager or investment adviser is an Affiliate of the investment manager or investment adviser of the first fund.

Relevant Interbank Market ” means the London interbank market.

Relevant Provision ” means any financial covenant or other similar covenant or undertaking that requires the Parent, any member of the Group or the Group (as a whole) to achieve and maintain a stated level of financial condition or financial performance (or any event of default that has an equivalent effect).

Repeating Representations ” means each of the representations set out in Clause 18.1 ( Status ) to Clause 18.22 ( No Material Adverse Effect ) inclusive, other than Clause 18.3 ( Binding Obligations ), Clause 18.6 ( Governing law and enforcement ), Clause 18.7 ( Deduction of Tax ), Clause 18.8 ( No filing or stamp taxes ), paragraphs (a) and (b) of Clause 18.10 ( No misleading information ) and Clause 18.13 ( No proceedings pending or threatened ).

 

- 17 -


Table of Contents

Replacement Lender ” has the meaning given to it in paragraph (a) of Clause 34.4 ( Replacement of a Defaulting Lender ).

Representative ” means any delegate, agent, manager, administrator, nominee, attorney, trustee or custodian.

Resignation Letter ” means a letter substantially in the form set out in Schedule 8 ( Form of Resignation Letter ).

Retiring Guarantor ” has the meaning given to it in Clause 17.8 ( Release of Guarantors’ right of contribution ).

Screen Rate ” means the London interbank offered rate for dollars for the relevant period, displayed on the appropriate page (being currently LIBOR 01) of the Reuters screen. If the agreed page is replaced or service ceases to be available, the Agent may specify another page or service displaying the appropriate rate after consultation with the Parent and the Lenders.

Selection Notice ” means a notice substantially in the form set out in Part II of Schedule 3 ( Requests ) given in accordance with Clause 9 ( Interest Periods ) in relation to the Facility.

Sharing Finance Parties ” has the meaning given to it in Clause 27.2 ( Redistribution of payments ).

Sharing Payment ” has the meaning given to it in Clause 27.1 ( Payments to Finance Parties ).

Specified Time ” means a time determined in accordance with Schedule 10 ( Timetable ).

Standard & Poor’s ” means Standard & Poor’s, a division of the McGraw Hill Companies Inc., or any successor to its rating agency function.

Subject Party ” has the meaning given to it in paragraph (b) of Clause 12.5 ( Value added tax ).

Subsidiary ” means, in relation to any company or corporation, a company or corporation:

 

  (a) which is controlled, directly or indirectly, by the first mentioned company or corporation;

 

  (b) more than half the issued share capital of which is beneficially owned, directly or indirectly by the first mentioned company or corporation; or

 

  (c) which is a Subsidiary of another Subsidiary of the first mentioned company or corporation,

and for this purpose, a company or corporation shall be treated as being controlled by another if that other company or corporation is able to direct its affairs and/or to control the composition of its board of directors or equivalent body.

 

- 18 -


Table of Contents

Supplier ” has the meaning given to it in paragraph (b) of Clause 12.5 ( Value added tax ).

Tax ” means any tax, levy, impost, duty or other charge or withholding of a similar nature (including, without limitation, any penalty or interest payable in connection with any failure to pay or any delay in paying any of the same).

Tax Credit ” means a credit against, relief or remission for, or repayment of any Tax.

Tax Deduction ” means a deduction or withholding for or on account of Tax from a payment under a Finance Document.

Tax Payment ” means either the increase in a payment made by an Obligor to a Finance Party under Clause 12.1 ( Tax gross-up ) or a payment under Clause 12.2 ( Tax indemnity ).

Termination Date ” means the date falling 21 Months from the date of this Agreement.

Total Commitments ” means the aggregate of the Commitments, being US$600,000,000 at the date of this Agreement.

Transfer Certificate ” means a certificate substantially in the form set out in Schedule 5 ( Form of Transfer Certificate ) or any other form agreed between the Agent and the Parent.

Transfer Date ” means, in relation to an assignment or a transfer:

 

  (a) the proposed Transfer Date specified in the relevant Assignment Agreement or Transfer Certificate; or

 

  (b) in the event that no Transfer Date is specified in the relevant Assignment Agreement or Transfer Certificate, the date on which the Agent executes the relevant Assignment Agreement or Transfer Certificate.

Unpaid Sum ” means any sum due and payable but unpaid by an Obligor under the Finance Documents.

Utilisation ” means a utilisation of the Facility.

Utilisation Date ” means the date of a Utilisation, being the date on which the relevant Loan is to be made.

Utilisation Request ” means a notice substantially in the form set out in Schedule 3 ( Utilisation Request ).

VAT ” means value added tax as provided for in the Value Added Tax Act 1994 and any other tax of a similar nature.

Website Lenders ” has the meaning given to it in paragraph (a) of Clause 19.7 ( Use of websites ).

 

- 19 -


Table of Contents
1.2 Construction

 

  (a) Unless a contrary indication appears any reference in this Agreement to:

 

  (i) the “ Agent ”, the “ Arranger ”, any “ Finance Party ”, any “ Lender ”, any “ Obligor ” or any “ Party ” shall be construed so as to include its successors in title, permitted assigns and permitted transferees;

 

  (ii) arm’s length ” means terms that are fair and reasonable to the counterparty of a transaction and no more or less favourable to the other party to the relevant transaction as could reasonably be expected to be obtained in a comparable arm’s length transaction with a person that is not the ultimate Holding Company of such counterparty or an entity of which such counterparty or its ultimate Holding Company has direct or indirect control, or owns directly or indirectly more than twenty per cent. (20%) of the share capital or similar rights of ownership;

 

  (iii) assets ” includes present and future properties, revenues and rights of every description;

 

  (iv) audited ” means, in respect of any financial statement, those financial statements as audited by the Auditors;

 

  (v) authorisations ” mean any authorisation, consent, registration, filing agreement, notarisation, certificate, licence, approval, resolution, permit and/or authority or any exemption from any of the aforesaid, by, with or from any authority (including, without limitation, any approvals required from the South African Reserve Bank in relation to any Finance Document or any transaction contemplated under any Finance Document);

 

  (vi) a “ Finance Document ” or any other agreement or instrument is a reference to that Finance Document or other agreement or instrument as amended, novated, supplemented, extended, replaced or restated;

 

  (vii) a “ guarantee ” means (other than in Clause 17 ( Guarantee and Indemnity ), any guarantee, letter of credit, bond, indemnity or similar assurance against loss, or any obligation, direct or indirect, actual or contingent to purchase or assume any indebtedness of any person or to make any investment in or loan to any person or to purchase assets of any person where, in each case, such obligation is assumed in order to maintain or assist the ability of such person to meet its indebtedness;

 

  (viii) indebtedness ” shall be construed so as to include any obligation (whether incurred as principal or as surety) for the payment or repayment of money, whether present or future, actual or contingent;

 

  (ix)

law ” shall be construed as any law (including statutory, common or customary law), statute, constitution, decree, judgment, treaty, regulation, directive, by-law, order, other legislative measure,

 

- 20 -


Table of Contents
  requirement, request or guideline (whether or not having the force of law but, if not having the force of law, is generally complied with by the persons to whom it is addressed or applied) of any government, supranational, local government, statutory or regulatory or self-regulatory or similar body or authority or court and the common law, as amended, replaced, re-enacted, restated or reinterpreted from time to time;

 

  (x) a “ person ” includes any individual, firm, company, corporation, government, state or agency of a state or any association, trust, joint venture, consortium or partnership (whether or not having separate legal personality);

 

  (xi) a “ regulation ” includes any regulation, rule, official directive, request or guideline (whether or not having the force of law but complied with generally) of any governmental, intergovernmental or supranational body, agency, department or regulatory, self-regulatory or other authority or organisation;

 

  (xii) a provision of law is a reference to that provision as amended or re-enacted; and

 

  (xiii) a time of day is a reference to London time.

 

  (b) Section, Clause and Schedule headings are for ease of reference only.

 

  (c) Unless a contrary indication appears, a term used in any other Finance Document or in any notice given under or in connection with any Finance Document has the same meaning in that Finance Document or notice as in this Agreement.

 

  (d) A Default is “ continuing ” if it has not been remedied or waived.

 

1.3 Currency Symbols and Definitions

US$ ”, “ $ ” and “ dollars ” denote lawful currency of the United States of America.

 

1.4 Third party rights

 

  (a) Unless expressly provided to the contrary in a Finance Document, a person who is not a Party has no right under the Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999 (the “ Third Parties Act ”) to enforce or to enjoy the benefit of any term of this Agreement.

 

  (b) Notwithstanding any term of any Finance Document, the consent of any person who is not a Party is not required to rescind or vary this Agreement at any time.

 

- 21 -


Table of Contents

SECTION 2

THE FACILITY

 

2. THE FACILITY

 

2.1 The Facility

Subject to the terms of this Agreement, the Lenders make available to the Borrowers a dollar term loan facility in an aggregate amount equal to the Total Commitments.

 

2.2 Finance Parties’ rights and obligations

 

  (a) The obligations of each Finance Party under the Finance Documents are several. Failure by a Finance Party to perform its obligations under the Finance Documents does not affect the obligations of any other Party under the Finance Documents. No Finance Party is responsible for the obligations of any other Finance Party under the Finance Documents.

 

  (b) The rights of each Finance Party under or in connection with the Finance Documents are separate and independent rights and any debt arising under the Finance Documents to a Finance Party from an Obligor shall be a separate and independent debt.

 

  (c) A Finance Party may, except as otherwise stated in the Finance Documents, separately enforce its rights under the Finance Documents.

 

3. PURPOSE

 

3.1 Purpose

 

  (a) The Original Borrowers shall apply all amounts borrowed by them under the Facility towards their general corporate and working capital purposes.

 

  (b) Each Additional Borrower shall apply all amounts borrowed by it under the Facility towards the purposes specified in the Accession Letter to which it is a party as Additional Borrower.

 

3.2 Monitoring

No Finance Party is bound to monitor or verify the application of any amount borrowed pursuant to this Agreement.

 

4. CONDITIONS OF UTILISATION

 

4.1 Initial conditions precedent

 

  (a) No Borrower may deliver a Utilisation Request unless the Agent has received all of the documents and other evidence listed in Part 1 of Schedule 2 ( Conditions Precedent to Initial Utilisation ) other than the evidence referred to in paragraph 3(i) of Part 1 of that schedule in form and substance satisfactory to the Agent. The Agent shall notify the Parent and the Lenders promptly upon being so satisfied.

 

- 22 -


Table of Contents
  (b) The Lenders will only be obliged to comply with Clause 5.4 ( Lenders Participation ) in relation to any Utilisation if on or before 12.00 noon London time on the proposed Utilisation Date for that Utilisation, the Agent has received all of the documents and other evidence listed in Part 1 of Schedule 2 ( Conditions Precedent to Initial Utilisation ) in form and substance satisfactory to the Agent. The Agent shall notify the Parent and the Lenders promptly upon being so satisfied.

 

4.2 Further Conditions Precedent

Subject to Clause 4.1 ( Initial Conditions Precedent) the Lenders will only be obliged to comply with Clause 5.4 ( Lenders Participation ) if on the date of the Utilisation Request and on the proposed Utilisation Date:

 

  (a) no Default is continuing or would result from the proposed Loan; and

 

  (b) the Repeating Representations to be made by each Obligor are true in all material respects.

 

4.3 Maximum number of Loans

 

  (a) A Borrower may not deliver a Utilisation Request if as a result of the proposed Utilisation more than 10 Loans would be outstanding.

 

  (b) A Borrower may not request that a Loan be divided if, as a result of the proposed division, 20 or more Loans would be outstanding.

 

- 23 -


Table of Contents

SECTION 3

UTILISATION

 

5. UTILISATION

 

5.1 Delivery of a Utilisation Request

A Borrower may utilise the Facility by delivery to the Agent of a duly completed Utilisation Request not later than the Specified Time.

 

5.2 Completion of a Utilisation Request

 

  (a) Each Utilisation Request is irrevocable and will not be regarded as having been duly completed unless:

 

  (i) the proposed Utilisation Date is a Business Day within the Availability Period;

 

  (ii) the currency and amount of the Utilisation comply with Clause 5.3 ( Currency and amount ); and

 

  (iii) the proposed Interest Period complies with Clause 9 ( Interest Periods ).

 

  (b) Only one Loan may be requested in each Utilisation Request.

 

5.3 Currency and amount

 

  (a) The currency specified in a Utilisation Request must be dollars.

 

  (b) The amount of the proposed Loan must be an amount which is not more than the Available Facility and which is a minimum of twenty million dollars ($20,000,000) or, if less, the Available Facility.

 

5.4 Lenders’ participation

 

  (a) If the conditions set out in this Agreement have been met, each Lender shall make its participation in each Loan available by the Utilisation Date through its Facility Office.

 

  (b) The amount of each Lender’s participation in each Loan will be equal to the proportion borne by its Available Commitment to the Available Facility immediately prior to making that Loan.

 

  (c) The Agent shall notify each Lender of the amount of each Loan and the amount of its participation in that Loan by the Specified Time.

 

5.5 Cancellation of Commitment

The Commitments which, at that time, are unutilised shall be immediately cancelled at the end of the Availability Period.

 

- 24 -


Table of Contents

SECTION 4

REPAYMENT, PREPAYMENT AND CANCELLATION

 

6. REPAYMENT

 

6.1 Repayment of Loans

Each Borrower which has drawn a Loan shall repay that Loan in full on the Termination Date.

 

7. PREPAYMENT AND CANCELLATION

 

7.1 Illegality

If it becomes unlawful in any applicable jurisdiction for a Lender to perform any of its obligations as contemplated by this Agreement or to fund or maintain its participation in any Loan:

 

  (a) that Lender shall promptly notify the Agent upon becoming aware of that event;

 

  (b) upon the Agent notifying the Parent, the Commitment of that Lender will be immediately cancelled; and

 

  (c) each Borrower shall repay that Lender’s participation in the Loans made to that Borrower on the last day of the Interest Period for each Loan occurring after the Agent has notified the Parent or, if earlier, the date specified by the Lender in the notice delivered to the Agent (being no earlier than the last day of any applicable grace period permitted by law).

 

7.2 Change of control

 

  (a) If any person or group of persons acting in concert gains control of the Parent:

 

  (i) the Parent shall promptly notify the Agent upon becoming aware of that event;

 

  (ii) a Lender shall not be obliged to fund a Utilisation and the Agent and the Parent shall consult about the change of control;

 

  (iii) if the Majority Lenders so require after a period of forty-five (45) days from receipt of the notice referred to in (i) above (provided, for the avoidance of doubt, failure of the Parent to provide such notice shall not prevent the Lenders from taking the following actions), the Agent shall by notice to the Parent, (such notice to be delivered no later than sixty (60) days from receipt of the notice referred to in (i) above), cancel the Total Commitments and declare all outstanding Loans, together with accrued interest and all other amounts accrued under the Finance Documents immediately due and payable, whereupon the Total Commitments will be cancelled and all such outstanding amounts will become immediately due and payable;

 

- 25 -


Table of Contents
  (iv) if the Agent does not serve the notice referred to in paragraph (iii) above, a Lender may by notice to the Agent which shall be delivered not earlier than forty-five (45) days nor later than sixty (60) days from receipt of the notice referred to in (i) above, whereupon the Agent shall by notice to the Parent (such notice to be delivered promptly after receipt of such Lender notification), cancel the Commitment of that Lender and declare the participation of that Lender in all outstanding Loans, together with accrued interest thereon and all other amounts due to such Lender under the Finance Documents immediately due and payable, whereupon the Commitment of that Lender will be cancelled and all such outstanding amounts will become immediately due and payable.

 

  (b) For the purpose of paragraph (a) above “ control ” means:

 

  (i) the power (whether by way of ownership of shares, proxy, contract, agency or otherwise) to:

 

  (A) cast, or control the casting of, more than one-half of the maximum number of votes that might be cast at a general meeting of the Parent; or

 

  (B) appoint or remove all, or the majority, of the directors or other equivalent officers of the Parent; or

 

  (C) give directions with respect to the operating and financial policies of the Parent which the directors or other equivalent officers of the Parent are obliged to comply with; or

 

  (ii) the holding of more than one-half of the issued share capital of the Parent (excluding any part of that issued share capital that carries no right to participate beyond a specified amount in a distribution of either profits or capital).

 

  (c) For the purpose of paragraph (a) above “ acting in concert ” means, a group of persons who, pursuant to an agreement or understanding (whether formal or informal), actively co-operate, through the acquisition by any of them, either directly or indirectly, of shares in the Parent, to obtain or consolidate control of the Parent.

 

7.3 Demerger Date

If the Demerger Date has not occurred on or before 28 February 2013 the Total Commitments shall automatically be cancelled and any amounts accrued under the Finance Documents shall become immediately due and payable.

 

- 26 -


Table of Contents
7.4 Mandatory Prepayment upon Capital Markets Issue

 

  (a) For the purpose of Clause 7:

 

  (i) Debt Capital Markets Issue ” means any Financial Indebtedness incurred by any member of the Group by way of the issue of bonds, notes, convertible bonds, hybrid instruments, debentures or other similar securities in any public or private placement raised in the international or domestic debt capital markets after the date of this Agreement

 

  (ii) Excluded Funds Raising ” means:

 

  (A) the Credit Facilities Agreement;

 

  (B) any Refinancing Funds Raising; and

 

  (C) any Funds Raising (other than the Credit Facilities Agreement, a Refinancing Funds Raising or a Funds Raising entered into for the purpose of refinancing the Facility) in respect of which cash proceeds actually received by the relevant member(s) of the Group when aggregated with (x) the cash proceeds actually received by any member of the Group in connection with any other Funds Raising (other than the Credit Facilities Agreement, a Refinancing Funds Raising or a Funds Raising entered into for the purpose of refinancing the Facility) entered into after the date of this Agreement and (y) the proceeds of any Excluded Disposal referred to in subparagraph (ii) of the definition thereof, are less than $50,000,000 (or its equivalent).

 

  (iii) Existing Facility ” means (A) the Existing Facility Agreements, but only if they are refinanced by the Credit Facilities Agreement; and (B) any credit facility, bond or note facility or loan agreement not referred to in (A) above that is outstanding on the date of this Agreement pursuant to which a member of the Group is a Borrower, but for the avoidance of doubt neither the Facility nor this Agreement shall be an Existing Facility.

 

  (iv) Funds Raising ” means (A) the raising of funds by any member of the Group, by any issue, sale or public offering of any equity security (including preference shares) in the equity markets or equity linked markets by the Parent (or any other member of the Group), (B) any Debt Capital Markets Issue, or (C) any bank finance in either the bilateral or syndicated loan market raised by any member of the Group.

 

- 27 -


Table of Contents
  (v) Net Proceeds ” means the cash proceeds actually received by the relevant member of the Group after the date of this Agreement under any Funds Raising (including without limitation a Funds Raising entered into for the purpose of refinancing the Facility) other than an Excluded Funds Raising and after deducting:

 

  (A) Taxes (and amounts reasonably reserved in respect of Taxes) incurred and required to be paid by the relevant member of the Group in respect of that Funds Raising (as reasonably determined by that member of the Group, on the basis of existing rates and taking account of any available credit, deduction or allowance); and

 

  (B) any reasonable expenses which are incurred by the relevant member of the Group to persons who are not members of the Group directly in connection with that Funds Raising.

 

  (vi) Refinancing Funds Raising ” means a Funds Raising entered into for the purpose of refinancing an Existing Facility (in an amount no greater than the original amount of that Existing Facility).

 

  (b) Subject to Clause 7.6 ( Mandatory prepayment – General ), the Parent shall ensure that an amount equal to the Net Proceeds is applied by a Borrower or Borrowers in prepayment of the Utilisations, and/or cancellation (as applicable) of the Available Commitments promptly upon receipt by the relevant member of the Group of such proceeds, but to the extent there are Utilisations outstanding, the Net Proceeds may be applied in prepayment of such Utilisations on the last day of the current Interest Period (of such Utilisations) during which such Net Proceeds are received.

 

7.5 Mandatory Prepayment Upon Disposals

 

  (a) For the purpose of Clause 7:

Disposal ” means a sale, lease, licence, transfer, loan or other disposal by a person of any asset, undertaking or business (whether by a voluntary or involuntary single transaction or series of transactions).

Disposal Proceeds ” means the consideration received by any member of the Group (including any amount receivable in repayment of intercompany debt) for any Disposal (including without limitation, a Specified Disposal) made by any member of the Group other than a Excluded Disposal and after deducting:

 

  (i) any reasonable expenses which are incurred by any member of the Group with respect to that Disposal to persons who are not members of the Group; and

 

  (ii) any Tax incurred and required to be paid by the seller in connection with that Disposal (as reasonably determined by the seller, on the basis of existing rates and taking account of any available credit, deduction or allowance).

 

- 28 -


Table of Contents

Excluded Disposal ” means:

 

  (i) any Disposal under paragraphs (b), (c), (d) or (e) of the definition of Permitted Disposals; and

 

  (ii) any Disposal (other than a Disposal referred to in (i) above or any Specified Disposal) where the consideration received by any member of the Group (including any amounts received in repayment of intercompany debt) for that disposal when aggregated with (x) the consideration received for all other Disposals (other than Disposals referred to in (i) above or any Specified Disposal) after the date of this Agreement and (y) the cash proceeds of any Excluded Funds Raising is less than US$50,000,000 (or its equivalent).

Specified Disposal ” means any Disposal by a member of the Group in relation to (i) up to 51 per cent. of the Chucapaka project in Peru; (ii) up to 100 per cent, of the Arctic Platinum project in Finland; (iii) up to 40 per cent. of Far Southeast project in the Philippines; (iv) the Yanfolila and the Komana projects in Mali; (v) the Woodjam project in Canada; and (vi) royalty streams relating to the Parent’s exploration portfolio.

 

  (b) Subject to Clause 7.6 ( Mandatory prepayment – General ), the Parent shall ensure that an amount equal to the Disposal Proceeds, is applied by a Borrower or Borrowers in prepayment of the Utilisations, and/or cancellation (as applicable) of the Available Commitments promptly upon receipt of such proceeds by the relevant member of the Group, but to the extent there are Utilisations outstanding, the Disposal Proceeds may be applied in prepayment of such Utilisations on the last day of the current Interest Period (of such Utilisations) during which such Disposal Proceeds are received.

 

7.6 Mandatory Prepayment – General

 

  (a) For the purpose of this Clause 7.6, “ Loan Proportion ” means the proportion which a Lender’s participation in all outstanding Loans, bears to the total amount of all outstanding Loans.

 

  (b) Subject to paragraph (c) below the Parent shall not be obliged to ensure and the Borrowers shall not be obliged to prepay Utilisations from any Net Proceeds or Disposal Proceeds in the manner contemplated pursuant to Clauses 7.4 and 7.5 (a “ Prepayment Withholding ”) if and to the extent it is illegal for a member of the Group to pay or distribute such Net Proceeds or Disposal Proceeds (either by way of intercompany loan, distribution or otherwise (or, in each case, it would be a breach of the fiduciary or statutory duties of the relevant officers or directors to do so)) to the Borrowers in order to enable the Borrowers to apply such Net Proceeds or Disposal Proceeds in prepayment of the Facility, provided that :

 

  (i) the Parent shall, and shall procure that the relevant members of the Group will, use all reasonable endeavours to overcome or avoid illegality, breach of fiduciary or statutory duties; and

 

- 29 -


Table of Contents
  (ii) if, following a change in law and/or fiduciary or statutory duty the payment or distribution of such Net Proceeds or Disposal Proceeds is no longer illegal (and no longer a breach of the fiduciary or statutory duties), the Borrowers must ensure that an amount equal to those Net Proceeds or Disposal Proceeds is promptly applied in prepayment and/or cancellation (as applicable).

 

  (c) Paragraph (b) shall not apply to any Disposal Proceeds received as consideration for a Specified Disposal.

 

  (d) The Parent shall notify the Agent promptly upon receipt by any member of the Group (and in any event within 3 Business Days) of any Net Proceeds or any Disposal Proceeds, and the Agent shall promptly notify the Lenders.

 

  (e) To the extent that any Borrower(s) are required to prepay outstanding Utilisations pursuant to Clause 7.4 ( Mandatory Prepayment Upon Capital Markets Issue ) or Clause 7.5 ( Mandatory Prepayment Upon Disposals ), any Lender may, by 3 Business Days notice to the Parent, require the Parent to ensure that the relevant Borrower(s) promptly prepay (without any Break Costs (which shall be borne by that relevant Lender)) that Lender’s participation in all outstanding Loans in an amount equal to the proportion of the Net Proceeds or Disposal Proceeds (as applicable) which is equivalent to that Lender’s Loan Proportion and the Commitment of that Lender will be cancelled in an amount equal to that Lender’s Loan Proportion.

 

7.7 Voluntary cancellation

During the Availability Period, the Parent may, if it gives the Agent not less than five (5) Business Days’ (or such shorter period as the Majority Lenders may agree) prior notice, cancel the whole or any part (being a minimum amount of US$10,000,000) of the Available Facility. Any cancellation under this Clause 7.7 shall reduce the Commitments of the Lenders rateably.

 

7.8 Voluntary Prepayment of Loans

 

  (a) A Borrower to which a Loan has been made may, if it gives the Agent not less than 5 Business Days’ (or such shorter period as the Majority Lenders may agree) prior notice, prepay the whole or any part of any Loan (but, if in part, being an amount that reduces the amount of the Loan by a minimum amount of US$10,000,000).

 

  (b) A Loan may only be prepaid after the last day of the Availability Period (or, if earlier, the day on which the Available Facility is zero).

 

7.9 Right of replacement or repayment and cancellation in relation to a single Lender

 

  (a) If:

 

  (i) any sum payable to any Lender by an Obligor is required to be increased under paragraph (c) of Clause 12.1 ( Tax gross-up ); or

 

- 30 -


Table of Contents
  (ii) any Lender claims indemnification from the Parent under Clause 12.2 ( Tax indemnity ) or Clause 13.1 ( Increased costs ); or

 

  (iii) any Lender notifies the Agent of its Additional Cost Rate under paragraph 3 of Schedule 4 ( Mandatory Cost Formula ),

the Parent may, whilst (in the case of paragraphs (i) and (ii) above) the circumstance giving rise to the requirement for that increase or indemnification continues or (in the case of paragraph (iii) above) that Additional Cost Rate is greater than zero, give the Agent notice of cancellation of the Commitment of that Lender and its intention to procure the repayment of that Lender’s participation in the Loans or give the Agent notice of its intention to replace that Lender in accordance with paragraph (d) below.

 

  (b) On receipt of a notice of cancellation referred to in paragraph (a) above, the Commitment of that Lender shall immediately be reduced to zero whereupon the Total Commitments shall be reduced by the same amount.

 

  (c) On the last day of each Interest Period which ends after the Parent has given notice of cancellation under paragraph (a) above (or, if earlier, the date specified by the Parent in that notice), each Borrower to which a Loan is outstanding shall repay that Lender’s participation in that Loan.

 

  (d) The Parent may, in the circumstances set out in paragraph (a) above, on five (5) Business Days’ prior notice to the Agent and that Lender, replace that Lender by requiring that Lender to (and, to the extent permitted by law, that Lender shall) transfer pursuant to Clause 23 ( Changes to the Lenders ) all (and not part only) of its rights and obligations under this Agreement to a Lender or other bank, financial institution, trust, fund or other entity selected by the Parent which confirms its willingness to assume and does assume all the obligations of the transferring Lender in accordance with Clause 23 ( Changes to the Lenders ) for a purchase price in cash or other cash payment payable at the time of the transfer equal to the outstanding principal amount of such Lender’s participation in the outstanding Loans and all accrued interest (to the extent that the Agent has not given a notification under Clause 23.9 ( Pro rata interest settlement )), Break Costs and other amounts payable in relation thereto under the Finance Documents.

 

  (e) The replacement of a Lender pursuant to paragraph (d) above shall be subject to the following conditions:

 

  (i) the Parent shall have no right to replace the Agent;

 

  (ii) neither the Agent nor any Lender shall have any obligation to find a replacement Lender; and

 

  (iii) in no event shall the Lender replaced under paragraph (d) above be required to pay or surrender any of the fees received by such Lender pursuant to the Finance Documents.

 

- 31 -


Table of Contents
7.10 Restrictions

 

  (a) Any notice of cancellation or prepayment given by any Party under this Clause 7 shall be irrevocable and, unless a contrary indication appears in this Agreement, shall specify the date or dates upon which the relevant cancellation or prepayment is to be made and the amount of that cancellation or prepayment.

 

  (b) Subject to paragraph (e) of Clause 7.6 ( Mandatory Prepayment – General ), any prepayment under this Agreement shall be made together with accrued interest on the amount prepaid and, subject to any Break Costs, without premium or penalty.

 

  (c) No Borrower may reborrow any part of the Facility which is prepaid.

 

  (d) The Borrowers shall not repay or prepay all or any part of the Loans or cancel all or any part of the Commitments except at the times and in the manner expressly provided for in this Agreement.

 

  (e) No amount of the Total Commitments cancelled under this Agreement may be subsequently reinstated.

 

  (f) If the Agent receives a notice under this Clause 7 it shall promptly forward a copy of that notice to either the Parent or the affected Lender, as appropriate.

 

  (g) If all or part of a Loan under the Facility is repaid or prepaid, an amount of the Commitments (equal to the amount of the Loan which is repaid or prepaid) in respect of the Facility will be deemed to be cancelled on the date of repayment or prepayment. Any cancellation under this paragraph (h) shall reduce the Commitments of the Lenders rateably under the Facility.

 

7.11 Right of cancellation in relation to a Defaulting Lender

 

  (a) If any Lender becomes a Defaulting Lender, the Parent may, at any time whilst the Lender continues to be a Defaulting Lender, give the Agent five (5) Business Days’ notice of cancellation of each Available Commitment of that Lender.

 

  (b) On the notice referred to in paragraph (a) above becoming effective, each Available Commitment of the Defaulting Lender shall immediately be reduced to zero.

 

  (c) The Agent shall as soon as practicable after receipt of a notice referred to in paragraph (a) above, notify all the Lenders.

 

- 32 -


Table of Contents

SECTION 5

COSTS OF UTILISATION

 

8. INTEREST

 

8.1 Calculation of interest

The rate of interest on each Loan for each Interest Period is the percentage rate per annum which is the aggregate of the applicable:

 

  (a) Margin;

 

  (b) LIBOR; and

 

  (c) Mandatory Cost, if any.

 

8.2 Payment of interest

Each Borrower to which a Loan has been made shall pay accrued interest on that Loan on the last day of each Interest Period (and, if the Interest Period is longer than 6 (six) months, on the dates falling at 6 (six) Monthly intervals after the first day of the relevant Interest Period).

 

8.3 Default interest

 

  (a) If an Obligor fails to pay any amount payable by it under a Finance Document on its due date, interest shall accrue on the overdue amount from the due date up to the date of actual payment (both before and after judgment) at a rate which, subject to paragraph (b) below, is one per cent. (1%) higher than the rate which would have been payable if the overdue amount had, during the period of non-payment, constituted a Loan in the currency of the overdue amount for successive Interest Periods, each of a duration selected by the Agent (acting reasonably). Any interest accruing under this Clause 8.3 shall be immediately payable by that Obligor on demand by the Agent.

 

  (b) If any overdue amount consists of all or part of a Loan which became due on a day which was not the last day of an Interest Period relating to that Loan:

 

  (i) the first Interest Period for that overdue amount shall have a duration equal to the unexpired portion of the current Interest Period relating to that Loan; and

 

  (ii) the rate of interest applying to the overdue amount during that first Interest Period shall be one per cent. (1%) higher than the rate which would have applied if the overdue amount had not become due.

 

  (c) Default interest (if unpaid) arising on an overdue amount will be compounded with the overdue amount at the end of each Interest Period applicable to that overdue amount but will remain immediately due and payable.

 

- 33 -


Table of Contents
8.4 Notification of rates of interest

The Agent shall promptly notify the Lenders and the relevant Borrower of the determination of a rate of interest under this Agreement.

 

9. INTEREST PERIODS

 

9.1 Selection of Interest Periods

 

  (a) A Borrower (or the Parent on behalf of a Borrower) may select an Interest Period for a Loan in the Utilisation Request for that Loan or (if the Loan has already been borrowed) in a Selection Notice.

 

  (b) Each Selection Notice for a Loan is irrevocable and must be delivered to the Agent by the Borrower (or the Parent on behalf of a Borrower) to which that Loan was made not later than the Specified Time.

 

  (c) If a Borrower (or the Parent) fails to deliver a Selection Notice to the Agent in accordance with paragraph (b) above, the relevant Interest Period will be three Months.

 

  (d) Subject to this Clause 9, a Borrower may select an Interest Period of one (1), or three (3) months or any other period agreed between the Borrower and the Agent (acting on the instructions of all the Lenders) in relation to the relevant loan.

 

  (e) An Interest Period for a Loan shall not extend beyond the Termination Date applicable to its facility.

 

  (f) Each Interest Period for a Loan shall start on the Utilisation Date or (if already made) on the last day of its preceding Interest Period.

 

9.2 Non-Business Days

If an Interest Period would otherwise end on a day which is not a Business Day, that Interest Period will instead end on the next Business Day in that calendar month (if there is one) or the preceding Business Day (if there is not).

 

9.3 Consolidation and division of Loans

 

  (a) Subject to paragraph (b) below, if two or more Interest Periods:

 

  (i) relate to Loans made to the same Borrower; and

 

  (ii) end on the same date,

those Loans will, unless that Borrower (or the Parent on its behalf) specifies to the contrary in the Selection Notice for the next Interest Period, be consolidated into, and treated as, a single Loan on the last day of the Interest Period.

 

- 34 -


Table of Contents
  (b) Subject to Clause 4.2 ( Maximum number of Loans ) and Clause 5.3 ( Currency and amount ), if a Borrower (or the Parent on its behalf) requests in a Selection Notice that a Loan be divided into two or more Loans, that Loan will, on the last day of its Interest Period, be so divided into the amounts specified in that Selection Notice, being an aggregate amount equal to the amount of the Loan immediately before its division.

 

10. CHANGES TO THE CALCULATION OF INTEREST

 

10.1 Absence of quotations

Subject to Clause 10.2 ( Market disruption ), if LIBOR is to be determined by reference to the Reference Banks but a Reference Bank does not supply a quotation by the Specified Time on the Quotation Day, the applicable LIBOR shall be determined on the basis of the quotations of the remaining Reference Banks.

 

10.2 Market disruption

 

  (a) If a Market Disruption Event occurs in relation to a Loan for any Interest Period, then the rate of interest on each Lender’s share of that Loan for the Interest Period shall be the percentage rate per annum which is the sum of:

 

  (i) the Margin;

 

  (ii) the rate notified to the Agent by that Lender as soon as practicable and in any event not later than five (5) Business Days before interest is due to be paid in respect of that Interest Period ( provided that if such Lender is unable to notify the Agent of such rate not later than five (5) Business Days before interest is due to be paid in respect of that Interest Period, it shall do so before interest is due to be paid in respect of that Interest Period), to be that which expresses as a percentage rate per annum the cost to that Lender of funding its participation in that Loan from whatever source it may reasonably select; and

 

  (iii) the Mandatory Cost, if any, applicable to that Lender’s participation in the Loan.

 

  (b) In this Agreement “ Market Disruption Event ” means:

 

  (i) at or about noon on the Quotation Day for the relevant Interest Period the Screen Rate is not available and none or only one of the Reference Banks supplies a rate to the Agent to determine LIBOR for dollars and for the relevant Interest Period; or

 

  (ii) before close of business in London on the Quotation Day for the relevant Interest Period, the Agent receives notifications from a Lender or Lenders (whose participations in a Loan exceed thirty five per cent. (35%) of that Loan) that the cost to it of obtaining matching deposits in the Relevant Interbank Market would be in excess of LIBOR.

 

- 35 -


Table of Contents
10.3 Alternative basis of interest or funding

 

  (a) If a Market Disruption Event occurs and the Agent or the Parent so requires, the Agent and the Parent shall enter into negotiations (for a period of not more than thirty (30) days) with a view to agreeing a substitute basis for determining the rate of interest.

 

  (b) Any alternative basis agreed pursuant to paragraph (a) above shall, with the prior consent of all the Lenders and the Parent, be binding on all Parties.

 

10.4 Break Costs

 

  (a) Each Borrower shall, within three (3) Business Days of demand by a Finance Party, pay to that Finance Party its Break Costs attributable to all or any part of a Loan or Unpaid Sum being paid by that Borrower on a day other than the last day of an Interest Period for that Loan or Unpaid Sum.

 

  (b) Each Lender shall, as soon as reasonably practicable after a demand by the Agent, provide a certificate confirming the amount of its Break Costs for any Interest Period in which they accrue.

 

11. FEES

 

11.1 Commitment fee

 

  (a) The Parent (or a Borrower nominated by the Parent) shall pay to the Agent (for the account of each Lender) a fee (in dollars) computed at the rate of 30 per cent. of the applicable Margin per annum on that Lender’s Available Commitment from the Demerger Date to the end of the Availability Period.

 

  (b) The accrued commitment fee is payable on the last day of each successive period of 3 Months after the Demerger Date which ends during the relevant Availability Period, on the last day of the Availability Period and, if cancelled in full, on the cancelled amount of the relevant Lender’s Commitment at the time the cancellation is effective.

 

  (c) No commitment fee is payable to the Agent (for the account of a Lender) on any Available Commitment of that Lender for any day on which that Lender is a Defaulting Lender.

 

11.2 Arrangement fee

The Parent (or a Borrower nominated by the Parent) shall pay to the Agent (for the account of the Arrangers) an arrangement fee in the amount and at the times agreed in a Fee Letter.

 

11.3 Agency fee

The Parent (or a Borrower nominated by the Parent) shall pay to the Agent (for its own account) an agency fee in the amount and at the times agreed in a Fee Letter.

 

- 36 -


Table of Contents
11.4 Funding fee

The Parent (or a Borrower nominated by the Parent) shall pay to the Agent (for the account of each Lender in respect of its participation in each Loan) a funding fee which shall be computed at a rate equal to 1.50% of the amount of that Loan, on the Utilisation Date for such Loan.

 

11.5 Ticking Fee

 

  (a) The Parent (or a Borrower nominated by the Parent) shall pay to the Agent (for the account of each Lender) a ticking fee in dollars computed at the rate of 0.40 per cent. per annum on the Available Commitment from the date of this Agreement to the Demerger Date.

 

  (b) The accrued ticking fee is payable on the Demerger Date, and if cancelled in full on the cancelled amount of the Commitments at the time the cancellation is effective.

 

11.6 Duration Fee

The Parent (or a Borrower nominated by the Parent) shall pay to the Agent (for the account of each Lender) a duration fee on the dates set out in the column on the left hand side below in an amount equal to the percentage of the Available Commitment and the percentage of all outstanding Loans at such date set opposite that date:

 

Date of Payment

   Fee (as a % of
Available
Commitment)
     Fee as a % of
outstanding
Loans
 

The date falling 6 Months from the date of the Agreement

     0.40         0.60   

The date falling 9 Months from the date of the Agreement

     0.40         0.60   

The date falling 12 Months from the date of the Agreement

     0.60         0.90   

The date falling 18 Months from the date of this Agreement

     0.60         0.90   

 

- 37 -


Table of Contents

SECTION 6

ADDITIONAL PAYMENT OBLIGATIONS

 

12. Tax Gross up and Indemnities

 

12.1 Tax gross-up

 

  (a) Each Obligor shall make all payments to be made by it without any Tax Deduction, unless a Tax Deduction is required by law.

 

  (b) An Obligor shall promptly upon becoming aware that it must make a Tax Deduction (or that there is any change in the rate or the basis of a Tax Deduction) notify the Agent accordingly. Similarly, a Lender shall notify the Agent on becoming so aware in respect of a payment payable to that Lender. If the Agent receives such notification from a Lender it shall notify the Parent and, if applicable, that Obligor.

 

  (c) If a Tax Deduction is required by law to be made by an Obligor, the amount of the payment due from that Obligor shall be increased to an amount which (after making any Tax Deduction) leaves an amount equal to the payment which would have been due if no Tax Deduction had been required.

 

  (d) If an Obligor is required to make a Tax Deduction, that Obligor shall make that Tax Deduction and any payment required in connection with that Tax Deduction within the time allowed and in the minimum amount required by law.

 

  (e) Within thirty (30) days of making either a Tax Deduction or any payment required in connection with that Tax Deduction, the Obligor making that Tax Deduction shall deliver to the Agent for the Finance Party entitled to the payment evidence reasonably satisfactory to that Finance Party that the Tax Deduction has been made or (as applicable) any appropriate payment paid to the relevant taxing authority.

 

12.2 Tax indemnity

 

  (a) An Obligor shall (within three (3) Business Days of demand by the Agent) pay to a Finance Party an amount equal to the loss, liability or cost which that Finance Party determines (in its absolute discretion) will be or has been (directly or indirectly) suffered for or on account of Tax by that Finance Party in respect of a Finance Document.

 

  (b) Paragraph (a) above shall not apply:

 

  (i) with respect to any Tax assessed on a Finance Party:

 

  (A) under the law of the jurisdiction in which that Finance Party is incorporated or, if different, the jurisdiction (or jurisdictions) in which that Finance Party is treated as resident for tax purposes; or

 

- 38 -


Table of Contents
  (B) under the law of the jurisdiction in which that Finance Party’s Facility Office is located in respect of amounts received or receivable in that jurisdiction,

if that Tax is imposed on or calculated by reference to the net income received or receivable (but not any sum deemed to be received or receivable) by that Finance Party; or

 

  (ii) to the extent a loss, liability or cost is compensated for by an increased payment under Clause 12.1 ( Tax gross-up ).

 

  (c) A Finance Party making, or intending to make a claim under paragraph (a) above shall promptly notify the Agent of the event which will give, or has given, rise to the claim, following which the Agent shall notify the Obligor.

 

  (d) A Finance Party shall, on receiving a payment from an Obligor under this Clause 12.2, notify the Agent.

 

12.3 Tax Credit

If an Obligor makes a Tax Payment and the relevant Finance Party determines (in its absolute discretion) that:

 

  (a) a Tax Credit is attributable either to an increased payment of which that Tax Payment forms part, or to that Tax Payment; and

 

  (b) that Finance Party has obtained, utilised and retained that Tax Credit,

the Finance Party shall pay an amount to such Obligor which that Finance Party determines (in its absolute discretion) will leave it (after that payment) in the same after-Tax position as it would have been in had the Tax Payment not been required to be made by such Obligor.

 

12.4 Stamp taxes

The Parent shall pay and, within three (3) Business Days of demand, indemnify each Finance Party against any cost, loss or liability that Finance Party incurs in relation to all stamp duty, registration and other similar Taxes payable in respect of any Finance Document.

 

12.5 Value added tax

 

  (a) All amounts set out or expressed in a Finance Document to be payable by any Party to a Finance Party which (in whole or in part) constitute the consideration for a supply or supplies for VAT purposes shall be deemed to be exclusive of any VAT which is chargeable on such supply or supplies, and accordingly, subject to paragraph (b) below, if VAT is or becomes chargeable on any supply made by any Finance Party to any Party under a Finance Document, that Party shall pay to the Finance Party (in addition to and at the same time as paying any other consideration for such supply) an amount equal to the amount of such VAT (and such Finance Party shall promptly provide an appropriate VAT invoice to such Party).

 

- 39 -


Table of Contents
  (b) If VAT is or becomes chargeable on any supply made by any Finance Party (the “ Supplier ”) to any other Finance Party (the “ Recipient ”) under a Finance Document, and any Party other than the Recipient (the “ Subject Party ”) is required by the terms of any Finance Document to pay an amount equal to the consideration for such supply to the Supplier (rather than being required to reimburse the Recipient in respect of that consideration), such Party shall also pay to the Supplier (in addition to and at the same time as paying such amount) an amount equal to the amount of such VAT. The Recipient will promptly pay to the Subject Party an amount equal to any credit or repayment obtained by the Recipient from the relevant tax authority which the Recipient reasonably determines is in respect of such VAT.

 

  (c) Where a Finance Document requires any Party to reimburse or indemnify a Finance Party for any cost or expense, that Party shall reimburse or indemnify (as the case may be) such Finance Party for the full amount of such cost or expense, including such part thereof as represents VAT, save to the extent that such Finance Party reasonably determines that it is entitled to credit or repayment in respect of such VAT from the relevant tax authority.

 

  (d) Any reference in this Clause 12.5 to any Party shall, at any time when such Party is treated as a member of a group for VAT purposes, include (where appropriate and unless the context otherwise requires) a reference to the representative member of such group at such time (the term “representative member” to have the same meaning as in the Value Added Tax Act 1994).

 

13. INCREASED COSTS

 

13.1 Increased costs

 

  (a) Subject to Clause 13.3 ( Exceptions ) the Parent (or a Borrower nominated by the Parent) shall, within twenty (20) Business Days of a demand by the Agent, pay for the account of a Finance Party the amount of any Increased Costs incurred by that Finance Party or any of its Affiliates as a result of:

 

  (i) the introduction of or any change in (or in the interpretation, administration or application of) any law or regulation after the date of this Agreement;

 

  (ii) compliance with any law or regulation made after the date of this Agreement; or

 

  (iii) the implementation or application of, or compliance with, Basel III or any law or regulation that implements or applies Basel III.

 

- 40 -


Table of Contents
  (b) In this Agreement:

 

  (i) Basel III ” means:

 

  (A) the agreements on capital requirements, a leverage ratio and liquidity standards contained in “Basel III: A global regulatory framework for more resilient banks and banking systems”, “Basel III: International framework for liquidity risk measurement, standards and monitoring” and “Guidance for national authorities operating the countercyclical capital buffer” published by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision on 16 December 2010, each as amended, supplemented or restated; and

 

  (B) the rules for global systemically important banks contained in “Global systemically important banks: assessment methodology and the additional loss absorbency requirement – Rules text” published by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision in November 2011, as amended, supplemented or restated; and

 

  (ii) Increased Costs ” means:

 

  (A) a reduction in the rate of return from the Facility or on a Finance Party’s (or its Affiliate’s) overall capital;

 

  (B) an additional or increased cost; or

 

  (C) a reduction of any amount due and payable under any Finance Document,

which is incurred or suffered by a Finance Party or any of its Affiliates to the extent that it is attributable to that Finance Party having entered into its Commitment or funding or performing its obligations under any Finance Document.

 

13.2 Increased cost claims

 

  (a) A Finance Party intending to make a claim pursuant to Clause 13.1 ( Increased costs ) shall notify the Agent of the event giving rise to the claim, following which the Agent shall promptly notify the Parent.

 

  (b) Each Finance Party shall, as soon as practicable after a demand by the Agent, provide a certificate confirming the amount of its Increased Costs.

 

13.3 Exceptions

Clause 13.1 ( Increased costs ) does not apply to the extent any Increased Cost is:

 

  (a) attributable to a Tax Deduction required by law to be made by an Obligor;

 

  (b) compensated for by Clause 12.2 ( Tax indemnity ) (or would have been compensated for under Clause 12.2 ( Tax indemnity ) but was not so compensated solely because any of the exclusions in paragraph (b) of Clause 12.2 ( Tax indemnity ) applied);

 

  (c) compensated for by the payment of the Mandatory Cost;

 

  (d) attributable to the wilful breach by the relevant Finance Party or its Affiliates of any law or regulation; or

 

- 41 -


Table of Contents
  (e) attributable to the implementation or application of or compliance with the bank levy imposed by the United Kingdom government under the Finance Act 2011 in the form existing on the date of this Agreement (the “UK Bank Levy”) or any other law or regulation which implements the UK Bank Levy (whether such implementation, application or compliance is by a government, regulator, Finance Party or any of its Affiliates).

 

14. OTHER INDEMNITIES

 

14.1 Currency indemnity

 

  (a) If any sum due from an Obligor under the Finance Documents (a “ Sum ”), or any order, judgment or award given or made in relation to a Sum, has to be converted from the currency (the “ First Currency ”) in which that Sum is payable into another currency (the “ Second Currency ”) for the purpose of:

 

  (i) making or filing a claim or proof against that Obligor;

 

  (ii) obtaining or enforcing an order, judgment or award in relation to any litigation or arbitration proceedings,

that Obligor shall as an independent obligation, within five (5) Business Days of demand, indemnify each Finance Party to whom that Sum is due against any cost, loss or liability arising out of or as a result of the conversion including any discrepancy between (A) the rate of exchange used to convert that Sum from the First Currency into the Second Currency and (B) the rate or rates of exchange available to that person at the time of its receipt of that Sum.

 

  (b) Each Obligor waives any right it may have in any jurisdiction to pay any amount under the Finance Documents in a currency or currency unit other than that in which it is expressed to be payable.

 

14.2 Other indemnities

The Parent (or a Borrower nominated by the Parent) shall, within five (5) Business Days of demand, indemnify each Finance Party against any cost, loss or liability incurred by that Finance Party as a result of:

 

  (a) the occurrence of any Event of Default;

 

  (b) a failure by an Obligor to pay any amount due under a Finance Document on its due date, including without limitation, any cost, loss or liability arising as a result of Clause 27 ( Sharing Among the Finance Parties );

 

  (c) funding, or making arrangements to fund, its participation in a Loan requested by a Borrower in a Utilisation Request but not made by reason of the operation of any one or more of the provisions of this Agreement (other than by reason of default or negligence by that Finance Party alone); or

 

  (d) a Loan (or part of a Loan) not being prepaid in accordance with a notice of prepayment given by a Borrower or the Parent.

 

- 42 -


Table of Contents
14.3 Indemnity to the Agent

The Parent shall promptly indemnify the Agent against any cost, loss or liability incurred by the Agent (acting reasonably) as a result of:

 

  (a) investigating any event which it reasonably believes is a Default; or

 

  (b) acting or relying on any notice, request or instruction which it reasonably believes to be genuine, correct and appropriately authorised.

 

15. MITIGATION BY THE LENDERS

 

15.1 Mitigation

 

  (a) Each Finance Party shall, in consultation with the Parent, take all reasonable steps to mitigate any circumstances which arise and which would result in any amount becoming payable under or pursuant to, or cancelled pursuant to, any of Clause 7.1 ( Illegality ), Clause 12 ( Tax Gross-up and Indemnities ), Clause 13 ( Increased Costs ) or paragraph 3 of Schedule 4 ( Mandatory Cost Formula ) including (but not limited to) transferring its rights and obligations under the Finance Documents to another Affiliate or Facility Office.

 

  (b) Paragraph (a) above does not in any way limit the obligations of any Obligor under the Finance Documents.

 

15.2 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

 

  (a) The Parent shall indemnify each Finance Party for all costs and expenses reasonably incurred by that Finance Party as a result of steps taken by it under Clause 15.1 ( Mitigation ).

 

  (b) A Finance Party is not obliged to take any steps under Clause 15.1 ( Mitigation ) if, in the opinion of that Finance Party (acting reasonably), to do so might be prejudicial to it.

 

16. COSTS AND EXPENSES

 

16.1 Transaction expenses

The Parent (or a Borrower nominated by the Parent) shall, promptly within five (5) Business Days of demand, pay the Agent and the Arrangers the amount of all costs and expenses (including legal fees but subject to any separately agreed cap) reasonably incurred by any of them in connection with the negotiation, preparation, printing and execution of:

 

  (a) this Agreement and any other documents referred to in this Agreement; and

 

  (b) any other Finance Documents executed after the date of this Agreement, subject to a cap of ten thousand dollars ($10,000) ( provided , however , that such cap shall not include the legal fees, which shall be subject to a separately agreed cap).

 

- 43 -


Table of Contents
16.2 Amendment costs

If (a) an Obligor requests an amendment, waiver or consent or (b) an amendment is required pursuant to Clause 28.11 ( Change of currency ), the Parent (or a Borrower nominated by the Parent) shall, within five (5) Business Days of demand, reimburse the Agent for the amount of all costs and expenses (including legal fees) reasonably incurred by the Agent in responding to, evaluating, negotiating or complying with that request or requirement.

 

16.3 Enforcement costs

The Parent (or a Borrower nominated by the Parent) shall, within five (5) Business Days of demand, pay to each Finance Party the amount of all costs and expenses (including legal fees) incurred by that Finance Party in connection with the enforcement of, or the preservation of any rights under, any Finance Document.

 

- 44 -


Table of Contents

SECTION 7

GUARANTEE

 

17. GUARANTEE AND INDEMNITY

 

17.1 Guarantee and indemnity

Each Guarantor irrevocably and unconditionally jointly and severally:

 

  (a) guarantees to each Finance Party punctual performance by each Borrower and the Parent of all that Borrower’s and the Parent’s obligations under the Finance Documents;

 

  (b) undertakes with each Finance Party that whenever a Borrower or the Parent does not pay any amount when due under or in connection with any Finance Document, that Guarantor shall immediately on demand pay that amount as if it was the principal obligor; and

 

  (c) agrees with each Finance Party that if any obligation guaranteed by it is or becomes unenforceable, invalid or illegal, it will, as an independent and primary obligation, indemnify that Finance Party immediately on demand (and shall make the relevant payment within five (5) Business Days of demand) against any cost, loss or liability it incurs as a result of a Borrower or the Parent not paying any amount which would, but for such unenforceability, invalidity or illegality, have been payable by it under any Finance Document on the date when it would have been due. The amount payable by a Guarantor under this indemnity will not exceed the amount it would have had to pay under this Clause 17 if the amount claimed had been recoverable on the basis of a guarantee.

 

17.2 Continuing guarantee

This guarantee is a continuing guarantee and will extend to the ultimate balance of sums payable by any Obligor under the Finance Documents, regardless of any intermediate payment or discharge in whole or in part.

 

17.3 Reinstatement

If any discharge, release or arrangement (whether in respect of the obligations of any Obligor or any security for those obligations or otherwise) is made by a Finance Party in whole or in part on the basis of any payment, security or other disposition which is avoided or must be restored in insolvency, liquidation, administration or otherwise, without limitation, then the liability of each Guarantor under this Clause 17 will continue or be reinstated as if the discharge, release or arrangement had not occurred.

 

- 45 -


Table of Contents
17.4 Waiver of defences

The obligations of each Guarantor under this Clause 17 will not be affected by an act, omission, matter or thing which, but for this Clause, would reduce, release or prejudice any of its obligations under this Clause 17 ( without limitation and whether or not known to it or any Finance Party ) including:

 

  (a) any time, waiver or consent granted to, or composition with, any Obligor or other person;

 

  (b) the release of any other Obligor or any other person under the terms of any composition or arrangement with any creditor of any member of the Group;

 

  (c) the taking, variation, compromise, exchange, renewal or release of, or refusal or neglect to perfect, take up or enforce, any rights against, or security over assets of, any Obligor or other person or any non-presentation or non-observance of any formality or other requirement in respect of any instrument or any failure to realise the full value of any security;

 

  (d) any incapacity or lack of power, authority or legal personality of or dissolution or change in the members or status of an Obligor or any other person;

 

  (e) any amendment, novation, supplement, extension, restatement (however fundamental and whether or not more onerous) or replacement of any Finance Document or any other document or security including without limitation any change in the purpose of, any extension of or any increase in any facility or the addition of any new facility under any Finance Document or other document or security;

 

  (f) any unenforceability, illegality or invalidity of any obligation of any person under any Finance Document or any other document or security; or

 

  (g) any insolvency or similar proceedings.

 

17.5 Immediate recourse

Each Guarantor waives any right it may have of first requiring any Finance Party (or any trustee or agent on its behalf) to proceed against or enforce any other rights or security or claim payment from any person before claiming from that Guarantor under this Clause 17. This waiver applies irrespective of any law or any provision of a Finance Document to the contrary.

 

17.6 Appropriations

Until all amounts which may be or become payable by the Obligors under or in connection with the Finance Documents have been irrevocably paid in full, each Finance Party (or any trustee or agent on its behalf) may:

 

  (a) refrain from applying or enforcing any other moneys, security or rights held or received by that Finance Party (or any trustee or agent on its behalf) in respect of those amounts, or apply and enforce the same in such manner and order as it sees fit (whether against those amounts or otherwise) and no Guarantor shall be entitled to the benefit of the same; and

 

- 46 -


Table of Contents
  (b) hold in an interest-bearing suspense account any moneys received from any Guarantor or on account of any Guarantor’s liability under this Clause 17.

 

17.7 Deferral of Guarantors’ rights

Until all amounts which may be or become payable by the Obligors under or in connection with the Finance Documents have been irrevocably paid in full and unless the Agent otherwise directs, no Guarantor will exercise any rights which it may have by reason of performance by it of its obligations under the Finance Documents or by reason of any amount being payable, or liability arising, under this Clause 17:

 

  (a) to be indemnified by an Obligor;

 

  (b) to claim any contribution from any other guarantor of any Obligor’s obligations under the Finance Documents;

 

  (c) to take the benefit (in whole or in part and whether by way of subrogation or otherwise) of any rights of the Finance Parties under the Finance Documents or of any other guarantee or security taken pursuant to, or in connection with, the Finance Documents by any Finance Party;

 

  (d) to bring legal or other proceedings for an order requiring any Obligor to make any payment, or perform any obligation, in respect of which any Guarantor has given a guarantee, undertaking or indemnity under Clause 17.1 ( Guarantee and Indemnity );

 

  (e) to exercise any right of set-off against any Obligor; and/or

 

  (f) to claim or prove as a creditor of any Obligor in competition with any Finance Party.

If a Guarantor receives any benefit, payment or distribution in relation to such rights it shall hold that benefit, payment or distribution to the extent necessary to enable all amounts which may be or become payable to the Finance Parties by the Obligors under or in connection with the Finance Documents to be repaid in full on trust for the Finance Parties and shall promptly pay or transfer the same to the Agent or as the Agent may direct for application in accordance with Clause 28 ( Payment mechanics )

 

17.8 Release of Guarantors’ right of contribution

If any Guarantor (a “ Retiring Guarantor ”) ceases to be a Guarantor in accordance with the terms of the Finance Documents for the purpose of any sale or other disposal of that Retiring Guarantor then on the date such Retiring Guarantor ceases to be a Guarantor:

 

  (a) that Retiring Guarantor is released by each other Guarantor from any liability (whether past, present or future and whether actual or contingent) to make a contribution to any other Guarantor arising by reason of the performance by any other Guarantor of its obligations under the Finance Documents; and

 

- 47 -


Table of Contents
  (b) each other Guarantor waives any rights it may have by reason of the performance of its obligations under the Finance Documents to take the benefit (in whole or in part and whether by way of subrogation or otherwise) of any rights of the Finance Parties under any Finance Document or of any other security taken pursuant to, or in connection with, any Finance Document where such rights or security are granted by or in relation to the assets of the Retiring Guarantor.

 

17.9 Additional security

This guarantee is in addition to and is not in any way prejudiced by any other guarantee or security now or subsequently held by any Finance Party.

 

- 48 -


Table of Contents

SECTION 8

REPRESENTATIONS, UNDERTAKINGS AND EVENTS OF DEFAULT

 

18. REPRESENTATIONS

Each Obligor makes the representations and warranties set out in this Clause 18 to each Finance Party (save for the representation and warranty set out in Clause 18.23 ( Demerger ) which is made by the Parent only).

 

18.1 Status

 

  (a) It is a limited liability company, duly incorporated and validly existing under the law of its jurisdiction of incorporation.

 

  (b) It has the power to own its assets and carry on its business as it is being conducted or is contemplated to be conducted.

 

18.2 Power and authority

It has the power to enter into and perform, and has taken all necessary action to authorise its entry into, and performance of, the Finance Documents to which it is party and the transactions contemplated by those Finance Documents.

 

18.3 Binding obligations

The obligations expressed to be assumed by it in each Finance Document to which it is a party are, subject to any general principles of law as at the date of this Agreement limiting its obligations, which are specifically referred to in any legal opinion delivered pursuant to Clause 4 ( Conditions of Utilisation ) or Clause 24 ( Changes to the Obligors ), legal, valid, binding and enforceable obligations.

 

18.4 Non-conflict with other obligations

The entry into and performance by it of, and the transactions contemplated by, the Finance Documents to which it is a party do not and will not conflict with:

 

  (a) any applicable law of its jurisdiction of incorporation;

 

  (b) its Constitutional Documents; or

 

  (c) any material agreement or instrument binding upon it or any of its assets.

 

18.5 Validity and admissibility in evidence

All authorisations required:

 

  (a) to enable it lawfully to enter into, exercise its rights and comply with its obligations under the Finance Documents to which it is a party and to ensure that the obligations expressed to be assumed by it thereunder are legal, valid, binding and enforceable; and

 

  (b) to make the Finance Documents to which it is a party admissible in evidence in its jurisdiction of incorporation,

 

- 49 -


Table of Contents

have been obtained or effected and are in full force and effect.

 

18.6 Governing law and enforcement

Subject to any general principles of law as at the date of this Agreement set out in any legal opinion delivered pursuant to the Finance Documents:

 

  (a) the choice of English law as the governing law of the Finance Documents will be recognised and enforced in its jurisdiction of incorporation; and

 

  (b) any judgment obtained in England in relation to a Finance Document will be recognised and enforced in its jurisdiction of incorporation.

 

18.7 Deduction of Tax

It is not required under the law of its jurisdiction of incorporation to make any deduction for or on account of Tax from any payment it may make under any Finance Document.

 

18.8 No filing or stamp taxes

Except to the extent set out in any legal opinion provided pursuant to the Finance Documents in relation to it, under the law of its jurisdiction of incorporation it is not necessary that the Finance Documents be filed, recorded or enrolled with any court or other authority in that jurisdiction or that any stamp, registration or similar tax be paid on or in relation to the Finance Documents or the transactions contemplated by the Finance Documents.

 

18.9 No default

 

  (a) No Event of Default is continuing or might reasonably be expected to result from the making of any Utilisation.

 

  (b) It is not, nor is it likely to be as a result of entering into and performing its obligations under the Finance Documents, in violation of any law or in breach of or in default under any agreement to which it is a party or which is binding on it or any of its assets to an extent or in a manner which could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

18.10 No misleading information

 

  (a) All written factual information supplied by it to the Finance Parties and the Agent in connection with the Finance Documents (and the information contained in the Information Package, excluding any equity analysts reports and the reports from the credit rating agencies) (the “ Information ”) was true and accurate in all material respects as at the date it was given or as at the date (if any) at which it was stated and was not misleading in any material respect at such date.

 

- 50 -


Table of Contents
  (b) The financial projections and forecasts contained in the Information have been prepared in good faith on the basis of recent historical information and on the basis of reasonable assumptions.

 

  (c) It has not knowingly withheld any information which, if disclosed, could reasonably be expected materially and adversely to affect the decision of the Finance Parties in considering whether or not to provide finance to each Borrower.

 

18.11 Financial statements

 

  (a) The Original Financial Statements were prepared in accordance with GAAP.

 

  (b) The Original Financial Statements fairly represent the Group’s financial condition and operations during the relevant financial year.

 

18.12 Pari passu ranking

Its payment obligations under the Finance Documents rank at least pari passu with the claims of all its other unsecured and unsubordinated creditors, except for obligations mandatorily preferred by law applying to companies generally in the jurisdiction of its incorporation.

 

18.13 No proceedings pending or threatened

Other than as disclosed in the financial statements most recently delivered to the Agent pursuant to paragraph (a) of Clause 19.1 ( Financial statements ), no litigation, arbitration or administrative proceedings of or before any court, arbitral body or government agency which, if adversely determined, might reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect have (to the best of its knowledge and belief) been started or threatened against it or any Material Group Company.

 

18.14 No winding-up

No Material Group Company has taken any corporate action, nor have any other steps been taken or legal proceedings started or (to the best of its knowledge and belief, after due enquiry) threatened against any Material Group Company, for its winding-up, dissolution, administration or re-organisation or for the enforcement of any Encumbrance over all or any of its revenues or assets or for the appointment of a receiver, administrator, administrative receiver, conservator, custodian, trustee or similar officer of it or of all or any of its assets which could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

18.15 No encumbrances

 

  (a) No Encumbrance exists over all or any of the assets of any Material Group Company except for Permitted Encumbrances.

 

  (b) No Encumbrance would arise as a result of the execution of and performance of its rights and obligations under the Finance Documents.

 

- 51 -


Table of Contents
18.16 Assets

It and each Material Group Company has good title to or validly leases or licenses all of the assets necessary and has all consents and/or authorisations necessary to carry on its business as conducted to the extent that failure to comply with this Clause 18.16 could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

18.17 Insurance

Each Material Group Company maintains insurances on and in relation to its business and assets against those risks and to the extent as is usual for companies in the jurisdiction in which it conducts its business carrying on substantially similar business in such jurisdiction.

 

18.18 Environmental Compliance

Each Material Group Company has adopted and complies with an environmental policy which requires monitoring of and compliance with all applicable Environmental Law and Environmental Permits applicable to it from time to time unless non-compliance with such policy could not reasonably be expected to cause a Material Adverse Effect.

 

18.19 Environmental Claims

No Environmental Claim (not of a frivolous or vexatious nature) has been commenced or (to the best of its knowledge and belief) is threatened against any Material Group Company where that claim would be reasonably likely, if determined against that Material Group Company, to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

18.20 Taxation

 

  (a) It and each Material Group Company has duly and punctually paid and discharged all Taxes imposed upon it or its assets within the time period allowed without incurring penalties except to the extent that:

 

  (i) payment is being contested in good faith;

 

  (ii) it has maintained adequate reserves for those Taxes; and

 

  (iii) payment can be lawfully withheld.

 

  (b) It is not and no Material Group Company is materially overdue in the filing of any Tax returns.

 

18.21 Ownership of Material Group Companies

 

  (a) Each existing Material Group Company on the date of this Agreement (other than the Cerro Corona Subsidiary, Newshelf and the Ghanaian Companies) is a wholly-owned Subsidiary of the Parent and any member of the Group which becomes a Material Group Company after the date of this Agreement will be a wholly or partially owned subsidiary of the Parent and the members of the Group holding the shares in such Material Group Company have not reduced their shareholding in such Subsidiary below the level of their shareholding at the time such Subsidiary became a Material Group Company.

 

- 52 -


Table of Contents
  (b) The Parent holds at least seventy-four per cent. (74%) of the issued share capital of Newshelf.

 

  (c) Newshelf holds at least seventy-four per cent. (74%) of the issued share capital of each of Gold Fields Operations Limited and GFI Joint Venture Holdings Proprietary Limited.

 

  (d) The Parent indirectly holds at least ninety per cent. (90%) of the issued share capital of each Ghanaian Company.

 

  (e) The Parent indirectly holds at least ninety-nine per cent. (99%) of the common shares in the share capital of the Cerro Corona Subsidiary (which equates to ninety-eight point five per cent. (98.5%) of the issued and outstanding shares in the share capital of the Cerro Corona Subsidiary).

 

18.22 No Material Adverse Effect

There has been no change in the business, condition (financial or otherwise), operations, performance or properties of the Obligors or the Group (taken as a whole) since 31 December 2011 which could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect excluding, for the avoidance of doubt, the Demerger or the announcement of the Demerger.

 

18.23 Demerger

It has taken all necessary action to authorise the Demerger and all relevant authorisations and approvals required to effect the Demerger have been obtained.

 

18.24 Times when representation made

 

  (a) All the representations and warranties in this Clause 18 are made by each Obligor on the date of this Agreement and, in the case of each Additional Obligor, on the date of accession of such Additional Obligor (by reference to the facts and circumstances then existing) (other than the representations in (i) paragraph (a) of Clause 18.10 ( No misleading information ) which are deemed to be made on the date the Information is provided by the relevant Obligor and in the case of the information contained in the Information Package, on the date on which the Information Package is posted on Debt domain by Barclays Bank PLC (in its capacity as Arranger) in connection with the syndication of the Facility, and (ii) Clause 18.23 ( Demerger ) which is deemed to be made on the Demerger Date by the Parent only).

 

  (b) The Repeating Representations are deemed to be made by each Obligor (by reference to the facts and circumstances then existing) on the date of each Utilisation Request and on each Utilisation Date and on the first day of each Interest Period, save that the references in Clause 18.11 ( Financial statements ) to “the Original Financial Statements” shall, for the purposes of the Repeating Representations, be construed as references to the most recent audited consolidated financial statements of the Parent delivered to the Agent under Clause 19.1 ( Financial statements ).

 

- 53 -


Table of Contents
19. INFORMATION UNDERTAKINGS

The undertakings in this Clause 19 are given in favour of each Finance Party and remain in force from the date of this Agreement for so long as any amount is outstanding under the Finance Documents or any Commitment is in force.

 

19.1 Financial statements

The Parent shall supply to the Agent:

 

  (a) as soon as the same become available, but in any event within one hundred and twenty (120) days after the end of each of its Financial Years the audited consolidated financial statements of the Parent for that Financial Year, it being acknowledged that in relation to the first set of audited consolidated financial statements of the Parent to be supplied, audited pro forma consolidated financial statements shall be supplied to exclude GFIMSA and its Subsidiaries;

 

  (b) as soon as the same become available, but in any event within one hundred and fifty (150) days after the end of each of its Financial Years:

 

  (i) the audited financial statements of each Obligor (other than Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited and Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited unless there is a legal requirement to audit its financial statements and any other Obligor which is not legally required to audit its financial statements) for that Financial Year; and

 

  (ii) if the audited financial statements of Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited and/or Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited and/or any other Obligor which is not legally required to audit its financial statements (as the case may be) are not delivered under (i) above, the unaudited financial statements of Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited and/or Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited and/or any other Obligor which is not legally required to audit its financial statements (as the case may be) for that Financial Year;

 

  (c) as soon as the same become available, but in any event within sixty (60) days after the first six (6) months of each of its Financial Years:

 

  (i) the unaudited financial statements of each Obligor for the first six (6) month period of that Financial Year; and

 

  (ii) the unaudited consolidated financial statements of the Parent for the first six (6) month period of that Financial Year; and

 

  (d) as soon as the same become available, but in any event within sixty (60) days after the end of each quarter of each Financial Year:

 

- 54 -


Table of Contents
  (i) the unaudited consolidated financial statements of the Parent for that period it being acknowledged that pro forma unaudited consolidated financial statements of the Parent shall be supplied for the period up to and including the Demerger Date to exclude GFIMSA and its Subsidiaries; and

 

  (ii) the unaudited financial statements of each Obligor for that period.

 

19.2 Compliance Certificate

 

  (a) The Parent shall supply to the Agent, with each set of consolidated financial statements delivered pursuant to paragraphs (a) and (c) of Clause 19.1 ( Financial statements ), a Compliance Certificate setting out (in reasonable detail) computations as to compliance with Clause 20 ( Financial Covenants ) as at the date as at which those financial statements were drawn up.

 

  (b) Each Compliance Certificate shall be signed by 2 (two) directors or executive officers of the Parent and, if required to be delivered with the audited consolidated financial statements delivered pursuant to paragraph (a) of Clause 19.1 ( Financial statements ), reported on by the Auditors.

 

19.3 Requirements as to financial statements

 

  (a) Each set of financial statements delivered by the Parent pursuant to Clause 19.1 ( Financial statements ) shall be certified by a director of the relevant company as fairly representing its financial condition as at the date as at which those financial statements were drawn up. This Clause 19.3 shall not apply to those financial statements delivered pursuant to paragraph (d) of Clause 19.1 ( Financial Statements ).

 

  (b) The Parent shall procure that each set of financial statements delivered pursuant to Clause 19.1 ( Financial statements ) is prepared in accordance with GAAP, the requirements of its jurisdiction of incorporation and accounting practices and financial reference periods consistent with those applied in the preparation of the Original Financial Statements, unless the Parent notifies the Agent that in relation to any sets of financial statements, there has been a change in GAAP or the accounting practices or reference periods and its Auditors (in the case of its annual audited financial statements) or the Parent (in the case of any of its other financial statements) delivers to the Agent:

 

  (i) a description of any change necessary for those financial statements to reflect GAAP, accounting practices and reference periods upon which the Original Financial Statements were prepared; and

 

  (ii) sufficient information, in form and substance as may be reasonably required by the Agent, to enable the Agent to determine whether Clause 20 ( Financial Covenants ) has been complied with and make an accurate comparison between the financial position indicated in those financial statements and the Original Financial Statements.

 

- 55 -


Table of Contents
  (c) If the Parent notifies the Agent of a change in accordance with paragraph (b) above, then the Parent and the Agent shall enter into negotiations in good faith with a view to agreeing:

 

  (i) whether or not the change might result in material alteration in the commercial effect of any of the terms of this Agreement or any other Finance Document; and

 

  (ii) if so, any amendments to this Agreement or any other Finance Document which may be necessary to ensure that the change does not result in any material alteration in the commercial effect of those terms, and if any amendments are agreed they shall take effect and be binding on each of the Parties in accordance with their terms.

 

  (d) Any reference in the Finance Documents to “ financial statements ” shall be construed as a reference to those financial statements as the same may be adjusted under this Clause 19.3 to reflect the basis upon which the Original Financial Statements were prepared.

 

19.4 Access to records

At any time after the occurrence of a Default and for so long as it is continuing, upon the request of the Agent or a Finance Party each Obligor shall (at that Obligor’s expense) provide to the Agent or any of its representatives and professional advisors such access to that Obligor’s records (including its general ledger), books and assets as that person may require at reasonable times and upon reasonable notice.

 

19.5 Information: miscellaneous

Each Obligor shall supply to the Agent, if the Agent so requests:

 

  (a) all documents dispatched by that Obligor to its shareholders (or any class of them) or its creditors generally at the same time as they are dispatched;

 

  (b) the details of any litigation, arbitration or administrative proceedings which are current, threatened or pending against any member of the Group which, if adversely determined against it, would be reasonably likely to have a Material Adverse Effect; and

 

  (c) promptly, such further information (including an extract of its general ledger) regarding the financial condition, business and operations of any Material Group Company as any Finance Party (through the Agent) may reasonably request.

 

19.6 Notification of default

 

  (a) Each Obligor shall notify the Agent, of any Default (and the steps, if any, being taken to remedy it) promptly upon becoming aware of its occurrence (unless that Obligor is aware that a notification has already been provided by another Obligor).

 

- 56 -


Table of Contents
  (b) Promptly upon a request by the Agent, each Borrower shall supply to the Agent, a certificate signed by 2 (two) of its directors or senior officers on its behalf certifying that no Default is continuing (or if a Default is continuing specifying the Default and the steps, if any, being taken to remedy it).

 

19.7 Use of websites

 

  (a) The Parent may satisfy its obligation under the Finance Documents to deliver any information in relation to those Lenders (the “ Website Lenders ”) who accept this method of communication by posting this information onto an electronic website designated by the Parent and the Agent (the “ Designated Website ”) if:

 

  (i) the Agent expressly agrees (after consultation with each of the Lenders) that it will accept communication of the information by this method;

 

  (ii) both the Parent and the Agent are aware of the address of and any relevant password specifications for the Designated Website; and

 

  (iii) the information is in a format previously agreed between the Parent and the Agent.

If any Lender (a “ Paper Form Lender ”) does not agree to the delivery of information electronically then the Agent shall notify the Parent accordingly and the Parent shall supply the information to the Agent (in sufficient copies for each Paper Form Lender) in paper form. In any event the Parent shall supply the Agent with at least one copy in paper form of any information required to be provided by it.

 

  (b) The Agent shall supply each Website Lender with the address of and any relevant password specifications for the Designated Website following designation of that website by the Parent and the Agent.

 

  (c) The Parent shall promptly upon becoming aware of its occurrence notify the Agent if:

 

  (i) the Designated Website cannot be accessed due to technical failure;

 

  (ii) the password specifications for the Designated Website change;

 

  (iii) any new information which is required to be provided under the Finance Documents is posted onto the Designated Website;

 

  (iv) any existing information which has been provided under the Finance Documents and posted onto the Designated Website is amended; or

 

  (v) the Parent becomes aware that the Designated Website or any information posted onto the Designated Website is or has been infected by any electronic virus or similar software.

 

- 57 -


Table of Contents

If the Parent notifies the Agent under paragraph (c)(i) or paragraph (c)(v) above, all information to be provided by the Parent under the Finance Documents after the date of that notice shall be supplied in paper form unless and until the Agent and each Website Lender is satisfied that the circumstances giving rise to the notification are no longer continuing.

Any Website Lender may request, through the Agent, one (1) paper copy of any information required to be provided under the Finance Documents which is posted onto the Designated Website. The Parent shall comply with any such request within ten (10) Business Days.

 

19.8 “Know your customer” checks

 

  (a) If:

 

  (i) the introduction of or any change in (or in the interpretation, administration or application of) any law or regulation made after the date of this Agreement;

 

  (ii) any change in the status of an Obligor or the composition of the shareholders of an Obligor after the date of this Agreement; or

 

  (iii) a proposed assignment or transfer by a Lender of any of its rights and obligations under the Finance Documents to a party that is not a Lender prior to such assignment or transfer,

 

     obliges the Agent or any Lender (or, in the case of paragraph (iii) above, any prospective new Lender) to comply with “know your customer” or similar identification procedures in circumstances where the necessary information is not already available to it, each Obligor shall promptly upon the request of the Agent or any Lender supply, or procure the supply of, such documentation and other evidence as is reasonably requested by the Agent (for itself or on behalf of any Lender) or any Lender (for itself or, in the case of the event described in paragraph (iii) above, on behalf of any prospective new Lender) in order for the Agent, such Lender or, in the case of the event described in paragraph (iii) above, any prospective new Lender to carry out and be satisfied it has complied with all necessary “know your customer” or other similar checks under all applicable laws and regulations pursuant to the transactions contemplated in the Finance Documents.

 

  (b) Each Lender shall promptly upon the request of the Agent supply, or procure the supply of, such documentation and other evidence as is reasonably requested by the Agent (for itself) in order for the Agent to carry out and be satisfied it has complied with all necessary “know your customer” or other similar checks under all applicable laws and regulations pursuant to the transactions contemplated in the Finance Documents.

 

  (c) The Parent shall, by not less than ten (10) Business Days’ prior written notice to the Agent, notify the Agent (which shall promptly notify the Lenders) of its intention to request that one of its Subsidiaries becomes an Additional Obligor pursuant to the terms of the Finance Documents.

 

- 58 -


Table of Contents
  (d) Following the giving of any notice pursuant to paragraph (c) above, if the accession of such Additional Obligor obliges the Agent or any Lender to comply with “know your customer” or similar identification procedures in circumstances where the necessary information is not readily available to it, the Parent shall promptly upon the request of the Agent or any Lender supply, or procure the supply of, such documentation and other evidence as is reasonably requested by the Agent (for itself or on behalf of any Lender) or any Lender (for itself or on behalf of any prospective Lender) in order for the Agent or such Lender or any prospective new Lender to carry out and be satisfied it has complied with all necessary “know your customer” or other similar checks under all applicable laws and regulations pursuant to the accession of such Subsidiary to the Finance Documents as an Additional Obligor.

 

20. FINANCIAL COVENANTS

 

20.1 Financial definitions:

 

  (a) In this Clause 20:

Consolidated EBITDA ” means, in respect of any Measurement Period, the consolidated net income of the Group (less the net income of any Project Finance Subsidiaries but including any dividends received in cash by any member of the Group (other than a Project Finance Subsidiary) from a Project Finance Subsidiary), before, without duplication and all as calculated in accordance with GAAP:

 

  (i) any provision on account of normal, deferred and royalty taxation;

 

  (ii) any interest, commission, discounts or other fees incurred or payable, received or receivable by any member of the Group in respect of Indebtedness for Borrowed Money;

 

  (iii) any other interest received or receivable by any member of the Group on any deposit or bank account;

 

  (iv) any non-cash adjustments to the environment rehabilitation and/or reclamation expenses;

 

  (v) any amount attributable to the amortisation of intangible assets and depreciation of tangible assets;

 

  (vi) any non-cash gains or losses relating to and resulting from the marked to market valuation of derivative and/or financial instruments;

 

  (vii) any losses from (or gains on the reversal of previously recognised) write-downs or impairments of assets and/or investments;

 

- 59 -


Table of Contents
  (viii) any gains or losses recognised on the attributable share of results of associates after tax, but including any dividends received in cash by any member of the Group from such an associate;

 

  (ix) any share-based payments;

 

  (x) any other extraordinary or exceptional items; and

 

  (xi) any other material non-cash gain or loss that needs to be accounted for under GAAP.

For any company that is not a Subsidiary of the Group but in which any member of the Group directly or indirectly owns an equity interest of more than twenty per cent. (20%) of the issued share capital (an “ Associate ”), the Parent may include in the Consolidated EBITDA the percentage of the equity interest of the amount that would be the EBITDA of the Associate.

Consolidated Net Borrowings ” means, at any time, the aggregate amount of all obligations of the members of the Group, other than Project Finance Subsidiaries (but including, for the avoidance of doubt, any guaranteed obligations of any other member of the Group in respect of the obligations of a Project Finance Subsidiary), for or in respect of Indebtedness for Borrowed Money but excluding any such obligation to any member of the Group, adjusted to take account of the aggregate amount of freely available cash and cash equivalents held by any member of the Group, other than Project Finance Subsidiaries, and so that no amount shall be included or excluded more than once, provided that , if a percentage of the EBITDA of any Associate is included in the Consolidated EBITDA then the same percentage of such Associate’s Consolidated Net Borrowings (but as if references in such definition to “Group” were references to the Associate and its Subsidiaries) will be included in the calculation of Consolidated Net Borrowings;

Consolidated Net Finance Charges ” means, in respect of any Measurement Period, the aggregate amount of the interest (including the interest element of leasing and hire purchase payments and capitalised interest), commission, fees, discounts and other finance payments payable by any member of the Group, other than Project Finance Subsidiaries, (including any commission, fees, discounts and other finance payment payable by any member of the Group under any interest rate hedging arrangement but deducting any commission, fees, discounts and other finance payments receivable by any member of the Group under any interest rate hedging instrument) but deducting any other interest receivable by any member of the Group, other than Project Finance Subsidiaries, on any deposit or bank account, provided that , if a percentage of the EBITDA of any Associate is included in the Consolidated EBITDA then the same percentage of such Associate’s Consolidated Net Finance Charges (but as if references in such definition to “Group” were references to the Associate and its Subsidiaries) will be included in the calculation of Consolidated Net Finance Charges; and

Measurement Period ” means each period of twelve (12) months ending on the last day of the Parent’s Financial Year and each period of twelve (12) months ending on the last day of the first half of the Parent’s Financial Year.

 

- 60 -


Table of Contents
  (b) For the purposes of this Clause 20:

 

  (i) if at any time the Cerro Corona Subsidiary is (or is deemed to be) a Material Group Company it shall be deemed to not be a Project Finance Subsidiary; and

 

  (ii) for the purposes of the Measurement Periods ending 31 December 2012 and 30 June 2013, the Cerro Corona Subsidiary shall be deemed to be a Material Group Company commencing from the beginning of each such Measurement Period.

 

20.2 Financial condition

The Parent shall ensure that for so long as any amount is outstanding under a Finance Document or any Commitment is in force:

 

  (a) the ratio of Consolidated EBITDA to Consolidated Net Finance Charges in respect of any Measurement Period shall be or shall exceed 5:1; and

 

  (b) the ratio of Consolidated Net Borrowings to Consolidated EBITDA shall not in respect of any Measurement Period exceed 2.5:1.

 

20.3 Financial testing

The financial covenants set out in Clause 20.2 ( Financial condition ) shall be tested by reference to each of the financial statements and/or each Compliance Certificate delivered pursuant to Clause 19.1 ( Financial Statements ) and Clause 19.2 ( Compliance Certificate ).

 

20.4 Breach of a Financial Condition Undertaking

Any Obligor shall, immediately upon becoming aware of a breach of either of the financial covenants in Clause 20.2 ( Financial condition ), notify the Agent and provide such details about the breach as the Agent may request (unless that Obligor is aware that a notification has already been provided by another Obligor).

 

21. GENERAL UNDERTAKINGS

The undertakings in this Clause 21 are given in favour of each Finance Party and remain in force from the date of this Agreement for so long as any amount is outstanding under the Finance Documents or any Commitment is in force.

 

21.1 Authorisations

Each Obligor shall promptly:

 

  (a) obtain, comply with and do all that is necessary to maintain in full force and effect; and

 

  (b) upon written request by the Agent or a Finance Party, supply certified copies to the Agent and/or a Finance Party, as the case may be, of,

any authorisation required or desirable under any applicable law to enable it to perform its obligations under the Finance Documents to which it is a party and to ensure the legality, validity, enforceability or admissibility in evidence of any Finance Document.

 

- 61 -


Table of Contents
21.2 Compliance with laws

Each Obligor shall comply in all respects with all laws and regulations to which it may be subject (including, but not limited to, Environmental Law), if failure so to comply would materially impair its ability to perform its obligations under the Finance Documents to which it is a party.

 

21.3 Negative pledge

 

  (a) No Obligor shall (and the Parent shall procure that no other Material Group Company shall) create or permit to subsist any Encumbrance over any of its assets.

 

  (b) No Obligor shall (and the Parent shall ensure that no other Material Group Company will):

 

  (i) sell, transfer or otherwise dispose of any of its assets on terms whereby they are or may be leased to or re-acquired by it or by an Obligor or any other member of the Group;

 

  (ii) sell, transfer or otherwise dispose of any of its receivables on recourse terms;

 

  (iii) enter into any arrangement under which money or the benefit of a bank or other account may be applied, set-off or made subject to a combination of accounts; or

 

  (iv) enter into any other preferential arrangement having a similar effect,

in circumstances where the arrangement or transaction is entered into primarily as a method of raising Financial Indebtedness or of financing the acquisition of an asset.

 

  (c) Paragraphs (a) and (b) above do not apply to Permitted Encumbrances.

 

21.4 Disposals and Mergers

 

  (a) No Obligor shall (and the Parent shall ensure that no other Material Group Company will):

 

  (i) enter into a single transaction or a series of transactions (whether related or not) and whether voluntarily or involuntarily to sell, lease, transfer or otherwise dispose of any assets; or

 

  (ii) enter into any amalgamation, demerger, merger or corporate reconstruction.

 

- 62 -


Table of Contents
  (b) Paragraph (a) above does not apply to:

 

  (i) Permitted Disposals;

 

  (ii) the Demerger; or

 

  (iii) any amalgamation, demerger, merger or corporate reconstruction of any member of the Group, without insolvency, if:

 

  (A) in respect of the Obligors or the successors-in-title or assignees of the Obligors, the Finance Documents are preserved as binding upon the amalgamated, demerged, merged and/or reconstructed members of the Group; and

 

  (B) the amalgamated, demerged, merged and/or reconstructed companies will be members of the Group; and

 

  (C) such amalgamation, demerger, merger and/or corporate reconstruction will not have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

21.5 Change of business

Each Obligor shall procure that no substantial change is made to the general nature of its business or the business of the Group taken as a whole from that carried on at the date of this Agreement, excluding, for the avoidance of doubt, the Demerger or the announcement of the Demerger.

 

21.6 Insurance

Each Obligor shall (and the Parent shall ensure that each Material Group Company will) maintain insurances on and in relation to its business, properties and assets with reputable underwriters or insurance companies against those risks and to the extent as is usual for companies carrying on the same or substantially similar business.

 

21.7 Environmental Compliance

Each Obligor shall (and the Parent shall ensure that each Material Group Company will) substantially comply in all material respects with all Environmental Law and obtain and maintain any Environmental Permits and take all reasonable steps in anticipation of known or expected future changes to or obligations under the same.

 

21.8 Environmental Claims

Each Obligor shall inform the Agent, in writing as soon as reasonably practical upon becoming aware of the same:

 

  (a) if any Environmental Claim (not of a frivolous or vexatious nature) has been commenced or (to the best of its knowledge and belief) threatened against any Material Group Company; or

 

- 63 -


Table of Contents
  (b) of any facts or circumstances which will or are reasonably likely to result in any Environmental Claim (not of a frivolous or vexatious nature) being commenced or threatened against any Material Group Company,

where the claim would be reasonably likely, if determined against that Material Group Company, to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

21.9 Taxation

Each Obligor shall (and the Parent shall ensure that each Material Group Company will) duly and punctually pay and discharge all Taxes imposed upon it or its assets within the time period allowed without incurring penalties save to the extent that:

 

  (a) payment is being contested in good faith;

 

  (b) adequate reserves are being maintained for those Taxes; and

 

  (c) where such payment can be lawfully withheld.

 

21.10 Maintenance of Legal Status

Each Obligor shall (and the Parent shall ensure that each Material Group Company will) do all such things as are necessary to maintain its existence as a legal person and shall maintain its books and records in good order and make all necessary corporate filings with the relevant authorities in its jurisdiction of incorporation.

 

21.11 Claims Pari Passu

Each Obligor shall ensure that at all times the claims of the Finance Parties against it under the Finance Documents rank at least pari passu with the claims of all its other unsecured and unsubordinated creditors save those whose claims are preferred by any bankruptcy, insolvency, liquidation or other similar laws of general application in its jurisdiction of incorporation.

 

21.12 Maintenance of Assets

Each Obligor shall (and the Parent shall ensure that each Material Group Company will) ensure that it has good title to or validly leases or licences all of the assets necessary and has all consents and/or authorisations necessary to carry on its business as conducted to the extent that failure to comply with this Clause 21.12 could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

21.13 Acquisitions

 

  (a) No Obligor shall (and the Parent shall ensure that no Material Group Company will), acquire any assets or business or make any investments.

 

  (b) Paragraph (a) above shall not apply to:

 

  (i)

any acquisition of assets or business or any investment made, in each case, on arms length terms where the aggregate amount of consideration for that acquisition or investment when aggregated with

 

- 64 -


Table of Contents
  the aggregate amount of consideration for all other assets or businesses acquired or investments made by any Material Group Company after the date of this Agreement under this paragraph (i), does not exceed US$50,000,000 (or its equivalent);

 

  (ii) any acquisition or investment made in the ordinary course of trading of the acquiring or investing entity;

 

  (iii) any investment in the ordinary course of trading of the Group of cash whose disposal is permitted under Clause 21.4 ( Disposals and Mergers );

 

  (iv) an acquisition or investment by a member of the Group of an asset sold, leased, transferred or otherwise disposed of by another member of the Group in circumstances constituting a Permitted Disposal;

 

  (v) an acquisition relating to the extension of an option concerning the Mankayan project in the Philippines, provided that the consideration for such an acquisition does not exceed US$58,000,000 (or its equivalent); and

 

  (vi) an acquisition relating to the Far Southeast project in the Philippines, provided that the consideration for such an acquisition does not exceed US$110,000,000 (or its equivalent).

 

21.14 Financial Indebtedness

No member of the Group (other than a Guarantor or a Project Finance Subsidiary) shall incur, create or permit to subsist or have outstanding any Financial Indebtedness or enter into any agreement or arrangement whereby it is entitled to incur, create or permit to subsist any Financial Indebtedness other than Permitted Financial Indebtedness.

 

21.15 Ownership of Material Group Companies

Subject to applicable law, the Parent shall ensure that:

 

  (a) each existing Material Group Company on the date of this Agreement (other than the Cerro Corona Subsidiary, Newshelf, the Ghanaian Companies, Gold Fields Operations Limited and GFI Joint Venture Holdings Proprietary Limited) is and continues to be a wholly-owned Subsidiary of the Parent and each member of the Group which becomes a Material Group Company after the date of this Agreement is a wholly or partially owned Subsidiary of the Parent and that members of the Group will hold and continue to hold at least the same percentage of the issued share capital of such Material Group Company as was held by members of the Group at the time such Subsidiary became a Material Group Company;

 

  (b) the Parent holds and continues to hold at least seventy four per cent. (74%) of the issued share capital of Newshelf;

 

- 65 -


Table of Contents
  (c) Newshelf holds and continues to hold at least seventy four per cent. (74%) of the issued share capital of each of Gold Fields Operations Limited and GFI Joint Venture Holdings Proprietary Limited;

 

  (d) the Parent indirectly holds and continues to indirectly hold at least ninety per cent. (90%) of the issued share capital of each Ghanaian Company; and

 

  (e) the Parent indirectly holds and continues to indirectly hold at least ninety nine per cent. (99%) of the common shares in the share capital of the Cerro Corona Subsidiary (which equates to ninety-eight point five per cent. (98.5%) of the issued and outstanding shares in the share capital of the Cerro Corona Subsidiary).

 

21.16 Loans or credit

 

  (a) Except as permitted under paragraph (b) below, no Obligor shall (and the Parent shall ensure that no other Material Group Company will) be a creditor in respect of any Financial Indebtedness, or incur, grant or allow to remain outstanding any guarantees (except as required under the Finance Documents) in respect of any Financial Indebtedness.

 

  (b) Paragraph (a) above does not apply to:

 

  (i) a Permitted Loan;

 

  (ii) a Permitted Guarantee; or

 

  (iii) for the avoidance of doubt any performance or similar bond guaranteeing performance by a member of the Group under any contract entered into in the ordinary course of trade, including any environmental bond, which a member of the Group is required to issue under any applicable law.

 

21.17 Most Favoured Lender Agreement

 

  (a) Subject to paragraph (b) below the Parent shall not (and shall ensure that no Obligor or Material Group Company will):

 

  (i) enter into any credit facility, bond or note facility (each an “ MFL Agreement ”) that contains or benefits from a Relevant Provision which is either not included in this Agreement (and would be beneficial to the Lenders) or would be more beneficial to the lenders, noteholders or bondholders under such MFL Agreement than any analogous provision of this Agreement is to the Lenders, or

 

  (ii)

amend any MFL Agreement so that the lenders, noteholders or bondholders under such MFL Agreement benefit from a Relevant Provision, which is either not included in this Agreement (and would be beneficial to the Lenders) or would be more beneficial to the lenders, noteholders or bondholders under such MFL Agreement than any analogous provision of this Agreement is to the Lenders,

 

- 66 -


Table of Contents
  unless in each case, the Parent promptly and in any event within 10 Business Days after such circumstance arises gives notice accordingly to the Agent (the “ MFL Notice ”) and provides a copy of the Relevant Provision to the Agent.

 

  (b) Paragraph (a) above shall not apply to:

 

  (i) any credit facility, bond or note facility entered into by the Parent, an Obligor or a Material Group Company which is existing as at the date of this Agreement (an “ Existing MFL Agreement ”) save in respect of amendments made to such Existing MFL Agreements;

 

  (ii) any credit facility, bond or note facility entered into for the purpose of refinancing a facility made available under an Existing MFL Agreement (a “ Refinancing MFL Agreement ”) on substantially the same terms as the Existing MFL Agreement it is refinancing; or

 

  (iii) any credit facility, bond or note facility in relation to which the Financial Indebtedness to be incurred or incurred thereunder constitutes Project Finance Borrowings (a “ Project Finance Borrowing MFL Agreement ”).

 

  (c) Unless the Agent (acting on the instructions of the Majority Lenders) notifies the Parent within 15 Business Days after receipt of the MFL Notice that it does not wish to accept the Relevant Provision, such Relevant Provision shall be deemed automatically incorporated by reference into this Agreement, mutatis mutandis, as if fully set out in this Agreement, without any further action required on the part of any Party, effective as of the date when such Relevant Provision became effective under the MFL Agreement. Thereafter each Obligor will promptly enter into such documentation and take such other action as the Agent (acting on the instructions of the Majority Lenders) may reasonably request in order to give effect to (and give evidence of authorisation of) any amendments or additions to this Agreement required to give effect to the Relevant Provision under this Agreement.

 

21.18 Most Favoured Lender Agreement: Guarantees and Security

 

  (a) Subject to paragraph (b) below, the Parent shall ensure that no Relevant Group Company:

 

  (i) is or becomes a borrower under any credit facility, bond or note facility pursuant to which an Obligor or a Material Group Company is party (each a “ Relevant MFL Agreement ”); or

 

  (ii) grants or has granted a guarantee, indemnity or any other credit support or any Encumbrance in respect of the obligations of any member of the Group under a Relevant MFL Agreement,

unless on or before the date of such accession or the date on which such guarantee, indemnity or other credit support or Encumbrance is granted, that Relevant Group Company is or has become an Additional Borrower and/or Additional Guarantor (as appropriate) under this Agreement and (if that Relevant Group Company has granted

 

- 67 -


Table of Contents

an Encumbrance in respect of the obligations of any member of the Group under the Relevant MFL Agreement) that Relevant Group Company shall grant or has granted an equivalent Encumbrance in favour of the Finance Parties in form and substance satisfactory to the Agent (acting on the instructions of the Majority Lenders acting reasonably as appropriate) and corporate authorisations and opinions in relation to such Encumbrance in form and substance satisfactory to the Agent (acting reasonably) have been delivered to the Agent.

 

  (b) Paragraph (a) above shall not apply to (i) any Existing MFL Agreements save in respect of Relevant Group Companies that become new borrowers or grant new guarantees, indemnities or other forms of credit support or Encumbrances in respect of such Existing MFL Agreements after the date of this Agreement; (ii) any Refinancing MFL Agreement which has equivalent borrowers and benefits from equivalent guarantees and Encumbrances as the MFL Agreement it is refinancing; or (iii) any Project Finance Borrowing MFL Agreement.

 

  (c) For the purposes of this Clause 21.18, a “ Relevant Group Company ” is a member of the Group which is neither an Obligor nor a Material Group Company.

 

21.19 Maintenance of Rating

The Parent shall use reasonable endeavours to ensure that the Parent maintains a long term credit rating with Moody’s and Standard & Poors.

 

22. EVENTS OF DEFAULT

Each of the events or circumstances set out in Clause 22 is an Event of Default (whether or not caused by any reason whatsoever outside the control of a Borrower or the Parent or any other person) save for Clause 22.16 ( Acceleration ) and Clause 22.17 ( Remedy ).

 

22.1 Non-payment

An Obligor does not pay on the due date any amount payable pursuant to a Finance Document at the place and in the currency in which it is expressed to be payable unless payment is made within three (3) Business Days of its due date.

 

22.2 Financial covenants

Any requirement of Clause 20 ( Financial Covenants ) is not satisfied.

 

22.3 Other obligations

 

  (a) Subject to Clause 22.17 ( Remedy ), an Obligor does not comply with any provision of the Finance Documents (other than those referred to in Clause 22.1 ( Non-Payment ) and Clause 20 ( Financial Covenants )).

 

- 68 -


Table of Contents
  (b) No Event of Default will occur under paragraph (a) in respect of Clause 21.9 ( Taxation ) unless the unpaid Taxes (which do not fall within paragraphs (a) (b) or (c) of that clause) exceed $20,000,000 (or its equivalent).

 

22.4 Misrepresentation

 

  (a) Subject to Clause 22.17 ( Remedy ), any representation or statement made or deemed to be made by any Obligor in the Finance Documents or any other document delivered by or on behalf of any Obligor under or in connection with any Finance Document is or proves to have been incorrect or misleading in any material and adverse respect when made or deemed to be made.

 

  (b) No Event of Default will occur under paragraph (a) above in respect of the representation contained in Clause 18.20 ( Taxation ) unless the unpaid Taxes (which do not fall within paragraphs (a) (b) or (c) of that clause) exceed $20,000,000 (or its equivalent).

 

22.5 Cross-default

 

  (a) Any Financial Indebtedness of a Material Group Company is not paid when due, nor where there is an applicable grace period, within the originally applicable grace period.

 

  (b) Any Financial Indebtedness of a Material Group Company is declared to be or otherwise becomes due and payable prior to its specified maturity as a result of an event of default (however described).

 

  (c) Any commitment for any Financial Indebtedness of a Material Group Company is cancelled or suspended by a creditor of a Material Group Company as a result of an event of default (however described).

 

  (d) Any creditor of a Material Group Company becomes entitled to declare any Financial Indebtedness of a Material Group Company due and payable prior to its specified maturity as a result of an event of default (however described).

 

  (e) No Event of Default will occur under this Clause 22.5 if the aggregate amount of Financial Indebtedness or commitment for Financial Indebtedness, falling within paragraphs (a) to to (d) of this Clause 22.5 is less than $20,000,000 (or its equivalent).

 

22.6 Insolvency

 

  (a) Any Material Group Company is unable or admits inability to pay its debts as they fall due, suspends making payments on any of its debts or, by reason of actual or anticipated financial difficulties, commences negotiations with one or more of its classes of creditors with a view to rescheduling any of its Financial Indebtedness which in the case of a Material Group Company (other than an Obligor) could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

- 69 -


Table of Contents
  (b) The value of the assets of any Material Group Company, fairly valued, is less than its liabilities (taking into account contingent and prospective liabilities) which in the case of a Material Group Company (other than an Obligor) could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

  (c) A moratorium is declared in respect of any Financial Indebtedness of any Material Group Company.

 

22.7 Insolvency proceedings

Any corporate action, legal proceedings or other similar procedure or step is taken in relation to:

 

  (a) the suspension of payments, a moratorium of any Financial Indebtedness, winding-up, dissolution, administration or reorganisation (by way of voluntary arrangement, scheme of arrangement or otherwise) of any Material Group Company;

 

  (b) a composition, compromise, assignment or arrangement with any creditor or class of creditors of any Material Group Company;

 

  (c) the appointment of a liquidator, receiver, administrator, administrative receiver, judicial manager, compulsory manager or other similar officer in respect of any Material Group Company or any of its assets; or

 

  (d) enforcement of any Encumbrance over any assets of any Material Group Company,

or any analogous procedure or step is taken in any jurisdiction and any such procedure or proceedings are not contested in good faith nor discharged within thirty (30) days (or such shorter period provided for contesting such procedure or proceedings under the laws of the relevant jurisdiction).

 

22.8 Failure to comply with final judgment

Any Material Group Company fails within five (5) Business Days of the due date to comply with or pay any sum due from it under any material final judgment or any final order made or given by any court of competent jurisdiction. For the purposes of this Clause 22.8, a “material final judgment” shall be any judgment for the payment of a sum of money in excess of twenty million dollars ($20,000,000) (or its equivalent).

 

22.9 Creditors’ process

Any expropriation (other than an expropriation where fair compensation is received) or the operation of the attachment, sequestration, distress or execution affects any material asset of a Material Group Company and is not discharged within twenty-one (21) days. For the purposes of this Clause 22.9 a “material asset” is any single income producing asset of the relevant Material Group Company which contributes not less than five per cent. (5%) towards the Consolidated EBITDA or gross assets of the Group (calculated according to the most recent set of audited consolidated financial statements delivered pursuant to Clause 19.1 ( Financial Statements )) provided that

 

- 70 -


Table of Contents

any loss of mineral rights arising as a result of the operation of the Mineral and Petroleum Resources Development Act, No. 28 of 2002 (the “MPRDA” ) (including the broad-based socio-economic empowerment charter (the “Mining Charter” ), the revised Mining Charter, the Code of Good Practice for the Minerals Industry and the Housing and Living Condition Standard for the Mining Industry published in accordance with the MPRDA) substantially in its current form as at the date of this Agreement and/or the operation of the Mineral and Petroleum Resources Royalty Act, No. 28 of 2008, substantially in its current form as at the date of this Agreement shall not constitute an expropriation for the purposes of this Clause 22.9.

 

22.10 Unlawfulness

It is or becomes unlawful for an Obligor to perform any of its obligations under the Finance Documents or such obligations cease to be legal, valid, binding or enforceable obligations

 

22.11 Repudiation and Unenforceability

An Obligor repudiates a Finance Document or any Finance Document is declared to be or is otherwise unenforceable against an Obligor by a court of the jurisdiction of incorporation of the relevant Obligor.

 

22.12 Governmental Intervention

By or under the authority of any government:

 

  (a) the management of any Material Group Company is wholly or partially displaced or the authority of any Material Group Company in the conduct of its business is wholly or partially taken over; or

 

  (b) all or a majority of the issued shares of any Material Group Company or material part of its revenues or assets is seized, nationalised, expropriated or compulsorily acquired. For the purposes of this Clause 22.12 “material part of its revenues or assets” shall in relation to the relevant Material Group Company be construed as revenues comprising not less than five per cent. (5%) of the Consolidated EBITDA or gross assets of the Group calculated mutatis mutandis in accordance with the provisions of Clause 22.9 ( Creditors’ process ) or assets which contribute not less than five per cent. (5%) towards the Consolidated EBITDA or gross assets of the Group calculated mutatis mutandis accordance with the provisions of Clause 22.9 ( Creditors’ process ), provided that neither the implementation of the MPRDA (including the Mining Charter, the revised Mining Charter, the Code of Good Practice for the Minerals Industry and the Housing and Living Condition Standard for the Mining Industry published in accordance with the MPRDA) substantially in its current form as at the date of this Agreement nor the implementation of the Mineral and Petroleum Resources Royalty Act, No. 28 of 2008, in each case substantially in its current form as at the date of this Agreement, shall constitute a seizure, nationalisation, expropriation or compulsory acquisition as contemplated by this Clause 22.12.

 

- 71 -


Table of Contents
22.13 Material Adverse Effect

Any change occurs in the business, condition (financial or otherwise), operations, performance or properties of the Obligors or the Group taken as a whole since the date of the Original Financial Statements which could be reasonably likely to have a Material Adverse Effect excluding, for the avoidance of doubt, the Demerger or the announcement of the Demerger.

 

22.14 Cessation of Business

Any Material Group Company ceases to carry on the business which it undertakes at the date of this Agreement, excluding for the avoidance of doubt the Demerger or the announcement of the Demerger.

 

22.15 Litigation

Any litigation, arbitration, administrative proceedings or governmental or regulatory investigations or proceedings against any Material Group Company or its respective assets or revenues is reasonably expected to be adversely determined, and if so determined, could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

22.16 Acceleration

On and at any time after the occurrence of an Event of Default which is continuing the Agent may, and shall if so directed by the Majority Lenders, by notice to the Borrowers and the Parent:

 

  (a) cancel the Total Commitments whereupon they shall immediately be cancelled;

 

  (b) declare that all or part of the Loans, together with accrued interest, and all other amounts accrued or outstanding under the Finance Documents be immediately due and payable, whereupon they shall become immediately due and payable; and/or

 

  (c) declare that all or part of the Loans be payable on demand, whereupon they shall immediately become payable on demand by the Agent on the instructions of the Majority Lenders.

 

22.17 Remedy

 

  (a) No Event of Default under this Clause 22 ( Events of Default ) (other than those referred to in Clause 22.1 ( Non-payment ) and 22.2 ( Financial covenants )) will occur if the failure to comply or circumstance giving rise to the same is capable of remedy and is remedied by an Obligor within ten (10) days of the earlier of the Agent giving notice to the Obligors or any Obligor becoming aware of the failure to comply.

 

  (b)

For the purposes of paragraph (a) above, the events or circumstances referred to in Clause 22.5 ( Cross-default ), Clause 22.6 ( Insolvency ), Clause 22.7 ( Insolvency Proceedings ), Clause 22.8 ( Failure to comply with final judgment ), Clause 22.9 ( Creditors’ process ), Clause 22.10 ( Unlawfulness ), Clause 22.11

 

- 72 -


Table of Contents
  ( Repudiation and Unenforceability ), Clause 22.12 ( Governmental Intervention ), Clause 22.13 ( Material Adverse Effect ) and Clause 22.14 ( Cessation of Business ) shall be deemed to be incapable of remedy save to the extent set out therein unless the Agent determines otherwise.

 

- 73 -


Table of Contents

SECTION 9

CHANGES TO PARTIES

 

23. CHANGES TO THE LENDERS

 

23.1 Assignments and transfers by the Lenders

Subject to this Clause 23, a Lender (the “ Existing Lender ”) may:

 

  (a) assign any of its rights; or

 

  (b) transfer by novation any of its rights and obligations,

to another bank or financial institution or to a trust, fund or other entity which is regularly engaged in or established for the purpose of making, purchasing or investing in loans, securities or other financial assets (the “ New Lender ”).

 

23.2 Conditions of assignment or transfer

 

  (a) Subject to paragraph (b) below the consent of the Parent is required for an assignment or transfer by an Existing Lender in accordance with Clause 23.1 ( Assignments and Transfers by Lenders ) unless the assignment or transfer:

 

  (i) is to another Lender or an Affiliate of a Lender; or

 

  (ii) takes effect at a time when an Event of Default has occurred and is continuing.

 

  (b) Paragraph (a) shall not apply to any Existing Lender that is transferring or assigning all or any part of its participation in a Loan and the Commitments which correspond to that Loan (or part of that Loan as applicable), after the date which is 6 Months from the date of this Agreement. An Existing Lender making such an assignment or transfer must consult with the Parent for not less than 5 days before it may make that assignment or transfer unless that assignment or transfer:

 

  (A) is to another Lender or an Affiliate of a Lender; or

 

  (B) takes effect at a time when an Event of Default has occurred and is continuing.

 

  (c) The consent of the Parent to an assignment or transfer (if required) must not be unreasonably withheld or delayed. The Parent will be deemed to have given its consent five (5) Business Days after the Existing Lender has requested it unless consent is expressly refused by the Parent within that time.

 

  (d) The consent of the Parent to an assignment or transfer must not be withheld solely because the assignment or transfer may result in an increase to the Mandatory Cost.

 

- 74 -


Table of Contents
  (e) An assignment will only be effective on:

 

  (i) receipt by the Agent (whether in the Assignment Agreement or otherwise) of written confirmation from the New Lender (in form and substance satisfactory to the Agent) that the New Lender will assume the same obligations to the other Finance Parties as it would have been under if it was an Original Lender; and

 

  (ii) performance by the Agent of all necessary “know your customer” or other similar checks under all applicable laws and regulations in relation to such assignment to a New Lender, the completion of which the Agent shall promptly notify to the Existing Lender and the New Lender.

 

  (f) A transfer will only be effective if the procedure set out in Clause 23.5 ( Procedure for transfer ) is complied with.

 

  (g) If:

 

  (i) a Lender assigns or transfers any of its rights or obligations under the Finance Documents or changes its Facility Office; and

 

  (ii) as a result of circumstances existing at the date the assignment, transfer or change occurs, an Obligor would be obliged to make a payment to the New Lender or Lender acting through its new Facility Office under Clause 12 ( Tax gross-up and indemnities ) or Clause 13 ( Increased costs ),

then the New Lender or Lender acting through its new Facility Office is only entitled to receive payment under those Clauses to the same extent as the Existing Lender or Lender acting through its previous Facility Office would have been if the assignment, transfer or change had not occurred.

 

  (h) Each New Lender, by executing the relevant Transfer Certificate or Assignment Agreement, confirms, for the avoidance of doubt, that the Agent has authority to execute on its behalf any amendment or waiver that has been approved by or on behalf of the requisite Lender or Lenders in accordance with this Agreement on or prior to the date on which the transfer or assignment becomes effective in accordance with this Agreement and that it is bound by that decision to the same extent as the Existing Lender would have been had it remained a Lender.

 

23.3 Assignment or transfer fee

The New Lender shall, on the date upon which an assignment or transfer takes effect, pay to the Agent (for its own account) a fee of three thousand dollars ($3,000), unless the Agent, in its sole discretion, agrees to waive the payment of such fee.

 

- 75 -


Table of Contents
23.4 Limitation of responsibility of Existing Lenders

 

  (a) Unless expressly agreed to the contrary, an Existing Lender makes no representation or warranty and assumes no responsibility to a New Lender for:

 

  (i) the legality, validity, effectiveness, adequacy or enforceability of the Finance Documents or any other documents;

 

  (ii) the financial condition of any Obligor;

 

  (iii) the performance and observance by any Obligor of its obligations under the Finance Documents or any other documents; or

 

  (iv) the accuracy of any statements (whether written or oral) made in or in connection with any Finance Document or any other document,

and any representations or warranties implied by law are excluded.

 

  (b) Each New Lender confirms to the Existing Lender and the other Finance Parties that it:

 

  (i) has made (and shall continue to make) its own independent investigation and assessment of the financial condition and affairs of each Obligor and its related entities in connection with its participation in this Agreement and has not relied exclusively on any information provided to it by the Existing Lender in connection with any Finance Document; and

 

  (ii) will continue to make its own independent appraisal of the creditworthiness of each Obligor and its related entities whilst any amount is or may be outstanding under the Finance Documents or any Commitment is in force.

 

  (c) Nothing in any Finance Document obliges an Existing Lender to:

 

  (i) accept a re-transfer or re-assignment from a New Lender of any of the rights and obligations assigned or transferred under this Clause 23; or

 

  (ii) support any losses directly or indirectly incurred by the New Lender by reason of the non-performance by any Obligor of its obligations under the Finance Documents or otherwise.

 

23.5 Procedure for transfer

 

  (a) Subject to the conditions set out in Clause 23.2 ( Conditions of assignment or transfer ) a transfer is effected in accordance with paragraph (c) below when the Agent executes an otherwise duly completed Transfer Certificate delivered to it by the Existing Lender and the New Lender. The Agent shall, subject to paragraph (b) below, as soon as reasonably practicable after receipt by it of a duly completed Transfer Certificate appearing on its face to comply with the terms of this Agreement and delivered in accordance with the terms of this Agreement, execute that Transfer Certificate.

 

- 76 -


Table of Contents
  (b) The Agent shall only be obliged to execute a Transfer Certificate delivered to it by the Existing Lender and the New Lender once it is satisfied it has complied with all necessary “know your customer” or other similar checks under all applicable laws and regulations in relation to the transfer to such New Lender.

 

  (c) Subject to Clause 23.9 ( Pro rata interest settlement ), on the Transfer Date:

 

  (i) to the extent that in the Transfer Certificate the Existing Lender seeks to transfer by novation its rights and obligations under the Finance Documents each of the Obligors and the Existing Lender shall be released from further obligations towards one another under the Finance Documents and their respective rights against one another under the Finance Documents shall be cancelled (being the “ Discharged Rights and Obligations ”);

 

  (ii) each of the Obligors and the New Lender shall assume obligations towards one another and/or acquire rights against one another which differ from the Discharged Rights and Obligations only insofar as that Obligor and the New Lender have assumed and/or acquired the same in place of that Obligor and the Existing Lender;

 

  (iii) the Agent, the Arrangers, the New Lender and other Lenders shall acquire the same rights and assume the same obligations between themselves as they would have acquired and assumed had the New Lender been an Original Lender with the rights and/or obligations acquired or assumed by it as a result of the transfer and to that extent the Agent, the Arrangers and the Existing Lender shall each be released from further obligations to each other under the Finance Documents; and

 

  (iv) the New Lender shall become a Party as a “Lender”.

 

23.6 Procedure for assignment

 

  (a) Subject to the conditions set out in Clause 23.2 ( Conditions of assignment or transfer ) an assignment may be effected in accordance with paragraph (c) below when the Agent executes an otherwise duly completed Assignment Agreement delivered to it by the Existing Lender and the New Lender. The Agent shall, subject to paragraph (b) below, as soon as reasonably practicable after receipt by it of a duly completed Assignment Agreement appearing on its face to comply with the terms of this Agreement and delivered in accordance with the terms of this Agreement, execute that Assignment Agreement.

 

  (b) The Agent shall only be obliged to execute an Assignment Agreement delivered to it by the Existing Lender and the New Lender once it is satisfied it has complied with all necessary “know your customer” or other similar checks under all applicable laws and regulations in relation to the assignment to such New Lender.

 

- 77 -


Table of Contents
  (c) Subject to Clause 23.9 ( Pro rata interest settlement ), on the Transfer Date:

 

  (i) the Existing Lender will assign absolutely to the New Lender the rights under the Finance Documents expressed to be the subject of the assignment in the Assignment Agreement;

 

  (ii) the Existing Lender will be released by each Obligor and the other Finance Parties from the obligations owed by it (the “ Relevant Obligations ”) and expressed to be the subject of the release in the Assignment Agreement; and

 

  (iii) the New Lender shall become a Party as a “Lender” and will be bound by obligations equivalent to the Relevant Obligations.

 

  (d) Lenders may utilise procedures other than those set out in this Clause 23.6 to assign their rights under the Finance Documents (but not, without the consent of the relevant Obligor or unless in accordance with Clause 23.5 ( Procedure for transfer ), to obtain a release by that Obligor from the obligations owed to that Obligor by the Lenders nor the assumption of equivalent obligations by a New Lender) provided that they comply with the conditions set out in Clause 23.2 ( Conditions of assignment or transfer ).

 

23.7 Copy of Transfer Certificate or Assignment Agreement to Parent

The Agent shall, as soon as reasonably practicable after it has executed a Transfer Certificate or Assignment Agreement, send to the Parent a copy of that Transfer Certificate or Assignment Agreement.

 

23.8 Security over Lenders’ rights

 

  (a) In addition to the other rights provided to Lenders under this Clause 23, each Lender may without consulting with or obtaining consent from any Obligor, at any time charge, assign or otherwise create an Encumbrance in or over (whether by way of collateral or otherwise) all or any of its rights under any Finance Document to secure obligations of that Lender including, without limitation:

 

  (i) any charge, assignment or other Encumbrance to secure obligations to a federal reserve or central bank; and

 

  (ii) in the case of any Lender which is a fund, any charge, assignment or other Encumbrance granted to any holders (or trustee or representatives of holders) of obligations owed, or securities issued, by that Lender as security for those obligations or securities,

except that no such charge, assignment or Encumbrance shall:

 

  (A) release a Lender from any of its obligations under the Finance Documents or substitute the beneficiary of the relevant charge, assignment or Encumbrance for the Lender as a party to any of the Finance Documents; or

 

- 78 -


Table of Contents
  (B) require any payments to be made by an Obligor other than or in excess of, or grant to any person any more extensive rights than, those required to be made or granted to the relevant Lender under the Finance Documents.

 

23.9 Pro rata interest settlement

If the Agent has notified the Lenders that it is able to distribute interest payments on a “ pro rata basis” to Existing Lenders and New Lenders then (in respect of any transfer pursuant to Clause 23.5 ( Procedure for transfer ) or any assignment pursuant to Clause 23.6 ( Procedure for assignment ) the Transfer Date of which, in each case, is after the date of such notification and is not on the last day of an Interest Period):

 

  (a) any interest or fees in respect of the relevant participation which are expressed to accrue by reference to the lapse of time shall continue to accrue in favour of the Existing Lender up to but excluding the Transfer Date (“ Accrued Amounts ”) and shall become due and payable to the Existing Lender (without further interest accruing on them) on the last day of the current Interest Period (or, if the Interest Period is longer than six Months, on the next of the dates which falls at six Monthly intervals after the first day of that Interest Period); and

 

  (b) the rights assigned or transferred by the Existing Lender will not include the right to the Accrued Amounts so that, for the avoidance of doubt:

 

  (i) when the Accrued Amounts become payable, those Accrued Amounts will be payable for the account of the Existing Lender; and

 

  (ii) the amount payable to the New Lender on that date will be the amount which would, but for the application of this Clause 23.9, have been payable to it on that date, but after deduction of the Accrued Amounts.

 

24. CHANGES TO THE OBLIGORS

 

24.1 Assignment and transfer by Obligors

No Obligor may assign any of its rights or transfer any of its rights or obligations under the Finance Documents.

 

24.2 Additional Borrowers

 

  (a) Subject to compliance with the provisions of paragraphs (c) and (d) of Clause 19.8 ( “Know your customer” checks ), the Parent may request that any of its Subsidiaries become an Additional Borrower. That Subsidiary shall become an Additional Borrower if:

 

  (i) all the Lenders, acting reasonably, approve the addition of that Subsidiary;

 

  (ii) the Parent delivers to the Agent a duly completed and executed Accession Letter;

 

- 79 -


Table of Contents
  (iii) the Parent confirms that no Default is continuing or would occur as a result of that Subsidiary becoming an Additional Borrower; and

 

  (iv) the Agent has received all of the documents and other evidence listed in Part II of Schedule 2 ( Conditions precedent ) in relation to that Additional Borrower, each in form and substance satisfactory to the Agent.

 

  (b) The Agent shall notify the Parent and the Lenders promptly upon being satisfied that it has received (in form and substance satisfactory to it) all the documents and other evidence listed in Part II of Schedule 2 ( Conditions precedent ).

 

24.3 Resignation of an Additional Borrower

 

  (a) The Parent may request that a Borrower (other than the Original Borrowers) ceases to be a Borrower by delivering to the Agent a Resignation Letter.

 

  (b) The Agent shall accept a Resignation Letter and notify the Parent and the Lenders of its acceptance if:

 

  (i) no Default is continuing or would result from the acceptance of the Resignation Letter (and the Parent has confirmed to the Agent that this is the case); and

 

  (ii) the Borrower is under no actual or contingent obligations as a Borrower under any Finance Documents,

whereupon that company shall cease to be a Borrower and shall have no further rights or obligations under the Finance Documents.

 

24.4 Additional Guarantors

 

  (a) Subject to compliance with the provisions of paragraphs (c) and (d) of Clause 19.8 ( “Know your customer” checks ), the Parent may request that any of its Subsidiaries become an Additional Guarantor. That Subsidiary shall become an Additional Guarantor if;

 

  (i) the Parent delivers to the Agent a duly completed and executed Accession Letter; and

 

  (ii) the Agent has received all of the documents and other evidence listed in Part III of Schedule 2 ( Conditions precedent ) in relation to that Additional Guarantor, each in form and substance satisfactory to the Agent.

 

  (b) The Agent shall notify the Parent and the Lenders promptly upon being satisfied that it has received (in form and substance satisfactory to it) all the documents and other evidence listed in Part III of Schedule 2 ( Conditions precedent ).

 

- 80 -


Table of Contents
24.5 Repetition of Representations

Delivery of an Accession Letter constitutes confirmation by the relevant Subsidiary that the representations in Clause 18 ( Representations ) are true and correct in relation to it as at the date of delivery as if made by reference to the facts and circumstances then existing.

 

24.6 Resignation of an Additional Guarantor

 

  (a) The Parent may request that a Guarantor (other than an Original Guarantor) ceases to be a Guarantor by delivering to the Agent a Resignation Letter.

 

  (b) The Agent shall accept a Resignation Letter and notify the Parent and the Lenders of its acceptance if no Default is continuing and the Parent has confirmed to the Agent that this is the case.

 

- 81 -


Table of Contents

SECTION 10

THE FINANCE PARTIES

 

25. ROLE OF THE AGENT AND THE ARRANGERS

 

25.1 Appointment of the Agent

 

  (a) Each other Finance Party appoints the Agent to act as its agent under and in connection with the Finance Documents.

 

  (b) Each other Finance Party authorises the Agent to exercise the rights, powers, authorities and discretions specifically given to the Agent under or in connection with the Finance Documents together with any other incidental rights, powers, authorities and discretions.

 

25.2 Duties of the Agent

 

  (a) Subject to paragraph (b) below, the Agent shall promptly forward to a Party the original or a copy of any document which is delivered to the Agent for that Party by any other Party.

 

  (b) Without prejudice to Clause 23.7 ( Copy of Transfer Certificate or Assignment Agreement to Parent ), paragraph (a) above shall not apply to any Transfer Certificate or to any Assignment Agreement.

 

  (c) Except where a Finance Document specifically provides otherwise, the Agent is not obliged to review or check the adequacy, accuracy or completeness of any document it forwards to another Party.

 

  (d) If the Agent receives notice from a Party referring to this Agreement, describing a Default and stating that the circumstance described is a Default, it shall promptly notify the other Finance Parties.

 

  (e) If the Agent is aware of the non-payment of any principal, interest, commitment fee or other fee payable to a Finance Party (other than the Agent or the Arrangers) under this Agreement it shall promptly notify the other Finance Parties.

 

  (f) The Agent’s duties under the Finance Documents are solely mechanical and administrative in nature.

 

  (g)

The Agent shall provide to the Parent within five (5) Business Days of a request by the Parent (but no more frequently than once per calendar month), a list (which may be in electronic form) setting out the names of the Lenders as at the date of that request, their respective Commitments, the address and fax number (and the department or officer, if any, for whose attention any communication is to be made) of each Lender for any communication to be made or document to be delivered under or in connection with the Finance Documents, the electronic mail address and/or any other information required to enable the sending and receipt of information by electronic mail or other electronic means to and by each Lender to whom any communication under or

 

- 82 -


Table of Contents
  in connection with the Finance Documents may be made by that means and the account details of each Lender for any payment to be distributed by the Agent to that Lender under the Finance Documents.

 

25.3 Role of the Arrangers

Except as specifically provided in the Finance Documents, the Arrangers have no obligations of any kind to any other Party under or in connection with any Finance Document.

 

25.4 No fiduciary duties

 

  (a) Nothing in this Agreement constitutes the Agent or the Arrangers as a trustee or fiduciary of any other person.

 

  (b) Neither the Agent nor the Arrangers shall be bound to account to any Lender for any sum or the profit element of any sum received by it for its own account.

 

25.5 Business with the Group

The Agent and the Arrangers may accept deposits from, lend money to and generally engage in any kind of banking or other business with any member of the Group.

 

25.6 Rights and discretions of the Agent

 

  (a) The Agent may rely on:

 

  (i) any representation, notice or document believed by it to be genuine, correct and appropriately authorised; and

 

  (ii) any statement made by a director, authorised signatory or employee of any person regarding any matters which may reasonably be assumed to be within his knowledge or within his power to verify.

 

  (b) The Agent may assume (unless it has received notice to the contrary in its capacity as agent for the Lenders) that:

 

  (i) no Default has occurred (unless it has actual knowledge of a Default arising under Clause 22.1 ( Non-payment ));

 

  (ii) any right, power, authority or discretion vested in any Party or the Majority Lenders has not been exercised; and

 

  (iii) any notice or request made by the Parent (other than a Utilisation Request) is made on behalf of and with the consent and knowledge of all the Obligors.

 

  (c) The Agent may engage, pay for and rely on the advice or services of any lawyers, accountants, surveyors or other experts.

 

  (d) The Agent may act in relation to the Finance Documents through its personnel and agents.

 

- 83 -


Table of Contents
  (e) The Agent may disclose to any other Party any information it reasonably believes it has received as agent under this Agreement.

 

  (f) Notwithstanding any other provision of any Finance Document to the contrary, neither the Agent nor the Arrangers are obliged to do or omit to do anything if it would or might in its reasonable opinion constitute a breach of any law or regulation or a breach of a fiduciary duty or duty of confidentiality.

 

  (g) Without prejudice to the generality of paragraph (f) above, the Agent may disclose the identity of a Defaulting Lender to the other Finance Parties and the Parent and shall disclose the same upon the written request of the Parent or the Majority Lenders.

 

  (h) The Agent may not disclose to any Finance Party any details of the rate notified to the Agent by any Lender or the identity of any such Lender for the purpose of paragraph (a)(ii) of Clause 10.2 ( Market Disruption ).

 

25.7 Majority Lenders’ instructions

 

  (a) Unless a contrary indication appears in a Finance Document, the Agent shall (i) exercise any right, power, authority or discretion vested in it as Agent in accordance with any instructions given to it by the Majority Lenders (or, if so instructed by the Majority Lenders, refrain from exercising any right, power, authority or discretion vested in it as Agent) and (ii) not be liable for any act (or omission) if it acts (or refrains from taking any action) in accordance with an instruction of the Majority Lenders.

 

  (b) Unless a contrary indication appears in a Finance Document, any instructions given by the Majority Lenders will be binding on all the Finance Parties.

 

  (c) The Agent may refrain from acting in accordance with the instructions of the Majority Lenders (or, if appropriate, the Lenders) until it has received such security as it may require for any cost, loss or liability (together with any associated VAT) which it may incur in complying with the instructions.

 

  (d) In the absence of instructions from the Majority Lenders, (or, if appropriate, the Lenders) the Agent may act (or refrain from taking action) as it considers to be in the best interest of the Lenders.

 

  (e) The Agent is not authorised to act on behalf of a Lender (without first obtaining that Lender’s consent) in any legal or arbitration proceedings relating to any Finance Document.

 

25.8 Responsibility for documentation

Neither the Agent nor the Arrangers:

 

  (a) is responsible for the adequacy, accuracy and/or completeness of any information (whether oral or written) supplied by the Agent, the Arrangers, an Obligor or any other person given in or in connection with any Finance Document; or

 

- 84 -


Table of Contents
  (b) is responsible for the legality, validity, effectiveness, adequacy or enforceability of any Finance Document or any other agreement, arrangement or document entered into, made or executed in anticipation of or in connection with any Finance Document.

 

25.9 Exclusion of liability

 

  (a) Without limiting paragraph (b) below (and without prejudice to the provisions of paragraph (e) of Clause 28.10 ( Disruption to payment systems etc ), the Agent will not be liable (including without limitation, for negligence or any other category of liability whatsoever) for any action taken by it under or in connection with any Finance Document, unless directly caused by its gross negligence or wilful misconduct.

 

  (b) No Party (other than the Agent) may take any proceedings against any officer, employee or agent of the Agent in respect of any claim it might have against the Agent or in respect of any act or omission of any kind by that officer, employee or agent in relation to any Finance Document and any officer, employee or agent of the Agent may rely on this Clause 25.9 subject to Clause 1.4 ( Third Party Rights ) and the provisions of the Third Parties Act.

 

  (c) The Agent will not be liable for any delay (or any related consequences) in crediting an account with an amount required under the Finance Documents to be paid by the Agent if the Agent has taken all necessary steps as soon as reasonably practicable to comply with the regulations or operating procedures of any recognised clearing or settlement system used by the Agent for that purpose.

 

  (d) Nothing in this Agreement shall oblige the Agent or the Arrangers to carry out any “know your customer” or other checks in relation to any person on behalf of any Lender and each Lender confirms to the Agent and the Arrangers that it is solely responsible for any such checks it is required to carry out and that it may not rely on any statement in relation to such checks made by the Agent or the Arrangers.

 

25.10 Lenders’ indemnity to the Agent

Each Lender shall (in proportion to its share of the Total Commitments or, if the Total Commitments are then zero, to its share of the Total Commitments immediately prior to their reduction to zero) indemnify the Agent, within three (3) Business Days of demand, against:

 

  (a) save as set out in (b) below, any cost, loss or liability (including, without limitation, for negligence or any other category of liability whatsoever) incurred by the Agent (otherwise than by reason of the Agent’s gross negligence or wilful misconduct)) or,

 

  (b) in the case of any cost, loss or liability pursuant to Clause 28.10 ( Disruption to Payment systems etc. ) notwithstanding the Agent’s negligence, gross negligence or any other category of liability whatsoever but not including any claim based on the fraud of the Agent, in either case, in acting as Agent under the Finance Documents

 

- 85 -


Table of Contents

(unless, in either case, the Agent has been reimbursed by an Obligor pursuant to a Finance Document or, as the case may be, by the relevant person pursuant to Clause 28.4 ( Clawback )).

 

25.11 Resignation of the Agent

 

  (a) The Agent may resign and appoint one of its Affiliates acting through an office as successor by giving notice to the other Finance Parties and the Parent.

 

  (b) Alternatively the Agent may resign by giving notice to the other Finance Parties and the Parent, in which case the Majority Lenders (after consultation with the Parent) may appoint a successor Agent.

 

  (c) If the Majority Lenders have not appointed a successor Agent in accordance with paragraph (b) above within thirty (30) days after notice of resignation was given, the Agent (after consultation with the Parent) may appoint a successor Agent.

 

  (d) If the Agent wishes to resign because (acting reasonably) it has concluded that it is no longer appropriate for it to remain as agent and the Agent is entitled to appoint a successor Agent under paragraph (c) above, the Agent may (if it concludes (acting reasonably) that it is necessary to do so in order to persuade the proposed successor Agent to become a party to this Agreement as Agent) agree with the proposed successor Agent amendments to this Clause 25 consistent with then current market practice for the appointment and protection of corporate trustees (which shall be determined by reference to the then standard documents published by the Loan Market Association and, to the extent practicable, following consultation by the Agent with the Lenders) and those amendments will bind the Parties.

 

  (e) The retiring Agent shall, at its own cost, make available to the successor Agent such documents and records and provide such assistance as the successor Agent may reasonably request for the purposes of performing its functions as Agent under the Finance Documents.

 

  (f) The Agent’s resignation notice shall only take effect upon the appointment of a successor.

 

  (g) Upon the appointment of a successor, the retiring Agent shall be discharged from any further obligation in respect of the Finance Documents but shall remain entitled to the benefit of this Clause 25. Its successor and each of the other Parties shall have the same rights and obligations amongst themselves as they would have had if such successor had been an original Party.

 

  (h) After consultation with the Parent, the Majority Lenders may, by notice to the Agent, require it to resign in accordance with paragraph (b) above. In this event, the Agent shall resign in accordance with paragraph (b) above.

 

- 86 -


Table of Contents
25.12 Replacement of the Agent

 

  (a) At any time the Agent is an Impaired Agent, the Majority Lenders may, by giving notice to the Agent replace the Agent by appointing a successor Agent (acting through an office in the United Kingdom).

 

  (b) The retiring Agent shall (at its own cost) make available to the successor Agent such documents and records and provide such assistance as the successor Agent may reasonable request for the purposes of performing its functions as Agent under the Finance Documents.

 

  (c) The appointment of the successor Agent shall take effect on the date specified in the notice from the Majority Lenders to the retiring Agent. As from this date, the retiring Agent shall be discharged from any further obligation in respect of the Finance Documents but shall remain entitled to the benefit of this Clause 25 (and any agency fees for the account of the retiring Agent shall cease to accrue from (and shall be payable on) that date).

 

  (d) Any successor Agent and each of the other Parties shall have the same rights and obligations amongst themselves as they would have had if such successor had been an original Party.

 

25.13 Confidentiality

 

  (a) In acting as agent for the Finance Parties, the Agent shall be regarded as acting through its agency division which shall be treated as a separate entity from any other of its divisions or departments.

 

  (b) If information is received by another division or department of the Agent, it may be treated as confidential to that division or department and the Agent shall not be deemed to have notice of it.

 

25.14 Relationship with the Lenders

 

  (a) Subject to Clause 23.9 ( Pro rata interest settlement ), the Agent may treat the person shown in its records as Lender at the opening of business (in the place of the Agent’s principal office as notified to the Finance Parties from time to time) as the Lender acting through its Facility Office:

 

  (i) entitled to or liable for any payment due under any Finance Document on that day; and

 

  (ii) entitled to receive and act upon any notice, request, document or communication or make any decision or determination under any Finance Document made or delivered on that day,

unless it has received not less than five (5) Business Days’ prior notice from that Lender to the contrary in accordance with the terms of this Agreement.

 

- 87 -


Table of Contents
  (b) Each Lender shall supply the Agent with any information required by the Agent in order to calculate the Mandatory Cost in accordance with Schedule 4 ( Mandatory Cost formula ).

 

  (c) Any Lender may by notice to the Agent appoint a person to receive on its behalf all notices, communications, information and documents to be made or despatched to that Lender under the Finance Documents. Such notice shall contain the address, fax number and (where communication by electronic mail or other electronic means is permitted under Clause 30.6 ( Electronic communication )) electronic mail address and/or any other information required to enable the sending and receipt of information by that means (and, in each case, the department or officer, if any, for whose attention communication is to be made) and be treated as a notification of a substitute address, fax number, electronic mail address, department and officer by that Lender for the purposes of Clause 30.2 ( Addresses ) and paragraph (a)(iii) of Clause 30.6 ( Electronic communication ) and the Agent shall be entitled to treat such person as the person entitled to receive all such notices, communications, information and documents as though that person were that Lender.

 

25.15 Credit appraisal by the Lenders

Without affecting the responsibility of any Obligor for information supplied by it or on its behalf in connection with any Finance Document, each Lender confirms to the Agent and the Arrangers that it has been, and will continue to be, solely responsible for making its own independent appraisal and investigation of all risks arising under or in connection with any Finance Document including but not limited to:

 

  (a) the financial condition, status and nature of each member of the Group;

 

  (b) the legality, validity, effectiveness, adequacy or enforceability of any Finance Document and any other agreement, arrangement or document entered into, made or executed in anticipation of, under or in connection with any Finance Document;

 

  (c) whether that Lender has recourse, and the nature and extent of that recourse, against any Party or any of its respective assets under or in connection with any Finance Document, the transactions contemplated by the Finance Documents or any other agreement, arrangement or document entered into, made or executed in anticipation of, under or in connection with any Finance Document; and

 

  (d) the adequacy, accuracy and/or completeness of any information provided by the Agent, any Party or by any other person under or in connection with any Finance Document, the transactions contemplated by the Finance Documents or any other agreement, arrangement or document entered into, made or executed in anticipation of, under or in connection with any Finance Document.

 

- 88 -


Table of Contents
25.16 Reference Banks

If a Reference Bank (or, if a Reference Bank is not a Lender, the Lender of which it is an Affiliate) ceases to be a Lender, the Agent may (in consultation with the Parent) appoint another Lender or an Affiliate of a Lender to replace that Reference Bank.

 

25.17 Agent’s Management Time

Any amount payable to the Agent under Clause 14.3 ( Indemnity to the Agent ), Clause 16 ( Costs and expenses ) and Clause 25.10 ( Lenders’ indemnity to the Agent ) shall include the cost of utilising the Agent’s management time or other resources and will be calculated on the basis of such reasonable daily or hourly rates as the Agent may notify to the Parent and the Lenders, and is in addition to any fee paid or payable to the Agent under Clause 11 ( Fees ).

 

25.18 Deduction from amounts payable by the Agent

If any Party owes an amount to the Agent under the Finance Documents the Agent may, after giving notice to that Party, deduct an amount not exceeding that amount from any payment to that Party which the Agent would otherwise be obliged to make under the Finance Documents and apply the amount deducted in or towards satisfaction of the amount owed. For the purposes of the Finance Documents that Party shall be regarded as having received any amount so deducted.

 

25.19 Reliance and engagement letters

Each Finance Party confirms that each of the Arrangers and the Agent has authority to accept on its behalf (and ratifies the acceptance on its behalf of any letters or reports already accepted by the Arrangers or Agent) the terms of any reliance letter or engagement letters relating to any reports or letters provided by accountants in connection with the Finance Documents or the transactions contemplated in the Finance Documents and to bind it in respect of those reports or letters and to sign such letters on its behalf and further confirms that it accepts the terms and qualifications set out in such letters.

 

26. CONDUCT OF BUSINESS BY THE FINANCE PARTIES

No provision of this Agreement will:

 

  (a) interfere with the right of any Finance Party to arrange its affairs (tax or otherwise) in whatever manner it thinks fit;

 

  (b) oblige any Finance Party to investigate or claim any credit, relief, remission or repayment available to it or the extent, order and manner of any claim; or

 

  (c) oblige any Finance Party to disclose any information relating to its affairs (tax or otherwise) or any computations in respect of Tax.

 

- 89 -


Table of Contents
27. SHARING AMONG THE FINANCE PARTIES

 

27.1 Payments to Finance Parties

If a Finance Party (a “ Recovering Finance Party ”) receives or recovers any amount from an Obligor other than in accordance with Clause 28 ( Payment mechanics ) (a “ Recovered Amount ”) and applies that amount to a payment due under the Finance Documents then:

 

  (a) the Recovering Finance Party shall, within three (3) Business Days, notify details of the receipt or recovery to the Agent;

 

  (b) the Agent shall determine whether the receipt or recovery is in excess of the amount the Recovering Finance Party would have been paid had the receipt or recovery been received or made by the Agent and distributed in accordance with Clause 28 ( Payment mechanics ), without taking account of any Tax which would be imposed on the Agent in relation to the receipt, recovery or distribution; and

 

  (c) the Recovering Finance Party shall, within three (3) Business Days of demand by the Agent, pay to the Agent an amount (the “ Sharing Payment ”) equal to such receipt or recovery less any amount which the Agent determines may be retained by the Recovering Finance Party as its share of any payment to be made, in accordance with Clause 28.6 ( Partial payments ).

 

27.2 Redistribution of payments

The Agent shall treat the Sharing Payment as if it had been paid by the relevant Obligor and distribute it between the Finance Parties (other than the Recovering Finance Party) (the “Sharing Finance Parties” ) in accordance with Clause 28.6 ( Partial payments ) towards the obligations of that Obligor to the Sharing Finance Parties.

 

27.3 Recovering Finance Party’s rights

On a distribution by the Agent under Clause 27.2 ( Redistribution of payments ) of a payment received by a Recovering Finance Party from an Obligor, as between the relevant Obligor and the Recovering Finance Party, an amount of the Recovered Amount equal to the Sharing Payment will be treated as not having been paid by that Obligor.

 

27.4 Reversal of redistribution

If any part of the Sharing Payment received or recovered by a Recovering Finance Party becomes repayable and is repaid by that Recovering Finance Party, then:

 

  (a) each Sharing Finance Party shall, upon request of the Agent, pay to the Agent for the account of that Recovering Finance Party an amount equal to the appropriate part of its share of the Sharing Payment (together with an amount as is necessary to reimburse that Recovering Finance Party for its proportion of any interest on the Sharing Payment which that Recovering Finance Party is required to pay) (the “ Redistributed Amount ”); and

 

- 90 -


Table of Contents
  (b) as between the relevant Obligor and each relevant Sharing Finance Party, an amount equal to the relevant Redistributed Amount will be treated as not having been paid by that Obligor.

 

27.5 Exceptions

 

  (a) This Clause 27 shall not apply to the extent that the Recovering Finance Party would not, after making any payment pursuant to this Clause 27, have a valid and enforceable claim against the relevant Obligor.

 

  (b) A Recovering Finance Party is not obliged to share with any other Finance Party any amount which the Recovering Finance Party has received or recovered as a result of taking legal or arbitration proceedings, if:

 

  (i) it notified that other Finance Party of the legal or arbitration proceedings; and

 

  (ii) that other Finance Party had an opportunity to participate in those legal or arbitration proceedings but did not do so as soon as reasonably practicable having received notice and did not take separate legal or arbitration proceedings.

 

- 91 -


Table of Contents

SECTION 11

ADMINISTRATION

 

28. PAYMENT MECHANICS

 

28.1 Payments to the Agent

 

  (a) On each date on which an Obligor or a Lender is required to make a payment under a Finance Document, that Obligor or Lender shall make the same available to the Agent (unless a contrary indication appears in a Finance Document) for value on the due date at the time and in such funds specified by the Agent as being customary at the time for settlement of transactions in the relevant currency in the place of payment.

 

  (b) Payment shall be made to such account in the principal financial centre of the country of that currency with such bank as the Agent specifies.

 

28.2 Distributions by the Agent

Each payment received by the Agent under the Finance Documents for another Party shall, subject to Clause 28.3 ( Distributions to an Obligor ), Clause 28.4 ( Clawback ) and Clause 25.18 ( Deduction from amounts payable by the Agent ) be made available by the Agent as soon as practicable after receipt to the Party entitled to receive payment in accordance with this Agreement (in the case of a Lender, for the account of its Facility Office), to such account as that Party may notify to the Agent by not less than five (5) Business Days’ notice with a bank in the principal financial centre of the country of that currency.

 

28.3 Distributions to an Obligor

The Agent may (with the consent of the Obligor or in accordance with Clause 29 ( Set-off )) apply any amount received by it for that Obligor in or towards payment (on the date and in the currency and funds of receipt) of any amount due from that Obligor under the Finance Documents or in or towards purchase of any amount of any currency to be so applied.

 

28.4 Clawback

 

  (a) Where a sum is to be paid to the Agent under the Finance Documents for another Party, the Agent is not obliged to pay that sum to that other Party (or to enter into or perform any related exchange contract) until it has been able to establish to its satisfaction that it has actually received that sum.

 

  (b) If the Agent pays an amount to another Party and it proves to be the case that the Agent had not actually received that amount, then (i) the Party to whom that amount (or the proceeds of any related exchange contract) was paid by the Agent shall on demand refund the same to the Agent and (ii) the person by whom that sum should have been made available or, if that person fails to do so the person to whom that sum was made available, shall on request pay to the Agent the amount (as certified by the Agent) which will indemnify the Agent against any funding cost incurred by it as a result of paying out that sum before receiving it.

 

- 92 -


Table of Contents
28.5 Impaired Agent

 

  (a) If, at any time, the Agent becomes an Impaired Agent, an Obligor or a Lender which is required to make a payment under the Finance Documents to the Agent in accordance with Clause 28.1 ( Payments to the Agent ) may instead either pay that amount direct to the required recipient or pay that amount to an interest-bearing account held with a bank or financial institution which has a rating for its long-term unsecured and non credit-enhanced debt obligations of A- or higher by Standard & Poor’s Rating Services or Fitch Ratings Ltd or A3 or higher by Moody’s Investor Services Limited or a comparable rating from an internationally recognised credit rating agency and in relation to which no Insolvency Event has occurred and is continuing, in the name of the Obligor or the Lender making the payment and designated as a trust account for the benefit of the Party or Parties beneficially entitled to that payment under the Finance Documents. In each case such payments must be made on the due date for payment under the Finance Documents.

 

  (b) All interest accrued on the amount standing to the credit of the trust account shall be for the benefit of the beneficiaries of that trust account pro rata to their respective entitlements.

 

  (c) A Party which has made a payment in accordance with this Clause 28.5 shall be discharged of the relevant payment obligation under the Finance Documents and shall not take any credit risk with respect to the amounts standing to the credit of the trust account.

 

  (d) Promptly upon the appointment of a successor Agent in accordance with Clause 25.12 ( Replacement of the Agent ), each Party which has made a payment to a trust account in accordance with this Clause 28.5 shall give all requisite instructions to the bank with whom the trust account is held to transfer the amount (together with any accrued interest) to the successor Agent for distribution in accordance with Clause 28.2 ( Distributions by the Agent ).

 

28.6 Partial payments

 

  (a) If the Agent receives a payment that is insufficient to discharge all the amounts then due and payable by an Obligor under the Finance Documents, the Agent shall apply that payment towards the obligations of that Obligor under the Finance Documents in the following order:

 

  (i) first , in or towards payment pro rata of any unpaid fees, costs and expenses of the Agent and the Arrangers under the Finance Documents;

 

  (ii) secondly , in or towards payment pro rata of any accrued interest, fee or commission due but unpaid under this Agreement;

 

  (iii) thirdly , in or towards payment pro rata of any principal due but unpaid under this Agreement; and

 

- 93 -


Table of Contents
  (iv) fourthly , in or towards payment pro rata of any other sum due but unpaid under the Finance Documents.

 

  (b) The Agent shall, if so directed by the Majority Lenders, vary the order set out in paragraphs (a)(ii) to (iv) above.

 

  (c) Paragraphs (a) and (b) above will override any appropriation made by an Obligor.

 

28.7 No set-off by Obligors

All payments to be made by an Obligor under the Finance Documents shall be calculated and be made without (and free and clear of any deduction for) set-off or counterclaim.

 

28.8 Business Days

 

  (a) Any payment which is due to be made on a day that is not a Business Day shall be made on the next Business Day in the same calendar month (if there is one) or the preceding Business Day (if there is not).

 

  (b) During any extension of the due date for payment of any principal or Unpaid Sum under this Agreement interest is payable on the principal or Unpaid Sum at the rate payable on the original due date.

 

28.9 Currency of account

 

  (a) Subject to paragraphs (b) and (c) below, dollars is the currency of account and payment for any sum due from an Obligor under any Finance Document.

 

  (b) Each payment in respect of costs, expenses or Taxes shall be made in the currency in which the costs, expenses or Taxes are incurred.

 

  (c) Any amount expressed to be payable in a currency other than dollars shall be paid in that other currency.

 

28.10 Disruption to payment systems etc.

If either the Agent determines (in its discretion) that a Disruption Event has occurred or the Agent is notified by the Parent that a Disruption Event has occurred:

 

  (a) the Agent may, and shall if requested to do so by the Parent, consult with the Parent with a view to agreeing with the Parent such changes to the operation or administration of the Facility as the Agent may deem necessary in the circumstances;

 

  (b) the Agent shall not be obliged to consult with the Parent in relation to any changes mentioned in paragraph (a) if, in its opinion, it is not practicable to do so in the circumstances and, in any event, shall have no obligation to agree to such changes;

 

- 94 -


Table of Contents
  (c) the Agent may consult with the Finance Parties in relation to any changes mentioned in paragraph (a) but shall not be obliged to do so if, in its opinion, it is not practicable to do so in the circumstances;

 

  (d) any such changes agreed upon by the Agent and the Parent shall (whether or not it is finally determined that a Disruption Event has occurred) be binding upon the Parties as an amendment to (or, as the case may be, waiver of) the terms of the Finance Documents notwithstanding the provisions of Clause 34 ( Amendments and Waivers );

 

  (e) the Agent shall not be liable for any damages, costs or losses whatsoever (including, without limitation for negligence, gross negligence or any other category of liability whatsoever but not including any claim based on the fraud of the Agent) arising as a result of its taking, or failing to take, any actions pursuant to or in connection with this Clause 28.10; and

 

  (f) the Agent shall notify the Finance Parties of all changes agreed pursuant to paragraph (d) above.

 

28.11 Change of currency

 

  (a) Unless otherwise prohibited by law, if more than one currency or currency unit are at the same time recognised by the central bank of any country as the lawful currency of that country, then:

 

  (i) any reference in the Finance Documents to, and any obligations arising under the Finance Documents in, the currency of that country shall be translated into, or paid in, the currency or currency unit of that country designated by the Agent (after consultation with the Parent); and

 

  (ii) any translation from one currency or currency unit to another shall be at the official rate of exchange recognised by the central bank for the conversion of that currency or currency unit into the other, rounded up or down by the Agent (acting reasonably).

 

  (b) If a change in any currency of a country occurs, this Agreement will, to the extent the Agent (acting reasonably and after consultation with the Parent) specifies to be necessary, be amended to comply with any generally accepted conventions and market practice in the Relevant Interbank Market and otherwise to reflect the change in currency.

 

29. SET-OFF

A Finance Party may set off any matured obligation due from an Obligor under the Finance Documents (to the extent beneficially owned by that Finance Party) against any matured obligation owed by that Finance Party to that Obligor, regardless of the place of payment, booking branch or currency of either obligation. If the obligations are in different currencies, the Finance Party may convert either obligation at a market rate of exchange in its usual course of business for the purpose of the set-off.

 

- 95 -


Table of Contents
30. NOTICES

 

30.1 Communications in writing

Any communication to be made under or in connection with the Finance Documents shall be made in writing and, unless otherwise stated, may be made by fax or letter.

 

30.2 Addresses

The address and fax number (and the department or officer, if any, for whose attention the communication is to be made) of each Party for any communication or document to be made or delivered under or in connection with the Finance Documents is:

 

  (a) in the case of the Parent, that identified with its name below;

 

  (b) in the case of each Lender or any other Obligor, that notified in writing to the Agent on or prior to the date on which it becomes a Party; and

 

  (c) in the case of the Agent, that identified with its name below,

or any substitute address or fax number or department or officer as the Party may notify to the Agent (or the Agent may notify to the other Parties, if a change is made by the Agent) by not less than five (5) Business Days’ notice.

 

30.3 Delivery

 

  (a) Any communication or document made or delivered by one person to another under or in connection with the Finance Documents will only be effective:

 

  (i) if by way of fax, when received in legible form; or

 

  (ii) if by way of letter, when it has been left at the relevant address or five (5) Business Days after being deposited in the post postage prepaid in an envelope addressed to it at that address,

and, if a particular department or officer is specified as part of its address details provided under Clause 30.2 ( Addresses ), if addressed to that department or officer.

 

  (b) Any communication or document to be made or delivered to the Agent will be effective only when actually received by the Agent and then only if it is expressly marked for the attention of the department or officer identified with the Agent’s signature below (or any substitute department or officer as the Agent shall specify for this purpose).

 

  (c) All notices from or to an Obligor shall be sent through the Agent.

 

  (d) Any communication or document made or delivered to the Parent in accordance with this Clause will be deemed to have been made or delivered to each of the Obligors.

 

- 96 -


Table of Contents
30.4 Notification of address and fax number

Promptly upon receipt of notification of an address and fax number or change of address or fax number pursuant to Clause 30.2 ( Addresses ) or changing its own address or fax number, the Agent shall notify the other Parties.

 

30.5 Communication when Agent is Impaired Agent

If the Agent is an Impaired Agent the Parties may, instead of communicating with each other through the Agent, communicate with each other directly and (while the Agent is an Impaired Agent) all the provisions of the Finance Documents which require communications to be made or notices to be given to or by the Agent shall be varied so that communications may be made and notices given to or by the relevant Parties directly. This provision shall not operate after a replacement Agent has been appointed.

 

30.6 Electronic communication

 

  (a) Any communication to be made between the Agent and a Lender under or in connection with the Finance Documents may be made by electronic mail or other electronic means, if the Agent and the relevant Lender:

 

  (i) agree that, unless and until notified to the contrary, this is to be an accepted form of communication;

 

  (ii) notify each other in writing of their electronic mail address and/or any other information required to enable the sending and receipt of information by that means; and

 

  (iii) notify each other of any change to their address or any other such information supplied by them.

 

  (b) Any electronic communication made between the Agent and a Lender will be effective only when actually received in readable form and in the case of any electronic communication made by a Lender to the Agent only if it is addressed in such a manner as the Agent shall specify for this purpose.

 

30.7 English language

 

  (a) Any notice given under or in connection with any Finance Document must be in English.

 

  (b) All other documents provided under or in connection with any Finance Document must be:

 

  (i) in English; or

 

  (ii) if not in English, and if so required by the Agent, accompanied by a certified English translation and, in this case, the English translation will prevail unless the document is a constitutional, statutory or other official document.

 

- 97 -


Table of Contents
30.8 Obligor agent

 

  (a) Each Obligor (other than the Parent) by its execution of this Agreement or an Accession Letter (as the case may be) irrevocably appoints the Parent to act on its behalf as its agent in relation to the Finance Documents and irrevocably authorises:

 

  (i) the Parent on its behalf to supply all information concerning itself contemplated by this Agreement to the Finance Parties and to give all notices and instructions (including, in the case of a Borrower, Utilisation Requests), to execute on its behalf any documents required hereunder and to make such agreements capable of being given, made or effected by any Obligor notwithstanding that they may affect the Obligor, without further reference to or the consent of that Obligor; and

 

  (ii) each Finance Party to give any notice, demand or other communication to that Obligor pursuant to the Finance Documents to the Parent on its behalf,

and in each case the Obligor shall be bound as though the Obligor itself had given the notices and instructions (including, without limitation, any Utilisation Requests) or executed or made such agreements or received the relevant notice, demand or other communication.

 

  (b) Every act, agreement, undertaking, settlement, waiver, notice or other communication given or made by the Parent or given to the Parent under any Finance Document on behalf of another Obligor or in connection with any Finance Document (whether or not known to any other Obligor and whether occurring before or after such other Obligor became an Obligor under any Finance Document) shall be binding for all purposes on that Obligor as if that Obligor had expressly made, given or concurred with it. In the event of any conflict between any notices or other communications of the Parent and any other Obligor, those of the Parent shall prevail.

 

31. CALCULATIONS AND CERTIFICATES

 

31.1 Accounts

In any litigation or arbitration proceedings arising out of or in connection with a Finance Document, the entries made in the accounts maintained by a Finance Party are prima facie evidence of the matters to which they relate.

 

31.2 Certificates and Determinations

Any certification or determination by a Finance Party of a rate or amount under any Finance Document is, in the absence of manifest error, conclusive evidence of the matters to which it relates.

 

- 98 -


Table of Contents
31.3 Day count convention

Any interest, commission or fee accruing under a Finance Document will accrue from day to day and is calculated on the basis of the actual number of days elapsed and a year of three hundred and sixty (360) days or, in any case where the practice in the Relevant Interbank Market differs, in accordance with that market practice.

 

32. PARTIAL INVALIDITY

If, at any time, any provision of the Finance Documents is or becomes illegal, invalid or unenforceable in any respect under any law of any jurisdiction, neither the legality, validity or enforceability of the remaining provisions nor the legality, validity or enforceability of such provision under the law of any other jurisdiction will in any way be affected or impaired.

 

33. REMEDIES AND WAIVERS

No failure to exercise, nor any delay in exercising, on the part of any Finance Party, any right or remedy under the Finance Documents shall operate as a waiver, nor shall any single or partial exercise of any right or remedy prevent any further or other exercise or the exercise of any other right or remedy. The rights and remedies provided in this Agreement are cumulative and not exclusive of any rights or remedies provided by law.

 

34. AMENDMENTS AND WAIVERS

 

34.1 Required consents

 

  (a) Subject to Clause 34.2 ( Exceptions ) any term of the Finance Documents may be amended or waived only with the consent of the Majority Lenders and the Parent and any such amendment or waiver will be binding on all Parties.

 

  (b) The Agent may effect, on behalf of any Finance Party, any amendment or waiver permitted by this Clause 34.

 

34.2 Exceptions

 

  (a) An amendment or waiver that has the effect of changing or which relates to:

 

  (i) the definition of “Majority Lenders” in Clause 1.1 ( Definitions );

 

  (ii) an extension to the date of payment of any amount under the Finance Documents (other than in relation to Clauses 7.4 ( Mandatory Prepayment upon Capital Markets Issue ), 7.5 ( Mandatory Prepayment Upon Disposals ) and 7.6 ( Mandatory Prepayment – General );

 

  (iii) a reduction in the Margin or a reduction in the amount of any payment of principal, interest, fees or commission payable;

 

  (iv) an increase in or an extension of any Commitment or any requirement that a cancellation of Commitments reduces the commitments of the lenders rateably under the Facility;

 

- 99 -


Table of Contents
  (v) a change to the Borrowers or Guarantors (other than in accordance with Clause 24 ( Changes to the Obligors ));

 

  (vi) any provision which expressly requires the consent of all the Lenders; or

 

  (vii) Clause 2.2 ( Finance Parties’ rights and obligations ), Clause 17 ( Guarantee and Indemnity ), Clause 23 ( Changes to the Lenders ) or this Clause 34,

shall not be made without the prior consent of all the Lenders.

 

  (b) An amendment or waiver which relates to the rights or obligations of the Agent or the Arrangers may not be effected without the consent of the Agent or the Arrangers.

 

34.3 Disenfranchisement of Defaulting Lenders

 

  (a) For so long as a Defaulting Lender has any Available Commitment, in ascertaining the Majority Lenders or whether any given percentage (including, for the avoidance of doubt, unanimity) of the Total Commitments has been obtained to approve any request for a consent, waiver, amendment or other vote under the Finance Documents, that Defaulting Lender’s Commitments will be reduced by the amount of its Available Commitments.

 

  (b) For the purposes of this Clause 34.3, the Agent may assume that the following Lenders are Defaulting Lenders:

 

  (i) any Lender which has notified the Agent that it has become a Defaulting Lender;

 

  (ii) any Lender in relation to which it is aware that any of the events or circumstances referred to in paragraphs (a), (b) or (c) of the definition of “Defaulting Lender” has occurred,

unless it has received notice to the contrary from the Lender concerned (together with any supporting evidence reasonably requested by the Agent) or the Agent is otherwise aware that the Lender has ceased to be a Defaulting Lender.

 

34.4 Replacement of a Defaulting Lender

 

  (a) The Parent may, at any time a Lender has become and continues to be a Defaulting Lender, by giving five (5) Business Days’ prior written notice to the Agent and such Lender:

 

  (i) replace such Lender by requiring such Lender to (and such Lender shall) transfer pursuant to Clause 23 ( Changes to the Lenders ) all (and not part only) of its rights and obligations under this Agreement; or

 

- 100 -


Table of Contents
  (ii) require such Lender to (and such Lender shall) transfer pursuant to Clause 23 ( Changes to the Lenders ) all (and not part only) of the undrawn Commitment of the Lender,

to a Lender or other bank, financial institution, trust, fund or other entity (a “ Replacement Lender ”) selected by the Parent, and which (unless the Agent is an Impaired Agent) is acceptable to the Agent (acting reasonably), which confirms its willingness to assume and does assume all the obligations or all the relevant obligations of the transferring Lender (including the assumption of the transferring Lender’s participations or unfunded participations (as the case may be) on the same basis as the transferring Lender), for a purchase price in cash payable at the time of the transfer equal to the outstanding principal amount of such Lender’s participation in the outstanding Utilisations and all accrued interest (subject to any notice having been given by the Agent under Clause 23.9 ( Pro rata interest settlement )), Break Costs and other amounts payable in relation thereto under the Finance Documents.

 

  (b) Any transfer of rights and obligations of a Defaulting Lender pursuant to this Clause shall be subject to the following conditions:

 

  (i) the Parent shall have no right to replace the Agent;

 

  (ii) neither the Agent nor the Defaulting Lender shall have any obligation to the Parent to find a Replacement Lender;

 

  (iii) the transfer must take place no later than five (5) days after the notice referred to in paragraph (a) above; and

 

  (iv) in no event shall the Defaulting Lender be required to pay or surrender to the Replacement Lender any of the fees received by the Defaulting Lender pursuant to the Finance Documents.

 

35. CONFIDENTIALITY

 

35.1 Confidential Information

Each Finance Party agrees to keep all Confidential Information confidential and not to disclose it to anyone, save to the extent permitted by Clause 35.2 ( Disclosure of Confidential Information ) and Clause 35.3 ( Disclosure to numbering service providers ), and to ensure that all Confidential Information is protected with security measures and a degree of care that would apply to its own confidential information.

 

35.2 Disclosure of Confidential Information

Any Finance Party may disclose:

 

  (a)

to any of its Affiliates and Related Funds and any of its or their officers, directors, employees, professional advisers, auditors, partners and Representatives such Confidential Information as that Finance Party shall consider appropriate if any person to whom the Confidential Information is to be given pursuant to this paragraph (a) is informed in writing of its

 

- 101 -


Table of Contents
  confidential nature and that some or all of such Confidential Information may be price-sensitive information except that there shall be no such requirement to so inform if the recipient is subject to professional obligations to maintain the confidentiality of the information or is otherwise bound by requirements of confidentiality in relation to the Confidential Information;

 

  (b) to any person:

 

  (i) to (or through) whom it assigns or transfers (or may potentially assign or transfer) all or any of its rights and/or obligations under one or more Finance Documents and to any of that person’s Affiliates, Related Funds, Representatives and professional advisers;

 

  (ii) with (or through) whom it enters into (or may potentially enter into), whether directly or indirectly, any sub-participation in relation to, or any other transaction under which payments are to be made or may be made by reference to, one or more Finance Documents and/or one or more Obligors and to any of that person’s Affiliates, Related Funds, Representatives and professional advisers;

 

  (iii) appointed by any Finance Party or by a person to whom paragraph (b)(i) or (ii) above applies to receive communications, notices, information or documents delivered pursuant to the Finance Documents on its behalf (including, without limitation, any person appointed under paragraph (c) of Clause 25.14 ( Relationship with the Lenders ));

 

  (iv) who invests in or otherwise finances (or may potentially invest in or otherwise finance), directly or indirectly, any transaction referred to in paragraph (b)(i) or (b)(ii) above;

 

  (v) to whom information is required or requested to be disclosed by any court of competent jurisdiction or any governmental, banking, taxation or other regulatory authority or similar body, the rules of any relevant stock exchange or pursuant to any applicable law or regulation;

 

  (vi) to whom or for whose benefit that Finance Party charges, assigns or otherwise creates any Encumbrance (or may do so) pursuant to Clause 23.8 ( Security over Lenders’ rights );

 

  (vii) to whom information is required to be disclosed in connection with, and for the purposes of, any litigation, arbitration, administrative or other investigations, proceedings or disputes;

 

  (viii) who is a Party; or

 

  (ix) with the consent of the Parent;

 

- 102 -


Table of Contents

in each case, such Confidential Information as that Finance Party shall consider appropriate if:

 

  (A) in relation to paragraphs (b)(i), (b)(ii) and b(iii) above, the person to whom the Confidential Information is to be given has entered into a Confidentiality Undertaking except that there shall be no requirement for a Confidentiality Undertaking if the recipient is a professional adviser and is subject to professional obligations to maintain the confidentiality of the Confidential Information;

 

  (B) in relation to paragraph (b)(iv) above, the person to whom the Confidential Information is to be given has entered into a Confidentiality Undertaking or is otherwise bound by requirements of confidentiality in relation to the Confidential Information they receive and is informed that some or all of such Confidential Information may be price-sensitive information;

 

  (C) in relation to paragraphs (b)(v), (b)(vi) and (b)(vii) above, the person to whom the Confidential Information is to be given is informed of its confidential nature and that some or all of such Confidential Information may be price-sensitive information except that there shall be no requirement to so inform if, in the opinion of that Finance Party, it is not practicable so to do in the circumstances;

 

  (c) to any person appointed by that Finance Party or by a person to whom paragraph (b)(i) or (b)(ii) above applies to provide administration or settlement services in respect of one or more of the Finance Documents including without limitation, in relation to the trading of participations in respect of the Finance Documents, such Confidential Information as may be required to be disclosed to enable such service provider to provide any of the services referred to in this paragraph (c) if the service provider to whom the Confidential Information is to be given has entered into a confidentiality agreement substantially in the form of the LMA Master Confidentiality Undertaking for Use With Administration/Settlement Service Providers or such other form of confidentiality undertaking agreed between the Parent and the relevant Finance Party;

 

  (d) to any rating agency (including its professional advisers) such Confidential Information as may be required to be disclosed to enable such rating agency to carry out its normal rating activities in relation to the Finance Documents and/or the Obligors.

 

- 103 -


Table of Contents
35.3 Disclosure to numbering service providers

 

  (a) Any Finance Party may disclose to any national or international numbering service provider appointed by that Finance Party to provide identification numbering services in respect of this Agreement, the Facility and/or one or more Obligors the following information:

 

  (i) names of Obligors;

 

  (ii) country of domicile of Obligors;

 

  (iii) place of incorporation of Obligors;

 

  (iv) date of this Agreement;

 

  (v) the names of the Agent and the Arrangers;

 

  (vi) date of each amendment and restatement of this Agreement;

 

  (vii) amount of Total Commitments;

 

  (viii) currency of the Facility;

 

  (ix) type of Facility;

 

  (x) ranking of Facility;

 

  (xi) Termination Date for Facility;

 

  (xii) changes to any of the information previously supplied pursuant to paragraphs (i) to (xi) above; and

 

  (xiii) such other information agreed between such Finance Party and the Parent,

to enable such numbering service provider to provide its usual syndicated loan numbering identification services.

 

  (b) The Parties acknowledge and agree that each identification number assigned to this Agreement, the Facility and/or one or more Obligors by a numbering service provider and the information associated with each such number may be disclosed to users of its services in accordance with the standard terms and conditions of that numbering service provider.

 

  (c) Each Obligor represents that none of the information set out in paragraphs (i) to (xiii) of paragraph (a) above is, nor will at any time be, unpublished price-sensitive information.

 

- 104 -


Table of Contents
  (d) The Agent shall notify the Parent and the other Finance Parties of:

 

  (i) the name of any numbering service provider appointed by the Agent in respect of this Agreement, the Facility and/or one or more Obligors; and

 

  (ii) the number or, as the case may be, numbers assigned to this Agreement, the Facility and/or one or more Obligors by such numbering service provider.

 

35.4 Entire agreement

This Clause 35 constitutes the entire agreement between the Parties in relation to the obligations of the Finance Parties under the Finance Documents regarding Confidential Information and supersedes any previous agreement, whether express or implied, regarding Confidential Information.

 

35.5 Inside Information

Each of the Finance Parties acknowledges that some or all of the Confidential Information is or may be price-sensitive information and that the use of such information may be regulated or prohibited by applicable legislation including securities law relating to insider dealing and market abuse and each of the Finance Parties undertakes not to use any Confidential Information for any unlawful purpose.

 

35.6 Notification of disclosure

Each of the Finance Parties agrees (to the extent permitted by law and regulation) to inform the Parent:

 

  (a) of the circumstances of any disclosure of Confidential Information made pursuant to paragraph (b)(v) of Clause 35.2 ( Disclosure of Confidential Information ) except where such disclosure is made to any of the persons referred to in that paragraph during the ordinary course of its supervisory or regulatory function; and

 

  (b) upon becoming aware that Confidential Information has been disclosed in breach of this Clause 35.

 

35.7 Continuing obligations

The obligations in this Clause 35 are continuing and, in particular, shall survive and remain binding on each Finance Party for a period of twelve months from the earlier of:

 

  (a) the date on which all amounts payable by the Obligors under or in connection with this Agreement have been paid in full and all Commitments have been cancelled or otherwise cease to be available; and

 

  (b) the date on which such Finance Party otherwise ceases to be a Finance Party.

 

- 105 -


Table of Contents
36. COUNTERPARTS

Each Finance Document may be executed in any number of counterparts, and this has the same effect as if the signatures on the counterparts were on a single copy of the Finance Document.

 

- 106 -


Table of Contents

SECTION 12

GOVERNING LAW AND ENFORCEMENT

 

37. GOVERNING LAW

This Agreement and any non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with it are governed by English law.

 

38. ENFORCEMENT

 

38.1 Jurisdiction

 

  (a) The courts of England have exclusive jurisdiction to settle any dispute arising out of or in connection with this Agreement (including a dispute regarding the existence, validity or termination of this Agreement or any non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with it) (a “ Dispute ”).

 

  (b) The Parties agree that the courts of England are the most appropriate and convenient courts to settle Disputes and accordingly no Party will argue to the contrary.

 

  (c) This Clause 38.1 is for the benefit of the Finance Parties only. As a result, no Finance Party shall be prevented from taking proceedings relating to a Dispute in any other courts with jurisdiction. To the extent allowed by law, the Finance Parties may take concurrent proceedings in any number of jurisdictions.

 

38.2 Service of process

Without prejudice to any other mode of service allowed under any relevant law, each Obligor (other than an Obligor incorporated in England and Wales):

 

  (a) irrevocably appoints Hackwood Secretaries Limited as its agent for service of process (in the case of an Obligor incorporated in South Africa, domicilium citandi et executandi ) in relation to any proceedings before the English courts in connection with any Finance Document; and

 

  (b) agrees that failure by an agent for service of process to notify the relevant Obligor of the process will not invalidate the proceedings concerned.

This Agreement has been entered into on the date stated at the beginning of this Agreement.

 

- 107 -


Table of Contents

SCHEDULE 1

THE ORIGINAL PARTIES

PART I

THE OBLIGORS

 

Name of Original Borrowers

   Registration number
(or equivalent, if any)

GFI Joint Venture Holdings Proprietary Limited, incorporated in South Africa

   1998/233354/07

Gold Fields Operations Limited, incorporated in South Africa

   1959/003209/06

Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited, incorporated in the British Virgin Islands

   184982

 

Name of Original Guarantors

   Registration number
(or equivalent, if any)

Gold Fields Limited, incorporated in South Africa

   1968/004880/06

Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited, incorporated in the British Virgin Islands

   651406

Gold Fields Operations Limited, incorporated in South Africa

   1959/003209/06

Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited, incorporated in the British Virgin Islands

   184982

GFI Joint Venture Holdings Proprietary Limited, incorporated in South Africa

   1998/233354/07

 

- 108 -


Table of Contents

PART II

THE ARRANGERS

Name of Arranger

Barclays Bank PLC

Credit Suisse AG, London Branch

J.P. Morgan Limited

 

- 109 -


Table of Contents

PART III

THE ORIGINAL LENDERS

 

Name of Original Lender

   Commitment (US$)  

Barclays Bank PLC

   $ 200,000,000   

Credit Suisse AG, London Branch

   $ 200,000,000   

JPMorgan Chase Bank, N.A., London Branch

   $ 200,000,000   
  

 

 

 
   $ 600,000,000   
  

 

 

 

 

- 110 -


Table of Contents

SCHEDULE 2

CONDITIONS PRECEDENT

PART I

CONDITIONS PRECEDENT TO INITIAL UTILISATION

 

1. Obligors

 

  (a) A copy of the Constitutional Documents of each Obligor.

 

  (b) A copy of a good standing certificate with respect to Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited and Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited, issued as of a recent date by the Registrar of Corporate Affairs in the British Virgin Islands.

 

  (c) A copy of a resolution of the board of directors (and, if necessary under the laws of its jurisdiction of incorporation, the shareholders) of each Obligor:

 

  (i) approving the terms of, and the transactions contemplated by, the Finance Documents to which it is a party and resolving that it execute the Finance Documents to which it is a party;

 

  (ii) authorising a specified person or persons to execute the Finance Documents to which it is a party on its behalf; and

 

  (iii) authorising a specified person or persons, on its behalf, to sign and/or dispatch all documents and notices (including, if relevant, any Utilisation Request) to be signed and/or dispatched by it under or in connection with the Finance Documents to which it is a party.

 

  (d) A specimen of the signature of each person authorised by the resolution referred to in paragraph (c) above.

 

  (e) A certificate of incumbency from the registered agent for Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited and Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited.

 

  (f) A copy of the resolution of the shareholders of Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited and Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited approving the relevant resolutions of the board of directors and the transactions contemplated thereby.

 

  (g) A certificate of the Obligors (signed by a director) confirming that borrowing or guaranteeing, as appropriate, the Total Commitments and any and all accrued interest would not cause any borrowing, guaranteeing or similar limit binding on any Obligor to be exceeded and that in respect of each Obligor to whom the Companies Act 2008 of South Africa applies the requirements of Section 45 of such Act has been complied with and each certificate shall have annexed to it the copies of the relevant resolutions, notices and statements.

 

- 111 -


Table of Contents
  (h) A certificate of an authorised signatory of the relevant Obligor certifying that each copy document relating to it specified in this Part I of Schedule 2 is correct, complete and in full force and effect as at a date no earlier than the date of this Agreement.

 

2. Legal opinions

 

  (a) A legal opinion of Clifford Chance LLP legal advisers to the Arrangers and the Agent in England, substantially in the form distributed to the Original Lenders prior to signing this Agreement.

 

  (b) A legal opinion of Conyers Dill & Pearman, legal advisers to the Arrangers and Agent in the British Virgin Islands, substantially in the form distributed to the Original Lenders prior to signing this Agreement.

 

  (c) A legal opinion of Edward Nathan Sonnenbergs, legal advisers to the Arrangers and Agent in South Africa, substantially in the form distributed to the Original Lenders prior to signing this Agreement.

 

3. Other documents and evidence

 

  (a) Evidence that any agent for service of process referred to in Clause 38.2 ( Service of process ) has accepted its appointment.

 

  (b) The Original Financial Statements together with a pro forma balance sheet for the Group to reflect the Group’s position post the Demerger.

 

  (c) Evidence that the fees, costs and expenses then due from the Parent pursuant to Clause 11 ( Fees ) and Clause 16 ( Costs and expenses ) have been paid or will be paid by the initial Utilisation Date.

 

  (d) A copy of the approval of the Financial Surveillance Department of the South African Reserve Bank confirming that Gold Fields Limited, GFI Joint Venture Holdings Proprietary Limited and Gold Fields Operations Limited (the “ South African Obligors ”) may enter into and provide the guarantee as contemplated by this Agreement and that the South African Obligors in their capacity as Original Borrowers may enter into and implement the provisions of this Agreement. If such approval is granted conditionally, this condition precedent shall not be considered to have been fulfilled, unless both the Lenders and the South African Obligors acknowledge in writing to each other that such conditions are acceptable.

 

  (e) A copy of any authorisation or consent (to include any relevant corporate, regulatory and shareholder consent) which the Agent (acting reasonably) considers to be necessary in connection with the entry into and performance of the transactions contemplated by this Agreement or for the validity and enforceability of any Finance Document.

 

  (f) Evidence that all conditions precedent to utilisation under the Credit Facilities Agreement (other than any condition precedent requiring evidence that the Demerger Date has occurred) have been satisfied or waived.

 

- 112 -


Table of Contents
  (g) Execution of a bond mandate letter by the Parent and each of the Underwriters in connection with the refinancing of the Facility and liability management exercise on the Existing Bond.

 

  (h) If the amount of the term facility and revolving credit facility made available pursuant to the Credit Facilities Agreement is increased prior to utilisation of this Facility, evidence that the amount of this Facility has been reduced by an equivalent amount.

 

  (i) Evidence (in the form of certified copies of (i) the notification received by the Parent from the Johannesburg Stock Exchange that the entire share capital of GFIMSA is listed on and admitted to trading on the Johannesburg Stock Exchange; and (ii) the notification received by the Parent from its transfer secretaries or from STRATE, that the Distribution is effected and GFIMSA accordingly is no longer a Subsidiary of the Parent), that the Demerger Date has occurred.

 

  (j) A certificate signed by a director of the Parent confirming that the board of directors of the Parent have approved the Demerger.

 

  (k) A copy of an opinion from Edward Nathan Sonnenbergs dated no earlier than 5 Business Days prior to the first Utilisation Date, confirming that no further regulatory or shareholder approval requirements are required in connection with the Demerger which have not already been obtained.

 

  (l) A certified copy of the announcement by the Company that the Distribution is to be effected.

 

  (m) A copy of the approval of the South African Reserve Bank of the Demerger, the Distribution and the secondary listing of GFIMSA on the New York Stock Exchange,

 

- 113 -


Table of Contents

PART II

CONDITIONS PRECEDENT REQUIRED TO BE DELIVERED BY AN

ADDITIONAL BORROWER

 

1. An Accession Letter, duly executed by the Additional Borrower and the Parent.

 

2. A copy of a good standing certificate with respect to any Additional Borrower incorporated in the British Virgin Islands, issued as of a recent date by the Registrar of Corporate Affairs in the British Virgin Islands.

 

3. A copy of the Constitutional Documents of the Additional Borrower.

 

4. A copy of a resolution of the board of directors (and, if necessary under the laws of its jurisdiction of incorporation, the shareholders) of the Additional Borrower:

 

  (a) approving the terms of, and the transactions contemplated by, the Accession Letter and the Finance Documents and resolving that it execute the Accession Letter;

 

  (b) authorising a specified person or persons to execute the Accession Letter on its behalf; and

 

  (c) authorising a specified person or persons, on its behalf, to sign and/or despatch all other documents and notices (including, in relation to an Additional Borrower, any Utilisation Request) to be signed and/or despatched by it under or in connection with the Finance Documents.

 

5. A specimen of the signature of each person authorised by the resolution referred to in paragraph 4 above.

 

6. A certificate of incumbency from the registered agent of each Additional Borrower incorporated in the British Virgin Islands.

 

7. If appropriate, a certificate of the Additional Borrower (signed by a director) confirming that borrowing or guaranteeing, as appropriate, the Total Commitments would not cause any borrowing, guaranteeing or similar limit binding on it to be exceeded and that in respect of each Additional Borrower to whom the Companies Act 2008 of South Africa applies the requirements of Section 45 of such Act has been complied with and each certificate shall have annexed to it the copies of the relevant resolutions, notices and statements.

 

8. A certificate of an authorised signatory of the Additional Borrower certifying that each copy document listed in this Part II of Schedule 2 is correct, complete and in full force and effect as at a date no earlier than the date of the Accession Letter.

 

9. A copy of any other authorisation or other document, opinion or assurance which the Agent considers to be necessary or desirable in connection with the entry into and performance of the transactions contemplated by the Accession Letter or for the validity and enforceability of any Finance Document.

 

- 114 -


Table of Contents
10. If appropriate, a copy of the approval of the Financial Surveillance Department of the South African Reserve Bank confirming that the Additional Borrower may enter into and provide the guarantee as contemplated by this Agreement and that the Additional Borrower may enter into and implement the provisions of this Agreement. If such approval is granted conditionally, this condition precedent shall not be considered to have been fulfilled, unless both the Lenders and the Additional Borrower acknowledge in writing to each other that such conditions are acceptable.

 

11. If available, the latest audited financial statements of the Additional Borrower.

 

12. A legal opinion from legal advisers to the Agent in England.

 

13. If the Additional Borrower is incorporated in a jurisdiction other than England and Wales, a legal opinion of the legal advisers to the Arrangers and the Agent in the jurisdiction in which the Additional Borrower is incorporated.

 

14. If the proposed Additional Borrower is incorporated in a jurisdiction other than England and Wales, evidence that the agent for service of process specified in Clause 38.2 ( Service of process ) has accepted its appointment in relation to the proposed Additional Borrower.

 

- 115 -


Table of Contents

PART III

CONDITIONS PRECEDENT REQUIRED TO BE DELIVERED BY AN

ADDITIONAL GUARANTOR

 

1. An Accession Letter, duly executed by the Additional Guarantor and the Parent.

 

2. A copy of the Constitutional Documents of the Additional Guarantor.

 

3. A copy of a good standing certificate with respect to any Additional Guarantor incorporated in the British Virgin Islands, issued as of a recent date by the appropriate official in the British Virgin Islands.

 

4. A copy of a resolution of the board of directors (and, if necessary under the laws of its jurisdiction of incorporation, the shareholders) of the Additional Guarantor:

 

  (a) approving the terms of, and the transactions contemplated by, the Accession Letter and the Finance Documents and resolving that it execute the Accession Letter;

 

  (b) authorising a specified person or persons to execute the Accession Letter on its behalf; and

 

  (c) authorising a specified person or persons, on its behalf, to sign and/or dispatch all other documents and notices to be signed and/or despatched by it under or in connection with the Finance Documents.

 

5. A specimen of the signature of each person authorised by the resolution referred to in paragraph 4 above.

 

6. A certificate of incumbency from the registered agent of each Additional guarantor incorporated in the British Virgin Islands.

 

7. A copy of a resolution signed by all the holders of the issued shares of the Additional Guarantor, approving the terms of, and the transactions contemplated by, the Finance Documents to which the Additional Guarantor is a party.

 

8. A certificate of the Additional Guarantor (signed by a director) confirming that guaranteeing the Total Commitments would not cause any borrowing, guaranteeing or similar limit binding on it to be exceeded and that in respect of each Additional Guarantor to whom the Companies Act 2008 of South Africa applies the requirements of Section 45 of such Act has been complied with and each certificate shall have annexed to it the copies of the relevant resolutions, notices and statements.

 

9. A certificate of an authorised signatory of the Additional Guarantor certifying that each copy document listed in this Part III of Schedule 2 is correct, complete and in full force and effect as at a date no earlier than the date of the Accession Letter.

 

10. A copy of any other authorisation or other document, opinion or assurance which the Agent considers to be necessary or desirable in connection with the entry into and performance of the transactions contemplated by the Accession Letter or for the validity and enforceability of any Finance Document.

 

- 116 -


Table of Contents
11. If available, the latest audited financial statements of the Additional Guarantor.

 

12. A legal opinion from legal advisers to the Agent in England.

 

13. If the Additional Guarantor is incorporated in a jurisdiction other than England and Wales, a legal opinion of the legal advisers to the Agent in the jurisdiction in which the Additional Guarantor is incorporated.

 

14. If the Additional Guarantor is incorporated in a jurisdiction other than England and Wales, evidence that the agent for service of process specified in Clause 38.2 ( Service of process ) has accepted its appointment in relation to the proposed Additional Guarantor.

 

15. A copy of the approval of the Exchange Control Department of the South African Reserve Bank confirming that any Additional Guarantor incorporated in South Africa may enter into and provide the guarantees as contemplated by this Agreement and that the Additional Guarantor may enter into and implement the provisions of this Agreement. If such approval is granted conditionally, this condition precedent shall not be considered to have been fulfilled, unless both the Lenders and the Additional Guarantor acknowledge in writing to each other that such conditions are acceptable.

 

- 117 -


Table of Contents

SCHEDULE 3

REQUESTS

PART I

UTILISATION REQUEST

From: [ The Borrower ]

To: [ ] as Agent

Dated:

Dear Sirs

GFI Joint Venture Holdings Proprietary Limited, Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI)

Limited and Gold Fields Operations Limited – $600,000,000 Credit Facility Agreement

dated [ ] 2012 (the “Agreement”)

 

1. We refer to the Agreement. This is a Utilisation Request. Terms defined in the Agreement have the same meaning in this Utilisation Request unless given a different meaning in this Utilisation Request.

 

2. We wish to borrow a Loan on the following terms:

 

Proposed Utilisation Date:

   [ ] (or, if that is not a Business Day, the next Business Day)

Currency of Loan:

   Dollars

Amount:

   [ ], if less the Available Facility

Interest Period:

   [ ]

 

3. We confirm that each condition specified in Clause 4.2 ( Further conditions precedent ) is satisfied on the date of this Utilisation Request.

 

4. The proceeds of this Loan should be credited to [ account ].

 

5. This Utilisation Request is irrevocable.

 

Yours faithfully
   
authorised signatory for
[ name of relevant Borrower ]

 

- 118 -


Table of Contents

PART II

SELECTION NOTICE

From: [Borrower]

To: [Agent]

Dated:

Dear Sirs

GFI Joint Venture Holdings Proprietary Limited, Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI)

Limited and Gold Fields Operations Limited – $600,000,000 Credit Facility Agreement

dated [ ] 2012 (the “Agreement”)

 

1. We refer to the Agreement. This is a Selection Notice. Terms defined in the Agreement have the same meaning in this Selection Notice unless given a different meaning in this Selection Notice.

 

2. We refer to the following Loan[s] with an Interest Period ending on [ ]*

 

3. [We request that the above Loan[s] be divided into [ ] Loans with the following amounts and Interest Periods:]**

or

[We request that the next Interest Period for the above Loan[s] is [ ]].***

 

4. This Selection Notice is irrevocable.

Yours faithfully

   
authorised signatory for
[ name of relevant Borrower ]

 

- 119 -


Table of Contents

SCHEDULE 4

MANDATORY COST FORMULA

 

1. The Mandatory Cost is an addition to the interest rate to compensate Lenders for the cost of compliance with (a) the requirements of the Bank of England and/or the Financial Services Authority (or, in either case, any other authority which replaces all or any of its functions) or (b) the requirements of the European Central Bank.

 

2. On the first day of each Interest Period (or as soon as possible thereafter) the Agent shall calculate, as a percentage rate, a rate (the “ Additional Cost Rate ”) for each Lender, in accordance with the paragraphs set out below. The Mandatory Cost will be calculated by the Agent as a weighted average of the Lenders’ Additional Cost Rates (weighted in proportion to the percentage participation of each Lender in the relevant Loan) and will be expressed as a percentage rate per annum.

 

3. The Additional Cost Rate for any Lender lending from a Facility Office in a Participating Member State will be the percentage notified by that Lender to the Agent. This percentage will be certified by that Lender in its notice to the Agent to be its reasonable determination of the cost (expressed as a percentage of that Lender’s participation in all Loans made from that Facility Office) of complying with the minimum reserve requirements of the European Central Bank in respect of loans made from that Facility Office.

 

4. The Additional Cost Rate for any Lender lending from a Facility Office in the United Kingdom will be calculated by the Agent as follows:

 

E x 0.01

 
300   per cent. per annum.

Where:

 

  E is designed to compensate Lenders for amounts payable under the Fees Rules and is calculated by the Agent as being the average of the most recent rates of charge supplied by the Reference Banks to the Agent pursuant to paragraph 7 below and expressed in pounds per £1,000,000.

 

5. For the purposes of this Schedule:

 

  (a) Fees Rules ” means the rules on periodic fees contained in the FSA Supervision Manual or such other law or regulation as may be in force from time to time in respect of the payment of fees for the acceptance of deposits;

 

  (b) Fee Tariffs ” means the fee tariffs specified in the Fees Rules under the activity group A.1 Deposit acceptors (ignoring any minimum fee or zero rated fee required pursuant to the Fees Rules but taking into account any applicable discount rate); and

 

  (c) Tariff Base ” has the meaning given to it in, and will be calculated in accordance with, the Fees Rules.

 

- 120 -


Table of Contents
6. If requested by the Agent, each Reference Bank shall, as soon as practicable after publication by the Financial Services Authority, supply to the Agent, the rate of charge payable by that Reference Bank to the Financial Services Authority pursuant to the Fees Rules in respect of the relevant financial year of the Financial Services Authority (calculated for this purpose by that Reference Bank as being the average of the Fee Tariffs applicable to that Reference Bank for that financial year) and expressed in pounds per £1,000,000 of the Tariff Base of that Reference Bank.

 

7. Each Lender shall supply any information required by the Agent for the purpose of calculating its Additional Cost Rate. In particular, but without limitation, each Lender shall supply the following information on or prior to the date on which it becomes a Lender:

 

  (a) the jurisdiction of its Facility Office; and

 

  (b) any other information that the Agent may reasonably require for such purpose.

Each Lender shall promptly notify the Agent of any change to the information provided by it pursuant to this paragraph.

 

8. The percentages of each Lender for the purpose of E above shall be determined by the Agent based upon the information supplied to it pursuant to paragraphs 6 and 7 above and on the assumption that, unless a Lender notifies the Agent to the contrary, each Lender’s obligations in relation to cash ratio deposits are the same as those of a typical bank from its jurisdiction of incorporation with a Facility Office in the same jurisdiction as its Facility Office.

 

9. The Agent shall have no liability to any person if such determination results in an Additional Cost Rate which over or under compensates any Lender and shall be entitled to assume that the information provided by any Lender or Reference Bank pursuant to paragraphs 3, 6 and 7 above is true and correct in all respects.

 

10. The Agent shall distribute the additional amounts received as a result of the Mandatory Cost to the Lenders on the basis of the Additional Cost Rate for each Lender based on the information provided by each Lender and each Reference Bank pursuant to paragraphs 3, 6 and 7 above.

 

11. Any determination by the Agent pursuant to this Schedule in relation to a formula, the Mandatory Cost, an Additional Cost Rate or any amount payable to a Lender shall, in the absence of manifest error, be conclusive and binding on all Parties.

 

12. The Agent may from time to time, after consultation with the Parent and the Lenders, determine and notify to all Parties any amendments which are required to be made to this Schedule in order to comply with any change in law, regulation or any requirements from time to time imposed by the Financial Services Authority or, the European Central Bank (or, in any case, any other authority which replaces all or any of its functions) and any such determination shall, in the absence of manifest error, be conclusive and binding on all Parties.

 

- 121 -


Table of Contents

SCHEDULE 5

FORM OF TRANSFER CERTIFICATE

To: [ ] as Agent

From: [ The Existing Lender ] (the “ Existing Lender ”) and [ The New Lender ] (the “ New Lender ”)

Dated:

GFI Joint Venture Holdings Proprietary Limited, Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI)

Limited and Gold Fields Operations Limited – $600,000,000 Credit Facility Agreement

dated [ ] 2012 (the “Agreement”)

 

1. We refer to the Agreement. This is a Transfer Certificate. Terms defined in the Agreement have the same meaning in this Transfer Certificate unless given a different meaning in this Transfer Certificate.

 

2. We refer to Clause 23.5 ( Procedure for transfer ):

 

  (a) The Existing Lender and the New Lender agree to the Existing Lender transferring to the New Lender by novation all or part of the Existing Lender’s Commitment, rights and obligations referred to in the Schedule in accordance with Clause 23.5 ( Procedure for transfer ).

 

  (b) The proposed Transfer Date is [ ].

 

  (c) The Facility Office and address, fax number, email address and attention details for notices of the New Lender for the purposes of Clause 30.2 ( Addresses ) are set out in the Schedule.

 

3. The New Lender expressly acknowledges the limitations on the Existing Lender’s obligations set out in paragraph (c) of Clause 23.4 ( Limitation of responsibility of Existing Lenders ).

 

4. This Transfer Certificate may be executed in any number of counterparts and this has the same effect as if the signatures on the counterparts were on a single copy of this Transfer Certificate.

 

5. This Transfer Certificate, and any non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with it, is governed by English law.

 

- 122 -


Table of Contents

THE SCHEDULE

Commitment/rights and obligations to be transferred

[insert relevant details]

[Facility Office address, fax number, email address and attention details for notices and

account details for payments,]

 

[Existing Lender]

   [New Lender]
By:   

 

   By:   

 

Market Entity Identifier  

 

   Market Entity Identifier  

 

This Transfer Certificate is accepted by the Agent and the Transfer Date is confirmed as [ ].

[ ]

By:

 

- 123 -


Table of Contents

SCHEDULE 6

FORM OF ASSIGNMENT AGREEMENT

To: [ ] as Agent and [ ] as Parent, for and on behalf of each Obligor

From: [the Existing Lender] (the “ Existing Lender ”) and [the New Lender] (the “ New Lender ”)

Dated:

GFI Joint Venture Holdings Proprietary Limited, Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited and Gold Fields Operations Limited – $600,000,000 Credit Facility Agreement dated [ ] 2012 (the “Agreement”)

 

1. We refer to the Agreement. This is an Assignment Agreement. Terms defined in the Agreement have the same meaning in this Assignment Agreement unless given a different meaning in this Assignment Agreement.

 

2. We refer to Clause 23.6 ( Procedure for assignment ):

 

  (a) The Existing Lender assigns absolutely to the New Lender all the rights of the Existing Lender under the Agreement and the other Finance Documents which relate to that portion of the Existing Lender’s Commitments and participations in Loans under the Agreement as specified in the Schedule.

 

  (b) The Existing Lender is released from all the obligations of the Existing Lender which correspond to that portion of the Existing Lender’s Commitments and participations in Loans under the Agreement specified in the Schedule.

 

  (c) The New Lender becomes a Party as a Lender and is bound by obligations equivalent to those from which the Existing Lender is released under paragraph (b) above.

 

3. The proposed Transfer Date is [ ].

 

4. On the Transfer Date the New Lender becomes Party to the Finance Documents as a Lender.

 

5. The Facility Office and address, fax number and attention details for notices of the New Lender for the purposes of Clause 30.2 ( Addresses ) are set out in the Schedule.

 

6. The New Lender expressly acknowledges the limitations on the Existing Lender’s obligations set out in paragraph (c) of Clause 23.4 ( Limitation of responsibility of Existing Lenders ).

 

7. This Assignment Agreement acts as notice to the Agent (on behalf of each Finance Party) and, upon delivery in accordance with Clause 23.7 ( Copy of Transfer Certificate or Assignment Agreement to Parent ), to the Parent (on behalf of each Obligor) of the assignment referred to in this Assignment Agreement.

 

- 124 -


Table of Contents
8. This Assignment Agreement may be executed in any number of counterparts and this has the same effect as if the signatures on the counterparts were on a single copy of this Assignment Agreement.

 

9. This Assignment Agreement, and any non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with it, is governed by English law.

 

10. This Assignment Agreement has been entered into on the date stated at the beginning of this Assignment Agreement.

 

- 125 -


Table of Contents

THE SCHEDULE

Commitment/rights to be assigned

[insert relevant details]

[Facility Office address, fax number, email address and attention details for notices and account details for payments,]

 

[Existing Lender]

   [New Lender]
By:   

 

   By:   

 

Market Entity Identifier:  

 

   Market Entity Identifier:  

 

This Assignment Agreement is accepted by the Agent and the Transfer Date is confirmed as [ ].

[ ]

By:

 

- 126 -


Table of Contents

SCHEDULE 7

FORM OF ACCESSION LETTER

To:         [ ] as Agent

From:    [Subsidiary] and Gold Fields Limited

Dated:

Dear Sirs

GFI Joint Venture Holdings Proprietary Limited, Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited and Gold Fields Operations Limited – $600,000,000 Credit Facility Agreement dated [ ] 2012 (the “Agreement”)

 

1. We refer to the Agreement. This is an Accession Letter. Terms defined in the Agreement have the same meaning in this Accession Letter unless given a different meaning in this Accession Letter.

 

2. [Subsidiary] agrees to become an Additional [Borrower]/[Guarantor] and to be bound by the terms of the Agreement as an Additional [Borrower]/[Guarantor] pursuant to Clause [24.2 ( Additional Borrowers )]/[24.4 ( Additional Guarantors )] of the Agreement. [Subsidiary] is a wholly owned Subsidiary of the Parent duly incorporated under the laws of [name of relevant jurisdiction].

 

3. [Specify purpose of the Loan].

 

4. [Subsidiary’s] administrative details are as follows:

Address:

Fax No:

Attention:

 

5. This Accession Letter, and any non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with it, is governed by English law.

[This Accession Letter has been executed as a deed by [ Subsidiary ] and is delivered on the date stated above.] 1

 

Gold Fields Limited

   [Subsidiary]

By:

   By:

 

 

1   For any additional Guarantor, the Accession Letter is to be executed as a deed and the signature block shall be amended accordingly.

 

- 127 -


Table of Contents

SCHEDULE 8

FORM OF RESIGNATION LETTER

To:         [ ] as Agent

From:    [resigning Obligor] and Gold Fields Limited

Dated:

Dear Sirs

GFI Joint Venture Holdings Proprietary Limited, Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited and Gold Fields Operations Limited – $600,000,000 Credit Facility Agreement dated [ ] 2012 (the “Agreement”)

 

1. We refer to the Agreement. This is a Resignation Letter. Terms defined in the Agreement have the same meaning in this Resignation Letter unless given a different meaning in this Accession Letter.

 

2. Pursuant to [Clause 24.3 ( Resignation of an Additional Borrower )]/[Clause 24.6 ( Resignation of an Additional Guarantor )], we request that [resigning Obligor] be released from its obligations as a [Borrower]/[Guarantor] under the Agreement.

 

3. We confirm that no default is continuing or would result from the acceptance of this request.

 

4. This Resignation Letter, and any non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with it, is governed by English law.

 

Gold Fields Limited

     [Subsidiary]

By:

    

By:

 

- 128 -


Table of Contents

SCHEDULE 9

FORM OF COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATE

To: [ ] as Agent

From: Gold Fields Limited

Dated:

Dear Sirs

GFI Joint Venture Holdings Proprietary Limited, Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited and Gold Fields Operations Limited – $600,000,000 Credit Facility Agreement dated [ ] 2012 (the “Agreement”)

 

1. We refer to the Agreement. This is a Compliance Certificate. Terms defined in the Agreement have the same meaning when used in this Compliance Certificate unless given a different meaning in this Compliance Certificate.

 

2. We confirm that as at [ ]:

 

  (a) Consolidated EBITDA to Consolidated Net Finance Charges

the ratio of Consolidated EBITDA to Consolidated Net Finance Charges in respect of the Measurement Period ending on [ ] was: [ ]:1; and

 

  (b) Consolidated Net Borrowings to Consolidated EBITDA

the ratio of Consolidated Net Borrowings to Consolidated EBITDA in respect of the Measurement Period ending on [ ] was: [ ]:1,

and attach calculations showing how these figures were calculated.

 

3. We confirm that no Default is continuing.

 

Signed:

    

 

[Director]/[Executive Officer]

of

Gold Fields Limited

    

[Director]/[Executive Officer]

of

Gold Fields Limited

[insert applicable certification language]

 

   

[or and on behalf of

[name of auditors of the Parent]

 

- 129 -


Table of Contents

SCHEDULE 10

TIMETABLE

 

“U”    =    date of utilisation
“U – X”    =    X Business Days prior to date of Utilisation
Delivery of a duly completed Utilisation Request (Clause 5.1 (Delivery of a Utilisation Request), or a Selection Notice Clause 5.1 ( Selection of Interest Periods ))   

U-3

10.00 a.m.

Agent notifies the Lenders of the Loan in accordance with Clause 5.4 ( Lenders’ participation )   

U-3

3.00 p.m.

LIBOR is fixed   

U-2

11:00 a.m.

 

- 130 -


Table of Contents

SCHEDULE 11

LMA FORM OF CONFIDENTIALITY UNDERTAKING

[Letterhead of Seller]

Date: [ ]

To:

 

 

[insert name of Potential

Purchaser]

 

 

 

Re:         The Agreement

 

Company:                                                                (the “Company”)

Date:

Amount:

Agent:

 

Dear Sirs

We understand that you are considering acquiring an interest in the Agreement which, subject to the Agreement, may be by way of novation, assignment, the entering into, whether directly or indirectly, of a sub-participation or any other transaction under which payments are to be made or may be made by reference to one or more Finance Documents and/or one or more Obligors or by way of investing in or otherwise financing, directly or indirectly, any such novation, assignment, sub-participation or other transaction (the “ Acquisition ”). In consideration of us agreeing to make available to you certain information, by your signature of a copy of this letter you agree as follows:

 

1. CONFIDENTIALITY UNDERTAKING

You undertake (a) to keep all Confidential Information confidential and not to disclose it to anyone, save to the extent permitted by paragraph 2 below and to ensure that all Confidential Information is protected with security measures and a degree of care that would apply to your own confidential information, and (b) until the Acquisition is completed to use the Confidential Information only for the Permitted Purpose.

 

2. PERMITTED DISCLOSURE

We agree that you may disclose:

 

2.1

to any of your Affiliates and any of your or their officers, directors, employees, professional advisers and auditors such Confidential Information as you shall consider appropriate if any person to whom the Confidential Information is to be given

 

131


Table of Contents
  pursuant to this paragraph 2.1 is informed in writing of its confidential nature and that some or all of such Confidential Information may be price-sensitive information, except that there shall be no such requirement to so inform if the recipient is subject to professional obligations to maintain the confidentiality of the information or is otherwise bound by requirements of confidentiality in relation to the Confidential Information;

 

2.2 subject to the requirements of the Agreement, to any person:

 

  (a) to (or through) whom you assign or transfer (or may potentially assign or transfer) all or any of your rights and/or obligations which you may acquire under the Agreement such Confidential Information as you shall consider appropriate if the person to whom the Confidential Information is to be given pursuant to this sub-paragraph (a) of paragraph 2.2 has delivered a letter to you in equivalent form to this letter;

 

  (b) with (or through) whom you enter into (or may potentially enter into) any sub-participation in relation to, or any other transaction under which payments are to be made or may be made by reference to the Agreement or any Obligor such Confidential Information as you shall consider appropriate if the person to whom the Confidential Information is to be given pursuant to this sub-paragraph (b) of paragraph 2.2 has delivered a letter to you in equivalent form to this letter;

 

  (c) to whom information is required or requested to be disclosed by any governmental, banking, taxation or other regulatory authority or similar body, the rules of any relevant stock exchange or pursuant to any applicable law or regulation such Confidential Information as you shall consider appropriate; and

 

2.3 notwithstanding paragraphs 2.1 and 2.2. above, Confidential Information to such persons to whom, and on the same terms as, a Finance Party is permitted to disclose Confidential Information under the Agreement, as if such permissions were set out in full in this letter and as if references in those permissions to Finance Party were references to you.

 

3. NOTIFICATION OF DISCLOSURE

You agree (to the extent permitted by law and regulation) to inform us:

 

3.1 of the circumstances of any disclosure of Confidential Information made pursuant to sub-paragraph (c) of paragraph 2.2 above except where such disclosure is made to any of the persons referred to in that paragraph during the ordinary course of its supervisory or regulatory function; and

 

3.2 upon becoming aware that Confidential Information has been disclosed in breach of this letter.

 

132


Table of Contents
4. RETURN OF COPIES

If you do not enter into the Acquisition and we so request in writing, you shall return or destroy all Confidential Information supplied to you by us and destroy or permanently erase (to the extent technically practicable) all copies of Confidential Information made by you and use your reasonable endeavours to ensure that anyone to whom you have supplied any Confidential Information destroys or permanently erases (to the extent technically practicable) such Confidential Information and any copies made by them, in each case save to the extent that you or the recipients are required to retain any such Confidential Information by any applicable law, rule or regulation or by any competent judicial, governmental, supervisory or regulatory body or in accordance with internal policy, or where the Confidential Information has been disclosed under sub-paragraph (c) of paragraph 2.2 above.

 

5. CONTINUING OBLIGATIONS

The obligations in this letter are continuing and, in particular, shall survive and remain binding on you until (a) if you become a party to the Agreement as a lender of record, the date on which you become such a party to the Agreement; (b) if you enter into the Acquisition but it does not result in you becoming a party to the Agreement as a lender of record, the date falling [twelve] months after the date on which all of your rights and obligations contained in the documentation entered into to implement that Acquisition have terminated; or (c) in any other case the date falling [twelve] months after the date of your final receipt (in whatever manner) of any Confidential Information.

 

6. NO REPRESENTATION; CONSEQUENCES OF BREACH, ETC

You acknowledge and agree that:

 

6.1 neither we, nor any member of the Group nor any of our or their respective officers, employees or advisers (each a “ Relevant Person ”) (i) make any representation or warranty, express or implied, as to, or assume any responsibility for, the accuracy, reliability or completeness of any of the Confidential Information or any other information supplied by us or the assumptions on which it is based or (ii) shall be under any obligation to update or correct any inaccuracy in the Confidential Information or any other information supplied by us or be otherwise liable to you or any other person in respect of the Confidential Information or any such information; and

 

6.2 we or members of the Group may be irreparably harmed by the breach of the terms of this letter and damages may not be an adequate remedy; each Relevant Person may be granted an injunction or specific performance for any threatened or actual breach of the provisions of this letter by you.

 

7. ENTIRE AGREEMENT: NO WAIVER; AMENDMENTS, ETC

 

7.1 This letter constitutes the entire agreement between us in relation to your obligations regarding Confidential Information and supersedes any previous agreement, whether express or implied, regarding Confidential Information.

 

133


Table of Contents
7.2 No failure to exercise, nor any delay in exercising, any right or remedy under this letter will operate as a waiver of any such right or remedy or constitute an election to affirm this letter. No election to affirm this letter will be effective unless it is in writing. No single or partial exercise of any right or remedy will prevent any further or other exercise or the exercise of any other right or remedy under this letter.

 

7.3 The terms of this letter and your obligations under this letter may only be amended or modified by written agreement between us.

 

8. INSIDE INFORMATION

You acknowledge that some or all of the Confidential Information is or may be price-sensitive information and that the use of such information may be regulated or prohibited by applicable legislation including securities law relating to insider dealing and market abuse and you undertake not to use any Confidential Information for any unlawful purpose.

 

9. NATURE OF UNDERTAKINGS

The undertakings given by you under this letter are given to us and are also given for the benefit of the Company and each other member of the Group.

 

10. THIRD PARTY RIGHTS

 

10.1 Subject to this paragraph 10 and to paragraphs 6 and 9, a person who is not a party to this letter has no right under the Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999 (the “ Third Parties Act ”) to enforce or to enjoy the benefit of any term of this letter.

 

10.2 The Relevant Persons may enjoy the benefit of the terms of paragraphs 6 and 9 subject to and in accordance with this paragraph 10 and the provisions of the Third Parties Act.

 

10.3 Notwithstanding any provisions of this letter, the parties to this letter do not require the consent of any Relevant Person to rescind or vary this letter at any time.

 

11. GOVERNING LAW AND JURISDICTION

 

11.1 This letter (including the agreement constituted by your acknowledgement of its terms) (the “ Letter ”) and any non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with it (including any non-contractual obligations arising out of the negotiation of the transaction contemplated by this Letter) are governed by English law.

 

11.2 The courts of England have non-exclusive jurisdiction to settle any dispute arising out of or in connection with this Letter (including a dispute relating to any non-contractual obligation arising out of or in connection with either this Letter or the negotiation of the transaction contemplated by this Letter).

 

12. DEFINITIONS

In this letter (including the acknowledgement set out below) terms defined in the Agreement shall, unless the context otherwise requires, have the same meaning and:

 

134


Table of Contents

Confidential Information ” means all information relating to the Company, any Obligor, the Group, the Finance Documents, the Facility and/or the Acquisition which is provided to you in relation to the Finance Documents or the Facility by us or any of our affiliates or advisers, in whatever form, and includes information given orally and any document, electronic file or any other way of representing or recording information which contains or is derived or copied from such information but excludes information that:

 

  (a) is or becomes public information other than as a direct or indirect result of any breach by you of this letter; or

 

  (b) is identified in writing at the time of delivery as non-confidential by us or our advisers; or

 

  (c) is known by you before the date the information is disclosed to you by us or any of our affiliates or advisers or is lawfully obtained by you after that date, from a source which is, as far as you are aware, unconnected with the Group and which, in either case, as far as you are aware, has not been obtained in breach of, and is not otherwise subject to, any obligation of confidentiality.

Group ” means the Company and its subsidiaries for the time being (as such term is defined in the Companies Act 2006).

Permitted Purpose ” means considering and evaluating whether to enter into the Acquisition.

Please acknowledge your agreement to the above by signing and returning the enclosed copy.

 

Yours faithfully

 

For and on behalf of

[Seller]

 

135


Table of Contents

To: [Seller]

The Company and each other member of the Group

We acknowledge and agree to the above:

   
For and on behalf of
[Potential Purchaser]

 

136


Table of Contents

SIGNATURES

The Parent

GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

 

By:

        PAUL SCHMIDT, DIRECTOR AND CFO

Address:

   150 Helen Road
   Sandown, Sandton 2196
   South Africa

Fax No:

   +27 86720 2704

Attn:

   Executive Vice President, General Counsel
The Original Borrowers
GFI JOINT VENTURE HOLDINGS PROPRIETARY LIMITED

By:

        NICHOLAS JOHN HOLLAND, DIRECTOR
GOLD FIELDS OROGEN HOLDING (BVI) LIMITED

By:

        RICHARD TAYLOR, DIRECTOR
GOLD FIELDS OPERATIONS LIMITED

By:

        PAUL SCHMIDT, DIRECTOR

 

137


Table of Contents

The Original Guarantors

GFI JOINT VENTURE HOLDINGS PROPRIETARY LIMITED

By:

        NICHOLAS JOHN HOLLAND, DIRECTOR

GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

By:

        PAUL SCHMIDT, DIRECTOR AND CFO
GOLD FIELDS HOLDINGS COMPANY (BVI) LIMITED

By:

        MICHAEL D. FLEISCHER, DIRECTOR

GOLD FIELDS OPERATIONS LIMITED

By:

        PAUL SCHMIDT, DIRECTOR
GOLD FIELDS OROGEN HOLDING (BVI) LIMITED

By:

        RICHARD TAYLOR, DIRECTOR

 

138


Table of Contents

BARCLAYS BANK PLC as Arranger

By:

        KEITH HATTON, MANAGING DIRECTOR

BARCLAYS BANK PLC as Original Lender

By:

        KEITH HATTON, MANAGING DIRECTOR

BARCLAYS BANK PLC as Agent

By:

        KEITH HATTON, MANAGING DIRECTOR

Address:

     5 The North Colonnade
     London E14 4BB

Fax No:

     +44 7773 4893

Attn:

     Antony Girling

 

139


Table of Contents
CREDIT SUISSE AG, LONDON BRANCH as Arranger

By:

        CHRISTOPHER M. TUFFEY, MANAGING DIRECTOR
        RAHUL SRINIVASAN, DIRECTOR
CREDIT SUISSE AG, LONDON BRANCH as Original Lender

By:

        CHRISTOPHER M. TUFFEY, MANAGING DIRECTOR
        RAHUL SRINIVASAN, DIRECTOR

 

140


Table of Contents

J.P. MORGAN LIMITED as Arranger

By:

        REGIS CASTRO, VICE PRESIDENT
JPMORGAN CHASE BANK, N.A., LONDON BRANCH as Original Lender

By:

        REGIS CASTRO, VICE PRESIDENT

 

141

Exhibit 4.25

 

LOGO

CONFORMED COPY

DATED 28 NOVEMBER 2012, AS AMENDED AND RESTATED PURSUANT TO A

SYNDICATION AND AMENDMENT AGREEMENT DATED 30 JANUARY 2013

GFI JOINT VENTURE HOLDINGS PROPRIETARY LIMITED

GOLD FIELDS OPERATIONS LIMITED

GOLD FIELDS OROGEN HOLDING (BVI) LIMITED

ARRANGED BY

THE FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS

LISTED HEREIN AS ARRANGERS

WITH

BARCLAYS BANK PLC

ACTING AS AGENT

 

 

CREDIT FACILITIES AGREEMENT

 

 

 


    CONTENTS       
Clause        Page  
1.   Definitions and Interpretation      1   
2.   The Facilities      23   
3.   Purpose      23   
4.   Conditions of Utilisation      24   
5.   Utilisation      25   
6.   Repayment      27   
7.   Prepayment and Cancellation      28   
8.   Interest      33   
9.   Interest Periods      35   
10.   Changes to the Calculation of Interest      36   
11.   Fees      38   
12.   Tax Gross up and Indemnities      40   
13.   Increased Costs      42   
14.   Other Indemnities      44   
15.   Mitigation by the Lenders      45   
16.   Costs and Expenses      45   
17.   Guarantee and Indemnity      47   
18.   Representations      51   
19.   Information Undertakings      56   
20.   Financial Covenants      61   
21.   General Undertakings      63   
22.   Events of Default      70   
23.   Changes to the Lenders      76   
24.   Changes to the Obligors      81   
25.   Role of the Agent and the Arrangers      84   
26.   Conduct of Business by the Finance Parties      91   
27.   Sharing among the Finance Parties      92   
28.   Payment Mechanics      94   
29.   Set-off      97   
30.   Notices      97   
31.   Calculations and Certificates      100   
32.   Partial Invalidity      101   
33.   Remedies and Waivers      101   
34.   Amendments and Waivers      101   


35.

  Confidentiality      103   

36.

  Counterparts      107   

37.

  Governing Law      108   

38.

  Enforcement      108   
Schedule 1 The Original Parties      109   
Part I The Obligors      109   
Part II The Arrangers      110   
Part III The Original Lenders      111   
Schedule 2 Conditions Precedent      112   
Part I Conditions Precedent to Initial Utilisation      112   
Part II Conditions Precedent required to be delivered by an Additional Borrower      115   
Part III Conditions Precedent required to be delivered by an Additional Guarantor      117   
Schedule 3 Requests      119   
Part I Utilisation Request      119   
Part II Selection Notice applicable to a Facility A Loan      120   
Schedule 4 Mandatory Cost Formula      121   
Schedule 5 Form of Transfer Certificate      123   
Schedule 6 Form of Assignment Agreement      125   
Schedule 7 Form of Accession Letter      128   
Schedule 8 Form of Resignation Letter      129   
Schedule 9 Form of Compliance Certificate      130   
Schedule 10 Timetable      131   
Schedule 11 LMA Form of Confidentiality Undertaking      132   

 


THIS AGREEMENT is dated 28 November 2012, as amended and restated pursuant to a syndication and amendment agreement dated 30 January 2013, and made

BETWEEN:

 

(1) GOLD FIELDS LIMITED (the “ Parent ”);

 

(2) GFI JOINT VENTURE HOLDINGS PROPRIETARY LIMITED, GOLD FIELDS OPERATIONS LIMITED and GOLD FIELDS OROGEN HOLDING (BVI) LIMITED (the “ Original Borrowers ”);

 

(3) THE SUBSIDIARIES of the Parent listed in Part I of Schedule 1 ( The Original Parties ) as guarantors (together with the Parent, the “ Original Guarantors ”);

 

(4) THE FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS listed in Part II of Schedule 1 ( The Original Parties ) as mandated lead arrangers and bookrunners (together the “ Arrangers ” and individually an “ Arranger ”);

 

(5) THE FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS listed in Part III of Schedule 1 ( The Original Parties ) as lenders (the “ Original Lenders ”); and

 

(6) BARCLAYS BANK PLC as agent of the other Finance Parties (the “ Agent ”).

IT IS AGREED as follows:

SECTION 1

INTERPRETATION

 

1. DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION

 

1.1 Definitions

In this Agreement:

Accession Letter ” means a document substantially in the form set out in Schedule 7 ( Form of Accession Letter ).

Additional Borrower ” means a company which becomes an Additional Borrower in accordance with Clause 24 ( Changes to the Obligors ).

Additional Cost Rate ” has the meaning given to it in Schedule 4 ( Mandatory Cost Formula ).

Additional Guarantor ” means a company which becomes an Additional Guarantor in accordance with Clause 24 ( Changes to the Obligors ).

Additional Obligor ” means an Additional Borrower or an Additional Guarantor.

Affiliate ” means, in relation to any person, a Subsidiary of that person or a Holding Company of that person or any other Subsidiary of that Holding Company.

Agreement ” means this credit facilities agreement.

 

- 1 -


Assignment Agreement ” means an agreement substantially in the form set out in Schedule 6 ( Form of Assignment Agreement ) or any other form agreed between the relevant assignor and assignee.

Associate ” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 20.1 ( Financial definitions ) of this Agreement.

Auditors ” means, at any time, the auditors of the Parent at that time, being as at the date of this Agreement KPMG and any replacement for those auditors appointed by the Parent.

Availability Period ” means:

 

  (a) in relation to Facility A, the period from and including the date of this Agreement to and including the Demerger Date; and

 

  (b) in relation to Facility B, the period from and including the date of this Agreement to and including the date which is one Month prior to the Termination Date applicable to Facility B.

Available Commitment ” means, in relation to a Facility, a Lender’s Commitment under that Facility minus:

 

  (a) the amount of its participation in any outstanding Loans under that Facility; and

 

  (b) in relation to any proposed Utilisation, the amount of its participation in any Loans that are due to be made under that Facility on or before the proposed Utilisation Date,

other than in relation to any proposed Utilisation under Facility B only, that Lender’s participation in any Facility B Loans that are due to be repaid or prepaid on or before the proposed Utilisation Date.

Available Facility ” means, in relation to a Facility, the aggregate for the time being of each Lender’s Available Commitment in respect of that Facility.

Basel III ” has the meaning set out in paragraph (b) of Clause 13.1 ( Increased costs ).

Borrower ” means an Original Borrower or an Additional Borrower unless it has ceased to be a Borrower in accordance with Clause 24 ( Changes to the Obligors ).

Break Costs ” means the amount (if any) by which:

 

  (a) the interest which a Lender should have received for the period from the date of receipt of all or any part of its participation in a Loan or Unpaid Sum to the last day of the current Interest Period in respect of that Loan or Unpaid Sum, had the principal amount or Unpaid Sum received been paid on the last day of that Interest Period;

 

- 2 -


exceeds:

 

  (b) the amount which that Lender would be able to obtain by placing an amount equal to the principal amount or Unpaid Sum received by it on deposit with a leading bank in the Relevant Interbank Market for a period starting on the Business Day following receipt or recovery and ending on the last day of the current Interest Period.

Business Day ” means a day (other than a Saturday or Sunday) on which banks are open for general business in London, New York and Johannesburg.

Cerro Corona Project ” means the development of the gold and copper deposits in Peru by the Cerro Corona Subsidiary.

Cerro Corona Subsidiary ” means Gold Fields La Cima S.A.

Commitment ” means a Facility A Commitment or a Facility B Commitment.

Compliance Certificate ” means a certificate substantially in the form set out in Schedule 9 ( Form of Compliance Certificate ).

Confidential Information ” means all information relating to the Parent, any Obligor, the Group, the Finance Documents or a Facility of which a Finance Party becomes aware in its capacity as, or for the purpose of becoming, a Finance Party or which is received by a Finance Party in relation to, or for the purpose of becoming a Finance Party under, the Finance Documents or a Facility from either:

 

  (a) any member of the Group or any of its advisers; or

 

  (b) another Finance Party, if the information was obtained by that Finance Party directly or indirectly from any member of the Group or any of its advisers,

in whatever form, and includes information given orally and any document, electronic file or any other way of representing or recording information which contains or is derived or copied from such information but excludes information that:

 

  (i) is or becomes public information other than as a direct or indirect result of any breach by that Finance Party of Clause 35 ( Confidentiality ); or

 

  (ii) is identified in writing at the time of delivery as non-confidential by the Parent; or

 

  (iii) is known by that Finance Party before the date the information is disclosed to it in accordance with paragraphs (a) or (b) above or is lawfully obtained by that Finance Party after that date, from a source which is, as far as that Finance Party is aware, unconnected with the Group and which, in either case, as far as that Finance Party is aware, has not been obtained in breach of, and is not otherwise subject to, any obligation of confidentiality.

 

- 3 -


Confidentiality Undertaking ” means a confidentiality undertaking substantially in a recommended form of the LMA as set out in Schedule 11 ( LMA Form of Confidentiality Undertaking ) or in any other form agreed between the Parent and the Agent.

Consolidated EBITDA ” has the meaning set out in Clause 20.1 ( Financial Definitions ).

Consolidated Tangible Net Worth ” means, at any time, the “Shareholders’ Equity”, as reported in the “Group Statement of Changes in Shareholders’ Equity” in the last set of annual consolidated financial statements of the Parent delivered to the Agent pursuant to this Agreement.

Constitutional Documents ” means, in respect of any person at any time, the then current and up-to-date constitutional documents of such person at such time (including, without limitation, such person’s memorandum and articles of association, certificate of incorporation, articles of incorporation or commercial registration certificate).

Default ” means an Event of Default or any event or circumstance specified in Clause 22 ( Events of Default ) which would (with the expiry of a grace period, the giving of notice, the making of any determination under the Finance Documents or any combination of any of the foregoing) be an Event of Default.

Defaulting Lender ” means any Lender:

 

  (a) which has failed to make its participation in a Loan available or has notified the Agent that it will not make its participation in a Loan available by the Utilisation Date of that Loan in accordance with Clause 5.4 ( Lenders’ participation );

 

  (b) which has otherwise rescinded or repudiated a Finance Document; or

 

  (c) with respect to which an Insolvency Event has occurred and is continuing,

unless, in the case of paragraph (a) above:

 

  (i) its failure to pay is caused by:

 

  (A) administrative or technical error; or

 

  (B) a Disruption Event, and

payment is made within five (5) Business Days of its due date; or

 

  (ii) the Lender is disputing in good faith whether it is contractually obliged to make the payment in question.

Demerger ” means the demerger of the business of GFIMSA and its Subsidiaries from the business of the Parent and its other Subsidiaries by way of the Distribution.

 

- 4 -


Demerger Date ” means the first day on which each of the following has occurred (i) the entire share capital of GFIMSA is listed and admitted to trading on the Johannesburg Stock Exchange as notified to the Parent by the Johannesburg Stock Exchange; and (ii) the Distribution is effected and GFIMSA accordingly ceases to be a Subsidiary of the Parent as notified to the Parent by its transfer secretaries or STRATE (the Central Depository for the electronic settlement of financial instruments in South Africa as conducted by Strate Limited).

Designated Website ” has the meaning given to it in paragraph (a) of Clause 19.7 ( Use of websites ).

Disruption Event ” means either or both of:

 

  (a) a material disruption to those payment or communications systems or to those financial markets which are, in each case, required to operate in order for payments to be made in connection with a Facility (or otherwise in order for the transactions contemplated by the Finance Documents to be carried out) which disruption is not caused by, and is beyond the control of, any of the Parties; or

 

  (b) the occurrence of any other event which results in a disruption (of a technical or system-related nature) to the treasury or payments operations of a Party preventing that, or any other Party:

 

  (i) from performing its payment obligations under the Finance Documents; or

 

  (ii) from communicating with other Parties in accordance with the terms of the Finance Documents,

and which (in either such case) is not caused by, and is beyond the control of, the Party whose operations are disrupted.

Distribution ” means the pro rata distribution in specie under South African law by the Parent of the entire issued share capital held by the Parent in GFIMSA to the Parent’s existing shareholders, American depository receipt holders and international depository receipt holders.

Encumbrance ” means:

 

  (a) any mortgage, pledge, lien, assignment or cession conferring security, hypothecation, a security interest, preferential right or trust arrangement or other encumbrance of the like securing any obligation of any person; or

 

  (b) any arrangement under which money or claims to, or for the benefit of, a bank or other account may be applied, set off or made subject to a combination of accounts so as to effect discharge of any sum owed or payable to any person; or

 

  (c) any other type of preferential agreement or arrangement (including any title transfer and retention arrangement), the effect of which is the creation of a security interest.

 

- 5 -


Environmental Claim ” means any claim, proceeding or investigation by any person in respect of any Environmental Law.

Environmental Law ” means any law applicable to the business conducted by a Material Group Company at the relevant time in any jurisdiction in which that Material Group Company conducts business which relates to the pollution, degradation or protection of the environment or harm to or the protection of human health or the health of animals or plants.

Environmental Permits ” means any permit, licence, consent, approval and other authorisation and the filing of any notification, report or assessment required under any Environmental Law for the operation of the business of any Material Group Company conducted on or from the properties owned or used by that Material Group Company.

Event of Default ” means any event or circumstance specified as such in Clause 22 ( Events of Default ).

Existing Bond ” means the US$1,000,000,000 bond maturing in 2020 issued on 7 October 2010 by Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited.

Existing Facilities ” means the facilities granted under each of the Existing Facility Agreements.

Existing Facility Agreements ” means the Existing 2012 Facility Agreement and the Existing 2011 Facility Agreement.

Existing 2011 Facility Agreement ” means the US$1,000,000,000 credit facility agreement dated 16 June 2011 between GFIMSA, Gold Fields Operations Limited and Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited as borrowers, the Parent and certain Subsidiaries of the Parent as guarantors, the financing institutions listed therein as mandated lead arrangers, Barclays Bank PLC as agent and others.

Existing 2012 Facility Agreement ” means the US$500,000,000 credit facility agreement dated 17 April 2012 between GFIMSA, Gold Fields Operations Limited and Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited as borrowers, the Parent and certain Subsidiaries of the Parent as guarantors, the financing institutions listed therein as mandated lead arrangers, The Bank of Tokyo Mitsubishi UFJ, Ltd. as agent and others.

Existing Lender ” has the meaning given to it in Clause 23.1 ( Assignments and transfers by the Lenders ).

Facility ” means Facility A or Facility B.

Facility A ” means the term loan facility made available under this Agreement as described in paragraph (a) of Clause 2.1 ( The Facilities ).

Facility A Commitment ” means:

 

  (a) in relation to an Original Lender, the amount set opposite its name under the heading “Facility A Commitment” in Part III of Schedule 1 ( The Original Parties ) and the amount of any other Facility A Commitment transferred to it under this Agreement; and

 

- 6 -


  (b) in relation to any other Lender, the amount of any Facility A Commitment transferred to it under this Agreement,

to the extent not cancelled, reduced or transferred by it under this Agreement.

Facility A Loan ” means a loan made or to be made under Facility A or the principal amount outstanding for the time being of that loan.

Facility B ” means the revolving loan facility made available under this Agreement as described in paragraph (b) of Clause 2.1 ( The Facilities ).

Facility B Commitment ” means:

 

  (a) in relation to an Original Lender, the amount set opposite its name under the heading “Facility B Commitment” in Part III of Schedule 1 ( The Original Parties ) and the amount of any other Facility B Commitment transferred to it under this Agreement; and

 

  (b) in relation to any other Lender, the amount of any Facility B Commitment transferred to it under this Agreement,

to the extent not cancelled, reduced or transferred by it under this Agreement.

Facility B Loan ” means a loan made or to be made under Facility B or the principal amount outstanding for the time being of that loan.

Facility Office ” means the office(s) notified by a Lender to the Agent in writing on or before the date it becomes a Lender (or, following that date, by not less than five (5) Business Days’ written notice) as the office(s) through which it will perform its obligations under this Agreement.

Fee Letter ” means any letter or letters dated on or about the date of this Agreement between the Arrangers and the Original Borrowers or the Parent (or the Agent and the Parent) setting out any of the fees referred to in Clause 11 (Fees) .

Finance Document ” means this Agreement, any Fee Letter, any Accession Letter, any Resignation Letter and any other document designated as such by the Agent and the Parent.

Finance Party ” means the Agent, the Arrangers or a Lender.

Financial Indebtedness ” means (without double counting) any indebtedness for or in respect of:

 

  (a) moneys borrowed;

 

  (b) any amount raised by acceptance under any acceptance credit facility or dematerialised equivalent;

 

- 7 -


  (c) any amount raised pursuant to any note purchase facility or the issue of bonds, notes, debentures, loan stock or any similar instrument;

 

  (d) the amount of any liability in respect of any lease or hire purchase contract which would, in accordance with GAAP, be treated as a finance or capital lease;

 

  (e) receivables sold or discounted (other than any receivables to the extent they are sold on a non-recourse basis);

 

  (f) the amount of liability in respect of any purchase price for assets or services the payment of which is deferred where the deferral of such price is either:

 

  (i) used primarily as a method of raising credit; or

 

  (ii) not made in the ordinary course of business;

 

  (g) any agreement or option to re-acquire an asset if one of the primary reasons for entering into such agreement or option is to raise finance;

 

  (h) any amount raised under any other transaction (including any forward sale or purchase agreement) having the commercial effect of a borrowing;

 

  (i) any derivative transaction entered into in connection with protection against or benefit from fluctuation in any rate or price (and, when calculating the value of any derivative transaction, only the marked to market value shall be taken into account);

 

  (j) any counter-indemnity obligation in respect of a guarantee, indemnity, bond, standby or documentary letter of credit or any other instrument issued by a bank or financial institution;

 

  (k) any amount raised by the issue of redeemable shares to the extent such shares are redeemable prior to the Termination Date; and

 

  (l) the amount of any liability in respect of any guarantee or indemnity for any of its items referred to in paragraphs (a) to (k) above.

Financial Year ” means, at any time, the financial year of the Group ending on 31 December in each calendar year.

GAAP ” means the generally accepted accounting principles set out in IFRS.

GFIMSA ” means GFI Mining South Africa Proprietary Limited (subsequently renamed Sibanye Gold Ltd), a company incorporated in South Africa with registration number 2002/031431/06.

Ghanaian Companies ” means Gold Fields Ghana Limited and Abosso Goldfields Limited.

 

- 8 -


Group ” means the Parent, the Guarantors and each of their Subsidiaries from time to time, provided that prior to the Demerger Date, GFIMSA and its Subsidiaries shall be deemed to not be members of the Group.

Group Company ” means a member of the Group.

Guarantor ” means an Original Guarantor or an Additional Guarantor unless, in the case of an Additional Guarantor, it has ceased to be a Guarantor in accordance with Clause 24 ( Changes to the Obligors ).

Holding Company ” means, in relation to a company or corporation, any other company or corporation in respect of which it is a Subsidiary.

IFRS ” means international accounting standards within the meaning of the IAS Regulation 1606/2002 to the extent applicable to the relevant financial statements.

Impaired Agent ” means the Agent at any time when:

 

  (a) it has failed to make (or has notified a Party that it will not make) a payment required to be made by it under the Finance Documents by the due date for payment;

 

  (b) the Agent otherwise rescinds or repudiates a Finance Document;

 

  (c) (if the Agent is also a Lender) it is a Defaulting Lender under paragraph (a) or (b) of the definition of “Defaulting Lender”; or

 

  (d) an Insolvency Event has occurred and is continuing with respect to the Agent;

unless, in the case of paragraph (a) above:

 

  (i) its failure to pay is caused by:

 

  (A) administrative or technical error; or

 

  (B) a Disruption Event; and

payment is made within five (5) Business Days of its due date; or

 

  (ii) the Agent is disputing in good faith whether it is contractually obliged to make the payment in question.

Increased Costs ” has the meaning given to it in paragraph (b) of Clause 13.1 ( Increased costs ).

Indebtedness for Borrowed Money ” means Financial Indebtedness save for any indebtedness for or in respect of paragraphs (i) and (j) of the definition of “ Financial Indebtedness ”.

Information ” has the meaning given to such term in paragraph (a) of Clause 18.10 ( No misleading information ).

 

- 9 -


Information Package ” means (i) the projections and (ii) the presentation dated 8 November 2012 (as updated on 29 November 2012) prepared by the Parent in order to solicit the assignment of a long term credit rating to the Parent from Moody’s and Standard & Poor’s each in the form approved and identified as such by the Parent, and each of which, at the Parent’s request and on its behalf, are to be posted on Debtdomain by Barclays Bank PLC (in its capacity as Arranger) in connection with syndication of the Facilities.

Insolvency Event ” means, in relation to a Finance Party, that:

 

  (a) any receiver, administrative receiver, administrator, liquidator, compulsory manager or other similar officer is appointed in respect of that Finance Party or all or substantially all of its assets;

 

  (b) that Finance Party is subject to any event which has an analogous effect to any of the events specified in paragraph (a) above under the applicable laws of any jurisdiction; or

 

  (c) that Finance Party suspends making payments on all or substantially all of its debts or publicly announces an intention to do so.

Interest Period ” means, in relation to a Loan, each period determined in accordance with Clause 9 ( Interest Periods ) and, in relation to an Unpaid Sum, each period determined in accordance with Clause 8.5 ( Default interest ).

Lender ” means:

 

  (a) any Original Lender; and

 

  (b) any bank or financial institution which has become a Party in accordance with Clause 23 ( Changes to the Lenders ),

which in each case has not ceased to be a Lender in accordance with the terms of this Agreement.

LIBOR ” means, in relation to any Loan:

 

  (a) the applicable Screen Rate; or

 

  (b) (if no Screen Rate is available for dollars for the Interest Period of that Loan) the arithmetic mean of the rates (rounded upwards to four decimal places) as supplied to the Agent at its request quoted by two (2) Reference Banks to leading banks in the London interbank market,

as of the Specified Time on the Quotation Day for the offering of deposits in dollars and for a period comparable to the Interest Period for that Loan.

LMA ” means the Loan Market Association.

Loan ” means a Facility A Loan or a Facility B Loan.

 

- 10 -


Majority Lenders ” means:

 

  (a) at any time there are only three Lenders, a Lender or Lenders whose Commitments aggregate 66 per cent. or more of the Total Commitments (or, if the Total Commitments have been reduced to zero, aggregated 66 per cent. or more of the Total Commitments immediately prior to the reduction); and

 

  (b)

at any other time a Lender or Lenders whose Commitments aggregate more than 66  2 / 3  per cent. of the Total Commitments (or, if the Total Commitments have been reduced to zero, aggregated more than 66  2 / 3  per cent. of the Total Commitments immediately prior to the reduction).

Mandatory Cost ” means the percentage rate per annum calculated by the Agent in accordance with Schedule 4 ( Mandatory Cost Formula ).

Margin ” means the percentage rate per annum determined in accordance with Clause 8.3 ( Margin ).

Market Disruption Event ” has the meaning given to it in paragraph (b) of Clause 10.2 ( Market disruption ).

Material Adverse Effect ” means a material adverse effect on:

 

  (a) the business, operations, property or financial condition of the Group taken as a whole;

 

  (b) the ability of an Obligor to perform its financial or other material obligations under the Finance Documents to which it is a party; or

 

  (c) the validity or enforceability of the Finance Documents or any of them.

Material Group Company ” means:

 

  (a) the Obligors; and

 

  (b) any member of the Group from time to time that is not a Non-Material Group Company;

and “ Material Group Companies ” means, as the context requires, all of them.

Mining Charter ” has the meaning given to it in Clause 22.9 ( Creditors’ Process ).

Month ” means a period starting on one day in a calendar month and ending on the numerically corresponding day in the next calendar month, except that:

 

  (a) (subject to paragraph (c) below) if the numerically corresponding day is not a Business Day, that period shall end on the next Business Day in that calendar month in which that period is to end if there is one, or if there is not, on the immediately preceding Business Day;

 

- 11 -


  (b) if there is no numerically corresponding day in the calendar month in which that period is to end, that period shall end on the last Business Day in that calendar month; and

 

  (c) if an Interest Period begins on the last Business Day of a calendar month, that Interest Period shall end on the last Business Day in the calendar month in which that Interest Period is to end.

Paragraphs (a), (b) and (c) above will only apply to the last Month of any period.

Moody’s ” means Moody’s Investor Services Inc., or any successor to its rating agency function.

MPRDA ” has the meaning given to it in Clause 22.9 ( Creditors’ Process ).

New Lender ” has the meaning given to it in Clause 23.1 ( Assignments and transfers by the Lenders ).

Newshelf ” means Newshelf 899 Proprietary Limited, a company incorporated under the laws of South Africa.

Non-Material Group Company ” means, at any time, a member of the Group (other than an Obligor) which had EBITDA (determined on the same basis as Consolidated EBITDA) and gross assets in its most recently ended Financial Year (on a consolidated basis taking into account it and its subsidiaries only) less than ten per cent. (10%) of Consolidated EBITDA (but including, for these purposes only, the net income of any Project Finance Subsidiaries) and gross assets of the Group (calculated according to the most recent set of audited consolidated financial statements delivered pursuant to Clause 19.1 ( Financial Statements )). Compliance with the aforementioned condition shall be determined by reference to the latest audited financial statements of such member of the Group (consolidated in the case of a member of the Group which itself has Subsidiaries), provided that :

 

  (a) if, in the case of any member of the Group which itself has Subsidiaries, no consolidated financial statements are prepared and audited, its consolidated EBITDA and gross assets shall be determined on the basis of pro forma consolidated financial statements of the relevant member of the Group and its Subsidiaries, prepared for this purpose by the Parent;

 

  (b) following the Demerger, or if any intra-Group transfer or re-organisation takes place, the audited financial statements of the Group Company and all relevant members of the Group shall be adjusted by the Parent in order to take into account the Demerger or such intra-Group transfer or re-organisation; and

 

  (c) the audited financial statements of the Group and any relevant member of the Group shall be adjusted in such a manner as the Auditors think fair and appropriate to take account of the Demerger or the acquisition or disposal of any member of the Group or any business of any member of the Group, after the date or at which the audited financial statements of the Group are made up.

Should there be any dispute regarding whether any member of the Group is or is not a Non-Material Group Company such dispute shall be referred, at the request of the

 

- 12 -


Agent, to the Auditors and a report by the Auditors that a member of the Group is or is not a Non-Material Group Company shall, in the absence of manifest error, be conclusive and binding on all Parties. The costs of obtaining the report by the Auditors will be borne by the unsuccessful party to the dispute.

Obligor ” means a Borrower or a Guarantor.

Original Financial Statements ” means the audited consolidated financial statements of the Parent for the Financial Year ended 31 December 2011.

Paper Form Lenders ” has the meaning given to it in paragraph (a) of Clause 19.7 ( Use of websites ).

Party ” means a party to this Agreement.

Permitted Disposal ” means any sale, lease, transfer or other disposal:

 

  (a) by an Obligor or any member of the Group of obsolete or redundant assets which are no longer required for the efficient operation of the business of such Obligor or such member of the Group; or

 

  (b) by an Obligor or any member of the Group in the ordinary course of its day-to-day business if that sale, lease, transfer or other disposal is not otherwise restricted by a term of any Finance Document; or

 

  (c) by an Obligor to another Obligor (other than to an Additional Obligor); or

 

  (d) by a member of the Group that is not an Obligor to an Obligor or by an Obligor to an Additional Obligor or to a member of the Group that is not an Obligor if such sale, lease, transfer or other disposal is concluded at arm’s length; or

 

  (e) by a member of the Group that is not an Obligor to another member of the Group that is not an Obligor; or

 

  (f) by any member of the Group to any other person where the higher of the market value or consideration receivable when aggregated with the higher of the market value or consideration receivable for any other sale, lease, transfer or other disposal by any member of the Group (other than a sale, lease, transfer or other disposal referred to in (a), (b), (c), (d), (e) and (g)) does not exceed ten per cent. (10%) of the Consolidated Tangible Net Worth in any Financial Year subject to a maximum of twenty per cent. (20%) of Consolidated Tangible Net Worth at such time in aggregate during the period from the date of this Agreement to the Termination Date; or

 

  (g) for which the Agent has given its prior written consent (acting on the instructions of the Majority Lenders).

Permitted Encumbrance ” means:

 

  (a)

any Encumbrance created prior to the date of this Agreement which (i) is disclosed in the Original Financial Statements and (ii) in all circumstances

 

- 13 -


  secures only indebtedness outstanding or a facility available at the date of this Agreement if the principal amount or original facility thereby secured is not increased after the date of this Agreement;

 

  (b) any title transfer or retention arrangement entered into by any member of the Group in the normal course of its trading activities and on terms no worse for that member of the Group than the standard terms of the relevant supplier;

 

  (c) any netting or set-off arrangement entered into by any member of the Group in the ordinary course of its banking arrangements (which shall include, for the avoidance of doubt, those pursuant to hedging arrangements in relation to gold, silver, copper and other commodity prices, foreign exchange rates and interest rates where such arrangements are entered into for the purposes of providing protection against fluctuation in such rates or prices in the ordinary course of business), for the purpose of netting debit and credit balances;

 

  (d) any lien arising by operation of law and in the ordinary course of trading and not by reason of any default (whether in payments or otherwise), of any member of the Group;

 

  (e) any Encumbrance over or affecting (or transaction described in paragraph (b) of Clause 21.3 ( Negative Pledge ) (“ Quasi-Encumbrance ”) affecting) any asset acquired by a member of the Group after the date of this Agreement if:

 

  (i) the Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance was not created in contemplation of the acquisition of that asset by a member of the Group;

 

  (ii) the principal amount secured has not been increased in contemplation of, or since the acquisition of that asset by a member of the Group; and

 

  (iii) the Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance is (other than an Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance otherwise permitted pursuant to paragraphs (b), (c), (d), (f), (g), (i) or (j)) removed or discharged within six (6) months of the date of acquisition of such asset;

 

  (f) any Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance over or affecting any asset of any company which becomes a member of the Group after the date of this Agreement, where the Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance is created prior to the date on which that company becomes a member of the Group, if:

 

  (i) the Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance was not created in contemplation of the acquisition of that company;

 

  (ii) the principal amount secured has not increased in contemplation of or since the acquisition of that company; and

 

  (iii) the Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance is (other than an Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance otherwise permitted pursuant to paragraphs (b), (c), (d), (e), (g), (i) or (j)) removed or discharged within six (6) months of that company becoming a member of the Group;

 

- 14 -


  (g) any Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance granted in respect of Project Finance Borrowings over assets of, or the shares in, a Project Finance Subsidiary (other than the Cerro Corona Subsidiary);

 

  (h) any Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance resulting from the rules and regulations of any clearing system or stock exchange over shares and/or other securities held in that clearing system or stock exchange;

 

  (i) in respect of Encumbrances or Quasi-Encumbrances over or affecting any asset of any Material Group Company (other than the Cerro Corona Subsidiary), any Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance securing indebtedness the principal amount of which (when aggregated with the principal amount of any other indebtedness which has the benefit of Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance other than any permitted under paragraphs (a) to (h) above and (j) and (k) below), does not at any time exceed ten per cent. (10%) of Consolidated Tangible Net Worth (or its equivalent in another currency) (but adjusted to include the net value of new assets acquired since the last date of the latest set of consolidated annual financial statements of the Group);

 

  (j) any other Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance as agreed by the Agent (acting on the instructions of the Majority Lenders) in writing; or

 

  (k) any Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance granted in respect of Financial Indebtedness incurred in connection with the Cerro Corona Project over the business or assets of the Cerro Corona Subsidiary or over the Ownership Interests in the Cerro Corona Subsidiary provided that the amount of Financial Indebtedness secured by all such Encumbrances or Quasi-Encumbrances permitted by this paragraph (k) does not at any time in aggregate exceed two hundred million dollars ($200,000,000) (or its equivalent). In this paragraph (k) “Ownership Interests” means (i) the shares issued by the Cerro Corona Subsidiary, (ii) any shareholder loans made to the Cerro Corona Subsidiary (iii) to the extent required by Peruvian law, the shares in the Holding Company which directly owns the shares issued by the Cerro Corona Subsidiary provided that such Holding Company’s sole assets are shares issued by, and any loans made by it to, the Cerro Corona Subsidiary and its sister company, Minera Gold Fields S.A.

Permitted Financial Indebtedness ” means any Financial Indebtedness:

 

  (a) arising under the Finance Documents;

 

  (b) arising under any environmental bond which any member of the Group is required to issue by any applicable law;

 

  (c) arising in connection with the Cerro Corona Project provided that , the aggregate amount of all such Financial Indebtedness does not at any time exceed two hundred million dollars ($200,000,000) (or its equivalent);

 

  (d) arising under any derivative transaction entered into in connection with protection against or benefit from fluctuation in any rate or price but not for speculative purposes;

 

- 15 -


  (e) of the Group existing and available on the date of this Agreement (or, of any person that becomes a member of the Group from time to time, provided that , such Financial Indebtedness existed at the time such person became a member of the Group and was not created in anticipation thereof);

 

  (f) between Group Companies to the extent incurred for the purposes of financing general corporate and working capital requirements; or

 

  (g) not falling within paragraphs (a), (b), (c), (d), (e) or (f) above provided that the aggregate amount of all Financial Indebtedness (excluding, for the avoidance of doubt, any Financial Indebtedness incurred by a Guarantor or a Project Finance Subsidiary) permitted under this paragraph (g) does not at any time exceed two hundred and fifty million dollars ($250,000,000) (or its equivalent).

Permitted Guarantee ” means:

 

  (a) any guarantees of any Financial Indebtedness of any member of the Group;

 

  (b) any guarantee given in respect of the netting or set-off arrangements permitted pursuant to paragraph (c) of the definition of “Permitted Encumbrances”;

 

  (c) any guarantees or indemnities outstanding on the date of this Agreement (which for the avoidance of doubt shall include the indemnity granted in favour of GFIMSA in relation to its obligations under the Existing Bond); or

 

  (d) any guarantees not falling within paragraphs (a), (b) or (c) above so long as the aggregate amount of such guarantees outstanding at any time when aggregated with the amount of any loans permitted pursuant to paragraph (f) of “Permitted Loan” does not exceed $200,000,000 (or its equivalent) at any time.

Permitted Loan ” means:

 

  (a) any trade credit extended by any member of the Group to its customers on normal commercial terms and in the ordinary course of its trading activities;

 

  (b) Financial Indebtedness which is referred to in the definition of, or otherwise constitutes, Permitted Financial Indebtedness (except under paragraph (d) of that definition);

 

  (c) a loan made by an Obligor to another Obligor or made by a Material Group Company which is not an Obligor to another Material Group Company;

 

  (d) any loan between Group Companies to the extent made for the purposes of financing general corporate and working capital requirements;

 

  (e) any loan made by an Obligor or Material Group Company which is outstanding on the date of this Agreement; or

 

  (f)

any loan (other than a loan permitted under paragraphs (a), (b), (c), (d) or (e) above so long as the aggregate amount of the Financial Indebtedness under

 

- 16 -


  any such loans when aggregated with the amount of any guarantees permitted pursuant to paragraph (d) of “Permitted Guarantee” does not exceed $200,000,000 (or its equivalent) at any time.

Project Finance Borrowings ” means:

 

  (a) any indebtedness to finance (or re-finance) a project comprised of the ownership, development, construction, refurbishment, commissioning and/or operation of assets which is incurred by a Project Finance Subsidiary in connection with such project and in respect of which the recourse of the person(s) making any such finance (or re-finance) available to that Project Finance Subsidiary for the payment, repayment and prepayment of such indebtedness is limited to (i) the Project Finance Subsidiary and its assets and/or the shares in that Project Finance Subsidiary and/or (ii) during the period prior to successful completion of the relevant completion tests applicable to such project guarantees from any one or more members of the Group; or

 

  (b) any indebtedness the terms and conditions of which have been approved by the Agent and which the Agent has agreed in writing (acting on the instructions of the Majority Lenders) to treat as a “Project Finance Borrowing” for the purposes of the Finance Documents.

Project Finance Subsidiary ” means a single purpose company or other entity (excluding the Obligors) whose sole business is a project comprised of the ownership, development, construction, refurbishment, commissioning and/or operation of an asset which has incurred Project Finance Borrowings.

Quotation Day ” means, in the case of a determination of LIBOR, the date on which quotations would customarily be provided by leading banks in the London Interbank Market for deposits or amounts in dollars for delivery on the first day of such period or on any other relevant date.

Recipient ” has the meaning given to it in paragraph (b) of Clause 12.5 ( Value added tax ).

Recovered Amount ” has the meaning given to it in Clause 27.1 ( Payments to Finance Parties ).

Recovering Finance Party ” has the meaning given to it in Clause 27.1 ( Payments to Finance Parties ).

Redistributed Amount ” has the meaning given to it in Clause 27.4 ( Reversal of redistribution ).

Reference Banks ” means the principal London offices of The Bank of Tokyo-Mitsubishi UFJ, Ltd., and Barclays Bank PLC and/or such other banks as may be appointed by the Agent in consultation with the Parent.

Related Fund ” in relation to a fund (the “ first fund ”), means a fund which is managed or advised by the same investment manager or investment adviser as the first fund or, if it is managed by a different investment manager or investment adviser, a fund whose investment manager or investment adviser is an Affiliate of the investment manager or investment adviser of the first fund.

 

- 17 -


Relevant Interbank Market ” means the London interbank market.

Relevant Provision ” means any financial covenant or other similar covenant or undertaking that requires the Parent, any member of the Group or the Group (as a whole) to achieve and maintain a stated level of financial condition or financial performance (or any event of default that has an equivalent effect).

Repeating Representations ” means each of the representations set out in Clause 18.1 ( Status ) to Clause 18.22 ( No Material Adverse Effect ) inclusive, other than Clause 18.3 ( Binding Obligations ), Clause 18.6 ( Governing law and enforcement ), Clause 18.7 ( Deduction of Tax ), Clause 18.8 ( No filing or stamp taxes ), paragraphs (a) and (b) of Clause 18.10 ( No misleading information ) and Clause 18.13 ( No proceedings pending or threatened ).

Replacement Lender ” has the meaning given to it in paragraph (a) of Clause 34.4 ( Replacement of a Defaulting Lender ).

Representative ” means any delegate, agent, manager, administrator, nominee, attorney, trustee or custodian.

Resignation Letter ” means a letter substantially in the form set out in Schedule 8 ( Form of Resignation Letter ).

Retiring Guarantor ” has the meaning given to it in Clause 17.8 ( Release of Guarantors’ right of contribution ).

Rollover Loans ” means one or more Facility B Loans:

 

  (a) made or to be made on the same day that a maturing Facility B Loan is due to be repaid;

 

  (b) the aggregate amount of which is equal to or less than the amount of the maturing Facility B Loan; and

 

  (c) made or to be made to the same Borrower for the purpose of refinancing a maturing Facility B Loan.

Screen Rate ” means the London interbank offered rate for dollars for the relevant period, displayed on the appropriate page (being currently LIBOR 01) of the Reuters screen. If the agreed page is replaced or service ceases to be available, the Agent may specify another page or service displaying the appropriate rate after consultation with the Parent and the Lenders.

Selection Notice ” means a notice substantially in the form set out in Part II of Schedule 3 ( Requests ) given in accordance with Clause 9 ( Interest Periods ) in relation to Facility A.

Sharing Finance Parties ” has the meaning given to it in Clause 27.2 ( Redistribution of payments ).

 

- 18 -


Sharing Payment ” has the meaning given to it in Clause 27.1 ( Payments to Finance Parties ).

Specified Time ” means a time determined in accordance with Schedule 10 ( Timetable ).

Standard & Poor’s ” means Standard & Poor’s, a division of the McGraw-Hill Companies Inc., or any successor to its rating agency function.

Subject Party ” has the meaning given to it in paragraph (b) of Clause 12.5 ( Value added tax ).

Subsidiary ” means, in relation to any company or corporation, a company or corporation:

 

  (a) which is controlled, directly or indirectly, by the first mentioned company or corporation;

 

  (b) more than half the issued share capital of which is beneficially owned, directly or indirectly by the first mentioned company or corporation; or

 

  (c) which is a Subsidiary of another Subsidiary of the first mentioned company or corporation,

and for this purpose, a company or corporation shall be treated as being controlled by another if that other company or corporation is able to direct its affairs and/or to control the composition of its board of directors or equivalent body.

Supplier ” has the meaning given to it in paragraph (b) of Clause 12.5 ( Value added tax ).

Syndication and Amendment Agreement ” means the syndication and amendment agreement in respect of this Agreement dated 30 January 2013 and made between, among others, the Parent, the Original Borrowers, the Original Guarantors and the Agent.

Syndication Date ” has the meaning ascribed thereto in the Syndication and Amendment Agreement.

Tax ” means any tax, levy, impost, duty or other charge or withholding of a similar nature (including, without limitation, any penalty or interest payable in connection with any failure to pay or any delay in paying any of the same).

Tax Credit ” means a credit against, relief or remission for, or repayment of any Tax.

Tax Deduction ” means a deduction or withholding for or on account of Tax from a payment under a Finance Document.

Tax Payment ” means either the increase in a payment made by an Obligor to a Finance Party under Clause 12.1 ( Tax gross-up ) or a payment under Clause 12.2 ( Tax indemnity ).

 

- 19 -


Termination Date ” means:

 

  (a) in relation to Facility A the date falling 36 Months from the date of this Agreement; and

 

  (b) in relation to Facility B the date falling 60 Months from the date of this Agreement.

Total Commitments ” means the aggregate of the Commitments, being US$1,440,000,000 at the Syndication Date.

Total Facility A Commitments ” means the aggregate of the Facility A Commitments, being US$720,000,000 at the Syndication Date.

Total Facility B Commitments ” means the aggregate of the Facility B Commitments, being US$720,000,000 at the Syndication Date.

Transfer Certificate ” means a certificate substantially in the form set out in Schedule 5 ( Form of Transfer Certificate ) or any other form agreed between the Agent and the Parent.

Transfer Date ” means, in relation to an assignment or a transfer:

 

  (a) the proposed Transfer Date specified in the relevant Assignment Agreement or Transfer Certificate; or

 

  (b) in the event that no Transfer Date is specified in the relevant Assignment Agreement or Transfer Certificate, the date on which the Agent executes the relevant Assignment Agreement or Transfer Certificate.

Unpaid Sum ” means any sum due and payable but unpaid by an Obligor under the Finance Documents.

Utilisation ” means a utilisation of a Facility.

Utilisation Date ” means the date of a Utilisation, being the date on which the relevant Loan is to be made.

Utilisation Request ” means a notice substantially in the form set out in Schedule 3 ( Utilisation Request ).

VAT ” means value added tax as provided for in the Value Added Tax Act 1994 and any other tax of a similar nature.

Website Lenders ” has the meaning given to it in paragraph (a) of Clause 19.7 ( Use of websites ).

 

- 20 -


1.2 Construction

 

  (a) Unless a contrary indication appears any reference in this Agreement to:

 

  (i) the “ Agent ”, the “ Arranger ”, any “ Finance Party ”, any “ Lender ”, any “ Obligor ” or any “ Party ” shall be construed so as to include its successors in title, permitted assigns and permitted transferees;

 

  (ii) arm’s length ” means terms that are fair and reasonable to the counterparty of a transaction and no more or less favourable to the other party to the relevant transaction as could reasonably be expected to be obtained in a comparable arm’s length transaction with a person that is not the ultimate Holding Company of such counterparty or an entity of which such counterparty or its ultimate Holding Company has direct or indirect control, or owns directly or indirectly more than twenty per cent. (20%) of the share capital or similar rights of ownership;

 

  (iii) assets ” includes present and future properties, revenues and rights of every description;

 

  (iv) audited ” means, in respect of any financial statement, those financial statements as audited by the Auditors;

 

  (v) authorisations ” mean any authorisation, consent, registration, filing agreement, notarisation, certificate, licence, approval, resolution, permit and/or authority or any exemption from any of the aforesaid, by, with or from any authority (including, without limitation, any approvals required from the South African Reserve Bank in relation to any Finance Document or any transaction contemplated under any Finance Document);

 

  (vi) a “ Finance Document ” or any other agreement or instrument is a reference to that Finance Document or other agreement or instrument as amended, novated, supplemented, extended, replaced or restated;

 

  (vii) a “ guarantee ” means (other than in Clause 17 ( Guarantee and Indemnity ), any guarantee, letter of credit, bond, indemnity or similar assurance against loss, or any obligation, direct or indirect, actual or contingent to purchase or assume any indebtedness of any person or to make any investment in or loan to any person or to purchase assets of any person where, in each case, such obligation is assumed in order to maintain or assist the ability of such person to meet its indebtedness;

 

  (viii) indebtedness ” shall be construed so as to include any obligation (whether incurred as principal or as surety) for the payment or repayment of money, whether present or future, actual or contingent;

 

  (ix)

law ” shall be construed as any law (including statutory, common or customary law), statute, constitution, decree, judgment, treaty, regulation, directive, by-law, order, other legislative measure,

 

- 21 -


  requirement, request or guideline (whether or not having the force of law but, if not having the force of law, is generally complied with by the persons to whom it is addressed or applied) of any government, supranational, local government, statutory or regulatory or self-regulatory or similar body or authority or court and the common law, as amended, replaced, re-enacted, restated or reinterpreted from time to time;

 

  (x) a “ person ” includes any individual, firm, company, corporation, government, state or agency of a state or any association, trust, joint venture, consortium or partnership (whether or not having separate legal personality);

 

  (xi) a “ regulation ” includes any regulation, rule, official directive, request or guideline (whether or not having the force of law but complied with generally) of any governmental, intergovernmental or supranational body, agency, department or regulatory, self-regulatory or other authority or organisation;

 

  (xii) a provision of law is a reference to that provision as amended or re-enacted; and

 

  (xiii) a time of day is a reference to London time.

 

  (b) Section, Clause and Schedule headings are for ease of reference only.

 

  (c) Unless a contrary indication appears, a term used in any other Finance Document or in any notice given under or in connection with any Finance Document has the same meaning in that Finance Document or notice as in this Agreement.

 

  (d) A Default is “ continuing ” if it has not been remedied or waived.

 

1.3 Currency Symbols and Definitions

US$ ”, “ $ ” and “ dollars ” denote lawful currency of the United States of America.

 

1.4 Third party rights

 

  (a) Unless expressly provided to the contrary in a Finance Document, a person who is not a Party has no right under the Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999 (the “ Third Parties Act ”) to enforce or to enjoy the benefit of any term of this Agreement.

 

  (b) Notwithstanding any term of any Finance Document, the consent of any person who is not a Party is not required to rescind or vary this Agreement at any time.

 

- 22 -


SECTION 2

THE FACILITIES

 

2. THE FACILITIES

 

2.1 The Facilities

Subject to the terms of this Agreement, the Lenders make available to the Borrowers:

 

  (a) a dollar term loan facility in an aggregate amount equal to the Total Facility A Commitments; and

 

  (b) a dollar revolving loan facility in an aggregate amount equal to the Total Facility B Commitments.

 

2.2 Finance Parties’ rights and obligations

 

  (a) The obligations of each Finance Party under the Finance Documents are several. Failure by a Finance Party to perform its obligations under the Finance Documents does not affect the obligations of any other Party under the Finance Documents. No Finance Party is responsible for the obligations of any other Finance Party under the Finance Documents.

 

  (b) The rights of each Finance Party under or in connection with the Finance Documents are separate and independent rights and any debt arising under the Finance Documents to a Finance Party from an Obligor shall be a separate and independent debt.

 

  (c) A Finance Party may, except as otherwise stated in the Finance Documents, separately enforce its rights under the Finance Documents.

 

3. PURPOSE

 

3.1 Purpose

 

  (a) The Original Borrowers shall apply all amounts borrowed by them under the Facilities towards, firstly, (i) repayment of the Existing Facility Agreements and thereafter (ii) their general corporate and working capital purposes.

 

  (b) Each Additional Borrower shall apply all amounts borrowed by it under a Facility towards the purposes specified in the Accession Letter to which it is a party as Additional Borrower.

 

3.2 Monitoring

No Finance Party is bound to monitor or verify the application of any amount borrowed pursuant to this Agreement.

 

- 23 -


4. CONDITIONS OF UTILISATION

 

4.1 Initial conditions precedent

 

  (a) No Borrower may deliver a Utilisation Request unless the Agent has received all of the documents and other evidence listed in Part I of Schedule 2 ( Conditions Precedent to Initial Utilisation ) other than the evidence referred to in paragraph 3(g) in Part I of that schedule in form and substance satisfactory to the Agent. The Agent shall notify the Parent and the Lenders promptly upon being so satisfied

 

  (b) The Lenders will only be obliged to comply with Clause 5.4 ( Lenders Participation ) in relation to any Utilisation if on or before 12.00 noon London time on the proposed Utilisation Date for that Utilisation the Agent has received all of the documents and other evidence listed in Part I of Schedule 2 ( Conditions Precedent to Initial Utilisation ) in form and substance satisfactory to the Agent. The Agent shall notify the Parent and the Lenders promptly upon being so satisfied.

 

4.2 Further conditions precedent

Subject to Clause 4.1 ( Initial Conditions Precedent ), the Lenders will only be obliged to comply with Clause 5.4 ( Lenders’ participation ) if on the date of the Utilisation Request and on the proposed Utilisation Date:

 

  (a) in the case of a Rollover Loan, no Event of Default is continuing or would result from the proposed Rollover Loan, and in the case of any other Loan, no Default is continuing or would result from the proposed Loan; and

 

  (b) the Repeating Representations to be made by each Obligor are true in all material respects.

 

4.3 Maximum number of Loans

 

  (a) A Borrower may not deliver a Utilisation Request if as a result of the proposed Utilisation:

 

  (i) more than 10 Facility A Loans would be outstanding; or

 

  (ii) more than 10 Facility B Loans would be outstanding;

 

  (b) A Borrower may not request that a Facility A Loan be divided if, as a result of the proposed division, 20 or more Facility A Loans would be outstanding.

 

- 24 -


SECTION 3

UTILISATION

 

5. UTILISATION

 

5.1 Delivery of a Utilisation Request

A Borrower may utilise a Facility by delivery to the Agent of a duly completed Utilisation Request not later than the Specified Time.

 

5.2 Completion of a Utilisation Request

 

  (a) Each Utilisation Request is irrevocable and will not be regarded as having been duly completed unless:

 

  (i) it identifies the Facility to be utilised;

 

  (ii) the proposed Utilisation Date is a Business Day within the Availability Period applicable to that Facility;

 

  (iii) the currency and amount of the Utilisation comply with Clause 5.3 ( Currency and amount ); and

 

  (iv) the proposed Interest Period complies with Clause 9 ( Interest Periods ).

 

  (b) Only one Loan may be requested in each Utilisation Request.

 

5.3 Currency and amount

 

  (a) The currency specified in a Utilisation Request must be dollars.

 

  (b) The amount of the proposed Loan must be an amount which is not more than the Available Facility and which is a minimum of ten million dollars ($10,000,000) or, if less, the Available Facility.

 

5.4 Lenders’ participation

 

  (a) If the conditions set out in this Agreement have been met and subject to Clause 6.2 ( Repayment of Facility B Loans ), each Lender shall make its participation in each Loan available by the Utilisation Date through its Facility Office.

 

  (b) The amount of each Lender’s participation in each Loan will be equal to the proportion borne by its Available Commitment to the Available Facility immediately prior to making that Loan.

 

  (c) The Agent shall notify each Lender of the amount of each Loan, the amount of its participation in that Loan and in the case of a Facility B Loan and if different the amount of that participation to be made available in accordance with Clause 28.1 ( Payments to the Agent ), in each case by the Specified Time.

 

- 25 -


5.5 Cancellation of Commitment

 

  (a) The Facility A Commitments which, at that time, are unutilised shall be immediately cancelled at the end of the Availability Period for Facility A.

 

  (b) The Facility B Commitments which, at that time, are unutilised shall be immediately cancelled at the end of the Availability Period for Facility B.

 

- 26 -


SECTION 4

REPAYMENT, PREPAYMENT AND CANCELLATION

 

6. REPAYMENT

 

6.1 Repayment of Facility A Loans

 

  (a) Each Borrower which has drawn a Facility A Loan shall repay that Loan in full on the Termination Date in respect of Facility A.

 

  (b) No Borrower may reborrow any part of Facility A which is repaid.

 

6.2 Repayment of Facility B Loans

 

  (a) Each Borrower which has drawn a Facility B Loan shall repay that Loan on the last day of its Interest Period.

 

  (b) Without prejudice to each Borrower’s obligation under paragraph (a) above, if:

 

  (i) one or more Facility B Loans are to be made available to a Borrower:

 

  (A) on the same day that a maturing Facility B Loan is due to be repaid by that Borrower; and

 

  (B) in whole or in part for the purpose of refinancing the maturing Facility B Loan; and

 

  (ii) the proportion borne by each Lender’s participation in the maturing Facility B Loan to the amount of that maturing Facility B Loan is the same as the proportion borne by that Lender’s participation in the new Facility B Loans to the aggregate amount of those new Facility B Loans,

the aggregate amount of the new Facility B Loans shall, unless the Parent notifies the Agent to the contrary in the relevant Utilisation Request, be treated as if applied in or towards repayment of the maturing Facility B Loan so that:

 

  (A) if the amount of the maturing Facility B Loan exceeds the aggregate amount of the new Facility B Loans:

 

  (1) the relevant Borrower will only be required to make a payment under Clause 28.1 ( Payments to the Agent ) in an amount in the relevant currency equal to that excess; and

 

  (2) each Lender’s participation (if any) in the new Facility B Loans shall be treated as having been made available and applied by the Borrower in or towards repayment of that Lender’s participation (if any) in the maturing Facility B Loan and that Lender will not be required to make a payment under Clause 28.1 ( Payments to the Agent ) in respect of its participation in the new Facility B Loans; and

 

- 27 -


  (B) if the amount of the maturing Facility B Loan is equal to or less than the aggregate amount of the new Facility B Loans:

 

  (1) the relevant Borrower will not be required to make a payment under Clause 28.1 ( Payments to the Agent ) and

 

  (2) each Lender will be required to make a payment under Clause 28.1 ( Payments to the Agent ) in respect of its participation in the new Facility B Loans only to the extent that its participation in the new Facility B Loans exceeds that Lender’s participation in the maturing Facility B Loan and the remainder of that Lender’s participation in the new Facility B Loans shall be treated as having been made available and applied by the Borrower in or towards repayment of that Lender’s participation in the maturing Facility B Loan.

 

7. PREPAYMENT AND CANCELLATION

 

7.1 Illegality

If it becomes unlawful in any applicable jurisdiction for a Lender to perform any of its obligations as contemplated by this Agreement or to fund or maintain its participation in any Loan:

 

  (a) that Lender shall promptly notify the Agent upon becoming aware of that event;

 

  (b) upon the Agent notifying the Parent, the Commitment of that Lender will be immediately cancelled; and

 

  (c) each Borrower shall repay that Lender’s participation in the Loans made to that Borrower on the last day of the Interest Period for each Loan occurring after the Agent has notified the Parent or, if earlier, the date specified by the Lender in the notice delivered to the Agent (being no earlier than the last day of any applicable grace period permitted by law).

 

7.2 Change of control

 

  (a) If any person or group of persons acting in concert gains control of the Parent:

 

  (i) the Parent shall promptly notify the Agent upon becoming aware of that event;

 

  (ii) a Lender shall not be obliged to fund a Utilisation (except for a Rollover Loan) and the Agent and the Parent shall consult about the change of control;

 

- 28 -


  (iii) if the Majority Lenders so require after a period of forty-five (45) days from receipt of the notice referred to in (i) above (provided, for the avoidance of doubt, failure of the Parent to provide such notice shall not prevent the Lenders from taking the following actions), the Agent shall by notice to the Parent, (such notice to be delivered no later than sixty (60) days from receipt of the notice referred to in (i) above), cancel the Total Commitments and declare all outstanding Loans, together with accrued interest and all other amounts accrued under the Finance Documents immediately due and payable, whereupon the Total Commitments will be cancelled and all such outstanding amounts will become immediately due and payable;

 

  (iv) if the Agent does not serve the notice referred to in paragraph (iii) above, a Lender may by notice to the Agent which shall be delivered not earlier than forty-five (45) days nor later than sixty (60) days from receipt of the notice referred to in (i) above, whereupon the Agent shall by notice to the Parent (such notice to be delivered promptly after receipt of such Lender notification), cancel the Commitment of that Lender and declare the participation of that Lender in all outstanding Loans, together with accrued interest thereon and all other amounts due to such Lender under the Finance Documents immediately due and payable, whereupon the Commitment of that Lender will be cancelled and all such outstanding amounts will become immediately due and payable.

 

  (b) For the purpose of paragraph (a) above “ control ” means:

 

  (i) the power (whether by way of ownership of shares, proxy, contract, agency or otherwise) to:

 

  (A) cast, or control the casting of, more than one-half of the maximum number of votes that might be cast at a general meeting of the Parent; or

 

  (B) appoint or remove all, or the majority, of the directors or other equivalent officers of the Parent; or

 

  (C) give directions with respect to the operating and financial policies of the Parent which the directors or other equivalent officers of the Parent are obliged to comply with; or

 

  (ii) the holding of more than one-half of the issued share capital of the Parent (excluding any part of that issued share capital that carries no right to participate beyond a specified amount in a distribution of either profits or capital).

 

  (c) For the purpose of paragraph (a) above “ acting in concert ” means, a group of persons who, pursuant to an agreement or understanding (whether formal or informal), actively co-operate, through the acquisition by any of them, either directly or indirectly, of shares in the Parent, to obtain or consolidate control of the Parent.

 

- 29 -


7.3 Demerger Date

If the Demerger Date has not occurred on or before 28 February 2013 the Total Commitments shall automatically be cancelled and any amounts accrued under the Finance Documents shall become immediately due and payable.

 

7.4 Voluntary cancellation

During the Availability Period, the Parent may, if it gives the Agent not less than five (5) Business Days’ (or such shorter period as the Majority Lenders may agree) prior notice, cancel the whole or any part (being a minimum amount of US$10,000,000 of an Available Facility. Any cancellation under this Clause 7.4 shall reduce the Commitments of the Lenders rateably.

 

7.5 Voluntary Prepayment of Facility A Loans

 

  (a) A Borrower to which a Facility A Loan has been made may, if it gives the Agent not less than 5 Business Days’ (or such shorter period as the Majority Lenders may agree) prior notice, prepay the whole or any part of any Facility A Loan (but, if in part, being an amount that reduces the amount of the Facility A Loan by a minimum amount of US$10,000,000).

 

  (b) A Facility A Loan may only be prepaid after the last day of the Availability Period (or, if earlier, the day on which the applicable Available Facility is zero).

 

7.6 Voluntary Prepayment of Facility B Loans

The Borrower to which a Facility B Loan has been made may, if it gives the Agent not less than 5 Business Days’ (or such shorter period as the Majority Lenders may agree) prior notice, prepay the whole or any part of a Facility B Loan (but if in part, being an amount that reduces the amount of the Facility B Loan by a minimum amount of US$10,000,000.

 

7.7 Right of replacement or repayment and cancellation in relation to a single Lender

 

  (a) If:

 

  (i) any sum payable to any Lender by an Obligor is required to be increased under paragraph (c) of Clause 12.1 ( Tax gross-up ); or

 

  (ii) any Lender claims indemnification from the Parent under Clause 12.2 ( Tax indemnity ) or Clause 13.1 ( Increased costs ); or

 

  (iii) any Lender notifies the Agent of its Additional Cost Rate under paragraph 3 of Schedule 4 ( Mandatory Cost Formula ),

the Parent may, whilst (in the case of paragraphs (i) and (ii) above) the circumstance giving rise to the requirement for that increase or indemnification continues or (in the case of paragraph (iii) above) that Additional Cost Rate is greater than zero, give the Agent notice of cancellation

 

- 30 -


of the Commitment of that Lender and its intention to procure the repayment of that Lender’s participation in the Loans or give the Agent notice of its intention to replace that Lender in accordance with paragraph (d) below.

 

  (b) On receipt of a notice of cancellation referred to in paragraph (a) above, the Commitment of that Lender shall immediately be reduced to zero whereupon the Total Commitments shall be reduced by the same amount.

 

  (c) On the last day of each Interest Period which ends after the Parent has given notice of cancellation under paragraph (a) above (or, if earlier, the date specified by the Parent in that notice), each Borrower to which a Loan is outstanding shall repay that Lender’s participation in that Loan.

 

  (d) The Parent may, in the circumstances set out in paragraph (a) above, on five (5) Business Days’ prior notice to the Agent and that Lender, replace that Lender by requiring that Lender to (and, to the extent permitted by law, that Lender shall) transfer pursuant to Clause 23 ( Changes to the Lenders ) all (and not part only) of its rights and obligations under this Agreement to a Lender or other bank, financial institution, trust, fund or other entity selected by the Parent which confirms its willingness to assume and does assume all the obligations of the transferring Lender in accordance with Clause 23 ( Changes to the Lenders ) for a purchase price in cash or other cash payment payable at the time of the transfer equal to the outstanding principal amount of such Lender’s participation in the outstanding Loans and all accrued interest (to the extent that the Agent has not given a notification under Clause 23.9 ( Pro rata interest settlement )), Break Costs and other amounts payable in relation thereto under the Finance Documents.

 

  (e) The replacement of a Lender pursuant to paragraph (d) above shall be subject to the following conditions:

 

  (i) the Parent shall have no right to replace the Agent;

 

  (ii) neither the Agent nor any Lender shall have any obligation to find a replacement Lender; and

 

  (iii) in no event shall the Lender replaced under paragraph (d) above be required to pay or surrender any of the fees received by such Lender pursuant to the Finance Documents.

 

7.8 Restrictions

 

  (a) Any notice of cancellation or prepayment given by any Party under this Clause 7 shall be irrevocable and, unless a contrary indication appears in this Agreement, shall specify the date or dates upon which the relevant cancellation or prepayment is to be made and the amount of that cancellation or prepayment.

 

  (b) Any prepayment under this Agreement shall be made together with accrued interest on the amount prepaid and, subject to any Break Costs, without premium or penalty.

 

- 31 -


  (c) No Borrower may reborrow any part of Facility A which is prepaid.

 

  (d) Unless a contrary indication appears in this Agreement any part of Facility B which is prepaid or repaid may be reborrowed in accordance with the terms of this Agreement.

 

  (e) The Borrowers shall not repay or prepay all or any part of the Loans or cancel all or any part of the Commitments except at the times and in the manner expressly provided for in this Agreement.

 

  (f) No amount of the Total Commitments cancelled under this Agreement may be subsequently reinstated.

 

  (g) If the Agent receives a notice under this Clause 7 it shall promptly forward a copy of that notice to either the Parent or the affected Lender, as appropriate.

 

  (h) If all or part of a Loan under a Facility is repaid or prepaid and is not available for redrawing (other than by operation of Clause 4.2 ( Further conditions precedent )), an amount of the Commitments (equal to the amount of the Loan which is repaid or prepaid) in respect of that Facility will be deemed to be cancelled on the date of repayment or prepayment. Any cancellation under this paragraph (h) shall reduce the Commitments of the Lenders rateably under that Facility.

 

7.9 Right of cancellation in relation to a Defaulting Lender

 

  (a) If any Lender becomes a Defaulting Lender, the Parent may, at any time whilst the Lender continues to be a Defaulting Lender, give the Agent five (5) Business Days’ notice of cancellation of each Available Commitment of that Lender.

 

  (b) On the notice referred to in paragraph (a) above becoming effective, each Available Commitment of the Defaulting Lender shall immediately be reduced to zero.

 

  (c) The Agent shall as soon as practicable after receipt of a notice referred to in paragraph (a) above, notify all the Lenders.

 

- 32 -


SECTION 5

COSTS OF UTILISATION

 

8. INTEREST

 

8.1 Calculation of interest

The rate of interest on each Loan for each Interest Period is the percentage rate per annum which is the aggregate of the applicable:

 

  (a) Margin;

 

  (b) LIBOR; and

 

  (c) Mandatory Cost, if any.

 

8.2 Payment of interest

Each Borrower to which a Loan has been made shall pay accrued interest on that Loan on the last day of each Interest Period (and, if the Interest Period is longer than 6 (six) months, on the dates falling at 6 (six) Monthly intervals after the first day of the relevant Interest Period).

 

8.3 Margin

Subject to Clause 8.4 ( Margin Adjustments ):

 

  (a) the Margin in relation to each Facility A Loan is 2.45% per annum; and

 

  (b) the Margin in relation to each Facility B Loan is 2.25% per annum.

 

8.4 Margin Adjustments

 

  (a) The Margin for all Loans shall, on each date on which the Parent notifies the Agent that a revised long term credit rating assigned to the Parent by either Moody’s or Standard & Poor’s is published or withdrawn, be adjusted to the percentage rate set out opposite the relevant long term credit rating assigned to the Parent in the table below.

 

Rating

(Standard &

Poor’s )

 

Rating

(Moody’s)

 

Facility A

Margin p.a.

 

Facility B

Margin p.a

BBB

  Baa2   1.80%   1.60%

BBB-

  Baa3   2.00%   1.80%

BB+

  Ba1   2.45%   2.25%

BB

  Ba2   2.95%   2.75%

BB-

  Ba3   3.45%   3.25%

 

- 33 -


  (b) Any adjustment to the Margin (whether upwards or downwards) will apply from the date on which the Parent notifies the Agent of the publication of the relevant change to, or to the extent applicable, the withdrawal of the long term credit rating assigned to the Parent by Moody’s or Standard & Poor’s.

 

  (c) If at any time there is a difference in the long term credit ratings assigned to the Parent by each of Standard & Poor’s and Moody’s, the applicable Margin will be the average of the Margins applicable to the relevant ratings.

 

  (d) If at any time only one of Standard & Poor’s or Moody’s assigns a long term credit rating to the Parent or if either Standard & Poor’s or Moody’s ceases to assign a long term credit rating to the Parent:

 

  (i) the applicable Margin will be the average of (x) the Margin applicable to the rating assigned by the remaining rating agency or the rating agency that has issued a rating (as applicable) and (y) 3.45% per annum in the case of each Facility A Loan and 3.25% per annum in the case of each Facility B Loan; or

 

  (ii) the Parent may obtain a substitute rating from another statistical rating agency acceptable to the Agent acting reasonably, but until such time as a substitute rating agency is appointed by the Parent and has assigned a long term credit rating to the Parent, the Margin shall be determined in accordance with sub-paragraph (i) above.

 

  (e) Following any substitution under paragraph (d)(ii) above, references in this Clause 8 ( Interest) to Moody’s or Standard & Poor’s as the case may be shall be to such substitute rating agency.

 

  (f) If none of Moody’s, Standard & Poor’s or any other statistical ratings agency appointed by the Parent under paragraph (d)(ii) above, assign a long term credit rating to the Parent, the Margin set out in the table above opposite the ratings BB- in the case of Standard & Poor’s and Ba3 in the case of Moody’s will apply.

 

  (g) Notwithstanding any other provision, if at any time an Event of Default is continuing:

 

  (i) the Margin in relation to Facility A will be 3.45% per annum; and

 

  (ii) the Margin in relation to Facility B will be 3.25% per annum.

 

  (h) If the relevant Event of Default ceases to be continuing, the Margin will be calculated in accordance with paragraph (a) above, and shall take effect in relation to each Loan from the next Business Day after the date on which the relevant Event of Default ceases to be continuing.

 

  (i) The Parent shall notify the Agent promptly upon becoming aware (and in any event within 3 Business Days) that Moody’s, and/or Standard & Poor’s and/or any other statistical ratings agency as appointed by the Parent under paragraph (d)(ii) above has published or withdrawn a long term credit rating assigned to the Parent.

 

- 34 -


8.5 Default interest

 

  (a) If an Obligor fails to pay any amount payable by it under a Finance Document on its due date, interest shall accrue on the overdue amount from the due date up to the date of actual payment (both before and after judgment) at a rate which, subject to paragraph (b) below, is one per cent. (1%) higher than the rate which would have been payable if the overdue amount had, during the period of non-payment, constituted a Loan in the currency of the overdue amount for successive Interest Periods, each of a duration selected by the Agent (acting reasonably). Any interest accruing under this Clause 8.5 shall be immediately payable by that Obligor on demand by the Agent.

 

  (b) If any overdue amount consists of all or part of a Loan which became due on a day which was not the last day of an Interest Period relating to that Loan:

 

  (i) the first Interest Period for that overdue amount shall have a duration equal to the unexpired portion of the current Interest Period relating to that Loan; and

 

  (ii) the rate of interest applying to the overdue amount during that first Interest Period shall be one per cent. (1%) higher than the rate which would have applied if the overdue amount had not become due.

 

  (c) Default interest (if unpaid) arising on an overdue amount will be compounded with the overdue amount at the end of each Interest Period applicable to that overdue amount but will remain immediately due and payable.

 

8.6 Notification of rates of interest

The Agent shall promptly notify the Lenders and the relevant Borrower of the determination of a rate of interest under this Agreement.

 

9. INTEREST PERIODS

 

9.1 Selection of Interest Periods

 

  (a) A Borrower (or the Parent on behalf of a Borrower) may select an Interest Period for a Loan in the Utilisation Request for that Loan or (if the Loan has already been borrowed) in a Selection Notice.

 

  (b) Each Selection Notice for a Facility A Loan is irrevocable and must be delivered to the Agent by the Borrower (or the Parent on behalf of a Borrower) to which that Facility A Loan was made not later than the Specified Time.

 

  (c) If a Borrower (or the Parent) fails to deliver a Selection Notice to the Agent in accordance with paragraph (b) above, the relevant Interest Period will be three Months.

 

  (d) Subject to this Clause 9, a Borrower may select an Interest Period of one (1), two (2), three (3) or six (6) months or any other period agreed between the Borrower and the Agent (acting on the instructions of all the Lenders) in relation to the relevant loan.

 

- 35 -


  (e) An Interest Period for a Loan shall not extend beyond the Termination Date applicable to its facility.

 

  (f) Each Interest Period for a Facility A Loan shall start on the Utilisation Date or (if already made) on the last day of its preceding Interest Period.

 

  (g) A Facility B Loan has one Interest Period only.

 

9.2 Non-Business Days

If an Interest Period would otherwise end on a day which is not a Business Day, that Interest Period will instead end on the next Business Day in that calendar month (if there is one) or the preceding Business Day (if there is not).

 

9.3 Consolidation and division of Facility A Loans

 

  (a) Subject to paragraph (b) below, if two or more Interest Periods:

 

  (i) relate to Facility A Loans made to the same Borrower; and

 

  (ii) end on the same date,

those Facility A Loans will, unless that Borrower (or the Parent on its behalf) specifies to the contrary in the Selection Notice for the next Interest Period, be consolidated into, and treated as, a single Facility A Loan on the last day of the Interest Period.

 

  (b) Subject to Clause 4.3 ( Maximum number of Loans ) and Clause 5.3 ( Currency and amount ), if a Borrower (or the Parent on its behalf) requests in a Selection Notice that a Facility A Loan be divided into two or more Facility A Loans, that Facility A Loan will, on the last day of its Interest Period, be so divided into the amounts specified in that Selection Notice, being an aggregate amount equal to the amount of the Facility A Loan immediately before its division.

 

10. CHANGES TO THE CALCULATION OF INTEREST

 

10.1 Absence of quotations

Subject to Clause 10.2 ( Market disruption ), if LIBOR is to be determined by reference to the Reference Banks but a Reference Bank does not supply a quotation by the Specified Time on the Quotation Day, the applicable LIBOR shall be determined on the basis of the quotations of the remaining Reference Banks.

 

10.2 Market disruption

 

  (a) If a Market Disruption Event occurs in relation to a Loan for any Interest Period, then the rate of interest on each Lender’s share of that Loan for the Interest Period shall be the percentage rate per annum which is the sum of:

 

  (i) the Margin;

 

- 36 -


  (ii) the rate notified to the Agent by that Lender as soon as practicable and in any event not later than five (5) Business Days before interest is due to be paid in respect of that Interest Period ( provided that if such Lender is unable to notify the Agent of such rate not later than five (5) Business Days before interest is due to be paid in respect of that Interest Period, it shall do so before interest is due to be paid in respect of that Interest Period), to be that which expresses as a percentage rate per annum the cost to that Lender of funding its participation in that Loan from whatever source it may reasonably select; and

 

  (iii) the Mandatory Cost, if any, applicable to that Lender’s participation in the Loan.

 

  (b) In this Agreement “ Market Disruption Event ” means:

 

  (i) at or about noon on the Quotation Day for the relevant Interest Period the Screen Rate is not available and none or only one of the Reference Banks supplies a rate to the Agent to determine LIBOR for dollars and for the relevant Interest Period; or

 

  (ii) before close of business in London on the Quotation Day for the relevant Interest Period, the Agent receives notifications from a Lender or Lenders (whose participations in a Loan exceed thirty five per cent. (35%) of that Loan) that the cost to it of obtaining matching deposits in the Relevant Interbank Market would be in excess of LIBOR.

 

10.3 Alternative basis of interest or funding

 

  (a) If a Market Disruption Event occurs and the Agent or the Parent so requires, the Agent and the Parent shall enter into negotiations (for a period of not more than thirty (30) days) with a view to agreeing a substitute basis for determining the rate of interest.

 

  (b) Any alternative basis agreed pursuant to paragraph (a) above shall, with the prior consent of all the Lenders and the Parent, be binding on all Parties.

 

10.4 Break Costs

 

  (a) Each Borrower shall, within three (3) Business Days of demand by a Finance Party, pay to that Finance Party its Break Costs attributable to all or any part of a Loan or Unpaid Sum being paid by that Borrower on a day other than the last day of an Interest Period for that Loan or Unpaid Sum.

 

  (b) Each Lender shall, as soon as reasonably practicable after a demand by the Agent, provide a certificate confirming the amount of its Break Costs for any Interest Period in which they accrue.

 

- 37 -


11. FEES

 

11.1 Commitment fee

 

  (a) The Parent (or a Borrower nominated by the Parent) shall pay to the Agent (for the account of each Lender) a fee (in dollars) computed at the rate of:

 

  (i) 40 per cent. of the applicable Margin per annum on that Lender’s Available Commitment under Facility A from the Demerger Date to the end of the Availability Period applicable to Facility A; and

 

  (ii) 40 per cent. of the applicable Margin per annum on that Lender’s Available Commitment under Facility B from the Demerger Date to the end of the Availability Period applicable to Facility B.

 

  (b) The accrued commitment fee in respect of each Facility is payable on the last day of each successive period of 3 Months after the Demerger Date which ends during the relevant Availability Period, on the last day of the relevant Availability Period and, if cancelled in full, on the cancelled amount of the relevant Lender’s Commitment at the time the cancellation is effective.

 

  (c) No commitment fee is payable to the Agent (for the account of a Lender) on any Available Commitment of that Lender for any day on which that Lender is a Defaulting Lender.

 

11.2 Participation fee

The Parent (or a Borrower nominated by the Parent) shall pay to the Agent (for the account of the Lenders based on their respective Commitments) a participation fee in the amount and at the times agreed in a Fee Letter.

 

11.3 Arrangement fee

The Parent (or a Borrower nominated by the Parent) shall pay to the Agent (for the account of the Arrangers) an arrangement fee in the amount and at the times agreed in a Fee Letter.

 

11.4 Agency fee

The Parent (or a Borrower nominated by the Parent) shall pay to the Agent (for its own account) an agency fee in the amount and at the times agreed in a Fee Letter.

 

11.5 Utilisation fee

Where the principal amount outstanding of the drawn Loans under Facility B, expressed as a percentage of the Total Facility B Commitments, fall within a percentage range set out in the left hand column below, the Parent (or a Borrower nominated by the Parent) shall pay to the Agent (for the account of each Lender in respect of its participation in the Facility B Loan(s)) a utilisation fee which shall be computed at a rate equal to the rate per annum set out opposite such percentage range in the right hand column below on the total outstanding Facility B Loans. Utilisation fees are calculated on a day to day basis and accrued utilisation fees are payable quarterly in arrear until the Termination Date in respect of Facility B and on the date a Lender’s Facility B Commitment is cancelled in full.

 

- 38 -


Facility B Loans outstanding (as a percentage of the Total Facility B Commitments)

   Utilisation Fee
(per annum)
 

Less than or equal to 33  1 / 3 %

     0.20

Greater than 33  1 / 3 % and less than or equal to 66  2 / 3 %

     0.40

Greater than 66  2 / 3 %

     0.60

 

11.6 Ticking Fee

 

  (a) The Parent (or a Borrower nominated by the Parent) shall pay to the Agent (for the account of each Lender) a ticking fee in dollars computed at the rate of 0.40 per cent. per annum on the Available Commitments from the date of this Agreement to the Demerger Date.

 

  (b) The accrued ticking fee is payable on the Demerger Date, and if cancelled in full on the cancelled amount of the Commitments at the time the cancellation is effective.

 

- 39 -


SECTION 6

ADDITIONAL PAYMENT OBLIGATIONS

 

12. TAX GROSS UP AND INDEMNITIES

 

12.1 Tax gross-up

 

  (a) Each Obligor shall make all payments to be made by it without any Tax Deduction, unless a Tax Deduction is required by law.

 

  (b) An Obligor shall promptly upon becoming aware that it must make a Tax Deduction (or that there is any change in the rate or the basis of a Tax Deduction) notify the Agent accordingly. Similarly, a Lender shall notify the Agent on becoming so aware in respect of a payment payable to that Lender. If the Agent receives such notification from a Lender it shall notify the Parent and, if applicable, that Obligor.

 

  (c) If a Tax Deduction is required by law to be made by an Obligor, the amount of the payment due from that Obligor shall be increased to an amount which (after making any Tax Deduction) leaves an amount equal to the payment which would have been due if no Tax Deduction had been required.

 

  (d) If an Obligor is required to make a Tax Deduction, that Obligor shall make that Tax Deduction and any payment required in connection with that Tax Deduction within the time allowed and in the minimum amount required by law.

 

  (e) Within thirty (30) days of making either a Tax Deduction or any payment required in connection with that Tax Deduction, the Obligor making that Tax Deduction shall deliver to the Agent for the Finance Party entitled to the payment evidence reasonably satisfactory to that Finance Party that the Tax Deduction has been made or (as applicable) any appropriate payment paid to the relevant taxing authority.

 

12.2 Tax indemnity

 

  (a) An Obligor shall (within three (3) Business Days of demand by the Agent) pay to a Finance Party an amount equal to the loss, liability or cost which that Finance Party determines (in its absolute discretion) will be or has been (directly or indirectly) suffered for or on account of Tax by that Finance Party in respect of a Finance Document.

 

  (b) Paragraph (a) above shall not apply:

 

  (i) with respect to any Tax assessed on a Finance Party:

 

  (A) under the law of the jurisdiction in which that Finance Party is incorporated or, if different, the jurisdiction (or jurisdictions) in which that Finance Party is treated as resident for tax purposes; or

 

- 40 -


  (B) under the law of the jurisdiction in which that Finance Party’s Facility Office is located in respect of amounts received or receivable in that jurisdiction,

if that Tax is imposed on or calculated by reference to the net income received or receivable (but not any sum deemed to be received or receivable) by that Finance Party; or

 

  (ii) to the extent a loss, liability or cost is compensated for by an increased payment under Clause 12.1 ( Tax gross-up ).

 

  (c) A Finance Party making, or intending to make a claim under paragraph (a) above shall promptly notify the Agent of the event which will give, or has given, rise to the claim, following which the Agent shall notify the Obligor.

 

  (d) A Finance Party shall, on receiving a payment from an Obligor under this Clause 12.2, notify the Agent.

 

12.3 Tax Credit

If an Obligor makes a Tax Payment and the relevant Finance Party determines (in its absolute discretion) that:

 

  (a) a Tax Credit is attributable either to an increased payment of which that Tax Payment forms part, or to that Tax Payment; and

 

  (b) that Finance Party has obtained, utilised and retained that Tax Credit,

the Finance Party shall pay an amount to such Obligor which that Finance Party determines (in its absolute discretion) will leave it (after that payment) in the same after-Tax position as it would have been in had the Tax Payment not been required to be made by such Obligor.

 

12.4 Stamp taxes

The Parent shall pay and, within three (3) Business Days of demand, indemnify each Finance Party against any cost, loss or liability that Finance Party incurs in relation to all stamp duty, registration and other similar Taxes payable in respect of any Finance Document.

 

12.5 Value added tax

 

  (a) All amounts set out or expressed in a Finance Document to be payable by any Party to a Finance Party which (in whole or in part) constitute the consideration for a supply or supplies for VAT purposes shall be deemed to be exclusive of any VAT which is chargeable on such supply or supplies, and accordingly, subject to paragraph (b) below, if VAT is or becomes chargeable on any supply made by any Finance Party to any Party under a Finance Document, that Party shall pay to the Finance Party (in addition to and at the same time as paying any other consideration for such supply) an amount equal to the amount of such VAT (and such Finance Party shall promptly provide an appropriate VAT invoice to such Party).

 

- 41 -


  (b) If VAT is or becomes chargeable on any supply made by any Finance Party (the “ Supplier ”) to any other Finance Party (the “ Recipient ”) under a Finance Document, and any Party other than the Recipient (the “ Subject Party ”) is required by the terms of any Finance Document to pay an amount equal to the consideration for such supply to the Supplier (rather than being required to reimburse the Recipient in respect of that consideration), such Party shall also pay to the Supplier (in addition to and at the same time as paying such amount) an amount equal to the amount of such VAT. The Recipient will promptly pay to the Subject Party an amount equal to any credit or repayment obtained by the Recipient from the relevant tax authority which the Recipient reasonably determines is in respect of such VAT.

 

  (c) Where a Finance Document requires any Party to reimburse or indemnify a Finance Party for any cost or expense, that Party shall reimburse or indemnify (as the case may be) such Finance Party for the full amount of such cost or expense, including such part thereof as represents VAT, save to the extent that such Finance Party reasonably determines that it is entitled to credit or repayment in respect of such VAT from the relevant tax authority.

 

  (d) Any reference in this Clause 12.5 to any Party shall, at any time when such Party is treated as a member of a group for VAT purposes, include (where appropriate and unless the context otherwise requires) a reference to the representative member of such group at such time (the term “representative member” to have the same meaning as in the Value Added Tax Act 1994).

 

13. INCREASED COSTS

 

13.1 Increased costs

 

  (a) Subject to Clause 13.3 ( Exceptions ) the Parent (or a Borrower nominated by the Parent) shall, within twenty (20) Business Days of a demand by the Agent, pay for the account of a Finance Party the amount of any Increased Costs incurred by that Finance Party or any of its Affiliates as a result of:

 

  (i) the introduction of or any change in (or in the interpretation, administration or application of) any law or regulation after the date of this Agreement;

 

  (ii) compliance with any law or regulation made after the date of this Agreement; or

 

  (iii) the implementation or application of, or compliance with, Basel III or any law or regulation that implements or applies Basel III.

 

  (b) In this Agreement:

 

  (i) Basel III ” means

 

  (A)

the agreements on capital requirements, a leverage ratio and liquidity standards contained in “Basel III: A global regulatory framework for more resilient banks and banking systems”, “Basel III: International framework for liquidity risk

 

- 42 -


  measurement, standards and monitoring” and “Guidance for national authorities operating the countercyclical capital buffer” published by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision on 16 December 2010, each as amended, supplemented or restated; and

 

  (B) the rules for global systemically important banks contained in “Global systemically important banks; assessment methodology and the additional loss absorbency requirement - Rules text” published by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision in November 2011, as amended, supplemented or restated; and

 

  (ii) Increased Costs ” means:

 

  (A) a reduction in the rate of return from the Facilities or on a Finance Party’s (or its Affiliate’s) overall capital;

 

  (B) an additional or increased cost; or

 

  (C) a reduction of any amount due and payable under any Finance Document,

which is incurred or suffered by a Finance Party or any of its Affiliates to the extent that it is attributable to that Finance Party having entered into its Commitment or funding or performing its obligations under any Finance Document.

 

13.2 Increased cost claims

 

  (a) A Finance Party intending to make a claim pursuant to Clause 13.1 ( Increased costs ) shall notify the Agent of the event giving rise to the claim, following which the Agent shall promptly notify the Parent.

 

  (b) Each Finance Party shall, as soon as practicable after a demand by the Agent, provide a certificate confirming the amount of its Increased Costs.

 

13.3 Exceptions

Clause 13.1 ( Increased costs ) does not apply to the extent any Increased Cost is:

 

  (a) attributable to a Tax Deduction required by law to be made by an Obligor;

 

  (b) compensated for by Clause 12.2 ( Tax indemnity ) (or would have been compensated for under Clause 12.2 ( Tax indemnity ) but was not so compensated solely because any of the exclusions in paragraph (b) of Clause 12.2 ( Tax indemnity ) applied);

 

  (c) compensated for by the payment of the Mandatory Cost;

 

  (d) attributable to the wilful breach by the relevant Finance Party or its Affiliates of any law or regulation; or

 

- 43 -


  (e) attributable to the implementation or application of or compliance with the bank levy imposed by the United Kingdom government under the Finance Act 2011 in the form existing on the date of this Agreement (the “UK Bank Levy”) or any other law or regulation which implements the UK Bank Levy (whether such implementation, application or compliance is by a government, regulator, Finance Party or any of its Affiliates).

 

14. OTHER INDEMNITIES

 

14.1 Currency indemnity

 

  (a) If any sum due from an Obligor under the Finance Documents (a “ Sum ”), or any order, judgment or award given or made in relation to a Sum, has to be converted from the currency (the “ First Currency ”) in which that Sum is payable into another currency (the “ Second Currency ”) for the purpose of:

 

  (i) making or filing a claim or proof against that Obligor;

 

  (ii) obtaining or enforcing an order, judgment or award in relation to any litigation or arbitration proceedings,

that Obligor shall as an independent obligation, within five (5) Business Days of demand, indemnify each Finance Party to whom that Sum is due against any cost, loss or liability arising out of or as a result of the conversion including any discrepancy between (A) the rate of exchange used to convert that Sum from the First Currency into the Second Currency and (B) the rate or rates of exchange available to that person at the time of its receipt of that Sum.

 

  (b) Each Obligor waives any right it may have in any jurisdiction to pay any amount under the Finance Documents in a currency or currency unit other than that in which it is expressed to be payable.

 

14.2 Other indemnities

The Parent (or a Borrower nominated by the Parent) shall, within five (5) Business Days of demand, indemnify each Finance Party against any cost, loss or liability incurred by that Finance Party as a result of:

 

  (a) the occurrence of any Event of Default;

 

  (b) a failure by an Obligor to pay any amount due under a Finance Document on its due date, including without limitation, any cost, loss or liability arising as a result of Clause 27 ( Sharing Among the Finance Parties );

 

  (c) funding, or making arrangements to fund, its participation in a Loan requested by a Borrower in a Utilisation Request but not made by reason of the operation of any one or more of the provisions of this Agreement (other than by reason of default or negligence by that Finance Party alone); or

 

  (d) a Loan (or part of a Loan) not being prepaid in accordance with a notice of prepayment given by a Borrower or the Parent.

 

- 44 -


14.3 Indemnity to the Agent

The Parent shall promptly indemnify the Agent against any cost, loss or liability incurred by the Agent (acting reasonably) as a result of:

 

  (a) investigating any event which it reasonably believes is a Default; or

 

  (b) acting or relying on any notice, request or instruction which it reasonably believes to be genuine, correct and appropriately authorised.

 

15. MITIGATION BY THE LENDERS

 

15.1 Mitigation

 

  (a) Each Finance Party shall, in consultation with the Parent, take all reasonable steps to mitigate any circumstances which arise and which would result in any amount becoming payable under or pursuant to, or cancelled pursuant to, any of Clause 7.1 ( Illegality ), Clause 12 ( Tax Gross-up and Indemnities ), Clause 13 ( Increased Costs ) or paragraph 3 of Schedule 4 ( Mandatory Cost Formula ) including (but not limited to) transferring its rights and obligations under the Finance Documents to another Affiliate or Facility Office.

 

  (b) Paragraph (a) above does not in any way limit the obligations of any Obligor under the Finance Documents.

 

15.2 Limitation of liability

 

  (a) The Parent shall indemnify each Finance Party for all costs and expenses reasonably incurred by that Finance Party as a result of steps taken by it under Clause 15.1 ( Mitigation ).

 

  (b) A Finance Party is not obliged to take any steps under Clause 15.1 ( Mitigation ) if, in the opinion of that Finance Party (acting reasonably), to do so might be prejudicial to it.

 

16. COSTS AND EXPENSES

 

16.1 Transaction expenses

The Parent (or a Borrower nominated by the Parent) shall, promptly within five (5) Business Days of demand, pay the Agent and the Arrangers the amount of all costs and expenses (including legal fees but subject to any separately agreed cap) reasonably incurred by any of them in connection with the negotiation, preparation, printing and execution of:

 

  (a) this Agreement and any other documents referred to in this Agreement; and

 

  (b) any other Finance Documents executed after the date of this Agreement,

subject to a cap of ten thousand dollars ($10,000) ( provided , however , that such cap shall not include the legal fees, which shall be subject to a separately agreed cap).

 

- 45 -


16.2 Amendment costs

If (a) an Obligor requests an amendment, waiver or consent or (b) an amendment is required pursuant to Clause 28.11 ( Change of currency ), the Parent (or a Borrower nominated by the Parent) shall, within five (5) Business Days of demand, reimburse the Agent for the amount of all costs and expenses (including legal fees) reasonably incurred by the Agent in responding to, evaluating, negotiating or complying with that request or requirement.

 

16.3 Enforcement costs

The Parent (or a Borrower nominated by the Parent) shall, within five (5) Business Days of demand, pay to each Finance Party the amount of all costs and expenses (including legal fees) incurred by that Finance Party in connection with the enforcement of, or the preservation of any rights under, any Finance Document.

 

- 46 -


SECTION 7

GUARANTEE

 

17. GUARANTEE AND INDEMNITY

 

17.1 Guarantee and indemnity

Each Guarantor irrevocably and unconditionally jointly and severally:

 

  (a) guarantees to each Finance Party punctual performance by each Borrower and the Parent of all that Borrower’s and the Parent’s obligations under the Finance Documents;

 

  (b) undertakes with each Finance Party that whenever a Borrower or the Parent does not pay any amount when due under or in connection with any Finance Document, that Guarantor shall immediately on demand pay that amount as if it was the principal obligor; and

 

  (c) agrees with each Finance Party that if any obligation guaranteed by it is or becomes unenforceable, invalid or illegal, it will, as an independent and primary obligation, indemnify that Finance Party immediately on demand (and shall make the relevant payment within five (5) Business Days of demand) against any cost, loss or liability it incurs as a result of a Borrower or the Parent not paying any amount which would, but for such unenforceability, invalidity or illegality, have been payable by it under any Finance Document on the date when it would have been due. The amount payable by a Guarantor under this indemnity will not exceed the amount it would have had to pay under this Clause 17 if the amount claimed had been recoverable on the basis of a guarantee.

 

17.2 Continuing guarantee

This guarantee is a continuing guarantee and will extend to the ultimate balance of sums payable by any Obligor under the Finance Documents, regardless of any intermediate payment or discharge in whole or in part.

 

17.3 Reinstatement

If any discharge, release or arrangement (whether in respect of the obligations of any Obligor or any security for those obligations or otherwise) is made by a Finance Party in whole or in part on the basis of any payment, security or other disposition which is avoided or must be restored in insolvency, liquidation, administration or otherwise, without limitation, then the liability of each Guarantor under this Clause 17 will continue or be reinstated as if the discharge, release or arrangement had not occurred.

 

- 47 -


17.4 Waiver of defences

The obligations of each Guarantor under this Clause 17 will not be affected by an act, omission, matter or thing which, but for this Clause, would reduce, release or prejudice any of its obligations under this Clause 17 ( without limitation and whether or not known to it or any Finance Party ) including:

 

  (a) any time, waiver or consent granted to, or composition with, any Obligor or other person;

 

  (b) the release of any other Obligor or any other person under the terms of any composition or arrangement with any creditor of any member of the Group;

 

  (c) the taking, variation, compromise, exchange, renewal or release of, or refusal or neglect to perfect, take up or enforce, any rights against, or security over assets of, any Obligor or other person or any non-presentation or non-observance of any formality or other requirement in respect of any instrument or any failure to realise the full value of any security;

 

  (d) any incapacity or lack of power, authority or legal personality of or dissolution or change in the members or status of an Obligor or any other person;

 

  (e) any amendment, novation, supplement, extension, restatement (however fundamental and whether or not more onerous) or replacement of any Finance Document or any other document or security including without limitation any change in the purpose of, any extension of or any increase in any facility or the addition of any new facility under any Finance Document or other document or security;

 

  (f) any unenforceability, illegality or invalidity of any obligation of any person under any Finance Document or any other document or security; or

 

  (g) any insolvency or similar proceedings.

 

17.5 Immediate recourse

Each Guarantor waives any right it may have of first requiring any Finance Party (or any trustee or agent on its behalf) to proceed against or enforce any other rights or security or claim payment from any person before claiming from that Guarantor under this Clause 17. This waiver applies irrespective of any law or any provision of a Finance Document to the contrary.

 

17.6 Appropriations

Until all amounts which may be or become payable by the Obligors under or in connection with the Finance Documents have been irrevocably paid in full, each Finance Party (or any trustee or agent on its behalf) may:

 

  (a) refrain from applying or enforcing any other moneys, security or rights held or received by that Finance Party (or any trustee or agent on its behalf) in respect of those amounts, or apply and enforce the same in such manner and order as it sees fit (whether against those amounts or otherwise) and no Guarantor shall be entitled to the benefit of the same; and

 

- 48 -


  (b) hold in an interest-bearing suspense account any moneys received from any Guarantor or on account of any Guarantor’s liability under this Clause 17.

 

17.7 Deferral of Guarantors’ rights

Until all amounts which may be or become payable by the Obligors under or in connection with the Finance Documents have been irrevocably paid in full and unless the Agent otherwise directs, no Guarantor will exercise any rights which it may have by reason of performance by it of its obligations under the Finance Documents or by reason of any amount being payable, or liability arising, under this Clause 17:

 

  (a) to be indemnified by an Obligor;

 

  (b) to claim any contribution from any other guarantor of any Obligor’s obligations under the Finance Documents;

 

  (c) to take the benefit (in whole or in part and whether by way of subrogation or otherwise) of any rights of the Finance Parties under the Finance Documents or of any other guarantee or security taken pursuant to, or in connection with, the Finance Documents by any Finance Party;

 

  (d) to bring legal or other proceedings for an order requiring any Obligor to make any payment, or perform any obligation, in respect of which any Guarantor has given a guarantee, undertaking or indemnity under Clause 17.1 ( Guarantee and Indemnity );

 

  (e) to exercise any right of set-off against any Obligor; and/or

 

  (f) to claim or prove as a creditor of any Obligor in competition with any Finance Party.

If a Guarantor receives any benefit, payment or distribution in relation to such rights it shall hold that benefit, payment or distribution to the extent necessary to enable all amounts which may be or become payable to the Finance Parties by the Obligors under or in connection with the Finance Documents to be repaid in full on trust for the Finance Parties and shall promptly pay or transfer the same to the Agent or as the Agent may direct for application in accordance with Clause 28 ( Payment mechanics )

 

17.8 Release of Guarantors’ right of contribution

If any Guarantor (a “ Retiring Guarantor ”) ceases to be a Guarantor in accordance with the terms of the Finance Documents for the purpose of any sale or other disposal of that Retiring Guarantor then on the date such Retiring Guarantor ceases to be a Guarantor:

 

  (a) that Retiring Guarantor is released by each other Guarantor from any liability (whether past, present or future and whether actual or contingent) to make a contribution to any other Guarantor arising by reason of the performance by any other Guarantor of its obligations under the Finance Documents; and

 

- 49 -


  (b) each other Guarantor waives any rights it may have by reason of the performance of its obligations under the Finance Documents to take the benefit (in whole or in part and whether by way of subrogation or otherwise) of any rights of the Finance Parties under any Finance Document or of any other security taken pursuant to, or in connection with, any Finance Document where such rights or security are granted by or in relation to the assets of the Retiring Guarantor.

 

17.9 Additional security

This guarantee is in addition to and is not in any way prejudiced by any other guarantee or security now or subsequently held by any Finance Party.

 

- 50 -


SECTION 8

REPRESENTATIONS, UNDERTAKINGS AND EVENTS OF DEFAULT

 

18. REPRESENTATIONS

Each Obligor makes the representations and warranties set out in this Clause 18 to each Finance Party (save for the representation and warranty set out in Clause 18.23 ( Demerger ) which is made by the Parent only).

 

18.1 Status

 

  (a) It is a limited liability company, duly incorporated and validly existing under the law of its jurisdiction of incorporation.

 

  (b) It has the power to own its assets and carry on its business as it is being conducted or is contemplated to be conducted.

 

18.2 Power and authority

It has the power to enter into and perform, and has taken all necessary action to authorise its entry into, and performance of, the Finance Documents to which it is party and the transactions contemplated by those Finance Documents.

 

18.3 Binding obligations

The obligations expressed to be assumed by it in each Finance Document to which it is a party are, subject to any general principles of law as at the date of this Agreement limiting its obligations, which are specifically referred to in any legal opinion delivered pursuant to Clause 4 ( Conditions of Utilisation ) or Clause 24 ( Changes to the Obligors ), legal, valid, binding and enforceable obligations.

 

18.4 Non-conflict with other obligations

The entry into and performance by it of, and the transactions contemplated by, the Finance Documents to which it is a party do not and will not conflict with:

 

  (a) any applicable law of its jurisdiction of incorporation;

 

  (b) its Constitutional Documents; or

 

  (c) any material agreement or instrument binding upon it or any of its assets.

 

18.5 Validity and admissibility in evidence

All authorisations required:

 

  (a) to enable it lawfully to enter into, exercise its rights and comply with its obligations under the Finance Documents to which it is a party and to ensure that the obligations expressed to be assumed by it thereunder are legal, valid, binding and enforceable; and

 

- 51 -


  (b) to make the Finance Documents to which it is a party admissible in evidence in its jurisdiction of incorporation,

have been obtained or effected and are in full force and effect.

 

18.6 Governing law and enforcement

Subject to any general principles of law as at the date of this Agreement set out in any legal opinion delivered pursuant to the Finance Documents:

 

  (a) the choice of English law as the governing law of the Finance Documents will be recognised and enforced in its jurisdiction of incorporation; and

 

  (b) any judgment obtained in England in relation to a Finance Document will be recognised and enforced in its jurisdiction of incorporation.

 

18.7 Deduction of Tax

It is not required under the law of its jurisdiction of incorporation to make any deduction for or on account of Tax from any payment it may make under any Finance Document.

 

18.8 No filing or stamp taxes

Except to the extent set out in any legal opinion provided pursuant to the Finance Documents in relation to it, under the law of its jurisdiction of incorporation it is not necessary that the Finance Documents be filed, recorded or enrolled with any court or other authority in that jurisdiction or that any stamp, registration or similar tax be paid on or in relation to the Finance Documents or the transactions contemplated by the Finance Documents.

 

18.9 No default

 

  (a) No Event of Default is continuing or might reasonably be expected to result from the making of any Utilisation.

 

  (b) It is not, nor is it likely to be as a result of entering into and performing its obligations under the Finance Documents, in violation of any law or in breach of or in default under any agreement to which it is a party or which is binding on it or any of its assets to an extent or in a manner which could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

18.10  No misleading information

 

  (a) All written factual information supplied by it to the Finance Parties and the Agent in connection with the Finance Documents (and the information contained in the Information Package, excluding any equity analysts reports and the reports from the credit rating agencies) (the “ Information ”) was true and accurate in all material respects as at the date it was given or as at the date (if any) at which it was stated and was not misleading in any material respect at such date.

 

- 52 -


  (b) The financial projections and forecasts contained in the Information have been prepared in good faith on the basis of recent historical information and on the basis of reasonable assumptions.

 

  (c) It has not knowingly withheld any information which, if disclosed, could reasonably be expected materially and adversely to affect the decision of the Finance Parties in considering whether or not to provide finance to each Borrower.

 

18.11  Financial statements

 

  (a) The Original Financial Statements were prepared in accordance with GAAP.

 

  (b) The Original Financial Statements fairly represent the Group’s financial condition and operations during the relevant financial year.

 

18.12  Pari passu ranking

Its payment obligations under the Finance Documents rank at least pari passu with the claims of all its other unsecured and unsubordinated creditors, except for obligations mandatorily preferred by law applying to companies generally in the jurisdiction of its incorporation.

 

18.13  No proceedings pending or threatened

Other than as disclosed in the financial statements most recently delivered to the Agent pursuant to paragraph (a) of Clause 19.1 ( Financial statements ), no litigation, arbitration or administrative proceedings of or before any court, arbitral body or government agency which, if adversely determined, might reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect have (to the best of its knowledge and belief) been started or threatened against it or any Material Group Company.

 

18.14  No winding-up

No Material Group Company has taken any corporate action, nor have any other steps been taken or legal proceedings started or (to the best of its knowledge and belief, after due enquiry) threatened against any Material Group Company, for its winding-up, dissolution, administration or re-organisation or for the enforcement of any Encumbrance over all or any of its revenues or assets or for the appointment of a receiver, administrator, administrative receiver, conservator, custodian, trustee or similar officer of it or of all or any of its assets which could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

18.15  No encumbrances

 

  (a) No Encumbrance exists over all or any of the assets of any Material Group Company except for Permitted Encumbrances.

 

  (b) No Encumbrance would arise as a result of the execution of and performance of its rights and obligations under the Finance Documents.

 

- 53 -


18.16  Assets

It and each Material Group Company has good title to or validly leases or licenses all of the assets necessary and has all consents and/or authorisations necessary to carry on its business as conducted to the extent that failure to comply with this Clause 18.16 could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

18.17  Insurance

Each Material Group Company maintains insurances on and in relation to its business and assets against those risks and to the extent as is usual for companies in the jurisdiction in which it conducts its business carrying on substantially similar business in such jurisdiction.

 

18.18  Environmental Compliance

Each Material Group Company has adopted and complies with an environmental policy which requires monitoring of and compliance with all applicable Environmental Law and Environmental Permits applicable to it from time to time unless non-compliance with such policy could not reasonably be expected to cause a Material Adverse Effect.

 

18.19  Environmental Claims

No Environmental Claim (not of a frivolous or vexatious nature) has been commenced or (to the best of its knowledge and belief) is threatened against any Material Group Company where that claim would be reasonably likely, if determined against that Material Group Company, to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

18.20  Taxation

 

  (a) It and each Material Group Company has duly and punctually paid and discharged all Taxes imposed upon it or its assets within the time period allowed without incurring penalties except to the extent that:

 

  (i) payment is being contested in good faith;

 

  (ii) it has maintained adequate reserves for those Taxes; and

 

  (iii) payment can be lawfully withheld.

 

  (b) It is not and no Material Group Company is materially overdue in the filing of any Tax returns.

 

18.21  Ownership of Material Group Companies

 

  (a) Each existing Material Group Company on the date of this Agreement (other than the Cerro Corona Subsidiary, Newshelf and the Ghanaian Companies) is a wholly-owned Subsidiary of the Parent and any member of the Group which becomes a Material Group Company after the date of this Agreement will be a wholly or partially owned subsidiary of the Parent and the members of the Group holding the shares in such Material Group Company have not reduced their shareholding in such Subsidiary below the level of their shareholding at the time such Subsidiary became a Material Group Company.

 

- 54 -


  (b) The Parent holds at least seventy-four per cent. (74%) of the issued share capital of Newshelf.

 

  (c) Newshelf holds at least seventy-four per cent. (74%) of the issued share capital of each of Gold Fields Operations Limited and GFI Joint Venture Holdings Proprietary Limited.

 

  (d) The Parent indirectly holds at least ninety per cent. (90%) of the issued share capital of each Ghanaian Company.

 

  (e) The Parent indirectly holds at least ninety-nine per cent. (99%) of the common shares in the share capital of the Cerro Corona Subsidiary (which equates to ninety-eight point five per cent. (98.5%) of the issued and outstanding shares in the share capital of the Cerro Corona Subsidiary).

 

18.22  No Material Adverse Effect

There has been no change in the business, condition (financial or otherwise), operations, performance or properties of the Obligors or the Group (taken as a whole) since 31 December 2011 which could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect excluding, for the avoidance of doubt, the Demerger or the announcement of the Demerger.

 

18.23  Demerger

It has taken all necessary action to authorise the Demerger and all relevant authorisations and approvals required to effect the Demerger have been obtained.

 

18.24  Times when representation made

 

  (a) All the representations and warranties in this Clause 18 are made by each Obligor on the date of this Agreement and, in the case of each Additional Obligor, on the date of accession of such Additional Obligor (by reference to the facts and circumstances then existing) (other than the representations in (i) paragraph (a) of Clause 18.10 ( No misleading information ) which are deemed to be made on the date the Information is provided by the relevant Obligor and in the case of the information contained in the Information Package, on the date on which the Information Package is posted on Debt domain by Barclays Bank PLC (in its capacity as Arranger) in connection with the syndication of the Facilities, and (ii) Clause 18.23 ( Demerger ) which is deemed to be made on the Demerger Date by the Parent only).

 

  (b) The Repeating Representations are deemed to be made by each Obligor (by reference to the facts and circumstances then existing) on the date of each Utilisation Request and on each Utilisation Date, and on the first day of each Interest Period, save that the references in Clause 18.11 ( Financial statements ) to “the Original Financial Statements” shall, for the purposes of the Repeating Representations, be construed as references to the most recent audited consolidated financial statements of the Parent delivered to the Agent under Clause 19.1 ( Financial statements ).

 

- 55 -


19. INFORMATION UNDERTAKINGS

The undertakings in this Clause 19 are given in favour of each Finance Party and remain in force from the date of this Agreement for so long as any amount is outstanding under the Finance Documents or any Commitment is in force.

 

19.1 Financial statements

The Parent shall supply to the Agent:

 

  (a) as soon as the same become available, but in any event within one hundred and twenty (120) days after the end of each of its Financial Years the audited consolidated financial statements of the Parent for that Financial Year, it being acknowledged that in relation to the first set of audited consolidated financial statements of the Parent to be supplied, audited pro forma consolidated financial statements shall be supplied to exclude GFIMSA and its Subsidiaries;

 

  (b) as soon as the same become available, but in any event within one hundred and fifty (150) days after the end of each of its Financial Years:

 

  (i) the audited financial statements of each Obligor (other than Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited and Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited unless there is a legal requirement to audit its financial statements and any other Obligor which is not legally required to audit its financial statements) for that Financial Year; and

 

  (ii) if the audited financial statements of Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited and/or Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited and/or any other Obligor which is not legally required to audit its financial statements (as the case may be) are not delivered under (i) above, the unaudited financial statements of Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited and/or Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited and/or any other Obligor which is not legally required to audit its financial statements (as the case may be) for that Financial Year;

 

  (c) as soon as the same become available, but in any event within sixty (60) days after the first six (6) months of each of its Financial Years:

 

  (i) the unaudited financial statements of each Obligor for the first six (6) month period of that Financial Year; and

 

  (ii) the unaudited consolidated financial statements of the Parent for the first six (6) month period of that Financial Year; and

 

  (d) as soon as the same become available, but in any event within sixty (60) days after the end of each quarter of each Financial Year:

 

  (i) the unaudited consolidated financial statements of the Parent for that period, it being acknowledged that pro forma unaudited consolidated financial statements of the Parent shall be supplied for the period up to and including the Demerger Date to exclude GFIMSA and its Subsidiaries; and

 

- 56 -


  (ii) the unaudited financial statements of each Obligor for that period.

 

19.2 Compliance Certificate

 

  (a) The Parent shall supply to the Agent, with each set of consolidated financial statements delivered pursuant to paragraphs (a) and (c) of Clause 19.1 ( Financial statements ), a Compliance Certificate setting out (in reasonable detail) computations as to compliance with Clause 20 ( Financial Covenants ) as at the date as at which those financial statements were drawn up.

 

  (b) Each Compliance Certificate shall be signed by 2 (two) directors or executive officers of the Parent and, if required to be delivered with the audited consolidated financial statements delivered pursuant to paragraph (a) of Clause 19.1 ( Financial statements ), reported on by the Auditors.

 

19.3 Requirements as to financial statements

 

  (a) Each set of financial statements delivered by the Parent pursuant to Clause 19.1 ( Financial statements ) shall be certified by a director of the relevant company as fairly representing its financial condition as at the date as at which those financial statements were drawn up. This Clause 19.3 shall not apply to those financial statements delivered pursuant to paragraph (d) of Clause 19.1 ( Financial Statements ).

 

  (b) The Parent shall procure that each set of financial statements delivered pursuant to Clause 19.1 ( Financial statements ) is prepared in accordance with GAAP, the requirements of its jurisdiction of incorporation and accounting practices and financial reference periods consistent with those applied in the preparation of the Original Financial Statements, unless the Parent notifies the Agent that in relation to any sets of financial statements, there has been a change in GAAP or the accounting practices or reference periods and its Auditors (in the case of its annual audited financial statements) or the Parent (in the case of any of its other financial statements) delivers to the Agent:

 

  (i) a description of any change necessary for those financial statements to reflect GAAP, accounting practices and reference periods upon which the Original Financial Statements were prepared; and

 

  (ii) sufficient information, in form and substance as may be reasonably required by the Agent, to enable the Agent to determine whether Clause 20 ( Financial Covenants ) has been complied with and make an accurate comparison between the financial position indicated in those financial statements and the Original Financial Statements.

 

- 57 -


  (c) If the Parent notifies the Agent of a change in accordance with paragraph (b) above, then the Parent and the Agent shall enter into negotiations in good faith with a view to agreeing:

 

  (i) whether or not the change might result in material alteration in the commercial effect of any of the terms of this Agreement or any other Finance Document; and

 

  (ii) if so, any amendments to this Agreement or any other Finance Document which may be necessary to ensure that the change does not result in any material alteration in the commercial effect of those terms, and if any amendments are agreed they shall take effect and be binding on each of the Parties in accordance with their terms.

 

  (d) Any reference in the Finance Documents to “ financial statements ” shall be construed as a reference to those financial statements as the same may be adjusted under this Clause 19.3 to reflect the basis upon which the Original Financial Statements were prepared.

 

19.4 Access to records

At any time after the occurrence of a Default and for so long as it is continuing, upon the request of the Agent or a Finance Party each Obligor shall (at that Obligor’s expense) provide to the Agent or any of its representatives and professional advisors such access to that Obligor’s records (including its general ledger), books and assets as that person may require at reasonable times and upon reasonable notice.

 

19.5 Information: miscellaneous

Each Obligor shall supply to the Agent, if the Agent so requests:

 

  (a) all documents dispatched by that Obligor to its shareholders (or any class of them) or its creditors generally at the same time as they are dispatched;

 

  (b) the details of any litigation, arbitration or administrative proceedings which are current, threatened or pending against any member of the Group which, if adversely determined against it, would be reasonably likely to have a Material Adverse Effect; and

 

  (c) promptly, such further information (including an extract of its general ledger) regarding the financial condition, business and operations of any Material Group Company as any Finance Party (through the Agent) may reasonably request.

 

19.6 Notification of default

 

  (a) Each Obligor shall notify the Agent, of any Default (and the steps, if any, being taken to remedy it) promptly upon becoming aware of its occurrence (unless that Obligor is aware that a notification has already been provided by another Obligor).

 

- 58 -


  (b) Promptly upon a request by the Agent, each Borrower shall supply to the Agent, a certificate signed by 2 (two) of its directors or senior officers on its behalf certifying that no Default is continuing (or if a Default is continuing specifying the Default and the steps, if any, being taken to remedy it).

 

19.7 Use of websites

 

  (a) The Parent may satisfy its obligation under the Finance Documents to deliver any information in relation to those Lenders (the “ Website Lenders ”) who accept this method of communication by posting this information onto an electronic website designated by the Parent and the Agent (the “ Designated Website ”) if:

 

  (i) the Agent expressly agrees (after consultation with each of the Lenders) that it will accept communication of the information by this method;

 

  (ii) both the Parent and the Agent are aware of the address of and any relevant password specifications for the Designated Website; and

 

  (iii) the information is in a format previously agreed between the Parent and the Agent.

If any Lender (a “ Paper Form Lender ”) does not agree to the delivery of information electronically then the Agent shall notify the Parent accordingly and the Parent shall supply the information to the Agent (in sufficient copies for each Paper Form Lender) in paper form. In any event the Parent shall supply the Agent with at least one copy in paper form of any information required to be provided by it.

 

  (b) The Agent shall supply each Website Lender with the address of and any relevant password specifications for the Designated Website following designation of that website by the Parent and the Agent.

 

  (c) The Parent shall promptly upon becoming aware of its occurrence notify the Agent if:

 

  (i) the Designated Website cannot be accessed due to technical failure;

 

  (ii) the password specifications for the Designated Website change;

 

  (iii) any new information which is required to be provided under the Finance Documents is posted onto the Designated Website;

 

  (iv) any existing information which has been provided under the Finance Documents and posted onto the Designated Website is amended; or

 

  (v) the Parent becomes aware that the Designated Website or any information posted onto the Designated Website is or has been infected by any electronic virus or similar software.

If the Parent notifies the Agent under paragraph (c)(i) or paragraph (c)(v) above, all information to be provided by the Parent under the Finance

 

- 59 -


Documents after the date of that notice shall be supplied in paper form unless and until the Agent and each Website Lender is satisfied that the circumstances giving rise to the notification are no longer continuing.

Any Website Lender may request, through the Agent, one (1) paper copy of any information required to be provided under the Finance Documents which is posted onto the Designated Website. The Parent shall comply with any such request within ten (10) Business Days.

 

19.8 Know your customer checks

 

  (a) If:

 

  (i) the introduction of or any change in (or in the interpretation, administration or application of) any law or regulation made after the date of this Agreement;

 

  (ii) any change in the status of an Obligor or the composition of the shareholders of an Obligor after the date of this Agreement; or

 

  (iii) a proposed assignment or transfer by a Lender of any of its rights and obligations under the Finance Documents to a party that is not a Lender prior to such assignment or transfer,

obliges the Agent or any Lender (or, in the case of paragraph (iii) above, any prospective new Lender) to comply with “know your customer” or similar identification procedures in circumstances where the necessary information is not already available to it, each Obligor shall promptly upon the request of the Agent or any Lender supply, or procure the supply of, such documentation and other evidence as is reasonably requested by the Agent (for itself or on behalf of any Lender) or any Lender (for itself or, in the case of the event described in paragraph (iii) above, on behalf of any prospective new Lender) in order for the Agent, such Lender or, in the case of the event described in paragraph (iii) above, any prospective new Lender to carry out and be satisfied it has complied with all necessary “know your customer” or other similar checks under all applicable laws and regulations pursuant to the transactions contemplated in the Finance Documents.

 

  (b) Each Lender shall promptly upon the request of the Agent supply, or procure the supply of, such documentation and other evidence as is reasonably requested by the Agent (for itself) in order for the Agent to carry out and be satisfied it has complied with all necessary “know your customer” or other similar checks under all applicable laws and regulations pursuant to the transactions contemplated in the Finance Documents.

 

  (c) The Parent shall, by not less than ten (10) Business Days’ prior written notice to the Agent, notify the Agent (which shall promptly notify the Lenders) of its intention to request that one of its Subsidiaries becomes an Additional Obligor pursuant to the terms of the Finance Documents.

 

- 60 -


  (d) Following the giving of any notice pursuant to paragraph (c) above, if the accession of such Additional Obligor obliges the Agent or any Lender to comply with “know your customer” or similar identification procedures in circumstances where the necessary information is not readily available to it, the Parent shall promptly upon the request of the Agent or any Lender supply, or procure the supply of, such documentation and other evidence as is reasonably requested by the Agent (for itself or on behalf of any Lender) or any Lender (for itself or on behalf of any prospective Lender) in order for the Agent or such Lender or any prospective new Lender to carry out and be satisfied it has complied with all necessary “know your customer” or other similar checks under all applicable laws and regulations pursuant to the accession of such Subsidiary to the Finance Documents as an Additional Obligor.

 

20. FINANCIAL COVENANTS

 

20.1 Financial definitions:

 

  (a) In this Clause 20:

Consolidated EBITDA ” means, in respect of any Measurement Period, the consolidated net income of the Group (less the net income of any Project Finance Subsidiaries but including any dividends received in cash by any member of the Group (other than a Project Finance Subsidiary) from a Project Finance Subsidiary), before, without duplication and all as calculated in accordance with GAAP:

 

  (i) any provision on account of normal, deferred and royalty taxation;

 

  (ii) any interest, commission, discounts or other fees incurred or payable, received or receivable by any member of the Group in respect of Indebtedness for Borrowed Money;

 

  (iii) any other interest received or receivable by any member of the Group on any deposit or bank account;

 

  (iv) any non-cash adjustments to the environment rehabilitation and/or reclamation expenses;

 

  (v) any amount attributable to the amortisation of intangible assets and depreciation of tangible assets;

 

  (vi) any non-cash gains or losses relating to and resulting from the marked to market valuation of derivative and/or financial instruments;

 

  (vii) any losses from (or gains on the reversal of previously recognised) write-downs or impairments of assets and/or investments;

 

  (viii) any gains or losses recognised on the attributable share of results of associates after tax, but including any dividends received in cash by any member of the Group from such an associate;

 

- 61 -


  (ix) any share-based payments;

 

  (x) any other extraordinary or exceptional items; and

 

  (xi) any other material non-cash gain or loss that needs to be accounted for under GAAP.

For any company that is not a Subsidiary of the Group but in which any member of the Group directly or indirectly owns an equity interest of more than twenty per cent. (20%) of the issued share capital (an “ Associate ”), the Parent may include in the Consolidated EBITDA the percentage of the equity interest of the amount that would be the EBITDA of the Associate.

Consolidated Net Borrowings ” means, at any time, the aggregate amount of all obligations of the members of the Group, other than Project Finance Subsidiaries (but including, for the avoidance of doubt, any guaranteed obligations of any other member of the Group in respect of the obligations of a Project Finance Subsidiary), for or in respect of Indebtedness for Borrowed Money but excluding any such obligation to any member of the Group, adjusted to take account of the aggregate amount of freely available cash and cash equivalents held by any member of the Group, other than Project Finance Subsidiaries, and so that no amount shall be included or excluded more than once, provided that , if a percentage of the EBITDA of any Associate is included in the Consolidated EBITDA then the same percentage of such Associate’s Consolidated Net Borrowings (but as if references in such definition to “Group” were references to the Associate and its Subsidiaries) will be included in the calculation of Consolidated Net Borrowings;

Consolidated Net Finance Charges ” means, in respect of any Measurement Period, the aggregate amount of the interest (including the interest element of leasing and hire purchase payments and capitalised interest), commission, fees, discounts and other finance payments payable by any member of the Group, other than Project Finance Subsidiaries, (including any commission, fees, discounts and other finance payment payable by any member of the Group under any interest rate hedging arrangement but deducting any commission, fees, discounts and other finance payments receivable by any member of the Group under any interest rate hedging instrument) but deducting any other interest receivable by any member of the Group, other than Project Finance Subsidiaries, on any deposit or bank account, provided that , if a percentage of the EBITDA of any Associate is included in the Consolidated EBITDA then the same percentage of such Associate’s Consolidated Net Finance Charges (but as if references in such definition to “Group” were references to the Associate and its Subsidiaries) will be included in the calculation of Consolidated Net Finance Charges; and

Measurement Period ” means each period of twelve (12) months ending on the last day of the Parent’s Financial Year and each period of twelve (12) months ending on the last day of the first half of the Parent’s Financial Year.

 

- 62 -


  (b) For the purposes of this Clause 20:

 

  (i) if at any time the Cerro Corona Subsidiary is (or is deemed to be) a Material Group Company it shall be deemed to not be a Project Finance Subsidiary; and

 

  (ii) for the purposes of the Measurement Periods ending 31 December 2012 and 30 June 2013, the Cerro Corona Subsidiary shall be deemed to be a Material Group Company commencing from the beginning of each such Measurement Period.

 

20.2 Financial condition

The Parent shall ensure that for so long as any amount is outstanding under a Finance Document or any Commitment is in force:

 

  (a) the ratio of Consolidated EBITDA to Consolidated Net Finance Charges in respect of any Measurement Period shall be or shall exceed 5:1; and

 

  (b) the ratio of Consolidated Net Borrowings to Consolidated EBITDA shall not in respect of any Measurement Period exceed 2.5:1.

 

20.3 Financial testing

The financial covenants set out in Clause 20.2 ( Financial condition ) shall be tested by reference to each of the financial statements and/or each Compliance Certificate delivered pursuant to Clause 19.1 ( Financial Statements ) and Clause 19.2 ( Compliance Certificate ).

 

20.4 Breach of a Financial Condition Undertaking

Any Obligor shall, immediately upon becoming aware of a breach of either of the financial covenants in Clause 20.2 ( Financial condition ), notify the Agent and provide such details about the breach as the Agent may request (unless that Obligor is aware that a notification has already been provided by another Obligor).

 

21. GENERAL UNDERTAKINGS

The undertakings in this Clause 21 are given in favour of each Finance Party and remain in force from the date of this Agreement for so long as any amount is outstanding under the Finance Documents or any Commitment is in force.

 

21.1 Authorisations

Each Obligor shall promptly:

 

  (a) obtain, comply with and do all that is necessary to maintain in full force and effect; and

 

  (b) upon written request by the Agent or a Finance Party, supply certified copies to the Agent and/or a Finance Party, as the case may be, of,

 

- 63 -


any authorisation required or desirable under any applicable law to enable it to perform its obligations under the Finance Documents to which it is a party and to ensure the legality, validity, enforceability or admissibility in evidence of any Finance Document.

 

21.2 Compliance with laws

Each Obligor shall comply in all respects with all laws and regulations to which it may be subject (including, but not limited to, Environmental Law), if failure so to comply would materially impair its ability to perform its obligations under the Finance Documents to which it is a party.

 

21.3 Negative pledge

 

  (a) No Obligor shall (and the Parent shall procure that no other Material Group Company shall) create or permit to subsist any Encumbrance over any of its assets.

 

  (b) No Obligor shall (and the Parent shall ensure that no other Material Group Company will):

 

  (i) sell, transfer or otherwise dispose of any of its assets on terms whereby they are or may be leased to or re-acquired by it or by an Obligor or any other member of the Group;

 

  (ii) sell, transfer or otherwise dispose of any of its receivables on recourse terms;

 

  (iii) enter into any arrangement under which money or the benefit of a bank or other account may be applied, set-off or made subject to a combination of accounts; or

 

  (iv) enter into any other preferential arrangement having a similar effect,

in circumstances where the arrangement or transaction is entered into primarily as a method of raising Financial Indebtedness or of financing the acquisition of an asset.

 

  (c) Paragraphs (a) and (b) above do not apply to Permitted Encumbrances.

 

21.4 Disposals and Mergers

 

  (a) No Obligor shall (and the Parent shall ensure that no other Material Group Company will):

 

  (i) enter into a single transaction or a series of transactions (whether related or not) and whether voluntarily or involuntarily to sell, lease, transfer or otherwise dispose of any assets; or

 

  (ii) enter into any amalgamation, demerger, merger or corporate reconstruction.

 

- 64 -


  (b) Paragraph (a) above does not apply to:

 

  (i) Permitted Disposals;

 

  (ii) the Demerger; or

 

  (iii) any amalgamation, demerger, merger or corporate reconstruction of any member of the Group, without insolvency, if:

 

  (A) in respect of the Obligors or the successors-in-title or assignees of the Obligors, the Finance Documents are preserved as binding upon the amalgamated, demerged, merged and/or reconstructed members of the Group; and

 

  (B) the amalgamated, demerged, merged and/or reconstructed companies will be members of the Group; and

 

  (C) such amalgamation, demerger, merger and/or corporate reconstruction will not have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

21.5 Change of business

Each Obligor shall procure that no substantial change is made to the general nature of its business or the business of the Group taken as a whole from that carried on at the date of this Agreement, excluding, for the avoidance of doubt, the Demerger or the announcement of the Demerger.

 

21.6 Insurance

Each Obligor shall (and the Parent shall ensure that each Material Group Company will) maintain insurances on and in relation to its business, properties and assets with reputable underwriters or insurance companies against those risks and to the extent as is usual for companies carrying on the same or substantially similar business.

 

21.7 Environmental Compliance

Each Obligor shall (and the Parent shall ensure that each Material Group Company will) substantially comply in all material respects with all Environmental Law and obtain and maintain any Environmental Permits and take all reasonable steps in anticipation of known or expected future changes to or obligations under the same.

 

21.8 Environmental Claims

Each Obligor shall inform the Agent, in writing as soon as reasonably practical upon becoming aware of the same:

 

  (a) if any Environmental Claim (not of a frivolous or vexatious nature) has been commenced or (to the best of its knowledge and belief) threatened against any Material Group Company; or

 

- 65 -


  (b) of any facts or circumstances which will or are reasonably likely to result in any Environmental Claim (not of a frivolous or vexatious nature) being commenced or threatened against any Material Group Company,

where the claim would be reasonably likely, if determined against that Material Group Company, to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

21.9 Taxation

Each Obligor shall (and the Parent shall ensure that each Material Group Company will) duly and punctually pay and discharge all Taxes imposed upon it or its assets within the time period allowed without incurring penalties save to the extent that:

 

  (a) payment is being contested in good faith;

 

  (b) adequate reserves are being maintained for those Taxes; and

 

  (c) where such payment can be lawfully withheld.

 

21.10  Maintenance of Legal Status

Each Obligor shall (and the Parent shall ensure that each Material Group Company will) do all such things as are necessary to maintain its existence as a legal person and shall maintain its books and records in good order and make all necessary corporate filings with the relevant authorities in its jurisdiction of incorporation.

 

21.11  Claims Pari Passu

Each Obligor shall ensure that at all times the claims of the Finance Parties against it under the Finance Documents rank at least pari passu with the claims of all its other unsecured and unsubordinated creditors save those whose claims are preferred by any bankruptcy, insolvency, liquidation or other similar laws of general application in its jurisdiction of incorporation.

 

21.12  Maintenance of Assets

Each Obligor shall (and the Parent shall ensure that each Material Group Company will) ensure that it has good title to or validly leases or licences all of the assets necessary and has all consents and/or authorisations necessary to carry on its business as conducted to the extent that failure to comply with this Clause 21.12 could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

21.13  Acquisitions

 

  (a) No Obligor shall (and the Parent shall ensure that no Material Group Company will), acquire any assets or business or make any investments.

 

  (b) Paragraph (a) above shall not apply to:

 

  (i) any acquisition of assets or business or any investment made, in each case, on arms length terms where the aggregate amount of consideration for that acquisition or investment does not exceed 15% of the Market Capitalisation of the Parent;

 

- 66 -


  (ii) any acquisition or investment made in the ordinary course of trading of the acquiring or investing entity;

 

  (iii) any investment in the ordinary course of trading of the Group of cash whose disposal is permitted under Clause 21.4 ( Disposals and Mergers );

 

  (iv) an acquisition or investment by a member of the Group of an asset sold, leased, transferred or otherwise disposed of by another member of the Group in circumstances constituting a Permitted Disposal; and

 

  (v) any acquisition or investment (not being an acquisition that is classed as a “Category 1” transaction under the Listing Requirements of the JSE Limited):

 

  (A) made on arms length terms;

 

  (B) where the amount of consideration for such acquisition or investment is funded directly, or out of the proceeds of, an issue of shares in the Parent; and

 

  (C) in respect of which the Parent has confirmed to the Agent that the LTM EBITDA of the entity or asset to be acquired or invested in is positive, and that the asset or entity will be immediately cash accretive to the Group as certified by the Parent in a certificate signed by the chief financial officer of the Parent.

 

  (c) For the purposes of this Clause 21.13:

LTM EBTIDA ” of an entity or asset means, at any time, the last 12 Months’ earnings before interest, tax, depreciation and amortisation of that entity or attributable to that asset (determined by reference to the most recently available financial statements relevant to that entity or asset); and

Market Capitalisation ” means the product obtained as a result of multiplying (A) by (B), where (A) is the average closing price for the issued shares of the Parent on the Johannesburg Stock Exchange during the 30 day period prior to the date the relevant Obligor or Material Group Company is committed to make the relevant acquisition or investment and (B) is the total number of shares (including, without double counting those represented by American depository receipts) issued by the Parent.

 

21.14  Financial Indebtedness

No member of the Group (other than a Guarantor or a Project Finance Subsidiary) shall incur, create or permit to subsist or have outstanding any Financial Indebtedness or enter into any agreement or arrangement whereby it is entitled to incur, create or permit to subsist any Financial Indebtedness other than Permitted Financial Indebtedness.

 

- 67 -


21.15  Ownership of Material Group Companies

Subject to applicable law, the Parent shall ensure that:

 

  (a) each existing Material Group Company on the date of this Agreement (other than the Cerro Corona Subsidiary, Newshelf, the Ghanaian Companies, Gold Fields Operations Limited and GFI Joint Venture Holdings Proprietary Limited) is and continues to be a wholly-owned Subsidiary of the Parent and each member of the Group which becomes a Material Group Company after the date of this Agreement is a wholly or partially owned Subsidiary of the Parent and that members of the Group will hold and continue to hold at least the same percentage of the issued share capital of such Material Group Company as was held by members of the Group at the time such Subsidiary became a Material Group Company;

 

  (b) the Parent holds and continues to hold at least seventy four per cent. (74%) of the issued share capital of Newshelf;

 

  (c) Newshelf holds and continues to hold at least seventy four per cent. (74%) of the issued share capital of each of Gold Fields Operations Limited and GFI Joint Venture Holdings Proprietary Limited;

 

  (d) the Parent indirectly holds and continues to indirectly hold at least ninety per cent. (90%) of the issued share capital of each Ghanaian Company; and

 

  (e) the Parent indirectly holds and continues to indirectly hold at least ninety nine per cent. (99%) of the common shares in the share capital of the Cerro Corona Subsidiary (which equates to ninety-eight point five per cent. (98.5%) of the issued and outstanding shares in the share capital of the Cerro Corona Subsidiary).

 

21.16  Loans or credit

 

  (a) Except as permitted under paragraph (b) below, no Obligor shall (and the Parent shall ensure that no other Material Group Company will) be a creditor in respect of any Financial Indebtedness, or incur, grant or allow to remain outstanding any guarantees (except as required under the Finance Documents) in respect of any Financial Indebtedness.

 

  (b) Paragraph (a) above does not apply to:

 

  (i) a Permitted Loan;

 

  (ii) a Permitted Guarantee; or

 

  (iii) for the avoidance of doubt, any performance or similar bond guaranteeing performance by a member of the Group under any contract entered into in the ordinary course of trade, including any environmental bond which a member of the Group is required to issue under any applicable law.

 

- 68 -


21.17  Most Favoured Lender Agreement

 

  (a) Subject to paragraph (b) below, the Parent shall not (and shall ensure that no Obligor or Material Group Company will):

 

  (i) enter into any credit facility, bond or note facility (each an “ MFL Agreement ”) that contains or benefits from a Relevant Provision which is either not included in this Agreement (and would be beneficial to the Lenders) or would be more beneficial to the lenders, noteholders or bondholders under such MFL Agreement than any analogous provision of this Agreement is to the Lenders, or

 

  (ii) amend any MFL Agreement so that the lenders, noteholders or bondholders under such MFL Agreement benefit from a Relevant Provision which is either not included in this Agreement (and would be beneficial to the Lenders) or would be more beneficial to the lenders, noteholders or bondholders under such MFL Agreement than any analogous provision of this Agreement is to the Lenders,

unless in each case, the Parent promptly and in any event within 10 Business Days after such circumstance arises gives notice accordingly to the Agent (the “ MFL Notice ”) and provides a copy of the Relevant Provision to the Agent.

 

  (b) Paragraph (a) above shall not apply to:

 

  (i) any credit facility, bond or note facility entered into by the Parent, an Obligor or a Material Group Company which is existing as at the date of this Agreement (an “ Existing MFL Agreement ”) save in respect of amendments made to such Existing MFL Agreements;

 

  (ii) any credit facility, bond, or note facility entered into for the purpose of refinancing a facility made available under an Existing MFL Agreement (a “ Refinancing MFL Agreement ”) on substantially the same terms as the Existing MFL Agreement it is refinancing; or

 

  (iii) any credit facility, bond or note facility, in relation to which the Financial Indebtedness to be incurred, or incurred thereunder constitutes Project Finance Borrowings (a “ Project Finance Borrowing MFL Agreement ”).

 

  (c)

Unless the Agent (acting on the instructions of the Majority Lenders) notifies the Parent within 15 Business Days after receipt of the MFL Notice that it does not wish to accept the Relevant Provision, such Relevant Provision shall be deemed automatically incorporated by reference into this Agreement, mutatis mutandis, as if fully set out in this Agreement, without any further action required on the part of any Party, effective as of the date when such Relevant Provision became effective under the MFL Agreement. Thereafter each Obligor will promptly enter into such documentation and take such other

 

- 69 -


  action as the Agent (acting on the instructions of the Majority Lenders) may reasonably request in order to give effect to (and give evidence of authorisation of) any amendments or additions to this Agreement required to give effect to the Relevant Provision under this Agreement.

 

21.18  Most Favoured Lender Agreement: Guarantees and Security

 

  (a) Subject to paragraph (b) below the Parent shall ensure that no Relevant Group Company:

 

  (i) is or becomes a borrower under any credit facility, bond or note facility pursuant to which an Obligor or a Material Group Company is party (each a “ Relevant MFL Agreement ”); or

 

  (ii) grants or has granted a guarantee, indemnity or any other credit support or any Encumbrance in respect of the obligations of any member of the Group under a Relevant MFL Agreement,

unless on or before the date of such accession or the date on which such guarantee, indemnity or other credit support or Encumbrance is granted, that Relevant Group Company is or has become an Additional Borrower and/or Additional Guarantor (as appropriate) under this Agreement and (if that Relevant Group Company has granted an Encumbrance in respect of the obligations of any member of the Group under the Relevant MFL Agreement) that Relevant Group Company shall grant or has granted an equivalent Encumbrance in favour of the Finance Parties in form and substance satisfactory to the Agent (acting on the instructions of the Majority Lenders acting reasonably as appropriate) and corporate authorisations and opinions in relation to such Encumbrance in form and substance satisfactory to the Agent (acting reasonably) have been delivered to the Agent.

 

  (b) Paragraph (a) above shall not apply to (i) any Existing MFL Agreements save in respect of Relevant Group Companies that become new borrowers or grant new guarantees, indemnities, or other forms of credit support or Encumbrances in respect of such Existing MFL Agreements after the date of this Agreement, (ii) any Refinancing MFL Agreement which has equivalent borrowers and benefits from equivalent guarantees and Encumbrances as the MFL Agreement it is refinancing or (iii) any Project Finance Borrowing MFL Agreement.

 

  (c) For the purposes of this Clause 21.18, a “ Relevant Group Company ” is a member of the Group which is neither an Obligor nor a Material Group Company.

 

22. EVENTS OF DEFAULT

Each of the events or circumstances set out in Clause 22 is an Event of Default (whether or not caused by any reason whatsoever outside the control of a Borrower or the Parent or any other person) save for Clause 22.16 ( Acceleration ) and Clause 22.17 ( Remedy ).

 

- 70 -


22.1 Non-payment

An Obligor does not pay on the due date any amount payable pursuant to a Finance Document at the place and in the currency in which it is expressed to be payable unless payment is made within three (3) Business Days of its due date.

 

22.2 Financial covenants

Any requirement of Clause 20 ( Financial Covenants ) is not satisfied.

 

22.3 Other obligations

 

  (a) Subject to Clause 22.17 ( Remedy ), an Obligor does not comply with any provision of the Finance Documents (other than those referred to in Clause 22.1 ( Non-Payment ) and Clause 20 ( Financial Covenants )).

 

  (b) No Event of Default will occur under paragraph (a) in respect of Clause 21.9 ( Taxation ) unless the unpaid Taxes (which do not fall within paragraphs (a), (b) or (c) of that clause) exceed $20,000,000 (or its equivalent).

 

22.4 Misrepresentation

 

  (a) Subject to Clause 22.17 ( Remedy ), any representation or statement made or deemed to be made by any Obligor in the Finance Documents or any other document delivered by or on behalf of any Obligor under or in connection with any Finance Document is or proves to have been incorrect or misleading in any material and adverse respect when made or deemed to be made.

 

  (b) No Event of Default will occur under paragraph (a) above in respect of the representation contained in Clause 18.20(a) unless the unpaid Taxes (which do not fall within paragraphs 18.20(a)(i), 18.20(a)(ii) and 18.20(a)(iii)) exceed $20,000,000 (or its equivalent).

 

22.5 Cross-default

 

  (a) Any Financial Indebtedness of a Material Group Company is not paid when due, nor where there is an applicable grace period, within the originally applicable grace period.

 

  (b) Any Financial Indebtedness of a Material Group Company is declared to be or otherwise becomes due and payable prior to its specified maturity as a result of an event of default (however described).

 

  (c) Any commitment for any Financial Indebtedness of a Material Group Company is cancelled or suspended by a creditor of a Material Group Company as a result of an event of default (however described).

 

  (d) Any creditor of a Material Group Company becomes entitled to declare any Financial Indebtedness of a Material Group Company due and payable prior to its specified maturity as a result of an event of default (however described).

 

- 71 -


  (e) No Event of Default will occur under this Clause 22.5 if the aggregate amount of Financial Indebtedness or commitment for Financial Indebtedness, falling within paragraphs (a) to to (d) of this Clause 22.5 is less than $20,000,000 (or its equivalent).

 

22.6 Insolvency

 

  (a) Any Material Group Company is unable or admits inability to pay its debts as they fall due, suspends making payments on any of its debts or, by reason of actual or anticipated financial difficulties, commences negotiations with one or more of its classes of creditors with a view to rescheduling any of its Financial Indebtedness which in the case of a Material Group Company (other than an Obligor) could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

  (b) The value of the assets of any Material Group Company, fairly valued, is less than its liabilities (taking into account contingent and prospective liabilities) which in the case of a Material Group Company (other than an Obligor) could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

  (c) A moratorium is declared in respect of any Financial Indebtedness of any Material Group Company.

 

22.7 Insolvency proceedings

Any corporate action, legal proceedings or other similar procedure or step is taken in relation to:

 

  (a) the suspension of payments, a moratorium of any Financial Indebtedness, winding-up, dissolution, administration or reorganisation (by way of voluntary arrangement, scheme of arrangement or otherwise) of any Material Group Company;

 

  (b) a composition, compromise, assignment or arrangement with any creditor or class of creditors of any Material Group Company;

 

  (c) the appointment of a liquidator, receiver, administrator, administrative receiver, judicial manager, compulsory manager or other similar officer in respect of any Material Group Company or any of its assets; or

 

  (d) enforcement of any Encumbrance over any assets of any Material Group Company,

or any analogous procedure or step is taken in any jurisdiction and any such procedure or proceedings are not contested in good faith nor discharged within thirty (30) days (or such shorter period provided for contesting such procedure or proceedings under the laws of the relevant jurisdiction).

 

22.8 Failure to comply with final judgment

Any Material Group Company fails within five (5) Business Days of the due date to comply with or pay any sum due from it under any material final judgment or any

 

- 72 -


final order made or given by any court of competent jurisdiction. For the purposes of this Clause 22.8, a “material final judgment” shall be any judgment for the payment of a sum of money in excess of twenty million dollars ($20,000,000) (or its equivalent).

 

22.9 Creditors’ process

Any expropriation (other than an expropriation where fair compensation is received) or the operation of the attachment, sequestration, distress or execution affects any material asset of a Material Group Company and is not discharged within twenty-one (21) days. For the purposes of this Clause 22.9 a “material asset” is any single income producing asset of the relevant Material Group Company which contributes not less than five per cent. (5%) towards the Consolidated EBITDA or gross assets of the Group (calculated according to the most recent set of audited consolidated financial statements delivered pursuant to Clause 19.1 ( Financial Statements )) provided that any loss of mineral rights arising as a result of the operation of the Mineral and Petroleum Resources Development Act, No. 28 of 2002 (the “ MPRDA ”) (including the broad-based socio-economic empowerment charter (the “ Mining Charter ”), the revised Mining Charter, the Code of Good Practice for the Minerals Industry and the Housing and Living Condition Standard for the Mining Industry published in accordance with the MPRDA) substantially in its current form as at the date of this Agreement and/or the operation of the Mineral and Petroleum Resources Royalty Act, No. 28 of 2008, substantially in its current form as at the date of this Agreement shall not constitute an expropriation for the purposes of this Clause 22.9.

 

22.10  Unlawfulness

It is or becomes unlawful for an Obligor to perform any of its obligations under the Finance Documents or such obligations cease to be legal, valid, binding or enforceable obligations

 

22.11  Repudiation and Unenforceability

An Obligor repudiates a Finance Document or any Finance Document is declared to be or is otherwise unenforceable against an Obligor by a court of the jurisdiction of incorporation of the relevant Obligor.

 

22.12  Governmental Intervention

By or under the authority of any government:

 

  (a) the management of any Material Group Company is wholly or partially displaced or the authority of any Material Group Company in the conduct of its business is wholly or partially taken over; or

 

  (b)

all or a majority of the issued shares of any Material Group Company or material part of its revenues or assets is seized, nationalised, expropriated or compulsorily acquired. For the purposes of this Clause 22.12 “material part of its revenues or assets” shall in relation to the relevant Material Group Company be construed as revenues comprising not less than five per cent. (5%) of the Consolidated EBITDA or gross assets of the Group calculated mutatis mutandis in accordance with the provisions of Clause 22.9 ( Creditors’ process )

 

- 73 -


  or assets which contribute not less than five per cent. (5%) towards the Consolidated EBITDA or gross assets of the Group calculated mutatis mutandis accordance with the provisions of Clause 22.9 ( Creditors’ process ), provided that neither the implementation of the MPRDA (including the Mining Charter, the revised Mining Charter, the Code of Good Practice for the Minerals Industry and the Housing and Living Condition Standard for the Mining Industry published in accordance with the MPRDA) substantially in its current form as at the date of this Agreement nor the implementation of the Mineral and Petroleum Resources Royalty Act, No. 28 of 2008, in each case substantially in its current form as at the date of this Agreement, shall constitute a seizure, nationalisation, expropriation or compulsory acquisition as contemplated by this Clause 22.12.

 

22.13  Material Adverse Effect

Any change occurs in the business, condition (financial or otherwise), operations, performance or properties of the Obligors or the Group taken as a whole since the date of the Original Financial Statements which could be reasonably likely to have a Material Adverse Effect excluding, for the avoidance of doubt, the Demerger or the announcement of the Demerger.

 

22.14  Cessation of Business

Any Material Group Company ceases to carry on the business which it undertakes at the date of this Agreement, excluding for the avoidance of doubt the Demerger or the announcement of the Demerger.

 

22.15  Litigation

Any litigation, arbitration, administrative proceedings or governmental or regulatory investigations or proceedings against any Material Group Company or its respective assets or revenues is reasonably expected to be adversely determined, and if so determined, could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

22.16  Acceleration

On and at any time after the occurrence of an Event of Default which is continuing the Agent may, and shall if so directed by the Majority Lenders, by notice to the Borrowers and the Parent:

 

  (a) cancel the Total Commitments whereupon they shall immediately be cancelled;

 

  (b) declare that all or part of the Loans, together with accrued interest, and all other amounts accrued or outstanding under the Finance Documents be immediately due and payable, whereupon they shall become immediately due and payable; and/or

 

  (c) declare that all or part of the Loans be payable on demand, whereupon they shall immediately become payable on demand by the Agent on the instructions of the Majority Lenders.

 

- 74 -


22.17  Remedy

 

  (a) No Event of Default under this Clause 22 ( Events of Default ) (other than those referred to in Clause 22.1 ( Non-payment ) and 22.2 ( Financial covenants )) will occur if the failure to comply or circumstance giving rise to the same is capable of remedy and is remedied by an Obligor within ten (10) days of the earlier of the Agent giving notice to the Obligors or any Obligor becoming aware of the failure to comply.

 

  (b) For the purposes of paragraph (a) above, the events or circumstances referred to in Clause 22.5 ( Cross-default ), Clause 22.6 ( Insolvency ), Clause 22.7 ( Insolvency Proceedings ), Clause 22.8 ( Failure to comply with final judgment ), Clause 22.9 ( Creditors’ process ), Clause 22.10 ( Unlawfulness ), Clause 22.11 ( Repudiation and Unenforceability ), Clause 22.12 ( Governmental Intervention ), Clause 22.13 ( Material Adverse Effect ) and Clause 22.14 ( Cessation of Business ) shall be deemed to be incapable of remedy save to the extent set out therein unless the Agent determines otherwise.

 

- 75 -


SECTION 9

CHANGES TO PARTIES

 

23. CHANGES TO THE LENDERS

 

23.1 Assignments and transfers by the Lenders

Subject to this Clause 23, a Lender (the “ Existing Lender ”) may:

 

  (a) assign any of its rights; or

 

  (b) transfer by novation any of its rights and obligations,

to another bank or financial institution or to a trust, fund or other entity which is regularly engaged in or established for the purpose of making, purchasing or investing in loans, securities or other financial assets (the “ New Lender ”).

 

23.2 Conditions of assignment or transfer

 

  (a) From the date of this Agreement until the date which is 6 Months from the date of this Agreement, an Existing Lender must consult with the Parent for not less than 5 days before it may make an assignment or transfer in accordance with Clause 23.1 ( Assignments and Transfers by Lenders ) unless the assignment or transfer:

 

  (i) is to another Lender or an Affiliate of a Lender; or

 

  (ii) takes effect at a time when an Event of Default has occurred and is continuing.

 

  (b) After the date which is 6 Months from the date of this Agreement, the consent of the Parent is required for an assignment or transfer by an Existing Lender, unless the assignment of transfer:

 

  (i) is to another Lender or an Affiliate of a Lender; or

 

  (ii) takes effect at a time when an Event of Default has occurred and is continuing.

 

  (c) The consent of the Parent to an assignment or transfer (if required) must not be unreasonably withheld or delayed. The Parent will be deemed to have given its consent five (5) Business Days after the Existing Lender has requested it unless consent is expressly refused by the Parent within that time.

 

  (d) The consent of the Parent to an assignment or transfer must not be withheld solely because the assignment or transfer may result in an increase to the Mandatory Cost.

 

  (e) An assignment will only be effective on:

 

  (i)

receipt by the Agent (whether in the Assignment Agreement or otherwise) of written confirmation from the New Lender (in form and

 

- 76 -


  substance satisfactory to the Agent) that the New Lender will assume the same obligations to the other Finance Parties as it would have been under if it was an Original Lender; and

 

  (ii) performance by the Agent of all necessary “know your customer” or other similar checks under all applicable laws and regulations in relation to such assignment to a New Lender, the completion of which the Agent shall promptly notify to the Existing Lender and the New Lender.

 

  (f) A transfer will only be effective if the procedure set out in Clause 23.5 ( Procedure for transfer ) is complied with.

 

  (g) If:

 

  (i) a Lender assigns or transfers any of its rights or obligations under the Finance Documents or changes its Facility Office; and

 

  (ii) as a result of circumstances existing at the date the assignment, transfer or change occurs, an Obligor would be obliged to make a payment to the New Lender or Lender acting through its new Facility Office under Clause 12 ( Tax gross-up and indemnities ) or Clause 13 ( Increased costs ),

then the New Lender or Lender acting through its new Facility Office is only entitled to receive payment under those Clauses to the same extent as the Existing Lender or Lender acting through its previous Facility Office would have been if the assignment, transfer or change had not occurred.

 

  (h) Each New Lender, by executing the relevant Transfer Certificate or Assignment Agreement, confirms, for the avoidance of doubt, that the Agent has authority to execute on its behalf any amendment or waiver that has been approved by or on behalf of the requisite Lender or Lenders in accordance with this Agreement on or prior to the date on which the transfer or assignment becomes effective in accordance with this Agreement and that it is bound by that decision to the same extent as the Existing Lender would have been had it remained a Lender.

 

23.3 Assignment or transfer fee

The New Lender shall, on the date upon which an assignment or transfer takes effect, pay to the Agent (for its own account) a fee of three thousand dollars ($3,000), unless the Agent, in its sole discretion, agrees to waive the payment of such fee.

 

23.4 Limitation of responsibility of Existing Lenders

 

  (a) Unless expressly agreed to the contrary, an Existing Lender makes no representation or warranty and assumes no responsibility to a New Lender for:

 

  (i) the legality, validity, effectiveness, adequacy or enforceability of the Finance Documents or any other documents;

 

- 77 -


  (ii) the financial condition of any Obligor;

 

  (iii) the performance and observance by any Obligor of its obligations under the Finance Documents or any other documents; or

 

  (iv) the accuracy of any statements (whether written or oral) made in or in connection with any Finance Document or any other document,

and any representations or warranties implied by law are excluded.

 

  (b) Each New Lender confirms to the Existing Lender and the other Finance Parties that it:

 

  (i) has made (and shall continue to make) its own independent investigation and assessment of the financial condition and affairs of each Obligor and its related entities in connection with its participation in this Agreement and has not relied exclusively on any information provided to it by the Existing Lender in connection with any Finance Document; and

 

  (ii) will continue to make its own independent appraisal of the creditworthiness of each Obligor and its related entities whilst any amount is or may be outstanding under the Finance Documents or any Commitment is in force.

 

  (c) Nothing in any Finance Document obliges an Existing Lender to:

 

  (i) accept a re-transfer or re-assignment from a New Lender of any of the rights and obligations assigned or transferred under this Clause 23; or

 

  (ii) support any losses directly or indirectly incurred by the New Lender by reason of the non-performance by any Obligor of its obligations under the Finance Documents or otherwise.

 

23.5 Procedure for transfer

 

  (a) Subject to the conditions set out in Clause 23.2 ( Conditions of assignment or transfer ) a transfer is effected in accordance with paragraph (c) below when the Agent executes an otherwise duly completed Transfer Certificate delivered to it by the Existing Lender and the New Lender. The Agent shall, subject to paragraph (b) below, as soon as reasonably practicable after receipt by it of a duly completed Transfer Certificate appearing on its face to comply with the terms of this Agreement and delivered in accordance with the terms of this Agreement, execute that Transfer Certificate.

 

  (b) The Agent shall only be obliged to execute a Transfer Certificate delivered to it by the Existing Lender and the New Lender once it is satisfied it has complied with all necessary “know your customer” or other similar checks under all applicable laws and regulations in relation to the transfer to such New Lender.

 

- 78 -


  (c) Subject to Clause 23.9 ( Pro rata interest settlement ), on the Transfer Date:

 

  (i) to the extent that in the Transfer Certificate the Existing Lender seeks to transfer by novation its rights and obligations under the Finance Documents each of the Obligors and the Existing Lender shall be released from further obligations towards one another under the Finance Documents and their respective rights against one another under the Finance Documents shall be cancelled (being the “ Discharged Rights and Obligations ”);

 

  (ii) each of the Obligors and the New Lender shall assume obligations towards one another and/or acquire rights against one another which differ from the Discharged Rights and Obligations only insofar as that Obligor and the New Lender have assumed and/or acquired the same in place of that Obligor and the Existing Lender;

 

  (iii) the Agent, the Arrangers, the New Lender and other Lenders shall acquire the same rights and assume the same obligations between themselves as they would have acquired and assumed had the New Lender been an Original Lender with the rights and/or obligations acquired or assumed by it as a result of the transfer and to that extent the Agent, the Arrangers and the Existing Lender shall each be released from further obligations to each other under the Finance Documents; and

 

  (iv) the New Lender shall become a Party as a “Lender”.

 

23.6 Procedure for assignment

 

  (a) Subject to the conditions set out in Clause 23.2 ( Conditions of assignment or transfer ) an assignment may be effected in accordance with paragraph (c) below when the Agent executes an otherwise duly completed Assignment Agreement delivered to it by the Existing Lender and the New Lender. The Agent shall, subject to paragraph (b) below, as soon as reasonably practicable after receipt by it of a duly completed Assignment Agreement appearing on its face to comply with the terms of this Agreement and delivered in accordance with the terms of this Agreement, execute that Assignment Agreement.

 

  (b) The Agent shall only be obliged to execute an Assignment Agreement delivered to it by the Existing Lender and the New Lender once it is satisfied it has complied with all necessary “know your customer” or other similar checks under all applicable laws and regulations in relation to the assignment to such New Lender.

 

  (c) Subject to Clause 23.9 ( Pro rata interest settlement ), on the Transfer Date:

 

  (i) the Existing Lender will assign absolutely to the New Lender the rights under the Finance Documents expressed to be the subject of the assignment in the Assignment Agreement;

 

- 79 -


  (ii) the Existing Lender will be released by each Obligor and the other Finance Parties from the obligations owed by it (the “ Relevant Obligations ”) and expressed to be the subject of the release in the Assignment Agreement; and

 

  (iii) the New Lender shall become a Party as a “Lender” and will be bound by obligations equivalent to the Relevant Obligations.

 

  (d) Lenders may utilise procedures other than those set out in this Clause 23.6 to assign their rights under the Finance Documents (but not, without the consent of the relevant Obligor or unless in accordance with Clause 23.5 ( Procedure for transfer ), to obtain a release by that Obligor from the obligations owed to that Obligor by the Lenders nor the assumption of equivalent obligations by a New Lender) provided that they comply with the conditions set out in Clause 23.2 ( Conditions of assignment or transfer ).

 

23.7 Copy of Transfer Certificate or Assignment Agreement to Parent

The Agent shall, as soon as reasonably practicable after it has executed a Transfer Certificate or Assignment Agreement, send to the Parent a copy of that Transfer Certificate or Assignment Agreement.

 

23.8 Security over Lenders’ rights

 

  (a) In addition to the other rights provided to Lenders under this Clause 23, each Lender may without consulting with or obtaining consent from any Obligor, at any time charge, assign or otherwise create an Encumbrance in or over (whether by way of collateral or otherwise) all or any of its rights under any Finance Document to secure obligations of that Lender including, without limitation:

 

  (i) any charge, assignment or other Encumbrance to secure obligations to a federal reserve or central bank; and

 

  (ii) in the case of any Lender which is a fund, any charge, assignment or other Encumbrance granted to any holders (or trustee or representatives of holders) of obligations owed, or securities issued, by that Lender as security for those obligations or securities,

except that no such charge, assignment or Encumbrance shall:

 

  (A) release a Lender from any of its obligations under the Finance Documents or substitute the beneficiary of the relevant charge, assignment or Encumbrance for the Lender as a party to any of the Finance Documents; or

 

  (B) require any payments to be made by an Obligor other than or in excess of, or grant to any person any more extensive rights than, those required to be made or granted to the relevant Lender under the Finance Documents.

 

- 80 -


23.9 Pro rata interest settlement

If the Agent has notified the Lenders that it is able to distribute interest payments on a “ pro rata basis” to Existing Lenders and New Lenders then (in respect of any transfer pursuant to Clause 23.5 ( Procedure for transfer ) or any assignment pursuant to Clause 23.6 ( Procedure for assignment ) the Transfer Date of which, in each case, is after the date of such notification and is not on the last day of an Interest Period):

 

  (a) any interest or fees in respect of the relevant participation which are expressed to accrue by reference to the lapse of time shall continue to accrue in favour of the Existing Lender up to but excluding the Transfer Date (“ Accrued Amounts ”) and shall become due and payable to the Existing Lender (without further interest accruing on them) on the last day of the current Interest Period (or, if the Interest Period is longer than six Months, on the next of the dates which falls at six Monthly intervals after the first day of that Interest Period); and

 

  (b) the rights assigned or transferred by the Existing Lender will not include the right to the Accrued Amounts so that, for the avoidance of doubt:

 

  (i) when the Accrued Amounts become payable, those Accrued Amounts will be payable for the account of the Existing Lender; and

 

  (ii) the amount payable to the New Lender on that date will be the amount which would, but for the application of this Clause 23.9, have been payable to it on that date, but after deduction of the Accrued Amounts.

 

24. CHANGES TO THE OBLIGORS

 

24.1 Assignment and transfer by Obligors

No Obligor may assign any of its rights or transfer any of its rights or obligations under the Finance Documents.

 

24.2 Additional Borrowers

 

  (a) Subject to compliance with the provisions of paragraphs (c) and (d) of Clause 19.8 ( “Know your customer” checks ), the Parent may request that any of its Subsidiaries become an Additional Borrower. That Subsidiary shall become an Additional Borrower if:

 

  (i) all the Lenders, acting reasonably, approve the addition of that Subsidiary;

 

  (ii) the Parent delivers to the Agent a duly completed and executed Accession Letter;

 

  (iii) the Parent confirms that no Default is continuing or would occur as a result of that Subsidiary becoming an Additional Borrower; and

 

  (iv) the Agent has received all of the documents and other evidence listed in Part II of Schedule 2 ( Conditions precedent ) in relation to that Additional Borrower, each in form and substance satisfactory to the Agent.

 

- 81 -


  (b) The Agent shall notify the Parent and the Lenders promptly upon being satisfied that it has received (in form and substance satisfactory to it) all the documents and other evidence listed in Part II of Schedule 2 ( Conditions precedent ).

 

24.3 Resignation of an Additional Borrower

 

  (a) The Parent may request that a Borrower (other than the Original Borrowers) ceases to be a Borrower by delivering to the Agent a Resignation Letter.

 

  (b) The Agent shall accept a Resignation Letter and notify the Parent and the Lenders of its acceptance if:

 

  (i) no Default is continuing or would result from the acceptance of the Resignation Letter (and the Parent has confirmed to the Agent that this is the case); and

 

  (ii) the Borrower is under no actual or contingent obligations as a Borrower under any Finance Documents,

whereupon that company shall cease to be a Borrower and shall have no further rights or obligations under the Finance Documents.

 

24.4 Additional Guarantors

 

  (a) Subject to compliance with the provisions of paragraphs (c) and (d) of Clause 19.8 ( “Know your customer” checks ), the Parent may request that any of its Subsidiaries become an Additional Guarantor. That Subsidiary shall become an Additional Guarantor if;

 

  (i) the Parent delivers to the Agent a duly completed and executed Accession Letter; and

 

  (ii) the Agent has received all of the documents and other evidence listed in Part III of Schedule 2 ( Conditions precedent ) in relation to that Additional Guarantor, each in form and substance satisfactory to the Agent.

 

  (b) The Agent shall notify the Parent and the Lenders promptly upon being satisfied that it has received (in form and substance satisfactory to it) all the documents and other evidence listed in Part III of Schedule 2 ( Conditions precedent ).

 

24.5 Repetition of Representations

Delivery of an Accession Letter constitutes confirmation by the relevant Subsidiary that the representations in Clause 18 ( Representations ) are true and correct in relation to it as at the date of delivery as if made by reference to the facts and circumstances then existing.

 

- 82 -


24.6 Resignation of an Additional Guarantor

 

  (a) The Parent may request that a Guarantor (other than an Original Guarantor) ceases to be a Guarantor by delivering to the Agent a Resignation Letter.

 

  (b) The Agent shall accept a Resignation Letter and notify the Parent and the Lenders of its acceptance if no Default is continuing and the Parent has confirmed to the Agent that this is the case.

 

- 83 -


SECTION 10

THE FINANCE PARTIES

 

25. ROLE OF THE AGENT AND THE ARRANGERS

 

25.1 Appointment of the Agent

 

  (a) Each other Finance Party appoints the Agent to act as its agent under and in connection with the Finance Documents.

 

  (b) Each other Finance Party authorises the Agent to exercise the rights, powers, authorities and discretions specifically given to the Agent under or in connection with the Finance Documents together with any other incidental rights, powers, authorities and discretions.

 

25.2 Duties of the Agent

 

  (a) Subject to paragraph (b) below, the Agent shall promptly forward to a Party the original or a copy of any document which is delivered to the Agent for that Party by any other Party.

 

  (b) Without prejudice to Clause 23.7 ( Copy of Transfer Certificate or Assignment Agreement to Parent ), paragraph (a) above shall not apply to any Transfer Certificate or to any Assignment Agreement.

 

  (c) Except where a Finance Document specifically provides otherwise, the Agent is not obliged to review or check the adequacy, accuracy or completeness of any document it forwards to another Party.

 

  (d) If the Agent receives notice from a Party referring to this Agreement, describing a Default and stating that the circumstance described is a Default, it shall promptly notify the other Finance Parties.

 

  (e) If the Agent is aware of the non-payment of any principal, interest, commitment fee or other fee payable to a Finance Party (other than the Agent or the Arrangers) under this Agreement it shall promptly notify the other Finance Parties.

 

  (f) The Agent’s duties under the Finance Documents are solely mechanical and administrative in nature.

 

  (g) The Agent shall provide to the Parent within five (5) Business Days of a request by the Parent (but no more frequently than once per calendar month), a list (which may be in electronic form) setting out the names of the Lenders as at the date of that request, their respective Commitments, the address and fax number (and the department or officer, if any, for whose attention any communication is to be made) of each Lender for any communication to be made or document to be delivered under or in connection with the Finance Documents, the electronic mail address and/or any other information required to enable the sending and receipt of information by electronic mail or other electronic means to and by each Lender to whom any communication under or in connection with the Finance Documents may be made by that means and the account details of each Lender for any payment to be distributed by the Agent to that Lender under the Finance Documents.

 

- 84 -


25.3 Role of the Arrangers

Except as specifically provided in the Finance Documents, the Arrangers have no obligations of any kind to any other Party under or in connection with any Finance Document.

 

25.4 No fiduciary duties

 

  (a) Nothing in this Agreement constitutes the Agent or the Arrangers as a trustee or fiduciary of any other person.

 

  (b) Neither the Agent nor the Arrangers shall be bound to account to any Lender for any sum or the profit element of any sum received by it for its own account.

 

25.5 Business with the Group

The Agent and the Arrangers may accept deposits from, lend money to and generally engage in any kind of banking or other business with any member of the Group.

 

25.6 Rights and discretions of the Agent

 

  (a) The Agent may rely on:

 

  (i) any representation, notice or document believed by it to be genuine, correct and appropriately authorised; and

 

  (ii) any statement made by a director, authorised signatory or employee of any person regarding any matters which may reasonably be assumed to be within his knowledge or within his power to verify.

 

  (b) The Agent may assume (unless it has received notice to the contrary in its capacity as agent for the Lenders) that:

 

  (i) no Default has occurred (unless it has actual knowledge of a Default arising under Clause 22.1 ( Non-payment ));

 

  (ii) any right, power, authority or discretion vested in any Party or the Majority Lenders has not been exercised; and

 

  (iii) any notice or request made by the Parent (other than a Utilisation Request) is made on behalf of and with the consent and knowledge of all the Obligors.

 

  (c) The Agent may engage, pay for and rely on the advice or services of any lawyers, accountants, surveyors or other experts.

 

  (d) The Agent may act in relation to the Finance Documents through its personnel and agents.

 

- 85 -


  (e) The Agent may disclose to any other Party any information it reasonably believes it has received as agent under this Agreement.

 

  (f) Notwithstanding any other provision of any Finance Document to the contrary, neither the Agent nor the Arrangers are obliged to do or omit to do anything if it would or might in its reasonable opinion constitute a breach of any law or regulation or a breach of a fiduciary duty or duty of confidentiality.

 

  (g) Without prejudice to the generality of paragraph (f) above, the Agent may disclose the identity of a Defaulting Lender to the other Finance Parties and the Parent and shall disclose the same upon the written request of the Parent or the Majority Lenders.

 

  (h) The Agent may not disclose to any Finance Party any details of the rate notified to the Agent by any Lender or the identity of any such Lender for the purpose of paragraph (a)(ii) of Clause 10.2 ( Market Disruption ).

 

25.7   Majority Lenders’ instructions

 

  (a) Unless a contrary indication appears in a Finance Document, the Agent shall (i) exercise any right, power, authority or discretion vested in it as Agent in accordance with any instructions given to it by the Majority Lenders (or, if so instructed by the Majority Lenders, refrain from exercising any right, power, authority or discretion vested in it as Agent) and (ii) not be liable for any act (or omission) if it acts (or refrains from taking any action) in accordance with an instruction of the Majority Lenders.

 

  (b) Unless a contrary indication appears in a Finance Document, any instructions given by the Majority Lenders will be binding on all the Finance Parties.

 

  (c) The Agent may refrain from acting in accordance with the instructions of the Majority Lenders (or, if appropriate, the Lenders) until it has received such security as it may require for any cost, loss or liability (together with any associated VAT) which it may incur in complying with the instructions.

 

  (d) In the absence of instructions from the Majority Lenders, (or, if appropriate, the Lenders) the Agent may act (or refrain from taking action) as it considers to be in the best interest of the Lenders.

 

  (e) The Agent is not authorised to act on behalf of a Lender (without first obtaining that Lender’s consent) in any legal or arbitration proceedings relating to any Finance Document.

 

25.8  Responsibility for documentation

Neither the Agent nor the Arrangers:

 

  (a) is responsible for the adequacy, accuracy and/or completeness of any information (whether oral or written) supplied by the Agent, the Arrangers, an Obligor or any other person given in or in connection with any Finance Document; or

 

- 86 -


  (b) is responsible for the legality, validity, effectiveness, adequacy or enforceability of any Finance Document or any other agreement, arrangement or document entered into, made or executed in anticipation of or in connection with any Finance Document.

 

25.9   Exclusion of liability

 

  (a) Without limiting paragraph (b) below (and without prejudice to the provisions of paragraph (e) of Clause 28.10 ( Disruption to payment systems etc ), the Agent will not be liable (including without limitation, for negligence or any other category of liability whatsoever) for any action taken by it under or in connection with any Finance Document, unless directly caused by its gross negligence or wilful misconduct.

 

  (b) No Party (other than the Agent) may take any proceedings against any officer, employee or agent of the Agent in respect of any claim it might have against the Agent or in respect of any act or omission of any kind by that officer, employee or agent in relation to any Finance Document and any officer, employee or agent of the Agent may rely on this Clause 25.9 subject to Clause 1.4 ( Third Party Rights ) and the provisions of the Third Parties Act.

 

  (c) The Agent will not be liable for any delay (or any related consequences) in crediting an account with an amount required under the Finance Documents to be paid by the Agent if the Agent has taken all necessary steps as soon as reasonably practicable to comply with the regulations or operating procedures of any recognised clearing or settlement system used by the Agent for that purpose.

 

  (d) Nothing in this Agreement shall oblige the Agent or the Arrangers to carry out any “know your customer” or other checks in relation to any person on behalf of any Lender and each Lender confirms to the Agent and the Arrangers that it is solely responsible for any such checks it is required to carry out and that it may not rely on any statement in relation to such checks made by the Agent or the Arrangers.

 

25.10  Lenders’ indemnity to the Agent

Each Lender shall (in proportion to its share of the Total Commitments or, if the Total Commitments are then zero, to its share of the Total Commitments immediately prior to their reduction to zero) indemnify the Agent, within three (3) Business Days of demand, against:

 

  (a) save as set out in (b) below, any cost, loss or liability (including, without limitation, for negligence or any other category of liability whatsoever) incurred by the Agent (otherwise than by reason of the Agent’s gross negligence or wilful misconduct)) or,

 

  (b) in the case of any cost, loss or liability pursuant to Clause 28.10 ( Disruption to Payment systems etc. ) notwithstanding the Agent’s negligence, gross negligence or any other category of liability whatsoever but not including any claim based on the fraud of the Agent, in either case, in acting as Agent under the Finance Documents

 

- 87 -


(unless, in either case, the Agent has been reimbursed by an Obligor pursuant to a Finance Document or, as the case may be, by the relevant person pursuant to Clause 28.4 ( Clawback )).

 

25.11  Resignation of the Agent

 

  (a) The Agent may resign and appoint one of its Affiliates acting through an office as successor by giving notice to the other Finance Parties and the Parent.

 

  (b) Alternatively the Agent may resign by giving notice to the other Finance Parties and the Parent, in which case the Majority Lenders (after consultation with the Parent) may appoint a successor Agent.

 

  (c) If the Majority Lenders have not appointed a successor Agent in accordance with paragraph (b) above within thirty (30) days after notice of resignation was given, the Agent (after consultation with the Parent) may appoint a successor Agent.

 

  (d) If the Agent wishes to resign because (acting reasonably) it has concluded that it is no longer appropriate for it to remain as agent and the Agent is entitled to appoint a successor Agent under paragraph (c) above, the Agent may (if it concludes (acting reasonably) that it is necessary to do so in order to persuade the proposed successor Agent to become a party to this Agreement as Agent) agree with the proposed successor Agent amendments to this Clause 25 consistent with then current market practice for the appointment and protection of corporate trustees (which shall be determined by reference to the then standard documents published by the Loan Market Association and, to the extent practicable, following consultation by the Agent with the Lenders) and those amendments will bind the Parties.

 

  (e) The retiring Agent shall, at its own cost, make available to the successor Agent such documents and records and provide such assistance as the successor Agent may reasonably request for the purposes of performing its functions as Agent under the Finance Documents.

 

  (f) The Agent’s resignation notice shall only take effect upon the appointment of a successor.

 

  (g) Upon the appointment of a successor, the retiring Agent shall be discharged from any further obligation in respect of the Finance Documents but shall remain entitled to the benefit of this Clause 25. Its successor and each of the other Parties shall have the same rights and obligations amongst themselves as they would have had if such successor had been an original Party.

 

  (h) After consultation with the Parent, the Majority Lenders may, by notice to the Agent, require it to resign in accordance with paragraph (b) above. In this event, the Agent shall resign in accordance with paragraph (b) above.

 

- 88 -


25.12  Replacement of the Agent

 

  (a) At any time the Agent is an Impaired Agent, the Majority Lenders may, by giving notice to the Agent replace the Agent by appointing a successor Agent (acting through an office in the United Kingdom).

 

  (b) The retiring Agent shall (at its own cost) make available to the successor Agent such documents and records and provide such assistance as the successor Agent may reasonable request for the purposes of performing its functions as Agent under the Finance Documents.

 

  (c) The appointment of the successor Agent shall take effect on the date specified in the notice from the Majority Lenders to the retiring Agent. As from this date, the retiring Agent shall be discharged from any further obligation in respect of the Finance Documents but shall remain entitled to the benefit of this Clause 25 (and any agency fees for the account of the retiring Agent shall cease to accrue from (and shall be payable on) that date).

 

  (d) Any successor Agent and each of the other Parties shall have the same rights and obligations amongst themselves as they would have had if such successor had been an original Party.

 

25.13  Confidentiality

 

  (a) In acting as agent for the Finance Parties, the Agent shall be regarded as acting through its agency division which shall be treated as a separate entity from any other of its divisions or departments.

 

  (b) If information is received by another division or department of the Agent, it may be treated as confidential to that division or department and the Agent shall not be deemed to have notice of it.

 

25.14  Relationship with the Lenders

 

  (a) Subject to Clause 23.9 ( Pro rata interest settlement ), the Agent may treat the person shown in its records as Lender at the opening of business (in the place of the Agent’s principal office as notified to the Finance Parties from time to time) as the Lender acting through its Facility Office:

 

  (i) entitled to or liable for any payment due under any Finance Document on that day; and

 

  (ii) entitled to receive and act upon any notice, request, document or communication or make any decision or determination under any Finance Document made or delivered on that day,

unless it has received not less than five (5) Business Days’ prior notice from that Lender to the contrary in accordance with the terms of this Agreement.

 

  (b) Each Lender shall supply the Agent with any information required by the Agent in order to calculate the Mandatory Cost in accordance with Schedule 4 ( Mandatory Cost formula ).

 

- 89 -


  (c) Any Lender may by notice to the Agent appoint a person to receive on its behalf all notices, communications, information and documents to be made or despatched to that Lender under the Finance Documents. Such notice shall contain the address, fax number and (where communication by electronic mail or other electronic means is permitted under Clause 30.6 ( Electronic communication )) electronic mail address and/or any other information required to enable the sending and receipt of information by that means (and, in each case, the department or officer, if any, for whose attention communication is to be made) and be treated as a notification of a substitute address, fax number, electronic mail address, department and officer by that Lender for the purposes of Clause 30.2 ( Addresses ) and paragraph (a)(iii) of Clause 30.6 ( Electronic communication ) and the Agent shall be entitled to treat such person as the person entitled to receive all such notices, communications, information and documents as though that person were that Lender.

 

25.15  Credit appraisal by the Lenders

Without affecting the responsibility of any Obligor for information supplied by it or on its behalf in connection with any Finance Document, each Lender confirms to the Agent and the Arrangers that it has been, and will continue to be, solely responsible for making its own independent appraisal and investigation of all risks arising under or in connection with any Finance Document including but not limited to:

 

  (a) the financial condition, status and nature of each member of the Group;

 

  (b) the legality, validity, effectiveness, adequacy or enforceability of any Finance Document and any other agreement, arrangement or document entered into, made or executed in anticipation of, under or in connection with any Finance Document;

 

  (c) whether that Lender has recourse, and the nature and extent of that recourse, against any Party or any of its respective assets under or in connection with any Finance Document, the transactions contemplated by the Finance Documents or any other agreement, arrangement or document entered into, made or executed in anticipation of, under or in connection with any Finance Document; and

 

  (d) the adequacy, accuracy and/or completeness of any information provided by the Agent, any Party or by any other person under or in connection with any Finance Document, the transactions contemplated by the Finance Documents or any other agreement, arrangement or document entered into, made or executed in anticipation of, under or in connection with any Finance Document.

 

25.16  Reference Banks

If a Reference Bank (or, if a Reference Bank is not a Lender, the Lender of which it is an Affiliate) ceases to be a Lender, the Agent may (in consultation with the Parent) appoint another Lender or an Affiliate of a Lender to replace that Reference Bank.

 

- 90 -


25.17  Agent’s Management Time

Any amount payable to the Agent under Clause 14.3 ( Indemnity to the Agent ), Clause 16 ( Costs and expenses ) and Clause 25.10 ( Lenders’ indemnity to the Agent ) shall include the cost of utilising the Agent’s management time or other resources and will be calculated on the basis of such reasonable daily or hourly rates as the Agent may notify to the Parent and the Lenders, and is in addition to any fee paid or payable to the Agent under Clause 11 ( Fees ).

 

25.18  Deduction from amounts payable by the Agent

If any Party owes an amount to the Agent under the Finance Documents the Agent may, after giving notice to that Party, deduct an amount not exceeding that amount from any payment to that Party which the Agent would otherwise be obliged to make under the Finance Documents and apply the amount deducted in or towards satisfaction of the amount owed. For the purposes of the Finance Documents that Party shall be regarded as having received any amount so deducted.

 

25.19  Reliance and engagement letters

Each Finance Party confirms that each of the Arrangers and the Agent has authority to accept on its behalf (and ratifies the acceptance on its behalf of any letters or reports already accepted by the Arrangers or Agent) the terms of any reliance letter or engagement letters relating to any reports or letters provided by accountants in connection with the Finance Documents or the transactions contemplated in the Finance Documents and to bind it in respect of those reports or letters and to sign such letters on its behalf and further confirms that it accepts the terms and qualifications set out in such letters.

 

26. CONDUCT OF BUSINESS BY THE FINANCE PARTIES

No provision of this Agreement will:

 

  (a) interfere with the right of any Finance Party to arrange its affairs (tax or otherwise) in whatever manner it thinks fit;

 

  (b) oblige any Finance Party to investigate or claim any credit, relief, remission or repayment available to it or the extent, order and manner of any claim; or

 

  (c) oblige any Finance Party to disclose any information relating to its affairs (tax or otherwise) or any computations in respect of Tax.

 

- 91 -


27. SHARING AMONG THE FINANCE PARTIES

 

27.1 Payments to Finance Parties

If a Finance Party (a “ Recovering Finance Party ”) receives or recovers any amount from an Obligor other than in accordance with Clause 28 ( Payment mechanics ) (a “ Recovered Amount ”) and applies that amount to a payment due under the Finance Documents then:

 

  (a) the Recovering Finance Party shall, within three (3) Business Days, notify details of the receipt or recovery to the Agent;

 

  (b) the Agent shall determine whether the receipt or recovery is in excess of the amount the Recovering Finance Party would have been paid had the receipt or recovery been received or made by the Agent and distributed in accordance with Clause 28 ( Payment mechanics ), without taking account of any Tax which would be imposed on the Agent in relation to the receipt, recovery or distribution; and

 

  (c) the Recovering Finance Party shall, within three (3) Business Days of demand by the Agent, pay to the Agent an amount (the “ Sharing Payment ”) equal to such receipt or recovery less any amount which the Agent determines may be retained by the Recovering Finance Party as its share of any payment to be made, in accordance with Clause 28.6 ( Partial payments ).

 

27.2  Redistribution of payments

The Agent shall treat the Sharing Payment as if it had been paid by the relevant Obligor and distribute it between the Finance Parties (other than the Recovering Finance Party) (the “ Sharing Finance Parties ”) in accordance with Clause 28.6 ( Partial payments ) towards the obligations of that Obligor to the Sharing Finance Parties.

 

27.3  Recovering Finance Party’s rights

On a distribution by the Agent under Clause 27.2 ( Redistribution of payments ) of a payment received by a Recovering Finance Party from an Obligor, as between the relevant Obligor and the Recovering Finance Party, an amount of the Recovered Amount equal to the Sharing Payment will be treated as not having been paid by that Obligor.

 

27.4  Reversal of redistribution

If any part of the Sharing Payment received or recovered by a Recovering Finance Party becomes repayable and is repaid by that Recovering Finance Party, then:

 

  (a) each Sharing Finance Party shall, upon request of the Agent, pay to the Agent for the account of that Recovering Finance Party an amount equal to the appropriate part of its share of the Sharing Payment (together with an amount as is necessary to reimburse that Recovering Finance Party for its proportion of any interest on the Sharing Payment which that Recovering Finance Party is required to pay) (the “ Redistributed Amount ”); and

 

- 92 -


  (b) as between the relevant Obligor and each relevant Sharing Finance Party, an amount equal to the relevant Redistributed Amount will be treated as not having been paid by that Obligor.

 

27.5 Exceptions

 

  (a) This Clause 27 shall not apply to the extent that the Recovering Finance Party would not, after making any payment pursuant to this Clause 27, have a valid and enforceable claim against the relevant Obligor.

 

  (b) A Recovering Finance Party is not obliged to share with any other Finance Party any amount which the Recovering Finance Party has received or recovered as a result of taking legal or arbitration proceedings, if:

 

  (i) it notified that other Finance Party of the legal or arbitration proceedings; and

 

  (ii) that other Finance Party had an opportunity to participate in those legal or arbitration proceedings but did not do so as soon as reasonably practicable having received notice and did not take separate legal or arbitration proceedings.

 

- 93 -


SECTION 11

ADMINISTRATION

 

28. PAYMENT MECHANICS

 

28.1 Payments to the Agent

 

  (a) On each date on which an Obligor or a Lender is required to make a payment under a Finance Document, that Obligor or Lender shall make the same available to the Agent (unless a contrary indication appears in a Finance Document) for value on the due date at the time and in such funds specified by the Agent as being customary at the time for settlement of transactions in the relevant currency in the place of payment.

 

  (b) Payment shall be made to such account in the principal financial centre of the country of that currency with such bank as the Agent specifies.

 

28.2 Distributions by the Agent

Each payment received by the Agent under the Finance Documents for another Party shall, subject to Clause 28.3 ( Distributions to an Obligor ), Clause 28.4 ( Clawback ) and Clause 25.18 ( Deduction from amounts payable by the Agent ) be made available by the Agent as soon as practicable after receipt to the Party entitled to receive payment in accordance with this Agreement (in the case of a Lender, for the account of its Facility Office), to such account as that Party may notify to the Agent by not less than five (5) Business Days’ notice with a bank in the principal financial centre of the country of that currency.

 

28.3 Distributions to an Obligor

The Agent may (with the consent of the Obligor or in accordance with Clause 29 ( Set-off )) apply any amount received by it for that Obligor in or towards payment (on the date and in the currency and funds of receipt) of any amount due from that Obligor under the Finance Documents or in or towards purchase of any amount of any currency to be so applied.

 

28.4 Clawback

 

  (a) Where a sum is to be paid to the Agent under the Finance Documents for another Party, the Agent is not obliged to pay that sum to that other Party (or to enter into or perform any related exchange contract) until it has been able to establish to its satisfaction that it has actually received that sum.

 

  (b) If the Agent pays an amount to another Party and it proves to be the case that the Agent had not actually received that amount, then (i) the Party to whom that amount (or the proceeds of any related exchange contract) was paid by the Agent shall on demand refund the same to the Agent and (ii) the person by whom that sum should have been made available or, if that person fails to do so the person to whom that sum was made available, shall on request pay to the Agent the amount (as certified by the Agent) which will indemnify the Agent against any funding cost incurred by it as a result of paying out that sum before receiving it.

 

- 94 -


28.5 Impaired Agent

 

  (a) If, at any time, the Agent becomes an Impaired Agent, an Obligor or a Lender which is required to make a payment under the Finance Documents to the Agent in accordance with Clause 28.1 ( Payments to the Agent ) may instead either pay that amount direct to the required recipient or pay that amount to an interest-bearing account held with a bank or financial institution which has a rating for its long-term unsecured and non credit-enhanced debt obligations of A- or higher by Standard & Poor’s Rating Services or Fitch Ratings Ltd or A3 or higher by Moody’s Investor Services Limited or a comparable rating from an internationally recognised credit rating agency and in relation to which no Insolvency Event has occurred and is continuing, in the name of the Obligor or the Lender making the payment and designated as a trust account for the benefit of the Party or Parties beneficially entitled to that payment under the Finance Documents. In each case such payments must be made on the due date for payment under the Finance Documents.

 

  (b) All interest accrued on the amount standing to the credit of the trust account shall be for the benefit of the beneficiaries of that trust account pro rata to their respective entitlements.

 

  (c) A Party which has made a payment in accordance with this Clause 28.5 shall be discharged of the relevant payment obligation under the Finance Documents and shall not take any credit risk with respect to the amounts standing to the credit of the trust account.

 

  (d) Promptly upon the appointment of a successor Agent in accordance with Clause 25.12 ( Replacement of the Agent ), each Party which has made a payment to a trust account in accordance with this Clause 28.5 shall give all requisite instructions to the bank with whom the trust account is held to transfer the amount (together with any accrued interest) to the successor Agent for distribution in accordance with Clause 28.2 ( Distributions by the Agent ).

 

28.6 Partial payments

 

  (a) If the Agent receives a payment that is insufficient to discharge all the amounts then due and payable by an Obligor under the Finance Documents, the Agent shall apply that payment towards the obligations of that Obligor under the Finance Documents in the following order:

 

  (i) first , in or towards payment pro rata of any unpaid fees, costs and expenses of the Agent and the Arrangers under the Finance Documents;

 

  (ii) secondly , in or towards payment pro rata of any accrued interest, fee or commission due but unpaid under this Agreement;

 

  (iii) thirdly , in or towards payment pro rata of any principal due but unpaid under this Agreement; and

 

  (iv) fourthly , in or towards payment pro rata of any other sum due but unpaid under the Finance Documents.

 

- 95 -


  (b) The Agent shall, if so directed by the Majority Lenders, vary the order set out in paragraphs (a)(ii) to (iv) above.

 

  (c) Paragraphs (a) and (b) above will override any appropriation made by an Obligor.

 

28.7 No set-off by Obligors

All payments to be made by an Obligor under the Finance Documents shall be calculated and be made without (and free and clear of any deduction for) set-off or counterclaim.

 

28.8 Business Days

 

  (a) Any payment which is due to be made on a day that is not a Business Day shall be made on the next Business Day in the same calendar month (if there is one) or the preceding Business Day (if there is not).

 

  (b) During any extension of the due date for payment of any principal or Unpaid Sum under this Agreement interest is payable on the principal or Unpaid Sum at the rate payable on the original due date.

 

28.9 Currency of account

 

  (a) Subject to paragraphs (b) and (c) below, dollars is the currency of account and payment for any sum due from an Obligor under any Finance Document.

 

  (b) Each payment in respect of costs, expenses or Taxes shall be made in the currency in which the costs, expenses or Taxes are incurred.

 

  (c) Any amount expressed to be payable in a currency other than dollars shall be paid in that other currency.

 

28.10  Disruption to payment systems etc.

If either the Agent determines (in its discretion) that a Disruption Event has occurred or the Agent is notified by the Parent that a Disruption Event has occurred:

 

  (a) the Agent may, and shall if requested to do so by the Parent, consult with the Parent with a view to agreeing with the Parent such changes to the operation or administration of the Facilities as the Agent may deem necessary in the circumstances;

 

  (b) the Agent shall not be obliged to consult with the Parent in relation to any changes mentioned in paragraph (a) if, in its opinion, it is not practicable to do so in the circumstances and, in any event, shall have no obligation to agree to such changes;

 

  (c) the Agent may consult with the Finance Parties in relation to any changes mentioned in paragraph (a) but shall not be obliged to do so if, in its opinion, it is not practicable to do so in the circumstances;

 

- 96 -


  (d) any such changes agreed upon by the Agent and the Parent shall (whether or not it is finally determined that a Disruption Event has occurred) be binding upon the Parties as an amendment to (or, as the case may be, waiver of) the terms of the Finance Documents notwithstanding the provisions of Clause 34 ( Amendments and Waivers );

 

  (e) the Agent shall not be liable for any damages, costs or losses whatsoever (including, without limitation for negligence, gross negligence or any other category of liability whatsoever but not including any claim based on the fraud of the Agent) arising as a result of its taking, or failing to take, any actions pursuant to or in connection with this Clause 28.10; and

 

  (f) the Agent shall notify the Finance Parties of all changes agreed pursuant to paragraph (d) above.

 

28.11  Change of currency

 

  (a) Unless otherwise prohibited by law, if more than one currency or currency unit are at the same time recognised by the central bank of any country as the lawful currency of that country, then:

 

  (i) any reference in the Finance Documents to, and any obligations arising under the Finance Documents in, the currency of that country shall be translated into, or paid in, the currency or currency unit of that country designated by the Agent (after consultation with the Parent); and

 

  (ii) any translation from one currency or currency unit to another shall be at the official rate of exchange recognised by the central bank for the conversion of that currency or currency unit into the other, rounded up or down by the Agent (acting reasonably).

 

  (b) If a change in any currency of a country occurs, this Agreement will, to the extent the Agent (acting reasonably and after consultation with the Parent) specifies to be necessary, be amended to comply with any generally accepted conventions and market practice in the Relevant Interbank Market and otherwise to reflect the change in currency.

 

29. SET-OFF

A Finance Party may set off any matured obligation due from an Obligor under the Finance Documents (to the extent beneficially owned by that Finance Party) against any matured obligation owed by that Finance Party to that Obligor, regardless of the place of payment, booking branch or currency of either obligation. If the obligations are in different currencies, the Finance Party may convert either obligation at a market rate of exchange in its usual course of business for the purpose of the set-off.

 

30. NOTICES

 

30.1 Communications in writing

Any communication to be made under or in connection with the Finance Documents shall be made in writing and, unless otherwise stated, may be made by fax or letter.

 

- 97 -


30.2 Addresses

The address and fax number (and the department or officer, if any, for whose attention the communication is to be made) of each Party for any communication or document to be made or delivered under or in connection with the Finance Documents is:

 

  (a) in the case of the Parent, that identified with its name below;

 

  (b) in the case of each Lender or any other Obligor, that notified in writing to the Agent on or prior to the date on which it becomes a Party; and

 

  (c) in the case of the Agent, that identified with its name below,

or any substitute address or fax number or department or officer as the Party may notify to the Agent (or the Agent may notify to the other Parties, if a change is made by the Agent) by not less than five (5) Business Days’ notice.

 

30.3 Delivery

 

  (a) Any communication or document made or delivered by one person to another under or in connection with the Finance Documents will only be effective:

 

  (i) if by way of fax, when received in legible form; or

 

  (ii) if by way of letter, when it has been left at the relevant address or five (5) Business Days after being deposited in the post postage prepaid in an envelope addressed to it at that address,

and, if a particular department or officer is specified as part of its address details provided under Clause 30.2 ( Addresses ), if addressed to that department or officer.

 

  (b) Any communication or document to be made or delivered to the Agent will be effective only when actually received by the Agent and then only if it is expressly marked for the attention of the department or officer identified with the Agent’s signature below (or any substitute department or officer as the Agent shall specify for this purpose).

 

  (c) All notices from or to an Obligor shall be sent through the Agent.

 

  (d) Any communication or document made or delivered to the Parent in accordance with this Clause will be deemed to have been made or delivered to each of the Obligors.

 

30.4 Notification of address and fax number

Promptly upon receipt of notification of an address and fax number or change of address or fax number pursuant to Clause 30.2 ( Addresses ) or changing its own address or fax number, the Agent shall notify the other Parties.

 

- 98 -


30.5 Communication when Agent is Impaired Agent

If the Agent is an Impaired Agent the Parties may, instead of communicating with each other through the Agent, communicate with each other directly and (while the Agent is an Impaired Agent) all the provisions of the Finance Documents which require communications to be made or notices to be given to or by the Agent shall be varied so that communications may be made and notices given to or by the relevant Parties directly. This provision shall not operate after a replacement Agent has been appointed.

 

30.6 Electronic communication

 

  (a) Any communication to be made between the Agent and a Lender under or in connection with the Finance Documents may be made by electronic mail or other electronic means, if the Agent and the relevant Lender:

 

  (i) agree that, unless and until notified to the contrary, this is to be an accepted form of communication;

 

  (ii) notify each other in writing of their electronic mail address and/or any other information required to enable the sending and receipt of information by that means; and

 

  (iii) notify each other of any change to their address or any other such information supplied by them.

 

  (b) Any electronic communication made between the Agent and a Lender will be effective only when actually received in readable form and in the case of any electronic communication made by a Lender to the Agent only if it is addressed in such a manner as the Agent shall specify for this purpose.

 

30.7 English language

 

  (a) Any notice given under or in connection with any Finance Document must be in English.

 

  (b) All other documents provided under or in connection with any Finance Document must be:

 

  (i) in English; or

 

  (ii) if not in English, and if so required by the Agent, accompanied by a certified English translation and, in this case, the English translation will prevail unless the document is a constitutional, statutory or other official document.

 

- 99 -


30.8 Obligor agent

 

  (a) Each Obligor (other than the Parent) by its execution of this Agreement or an Accession Letter (as the case may be) irrevocably appoints the Parent to act on its behalf as its agent in relation to the Finance Documents and irrevocably authorises:

 

  (i) the Parent on its behalf to supply all information concerning itself contemplated by this Agreement to the Finance Parties and to give all notices and instructions (including, in the case of a Borrower, Utilisation Requests), to execute on its behalf any documents required hereunder and to make such agreements capable of being given, made or effected by any Obligor notwithstanding that they may affect the Obligor, without further reference to or the consent of that Obligor; and

 

  (ii) each Finance Party to give any notice, demand or other communication to that Obligor pursuant to the Finance Documents to the Parent on its behalf,

and in each case the Obligor shall be bound as though the Obligor itself had given the notices and instructions (including, without limitation, any Utilisation Requests) or executed or made such agreements or received the relevant notice, demand or other communication.

 

  (b) Every act, agreement, undertaking, settlement, waiver, notice or other communication given or made by the Parent or given to the Parent under any Finance Document on behalf of another Obligor or in connection with any Finance Document (whether or not known to any other Obligor and whether occurring before or after such other Obligor became an Obligor under any Finance Document) shall be binding for all purposes on that Obligor as if that Obligor had expressly made, given or concurred with it. In the event of any conflict between any notices or other communications of the Parent and any other Obligor, those of the Parent shall prevail.

 

31. CALCULATIONS AND CERTIFICATES

 

31.1 Accounts

In any litigation or arbitration proceedings arising out of or in connection with a Finance Document, the entries made in the accounts maintained by a Finance Party are prima facie evidence of the matters to which they relate.

 

31.2 Certificates and Determinations

Any certification or determination by a Finance Party of a rate or amount under any Finance Document is, in the absence of manifest error, conclusive evidence of the matters to which it relates.

 

- 100 -


31.3 Day count convention

Any interest, commission or fee accruing under a Finance Document will accrue from day to day and is calculated on the basis of the actual number of days elapsed and a year of three hundred and sixty (360) days or, in any case where the practice in the Relevant Interbank Market differs, in accordance with that market practice.

 

32. PARTIAL INVALIDITY

If, at any time, any provision of the Finance Documents is or becomes illegal, invalid or unenforceable in any respect under any law of any jurisdiction, neither the legality, validity or enforceability of the remaining provisions nor the legality, validity or enforceability of such provision under the law of any other jurisdiction will in any way be affected or impaired.

 

33. REMEDIES AND WAIVERS

No failure to exercise, nor any delay in exercising, on the part of any Finance Party, any right or remedy under the Finance Documents shall operate as a waiver, nor shall any single or partial exercise of any right or remedy prevent any further or other exercise or the exercise of any other right or remedy. The rights and remedies provided in this Agreement are cumulative and not exclusive of any rights or remedies provided by law.

 

34. AMENDMENTS AND WAIVERS

 

34.1 Required consents

 

  (a) Subject to Clause 34.2 ( Exceptions ) any term of the Finance Documents may be amended or waived only with the consent of the Majority Lenders and the Parent and any such amendment or waiver will be binding on all Parties.

 

  (b) The Agent may effect, on behalf of any Finance Party, any amendment or waiver permitted by this Clause 34.

 

34.2 Exceptions

 

  (a) An amendment or waiver that has the effect of changing or which relates to:

 

  (i) the definition of “Majority Lenders” in Clause 1.1 ( Definitions );

 

  (ii) an extension to the date of payment of any amount under the Finance Documents;

 

  (iii) a reduction in the Margin or a reduction in the amount of any payment of principal, interest, fees or commission payable;

 

  (iv) an increase in or an extension of any Commitment or any requirement that a cancellation of Commitments reduces the commitments of the lenders rateably under the relevant Facility;

 

- 101 -


  (v) a change to the Borrowers or Guarantors (other than in accordance with Clause 24 ( Changes to the Obligors ));

 

  (vi) any provision which expressly requires the consent of all the Lenders; or

 

  (vii) Clause 2.2 ( Finance Parties’ rights and obligations ), Clause 17 ( Guarantee and Indemnity ), Clause 23 ( Changes to the Lenders ) or this Clause 34,

shall not be made without the prior consent of all the Lenders.

 

  (b) An amendment or waiver which relates to the rights or obligations of the Agent or the Arrangers may not be effected without the consent of the Agent or the Arrangers.

 

34.3 Disenfranchisement of Defaulting Lenders

 

  (a) For so long as a Defaulting Lender has any Available Commitment, in ascertaining the Majority Lenders or whether any given percentage (including, for the avoidance of doubt, unanimity) of the Total Commitments has been obtained to approve any request for a consent, waiver, amendment or other vote under the Finance Documents, that Defaulting Lender’s Commitments will be reduced by the amount of its Available Commitments.

 

  (b) For the purposes of this Clause 34.3, the Agent may assume that the following Lenders are Defaulting Lenders:

 

  (i) any Lender which has notified the Agent that it has become a Defaulting Lender;

 

  (ii) any Lender in relation to which it is aware that any of the events or circumstances referred to in paragraphs (a), (b) or (c) of the definition of “Defaulting Lender” has occurred,

unless it has received notice to the contrary from the Lender concerned (together with any supporting evidence reasonably requested by the Agent) or the Agent is otherwise aware that the Lender has ceased to be a Defaulting Lender.

 

34.4 Replacement of a Defaulting Lender

 

  (a) The Parent may, at any time a Lender has become and continues to be a Defaulting Lender, by giving five (5) Business Days’ prior written notice to the Agent and such Lender:

 

  (i) replace such Lender by requiring such Lender to (and such Lender shall) transfer pursuant to Clause 23 ( Changes to the Lenders ) all (and not part only) of its rights and obligations under this Agreement; or

 

- 102 -


  (ii) require such Lender to (and such Lender shall) transfer pursuant to Clause 23 ( Changes to the Lenders ) all (and not part only) of the undrawn Commitment of the Lender,

to a Lender or other bank, financial institution, trust, fund or other entity (a “ Replacement Lender ”) selected by the Parent, and which (unless the Agent is an Impaired Agent) is acceptable to the Agent (acting reasonably), which confirms its willingness to assume and does assume all the obligations or all the relevant obligations of the transferring Lender (including the assumption of the transferring Lender’s participations or unfunded participations (as the case may be) on the same basis as the transferring Lender), for a purchase price in cash payable at the time of the transfer equal to the outstanding principal amount of such Lender’s participation in the outstanding Utilisations and all accrued interest (subject to any notice having been given by the Agent under Clause 23.9 ( Pro rata interest settlement )), Break Costs and other amounts payable in relation thereto under the Finance Documents.

 

  (b) Any transfer of rights and obligations of a Defaulting Lender pursuant to this Clause shall be subject to the following conditions:

 

  (i) the Parent shall have no right to replace the Agent;

 

  (ii) neither the Agent nor the Defaulting Lender shall have any obligation to the Parent to find a Replacement Lender;

 

  (iii) the transfer must take place no later than five (5) days after the notice referred to in paragraph (a) above; and

 

  (iv) in no event shall the Defaulting Lender be required to pay or surrender to the Replacement Lender any of the fees received by the Defaulting Lender pursuant to the Finance Documents.

 

35. CONFIDENTIALITY

 

35.1 Confidential Information

Each Finance Party agrees to keep all Confidential Information confidential and not to disclose it to anyone, save to the extent permitted by Clause 35.2 ( Disclosure of Confidential Information ) and Clause 35.3 ( Disclosure to numbering service providers ), and to ensure that all Confidential Information is protected with security measures and a degree of care that would apply to its own confidential information.

 

35.2 Disclosure of Confidential Information

Any Finance Party may disclose:

 

  (a)

to any of its Affiliates and Related Funds and any of its or their officers, directors, employees, professional advisers, auditors, partners and Representatives such Confidential Information as that Finance Party shall consider appropriate if any person to whom the Confidential Information is to be given pursuant to this paragraph (a) is informed in writing of its confidential nature and that some or all of such Confidential Information may

 

- 103 -


  be price-sensitive information except that there shall be no such requirement to so inform if the recipient is subject to professional obligations to maintain the confidentiality of the information or is otherwise bound by requirements of confidentiality in relation to the Confidential Information;

 

  (b) to any person:

 

  (i) to (or through) whom it assigns or transfers (or may potentially assign or transfer) all or any of its rights and/or obligations under one or more Finance Documents and to any of that person’s Affiliates, Related Funds, Representatives and professional advisers;

 

  (ii) with (or through) whom it enters into (or may potentially enter into), whether directly or indirectly, any sub-participation in relation to, or any other transaction under which payments are to be made or may be made by reference to, one or more Finance Documents and/or one or more Obligors and to any of that person’s Affiliates, Related Funds, Representatives and professional advisers;

 

  (iii) appointed by any Finance Party or by a person to whom paragraph (b)(i) or (ii) above applies to receive communications, notices, information or documents delivered pursuant to the Finance Documents on its behalf (including, without limitation, any person appointed under paragraph (c) of Clause 25.14 ( Relationship with the Lenders ));

 

  (iv) who invests in or otherwise finances (or may potentially invest in or otherwise finance), directly or indirectly, any transaction referred to in paragraph (b)(i) or (b)(ii) above;

 

  (v) to whom information is required or requested to be disclosed by any court of competent jurisdiction or any governmental, banking, taxation or other regulatory authority or similar body, the rules of any relevant stock exchange or pursuant to any applicable law or regulation;

 

  (vi) to whom or for whose benefit that Finance Party charges, assigns or otherwise creates any Encumbrance (or may do so) pursuant to Clause 23.8 ( Security over Lenders’ rights );

 

  (vii) to whom information is required to be disclosed in connection with, and for the purposes of, any litigation, arbitration, administrative or other investigations, proceedings or disputes;

 

  (viii) who is a Party; or

 

  (ix) with the consent of the Parent;

in each case, such Confidential Information as that Finance Party shall consider appropriate if:

 

  (A)

in relation to paragraphs (b)(i), (b)(ii) and b(iii) above, the person to whom the Confidential Information is to be given has

 

- 104 -


  entered into a Confidentiality Undertaking except that there shall be no requirement for a Confidentiality Undertaking if the recipient is a professional adviser and is subject to professional obligations to maintain the confidentiality of the Confidential Information;

 

  (B) in relation to paragraph (b)(iv) above, the person to whom the Confidential Information is to be given has entered into a Confidentiality Undertaking or is otherwise bound by requirements of confidentiality in relation to the Confidential Information they receive and is informed that some or all of such Confidential Information may be price-sensitive information;

 

  (C) in relation to paragraphs (b)(v), (b)(vi) and (b)(vii) above, the person to whom the Confidential Information is to be given is informed of its confidential nature and that some or all of such Confidential Information may be price-sensitive information except that there shall be no requirement to so inform if, in the opinion of that Finance Party, it is not practicable so to do in the circumstances;

 

  (c) to any person appointed by that Finance Party or by a person to whom paragraph (b)(i) or (b)(ii) above applies to provide administration or settlement services in respect of one or more of the Finance Documents including without limitation, in relation to the trading of participations in respect of the Finance Documents, such Confidential Information as may be required to be disclosed to enable such service provider to provide any of the services referred to in this paragraph (c) if the service provider to whom the Confidential Information is to be given has entered into a confidentiality agreement substantially in the form of the LMA Master Confidentiality Undertaking for Use With Administration/Settlement Service Providers or such other form of confidentiality undertaking agreed between the Parent and the relevant Finance Party;

 

  (d) to any rating agency (including its professional advisers) such Confidential Information as may be required to be disclosed to enable such rating agency to carry out its normal rating activities in relation to the Finance Documents and/or the Obligors.

 

35.3 Disclosure to numbering service providers

 

  (a) Any Finance Party may disclose to any national or international numbering service provider appointed by that Finance Party to provide identification numbering services in respect of this Agreement, the Facilities and/or one or more Obligors the following information:

 

  (i) names of Obligors;

 

  (ii) country of domicile of Obligors;

 

- 105 -


  (iii) place of incorporation of Obligors;

 

  (iv) date of this Agreement;

 

  (v) the names of the Agent and the Arrangers;

 

  (vi) date of each amendment and restatement of this Agreement;

 

  (vii) amount of Total Commitments;

 

  (viii) currency of the Facilities;

 

  (ix) type of Facilities;

 

  (x) ranking of Facilities;

 

  (xi) Termination Date for Facilities;

 

  (xii) changes to any of the information previously supplied pursuant to paragraphs (i) to (xi) above; and

 

  (xiii) such other information agreed between such Finance Party and the Parent,

to enable such numbering service provider to provide its usual syndicated loan numbering identification services.

 

  (b) The Parties acknowledge and agree that each identification number assigned to this Agreement, the Facilities and/or one or more Obligors by a numbering service provider and the information associated with each such number may be disclosed to users of its services in accordance with the standard terms and conditions of that numbering service provider.

 

  (c) Each Obligor represents that none of the information set out in paragraphs (i) to (xiii) of paragraph (a) above is, nor will at any time be, unpublished price-sensitive information.

 

  (d) The Agent shall notify the Parent and the other Finance Parties of:

 

  (i) the name of any numbering service provider appointed by the Agent in respect of this Agreement, the Facilities and/or one or more Obligors; and

 

  (ii) the number or, as the case may be, numbers assigned to this Agreement, the Facilities and/or one or more Obligors by such numbering service provider.

 

35.4 Entire agreement

This Clause 35 constitutes the entire agreement between the Parties in relation to the obligations of the Finance Parties under the Finance Documents regarding

 

- 106 -


Confidential Information and supersedes any previous agreement, whether express or implied, regarding Confidential Information.

 

35.5 Inside Information

Each of the Finance Parties acknowledges that some or all of the Confidential Information is or may be price-sensitive information and that the use of such information may be regulated or prohibited by applicable legislation including securities law relating to insider dealing and market abuse and each of the Finance Parties undertakes not to use any Confidential Information for any unlawful purpose.

 

35.6 Notification of disclosure

Each of the Finance Parties agrees (to the extent permitted by law and regulation) to inform the Parent:

 

  (a) of the circumstances of any disclosure of Confidential Information made pursuant to paragraph (b)(v) of Clause 35.2 ( Disclosure of Confidential Information ) except where such disclosure is made to any of the persons referred to in that paragraph during the ordinary course of its supervisory or regulatory function; and

 

  (b) upon becoming aware that Confidential Information has been disclosed in breach of this Clause 35.

 

35.7 Continuing obligations

The obligations in this Clause 35 are continuing and, in particular, shall survive and remain binding on each Finance Party for a period of twelve months from the earlier of:

 

  (a) the date on which all amounts payable by the Obligors under or in connection with this Agreement have been paid in full and all Commitments have been cancelled or otherwise cease to be available; and

 

  (b) the date on which such Finance Party otherwise ceases to be a Finance Party.

 

36. COUNTERPARTS

Each Finance Document may be executed in any number of counterparts, and this has the same effect as if the signatures on the counterparts were on a single copy of the Finance Document.

 

- 107 -


SECTION 12

GOVERNING LAW AND ENFORCEMENT

 

37. GOVERNING LAW

This Agreement and any non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with it are governed by English law.

 

38. ENFORCEMENT

 

38.1 Jurisdiction

 

  (a) The courts of England have exclusive jurisdiction to settle any dispute arising out of or in connection with this Agreement (including a dispute regarding the existence, validity or termination of this Agreement or any non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with it) (a “ Dispute ”).

 

  (b) The Parties agree that the courts of England are the most appropriate and convenient courts to settle Disputes and accordingly no Party will argue to the contrary.

 

  (c) This Clause 38.1 is for the benefit of the Finance Parties only. As a result, no Finance Party shall be prevented from taking proceedings relating to a Dispute in any other courts with jurisdiction. To the extent allowed by law, the Finance Parties may take concurrent proceedings in any number of jurisdictions.

 

38.2 Service of process

Without prejudice to any other mode of service allowed under any relevant law, each Obligor (other than an Obligor incorporated in England and Wales):

 

  (a) irrevocably appoints Hackwood Secretaries Limited as its agent for service of process (in the case of an Obligor incorporated in South Africa, domicilium citandi et executandi ) in relation to any proceedings before the English courts in connection with any Finance Document; and

 

  (b) agrees that failure by an agent for service of process to notify the relevant Obligor of the process will not invalidate the proceedings concerned.

This Agreement has been entered into on the date stated at the beginning of this Agreement.

 

- 108 -


SCHEDULE 1

THE ORIGINAL PARTIES

PART I

THE OBLIGORS

 

Name of Original Borrowers

   Registration number (or
equivalent, if any)

GFI Joint Venture Holdings Proprietary Limited, incorporated in South Africa

   1998/023354/07

Gold Fields Operations Limited, incorporated in South Africa

   1959/003209/06

Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited, incorporated in the British Virgin Islands

   184982

 

Name of Original Guarantors

   Registration number (or
equivalent, if any)

Gold Fields Limited, incorporated in South Africa

   1968/004880/06

Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited, incorporated in the British Virgin Islands

   651406

Gold Fields Operations Limited, incorporated in South Africa

   1959/003209/06

Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited, incorporated in the British Virgin Islands

   184982

GFI Joint Venture Holdings Proprietary Limited, incorporated in South Africa

   1998/023354/07

 

- 109 -


PART II

THE ARRANGERS

Name of Arranger

Barclays Bank PLC

Credit Suisse AG, London Branch

J.P. Morgan Limited

 

- 110 -


PART III

THE ORIGINAL LENDERS

 

Name of Original Lender

   Facility A
Commitment (US$)
     Facility B
Commitment (US$)
 

Barclays Bank PLC

     50,000,000         50,000,000   

BTMU (Europe) Limited

     50,000,000         50,000,000   

Commonwealth Bank of Australia acting in its own capacity and through its offshore banking unit

     50,000,000         50,000,000   

Credit Suisse AG, London Branch

     50,000,000         50,000,000   

HSBC Bank plc

     50,000,000         50,000,000   

JPMorgan Chase Bank, N.A.,

London Branch

     50,000,000         50,000,000   

Australia and New Zealand Banking Group Limited

     45,000,000         45,000,000   

Bank of America, N.A.

     45,000,000         45,000,000   

Bank of China Limited

     45,000,000         45,000,000   

Bank of Montreal, London Branch

     45,000,000         45,000,000   

CIBC World Markets plc

     45,000,000         45,000,000   

The Royal Bank of Scotland plc

     45,000,000         45,000,000   

Scotiabank Europe plc

     45,000,000         45,000,000   

Standard Chartered Bank

     45,000,000         45,000,000   

Sumitomo Mitsui Finance Dublin Limited

     30,000,000         30,000,000   

Westpac Banking Corporation (acting through its Offshore Banking Unit)

     30,000,000         30,000,000   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 
   $ 720,000,000       $ 720,000,000   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

- 111 -


SCHEDULE 2

CONDITIONS PRECEDENT

PART I

CONDITIONS PRECEDENT TO INITIAL UTILISATION

 

1. Obligors

 

  (a) A copy of the Constitutional Documents of each Obligor.

 

  (b) A copy of a good standing certificate with respect to Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited and Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited, issued as of a recent date by the Registrar of Corporate Affairs in the British Virgin Islands.

 

  (c) A copy of a resolution of the board of directors (and, if necessary under the laws of its jurisdiction of incorporation, the shareholders) of each Obligor:

 

  (i) approving the terms of, and the transactions contemplated by, the Finance Documents to which it is a party and resolving that it execute the Finance Documents to which it is a party;

 

  (ii) authorising a specified person or persons to execute the Finance Documents to which it is a party on its behalf; and

 

  (iii) authorising a specified person or persons, on its behalf, to sign and/or dispatch all documents and notices (including, if relevant, any Utilisation Request) to be signed and/or dispatched by it under or in connection with the Finance Documents to which it is a party.

 

  (d) A specimen of the signature of each person authorised by the resolution referred to in paragraph (c) above.

 

  (e) A certificate of incumbency from the registered agent for Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited and Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited.

 

  (f) A copy of the resolution of the shareholders of Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited and Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited approving the relevant resolutions of the board of directors and the transactions contemplated thereby.

 

  (g) A certificate of the Obligors (signed by a director) confirming that borrowing or guaranteeing, as appropriate, the Total Commitments and any and all accrued interest would not cause any borrowing, guaranteeing or similar limit binding on any Obligor to be exceeded and that in respect of each Obligor to whom the Companies Act 2008 of South Africa applies the requirements of Section 45 of such Act has been complied with and each certificate shall have annexed to it the copies of the relevant resolutions, notices and statements.

 

  (h) A certificate of an authorised signatory of the relevant Obligor certifying that each copy document relating to it specified in this Part I of Schedule 2 is correct, complete and in full force and effect as at a date no earlier than the date of this Agreement.

 

112


2. Legal opinions

 

  (a) A legal opinion of Clifford Chance LLP legal advisers to the Arrangers and the Agent in England, substantially in the form distributed to the Original Lenders prior to signing this Agreement.

 

  (b) A legal opinion of Conyers Dill & Pearman, legal advisers to the Arrangers and Agent in the British Virgin Islands, substantially in the form distributed to the Original Lenders prior to signing this Agreement.

 

  (c) A legal opinion of Edward Nathan Sonnenbergs, legal advisers to the Arrangers and Agent in South Africa, substantially in the form distributed to the Original Lenders prior to signing this Agreement.

 

3. Other documents and evidence

 

  (a) Evidence that any agent for service of process referred to in Clause 38.2 ( Service of process ) has accepted its appointment.

 

  (b) The Original Financial Statements together with a pro forma balance sheet for the Group to reflect the Group’s position post the Demerger.

 

  (c) Evidence that the fees, costs and expenses then due from the Parent pursuant to Clause 11 ( Fees ) and Clause 16 ( Costs and expenses ) have been paid or will be paid by the initial Utilisation Date.

 

  (d) A copy of the approval of the Financial Surveillance Department of the South African Reserve Bank confirming that Gold Fields Limited, GFI Joint Venture Holdings Proprietary Limited and Gold Fields Operations Limited (the “ South African Obligors ”) may enter into and provide the guarantee as contemplated by this Agreement and that the South African Obligors in their capacity as Original Borrowers may enter into and implement the provisions of this Agreement. If such approval is granted conditionally, this condition precedent shall not be considered to have been fulfilled, unless both the Lenders and the South African Obligors acknowledge in writing to each other that such conditions are acceptable.

 

  (e) A copy of any authorisation or consent (to include any relevant corporate, regulatory and shareholder consent) which the Agent, acting reasonably, considers to be necessary in connection with the entry into and performance of the transactions contemplated by this Agreement or for the validity and enforceability of any Finance Document.

 

  (f) Evidence that all amounts outstanding under the Existing Facilities have been or will be repaid and that the Existing Facilities have been or will be cancelled in full on or before the first Utilisation Date.

 

  (g)

Evidence (in the form of certified copies of (i) the notification received by the Parent from the Johannesburg Stock Exchange that the entire share capital of

 

- 113 -


  GFIMSA is listed on and admitted to trading on the Johannesburg Stock Exchange and (ii) the notification received by the Parent from its transfer secretaries or from STRATE, that the Distribution is effected and GFIMSA accordingly is no longer a Subsidiary of the Parent) that the Demerger Date has occurred.

 

  (h) A certificate signed by a director of the Parent confirming that the board of directors of the Parent have approved the Demerger.

 

  (i) A copy of an opinion from Edward Nathan Sonnenbergs dated no earlier than 5 Business Days prior to the first Utilisation Date, confirming that no further regulatory or shareholder approval requirements are required in connection with the Demerger which have not already been obtained.

 

  (j) A certified copy of the announcement by the Company that the Distribution is to be effected.

 

  (k) A copy of the approval of the South African Reserve Bank of the Demerger, the Distribution and the secondary listing of GFIMSA on the New York Stock Exchange.

 

- 114 -


PART II

CONDITIONS PRECEDENT REQUIRED TO BE DELIVERED BY AN

ADDITIONAL BORROWER

 

1. An Accession Letter, duly executed by the Additional Borrower and the Parent.

 

2. A copy of a good standing certificate with respect to any Additional Borrower incorporated in the British Virgin Islands, issued as of a recent date by the Registrar of Corporate Affairs in the British Virgin Islands.

 

3. A copy of the Constitutional Documents of the Additional Borrower.

 

4. A copy of a resolution of the board of directors (and, if necessary under the laws of its jurisdiction of incorporation, the shareholders) of the Additional Borrower:

 

  (a) approving the terms of, and the transactions contemplated by, the Accession Letter and the Finance Documents and resolving that it execute the Accession Letter;

 

  (b) authorising a specified person or persons to execute the Accession Letter on its behalf; and

 

  (c) authorising a specified person or persons, on its behalf, to sign and/or despatch all other documents and notices (including, in relation to an Additional Borrower, any Utilisation Request) to be signed and/or despatched by it under or in connection with the Finance Documents.

 

5. A specimen of the signature of each person authorised by the resolution referred to in paragraph 4 above.

 

6. A certificate of incumbency from the registered agent of each Additional Borrower incorporated in the British Virgin Islands.

 

7. If appropriate, a certificate of the Additional Borrower (signed by a director) confirming that borrowing or guaranteeing, as appropriate, the Total Commitments would not cause any borrowing, guaranteeing or similar limit binding on it to be exceeded and that in respect of each Additional Borrower to whom the Companies Act 2008 of South Africa applies the requirements of Section 45 of such Act has been complied with and each certificate shall have annexed to it the copies of the relevant resolutions, notices and statements.

 

8. A certificate of an authorised signatory of the Additional Borrower certifying that each copy document listed in this Part II of Schedule 2 is correct, complete and in full force and effect as at a date no earlier than the date of the Accession Letter.

 

9. A copy of any other authorisation or other document, opinion or assurance which the Agent considers to be necessary or desirable in connection with the entry into and performance of the transactions contemplated by the Accession Letter or for the validity and enforceability of any Finance Document.

 

10.

If appropriate, a copy of the approval of the Financial Surveillance Department of the South African Reserve Bank confirming that the Additional Borrower may enter into

 

- 115 -


  and provide the guarantee as contemplated by this Agreement and that the Additional Borrower may enter into and implement the provisions of this Agreement. If such approval is granted conditionally, this condition precedent shall not be considered to have been fulfilled, unless both the Lenders and the Additional Borrower acknowledge in writing to each other that such conditions are acceptable.

 

11. If available, the latest audited financial statements of the Additional Borrower.

 

12. A legal opinion from legal advisers to the Agent in England.

 

13. If the Additional Borrower is incorporated in a jurisdiction other than England and Wales, a legal opinion of the legal advisers to the Arrangers and the Agent in the jurisdiction in which the Additional Borrower is incorporated.

 

14. If the proposed Additional Borrower is incorporated in a jurisdiction other than England and Wales, evidence that the agent for service of process specified in Clause 38.2 ( Service of process ) has accepted its appointment in relation to the proposed Additional Borrower.

 

- 116 -


PART III

CONDITIONS PRECEDENT REQUIRED TO BE DELIVERED BY AN

ADDITIONAL GUARANTOR

 

1. An Accession Letter, duly executed by the Additional Guarantor and the Parent.

 

2. A copy of the Constitutional Documents of the Additional Guarantor.

 

3. A copy of a good standing certificate with respect to any Additional Guarantor incorporated in the British Virgin Islands, issued as of a recent date by the appropriate official in the British Virgin Islands.

 

4. A copy of a resolution of the board of directors (and, if necessary under the laws of its jurisdiction of incorporation, the shareholders) of the Additional Guarantor:

 

  (a) approving the terms of, and the transactions contemplated by, the Accession Letter and the Finance Documents and resolving that it execute the Accession Letter;

 

  (b) authorising a specified person or persons to execute the Accession Letter on its behalf; and

 

  (c) authorising a specified person or persons, on its behalf, to sign and/or dispatch all other documents and notices to be signed and/or despatched by it under or in connection with the Finance Documents.

 

5. A specimen of the signature of each person authorised by the resolution referred to in paragraph 4 above.

 

6. A certificate of incumbency from the registered agent of each Additional guarantor incorporated in the British Virgin Islands.

 

7. A copy of a resolution signed by all the holders of the issued shares of the Additional Guarantor, approving the terms of, and the transactions contemplated by, the Finance Documents to which the Additional Guarantor is a party.

 

8. A certificate of the Additional Guarantor (signed by a director) confirming that guaranteeing the Total Commitments would not cause any borrowing, guaranteeing or similar limit binding on it to be exceeded and that in respect of each Additional Guarantor to whom the Companies Act 2008 of South Africa applies the requirements of Section 45 of such Act has been complied with and each certificate shall have annexed to it the copies of the relevant resolutions, notices and statements.

 

9. A certificate of an authorised signatory of the Additional Guarantor certifying that each copy document listed in this Part III of Schedule 2 is correct, complete and in full force and effect as at a date no earlier than the date of the Accession Letter.

 

10. A copy of any other authorisation or other document, opinion or assurance which the Agent considers to be necessary or desirable in connection with the entry into and performance of the transactions contemplated by the Accession Letter or for the validity and enforceability of any Finance Document.

 

- 117 -


11. If available, the latest audited financial statements of the Additional Guarantor.

 

12. A legal opinion from legal advisers to the Agent in England.

 

13. If the Additional Guarantor is incorporated in a jurisdiction other than England and Wales, a legal opinion of the legal advisers to the Agent in the jurisdiction in which the Additional Guarantor is incorporated.

 

14. If the Additional Guarantor is incorporated in a jurisdiction other than England and Wales, evidence that the agent for service of process specified in Clause 38.2 ( Service of process ) has accepted its appointment in relation to the proposed Additional Guarantor.

 

15. A copy of the approval of the Exchange Control Department of the South African Reserve Bank confirming that any Additional Guarantor incorporated in South Africa may enter into and provide the guarantees as contemplated by this Agreement and that the Additional Guarantor may enter into and implement the provisions of this Agreement. If such approval is granted conditionally, this condition precedent shall not be considered to have been fulfilled, unless both the Lenders and the Additional Guarantor acknowledge in writing to each other that such conditions are acceptable.

 

- 118 -


SCHEDULE 3

REQUESTS

PART I

UTILISATION REQUEST

From: [ The Borrower ]

To:     [ ] as Agent

Dated:

Dear Sirs

GFI Joint Venture Holdings Proprietary Limited, Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited and Gold Fields Operations Limited – $900,000,000 Credit Facilities Agreement dated 28 November 2012, as amended and restated pursuant to the Syndication and Amendment Agreement (the “Agreement”)

 

1. We refer to the Agreement. This is a Utilisation Request. Terms defined in the Agreement have the same meaning in this Utilisation Request unless given a different meaning in this Utilisation Request.

 

2. We wish to borrow a Loan on the following terms:

 

Proposed Utilisation Date:

   [ ] (or, if that is not a Business Day, the next Business Day)

Facility to be utilised:

   [Facility A/Facility B]

Currency of Loan:

   Dollars

Amount:

   [ ], if less the Available Facility

Interest Period:

   [ ]

 

3. We confirm that each condition specified in Clause 4.2 ( Further conditions precedent ) is satisfied on the date of this Utilisation Request.

 

4. [This Loan is to be made in [whole]/[part] for the purpose of refinancing [ identify maturing Facility B Loan ]/[The proceeds of this Loan should be credited to [ account ].]

 

5. This Utilisation Request is irrevocable.

Yours faithfully

 

 

authorised signatory for

[ name of relevant Borrower ]

 

- 119 -


PART II

SELECTION NOTICE

APPLICABLE TO A FACILITY A LOAN

From: [Borrower]

To:     [Agent]

Dated:

Dear Sirs

GFI Joint Venture Holdings Proprietary Limited, Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited and Gold Fields Operations Limited – $900,000,000 Credit Facilities Agreement dated 28 November 2012, as amended and restated pursuant to the Syndication and Amendment Agreement (the “Agreement”)

 

1. We refer to the Agreement. This is a Selection Notice. Terms defined in the Agreement have the same meaning in this Selection Notice unless given a different meaning in this Selection Notice.

 

2. We refer to the following Facility A Loan[s] with an Interest Period ending on [ ]*

 

3. [We request that the above Facility A Loan[s] be divided into [ ] Facility A Loans with the following amounts and Interest Periods:]**

or

[We request that the next Interest Period for the above Facility A Loan[s] is [ ]].***

 

4. This Selection Notice is irrevocable.

Yours faithfully

 

 

authorised signatory for

[ name of relevant Borrower ]

 

- 120 -


SCHEDULE 4

MANDATORY COST FORMULA

 

1. The Mandatory Cost is an addition to the interest rate to compensate Lenders for the cost of compliance with (a) the requirements of the Bank of England and/or the Financial Services Authority (or, in either case, any other authority which replaces all or any of its functions) or (b) the requirements of the European Central Bank.

 

2. On the first day of each Interest Period (or as soon as possible thereafter) the Agent shall calculate, as a percentage rate, a rate (the “ Additional Cost Rate ”) for each Lender, in accordance with the paragraphs set out below. The Mandatory Cost will be calculated by the Agent as a weighted average of the Lenders’ Additional Cost Rates (weighted in proportion to the percentage participation of each Lender in the relevant Loan) and will be expressed as a percentage rate per annum.

 

3. The Additional Cost Rate for any Lender lending from a Facility Office in a Participating Member State will be the percentage notified by that Lender to the Agent. This percentage will be certified by that Lender in its notice to the Agent to be its reasonable determination of the cost (expressed as a percentage of that Lender’s participation in all Loans made from that Facility Office) of complying with the minimum reserve requirements of the European Central Bank in respect of loans made from that Facility Office.

 

4. The Additional Cost Rate for any Lender lending from a Facility Office in the United Kingdom will be calculated by the Agent as follows:

 

E  × 0.01

  

300

   per cent. per annum.

Where:

 

  E is designed to compensate Lenders for amounts payable under the Fees Rules and is calculated by the Agent as being the average of the most recent rates of charge supplied by the Reference Banks to the Agent pursuant to paragraph 7 below and expressed in pounds per £1,000,000.

 

5. For the purposes of this Schedule:

 

  (a) Fees Rules ” means the rules on periodic fees contained in the FSA Supervision Manual or such other law or regulation as may be in force from time to time in respect of the payment of fees for the acceptance of deposits;

 

  (b) Fee Tariffs ” means the fee tariffs specified in the Fees Rules under the activity group A.1 Deposit acceptors (ignoring any minimum fee or zero rated fee required pursuant to the Fees Rules but taking into account any applicable discount rate); and

 

  (c) Tariff Base ” has the meaning given to it in, and will be calculated in accordance with, the Fees Rules.

 

- 121 -


6. If requested by the Agent, each Reference Bank shall, as soon as practicable after publication by the Financial Services Authority, supply to the Agent, the rate of charge payable by that Reference Bank to the Financial Services Authority pursuant to the Fees Rules in respect of the relevant financial year of the Financial Services Authority (calculated for this purpose by that Reference Bank as being the average of the Fee Tariffs applicable to that Reference Bank for that financial year) and expressed in pounds per £1,000,000 of the Tariff Base of that Reference Bank.

 

7. Each Lender shall supply any information required by the Agent for the purpose of calculating its Additional Cost Rate. In particular, but without limitation, each Lender shall supply the following information on or prior to the date on which it becomes a Lender:

 

  (a) the jurisdiction of its Facility Office; and

 

  (b) any other information that the Agent may reasonably require for such purpose.

Each Lender shall promptly notify the Agent of any change to the information provided by it pursuant to this paragraph.

 

8. The percentages of each Lender for the purpose of E above shall be determined by the Agent based upon the information supplied to it pursuant to paragraphs 6 and 7 above and on the assumption that, unless a Lender notifies the Agent to the contrary, each Lender’s obligations in relation to cash ratio deposits are the same as those of a typical bank from its jurisdiction of incorporation with a Facility Office in the same jurisdiction as its Facility Office.

 

9. The Agent shall have no liability to any person if such determination results in an Additional Cost Rate which over or under compensates any Lender and shall be entitled to assume that the information provided by any Lender or Reference Bank pursuant to paragraphs 3, 6 and 7 above is true and correct in all respects.

 

10. The Agent shall distribute the additional amounts received as a result of the Mandatory Cost to the Lenders on the basis of the Additional Cost Rate for each Lender based on the information provided by each Lender and each Reference Bank pursuant to paragraphs 3, 6 and 7 above.

 

11. Any determination by the Agent pursuant to this Schedule in relation to a formula, the Mandatory Cost, an Additional Cost Rate or any amount payable to a Lender shall, in the absence of manifest error, be conclusive and binding on all Parties.

 

12. The Agent may from time to time, after consultation with the Parent and the Lenders, determine and notify to all Parties any amendments which are required to be made to this Schedule in order to comply with any change in law, regulation or any requirements from time to time imposed by the Financial Services Authority or, the European Central Bank (or, in any case, any other authority which replaces all or any of its functions) and any such determination shall, in the absence of manifest error, be conclusive and binding on all Parties.

 

- 122 -


SCHEDULE 5

FORM OF TRANSFER CERTIFICATE

To:     [ ] as Agent

 

From: [ The Existing Lender ] (the “ Existing Lender ”) and [ The New Lender ] (the “ New Lender ”)

Dated:

GFI Joint Venture Holdings Proprietary Limited, Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited and Gold Fields Operations Limited – $900,000,000 Credit Facilities Agreement dated 28 November 2012, as amended and restated pursuant to the Syndication and Amendment Agreement (the “Agreement”)

 

1. We refer to the Agreement. This is a Transfer Certificate. Terms defined in the Agreement have the same meaning in this Transfer Certificate unless given a different meaning in this Transfer Certificate.

 

2. We refer to Clause 23.5 ( Procedure for transfer ):

 

  (a) The Existing Lender and the New Lender agree to the Existing Lender transferring to the New Lender by novation all or part of the Existing Lender’s Commitment, rights and obligations referred to in the Schedule in accordance with Clause 23.5 ( Procedure for transfer ).

 

  (b) The proposed Transfer Date is [ ].

 

  (c) The Facility Office and address, fax number, email address and attention details for notices of the New Lender for the purposes of Clause 30.2 ( Addresses ) are set out in the Schedule.

 

3. The New Lender expressly acknowledges the limitations on the Existing Lender’s obligations set out in paragraph (c) of Clause 23.4 ( Limitation of responsibility of Existing Lenders ).

 

4. This Transfer Certificate may be executed in any number of counterparts and this has the same effect as if the signatures on the counterparts were on a single copy of this Transfer Certificate.

 

5. This Transfer Certificate, and any non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with it, is governed by English law.

 

- 123 -


THE SCHEDULE

Commitment/rights and obligations to be transferred

[ insert relevant details ]

[ Facility Office address, fax number, email address and attention details for notices and account details for payments, ]

 

[Existing Lender]

   [New Lender]
By:   

 

   By:   

 

Market Entity Identifier:  

 

   Market Entity Identifier:  

 

This Transfer Certificate is accepted by the Agent and the Transfer Date is confirmed as [ ].

[ ]

By:

 

- 124 -


SCHEDULE 6

FORM OF ASSIGNMENT AGREEMENT

 

To: [ ] as Agent and [ ] as Parent, for and on behalf of each Obligor

 

From: [the Existing Lender] (the “ Existing Lender ”) and [the New Lender] (the “ New Lender ”)

Dated:

GFI Joint Venture Holdings Proprietary Limited, Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited and Gold Fields Operations Limited – $900,000,000 Credit Facilities Agreement dated 28 November 2012, as amended and restated pursuant to the Syndication and Amendment Agreement (the “Agreement”)

 

1. We refer to the Agreement. This is an Assignment Agreement. Terms defined in the Agreement have the same meaning in this Assignment Agreement unless given a different meaning in this Assignment Agreement.

 

2. We refer to Clause 23.6 ( Procedure for assignment ):

 

  (a) The Existing Lender assigns absolutely to the New Lender all the rights of the Existing Lender under the Agreement and the other Finance Documents which relate to that portion of the Existing Lender’s Commitments and participations in Loans under the Agreement as specified in the Schedule.

 

  (b) The Existing Lender is released from all the obligations of the Existing Lender which correspond to that portion of the Existing Lender’s Commitments and participations in Loans under the Agreement specified in the Schedule.

 

  (c) The New Lender becomes a Party as a Lender and is bound by obligations equivalent to those from which the Existing Lender is released under paragraph (b) above.

 

3. The proposed Transfer Date is [ ].

 

4. On the Transfer Date the New Lender becomes Party to the Finance Documents as a Lender.

 

5. The Facility Office and address, fax number and attention details for notices of the New Lender for the purposes of Clause 30.2 ( Addresses ) are set out in the Schedule.

 

6. The New Lender expressly acknowledges the limitations on the Existing Lender’s obligations set out in paragraph (c) of Clause 23.4 ( Limitation of responsibility of Existing Lenders ).

 

7. This Assignment Agreement acts as notice to the Agent (on behalf of each Finance Party) and, upon delivery in accordance with Clause 23.7 ( Copy of Transfer Certificate or Assignment Agreement to Parent ), to the Parent (on behalf of each Obligor) of the assignment referred to in this Assignment Agreement.

 

- 125 -


8. This Assignment Agreement may be executed in any number of counterparts and this has the same effect as if the signatures on the counterparts were on a single copy of this Assignment Agreement.

 

9. This Assignment Agreement, and any non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with it, is governed by English law.

 

10. This Assignment Agreement has been entered into on the date stated at the beginning of this Assignment Agreement.

 

- 126 -


THE SCHEDULE

Commitment/rights to be assigned

[ insert relevant details ]

[ Facility Office address, fax number, email address and attention details for notices and account details for payments, ]

 

[Existing Lender]

   [New Lender]
By:   

 

   By:   

 

Market Entity Identifier:  

 

   Market Entity Identifier:  

 

This Assignment Agreement is accepted by the Agent and the Transfer Date is confirmed as [ ].

[ ]

By:

 

- 127 -


SCHEDULE 7

FORM OF ACCESSION LETTER

To:         [ ] as Agent

From:    [Subsidiary] and Gold Fields Limited

Dated:

Dear Sirs

GFI Joint Venture Holdings Proprietary Limited, Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited and Gold Fields Operations Limited – $900,000,000 Credit Facilities Agreement dated 28 November 2012, as amended and restated pursuant to the Syndication and Amendment Agreement (the “Agreement”)

 

1. We refer to the Agreement. This is an Accession Letter. Terms defined in the Agreement have the same meaning in this Accession Letter unless given a different meaning in this Accession Letter.

 

2. [Subsidiary] agrees to become an Additional [Borrower]/[Guarantor] and to be bound by the terms of the Agreement as an Additional [Borrower]/[Guarantor] pursuant to Clause [24.2 ( Additional Borrowers )]/[24.4 ( Additional Guarantors )] of the Agreement. [Subsidiary] is a wholly owned Subsidiary of the Parent duly incorporated under the laws of [name of relevant jurisdiction].

 

3. [Specify purpose of the Loan].

 

4. [Subsidiary’s] administrative details are as follows:

Address:

Fax No:

Attention:

 

5. This Accession Letter, and any non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with it, is governed by English law.

[This Accession Letter has been executed as a deed by [ Subsidiary ] and is delivered on the date stated above.]*

 

Gold Fields Limited

   [Subsidiary]

By:

   By:

 

* For any additional Guarantor, the Accession Letter is to be executed as a deed and the signature block shall be amended accordingly.

 

- 128 -


SCHEDULE 8

FORM OF RESIGNATION LETTER

To:         [ ] as Agent

From:    [resigning Obligor] and Gold Fields Limited

Dated:

Dear Sirs

GFI Joint Venture Holdings Proprietary Limited, Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited and Gold Fields Operations Limited – $900,000,000 Credit Facilities Agreement dated 28 November 2012, as amended and restated pursuant to the Syndication and Amendment Agreement (the “Agreement”)

 

1. We refer to the Agreement. This is a Resignation Letter. Terms defined in the Agreement have the same meaning in this Resignation Letter unless given a different meaning in this Accession Letter.

 

2. Pursuant to [Clause 24.3 ( Resignation of an Additional Borrower )]/[Clause 24.6 ( Resignation of an Additional Guarantor )], we request that [resigning Obligor] be released from its obligations as a [Borrower]/[Guarantor] under the Agreement.

 

3. We confirm that no default is continuing or would result from the acceptance of this request.

 

4. This Resignation Letter, and any non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with it, is governed by English law.

 

Gold Fields Limited

     [Subsidiary]   

By:

 

 

   By:   

 

 

- 129 -


SCHEDULE 9

FORM OF COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATE

To:         [ ] as Agent

From:    Gold Fields Limited

Dated:

Dear Sirs

GFI Joint Venture Holdings Proprietary Limited, Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited and Gold Fields Operations Limited – $900,000,000 Credit Facilities Agreement dated 28 November 2012, as amended and restated pursuant to the Syndication and Amendment Agreement (the “Agreement”)

 

1. We refer to the Agreement. This is a Compliance Certificate. Terms defined in the Agreement have the same meaning when used in this Compliance Certificate unless given a different meaning in this Compliance Certificate.

 

2. We confirm that as at [ ]:

 

  (a) Consolidated EBITDA to Consolidated Net Finance Charges

the ratio of Consolidated EBITDA to Consolidated Net Finance Charges in respect of the Measurement Period ending on [ ] was: [ ]:1; and

 

  (b) Consolidated Net Borrowings to Consolidated EBITDA

the ratio of Consolidated Net Borrowings to Consolidated EBITDA in respect of the Measurement Period ending on [ ] was: [ ]:1,

and attach calculations showing how these figures were calculated.

 

3. We confirm that no Default is continuing.

 

Signed:  

 

  

 

[Director]/[Executive Officer]

of

Gold Fields Limited

  

[Director]/[Executive Officer]

of

Gold Fields Limited

[ insert applicable certification language ]

 

 

 
[for and on behalf of  
[ name of auditors of the Parent ]  

 

- 130 -


SCHEDULE 10

TIMETABLE

 

“U”      =      date of utilisation
“U – X”      =      X Business Days prior to date of Utilisation
Delivery of a duly completed Utilisation Request (Clause 5.1 (Delivery of a Utilisation Request), or a Selection Notice Clause 5.1 ( Selection of Interest Periods ))      

U-3

10.00 a.m.

Agent notifies the Lenders of the Loan in accordance with Clause 5.4 ( Lenders’ participation )      

U-3

3.00 p.m.

LIBOR is fixed      

U-2

11:00 a.m.

 

- 131 -


SCHEDULE 11

LMA FORM OF CONFIDENTIALITY UNDERTAKING

[Letterhead of Seller]

Date: [ ]

To:

 

 

[insert name of Potential

Purchaser]

 

 

 

Re:         The Agreement

 

Company:                                              (the “ Company ”)

Date:

Amount:

Agent:

 

Dear Sirs

We understand that you are considering acquiring an interest in the Agreement which, subject to the Agreement, may be by way of novation, assignment, the entering into, whether directly or indirectly, of a sub-participation or any other transaction under which payments are to be made or may be made by reference to one or more Finance Documents and/or one or more Obligors or by way of investing in or otherwise financing, directly or indirectly, any such novation, assignment, sub-participation or other transaction (the “ Acquisition ”). In consideration of us agreeing to make available to you certain information, by your signature of a copy of this letter you agree as follows:

 

1. CONFIDENTIALITY UNDERTAKING

You undertake (a) to keep all Confidential Information confidential and not to disclose it to anyone, save to the extent permitted by paragraph 2 below and to ensure that all Confidential Information is protected with security measures and a degree of care that would apply to your own confidential information, and (b) until the Acquisition is completed to use the Confidential Information only for the Permitted Purpose.

 

- 132 -


2. PERMITTED DISCLOSURE

We agree that you may disclose:

 

2.1 to any of your Affiliates and any of your or their officers, directors, employees, professional advisers and auditors such Confidential Information as you shall consider appropriate if any person to whom the Confidential Information is to be given pursuant to this paragraph 2.1 is informed in writing of its confidential nature and that some or all of such Confidential Information may be price-sensitive information, except that there shall be no such requirement to so inform if the recipient is subject to professional obligations to maintain the confidentiality of the information or is otherwise bound by requirements of confidentiality in relation to the Confidential Information;

 

2.2 subject to the requirements of the Agreement, to any person:

 

  (a) to (or through) whom you assign or transfer (or may potentially assign or transfer) all or any of your rights and/or obligations which you may acquire under the Agreement such Confidential Information as you shall consider appropriate if the person to whom the Confidential Information is to be given pursuant to this sub-paragraph (a) of paragraph 2.2 has delivered a letter to you in equivalent form to this letter;

 

  (b) with (or through) whom you enter into (or may potentially enter into) any sub-participation in relation to, or any other transaction under which payments are to be made or may be made by reference to the Agreement or any Obligor such Confidential Information as you shall consider appropriate if the person to whom the Confidential Information is to be given pursuant to this sub-paragraph (b) of paragraph 2.2 has delivered a letter to you in equivalent form to this letter;

 

  (c) to whom information is required or requested to be disclosed by any governmental, banking, taxation or other regulatory authority or similar body, the rules of any relevant stock exchange or pursuant to any applicable law or regulation such Confidential Information as you shall consider appropriate; and

 

2.3 notwithstanding paragraphs 2.1 and 2.2. above, Confidential Information to such persons to whom, and on the same terms as, a Finance Party is permitted to disclose Confidential Information under the Agreement, as if such permissions were set out in full in this letter and as if references in those permissions to Finance Party were references to you.

 

3. NOTIFICATION OF DISCLOSURE

You agree (to the extent permitted by law and regulation) to inform us:

 

3.1 of the circumstances of any disclosure of Confidential Information made pursuant to sub-paragraph (c) of paragraph 2.2 above except where such disclosure is made to any of the persons referred to in that paragraph during the ordinary course of its supervisory or regulatory function; and

 

- 133 -


3.2 upon becoming aware that Confidential Information has been disclosed in breach of this letter.

 

4. RETURN OF COPIES

If you do not enter into the Acquisition and we so request in writing, you shall return or destroy all Confidential Information supplied to you by us and destroy or permanently erase (to the extent technically practicable) all copies of Confidential Information made by you and use your reasonable endeavours to ensure that anyone to whom you have supplied any Confidential Information destroys or permanently erases (to the extent technically practicable) such Confidential Information and any copies made by them, in each case save to the extent that you or the recipients are required to retain any such Confidential Information by any applicable law, rule or regulation or by any competent judicial, governmental, supervisory or regulatory body or in accordance with internal policy, or where the Confidential Information has been disclosed under sub-paragraph (c) of paragraph 2.2 above.

 

5. CONTINUING OBLIGATIONS

The obligations in this letter are continuing and, in particular, shall survive and remain binding on you until (a) if you become a party to the Agreement as a lender of record, the date on which you become such a party to the Agreement; (b) if you enter into the Acquisition but it does not result in you becoming a party to the Agreement as a lender of record, the date falling [twelve] months after the date on which all of your rights and obligations contained in the documentation entered into to implement that Acquisition have terminated; or (c) in any other case the date falling [twelve] months after the date of your final receipt (in whatever manner) of any Confidential Information.

 

6. NO REPRESENTATION; CONSEQUENCES OF BREACH, ETC

You acknowledge and agree that:

 

6.1 neither we, nor any member of the Group nor any of our or their respective officers, employees or advisers (each a “ Relevant Person ”) (i) make any representation or warranty, express or implied, as to, or assume any responsibility for, the accuracy, reliability or completeness of any of the Confidential Information or any other information supplied by us or the assumptions on which it is based or (ii) shall be under any obligation to update or correct any inaccuracy in the Confidential Information or any other information supplied by us or be otherwise liable to you or any other person in respect of the Confidential Information or any such information; and

 

6.2 we or members of the Group may be irreparably harmed by the breach of the terms of this letter and damages may not be an adequate remedy; each Relevant Person may be granted an injunction or specific performance for any threatened or actual breach of the provisions of this letter by you.

 

- 134 -


7. ENTIRE AGREEMENT: NO WAIVER; AMENDMENTS, ETC

 

7.1 This letter constitutes the entire agreement between us in relation to your obligations regarding Confidential Information and supersedes any previous agreement, whether express or implied, regarding Confidential Information.

 

7.2 No failure to exercise, nor any delay in exercising, any right or remedy under this letter will operate as a waiver of any such right or remedy or constitute an election to affirm this letter. No election to affirm this letter will be effective unless it is in writing. No single or partial exercise of any right or remedy will prevent any further or other exercise or the exercise of any other right or remedy under this letter.

 

7.3 The terms of this letter and your obligations under this letter may only be amended or modified by written agreement between us.

 

8. INSIDE INFORMATION

You acknowledge that some or all of the Confidential Information is or may be price-sensitive information and that the use of such information may be regulated or prohibited by applicable legislation including securities law relating to insider dealing and market abuse and you undertake not to use any Confidential Information for any unlawful purpose.

 

9. NATURE OF UNDERTAKINGS

The undertakings given by you under this letter are given to us and are also given for the benefit of the Company and each other member of the Group.

 

10. THIRD PARTY RIGHTS

 

10.1 Subject to this paragraph 10 and to paragraphs 6 and 9, a person who is not a party to this letter has no right under the Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999 (the “ Third Parties Act ”) to enforce or to enjoy the benefit of any term of this letter.

 

10.2 The Relevant Persons may enjoy the benefit of the terms of paragraphs 6 and 9 subject to and in accordance with this paragraph 10 and the provisions of the Third Parties Act.

 

10.3 Notwithstanding any provisions of this letter, the parties to this letter do not require the consent of any Relevant Person to rescind or vary this letter at any time.

 

11. GOVERNING LAW AND JURISDICTION

 

11.1 This letter (including the agreement constituted by your acknowledgement of its terms) (the “ Letter ”) and any non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with it (including any non-contractual obligations arising out of the negotiation of the transaction contemplated by this Letter) are governed by English law.

 

11.2 The courts of England have non-exclusive jurisdiction to settle any dispute arising out of or in connection with this Letter (including a dispute relating to any non-contractual obligation arising out of or in connection with either this Letter or the negotiation of the transaction contemplated by this Letter).

 

- 135 -


12. DEFINITIONS

In this letter (including the acknowledgement set out below) terms defined in the Agreement shall, unless the context otherwise requires, have the same meaning and:

Confidential Information ” means all information relating to the Company, any Obligor, the Group, the Finance Documents, the Facilities and/or the Acquisition which is provided to you in relation to the Finance Documents or the Facilities by us or any of our affiliates or advisers, in whatever form, and includes information given orally and any document, electronic file or any other way of representing or recording information which contains or is derived or copied from such information but excludes information that:

 

  (a) is or becomes public information other than as a direct or indirect result of any breach by you of this letter; or

 

  (b) is identified in writing at the time of delivery as non-confidential by us or our advisers; or

 

  (c) is known by you before the date the information is disclosed to you by us or any of our affiliates or advisers or is lawfully obtained by you after that date, from a source which is, as far as you are aware, unconnected with the Group and which, in either case, as far as you are aware, has not been obtained in breach of, and is not otherwise subject to, any obligation of confidentiality.

Group ” means the Company and its subsidiaries for the time being (as such term is defined in the Companies Act 2006).

Permitted Purpose ” means considering and evaluating whether to enter into the Acquisition.

Please acknowledge your agreement to the above by signing and returning the enclosed copy.

Yours faithfully

 

 

 

For and on behalf of

 
[Seller]  

 

- 136 -


To:    [Seller]   
The Company and each other member of the Group   

We acknowledge and agree to the above:

 

 

 
For and on behalf of  
[Potential Purchaser]  

 

- 137 -


SIGNATURES

[ NOT RESTATED ]

 

- 138 -


LOGO

CONFORMED COPY

SYNDICATION AND AMENDMENT AGREEMENT

DATED 30 JANUARY 2013

FOR

GFI JOINT VENTURE HOLDINGS PROPRIETARY LIMITED

GOLD FIELDS OPERATIONS LIMITED

AND

GOLD FIELDS OROGEN HOLDING (BVI) LIMITED

ARRANGED BY

BARCLAYS BANK PLC

CREDIT SUISSE AG, LONDON BRANCH

J.P. MORGAN LIMITED

WITH

BARCLAYS BANK PLC

ACTING AS AGENT

 

 

RELATING TO A CREDIT FACILITIES AGREEMENT

DATED 28 NOVEMBER 2012

 

 


CONTENTS

 

Clause         Page  

1.

   Definitions and Interpretation      1   

2.

   Conditions Precedent      2   

3.

   Representations      3   

4.

   Transfer by Novation and Facilities Increase      4   

5.

   The Arrangers      6   

6.

   Restatement      6   

7.

   Continuity and Further Assurance      6   

8.

   Consents and Waivers      7   

9.

   Miscellaneous      7   

10.

   Governing Law      7   

Schedule 1 The Parties

     8   

Part I The Obligors

     8   

Part II The Existing Lenders

     9   

Part III The New Lenders

     10   

Part IV The Arrangers

     11   

Schedule 2 The Lenders

     12   

Schedule 3 Conditions Precedent

     13   

Schedule 4 Amended Facilities Agreement

     14   


THIS AGREEMENT is dated 30 January 2013 and made between:

 

(1) GOLD FIELDS LIMITED (the “ Parent ”);

 

(2) GFI JOINT VENTURE HOLDINGS PROPRIETARY LIMITED , GOLD FIELDS OPERATIONS LIMITED AND GOLD FIELDS OROGEN HOLDING (BVI) LIMITED (the “ Original Borrowers ”);

 

(3) THE SUBSIDIARIES of the Parent listed in Part I of Schedule 1 as guarantors (together with the Parent, the “ Original Guarantors ”);

 

(4) BARCLAYS BANK PLC, CREDIT SUISSE AG, LONDON BRANCH AND J.P. MORGAN LIMITED (whether acting individually or together the “ Arranger ”);

 

(5) THE FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS listed in Part II of Schedule 1 as existing lenders (the “ Existing Lenders ”);

 

(6) THE FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS listed in Part III of Schedule 1 as new lenders (the “ New Lenders ”); and

 

(7) BARCLAYS BANK PLC as agent of the other Finance Parties (the “ Agent ”).

RECITALS:

 

(A) The Existing Lenders have made available to the Original Borrowers a dollar term loan facility and a dollar revolving loan facility pursuant to the terms of the Original Facilities Agreement (the “ Credit Facilities ”).

 

(B) In connection with the syndication of the Credit Facilities part of the Commitments of the Existing Lenders are to be transferred to the New Lenders and the Total Commitments are also to be increased.

 

(C) As a result, certain amendments are required to be made to the terms of the Original Facilities Agreement, which the parties hereto have agreed to, as set out in the Amended Facilities Agreement.

IT IS AGREED as follows:

 

1. Definitions and Interpretation

 

1.1 Definitions

In this Agreement:

Amended Facilities Agreement ” means the Original Facilities Agreement, as amended and restated by this Agreement.

Guarantee Obligations ” means the guarantee and indemnity obligations of an Original Guarantor contained in Clause 17 ( Guarantee and Indemnity ) of the Original Facilities Agreement.

 

- 1 -


Original Facilities Agreement ” means the facilities agreement dated 28 November 2012 between the Parent, the Original Borrowers, the Original Guarantors, the Agent, the Arranger and the Existing Lenders.

Syndication Date ” means 30 January 2013.

 

1.2 Incorporation of defined terms

 

  (a) Unless a contrary indication appears, a term defined in the Original Facilities Agreement has the same meaning in this Agreement.

 

  (b) The principles of construction set out in the Original Facilities Agreement shall have effect as if set out in this Agreement.

 

1.3 Clauses

In this Agreement any reference to a “Clause” or a “Schedule” is, unless the context otherwise requires, a reference to a Clause of or a Schedule to this Agreement.

 

1.4 Third party rights

A person who is not a party to this Agreement has no right under the Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999 to enforce or to enjoy the benefit of any term of this Agreement.

 

1.5 Designation

In accordance with the Original Facilities Agreement, each of the Parent and the Agent designates this Agreement as a Finance Document.

 

2. CONDITIONS PRECEDENT

 

2.1 Conditions Precedent

The provisions of Clause 4 ( Transfer by Novation and Facilities Increase ) and Clause 6 ( Restatement ) shall be effective only if, on or before the Syndication Date, the Agent has received all the documents and other evidence listed in Schedule 3 ( Conditions Precedent ) in form and substance satisfactory to the Agent. The Agent shall notify the Parent and the Existing Lenders promptly upon being so satisfied.

 

2.2 Confirmation as to documents already delivered

Each of the Obligors (other than in relation to Clause 2.2(e) below, which is confirmed by Gold Fields Limited, GFI Joint Venture Holdings Proprietary Limited and Gold Fields Operations Limited only and in relation to Clause 2.2(f) below, which is confirmed by Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited and Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited only) hereby confirms on the date of this Agreement and on the Syndication Date that:

 

  (a) the Constitutional Documents previously delivered by it to the Agent pursuant to paragraph 1(a) of Part I of Schedule 2 ( Conditions Precedent ) of the Original Facilities Agreement have not been amended and remain in full force and effect;

 

- 2 -


  (b) the resolutions of its board of directors previously delivered by it to the Agent pursuant to paragraph 1(c) of Part I of Schedule 2 ( Conditions Precedent ) of the Original Facilities Agreement:

 

  (i) approving the terms of, and the transactions contemplated by, the Original Facilities Agreement and resolving that it execute the Original Facilities Agreement; and

 

  (ii) authorising a specified person or persons to execute the Original Facilities Agreement on its behalf,

have not been amended and remain in full force and effect.

 

  (c) the specimen of the signature of each person authorised by the resolution referred to in paragraph (b) above delivered by it to the Agent pursuant to paragraph 1(d) of Part I of Schedule 2 ( Conditions Precedent ) of the Original Facilities Agreement remains true and correct;

 

  (d) borrowing or guaranteeing, as appropriate, the Total Commitments (as set out in the Amended Facilities Agreement) and any and all accrued interest would not cause any borrowing, guaranteeing or similar limit binding on it to be exceeded and, in respect of each Obligor to whom the Companies Act 2008 of South Africa applies, the requirements of Section 45 of such Act has been complied with;

 

  (e) the approval of the Financial Surveillance Department of the South African Reserve Bank previously delivered to the Agent pursuant to paragraph 3(d) of Part I of Schedule 2 ( Conditions Precedent ) of the Original Facilities Agreement remains in full force and effect with respect to the Amended Facilities Agreement; and

 

  (f) the copy documents delivered to the Agent pursuant to paragraphs 1(a) and 1(b) of Schedule 3 ( Conditions Precedent ) of this Agreement are correct, complete and in full force and effect.

 

3. REPRESENTATIONS

 

3.1 Repeating Representations

The Repeating Representations are deemed to be made by each Obligor (by reference to the facts and circumstances then existing) on:

 

  (a) the date of this Agreement; and

 

  (b) the Syndication Date,

and references to “this Agreement” in the Repeating Representations should be construed as references to this Agreement and to the Original Facilities Agreement and on the Syndication Date, to the Amended Facilities Agreement.

 

- 3 -


3.2 Other Representations

Each Obligor is deemed to make the following representations (by reference to the facts and circumstances then existing) on the date of this Agreement and on the Syndication Date:

 

  (a) the obligations expressed to be assumed by it in this Agreement are, subject to any general principles of law as at the date of this Agreement limiting its obligations, which are specifically referred to in any legal opinion delivered pursuant to Schedule 3 ( Conditions Precedent ) of this Agreement, legal, valid, binding and enforceable obligations; and

 

  (b) subject to any general principles of law as at the date of this Agreement set out in any legal opinion delivered pursuant to Schedule 3 ( Conditions Precedent ) of this Agreement:

 

  (i) the choice of English law as the governing law of this Agreement will be recognised and enforced in its jurisdiction of incorporation; and

 

  (ii) any judgment obtained in England in relation to this Agreement will be recognised and enforced in its jurisdiction of incorporation.

 

4. TRANSFER BY NOVATION AND FACILITIES INCREASE

 

4.1 Transfer by novation

On the Syndication Date (whether or not a Default is continuing) the Total Commitments shall be increased by $540,000,000 and each Existing Lender shall transfer by novation all or part of its Commitment, rights and obligations under the Finance Documents to a New Lender, so that:

 

  (a) each New Lender will become a Lender under the Amended Facilities Agreement with a Facility A Commitment and/or Facility B Commitment as set out in the relevant columns opposite its name in Schedule 2 ( The Lenders ); and

 

  (b) each Existing Lender’s Facility A Commitment and/or Facility B Commitment shall be reduced to the respective amount set out in the relevant columns opposite its name in Schedule 2 ( The Lenders ).

 

4.2 Procedure for transfer by novation

The transfer by novation set out in Clause 4.1 ( Transfer by novation ) shall take effect on the Syndication Date so that:

 

  (a) to the extent that in Clause 4.1 ( Transfer by novation ) each Existing Lender seeks to transfer by novation its rights and obligations under the Finance Documents each of the Obligors and each Existing Lender shall be released from further obligations towards one another under the Finance Documents and their respective rights against one another under the Finance Documents shall be cancelled (being the “ Discharged Rights and Obligations ”);

 

- 4 -


  (b) each of the Obligors and each New Lender shall assume obligations towards one another and/or acquire rights against one another which differ from the Discharged Rights and Obligations only insofar as that Obligor and the relevant New Lender have assumed and/or acquired the same in place of that Obligor and the Existing Lender;

 

  (c) the Agent, the Arranger, each New Lender and the other Lenders shall acquire the same rights and assume the same obligations between themselves as they would have acquired and assumed had each New Lender been an Original Lender with the rights and/or obligations acquired or assumed by it as a result of the transfer by novation and to that extent the Agent, the Arranger and the relevant Existing Lender shall each be released from further obligations to each other under the Finance Documents; and

 

  (d) each New Lender shall become a Party as a “Lender”.

 

4.3 Amounts due on or before the Syndication Date

Any amounts payable to the Existing Lenders by the Obligors pursuant to any Finance Document on or before the Syndication Date (including, without limitation, all interest, fees and commission payable on the Syndication Date) in respect of any period ending on or prior to the Syndication Date shall be for the account of the Existing Lenders and none of the New Lenders shall have any interest in, or any rights in respect of, any such amount.

 

4.4 Limitation of responsibility of Existing Lenders

 

  (a) Each New Lender confirms to each Existing Lender and the other Finance Parties that it:

 

  (i) has received a copy of the Original Facilities Agreement together with such other information as it has required in connection with this transaction;

 

  (ii) has made (and shall continue to make) its own independent investigation and assessment of the financial condition and affairs of each Obligor and its related entities in connection with its participation in this Agreement and the Amended Facilities Agreement and has not relied exclusively on any information provided to it by any Existing Lender in connection with any Finance Document; and

 

  (iii) will continue to make its own independent appraisal of the creditworthiness of each Obligor and its related entities whilst any amount is or may be outstanding under the Finance Documents or any Commitment is in force.

 

  (b) Unless expressly agreed to the contrary, the Existing Lenders make no representation or warranty and assume no responsibility to the New Lenders for:

 

  (i) the legality, validity, effectiveness, adequacy or enforceability of the Finance Documents or any other documents;

 

- 5 -


  (ii) the financial condition of any Obligor;

 

  (iii) the performance and observance by any Obligor of its obligations under the Finance Documents or any other documents; or

 

  (iv) the accuracy of any statements (whether written or oral) made in or in connection with the Finance Documents or any other document,

and any representations or warranties implied by law are excluded.

 

  (c) Nothing in any Finance Document obliges any Existing Lender to:

 

  (i) accept a re-transfer from any New Lender of any of the rights and obligations transferred by novation under this Agreement; or

 

  (ii) support any losses directly or indirectly incurred by a New Lender by reason of the non-performance by any Obligor of its obligations under the Finance Documents or otherwise.

 

4.5 Administrative Details

Each New Lender confirms that it has delivered to the Agent its Facility Office details and address, fax number and attention details for the purposes of clause 30.2 ( Addresses ) of the Amended Facilities Agreement.

 

5. THE ARRANGERS

The Arrangers, the Existing Lenders and the New Lenders agree (and the Parent acknowledges) that each financial institution listed in Part IV ( The Arrangers ) of Schedule 1 ( The Parties ) shall be given the status of mandated lead arranger or lead arranger (as described therein) in connection with the Facilities. This status shall be in addition to the status of Lender where the entities listed are also listed as New Lenders in Part III ( The New Lenders ) of Schedule 1 ( The Parties ) but shall otherwise confer no other status in connection with the Facilities.

 

6. RESTATEMENT

With effect from the Syndication Date the Original Facilities Agreement shall be amended and restated so that it shall be read and construed for all purposes as set out in Schedule 4 ( Amended Facilities Agreement ).

 

7. CONTINUITY AND FURTHER ASSURANCE

 

7.1 Continuing obligations

The provisions of the Original Facilities Agreement and the other Finance Documents shall, save as amended by this Agreement, continue in full force and effect.

 

7.2 Confirmation of Guarantee Obligations

For the avoidance of doubt, each Original Guarantor confirms for the benefit of the Finance Parties that all Guarantee Obligations owed by it under the Amended

 

- 6 -


Facilities Agreement shall (a) remain in full force and effect notwithstanding the amendments referred to in Clause 6 ( Restatement ) and (b) extend to any new obligations assumed by any Obligor under the Finance Documents as a result of this Agreement (including, but not limited to, under the Amended Facilities Agreement).

 

8. CONSENTS AND WAIVERS

 

8.1 Consent and waiver

The Parent, each other Obligor, the Arranger, the Existing Lenders and the Agent each:

 

  (a) consent to the New Lenders becoming Lenders; and

 

  (b) waive the requirements of clause 23 ( Changes to the Lenders ) of the Original Facilities Agreement for the purposes of this Agreement and for the transfer by novation effected pursuant to this Agreement.

 

8.2 Agent’s Waiver

The Agent waives the requirement for the payment of the fee referred to in clause 23.3 ( Assignment or transfer fee ) of the Original Facilities Agreement in respect of the transfers by novation effected pursuant to this Agreement.

 

9. MISCELLANEOUS

 

9.1 Incorporation of terms

The provisions of clause 30 ( Notices ), clause 32 ( Partial invalidity ), clause 33 ( Remedies and waivers ) and clause 38 ( Enforcement ) of the Original Facilities Agreement shall be incorporated into this Agreement as if set out in full in this Agreement and as if references in those clauses to “this Agreement” or “the Finance Documents” are references to this Agreement and as if references in those clauses to “Party” and “Lender” include the New Lenders.

 

9.2 Counterparts

This Agreement may be executed in any number of counterparts, and this has the same effect as if the signatures on the counterparts were on a single copy of this Agreement.

 

10. GOVERNING LAW

This Agreement and any non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with it are governed by English law.

This Agreement has been entered into on the date stated at the beginning of this Agreement.

 

- 7 -


SCHEDULE 1

THE PARTIES

PART I

THE OBLIGORS

 

Name of Original Borrowers    Registration number (or equivalent, if any)

GFI Joint Venture Holdings Proprietary Limited, incorporated in South Africa

   1998/023354/07

Gold Fields Operations Limited, incorporated in South Africa

   1959/003209/06

Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited, incorporated in the British Virgin Islands

   184982

 

Name of Original Guarantors    Registration number (or equivalent, if any)

Gold Fields Limited, incorporated in South Africa

   1968/004880/06

Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited, incorporated in the British Virgin Islands

   651406

Gold Fields Operations Limited, incorporated in South Africa

   1959/003209/06

Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited, incorporated in the British Virgin Islands

   184982

GFI Joint Venture Holdings Proprietary Limited, incorporated in South Africa

   1998/023354/07

 

- 8 -


PART II

THE EXISTING LENDERS

Barclays Bank PLC

Credit Suisse AG, London Branch

JPMorgan Chase Bank, N.A., London Branch

 

- 9 -


PART III

THE NEW LENDERS

Australia and New Zealand Banking Group Limited

Bank of America, N.A.

Bank of China Limited

Bank of Montreal, London Branch

BTMU (Europe) Limited

CIBC World Markets plc

Commonwealth Bank of Australia acting in its own capacity and through its offshore banking unit

HSBC Bank plc

The Royal Bank of Scotland plc

Scotiabank Europe plc

Standard Chartered Bank

Sumitomo Mitsui Finance Dublin Limited

Westpac Banking Corporation (acting through its Offshore Banking Unit)

 

- 10 -


PART IV

THE ARRANGERS

Name of mandated lead arranger

Australia and New Zealand Banking Group Limited

Banc of America Securities Limited

Bank of China Limited

Bank of Montreal

The Bank of Tokyo-Mitsubishi UFJ, Ltd.

CIBC World Markets plc

Commonwealth Bank of Australia acting in its own capacity and through its offshore banking unit

HSBC Bank plc

The Royal Bank of Scotland plc

Scotiabank Europe plc

Standard Chartered Bank

Name of lead arranger

Sumitomo Mitsui Finance Dublin Limited

Westpac Banking Corporation (acting through its Offshore Banking Unit)

 

- 11 -


SCHEDULE 2

THE LENDERS

 

Name of Lender

   Facility A Commitment      Facility B Commitment  

Barclays Bank PLC

   $ 50,000,000       $ 50,000,000   

BTMU (Europe) Limited

   $ 50,000,000       $ 50,000,000   

Commonwealth Bank of Australia acting in its own capacity and through its offshore banking unit

   $ 50,000,000       $ 50,000,000   

Credit Suisse AG, London Branch

   $ 50,000,000       $ 50,000,000   

HSBC Bank plc

   $ 50,000,000       $ 50,000,000   

JPMorgan Chase Bank, N.A., London Branch

   $ 50,000,000       $ 50,000,000   

Australia and New Zealand Banking Group Limited

   $ 45,000,000       $ 45,000,000   

Bank of America, N.A.

   $ 45,000,000       $ 45,000,000   

Bank of China Limited

   $ 45,000,000       $ 45,000,000   

Bank of Montreal, London Branch

   $ 45,000,000       $ 45,000,000   

CIBC World Markets plc

   $ 45,000,000       $ 45,000,000   

The Royal Bank of Scotland plc

   $ 45,000,000       $ 45,000,000   

Scotiabank Europe plc

   $ 45,000,000       $ 45,000,000   

Standard Chartered Bank

   $ 45,000,000       $ 45,000,000   

Sumitomo Mitsui Finance Dublin Limited

   $ 30,000,000       $ 30,000,000   

Westpac Banking Corporation (acting through its Offshore Banking Unit)

   $ 30,000,000       $ 30,000,000   
   $ 720,000,000       $ 720,000,000   

 

- 12 -


SCHEDULE 3

CONDITIONS PRECEDENT

 

1. Obligors

 

  (a) A copy of a good standing certificate with respect to Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited and Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited, issued as of a recent date by the Registrar of Corporate Affairs in the British Virgin Islands.

 

  (b) A certificate of incumbency from the registered agent for Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited and Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited.

 

2. Legal Opinions

 

  (a) A legal opinion of Clifford Chance LLP legal advisers to the Arrangers and the Agent in England, substantially in the form distributed to the Existing Lenders and the New Lenders prior to signing this Agreement.

 

  (b) A legal opinion of Conyers Dill & Pearman, legal advisers to the Arrangers and Agent in the British Virgin Islands, substantially in the form distributed to the Existing Lenders and the New Lenders prior to signing this Agreement.

 

  (c) A legal opinion of Edward Nathan Sonnenbergs, legal advisers to the Arrangers and Agent in South Africa, substantially in the form distributed to the Existing Lenders and the New Lenders prior to signing this Agreement.

 

- 13 -


SCHEDULE 4

AMENDED FACILITIES AGREEMENT

[ Insert Amended Facilities Agreement ]

 

- 14 -


SIGNATURES

The Parent

For and on behalf of

GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

By: PAUL ANDY SCHMIDT

The Original Borrowers

For and on behalf of

GFI JOINT VENTURE HOLDINGS PROPRIETARY LIMITED

By: NICHOLAS JOHN HOLLAND

For and on behalf of

GOLD FIELDS OPERATIONS LIMITED

By: PAUL ANDY SCHMIDT

For and on behalf of

GOLD FIELDS OROGEN HOLDING (BVI) LIMITED

By: RICHARD TAYLOR

The Original Guarantors

For and on behalf of

GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

By: PAUL ANDY SCHMIDT

 

- 15 -


For and on behalf of

GOLD FIELDS HOLDINGS COMPANY (BVI) LIMITED

By: MICHAEL DAVID FLEISCHER

For and on behalf of

GOLD FIELDS OPERATIONS LIMITED

By: PAUL ANDY SCHMIDT

For and on behalf of

GOLD FIELDS OROGEN HOLDING (BVI) LIMITED

By: RICHARD TAYLOR

For and on behalf of

GFI JOINT VENTURE HOLDINGS PROPRIETARY LIMITED

By: NICHOLAS JOHN HOLLAND

The Agent

For and on behalf of

BARCLAYS BANK PLC

By: KEITH HATTON

The Arrangers

For and on behalf of

BARCLAYS BANK PLC

By: KEITH HATTON

 

- 16 -


For and on behalf of

CREDIT SUISSE AG, LONDON BRANCH

By: MARKUS NIEMEIER                      KARIM BLASETTI

For and on behalf of

J.P. MORGAN LIMITED

By: ISABELLE NINO

The Existing Lenders

For and on behalf of

BARCLAYS BANK PLC

By: KEITH HATTON

For and on behalf of

CREDIT SUISSE AG, LONDON BRANCH

By: MARKUS NIEMEIER                      KARIM BLASETTI

For and on behalf of

JPMORGAN CHASE BANK, N.A., LONDON BRANCH

By: ISABELLE NINO

 

- 157 -


The New Lenders

For and on behalf of

AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND BANKING GROUP LIMITED

By: RICHARD SMITH-MORGAN

 

- 158 -


For and on behalf of

BANK OF AMERICA, N.A.

By: V. G. IUSHKO

 

- 19 -


For and on behalf of

BANK OF CHINA LIMITED

By: STEPHEN HARDMAN                YAN WANG

 

- 20 -


For and on behalf of

BANK OF MONTREAL, LONDON BRANCH

By: A. L. EBDON                 LISA RODRIGUEZ

 

- 21 -


For and on behalf of

BTMU (EUROPE) LIMITED

By: TAIJU HISAI

 

- 22 -


For and on behalf of

CIBC WORLD MARKETS PLC

By: STEPHEN REDDING                GEOFFREY WILSON

 

- 23 -


For and on behalf of

COMMONWEALTH BANK OF AUSTRALIA ACTING IN ITS OWN CAPACITY AND THROUGH ITS OFFSHORE BANKING UNIT

By: JOHANNES OOSTHUIZEN

 

- 24 -


For and on behalf of

HSBC BANK PLC

By: SEVAG AREVIAN

 

- 25 -


For and on behalf of

THE ROYAL BANK OF SCOTLAND PLC

By: GEORGIA BAYNE

 

- 26 -


For and on behalf of

SCOTIABANK EUROPE PLC

By: JOHN FLEXER                WILLIAM SWORDS

 

- 27 -


For and on behalf of

STANDARD CHARTERED BANK

By: HIREN SINGHARAY

 

- 28 -


For and on behalf of

SUMITOMO MITSUI FINANCE DUBLIN LIMITED

By: JAMES SHEILS                HELEN DOWDALL

 

- 29 -


For and on behalf of

WESTPAC BANKING CORPORATION (ACTING THROUGH ITS OFFSHORE BANKING UNIT)

By: T CONNELL

 

- 30 -

Exhibit 4.26

INDEMNITY AGREEMENT

entered into between

GOLD FIELDS OROGEN HOLDING (BVI) LIMITED

and

GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

and

GOLD FIELDS OPERATIONS LIMITED

and

GOLD FIELDS HOLDINGS COMPANY (BVI) LIMITED

and

SIBANYE GOLD LIMITED

relating to the guarantee in respect of U.S.$1,000,000,000 4.875 per cent. Guaranteed Notes due 2020 issued by Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited and guaranteed by Gold Fields Limited, Sibanye Gold Limited (formerly GFI Mining South Africa Proprietary Limited), Gold Fields Operations Limited and Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited


The Parties to this Agreement are:

 

(1) GOLD FIELDS OROGEN HOLDING (BVI) LIMITED , a corporation incorporated under the laws of the British Virgin Islands with registered number 184982 (the “ Issuer ”)

 

(2) GOLD FIELDS LIMITED , a public company duly incorporated under the laws of the Republic of South Africa with registration number 1968/004880/06 (the “ Company ”);

 

(3) GOLD FIELDS OPERATIONS LIMITED , a public company duly incorporated under the laws of the Republic of South Africa with registration number 1959/003209/06 (“ GFO ”);

 

(4) GOLD FIELDS HOLDINGS COMPANY (BVI) LIMITED , a corporation incorporated under the laws of the British Virgin Islands with registered number 651406 (“ Gold Fields Holdings ”); and

 

(5) SIBANYE GOLD LIMITED , a public company duly incorporated under the laws of South Africa with registration number 2002/031431/06 (formerly GFI Mining South Africa Proprietary Limited), (“ SGL ” and, together with the Company, GFO and Gold Fields Holdings, the “ Guarantors ”).

It is recorded that:

 

(A) The Issuer issued U.S.$1,000,000,000 4.875 per cent. Guaranteed Notes due 2020 (the “ Notes ”), guaranteed by the Guarantors. The Notes are constituted by a trust deed dated 7 October 2010, and made between the Issuer, the Guarantors and Citicorp Trustee Company Limited as Trustee (the “ Trustee ”) (as may be further amended, supplemented and/or restated from time to time, the “ Trust Deed ”) and were issued subject to the terms and conditions of the Notes set out in Schedule 4 to the Trust Deed.

 

(B) The Guarantors have, pursuant to the Trust Deed, provided a joint and several payment guarantee in respect of the obligations of the Issuer under the Notes (the “ Notes Guarantee ”).

 

(C) The Company has announced its intention to implement the Demerger.

 

(D) Each of the Issuer, the Company, GFO and Gold Fields Holdings has agreed to indemnify SGL and hold SGL harmless in respect of any Noteholder Claims made against SGL in its capacity as a Guarantor of the Notes under the Notes Guarantee, subject to the terms and conditions set out in this Agreement.

The Parties agree as set out below:

 

1 Definitions and Interpretation

In this Agreement, unless the context otherwise requires, the provisions in this Clause 1 apply:

 

1.1 Definitions

Agents ” means the Paying and Transfer Agents and the Registrar (each as defined in the Paying and Transfer Agency Agreement), and “ Agent ” means any one of the Agents;

Agreement ” means this Indemnity Agreement;

Business Day ” means a day (other than a Saturday, a Sunday or official public holiday in South Africa within the meaning of the Public Holidays Act, 1994) on which banks are open for general business in Johannesburg;

 

 

1


Demerger ” means the demerger of the business of SGL and its subsidiaries from the business of the Company and its other subsidiaries by way of the Distribution;

Demerger Date ” means the first day on which each of the following has occurred (i) the entire share capital of SGL is listed and admitted to trading on the Johannesburg Stock Exchange; and (ii) the Distribution is effected and SGL accordingly ceases to be a subsidiary of the Company;

Distribution ” means the pro rata distribution in specie under South African law by the Company of the entire issued share capital held by the Company in SGL to the Company's existing shareholders, American depository receipt holders and international depository receipt holders;

Expiry Date ” means the first date on which none of the Notes shall remain outstanding (as defined in the Trust Deed) or, if earlier, the date on which SGL is unconditionally and irrevocably released as a Guarantor of the Notes;

Noteholder ” means the person whose name is entered in the register of holders of the Notes as the holder thereof;

Noteholder Claims ” means any and all losses, payments, damages, liabilities, claims, costs and expenses payable by SGL (whether jointly and severally or in any other capacity) to the Trustee, any Agent or any Noteholder directly related to the Notes or the Trust Deed in its capacity as a Guarantor of the Notes under or in connection with the Notes Guarantee;

Notes ” has the meaning given in Recital (A);

Notes Guarantee ” has the meaning given in Recital (B);

Parties ” means the parties to this Agreement and “ Party ” means, as the context requires, any one of them;

Paying and Transfer Agency Agreement ” means a paying and transfer agency agreement in respect of the Notes dated 7 October 2010, and made between the Issuer, the Guarantors of the Notes, Citicorp Trustee Company Limited as Trustee, Citibank, N.A., London Branch as Principal Paying and Transfer Agent for the Notes and Citigroup Global Markets Deutschland AG as Registrar (as may be further amended, supplemented and/or restated from time to time);

Trust Deed ” has the meaning given in Recital (A);

Trustee ” has the meaning given in Recital (A); and

ZAR Facility ” means the ZAR6,000,000,000 Term and Revolving Credit Facilities Agreement entered into by and between SGL, Absa Bank Limited (acting through its Absa Capital division), Nedbank Limited (acting through its Nedbank Capital and Nedbank Corporate divisions), The Standard Bank of South Africa Limited (acting through its Corporate and Investment Banking division), FirstRand Bank Limited (acting through its Rand Merchant Bank division) and JPMorgan Chase Bank, N.A., Johannesburg Branch, dated 28 November 2012, or any refinancing thereof (from time to time).

 

1.2 Singular, plural, gender

References to one gender include all genders and references to the singular include the plural and vice versa .

 

 

2


1.3 Clauses and headings

References to Clauses are to Clauses of this Agreement. Headings shall be ignored in construing this Agreement.

 

1.4 References to persons and companies

References to:

 

  1.4.1 a person include any company, partnership or unincorporated association (whether or not having separate legal personality);

 

  1.4.2 a company shall include any company, corporation or any body corporate, wherever incorporated; and

 

  1.4.3 any agreement include appendices thereto, as well as amendments, variations and substitutions of such agreement.

 

2 Indemnity

 

2.1 With effect from the Demerger Date, each of the Issuer, the Company, GFO and Gold Fields Holdings (each, an “ Indemnifier ” and collectively, the “ Indemnifiers ”) hereby jointly and severally indemnifies and holds SGL harmless from and against any and all Noteholder Claims (whether such Noteholder Claims are made prior to or after the Demerger Date or whether the circumstances (including, without limitation, the occurrence of any “Event of Default” (as defined in the Trust Deed)) giving rise to such Noteholder Claims arose prior to or after the Demerger Date) and any direct funding costs or related expenses incurred by SGL pending payment by the Indemnifiers under this Agreement, and the Indemnifiers agree, jointly and severally, that if SGL is required in its capacity as a Guarantor of the Notes under the Notes Guarantee to pay such Noteholder Claim and/or such direct funding costs or related expenses, they shall, within 3 (three) Business Days of demand by SGL, pay to SGL an amount equal to such Noteholder Claim and/or such direct funding costs and related expenses.

 

2.2 Notwithstanding Clause 2.1:

 

  2.2.1 the Indemnifiers shall not be responsible or have any liability to SGL or any other party for any indirect, special, consequential or any other damages, other than the Noteholder Claims and/or the direct funding costs and related expenses referred to in Clause 2.1; and

 

  2.2.2 the Indemnifiers shall not be responsible or have any liability to SGL for any losses or damages which SGL may suffer or incur and which relate to or arise from, directly or indirectly, the ZAR Facility; provided that this Clause 2.2.2 shall not be construed as limiting the rights of SGL to make a demand under Clause 2.1 if the circumstances giving rise to the relevant Noteholder Claims arise from the occurrence of an “ Event of Default ” (as defined in the ZAR Facility).

 

3 Claims

 

3.1 If SGL becomes aware of any Noteholder Claim relevant for the purposes of Clause 2, SGL shall:

 

  3.1.1 promptly notify each of the Indemnifiers in writing in accordance with Clause 10.3; and

 

 

3


  3.1.2 provide to the Indemnifiers and/or (if requested to do so) their legal advisers, at the cost of the Company, such information and documentation relating to such Noteholder Claim as the Company may reasonably require.

No failure by SGL to comply with its obligations under this Clause 3.1 shall affect the liabilities of the Indemnifiers under this Agreement.

 

3.2 The Issuer shall give notice to each of the other Indemnifiers and SGL in accordance with Clause 10.3 hereof (i) promptly after receipt of any notice from the Trustee declaring the Notes to be due and payable prior to their stated maturity date as a result of an Event of Default (as defined in the Trust Deed) and (ii) promptly after becoming aware of any Potential Event of Default (as defined in the Trust Deed).

 

4 Guarantee Fee

The Indemnifiers and SGL have entered into a separate agreement in relation to a guarantee fee to be paid by the Issuer (failing which the Company, GFO and Gold Fields Holdings, jointly and severally) to SGL in respect of the period from and including the Demerger Date to but excluding the Expiry Date.

 

5 No Deductions

All sums payable by the Indemnifiers under this Agreement shall be paid free and clear of any deductions, taxes, withholdings, set-offs or counterclaims (together, “ Withholdings ”), save only as may be required by law. If any Withholdings are required by law, the relevant Indemnifier shall be obliged to pay such sum as will after such Withholding has been made leave SGL with the same amount as SGL would have been entitled to receive in the absence of a requirement to make a Withholding.

 

6 Waiver of Defences

The obligations of each of the Indemnifiers under this Agreement shall not be prejudiced, affected or diminished by any act, omission, circumstance, matter or thing which, but for this provision, would reduce, release or prejudice any of its obligations under this Agreement or otherwise exonerate such Indemnifier from its obligations under this Agreement, in whole or in part, including, without limitation:

 

  6.1.1 any time, waiver or consent granted to, or composition with, any Indemnifier or other person;

 

  6.1.2 the release of any other Indemnifier or any other person under the terms of any composition or arrangement with any creditor of any Indemnifier;

 

  6.1.3 the taking, variation, compromise, exchange, renewal or release of, or refusal or neglect to perfect, execute, take up or enforce, any rights against, or security over assets of, any Indemnifier or other person or any non-presentation or non-observance of any formality or other requirement in respect of any instrument or any failure to realise the full value of any security;

 

  6.1.4 any incapacity or lack of power, authority or legal personality of or dissolution or change in the members or status of an Indemnifier or any other person;

 

  6.1.5

any amendment, novation, supplement, extension restatement (however fundamental and whether or not more onerous) or replacement of any Finance

 

 

4


  Document (as defined in the ZAR Facility) or any other document or security including without limitation any change in the purpose of, any extension of or any increase in any facility or the addition of any new facility under any Finance Document (as defined in the ZAR Facility) or other document or security;

 

  6.1.6 any unenforceability, illegality, invalidity suspension or cancellation of any obligation of any person under this Agreement or the Notes or any other document or security purporting to reduce or otherwise affect such obligations with the intent that the each Indemnifier’s obligations under this Agreement shall remain in full force and this indemnity shall be construed accordingly as if there were no such unenforceability, illegality, invalidity suspension or cancellation;

 

  6.1.7 any insolvency, liquidation, winding-up, business rescue or similar proceedings (including, but not limited to, receipt of any distribution made under or in connection with those proceedings);

 

  6.1.8 this Agreement or any other related document (including, without limitation the agreement referred to in Clause 4) not being executed by or binding against any other Indemnifier or any other party; or

 

  6.1.9 any other fact or circumstance arising on which an Indemnifier might otherwise be able to rely on a defence based on prejudice, waiver or estoppel.

 

7 Demerger Date

The obligations of each Party under this Agreement shall be conditional upon the occurrence of the Demerger Date. If the Demerger Date has not occurred on or before 28 February 2013, or such later date as may be agreed in writing between the Parties, this Agreement shall terminate and be of no further force or effect and no Party shall be under any liability to any other in respect of this Agreement.

 

8 Undertaking by SGL

SGL undertakes in favour of the Indemnifiers that it shall comply with each of its obligations under the Notes and the Trust Deed.

 

9 Continuing Obligations

The Indemnifiers’ obligations and liabilities under this Agreement shall continue and remain in full force and effect as a continuing security and indemnity until the Expiry Date.

 

10 Other Provisions

 

10.1 Assignment

Neither Party may, without the prior written consent of the other, assign, grant any security interest over, hold on trust or otherwise transfer the benefit of all or any of its obligations under this Agreement, or any benefit arising under or out of this Agreement, provided that SGL shall be entitled to enter into a Cession in Security with the Finance Parties (as defined in the ZAR Facility) before the Demerger Date pursuant to which SGL will cede in securitatem debiti all of its rights, title and interest in and to this Agreement in favour of the Finance Parties (as defined in the ZAR Facility), jointly and severally, as security for its obligations under the Finance Documents (as defined in the ZAR Facility) to which it is a party.

 

 

5


10.2 Whole Agreement

This Agreement (together with the Trust Deed and the Notes and the Paying and Transfer Agency Agreement) contains the whole agreement between the Parties relating to the subject matter of this Agreement to the exclusion of any terms implied by law which may be excluded by contract and supersede any previous written or oral agreement between the Parties in relation to the matters dealt with in this Agreement.

 

10.3 Notices

 

  10.3.1 Any notice or other communication in connection with this Agreement (each, a “ Notice ”) shall be:

 

  (i) in writing; and

 

  (ii) delivered by hand, fax, pre-paid first class post or courier.

 

  10.3.2 A Notice to any of the Indemnifiers shall be sent to the following address, or such other person or address as the Company may notify to SGL from time to time:

c/o Gold Fields Limited

150 Helen Road

Sandown

Sandton, 2196

South Africa

Fax: +27 11 562 9841

Attention: Executive Vice President: General Counsel

 

  10.3.3 A Notice to SGL shall be sent to the following address, or such other person or address as SGL may notify to the Company from time to time:

Libanon Businesspark

1 Hospital Road (off Cedar Avenue)

Libanon

Westonaria

1779

South Africa]

Fax: +27 11 562 9826

Attention: Mr Charl Keyter

 

  10.3.4 A Notice shall be effective upon receipt and shall be deemed to have been received:

 

  (i) 60 hours after posting, if delivered by pre-paid first class post;

 

  (ii) at the time of delivery, if delivered by hand or courier;

 

  (iii) at the time of transmission in legible form, if delivered by fax.

 

 

6


10.4 Counterparts

This Agreement may be executed in any number of counterparts, all of which taken together shall constitute one and the same instrument. Any Party may enter into this Agreement by executing any such counterpart.

 

10.5 Governing law

Regardless of the place of execution, performance or domicile of the Parties, this Agreement and all modifications and amendments hereof shall be governed by and construed under and in accordance with the laws of South Africa. The Parties hereby consent and submit to the non-exclusive jurisdiction of the High Court of South Africa (South Gauteng High Court, Johannesburg division) (or any successor to that division) for the purpose of any action or other legal proceedings that any of them may institute with regard to the any matters or claims arising in terms hereof.

 

SIGNED at  

Sandton

   on   

20 December

   2012
AS WITNESS:                 

/s/ P.H. Henning

      For:    GOLD FIELDS LIMITED   

P.H. HENNING

     

/s/ Paul A. Schmidt

  
(Name in Block Letters)       Duly authorised thereto   
SIGNED at  

Douglas, Isle of Man

   on   

19 December

   2012
AS WITNESS:                

/s/ Lucy Woolnough

     For:    GOLD FIELDS OROGEN HOLDING (BVI)
LIMITED
  

LUCY WOOLNOUGH

    

/s/ Richard Taylor DIRECTOR

  
(Name in Block Letters)      Duly authorised thereto   

 

 

7


SIGNED at  

Sandton

   on   

20 December

   2012
AS WITNESS:                 

/s/ P.H. Henning

      For:      GOLD FIELDS OPERATIONS LIMITED   

P.H. HENNING

     

/s/ Paul A. Schmidt

  
(Name in Block Letters)       Duly authorised thereto   
SIGNED at  

Sandton

   on   

20 December

   2012
AS WITNESS:                

/s/ P.H. Henning

     For:    GOLD FIELDS HOLDINGS COMPANY (BVI)
LIMITED
  

P.H. HENNING

    

/s/ Michael D. Fleischer

  
(Name in Block Letters)      Duly authorised thereto   
SIGNED at  

Sandton

   on   

20 December

   2012
AS WITNESS:                

/s/ P. H. Henning

     For:    SIBANYE GOLD LIMITED   

P.H. HENNING

    

/s/ Charl Keyter

  
(Name in Block Letters)      Duly authorised thereto   

 

8

Exhibit 4.27

TRANSITIONAL SERVICES AGREEMENT

Between

GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

(“Gold Fields”)

And

SIBANYE GOLD LIMITED

(“Sibanye Gold”)

and

GOLD FIELDS SHARED SERVICES PROPRIETARY LIMITED

(a wholly owned subsidiary of Sibanye Gold Limited No: 200202077507)

(“the Provider”)

and

GOLD FIELDS GROUP SERVICES PROPRIETARY LIMITED

(a wholly owned subsidiary of Gold Fields Limited No: 2006/038878/07)

(“the Recipient”)


1. INTERPRETATION

In this Agreement, unless the context clearly requires a different interpretation, the following words and phrases shall have the meanings assigned to them hereunder and cognate expressions shall have corresponding meanings -

 

1.1              “Agreement”  

:               

    means this agreement together with Annexures “A”, “B” and “C”, hereto;
1.2   “Assets”   :     means the right, property, interests and tangible assets owned by the Parties, including, without limitation
        third parties contracts and licenses immediately prior to the Effective Date which form part of the businesses of the parties on and as at the Effective Date and:
       

(a)    the assets relating to the businesses;

       

(b)    any shares in any company, or any interest, part participation or participation in any syndication, joint venture or partnership; and

       

(c)    all rights in and to claims or litigation, fixed assets, debts owed to either Party in respect of the businesses of the Parties;

1.3   “Business Day”   :     means any calendar day other than a Saturday, Sunday or public holiday in the Republic of South Africa;
1.3   “Costs Closing Date”   :     means the annual pre-determined monthly date on which costs for Gold Fields Limited will close and which Parties agree to, reflected in Annexure “C” of this Agreement
1.4   “Data”   :     means all data owned, controlled and managed by the Parties, from time to time, including all data, information, text, codes, diagrams, images and sounds, in whatever media same may be stored, which data is used for and in connection with the business of the Parties;

 

2


1.5   “Data Protection Legislation”   :     means any legislation in force from time to time which implements the data protection directives and is applicable to the provision of the Services and the Transition Services pursuant to this Agreement;
1.6   “Effective Date”   :     means the date of Unbundling being on or about 18 February 2013, notwithstanding the Signature Date;
1.7   “Gold Fields Group”   :     means the Gold Fields Limited group of companies;
1.8   “Gold Fields”   :     Gold Fields Limited (Registration No. 1968/004880/06), a public company duly incorporated in South Africa in terms of the Companies Act 71 of 2008, all the ordinary shares of which are listed on the JSE;
1.9           “Intellectual Property Rights”   :     means:
        (a) patents, trademarks, service marks, registered design, applications and rights to apply for any of those rights, trade, business and company names, internet, domain names and email addresses, unregistered trademarks and service marks, copyrights, database rights, rights in software, know-how, rights in design and inventions;
        (b) rights under licenses, consents, orders, statutes or otherwise in relation to a right in paragraph (a);

 

3


        (c) rights of the same or similar effect or nature as or to those in paragraphs (a) and (b) which now or in the future may subsist; and
        (d) the right to sue for past infringements of any of the foregoing rights;
1.10   “IT Services”   :     means such information technology services provided by the Recipient as at the Signature Date to the Gold Fields Group companies and the Sibanye Gold Group of Companies, including IT support services, which services will continue during the Transition Period subject to the terms of this Agreement;
1.11   “Parties”   :     means Sibanye Gold, the Provider, the Recipient. and Gold Fields Limited. “Party” shall mean either Sibanye Gold, or the Provider or Gold Fields or the Recipient, as the case may be;
1.12   “Provider”   :     means Gold Fields Shared Services Proprietary Limited a private company duly incorporated in South Africa in terms of the Companies Act;
1.13   “Provider Personnel”   :     means the personnel used by the Provider to carry out the Services;
1.14   “Provider Site”   :     means any site of the Provider at which the Transition Services will be provided;
1.15           “Recipient”   :     means Gold Fields Group Services Proprietary Limited, a private company duly incorporated in South Africa in terms of the Companies Act;

 

4


1.16   “Recipient Personnel”   :     means the personnel used by the Recipient to carry out the Transitional Services;
1.17   “Recipient Site”   :     means any site of the Recipient at which Services will be provided;
1.18   “Services”   :     means those services as stipulated in the SLA Agreements referred to in Annexure “A” and further includes the IT Services where applicable;
1.19   “SLA Agreements”   :     means those service agreements entered into between the Recipient and the Provider and/or other Gold Fields group companies;
1.20   “Sibanye Gold Limited”   :     Sibanye Gold Limited (registration 2002/031431/06), (formerly known as GFI Mining South Africa Proprietary Limited) a public company duly incorporated in South Africa in terms of the Companies Act;
1.21   “Sibanye Gold Group”   :     means the Sibanye Gold group of companies;
1.22   “Signature Date”   :     means the date of signature of this Agreement by the Party signing last in time;
1.23   “Tax Invoice”   :     means a Tax Invoice as defined in terms of the VAT Act;
1.24           “Total Costs”   :     means all costs and expenses reasonably properly, necessarily and actually incurred which shall be paid in accordance with the provisions of the SLA Agreements referred to in Annexure A and the IT Services, or any amendments to those agreements or the terms of this Agreement, during the Transitional Period;

 

5


1.25   “Transitional Services”  

:

    means the services referred to in Annexure “B” and the IT Services where applicable be provided to the Provider by the Recipient;
1.26   “Transition Plan”  

:

    means the non-binding plan to be agreed to by the Parties with respect to the Services and the Transition Services prior to the Effective Date;
1.27   “Transition Period”  

:

    means a period of 12 months from the date of Unbundling or such extended period as agreed in writing between the Parties;
1.28   “Termination Date”  

:

    means the date of termination of this Agreement in accordance with the terms of this Agreement;
1.29   “Unbundling”  

:

    The pro rata in specie distribution by Gold Fields of its shares in Sibanye Gold to Gold Fields shareholders in terms of section 46 of the Companies Act 71 of 2008 (“ Companies Act ”) and section 46 of the Income Tax Act 58 of 1962 (“ Income Tax Act ”), and as authorised by Gold Fields’ memorandum of incorporation, to be effected in the ratio of one Sibanye Gold share for every one Gold Fields share held at the close of business on or about 15 February 2013, and otherwise on the terms and conditions set out in this Agreement such that each Gold Fields shareholder on the 18 th February 2013 will become the beneficial owner of one Sibanye Gold share for each Gold Fields share held by it on that date;
1.30           “VAT Act”  

:

    means the Value Added Tax Act, 89 of 1991, as amended from time to time;

 

6


2. INTRODUCTION

 

2.1 It is recorded that currently the Provider conducts the business of -

 

2.1.1 rendering financial operations and materials management services to certain members of the Gold Fields Group in accordance with the SLA Agreements and has the necessary skill, knowledge and expertise in order to provide such services;

 

2.1.2 procuring and supplying certain members of the Gold Fields Group with materials and stock in accordance with the SLA Agreements required by such members in conducting their respective operations.

 

2.2 The Recipient currently conducts its services business of providing, amongst others, financial and treasury, legal and corporate services, human resource and benefit management, information technology, group insurance, internal audit and corporate communication and investor relations services.

 

2.3 Gold Fields has approved a transaction whereby Sibanye Gold will be listed on the JSE Limited (“ JSE ”) in South Africa and the listing of American depositary receipts (“ ADR s”) on the New York Stock Exchange (the “ NYSE ”) after which Sibanye Gold will be unbundled in terms of S46 of the Companies Act and S46 of the Income Tax Act as amended.

 

2.4 The Parties agree to use all reasonable endeavours and act in good faith in carrying out the terms of this Agreement after the Unbundling of Sibanye Gold from the Gold Fields Group and during the subsequent Transition Period the intention of the Parties being that the transition should be as smooth and non disruptive as possible for both Parties.

 

2.5 Gold Fields will require the Provider to assist with the continuation of Services in terms of the SLA Agreements it currently performs in relation to the Recipient and other Gold Fields group companies for the Transition Period in accordance with the terms of this Agreement.

 

7


2.6 In certain instances the Provider will require the Recipient to assist with providing Transition Services the Provider currently performs or will be required to perform due to the Unbundling to the Provider for the Transition Period in accordance with the terms of this Agreement.

 

2.7 This Agreement sets out the terms and conditions upon which (i) the Provider will provide the Recipient and where applicable other members of the Gold Fields Group with Services and (ii) the Recipient will provide the Transitional Services to the Provider, and if necessary other Sibanye Gold group companies, during the Transition Period or longer if agreed to by the parties in writing in accordance with the terms of this Agreement.

 

3. APPOINTMENT

 

3.1 Gold Fields and the the Recipient hereby appoints the Provider, who hereby accepts such appointment, to continue to render the Services as described in the SLA Agreements and where applicable, the IT Services, to the Gold Fields Group; subject to the terms and conditions set out in this Agreement.

 

3.2 Sibanye Gold and the Provider hereby appoints the Recipient, who hereby accepts such appointment, to render the Transition Services and where applicable, the IT Services, to the Sibanye Gold Group, subject to the terms and conditions set out in this Agreement.

 

3.3 This Agreement shall be deemed to have commenced on the Effective Date and shall, subject to any rights of cancellation or termination which either Party may have in terms of this Agreement or in law, thereafter continue for the Transition Period.

 

3.4 All SLA Agreements referred to in Annexure “A” or third party agreements (discussed in Clause 7below) entered into between the Parties and still in place at the Signature Date relating to the subject matter of this Agreement shall remain in place for the Transition Period subject to Clause 4 below.

 

4. ASSETS

 

4.1 The Parties agree that subject to the provisions of this Agreement, all Assets that are required to be transferred between the Parties will be identified in writing and agreed to by the Parties (and signed off by the Chief Financial Officer of each of Gold Fields and Sibanye Gold) before or by the Effective Date and included in the Transition Plan.

 

8


4.2 The Parties agree that rights, title and interest in all of the Assets shall be assigned either to Gold Fields or Sibanye Gold as the identification process referred to in 4.1 determines.

 

4.3 The Parties jointly agree to give, where applicable, such notice of the assignment to any relevant third parties and in such form as may be agreed between them.

 

5. PERFORMANCE OF SERVICES AND TRANSITION SERVICES

 

5.1 The Parties undertake to provide or procure the provision of the Services and the Transition Services as the case may be and the Parties undertake to pay or procure payment for such Services or Transition Services, subject to and in accordance with the terms of this Agreement.

 

5.2 The Parties intend that the Services and the Transition Services will be provided in accordance with the Transition Plan but agree that the Transition Plan is non-binding and is subject to amendment during the Transition Period. In the event of any discrepancy between this Agreement and the Transition Plan, this Agreement will prevail.

 

5.3 In order to give effect to the Parties intention referred to in 2.4, the Parties agree that they will make, such amendments to the Services and /or the Transition Services as each Party considers necessary to define the Services and Transition Services accurately and comprehensively. Any such amendments shall be recorded in writing signed by an authorised representative of each party. The Transition Plan shall be updated after every amendment setting out any changes required to the Transition Plan. Any Dispute as to the amendments to the Services or Transition Services either before or after such amendments are agreed, shall be referred to the Dispute Resolution Process referred to in Clause 21.2 for resolution.

 

6. PROVISION OF SERVICES

 

6.1 The Provider undertakes and warrants that for the duration of this Agreement, it shall -

 

6.1.1 render the Services and supply the materials and its other duties under this Agreement diligently and competently and at a level of skill, ability and performance that is acceptable to the Recipient;

 

9


6.1.2 in addition to rendering the Services, render such other services to the Recipient as may be agreed in writing between the Parties from time to time;

 

6.1.3 to the extent necessary for the Provider to render the Services and carry out its duties in terms of this Agreement, appoint properly trained and suitably qualified employees;

 

6.1.4 on demand by the Recipient and in any event on the Termination Date, deliver to the Recipient all documents, the Data or other materials of whatever nature and irrespective on what media same are stored as prepared by the Provider in the course of rendering the Services and performing its duties under this Agreement;

 

6.1.5 maintain the highest standards of workmanship and shall comply with all applicable legislation, by-laws and regulations in performing its obligations in terms of this Agreement.

 

7. PROVISION OF TRANSITION SERVICES

 

7.1 The Recipient undertakes and warrants that for the duration of this Agreement, it shall -

 

7.1.1 render the Transition Services and its other duties under this Agreement diligently and competently and at a level of skill, ability and performance that is acceptable to the Recipient;

 

7.1.2 in addition to rendering the Transition Services, render such other services to the Recipient as may be agreed in writing between the Parties from time to time;

 

7.1.3 to the extent necessary for the Recipient to render the Transition Services and carry out its duties in terms of this Agreement, appoint properly trained and suitably qualified employees;

 

7.1.4

on demand by the Provider and in any event on the Termination Date, deliver to the Provider all documents, the Data or other materials of whatever nature and

 

10


  respective on what media same are stored as prepared by the Recipient Provider in the course of rendering the Transition Services and performing its duties under this Agreement;

 

7.1.5 maintain the highest standards of workmanship and shall comply with all applicable legislation, by-laws and regulations in performing its obligations in terms of this Agreement.

 

8. THE RECIPIENT AND PROVIDER OBLIGATION

The Services

The Recipient will:

 

8.1 allow the Provider’s Personnel, on reasonable notice and the production of satisfactory evidence of identity and authority:

 

8.1.1 reasonable access to each Recipient Site; and

 

8.1.2 reasonable facilities at each Recipient;

at all reasonable times and to the extent necessary for the performance of the Provider’s obligations under this Agreement, provided that:

 

8.1.3 in exercising its rights under this clause 8.1, the Provider will make all reasonable efforts not to cause any:

 

  (a) damage or injury to the Recipient Sites, or to the property and personnel located at the Recipient Sites; or

 

  (b) disruption to the business of the Recipient; and

 

8.2 as soon as practicable provide the Provider with such information as from time to time that the Provider may reasonably request in writing (and the Recipient is reasonable able to provide) to assist the Provider in the performance of its obligations under this Agreement.

 

11


The Transition Services

 

The Provider will:

 

8.3 allow the Recipient’s Personnel, on reasonable notice and the production of satisfactory evidence of identity and authority:

 

8.3.1 reasonable access to each Provider’s Site; and

 

8.3.2 reasonable facilities at each Provider;

at all reasonable times and to the extent necessary for the performance of the Recipient’s obligations under this Agreement, provided that:

 

8.3.3 in exercising its rights under this clause 8.3, the Provider will make all reasonable efforts not to cause any:

 

  (a) damage or injury to the Provider’s Sites, or to the property and personnel located at the Recipient Sites; or

 

  (b) disruption to the business of the Provider; and

 

8.4 as soon as practicable provide the Recipient with such information as from time to time that the Recipient may reasonably request in writing (and the Provider is reasonable able to provide) to assist the Recipient in the performance of its obligations under this Agreement.

 

9. TRANSFERRING CONTRACTS

 

9.1 As referred to in Clause 3.4 above, all existing SLA Agreements shall remain in effect for at least the Transition Period unless the term of those arrangements are extended, amended or terminated.

 

9.2 In respect of any third party contracts and licenses in existence between the Parties that are used by both Parties, the Parties will use their reasonable endeavours to continue to provide or to procure that third parties continue to provide the benefit of such contracts and licences to both Parties, and the Parties shall pay any charges associated with any benefit or services they receive under such contracts.

 

12


9.3 The Parties agree that there may be other contracts which have not yet been identified by the Parties and which, whilst retained by the either Party, the other Party will continue to require the benefit of after the Effective Date. In relation to such contracts, as well as the contracts described in 9.2, the Parties hereby agree and undertakes to each other that the Parties shall indemnify each other on demand against each loss, liability and cost incurred by the other party (“Indemnified Party”) after the Effective Date in connection with the termination in whole or part of such contracts, if the contract was terminated by the terminating Party (“Terminating Party”) on the instruction or due to the Terminating Party no longer requiring the benefit of such contract, including without limitation each loss, liability and cost reasonably incurred as a result of defending or settling any claim alleging such a liability but excluding any liability of the Parties arising under the terms of this Agreement. The Parties agree to consult with the each other prior to terminating any such contracts with a view to mitigating any losses that may arise.

 

10. CONSIDERATION AND PAYMENT OF THE SERVICES

 

10.1 As payment for the Provider rendering the Services, the Parties agree that the Recipient shall pay the Total Costs in accordance with the SLA Agreements for the Transition Period or another amount agreed to by the Parties in writing during the Transition Period.

 

10.2 For the rendering of the Transition Services, the Provider agrees to pay the Recipient an amount agreed to by the Parties prior to Unbundling for the Transition Services or such other amount agreed to by the Parties in writing during the Transition Period.

 

10.3 The Parties agree that with regards to the Services, the Transition Services and where applicable to the transfer of the Assets as set out in Clause 4, the Parties will invoice such Services and/or Transitional Services in accordance with the SLA Agreements or such arrangement as agreed to by the Parties. The Parties agree that they will honour such payments (unless disputed in terms of the Dispute Resolution Process) in accordance with the intention of the Parties as set out in Clause 2.4 above and indemnify each other as referred to in Clause 15 below.

 

10.4

As proof of any payments due and payable by the Parties in terms of this clause 10, the Parties agree to furnish each other with a monthly Tax Invoice, in form and substance

 

13


  acceptable to each Party. Such Tax Invoices shall comply with all the requirements set out for invoices in the VAT Act. Such Tax Invoices shall record all Services and the Transition Services, as the case may be, rendered by the Parties up to the Costs Closing Date of each month, to reach the Parties by no later than 2 (two) Business Days after the Costs Closing Date of each month. The Parties shall approve or reject each Tax Invoice within 5(five) Business Days of receipt thereof. If either of the Parties rejects a Tax Invoice, they shall inform the other in writing, setting out the reasons for disapproval in order to enable the necessary Party to take appropriate corrective measures.

 

10.4 The Parties will provide each other and their respective auditors with such documents and information with respect to each Tax Invoice provided to each other under this Agreement as the Parties may reasonably request (and the Provider is reasonably able to provide) for the purpose of verifying the accuracy of the invoice.

 

10.5 Either party shall have the right to charge interest at the rate of 2% per annum above the prime rate of Standard Bank of South Africa Limited from time to time, from the due date for payment to the date of actual payment in full (whether before or after judgement) on any unpaid sum due from the other party under this Agreement.

 

11. AUDIT FOR SERVICES

 

11.1 The Provider will keep full and accurate records relating to its supply of the Services (including but not limited to records relating to any amounts invoiced to the Recipient under this Agreement) (the “ Records ”).

 

11.2 The Provider will give the Recipient and/or their Services duly authorised representatives access to the Records to the extent necessary to enable the Recipient to:

 

11.2.1 fulfill any legal, statutory or reporting obligations or obligations to its shareholders; and

 

11.2.2 determine the accuracy of any amounts invoiced under clause 10.

 

11.3 The Provider agrees to provide the Recipient and/or their authorised representatives with all reasonable assistance in exercising the Recipient right of audit under clause 11.2.

 

14


11.4 Subject to clause11.5, the cost of any audit carried out pursuant to this clause will be for the Recipient’s Account.

 

11.5 If any audit carried out pursuant to this clause reveals that any invoices rendered to the Recipient under Clause 10 were for amounts in excess of those properly due in accordance with the terms of this Agreement, the Provider will:

 

11.5.1 promptly reimburse the Recipient for the reasonable costs of such audit, including but not limited to auditor’s fees, travel and accommodation expenses; and

 

11.5.2 in respect to any overpayment, repay to the Recipient a sum equal to the amount by which the Recipient has overpaid together with interest on any sum at a rate calculated at the rate set out in clause 10.5.

 

11. AUDIT FOR TRANSITION SERVICES

 

12.1 The Recipient will keep full and accurate records relating to its supply of the Transition Services (including but not limited to records relating to any amounts invoiced to the Provider under this Agreement) (the “ Transition Records ”).

 

12.2 The Recipient will give the Provider and/or their Transition Services duly authorised representative’s access to the Transition Records to the extent necessary to enable the Provider to:

 

12.2.1 fulfill any legal, statutory or reporting obligations or obligations to its shareholders; and

 

12.2.2 determine the accuracy of any amounts invoiced under clause 8.

 

12.3 The Recipient agrees to provide the Provider and/or their authorised representatives with all reasonable assistance in exercising the Provider right of audit under clause 12.2.

 

12.4 Subject to clause 12.5, the cost of any audit carried out pursuant to this clause will be for the Provider’s Account.

 

15


12.5 If any audit carried out pursuant to this clause reveals that any invoices rendered to the Provider under Clause 10 were for amounts in excess of those properly due in accordance with the terms of this Agreement, the Recipient will:

 

12.5.1 promptly reimburse the Provider for the reasonable costs of such audit, including but not limited to auditor’s fees, travel and accommodation expenses; and

 

12.5.2 in respect to any overpayment, repay to the Provider a sum equal to the amount by which the Provider has overpaid together with interest on any sum at a rate calculated at the rate set out in clause 10.5.

 

13. PROVIDER WARRANTIES

 

13.1 In respect of those Services which the Provider itself provides to the Recipient which are not provided by third parties, the Provider represents and warrants to the Recipient that:

 

13.1.1 it will use all reasonable care, skill and diligence in carrying out the Services;

 

13.1.2 in supplying the Services, it will endeavour to comply with all applicable regulations, laws and legislation;

 

13.1.3 the Provider Personnel are adequately experienced, training, qualified and skilled for purpose of carrying out the Services; and

 

13.1.4 it will make all reasonable efforts to maintain continuity in relation to the Provider Personnel.

 

14 RECIPIENT WARRANTIES

 

14.1 In respect of those Transition Services which the Recipient itself provides to the Provider which are not provided by third parties, the Recipient represents and warrants to the Provider that:

 

16


14.1.1 it will use all reasonable care, skill and diligence in carrying out the Transition Services;

 

14.1.2 in supplying the Transition Services, it will endeavour to comply with all applicable regulations, laws and legislation;

 

14.1.3 the Recipient Personnel are adequately experienced, training, qualified and skilled for purpose of carrying out the Transition Services; and

 

14.1.4 it will make all reasonable efforts to maintain continuity in relation to the Recipient Personnel.

 

15. INDEMNITY AND LIABILITY

Without prejudice to any of the rights of the Parties arising from any of the provisions of this Agreement, the Parties indemnifies each other and their directors against all loss (including but not limited to loss of data, goodwill and/or profits), liability, damage (whether direct, indirect or consequential) or expense of whatsoever nature and howsoever arising which either Party or any third party may suffer as a result of or which may be attributable to any claims or liabilities which are attributable to or caused by the provisions of this Agreement, including but not limited to the use, disclosure, exploitation or any use whatsoever by the Parties, their employees, agents, representatives and/or sub-contractors, of the Data.

 

16. CONFIDENTIALITY

 

16.1 The Parties shall treat as strictly secret and confidential the Data and all information of whatsoever nature and in whatsoever format relating to Parties and its operations, it being agreed and undertaken by the Parties that such information are not to be disclosed, directly or indirectly to any person without the consent of Parties or in terms of any order of a Court of competent jurisdiction which shall have directed it, or as may be required by law or by the rules of any recognised stock exchange.

 

16.2 The Parties shall take or cause to be taken such reasonable precautions as may be necessary to prevent the disclosure of any such information which is not a matter of public knowledge or lawfully available from any other source.

 

17


17. ANNOUNCEMENTS

 

17.1 Subject to clause 17.2, neither party will disclose the fact, terms or subject matter of this Agreement unless it has first obtained the other party’s written consent (not to be unreasonably withheld or delayed).

 

17.2 Clause 17.1 does not apply to a public announcement, communication or circular if it is required by law, a regulation of a listing authority or stock exchange or by a governmental authority or other authority with relevant powers, provided that such announcement is, so far as is practicable, made after consultation with, and takes into account the reasonable requirements of, the other party.

 

18. OWNERSHIP OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY

Any Intellectual Property Rights created or generated by the Parties or their employees in connection with the supply of the Services or the Transition Services will vest in the Party who created or generated the Intellectual Property Rights or its employees.

 

19. PERIODIC REVIEWS AND CHANGES TO SERVICES

 

19.1 In accordance with the intention of the Parties as set out in Clause 2.4 above , the Parties shall form a steering committee to carry out the Transition Plan and will include the Chief Financial Officer of both Gold Fields and Sibanye Gold or their appointees to meet twice a month to -

 

19.1.1 review the performance of the each other’s obligations in terms of the Transition Plan and this Agreement (“ Review Meetings ”);

 

19.1.2 identify the priorities and needs from time to time of each Party;

 

19.1.3 agree, formulate and plan the timing of –

 

19.1.3.1 any amendments to the Services and/or other existing obligations of the SLA Agreements in terms of this Agreement;

 

19.1.3.2 the detail of the Transition Services including any amendments to such Transition Services and/or other existing obligations in terms of this Agreement;

 

18


19.1.3.2 any additional services to be rendered by the either the Provider or the Recipient;

 

19.1.4 address issues and matters arising during the term of this Agreement;

 

19.1.5 ensure a prompt resolution of issues and disputes;

 

19.1.6 generally assess, discuss and evaluate all material issues set out in this Agreement so as to ensure the smooth performance by the Parties of their obligations in terms of this Agreement.

 

19.2 The relevant Representatives for each Service and/or the Transition Services or their delegates and such other representatives of the parties as are essential to the matters due to be discussed will attend or participate (by telephone conference or in person) in the relevant Review Meetings.

 

19.3 If either party wishes to add services or change the nature or scope of the Services, that party must make a request in writing to the other party at least five Business Days prior to the next Review Meeting, setting out in full detail the proposed addition or change and the reason for requesting the addition or change. The request will be discussed at the next Review Meeting, or sooner if the parties agree. Any additions or changes to the Services which are agreed by the parties shall be documented by a corresponding addition or change to the Annexures, subject to the parties obtaining any necessary approvals (including without limitation foreign exchange approval if applicable).

 

20. REPRESENTATIVES

 

20.1 With effect from the Unbundling, the Provider and the Recipient will appoint Representatives, in respect of each Service or Transition Service, to act as the principal points of contact between the parties in relation to matters and disputes arising under this Agreement in respect of the Services and Transition Services provided.

 

20.2 Each party’s Representative can delegate his/her functions to the extent agreed by the other party, such consent not to be unreasonably withheld or delayed.

 

19


20.3 Either party will be entitled to replace its Representative at any time, but will give the other party as much notice as reasonably practicable of such replacement.

 

21. DISPUTE RESOLUTION

 

21.1 Limitation on proceedings

The Parties agree that it is a condition precedent to the commencement of any litigation proceedings by a party in respect of a dispute under, or in relation to, this Agreement (“ Dispute ”) that the party has complied fully with the agreed process for resolving a Dispute (“ Dispute Resolution Process ”) under this clause 21 (regardless of the level or levels on which the Dispute has been considered prior to the Signature Date) except:

 

21.1.1 where the Dispute concerns the non-payment of monies due, the quantum of which is certain; or

 

21.1.2 if the party seeks urgent interlocutory, injunctive or declaratory relief; or

 

21.1.3 if the other party has failed to observe the requirements of this clause and the party seeks to enforce compliance with the Dispute Resolution Process,

in respect of the Dispute.

 

21.2 Dispute Resolution Process

 

21.2.1 Where a Dispute arises between the Parties, a Party may give notice to the other Parties initiating a Dispute Resolution Process in respect of the Dispute (Dispute Notice) which Dispute Notice must:

 

21.2.1.1 state that the notice is given under this Clause 21.2;

 

21.2.1.2 describe the nature of the Dispute; and

 

21.2.1.3 nominate a representative of the party who is authorised to negotiate and settle the Dispute on the party’s behalf.

 

21.2.2 The other Party must within 3 (three) days after receipt of a Dispute Notice nominate in writing to the other parties a representative authorised to negotiate and settle the Dispute on its behalf.

 

20


21.2.3 The parties’ representatives must negotiate in good faith with a view to resolving the Dispute within 3 (three) days after the receipt of the Dispute Notice, (or such longer period as those representatives agree), failing which the Dispute must be immediately referred to the Chief Financial Officers of the Gold Fields and Sibanye Gold.

 

21.2.4 The Chief Financial Officers must negotiate in good faith with a view to resolving the Dispute within 7 (Seven) Business days of the Dispute being referred to them (or such longer period as the Chief Executive Officers agree) failing which, the Dispute may be immediately referred to the Chief Executive Officers of the Parties.

 

21.2.5 The Chief Executive Officers must negotiate in good faith with a view to resolving the Dispute within 7 (Seven) Business days of the Dispute being referred to them (or such longer period as the Chief Executive Officers agree) failing which, the Dispute may be immediately referred by any party by notice of Arbitration under this Agreement.

 

22. ARBITRATION

 

22.1 In the event of any Dispute is not resolved through the Dispute Resolution Process mention in Clause 21 above, the Dispute will be referred for arbitration to the Arbitration Foundation of South Africa (“AFSA”) in terms of AFSA’s arbitration rules for the time being in force.

 

22.2 This clause shall constitute each Party’s irrevocable consent to the arbitration proceedings, and no Party shall be entitled to withdraw here from or to claim that such arbitration proceedings that it is not bound by this clause.

 

22.3 Each of the Parties hereby irrevocably agrees that the decision of the arbitrator in the arbitration proceedings -

 

22.3.1 shall be final and binding on each of them; and

 

22.3.2 will be carried into effect; and

 

22.3.3 may be made an order of any court to whose jurisdiction the Parties are subject.

 

21


22.4 Notwithstanding the foregoing, nothing in this clause shall be construed as precluding either Party from applying to court for a temporary interdict or other relief of an urgent nature, pending the decision of the award of the arbitrator in terms of this clause.

 

23 . FORCE MAJEURE

 

23.1 Meaning of Force Majeure

The term “ Force Majeure ” as used in this Agreement means any cause which is not reasonably within the control of the affected party claiming relief by reason of Force Majeure (“Affected Party”), which cause may include:

 

23.1.1 an act of God;

 

23.1.2 strike, lockout, stoppage, ban or other types of industrial action whether at any of the Affected Parties sites;

 

23.1.3 war (whether declared or undeclared), acts of war, blockade, act of the public enemy, act of terrorism, act of hostile army, revolution, insurrection, riot or civil commotion;

 

23.1.4 earthquake, lightning, fire, arson, flood, storm, cyclone, explosion or epidemic;

 

23.1.5 unavailability of equipment or transport, or inability to access the Affected Party’s sites or any relevant portion of them;

 

23.1.6 any part of the Affected Party’s business being rendered unsafe as a result of any hazardous, dangerous, perilous,, unsafe chemical, substance, material or property or nuclear radiation;

 

23.1.7 epidemic, explosion, disease, hijacking, sabotage or crime;

 

23.1.8 acts of government or governmental authority, including any relevant regulator,

and any other cause whether of the kind specifically listed above or otherwise which is not reasonably within the control of the Affected Party claiming Force Majeure.

 

22


23.2 Relief

If, as a direct result of Force Majeure, a n Affected Party becomes unable, wholly or in part, to perform an obligation (other than an obligation to pay money) under this Agreement:

 

23.2.1 that the Affected Party may give the other party notice of the Force Majeure with reasonably full particulars and, insofar as is known to it, the probable extent to which it will be unable to perform, or be delayed in performing its obligation;

 

23.2.2 on giving the notice of the Force Majeure, that obligation is suspended but only to the extent that and for so long as it is affected by the Force Majeure;

 

23.2.3 the Affected Party affected by Force Majeure must use all reasonable diligence to overcome or remove the effect of the Force Majeure as quickly as possible;

 

23.2.4 if the Force Majeure, after the Affected Party has used all reasonable endeavours to attempt to remove the same where possible, cannot be removed, overcome or abated, to an extent that allows resumption of performance within 6 months (or such other period as the Parties agree) from the date the Affected Party first became so affected, the Parties must consider and determine whether this agreement must be modified or terminated; and

 

23.2.5 notwithstanding the Force Majeure, the Parties must continue to perform the other services not affected by the Force Majeure.

 

23.3 Labour disputes

The obligation to use all reasonable diligence to overcome or remove the effect of the Force Majeure does not require the Affected Party to:

 

23.3.1 settle any strike, or other labour dispute; or

 

23.3.2 contest the validity or enforceability of any law, regulation or legally enforceable order by way of legal proceedings; or

 

23


on terms not acceptable to it solely for the purpose of removing the event of Force Majeure.

 

23.4 Resumption

The Affected Party must resume performance of its obligations as soon as, and to the extent that, it is no longer affected by the Force Majeure.

 

24. TERMINATION

 

24.1 A party (the “ Initiating Party ”) may terminate this Agreement with immediate effect by notice to the other party (the “ Breaching Party ”) on or at any time after the occurrence of any event specified in Clause 25.3. (a “ Termination Event ”)

 

24.2 If a Termination Event occurs in relation to a specific Service or Services and Transition Service or Transition Services, then the Initiating Party may, at its sole discretion, terminate this Agreement in part in relation to such Service or Services and the Transition Services with immediate effect by notice to the Breaching Party, in which event the Agreement shall continue in accordance with its terms in respect of the remaining Services and the Transition Services.

 

24.3 The Termination Events are:

 

24.3.1 the Breaching Party being in material breach (whether or not a repudiatory breach) of an obligation under this Agreement and, if the breach is capable of remedy, failing to remedy the breach within 7 days starting on the day after receipt of notice from the Initiating Party;

 

  (a) giving full details of the breach; and

 

  (b) requiring the Breaching Party to remedy the Breach; and

 

  (c) stating that a failure to remedy the breach may give rise to termination under Clause 24.1.

For the purpose of this Clause 24.3.1 a breach is capable of remedy if time is not of the essence in performance of the obligation and if the Breaching Party can comply with the obligation within the 7 day period;

 

24


24.3.2 a breach by the Breaching Party of an obligation under this Agreement (whether or not it is capable of remedy) which is persistent. In this clause 24.3.2:

 

  (a) A breach is deemed to be “ persistent ” if it is repeated (and notice of it is given to the Breaching Party) sufficiently often to have a material impact on the conduct of the Initiating Party’s business (or, where the Recipient is the Initiating Party, the use or enjoyment of the Services(; and

 

  (b) Similar breaches are deemed to be instances of the same breach;

 

24.3.3 the Breaching Party passing a resolution for winding up or a court of competent jurisdiction making an order for winding up, dissolution or business rescue;

 

24.3.4 the making of an administrative order relating to business rescue procedures in terms of the provisions of the Companies Act in relation to the Breaching Party;

 

24.3.5 the Breaching Party making an arrangement or compromise with its creditors generally or making an application to a court of competent jurisdiction for protection from its creditors generally (including without limitation, proceedings under Chapter 11 of the US Bankruptcy Code); or

 

24.3.6 any event that would, under the law of the South Africa in which the Breaching Party carries on business or has an asset, be equivalent or analogous to any of the events specified in clause 24.3.3, 24.3.5 and 24.3 6;

 

24.3.7 the Recipient has set up its own functions to provide the Services and the Services are rendered unnecessary;

 

24.3.8 the Provider has set up its own functions to provide the Transition Services and the Services are rendered unnecessary.

 

24.4 The Recipient may terminate the provision of the Services by giving 90 days written notice to the Provider.

 

24.5 Expiry or termination of this Agreement or a Service does not affect a party’s accrued rights and obligations at the date of expiry or termination.

 

25


24.6 Each party’s further rights and obligations will cease immediately on expiry or termination except clauses 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 21, 22, 23, 24.5 and 24.6, together with those clauses the survival of which is necessary for the interpretation or enforcement of this Agreement, will survive expiry or termination of this Agreement and will continue in full force and effect.

 

25. DOMICILIUM AND NOTICES

 

25.1 The Parties choose domicilium citandi et executandi for all purposes of the giving of any notice, the payment of any sum, the serving of any process and for any other purpose arising from this Agreement, as follows -

 

25.1.1    The Provider:    Attention      :       Chief Financial Officer
      physical      :      

1 Hospital Street,

Libanon,

Westonaria,

1779,

South Africa

      postal      :      

Postnet Suite 19

Private Bag X5

Strubens Valley

1735

      facsimile      :       +27 11 278 9863
25.1.2    the Recipient:    Attention      :       Chief Financial Officer
      Physical      :      

150 Helen Road

Sandown

Sandton

2196

      postal      :      

Postnet Suite 252

Private Bag X30500

Houghton

2041

      facsimile      :       +27115629796

 

26


25.2 Each of the Parties shall be entitled from time to time, by written notice to the other, to vary its domicilium to any other physical address within the Republic of South Africa and/or its facsimile number.

 

25.3 Any notice given and any payment made by any Party to the other which -

 

25.3.1 is delivered by hand during the normal business hours of the addressee at the addressee’s domicilium for the time being shall be rebuttably presumed to have been received by the addressee at the time of delivery;

 

25.3.2 is posted by prepaid registered post from an address within the Republic of South Africa to the addressee at the addressee’s domicilium for the time being shall be rebuttably presumed to have been received by the addressee on the seventh day after the date of posting.

 

25.4 Any notice given by any Party to any other Party which is transmitted by facsimile to the addressee at the addressee’s facsimile address for the time being shall be presumed, until the contrary is proved by the addressee, to have been received by the addressee on the date of successful transmission thereof.

 

26. ASSIGNMENT AND SUBCONTRACTING

 

26.1 Subject to clause 26.2, a Party cannot assign, transfer or create any trust in respect of, or purport to assign, transfer or create any trust in respect of, a right or obligation under this Agreement without having first obtained the other party’s written consent (such consent not be unreasonably withheld or delayed).

 

26.2 Either party may assign or transfer a right or obligation under this Agreement to any member of its Group by giving prior written notice to the other party.

 

26.3 The Provider may subcontract the performance of any of its obligations under this Agreement to any member of its Group or to any third party at its sole discretion.

 

27


26.4 The Recipient may not subcontract its obligations without the prior written consent of the Provider.

 

27. GENERAL

 

27.1 This Agreement constitutes the whole agreement between the Parties relating to the subject matter hereof.

 

27.2 No alteration, variation or consensual cancellation of this Agreement shall be of any effect unless it is recorded in writing and signed by the Parties.

 

27.3 No extension of time or waiver or relaxation of any of the provisions or terms of this Agreement or any agreement, bill of exchange or other document issued or executed pursuant to or in terms of this Agreement, shall operate as an estoppel against any Party in respect of its rights under this Agreement, nor shall it operate so as to preclude such Party thereafter from exercising its rights strictly in accordance with this Agreement.

 

27.4 No Party shall be bound by any express or implied term, representation, warranty, promise or the like not recorded herein, whether it induced the contract and/or whether it was negligent or not.

 

27.5 The Parties agree that if any provision of this Agreement is invalid or unenforceable in any jurisdiction, such provision shall be fully severable from this Agreement and the other provisions hereof shall remain in full force and effect in such jurisdiction and the remaining provisions hereof shall be liberally construed to carry out the provisions and intent hereof.

 

27.6 Regardless of the place of execution, performance or domicile of the Parties, this Agreement and all modifications and amendments hereof shall be governed by and construed under and in accordance with the laws of South Africa. Subject to clauses 21 and 22, the Parties hereby consent and submit to the non-exclusive jurisdiction of the High Court of South Africa (Witwatersrand Local Division) for the purpose of any action or other legal proceedings that either of them may institute with regard to the any matters or claims arising in terms hereof.

 

28


27.7 Any payment to be made by any Party under this Agreement shall be made in full without any sell off, restriction, condition, exchange, deduction or change.

 

27.8 Each party will to the extent that is reasonably able to do so, execute all documents and do all acts and things reasonable required by the other to give effect to the terms of this Agreement.

 

28. INTERPRETATION

 

28.1 In this Agreement, unless the context clearly requires a different interpretation, a reference to –

 

28.1.1 the singular shall be deemed to include the plural and vice versa ;

 

28.1.2 any one gender shall be deemed to include the other two genders;

 

28.1.3 a natural person shall be deemed to include a juristic person and vice versa .

 

28.2 In this Agreement –

 

28.2.1 clause headings appear for purposes of reference only and shall not govern, nor in any way influence, the proper interpretation of this Agreement;

 

28.2.2 if anything in a definition is a substantive provision conferring rights or imposing obligations on anyone, effect shall be given to it as if it were a substantive provision in the body of this Agreement;

 

28.2.3 the eiusdem generis rule shall not apply and whenever a term is followed by the word “including” which is then followed by specific examples, such examples shall not be construed so as to limit the meaning of that term;

 

28.2.4 unless specifically otherwise provided, any number of days prescribed shall be determined by excluding the first and including the last day;

 

28.2.5 a reference to any statutory enactment shall be construed as a reference to that enactment as at the signature date and as amended or re-enacted from time to time;

 

29


28.2.7 expressions defined in this Agreement shall bear the same meanings in annexures or appendices to this Agreement that do not themselves contain their own definitions;

 

28.2.8 where any term is defined within the context of any particular clause in this Agreement, the term so defined, unless it is clear from the clause in question that the term so defined has limited application to the relevant clause, shall bear the meaning ascribed to it for all purposes in terms of this Agreement, notwithstanding that the term has not been defined in the definition clause.

 

28.3 The expiration or termination of this Agreement shall not affect such of the provisions of this Agreement that expressly provide that they will operate after any such expiration or termination or which of necessity must continue to have effect after such expiration or termination, notwithstanding that the clauses themselves do not expressly provide for this.

 

30


Thus done and signed on behalf of the Provider at Sandton on this 21 st day of December 2012.

AS WITNESSES:

 

1.   

/s/ Cecilia Ntombela

  For:  

GOLD FIELDS SHARED SERVICES

PROPRIETARY LIMITED

2.         

/s/ Taryn Harmse

    

/s/ S.M. Govender

who warrants that he is duly authorised thereto

Thus done and signed on behalf of the Recipient at Sandton on this 21 st day of December 2012.

AS WITNESSES:

 

1.   

/s/ Cecilia Ntombela

  For:  

GOLD FIELDS GROUP SERVICES

PROPRIETARY LIMITED

2.         

/s/ Taryn Harmse

    

/s/ Paul A. Schmidt

who warrants that he is duly authorised thereto

 

31


Thus done and signed on behalf of the Gold Fields at Sandton on this 21 st day of December 2012.

AS WITNESSES:

 

1.

  

/s/ Cecilia Ntombela

   For: GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

2.

  

/s/ Taryn Harmse

  

/s/ Paul A. Schmidt

      who warrants that he is duly authorised thereto
Thus done and signed on behalf of the Provider at Sandton on this 21 st day of December 2012.
AS WITNESSES:   

1.

  

/s/ Cecilia Ntombela

   For: SIBANYE GOLD LIMITED

2.

  

/s/ Taryn Harmse

  

/s/ Charl Keyter

      who warrants that he is duly authorised thereto

 

32


ANNEXURE “A”

SLA AGREEMENTS

 

Parties

   Date   

Addendum

   Date  
1. Gold Fields Shared Services Pty Limited and Gold Fields Business & Leadership Academy    1/7/2009      
2. Gold Fields Shared Services Pty Limited and GFI Mining South Africa (Pty) Ltd (now known as Sibanye Gold Limited)    18/6/2007    Yes      31/05/2009   
3. Gold Fields Shared Services Pty Limited and Gold Field Security Limited t/a Gold Fields Protection Services.    1/7/2009      
4. Gold Fields Shared Services Pty Limited and Gold Fields Ghana Limited and Abosso Goldfields Limited    1/11/2011    Yes      9/10/2012   
5. Gold Fields Group Services Pty Limited and Gold Fields Shared Services Pty Limited    1/7/2009      
6. Gold Fields Shared Services Pty Limited and M Janse van Rensburg (Pty) Ltd    1/9/2009      
7. Gold Fields Shared Services Pty Limited and South Deep Joint Venture    23/7/2008    Gold Fields Operations Limited and GFI Joint Venture Holdings (Pty) Ltd      31/5/2010   
8. M Jansen van Rensburg (Pty) Limited and Gold Fields Shared Services (Pty) Limited    15/2/2012      
9. Reverse SLA between Gold Fields Ghana Limited and Gold Fields Shared Services (Pty) Limited    11/01/2012      
10. Reverse SLA between Gold Fields Group Services (Pty) Limited and Gold Fields Shared Services (Pty) Limited    24/12/2012      
11. Reverse SLA between Sibanye Operations (Beatrix, Kloof, Driefontein) and South Deep and Gold fields Shared Services (Pty) Limited    15/2/2012      
12. Gold Fields Business Leadership Academy (Pty) Limited and Gold fields Shared Services (Pty) Limited    13/03/2012      

 

33


13. Reverse SLA between Leslie Williams Hospital, a division of Sibanye Gold and Gold Fields Group Shared Services      15/02/2012         
14. Reverse SLA between Gold Fields Security Limited t/a Gold Fields Protection Services and Gold Fields Shared Services (Pty) Limited      15/01/2012         

 

34


ANNEXURE “B”

TRANSITION SERVICES

The Transition Services to be provided by the Recipient during the Transition Period will include, but not be limited to, the following:

 

  1. Corporate Communications;

 

  2. Human Resources and benefit management including Training and Development Services;

 

  3. Treasury and Finance;

 

  4. Group Insurance Services;

 

  5. Legal and Tax advice;

 

  6. Internal Audit;

 

  7. Information Technology services and functions;

 

  8. Corporate controller

 

  9. All others that the Parties agree may not be listed in this Annexure B.

 

35


GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

TIME TABLE 2013

MANAGEMENT REPORTS

 

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       

Year  

     Month/Cost
Close
    

Review Book
and FDC # to
Head Office

     Monthly/
Quarterly
Results to
Audit/Board
     GFL Review
Book to Board
     21 December      9/11  January ##           19 February

2013

     23 January      1 February      1 February      26 February
     21 February      4 March           26 March
     22 March      3 April      26 April      14 May
     22 April      3 May           21 May
     22 May      3 June           20 June
     21 June      2 July      8 August      27 August
     22 July      1 August           30 August
     21 August      2 September           20 September
     20 September      2 October      8 November      26 November
     23 October      1 November           29 November
     21 November      2 December           19 December
     20 December               

 

# Report due at Head Office midday.
## In January International will submit earlier than SA ops as not constrained by extended Christmas break.

Year end audited FDC required by this date.

Quarter end, therefore Monthly report out after quarterly results.

 

36

Exhibit 4.28

EXECUTION

REVOLVING CREDIT FACILITY AGREEMENT

amongst

NEDBANK LIMITED

(acting through its NEDBANK CAPITAL and

NEDBANK CORPORATE divisions)

GFI JOINT VENTURE HOLDINGS PROPRIETARY LIMITED

GOLD FIELDS OPERATIONS LIMITED

and

THE ORIGINAL GUARANTORS LISTED IN SCHEDULE 1


TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

1.

 

PARTIES

     1   

2.

 

DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION

     1   

3.

 

INTRODUCTION

     36   

4.

 

THE FACILITY

     36   

5.

 

CONDITIONS OF UTILISATION

     37   

6.

 

UTILISATION OF FACILITY

     39   

7.

 

INTEREST

     41   

8.

 

INTEREST PERIODS

     44   

9.

 

REPAYMENTS

     46   

10.

 

PREPAYMENTS

     47   

11.

 

FEES

     51   

12.

 

TAX GROSS UP AND INDEMNITIES

     52   

13.

 

INCREASED COSTS

     56   

14.

 

COSTS AND EXPENSES

     57   

15.

 

GUARANTEE AND INDEMNITY

     58   

16.

 

REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES

     62   

17.

 

INFORMATION UNDERTAKINGS

     70   

18.

 

FINANCIAL COVENANTS

     77   

19.

 

GENERAL UNDERTAKINGS

     78   

20.

 

DEFAULT

     84   

21.

 

CHANGE OF PARTY

     92   

22.

 

CHANGES TO THE OBLIGORS

     96   

23.

 

PAYMENT MECHANICS

     98   

24.

 

CONFIDENTIALITY

     99   

25.

 

SET-OFF

     101   

26.

 

NOTICES AND DOMICILIA

     102   

27.

 

GENERAL

     105   


SCHEDULE 1: ORIGINAL GUARANTORS

     112   

SCHEDULE 2: ADVANCE CONDITION DOCUMENTS

     113   

SCHEDULE 3: FORM OF UTILISATION REQUEST

     116   

SCHEDULE 4: SILICOSIS LITIGATION

     118   

SCHEDULE 5: FORM OF ACCESSION UNDERTAKING

     119   

SCHEDULE 6: FORM OF RESIGNATION LETTER

     121   

SCHEDULE 7: FORM OF COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATE

     122   

SCHEDULE 8: PERMITTED TRANSFEREES

     123   


REVOLVING CREDIT FACILITY AGREEMENT

 

1. PARTIES

 

1.1 The Parties to this Agreement are:

 

1.1.1 NEDBANK LIMITED (acting through its NEDBANK CAPITAL and NEDBANK CORPORATE divisions) (as Facility Agent and Original Lender) ;

 

1.1.2 GFI JOINT VENTURE HOLDINGS PROPRIETARY LIMITED (as Original Borrower) ;

 

1.1.3 GOLD FIELDS OPERATIONS LIMITED (as Original Borrower) ; and

 

1.1.4 THE ORIGINAL GUARANTORS LISTED IN SCHEDULE 1 (as Original Guarantors) .

 

1.2 The Parties agree as set out below.

 

2. DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION

 

2.1 In this Agreement and in the other Finance Documents, unless the context dictates otherwise or unless otherwise defined in a Finance Document, the words and expressions set forth below shall bear the following meanings and cognate expressions shall bear corresponding meanings:

 

2.1.1 “Accession Undertaking” means:

 

2.1.1.1 in relation to any Additional Borrower, an undertaking substantially in the form set out in Schedule 5 ( Form of Accession Undertaking ) delivered or to be delivered to the Facility Agent and by which an Additional Borrower will become a Party to this Agreement; and

 

2.1.1.2 in relation to any Additional Guarantor, an undertaking substantially in the form set out in Schedule 5 ( Form of Accession Undertaking ) delivered or to be delivered to the Facility Agent and by which an Additional Guarantor will become a Party to this Agreement;

 

Page 1.


2.1.2 “Additional Borrower” means any company which has become a Party as a Borrower in accordance with clause 22.2 ( Additional Borrowers );

 

2.1.3 “Additional Guarantor” means any company which has become a Party as a Guarantor in accordance with clause 22.4 ( Additional Guarantors );

 

2.1.4 “Agreement” means this Revolving Credit Facility Agreement and its Schedules;

 

2.1.5 “Arranger” means Nedbank;

 

2.1.6 “Associate” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 2.2.1.1 ( Consolidated EBITDA ) of this Agreement;

 

2.1.7 “Auditors” means, at any time, the auditors of the Parent at that time, being KPMG as at the Signature Date, and any replacement of those auditors appointed by the Parent;

 

2.1.8 “Availability Period” means the period commencing on the Financial Close Date and ending on the earlier of:

 

2.1.8.1 the date on which the Available Facility is cancelled in terms of this Agreement; and

 

2.1.8.2 the date which is 1 (one) Month prior to the Final Maturity Date;

 

2.1.9 “Available Commitment” means, in relation to any Lender, that Lender’s Commitment minus (subject as set out below):

 

2.1.9.1 the amount of its participation in any outstanding Loans; and

 

Page 2.


2.1.9.2 in relation to any proposed Utilisation, the amount of its participation in any Loans that are due to be made on or before the proposed Utilisation Date;

provided that for the purposes of calculating a Lender’s Available Commitment in relation to any proposed Utilisation, that Lender’s participation in any Loans that are due to be repaid or prepaid on or before the proposed Utilisation Date shall not be deducted from that Lender’s Commitment;

 

2.1.10 “Available Facility” means the aggregate for the time being of each Lender’s Available Commitment;

 

2.1.11 “Base Rate” means, subject to clause 8.1.3, JIBAR or where it is not possible to determine JIBAR on any Reset Date, the ZAR-JIBAR-Reference Banks Rate, in either case converted to a nominal annual compounded monthly in arrear rate;

 

2.1.12 “Borrowers” means the Original Borrowers and each Additional Borrower, unless it has ceased to be a Borrower in accordance with clause 22 (Change to the Obligors) , and a reference to “Borrower” shall be any one of them as the context requires;

 

2.1.13 “Breakage Costs” means the amount (if any) by which:

 

2.1.13.1 the interest which a Lender should have received for the period from the date of receipt of all or any part of its participation in a Loan or Unpaid Sum to the last day of the current Interest Period in respect of that Loan or Unpaid Sum, had the principal amount or Unpaid Sum received been paid on the last day of that Interest Period;

exceeds:

 

2.1.13.2 the amount which that Lender would be able to obtain by placing an amount equal to the principal amount or Unpaid Sum received by it on deposit with a leading bank in the Johannesburg interbank market for a period starting on the Business Day following receipt or recovery and ending on the last day of the current Interest Period;

 

Page 3.


2.1.14 “Business Day” means any day (other than a Saturday, Sunday or an official public holiday in South Africa within the meaning of the Public Holidays Act, 1994) on which banks generally are open for business in Johannesburg;

 

2.1.15 “Cerro Corona Project” means the development of the gold and copper deposits in Peru by the Cerro Corona Subsidiary;

 

2.1.16 “Cerro Corona Subsidiary” means Gold Fields La Cima S.A.;

 

2.1.17 “Commitment” means:

 

2.1.17.1 in relation to the Original Lender, R1 500 000 000 (One Billion Five Hundred Million Rand); and

 

2.1.17.2 in relation to any other Lender, the amount of any Commitment transferred to it under this Agreement,

in each case, (a) to the extent not cancelled, reduced or transferred by it under this Agreement, and (b) exclusive of any accrued and unpaid or capitalised interest;

 

2.1.18 “Companies Act” means the Companies Act, 71 of 2008;

 

2.1.19 “Compliance Certificate” means a certificate substantially in the form of the letter set out in Schedule 7 ( Form of Compliance Certificate );

 

2.1.20 “Confidentiality Undertaking” means a confidentiality undertaking substantially in a recommended form of the Loan Market Association or in any other form agreed between the Parent and the Facility Agent;

 

2.1.21 “Constitutional Documents” means, in respect of any person at any time, the then current and up-to-date constitutional documents of such person at such time (including, without limitation, such person’s memorandum of incorporation, certificate of incorporation, articles of incorporation or commercial registration certificate);

 

Page 4.


2.1.22 “CP Satisfaction Date” means the date upon which the conditions set out in clause 5.1 have been fulfilled or, where capable of waiver, waived, as the case may be;

 

2.1.23 “Default” means an Event of Default or any event or circumstances specified in clause 20.1 ( Events of Default ) which would (with the expiry of a grace period, the giving of notice or the making of any determination under the Finance Documents or any combination of the foregoing) be an Event of Default;

 

2.1.24 “Demerger” means the demerger of the business of SGL and its Subsidiaries from the business of the Parent and its other Subsidiaries by way of the Distribution;

 

2.1.25 “Distribution” means the pro rata distribution in specie under South African law by the Parent of the entire issued share capital held by the Parent in SGL to the Parent’s existing shareholders, American depository receipt holders and international depository receipt holders;

 

2.1.26 “Encumbrance” means:

 

2.1.26.1 any mortgage, pledge, lien, assignment or cession conferring security, hypothecation, security interest, preferential right or trust arrangement or other encumbrance securing any obligation of any person; or

 

2.1.26.2 any arrangement under which money or claims to, or for the benefit of, a bank or other account may be applied, set off or made subject to a combination of accounts so as to effect discharge of any sum owed or payable to any person; or

 

Page 5.


2.1.26.3 any other type of preferential agreement or arrangement (including any title transfer and retention arrangement), the effect of which is the creation of a security interest;

 

2.1.27 “Environmental Claim” means any claim, proceeding or investigation by any person in respect of any Environmental Law;

 

2.1.28 “Environmental Law” means any law applicable to the business conducted by a Material Group Company at the relevant time in any jurisdiction in which that Material Group Company conducts business which relates to the pollution, degradation or protection of the environment or harm to or the protection of human health or the health of animals or plants;

 

2.1.29 “Environmental Permits” means any permit, licence, consent, approval and other authorisation and the filing of any notification, report or assessment required under any Environmental Law for the operation of the business of any Material Group Company conducted on or from the properties owned or used by that Material Group Company;

 

2.1.30 “Event of Default” means any event or circumstance specified as such in clause 20.1 ( Events of Default );

 

2.1.31 “Facility” means the revolving credit facility made available to the Borrowers under this Agreement as described in clause 4 ( The Facility );

 

2.1.32 “Facility Agent” means Nedbank;

 

2.1.33 “Fee Letter” means any letter or letters between the Arranger and the Parent (or the Facility Agent and the Parent) setting out any of the fees referred to in clause 11 ( Fees );

 

2.1.34 “Final Maturity Date” means the 5th anniversary of the Financial Close Date;

 

Page 6.


2.1.35 “Finance Documents” means:

 

2.1.35.1 this Agreement;

 

2.1.35.2 any Fee Letter;

 

2.1.35.3 any Utilisation Request;

 

2.1.35.4 any Accession Undertaking;

 

2.1.35.5 any other agreement or document at any time designated a Finance Document by written agreement between the Facility Agent and the Borrowers; and

 

2.1.35.6 any amendment agreement to any of the Finance Documents referred to in clauses 2.1.35.1 to 2.1.35.5 above;

and “Finance Document” means, as the context requires, any of them;

 

2.1.36 “Finance Party” means:

 

2.1.36.1 each Lender; and

 

2.1.36.2 the Facility Agent;

and “Finance Parties” means, as the context requires, all of them;

 

2.1.37 “Financial Close Date” means the date which is the earlier of:

 

2.1.37.1 the CP Satisfaction Date; or

 

2.1.37.2 the date on which the first Utilisation is made under this Agreement;

 

2.1.38 “Financial Close Documents” means all of the documents and other evidence listed in Schedule 2 ( Financial Close Documents );

 

2.1.39 “Financial Covenants” means the financial covenants and ratios set out in clause 18.1 ( Financial Condition );

 

Page 7.


2.1.40 “GAAP” means the generally accepted accounting principles set out in IFRS;

 

2.1.41 “GFIJVH” means GFI Joint Venture Holdings Proprietary Limited (Registration No. 1998/023354/07), a private company duly incorporated according to the company laws of South Africa;

 

2.1.42 “GF Holdings” means Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited (Registration No. 651406), a limited liability company duly incorporated according to the company laws of the British Virgin Islands;

 

2.1.43 “GFO” means Gold Fields Operations Limited (Registration No. 1959/003209/06), a public company duly incorporated according to the company laws of South Africa;

 

2.1.44 “GFOH” means Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited (Registration No. 184982), a limited liability company duly incorporated according to the company laws of the British Virgin Islands;

 

2.1.45 “Ghanaian Companies” means Gold Fields Ghana Limited and Abosso Goldfields Limited and “Ghanaian Company” means either of them as required by the context;

 

2.1.46 “Group” means the Parent, the Guarantors and their Subsidiaries from time to time. For the avoidance of doubt, SGL and its Subsidiaries shall not be members of the Group;

 

2.1.47 “Group Company” means any member of the Group and “Group Companies” means, as the context requires, all of them;

 

2.1.48 “Guarantors” means the Original Guarantors and each Additional Guarantor, unless it has ceased to be a Guarantor in accordance with clause 22 (Change to the Obligors) , and a reference to “Guarantor” shall be to any one of them as the context requires;

 

Page 8.


2.1.49 “IFRS” means International Financial Reporting Standards issued and/or adopted by the International Accounting Standards Board;

 

2.1.50 “Interest Period” means, in relation to a Loan, each period determined in accordance with clause 8 ( Interest Periods ) and, in relation to an Unpaid Sum, each period determined in accordance with clause 7.3 ( Default Interest );

 

2.1.51 “JIBAR” means, in relation to any Interest Period, the rate for the period which most closely approximates such Interest Period which appears on the Reuters Screen SAFEY Page as at 11h00 Johannesburg time on the first day of such Interest Period;

 

2.1.52 “JSE Listings Requirements” means the listings requirements for public listed companies published by JSE Limited in accordance with the provisions of the Securities Services Act, 2004;

 

2.1.53 “Lender” means:

 

2.1.53.1 the Original Lender; and

 

2.1.53.2 any bank or financial institution which has become a Party in accordance with clause 21 ( Change of Party ),

which in each case has not ceased to be a Party in accordance with the terms of this Agreement;

 

2.1.54 “Loan” means a loan made or to be made under the Facility or (as the context may require) the principal amount outstanding for the time being of that loan;

 

Page 9.


2.1.55 “Majority Lenders” means:

 

2.1.55.1

if there are no Loans then outstanding, a Lender or Lenders whose Commitments aggregate more than 66  2 / 3 % of the Total Commitments (or, if the Total Commitments have been reduced to zero, aggregated more than 66   2 / 3 % of the Total Commitments immediately prior to the reduction); or

 

2.1.55.2

at any other time, a Lender or Lenders whose participations in the Loans then outstanding aggregate more than 66  2 / 3 % of all the Loans then outstanding;

 

2.1.56 “Margin” means 2.50% (two comma five percent) nominal annual compounded monthly in arrears (which includes, subject to clause 13 ( Increased Costs ), all statutory, liquid and reserve costs, the Lenders’ credit margin and all other regulatory costs);

 

2.1.57 “Market Downturn Event” means any material adverse change, determined in the sole good faith discretion of the Original Lender, in (a) the South African or international capital markets or in the South African or international monetary, financial, political or economic conditions, or (b) the South African or international gold mining industry, in each case which renders it unlawful, impossible or, in the sole good faith discretion of the Original Lender, uneconomic, to provide the Facility on any terms or the terms set out in this Agreement; provided that the provision of the Facility shall not be regarded as “uneconomic” if the primary reason therefore is that the Original Lender wishes to place the capital committed by it pursuant to the Facility on more attractive financial terms than those of the Facility;

 

2.1.58 “Material Adverse Effect” means a material adverse effect on:

 

2.1.58.1 the ability of an Obligor to perform its financial or other material obligations under the Finance Documents to which it is a party; or

 

Page 10.


2.1.58.2 the validity and enforceability of the Finance Documents or any of them;

 

2.1.59 “Material Group Companies” means:

 

2.1.59.1 each Obligor; and

 

2.1.59.2 any Group Company from time to time that is not a Non-Material Group Company,

and “Material Group Company” means, as the context requires, any one of them;

 

2.1.60 “Month” means a reference to a period starting on one day in a calendar month and ending on the numerically corresponding day but one in the next calendar month, except that:

 

2.1.60.1 subject to clause 2.1.60.3, if the numerically corresponding day is not a Business Day, that period shall end on the next Business Day in that calendar month in which that period is to end if there is one, or if there is not, on the immediately preceding Business Day;

 

2.1.60.2 if there is no numerically corresponding day in the calendar month in which that period is to end, that period shall end on the last Business Day in that calendar month; and

 

2.1.60.3 if an Interest Period begins on the last Business Day of a calendar month, that Interest Period shall end on the last Business Day in the calendar month in which that Interest Period is to end;

 

2.1.61 “Nedbank” means Nedbank Limited (acting through its Nedbank Capital and Nedbank Corporate divisions) (Registration No. 1951/000009/06), a public company and registered bank duly incorporated according to the company and banking laws of South Africa;

 

Page 11.


2.1.62 “Newshelf” means Newshelf 899 (Proprietary) Limited (Registration No. 2007/019941/07), a private company duly incorporated according to the company laws of South Africa;

 

2.1.63 “Non-Material Group Company” means, at any time, a member of the Group (other than an Obligor) which had EBITDA (determined on the same basis as Consolidated EBITDA) or gross assets in its most recently ended Financial Year (on a consolidated basis taking into account it and its Subsidiaries only) less than or equal to 10% (ten percent) of Consolidated EBITDA (but including, for these purposes only, the net income of any Project Finance Subsidiaries) or gross assets of the Group (calculated according to the most recent set of audited consolidated financial statements delivered pursuant to Clause 17.1 ( Financial Statements) ). Compliance with the aforementioned condition shall be determined by reference to the latest audited financial statements of such member of the Group (consolidated in the case of a member of the Group which itself has Subsidiaries), provided that :

 

2.1.63.1 if, in the case of any member of the Group which itself has Subsidiaries, no consolidated financial statements are prepared and audited, its consolidated EBITDA and gross assets shall be determined on the basis of pro forma consolidated financial statements of the relevant member of the Group and its Subsidiaries, prepared for this purpose by the Parent;

 

2.1.63.2 following the Demerger, or if any intra-Group transfer or re-organisation takes place, the audited financial statements of the Group Company and all relevant members of the Group shall be adjusted by the Parent in order to take into account the Demerger or such intra-Group transfer or re-organisation; and

 

2.1.63.3 the audited financial statements of the Group and any relevant member of the Group shall be adjusted in such a manner as the Auditors think fair and appropriate to take account of the Demerger or the acquisition or disposal of any member of the Group or any business of any member of the Group, after the date or at which the audited financial statements of the Group are made up.

 

Page 12.


Should there be any dispute regarding whether any member of the Group is or is not a Non-Material Group Company such dispute shall be referred, at the request of the Facility Agent, to the Auditors and a report by the Auditors that a member of the Group is or is not a Non-Material Group Company shall, in the absence of manifest error, be conclusive and binding on all Parties. The costs of obtaining the report by the Auditors will be borne by the unsuccessful party to the dispute;

 

2.1.64 “Obligor” means:

 

2.1.64.1 a Borrower;

 

2.1.64.2 a Guarantor; or

 

2.1.64.3 any other person comprising a Group Company, designated as an Obligor by agreement between the Facility Agent, the Parent and such person from time to time,

and “Obligors” means, as the context requires, all of them;

 

2.1.65 “Original Borrowers” means:

 

2.1.65.1 GFIJVH; and

 

2.1.65.2 GFO,

and “Original Borrower” means, as the context requires, any of them;

 

2.1.66 “Original Financial Statements” means the audited consolidated annual financial statements of the Parent for the Financial Year ended 31 December 2011;

 

2.1.67 “Original Guarantors” means the parties listed in Schedule 1 ( Original Guarantors );

 

Page 13.


2.1.68 “Original Lender” means Nedbank;

 

2.1.69 “Parent” means Gold Fields Limited (Registration No. 1968/004880/06), a public company duly incorporated according to the company laws of South Africa;

 

2.1.70 “Parties” means:

 

2.1.70.1 the Lenders;

 

2.1.70.2 the Borrowers;

 

2.1.70.3 the Facility Agent; and

 

2.1.70.4 the Guarantors,

and “Party” means, as the context requires, any one of them;

 

2.1.71 “Permitted Disposal” means any sale, lease, transfer or other disposal:

 

2.1.71.1 by an Obligor or any member of the Group of obsolete or redundant assets which are no longer required for the efficient operation of the business of such Obligor or such member of the Group; or

 

2.1.71.2 by an Obligor or any member of the Group in the ordinary course of its day-to-day business if that sale, lease, transfer or other disposal is not otherwise restricted by a term of any Finance Document; or

 

2.1.71.3 by an Obligor to another Obligor (other than to an Additional Obligor); or

 

2.1.71.4 by a member of the Group that is not an Obligor to an Obligor or by an Obligor to an Additional Obligor or to a member of the Group that is not an Obligor if such sale, lease, transfer or other disposal is concluded at arm’s length; or

 

Page 14.


2.1.71.5 by a member of the Group that is not an Obligor to another member of the Group that is not an Obligor; or

 

2.1.71.6 by any member of the Group to any other person where the higher of the market value or consideration receivable when aggregated with the higher of the market value or consideration receivable for any other sale, lease, transfer or other disposal by any member of the Group (other than a sale, lease, transfer or other disposal referred to in clauses 2.1.71.1, 2.1.71.2, 2.1.71.3, 2.1.71.4, 0 and 2.1.71.7) does not exceed 20% (twenty percent) of the Consolidated Tangible Net Worth in any Financial Year subject to a maximum of 30% (thirty percent) of Consolidated Tangible Net Worth at such time in aggregate during the period from the date of this Agreement to the Final Maturity Date; or

 

2.1.71.7 for which the Facility Agent has given its prior written consent (acting on the instructions of the Majority Lenders);

 

2.1.72 “Permitted Encumbrance” means:

 

2.1.72.1 any Encumbrance created prior to the Signature Date which has been disclosed:

 

2.1.72.1.1 in writing to the Facility Agent prior to the Signature Date; or

 

2.1.72.1.2 in the Original Financial Statements,

and which only secures indebtedness outstanding at the Signature Date if the principal amount or original facility thereby secured is not increased after the Signature Date;

 

2.1.72.2 any title transfer or retention arrangement entered into by any Group Company in the normal course of the trading activities and on terms no worse for that Group Company than the standard terms of the relevant supplier;

 

Page 15.


2.1.72.3 any netting or set-off arrangement entered into by any Group Company in the ordinary course of its banking arrangements (which shall include, for the avoidance of doubt, those pursuant to hedging arrangements in relation to gold, silver, copper and other commodity prices, foreign exchange rates and interest rates where such arrangements are entered into for the purposes of providing protection against fluctuation in such rates or prices in the ordinary course of business), for the purpose of netting debit and credit balances;

 

2.1.72.4 any lien arising by operation of law and in the ordinary course of trading and not by reason of any default (whether in payment or otherwise) of any Group Company;

 

2.1.72.5 any Encumbrance over or affecting (or transaction described in clause 19.3 ( Negative Pledge ) ( “Quasi-Encumbrance” ) affecting) any asset acquired by a member of the Group after the date of this Agreement if:

 

2.1.72.5.1 the Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance was not created in contemplation of the acquisition of that asset by a member of the Group;

 

2.1.72.5.2 the principal amount secured has not been increased in contemplation of, or since the acquisition of that asset by a member of the Group; and

 

2.1.72.5.3 the Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance is (other than an Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance otherwise permitted pursuant to clauses 2.1.72.2, 2.1.72.3, 2.1.72.4, 2.1.72.6, 2.1.72.7, 2.1.72.8 or 0) removed or discharged within 6 (six) Months of the date of acquisition of such asset;

 

2.1.72.6 any Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance over or affecting any asset of any company which becomes a member of the Group after the date of this Agreement, where the Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance is created prior to the date on which that company becomes a member of the Group, if:

 

2.1.72.6.1 the Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance was not created in contemplation of the acquisition of that company;

 

Page 16.


2.1.72.6.2 the principal amount secured has not increased in contemplation of or since the acquisition of that company; and

 

2.1.72.6.3 the Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance is (other than an Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance otherwise permitted pursuant to clauses 2.1.72.2, 2.1.72.3, 2.1.72.4, 2.1.72.6, 2.1.72.7, 2.1.72.8 or 0) removed or discharged within 6 (six) Months of that company becoming a member of the Group;

 

2.1.72.7 any Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance granted in respect of Project Finance Borrowings over assets of, or the shares in, a Project Finance Subsidiary;

 

2.1.72.8 in respect of Encumbrances or Quasi-Encumbrances over or affecting any asset of any Material Group Company, any Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance securing indebtedness the principal amount of which (when aggregated with the principal amount of any other indebtedness which has the benefit of Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance other than any permitted under clauses 2.1.72.1 to 2.1.72.7 above and clauses 0 and 2.1.72.10 below) does not at any time exceed 12% (twelve percent) of Consolidated Tangible Net Worth (or its equivalent in another currency) (but adjusted to include the net value of new assets acquired since the last date of the latest set of consolidated annual financial statements of the Group);

 

Page 17.


2.1.72.9 any other Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance created with the prior written approval of the Facility Agent (acting on the instructions of the Majority Lenders);

 

2.1.72.10 any Encumbrance or Quasi-Encumbrance granted in respect of Financial Indebtedness incurred in connection with the Cerro Corona Project over the business or assets of the Cerro Corona Subsidiary or over the Ownership Interests in the Cerro Corona Subsidiary provided that the amount of Financial Indebtedness secured by all such Encumbrances or Quasi-Encumbrances permitted by this clause 2.1.72.10 does not at any time in aggregate exceed US$200 000 000 (Two Hundred Million United States Dollars) (subject to a maximum exchange rate of R12/$). In this clause 2.1.72.10 “Ownership Interests” means:

 

2.1.72.10.1 the shares issued by the Cerro Corona Subsidiary;

 

2.1.72.10.2 any shareholder loans made to the Cerro Corona Subsidiary;

 

2.1.72.10.3 to the extent required by Peruvian law, the shares in the holding company which directly owns the shares issued by the Cerro Corona Subsidiary provided that such holding company’s sole assets are shares issued by, and any loans made by it to, the Cerro Corona Subsidiary and its sister company, Mineral Gold Fields S.A.;

 

2.1.73 “Permitted Indebtedness” means Financial Indebtedness:

 

2.1.73.1 arising under the Finance Documents;

 

2.1.73.2 arising under any environmental bond which any member of the Group is required to issue by any applicable law;

 

Page 18.


2.1.73.3 arising in connection with the Cerro Corona Project up to a maximum aggregate amount of US$200 000 000 (Two Hundred Million United States Dollars) (subject to a maximum exchange rate of R12/$);

 

2.1.73.4 arising under any derivative transaction entered into in connection with protection against or benefit from fluctuation in any rate or price but not for speculative purposes;

 

2.1.73.5 of the Group existing and available on the date of this Agreement (or, of any person that becomes a member of the Group from time to time, provided that , such Financial Indebtedness existed at the time such person became a member of the Group and was not created in anticipation thereof);

 

2.1.73.6 between Group Companies to the extent incurred for the purposes of financing general corporate and working capital requirements; or

 

2.1.73.7 not falling within clauses 2.1.73.1, 2.1.73.2, 0, 2.1.73.4, 2.1.73.5 or 2.1.73.6 above provided that the aggregate amount of all Financial Indebtedness (excluding, for the avoidance of doubt, any Financial Indebtedness incurred by a Guarantor or a Project Finance Subsidiary) permitted under this clause 2.1.73.7 does not at any time exceed US$250 000 000 (Two Hundred and Fifty Million United States Dollars) (subject to a maximum exchange rate of R12/$);

 

2.1.74 “Permitted Transferees” means, subject to clause 21.2.3, any person listed in Schedule 8 ( Permitted Transferees );

 

Page 19.


2.1.75 “Project Finance Borrowings” means:

 

2.1.75.1 any indebtedness to finance (or refinance) a project comprised of the ownership, development, construction, refurbishment, commissioning and/or operation of assets which is incurred by a Project Finance Subsidiary in connection with such project and in respect of which the recourse of the person(s) making any such finance (or re-finance) available to that Project Finance Subsidiary for the payment, repayment and prepayment of such indebtedness is limited to (i) the Project Finance Subsidiary and its assets and/or the shares in that Project Finance Subsidiary and/or (ii) during the period prior to successful completion of the relevant completion tests applicable to such project guarantees from any one or more members of the Group;

 

2.1.75.2 any indebtedness the terms and conditions of which have been approved by the Facility Agent and which the Facility Agent has agreed in writing (acting on the instructions of the Majority Lenders) to treat as a “Project Finance Borrowing” for the purposes of this Agreement;

 

2.1.76 “Project Finance Subsidiary” means a single purpose company or other entity (excluding the Obligors) whose sole business is a project comprised of the ownership, development, construction, refurbishment, commissioning and/or operation of an asset which has incurred Project Finance Borrowings;

 

2.1.77 “Rand” and “R” means South African Rand, the lawful currency of South Africa;

 

2.1.78 “Reference Banks” means Nedbank Limited, FirstRand Bank Limited, The Standard Bank of South Africa Limited and ABSA Bank Limited;

 

2.1.79 “Repeating Representations” means each of those representations and warranties set out in clause 16.1 ( Representations and Warranties ) which are stated as being deemed to be repeated as provided for pursuant to clause 16.2 ( Repetition );

 

2.1.80 “Repetition Date” has the meaning given to it in clause 16.2 ( Repetition );

 

Page 20.


2.1.81 “Reset Date” means the first day of each Interest Period, being the date in each case upon which the relevant Base Rate is to be determined for such Interest Period, provided the first Reset Date shall be the first Utilisation Date;

 

2.1.82 “Resignation Letter” means a letter substantially in the form of the letter set out in Schedule 6 ( Form of Resignation Letter );

 

2.1.83 “Restricted Party” means a person that is: (i) listed on, or owned or controlled by a person listed on, or acting on behalf of a person listed on, any Sanctions List; (ii) located in, incorporated under the laws of, or owned or (directly or indirectly) controlled by, or acting on behalf of, a person located in or organized under the laws of a country or territory that is the target of country-wide or territory-wide Sanctions; or (iii) otherwise a target of Sanctions (target of Sanctions signifying a person with whom a US person or other national of a Sanctions Authority would be prohibited or restricted by law from engaging in trade, business or other activities);

 

2.1.84 “Rollover Loans” means one or more Loans:

 

2.1.84.1 made or to be made on the same day that a maturing Loan is due to be repaid;

 

2.1.84.2 the aggregate amount of which is equal to or less than the maturing Loan; and

 

2.1.84.3 made or to be made for the purpose of refinancing a maturing Loan;

 

2.1.85 “SAFEX Overnight Deposit Rate” means:

 

2.1.85.1 on the relevant Reset Date, the overnight deposit rate designated as ( “SFXROD” ) which appears on the Reuters SAFEX Money Market Screen as of 11h00 Johannesburg time on that date, rounded to the third decimal point; or

 

Page 21.


2.1.85.2 where the SAFEX Overnight Deposit Rate cannot be determined on account of the relevant rate not appearing on the Reuters SAFEX Money Market Screen, an equivalent rate determined by the Facility Agent, acting in a commercially reasonable manner;

 

2.1.86 “Sanctions” means the economic sanctions laws, regulations, embargoes or restrictive measures administered, enacted or enforced by: (i) the United States government, (ii) the United Nations, (iii) the European Union, (iv) the United Kingdom, (v) the Republic of France, (vi) the Council of Europe or (vii) the respective governmental institutions and agencies of any of the foregoing, including, without limitation, the Office of Foreign Assets Control of the US Department of Treasury ( “OFAC” ), the US Department of Commerce, the United States Department of State, Her Majesty’s Treasury ( “HMT” ) and the French Ministry of Finance (together, the “Sanctions Authorities” );

 

2.1.87 “Sanctions List” means the “Specially Designated Nationals and Blocked Persons” list maintained by OFAC, the Consolidated List of Financial Sanctions Targets and the Investment Ban List maintained by HMT, or any similar list maintained by, or public announcement of Sanctions designation made by, any of the Sanctions Authorities, each as amended, supplemented or substituted from time to time;

 

2.1.88 “Semi-Annual Period” shall bear the meaning defined in clause 7.2.2.1;

 

2.1.89 “SGL” means Sibanye Gold Limited (Registration No. 2002/031431/06), a public company duly incorporated according to the company laws of South Africa (formerly GFI Mining South Africa Proprietary Limited);

 

2.1.90 “Signature Date” means the date of the signature of this Agreement by the Party signing last in time, provided that all the Parties have signed this Agreement;

 

Page 22.


2.1.91 “South Africa” means the Republic of South Africa as constituted from time to time;

 

2.1.92 Subsidiary ” means a “subsidiary” as defined in the Companies Act and shall include any person who would, but for not being a “company” under the Companies Act, qualify as a “subsidiary” as defined in the Companies Act;

 

2.1.93 “Tax” means any tax, levy, impost, duty or other charge or withholding of a similar nature (including, without limitation, any penalty or interest payable in connection with any failure to pay or delay in paying any of the same);

 

2.1.94 “Tax Credit” means a credit against, relief or remission for, or repayment of any Tax;

 

2.1.95 “Tax Deduction” means a deduction or withholding for or on account of Tax from payment under a Finance Document;

 

2.1.96 “Tax Payment” means either the increase in a payment made by an Obligor to a Finance Party under Clause 12.1 (Tax gross-up) or a payment under Clause 12.2 (Tax indemnity) ;

 

2.1.97 “Total Commitments” means the aggregate of all the Lenders’ Commitments at any time;

 

2.1.98 “Unpaid Sum” means any sum due and payable but unpaid by an Obligor under the Finance Documents;

 

2.1.99 “Utilisation” means a utilisation of the Facility;

 

2.1.100 “Utilisation Date” means the date of a Utilisation being the date upon which the relevant Loan is made;

 

2.1.101 “Utilisation Request” means a notice substantially in the form set out in Schedule 3 ( Form of Utilisation Request );

 

Page 23.


2.1.102 “VAT” means value added tax leviable in terms of the Value Added Tax Act, 1991; and

 

2.1.103 “ZAR-JIBAR-Reference Banks Rate” means the mid-market rate between deposits and loans in Rand for an Interest Period quoted by the Reference Banks at approximately 11am Johannesburg time on the relevant Reset Date. The Facility Agent will request the principal Johannesburg office of each of the Reference Banks to provide a quotation of its rate. If at least two quotations are provided, the rate for that Reset Date will be the arithmetic means of the quotations. If fewer than two quotations are provided, the rate for that Reset Date will be determined by the Facility Agent in accordance with clauses 7.6 and 7.7.

 

2.2 Financial Definitions

 

2.2.1 In the Finance Documents, the accounting expressions set forth below shall bear the following meanings:

 

2.2.1.1 Consolidated EBITDA ” means, in respect of any Measurement Period, the consolidated net income of the Group (less the net income of any Project Finance Subsidiaries but including any dividends received in cash by any member of the Group (other than a Project Finance Subsidiary) from a Project Finance Subsidiary), before, without duplication and all as calculated in accordance with GAAP:

 

2.2.1.1.1 any provision on account of normal, deferred and royalty taxation;

 

2.2.1.1.2 any interest, commission, discounts or other fees incurred or payable, received or receivable by any member of the Group in respect of Indebtedness for Borrowed Money;

 

2.2.1.1.3 any other interest received or receivable by any member of the Group on any deposit or bank account;

 

Page 24.


2.2.1.1.4 any non-cash adjustments to the environment rehabilitation and/or reclamation expenses;

 

2.2.1.1.5 any amount attributable to the amortisation of intangible assets and depreciation of tangible assets;

 

2.2.1.1.6 any non-cash gains or losses relating to and resulting from the marked to market valuation of derivative and/or financial instruments;

 

2.2.1.1.7 any losses from (or gains on the reversal of previously recognised) write-downs or impairments of assets and/or investments;

 

2.2.1.1.8 any gains or losses recognised on the attributable share of results of Associates after tax, but including any dividends received in cash by any member of the Group from such an Associate;

 

2.2.1.1.9 any share-based payments;

 

2.2.1.1.10 any other extraordinary or exceptional items; and

 

2.2.1.1.11 any other material non-cash gain or loss that needs to be accounted for under GAAP.

For any company that is not a Subsidiary of the Group but in which any member of the Group directly or indirectly owns an equity interest of more than 20% (twenty per cent) of the issued share capital (an “ Associate ”), the Parent may include in the Consolidated EBITDA the percentage of the equity interest of the amount that would be the EBITDA of the Associate;

 

Page 25.


2.2.1.2 Consolidated Net Borrowings ” means, at any time, the aggregate amount of all obligations of the members of the Group, other than Project Finance Subsidiaries (but including, for the avoidance of doubt, any guarantee obligations of any other member of the Group in respect of the obligations of a Project Finance Subsidiary), for or in respect of Indebtedness for Borrowed Money but excluding any such obligation to any member of the Group, adjusted to take account of the aggregate amount of freely available cash and cash equivalents held by any member of the Group, other than Project Finance Subsidiaries, and so that no amount shall be included or excluded more than once, provided that, if a percentage of the EBITDA of any Associate is included in the Consolidated EBITDA then the same percentage of such Associate’s Consolidated Net Borrowings (but as if references in such definition to “Group” were references to the Associate and its Subsidiaries) will be included in the calculation of Consolidated Net Borrowings;

 

2.2.1.3 Consolidated Net Finance Charges ” means, in respect of any Measurement Period, the aggregate amount of the interest (including the interest element of leasing and hire purchase payments and capitalised interest), commission, fees, discounts and other finance payments payable by any member of the Group, other than Project Finance Subsidiaries, (including any commission, fees, discounts and other finance payment payable by any member of the Group under any interest rate hedging arrangement but deducting any commission, fees, discounts and other finance payments receivable by any member of the Group under any interest rate hedging instrument) but deducting any other interest receivable by any member of the Group, other than Project Finance Subsidiaries, on any deposit or bank account, provided that, if a percentage of the EBITDA of any Associate is included in the Consolidated EBITDA then the same percentage of such Associate’s Consolidated Net Finance Charges (but as if references in such definition to “Group” were references to the Associate and its Subsidiaries) will be included in the calculation of Consolidated Net Finance Charges;

 

Page 26.


2.2.1.4 Consolidated Tangible Net Worth ” means, at any time, the “Total Equity”, as reported in the “Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity” in the last set of annual consolidated financial statements of the Parent delivered to the Facility Agent pursuant to this Agreement;

 

2.2.1.5 “Financial Indebtedness” means (without double counting) any indebtedness of the Group for or in respect of:

 

2.2.1.5.1 moneys borrowed;

 

2.2.1.5.2 any amount raised by acceptance under any acceptance credit facility;

 

2.2.1.5.3 any amount raised pursuant to any note purchase facility or the issue of bonds, notes, debentures, loan stock or any similar instrument;

 

2.2.1.5.4 the amount of any liability in respect of any lease or hire purchase contract which would, in accordance with GAAP, be treated as a finance or capital lease;

 

2.2.1.5.5 receivables sold or discounted (other than any receivables to the extent they are sold on a non-recourse basis);

 

2.2.1.5.6 the amount of any liability in respect of any purchase price for assets or services the payment of which is deferred where the deferral of such price is either:

 

2.2.1.5.6.1 used primarily as a method of raising credit; or

 

2.2.1.5.6.2 not made in the ordinary course of business;

 

2.2.1.5.7 any agreement or option to re-acquire an asset if one of the primary reasons for entering into such agreement or option is to raise finance;

 

Page 27.


2.2.1.5.8 any amount raised under any other transaction (including any forward sale or purchase agreement) having the commercial effect of a borrowing;

 

2.2.1.5.9 any derivative transaction (a “Derivative Transaction” ) entered into in connection with protection against or benefit from fluctuation in any rate or price save for a Derivative Transaction entered into in relation to any amount payable to a trade creditor (and, when calculating the value of any Derivative Transaction, only the marked to market value shall be taken into account which, for the avoidance of doubt, may be an addition to or subtraction from the amount of Financial Indebtedness);

 

2.2.1.5.10 any counter-indemnity obligation in respect of a guarantee, indemnity, bond, standby or documentary letter of credit or any other instrument issued by a bank or financial institution;

 

2.2.1.5.11 any amount raised by the issue of redeemable shares to the extent such shares are redeemable prior to the Final Maturity Date; and

 

2.2.1.5.12 the amount of any liability in respect of any guarantee or indemnity for any of the items referred to in paragraphs 2.2.1.5.1 to 2.2.1.5.11 above,

but not including any indebtedness owed by any Obligor to any other Obligor;

 

2.2.1.6 “Financial Year” means, at any time, the financial year of the Group ending on 31 December in each calendar year;

 

Page 28.


2.2.1.7 “Indebtedness for Borrowed Money” means Financial Indebtedness save for any indebtedness for or in respect of clauses 2.2.1.5.9 and 2.2.1.5.10 of the definition of “Financial Indebtedness” ;

 

2.2.1.8 Measurement Period ” means each period of 12 (twelve) Months ending on the last day of the Parent’s Financial Year and each period of 12 (twelve) Months ending on the last day of the first half of the Parent’s Financial Year.

 

2.3 Interpretation and Construction

 

2.3.1 A document in an “ agreed form ” is a document which has been initialled as such on or before the relevant date for the purposes of identification by or on behalf of the Borrower and the Facility Agent or, if not so initialled, is in form and substance reasonably satisfactory to the Facility Agent.

 

2.3.2 Any reference in any Finance Document to:

 

2.3.2.1 an “affected person” shall have the meaning ascribed thereto in section 128 of the Companies Act;

 

2.3.2.2 an “affiliate” means, in relation to any person, a Subsidiary of that person or a holding company of that person or any other Subsidiary of that holding company;

 

2.3.2.3 an “amendment” includes a supplement, novation or re-enactment and “amended” is to be construed accordingly;

 

2.3.2.4 “arm’s length” means terms that are fair and reasonable to the counterparty of a transaction and no more or less favourable to the other party to the relevant transaction as could reasonably be expected to be obtained in a comparable arm’s length transaction with a person that is not the ultimate holding company of such counterparty or an entity of which such counterparty or its ultimate holding company has direct or indirect control, or owns directly or indirectly more than 20% (twenty percent) of the share capital or similar rights of ownership;

 

Page 29.


2.3.2.5 “assets” includes properties, revenues and rights of every description;

 

2.3.2.6 “audited” means, in respect of any financial statement those financial statements as audited by the Auditors;

 

2.3.2.7 “authorisations” mean any authorisation, consent, registration, filing, agreement, notarisation, certificate, licence, approval, resolution, permit and/or authority or any exemption from any of the aforesaid, by, with or from any authority (including, without limitation, any approvals required from the South African Reserve Bank in relation to any Finance Document or any transaction contemplated under any Finance Document);

 

2.3.2.8 “authority” means any government or governmental, administrative, fiscal or judicial authority, body, court, department, commission, tribunal, registry or any stated owned or controlled authority which principally performs governmental functions;

 

2.3.2.9 “business rescue” shall have the meaning ascribed thereto in section 128 of the Companies Act;

 

2.3.2.10 “business rescue practitioner” shall have the meaning ascribed thereto in section 128 of the Companies Act;

 

2.3.2.11 a “calendar month” shall be construed as a named month, i.e. January, February, March, April, May, June, July, August, September, October, November and December;

 

2.3.2.12 a “clause” shall, subject to any contrary indication, be construed as a reference to a clause hereof;

 

Page 30.


2.3.2.13 “continuing” , in the context of a Default, means:

 

2.3.2.13.1 where an Event of Default or its consequences are incapable of remedy that Event of Default is deemed to be continuing unless it has been expressly waived in writing by the Facility Agent and any conditions of such waiver have been fulfilled to the reasonable satisfaction of the Facility Agent;

 

2.3.2.13.2 in any other case, the Default is deemed to be continuing unless and until either:

 

2.3.2.13.2.1 it has been expressly waived in writing by the Facility Agent and any conditions of such waiver have been fulfilled to the reasonable satisfaction of the Facility Agent; or

 

2.3.2.13.2.2 it has been remedied within the applicable remedy period by any person and the resulting position is that which it would have been if such Default had not occurred or if the resulting position is reasonably acceptable to the Facility Agent;

 

2.3.2.14 “financially distressed” shall have the meaning ascribed thereto in section 128 of the Companies Act;

 

2.3.2.15 a “holding company” shall be construed in accordance with the Companies Act;

 

2.3.2.16 the words “including” and “in particular” are used by way of illustration or emphasis only and shall not be construed as, nor shall they take effect as, limiting the generality of any of the preceding words;

 

Page 31.


2.3.2.17 “indebtedness” shall be construed so as to include any obligation (whether incurred as principal or as surety or as guarantor) for the payment or repayment of money, whether present or future, actual or contingent;

 

2.3.2.18 “law” shall be construed as any law (including statutory, common or customary law), statute, constitution, decree, judgment, treaty, regulation, directive, by-law, order, other legislative measure, directive, requirement, request or guideline (whether or not having the force of law but, if not having the force of law, is generally complied with by the persons to whom it is addressed or applied) of any government, supranational, local government, statutory or regulatory or self-regulatory or similar body or authority or court and the common law, as amended, replaced, re-enacted, restated or reinterpreted from time to time;

 

2.3.2.19 the words “other” and “otherwise” shall not be construed eiusdem generis with any foregoing words where a wider construction is possible;

 

2.3.2.20 a “person” shall be construed as a reference to any person, firm, company, corporation, government, state or agency of a state or any association or partnership (whether or not having separate legal personality) of two or more of the foregoing;

 

2.3.2.21 a “regulation” means any regulation, rule, official directive, request or guideline (whether or not having the force of law but complied with generally) of any governmental, inter-governmental or supranational body, agency, department or regulatory, self-regulatory or other authority or organisation;

 

2.3.2.22 “repay” (or any derivative form of that word) includes “prepay” (or any derivative form of that word);

 

2.3.2.23 “security interest” means any mortgage, pledge, lien, charge, assignment, cession, hypothecation or security interest or any other agreement or arrangement having the effect of conferring security;

 

Page 32.


2.3.2.24 a “Schedule” shall, subject to any contrary indication, be construed as a reference to a schedule hereof or a schedule of a Finance Document;

 

2.3.3 Unless inconsistent with the context or save where the contrary is expressly indicated in any Finance Document:

 

2.3.3.1 if any provision in a definition is a substantive provision conferring rights or imposing obligations on any Party, notwithstanding that it appears only in an interpretation clause, effect shall be given to it as if it were a substantive provision of the relevant Finance Document;

 

2.3.3.2 when any number of days is prescribed in any Finance Document, same shall be reckoned inclusively of the first and exclusively of the last day unless the last day falls on a day which is not a Business Day, in which case the last day shall be the next succeeding Business Day;

 

2.3.3.3 in the event that the day for payment of any amount due in terms of any Finance Document should fall on a day which is not a Business Day, the relevant day for payment shall be the preceding Business Day;

 

2.3.3.4 in the event that the day for performance of any obligation to be performed in terms of any Finance Document should fall on a day which is not a Business Day, the relevant day for performance shall be the succeeding Business Day;

 

2.3.3.5 any reference in any Finance Document to an enactment is to that enactment as at the Signature Date and as amended or re-enacted from time to time;

 

Page 33.


2.3.3.6 any reference in any Finance Document to this Agreement or any other agreement or document shall be construed as a reference to this Agreement or, as the case may be, such other agreement or document as same may have been, or may from time to time be, amended, varied, novated or supplemented;

 

2.3.3.7 except as expressly provided for in any Finance Document, no provision of any Finance Document constitutes a stipulation for the benefit of any person who is not a Party to the relevant Finance Document;

 

2.3.3.8 references to day/s, calendar month/s or year/s shall be construed as Gregorian calendar day/s, calendar month/s or year/s;

 

2.3.3.9 a reference to a Party includes that Party’s successors-in-title and permitted assigns;

 

2.3.3.10 where any Party is required to provide any consent or approval or agree to the actions of any other Party, the request for such consent or approval or agreement shall be in writing and such consent or approval or agreement shall be in writing and shall not be unreasonably withheld or delayed having regard to the financial condition of the Borrower and the Group and the ability of the Obligors to perform their financial or other material obligations under the Finance Documents.

 

2.3.4 The headings to the clauses and schedules of any Finance Document are for reference purposes only and shall in no way govern or affect the interpretation of nor modify nor amplify the terms of any Finance Document nor any clause or schedule thereof.

 

2.3.5 Unless inconsistent with the context, an expression in any Finance Document which denotes:

 

2.3.5.1 any one gender includes the other genders;

 

Page 34.


2.3.5.2 a natural person includes a juristic person and vice versa ; and

 

2.3.5.3 the singular includes the plural and vice versa .

 

2.3.6 The Schedules to any Finance Document form an integral part thereof and words and expressions defined in any Finance Document shall bear, unless the context otherwise requires, the same meaning in such Schedules. To the extent that there is any conflict between the Schedules to any Finance Document and the provisions of the relevant Finance Document, the provisions of the relevant Finance Document shall prevail.

 

2.3.7 Where any term is defined within the context of any particular clause in any Finance Document, the term so defined, unless it is clear from the clause in question that the term so defined has limited application to the relevant clause, shall bear the same meaning as ascribed to it for all purposes in terms of the relevant Finance Document, notwithstanding that that term has not been defined in any interpretation clause.

 

2.3.8 The expiration or termination of any Finance Documents shall not affect such of the provisions of the Finance Documents as expressly provide that they will operate after any such expiration or termination or which of necessity must continue to have effect after such expiration or termination, notwithstanding that the clauses themselves do not expressly provide for this.

 

2.3.9 The Finance Documents shall be binding on and enforceable by the administrators, trustees, permitted assigns or liquidators of the Parties as fully and effectually as if they had signed the Finance Documents in the first instance and reference to any Party shall be deemed to include such Party’s administrators, trustees, permitted assigns or liquidators, as the case may be.

 

Page 35.


2.3.10 The use of any expression in any Finance Document covering a process available under South African law such as winding-up (without limitation eiusdem generis ) shall, if any of the Parties to the Finance Documents is subject to the law of any other jurisdiction, be construed as including any equivalent or analogous proceedings under the law of such other jurisdiction.

 

2.3.11 Where figures are referred to in numerals and in words in any Finance Document, if there is any conflict between the two, the words shall prevail.

 

3. INTRODUCTION

 

3.1 The Borrowers require the Facility for the purpose of funding (i) capital expenditure of the Group, and (ii) general corporate and working capital requirements of the Group.

 

3.2 The Lenders have agreed to make the Facility available to the Borrowers in accordance with the terms and conditions of this Agreement.

 

4. THE FACILITY

 

4.1 The Facility

The Lenders agree to make available to the Borrowers a revolving credit facility in an aggregate amount equal to the Total Commitments, subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement.

 

4.2 Purpose of the Facility

The Borrowers shall utilise the Facility for the purpose of funding (i) capital expenditure of the Group, and (ii) general corporate and working capital requirements of the Group.

 

4.3 Monitoring

No Finance Party is bound to monitor or verify the application of any amount borrowed pursuant to this Agreement.

 

Page 36.


4.4 Finance Parties’ Rights and Obligations

 

4.4.1 The obligations of each Finance Party under the Finance Documents are several. Failure by a Finance Party to perform its obligations under the Finance Documents does not affect the obligations of any other Party under the Finance Documents. No Finance Party is responsible for the obligations of any other Finance Party under the Finance Documents.

 

4.4.2 The rights of each Finance Party under or in connection with the Finance Documents are separate and independent rights and any debt arising under the Finance Documents to a Finance Party from an Obligor shall be a separate and independent debt.

 

4.4.3 A Finance Party may, except as otherwise stated in the Finance Documents, separately enforce its rights under the Finance Documents.

 

4.5 Facility Agent

While Nedbank is the only Lender under the Facility, all references to the Facility Agent in this Agreement shall be construed as references to Nedbank in its capacity as a Lender.

 

5. CONDITIONS OF UTILISATION

 

5.1 Initial Conditions Precedent

The Lenders shall not be obliged to make any Loan to the Borrowers under the Facility unless:

 

5.1.1 all of the Financial Close Documents have been delivered to the Facility Agent in a form and in substance satisfactory to the Facility Agent. The Facility Agent shall notify the Parent and the Lenders promptly on being so satisfied; or

 

5.1.2 to the extent that any Financial Close Documents are not in a form and in substance satisfactory to the Facility Agent or have not been delivered, the Facility Agent has, upon written notice to all of the Parties, waived or deferred delivery of those Financial Close Documents which are not in a form and in substance satisfactory to it or which have not been delivered pursuant to clause 5.3 ( Waiver of Conditions Precedent );

 

Page 37.


5.1.3 the Facility Agent has notified the Parent on or prior to the Financial Close Date that it is satisfied that no Market Downturn Event has occurred between the Signature Date and the Financial Close Date; and

 

5.1.4 the Facility Agent being satisfied that no business rescue proceedings have commenced in respect of any Material Group Company, which in the case of a Material Group Company (other than an Obligor) could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

5.2 Further Conditions to Utilisation of Facility

The Lenders shall not be obliged to make any Loan to the Borrowers under the Facility unless on the proposed Utilisation Date:

 

5.2.1 in the case of a Rollover Loan, no Event of Default is continuing or would result from the proposed Rollover Loan, and in the case of any other Loan, no Default is continuing or would result from the proposed Loan;

 

5.2.2 the Repeating Representations are true, accurate and complete in all material respects.

 

5.3 Waiver or Deferral of Conditions Precedent

 

5.3.1 Satisfaction of any of the conditions set out in:

 

5.3.1.1 clause 5.1 ( Initial Conditions Precedent ) may be waived or deferred by the Facility Agent acting on the instructions of the Majority Lenders;

 

5.3.1.2 clause 5.2 ( Further Conditions to Utilisation of Facility ) may be waived or deferred by the Facility Agent acting on the instructions of the Majority Lenders.

 

Page 38.


5.3.2 Waiver or deferral of delivery of any of the Financial Close Documents either at all or in a form and in substance satisfactory to the Facility Agent or waiver of any of the further conditions set out in clause 5.2 ( Further Conditions to Utilisation of Facility ) shall not prejudice the right of the Facility Agent to require subsequent fulfilment of such condition in a written notice to this effect delivered at the time of such waiver or deferral and, unless otherwise specified in any written notice waiving fulfilment of the relevant condition, the relevant condition shall be fulfilled by the Obligors within 5 (five) Business Days of the date of the written notice waiving fulfilment of such condition.

 

5.4 Termination

If the Financial Close Date has not occurred before the date falling 60 (sixty) days after the Signature Date then the Facility Agent shall be entitled, acting on the instructions of the Majority Lenders to cancel the Facility by written notice to the Borrowers. Such cancellation shall be without prejudice to the Borrowers’ obligation under clause 14 ( Costs and Expenses ) to pay any costs, fees, expenses or taxes then due and payable.

 

6. UTILISATION OF FACILITY

 

6.1 Subject to clause 5 ( Conditions of Utilisation ), a Borrower may utilise the Facility during the Availability Period by delivering to the Facility Agent a duly completed Utilisation Request:

 

6.1.1 not later than 11h00 not less than 3 (three) Business Days prior to the proposed Utilisation Date if the amount of the proposed Loan is less than or equal to R500 000 000 (Five Hundred Million Rand); or

 

6.1.2 not later than 11h00 not less than 5 (five) Business Days prior to the proposed Utilisation Date if the amount of the proposed Loan is greater than R500 000 000 (Five Hundred Million Rand).

 

Page 39.


6.2 Each Utilisation Request is irrevocable and will not be regarded as having been duly completed unless:

 

6.2.1 the proposed Utilisation Date is a Business Day within the Availability Period;

 

6.2.2 the currency of the proposed Loan is Rand;

 

6.2.3 the amount of the proposed Loan is a minimum amount of R10 000 000 (Ten Million Rand) (or, if less, the Available Facility);

 

6.2.4 it specifies an Interest Period of one, three, six or twelve Months applicable to the proposed Loan;

 

6.2.5 it specifies a bank account in South Africa to which the Borrower wishes the proceeds of the Loan to be credited; and

 

6.2.6 the proposed Loan together with the aggregate of the Loans still outstanding on the proposed Utilisation Date shall not exceed the Available Facility.

 

6.3 Only one Loan may be requested in each Utilisation Request.

 

6.4 Only one Utilisation Request may be outstanding at any point in time.

 

6.5 A maximum of two Utilisation Requests may be delivered in any calendar month during the Availability Period.

 

6.6 A Borrower may not deliver a Utilisation Request if as a result of the proposed Utilisation more than 10 (ten) Loans would be outstanding at any point in time and to this effect, the Lender will consolidate 2 (two) or more outstanding Loans made to the same Borrower maturing on the same date, such that the relevant Rollover Loan made to refinance such maturing Loans will be in respect of such outstanding Loans as consolidated into 1 (one) Loan.

 

6.7 The Borrower acknowledges and agrees that any Utilisation Request signed by an authorised signatory (as designated in terms of paragraph 1.2.2 of Schedule 2 ( Financial Documents )) on behalf of a Borrower shall be deemed to be a valid Utilisation Request issued by that Borrower and any Loan made pursuant to such Utilisation Request to that Borrower shall constitute a valid Loan to that Borrower.

 

Page 40.


6.8 If the conditions set out in this Agreement have been met, each Lender shall make its participation in each Loan available on the Utilisation Date.

 

6.9 The amount of each Lender’s participation in each Loan will be equal to the proportion borne by its Available Commitment to the Available Facility immediately prior to making the Loan.

 

7. INTEREST

 

7.1 Calculation of interest

The rate of interest on each Loan for each Interest Period is the percentage rate per annum which is the aggregate of the applicable:

 

7.1.1 Base Rate; and

 

7.1.2 Margin.

 

7.2 Payment of interest

 

7.2.1 In respect of each Interest Period of one, three or six Months selected in accordance with clause 8.1.2, each Borrower to which a Loan has been made shall pay accrued interest on that Loan on the last day of each such Interest Period.

 

7.2.2 In respect of each Interest Period of 12 (twelve) Months selected in accordance with clause 8.1.2, each Borrower to which a Loan has been made shall pay accrued interest on that Loan as follows:

 

7.2.2.1 all interest accrued during the 6 (six) Month period (a “Semi-Annual Period” ) commencing on the first day of such Interest Period (inclusive of the first day of that Semi-Annual Period but exclusive of the last day of that Semi-Annual Period) shall be paid by that Borrower on the last day of that Semi-Annual Period; and

 

Page 41.


7.2.2.2 all interest accrued during the period commencing on the last day of that Semi-Annual Period and ending on the last day of that Interest Period (inclusive of the first day of that period but exclusive of the last day that period) shall be paid by that Borrower on the last day of that Interest Period.

 

7.3 Default interest

 

7.3.1 If an Obligor fails to pay any amount payable by it under a Finance Document on its due date, interest shall accrue on the overdue amount from the due date up to the date of actual payment (both before and after judgment) at a rate which, subject to clause 7.3.2, is 2% (two percent) higher than the rate which would have been payable if the overdue amount had, during the period of non-payment, constituted a Loan in the currency of the overdue amount for successive Interest Periods, each of a duration selected by the Facility Agent (acting reasonably). Any interest accruing under this clause 7.3 shall be immediately payable by the relevant Obligor on demand by the Facility Agent.

 

7.3.2 If any overdue amount consists of all or part of a Loan which became due on a day which was not the last day of an Interest Period relating to that Loan:

 

7.3.2.1 the first Interest Period for that overdue amount shall have a duration equal to the unexpired portion of the current Interest Period relating to that Loan; and

 

7.3.2.2 the rate of interest applying to the overdue amount during that first Interest Period shall be 2% (two percent) higher than the rate which would have applied if the overdue amount had not become due.

 

7.3.3 Default interest (if unpaid) arising on an overdue amount will be compounded with the overdue amount at the end of each Interest Period applicable to that overdue amount but will remain immediately due and payable.

 

Page 42.


7.4 Notification of rates of interest

The Facility Agent shall promptly notify the Lenders and the relevant Borrower of the determination of a rate of interest under this Agreement.

 

7.5 Absence of quotations

Subject to clause 7.6 ( Market disruption ), if the Base Rate is to be determined by reference to the Reference Banks but a Reference Bank does not supply a quotation by 11h00 (Johannesburg time) on the Reset Date, the applicable Base Rate shall be determined on the basis of the quotations of the remaining Reference Banks.

 

7.6 Market disruption

 

7.6.1 If a Market Disruption Event occurs in relation to a Loan for any Interest Period, then the rate of interest on each Lender’s share of that Loan for the Interest Period shall be the percentage rate nominal annual compounded monthly in arrears which is the sum of:

 

7.6.1.1 the Margin; and

 

7.6.1.2 the rate notified to the Facility Agent by that Lender as soon as practicable and in any event before interest is due to be paid in respect of that Interest Period, to be that which expresses as a percentage rate per annum the cost to that Lender of funding its participation in that Loan from whatever source it may reasonably select.

 

7.6.2 In this Agreement “Market Disruption Event” means:

 

7.6.2.1 at or about noon on the Reset Date for the relevant Interest Period JIBAR is not available on the relevant screen and none or only one of the Reference Banks supplies a rate to the Facility Agent to determine the Base Rate for the relevant Interest Period; or

 

Page 43.


7.6.2.2 before close of business in Johannesburg on the Reset Date for the relevant Interest Period, the Facility Agent receives notifications from any Lender that the cost to it of obtaining matching deposits in the Johannesburg interbank market would be in excess of the Base Rate.

 

7.7 Alternative basis of interest or funding

 

7.7.1 Without prejudice to the generality of clause 7.6.1, if a Market Disruption Event occurs and the Facility Agent or the Parent so requires, the Facility Agent and the Parent shall enter into negotiations (for a period of not more than 30 (thirty days) with a view to agreeing a substitute basis for determining the rate of interest.

 

7.7.2 Any alternative basis agreed pursuant to clause 7.7.1 above shall, with the prior consent of all the Lenders and the Parent, be binding on all Parties.

 

8. INTEREST PERIODS

 

8.1 Selection of Interest Periods

 

8.1.1 A Borrower (or the Parent on behalf of a Borrower) shall select an Interest Period for a Loan in the Utilisation Request for that Loan.

 

8.1.2 Subject to this clause 8 (Interest Periods) , a Borrower (or the Parent on behalf of a Borrower) may select an Interest Period of one, three, six or twelve Months, as specified in the Utilisation Request.

 

Page 44.


8.1.3 An Interest Period for a Loan shall not extend beyond the Final Maturity Date. If an Interest Period for a Loan selected by a Borrower would, but for this clause 8.1.3, extend beyond the Final Maturity Date (such Interest Period, a “Broken Period” ), then for that Broken Period the Base Rate shall be determined in accordance with the following formula:

r = r1 + (t- t1) x (r2-r1) / (t2-t1)

where:

r = the Base Rate to be determined,

r1 = the JIBAR or where it is not possible to determine JIBAR on any Reset Date, the ZAR-JIBAR-Reference Banks Rate, in either case converted to a nominal annual compounded monthly in arrear rate, for the period closest to but less than that Broken Period plus, if this would result in r1 being equal to SAFEX Overnight Deposit Rate, 0,01%;

r2 = JIBAR or where it is not possible to determine JIBAR on any Reset Date, the ZAR-JIBAR-Reference Banks Rate, in either case converted to a nominal annual compounded monthly in arrear rate, for the period closest to but greater than that Broken Period;

t1 = the number of days applicable to the period for which r1 is quoted on the first day of that Broken Period;

t2 = the number of days applicable to the period for which r2 is quoted on the first day of that Broken Period;

t = the number of days in that Broken Period.

 

8.1.4 Each Interest Period for a Loan shall start on the relevant Utilisation Date.

 

8.1.5 A Loan has 1 (one) Interest Period only.

 

8.1.6 Subject to this clause 8 (Interest Periods) , a Borrower (or the Parent on behalf of a Borrower) may select a different Interest Period for a Rollover Loan than the Interest Period of the Loan being refinanced by that Rollover Loan in the Utilisation Request delivered for that Rollover Loan.

 

Page 45.


8.1.7 If a Borrower (or the Parent on behalf of a Borrower) fails to select an Interest Period for a Loan in the Utilisation Request for that Loan, the Interest Period for the applicable Loan shall be 3 (three) Months.

 

8.2 Non-Business Days

If an Interest Period or a Semi-Annual Period would otherwise end on a day which is not a Business Day, that Interest Period or Semi-Annual Period will instead end on the next Business Day in that calendar month (if there is one) or the preceding Business Day (if there is not).

 

8.3 Consolidation of Loans

If two or more Interest Periods relate to Loans made to the same Borrower and end on the same date, those Loans will be consolidated into, and treated as, a single Loan on the last day of the Interest Period.

 

8.4 Day Count Convention

Any interest or fee accruing under a Finance Document will accrue from day to day and is calculated inclusive of the first day but exclusive of the last day of an Interest Period or Semi-Annual Period, as the case may be, on the basis of the actual number of days elapsed and a year of 365 days (irrespective of whether the year is a leap year) or, in any case where the practice in the Johannesburg interbank market differs, in accordance with that market practice.

 

9. REPAYMENTS

Each Borrower shall repay each Loan made to it on the last day of its Interest Period such that all Loans outstanding under the Facility (including accrued and unpaid interest thereon) shall be repaid in full by no later than the Final Maturity Date.

 

Page 46.


10. PREPAYMENTS

 

10.1 Illegality

If it becomes unlawful in any applicable jurisdiction for a Lender to perform any of its obligations as contemplated by this Agreement or to fund or maintain its participation in any Loan:

 

10.1.1 that Lender shall promptly notify the Facility Agent upon becoming aware of that event;

 

10.1.2 upon the Facility Agent notifying the Parent, the Commitment of that Lender will be immediately cancelled; and

 

10.1.3 each Borrower shall repay that Lender’s participation in the Loans made to that Borrower on the last day of the Interest Period for each Loan occurring after the Facility Agent has notified the Parent or, if earlier, the date specified by the Lender in the notice delivered to the Facility Agent (being no earlier than the last day of any applicable grace period permitted by law).

 

10.2 Mandatory Prepayment

 

10.2.1 If any person or group of persons acting in concert gains control of the Parent:

 

10.2.1.1 the Parent shall promptly notify the Facility Agent upon becoming aware of that event;

 

10.2.1.2 a Lender shall not be obliged to fund a Utilisation (except for a Rollover Loan) and the Facility Agent and the Parent shall consult about the change of control;

 

10.2.1.3 if the Majority Lenders so require after a period of 45 (forty-five) days from receipt of the notice referred to in clause 10.2.1.1 above, the Facility Agent shall by notice to the Parent, (such notice to be delivered no later than 60 (sixty) days from receipt of the notice referred to in clause 10.2.1.1 above), cancel the Total Commitments and declare all outstanding Loans, together with accrued interest and all other amounts accrued under the Finance Documents immediately due and payable, whereupon the Total Commitments will be cancelled and all such outstanding amounts will become immediately due and payable;

 

Page 47.


10.2.1.4 if the Facility Agent does not serve the notice referred to in clause 10.2.1.3 above, each Lender may by notice to the Facility Agent, which shall be delivered not earlier than 45 (forty-five) days nor later than 60 (sixty) days from receipt of the notice referred to in 10.2.1.1 above, whereupon the Facility Agent shall by notice to the Parent (such notice to be delivered promptly after receipt of the Lender’s notification), cancel the Commitment of that Lender and declare the participation of that Lender in all outstanding Loans, together with accrued interest thereon and all other amounts due to such Lender under the Finance Documents immediately due and payable, whereupon the Commitment of the Lender will be cancelled and all such outstanding amounts will become immediately due and payable.

 

10.2.2 For the purpose of clause 10.2.1 above, “control” means:

 

10.2.2.1 the power (whether by way ownership of shares, proxy, contract, agency or otherwise) to:

 

10.2.2.1.1 cast, or control the casting of, more than one-half of the maximum number of votes that might be cast at a general meeting of the Parent; or

 

10.2.2.1.2 appoint or remove all, or the majority, of the directors or other equivalent officers of the Parent; or

 

10.2.2.1.3 give directions with respect to the operating and financial policies of the Parent which the directors or other equivalent officers of the Parent are obliged to comply with; or

 

Page 48.


10.2.2.2 the holding of more than one-half of the issued share capital of the Parent (excluding any part of that issued share capital that carries no right to participate beyond a specified amount in a distribution of either profits or capital).

For the purpose of clause 10.2.1 above, “acting in concert” means, a group of persons who, pursuant to an agreement or understanding (whether formal or informal), actively co-operate, through the acquisition by any of them, either directly or indirectly, of shares in the Parent, to obtain or consolidate control of the Parent.

 

10.3 Voluntary Prepayment

 

10.3.1 At any time prior to the Final Maturity Date and for as long as no Default is continuing, a Borrower may by giving to the Facility Agent not less than 5 (five) Business Days’ prior written notice (a “Prepayment Notice” ) to that effect, prepay the whole or a portion of the Loans made to it (the “Voluntary Prepayment Portion” ), subject to the conditions and provisions relating to prepayment as set out in clauses 10.3.2 and 10.7 ( Restrictions and Miscellaneous Provisions relating to Prepayments ).

 

10.3.2 Any proposed voluntary prepayment hereunder shall be conditional upon and subject to compliance by the Borrowers with the following conditions and provisions:

 

10.3.2.1 such prepayment shall not result in a breach of the Financial Covenants immediately after such prepayment has been made;

 

10.3.2.2 the Voluntary Prepayment Portion being prepaid shall be a minimum aggregate amount of R10 000 000 (Ten Million Rand) (or, if less, the amount of the then outstanding Loans) and in integral multiples of R10 000 000 (Ten Million Rand) thereafter.

 

Page 49.


10.4 Cancellation

Any unutilised portion of the Available Facility shall be cancelled on the last day of the Availability Period and the Available Facility shall be reduced to zero.

 

10.5 Voluntary Cancellation

During the Availability Period, the Parent may, if it gives the Facility Agent not less than 10 (ten) Business Days’ (or such shorter period as the Majority Lenders may agree) prior notice, cancel the whole or any part (being a minimum amount of R10 000 000 (Ten Million Rand) and integral multiples of R10 000 000 (Ten Million Rand) in excess thereof) of the Available Facility. Any cancellation under this clause 10.5 shall reduce the Commitments of the Lenders rateably.

 

10.6 Breakage Costs

 

10.6.1 Each Borrower shall, within 3 (three) Business Days of demand by a Finance Party, pay to that Finance Party its Breakage Costs attributable to all or any part of a Loan or Unpaid Sum being paid by that Borrower on a day other than the last day of an Interest Period for that Loan or Unpaid Sum.

 

10.6.2 Each Lender shall, as soon as reasonably practicable after a demand by the Facility Agent, provide a certificate confirming the amount of its Breakage Costs for any Interest Period in which they accrue.

 

10.7 Restrictions and Miscellaneous Provisions relating to Prepayments

 

10.7.1 Any notice of cancellation or prepayment given by any Party under this clause 10 shall be irrevocable and, unless a contrary indication appears in this Agreement, shall specify the date or dates upon which the relevant cancellation or prepayment is to be made and the amount of that cancellation or prepayment.

 

Page 50.


10.7.2 Any prepayment under this Agreement shall be made together with accrued interest on the amount prepaid and, subject to any Breakage Costs, without premium or penalty.

 

10.7.3 Unless a contrary indication appears in this Agreement, any part of any Loan which is prepaid may be reborrowed in accordance with the terms of this Agreement.

 

10.7.4 The Borrowers shall not repay or prepay all or any part of the Loans or cancel all or any part of the Commitments except at the times and in the manner expressly provided for in this Agreement.

 

10.7.5 No amount of the Total Commitments cancelled under this Agreement may be subsequently reinstated.

 

10.7.6 If the Facility Agent received a notice under this clause 10 it shall promptly forward a copy of that notice to either the Parent or the affected Lender, as appropriate.

 

11. FEES

 

11.1 Commitment Fees

 

11.1.1 The Parent (or a Borrower nominated by the Parent) shall pay to the Facility Agent (for the account of each Lender) a commitment fee in Rand which shall be computed at the rate of 0.85% (zero comma eight five percent) per annum on that Lender’s Available Commitment.

 

11.1.2 The accrued commitment fee is payable on the last day of each successive period of 6 (six) Months which ends during the Availability Period, on the last day of the Availability Period and, if cancelled in full, on the cancelled amount of the relevant Lender’s Commitment at the time the cancellation is effective.

 

Page 51.


11.2 Arranging Fee

The Parent (or a Borrower nominated by the Parent) shall pay to the Arranger an arranging fee in the amount and at the times agreed in a Fee Letter.

 

11.3 Agency Fee

The Parent (or a Borrower nominated by the Parent) shall pay to the Facility Agent (for its own account) an agency fee in the amount and at the times agreed in a Fee Letter.

 

12. TAX GROSS UP AND INDEMNITIES

 

12.1 Tax gross-up

 

12.1.1 Each Obligor shall make all payments to be made by it without any Tax Deduction, unless a Tax Deduction is required by law.

 

12.1.2 The Parent shall promptly upon becoming aware that an Obligor must make a Tax Deduction (or that there is any change in the rate or the basis of a Tax Deduction) notify the Facility Agent accordingly. Similarly, a Lender shall notify the Facility Agent on becoming so aware in respect of a payment payable to that Lender. If the Facility Agent receives such notification from a Lender it shall notify the Parent and, if applicable, that Obligor.

 

12.1.3 If a Tax Deduction is required by law to be made by an Obligor, the amount of the payment due from that Obligor shall be increased to an amount which (after making any Tax Deduction) leaves an amount equal to the payment which would have been due if no Tax Deduction had been required.

 

12.1.4 If an Obligor is required to make a Tax Deduction, that Obligor shall make that Tax Deduction and any payment required in connection with that Tax Deduction within the time allowed and in the minimum amount required by law.

 

Page 52.


12.1.5 Within thirty days of making either a Tax Deduction or any payment required in connection with that Tax Deduction, the Obligor making that Tax Deduction shall deliver to the Facility Agent for the Finance Party entitled to the payment evidence reasonably satisfactory to that Finance Party that the Tax Deduction has been made or (as applicable) any appropriate payment paid to the relevant taxing authority.

 

12.2 Tax indemnity

 

12.2.1 The Parent shall (within 3 (three) Business Days of demand by the Facility Agent) pay to a Finance Party an amount equal to the loss, liability or cost which that Finance Party determines (in its absolute discretion) will be or has been (directly or indirectly) suffered for or on account of Tax by that Finance Party in respect of a Finance Document.

 

12.2.2 Clause 12.2.1 above shall not apply:

 

12.2.2.1 with respect to any Tax assessed on a Finance Party:

 

12.2.2.1.1 under the law of the jurisdiction in which that Finance Party is incorporated or, if different, the jurisdiction (or jurisdictions) in which that Finance Party is treated as resident for tax purposes; or

 

12.2.2.1.2 under the law of the jurisdiction in which that Finance Party’s Facility Office is located in respect of amounts received or receivable in that jurisdiction,

if that Tax is imposed on or calculated by reference to the net income received or receivable (but not any sum deemed to be received or receivable) by that Finance Party; or

 

12.2.2.2 to the extent a loss, liability or cost is compensated for by an increased payment under clause 12.1 ( Tax gross-up ).

 

Page 53.


12.2.3 A Finance Party making, or intending to make a claim under clause 12.2.1 above shall promptly notify the Facility Agent of the event which will give, or has given, rise to the claim, following which the Facility Agent shall notify the Parent.

 

12.2.4 A Finance Party shall, on receiving a payment from an Obligor under this clause 12.2, notify the Facility Agent.

 

12.3 Tax Credit

If an Obligor makes a Tax Payment and the relevant Finance Party determines (in its absolute discretion) that:

 

12.3.1 a Tax Credit is attributable either to an increased payment of which that Tax Payment forms part, or to that Tax Payment; and

 

12.3.2 that Finance Party has obtained, utilised and retained that Tax Credit,

the Finance Party shall pay an amount to such Obligor which that Finance Party determines (in its absolute discretion) will leave it (after that payment) in the same after-Tax position as it would have been in had the Tax Payment not been required to be made by such Obligor.

 

12.4 Stamp taxes

The Parent shall pay and, within 3 (three) Business Days of demand, indemnify each Finance Party against any cost, loss or liability that a Finance Party incurs in relation to all stamp duty, registration and other similar Taxes payable in respect of any Finance Document.

 

12.5 Value added tax

 

12.5.1 All amounts set out, or expressed to be payable under a Finance Document by any Party to a Finance Party which (in whole or in part) constitute the consideration for VAT purposes shall be deemed to be exclusive of any VAT which is chargeable on such supply, and accordingly, subject to clause 12.5.3 below, if VAT is chargeable on any supply made by any Finance Party to any Party under a Finance Document, that Party shall pay to the Finance Party (in addition to and at the same time as paying the consideration) an amount equal to the amount of the VAT (and such Finance Party shall promptly provide an appropriate VAT invoice to such Party).

 

Page 54.


12.5.2 If VAT is chargeable on any supply made by any Finance Party (the “Supplier” ) to any other Finance Party (the “Recipient” ) under a Finance Document, and any Party (the “Relevant Party” ) is required by the terms of any Finance Document to pay an amount equal to the consideration for such supply to the Supplier (rather than being required to reimburse the Recipient in respect of that consideration), such Party shall also pay to the Supplier (in addition to and at the same time as paying such amount) an amount equal to the amount of such VAT. The Recipient will promptly pay to the Relevant Party an amount equal to any credit or repayment from the relevant tax authority which it reasonably determines relates to the VAT chargeable on that supply.

 

12.5.3 Where a Finance Document requires any Party to reimburse a Finance Party for any costs or expenses, that Party shall also at the same time pay and indemnify the Finance Party against all VAT incurred by the Finance Party in respect of the costs or expenses to the extent that the Finance Party reasonably determines that neither it nor any other member of any group of which it is a member for VAT purposes is entitled to credit or repayment from the relevant tax authority in respect of the VAT.

 

Page 55.


13. INCREASED COSTS

 

13.1 Increased costs

 

13.1.1 Subject to clause 13.3 ( Exceptions ) the Parent (or a Borrower nominated by the Parent) shall, within 5 (five) Business Days of a demand by the Facility Agent, pay for the account of a Finance Party the amount of any Increased Costs incurred by that Finance Party or any of its affiliates as a result of (i) the introduction of or any change in (or in the interpretation, administration or application of) any law or regulation or (ii) compliance with any law or regulation made after the date of this Agreement.

 

13.1.2 In this Agreement “Increased Costs” means:

 

13.1.2.1 a reduction in the rate of return from a Facility or on a Finance Party’s (or its affiliate’s) overall capital;

 

13.1.2.2 an additional or increased cost; or

 

13.1.2.3 a reduction of any amount due and payable under any Finance Document,

which is incurred or suffered by a Finance Party or any of its affiliates to the extent that it is attributable to that Finance Party having entered into its Commitment or funding or performing its obligations under any Finance Document.

 

13.2 Increased cost claims

 

13.2.1 A Finance Party intending to make a claim pursuant to clause 0 ( Increased costs ) shall notify the Facility Agent of the event giving rise to the claim, following which the Facility Agent shall promptly notify the Parent.

 

13.2.2 Each Finance Party shall, as soon as practicable after a demand by the Facility Agent, provide a certificate in accordance with clause 27.2 ( Accounts and Certificates ) confirming the amount of its Increased Costs.

 

Page 56.


13.3 Exceptions

Clause 0 ( Increased costs ) does not apply to the extent any Increased Cost is:

 

13.3.1 attributable to a Tax Deduction required by law to be made by an Obligor;

 

13.3.2 compensated for by clause 12.2 ( Tax indemnity ) (or would have been compensated for under clause 12.2 ( Tax indemnity ) but was not so compensated solely because any of the exclusions in clause 12.2.2 applied); or

 

13.3.3 attributable to the wilful breach by the relevant Finance Party or its affiliates of any law or regulation.

 

14. COSTS AND EXPENSES

 

14.1 Transaction Expenses

The Parent (or a Borrower nominated by the Parent) shall promptly within 5 (five) Business Days of demand pay the Facility Agent the amount of all reasonable or necessary costs and expenses, including reasonable and agreed legal fees payable up to an aggregate maximum amount of R10 000.00 (Ten Thousand Rand) excluding VAT and disbursements, reasonably incurred by the Facility Agent and the Lenders in connection with:

 

14.1.1 the negotiation, preparation, printing and execution of:

 

14.1.1.1 this Agreement, the other Finance Documents and the Financial Close Documents; and

 

14.1.1.2 any other Finance Documents executed after the Signature Date;

provided that no Obligor shall be liable for any cost or expense so incurred (other than the legal fees referred to above) in excess of R20 000 (Twenty Thousand Rand) unless the incurral of that cost or expense has been approved in writing by the Parent in advance of its incurral.

 

Page 57.


14.2 Amendment Costs

An Obligor shall within 5 (five) Business Days of demand reimburse the Facility Agent for the amount of all costs, fees and expenses reasonably incurred by the Facility Agent in connection with any amendment, waiver or consent requested by that Obligor in relation to any Finance Document.

 

14.3 Enforcement Costs

The Obligors shall be jointly and severally liable for payment, within 5 (five) Business Days of demand of the amount of all costs and expenses (including legal fees on the scale as between attorney and own client whether incurred before or after judgement) incurred by any Finance Party in connection with the enforcement of, or the preservation of any rights under, any Finance Document.

 

15. GUARANTEE AND INDEMNITY

 

15.1 Guarantee and Indemnity

Each Guarantor irrevocably and unconditionally jointly and severally:

 

15.1.1 guarantees to each Finance Party the punctual performance by each Borrower of all that Borrower’s obligations under the Finance Documents;

 

15.1.2 undertakes with each Finance Party that whenever a Borrower does not pay any amount when due under or in connection with any Finance Document, that Guarantor shall immediately on demand pay that amount as if it was the principal obligor; and

 

Page 58.


15.1.3 indemnifies each Finance Party immediately on demand (and shall make the relevant payment within 5 (five) Business Days of such demand) against any cost, loss or liability suffered by that Finance Party if any obligation guaranteed by it is or becomes unenforceable, invalid or illegal. The amount of the cost, loss or liability shall be equal to the amount which the Finance Party would otherwise have been entitled to recover.

 

15.2 Continuing Guarantee

This guarantee is a continuing guarantee and will extend to the ultimate balance of sums payable by any Obligor under the Finance Documents regardless of any intermediate payment or discharge in whole or in part.

 

15.3 Reinstatement

If any payment by an Obligor or any one of them or any discharge given by a Finance Party (whether in respect of the obligations of any Obligor or any security for those obligations or otherwise) is avoided or reduced as a result of insolvency, business rescue proceedings, liquidation, winding up or any similar event:

 

15.3.1 the liability of each Obligor shall continue as if the payment, discharge, avoidance or reduction has not occurred; and

 

15.3.2 each Finance Party shall be entitled to recover the value or amount of that security or payment from each Obligor as if the payment, discharge, avoidance or reduction has not occurred.

 

15.4 Waiver of Defences

The obligations of each Guarantor under this clause 15 ( Guarantee and Indemnity ) will not be affected by an act, omission, matter or thing which, but for this clause, would reduce, release or prejudice any of its obligations under this clause 15 ( Guarantee and Indemnity ) (without limitation and whether or not known to it or any Finance Party) including:

 

15.4.1 any time, waiver or consent granted to, or composition with, the Obligors or any one of them or other person;

 

Page 59.


15.4.2 the release of the Obligors or any one of them or any other person under the terms of any composition or arrangement with any creditor of any member of the Group;

 

15.4.3 the taking, variation, compromise, exchange, renewal or release of, or refusal or neglect to perfect, take up or enforce, any rights against, or security over assets of, the Obligors or any one of them or other person or any non-presentation or non-observance of any formality or other requirement in respect of any instrument or any failure to realise the full value of any security;

 

15.4.4 any incapacity or lack of power, authority or legal personality of or dissolution or change in the members or status of the Obligors or any one of them or any other person;

 

15.4.5 any amendment (however fundamental) or replacement of a Finance Document or any other document or security;

 

15.4.6 any unenforceability, illegality or invalidity of any obligation of any person under any Finance Document or any other document or security; or

 

15.4.7 any insolvency, business rescue proceedings, liquidation, winding up or similar proceedings.

 

15.5 Immediate Recourse

Each Guarantor waives any right it may have of first requiring any Finance Party to proceed against or enforce any other rights or security or claim payment from any person before claiming from that Guarantor under this clause 15.

 

Page 60.


15.6 Subordination of Guarantors’ Rights

 

15.6.1 When any Default has occurred and is continuing, each of the Guarantors acknowledges and agrees that any recourse claims it may have against the Obligors or any one of them (the “Recourse Claims” ) shall be subordinated to the claims of the Lenders against the Obligors under this Agreement so that until the earlier to occur of the discharge in full of all the Obligors’ obligations under the Finance Documents (the “Secured Obligations”) or the remedy of the Default:

 

15.6.1.1 the Finance Parties’ claims will rank in priority to the Recourse Claims; and

 

15.6.1.2 no Guarantor will claim, receive or accept, directly or indirectly, payment of any Recourse Claims; and

 

15.6.1.3 no Guarantor shall take, accept or receive the benefit of any Encumbrance from any Obligor; and

 

15.6.1.4 no Guarantor shall obtain or enforce any judgement against any Obligor in relation to any of the Recourse Claims.

 

15.6.2 No Guarantor shall petition or apply for or vote in favour of any resolution for the winding-up, dissolution or administration or analogous or similar process with regard to the Obligors or any one of them prior to the date of full and final discharge of the Secured Obligations.

 

15.6.3 In any liquidation of (whether provisional or final) or judicial management of or compromise of any Obligor, no Guarantor shall prove or seek to prove claims in respect of any Recourse Claims it may have prior to the date of full and final discharge of all of the Secured Obligations if the effect of such proof would be to reduce the dividend payable to the Finance Parties in relation to the Finance Parties’ claims at the time of such liquidation, judicial management or compromise.

 

Page 61.


15.7 Additional Security

This guarantee is in addition to and is not in any way prejudiced by any other guarantee or security and neither shall it prejudice any other guarantee or security now or subsequently held by the Lender.

 

16. REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES

 

16.1 Representations and Warranties

Each Obligor makes the representations and warranties set out in this clause 16.1 to each Finance Party.

 

16.1.1 Status

 

16.1.1.1 It is a limited liability company, duly incorporated and validly existing under the law of its jurisdiction of incorporation.

 

16.1.1.2 It has the power to own its assets and carry on its business as it is being conducted or is contemplated to be conducted.

 

16.1.2 Power and Authority

It has the power to enter into and perform, and has taken all necessary action to authorise its entry into, and performance of, the Finance Documents to which it is party and the transactions contemplated by those Finance Documents.

 

16.1.3 Binding Obligations

The obligations expressed to be assumed by it in each Finance Document to which it is a party are, subject to any general principles of law as at the Signature Date limiting its obligations, which are specifically referred to in any legal opinion delivered pursuant to clause 5.1 (Initial Conditions Precedent) or clause 22 (Change to Obligors) , legal, valid, binding and enforceable obligations.

 

Page 62.


16.1.4 Non-Conflict with Other Obligations

The entry into and performance by it of, and the transactions contemplated by, the Finance Documents to which it is a party do not and will not conflict with:

 

16.1.4.1 any law applicable to it;

 

16.1.4.2 its Constitutional Documents; or

 

16.1.4.3 any material agreement or instrument binding upon it or any of its assets.

 

16.1.5 Authorisations

All authorisations required:

 

16.1.5.1 to enable it lawfully to enter into, exercise its rights and comply with its obligations under the Finance Documents to which it is a party and to ensure that the obligations expressed to be assumed by it thereunder are legal, valid, binding and enforceable;

 

16.1.5.2 to enable it to lawfully conduct its business where failure to obtain such authorisation would result in a Material Adverse Effect; and

 

16.1.5.3 to make the Finance Documents to which it is a party admissible in evidence in its jurisdiction of incorporation,

have been obtained or effected and are in full force and effect.

 

16.1.6 Governing law and enforcement

Subject to any general principles of law as at the date of this Agreement set out in any legal opinion delivered pursuant to clause 5.1 ( Initial conditions precedent ) or clause 22 ( Changes to the Obligors ):

 

16.1.6.1 the choice of South African law as the governing law of the Finance Documents will be recognised and enforced in its jurisdiction of incorporation; and

 

Page 63.


16.1.6.2 any judgment obtained in South Africa in relation to a Finance Document will be recognised and enforced in its jurisdiction of incorporation.

 

16.1.7 Deduction of Tax

It is not required under the law of its jurisdiction of incorporation to make any deduction for or on account of Tax from any payment it may make under any Finance Document.

 

16.1.8 No filing or stamp taxes

Except to the extent set out in any legal opinion provided pursuant to clause 5.1 ( Initial conditions precedent ) or clause 22 ( Changes to the Obligors ) in relation to it, under the law of its jurisdiction of incorporation it is not necessary that the Finance Documents be filed, recorded or enrolled with any court or other authority in that jurisdiction or that any stamp, registration or similar tax be paid on or in relation to the Finance Documents or the transactions contemplated by the Finance Documents.

 

16.1.9 No Default

 

16.1.9.1 No Default is continuing or might reasonably be expected to result from the making of any Utilisation.

 

16.1.9.2 It is not, nor is it likely to be as a result of entering into and performing its obligations under the Finance Documents, in violation of any law or in breach of or in default under any agreement to which it is a party or which is binding on it or any of its assets to an extent or in a manner which could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

16.1.10 No Misleading Information

 

16.1.10.1 To the best of its knowledge and belief (having made due enquiry), all written factual information supplied by it to the Finance Parties in connection with this Agreement (excluding equity analysts reports and the reports from credit rating agencies) was true and accurate in all material respects as at the date it was given or as at the date (if any) at which it was stated and was not deliberately misleading in any material respects at such date. The financial projections and forecasts contained in the information have been prepared in good faith on the basis of recent historical information and on the basis of reasonable assumptions.

 

Page 64.


16.1.10.2 It has not knowingly withheld any information which, if disclosed, could reasonably be expected materially and adversely to affect the decision of any Finance Party in considering whether or not to provide finance to the Borrowers.

 

16.1.11 Financial Statements

 

16.1.11.1 The Original Financial Statements were prepared in accordance with GAAP.

 

16.1.11.2 The Original Financial Statements fairly represent the Group’s financial condition and operations during the relevant financial period.

 

16.1.12 Pari Passu Ranking

Its payment obligations under the Finance Documents to which it is a party rank at least pari passu with the claims of all its other unsecured and unsubordinated creditors, except for obligations mandatorily preferred by law applying to companies generally in the jurisdiction of its incorporation.

 

16.1.13 No Proceedings Pending or Threatened

Other than as disclosed in the financial statements most recently delivered to the Facility Agent pursuant to Clause 17.1 ( Financial Statements ) or arising from the potential litigation disclosed in Schedule 4 ( Silicosis Litigation ), no litigation, arbitration or administrative proceedings of or before any court or arbitral body have been started or (to the best of its knowledge and belief, after due enquiry) threatened against it which could reasonably be expected to affect the validity, legality or enforceability of any Finance Documents to which it is a party.

 

Page 65.


16.1.14 No Winding-Up

 

16.1.14.1 No Material Group Company has taken any corporate action, nor have any other steps been taken or legal proceedings started or (to the best of its knowledge and belief, after due enquiry) threatened against any Material Group Company, for its winding-up, dissolution, administration, re-organisation or the commencement of business rescue proceedings or for the enforcement of any Encumbrance over all or any of its revenues or assets or for the appointment of a receiver, administrator, administrative receiver, business rescue practitioner, conservator, custodian, trustee or similar officer of it or of all or any of its assets, which could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

16.1.14.2 The board of any Material Group Company that is financially distressed, which in the case of a Material Group Company (other than an Obligor) could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect, has delivered the written notice required in terms of section 129(7) of the Companies Act.

 

16.1.15 No Encumbrances

 

16.1.15.1 No Encumbrance exists over all or any of the assets of any Material Group Company except for Permitted Encumbrances.

 

16.1.15.2 No Encumbrance would arise as a result of the execution of and performance of its rights and obligations under the Finance Documents.

 

Page 66.


16.1.16 Assets

It and each Material Group Company has good title to or validly leases or licenses all of the assets necessary to carry on its business as presently conducted, to the extent that failure to comply with this clause 16.1.16 ( Assets ) could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

16.1.17 Insurance

Each Material Group Company maintains insurances on and in relation to its business and assets against those risks and to the extent as is usual for companies in the jurisdiction in which it conducts its business carrying on substantially similar business in such jurisdiction.

 

16.1.18 Environmental Compliance

Each Material Group Company has adopted and complies with an environmental policy which requires monitoring of and compliance with all applicable Environmental Law and Environmental Permits applicable to it from time to time unless non-compliance with such policy could not reasonably be expected to cause a Material Adverse Effect.

 

16.1.19 Environmental Claims

No Environmental Claim (not of a frivolous or vexatious nature) has been commenced or (to the best of its knowledge and belief, having made due enquiry) is threatened against any Material Group Company where that claim would be reasonably likely, if determined against that Material Group Company, to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

Page 67.


16.1.20 Taxation

 

16.1.20.1 It and each Material Group Company has duly and punctually paid and discharged all Taxes imposed upon it or its assets within the time period allowed without incurring penalties except to the extent that:

 

16.1.20.1.1 payment is being contested in good faith;

 

16.1.20.1.2 it has maintained adequate reserves for those Taxes; and

 

16.1.20.1.3 payment can be lawfully withheld.

 

16.1.20.2 It is not and no Material Group Company is materially overdue in the filing of any Tax returns.

 

16.1.21 Ownership of Material Group Companies

 

16.1.21.1 Each existing Material Group Company on the date of this Agreement (other than the Cerro Corona Subsidiary, Newshelf, GFO, GFIJVH and the Ghanaian Companies) is a wholly-owned Subsidiary of the Parent and any member of the Group which becomes a Material Group Company after the date of this Agreement will be a wholly or partially owned Subsidiary of the Parent and the members of the Group holding the shares in such Material Group Company have not reduced their shareholding in such Subsidiary below the level of their shareholding at the time such Subsidiary became a Material Group Company.

 

16.1.21.2 The Parent holds at least 74% (seventy-four percent) of the issued share capital of Newshelf.

 

16.1.21.3 Newshelf holds at least 74% (seventy-four percent) of the issued share capital of each of GFO and GFIJVH.

 

16.1.21.4 The Parent indirectly holds at least 90% (ninety percent) of the issued share capital of each Ghanaian Company.

 

Page 68.


16.1.21.5 The Parent indirectly holds at least 99% (ninety-nine percent) of the common shares in the share capital of the Cerro Corona Subsidiary (which equates to 98,5% (ninety eight comma five percent) of the issued and outstanding shares in the share capital of the Cerro Corona Subsidiary).

 

16.1.22 No Material Adverse Effect

There has been no change in the business, condition (financial or otherwise), operations, performance, properties or prospects of the Obligors or the Group (taken as a whole) since 31 December 2011 which could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect excluding, for the avoidance of doubt, the Demerger.

 

16.2 Repetition

 

16.2.1 All the representations and warranties in this clause 16 ( Representations and Warranties ) are made by each Obligor on the Signature Date (other than in respect of clause 16.1.11.1, which is deemed to be made on the date such information is provided).

 

16.2.2 The Repeating Representations are made or deemed to be made by an Additional Guarantor, the day on which it becomes an Additional Guarantor.

 

16.2.3 All the representations and warranties in this clause 16 are deemed to be made by each Obligor (by reference to the facts and circumstances then existing) on the date of each Utilisation Request and Utilisation Date.

 

16.2.4 The Repeating Representations are deemed to be made on each Repetition Date by each Obligor in either case by reference to the facts and circumstances then existing on that Repetition Date.

 

16.2.5 For the purposes of clause 16.2.2 above:

 

16.2.5.1 “Repeating Representations” means the representations and warranties contained in clause 16.1.1 ( Status ) to clause 16.1.22 ( No Material Adverse Effect ) (each inclusive) with the exception of clauses 16.1.3 ( Binding Obligations), 16.1.6 ( Governing Law and Enforcement) , 16.1.7 (Deduction of Tax) , 16.1.8 (No Filing or Stamp Taxes) and 16.1.10 ( No Misleading Information ) and 16.1.13 (No Proceedings Pending or Threatened) ; save that the references in clauses 16.1.11.1 and 16.1.11.2 to the Original Financial Statements” shall, for the purposes of this Repeating Representation, be construed as references to the most recent audited consolidated financial statements of the Group and the audited financial statements of the Borrowers and each Guarantor delivered to the Facility Agent under clause 17.1 ( Financial Statements ).

 

Page 69.


16.2.5.2 “Repetition Date” means the first day of each Interest Period (other than on the first day of the first Interest Period for a Loan).

 

16.3 Reliance

The Finance Parties have entered into the Finance Documents to which each of them is a party on the strength of, and relying on, the representations and warranties set out in clause 16.1 ( Representations and Warranties ), each of which shall be deemed to be a separate representation and warranty given without prejudice to any other representation or warranty and deemed to be a material representation inducing the Finance Parties to enter into the Finance Documents to which each of them is party.

 

17. INFORMATION UNDERTAKINGS

The undertakings in this clause 17 ( Information Undertakings ) are given in favour of each Finance Party and remain in force from the Signature Date for so long as any amount is outstanding under the Finance Documents or any Commitment is in force.

 

17.1 Financial Statements

The Parent shall supply to the Facility Agent:

 

17.1.1 as soon as the same become available, but in any event within 120 (one hundred and twenty) days after the end of each of its Financial Years the audited consolidated financial statements of the Parent for that Financial Year;

 

Page 70.


17.1.2 as soon as the same become available, but in any event within 150 (one hundred and fifty) days after the end of each of its Financial Years:

 

17.1.2.1 the audited financial statements of each Obligor (other than GF Holdings and GFOH unless there is a legal requirement to audit its financial statements and any other Obligor which is not legally required to audit its financial statements) for that Financial Year; and

 

17.1.2.2 if the audited financial statements of GF Holdings and/or GFOH and/or any other Obligor which is not legally required to audit its financial statements (as the case may be) are not delivered under 17.1.2.1 above, the unaudited financial statements of GF Holdings and/or GFOH and/or any other Obligor which is not legally required to audit its financial statements (as the case may be) for that Financial Year;

 

17.1.3 as soon as the same become available, but in any event within 60 (sixty) days after the first 6 (six) Months of each of its Financial Years:

 

17.1.3.1 the unaudited financial statements of each Obligor for the first 6 (six) Month period of that Financial Year; and

 

17.1.3.2 the unaudited consolidated financial statements of the Parent for the first 6 (six) Month period of that Financial Year; and

 

17.1.4 as soon as the same become available, but in any event within 60 (sixty) days after the end of each quarter of each Financial Year:

 

17.1.4.1 the unaudited consolidated financial statements of the Parent for that period; and

 

Page 71.


17.1.4.2 the unaudited financial statements of each Obligor for that period.

 

17.2 Compliance Certificate

 

17.2.1 The Parent shall supply to the Facility Agent, with each set of consolidated financial statements delivered pursuant to clause 17.1.1 and 17.1.3 of clause 17.1 ( Financial Statements ), a Compliance Certificate setting out (in reasonable detail) computations as to compliance with clause 18 ( Financial Covenants ) as at the date as at which those financial statements were drawn up.

 

17.2.2 Each Compliance Certificate shall be signed by 2 (two) directors of the Parent and, if required to be delivered with the audited consolidated financial statements delivered pursuant to clause 17.1.2.1 of clause 17.1 ( Financial statements ), by the Auditors.

 

17.3 Requirements as to Financial Statements

 

17.3.1 Each set of financial statements delivered pursuant to clause 17.1 ( Financial Statements ) shall be certified by a director of the Obligor as fairly representing its financial condition as at the date as at which those financial statements were drawn up.

 

17.3.2 Each Obligor shall procure that each set of financial statements delivered pursuant to clause 17.1 ( Financial Statements ) is prepared in accordance with GAAP, the requirements of its jurisdiction of incorporation and accounting practises and financial reference periods consistent with those applied in the preparation of the Original Financial Statements.

 

17.3.3 Clause 17.3.2 shall not apply to the extent that, in relation to any sets of financial statements, the Obligor notifies the Facility Agent that there has been a change in GAAP or the accounting practices or reference periods and its Auditors (in the case of its annual audited financial statements) or the Parent (in the case of any of its other financial statements) delivers to the Facility Agent:

 

17.3.3.1 a description of any change necessary for those financial statements to reflect GAAP, accounting practices and reference periods upon which the Original Financial Statements were prepared; and

 

Page 72.


17.3.3.2 sufficient information, in form and substance as may be reasonably required by the Facility Agent, to enable the Lenders to determine whether clause 18 ( Financial Covenants ) has been complied with and make an accurate comparison between the financial position indicated in those financial statements and the Original Financial Statements.

 

17.3.4 If an Obligor notifies the Facility Agent of a change in accordance with clause 17.3.3 above, then an Obligor and the Facility Agent shall enter into negotiations in good faith with a view to agreeing:

 

17.3.4.1 whether or not the change might result in material alteration in the commercial effect of any of the terms of this Agreement or any other Finance Document; and

 

17.3.4.2 if so, any amendments to this Agreement or any other Finance Document which may be necessary to ensure that the change does not result in any material alteration in the commercial effect of those terms,

and if any amendments are agreed they shall take effect and be binding on each of the Parties in accordance with their terms.

 

17.3.5 Any reference in this Agreement to “ financial statements ” shall be construed as a reference to those financial statements as the same may be adjusted under this clause 17.3 to reflect the basis upon which the Original Financial Statements were prepared.

 

Page 73.


17.4 Access to Records

At any time after the occurrence of a Default and for so long as it is continuing, upon the request of the Facility Agent, each Obligor shall (at that Obligor’s expense) provide to that person or any of its representatives and professional advisors such access to that Obligor’s records (including its general ledger), books and assets as that person may require at reasonable times and upon reasonable notice.

 

17.5 Information : Miscellaneous

Each Obligor shall supply to the Facility Agent (in sufficient copies for all Finance Parties, if the Facility Agent so requests under clause 17.7 ( Delivery of Information )):

 

17.5.1 all documents dispatched by that Obligor to its shareholders (or any class of them) or its creditors generally at the same time as they are dispatched;

 

17.5.2 the details of any litigation, arbitration or administrative proceedings which are current, threatened or pending against any Group Company which, if adversely determined against it, would be reasonably likely to result in a Material Adverse Effect; and

 

17.5.3 such further information (including an extract of its general ledger) regarding the financial condition, business and operations of any Group Company as any Finance Party (through the Facility Agent) may reasonably request.

 

17.6 Notification of Default

 

17.6.1 Each Obligor shall notify in writing the Facility Agent of any Default and the steps, if any, being taken to remedy it promptly upon becoming aware of its occurrence (unless that Obligor is aware that a notification has already been provided by another Obligor). This obligation extends (without limitation) to any facts or circumstances:

 

17.6.1.1 Which are reasonably likely to result in the commencement of business rescue proceedings, whether commenced by the board of directors of each Obligor, by an affected person or at the instance of the court pursuant to a court order commencing business rescue proceedings;

 

Page 74.


17.6.1.2 Related to the receipt by it of any application from an affected person in terms of section 131 of the Companies Act, a copy of which application and all related documentation shall be promptly delivered by the Obligor to the Facility Agent; and

 

17.6.1.3 Related to the convening of a meeting of the board of directors of the Obligor to consider a resolution by such board to commence business rescue proceedings, a copy of which resolution shall promptly be delivered by the Obligor to the Facility Agent.

 

17.6.2 Each Obligor undertakes to deliver to the Facility Agent, written notice, no later than 5 (five) Business Days prior to the date upon which a board meeting to approve a resolution contemplated under section 129 of the Companies Act is to be held, together with the details of the date and place at which the meeting will be held so as to enable the Facility Agent in its discretion to attend such meeting. The Obligors further agree that the Facility Agent shall be entitled in its discretion to attend the meeting and should it do so then the Facility Agent shall, subject to applicable laws, have the right to be consulted in respect of the appointment of an appropriate business rescue practitioner.

 

17.6.3 Promptly upon a request by the Facility Agent, each Borrower shall supply to the Facility Agent a certificate signed by 2 (two) directors or senior officers on its behalf certifying that no Default is continuing (or if a Default is continuing specifying the Default and the steps, if any, being taken to remedy it).

 

Page 75.


17.7 Delivery of Information

 

17.7.1 Without prejudice to clause 26 ( Notices and Domicilia ), any documents to be delivered under this clause 17 ( Delivery of Information ) may be delivered by the Obligors to the Facility Agent (and by the Facility Agent to the Lenders):

 

17.7.1.1 by e-mail where the Majority Lenders have expressly agreed, by written notice to the Facility Agent, to receive such documents by e-mail and has informed the Facility Agent of an e-mail address pursuant to clause 26 ( Notices and Domicilia ), provided that, for this purpose, any such notification shall also be followed-up by telefax; or

 

17.7.1.2 to the extent that it becomes common practise in South Africa to do so and the Facility Agent has agreed to do so and (as applicable) a Finance Party has expressly agreed, by written notice to the Facility Agent (such agreement not to be unreasonably withheld or delayed), by reference to a website, the address of which (and the location of the relevant documents at such website) has been confirmed to such Party in accordance with clause 26 ( Notices and Domicilia ).

 

17.7.2 If a Finance Party requests delivery to it of a paper copy of any document to be delivered by an Obligor under this clause 17 ( Information Undertakings ) in place of an electronic copy of such document, it shall notify the Facility Agent accordingly. The Facility Agent shall request an Obligor in writing to provide such paper copies promptly upon receipt of any such notice and such Obligor shall be obliged promptly to do so.

 

17.8 Know your customer requirements

 

17.8.1 If any Finance Party (or any prospective New Lender) is obliged to comply with know your customer or similar identification procedures under the Financial Intelligence Centre Act, 2001 or any similar legislation in circumstances where the necessary information is not already available to it, each Obligor must promptly, on the request of that Finance Party, supply to the Finance Party any documentation or other evidence which that Finance Party reasonably requests (whether for itself or on behalf of a prospective new Lender) to enable that Finance Party or prospective New Lender to carry out all such procedures.

 

Page 76.


17.8.2 The Parent shall, by not less than 10 (ten) Business Days’ prior written notice to the Facility Agent, notify the Facility Agent (which shall promptly notify the Lenders) of its intention to request that one of the subsidiaries becomes an Additional Obligor pursuant to clause 22 ( Changes to the Obligors ).

 

17.8.3 Following the giving of any notice pursuant to clause 17.8.2 above, if the accession of any Additional Obligor requires any Finance Party to carry out know your customer procedures in circumstances where the required information is not already available to it, the Parent must promptly, on request by that Finance Party, supply to the Finance Party any documentation or other evidence which that Finance Party reasonably requires in order to carry out all applicable know your customer procedures.

 

17.8.4 Each Lender must promptly on the request of the Facility Agent supply to the Facility Agent any documentation or other evidence which is reasonably required by the Facility Agent to carry out and be satisfied with the results of all know your customer requirements.

 

18. FINANCIAL COVENANTS

 

18.1 Financial Condition

The Parent shall ensure that for so long as any amount is outstanding under a Finance Document or any Commitment is in force:

 

18.1.1 the ratio of Consolidated EBITDA to Consolidated Net Finance Charges in respect of any Measurement Period shall be or shall exceed 5:1;

 

Page 77.


18.1.2 the ratio of Consolidated Net Borrowings to Consolidated EBITDA shall not in respect of any Measurement Period exceed 2.5:1.

 

18.2 Financial Testing

The Financial Covenants shall be tested by reference to each of the financial statements and/or each Compliance Certificate delivered pursuant to Clause 17.2 ( Compliance Certificate ).

 

18.3 Breach of a Financial Condition Undertaking

Immediately upon becoming aware of a breach of any of the Financial Covenants, each Obligor shall notify the Facility Agent (and provide such details about the breach as the Facility Agent may request) (unless that Obligor is aware that a notification has already been provided by another Obligor).

 

19. GENERAL UNDERTAKINGS

The undertakings in this clause 19 ( General Undertakings ) are given in favour of each Finance Party and remain in force from the Signature Date for so long as any amount is outstanding under the Finance Documents or any Commitment is in force.

 

19.1 Authorisation

Each Obligor shall promptly:

 

19.1.1 obtain, comply with and do all that is necessary to maintain in full force and effect; and

 

19.1.2 upon written request by the Facility Agent or a Finance Party supply certified copies to the Facility Agent of, any authorisation required or desirable under any applicable law to enable it to perform its obligations under the Finance Documents to which it is a Party and to ensure the legality, validity, enforceability or admissibility in evidence of any Finance Documents.

 

Page 78.


19.2 Compliance with Laws

Each Obligor shall comply in all respects with all laws and regulations (including, but not limited to, Environmental Law) to which it may be subject, if failure so to comply would materially impair its ability to perform its obligations under the Finance Documents to which it is a party.

 

19.3 Negative Pledge

 

19.3.1 No Obligor shall (and the Parent shall procure that no other Material Group Company will) create or permit to subsist any Encumbrance over any of its assets.

 

19.3.2 No Obligor shall (and the Parent shall procure that no other Material Group Company will):

 

19.3.2.1 sell, transfer or otherwise dispose of any of its assets on terms whereby they are or may be leased to or re-acquired by it or by an Obligor or any other member of the Group;

 

19.3.2.2 sell, transfer, cede or otherwise dispose of any of its receivables on recourse terms;

 

19.3.2.3 enter into any arrangement under which money or the benefit of a bank or other account may be applied, set-off or made subject to a combination of accounts; or

 

19.3.2.4 enter into any other preferential arrangement having a similar effect,

in circumstances where the arrangement or transaction is entered into primarily as a method of raising any form of Financial Indebtedness or of financing the acquisition of an asset.

 

Page 79.


19.3.3 Clauses 19.3.1 and 19.3.2 above do not apply to Permitted Encumbrances.

 

19.4 Financial Indebtedness

The Parent shall not (and the Parent shall procure that no member of the Group (other than a Guarantor or a Project Finance Subsidiary) shall) incur, create or permit to subsist or have outstanding any Financial Indebtedness or enter into any agreement or arrangement whereby it is entitled to incur, create or permit to subsist any Financial Indebtedness other than Permitted Indebtedness.

 

19.5 Disposals and Mergers

 

19.5.1 No Obligor shall (and the Parent shall ensure that no other Material Group Company will):

 

19.5.1.1 enter into a single transaction or a series of transactions (whether related or not) and whether voluntarily or involuntarily to sell, lease, transfer or otherwise dispose of any assets; or

 

19.5.1.2 enter into any amalgamation, demerger, merger or corporate reconstruction.

 

19.5.2 Clause 19.5.1 above does not apply to:

 

19.5.2.1 Permitted Disposals;

 

19.5.2.2 the Demerger; or

 

19.5.2.3 any amalgamation, demerger, merger or corporate reconstruction of any member of the Group, without insolvency, if:

 

19.5.2.3.1 in respect of the Obligors or the successors-in-title or assignees of the Obligors, the Finance Documents are preserved as binding upon the amalgamated, demerged, merged and/or reconstructed members of the Group; and

 

Page 80.


19.5.2.3.2 the amalgamated, demerged, merged and/or reconstructed companies will be members of the Group; and

 

19.5.2.3.3 such amalgamation, demerger, merger and/or corporate reconstruction will not have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

19.6 Pari Passu Ranking

Each Obligor shall ensure that at all times the claims of the Finance Parties against it under the Finance Documents rank at least pari passu with claims of all its other unsecured and unsubordinated creditors, except for obligations mandatorily preferred by law applying to companies generally in its jurisdiction of incorporation.

 

19.7 Change of Business

Each Obligor shall procure that no substantial change is made to the general nature of its business or the business of the Group taken as a whole from that carried on as at the Signature Date, excluding, for the avoidance of doubt, the Demerger.

 

19.8 Insurance

Each Obligor shall (and the Parent shall ensure that each Material Group Company will) maintain insurances on and in relation to its business and assets with reputable underwriters or insurance companies against those risks and to the extent as is usual for companies carrying on the same or substantially similar business.

 

19.9 Environmental Compliance

Each Obligor shall (and the Parent shall ensure that each Material Group Company will) comply in all material respects with all Environmental Laws and obtain and maintain any Environmental Permits, take all reasonable steps in anticipation of known or expected future changes to or obligations under the same, and implement procedures to monitor compliance with and to prevent liability under any Environmental Law, to the extent required by applicable law.

 

Page 81.


19.10 Environmental Claims

Each Obligor shall inform the Facility Agent, in writing as soon as reasonably practical upon becoming aware of the same:

 

19.10.1 if any Environmental Claim (not of a frivolous or vexatious nature) has been commenced or (to the best of its knowledge and belief, having made due enquiry) threatened against any Material Group Company; or

 

19.10.2 of any facts or circumstances which will or are reasonably likely to result in any Environmental Claim (not of a frivolous or vexatious nature) being commenced or threatened against any Material Group Company,

where the claim would be reasonably likely, if determined against that Material Group Company, to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

19.11 Sanctions

No Obligor, nor any of its subsidiaries or joint ventures, nor any of their respective directors, officers or employees, nor to the knowledge of the Obligors, any persons acting on any of their behalf:

 

19.11.1 is a Restricted Party; or

 

19.11.2 has received notice of or is aware of any claim, action, suit, proceeding or investigation against it with respect to Sanctions by any Sanctions Authority.

 

19.12 Taxation

Each Obligor shall (and the Parent shall ensure that each other Material Group Company will) duly and punctually pay and discharge all Taxes imposed upon it or its assets within the time period allowed without incurring material penalties, except to the extent:

 

19.12.1 that such payment is being contested in good faith;

 

Page 82.


19.12.2 adequate reserves are being maintained for those Taxes; and

 

19.12.3 where such payment can be lawfully withheld.

 

19.13 Maintenance of Legal Status

Each Material Group Company shall do all such things as are necessary to maintain its existence as a legal person and shall maintain its books and records in good order and make all necessary corporate filings with the relevant authorities in its jurisdiction of incorporation.

 

19.14 Maintenance of Assets

Each Obligor shall (and the Parent shall ensure that each other Material Group Company shall) ensure that it has good title to or validly leases or licences all of the assets necessary and has all consents and/or authorisations necessary to carry on its business as conducted to the extent that failure to comply with this clause 19.14 could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

19.15 Acquisitions

No Obligor shall (and the Parent shall ensure that no Material Group Company will), without the prior consent of the Lender, enter into any transaction, acquire any company, business, assets or undertaking where such a transaction or acquisition is classed as a “Category 1” transaction under the JSE Listings Requirements. For the purpose of this clause 19.15 only, references to a transaction shall be construed as not including any acquisition of the Parent by a third party.

 

19.16 Ownership of Material Group Companies

Subject to applicable law, the Parent shall ensure that:

 

19.16.1 each existing Material Group Company on the date of this Agreement (other than the Cerro Corona Subsidiary, Newshelf, GFO, GFIJVH and the Ghanaian Companies) is and continues to be a wholly-owned Subsidiary of the Parent and each member of the Group which becomes a Material Group Company after the date of this Agreement is a wholly or partially owned Subsidiary of the Parent and that members of the Group will hold and continue to hold at least the same percentage of the issued share capital of such Material Group Company as was held by members of the Group at the time such Subsidiary became a Material Group Company;

 

Page 83.


19.16.2 the Parent holds and continues to hold at least 74% (seventy-four percent) of the issued share capital of Newshelf;

 

19.16.3 Newshelf holds and continues to hold at least 74% (seventy-four percent) of the issued share capital of each of GFO and GFIJVH;

 

19.16.4 the Parent indirectly holds and continues to indirectly hold at least 90% (ninety percent) of the issued share capital of each Ghanaian Company; and

 

19.16.5 the Parent indirectly holds and continues to indirectly hold at least 99% (ninety-nine percent) of the common shares in the share capital of the Cerro Corona Subsidiary (which equates to 98,5% (ninety eight comma five percent) of the issued and outstanding shares in the share capital of the Cerro Corona Subsidiary).

 

20. DEFAULT

 

20.1 Events of Default

Each of the events set out in this clause 20 ( Default ) is an Event of Default (whether or not caused by any reason whatsoever outside the control of the Borrowers, any other Obligor or any other person).

 

20.1.1 Non-Payment

An Obligor does not pay on the due date any amount payable pursuant to a Finance Document at the place and in the currency in which it is expressed to be payable unless payment is made within 5 (five) Business Days of its due date.

 

Page 84.


20.1.2 Financial Covenants

Any requirement of clause 18 ( Financial Covenants ) is not satisfied.

 

20.1.3 Other Obligations under Finance Documents

 

20.1.3.1 Subject to clause 20.3 ( Remedy ), an Obligor does not comply with any provision of the Finance Documents (other than those referred to in clause 20.1.1 ( Non-Payment ) and clause 20.1.2 ( Financial Covenants ).

 

20.1.3.2 No Event of Default will occur under clause 20.1.3.1 if the Taxes not duly and punctually paid and discharged and in respect of which the undertaking contained in clause 19.12 ( Taxation ) is given do not exceed an amount of US$20 000 000 (Twenty Million United States Dollars) (subject to a maximum exchange rate of R12/$).

 

20.1.4 Misrepresentation

 

20.1.4.1 Subject to clause 20.3 ( Remedy ), any representation or statement made or in the case of clause 16.2.1 ( Repetition ), deemed to be made by any Obligor or in the Finance Documents or any other document delivered by or on behalf of any Obligor under or in connection with any Finance Documents is or is proved to have been incorrect or misleading in any material and adverse respect when made or in the case of clause 16.2.1 ( Repetition ), deemed to be made.

 

20.1.4.2 No Event of Default will occur under clause 20.1.4.1 if the Taxes in respect of which the representation contained in clause 19.12 ( Taxation ) was made does not exceed an amount of US$20 000 000 (Twenty Million United States Dollars) (subject to a maximum exchange rate of R12/$).

 

Page 85.


20.1.5 Cross-Default

 

20.1.5.1 Any Financial Indebtedness of a Material Group Company is not paid when due, nor where there is an applicable grace period, within the earlier to expire of the originally applicable grace period and a period of 5 (five) days starting at the same time as the originally applicable grace period.

 

20.1.5.2 Any Financial Indebtedness of a Material Group Company is declared to be or otherwise becomes due and payable prior to its specified maturity as a result of an event of default (however described).

 

20.1.5.3 Any commitment for any Financial Indebtedness of a Material Group Company is cancelled or suspended by a creditor of a Material Group Company as a result of an event of default (however described).

 

20.1.5.4 Any creditor of a Material Group Company becomes entitled to declare any Financial Indebtedness of a Material Group Company due and payable prior to its specified maturity as a result of an event of default (however described).

 

20.1.5.5 No Event of Default will occur under this clause 0 ( Cross Default ) if the aggregate amount of Financial Indebtedness or commitment for Financial Indebtedness, falling within clauses 20.1.5.1 to 20.1.5.4 is less than US$20 000 000 (Twenty Million United States Dollars) (subject to a maximum exchange rate of R12/$).

 

20.1.6 Insolvency

 

20.1.6.1 Any Material Group Company is unable or admits inability to pay its debts as they fall due, suspends making payments on any of its debts or, by reason of actual or anticipated financial difficulties, commences negotiations with one or more of its classes of creditors with a view to rescheduling any of its Financial Indebtedness which in the case of a Material Group Company (other than an Obligor) could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

Page 86.


20.1.6.2 The value of the assets of any Material Group Company, fairly valued, is less than its liabilities (taking into account contingent and prospective liabilities) which in the case of a Material Group Company (other than an Obligor) could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

20.1.6.3 A moratorium is declared or takes effect in respect of any Financial Indebtedness of any Material Group Company.

 

20.1.6.4 Any Material Group Company is financially distressed, which in the case of a Material Group Company (other than an Obligor) could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect, and the board of that Material Group Company has not timeously delivered the written notice required in terms of section 129(7) of the Companies Act.

 

20.1.7 Insolvency Proceedings

 

20.1.7.1 Any corporate action, legal proceedings or other similar procedure or steps taken in relation to:

 

20.1.7.1.1 the suspension of payments or commencement of business rescue proceedings (whether by any member of the Group or by any other person under section 129 of the Companies Act or pursuant to an application by an “affected person” under section 131 of the Companies Act or by the court during any other proceedings in respect of any member of the Group), a moratorium of any Financial Indebtedness, winding-up, dissolution, administration or re-organisation (by way of voluntary arrangement, scheme of arrangement or otherwise) of any Material Group Company;

 

Page 87.


20.1.7.1.2 a composition, compromise or arrangement with any creditor or class of creditors of any Material Group Company;

 

20.1.7.1.3 the appointment of a liquidator, business rescue practitioner, receiver, administrator, administrative receiver, judicial manager, compulsory manager or other similar officer in respect of any Material Group Company or any of its assets; or

 

20.1.7.1.4 enforcement of any Encumbrance over any assets of any Material Group Company,

or any analogous procedure or step is taken in any jurisdiction and any such procedure or proceedings are not contested in good faith nor discharged within 30 (thirty) days (or such shorter period provided for contesting such procedure or proceedings under the laws of the relevant jurisdiction), which in the case of a Material Group Company (other than an Obligor) could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

20.1.7.2 A meeting is proposed or convened by the directors of any Material Group Company, a resolution is proposed or passed, application is made or an order is applied for or granted, to authorise the entry into or implementation of any business rescue proceedings (or any similar proceedings) in respect of any Material Group Company or any analogous procedure or step is taken in any jurisdiction, which in the case of a Material Group Company (other than an Obligor) could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

20.1.8 Failure to comply with Final Judgement

Any Material Group Company fails within 5 (five) Business Days of the due date to comply with or pay any sum due from it under any material final judgement or any final order made or given by any court of competent jurisdiction. For the purposes of this clause 20.1.8 ( Failure to comply with Final Judgement ), a “ material final judgement ” shall be any judgement for the payment of a sum of money in excess of US$20 000 000 (Twenty Million United States Dollars) (subject to a maximum exchange rate of R12/$).

 

Page 88.


20.1.9 Creditors’ Process

Any expropriation (other than an expropriation where fair compensation is received) or the operation of the attachment, sequestration, distress or execution affects any material asset of a Material Group Company and is not discharged within 21 (twenty-one) days. For the purposes of this clause 20.1.9 ( Creditor’s Process ) a “ material asset ” is any single income producing asset of the relevant Material Group Company which contributes not less than 5% (five percent) towards the Consolidated EBITDA or gross assets of the Group (calculated according to the most recent set of audited consolidated financial statements delivered pursuant to clause 17.1 ( Financial Statements )), provided that any loss of mineral rights arising as a result of the operation of the Mineral and Petroleum Resources Development Act, No. 28 of 2002 (the “MPRDA” ) (including the broad-based socio-economic empowerment charter (the “Mining Charter” ), the revised Mining Charter, the Code of Good Practice for the Minerals Industry and the Housing and Living Condition Standard for the Mining Industry published in accordance with the MPRDA), substantially in its current form as at the Signature Date and/or the operation of the Mineral and Petroleum Resources Royalty Act, No. 28 of 2008, substantially in its current form as at the Signature Date, shall not constitute an expropriation for the purposes of this clause 20.1.9 ( Creditor’s Process ).

 

20.1.10 Unlawfulness

It is or becomes unlawful for an Obligor to perform any of its obligations under the Financial Documents or such obligations are to be legal, valid, binding or enforceable obligations.

 

Page 89.


20.1.11 Repudiation

An Obligor repudiates a Finance Document or any Finance Document is declared to be or is otherwise unenforceable against an Obligor by a court of the jurisdiction of incorporation of the relevant Obligor.

 

20.1.12 Governmental Intervention

By or under the authority of any government:

 

20.1.12.1 the management of any Material Group Company is wholly or partially displaced or the authority of any Material Group Company in the conduct of its business is wholly or partially curtailed; or

 

20.1.12.2 all or a majority of the issued shares of any Material Group Company or material part of its revenues or assets is seized, nationalised, expropriated or compulsorily acquired. For the purposes of this clause 20.1.12 ( Governmental Intervention ) “ material part of its revenues or assets ” shall in relation to the relevant Material Group Company be construed as revenues comprising not less than 5% (five percent) of the Consolidated EBITDA or gross assets of the Group calculated mutatis mutandis in accordance with the provisions of clause 20.1.9 ( Creditor’s Process ) or assets which contribute not less than 5% (five percent) towards the Consolidated EBITDA or gross assets of the Group calculated mutatis mutandis accordance with the provisions of clause 20.1.9 ( Creditor’s Process ), provided that neither the implementation of the MPRDA (including the Mining Charter, the revised Mining Charter, the Code of Good Practice for the Minerals Industry and the Housing and Living Condition Standard for the Mining Industry published in accordance with the MPRDA) substantially in its current form as at the Signature Date nor the implementation of the Mineral and Petroleum Resources Royalty Act, No. 28 of 2008, substantially in its current form as at the Signature Date, shall constitute a seizure, nationalisation, expropriation or compulsory acquisition as contemplated by this clause 20.1.12 ( Governmental Intervention ).

 

Page 90.


20.1.13 Material Adverse Effect

Any change occurs in the business, condition (financial or otherwise), operations, performance, properties or prospects of the Obligors or the Group taken as a whole since 31 December 2011, which could be reasonably likely to have a Material Adverse Effect, excluding, for the avoidance of doubt, the Demerger.

 

20.1.14 Cessation of Business

Any Material Group Company ceases to carry on the business which it undertakes at the Signature Date, excluding, for the avoidance of doubt, the Demerger.

 

20.2 Acceleration

 

20.2.1 If any Event of Default occurs which is continuing, the Facility Agent shall be entitled (acting on the instructions of the Majority Lenders) and without prejudice to any other rights or remedies which the Finance Parties may have under any of the Financial Documents by notice to the Borrowers and the Parent to:

 

20.2.1.1 cancel the Total Commitments whereupon they shall immediately be cancelled;

 

20.2.1.2 declare that all or part of the Loans, together with accrued interest, and all other amounts accrued or outstanding under the Finance Documents be immediately due and payable, whereupon they shall become immediately due and payable; and/or

 

20.2.1.3 declare that all or part of the Loans be payable on demand, whereupon they shall immediately become payable on demand by the Facility Agent on the instructions of the Majority Lenders.

 

Page 91.


20.3 Remedy

 

20.3.1 No Event of Default under this clause 20.1 ( Events of Default ) (other than those referred to in clause 20.1.1 ( Non-payment ) and 20.1.2 ( Financial covenants )) will occur if the failure to comply or circumstance giving rise to the same is capable of remedy and is remedied by an Obligor within 10 (ten) days of the earlier of the Facility Agent giving notice to the Obligors or any Obligor becoming aware of the failure to comply.

 

20.3.2 For the purposes of clause 20.3.1, the events or circumstances referred to in clause 0 ( Cross-default ), clause 20.1.6 ( Insolvency ), clause 20.1.7 ( Insolvency Proceedings ), clause 20.1.8 ( Failure to comply with final judgment ), clause 20.1.9 ( Creditors’ process ), clause 20.1.10 ( Unlawfulness ), clause 20.1.11 ( Repudiation ), clause 20.1.12 ( Governmental Intervention ), clause 20.1.13 ( Material Adverse Effect ) and clause 20.1.14 ( Cessation of Business ) shall be deemed to be incapable of remedy save to the extent set out therein unless the Facility Agent determines otherwise.

 

21. CHANGE OF PARTY

 

21.1 Cession and Delegation by the Lenders

 

21.1.1 Subject to this clause, any Lender (the “Existing Lender” ) may:

 

21.1.1.1 cede any of its rights; or

 

21.1.1.2 delegate any of its obligations,

under this Agreement and any corresponding rights or obligations under any other Finance Document to another bank or financial institution, any one of whom shall be a new lender (the “New Lender” ).

 

Page 92.


21.2 Consent of Parent to Cession and Delegation by the Lenders

 

21.2.1 The consent of the Parent is required for any cession or delegation by an Existing Lender, unless the cession or delegation is to (a) a Permitted Transferee, (b) another Lender, or (c) an Affiliate of a Lender.

 

21.2.2 The consent of the Parent to a cession or delegation must not be unreasonably withheld or delayed. The Parent will be deemed to have given its consent 5 (five) Business Days after the Existing Lender has requested it unless consent is expressly refused by the Parent within that time.

 

21.2.3 Notwithstanding clause 21.2.1, the Parent (acting reasonably) shall at any time (other than during the 15 (fifteen) Business Day notice period referred to in clause 21.6 ( Notification )) be entitled to deliver a written notice to the Facility Agent specifying that it wishes to remove a Permitted Transferee from the list set out in Schedule 8 (Permitted Transferees). Such written notice shall set out reasonable grounds for the Parent’s request to remove such Permitted Transferee from the list set out in Schedule 8 (Permitted Transferees). If the Facility Agent is satisfied (acting reasonably) that the Parent has reasonable grounds for such removal, the Facility Agent shall notify the Parent in writing accordingly and such Permitted Transferee shall thereupon cease to be a Permitted Transferee; provided that, to the extent that such Permitted Transferee is already a Lender as at the date of such removal, such removal shall not obligate any Finance Party to acquire or re-acquire such Permitted Transferee’s participation in any Loans.

 

21.3 New Lender to become Bound

In the event an Existing Lender cedes any of its rights or delegates any of its obligations as contemplated under clause 21.1 ( Cession and Delegation by the Lender ), the Existing Lender shall procure that the New Lender agrees to become bound by all the terms and conditions of this Agreement and the other Finance Documents to which the Existing Lender is a party as a party thereto.

 

Page 93.


21.4 Limitation of responsibility of Existing Lenders

 

21.4.1 Unless expressly agreed to the contrary, an Existing Lender makes no representation or warranty and assumes no responsibility to a New Lender for:

 

21.4.1.1 the legality, validity, effectiveness, adequacy or enforceability of the Finance Documents or any other documents;

 

21.4.1.2 the financial condition of any Obligor;

 

21.4.1.3 the performance and observance by any Obligor of its obligations under the Finance Documents or any other documents; or

 

21.4.1.4 the accuracy of any statements (whether written or oral) made in or in connection with any Finance Document or any other document,

and any representations or warranties implied by law are excluded.

 

21.4.2 Each New Lender confirms to the Existing Lender and the other Finance Parties that it:

 

21.4.2.1 has made (and shall continue to make) its own independent investigation and assessment of the financial condition and affairs of each Obligor and its related entities in connection with its participation in this Agreement and has not relied exclusively on any information provided to it by the Existing Lender in connection with any Finance Document; and

 

21.4.2.2 will continue to make its own independent appraisal of the creditworthiness of each Obligor and its related entities whilst any amount is or may be outstanding under the Finance Documents or any Commitment is in force.

 

Page 94.


21.4.3 Nothing in any Finance Document obliges an Existing Lender to:

 

21.4.3.1 accept a re-transfer from a New Lender of any of the rights and obligations assigned or transferred under this clause 21.4 ( Limitation of Responsibility of Existing Lenders ); or

 

21.4.3.2 support any losses directly or indirectly incurred by the New Lender by reason of the non-performance by any Obligor of its obligations under the Finance Documents or otherwise.

 

21.5 Disclosure of Information

A Lender may disclose to any of its affiliates and/or any other person:

 

21.5.1 to (or through) whom that the Lender cedes, assigns or transfers (or may potentially assign or transfer) all or any of its rights and obligations under the Finance Documents;

 

21.5.2 with (or through) whom that Lender enters into (or may potentially enter into) any sub-participation in relation to, or any other transaction under which payments are to be made by reference to, the Finance Documents or any Obligor; or

 

21.5.3 to whom, and to the extent that, information is required to be disclosed by any applicable law or regulation,

any information about an Obligor, the Group and the Finance Documents as that Lender shall consider appropriate if, in relation to clauses 21.5.1 and 21.5.2 above, the person to whom the information is to be given has agreed to maintain such information as confidential information and has executed a Confidentiality Undertaking.

 

21.6 Notification

A Lender proposing to effect any cession, assignment or transfer occurring pursuant to this clause 21 ( Change of Party ) shall give the Parent and each other Finance Party 15 (fifteen) Business Days’ prior written notice of any such proposed cession, assignment or transfer.

 

Page 95.


21.7 Additional Parties

Each of the Lenders appoints the Facility Agent to receive on its behalf each Accession Undertaking delivered to the Facility Agent and to accept and sign it if, in the Facility Agent’s opinion, it is complete and appears on its face to be authentic and duly executed by the relevant acceding party and until accepted and signed by the Facility Agent that document shall not be effective.

 

22. CHANGES TO THE OBLIGORS

 

22.1 Assignment and transfer by Obligors

No Obligor may cede any of its rights or delegate any of its obligations under the Finance Documents without the prior written consent of the Facility Agent.

 

22.2 Additional Borrowers

 

22.2.1 The Parent may request that any of its subsidiaries become an Additional Borrower. That Subsidiary shall become an Additional Borrower if:

 

22.2.1.1 the Lenders, acting reasonably, approve the addition of that Subsidiary;

 

22.2.1.2 the Parent delivers to the Facility Agent a duly completed and executed Accession Undertaking;

 

22.2.1.3 the Parent confirms that no Default is continuing or would occur as a result of that Subsidiary becoming an Additional Borrower; and

 

22.2.1.4 the Facility Agent has received all of the documents and other evidence listed in paragraphs 1, 3, 4, 6 and 8 of Schedule 2 ( Financial Close Documents ) mutatis mutandis in relation to that Additional Borrower, each in form and substance satisfactory to the Facility Agent.

 

Page 96.


22.2.2 The Facility Agent shall notify the Parent and the Lenders promptly upon being satisfied that it has received (in form and substance satisfactory to it) all the documents and other evidence listed in paragraphs 1, 3, 4, 6 and 7 of Schedule 2 ( Financial Close Documents ) mutatis mutandis in relation to that Additional Borrower.

 

22.3 Resignation of an Additional Borrower

 

22.3.1 The Parent may request that a Borrower (other than the Original Borrowers) ceases to be a Borrower by delivering to the Facility Agent a Resignation Letter.

 

22.3.2 The Facility Agent shall accept a Resignation Letter and notify the Parent and the Lenders of its acceptance if:

 

22.3.2.1 no Default is continuing or would result from the acceptance of the Resignation Letter (and the Parent has confirmed to the Facility Agent that this is the case); and

 

22.3.2.2 the Borrower is under no actual or contingent obligations as a Borrower under any Finance Documents,

whereupon that company shall cease to be a Borrower and shall have no further rights or obligations under the Finance Documents.

 

22.4 Additional Guarantors

 

22.4.1 The Parent may request that any of its subsidiaries become an Additional Guarantor. That Subsidiary shall become an Additional Guarantor if;

 

22.4.1.1 the Parent delivers to the Facility Agent a duly completed and executed Accession Undertaking; and

 

22.4.1.2 the Facility Agent has received all of the documents and other evidence listed in paragraphs 1, 3, 4 and 7 of Schedule 2 ( Financial Close Documents ) mutatis mutandis in relation to that Additional Guarantor, each in form and substance satisfactory to the Facility Agent.

 

Page 97.


22.4.2 The Facility Agent shall notify the Parent and the Lenders promptly upon being satisfied that it has received (in form and substance satisfactory to it) all the documents and other evidence listed in paragraphs 1, 3, 4, 6 and 7 of Schedule 2 ( Financial Close Documents ) mutatis mutandis in relation to that Additional Guarantor.

 

22.5 Repetition of Representations

Delivery of an Accession Undertaking constitutes confirmation by the relevant Subsidiary that the representations in clause 16 ( Representations and Warranties ) are true and correct in relation to it as at the date of delivery as if made by reference to the facts and circumstances then existing.

 

22.6 Resignation of an Additional Guarantor

 

22.6.1 The Parent may request that a Guarantor (other than an Original Guarantor) ceases to be a Guarantor by delivering to the Facility Agent a Resignation Letter.

 

22.6.2 The Facility Agent shall accept a Resignation Letter and notify the Parent and the Lenders of its acceptance if no Default is continuing and the Parent has confirmed to the Facility Agent that this is the case.

 

23. PAYMENT MECHANICS

 

23.1 All payments to be made by the Obligors under any of the Finance Documents shall be governed by the following provisions:

 

23.1.1 all payments shall be made to the Facility Agent on the due date for such payment into the bank account nominated by the Facility Agent;

 

23.1.2 all payments shall be made for value by no later than 15h00 on the due date for such payment; and

 

Page 98.


23.1.3 all payments shall be made in immediately available, freely transferable, cleared funds free and clear of set-off, deduction or counterclaim.

 

23.2 Partial payments

 

23.2.1 If the Facility Agent receives a payment that is insufficient to discharge all the amounts then due and payable by an Obligor under the Finance Documents, the Agent shall apply that payment towards the obligations of that Obligor under the Finance Documents in the following order:

 

23.2.1.1 first , in or towards payment pro rata of any due but unpaid fees, costs and expenses of the Facility Agent under the Finance Documents;

 

23.2.1.2 secondly , in or towards payment pro rata of any accrued interest, fee or commission due but unpaid under the Finance Documents;

 

23.2.1.3 thirdly , in or towards payment pro rata of any principal due but unpaid under this Agreement; and

 

23.2.1.4 fourthly , in or towards payment pro rata of any other sum due but unpaid under the Finance Documents.

 

23.2.2 The Facility Agent shall, if so directed by the Majority Lenders, vary the order set out in clauses 23.2.1.2 to 23.2.1.4.

 

23.2.3 Clauses 23.2.1 and 23.2.2 will override any appropriation made by an Obligor.

 

24. CONFIDENTIALITY

 

24.1 Without the prior written consent of the other Parties, each Party will keep confidential and will not disclose to any person:

 

24.1.1 the details of any document, the details of the negotiations leading to any document, and the information handed over to such Party during the course of negotiations, as well as the details of all the transactions or agreements contemplated in any document; and

 

Page 99.


24.1.2 all information relating to the business or the operations and affairs of the Parties (together “Confidential Information” ).

 

24.2 The Parties agree to keep all Confidential Information confidential and to disclose it only to their officers, directors, employees, consultants, shareholders, professional advisers, auditors, any other divisions or affiliates of the Party and any person to whom the Lenders wish to cede any or their respective rights or delegate any of their respective obligations under any of the Finance Documents who:

 

24.2.1 have a need to know (and then only to the extent that each such person has a need to know);

 

24.2.2 are aware that the Confidential Information should be kept confidential;

 

24.2.3 are aware of the disclosing Party’s undertaking in relation to such information in terms of this Agreement; and

 

24.2.4 have been directed by the disclosing Party to keep the Confidential Information confidential and have undertaken to keep the Confidential Information confidential. Furthermore, if either Party so requires, the other Party shall procure that each of its employees to whom such disclosure is made, provides a written undertaking of confidentiality to the requesting Party, on terms which meet with that Party’s reasonable satisfaction.

 

24.3 The obligations of the Parties in relation to the maintenance and non-disclosure of Confidential Information in terms of this Agreement do not extend to information that:

 

24.3.1 is disclosed to the receiving Party in terms of the Finance Documents but at the time of such disclosure such information is known to be in the lawful possession or control of that Party and not subject to an obligation of confidentiality; or

 

Page 100.


24.3.2 is or lawfully becomes public knowledge, otherwise than pursuant to a breach of this Agreement by the Party who received such Confidential Information; or

 

24.3.3 is required by the provisions of any law, statute or regulation or during any court proceedings, or by the rules or regulations of any recognised stock exchange or other regulatory authority (including the United States Securities and Exchange Commission) to be disclosed; or

 

24.3.4 is exchanged amongst the Lender and the Facility Agent for the purposes of or in connection with the instruction of the Facility Agent or for the purposes of exercising or enforcing any of their rights and/or in performing any of their obligations under this Agreement or any other Finance Document.

 

24.4 Each of the Finance Parties acknowledges that some or all of the Confidential Information of the Group is or may be price-sensitive information and that the use of such information may be regulated or prohibited by applicable legislation including securities law relating to insider dealing and market abuse and each of the Finance Parties undertakes not to use any such Confidential Information for any unlawful purpose.

 

25. SET-OFF

 

25.1 A Finance Party may set-off any due and payable obligation owed by an Obligor under the Finance Documents to that Finance Party against any obligation owed by that Finance Party to that Obligor. Each Finance Party shall notify the relevant Obligor (giving full details) promptly after the exercise or purported exercise of any right under this clause 25;

 

25.2 Without derogating from any right or entitlement of the Finance Party, upon the commencement of business rescue proceedings, or the taking of any steps contemplated under the Companies Act in anticipation of business rescue proceedings, all amounts due and payable by the Obligor to the Finance Party, will at the option of the Finance Party (and without prior notice to the Obligor being required), be reduced by set-off against any other amounts (“Other Amounts”) due and payable by the Finance Party to the Obligor (whether or not arising under this Agreement). To the extent that any Other Amounts are so set-off, those Other Amounts will be discharged promptly in all respects. The Finance Party shall give notice to the Obligors of any set-off effected under this clause. Nothing in this clause will be effective to create a security interest. This clause will be without prejudice and in addition to any other right of set-off, offset, combination of accounts, lien, right of retention or withholding or similar right or requirement to which any party is at any time otherwise entitled or subject (whether by operation of law, contract or otherwise)

 

Page 101.


26. NOTICES AND DOMICILIA

 

26.1 Notices

 

26.1.1 Each Party chooses the addresses set out opposite its name below as its addresses to which any written notice in connection with the Finance Documents may be addressed.

 

26.1.1.1 Nedbank:

 

Nedbank Limited (acting through its Nedbank Capital and Nedbank Corporate divisions)

Block F, 3 rd Floor

135 Rivonia Road

SANDOWN

2196

 

Telefax No: (011) 295 3902

Attention: Head of Transaction Management

 

E-mail: specfinproman@nedbank.co.za

 

Page 102.


With a copy to:

 

Nedbank Limited (acting through its Nedbank Capital and Nedbank Corporate divisions)

Block I, 6th Floor

135 Rivonia Road

SANDOWN

2196

 

Telefax No: (011) 294 1333

Attention: Head: Corporate Banking Credit Risk

 

26.1.1.2 Facility Agent:

 

Nedbank Limited (acting through its Nedbank Capital and Nedbank Corporate divisions)

Block F, 3 rd Floor

135 Rivonia Road

SANDOWN

2196

 

Telefax No: (011) 295 3902

Attention: Head of Transaction Management

 

E-mail: specfinproman@nedbank.co.za

 

26.1.1.3 Obligors:

 

150 Helen Road

SANDTON

2196

 

Telefax No: (011) 562 9828

 

Attention: Executive Vice President – General Counsel

 

26.1.2 Any notice or communication required or permitted to be given in terms of the Finance Documents shall be valid and effective only if in writing but it shall be competent to give notice by telefax transmitted to its telefax number set out opposite its name above.

 

26.1.3

Any Party may by written notice to the other Parties change its chosen physical addresses and/or telefax number for the purposes of clause 26.1.1 to any other address(es) and/or telefax number, provided that the change shall become effective on the 14 th (fourteenth) day after the receipt of the notice by the addressee.

 

Page 103.


26.1.4 Any notice given in terms of this Agreement shall:

 

26.1.4.1

if sent by a courier service be deemed to have been received by the addressee on the 7 th (seventh) Business Day following the date of such sending;

 

26.1.4.2 if delivered by hand be deemed to have been received by the addressee on the date of delivery;

 

26.1.4.3

if transmitted by facsimile be deemed to have been received by the addressee on the 1 st (first) Business Day after the date of transmission,

unless the contrary is proved.

 

26.1.5 Notwithstanding anything to the contrary herein contained, a written notice or communication actually received by a Party shall be an adequate written notice or communication to it, notwithstanding that it was not sent to or delivered at its chosen address and/or telefax number.

 

26.2 Domicilia

 

26.2.1 Each of the Parties chooses its physical address referred to in clause 26.1.1 as its domicilium citandi et executandi at which documents in legal proceedings in connection with this Agreement may be served.

 

26.2.2

Any Party may by written notice to the other Party change its domicilium from time to time to another address, not being a post office box or a poste restante , in South Africa; provided that any such change shall only be effective on the 14 th (fourteenth) day after deemed receipt of the notice by the other Party pursuant to clause 26.1.5.

 

Page 104.


27. GENERAL

 

27.1 Renunciation of Benefits

Each Obligor renounces, to the extent permitted under applicable law, the benefits of each of the legal exceptions of excussion, division, revision of accounts, no value received, errore calculi, non causa debiti, non numeratae pecuniae and cession of actions, and declares that it understands the meaning of each such legal exception and the effect of such renunciation.

 

27.2 Accounts and Certificates

The entries made in the accounts maintained by the Lenders in connection with the Facility and/or any certificate and/or notice issued, and signed by any manager or director (whose appointment, designation and authority as such it shall not be necessary to prove) of the Lenders or the Facility Agent, save for manifest error, be prima facie proof of the amounts from time to time owing by any Obligor under the Finance Documents.

 

27.3 Sole Agreement

The Finance Documents constitute the sole record of the agreement between the Parties in regard to the subject matter thereof.

 

27.4 No Implied Terms

No Party shall be bound by any express or implied term, representation, warranty, promise or the like, not recorded in any Finance Document.

 

27.5 No Variation

No addition to, variation or consensual cancellation of any Finance Document and no extension of time, waiver or relaxation or suspension of any of the provisions or terms of any Finance Document shall be of any force or effect unless in writing and signed by or on behalf of all the parties thereto.

 

Page 105.


27.6 Extensions and Waivers

No latitude, extension of time or other indulgence which may be given or allowed by any Party to any other Party in respect of the performance of any obligation hereunder or enforcement of any right arising from any Finance Document and no single or partial exercise of any right by any Party shall under any circumstances be construed to be an implied consent by such Party or operate as a waiver or a novation of, or otherwise affect any of that Party’s rights in terms of or arising from any Finance Document or estop such Party from enforcing, at any time and without notice, strict and punctual compliance with each and every provision or term of any Finance Document.

 

27.7 Further Assurances

The Parties undertake at all times to do all such things, to perform all such acts and to take all such steps and to procure the doing of all such things, the performance of all such actions and the taking of all such steps as may be open to them and necessary for or incidental to the putting into effect or maintenance of the terms, conditions and import of any Finance Document.

 

27.8 Waiver of Defences

The provisions of the Finance Documents will not be affected by an act, omission, matter or thing which, but for this clause 27.8 ( Waiver of Defences ), would reduce, release or prejudice the subordination and priorities in this Agreement including:

 

27.8.1 any time, waiver or consent granted to, or composition with any person;

 

27.8.2 the taking, variation, compromise, exchange, renewal or release of, or refusal or neglect to perfect, take up or enforce, any rights against, or security over assets of, any Obligor or any non-presentation or non-observance of any formality or other requirement in respect of any instrument;

 

27.8.3 any incapacity or lack of power, authority or legal personality of or dissolution or change in the members or status of any person;

 

Page 106.


27.8.4 any amendment (however fundamental) or replacement of a Finance Document or any other document or security;

 

27.8.5 any unenforceability, illegality or invalidity of any obligation of any person under any Finance Document or any other document or security; or

 

27.8.6 any intermediate payment or discharge of any of the Secured Obligations in whole or in part.

 

27.9 Independent Advice

Each of the Parties acknowledges that they have been free to secure independent legal and other advice as to the nature and effect of all of the provisions of the Finance Documents and that they have either taken such independent legal and other advice or dispensed with the necessity of doing so. Further, each of the Parties acknowledges that all of the provisions of each Finance Document and the restrictions therein contained are fair and reasonable in all the circumstances and are part of the overall intention of the Parties in connection with the Finance Documents.

 

27.10 Counterparts

Any Finance Document may be executed in any number of counterparts and by different parties thereto in separate counterparts, each of which when so executed shall be deemed to be an original and all of which when taken together shall constitute one and the same agreement.

 

27.11 Waiver of Immunity

Each Obligor waives generally all immunity it or its assets or revenues may otherwise have in any jurisdiction, including immunity in respect of:

 

27.11.1 the giving of any relief by way of interdict or order for specific performance or for the recovery of assets or revenues; and

 

Page 107.


27.11.2 the issue of any process against its assets or revenues for the enforcement of a judgement or, in an action in rem, for the arrest, detention or sale of any of its assets and revenues.

 

27.12 Governing Law

The entire provisions of each Finance Document shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of South Africa.

 

27.13 Jurisdiction

The Parties hereby irrevocably and unconditionally consent to the non-exclusive jurisdiction of the High Court of South Africa (South Gauteng High Court, Johannesburg division) (or any successor to that division) in regard to all matters arising from the Finance Documents.

 

27.14 Severability

Each provision in each Finance Document is severable from all others, notwithstanding the manner in which they may be linked together or grouped grammatically, and if in terms of any judgment or order, any provision, phrase, sentence, paragraph or clause is found to be defective or unenforceable for any reason, the remaining provisions, phrases, sentences, paragraphs and clauses shall nevertheless continue to be of full force. In particular, and without limiting the generality of the aforegoing, the Parties acknowledge their intention to continue to be bound by each Finance Document notwithstanding that any provision may be found to be unenforceable or void or voidable, in which event the provision concerned shall be severed from the other provisions, each of which shall continue to be of full force.

 

Page 108.


SIGNED at                      on this the      day of              2013.

 

For and on behalf of
NEDBANK LIMITED (acting through its Nedbank Capital division)

 

Name:
Capacity:
Who warrants his authority hereto

 

Name:
Capacity:
Who warrants his authority hereto

SIGNED at                      on this the      day of              2013.

 

For and on behalf of
NEDBANK LIMITED (acting through its Nedbank Corporate division)

 

Name:
Capacity:
Who warrants his authority hereto

 

Name:
Capacity:
Who warrants his authority hereto

 

Page 109.


SIGNED at                      on this the      day of              2013.

 

For and on behalf of
GFI JOINT VENTURE HOLDINGS PROPRIETARY LIMITED

 

Name:
Capacity:
Who warrants his authority hereto

SIGNED at                      on this the      day of              2013.

 

For and on behalf of
GOLD FIELDS OPERATIONS LIMITED

 

Name:
Capacity:
Who warrants his authority hereto

SIGNED at                      on this the      day of              2013.

 

For and on behalf of
GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

 

Name:
Capacity:
Who warrants his authority hereto

 

Page 110.


SIGNED at                      on this the      day of              2013.

 

For and on behalf of
GOLD FIELDS HOLDINGS COMPANY (BVI) LIMITED

 

Name:
Capacity:
Who warrants his authority hereto

SIGNED at                      on this the      day of              2013.

 

For and on behalf of
GOLD FIELDS OROGEN HOLDING (BVI) LIMITED

 

Name:
Capacity:
Who warrants his authority hereto

 

Page 111.


SCHEDULE 1

ORIGINAL GUARANTORS

 

NO.

  

ORIGINAL GUARANTORS

1.   

Gold Fields Limited

 

(Registration No. 1968/004880/06)

2.   

Gold Fields Operations Limited

 

(Registration No. 1959/003209/06)

3.   

Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited

 

(Registration No. 651406)

4.   

Gold Fields Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited

 

(Registration No. 184982)

5.   

GFI Joint Venture Holdings Proprietary Limited

 

(Registration No. 1998/023354/07)

 

Page 112.


SCHEDULE 2

FINANCIAL CLOSE DOCUMENTS

 

1. The Obligors

 

1.1 A copy of the Constitutional Documents of each Obligor.

 

1.2 A copy of a resolution of the board of directors of each Obligor:

 

1.2.1 approving the terms of, and the transactions contemplated by, the Finance Documents to which it is a party and resolving to execute those Finance Documents, including as applicable, such resolutions approving the terms of, and the transactions contemplated by, the Finance Documents to which the Guarantors are a party, as may be required pursuant to section 45 of the Companies Act;

 

1.2.2 authorising a specified person or persons to execute the Finance Documents to which it is a party on its behalf; and

 

1.2.3 authorising a specified person or persons, on its behalf, to sign and/or despatch all documents and notices to be signed and/or despatched by it under or in connection with the Finance Documents to which it is a party.

 

1.3 A certificate by a director of the Parent certifying in writing that business rescue proceedings have not commenced in respect of any Material Group Company, which in the case of a Material Group Company (other than an Obligor) could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

1.4 A specimen of the signature of each person authorised by the resolution referred to in paragraphs 1.2 above.

 

2. Finance Documents

A duly executed original of this Agreement and all the Fee Letters.

 

Page 113.


3. Financial Intelligence Centre Act, 2001

All information and documentation required by the Original Lender in relation to each Obligor to enable it to comply with its obligations under, and the requirements of, the Financial Intelligence Centre Act, 2001 and its own “ know your customer ” procedures.

 

4. Legal Opinions

A legal opinion of the Parent’s legal counsel in a form reasonably satisfactory to the Original Lender dealing with the capacity and authority of the Obligors, which opinion will include, but will not be limited to, confirmation that the limit on each Obligor’s respective powers will not be exceeded as a result of the borrowings or giving of guarantees or indemnities contemplated by the Finance Documents.

 

5. Financial Statements

 

5.1 The Original Financial Statements together with the latest audited financial statements of each Obligor (other than GF Holdings and GFOH) or any other Obligor which is not legally required to audit its financial statements).

 

5.2 The latest unaudited financial statements of GF Holdings and GFOH.

 

Page 114.


6. Authorisations and Consents

A copy of any authorisation or consent (to include any relevant corporate, regulatory and shareholder consent or approval (including as applicable, such members resolutions approving the terms of, and the transactions contemplated by, the Finance Documents to which the Guarantors are a party, as may be required pursuant to section 45 of the Companies Act) required to authorise the relevant Obligor to guarantee the Facility or to take any action required to be taken by the relevant Obligor in connection with the Facility) which the Facility Agent reasonably considers to be necessary or desirable in connection with the entry into and performance of the transactions contemplated by this Agreement or for the validity and enforceability of any Finance Document.

 

7. Demerger

A certificate by a director of the Parent certifying in writing that the Demerger has taken place.

 

Page 115.


SCHEDULE 3

FORM OF UTILISATION REQUEST

(To appear on the letterhead of a Borrower)

 

To: [insert]

[Facility Agent]

Date:

Attention: [insert]

Dear Sirs

FACILITY AGREEMENT DATED [INSERT DATE] : UTILISATION REQUEST

 

1. We refer to the Facility Agreement dated [insert] entered into between inter alia us and, Nedbank Limited (acting through its Nedbank Capital and Nedbank Corporate divisions) (the “Facility Agreement” ).

 

2. This is an Utilisation Request.

 

3. The terms defined in the Facility Agreement shall have the same meanings where used in this Utilisation Request.

 

4. This Utilisation Request is irrevocable.

 

5. We hereby give you notice that, pursuant to the Facility Agreement and on [insert date] , we wish to borrow a Loan in an amount of R [insert] ( [insert] Rand) upon the terms and subject to the conditions contained therein.

 

6. We elect an Interest Period of [insert] Months.

 

Page 116.


7. We confirm that as of the date hereof:

 

7.1 the Repeating Representations set out in the Facility Agreement are true and correct in all material respects; and

 

7.2 no Default has occurred and/or is continuing.

 

8. The proceeds of the Loan must be credited to the following bank account:

 

8.1 Bank: [insert] ;

 

8.2 Branch: [insert] ;

 

8.3 Account Name: [insert] ;

 

8.4 Account Number: [insert] ;

 

8.5 Branch Code: [insert] .

Yours faithfully

[BORROWER]

 

Page 117.


SCHEDULE 4

SILICOSIS LITIGATION

On 21 August 2012, a court application was served on a group of respondents that included the Parent and SGL (the “August Respondents” ). On 21 December 2012, a further court application was issued subsequently served on a number of respondents, including the Parent and SGL, (the “December Respondents” and, together with the August Respondents, the “Respondents” ) during January 2013, on behalf of classes of mine workers, former mine workers and their dependents who were previously employed by, or who are currently employed by, amongst others, the Parent and SGL and who allegedly contracted silicosis and/or other occupational lung diseases (the “Classes” ). The court application of 21 August 2012 and the court application of 21 December 2012 are together referred to below as the “Applications” .

These Applications request that the court certify a class action to be instituted by the applicants on behalf of the Classes. The Applications are the first and preliminary steps in a process where, if the court were to certify the class action, the applicants may, in a second stage, bring an action wherein they will attempt to hold the Respondents liable for silicosis and other occupational lung diseases and resultant consequences. In the second stage, the Applications contemplate addressing what the applicants describe as common legal and factual issues regarding the claim arising from the allegations of the entire Classes. If the applicants are successful in the second stage, they envisage that individual members of the Classes could later submit individual claims for damages against the respective Respondents. The Applications do not identify the number of claims that may be instituted against the Respondents or the quantum of damages the applicants may seek.

The Parent has filed notices of its intention to oppose the Applications and has instructed its attorneys to defend the claims. Gold Fields and its attorneys are engaging with the applicants’ attorneys in both Applications to try to establish a court-sanctioned process to agree the timelines (including the date by which the Parent must file its papers opposing the Applications) and the possible consolidation of the separate applications. At this stage, neither the Parent nor SGL can quantify their potential liability from these actions.

 

Page 118.


SCHEDULE 5

FORM OF ACCESSION UNDERTAKING

 

To:    Nedbank Limited (acting through its Nedbank Capital and Nedbank Corporate divisions) (as Facility Agent)
From:    Gold Fields Limited; and

[insert full name of new Borrower/Guarantor] (the “Acceding Party” )

Date:

Dear Sirs

Facility Agreement between Nedbank Limited, Gold Fields Limited and others dated [insert] (the “Facility Agreement”)

 

1. We refer to the Facility Agreement. This is an Accession Undertaking. Terms defined in the Agreement have the same meaning in this Accession Undertaking unless given a different meaning in this Accession Undertaking.

 

2. The Acceding Party agrees to become an Additional [Borrower/Guarantor] and to be bound by the terms of the Facility Agreement as an Additional [Borrower/Guarantor] pursuant to clause 22 ( Change to the Obligors ) of the Facility Agreement. The Acceding Party is a company duly incorporated under the laws of [insert name of relevant jurisdiction] .

 

3. The Acceding Party’s administrative details are as follows:

Address:

Fax No:

Attention:

 

Page 119.


4. This Accession Undertaking shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of South Africa.

 

For and on behalf of
GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

 

Name:
Capacity:
Who warrants his authority hereto
For and on behalf of
[insert actual name of Acceding Party]

 

Name:
Capacity:
Who warrants his authority hereto

 

Page 120.


SCHEDULE 6

FORM OF RESIGNATION LETTER

 

To:    Nedbank Limited (acting through its Nedbank Capital and Nedbank Corporate divisions) (as Facility Agent)
From:    Gold Fields Limited (the “Parent” ); and

[insert full name of resigning Obligor]

Date:

Dear Sirs

Facility Agreement between Nedbank Limited, Gold Fields Limited and others dated [insert] (the “Facility Agreement”)

 

1 We refer to the Facility Agreement. This is a Resignation Letter. Terms defined in the Agreement have the same meaning in this Resignation Letter unless given a different meaning in this Accession Letter.

 

2. Pursuant to [Clause 22.3 ( Resignation of an Additional Borrower )] / [Clause 22.6 ( Resignation of an Additional Guarantor )] , we request that [resigning Obligor] be released from its obligations as a [Borrower] / [Guarantor] under the Facility Agreement.

 

3 We confirm that no default is continuing or would result from the acceptance of this request:

 

4. This Resignation Letter shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of South Africa.

 

For and on behalf of
GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

 

Name:
Capacity:
Who warrants his authority hereto

 

Page 121.


SCHEDULE 7

FORM OF COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATE

 

To:    Nedbank Limited (acting through its Nedbank Capital and Nedbank Corporate divisions) (as Facility Agent)

[Date]

Dear Sirs

FACILITY AGREEMENT BETWEEN NEDBANK LIMITED, GOLD FIELDS LIMITED AND OTHERS DATED [            ] 2011 (the “Facility Agreement”)

 

1. We refer to the Facility Agreement. This is a Compliance Certificate, and terms used in this Compliance Certificate have the same meaning as in the Facility Agreement.

 

2. We confirm that as at [INSERT] :

 

2.1 Consolidated EBITDA to Consolidated Net Finance Charges

the ratio of Consolidated EBITDA to Consolidated Net Finance Charges in respect of the Measurement Period ending on [INSERT] was: [        ] : 1; and

 

2.2 Consolidated Net Borrowings to Consolidated EBITDA

the ratio of Consolidated Net Borrowings to Consolidated EBITDA in respect of the Measurement Period ending on [INSERT] was: [        ] : 1,

and attach calculations showing how these figures were calculated.

 

3 We confirm that no Default is continuing.*

 

For and on behalf of
Gold Fields Limited

 

Name:
Capacity:
Who warrants his authority hereto

 

Attachment: Auditor’s letter of confirmation of compliance with financial ratios.

 

* If this statement cannot be made, the Certificate should identify any Default that is continuing and the steps, if any, being taken to remedy it.

 

Page 122.


SCHEDULE 8

PERMITTED TRANSFEREES

PART 1

LOCAL BANKS

Absa Bank Limited

FirstRand Bank Limited

The Standard Bank of South Africa Limited

Nedbank Limited

Investec Bank Limited

PART 2

FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS

Futuregrowth

Liberty Group Limited

Metropolitan Life Limited

Momentum Group Limited

MIBFA

Old Mutual Specialised Finance (Proprietary) Limited

Old Mutual Life Assurance Company (South Africa) Limited

PIC

Sanlam Capital

Sanlam Life Insurance Limited

PART 3

AFFILIATES

Any bona fide and established affiliates, subsidiaries or holding companies of any of the banks or financial institutions listed in this Schedule 8 which are regularly engaged in or established for the purpose of making, purchasing or investing in loans, securities or other financial assets and that are not hedge funds.

 

Page 123.

Exhibit 8.1

AMENDED LIST OF SIGNIFICANT SUBSIDIARIES OF GOLD FIELDS LIMITED

(AS OF DECEMBER 31, 2012)

Sibanye Gold Limited (formerly known as GFI Mining South Africa (Proprietary) Limited), incorporated in South Africa (1)

GFL Mining Services Limited, incorporated in South Africa

Gold Fields Group Services Limited, incorporated in South Africa

Gold Fields Operations Limited, incorporated in South Africa ( 2 )

GFI Joint Venture Holdings (Pty) Limited, incorporated in South Africa ( 3 )

Gold Fields Orogen Holdings (BVI) Limited, incorporated in the British Virgin Islands

Gold Fields Holdings Company (BVI) Limited, incorporated in the British Virgin Islands

Gold Fields Ghana Holdings Limited, incorporated in the British Virgin Islands

Gold Fields Ghana Limited, incorporated in Ghana

Abosso Goldfields Limited, incorporated in Ghana

Gold Fields Australasia Limited, incorporated in the British Virgin Islands

Gold Fields Australia Pty Limited, incorporated in Australia

St. Ives Gold Mining Company (Pty) Limited, incorporated in Australia

Agnew Gold Mining Company (Pty) Limited, incorporated in Australia

Gold Fields Corona BVI Limited, incorporated in the British Virgin Islands

Gold Fields La Cima S.A., incorporated in Peru

Gold Fields Exploration B.V., incorporated in the Netherlands

Gold Fields Finland O.Y., incorporated in Finland

Gold Fields Artic Platinum O.Y, incorporated in Finland

Gold Fields Netherlands Services B.V., incorporated in the Netherlands ( 4 )

Newshelf (Pty) Limited, incorporated in South Africa

 

Notes:

 

(1) On February 18, 2013, Sibanye Gold Limited was spun-off from Gold Fields Limited by way of a pro rata distribution of shares in Sibanye Gold Limited to the shareholders of Gold Fields Limited.
(2) In fiscal 2007, Western Areas Limited changed its name to Gold Fields Operations Limited.
(3) In fiscal 2007, Barrick Gold South Africa (Pty) Limited changed its name to GFI Joint Venture Holdings (Pty) Limited.
(4) In fiscal 2007, Gold Fields Venezuela Holding B.V. changed its name to Gold Fields Netherlands Services B.V.

Exhibit 12.1

CERTIFICATIONS

I, Nicholas J. Holland, the Chief Executive Officer of Gold Fields Limited, certify that:

 

1 I have reviewed this annual report on Form 20-F of Gold Fields Limited;

 

2 Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

 

3 Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the company as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

 

4 The company’s other certifying officer(s) and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the company and have:

 

  (a) Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the company, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

 

  (b) Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

 

  (c) Evaluated the effectiveness of the company’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

 

  (d) Disclosed in this report any change in the company’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the period covered by the annual report that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the company’s internal control over financial reporting; and

 

5 The company’s other certifying officer(s) and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the company’s auditors and the audit committee of the company’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):

 

  (a) All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the company’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and

 

1


  (b) Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the company’s internal control over financial reporting.

 

Date: May 14, 2013
/s/ Nicholas J. Holland
Nicholas J. Holland
Chief Executive Officer

 

2

Exhibit 12.2

CERTIFICATIONS

I, Paul A. Schmidt, the Chief Financial Officer of Gold Fields Limited, certify that:

 

1 I have reviewed this annual report on Form 20-F of Gold Fields Limited;

 

2 Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

 

3 Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the company as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

 

4 The company’s other certifying officer(s) and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the company and have:

 

  (a) Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the company, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

 

  (b) Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

 

  (c) Evaluated the effectiveness of the company’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

 

  (d) Disclosed in this report any change in the company’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the period covered by the annual report that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the company’s internal control over financial reporting; and

 

5 The company’s other certifying officer(s) and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the company’s auditors and the audit committee of the company’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):

 

  (a) All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the company’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and

 

1


  (b) Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the company’s internal control over financial reporting.

 

Date: May 14, 2013
/s/ Paul A. Schmidt
Paul A. Schmidt
Chief Financial Officer

 

2

Exhibit 13.1

CERTIFICATION OF CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER

PURSUANT TO SECTION 906 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002

(18 U.S.C. SECTION 1350)

In connection with the Annual Report on Form 20-F of Gold Fields Limited (the “ Company ”) for the period ended December 31, 2012 as filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on the date hereof (the “ Report ”), I, Nicholas J. Holland, Chief Executive Officer of the Company, certify, pursuant to 18 U.S.C. Section 1350, as adopted pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, that:

 

1 The Report fully complies with the requirements of Section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934; and

 

2 The information contained in the Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of the Company.

 

Date: May 14, 2013
/s/ Nicholas J. Holland
Nicholas J. Holland
Chief Executive Officer

Exhibit 13.2

CERTIFICATION OF CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER

PURSUANT TO SECTION 906 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002

(18 U.S.C. SECTION 1350)

In connection with the Annual Report on Form 20-F of Gold Fields Limited (the “ Company ”) for the period ended December 31, 2012 as filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on the date hereof (the “ Report ”), I, Paul A. Schmidt, Chief Financial Officer of the Company, certify, pursuant to 18 U.S.C. Section 1350, as adopted pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, that:

 

1 The Report fully complies with the requirements of Section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934; and

 

2 The information contained in the Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of the Company.

 

Date: May 14, 2013
/s/ Paul A. Schmidt
Paul A. Schmidt
Chief Financial Officer